--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
++ Version 2, June 1991
++
++ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
++ 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
++ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
++ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
++
++ Preamble
++
++ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
++freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
++License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
++software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
++General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
++Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
++using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
++the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
++your programs, too.
++
++ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
++price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
++have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
++this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
++if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
++in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
++
++ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
++anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
++These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
++distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
++
++ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
++gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
++you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
++source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
++rights.
++
++ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
++(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
++distribute and/or modify the software.
++
++ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
++that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
++software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
++want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
++that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
++authors' reputations.
++
++ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
++patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
++program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
++program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
++patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
++
++ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
++modification follow.
++\f
++ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
++ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
++
++ 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
++a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
++under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
++refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
++means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
++that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
++either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
++language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
++the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
++
++Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
++covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
++running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
++is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
++Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
++Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
++
++ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
++source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
++conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
++copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
++notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
++and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
++along with the Program.
++
++You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
++you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
++
++ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
++of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
++distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
++above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
++
++ a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
++ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
++
++ b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
++ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
++ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
++ parties under the terms of this License.
++
++ c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
++ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
++ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
++ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
++ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
++ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
++ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
++ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
++ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
++ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
++\f
++These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
++identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
++and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
++themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
++sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
++distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
++on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
++this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
++entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
++
++Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
++your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
++exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
++collective works based on the Program.
++
++In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
++with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
++a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
++the scope of this License.
++
++ 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
++under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
++Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
++
++ a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
++ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
++ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
++
++ b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
++ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
++ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
++ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
++ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
++ customarily used for software interchange; or,
++
++ c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
++ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
++ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
++ received the program in object code or executable form with such
++ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
++
++The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
++making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
++code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
++associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
++control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
++special exception, the source code distributed need not include
++anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
++form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
++operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
++itself accompanies the executable.
++
++If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
++access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
++access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
++distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
++compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
++\f
++ 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
++except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
++otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
++void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
++However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
++this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
++parties remain in full compliance.
++
++ 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
++signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
++distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
++prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
++modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
++Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
++all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
++the Program or works based on it.
++
++ 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
++Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
++original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
++these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
++restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
++You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
++this License.
++
++ 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
++infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
++conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
++otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
++excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
++distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
++License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
++may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
++license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
++all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
++the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
++refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
++
++If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
++any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
++apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
++circumstances.
++
++It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
++patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
++such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
++integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
++implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
++generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
++through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
++system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
++to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
++impose that choice.
++
++This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
++be a consequence of the rest of this License.
++\f
++ 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
++certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
++original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
++may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
++those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
++countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
++the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
++
++ 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
++of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
++be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
++address new problems or concerns.
++
++Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
++specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
++later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
++either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
++Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
++this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
++Foundation.
++
++ 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
++programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
++to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
++Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
++make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
++of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
++of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
++
++ NO WARRANTY
++
++ 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
++FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
++OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
++PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
++OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
++MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
++TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
++PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
++REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
++
++ 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
++WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
++REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
++INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
++OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
++TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
++YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
++PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
++POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
++
++ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
++\f
++ How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
++
++ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
++possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
++free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
++
++ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
++to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
++convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
++the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
++
++ <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
++ Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
++
++ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++ the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++ (at your option) any later version.
++
++ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++ GNU General Public License for more details.
++
++ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++ Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
++
++
++Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
++
++If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
++when it starts in an interactive mode:
++
++ Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
++ Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
++ This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
++ under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
++
++The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
++parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may
++be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
++mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
++
++You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
++school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
++necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
++
++ Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
++ `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
++
++ <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
++ Ty Coon, President of Vice
++
++This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
++proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
++consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
++library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
++Public License instead of this License.
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++ GNU Free Documentation License
++ Version 1.1, March 2000
++
++ Copyright (C) 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
++ 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
++ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
++ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
++
++
++0. PREAMBLE
++
++The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
++written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone
++the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without
++modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily,
++this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get
++credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for
++modifications made by others.
++
++This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
++works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
++complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
++license designed for free software.
++
++We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
++software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
++program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
++software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
++it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
++whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License
++principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
++
++
++1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
++
++This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
++notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed
++under the terms of this License. The "Document", below, refers to any
++such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is
++addressed as "you".
++
++A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
++Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
++modifications and/or translated into another language.
++
++A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section of
++the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
++publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject
++(or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly
++within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a
++textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any
++mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
++connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
++commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
++them.
++
++The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
++are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
++that says that the Document is released under this License.
++
++The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are listed,
++as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
++the Document is released under this License.
++
++A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
++represented in a format whose specification is available to the
++general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and
++straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
++pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
++drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
++for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
++to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
++format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage
++subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is
++not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
++
++Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
++ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML
++or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple
++HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include
++PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only
++by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or
++processing tools are not generally available, and the
++machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output
++purposes only.
++
++The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
++plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
++this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in
++formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means
++the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
++preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
++
++
++2. VERBATIM COPYING
++
++You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
++commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
++copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
++to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
++conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use
++technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
++copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
++compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough
++number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
++
++You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
++you may publicly display copies.
++
++
++3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
++
++If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 100,
++and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose
++the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
++Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
++the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
++you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present
++the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
++visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition.
++Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
++the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
++as verbatim copying in other respects.
++
++If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
++legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
++reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
++pages.
++
++If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
++more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
++copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
++a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete
++Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the
++general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no
++charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter
++option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin
++distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this
++Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location
++until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque
++copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to
++the public.
++
++It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
++Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
++them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
++
++
++4. MODIFICATIONS
++
++You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
++the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
++the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
++Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
++and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
++of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
++
++A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
++ from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
++ (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
++ of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version
++ if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
++B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
++ responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
++ Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
++ Document (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five).
++C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
++ Modified Version, as the publisher.
++D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
++E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
++ adjacent to the other copyright notices.
++F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
++ giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
++ terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
++G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
++ and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
++H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
++I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add to
++ it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
++ publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
++ there is no section entitled "History" in the Document, create one
++ stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
++ given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
++ Version as stated in the previous sentence.
++J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
++ public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
++ the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
++ it was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section.
++ You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
++ least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
++ publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
++K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
++ preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the
++ substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
++ and/or dedications given therein.
++L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
++ unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
++ or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
++M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
++ may not be included in the Modified Version.
++N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements"
++ or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
++
++If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
++appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
++copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
++of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the
++list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
++These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
++
++You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
++nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
++parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
++been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
++standard.
++
++You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
++passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
++of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
++Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
++through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already
++includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
++by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
++you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
++permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
++
++The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
++give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
++imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
++
++
++5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
++
++You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
++License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
++versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
++Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
++list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
++license notice.
++
++The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
++multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
++copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
++different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
++adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
++author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
++Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
++Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
++
++In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled "History"
++in the various original documents, forming one section entitled
++"History"; likewise combine any sections entitled "Acknowledgements",
++and any sections entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections
++entitled "Endorsements."
++
++
++6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
++
++You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
++released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
++License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
++the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
++verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
++
++You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
++it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
++License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
++other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
++
++
++7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
++
++A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
++and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
++distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a Modified Version
++of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the
++compilation. Such a compilation is called an "aggregate", and this
++License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled
++with the Document, on account of their being thus compiled, if they
++are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
++
++If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
++copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter
++of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
++covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate.
++Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate.
++
++
++8. TRANSLATION
++
++Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
++distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
++Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
++permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
++translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
++original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
++translation of this License provided that you also include the
++original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement
++between the translation and the original English version of this
++License, the original English version will prevail.
++
++
++9. TERMINATION
++
++You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except
++as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to
++copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
++automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
++parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
++License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
++parties remain in full compliance.
++
++
++10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
++
++The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
++of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
++versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
++differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
++http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
++
++Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
++If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
++License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of
++following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
++of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
++Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
++number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
++as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
++
++
++ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
++
++To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
++the License in the document and put the following copyright and
++license notices just after the title page:
++
++ Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME.
++ Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
++ under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
++ or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
++ with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
++ Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
++ A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
++ Free Documentation License".
++
++If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections"
++instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no
++Front-Cover Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of
++"Front-Cover Texts being LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.
++
++If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
++recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
++free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
++to permit their use in free software.
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++2009-04-15 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * autogen.sh:
++ * configure.in:
++ Tentative patch to allow building without scrollkeeper and
++ gnome-doc-utils. Fixes #577059.
++
++2009-04-05 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am:
++ Only run the tests if gtk-doc is enabled. Fixes #577774.
++
++2009-03-18 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Fix <table> element mismatch in highlighted code. Fixes #575711.
++
++2009-03-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.m4:
++ Turn pdf off if there is no gtkdoc-mkpdf installed.
++
++2009-03-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Tobias Mueller <gnome-bugs@auftrags-killer.org>
++
++ * COPYING-DOCS:
++ * gtkdoc-check.in:
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-rebase.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ * help/manual/C/fdl-appendix.xml:
++ * tools/gtk-doc.el:
++ Update FSF address. Fixes #575623.
++
++2009-03-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkpdf.in:
++ Don't run fop for now, its way to broken.
++
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Formatting.
++
++2009-03-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Vincent Untz <vuntz@nome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ Be more friendly for files with a space in their name. Fixes #575574.
++
++2009-03-12 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Do not overwrite declaration variable with sgml-ified variant to not confuse
++ further parsing.
++
++2009-03-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Nicola Fontana <ntd@entidi.it>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Improve the test and fix handling trailing decorators. Fixes #574654
++
++2009-03-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Adding a test for #574654.
++
++2009-03-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Don't expect $MODULE to be defined (e.g. if someone does not update
++ gtkdoc.make).
++
++2009-03-09 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * ChangeLog:
++ Fix ChangeLog format so that we pick up the bug number for release
++ notes.
++
++2009-03-09 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Add vim support for syntax highlighting. Lets close the ticket.
++ Fixes #536928.
++
++2009-03-09 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ Don't confuse -1 with G_MAXULONG on 64bit. Fixes #572612.
++
++2009-02-26 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * doc/gtkdoc.dot:
++ Improve. scan only checks headers, while mkdb scans sources and
++ headers.
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am:
++ Document more variables.
++
++2009-02-26 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ There is some gtk specific stuff there, which we probably want to kick
++ out. No one else gets such a treatment.
++
++2009-02-26 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl:
++ * style.css:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Fix annotation more. Refactor the extra-link feature. Still disabled
++ by default. Needs configure stuff next.
++
++2009-02-24 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Paolo Borelli <pborelli@katamail.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ Use g_strerror. Fixes #572967.
++
++2009-02-23 Sven Herzberg <herzi@gnome-de.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: keep a reference on the GObjectClass while
++ peeking in interfaces' properties. Fixes #571820
++
++2009-02-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Don't use named entities.
++
++2009-02-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc-single.xsl:
++ Starting point for generating single page html. Needs refactoring with
++ gtk-doc.xsl (common stuff into gtk-doc-html.xsl).
++
++2009-02-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ With fop-0.94 it works actually, while 0.95 seesm to have the
++ exceptions.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkpdf.in:
++ Fix var reference.
++
++2009-02-22 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Prototype an idea.
++
++2009-02-22 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * Makefile.am:
++ Dist more files.
++
++ * configure.in:
++ Update status.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkpdf.in:
++ Remove some crack left from copy'n'paste.
++
++2009-02-22 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ Planning.
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * gtk-doc.m4:
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * gtkdoc-mkpdf.in:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * gtkdoc-mkpdf.in (added):
++ Clean up Makefile rules (be less verbose). Added options to configure to
++ allow selecting the desired output formats. Added initial pdf support (very
++ imature yet, due to several shortcommings of fop - bugs files).
++
++2009-02-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ Planning.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Update annotations and fix matching to support parameters.
++
++ * tests/annotations/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/annotations/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/annotations/src/tester.h:
++ Update annotation example and add one more.
++
++2009-02-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ Allow linking to struct members. Update docs. Fixes #565126.
++
++2009-02-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Fix params and running of 'highlight'.
++
++2009-02-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Require the line to ends after the double-colon (sans whitespace),
++
++2009-02-20 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Damien Lespiau <damien.lespiau@gmail.com>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Add --tag=CC to libtool invocations. Fixes #572396.
++
++2009-02-18 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am:
++ Fix example to show to to make it work even with make distcheck.
++
++2009-02-16 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * style.css:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ Also style <note> tags.
++
++2009-02-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * MAINTAINERS:
++ Fix the spelling of my name.
++
++2009-02-05 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ Some planning.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Single tabs are rendered inconsistently in browsers. Replace them with
++ a .
++
++2009-01-31 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ Try to link to struct members as a test for Bug #565126.
++
++2009-01-30 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Expanding urls is not a good idea yet. Need to figure out.
++
++2009-01-29 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/tools.sh:
++ Remove, this is generated.
++
++2009-01-29 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Automatically creating ulinks for urls.
++
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ Add a link for testing.
++
++2009-01-28 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * style-classic.css:
++ * style.css:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ Major CSS cleanup. This is hopefully an end of layout issues related
++ to the fixed navigation bar.
++
++2009-01-28 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * tests/gobject/src/giface.c:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ Abbreviation where not expanded at the start of text. Fixes #569339.
++
++2009-01-28 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ * tests/gobject/examples/gobject.c:
++ Expand urls in comments of examples.
++
++2009-01-27 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ * style.css:
++ Use tables like described in #536928.
++
++ * tests/tools.sh
++ Comment on why we do the tool check like this.
++
++ * tests/fail.sh:
++ Comment on test.
++
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ Fix xml a bit.
++
++2009-01-26 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ * tests/fail.sh:
++ * tests/fail/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/fail/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/fail/src/tester.c:
++ Add public symbols from section file when doing the -undocumented.txt
++ report. Also add the special symbols for the section docs when reading
++ the section-file. Extend test suite to check for it. Fixes #568732
++
++2009-01-26 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Handle inline functions in headers. Fixes #532395.
++
++2009-01-26 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * HACKING:
++ Mention onine site for regexp testing.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Small output cleanups.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ Indenting and use LogWarning once more.
++
++2009-01-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Recomment out debug log the accidentialy went in.
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * tests/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/fail.sh:
++ * tests/tools.sh.in:
++ * tests/tools.sh.in (added):
++ Add a check that tests that all scripts are runnable.
++
++2009-01-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-check.in:
++ No need to format a '\n' into a formatstring.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Add FIXMEs for Bug 568711.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in:
++ Add a comment.
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * tests/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/fail.sh:
++ * tests/fail/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/fail/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/fail/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/fail/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/fail/src/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/fail/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/fail/src/tester.h:
++ Add a test suite for failure checks.
++
++2009-01-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ Don't scan files twice. The patch was slightly changed to name the
++ hash lowercase (uppercase is used for configureation options) and
++ add a comment. Fixes #568708.
++
++2009-01-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Don't add empty <para></para> tags to the docs to avoid breaking the
++ detection of undocumented things. Fixes #568732.
++
++2009-01-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtk-doc.m4:
++ Change nonsense error message to tell that gtk-doc is needed to build
++ a given package and not gtk-doc. Fixes #568734.
++
++2009-01-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ Treat iface/interface like class in other places too.
++
++2009-01-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ Use CamelCase id for interfaces. Fixes #568706.
++
++2009-01-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkman.in:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Less quirky way of knowing that we run uninstalled, which is only
++ needed for the tests anyway. In addition to the patch, make same
++ changes in mkman, add a shift to arg parsing to not loop and change
++ the makefiles for the tests. Fixes #568702.
++
++2009-01-22 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Only run the syntax highligher if we have one. Fixes #568714.
++
++2009-01-22 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * README:
++ Point to the right docs.
++
++ * TODO:
++ More tinking.
++
++ * style.css:
++ Remove one commented out item.
++
++2009-01-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ * configure.in:
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ * style.css:
++ Match css of highlight with source-highlight. Handle line numbering by
++ our-selfs. Still stupid browsers copy '#' chars for each line number.
++
++2009-01-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Try to xref first word in 'normal' span.
++
++2009-01-20 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ We could add the language as a comment, it is not shown in the final output.
++
++2009-01-20 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ More ideas.
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Really fix double extension of entities.
++
++ * style.css:
++ Fix link color of xrefs symbols.
++
++2009-01-20 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Indent.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Fix end of string handling.
++
++ * style.css:
++ Use one tango colors one more time.
++
++2009-01-20 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * tests/annotations/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/Makefile.am:
++ Detect namespace prefix if not given.
++
++2009-01-20 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * style-classic.css:
++ * style.css:
++ Fix gap, caused by double index divs produces by index generated with
++ the docbook stylesheets.
++
++2009-01-20 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ More ideas.
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl:
++ Make sure indexdiv and glossarydiv elements have anchors.
++
++ * style-classic.css:
++ * style.css:
++ Fix spacing for navbar in index/glossary pages.
++
++ * tests/annotations/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ Cleanup samples.
++
++2009-01-19 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ More ideas.
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl:
++ Experiment with navigation for index and glossaries.
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Fix index entries and copy doc along with the method.
++
++ * style.css:
++ also do the extra spacing for the index/glossary environments now.
++
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ Experiment with a more complete doc structure.
++
++2009-01-12 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Make highligher post processing conditional.
++
++2009-01-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ Erm, not having a highlighter is not fatal.
++
++2009-01-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * HACKING:
++ * TODO:
++ * configure.in:
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Look for source-highlight and highlight. Not perfect yet, highlight uses
++ different classes in the css :/.
++
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ More header data in the examples.
++
++2009-01-09 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ Treat FOO_GET_INTERFACE as standard. Fixes #567132.
++
++2009-01-09 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * style.css:
++ * tests/gobject/examples/gobject.c:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Initial go at implementing syntax highlighting for sources using
++ gnu source-highlight. Needs testing and modularisation.
++
++2009-01-08 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in:
++ Comment out echo for debugging.
++
++2009-01-08 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Finally, make distcheck works.
++
++2009-01-08 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-check.in:
++ * gtkdoc-depscan.in:
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkman.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-rebase.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ * gtkdocize.in:
++ Add support for --help and --version to remaining tools. Also show a
++ short info on --help and format more consistently. Fixes #566911
++
++2009-01-07 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.m4:
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Detect gtkdoc-rebase in gtk-doc.m4. Based on idea of Sven Herzberg.
++ Fixes #562310
++
++2009-01-07 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * NEWS:
++ Prepare for 1.12.
++
++ * TODO:
++ More thinking about the documentation structure.
++
++ * configure.in:
++ Add automake support for more distcheck. Use a real sourcefile for the
++ srcdir (something that we won't remove one day).
++
++ * tests/annotations/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/annotations/src/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs/src/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/src/Makefile.am:
++ Add missing file to fix make distcheck. Use srcdir and not builddir to
++ locate includes.
++
++2009-01-07 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ Ideas about syntax highlighting.
++
++ * style-classic.css:
++ Old color scheme.
++
++ * style.css:
++ Use tango colors. Simplify css.
++
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ Tell what language this is.
++
++2009-01-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.c:
++ Fix inconsistency of prototype and docs.
++
++2009-01-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Now all tests pass.
++
++2009-01-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in:
++ * tests/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * tests/gtkdoctest.sh:
++ Fix running tests, if no gtk-doc is installed yet.
++
++2008-12-29 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Bruce van der Kooij <brucevdkooij@gmail.com>
++
++ * help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ Fixed three spelling errors (recommanded, conatins, alibrary).
++ Fixes #565835.
++
++2008-12-29 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ Documentation structure ideas.
++
++2008-12-05 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * style.css:
++ Highlight deprecation warnings.
++
++2008-12-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Fix escaping.
++
++2008-12-02 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ Planning.
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Remove the sh -c here now that its back in scanobj.
++
++ * tests/annotations/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ Cosmetic template update.
++
++2008-12-02 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Don't touch doctype header in expand-content-files.
++
++2008-12-01 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Add deprecation warnings for signals and properties. Also reuse code
++ for since and stability levels there. Fixes #562655.
++
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ Add testcase for #562655.
++
++2008-12-01 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ Reintroduce "sh -c" and comment why its used. Add real libtool support
++ to old scanobj tool as well.
++
++2008-12-01 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Fix index-id generation for child and style properties. Fixes #562064.
++
++2008-11-16 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * HACKING:
++ * configure.in:
++ * help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ Back to development.
++
++=== Release 1.11 ===
++
++2008-11-16 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * HACKING:
++ * NEWS:
++ Releasing 1.11.
++
++ * tests/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * tests/gtkdoctest.sh:
++ Fix make distcheck.
++
++2008-11-06 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ No install rules for test.
++
++2008-11-06 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Get rid of german variable name. Generate glossary xml for
++ annotations. Improve initial master document.
++
++ * tests/annotations/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ Update example to include anotation glossary.
++
++2008-11-05 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Peter Kjellerstedt <pkj@axis.com>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Correct check for existence of gtkdoc-rebase (better fix than the
++ previous one #508897). Fixes #559281.
++
++2008-10-27 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Christian Persch <chpe@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ Fix doc build when using GTK_DISABLE_SINGLE_INCLUDES. Fixes #558082.
++
++2008-10-20 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ * devhelp2.xsd:
++ More docs and planning.
++
++2008-10-20 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/annotations/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/annotations/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ Update annotations. Glossary enhancements.
++
++2008-10-19 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * devhelp2.xsd:
++ Update and document format.
++
++2008-10-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * devhelp2.xsd:
++ * devhelp2.xsl:
++ Add new language attribute and use "c" here.
++
++2008-10-16 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ Small comment cleanup and loud thinking in TODO :)
++
++2008-10-15 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Jeffrey Stedfast <fejj@novell.com>
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am:
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Allow versioned TARGET_DIR. Fixes #554718.
++
++2008-10-13 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ planning.
++
++ * doc/gtkdoc.dot:
++ Document workflow
++ * devhelp2.xsl:
++ Add support for enums/flags in devhelp index.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Support annotations. Fix missing roles.
++
++ * tests/annotations/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/annotations/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/annotations/src/tester.h:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ Update new syntax.
++
++2008-10-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * tests/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/annotations.sh:
++ * tests/annotations/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/annotations/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/annotations/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/annotations/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/annotations/src/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/annotations/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/annotations/src/tester.h:
++ Add testcases for gir annotation.
++
++2008-10-03 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Matthew Barnes <mbarnes@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Be more careful with "struct _<struct_name>". Fixes #554833.
++
++2008-10-03 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Behdad Esfahbod <behdad@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Add rules to create $(REPORT_FILES). Fixes #552822.
++
++2008-10-03 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Simon Josefsson <simon@josefsson.org>
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/Makefile.am:
++ Use GTKDOC_CFLAGS instead of INCLUDES in Makefile.am. Fixes #553407.
++
++2008-09-24 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Use full symbol, if it does not belong to the namespace.
++
++2008-09-22 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.h:
++ Document some odd behaviour.
++
++2008-09-22 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ More todos.
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Add testcase for bug 552602.
++
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Also use new RUN envvar here.
++
++2008-09-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Generate unique ids for properties, style and child properties.
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ If we use libtool, run scanner under libtool to use uninstalled
++ libraries.
++
++2008-09-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in:
++ Fix comparison.
++
++ * TODO:
++ ideas.
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * gtk-doc-fo.xsl:
++ * gtk-doc.xsl:
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.h:
++ Switch to docbook 4.3 dtd. Fixes #487727.
++ Add --name-space option to gtkdoc-mkdb for nicer indexes. Start with a
++ fo wrapper for pdf output.
++
++2008-09-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Don't install index.sgml twice. Also remove the " || :;" construct
++ that ssems to be there only to eat the return code.
++
++2008-07-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Accept "char const *" as well. Fixes #544172.
++
++2008-07-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Only specify options if gtkdoc-mkhtml can take them. Fixes #543855.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in:
++ Don't use bash specific features. Be more flexible so that we can add
++ more options.
++
++2008-07-09 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ Fix struct/enum level parsing which could go one to high and then the
++ main struct would never be closed.
++ Fixes #542137
++
++2008-06-28 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * autogen.sh:
++ Mention why this change is bad.
++
++2008-06-28 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am:
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Add searchpath to gtkdoc.mkhtml. Fixes #460753
++
++2008-06-22 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * autogen.sh:
++ To support timj aclocal setup we are shipping gnome-doc-utils.m4
++ and making sure automake picks it up ;)
++
++2008-06-22 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tools/migratetmpl.pl:
++ We were still removing too many <para>s.
++ Also add andrews trick to escape the c comments.
++ Add a newline to empty param docs.
++
++2008-06-22 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * m4/gnome-doc-utils.m4:
++ Add this to svn, so that bootstrap work where no gnome-doc-utils is
++ available yet.
++
++2008-06-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tools/migratetmpl.pl:
++ Factor out multiline formatting and use for deprecated field too.
++
++2008-06-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Commenting.
++
++ * tools/migratetmpl.pl:
++ Convert character entities back.
++
++2008-06-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ Start collection info about slowly deprecating crack.
++
++ * tools/migratetmpl.pl:
++ Add title.
++
++2008-06-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tools/migratetmpl.pl:
++ Use $file in section comment not title. Convert only standalone para
++ tags.
++
++2008-06-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tools/migratetmpl.pl:
++ Convert @Varargs: to @...:
++
++2008-06-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tools/migratetmpl.pl:
++ Convert single line c comments to c++ ones. Indent multiline parameter docs.
++
++2008-06-16 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ Don't reuse file var, fixes warning context.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ Also accept *.hh as headers suffix.
++
++2008-06-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Include original CFLAGS / LDFLAGS when building the scanner. Allows to
++ have own FLAGS defined in addition.
++
++2008-06-08 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ More planning.
++
++2008-06-08 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ Add more ideas.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ Merge two fwrite calls.
++
++ * tests/gobject/examples/gobject.c:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ Demonstrate how to include source fragments from external files.
++
++ * tests/gobject/src/giface.h:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.h:
++ Documents two entries.
++
++2008-06-07 Sebastian Dröge <slomo@circular-chaos.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ Add "%s" format strings to printf-like functions when printing
++ a string. Fixes #536980.
++
++2008-06-05 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ Fix quoting.
++
++ * tools/migratetmpl.pl:
++ Add first version of a tool to support migration from tmpl docs to
++ source code comments.
++
++2008-06-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * autogen.sh:
++ Correct invocation for gnome-doc-prepare.
++
++2008-06-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ Handle file or line being undefined.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Warn about repeated symbols in sections. Also give line of previous
++ occurrence. Also give that info for double file entries. Fixes #473342
++ Give correct error locate for one warning. Fixes #532395 partially
++
++2008-06-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Don't warn about overridden docs comment if its the same text.
++
++2008-06-03 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ Spelling.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Warn and skip double file entries in section files.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ Use the new warning format in this script too.
++
++ * gtkdoc-rebase.in:
++ Also use optional parameters here.
++
++2008-06-02 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/gobject/src/giface.c:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.h:
++ Add some since: tags for the tests too.
++
++2008-06-02 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ tody up and add some comments regarding HTML_DIR.
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ HTML_DIR is not necessarily set.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in:
++ Fix uninstalled.
++
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ Add more chapter id's and experiment with an index chapter.
++
++2008-06-02 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * style.css:
++ Improve spacing on indices and glossaries.
++
++2008-06-02 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.h:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Add some index lists to the tests. Add a deprecated function.
++
++2008-06-02 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Felix Riemann <friemann@svn.gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl:
++ * style.css:
++ Produce valid html. Fixes #534627.
++
++2008-05-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * tests/gobject/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/gobject/docs-tmpl/tester.types:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Build same docs once again with old tmpl approach.
++
++2008-05-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Sync names.
++
++2008-05-08 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ Fix a long standing bug that killed spaces in tmpl files.
++
++2008-05-05 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Fix regexps changes from previous commit. When using /e the
++ replacement part has to be a perl snippet.
++
++2008-05-05 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Don't expand '#' in ulink tags. Also allow to escape "#%@" with '\'.
++ Add to testsuite. Fixes #530758
++
++2008-05-05 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ It is GObject not GtkObject anymore
++
++2008-05-05 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ Make note about expanding urls.
++
++ * help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ Document the use of |[ ]| as a shortcut for program listing.
++
++ * tests/gobject/src/giface.h:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ Fix one undocumented symbol and add an exampl of the programlisting
++ shortcut.
++
++2008-04-22 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * HACKING:
++ We need to update the webpage.
++
++ * TODO:
++ * configure.in:
++ Planning.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Hopefully now unbreak the docbuild, if one has template but not uses
++ them.
++
++2008-04-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Add one more warning. Also trac location of section docs. Merge
++ source symbols once and then on demand (if we read a template).
++
++2008-04-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ * configure.in:
++ Idea about the tracing. Not that practical as it is.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ Unify file-error messages. Improve warning detail. Fix undocumented
++ status for template less runs.
++
++2008-04-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ Ideas.
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ Add common method for prining (gcc-style) warnings.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Use new method. Harmonize the warnings a bit. Remember locations
++ symbols are taken from template files for use in warnings.
++
++2008-04-09 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * HACKING:
++ Some releasing info.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Print file/line number in warning.
++
++ * help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ Some docs for what the <module>-overrides.txt file is for.
++
++2008-03-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * autogen.sh:
++ Tell automake to not warn us about portabillity issues. Its too late
++ for that.
++
++ * ChangeLog:
++ Surgery for the bugnumber.
++
++2008-03-21 Marc-Andre Lureau <marcandre.lureau@gmail.com>
++
++ * .svnignore, Makefile.am, autogen.sh, configure.in,
++ help/manual/.svnignore, help/manual/C/ChangeLog,
++ help/manual/C/Makefile.am, help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual-C.omf.in,
++ help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml, help/manual/ChangeLog,
++ help/manual/Makefile.am, help/manual/gtk-doc-manual.omf.in,
++ m4/.svnignore, omf.make, xmldocs.make:
++ GNOME doc-utils migration. Fixes #335239
++
++2008-03-22 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * HACKING:
++ * configure.in:
++ * help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ Back to development.
++
++=== Release 1.10 ===
++
++2008-03-19 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * NEWS:
++ * HACKING:
++ Prepare for release.
++
++ * style.css:
++ Add fix for footnote positions.
++
++2008-02-27 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Carlos Garnacho <carlos@imendio.com>
++
++ * tools/gtk-doc.el:
++ Update emacs mode to work with emacs22. Fixes #513318.
++
++2008-02-01 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Improve tmpl parsing and add some more logging. Fixes #512154.
++
++2008-01-30 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Add testcase for #512154.
++
++2008-01-28 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Condense all the multiple newlines in the generated xml.
++
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ Make sure the testsuite call the uninstalled scripts.
++
++2008-01-24 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl:
++ Unbreak fixxref. The index.sgml file should not have leading
++ whitespace. These were caused by indenting the xsl, which is dangerous
++ in case of <xsl:text>.
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Debug logging.
++
++2008-01-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ Don't warn when parsing enum struct members.
++
++2008-01-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ Give file and line number when complaining about duplicate
++ definitions. Seems to not have been applied with older commit.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.h:
++ Handle typedef enums.
++
++2008-01-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Don't fail in dist when no .types file is present. Fixes #509539.
++
++2008-01-16 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ Give file and line number when complaining about duplicate
++ definitions.
++
++2008-01-14 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Joe Marcus Clarke <marcus@freebsd.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Do not abort the build, if gtk-doc is not installed. Fixes #508897
++
++2007-12-20 Mathias Hasselmann <mathias@openismus.com>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ Lower Python dependency to 2.3 (#503054). Just warn when Python
++ wasn't found. Print a configuration summary before leaving the
++ configure script.
++ * Makefile.am:
++ Do not install gtkdoc-depscan when Python wasn't found.
++
++2007-12-20 Mathias Hasselmann <mathias@openismus.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-depscan.in:
++ Use old and/or pattern instead of the new ternary operator.
++ This drops the Python 2.5 dependency for that script.
++ Original patch by Frederic Peters. (#503054)
++
++2007-12-17 Mathias Hasselmann <mathias@openismus.com>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ Use AM_PATH_PYTHON instead of AC_PATH_PROG to find Python.
++ (#503710)
++
++2007-12-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl:
++ Render accronyms from docbook and glossary in html.
++
++2007-12-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-docs.sgml:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.sgml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.xml:
++ Add the xml instead of the sgml docs.
++
++2007-12-12 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Revert last change and reopen #503119. Needs a different fix.
++
++2007-12-12 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Use content_files as a dependency the sgml-build.stamp.
++
++2007-12-11 Mathias Hasselmann <mathias@openismus.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-depscan.in:
++ Use colon as name-version-separator in book names.
++
++2007-12-11 Mathias Hasselmann <mathias@openismus.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-depscan.in:
++ Also scan devhelp folders.
++
++2007-12-11 Mathias Hasselmann <mathias@openismus.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-depscan.in:
++ Print reasonable error message when passing
++ non-existant files on command line.
++
++2007-12-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Kouhei Sutou <kou@cozmixng.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl:
++ Consistently use UTF-8 instead of US-ASCII for output encoding.
++ Fixes #497367
++
++2007-12-10 Mathias Hasselmann <mathias@openismus.com>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * gtkdoc-depscan.in:
++ * Makefile.am:
++ Add gtkdoc-depscan, which resolves source code dependencies
++ by scanning devhelp2 books.
++
++2007-12-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * devhelp2.xsd:
++ Update schema.
++
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Remove left-over 'fi'.
++
++2007-12-05 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Better fix for #501066.
++
++2007-12-05 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * devhelp2.xsd:
++ Add first version of the schema.
++
++ * devhelp2.xsl:
++ Unbreak the devhelp2 file generation.
++
++ * tests/gtkdoctest.sh:
++ Add comment about doing schmea checks once they work.
++
++2007-12-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Apply build flags cleanups from #498521. Spotted by
++ dmacks@netspace.org.
++
++2007-12-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/gobject/src/giface.c:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ Uhm, unbreak the links in the test docs.
++
++2007-12-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/gobject/src/giface.c:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ Little test cleanup. The bug was already fixed.
++
++2007-12-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester.types:
++ * tests/gobject/src/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/src/giface.c:
++ * tests/gobject/src/giface.h:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.c:
++ * tests/gobject/src/gobject.h:
++ * tests/gobject/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/gobject/src/tester.h:
++ Refactor tests for #489279.
++
++2007-12-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Add testcase for #501038. Improve struct parsing to correctly finish
++ if the last line in struct declaration was a preprocessor statement.
++ Fixes #501038.
++
++2007-12-04 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Handle forward typedef'd enums. Fixes #446648.
++
++2007-12-02 Loïc Minier <lool@dooz.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Add double-quotes around `which gtkdoc-rebase` to prevent "test"
++ from failing with "/bin/sh: line 11: test: !=: unary operator
++ expected ". Fixes #501066.
++
++2007-11-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Avoid generated node ids. Fixes #365913.
++
++2007-11-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * style.css:
++ Alternative and cleaner footer implementation (unblock #365913).
++
++2007-11-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ Display proper types for pointer properties. Fixes #468278.
++
++2007-10-31 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Only warn about missing deprecation guards for declared symbols.
++ Fixes #492005.
++
++2007-10-31 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtkdoctest.sh:
++ Run our own check script. Clean the make output a bit.
++
++2007-10-31 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ Small doc fix.
++
++2007-10-31 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * Makefile.am:
++ Formatting.
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ Cleanup the 'make check' deps configure check.
++
++2007-10-01 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ Back to development.
++
++=== Release 1.9 ===
++
++2007-09-30 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * NEWS:
++ Releasing 1.9.
++
++2007-09-27 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * gtkdoc-rebase.in:
++ New day, new fix. Remove testing $(DESTDIR) from makefile and use
++ Getopt::Long qw(:config gnu_getopt); in rebase.
++
++2007-09-26 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ And actually saving before committing might greatly help.
++
++2007-09-26 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Another attempt to fix the rules.
++
++2007-09-26 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ If there is nothing to install, don't rebase.
++
++2007-09-26 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Unbreak the last change.
++
++2007-09-26 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Handle DESTDIR= case.
++
++2007-09-26 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ * gtkdoc-rebase.in:
++ Fix destdir option name.
++
++2007-09-25 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ Get make distcheck fully working.
++
++2007-09-25 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs.sh:
++ * tests/gobject.sh:
++ * tests/gtkdoctest.sh:
++ Try to get make distcheck to run.
++
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ Don't dist docs generated during test runs and remove some cruft.
++
++
++2007-09-24 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * NEWS:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ Adapt xml/ cleaning from gtk-doc.notmpl.make. Clean log files.
++
++2007-09-24 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * NEWS:
++ Current release notes.
++
++2007-09-24 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * MAINTAINERS:
++ Make mango happy.
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am:
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Process files from DISTCLEANFILES in the dist-hooks.
++
++2007-09-24 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * Makefile.am:
++ Add gtk-doc.notmpl.make to EXTRA_DIST. Fixes #479913.
++
++2007-09-20 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Revert online option for fixxref now that we have a rebase command.
++
++2007-09-18 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ Handle function pointers. Fixes #477532.
++
++2007-09-18 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ Parse reoccuring const. Fixes #471014.
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/gobject/src/tester.h:
++ Add more tests and cleanup the test-code a little.
++
++2007-09-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Revert some Makefile improvements, as we can't control the quoting
++ reliably.
++
++2007-09-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Default master doc should have proper extension. Fixes #467773.
++
++2007-09-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Makefile improvements.
++
++2007-09-03 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * MAINTAINERS:
++ Update MAINTAINER to adhere to rules given on
++ http://live.gnome.org/MaintainersCorner#maintainers
++
++2007-08-23 Benjamin Otte <otte@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ sync with gtkdoc-mkdb completely. Really fixes #419997
++
++2007-08-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * style.css:
++ Add divider and empty space at the bottom. Mostly fixes #448879.
++
++2007-08-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Make use of rebase if possible. Fixes #465920
++
++ * gtkdoc-rebase.in:
++ Rebase improvements and fixes.
++
++2007-08-16 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * .cvsignore:
++ * help/.cvsignore:
++ * help/manual/.cvsignore:
++ * help/manual/C/.cvsignore:
++ Get rid of cvsignore files.
++
++2007-08-14 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Don't die when encountering #if/#endif in enums. Fixes #324535.
++
++2007-08-14 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Frederic Peters <fpeters@0d.be>
++
++ * style.css:
++ Styling hr tags.
++
++2007-08-14 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ Document new features and bump version.
++
++2007-08-13 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Fix the funny side-effect of last 'broken-returns' fix.
++
++2007-08-13 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Really fix #460127.
++
++2007-08-13 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Now the 'broken' returns seems to work better. Fixes #380824 more.
++
++2007-08-13 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.c (bug_379466, bug_380824):
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h (test):
++ New test.
++ * tests/gtkdoctest.sh:
++ Fix bashism.
++
++2007-08-12 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Add another test for a bug we fixed with the changes below.
++ Fixes #460127.
++
++2007-08-12 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.c:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Improved scan logic. Fixes #411739.
++
++2007-08-12 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ Handle newline in declarations better. Fixes #379466.
++ Ensure space in multiline declarations when removing the newline.
++ Fix missing argument docs in template free build.
++
++2007-08-12 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ Handle "unsigned long|unsigned short|signed long|signed short".
++ Fixes #445693.
++
++2007-08-12 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * Makefile.am:
++ * configure.in:
++ * gtkdoc-check:
++ * gtkdoc-check.in:
++ Replacing my shell based test script by Davids perl based one. Add
++ licence, copyright and docs header. Integrate with build.
++
++2007-08-12 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ Make introspection of interfaces work in more cases. Fixes #355352.
++
++2007-08-12 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ Cleanup glib detection for tests.
++
++2007-08-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-check:
++ Fix modulename check.
++
++2007-08-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * Makefile.am:
++ Install new makefile.
++
++ * configure.in:
++ Bump version as we're working on 1.9.
++
++ * gtkdocize.in:
++ Add option to select makefile-flavour.
++
++2007-08-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ Add dummy rule to make first build run through. Fixes #156643
++
++2007-08-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * style.css:
++ Hide fixed navigationbar when printing. Fixes #449618
++
++2007-08-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.notmpl.make:
++ Add new makefile for tmpl-less build.
++
++2007-08-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * autogen.sh:
++ Accepts automake 1.10 too. Fixes #459225
++
++2007-08-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Make the tmpl-less build work.
++
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ Switch again to the tmpl-less build.
++
++2007-08-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Rouslan Solomakhin <rouslan@solomakhin.net>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ Fix the build.
++
++2007-08-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ Revert fix for #433338 and reopen bug. Breaks if file is not there,
++ e.g. if --rebuild-types is used.
++
++2007-08-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ Some cleanups.
++
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ Try the tmpl free build here.
++
++2007-08-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am:
++ Add commented out TESTS.
++
++ * gtk-doc.m4:
++ Check for location of gtkdoc-check.
++
++ * Makefile.am:
++ * gtkdoc-check:
++ Test doc status and print result in check like layout.
++
++2007-08-02 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: Sven Herzberg <herzi@gnome-de.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ Rebuild documentation of $(DOC_MODULE).types changed. Fixes #433338
++
++2007-08-02 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * Makefile.am:
++ * configure.in:
++ * gtkdoc-rebase.in:
++ Allow rebasing cross-references in generated docs. Fixes #434134.
++
++2007-08-02 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in:
++ Add a hack to gtkdoc-mkhtml to run uninstalled too.
++
++2007-08-02 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ Patch by: David Nečas <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl:
++ Generate ONLINE tag in index.sgml.
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Allow to base links against online versions of xreffed docs.
++ Fixes #454916.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Add releaseinfo to doctemplates.
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-docs.sgml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.sgml:
++ Update templates.
++
++2007-08-02 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ Use PERL5LIB envvar to use uninstalled gtkdoc-common.pl for tests.
++ Use tee to both show and redirect logs.
++ Build test-docs in check-local instead of all-local.
++ Fixes #459725.
++
++2007-07-25 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ Some more debug prints and code cleaning.
++
++2007-07-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ Patch by: Yeti <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Report undeclared symbols into a file. Fixes #436565.
++
++2007-07-18 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Readd two debug prints and remove one obsolete one.
++
++ * tests/bugs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/Makefile.am:
++ Enforce 'make clean' before 'make check'.
++
++2007-07-18 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ Patch by: Yeti <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Cleanup broek-return handling and add ignore_broken_returns for
++ section docs. Fixes #457077
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.in:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/Makefile.in:
++ Remove.
++
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ Use the local tools so that 'make check' works uninstalled.
++
++
++2007-07-18 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.c: (bug_419997):
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ * tests/gobject/src/tester.c: (gtkdoc_tester_class_init):
++ * tests/gobject/src/tester.h:
++ Add more test cases.
++
++2007-07-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.in:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.c: (bug_141869_a), (bug_141869_b),
++ (bug_379466), (bug_445693):
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtkdoctest.sh:
++ Improve test suite.
++
++2007-07-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ Patch by: Yeti <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ Improve paramenter parsing to allow parameter names that contain
++ const or restricted. Fixes #419997
++ Also fix the signed/unsigned more.
++
++2007-07-17 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * Makefile.am:
++ * autogen.sh:
++ * configure.in:
++ * tests/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs.sh:
++ * tests/bugs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/Makefile.in:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-docs.sgml:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/bugs/docs/tester.types:
++ * tests/bugs/src/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.c: (bug_445693), (bug_141869_a),
++ (bug_141869_b):
++ * tests/bugs/src/tester.h:
++ * tests/gobject.sh:
++ * tests/gobject/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/Makefile.in:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-docs.sgml:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester-sections.txt:
++ * tests/gobject/docs/tester.types:
++ * tests/gobject/src/Makefile.am:
++ * tests/gobject/src/tester.c: (gtkdoc_tester_new),
++ (gtkdoc_tester_get_property), (gtkdoc_tester_set_property),
++ (gtkdoc_tester_class_init), (gtkdoc_tester_get_type):
++ * tests/gobject/src/tester.h:
++ * tests/gtk-doc.make:
++ * tests/gtkdoctest.sh:
++ Add test-suite. Fixes #457173
++
++2007-07-16 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ Patch by: Yeti <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Avoid useless $return_start access.
++
++2007-07-16 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ Patch by: Petteri Räty <betelgeuse@gentoo.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.m4:
++ Make gtk-doc.m4 fail when needed gtk-doc is not installed and notify
++ user. Fixes #323938 and #450338.
++
++2007-07-15 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ Handle signed/unsigned without int. Fixes #141869.
++
++2007-07-15 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ Patch by: Yeti <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Improve handling of legacy "return" statement doc parsing. Warn about
++ those.
++
++2007-07-15 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ Fix perl warning about usage of undefined symbol.
++
++2007-07-15 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ Sync the function decl arg parsing. Fixes #419308.
++
++2007-07-15 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Improve the ---help output a little.
++
++2007-07-15 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Improve detection of absolute/relatives paths. Skip duplicate paths.
++ Fixes #453717.
++
++2007-06-14 Lo�c Minier <lool@dooz.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make:
++ Cleanup $(DOC_MODULE)-undocumented.txt files in
++ maintainer-clean-local. Fixes #415388.
++
++2007-06-14 Lo�c Minier <lool@dooz.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.m4:
++ Fix warnings in m4 macros when running "autoreconf -fi -Wall";
++ Guillem Jover. Fixes #428596.
++
++2007-06-11 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ExpandAbbreviations): just output "signal" and
++ "property" as the text for cross-reference links to signals and
++ properties, rather than something like "Object::signal" which can get
++ a bit long. Also tidied up the code a little.
++ (GetArgs): put the " inside the literal element.
++ (GetSignals): use a literal element for the signal name in the title,
++ to match the properties.
++
++2007-03-16 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in: handle preprocessor statements in enum and
++ struct declarations. Fixes #418027.
++
++2007-02-27 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: create toc for part and reference
++
++ * style.css: Fix placement of div.reference
++
++=== release 1.8 ===
++
++2007-02-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * Released 1.8.
++
++2007-02-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in: only rebuild the .types file automatically on the
++ very first run (i.e. when there are no sections or types files).
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: skip gnome_keyring_item_info_get_type if it is
++ in the .types file as it isn't a real GObject type. This is a hack to
++ avoid breaking the GNOME build. See bug #386508.
++
++2007-02-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: fix prerequisite section in nav-header
++
++2007-02-07 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * style.css: fixing footnote subscripts, make tables look nicer.
++ #405051
++
++2007-02-07 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make: make $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt and
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt depend on scan-build.stamp, so that
++ parallel make works. #404122, Ed Catmur.
++
++2007-02-07 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: don't return if !G_TYPE_IS_OBJECT (object_type)
++ as that means interface properties don't get output. This was broken
++ by the patch for #348058.
++
++2007-01-21 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: added "--default-includes" option to specify the
++ default "#include"s to place at the top of the synopsis of each
++ section. Normally this is specified in a <INCLUDE>...</INCLUDE> line
++ in MODULE-sections.txt, but if you are using the "--rebuild-sections"
++ option to automatically rebuild the MODULE-sections.txt file you can't
++ use that. #395023.
++
++2007-01-21 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (ReadTemplateFile):
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ReadTemplateFile): improved param regexp to handle
++ weird macro vararg names like "format...". #398971.
++
++2007-01-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: support "Include" setting in section docs in source
++ code, same as <INCLUDE>...</INCLUDE> setting in sections.txt file.
++ Part of #395023.
++
++2007-01-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputMacro): try to line up multiple lines of
++ arguments if possible. #384249
++
++2007-01-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): for headers marked private, return
++ immediately so we don't add anything to the sections file. #395005.
++
++2007-01-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: a number of changes to help when adding example code
++ to the docs (#368382):
++
++ a) Support CDATA in source code comments. (We don't touch anything in
++ CDATA.)
++ b) Support |[ ... ]| to include example code. (Just gets converted to
++ <informalexample><programlisting>)
++ c) Improve <programlisting> handling, by not inserting <para></para>
++ and not expanding "()", "@" or "%". (It still expands '#' so people
++ can use cross-references to any symbols if they want to.).
++ d) Improve '#' links a bit by skipping symbols that look like C
++ preprocessor directives (e.g. "#include").
++ e) Improve '&' handling a bit by converting to '&' if it doesn't
++ already look like the start of an entity reference.
++ f) Added special case for "#include <xxxx>" in <programlisting> so the
++ "<" and ">" get replaced by entities.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (ReadTemplateFile):
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ReadTemplateFile): fixed param regexp so it handles
++ "@...:" for varargs again. It also cleans up messed up template files
++ luckily.
++
++2007-01-04 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make (dist-hook): abort dist if html docs aren't generated.
++ #166462, Gustavo Carneiro.
++
++2007-01-03 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: improved output a little - made field widths larger,
++ removed signal prototypes from synopsis, and capitalized all signal
++ flags (to be consistent with argument capitalization). #384247,
++ Hans Petter Jansson.
++
++2007-01-03 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration):
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputFunction): fix parsing of "char * const"
++ arguments, with an extra "\s*". #387681
++
++2007-01-03 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * omf.make:
++ * xmldocs.make: updated to new versions from gnome-common. #363622
++ Also reverted the changes made for #316508 since they may cause
++ problems. We'll let the scrollkeeper/gnome-common/autoconf people
++ sort out that issue.
++
++2006-12-07 Ross Burton <ross@burtonini.com>
++
++ * help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ Add examples of how to document structs, properties and signals
++ (#383401).
++
++2006-12-04 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: added a '--query-child-properties' argument to
++ allow you to specify a function to return a list of child properties
++ for a class (similar to GtkContainer child properties). #379203
++
++2006-10-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: remove a shadow declaration to avoid compiler
++ warnings. #362475
++
++2006-10-15 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in: added a '--rebuild-sections' option that will
++ automatically recreate the MODULE-sections.txt file each time.
++ (This only works for projects with very neat header files.) #310494.
++
++2006-10-15 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ Bug #338517: Automatically creating/updating .types file:
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in: added a '--rebuild-types' option which will
++ automatically update the .types file using all _get_type() functions
++ found in the headers. (It will also do this if no .types file is found,
++ i.e. when gtk-doc is first run on a project.)
++
++ * gtk-doc.make (scan-build.stamp): run gtkdoc-scan before
++ gtkdoc-scangobj so we can use the generated .types file.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: if the .types file doesn't have any #include
++ directives, just output "extern GType *get_type();" declarations for
++ each *_get_type() function.
++
++2006-10-14 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ExpandAbbreviationsExceptCDATA): new function used
++ to expand abbreviations in extra files, but leaving CDATA sections
++ as they are. (#360579)
++
++2006-10-14 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputSGML): Allow the section id to be set from
++ within the source code "SECTION:" comment block. (#349855)
++
++2006-10-13 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * style.css: added missing comma from previous fix (#360967).
++
++2006-10-13 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputSymbolTraits): new function to output the
++ "Since" and "Stability Level:" paragraphs, with roles to allow
++ XSLT styling. (#348046)
++
++2006-10-13 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: support interfaces on non-GObject types.
++ (#348058, Josh Parsons).
++
++2006-10-13 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: make sure interfaces are initialized so the
++ signals query works. (#355352)
++
++2006-10-13 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * style.css: Make sure appendix title isn't obscured by navigation bar
++ (#360967, Philip Kovacs).
++
++2006-09-09 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in (get_type_name): Don't set is_pointer
++ to TRUE for enum and flags types. (#354880, Yevgen Muntyan)
++
++=== release 1.7 ===
++
++2006-07-29 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * Released 1.7.
++
++2006-06-30 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ScanSourceFile): fix regexp to allow section names
++ with '-' in them.
++
++ * gtk-doc.make (all-local, docs): added separate 'docs' target that can
++ be used even when the '--disable-gtk-doc' configure option is used.
++
++2006-06-15 Jody Goldberg <jody@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputFunction) : finish off #341872
++ Support 'T const * const *foo' and other more complex types.
++ Support ptr2ptr2func as a func argument.
++ 'void foo (void (**func) (void))'
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in : ditto.
++
++ (committed by Damon with minor changes to spacing so GTK+ docs are
++ unchanged).
++
++2006-06-09 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: use the 'role' attribute rather than the 'id' attribute
++ to identify the different sections for the navigation bar, since 'id'
++ must be unique throughout the entire document. Also fixed a few minor
++ issues with the output. (#342861, Leonardo Boshell)
++
++2006-05-30 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in (FixHTMLFile): Use the 's' modifier to the
++ substitution so we handle links spanning more than one line.
++ (#342845).
++
++2006-05-22 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * Makefile.am:
++ * help/Makefile.am:
++ * help/manual/Makefile.am: use a separate Makefile.am for each
++ subdirectory rather than using "SUBDIRS=help/manual/C".
++
++2006-05-21 Jody Goldberg <jody@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in (ParseStructDeclaration) : Support
++ 'long double foo' and
++ 'T const * const *foo' (#341872)
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration) : handle ptrs to ptrs to
++ functions 'void func (void (**ptr2ptr2func)(int a))'
++
++2006-05-21 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ScanSourceFile): don't check basename for '.[hc]'
++ suffix since we allow other suffixes as well now. (#340199)
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputSignalTemplates): check if the parameter
++ is actually in the source code comment block. If not, use the default
++ name. Otherwise we were outputting an empty "@:" in the templates.
++ (ReadTemplateFile): remove empty "@:" lines caused by above bug.
++
++2006-04-15 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * xmldocs.make: use gtkdochelpdir rather than docdir to avoid clash
++ with autoconf. (#316508)
++
++ * tools/gtk-doc.el: Output "Returns:" rather than "Return value:",
++ and a "C-x4s" binding for inserting a blank section header.
++
++ * gtk-doc.make (sgml-build.stamp): added $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt
++ to the dependencies, since although the templates depend on it, they
++ may not be changed, but the XML should still be rebuilt.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ScanSourceFile): allow whitespace after "SECTION:".
++
++2006-04-13 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ReadArgsFile): When outputting a warning about a
++ property, use a single colon ':', since that is what is used to
++ document properties in the source code. (2 colons are used for signals)
++
++ * gtk-doc.make (sgml-build.stamp): added $(HFILE_GLOB) here, to
++ catch any new documentation in the headers.
++
++2006-04-12 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (tagify2): strip special "-struct" suffix from
++ text of links to widget structs.
++
++2006-04-09 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ fix link after live.gnome.org wiki changes
++
++=== release 1.6 ===
++
++2006-04-09 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * Released 1.6.
++
++2006-03-29 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ missing '*' for arg in signal prototype in docs (#335486)
++
++2006-03-26 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (MergeSourceDocumentation): don't output warnings
++ for overridden titles, since that happens a lot. (#320010)
++
++ * configure.in: check for pkg-config >= 0.19.
++
++ * Makefile.am (pkgconfigdir): put the .pc file in $(datadir) rather
++ than $(libdir), since gtk-doc is architecture-independant. (#120950)
++
++ * configure.in: removed the hard dependency on openjade or jade, since
++ XML is used mostly now rather than SGML. We just output a warning
++ rather than an error if neither openjade or jade are found.
++
++2006-03-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * style.css:
++ add sect1 to pages with top-page offset adjustment (#166363)
++
++2006-03-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): try to handle the start of function
++ declarations spread over 3 lines. (#321708, Jorn Baayen)
++
++2006-03-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ (OutputOldParams): don't bother outputting unused parameters if they
++ don't have any documentation as that is pointless.
++
++2006-03-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (ReadTemplateFile): Add a workaround for an old
++ bug handling macros with arguments spread over several lines. (#318666)
++
++2006-03-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (MakeIndexterms): Make sure we still output an index
++ term if there isn't 'deprecated' or 'since' info.
++ (#334851, Tommi Komulainen).
++
++2006-03-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): added "--ignore-decorators" option to
++ ignore a list of declarators in function declarations.
++ (#316512, Bertram Felgenhauer).
++
++2006-03-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetSignals, GetArgs): call MakeIndexTerms() to make
++ sure that signals appear in the deprecated/new symbol indices.
++ (#332007, Tommi Komulainen).
++
++2006-03-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputEnum, ExpandAbbreviations, symbolify):
++ allow use of '#Object::signal' and '#Object:property' to link to
++ signals and properties, and add links to enum constant values.
++ (#332483, Stefan Kost)
++
++2006-03-15 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (MakeIndexterms): Create separate indexterms
++ for different roles, since the docbook stylesheets don't handle
++ multiple roles in one attribute. (#331586, Tommi Komulainen)
++
++=== release 1.5 ===
++
++2006-03-07 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * Released 1.5.
++
++2006-03-06 Tommi Komulainen <tommi.komulainen@nokia.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): Print object name after <TITLE> in
++ order to get get object hierarchy, signals and properties
++ documentation appear automatically (#333380)
++
++2006-01-24 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: patch from Damon Chaplin to fix signal flag parsing
++
++2006-01-08 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: patch from Jonathan Blandford to add support for a
++ "--source-suffixes" option so you can scan files with any suffixes
++ you want (e.g. C++ files).
++
++2005-12-19 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in: Use \w+: instead of \S+: when
++ matching parameter names, so that @Deprecated:2.10:
++ works in template files like in source code comments.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Add a missing "and" to the versioned
++ deprecation note.
++
++2005-12-09 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * devhelp.xsl:
++ try more to downgrade devhelp for old file format
++
++2005-12-09 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * Makefile.am:
++ add devhelp2 files
++ * autogen.sh:
++ create a autoregen.sh
++ * devhelp.xsl:
++ * devhelp2.xsl:
++ * gtk-doc.xsl:
++ generate two separate versions
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ fix parsing const after type (#322556)
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ fix parsing multiline macro heads (#320588)
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ allow additional root types (#323581)
++
++2005-12-05 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration):
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputFunction): Allow parameters to be declared
++ volatile (this happens in GLib nowadays)
++
++2005-10-11 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ remove left-over debug-print
++
++2005-10-10 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * devhelp.xsl:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ enhance gtkdoc devhelp output (#318129)
++
++2005-10-05 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ revert exchanging with  
++
++2005-10-04 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in: patch from Andrae Steiner to add missing ';'
++ (#317938)
++
++2005-09-29 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * TODO:
++ additionally point people to the gnome-wiki
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ don't warn on macros with return docs (#314267)
++
++2005-09-28 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ Show signal flags: (#316789)
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Emit flags for signals
++ as <FLAGS> element in $MODULE.signals
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Emit signal flags similar
++ to property flags.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in: Handle <FLAGS> here, too.
++
++2005-09-20 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * doc/README:
++ * doc/authors.txt:
++ * doc/gnome.txt:
++ * doc/sections-file.txt:
++ * doc/setting-up.txt:
++ * doc/style-guide.txt:
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in:
++ adding a note about where the new docs are
++
++2005-09-15 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader):
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration):
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputFunction): patch from dodji seketeli to handle
++ functions returning explicit enums. (#303337)
++
++ Patch from Stepan Kasal:
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in, gtkdoc-mkman.in, gtkdocize.in: Add datarootdir
++ variable, for compatibility with future Autoconf releases.
++
++ * configure.in (PACKAGE_DATA_DIR): Simplify the computation;
++ use a local macro AC_DEFINE_DIR, based on a macro from Autoconf
++ macro archive. (#313876)
++
++2005-09-15 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Patch from Stepan Kasal to avoid some gcc
++ warnings. (#312985)
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Use brackets around open() arguments to avoid
++ precedence problems. (#314838)
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Output more messages about compilation, linking
++ and running of scanner, to try to help track down any problems.
++ Also use "sh -c" to run the scanner (#167688)
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: patch from Stefan Kost to improve error messages,
++ though I changed it slightly so it doesn't output errno.
++
++2005-09-09 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * style.css:
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: Use a fixed navigation bar at the top of the page.
++ Patch from Stefan Kost with minor changes by me. (#313569)
++
++2005-08-18 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: added "const" in a few places to avoid lots
++ of warnings if all gcc warnings are on. (#312985)
++
++2005-08-15 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * COPYING-DOCS:
++ * Makefile.am:
++ * configure.in:
++ * omf.make:
++ * xmldocs.make:
++ adding the infrastructure for installation of gtkdoc manual
++
++2005-08-12 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ fix warning about uninitialized var EXPAND_CONTENT_FILES
++
++Tue Aug 9 12:01:27 2005 tjlocal <timj@imendio.com>
++
++ * autogen.sh: bail out with exit $? for failing programs.
++
++2005-07-26 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make: Pass DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE as the main filename to
++ gtkdoc-mkdb. Avoids creating spurious foo.sgml files in an XML build.
++ Patch from Malcolm Tredinnick. (#311344)
++
++ Prefix build messages with "gtk-doc: " rather than surrounding them
++ with "***" which looks like an error. (#170008)
++
++2005-07-26 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * README: removed comment about not being able to add section
++ documentation to source code files, which is not true any more.
++
++=== release 1.4 ===
++
++2005-07-03 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * Released 1.4.
++
++2005-06-20 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Fix typos in warnings.
++
++2005-06-17 Mikael Hallendal <micke@imendio.com>
++
++ * README: Updated Devhelp web address.
++
++2005-05-16 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Add "expand-content-files:s" to the GetOptions() call.
++
++2005-05-10 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Add an --expand-content-files option
++ to specify extra files to expand abbreviations in and
++ copy into the output directory.
++
++ * gtk-doc.make examples/Makefile.am: Add expand_content_files
++ variable.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputTemplateFile): Add an
++ --only-section-tmpl flag so that projects that keep everything
++ but section descriptions inline can avoid cvs conflicts.
++
++ * gtk-doc.make examples/Makefile.am: Add support for
++ MKTMPL_OPTIONS
++
++ * configure.in: Up version to 1.4.
++
++2005-05-02 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Accept C comments between struct name
++ and struct definition. GObject has an instance of this.
++
++2005-03-21 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtk-doc.dcl: Allow ':' in names. (#169087)
++
++2005-03-21 James Henstridge <james@jamesh.id.au>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl (encoding): output US-ASCII instead of ISO-8859-1.
++ This ensures that the output will be display correctly when served
++ as either ISO-8859-1 or UTF-8.
++
++2005-02-26 Sven Neumann <sven@gimp.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (MakeIndexterms): allow space in Since: keywords,
++ only strip leading and trailing whitespace (bug #168384).
++
++2005-02-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ScanSourceFile): add support for "@stability:"
++ in the inline section docs (Brian Cameron).
++
++2005-02-07 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (MergeSourceDocumentation): allow use of "@...:" in
++ the source code as well as "@Varargs:". Patch from Benjamin Otte.
++ #166366.
++
++2005-02-04 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ParseStabilityLevel): don't reset $stability if it
++ isn't Stable/Unstable/Private (Brian Cameron).
++ (ScanSourceFile): skip whitespace after "SECTION:".
++
++2005-02-01 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ScanSourceFile, MergeSourceDocumentation): patch
++ from Stefan Kost to support section documentation within the source
++ code (long description, short description, see also and title).
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in: patch from Brian Cameron to support stability
++ levels.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputFunction):
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration):
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in (ParseStructDeclaration): patch from Roger Leigh
++ to add support for the "restrict" keyword.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): patch from Roger Leigh to add support
++ for "unsigned" to one of the regexps.
++
++2005-01-31 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make (scan-build.stamp): added "2>&1" to grep command to
++ ignore any errors.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: patch from Stefan Kost to not add '<' '>' around
++ include files that already have '"' '"' around them, and to try to
++ gather more information about undocumented symbols. #164462.
++
++2005-01-28 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make: use dist-hook rather than EXTRA_DIST to copy the
++ $(DOC_MODULE).types file over, so we can skip this if it doesn't exist.
++ #156300.
++
++2005-01-12 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * README: patch from Stefan Kost to mention GObject classes
++ and describe the transformation process to XML/SGML and HTML,
++ and to mention Devhelp.
++
++=== release 1.3 ===
++
++2005-01-09 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * Released 1.3.
++
++2005-01-09 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (MergeSourceDocumentation): output better warnings
++ using the type information. Patch from Stefan Kost. #161979
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): support "typedef struct a *b;". Fixes
++ last part of #156318.
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in (ParseStructDeclaration): return an empty array
++ for forward struct declarations. Part of #156318.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: updated a few of the warnings to make them a bit
++ easier to understand.
++
++2004-11-22 James Henstridge <james@jamesh.id.au>
++
++ * acconfig.h: remove file, since we don't have a config.h
++
++ * configure.in: make sure $ACLOCAL_FLAGS is passed to aclocal on a
++ rebuild.
++
++ * autogen.sh: use Automake-1.9 if available, and call aclocal,
++ autoconf, automake, etc in the same order as autoreconf does.
++
++ * gtkdocize.in: if the AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR option is used in the
++ configure script, copy gtk-doc.m4 to that directory in the source
++ tree.
++
++2004-11-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputFunction): output "const" rather than
++ "G_CONST_RETURN". #157674.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration): skip "void" return types but
++ not if it has modifiers e.g. "void *". #156963.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): handle __attribute__. Patch from
++ Simon Josefsson. #156962.
++
++2004-10-31 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputStruct): handle opaque/forward struct
++ declarations. #156318 again. Tiny fix to avoid warnings.
++
++2004-10-28 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (ReadDeclarationsFile):
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ReadDeclarationsFile):
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): handle opaque/forward struct
++ declarations. #156318.
++
++2004-10-25 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputParamDescriptions): use a after Returns:
++ so it doesn't break before the colon.
++
++2004-10-24 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl (ParseEnumDeclaration): handle "typedef enum XXX {"
++ #156297. Patch from Simon Josefsson.
++
++2004-10-20 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ReadDeclarationsFile): set a flag to indicate a
++ struct has a typedef declaration.
++ (OutputStruct): better output for structs with typedefs. #83269.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): leave the struct declaration as it is.
++ Don't strip out 'typedef'. Also allow simple "struct foo {".
++
++2004-10-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in: use pkg-config to find where GLib is installed
++ and scan that directory for index files. Also scan $GNOME2_PATH.
++ These are only used as a last resort. If they are used we have to
++ output links as absolute URLs, rather than the default relative ones.
++
++2004-10-18 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in (ParseStructDeclaration): support function
++ pointers that return "foo const *" #141870.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader):
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputFunction):
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration): handle functions with const
++ or struct return types. #141870 and #148507.
++
++2004-10-15 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in (ParseStructDeclaration)
++ (ParseEnumDeclaration): moved these here, rather than have 2 copies
++ in gtkdoc-mkdb.in and gtkdoc-mktmpl.in.
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in (ParseStructDeclaration): handle struct fields
++ better. We can now handle things like *foo, ***bar, *baz[12][23],
++ foo : 25 all on one line. Fixes part of #151219.
++ Also support the 'short' modifier to fix #90565.
++ And use $nbsp; rather than spaces to try to avoid splitting
++ declarations in the output.
++ Also take an extra arg specifying whether to include parameters in
++ the function pointer fields.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): Deal with array types in typedefs.
++ (Eg, "typedef unsigned char MD5Digest[16];") From Dan Winship.
++ Last bit of #151219.
++
++2004-10-14 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (CreateValidSGMLID): use ":CAPS" rather than
++ "-CAPS" to distinguish all-caps identifiers, to avoid clashing with
++ identifiers ending in _caps! Bug #113120.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (MergeSourceDocumentation): if it looks like a
++ parameter has been described, but not in the right place, output
++ a better error message. Bug #141871.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputMacro, OutputFunction, GetSignals): allow
++ the author to use <!--PARAMETERS--> to specify the position of the
++ parameter table if they want. Hopefully good enough for bug #99567.
++ (MergeSourceDocumentation): end the paragraph before <!--PARAMETERS-->
++ and start a new one after it.
++
++ * doc/authors.txt: document <!--PARAMETERS-->.
++
++ * style.css: don't underline links normally, as we output lots of
++ them and it makes it very cluttered. Only underline links when the
++ mouse hovers over them, and change the color. Fixes #108037.
++
++ * gtk-doc.make (scan-build.stamp): depend on $(CFILE_GLOB) as well,
++ since changes in properties need to be picked up by gtkdoc-scangobj.
++ Bug #52458.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: (ParseStructDeclaration): for fields that are
++ function pointers, only return the function name, as otherwise the
++ output gets really messy. Fixes #66618.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: use '@PACKAGE_DATA_DIR@' instead of
++ "@PACKAGE_DATA_DIR@" so that it isn't interpolated. It failed when
++ $prefix was /software/@sys/usr. Fixes #113456.
++
++2004-10-13 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: patch from Olexiy Avramchenko to add 3 new
++ GdkEvent subtypes.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: patch from Benjamin Otte to get rid of
++ -Wsign-compare warnings. Bug #137013.
++
++Fri Sep 17 01:13:24 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: Add the images from the gallery on top
++ of the refentry they point to.
++
++ * style.css: Move the css bits of the gallery implementation
++ here.
++
++Fri Sep 17 00:30:16 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: Don't generate <link rel="refentry">
++ links, since e.g. the GTK+ docs contain MANY refentries.
++
++2004-09-10 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * autogen.sh: support automake 1.8. (part of #151219).
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am: require automake 1.6.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in: create an empty MODULE-overrides.txt file if it
++ doesn't exist. gtkdoc.make expects one to exist.
++
++ * doc/setting-up.txt: updated to document new procedure using
++ gtkdoc.make.
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am: updated to use gtkdoc.make.
++
++ * examples/configure.in: removed this. gtkdoc.make is used instead
++ now.
++
++ * examples/README: updated.
++
++ * Makefile.am (EXTRA_DIST): removed examples/configure.in.
++
++Wed Sep 8 01:12:25 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader):
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration):
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputFunction): Accept mixtures of *
++ and const in return types.
++
++Wed Sep 01 05:58:08 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Remove a debug printf
++
++Tue Aug 24 02:30:08 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: Add support for a gallery of widget images.
++
++Wed Jul 28 13:00:54 2004 Jonathan Blandford <jrb@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: remove the examples from the toc.
++
++2004-07-28 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * doc/sections-file.txt: mention use of '#' for comments.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: removed HEADER_FILE stuff, since it isn't used now.
++
++2004-07-23 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am (all-local): add empty all-local target for
++ when ENABLE_GTK_DOC is false. (#148209, Martin Quinson)
++
++Fri Jul 23 13:21:34 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ScanSourceFile): Fix regexps for matching
++ ignored files. (#148211, Martin Quinson)
++
++2004-07-03 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * style.css: Add a missing '}' and align arguments to the
++ top of their descriptions. (#145363, #145364, Mariano
++ Su�rez-Alvarez)
++
++2004-05-18 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: Let the docbook stylesheets generate
++ extra <link rel=...> elements. (#140221, Geert Stappers)
++
++2004-05-10 Geert Stappers <stappers@stappers.nl>
++
++ * TODO: new file, basically a reference to bugzilla.
++
++ * examples/README: tell about gtk-doc.make.
++
++2004-05-06 Geert Stappers <stappers@stappers.nl>
++
++ * MAINTAINERS: Add myself.
++
++2004-05-05 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: Correct the docbook stylesheet version
++ in which filtered index support will appear to 1.66.
++
++2004-04-27 Geert Stappers <stappers@stappers.nl>
++
++ * README: Updated the information on Debian packages.
++ Removed old author and time stamp line.
++
++2004-04-21 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * doc/sections-file.txt: Add hint about private types.
++
++ * README: Update.
++
++ * MAINTAINERS: Add myself.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ReadKnownSymbols): New function which
++ extracts information about public and private symbols from
++ the $MODULE-sections.txt file.
++ (ReadObjectHierarchy): Prune the tree, based on the information
++ collected by ReadKnownSymbols.
++ (ReadInterfaces): Also filter out private interfaces here
++ (ReadPrerequisites): ...and here.
++
++2004-04-19 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * Makefile.am: Add version-greater-or-equal.xsl.
++
++ * version-greater-or-equal.xsl: New file, implementing
++ the version-greater-or-equal template for comparing version
++ numbers.
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: Import version-greater-or-equal.xsl and
++ use the version-greater-or-equal template to a) check that
++ the xsl stylesheets are not too old and b) to avoid creating
++ multiple indices if the xsl stylesheets don't support filtered
++ indices. (#107774)
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (MakeIndexterms): Emit role attributes
++ on indexterms which can be used to create filtered indices
++ with sufficiently new xsl stylesheets. The required functionality
++ will appear in version 1.62 of the xsl stylesheets. (#115530)
++
++2004-04-16 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * style.css: Style information in a separate stylesheet.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in: Copy css files.
++
++ * Makefile.am (gtkdocdata_DATA): Add style.css
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: Use a stylesheet instead of hardwiring
++ styles. (#134683, Vincent Torri)
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetSignals): Organize the properties
++ descriptions to fit better with the other sections, and
++ also display information about allowed and default values.
++
++2004-04-15 Matthias Clasen <mclasen@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Use introspection more fully to emit
++ allowed ranges for integral types and default values.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetSignals): Handle missing signal parameter
++ names better.
++
++2004-03-04 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * autogen.sh: fixed URLs to download autoconf/automake/libtool.
++ Patch from Frederic L. W. Meunier.
++
++2004-02-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * .cvsignore: added gtk-doc.cat and gtkdocize.
++
++=== release 1.2 ===
++
++2004-02-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * Released 1.2.
++
++2004-02-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.cat.in: removed public ID for gtk-doc.dtd, since we don't
++ use it any more.
++
++Sat Feb 14 02:14:27 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtk-doc.m4: Avoid unnecessary checks if gtk-doc is
++ disabled. (#134221, Julio M. Merino Vidal)
++
++Sat Feb 14 02:03:01 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make: Don't create unneeded empty
++ directories. (#134319, Julio M. Merino Vidal)
++
++Sat Feb 14 01:37:38 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make: Add an empty all-local target to make it work
++ with non-GNU make. (#134343, Julio M. Merino Vidal)
++
++Wed Jan 28 00:52:00 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputObjectList): Avoid emitting invalid
++ docbook markup if there are no objects. Partial fix for #132661.
++
++Sun Jan 25 22:01:15 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Accept both the old and the new XInclude
++ namespace. (#131675, Edd Dumbill)
++
++2004-01-23 Thomas Vander Stichele <thomas at apestaart dot org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in: exit when tools return non-zero so errors can
++ be caught.
++
++Thu Jan 15 23:06:10 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: Set the chunk.fast parameter, to gain some
++ speed.
++
++Thu Jan 15 23:05:23 2004 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in: Make it work again without explicit
++ --module.
++
++Sat Dec 27 01:36:08 2003 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in: Add --help. (#126915)
++
++Sat Dec 27 00:43:42 2003 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ParseEnumDeclaration):
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (ParseEnumDeclaration): Support a trailing ,
++ in enum declarations. These are a GNU C extension, but also
++ blessed by C99. (#129949, Thomas Vander Stichele)
++
++Sun Nov 16 00:29:03 2003 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Don't use g_strdown(). (#127028,
++ David Schleef)
++
++Sun Nov 16 00:26:05 2003 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: If compiled against GLib >= 2.3.0, look
++ for properties on interfaces. (#127068, James M. Cape)
++
++2003-11-03 Dan Winship <danw@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Clean up $MODULE-scan.o even when using
++ libtool
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in: Likewise
++
++ * gtk-doc.make (CLEANFILES): Remove $(MODULE)-scan.o from here
++ (clean-local): rm -rf .libs
++
++Wed Oct 8 01:21:54 2003 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): Make gtkdoc-scan grok
++ typedef struct { } foo; in addition to the more baroque
++ typedef struct _foo foo; struct _foo { };
++ (#116807, Malcolm Tredinnick)
++
++Wed Oct 8 01:21:35 2003 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputParamDescriptions): Remove a pointless
++ warning.
++
++2003-10-01 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ Make signals and properties end up in the right template
++ file (#116569, Owen Taylor):
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputSignalTemplates):
++ (OutputArgTemplates): Return a string rather than directly
++ writing to OUTPUT.
++ (OutputTemplateFile): Don't interpret $title as the name of
++ the object to print signal and property templates for.
++ (UpdateTemplates): Collect signal and property templates for all
++ objects contained in the section.
++
++2003-08-10 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * acinclude.m4 (JH_PATH_XML_CATALOG): allow caller to specify
++ actions if found or not found.
++ (JH_CHECK_XML_CATALOG): when requiring JH_PATH_XML_CATALOG, don't
++ error out if it is not found.
++
++2003-08-03 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * doc/gnome.txt: Add some hints regarding markup of examples.
++
++2003-07-22 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * configure.in:
++ * gtk-doc.cat: Fix a problem with the previous commit.
++
++2003-07-21 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ Applied patches from Sebastian Rittau to add maintainer mode and an SGML catalog. (#117955, #117956)
++
++ * gtk-doc.cat.in: New catalog file.
++ * configure.in: Added gtk-doc.catalog to output files.
++ * Makefile.am: Install gtk-doc.catalog.
++
++ * configure.in: Added AM_MAINTAINER_MODE.
++ * autogen.sh: Added --enable-maintainer-mode to configure options.
++
++2003-07-09 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (ParseStructDeclaration):
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ParseStructDeclaration): Accept volatile struct members, which have just
++ made their appearance in glib.
++
++2003-06-29 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ExpandAbbreviations): When expanding @param, catch the common @param->field
++ and @param.field, to reduce the need for littering the C sources with <literal>foo->bar</literal>.
++
++2003-06-25 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ Changes for #115528:
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputSGML): Collect hierarchy, interfaces, implementations, prerequisites
++ and derived interfaces separately.
++ (OutputSGMLFile): Take two more arguments: implementations and derived interfaces.
++ (GetHierarchy): Also put immediate children in the local tree.
++ (GetInterfaces): Split into GetInterfaces and GetImplementations.
++ (GetImplementations): New function to get the implementations of an interface.
++ (GetDerived): New function to get the known derived interfaces of an interface.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (MakeXRef): Accept a second, optional parameter for the
++ text of the link.
++ (ExpandAbbreviations): Add semantic markup inside the links, so that
++ non-crossreferenced symbols come out properly formatted after link
++ removal. (#61345)
++
++2003-06-15 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ Support for a flat index of all symbols. (#92861)
++ To use, put an empty <index/> element in your driver document.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (MakeIndexterms): New function, emits an indexterm.
++ (OutputMacro, OutputTypedef, OutputStruct, OutputEnum,
++ OutputUnion, OutputVariable, OutputFunction): Use MakeIndexterms.
++ to emit indexterms for symbols.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetSignals):
++ (GetArgs): Emit Since: information for signals and properties.
++
++Thu Jun 12 15:55:57 2003 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in (declaration): Replace head -1 with -n 1.
++ (Merge change by Elliot Lee from Red Hat package)
++
++2003-06-11 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * doc/gnome.txt: Updates to the documentation of inline comments.
++
++2003-06-03 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtk-doc.spec.in: Add a missing Provides: and include the .pc file.
++ (#106568, Joe Pranevich)
++
++2003-05-27 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetSignals):
++ (GetArgs): Add signals and properties to the statistics.
++ (OutputMissingDocumentation): Emit undocumented signals and
++ properties. (#113645)
++
++2003-04-21 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * tools/docpercentages.pl: Fix autolinkification for undocumented
++ symbols.
++
++ * doc/style-guide.txt: Typo fix.
++
++=== release 1.1 ===
++
++2003-04-18 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * Released 1.1.
++
++2003-04-18 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * NEWS: add news items.
++
++ * configure.in: increment version number.
++
++2003-03-14 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputBook): Fix the public identifier for
++ DocBook V3.0: Davenport, not DavenPort.
++ (#108343, Mariano Suarez-Alvarez)
++
++2003-03-10 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * configure.in: associate the chmod commands with the files they
++ are chmod'ing. This way config.status will always run the correct
++ chmod command.
++
++2003-03-04 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * configure.in: look up the docbook DTD by public id rather than
++ system id.
++
++2003-02-26 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetArgs): Prefer template or comment docs over
++ blurbs only if they're nonempty, otherwise the empty docs from the
++ templates override all the blurbs.
++
++2003-02-26 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * autogen.sh (THEDIR): set up so that it will choose automake 1.7
++ or 1.6 in preference to 1.4. Passes distcheck okay.
++
++ * configure.in: update configure.in script to match
++ recommendations of newer autoconf's, and add an AC_PREREQ()
++ statement, since the xml catalog checks are using new autoconf
++ features.
++
++ * gtk-doc.make (xml-build.stamp): since other bits of the makefile
++ were assuming xml, may as well hard code --output-format=xml.
++
++2003-02-19 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * Makefile.am: get rid of the dist-hook, and just include the
++ given files in EXTRA_DIST instead.
++
++ * configure.in: provide meaningful names for the commands.
++
++ * acinclude.m4 (JH_CHECK_XML_CATALOG): add some extra arguments: a
++ friendly name for the catalog entry, and actions to run if the
++ entry was found or not. Also include a bit more information in
++ the config.log file if an error occurs.
++
++2003-02-18 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in (declaration): Avoid the unportable grep
++ option -q. (#105311)
++
++2003-02-19 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * devhelp.xsl: put chapters that aren't at the top level into the
++ toc tree (to make gtk's .devhelp tree look better).
++
++ * gtk-doc.spec.in (Requires): make the requires lines match
++ current requirements ...
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in (XSLTPROC): pass --nonet to xsltproc, so we
++ don't try to download DTDs and XSLT over the net. The configure
++ checks should catch people who don't have the correct files in
++ their catalog.
++
++2003-02-17 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtkdocize.in (--version): add --version argument.
++
++2003-02-14 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetOptions): actually accept --tmpl-dir as a
++ command line option. Based on a patch from Simon Josefsson
++ <jas@extundo.com>.
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: remove the xmlns declaration. Not really needed
++ for html output anyway ...
++
++2003-02-13 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * devhelp.xsl: remove refsect1's and refsect2's from book tree, as
++ suggested by Hallski.
++
++ * gtk-doc.make (install-data-local): the change to install images
++ was superfluous, so I have removed it.
++ (CLEANFILES): move some more stuff to CLEANFILES from the
++ distclean-local rule.
++
++2003-02-12 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtk-doc.make: add some chmod calls to work around distcheck on
++ automake >= 1.6.
++ (install-data-local): copy the images as well as the html files
++ during install.
++ (uninstall-local): add an uninstall rule to remove the docs.
++ (CLEANFILES): add $(DOC_MODULE)-scan.o to the list of files to be
++ cleaned up.
++
++2003-02-09 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtkdocize.in: script used to copy gtk-doc.make into another
++ module.
++
++ * gtk-doc.make: automake makefile fragment to handle gtk-doc
++ support in other modules.
++
++ * configure.in: check to make sure DocBook XML DTD and XSLT
++ stylesheets are present in the XML catalog.
++
++ * acinclude.m4 (JH_CHECK_XML_CATALOG): new macro to check for
++ entries in the XML catalog.
++
++2003-02-04 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtk-doc.m4: a macro to check for gtk-doc.
++
++ * Makefile.am (gtkdocdata_DATA): don't bother installing xml.dcl.
++ It isn't used anymore (since switching xml mode to xsltproc).
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in (gtkdocdir): and here.
++
++ * Makefile.am (gtkdocdatadir): change dir.
++
++ * configure.in: put data files in $(datadir)/gtk-doc/data, so that
++ they don't all get mixed up with the html docs installed by other
++ packages.
++
++=== release 1.0 ===
++
++2003-01-20 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * Released 1.0.
++
++2003-01-20 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * configure.in: bumped version to 1.0, and added SGML_OUTPUT_TYPE
++ variable, which we set to 'sgml-raw' if we have openjade, or 'sgml'
++ if we have jade. Added gtk-doc.pc to AC_OUTPUT.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in: used SGML_OUTPUT_TYPE variable to set the output
++ type of jade/openjade.
++
++ * gtk-doc.pc.in: new pkg-config file, which apps can use to reliably
++ check the gtk-doc version in future.
++
++ * Makefile.am (pkgconfigdir): install .pc file, and add it to
++ EXTRA_DIST.
++
++ * examples/configure.in: updated example to use pkg-config for the
++ version check.
++
++2003-01-18 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in (declaration): switch the output type from
++ "sgml" to "sgml-raw" when using Jade to process docs. This gets
++ rid of the line breaks inside the tags, which were confusing Lynx.
++
++2003-01-15 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): Remove special cases for Pango and
++ Bonobo.
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputDeclaration):
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration): Remove special cases for
++ structs named BlablaClass. (#95398)
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetInterfaces): Fix an off-by-one error.
++ (#103466, Josh Parsons)
++
++2002-12-28 Chema Celorio <chema@celorio.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan[g]obj.in: add "void" to functions with no parameters,
++ avoids warning with -Wmissing-prototypes when compiling
++ {module}-scan.c
++
++2002-12-16 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtk-doc.spec.in: require perl >= 5.6.0
++
++ * configure.in: require Perl >= 5.6.0
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in: add "use bytes;" to fix malformed UTF-8
++ character errors when run with a UTF-8 locale.
++
++2002-12-16 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputSGMLFile): Don't emit the additional
++ anchors in the title which breaks the generated html (the title
++ text is copied around). Instead, put the anchors before the
++ synopsis. This isn't perfect, but the best we can achieve without
++ stylesheet hackery.
++
++2002-12-13 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Add an --ignore-files option which can be used
++ to omit files or directories from scanning.
++ (OutputSGMLFile): Emit anchors for all objects contained in the
++ file to avoid dangling links.
++ (OutputMissingDocumentation): Emit deprecated symbols after
++ undeprecated ones.
++
++2002-12-12 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): Also recognize "positive" guards
++ like #ifdef GTK_ENABLE_BROKEN.
++
++2002-12-11 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: Change XPath path to "//anchor|//refentry" for the
++ generation of index.sgml. The previous path "//anchor|refentry"
++ was not matching any refentrys.
++
++2002-12-09 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (UpdateTemplates): Emit unused class structs
++ to $MODULE-unused.txt.
++
++2002-12-08 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputStruct): Don't emit private parts
++ of class structs to parameter lists in docs. Remove leftover
++ debugging output.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration): Don't emit private parts
++ of class structs to parameter lists in templates.
++
++2002-12-06 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ Improved /*< private >*/ handling: (#95398)
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputStruct): Handle /*< public >*/ and
++ /*< private >*/ for all structs. Default to private for object and
++ class structs, to public for all other structs.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): Emit declarations for class structs
++ to $MODULE-decl.txt.
++
++2002-12-05 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration):
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ReadTemplateFile): Support @Since: and
++ @Deprecated: as a way to specify since and deprecated information
++ in template files. This works for all kinds of symbols, even those
++ which normally don't have parameter lists.
++
++2002-12-02 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (MakeDeprecationNote): Support multi-paragraph
++ deprecation notes.
++
++2002-11-29 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in: copy the navigation images for both XML and
++ SGML cases.
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in: update DSSSL stylesheets to match layout of XSL
++ ones.
++
++2002-11-29 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): Make deprecation guards work with
++ both
++ #ifndef DEPRECATION_GUARD
++ #if !defined(DEPRECATION_GUARD) || defined(FOO_COMPILATION)
++ The second form is used in GDK and GTK+ to include selected
++ deprecated symbols when compiling the library itself.
++
++2002-11-27 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Parse to new tags in inline doc comments,
++ Since: and Deprecated:, which can be placed after the Returns:
++ tag. Emit the Since: information (which is expected to be just a
++ version number) after the parameters and the Deprecated:
++ information (which is expected to be one or more full sentences)
++ inside the deprecation warning.
++ Warn if a Deprecated: tag is found on a symbol which is not
++ guarded by a deprecation guard in the header.
++
++2002-11-26 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in: set gtkdoc-bookname and gtkdoc-version
++ parameters in sgml mode, and don't bother with the sed run after
++ processing with jade.
++ In XML mode, pass the version number in as a parameter too.
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in ($user-html-header$): add <meta> tag if
++ gtkdoc-version is set.
++ (generate-index-mode): if gtkdoc-bookname is set, add it to the
++ hrefs in the index file, like the XSLT sheets do.
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: add gtkdoc.version parameter, and use it to add a
++ <meta> tag with the gtk-doc version number.
++
++=== release 0.10 ===
++
++2002-11-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * Released 0.10.
++
++2002-11-16 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * configure.in: bumped version to 0.10.
++
++ * Makefile.am (EXTRA_DIST): added MAINTAINERS.
++
++ * README: updated requirements info, mainly to add XML stuff.
++
++ * NEWS: added news for 0.10
++
++ * MAINTAINERS:
++ * AUTHORS: updated my email address.
++
++2002-11-16 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: output HTML in ISO-8859-1 (latin1), as using UTF-8
++ can trigger misinterpretation of web pages when the web server
++ asserts that the document is encoded in latin1 in the mime type.
++
++2002-11-15 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: small changes to make the output closer to valid
++ HTML.
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in (MakeXRef): when substituting in cross
++ references, use lower case element and attribute names, and quote
++ the attribute value.
++
++2002-11-12 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: put content of parameter descriptions in
++ <simpara> elements instead of <para>'s. This makes the generated
++ HTML more compact, as it will omit the <p> tag inside the list
++ item.
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: adjust stylesheet a little.
++
++2002-11-10 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: change style for documentation.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in (declaration): copy PNG files to the html
++ directory.
++
++2002-11-10 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetArgs): Expand abbreviations in source doc
++ comments.
++
++2002-11-09 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputSignalTemplates): Don't replace template
++ param names with meaningless argn names generated by gtkdoc-scangobj.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetSignals): Use argument names from source doc
++ comments, if available.
++ (GetArgs): Use source doc comments instead of blurb, if available.
++ (ScanSourceFile): Also accept object::signal and object:property
++ symbols.
++ (MergeSourceDocumentation): For signals only, prefer source doc
++ param names over template param names.
++
++Fri Nov 8 15:10:57 2002 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetPrerequisites): Add missing <para>
++ here too.
++
++Mon Nov 4 17:17:40 2002 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (MergeSourceDocumentation): Warn
++ when overriding docs in template file by inline comments.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetInterfaces): Add missing <para> in
++ "Implemented interfaces" output.
++
++2002-10-29 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: in get_type_name() set is_pointer to TRUE for
++ subtypes of G_TYPE_BOXED and G_TYPE_POINTER. This means we get things
++ like "GtkTreeIter *iter" rather than "GtkTreeIter iter" which was
++ incorrect. Also return 'GParamSpec*' for G_TYPE_PARAM.
++ in lookup_signal_arg_names() changed GtkNotebook::switch-page
++ page argument to guint. And fixed a few other entries.
++ Also fixed argument numbering, so we don't get 2 "widget" arguments.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in: add ';' after unlink command to avoid warning.
++
++2002-10-20 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am (SCANOBJ_FILES): Add $(DOC_MODULE).prerequisites.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Read $MODULE.prerequisites and put list of
++ prerequisites below the object hierarchy for interfaces.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Write information about interface
++ prerequisites to $MODULE.prerequisites.
++
++2002-10-15 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Sort paramspec arrays for
++ greater stability and less random tmpl file diffs.
++
++2002-10-14 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am (SCANOBJ_FILES): Add $(DOC_MODULE).interfaces.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Read $MODULE.interfaces and put lists of
++ implemented interfaces/known implementations below the object
++ hierarchy for classes/interfaces.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Write interface information to
++ $MODULE.interfaces.
++
++2002-10-12 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Make interface appear in the object hierarchy.
++
++2002-10-11 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: use 'UTF-8', not UTF-8 for default.encoding, to
++ make the encoding actually appear in the resulting HTML.
++
++2002-10-09 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: set $doctype_header to "" for the SGML case, as
++ we don't add a doctype to the beginning of SGML fragments.
++
++Tue Sep 17 01:07:51 2002 Jonathan Blandford <jrb@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: output the chunks in UTF-8 so other tools can use
++ them.
++
++2002-09-03 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: turn on rendering of variablelists as tables, and
++ set CSS rules to style .variablelist instead of .informaltable.
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in (variablelist): override the variablelist handler
++ instead of the tgroups.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputStruct): use a <variablelist> for listing
++ the field descriptions.
++ (OutputEnum): same here.
++ (OutputParamDescriptions): and here.
++
++2002-08-12 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: include devhelp.xsl, and call generate.devhelp when
++ processing the docbook/xml input.
++
++ * devhelp.xsl: new file, implements .devhelp file output.
++
++2002-08-18 Havoc Pennington <hp@pobox.com>
++
++ * autogen.sh: hardcode aclocal-1.4/automake-1.4 so that users with
++ both automake 1.6 and 1.4 installed get the right automake. Means
++ compilation from CVS will now require the latest automake 1.4
++ release, or manually creating symlinks called "automake-1.4" and
++ "aclocal-1.4"
++
++2002-08-08 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Make sure blurbs end with a '.'
++
++2002-08-08 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: add a gtkdoc.bookname param, and include it in the
++ index.sgml output (if not empty).
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in: only perform the sed operation if we are using
++ Jade, and pass the module name as a parameter when using xsltproc.
++
++2002-08-04 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Don't try to list signals on types which
++ don't support signals, e.g. boxed types.
++
++2002-06-14 jacob berkman <jacob@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: do the version check before help, so --version
++ doesn't output --help (should fix recent build bustage)
++
++2002-06-12 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Make header-grabbing work without an explicit
++ --main-sgml-file argument.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Emit the object hierarchy as a <screen> rather
++ than a <literallayout>, since the Docbook XSL stylesheets don't
++ handle <link>s inside <literallayout>.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Decide whether to generate standalone documents
++ for XIncluding or entities based on the presence of the XInclude
++ namespace declaration on the document element.
++
++2002-06-09 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: try to grab the header off the top of the main
++ sgml file.
++
++2002-05-31 James Henstridge <james@daa.com.au>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputSGML): put XIncludes in the $book_bottom
++ variable.
++ (OutputBook): add the XInclude namespace declaration to the book
++ element.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in (declaration): if the document looks like XML,
++ process it with xsltproc.
++
++ * configure.in: check for xsltproc.
++
++ * gtk-doc.xsl: start of XSLT template for converting docbook/xml
++ to HTML.
++
++2002-06-03 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ConvertSGMLChars): Don't use Posix character
++ classes. Perl < 5.6 doesn't have them; and the API doc autobuilder
++ on widget.gnome.org has an old Perl.
++
++2002-05-29 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ Fixes for #77193:
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputSGML): Call GetSignals, GetArgs and
++ GetHierarchy for each symbol here and accumulate.
++ (OutputSGMLFile): Get signal, argument and hierarchy information
++ from the caller.
++ (GetSignals, GetArgs, GetHierarchy): Don't wrap the return value
++ in a refsect1, so that the results of multiple calls can be accumulated.
++
++2002-05-28 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ConvertSGMLChars): Make this work correctly
++ for empty elements and XML comments in doc comments.
++
++2002-05-27 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ReadTemplateFile, OutputSGMLFile):
++ Use only the basename of the template file in the key for the
++ symbol table, in order to decouple the file extensions of the
++ template files and the generated entities (we want to generate
++ .xml entities from .sgml template files when emitting XML).
++
++2002-05-25 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ConvertSGMLChars): New function which tries to
++ be a bit more clever when escaping SGML syntax characters.
++ (ScanSourceFile): Use ConvertSGMLChars instead of CreateValidSGML.
++ This reduces the work needed to make gtk-doc emit XML (where <, &
++ and friends must always be escaped).
++
++2002-05-18 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in: Detect whether we're processing SGML or XML.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: New option --output-format to switch between
++ SGML and XML output.
++
++ * Makefile.am (EXTRA_DIST): Add xml.dcl
++
++ * xml.dcl: The XML declaration.
++
++2002-05-06 jacob berkman <jacob@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: add an include for the GTK_CHECK_VERSION
++ macro
++
++2002-05-05 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Output style properties. (#80659)
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetArgs): Return separate sections for
++ properties, child properties and style properties. (#80659)
++
++2002-05-03 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Fix for segfault in scangobj-generated C
++ program on Solaris. (#80606, Jacob Berkman)
++
++2002-05-01 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * tools/docpercentages.pl: Add the script which Owen uses for the
++ d.g.o online API docs. Its easier to keep in sync here.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputMissingDocumentation): Fix
++ $MODULE-undocumented.txt for d.g.o online API docs.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetArgs): Use blurbs for property documentation.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Output child properties. Output nicks and
++ blurbs for properties.
++
++2002-04-28 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ScanSourceFile): Don't scan for return value
++ descriptions unnecessarily. (#65997)
++
++2002-03-11 Matthias Clasen <maclas@gmx.de>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in, gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Create docs for signals on interfaces.
++
++2002-02-01 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * configure.in: check for openjade or jade. Patch from Stefan Kost
++ <kost@imn.htwk-leipzig.de>.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in: use @JADE@ so the correct version of jade is used.
++
++ * autogen.sh: commented out autoheader since we don't have a config.h.
++
++=== release 0.9 ===
++
++2002-01-18 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * Released 0.9.
++
++2002-02-01 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am: added SCANOBJ_OPTIONS in case the module needs
++ to pass options to gtkdoc-scanobj or gtkdoc-scangobj.
++
++2002-01-24 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * tools/gtk-doc.el: added Zucchi's emacs lisp for automatically adding
++ skeleton comment blocks above functions. Very handy!
++
++2002-01-23 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * configure.in: bumped the version to 0.9, so GTK+ can depend on this
++ if it wants to.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: we now default to calling g_type_init() to
++ initialize the type system, rather than gtk_init(). This means you
++ don't need an X connection to build the docs any more. Hurrah!
++ Also added a '--type-init-func' argument so you can change the
++ function to be called. GTK+ uses --type-init-func="gtk_type_init(0)".
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): removed 'Found object' debug message.
++
++=== release 0.8 ===
++
++2002-01-18 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * Released 0.8.
++
++2002-01-18 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * Makefile.am (EXTRA_DIST): added gtk-doc.dcl to EXTRA_DIST.
++
++2002-01-18 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Reverted jacob's patch for this release, since
++ it breaks GTK+ and possibly other packages. I'll re-apply it after
++ the release, so we can fix everything in CVS.
++
++2002-01-18 jacob berkman <jacob@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: default to calling g_type_init(), remove
++ --nogtkinit argument and replace with a more flexible
++ --type-init-func
++
++2002-01-18 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ScanSourceFile): patch from Matthias Clasen
++ <matthiasc@poet.de> to only strip first space after '*' in source
++ code comment blocks, so example code can be indented as desired.
++ Bug #68216.
++
++Wed Nov 21 16:50:35 2001 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb,tmpl.in: Add some extra quoting to
++ error messages to make it clearer what is going on
++ with trailing commas on enumeration declarations.
++
++Wed Nov 21 16:00:45 2001 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * Applied patch from Matthias Clasen to use a modified
++ .dcl file with the 44 character name length limit removed.
++ (#61342)
++
++2001-10-17 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: applied patch from Matthias Clasen
++ <matthiasc@poet.de> to take a --sgml-mode argument which means
++ all comment blocks in the source code are assumed to be DocBook
++ (i.e. we don't convert '<', '>' and '&' to '<' etc.
++
++2001-10-09 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputMissingDocumentation): changed %.2f to %.0f
++ so hopefully the automated reports on developer.gnome.org will work
++ OK again.
++
++2001-10-02 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration):
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputFunction): applied patch from
++ matthiasc@poet.de (Matthias Clasen) to handle G_CONST_RETURN in a
++ parameter list. Bug #61341.
++
++2001-10-02 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputMissingDocumentation): applied patch from
++ matthiasc@poet.de (Matthias Clasen) to output percentages better.
++ Bug #61467.
++ Also set percent to 100 if total is 0, avoiding divide-by-zero.
++
++2001-10-02 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am (DOC_OVERRIDES): define as an empty string,
++ even when not used.
++
++2001-09-13 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputMissingDocumentation): initialize buffer to "".
++ Fix for SGI from David Kaelbling <drk@sgi.com>.
++
++Sat Sep 8 14:08:51 2001 Jonathan Blandford <jrb@webwynk.net>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): recognize GET_IFACE macros
++
++2001-09-08 Havoc Pennington <hp@pobox.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (GetArgs): Title the section on object properties
++ "Properties" instead of "Args"
++
++2001-08-14 Laszlo Peter <laca@ireland.sun.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: change \n's to \\n's in perl scripts
++ generating C code.
++
++2001-08-12 Jens Finke <jens@gnome.org>
++
++ * Updated gtk-doc.spec.in file to match gpp standard.
++
++=== release 0.7 ===
++
++2001-08-04 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * Released 0.7
++
++2001-08-04 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputFunction):
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration): patch from Lowell Johnson
++ <ldjohn@usgs.gov> to accept things like "long long", "short int",
++ "char test[][CLEN]" as function parameters.
++
++2001-07-20 Anders Carlsson <andersca@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Remove argument to g_type_init ();
++
++2001-07-09 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ParseStructDeclaration): accept G_CONST_RETURN
++ modifier for function return values. gtkdoc-mktmpl.in already had this.
++
++Thu Jun 21 11:57:16 2001 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Conform to changes in GObject API
++ for property retrieval.
++
++2001-05-25 Peter Williams <peterw@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ScanSourceFile): Skip single-line comments --
++ prevents barfing on ORBit-generated files.
++
++2001-05-20 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * examples/Makefile.am (sgml-build.stamp): replaced use of wildcard
++ (which isn't portable) with original *.sgml. I think this just means
++ that the first time you try to build the docs it will fail, but if
++ you run make again it will work.
++
++ * doc/setting-up.txt: explained that make may fail the first time.
++
++2001-05-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * README:
++ * doc/README:
++ * doc/setting-up.txt:
++ * doc/sections-file.txt:
++ * doc/authors.txt: updated docs to cover simpler setup procedure.
++
++ * doc/gtk_button.txt:
++ * doc/manpage:
++ * doc/manpage.man:
++ * doc/notes.txt: removed out-of date stuff.
++
++ * Makefile.am (dist-hook): updated so it doesn't try to remove old
++ examples subdirectory stuff.
++
++2001-05-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * examples/gnome/*:
++ * examples/gnomeui/*: removed out-of-date example files.
++
++ * examples/configure.in:
++ * examples/Makefile.am: new example setup mostly copied from GTK+.
++
++ * examples/README: describe the example configure.in/Makefile.am.
++
++2001-05-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: added --help option and changed output slightly to
++ make more compatible with XML. Patch from Toshio Kuratomi
++ <badger@prtr-13.ucsc.edu>
++
++2001-05-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputDeclaration):
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputFunction): changed a '?' to a '*' so we accept
++ multi-dimensional array function parameters. Patch from Paolo Casarini
++ <casarini@CS.UniBO.IT>
++
++2001-05-12 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in: used "*pos = 0" to avoid problems with backslashes
++ in '\0'.
++
++ * configure.in: removed dsssl dirs stuff, since we use public entities
++ now.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputBook): if there is no main SGML file we create
++ it here. Also added a --main-sgml-file option so we know where to put
++ it.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in: if there is no MODULE-sections.txt file, we copy
++ the MODULE-decl-list.txt file to it. The user can tweak it later.
++
++2001-05-11 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtk-doc.spec.in: applied patch from Toshio Kuratomi
++ <badger@prtr-13.ucsc.edu>.
++
++2001-05-07 Joakim Ziegler <joakim@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Added option --outputallsymbols to create a symbol list
++ in the module doc dir.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Added functionality to output a list of undocumented
++ symbols in a module, most of is is in OutputMissingDocumentation.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in: Small scanning fixes to facilitate the doc coverage
++ output mentioned above.
++
++2001-04-25 Federico Mena Quintero <federico@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in: Added missing output-dir in the call to
++ GetOptions().
++
++2001-04-24 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in: copied --outputdir option from gtkdoc-scangobj.in.
++
++Fri Apr 13 15:25:44 2001 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Restore call to OutputBook that was accidentally
++ deleted.
++
++Thu Apr 12 17:57:12 2001 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Add a --outputdir option (sort of hacky.
++ Need this because $CC, $LD can include relative paths if they
++ are based on $LIBTOOL)
++
++2001-03-26 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ReadSourceDocumentation): scan .h files as well,
++ so macros can be documented there if desired. Patch from
++ Yoann Vandoorselaere <yoann@mandrakesoft.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in (gtkdocdir): use 'test -f' rather than 'test -e'
++ which is GNU-specific.
++
++Thu Mar 8 17:26:29 2001 Tim Janik <timj@gtk.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: fix signal param type handling.
++
++Tue Mar 6 23:21:46 2001 Jonathan Blandford <jrb@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in: Add gobject support. Now works on files that
++ don't link against GTK.
++
++Sat Mar 3 17:43:42 2001 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-{scan,mktmpl,mkdb}.in: Add support for G_CONST_RETURN.
++ (Right now, it will appear as G_CONST_RETURN in the output -
++ I'm not sure that's right - perhaps it should be converted
++ to const.)
++
++2001-02-20 Michael Meeks <michael@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in: s/TRUE/1/
++
++2001-02-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (UpdateTemplates): fixed bug handling the $changed
++ flag.
++
++2001-02-17 Damon Chaplin <damon@ximian.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeaders):
++ (ScanHeader): patch from Johannes Stezenbach <js@convergence.de>
++ so we don't use '\b' in the regexp to match files/dirs to ignore.
++ '\b' can match '_' so we matched things we shouldn't have.
++
++Mon Feb 12 12:50:57 2001 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * configure.in: Up version.
++
++Sun Feb 11 18:35:07 2001 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in: Add a timestamp file for the
++ templates like sgml.stamp
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (OutputUnusedTemplates): Write the
++ symbols out in sorted order instead of hash table
++ order to reduce conflicts.
++
++Mon Feb 5 16:48:51 2001 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * configure.in gtk-doc.dsl.in: Remove checks for DSSSL - use a
++ public entity instead.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Fix to work with libtool better.
++
++2001-01-30 Havoc Pennington <hp@pobox.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in, gtkdoc-mkdb.in, gtkdoc-mktmpl.in,
++ gtkdoc-scan.in, gtkdoc-scangobj.in, gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ Added -*- cperl -*- magic, and --deprecated-guards
++ option.
++
++2001-01-23 Damon Chaplin <damon@helixcode.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in: changed so that they only update files when
++ necessary (they write new versions of the files out, then use 'cmp'
++ to compare with the existing versions to see if they have changed.)
++ This should make it easier to do proper dependency rules in Makefiles,
++ and it may cut down on CVS traffic.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in: update a timestamp file (html.stamp) after running.
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: update a timestamp file (sgml.stamp) if any of the
++ DocBook SGML files have been changed. So hopefully you can now use
++ rules like this to avoid unnecessary regeneration of the HTML:
++
++ all-local:
++ $(MAKE) scan
++ $(MAKE) templates
++ $(MAKE) sgml
++ $(MAKE) html.stamp
++
++ html.stamp: sgml.stamp $(EXTRA_SGML_FILES)
++ $(MAKE) html
++
++ (I've tried this with the old GTK+ reference API docs and it seems to
++ work well.)
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkman.in:
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in:
++ Added '--version' command-line arg to all shell & perl scripts, so
++ you can check for version 0.5 if you want to use the above rules.
++ (If 0.4 is used make will probably complain about not knowing how to
++ to build sgml.stamp.)
++
++ * gtkdoc-common.pl.in: new file to contain shared routines.
++ For now it just contains the UpdateFileIfChanged routine for the above.
++ We can move the duplicated routines here in future, though the use of
++ global variables makes this a bit awkward.
++
++ * configure.in (PACKAGE_DATA_DIR): calculates the data dir and
++ substitutes it so that the scripts know where gtkdoc-common.pl
++ is installed. Also added gtkdoc-common.pl to AC_OUTPUT.
++
++ * Makefile.am: added gtkdoc-common.pl to gtkdocdata_DATA.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in: deleted the old index.sgml file, since it causes
++ problems if it is owned by root (e.g. after you run 'make install' as
++ root. jade prompts you about overwriting it, which is annoying.
++
++2001-01-10 Havoc Pennington <hp@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in: Only move old file to backup if the old file
++ exists, and have better error messages when doing the backups
++
++Mon Jan 8 14:57:29 2001 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in: Canonicalize signal and argument
++ names to -, not _.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Fix up for GParamSpec.
++
++2001-01-04 Fr�d�ric Gobry <frederic.gobry@smartdata.ch>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in: fixed matching of < private_header > directive
++
++2000-12-19 Damon Chaplin <damon@helixcode.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: added default cases to get_type_name().
++
++2000-12-10 Arturo Tena <arturo@directmail.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in (get_type_name):
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in (get_type_name): fixed syntax error: forgotten
++ to close a switch statement.
++
++2000-12-10 Damon Chaplin <damon@helixcode.com>
++
++ * gtk-doc.spec.in: added spec.in file from John Gotts
++ <jgotts@linuxsavvy.com>.
++
++ * configure.in (AC_OUTPUT): added spec file.
++
++ * Makefile.am: uncommented spec file stuff, now that we have one.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in (get_type_name):
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in (get_type_name): updated to use the type numbers
++ rather than the type names, which were changed in GTK+ 1.2. This
++ should fix a problem where GTK_TYPE_STRING arguments were output as
++ 'GtkString *arg' instead of 'gchar *arg'.
++
++ I'm still not sure what to output for the structured types such as
++ GTK_TYPE_SIGNAL/ARGS/FOREIGN/CALLBACK/C_CALLBACK. Should these be
++ expanded to several arguments to the signal handler?
++
++2000-11-25 Dan Mueth <d-mueth@uchicago.edu>
++
++ * help/manual/C/: created this path
++ * gtk-doc-manual.sgml: Put part of the outline into SGML.
++ Chris plans to put rest of outline in here and start
++ writing.
++ * fdl-appendix.sgml: The FDL in SGML. We will probably post
++ these on the web as a single document (book) so we will
++ need the FDL to be included as an appendix.
++
++Fri Nov 3 07:21:34 2000 Tim Janik <timj@gtk.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ (ParseStructDeclaration):
++ (OutputStruct):
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ (ParseStructDeclaration):
++ support /*<protected>*/ equivalently to /*<private>*/
++
++Fri Nov 3 07:15:58 2000 Tim Janik <timj@gtk.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ (ReadTemplateFile): only eat up the first space (if at all
++ present) after "@param:" to preserve indentation for multiline
++ parameter descriptions.
++
++2000-10-30 Raja R Harinath <harinath@cs.umn.edu>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (ParseStructDeclaration):
++ Stop scanning at '}' only when it starts a line.
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (ParseStructDeclaration): Likewise.
++
++Mon Oct 30 02:59:54 2000 Tim Janik <timj@gtk.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: use g_signal_list_ids().
++
++Sun Oct 29 02:54:51 2000 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Sort signal types arrays for
++ greater stability and less random tmpl file diffs.
++
++Sun Oct 29 01:02:35 2000 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Work properly with GSignal
++
++=== release 0.4 ===
++
++2000-10-21 Damon Chaplin <damon@helixcode.com>
++
++ * Released 0.4
++
++2000-10-14 Damon Chaplin <damon@helixcode.com>
++
++ * AUTHORS:
++ * MAINTAINERS: changed my email address.
++
++ * Makefile.am (dist-hook): remove the CVS dirs from the dist.
++
++ * doc/setting-up.txt: typo.
++
++Fri Oct 6 17:51:50 2000 <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Allow multiple
++ --source-dir options.
++
++Thu Sep 7 11:41:12 2000 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Ignore all . files when scanning directories.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in: Add support for GLIB_VAR, GDKVAR,
++ etc when looking for variable declarations.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in: Recognize GET_CLASS macros.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Support .lo intermediate files
++ with libtool.
++
++Wed Sep 6 17:57:33 2000 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scangobj.in: Add gtkdoc-scangobj scanner for
++ GObject type system.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in: Allow setting $LD to allow separating
++ compilation and linking and thus to allow using libtool.
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in (ScanIndices): Allow HTMLDIR
++ not to be present yet.
++
++Tue Sep 5 23:37:53 2000 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in: Add a --extra-dir option to
++ allow scanning of additional uninstalled HTML
++ directories.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeaders): Honor subdirectories
++ appearing in --ignore-headers.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Append -CAPS to all all-caps identifiers
++ to prevent an infinite expansion of special cases.
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref.in: Add a --module-dir option to
++ allow fixing references in an uninstalled tree.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in gtkdoc-mkhtml.in: Simple handling
++ for macros with embedded commas in enumeration
++ declarations.
++
++Mon Aug 28 18:18:53 2000 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * configure.in (DSSSL_DIR): Remove check for AM_PATH_GTK
++ since the dependency is only run-time not install-time,
++ and to avoid dependency loops.
++
++2000-06-21 Damon Chaplin <damon@helixcode.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: fixed <INCLUDES> bug, I think.
++
++Wed Feb 9 11:29:25 2000 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in: Hack to avoid misidentifying structures
++ as GtkObjects within Pango.
++
++1999-12-15 Raja R Harinath <harinath@cs.umn.edu>
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in ($generate-chapter-toc$): Add missing close
++ parenthesis.
++
++1999-11-23 Raja R Harinath <harinath@cs.umn.edu>
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in: Use the (define (foo) ...) syntax rather than
++ the uglier (define foo (lambda () ...)) syntax.
++ ($generate-chapter-toc$): Simplify.
++ ($shade-verbatim-attr$): Simplify. Use ($table-width$) instead of
++ "100%" for width (See docs. of NWalsh Docbook DSSSL Stylesheets
++ for an explanation).
++
++1999-09-20 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in: If a Chapter has role="no-toc" we don't generate a
++ table of contents. This is useful if a better contents page has been
++ added manually, e.g. for the GTK+ Widgets & Objects page. (But it is
++ a bit of a hack.)
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in: added --nogtkinit flag which will make it call
++ gtk_type_init() rather than gtk_init(). This is useful when it is
++ run automatically to update the docs by a cron job or similar and a
++ connection to an X server is not desirable. However, if any widgets
++ need a connection to X in their class init function then this can't
++ be used (e.g. GtkFontSelection at present).
++
++Mon Sep 20 09:09:12 1999 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in gtkdoc-mktmpl.in: (ParseStructDeclaration):
++ Fixed up the code to do /*< private >*/ ... stripping.
++
++1999-09-10 Martin Baulig <martin@home-of-linux.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc.dsl.in ($generate-chapter-toc$): Return #t, not #f.
++
++1999-09-09 Martin Baulig <martin@home-of-linux.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): Don't force typedefs and other
++ things to start in column 0; allow some spaces in front of them.
++ Output `typedef struct { ... } name' structs as typedef, not as
++ structure.
++
++1999-09-08 Martin Baulig <martin@home-of-linux.org>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (CreateValidSGMLID): `s/::/-/g;' for CORBA objects.
++
++1999-08-22 Erik Walthinsen <omega@cse.ogi.edu>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in: modified so it will find any Class, not just Gtk
++ and Gnome classes. Introduces the possibility of extraneous Class
++ definitions (verified), which should be pruned somehow (haven't
++ analyzed the false positive yet).
++
++1999-08-22 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: a few fixes to ParseStructDeclaration. It still
++ has problems with nested structs/unions like those which occur in
++ gtkclist.h and gtktypeutils.h.
++
++ * configure.in: removed gtk-doc.spec from AC_OUTPUT, as whoever wrote
++ this forgot to add gtk-doc.spec.in to CVS.
++ * Makefile.am: commented out gtk-doc.spec.
++
++Wed Aug 18 03:55:30 1999 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in: Propagate fix from gtkdoc-mkdb.in.
++ :-(; need to libraryize, need to libraryize.
++
++Wed Aug 18 03:55:30 1999 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Fix bug that was preventing
++ structure field definitions from being output.
++
++Wed Aug 18 23:25:23 1999 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * configure.in: Add /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheet to list
++ of stylesheet directories. (Found in recent Debian
++ packages)
++
++1999-08-15 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Output $decl_out as the struct rather than the
++ original $declaration.
++
++1999-08-12 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in: Added special case in ParseEnumDeclaration to
++ handle GIOCondition which uses strange macros like this:
++ typedef enum
++ {
++ G_IO_IN GLIB_SYSDEF_POLLIN,
++ ...
++ The GLIB_SYSDEF_POLLIN macro expands to something like '=1'
++
++1999-08-05 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in: output <br clear=all> after sections and at end of
++ page so that right-aligned images aren't messed up quite as much.
++
++Wed Aug 4 04:04:55 1999 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mk{db,tmpl}.in (ParseStructDeclaration): Allow
++ for bit fields.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in (ReadObjectHierarchy): Remove
++ call to MakeXref that slipped in accidentally.
++
++Wed Aug 4 03:30:19 1999 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * doc/style-guide.txt: Removed references to creating
++ tables explicitly in favor of demonstrating new
++ syntax. Added a short section on /<* public >*/
++ and /*< private *>/.
++
++Wed Aug 4 03:15:19 1999 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in gtkdoc-mkhtml.in: Handle Struct and
++ Enumerations in approximately the same way as we
++ handle parameters. That is, instead of (as before)
++ coding in the tables by hand, one uses lines like:
++
++ @width: the width of the rectangle in pixels.
++
++ To support migration from the older hand-coded
++ tables, if none of the members of a structure or
++ enumeration have a description in a @... line, then
++ we don't generate the table at all.
++
++ Also, gtkdoc-mktmpl now loads up the object hierarchy,
++ because we need to be able to check if structures
++ are widget structures.
++
++ In general, the coding here is pretty clean, though
++ the style is a little different. (I'm iterating
++ through strings with m/.../msg; instead of
++ s/^...//; for one thing.) However, there are a some
++ of FIXME's where I've whimped out on try to handle
++ real C syntax, and the need to split out and librarize
++ a bunch of duplicated code is greater than ever.
++
++1999-06-06 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * configure.in: updated version to 0.3.
++
++ * doc/style-guide.txt: A couple of minor changes.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: Get rid of a couple of messages.
++ Output an empty <para> if an Arg isn't documented, to keep Jade happy.
++
++1999-05-22 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in: Renamed %shade-verbatim-attr-2% to
++ $shade-verbatim-attr$ and removed our redefinition of
++ $verbatim-display$ since the stylesheets version now calls
++ $shade-verbatim-attr$ as a function which is just what we wanted.
++
++ * README: Updated info on stylesheet versions supported - 1.40 is
++ known to be OK (with this version of gtk-doc), 1.19+ may work.
++
++1999-03-31 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * configure.in: update version to 0.2 for next release.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: added support for 'See Also' section.
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in: changed green background color slightly, and
++ set background color for enum tables.
++
++1999-03-21 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkhtml.in (gtkdocdir): use '-w no-idref' to suppress all the
++ warnings about references to non-existent IDs.
++
++1999-03-18 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in (OutputParamDescriptions): use role="params" for the
++ table so we can adjust the stylesheet code.
++ (OutputSGMLFile): Don't output 'one line description goes here'.
++ (ExpandAbbreviations): allow '-' in #symbol abbreviations, so we can
++ use #GtkWidget-struct.
++ (MakeXRef): get rid of special '-struct' suffix, for #GtkWidget-struct.
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in: use the "role" attribute on tables to set the
++ BGCOLOR.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in (ScanHeader): fix for scanning functions declared
++ over multiple lines - was catching things which weren't functions.
++
++1999-03-11 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * examples/gnomeui/Makefile.am (clean-local):
++ * examples/gnome/Makefile.am (clean-local): added *.args
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb.in: added support for Args and variables. Also a few
++ minor changes in the output, e.g. don't show macros > 2 lines long.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl.in:
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj.in: added support for Args.
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan.in: added support for extern'ed variables. Also
++ accept 'extern' before function declarations.
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in: made output prettier. Changed the navigation bars
++ and the colours used for the various backgrounds.
++
++ * doc/style-guide.txt: new file containinf a style guide for writing
++ the GTK+ documentation.
++
++ * doc/README: added description of style-guide.txt
++
++ * doc/setting-up.txt: fixed a typo
++
++ * README: added a bit about Args.
++
++1999-02-07 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * Makefile.am: Removed all the scripts from EXTRA_DIST, as they are
++ now generated from the .in files which automatically go in the dist.
++
++1999-02-02 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * doc/setting-up.txt (scan): removed text which incorrectly said that
++ changing section titles means you have to recreate the main SGML file.
++
++1999-02-03 Sebastian Wilhelmi <wilhelmi@ira.uka.de>
++
++ * configure.in: find perl in $PATH, generate the perl programs
++ from their *.in counterparts.
++
++ * gtkdoc-fixxref, gtkdoc-mkdb, gtkdoc-mktmpl, gtkdoc-scan,
++ gtkdoc-scanobj: Renamed to *.in and changed /usr/bin/perl to
++ @PERL@, as determined by configure.
++
++ * .cvsignore: Added diverse config* stuff and the new generated
++ perl programs.
++
++1999-01-28 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in: I forgot to make the new refentry code process the
++ child elements, so it was only outputting anchors for each page.
++
++ * doc/setting-up.txt (scan): added step to create MODULE.types file
++ for modules which contain widgets (or objects).
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb (OutputStruct): allow spaces inside the public/private
++ markers, e.g. "/* < public > */"
++
++1999-01-27 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * Makefile.am: added scripts to EXTRA_DIST and copied examples, doc
++ and db2man dirs in dist-hook.
++
++ * doc/sections-file.txt: added a couple of examples.
++
++ * doc/setting-up.txt: new document describing how to set up a module
++ to use gtk-doc.
++
++ * doc/README: added description of setting-up.txt
++
++ * README: added short 'Installation' section describing the
++ --with-dsssl-dir option.
++
++ * gtk-doc.dsl.in: also output links to each RefEntry page in the
++ index.sgml file, so libgnomeui docs can link to widgets. (The widget
++ hierarchy links were not working before.)
++
++1999-01-26 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scan (ScanHeader): parse function declarations that have the
++ return type and name on one line, and the '(' and args on the next.
++ NOTE: functions with the start of the declaration split over 3 lines
++ will not be parsed (e.g. return type on one line, function name on
++ next, and '(' and first argument on the third.) I hope there aren't
++ any.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb (OutputStruct): Use a different SGML ID for widget
++ structs, since the original ID is used for the entire RefEntry.
++ Also only show parts of widget structs which are marked with a
++ comment '/*<public>*/'. Use '/*<private>*/' for private fields.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl (UpdateTemplates): We include widget structs now,
++ so we do want warnings if they aren't used.
++
++ * examples/gnomeui/gnomeui-docs.sgml:
++ * examples/gnomeui/gnomeui-sections.txt:
++ * examples/gnomeui/gnomeui.types:
++ * examples/gnome/gnome-docs.sgml:
++ * examples/gnome/gnome-sections.txt: sync with latest source.
++
++ * examples/configure.in: Add --with-gnome-libs-dir option, so it can
++ be configured easily.
++ * examples/gnomeui/Makefile.am (DOC_SOURCE_DIR):
++ * examples/gnome/Makefile.am (DOC_SOURCE_DIR): use the new
++ GNOME_LIBS_DIR.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb (MergeSourceDocumentation): accept parameters names in
++ the source which use the wrong case, since there are quite a few of
++ these in Gnome.
++
++1999-01-25 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl: parse G_GNUC_EXTENSION before typedef'ed types.
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb: added support for specifying include files in the
++ MODULE-sections.txt file, to be output at the top of the synopsis.
++
++ * doc/sections-file.txt: added description of <INCLUDE> tag.
++
++ * examples/gnomeui/gnomeui-sections.txt:
++ * examples/gnome/gnome-sections.txt: added use of <INCLUDE>
++
++ * examples/configure.in: changed 'gtk-reference' to
++ 'gnome-libs-reference'.
++
++1999-01-18 Damon Chaplin <damon@karuna.freeserve.co.uk>
++
++ * README: updated my email address & noted that version 1.15+ of the
++ DocBook modular stylesheets is needed (for $table-width$).
++
++ * AUTHORS: updated my email address.
++
++1998-12-20 Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
++
++ * examples/gnomeui/gnomeui-docs.sgml,
++ examples/gnomeui/gnomeui-sections.txt,
++ examples/gnomeui/gnomeui.types:
++ s/gtkspell/gnome-spell/g
++
++1998-12-16 Damon Chaplin <DAChaplin@msn.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb (ExpandAbbreviations): Allow -ve contents, e.g. %-1.
++ (ScanSourceFile): Try to handle function descriptions that start
++ with 'Returns'. It was assuming that they were describing the return
++ value before.
++ Gets rid of 'Description:' which is sometimes included
++ at the start of the function description in the source comment blocks.
++ Makes sure newlines are preserved in the description, as consecutive
++ newlines are converted to paragraph separators later.
++
++1998-12-15 Damon Chaplin <DAChaplin@msn.com>
++ * Major changes to the scripts to merge in comments within source code
++ * gtk-doc-fixxref added
++ * examples directory added with an example for setting up modules to
++ use gtk-doc
++ * documentation updated
++
++
++1998-11-28 Damon Chaplin <DAChaplin@msn.com>
++
++ * gtkdoc-scanobj:
++ * gtkdoc-scan:
++ * gtkdoc-mktmpl:
++ * gtkdoc-mkdb: Major changes to make it easy to update the docs
++ when the API changes. It's pretty much all automatic now.
++ Also added licenses and function comments, and added 'use strict'.
++ The Gnome widgets should now be visible in the hierarchy.
++ Removed a few 'mkdir's which I don't think are necessary now.
++
++Tue Nov 24 16:32:23 1998 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * README doc/authors.txt: Updated to describe the
++ new generic scripts instead of the old ones hard-coded
++ for GLIB and GTK+.
++
++Tue Nov 24 01:06:17 1998 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * .cvsignore: Added .cvsignore
++
++Tue Nov 24 01:03:47 1998 Owen Taylor <otaylor@redhat.com>
++
++ * autogen.sh configure.in: Minor touchups so the newly
++ imported stuff autogen's correctly.
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++Testing
++=======
++
++jhbuild --no-interact build 2>&1 | tee build.log
++grep "gtkdoc-* line" build.log
++
++jhbuild buildone --no-net glib
++
++Since 1.23 we do have a snapshot feature to check the stability of the generated
++xml/html. Simply run "make snapshot" under tests. Then make changes and run
++"make check". The tests/sanity.sh will check for delta. If you want to inspect
++what delta a change created, you can git checkout a revision before the change,
++"make snapshot", go back to head and "make check", the sanity.sh test will now
++fail and show the delta.
++
++Releasing
++=========
++
++http://live.gnome.org/MaintainersCorner/Releasing
++
++'''shell
++export OLD_VER=1.31
++export NEW_VER=1.32
++export OLD_VER_TAG=$(echo ${OLD_VER} | tr '.' '_')
++export NEW_VER_TAG=$(echo ${NEW_VER} | tr '.' '_')
++export GNOME_USER=...
++```
++
++- bump release date in:
++ help/manual/C/index.docbook
++- bump version in (x.y.1 -> x.y+1)
++ configure.ac meson.build
++
++- update NEWS
++ # ./bugzilla.py general ${NEW_VER} gtk-doc >RELNOTES.txt
++ git log --summary --format=short GTK_DOC_${OLD_VER_TAG}.. >ChangeLog-${NEW_VER}
++ grep "Author:" ChangeLog-${NEW_VER} | sed 's/Author:\(.*\)\ <.*>/\1/' | sort | uniq >RELNOTES.txt
++ and then copy to NEWS
++
++```shell
++# commit
++git add configure.ac meson.build NEWS help/manual/C/index.docbook
++git commit -m"release: update news and date in manual"
++git push
++
++# dist
++TAR_OPTIONS="--owner=root --group=root" make distcheck
++
++# tag
++git tag -a GTK_DOC_${NEW_VER_TAG} -m"release: ${NEW_VER}"
++git push origin GTK_DOC_${NEW_VER_TAG}
++
++# release
++scp gtk-doc-${NEW_VER}.tar.xz ${GNOME_USER}@master.gnome.org:
++scp NEWS ${GNOME_USER}@master.gnome.org:gtk-doc-${NEW_VER}.news
++scp ChangeLog-${NEW_VER} ${GNOME_USER}@master.gnome.org:gtk-doc-${NEW_VER}.changes
++ssh ${GNOME_USER}@master.gnome.org "ftpadmin install gtk-doc-${NEW_VER}.tar.xz"
++```
++
++- bump versions in:
++ configure.ac meson.build help/manual/C/index.docbook NEWS
++
++``'shell
++# commit
++git add configure.ac meson.build NEWS help/manual/C/index.docbook
++git commit -m"release: bump versions and back to development"
++git push
++```
++
++- update web-pages (gtk-web/gtk-doc)
++ git add gtk-doc/news.php
++ git commit -m"gtk-doc: new release (${NEW_VER})"
++ git push
++
++- if we want a icon on the newsfeed, we should copy a icon like on
++ http://ftp.acc.umu.se/pub/GNOME/sources/rhythmbox/rhythmbox.png
++ e.g. /usr/share/icons/hicolor/48x48/apps/devhelp.png
++
++Optimizing & Meassuring
++=======================
++
++cd tests/gobject/docs/html
++time xsltproc --nonet --xinclude --stringparam gtkdoc.bookname "tester" --stringparam gtkdoc.version "1.12" ../../../../gtk-doc.xsl ../tester-docs.xml
++~ 1.1 sec.
++time saxon ../tester-docs.xml ../../../../gtk-doc.xsl gtkdoc.bookname="tester" gtkdoc.version="1.12"
++~ 53 sec.
++time xsltproc --nonet --xinclude --stringparam gtkdoc.bookname "tester" --stringparam gtkdoc.version "1.12" /usr/share/yelp-xsl/xslt/docbook/html/db2html.xsl ../tester-docs.xml
++~ 0.7 sec
++
++cd /your/project/docs/html
++time xsltproc --nonet --xinclude --stringparam gtkdoc.bookname "foo" --stringparam gtkdoc.version "1.12" /usr/share/gtk-doc/data/gtk-doc.xsl ../buzztrax-core-docs.xml
++real 0m6.633s user 0m6.464s sys 0m0.128s
++real 0m6.459s user 0m6.384s sys 0m0.068s
++
++time xsltproc --nonet --xinclude --stringparam gtkdoc.bookname "buzztrax-core" --stringparam gtkdoc.version "1.12" /usr/share/yelp-xsl/xslt/docbook/html/db2html.xsl ../buzztrax-core-docs.xml
++real 0m3.312s user 0m3.224s sys 0m0.076s
++real 0m3.549s user 0m3.464s sys 0m0.076s
++
++
++xsltproc --profile data.xsl data.xml 2>report.txt
++cat report.txt | gprof2dot.py -e 0.01 -n 0.01 | dot -Tpng -o report.png
++
++one can now use "GTKDOC_PROFILE=1 make" to run this during gtkdoc-mkhtml. It
++still needs a change in gprof2dot.py
++https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=612186#c3
++
++Performance tips:
++* uses keys when we have slow xpath selects
++ http://www.xml.com/pub/a/2002/02/06/key-lookups.html
++
++Troubles with parsing regexps
++=============================
++Test regexps online:
++http://www.solmetra.com/scripts/regex/index.php
++
++Test Coverage
++=============
++sudo apt-get install python3-coverage
++PYTHONPATH=$PWD python3-coverage run tests/scan.py
++python3-coverage html --include="gtkdoc/*.py"
++
++or
++
++cd test; make coverage
++
++Find Dead Code
++==============
++sudo pip3 install vulture
++PYTHONPATH=$PWD vulture gtkdoc/*.py gtkdoc-*.in
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++Stefan Sauer
++Email: ensonic@hora-obscura.de
++Userid: stefkost
++
++Damon Chaplin
++Email: damon@gnome.org
++Userid: damon
++
++Owen Taylor
++Email: otaylor@redhat.com
++Userid: otaylor
++
++Matthias Clasen
++Email: mclasen@redhat.com
++Userid: matthiasc
++
++
++Note that several people are contributing to gtk-doc, and some parts of it
++are technically maintained by other people. The people listed above are
++meant as contacts for administrative questions. Other questions are best
++directed to the mailing list gtk-doc-list@gnome.org.
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++ACLOCAL_AMFLAGS=-I m4 ${ACLOCAL_FLAGS}
++
++SUBDIRS = buildsystems/autotools buildsystems/cmake help tests
++
++bin_SCRIPTS = \
++ gtkdoc-check \
++ gtkdoc-depscan \
++ gtkdoc-fixxref \
++ gtkdoc-mkdb \
++ gtkdoc-mkhtml \
++ gtkdoc-mkhtml2 \
++ gtkdoc-mkman \
++ gtkdoc-mkpdf \
++ gtkdoc-rebase \
++ gtkdoc-scan \
++ gtkdoc-scangobj
++
++gtkdocdatadir = $(datadir)/gtk-doc/data
++gtkdocdata_DATA = \
++ gtk-doc.xsl \
++ version-greater-or-equal.xsl \
++ devhelp2.xsd \
++ devhelp2.xsl \
++ style/home.png \
++ style/left.png \
++ style/left-insensitive.png \
++ style/right.png \
++ style/right-insensitive.png \
++ style/up.png \
++ style/up-insensitive.png \
++ style/style.css
++
++pylibdatadir = $(datadir)/gtk-doc/python/gtkdoc
++pylibdata_DATA = \
++ gtkdoc/__init__.py \
++ gtkdoc/check.py \
++ gtkdoc/common.py \
++ gtkdoc/config.py \
++ gtkdoc/config_data.py \
++ gtkdoc/fixxref.py \
++ gtkdoc/highlight.py \
++ gtkdoc/md_to_db.py \
++ gtkdoc/mkdb.py \
++ gtkdoc/mkhtml.py \
++ gtkdoc/mkhtml2.py \
++ gtkdoc/mkman.py \
++ gtkdoc/mkpdf.py \
++ gtkdoc/rebase.py \
++ gtkdoc/scan.py \
++ gtkdoc/scangobj.py
++
++pkgconfigdir = $(datadir)/pkgconfig
++pkgconfig_DATA = gtk-doc.pc
++
++EXTRA_DIST = \
++ MAINTAINERS \
++ $(gtkdocdata_DATA) \
++ $(pylibdata_DATA) \
++ gtk-doc.pc.in \
++ gtk-doc.doap \
++ gtk-doc-fo.xsl \
++ doc/README \
++ doc/authors.txt \
++ doc/gnome.txt \
++ doc/sections-file.txt \
++ doc/setting-up.txt \
++ doc/style-guide.txt \
++ examples/README \
++ examples/Makefile.am \
++ tools/docpercentages.pl \
++ tools/gtk-doc.el \
++ COPYING-DOCS
++
++CLEANFILES = \
++ gtkdoc-checkc \
++ gtkdoc-depscanc \
++ gtkdoc-fixxrefc \
++ gtkdoc-mkdbc \
++ gtkdoc-mkhtmlc \
++ gtkdoc-mkhtml2c \
++ gtkdoc-mkmanc \
++ gtkdoc-mkpdfc \
++ gtkdoc-rebasec \
++ gtkdoc-scangobjc \
++ gtkdoc/__init__.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/check.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/common.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/config.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/fixxref.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/md_to_db.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/mkdb.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/mkhtml.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/mkhtml2.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/mkman.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/mkpdf.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/rebase.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/scan.pyc \
++ gtkdoc/scangobj.pyc
++
++DISTCLEANFILES = \
++ gtkdoc-check \
++ gtkdoc-depscan \
++ gtkdoc-fixxref \
++ gtkdocize \
++ gtkdoc-mkdb \
++ gtkdoc-mkhtml \
++ gtkdoc-mkhtml2 \
++ gtkdoc-mkman \
++ gtkdoc-mkpdf \
++ gtk-doc.pc \
++ gtkdoc-rebase \
++ gtkdoc-scangobj \
++ gtkdoc-scan \
++ gtkdoc/config.py
++
++MAINTAINERCLEANFILES = \
++ $(GITIGNORE_MAINTAINERCLEANFILES_TOPLEVEL) \
++ $(GITIGNORE_MAINTAINERCLEANFILES_MAKEFILE_IN) \
++ $(GITIGNORE_MAINTAINERCLEANFILES_M4_LIBTOOL) \
++ INSTALL \
++ RELNOTES.txt \
++ ChangeLog-?.?? \
++ gtk-doc-*.tar.xz \
++ build-aux
++
++clean-local:
++ -find . -name "__pycache__" -type d -exec rm -r "{}" \;
++
++## We get warnings for left-over files when doing 'make distcheck'
++distuninstallcheck_listfiles = find . -type f -print
++
++# Workaround for automake 1.61
++# https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/bug-automake/2018-04/msg00002.html
++distuninstallcheck_listfiles += | grep -v '__pycache__'
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
++
++dist-hook:
++ @if test -d "$(srcdir)/.git"; \
++ then \
++ echo Creating ChangeLog && \
++ ( cd "$(top_srcdir)" && \
++ echo '# Generated by Makefile. Do not edit.'; echo; \
++ $(top_srcdir)/missing --run git log --stat ) > ChangeLog.tmp \
++ && mv -f ChangeLog.tmp $(top_distdir)/ChangeLog \
++ || ( rm -f ChangeLog.tmp ; \
++ echo Failed to generate ChangeLog >&2 ); \
++ else \
++ echo A git clone is required to generate a ChangeLog >&2; \
++ fi
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++GTK-Doc 1.32.1 (Aug 15 2019)
++===============
++
++Dev version
++
++This version does not generate object_index.sgml if the library contains no
++gobjects.
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.32 (Aug 15 2019)
++===============
++
++Hotfix release.
++
++Contributors
++
++ Michael Catanzaro
++ Stefan Sauer
++
++GTK-Doc 1.31 (Aug 5 2019)
++===============
++
++Nonmaintainer release to fix "Wrong permissions for style CSS file" (#84)
++
++Contributors
++
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ Matthias Clasen
++ Michael Catanzaro
++ Nelson Benítez León
++ Stefan Sauer
++ Ting-Wei Lan
++ Xavier Claessens
++
++GTK-Doc 1.30 (May 08 2019)
++===============
++
++GTK-Doc is now using python-pygments to do the syntax highlighing. It is not
++depending on highligh or source-highligh anymore.
++
++This version ships with a new expermiental gtkdoc-mkhtml2 toolchain replacing
++gktdoc-mkhtml+gtkdoc-fixxref.
++
++Contributors
++
++ Aleksander Morgado
++ Anders Jonsson
++ Andre Klapper
++ Bastien Nocera
++ Christian Kirbach
++ Corentin Noël
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ Emmanuele Bassi
++ Ignacio Casal Quinteiro
++ Lubomir Rintel
++ Marco Trevisan (Treviño)
++ Marek Cernocky
++ Mario Blättermann
++ Mathieu Bridon
++ Michael Catanzaro
++ Nicola Fontana
++ Philip Withnall
++ Piotr Drąg
++ Rafael Fontenelle
++ Stefan Sauer
++ Ting-Wei Lan
++ Руслан Ижбулатов
++
++GTK-Doc 1.29 (Aug 28 2018)
++===============
++
++GTK-Doc now requires python-3.X. It does not requires python-six anymore.
++
++Note that this is a nonmaintainer release and that tests are known to be broken.
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 674163 : html-build.stamp rule broken for out-of-tree builds with absolute paths
++ o 795744 : Too much escaped string - " & lt;child > " in description of " GtkOverlay as GtkBuildable " section
++ o 796011 : Crash in ScanDirectory caused by overlooked use of renamed `dir` variable
++ o 796012 : Several places in rebase.py incorrectly use `match.groups(1)` instead of `match.group(1)`, one causes a crash
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Adam Williamson
++ Anders Jonsson
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ David D
++ LRN
++ Marek Cernocky
++ Martin Blanchard
++ Michael Biebl
++ Michael Catanzaro
++ Rafael Fontenelle
++ Sebastian Geiger
++ Stefan Sauer
++ Tim Sabsch
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.28 (Mar 24 2018)
++==============
++
++Bug fixes.
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 791928 : gtk-doc doesn't understand 'stability: Obsolete'
++ o 792148 : cmake: Installed GtkDocConfig.cmake has incorrect bindir path
++ o 792661 : use pygments to do syntax highlighting
++ o 793599 : Please run testsuite with V=0
++ o 794051 : rebase: fix on-line location extraction from devhelp files
++ o 794182 : private_header regex is broken
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Anders Jonsson
++ Arnaud Rebillout
++ Behdad Esfahbod
++ Bruce Mitchener
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ Marek Černocký
++ Rafael Fontenelle
++ Stefan Sauer
++ Tim-Philipp Müller
++ Tim Sabsch
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.27 (Dec 07 2017)
++==============
++
++Finetune the python port.
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 773879 : scangobj: Do not generate unused parameters
++ o 786174 : Several test failures on Arch Linux
++ o 787495 : gtkdoc-fixxref crashes when running vim for syntax highlighting
++ o 787768 : Aborts when glib2.0-dev is not installed
++ o 787862 : Always open files in text mode and always use utf-8
++ o 788473 : fixxref crashes if a .devhelp2.gz file is found
++ o 789531 : Don't depend on the system shell
++ o 790022 : mkdb: Add support for (not optional) annotation
++ o 791131 : gtk-doc and python3: fixxref failures
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Alban Browaeys
++ Anders Jonsson
++ Christian Kirbach
++ Christoph Reiter
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ gkrithi8
++ Jan Alexander Steffens (heftig)
++ Marek Cernocky
++ Michael Catanzaro
++ Pavel Grunt
++ Philip Withnall
++ Rafael Fontenelle
++ Simon McVittie
++ Stefan Sauer
++ Will Thompson
++
++GTK-Doc 1.26 (Aug 11 2017)
++============
++
++Remove tmpl support (gtkdoc-mktmpl). Port all tools from bash/perl to python.
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 773879 : scangobj: Do not generate unused parameters
++ o 780789 : Convert gtkdoc-scan from Perl to Python
++ o 752126 : Add support for inline program documentation
++ o 753052 : _() causes element a: validity error : ID idx already defined
++ o 758137 : GtkLabel and GtkShortcutsShortcut notes on escaping character entities don't render properly
++ o 764407 : Broken links to structs in function definitions
++ o 764543 : /usr/bin/gtkdoc-mkpdf always exits with an error
++ o 768675 : make check fails on master
++ o 769125 : gtkdoc-mkhtml/pdf fails on spaces in search path
++ o 769341 : gtkdoc-mkdb line 3966 triggers "Negative repeat count does nothing" warnings
++ o 771255 : "Symbol name not found at the start of comment block" warning with "attributes" annotation.
++ o 773151 : configure: Lower perl dependency to 5.16.0
++ o 774168 : gobject introspection annotations and gtk-doc parser do not agree
++ o 774812 : Error messages from xsltproc are hidden by gtkdoc-mkhtml
++ o 778144 : Allow disabling introspection for ancillary property mechanisms
++ o 779566 : Replace shell executables with Python
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Anders Jonsson
++ Bernhard M. Wiedemann
++ Carlos Garcia Campos
++ Christian Kirbach
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ Emmanuele Bassi
++ Ernestas Kulik
++ HorimotoYasuhiro
++ Jussi Pakkanen
++ Kalev Lember
++ Marek Černocký
++ Mario Blättermann
++ Marius Vlad
++ Marvin Schmidt
++ Nirbheek Chauhan
++ Philip Withnall
++ Rafael Fontenelle
++ Sam Thursfield
++ Sebastian Rasmussen
++ Simon Josefsson
++ Stefan Sauer
++ Thomas Wood
++ Ting-Wei Lan
++ Tom Tryfonidis
++ Víctor Manuel Jáquez Leal
++
++GTK-Doc 1.25 (Mar 21 2016)
++==============
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 763465 : – released version of gtk-doc no longer understands cross-reference data in gtk+
++ o 742404 : unify index.sgml and *.devhelp2 + change gtkdoc-fixxref to use *.devhelp2
++ o 743182 : Automatically support PACKAGE variables as XML entities
++ o 744061 : Skip standard g_iface, parent_instance and parent_class struct members
++ o 751479 : help: Document the Stability tag for documentation comments
++ o 751777 : gtk-doc -sections.txt file documentation is a bit confusing
++ o 751783 : Creating master xml document documentation is a bit lacking
++ o 751906 : help: Fix incorrect example syntax for embedded images
++ o 752795 : documentation is not rebuilt when only content of doc comments change
++ o 753145 : gtkdoc-mkhtml fails on spaces in file names
++ o 753348 : gtkdocize does not handle -flat flavours
++ o 756297 : Add CMake module
++ o 756368 : gtkdocize mistakenly parses options from comments in configure.ac
++ o 756519 : `make check' fails - Sequence (?R...) not recognized in regex
++ o 756684 : Support (not nullable) annotation
++ o 756998 : Support |[ < !-- language= " plain " -- > ]|
++ o 758996 : gtkdoc-mkdb: ensure macros appear in the correct section
++ o 759017 : autogenerated ids in return and parameter blocks
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Christian Kirbach
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ Dimitris Spingos
++ Florian Brosch
++ Igor Gnatenko
++ Matthias Clasen
++ Philip Withnall
++ Quentin Glidic
++ Rafael Fontenelle
++ Sam Thursfield
++ Stefan Sauer
++ Thomas Wood
++ Tom Tryfonidis
++ Xavier Claessens
++
++GTK-Doc 1.24 (May 29 2015)
++============
++
++ This is another quick bugfix release for a regression, see bug #749591
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 749591 : gtk-doc 1.23 no longer includes xml namespace in .devhelp2 files
++ o 749706 : .gitignore files should not be under version control
++ o 749816 : Support syntax highlighting of different languages (patch included)
++ o 749901 : Strip common indent when highlighting with vim
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ Dexter Chua
++ Michael Catanzaro
++ Peter De Wachter
++ Stefan Sauer
++
++GTK-Doc 1.23 (May 17 2015)
++============
++
++ This is a quick bugfix release for a regression, see bug #749142.
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 749142 : Can't build totem-pl-parser from master using gtk-doc 1.22
++ o 749210 : mkman: Use full URL to refer to the docbook manpages stylesheet
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Emanuele Aina
++ Stefan Sauer
++
++GTK-Doc 1.22 (May 07 2015)
++============
++
++ Important notice - starting with the next release these long deprecated
++ features will be removed - you'll now see a warning if you actually use these
++ features. Please write to gtk-doc-list@gnome.org and tell us your concerns:
++ o gtkdoc-mktmpl - please move all the comments into the sources.
++ o generating html via sgml tools (jade/openjade), using xsltproc and
++ docbook-xslt is pretty common and preferred since version 1.6
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 727778 : – gtk-doc doesn't understand annotations for GList-contained types
++ o 729911 : Using #TypeName inshort_description makes " - " in HTML index disappear
++ o 732689 : strange result on a generated html page
++ o 734689 : " Specific - > General " document title format
++ o 736073 : Regression: problems with enum constants
++ o 736725 : Documentation consists mostly of empty space
++ o 741305 : Scanner issue with enum containing value ='{'
++ o 741763 : Example Makefile.am improvements
++ o 741941 : Last function argument missing in docs (possibly due to macro in code)
++ o 743879 : special case G_DECLARE_*_TYPE
++ o 743967 : Make build results reproducible
++ o 744075 : Missing struct members if forward declared in another header
++ o 744368 : gtkdoc-depscan doesn't handle unicode in .devhelp2 files correctly
++ o 746118 : gtkdoc-scan: fix regex for get_type() functions
++ o 746120 : Expand annotation recognition on symbol lines
++ o 746121 : gtkdoc-mkdb: don't warn on 'deprecated entities'
++ o 747207 : Typos in documentation
++ o 747298 : Test still tries to check gtkdoc-scanobj
++ o 748456 : xsl: Enable ToC generation on empty < toc/ > elements
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Anders Jonsson
++ Andre Klapper
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ David King
++ Dominique Leuenberger
++ Efstathios Iosifidis
++ Emanuele Aina
++ Fran Diéguez
++ Maria Mavridou
++ Marvin Schmidt
++ Olav Vitters
++ Philip Withnall
++ Rafael Ferreira
++ Ryan Lortie
++ Stefan Sauer
++ Tom Tryfonidis
++ Xavier Claessens
++
++GTK-Doc 1.21 (Jul 17 2014)
++============
++
++ Important notice - starting with the next release these long deprecated
++ features will be removed, please write to gtk-doc-list@gnome.org and tell us
++ your concerns:
++ o gtkdoc-mktmpl - please move all the comments into the sources.
++ o generating html via sgml tools (jade/openjade), using xsltproc and
++ docbook-xslt is pretty common and preferred since version 1.6
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 170860 : gtk-doc should have definitions for stability
++ o 644111 : one cannot specify against which libs gtkdoc-fixxref should resolve links (problematic with multiple versions)
++ o 657444 : " enum foo { ... } " ; not recognized
++ o 671519 : Self-test relies on nonportable (GNU enhanced) 'date' command
++ o 678094 : the word " returns " in a function description can be parsed as the " Returns: " section
++ o 722621 : gtk-doc tarball was created with 32bit uid/gid, unusable with mingw/msys tar
++ o 724739 : Self-test fail: gtkdoc-mkdb misusing perl datatype
++ o 725505 : new syntax highlighting for code is weird
++ o 725663 : configure: non POSIX test usage
++ o 730658 : Deprecation warning for non-deprecated type GParamFlags
++ o 730777 : Add support for nullable and optional annotations
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Christophe Fergeau
++ Damon Chaplin
++ Daniel Macks
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ Emmanuele Bassi
++ maria thukididu
++ Naohiro Aota
++ Philip Withnall
++ Rafael Ferreira
++ Stefan Sauer
++ Thomas Wood
++ William Jon McCann
++
++GTK-Doc 1.20 (Feb 16 2014)
++============
++
++ Important notice - starting with the next release these long deprecated
++ features will be removed, please write to gtk-doc-list@gnome.org and tell us
++ your concerns:
++ o gtkdoc-scanobj (only used for gtkobject)
++ o return values need to be documented using "Returns:". We will remove the
++ heuristic that turns a paragraph starting with "Returns " into return docs.
++ o gtkdoc-mktmpl - please move all the comments into the sources.
++ o generating html via sgml tools (jade/openjade), using xsltproc and
++ docbook-xslt is pretty common and preferred since version 1.6
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 605537 : Returns: listed among parameters
++ o 624001 : Support attribute-based method to deprecate symbols
++ o 662424 : Class hierarchy about interfaces not generated by default
++ o 665926 : should not have to document object structures
++ o 666509 : Specifying --enable-gtk-doc should not be required to build source packages
++ o 669417 : Duplicate IDs generated for unions registered as boxed types
++ o 671519 : Self-test relies on nonportable (GNU enhanced) 'date' command
++ o 692367 : gtkdocize should take a srcdir argument
++ o 696570 : style updates
++ o 697940 : Race condition between setup-build.stamp and scan-build.stamp
++ o 701259 : /bin/bash: -chmod: command not found
++ o 701638 : Support automake parallel test harness (fix error with GTKDOC_CHECK)
++ o 706404 : Minor bug in gtkdoc-mkdb
++ o 706438 : Empty lines added at the beginning and at the end of a programlisting
++ o 707426 : master is broken in picking up flavour from configure.ac
++ o 707717 : Support " Deprecated: X.Y "
++ o 708268 : New *-insensitive.png files are not distributes
++ o 710478 : gtkdoc-mkdb: Don't complain about annotations with hyphen
++ o 711111 : gtkdoc-mkdb: sort entries in the glossary
++ o 711598 : gtkdoc-scan doesn't ignore decorators containing parentheses
++ o 719644 : docs: make yelp usage conditional in manual
++ o 719645 : configure: emit message when looking for yelp
++ o 720061 : make: create subdirectories of the content_files to the builddir
++ o 721228 : configure: search for xml catalog in XDG_DATA_DIRS
++ o 722479 : cp -u is not portable
++ o 723118 : Mark |[ blocks as CDATA
++ o 723288 : Fix MarkDown support
++ o 723417 : New MarkDown parser
++ o 723696 : Add support for blockquote
++ o 723812 : Add support for reference links
++ o 723913 : List in markdown: < p > inside the last element of a < ul > list
++ o 723991 : Improve the display of the synopsis
++ o 724002 : gtkdoc-scan: Fix use of uninitialised value in trace logging
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Alban Browaeys
++ Alexander Kanavin
++ Carlos Garcia Campos
++ Christian Kirbach
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ David King
++ David Nečas
++ Dieter Verfaillie
++ Dimitris Spingos
++ Hib Eris
++ Matthias Clasen
++ Philip Chimento
++ Philip Withnall
++ Rafael Ferreira
++ Rico Tzschichholz
++ Ryan Lortie
++ Sebastian Rasmussen
++ Sébastien Wilmet
++ Stefan Sauer
++ Stef Walter
++ William Jon McCann
++ Zbigniew Jędrzejewski-Szmek
++
++GTK-Doc 1.19 (Jun 05 2013)
++============
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 652740 : Warnings during expansion of content files
++ o 660436 : Warning for skip annotations on function parameters
++ o 661853 : allow EXTRA_DIST to be predefined
++ o 668228 : several of the tests use syntax not compatible with traditional Bourne shells
++ o 670724 : gtk-doc.make: double recursion when maintainer-clean
++ o 670767 : generated file gnome-doc-utils.m4 is in version control
++ o 670796 : (patch) Show commands when building documentation with make
++ o 671519 : Self-test relies on nonportable (GNU enhanced) 'date' command
++ o 671960 : make dist fails without html/*
++ o 672710 : Use new documentation infrastructure
++ o 676685 : Allow to order functions without using $MODULE-sections.txt
++ o 685365 : (PATCH) Fix contents of warning message, should be " -sections.txt " not " -section.txt "
++ o 686148 : [patch] suggested parameters for gtkdoc-scangobj
++ o 687685 : 'g_type_init' is deprecated
++ o 688204 : undocumented enum values missing in indexes
++ o 688423 : Add support for " transfer floating " introspection annotation
++ o 689209 : Automake complains about trailing space after backslash.
++ o 690438 : Small improvements
++ o 696930 : Incorrect allowed value for a property
++ o 700981 : make: copy the files with their relative path included
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Alban Browaeys
++ Aleksander Morgado
++ Alexandre Franke
++ Bruno Brouard
++ Colin Walters
++ Daiki Ueno
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ David King
++ David Nečas
++ Dieter Verfaillie
++ Dimitris Spingos
++ dmustieles
++ Henrik Stokseth
++ Hib Eris
++ Javier Jardón
++ Jens Georg
++ Jiro Matsuzawa
++ Krzesimir Nowak
++ Mario Blättermann
++ Martin Pitt
++ Matthias Clasen
++ Murray Cumming
++ Piotr Drąg
++ Ryan Lortie
++ Sébastien Wilmet
++ Simon Josefsson
++ Stefan Sauer
++ Stef Walter
++ Takao Fujiwara
++ Tim Mooney
++ Tom Tryfonidis
++ 黄世海
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.18 (Sep 14 2011)
++============
++
++ o gtk-doc supports a subset of markdown (headings and lists) - see
++ http://git.gnome.org/browse/gtk-doc/tree/tests/gobject/src/gobject.c
++ o gtk-doc does not generate old devhelp files any more. This cuts down doc
++ generation time and works for devhelp >=0.11 (was released in 2005).
++ o changes for out-of-source dir build caused breakage for projects using
++ DOC_SOURCE_DIR with a relative path (to builddir). It is recommended to use
++ DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/src/xxx.
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 590927 : Support AM_SILENT_RULES for doc-build steps
++ o 617121 : /* < private > */ declarations in enums are still displayed
++ o 627758 : A way to ignore a symbol
++ o 639145 : shorthand syntax for headings
++ o 644291 : Enum parser breaks on assignment of ')'
++ o 646870 : HTML_IMAGES no longer in EXTRA_DIST
++ o 648289 : gtkdoc-mkdb doesn't compile.
++ o 648331 : Specify compatible options for 'highlight' consistently.
++ o 649269 : gtkdoc-scanobj should set some of its own CFLAGS/LDFLAGS
++ o 650407 : Buildings docs while distchecking produces thousands of “No declaration found” warnings, then fails.
++ o 652746 : Documentation of plain boxed structs broken
++ o 652764 : Update autotools config a bit
++ o 655711 : summarize depscan output by package
++ o 656453 : Performance improvements (PATCH)
++ o 656658 : gtk-doc.make: install target doesn't install docs when building in a separate directory
++ o 656773 : gtk-doc fails to find a symbol declared as 'char* const'
++ o 656946 : gtk-doc unable to handle 'extern short int'
++ o 657377 : srcdir!=builddir builds discard contents of tmpl
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Bakaoukas Nikolaos
++ Claude Paroz
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ David Necas
++ David Nečas
++ Javier Jardón
++ Jorge González
++ Mario Blättermann
++ Matthias Clasen
++ Michał Górny
++ Shaun McCance
++ Stefan Sauer (Kost)
++ Will Thompson
++ Yaakov Selkowitz
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.17 (Feb 16 2011)
++============
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 127049 : building reference documentation fails when builddir != srcdir
++ o 640241 : non-srcdir builds busted
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ Javier Jardón
++ Stefan Kost
++
++GTK-Doc 1.16 (Jan 14 2011)
++============
++
++ o gtkdoc-check can do more checks, one might need to update Makefile.am from
++ the examples/Makefile.am
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 625776 : serialise doubles and floats always with a decimal dot
++ o 627269 : link to signalflags docs from signal descriptions
++ o 467488 : GTK+ man pages request
++ o 481811 : Inline function bodies are confused with declarations
++ o 501107 : EXTRA_DIST automake warnings
++ o 512565 : add GTK_DOC_IGNORE
++ o 518427 : documentation best pratices needed
++ o 597937 : Function pointers as parameters to other functions are parsed improperly
++ o 612028 : gtkdoc-fixxref should call /usr/bin/vim -n -e -u NONE -T xterm
++ o 617478 : Tooltip is a nuisance
++ o 618379 : Navigation is hiding anchors title
++ o 620249 : invalid xml for object_index with (n_objects % 3) == 0
++ o 621931 : support GType and GVariant types
++ o 622971 : List of typos in the GTK-doc manual
++ o 623777 : G_TYPE_STRV in signals generate wrong docs
++ o 623968 : gtkdoc-mkdb generates invalid xml from sgml in inline comments
++ o 624199 : parser picks up contents of large macros
++ o 624200 : 'const' confuses the parser
++ o 627223 : gtkdoc-fixxref vim highlight fails on xhtml suffix
++ o 627920 : `make check` rule to list xml files missing from DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE
++ o 628611 : gtk-doc > = 1.13 creates automagic dependencies on syntax highlighters
++ o 628794 : Issue in gtkdoc-mkman.in
++ o 630288 : Fix 'scope notified' annotation
++ o 631336 : remove lists of gtk+ signal args in gtkdoc-scanobj and -scangobj
++ o 632587 : gtkdoc-scanner fails to identify (closure) annotation
++ o 638330 : const in parameter list is ignored
++ o 638831 : Support GTK+ 3 cell properties
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Bruno Brouard
++ Christian Persch
++ Claude Paroz
++ Gilles Dartiguelongue
++ Javier Jardón
++ Jorge González
++ Maarten Bosmans
++ Mario Blättermann
++ Matej Urbančič
++ Matthias Clasen
++ Pablo Castellano
++ P. F. Chimento
++ Philip Withnall
++ Rodrigo Aliste
++ Simón Pena
++ Stefan Kost
++ Tim-Philipp Müller
++ Vasilis Tsivikis
++
++GTK-Doc 1.15 (May 21 2010)
++============
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 614496 : Support for multiple DOC_SOURCE_DIR directories
++ o 615550 : gtk-doc fails to recognize (scope ...) and (skip) annotations
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Andreas Rottmann
++ Jorge González
++ Nicola Fontana
++ Nikos Bakaoukas
++ Stefan Kost
++
++GTK-Doc 1.14 (Mar 28 2010)
++============
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 593282 : Append " _struct " prefix to every struct name
++ o 599514 : sane support for per-page images
++ o 604892 : checks fail
++ o 613611 : parameter descriptions with annotations truncated at first \n
++ o 115531 : add short description to index entries
++ o 165425 : gtk-doc fails to parse unions
++ o 512155 : gets confused by multiline typedef
++ o 568711 : undocumented enum values are not reported
++ o 590602 : secondly running gtkdoc-mkdb will generate DOCTYPE missing XML files
++ o 590625 : $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt is required by " make dist "
++ o 591975 : Section_Id always embeds a trailing newline
++ o 604885 : Fix the use of gtkdocize --flavour option
++ o 604992 : gtkdoc-fixxref broken link warning is broken for functions
++ o 604995 : Syntax error in gtkdoc-mkman
++ o 604998 : Check for syntax errors in the test suite
++ o 605052 : put class structs to the generated section file
++ o 605211 : Many build failures with gtk-doc 1.13
++ o 605281 : Add " Since " and " Deprecated " tag to function example
++ o 605285 : Add < keycap > and < keycombo > example
++ o 605289 : Some documentation improvements
++ o 605452 : Added more info to " Documenting symbols " sectio
++ o 605564 : Env var equivalent to --flavour=no-tmpl
++ o 606661 : XInclude error while gnerating documentation
++ o 607445 : gtk-doc does not support long double as returned value type
++ o 607531 : Execute system() calls in subshells to ease debugging
++ o 609062 : [All-langs] [gtk-doc] Translated *.po files not available within ~/po directory
++ o 609194 : sort interface implementers
++ o 610255 : Self-test failure in git as of 2010-02-17: FAIL: gobject.sh
++ o 610257 : Patch to make GTK-DOC notice functions/variables with 'signed' prototypes
++ o 611848 : gtk-doc produces invalid DocBook markup if the SECTION ends with a tag that cannot be nested inside < para >
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Bruno Brouard
++ David Nečas
++ Emilio Pozuelo Monfort
++ Francisco Javier F. Serrador
++ Javier Jardón
++ Jorge González
++ Loïc Minier
++ Mario Blättermann
++ Marios Zindilis
++ Nicola Fontana
++ Philip Chimento
++ Runa Bhattacharjee
++ Ryan Lortie
++ Simon Josefsson
++ Simon McVittie
++ Stefan Kost
++ Sweta Kothari
++ Vincent Untz
++ Felix Iyadurai
++ krishnababu k
++
++GTK-Doc 1.13 (Dec 18 2009)
++============
++
++ o 604891 : gtk-doc tarball does not build
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Stefan Kost
++
++GTK-Doc 1.12 (Dec 18 2009)
++============
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 591450 : Build related fixes
++ o 466535 : generate documentation as pdf
++ o 502191 : acronym support
++ o 532395 : inline function parsing problems (e.g. in glib api docs)
++ o 536928 : have syntax highlghted and xrefs source code samples
++ o 562064 : index generation trouble
++ o 562310 : glib 2.18.3: /bin/sh: line 1: gtkdoc-rebase: command not found
++ o 562655 : doesn't produce deprecation note for signals
++ o 565126 : linking to struct members
++ o 565835 : Three spelling errors in gtk-doc-manual
++ o 566911 : add support for --help and --version to remaining tools
++ o 567132 : Take FOO_GET_INTERFACE as standard
++ o 568702 : gtkdoc-mkhtml no longer works when symlinked
++ o 568706 : gtkdoc-scan: use CamelCase id for interfaces
++ o 568708 : gtkdoc-scan should try not to scan files twice
++ o 568714 : Perl errors when syntax highlighting is not available
++ o 568732 : missing long descriptions undetected
++ o 568734 : configure check for gtk-doc prints that gtk-doc cannot be built
++ o 569339 : abbreviation are not expanded at the start of text
++ o 572396 : Fix to use shave + gtk-doc + libtool 1.x
++ o 572612 : Mistakenly substitute -1 with G_MAXULONG in x86_64
++ o 572967 : use g_strerror
++ o 574654 : --ignore-decorators does not ignore trailing stuff
++ o 575574 : Be more friendly for files with a space in their name
++ o 575623 : Update FSF address
++ o 575711 : < table > element mismatch in highlighted code
++ o 576313 : implicit declarations in testsuite ?
++ o 577059 : Gnome-doc support can't be disabled
++ o 577774 : Test suite run even when built with --disable-gtk-doc
++ o 580206 : gcc warnings in < module > -scan.c
++ o 580300 : gtkdoc-scan picks up _get_type functions it should not
++ o 580622 : xml dir is both part of distclean and dist rules
++ o 581237 : gtk-doc uses wrong gtkdoc-check in " make check " phase
++ o 584952 : " uninitialized value in concatenation " gtkdoc-mkdb line 938
++ o 587103 : return values of function-like macros
++ o 587196 : Typo in a string
++ o 589426 : Python is a required dependency
++ o 591789 : master FTBFS with automake 1.11
++ o 594224 : Please fix manual about inlined SECTION comments (and show warnings when invalid)
++ o 596730 : Signed vs. unsigned comparison in gtkdoc-scangobj.in causing compile errors
++ o 596731 : autogen.sh doesn't recognize automake-1.11
++ o 602026 : Warn if non-existing function gets referenced
++ o 602518 : Doesn't support " long int " return type
++ o 604798 : tests/fail.sh and tests/tools.sh.in use bashisms
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Claude Paroz
++ Dan Williams
++ Daniel Mustieles
++ Daniel Nylander
++ H. Habighorst
++ Jannis Pohlmann
++ Javier Jardón
++ Jennie Petoumenou
++ Jorge González
++ Mario Blättermann
++ Nicola Fontana
++ Philip Chimento
++ Philip Withnall
++ Simos Xenitellis
++ Stefan Kost
++ Sven Herzberg
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.11 (Nov 16 2008)
++============
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 531572 : one-page generation option
++ o 448879 : Use a footer when generating HTML documentation
++ o 311857 : xsltproc very slow generating index for gtk-docs.sgml
++ o 335239 : Using gnome-doc-utils for gtk-doc documentation
++ o 460753 : enable vpath build in gtkdoc-mkhtml
++ o 473342 : Warn about repeated symbols in sections
++ o 487727 : DocBook XML DTD version
++ o 523669 : make check: Element publisher content does not follow the...
++ o 530758 : gtk-doc should not expand XML tags and their attributes
++ o 533262 : no-template mode scans different source files
++ o 534627 : gtk-doc uses non-standard HTML element
++ o 542137 : No declaration found for: gsf_output_*
++ o 543855 : Fix for Bug 460753 (enable vpath build in gtkdoc-mkhtml) ...
++ o 544172 : Fails to parse return value of 'char const *'
++ o 552822 : Add rules to create $(REPORT_FILES)
++ o 553407 : Example Makefile.am uses obsolete INCLUDES instead of AM_...
++ o 554718 : gtk-doc needs to allow versioned TARGET_DIR
++ o 554833 : Be more careful with " struct _ < struct_name > "
++ o 558082 : evince docs build fails with GTK_DISABLE_SINGLE_INCLUDES
++ o 559281 : Correct check for existence of gtkdoc-rebase
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Behdad Esfahbod
++ Christian Persch
++ David Nečas
++ Felix Riemann
++ Jeffrey Stedfast
++ Marc-Andre Lureau
++ Matthew Barnes
++ Peter Kjellerstedt
++ Sebastian Dröge
++ Simon Josefsson
++ Stefan Kost
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.10 (Mar 20 2008)
++============
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 460753 : enable vpath build in gtkdoc-mkhtml
++ o 503119 : Add dependency on content_files to SGML target
++ o 127049 : building reference documentation fails when builddir != s...
++ o 481811 : Inline function bodies are confused with declarations
++ o 448879 : Use a footer when generating HTML documentation
++ o 492005 : Deprecation guard warnings for properties and signals
++ o 498521 : Inconsistent compiler flags passed in gtk-doc.make
++ o 365913 : gtk-doc output is not predictable
++ o 446648 : gtk-doc does not handle forward typedef'd enums
++ o 468278 : Display proper types for properties
++ o 497367 : don't use US-ASCII for output encoding
++ o 501066 : Missing quotes around gtkdoc-rebase check cause a warning
++ o 508897 : [PATCH] Fix build when gtk-doc is not installed
++ o 509539 : Building documentation aborts when no .types file is present
++ o 512154 : Struct member type attributes are limited to one token
++ o 513318 : gtk-doc.el doesn't work fine with emacs22
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Benjamin Otte
++ Carlos Garnacho
++ Damon Chaplin
++ David Nečas
++ Frederic Peters
++ Joe Marcus Clarke
++ Kouhei Sutou
++ Loïc Minier
++ Mathias Hasselmann
++ Petteri Räty
++ Rouslan Solomakhin
++ Stefan Kost
++ Sven Herzberg
++ Yeti
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.9 (Sep 30 2007)
++===========
++
++ Changes
++
++ o 419308 : unsynced regexps for parameter parsing
++ o 449618 : Top navigation bar is in the way
++ o 453717 : fixxref logic to determine absolute path's is flawed
++ o 457173 : unit tests for gtk-doc
++ o 465920 : Use gtkdoc-rebase
++ o 467773 : default master doc should have proper extension
++ o 141869 : Poor error generated when faced with a type declared as '...
++ o 156643 : Avoid make error in gtk-doc.make
++ o 322035 : wrong macro parsing
++ o 323938 : gtk-doc.m4 check is silent
++ o 324535 : gtk-doc doesn't handle deprecation inside enumerations
++ o 355352 : If you don't have an instantiatable type for a gtypeinter...
++ o 379466 : Improve C parser to handle TYPE\nVARIABLE in function pro...
++ o 380824 : docs are truncated if line begins with '* returns '
++ o 383456 : ' make check ' test for 100% documentation
++ o 411739 : Gtk-doc fails to handle ' struct tm * function_name (); '
++ o 415388 : Please clean -undocumented.txt files
++ o 418027 : gtkdoc-mkdb does not handle #ifdef in enum {}
++ o 419997 : parameter name trouble
++ o 428596 : Warnings with gtk-doc.m4 macros
++ o 434134 : fixxrefs like sed for installing pregenerated docs
++ o 436565 : Report undeclared symbols into a file
++ o 445596 : Impossible to link a page with an anchor
++ o 445693 : Does not understand ' unsigned long ' as a type
++ o 450338 : Make gtk-doc.m4 fail when needed gtk-doc is not installed
++ o 454916 : gtk-doc should permit generation of URI-based cross-refer...
++ o 457077 : add --no-implicit-returns to gtkdoc-mkdb
++ o 459225 : Accept automake-1.10 in autogen.sh
++ o 459725 : ' jhbuild build gtk-doc ' fails on make
++ o 460127 : parsing nested union/structs confuses public/private state
++ o 465365 : [PATCH] gtk-doc does not compile
++ o 466559 : [CSS] styling <hr />;
++ o 471014 : G_CONST_RETURN * G_CONST_RETURN * function not picked up
++ o 477532 : function variables
++ o 479913 : gtk-doc.notmpl.make is not distributed
++ o 479923 : distclean test output properly
++
++ Contributors
++
++ Benjamin Otte
++ Damon Chaplin
++ David Nečas
++ Frederic Peters
++ Loic Minier
++ Petteri Räty
++ Rouslan Solomakhin
++ Stefan Kost
++ Sven Herzberg
++ Yeti
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.8 (Feb 16 2007)
++===========
++
++ o Made it easier to include example code in the source code comment blocks.
++ "|[ ... ]|" can be used to delineate example code (it just gets converted
++ to "<informalexample><programlisting>"), and most of the text in example
++ code is left as it is. The only thing that is still expanded is
++ '#' to allow links to a symbol's documentation, e.g. '#GtkWidget'.
++ o Made the field widths wider for the HTML output, so it looks a bit nicer.
++ o Added a '--rebuild-sections' option to gtkdoc-scan to automatically rebuild
++ the MODULE-sections.txt file. This only works if all the header files are
++ organized neatly and functions don't need rearranging in the docs.
++ o Added a '--rebuild-types' option to gtkdoc-scan to automatically rebuild
++ the MODULE.types file, so you don't need to add new types manually.
++ o Leave CDATA sections as they are, in the extra XML content files and within
++ source code comment blocks.
++ o Allow the section id and #include's to be set within the "SECTION:" comment
++ block, using "@Section_ID:xxx" and "@Include:".
++ o Added "--default-includes" option to specify the default #include's (for
++ people who are using --rebuild-sections and so can't specify it in
++ MODULE-sections.txt).
++ o Added a '--query-child-properties' argument to help document child
++ properties of arbitrary GObjects (used by things like canvas widgets).
++ o Fixed documentation of signals of interfaces.
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.7 (Jul 29 2006)
++===========
++
++ o Fixed bug that resulted in empty "@:" lines in the templates.
++ o Fixed a few bugs with the XSL code.
++ o Supported a few more variations of C syntax.
++ o Remove the internally-used '-struct' suffix from links to widget structs.
++ o Fixed a few missing build dependencies.
++ o Added a new "C-x4s" binding to the emacs lisp code, to insert a blank
++ section header in the source code.
++ o Fixed bug that ignored inline section header docs with '-' in their names.
++ o Added a 'make docs' target that can be used to build the docs even when
++ gtk-doc has been disabled at configure time.
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.6 (Apr 9 2006)
++===========
++
++ o Removed the hard dependency on openjade or jade, since XML is used mainly
++ now rather than SGML.
++ o Install the .pc file in $(datadir) rather than $(libdir) since gtk-doc is
++ architecture-independant.
++ o Added "--ignore-decorators" option to ignore a list of declarators in
++ function declarations.
++ o Support '#Object::signal'/'#Object:property' to link to signals/properties
++ o Fixed missing index terms.
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.5 (Mar 7 2006)
++===========
++
++ o Output the new version of devhelp2 information, but still generate the old
++ devhelp files so older versions of DevHelp still work OK.
++ o Fixed the initial creation of the *-sections.txt file so the object
++ hierarchy, signals and properties all work automatically.
++ o Show information about signal flags (run first/last).
++ o Support a --source-suffixes argument specifying which source files to scan.
++ o Support other root object types besides GObject and GInterface.
++ o Use a fixed navigation bar for the generated documentation.
++ o New documentation from Stefan Kost.
++ o Handle more variations of C syntax.
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.4 (Jul 3 2005)
++===========
++
++ o Support section documentation (title, short description, long description
++ and 'see also') within the source code. I think everything can now be
++ documented within the source code.
++ o Support Stable/Unstable/Private stability levels for everything.
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.3 (Jan 9 2005)
++===========
++
++ o Use the new style.css stylesheet instead of hard-wiring the styles.
++ o Updated the documentation and example build files.
++ o Added support for a gallery of widget images.
++ o Output default values for widget properties and allowed ranges.
++ o Only underline links in the docs when the mouse hovers over them.
++ o Added support for placing the parameter table anywhere within the function
++ documentation (using the "<!--PARAMETERS-->" marker).
++ o Handle more variations of C syntax.
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.2 (Feb 16 2004)
++===========
++
++ o Added widget signals and properties to undocumented output and statistics.
++ o Added support for an index of all symbols.
++ o Emit "Since:" information for signals and properties.
++ o Added derived subclasses and interfaces to the widget hierarchies.
++ o Added .cat SGML catalog file.
++ o Support properties on interfaces.
++ o Added "--help" options to the scripts.
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.1 (Apr 18 2003)
++===========
++
++ o Add a gtk-doc.m4 macro that allows packages to provide consistent
++ checking for gtk-doc.
++ o Check to make sure that the XML catalog actually contains entries
++ for the DocBook XML DTD and XSLT stylesheets. Please consult the
++ README file if your system's XML catalog isn't set up.
++ o Add infrastructure for including the standard gtk-doc makefile
++ glue, so that maintainers of packages don't need to worry about
++ keeping it up to date. See glib head for an example of its use.
++ o Some updates to the devhelp contents file generation, as suggested
++ by Hallski.
++ o Fix some bugs in the DocBook XML codepath that were preventing
++ inter-module cross references from being resolved.
++ o Fix some bugs in extraction of object property documentation.
++
++
++GTK-Doc 1.0 (Jan 20 2003)
++===========
++
++ o Added support for "Since:" and "Deprecated:" tags, and look for deprecated
++ guard macros in header files.
++ o Support /*< public >*/ and /*< private >*/ markers for all structs.
++ o New "--ignore-files" option for gtkdoc-mkdb, to ignore files or directories.
++ o Used the "sgml-raw" output type with openjade, to avoid problems with Lynx.
++ o Added .pc pkg-config file which can be used to check the gtk-doc version.
++
++
++GTK-Doc 0.10 (Nov 14 2002)
++============
++
++ o --output-format option to select whether SGML or XML is generated.
++ o Use openjade or jade when converting SGML to HTML.
++ o Use xsltproc to convert XML to HTML, with a new look.
++ o In XML mode, support XIncludes as an alternative to entities.
++ o In XML mode, create .devhelp files.
++ o List interfaces in the object hierarchy.
++ o Create docs for signals on interfaces.
++ o Generate links between interface and their implementations and
++ prerequisites.
++ o Create docs for child and style properties.
++ o Use blurbs for property documentation.
++ o Allow inline documentation for signals and properties.
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++
++GTK+ DocBook Documentation Generator
++====================================
++
++GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the public
++API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries, but it can also be
++used to document application code.
++
++Note that GTK-Doc wasn't originally intended to be a general-purpose
++documentation tool, so it can be a bit awkward to setup and use.
++For a more polished general-purpose documentation tool you may want to look
++at Doxygen (http://www.doxygen.org/). However GTK-Doc has some special code
++to document the signals and properties of GTK+ widgets and GObject classes
++which other tools may not have.
++
++From your source code comments GTK-Doc generates a Docbook XML document, which
++is then transformed into HTML and/or PDF.
++The generated HTML documentation can be browsed in an ordinary web browser or
++by using the special Devhelp API browser
++(see https://wiki.gnome.org/Apps/Devhelp).
++
++
++Requirements
++============
++
++Python 3.x
++ http:///www.python.org
++
++Additional python modules:
++ For the tests: unittest, parameterized
++ For mkhtml2 (experimental): anytree, lxml and pygments
++ For fixxref: pygments
++
++For XML output (recommended):
++
++The DocBook XML DTD.
++ http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/
++
++The DocBook XSL Stylesheets.
++ http://docbook.sourceforge.net/projects/xsl/
++
++libxslt & libxml2 >= 2.3.6.
++ http://xmlsoft.org/
++
++For PDF output:
++
++the dblatex tool.
++ http://dblatex.sourceforge.net/
++
++Most distributions now have packages for all of these, so I would strongly
++advise that you grab those.
++
++See the documentation in the help/manual directory for more information. You can
++read it e.g. with yelp file://$PWD/help/manual/C/gtk-doc-manual.xml
++
++
++Building
++========
++
++We are supporting two build systems to build gtk-doc for some transitions time.
++
++
++Build using auto*
++-----------------
++
++In order to build with a the classic auto* system use these commands:
++
++Build from git:
++./autogen.sh; make
++
++Build from dist tarball:
++./configure; make
++
++There are a few parameters one can pass to ./configure, run ./configure --help
++to see them. Also ./autogen.sh can take those settings (and will hand them
++through to ./configure).
++
++To run the tests:
++make check
++
++To install:
++make install
++
++To make a release:
++make distcheck
++or
++make dist
++
++
++Build using meson
++-----------------
++
++Support for meson is new and still experiemntal.
++
++Build it from git:
++meson build .
++ninja -C build
++
++There are some options one can specify too:
++meson build . --prefix=
++meson build . -Dautotools_support=false
++meson build . -Dcmake_support=false
++meson build . -Dyelp_manual=false
++
++To run tests:
++ninja -C build test
++
++To install:
++ninja -C build install
++
++To make a release:
++ninja -C build dist
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++The TODO list for the gtk-doc project is at Bugzilla,
++the bugtracking system of the GNOME project.
++
++Visit
++ http://bugzilla.gnome.org/buglist.cgi?product=gtk-doc&bug_status=UNCONFIRMED&bug_status=NEW&bug_status=ASSIGNED&bug_status=REOPENED
++to see what is already requested, or where you can help. :-)
++
++To put an other request on the TODO list, visit
++ http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=gtk-doc
++
++Also have a look at
++ http://live.gnome.org/DocumentationProject/GtkDocFuture
++and join discussion about future features.
++
++
++Developers can also add items here :)
++
++= Less files to manually edit =
++The goal is that we configure gtk-doc in configure.ac and Makefile.am and
++document the code in the sources. Right no we also have to edit a bunch of extra
++files:
++ * $(DOC_MODULE).types
++ * $(DOC_MODULE)-docs.xml
++ * $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt
++
++== .types ==
++
++* using SCAN_OPTION="--rebuild-types" can be used to avoid maintaining the types
++ file
++* we need to check if this works well for all kind of _types (e.g. boxed)
++ https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=605025
++
++== -section.txt ==
++https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=646094
++
++* using SCAN_OPTION="--rebuild-sections" can be used to use the audogenerated
++ sections file
++* when scanning a header file, everything of the header and the respective .c
++ file will be put to one section
++* symbols can be hidden using __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__
++
++* we need comment markup to override the section
++ e.g.: " * InSection: xxxx"
++ this needs gtkdoc-mkdb::ScanSourceFile to understand a new tag, which
++ otherwise would appear as verbatim in the sources
++* if one has "@InSection: xxxx" in a section comment we could patch the
++ main.xml file and insert then xi:include line (would possibly rely on a
++ special comment-pair there, we might also need to rewrite these
++ auto-generated xi:includes every time as the placements could have been
++ changed, or we have a xi:include for each chapter, that we regenerate).
++* we need a way to specify subsections (Standard, Private)
++ this could be done in the SECTION comment
++ e.g.: "@HideSymbols: <list-of-symbols-to-hide>
++ * we could allow to have a SUBSECTION:xxx comment block too
++ but then we list all the symbols here to override the auto-section placement
++* if we want to avoid the "InSection in symbol docs we could also have
++ e.g.: "@ExtraSymbols: <list-of-symbols-to-include>
++* documented symbols that are in a file without section comment and do not
++ appear in "@ExtraSymbols", "@HideSymbols" would go to unused.txt
++ * shall we deprecated the unused sub-sections?
++* can we have both at the same time (for migration)
++ * yes, read section-file first and add/override from inline comments
++
++
++= More abbreviations =
++* expand urls (needds more work, see gtkdoc-mkdb : ExpandAbbreviations)
++
++
++= Running =
++gtk-doc is using a makefile with several targets to get from sources to docs. It
++uses makefile variables for configuration.
++It might be easier to have a gtkdoc tool that can run the other gtkdoc tools
++in the right order (ev. by importing them as modules). This could handle a few
++things nicer that the makefiles don't do well. This would also make it easy to
++run it manually or integrate into other build systems.
++
++
++= Intermediate files =
++Can we change the intermediate files into e.g. json or yaml so that we can just
++load it from python?
++
++Can we drop the decl-list.txt file (or rename to make sure this is what a
++generated section.txt would look like)
++
++
++= Issues =
++* gtkdoc-fixxref makefile targets use $HTML_DIR
++ * HTML_DIR: The directory where gtk-doc generated documentation is installed
++ it comes from gtk-doc.m4 (--with-html-dir) but has no default
++ * automake exports $htmldir which is by default:
++ ${prefix}/share/doc/${PACKAGE_TARNAME}
++ * the Makefile uses $(DESTDIR)$(TARGET_DIR)
++ where TARGET_DIR = $(HTML_DIR)/$(DOC_MODULE)
++ http://www.gnu.org/software/libtool/manual/automake/DESTDIR.html
++* gtkdoc does not know about module versions
++ * this is causing troubles when multiple library versions are installed
++ (gtk+-{2,3}, gstreamer-{0.8,0.10,1.0}
++ * right now gtk-doc is xreffing against any <module>/*.devhelp2 found
++ * just using the one with a higher number won't work
++
++
++= Extensibility =
++We'd like to extend gtk-doc to understand conventions/features of gobject libs.
++Ideally libs register their extension hooks, so that other libs that use these
++libs can benefit from the extensions too.
++
++== custom get_types collector ==
++- the default method takes the types from a type file
++- gstreamer plugin docs take a list of types from the gst plugin registry
++
++== custom properties ==
++- gtk has style and child properties
++
++== extra gobject property flags ==
++- gstreamer has 'controllable' properties
++
++= Output =
++* http://sagehill.net/docbookxsl/index.html
++* multipage-html
++ * would be good to be able to have page titles as a concatenation of document
++ name and page name (gtk+:GtkWIdget)
++* formats
++ http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=466535 : pdf
++ http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=467488 : man
++ we need more configure options in gtk-doc.m4:
++ --(enable|disable)-gtk-doc-(html|pdf|man)
++ - html : enabled by default
++* validation
++ xmllint --noout --xinclude --postvalid tester-docs.xml
++ xmllint --noout --postvalid tester-docs.fo --dtdvalid file://$HOME/download/fo.dtd
++ - fo.dtd : http://www.renderx.com/Tests/validator/fo.zip
++
++= Warnings =
++Bugzilla has some requests for extra warnings. We should support a common
++commandline option(s) in all tools to enable/disable the warnings. The makefiles
++should pass the flags from an env-var (GTKDOC_OPTIONS). The env-var should be
++used after the regular flags, so that the env-var can override hardcoded
++settings (in Makefile.am).
++
++Lets take this warning for the example:
++ "Symbol name not found at the start of the comment block."
++
++Version 1: (template "warn-xxx!, warn-yyy!")
++--warn-missing-symbol-at-comment-start
++--no-warn-missing-symbol-at-comment-start
++
++Version 2: (template "warn:s@")
++-Wmissing-symbol-at-comment-start
++-Wno-missing-symbol-at-comment-start
++-warn missing-symbol-at-comment-start
++-warn no-missing-symbol-at-comment-start
++
++more warnings:
++ - 'deprecated' deprecating 'features'
++ - 'dummy-docs' check if symbol docs are very short and repeat mainly words
++ from the symbol.
++ - possible xrefs (e.g. adding a # or () would make it a successful xref)
++
++
++= GIR =
++== scanning ==
++* ideas
++ * use gir files
++ 1) replace gtkdoc-scan/gtkdoc-scangobject by gtkdoc-gir and output the classical files or
++ patch gtkdoc-scan/gtkdoc-scangobject to output gir files
++ 2) patch gtkdoc-mkdb to read stuff from gir instead of classical files
++ * if gir-files would have the comments too (they are getting this now):
++ * we could even drop scanning the sources
++ * IDEs could use the gir-files to show doc-tooltips for symbols
++ * we might need yet another makefile flavour to use gir files
++* perl and xml
++ * http://www.xml.com/pub/a/2001/04/18/perlxmlqstart1.html
++
++== binding docs ==
++* simmillar workflow to gettext
++* add gtkdoc-mk??? to generate binding doc templates
++ * have c-comments there as comments
++ * when updating templates, mark sections that have changed as fuzzy
++* add options to gtkdoc-mkdb to build docbook from those templates
++* questions
++ * could we use the tmpl file mechanism?
++ * directory structure?
++ * we need to list the languages like ALL_LINGUAS for translations
++ * we need to create subdirs for binding docs, ideally we use one for 'C' as well
++* devhelp
++ * devhelp files need a language attribute in the book-tag
++ language={C,C++,JavaScript,Perl,Python,...}
++ * devhelp could show a selector for the language
++ * need to get existing python/~mm docs to use it, gtk-doc could output
++ language=C for own docs
++
++=== installation ===
++* need to install each book with a prefix
++* would be good to have a language attribute in book tag to allow filter by language
++* look at /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/pygobject/index.html
++
++
++= external processors =
++We need parametric, user definable macros.
++|[ ... ]| - programlistings
++|macro(arg1,arg2,...)[ ... ]| - call macro
++ - pass args as parameters (on the commandline)
++ - pass some gtk-doc vars in environment
++ (gtk-doc version, module, srcdir, buildir)
++ - content of [] on stdin or as a file
++ - get output on stdout or file
++ - and replace the macro with it
++The changes could be made in gtkdoc-mkdb::ExpandAbbreviations()
++== example macros ==
++|highlight(c)[...]| - highlight source code for a specific language (c)
++ - what will this output? preformatted html to be xincluded?
++ - we could have macros for each format, the docbook xml macro would leave
++ enough traces in the html so that a html macro can continue
++|dot(svg)[...]| - format dot graph and include result as mediaobject (in svg format)
++|ditta(svg)[...]| - parse ascii art and include result as mediaobject (in svg format)
++ - we need to generate a filename for the image or use anoter parameter
++
++== where to define macros ==
++* system wide and with the package, <prefix>/share/gtk-doc/macros, $(srcdir)
++* prefix for custom macros?
++* we could require stdin for input and stdout for output, the wrapper for the
++ actual tool can ensure the convention
++
++
++= styling =
++=== process html ===
++if we highlight to html we get colors, we need to check what tags we should process though:
++<pre class="programlisting"> is used for all code boxes.
++<div class="informalexample"><pre class="programlisting"> is used for examples.
++problems:
++* in html we don't know the language anymore
++ * add another div
++* with source-highlight, constants and types are not markedup.
++ for types we might need to build an own lang file dynamically and include
++ /usr/share/source-highlight/c.lang
++=== |[ ... ]| does not allow setting the language ===
++* check for vi/emacs/jedit modelines
++ jedit: http://www.jedit.org/users-guide/buffer-local.html
++ vim: http://vim.wikia.com/wiki/Modeline_magic
++ emacs: http://www.delorie.com/gnu/docs/emacs/emacs_486.html
++* allow <!-- language="C" --> comments after |[
++* we need to catch those when processing the docbook and expanding the |[
++* require new macro syntax
++
++== show inherited api ==
++could we write small html files for each object for methods, signals and properties and then use iframes to combine those at runtime like in javadoc?
++could we do that using javascript and some other magic?
++
++
++= Markup =
++== tags ==
++* to document the api-life cycle we have: since, deprecated and stability:
++* other things we might want to specify:
++ * multi-threading safety: mt-safe, use-with-lock <lock>
++
++== protected scope ==
++* we can have /* < protected > */ in classes
++* we can have <SUBSECTION Protected> in -section.txt
++* ideally we have Scope: {Public, Protected, Private} supported in doc comments
++* there is a bug for gir, https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=594125
++
++== wildcards in symbol names ==
++Sometimes one defines a set of function and macros with very similar purpose, e.g.
++READ_INT8, READ_INT16, READ_INT32. It would be great to allow documenting a symbol
++READ_INT* instead of 3 docs which are copy'n'pasted anyway. In the output we will have
++all matching declarations in one source listing. Multiple wildcards are okay.
++
++
++= documentation best practises #518427 =
++* we'd like offer a more complete skelleton
++ * structure
++ * docbook markup (part/chapter structure)
++* structure
++ Suggested structure for api-docs.
++ Idea is to have more content that api reference. It would be good to have a
++ gnome-platform document in devhelp, so that we could xref that instead of
++ explaining 100 times how to use pkg-config.
++
++ * examples
++ * gobject in devhelp
++ * concepts / api / tools / tutorial / related tools
++ * gtk in devhelp
++ * overview / api / migation / tools
++ * qt reference docs in qt assistant
++ * classes / overview / tutorial&examples
++ * recommendation
++ * front-page
++ * table with details (http://www.docbook.org/tdg/en/html/bookinfo.html)
++ (problem: what enclosing tag)
++ Logo, Module Version
++ Copyright and Legalnotice
++ Links
++ * homepage, mailing lists, irc channel
++ * repository, source releases, bugtracker
++ * TOC
++ * introduction - what is is about
++ * concepts - explain basic ideas and terminology
++ * development - how to build and run, env-vars, different platforms
++ * api - classic api docs
++ * tutorial & examples - integrated to keep it up-to-date and cross referenced
++ * migration - how to for api changes, deprecations
++ * (related) tools - tools part of the package or recommended for development
++ * indexes - api-index, depretations, new api since xxx
++
++proposed structure in docbook xml:
++<book>
++ <bookinfo>
++ </bookinfo>
++ <preface><title>Introduction</title>
++ ...
++ </preface>
++ <part label="I"><title>xxx Overview</title>
++ <xi:include href="building.xml" />
++ ...
++ </part>
++ <reference label="II"><title>xxx Core Reference</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/gtkmain.xml" />
++ ...
++ </part>
++ <reference label="III"><title>xxx Object Reference</title>
++ <chapter><title>Object Hierarchy</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/tree_index.sgml" />
++ </chapter>
++ <chapter>...
++ </part>
++ <index>...</index>
++</book>
++
++some things to check:
++* gtk,glib: can we make a <part> for the glosary and index's (according to docbook, yes)
++ should we use <appendix>? its like a chapter.
++* gobject: uses a <preface> for introductions
++* gobject: uses <reference> as a parent for the xi:includeed <refentry> docs
++
++
++= extra link for symbols =
++need options for configure:
++--enable-gtk-doc-codesearch-links
++--enable-gtk-doc-liveedit-links
++== viewvc,cgit,... ==
++- link to some online service for the code
++- problem: most don't have local anchors for the symbols
++- where to set the uri (in the document, like for online url)?
++- what about a template URL containing a %s for the "path/file" or a special macro
++ http://svn.gnome.org/viewvc/gtk-doc/trunk/tests/gobject/src/gobject.c?view=markup
++ http://buzztard.svn.sourceforge.net/viewvc/buzztard/trunk/buzztard/src/lib/core/core.c?view=markup
++ - unfortunately we can't link to symbols (only lines)
++ - linking to files is difficult as in gtkdoc we have modules
++
++== codesearch ==
++- google (code) link : http://www.google.com/codesearch?q=g_object_unref
++== live editing ==
++The idea is to have an 'edit' link in an online version of the docs (build from
++head development version) per doc-entry (symbols and section).
++The link goes to a cgi and that gets following parameters: docmodule,symbol.
++E.g. http://library.gnome.org/devel/references/edit?docmodule=glib&symbol=g_new
++The cgi would need a hashmap to get from docmodule to the way to check it out
++(ideally it has a recent checkout and only updates it).
++problems:
++- signal that this has been edited already?
++- support for xi:included examples
++- updating the checkout could be slow
++
++
++= fix missing since docs =
++cd gstreamer/gstreamer/docs/gst
++gtkdoc-mkdb --module=gstreamer --source-dir=../../gst --outputsymbolswithoutsince
++cd gstreamer/gstreamer/src
++git bisect start
++git bisect good
++git bisect bad RELEASE-0_10_0
++git bisect run script.sh
++
++script:
++#!/bin/sh
++make ctags
++grep "gst_caps_is_always_compatible" tags
++
++
++= performance =
++- timestamp each step
++ make check >make.log
++- try CFLAGS=-O0 for compiling the scanner, no need to optimize it
++ CFLAGS="-O0" make check >make.log
++ safes max 0.5 sec.
++- xslt
++ http://docbook2x.sourceforge.net/latest/doc/performance.html
++ - play with xsltproc --profile --verbose --timing
++ cd tests/gobject/docs/html
++ time /usr/bin/xsltproc 2>xslt.log --profile --verbose --timing --path /home/ensonic/projects/gnome/gtk-doc/gtk-doc/tests/gobject/docs --nonet --xinclude --stringparam gtkdoc.bookname tester --stringparam gtkdoc.version 1.14 /home/ensonic/projects/gnome/gtk-doc/gtk-doc/gtk-doc.xsl ../tester-docs.xml
++ - l10n.language is slow
++ bug: https://sourceforge.net/tracker/index.php?func=detail&aid=2918673&group_id=21935&atid=373750
++ see: http://www.mail-archive.com/docbook-apps@lists.oasis-open.org/msg05412.html
++ - override l10n.language
++ glib/gobject
++ real user sys
++ 2m15.221s 1m58.740s 0m1.456s
++ >
++ 1m55.480s 1m44.296s 0m2.125s
++ - override many template related to gentext
++ real user sys
++ 0m43.327s 0m38.594s 0m4.724s
++ >
++ real user sys
++ 0m33.282s 0m29.266s 0m4.012s
++ - removing the gentext calls for nav-bar alt tags does not help
++
++ - we could do the xinlcude processing once and use it for both html and pdf
++ time /usr/bin/xsltproc 2>../xslt4.log --path /home/ensonic/projects/gnome/gtk-doc/gtk-doc/tests/gobject/docs --nonet --xinclude --stringparam gtkdoc.bookname tester --stringparam gtkdoc.version 1.14 /home/ensonic/projects/gnome/gtk-doc/gtk-doc/gtk-doc.xsl ../tester-docs.xml
++ real user sys
++ 0m4.846s 0m4.434s 0m0.147s
++ 0m4.842s 0m4.386s 0m0.145s
++
++
++ time xmllint --nonet --xinclude ../tester-docs.xml >./tester-docs-all.xml
++ real user sys
++ 0m0.596s 0m0.546s 0m0.023s
++
++ time /usr/bin/xsltproc 2>../xslt5.log --path /home/ensonic/projects/gnome/gtk-doc/gtk-doc/tests/gobject/docs --nonet --stringparam gtkdoc.bookname tester --stringparam gtkdoc.version 1.14 /home/ensonic/projects/gnome/gtk-doc/gtk-doc/gtk-doc.xsl ./tester-docs-all.xml
++ real user sys
++ 0m4.167s 0m3.834s 0m0.106s
++ 0m4.248s 0m3.851s 0m0.114s
++
++
++ time xmllint --nonet --c14n --xinclude ../tester-docs.xml >./tester-docs-all2.xml
++
++ real user sys
++ 0m0.700s 0m0.636s 0m0.034s
++
++ time /usr/bin/xsltproc 2>../xslt6.log --path /home/ensonic/projects/gnome/gtk-doc/gtk-doc/tests/gobject/docs --nonet --stringparam gtkdoc.bookname tester --stringparam gtkdoc.version 1.14 /home/ensonic/projects/gnome/gtk-doc/gtk-doc/gtk-doc.xsl ./tester-docs-all2.xml
++
++ real user sys
++ 0m3.344s 0m3.026s 0m0.109s
++ 0m3.372s 0m3.037s 0m0.115s
++
++
++ l ../tester-docs.xml ./tester-docs-all*.xml
++
++ - we could also try to compact the installed xslt
++ xmllint --nonet --c14n --xinclude gtk-doc.xsl | sed -ne '/<!--/ { :c; /-->/! { N; b c; }; /-->/s/<!--.*-->//g }; /^ *$/!p;' | sed '/^$/d' >gtk-doc.pre.xsl
++ - unfortunately there is no way to ask xsltproc to pre-transform an xslt, that could
++ - strip comments
++ - process xsl:import and xsl:include
++ - extra xsltproc options:
++ --novalid: saves ~ 0.12 sec
++
++ - strip DOCTYPES on xincludes
++ - there is a performance bottleneck in libxml, where it parses DTD for each fragment
++ - we're using the dtd to
++ - validate fragments
++ - inject package name/version etc.
++ - 1) we could provide a flags to gtkdoc-mkdb to not put any doctype on
++ generated file and manually result entities in generated files (and
++ expand_content_files)
++ - to get a list of entities:
++ - we could parse entities from the main doc-file header
++ - tricky as with xml/gtkdocentities.ent, they are in a extra file
++ - we could pass entities as args for gtkdoc-mkdb
++ - if the flag is used, we should warn if entities are in the header
++ - 2) if the doctype on the main doc, does not cotnain entities, skip adding
++ the doctype to generated output
++ - 3) if the doctype on the main doc contains entities, only add the doctype
++ if the generated content contains entities ([&%][_a-zA-Z]*;)
++ - a quick check on the gnome modules showed:
++ - quite a few don't use entities
++ - those that use version.xml
++ - seem to mostly use it in the main doc
++ - but a few use it for man pages
++ find . -name "*.xml" -exec grep -Hn "&version;" {} \; | grep -v "\-docs.xml"
++
++find . -name "*.xml" -exec egrep --color -Hn '&[_a-zA-Z]*;' {} \; | egrep -v '&(amp|lt|gt|quot|apos|nbsp);' | egrep --color '&[_a-zA-Z]*;'
++find . -name "*.xml" -exec egrep -o '&[_a-zA-Z]*;' {} \; | sort | uniq -c | sort -n
++
++= python =
++- consider swithcing to this markdown parser
++ https://pythonhosted.org/Markdown/index.html
++- switch intermediate files to json/yaml
++ - we need to pick something, that we can easily output from plain c (produced by gtkdoc-scangobj)
++ - decl-list.txt and .types would need to stay
++ - maybe maintain one file per sourcefile (in a subdir) to eventually be able to
++ do incremental builds
++- refactor Read{Args,Declarations,Signals}File to output into a single dictionary each:
++ Signal{Names,Objects,Returns,...}[key] -> Signals[key].{names,objects,returns,...}
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/bin/sh
++# Run this to generate all the initial makefiles, etc.
++
++test -n "$srcdir" || srcdir=`dirname "$0"`
++test -n "$srcdir" || srcdir=.
++
++olddir=`pwd`
++cd "$srcdir"
++
++AUTORECONF=`which autoreconf`
++if test -z $AUTORECONF; then
++ echo "*** No autoreconf found, please install it ***"
++ exit 1
++else
++ autoreconf --force --install --verbose || exit $?
++fi
++
++cd "$olddir"
++test -n "$NOCONFIGURE" || "$srcdir/configure" "$@"
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/usr/bin/env python
++# -*- Mode: Python -*-
++# vi:si:et:sw=4:sts=4:ts=4
++
++
++# parse HTML from bugzilla.gnome.org to create a list of bugs for a given
++# product, component and target_milestone
++
++import re
++import os
++import sys
++import codecs
++import urllib
++import HTMLParser
++
++# a sample bug line we parse for future reference:
++#<TR VALIGN=TOP ALIGN=LEFT CLASS="Nor" ><TD><A HREF="show_bug.cgi?id=78267">78267</A> <td class=severity><nobr>min</nobr></td><td class=priority><nobr>Nor</nobr></td><td class=owner><nobr>thomas@apestaart.org</nobr></td><td class=status><nobr>RESO</nobr></td><td class=resolution><nobr>FIXE</nobr></td><td class=summary>autogen.sh doesn't take --prefix and similar to configure</td></TR>
++
++# a sample bug section after olav's updating of bugzilla
++# <td class="first-child">
++# <a href="show_bug.cgi?id=147641">147641</a>
++# <span style="display: none"></span>
++# </td>
++#
++# <td style="white-space: nowrap">nor
++# </td>
++# <td style="white-space: nowrap">Nor
++# </td>
++# <td style="white-space: nowrap">Linu
++# </td>
++# <td style="white-space: nowrap">GStreamer
++# </td>
++# <td style="white-space: nowrap">RESO
++# </td>
++# <td style="white-space: nowrap">FIXE
++# </td>
++# <td >[docs] pydoc segfaults when viewing gst package doc
++# </td>
++#
++# </tr>
++
++
++URL = 'http://bugzilla.gnome.org/buglist.cgi?product=%s&component=%s&target_milestone=%s'
++
++# reg = re.compile('<TR.*id=(\d+)".*summary>(.*)<\/td')
++
++HEADER = ' Changes\n'
++ITEM = ' o %s : %s'
++FOOTER = '\n Contributors\n'
++
++default_product = "gtk-doc"
++
++TD_ID = 1
++TD_SUMMARY = 7
++# after Olav's changes, it's now number 8
++#TD_SUMMARY = 8
++
++# Horrible, don't look here
++class HP(HTMLParser.HTMLParser):
++ def __init__(self):
++ HTMLParser.HTMLParser.__init__(self)
++ self.tr = 0
++ self.td = 0
++ self.bugs = []
++ self.bugno = 0
++ self.descr = ""
++
++ def handle_starttag(self, tag, data):
++ if tag == 'tr':
++ self.tr = 1
++ return
++ # count td's
++ elif self.tr and tag.startswith('td'):
++ self.td += 1
++
++ # all > refs are handled through this method; append them to self.descr
++ def handle_entityref(self, name):
++ self.descr += " &%s; " % name
++
++ # can be called more than once for one td
++ def handle_data(self, data):
++ if not self.tr:
++ return
++ data = data.strip()
++ if not data:
++ return
++
++ #print self.td, self.tr, repr(data)
++
++ # check what td it is in
++ if self.td == TD_ID:
++ try:
++ self.bugno = int(data)
++ #print "got id: ", self.bugno
++ except ValueError:
++ self.bugno = 0
++ elif self.td == TD_SUMMARY:
++ # the summary td
++ self.descr += data
++ #print "got descr: ", self.descr
++
++ def handle_endtag(self, tag):
++ if tag == 'tr':
++ self.tr = 0
++ self.td = 0
++ #print "end tag: ", self.bugno, self.descr
++ if self.bugno != 0:
++ self.bugs.append((self.bugno, self.descr))
++ self.bugno = 0
++ self.descr = ""
++
++def main(args):
++ if len(args) < 3:
++ print 'Usage: %s component milestone [product] [file]' % args[0]
++ return 2
++
++ component = args[1]
++ milestone = args[2]
++
++ if len(args) <= 3:
++ product = default_product
++ else:
++ product = args[3]
++
++ if len(args) <= 4:
++ output = None
++ else:
++ output = args[4]
++
++ url = URL % (product, urllib.quote(component), milestone)
++ fd = urllib.urlopen(url)
++
++ hp = HP()
++ hp.feed(fd.read())
++
++ lines = ["\n", ]
++ lines.append(HEADER)
++ for bug_id, summary in hp.bugs:
++ lines.append(ITEM % (bug_id, summary))
++ lines.append(FOOTER)
++ bugs = "\n".join(lines)
++
++ if not output:
++ print bugs
++ else:
++ # get original
++ #doc = codecs.open(output, "r", encoding='utf-8').read()
++ doc = open(output, "r").read()
++ matcher = re.compile('(.*)<bugs>.*</bugs>(.*)',
++ re.DOTALL)
++ match = matcher.search(doc)
++ pre = match.expand('\\1')
++ post = match.expand('\\2')
++
++ backup = output + ".bugs.bak"
++ os.rename(output, backup)
++ handle = open(output, "w")
++ handle.write(pre + bugs + post)
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ sys.exit(main(sys.argv))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++EXTRA_DIST = \
++ $(autotoolsdata_DATA) \
++ gtk-doc.m4
++
++CLEANFILES = gtk-doc.flat.make gtk-doc.no-xslt-flat.make
++
++bin_SCRIPTS = gtkdocize
++
++autotoolsdatadir = $(datadir)/gtk-doc/data
++autotoolsdata_DATA = \
++ gtk-doc.make \
++ gtk-doc.flat.make \
++ gtk-doc.no-xslt.make \
++ gtk-doc.no-xslt-flat.make
++
++aclocaldir = $(datadir)/aclocal
++aclocal_DATA = gtk-doc.m4
++
++gtk-doc.flat.make: gtk-doc.make
++ @$(SED) -e "s/EXTRA_DIST =/EXTRA_DIST +=/" $< >$@
++
++gtk-doc.no-xslt-flat.make: gtk-doc.no-xslt.make
++ @$(SED) -e "s/EXTRA_DIST =/EXTRA_DIST +=/" $< >$@
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- mode: autoconf -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc.m4 - configure macro to check for gtk-doc
++# Copyright (C) 2003 James Henstridge
++# 2007-2017 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
++#
++# As a special exception, the above copyright owner gives unlimited
++# permission to copy, distribute and modify the configure scripts that
++# are the output of Autoconf when processing the Macro. You need not
++# follow the terms of the GNU General Public License when using or
++# distributing such scripts, even though portions of the text of the
++# Macro appear in them. The GNU General Public License (GPL) does govern
++# all other use of the material that constitutes the Autoconf Macro.
++
++# serial 2
++
++dnl Usage:
++dnl GTK_DOC_CHECK([minimum-gtk-doc-version])
++AC_DEFUN([GTK_DOC_CHECK],
++[
++ AC_REQUIRE([PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG])
++ AC_BEFORE([AC_PROG_LIBTOOL],[$0])dnl setup libtool first
++ AC_BEFORE([AM_PROG_LIBTOOL],[$0])dnl setup libtool first
++
++ ifelse([$1],[],[gtk_doc_requires="gtk-doc"],[gtk_doc_requires="gtk-doc >= $1"])
++ AC_MSG_CHECKING([for gtk-doc])
++ PKG_CHECK_EXISTS([$gtk_doc_requires],[have_gtk_doc=yes],[have_gtk_doc=no])
++ AC_MSG_RESULT($have_gtk_doc)
++
++ if test "$have_gtk_doc" = "no"; then
++ AC_MSG_WARN([
++ You will not be able to create source packages with 'make dist'
++ because $gtk_doc_requires is not found.])
++ fi
++
++ dnl check for tools we added during development
++ dnl Use AC_CHECK_PROG to avoid the check target using an absolute path that
++ dnl may not be writable by the user. Currently, automake requires that the
++ dnl test name must end in '.test'.
++ dnl https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=701638
++ AC_CHECK_PROG([GTKDOC_CHECK],[gtkdoc-check],[gtkdoc-check.test])
++ AC_PATH_PROG([GTKDOC_CHECK_PATH],[gtkdoc-check])
++ AC_PATH_PROGS([GTKDOC_REBASE],[gtkdoc-rebase],[true])
++ AC_PATH_PROG([GTKDOC_MKPDF],[gtkdoc-mkpdf])
++
++ dnl for overriding the documentation installation directory
++ AC_ARG_WITH([html-dir],
++ AS_HELP_STRING([--with-html-dir=PATH], [path to installed docs]),,
++ [with_html_dir='${datadir}/gtk-doc/html'])
++ HTML_DIR="$with_html_dir"
++ AC_SUBST([HTML_DIR])
++
++ dnl enable/disable documentation building
++ AC_ARG_ENABLE([gtk-doc],
++ AS_HELP_STRING([--enable-gtk-doc],
++ [use gtk-doc to build documentation [[default=no]]]),,
++ [enable_gtk_doc=no])
++
++ AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether to build gtk-doc documentation])
++ AC_MSG_RESULT($enable_gtk_doc)
++
++ if test "x$enable_gtk_doc" = "xyes" && test "$have_gtk_doc" = "no"; then
++ AC_MSG_ERROR([
++ You must have $gtk_doc_requires installed to build documentation for
++ $PACKAGE_NAME. Please install gtk-doc or disable building the
++ documentation by adding '--disable-gtk-doc' to '[$]0'.])
++ fi
++
++ dnl don't check for glib if we build glib
++ if test "x$PACKAGE_NAME" != "xglib"; then
++ dnl don't fail if someone does not have glib
++ PKG_CHECK_MODULES(GTKDOC_DEPS, glib-2.0 >= 2.10.0 gobject-2.0 >= 2.10.0,,[:])
++ fi
++
++ dnl enable/disable output formats
++ AC_ARG_ENABLE([gtk-doc-html],
++ AS_HELP_STRING([--enable-gtk-doc-html],
++ [build documentation in html format [[default=yes]]]),,
++ [enable_gtk_doc_html=yes])
++ AC_ARG_ENABLE([gtk-doc-pdf],
++ AS_HELP_STRING([--enable-gtk-doc-pdf],
++ [build documentation in pdf format [[default=no]]]),,
++ [enable_gtk_doc_pdf=no])
++
++ if test -z "$GTKDOC_MKPDF"; then
++ enable_gtk_doc_pdf=no
++ fi
++
++ if test -z "$AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY"; then
++ AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY=1
++ fi
++ AC_SUBST([AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY])
++
++ AM_CONDITIONAL([HAVE_GTK_DOC], [test x$have_gtk_doc = xyes])
++ AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], [test x$enable_gtk_doc = xyes])
++ AM_CONDITIONAL([GTK_DOC_BUILD_HTML], [test x$enable_gtk_doc_html = xyes])
++ AM_CONDITIONAL([GTK_DOC_BUILD_PDF], [test x$enable_gtk_doc_pdf = xyes])
++ AM_CONDITIONAL([GTK_DOC_USE_LIBTOOL], [test -n "$LIBTOOL"])
++ AM_CONDITIONAL([GTK_DOC_USE_REBASE], [test -n "$GTKDOC_REBASE"])
++])
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- mode: makefile -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc.make - make rules for gtk-doc
++# Copyright (C) 2003 James Henstridge
++# 2004-2007 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007-2017 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
++
++####################################
++# Everything below here is generic #
++####################################
++
++if GTK_DOC_USE_LIBTOOL
++GTKDOC_CC = $(LIBTOOL) --tag=CC --mode=compile $(CC) $(INCLUDES) $(GTKDOC_DEPS_CFLAGS) $(AM_CPPFLAGS) $(CPPFLAGS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_LD = $(LIBTOOL) --tag=CC --mode=link $(CC) $(GTKDOC_DEPS_LIBS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(AM_LDFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_RUN = $(LIBTOOL) --mode=execute
++else
++GTKDOC_CC = $(CC) $(INCLUDES) $(GTKDOC_DEPS_CFLAGS) $(AM_CPPFLAGS) $(CPPFLAGS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_LD = $(CC) $(GTKDOC_DEPS_LIBS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(AM_LDFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_RUN =
++endif
++
++# We set GPATH here; this gives us semantics for GNU make
++# which are more like other make's VPATH, when it comes to
++# whether a source that is a target of one rule is then
++# searched for in VPATH/GPATH.
++#
++GPATH = $(srcdir)
++
++TARGET_DIR=$(HTML_DIR)/$(DOC_MODULE)
++
++SETUP_FILES = \
++ $(content_files) \
++ $(expand_content_files) \
++ $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt
++
++EXTRA_DIST = \
++ $(HTML_IMAGES) \
++ $(SETUP_FILES)
++
++DOC_STAMPS=setup-build.stamp scan-build.stamp sgml-build.stamp \
++ html-build.stamp pdf-build.stamp \
++ sgml.stamp html.stamp pdf.stamp
++
++SCANOBJ_FILES = \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).args \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).hierarchy \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).interfaces \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).prerequisites \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).signals
++
++REPORT_FILES = \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-undocumented.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-undeclared.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-unused.txt
++
++gtkdoc-check.test: Makefile
++ $(AM_V_GEN)echo "#!/bin/sh -e" > $@; \
++ echo "$(GTKDOC_CHECK_PATH) || exit 1" >> $@; \
++ chmod +x $@
++
++CLEANFILES = $(SCANOBJ_FILES) $(REPORT_FILES) $(DOC_STAMPS) gtkdoc-check.test
++
++if GTK_DOC_BUILD_HTML
++HTML_BUILD_STAMP=html-build.stamp
++else
++HTML_BUILD_STAMP=
++endif
++if GTK_DOC_BUILD_PDF
++PDF_BUILD_STAMP=pdf-build.stamp
++else
++PDF_BUILD_STAMP=
++endif
++
++all-gtk-doc: $(HTML_BUILD_STAMP) $(PDF_BUILD_STAMP)
++.PHONY: all-gtk-doc
++
++if ENABLE_GTK_DOC
++all-local: all-gtk-doc
++endif
++
++docs: $(HTML_BUILD_STAMP) $(PDF_BUILD_STAMP)
++
++$(REPORT_FILES): sgml-build.stamp
++
++#### setup ####
++
++GTK_DOC_V_SETUP=$(GTK_DOC_V_SETUP_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_SETUP_=$(GTK_DOC_V_SETUP_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_SETUP_0=@echo " DOC Preparing build";
++
++setup-build.stamp:
++ -$(GTK_DOC_V_SETUP)if test "$(abs_srcdir)" != "$(abs_builddir)" ; then \
++ files=`echo $(SETUP_FILES) $(DOC_MODULE).types`; \
++ if test "x$$files" != "x" ; then \
++ for file in $$files ; do \
++ destdir=`dirname $(abs_builddir)/$$file`; \
++ test -d "$$destdir" || mkdir -p "$$destdir"; \
++ test -f $(abs_srcdir)/$$file && \
++ cp -pf $(abs_srcdir)/$$file $(abs_builddir)/$$file || true; \
++ done; \
++ fi; \
++ fi
++ $(AM_V_at)touch setup-build.stamp
++
++#### scan ####
++
++GTK_DOC_V_SCAN=$(GTK_DOC_V_SCAN_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_SCAN_=$(GTK_DOC_V_SCAN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_SCAN_0=@echo " DOC Scanning header files";
++
++GTK_DOC_V_INTROSPECT=$(GTK_DOC_V_INTROSPECT_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_INTROSPECT_=$(GTK_DOC_V_INTROSPECT_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_INTROSPECT_0=@echo " DOC Introspecting gobjects";
++
++scan-build.stamp: setup-build.stamp $(HFILE_GLOB) $(CFILE_GLOB)
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_SCAN)_source_dir='' ; \
++ for i in $(DOC_SOURCE_DIR) ; do \
++ _source_dir="$${_source_dir} --source-dir=$$i" ; \
++ done ; \
++ gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --ignore-headers="$(IGNORE_HFILES)" $${_source_dir} $(SCAN_OPTIONS) $(EXTRA_HFILES)
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_INTROSPECT)if grep -l '^..*$$' $(DOC_MODULE).types > /dev/null 2>&1 ; then \
++ scanobj_options=""; \
++ gtkdoc-scangobj 2>&1 --help | grep >/dev/null "\-\-verbose"; \
++ if test "$$?" = "0"; then \
++ if test "x$(V)" = "x1"; then \
++ scanobj_options="--verbose"; \
++ fi; \
++ fi; \
++ CC="$(GTKDOC_CC)" LD="$(GTKDOC_LD)" RUN="$(GTKDOC_RUN)" CFLAGS="$(GTKDOC_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS)" LDFLAGS="$(GTKDOC_LIBS) $(LDFLAGS)" \
++ gtkdoc-scangobj $(SCANGOBJ_OPTIONS) $$scanobj_options --module=$(DOC_MODULE); \
++ else \
++ for i in $(SCANOBJ_FILES) ; do \
++ test -f $$i || touch $$i ; \
++ done \
++ fi
++ $(AM_V_at)touch scan-build.stamp
++
++$(DOC_MODULE)-decl.txt $(SCANOBJ_FILES) $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt: scan-build.stamp
++ @true
++
++#### xml ####
++
++GTK_DOC_V_XML=$(GTK_DOC_V_XML_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_XML_=$(GTK_DOC_V_XML_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_XML_0=@echo " DOC Building XML";
++
++sgml-build.stamp: setup-build.stamp $(DOC_MODULE)-decl.txt $(SCANOBJ_FILES) $(HFILE_GLOB) $(CFILE_GLOB) $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt $(expand_content_files) xml/gtkdocentities.ent
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_XML)_source_dir='' ; \
++ for i in $(DOC_SOURCE_DIR) ; do \
++ _source_dir="$${_source_dir} --source-dir=$$i" ; \
++ done ; \
++ gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --expand-content-files="$(expand_content_files)" --main-sgml-file=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $${_source_dir} $(MKDB_OPTIONS)
++ $(AM_V_at)touch sgml-build.stamp
++
++sgml.stamp: sgml-build.stamp
++ @true
++
++$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE): sgml-build.stamp
++ @true
++
++xml/gtkdocentities.ent: Makefile
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_XML)$(MKDIR_P) $(@D) && ( \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package \"$(PACKAGE)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_bugreport \"$(PACKAGE_BUGREPORT)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_name \"$(PACKAGE_NAME)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_string \"$(PACKAGE_STRING)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_tarname \"$(PACKAGE_TARNAME)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_url \"$(PACKAGE_URL)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_version \"$(PACKAGE_VERSION)\">"; \
++ ) > $@
++
++#### html ####
++
++GTK_DOC_V_HTML=$(GTK_DOC_V_HTML_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_HTML_=$(GTK_DOC_V_HTML_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_HTML_0=@echo " DOC Building HTML";
++
++GTK_DOC_V_XREF=$(GTK_DOC_V_XREF_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_XREF_=$(GTK_DOC_V_XREF_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_XREF_0=@echo " DOC Fixing cross-references";
++
++html-build.stamp: sgml.stamp $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $(content_files) $(expand_content_files)
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_HTML)rm -rf html && mkdir html && \
++ mkhtml_options=""; \
++ gtkdoc-mkhtml 2>&1 --help | grep >/dev/null "\-\-verbose"; \
++ if test "$$?" = "0"; then \
++ if test "x$(V)" = "x1"; then \
++ mkhtml_options="$$mkhtml_options --verbose"; \
++ fi; \
++ fi; \
++ gtkdoc-mkhtml 2>&1 --help | grep >/dev/null "\-\-path"; \
++ if test "$$?" = "0"; then \
++ mkhtml_options="$$mkhtml_options --path=\"$(abs_srcdir)\""; \
++ fi; \
++ cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $$mkhtml_options $(MKHTML_OPTIONS) $(DOC_MODULE) ../$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)
++ -@test "x$(HTML_IMAGES)" = "x" || \
++ for file in $(HTML_IMAGES) ; do \
++ test -f $(abs_srcdir)/$$file && cp $(abs_srcdir)/$$file $(abs_builddir)/html; \
++ test -f $(abs_builddir)/$$file && cp $(abs_builddir)/$$file $(abs_builddir)/html; \
++ test -f $$file && cp $$file $(abs_builddir)/html; \
++ done;
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_XREF)gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html --html-dir=$(HTML_DIR) $(FIXXREF_OPTIONS)
++ $(AM_V_at)touch html-build.stamp
++
++#### pdf ####
++
++GTK_DOC_V_PDF=$(GTK_DOC_V_PDF_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_PDF_=$(GTK_DOC_V_PDF_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_PDF_0=@echo " DOC Building PDF";
++
++pdf-build.stamp: sgml.stamp $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $(content_files) $(expand_content_files)
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_PDF)rm -f $(DOC_MODULE).pdf && \
++ mkpdf_options=""; \
++ gtkdoc-mkpdf 2>&1 --help | grep >/dev/null "\-\-verbose"; \
++ if test "$$?" = "0"; then \
++ if test "x$(V)" = "x1"; then \
++ mkpdf_options="$$mkpdf_options --verbose"; \
++ fi; \
++ fi; \
++ if test "x$(HTML_IMAGES)" != "x"; then \
++ for img in $(HTML_IMAGES); do \
++ part=`dirname $$img`; \
++ echo $$mkpdf_options | grep >/dev/null "\-\-imgdir=$$part "; \
++ if test $$? != 0; then \
++ mkpdf_options="$$mkpdf_options --imgdir=$$part"; \
++ fi; \
++ done; \
++ fi; \
++ gtkdoc-mkpdf --path="$(abs_srcdir)" $$mkpdf_options $(DOC_MODULE) $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $(MKPDF_OPTIONS)
++ $(AM_V_at)touch pdf-build.stamp
++
++##############
++
++clean-local:
++ @rm -f *~ *.bak
++ @rm -rf .libs
++ @if echo $(SCAN_OPTIONS) | grep -q "\-\-rebuild-types" ; then \
++ rm -f $(DOC_MODULE).types; \
++ fi
++ @if echo $(SCAN_OPTIONS) | grep -q "\-\-rebuild-sections" ; then \
++ rm -f $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt; \
++ fi
++
++distclean-local:
++ @rm -rf xml html $(REPORT_FILES) $(DOC_MODULE).pdf \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-decl-list.txt $(DOC_MODULE)-decl.txt
++ @if test "$(abs_srcdir)" != "$(abs_builddir)" ; then \
++ rm -f $(SETUP_FILES) $(DOC_MODULE).types; \
++ fi
++
++maintainer-clean-local:
++ @rm -rf xml html
++
++install-data-local:
++ @installfiles=`echo $(builddir)/html/*`; \
++ if test "$$installfiles" = '$(builddir)/html/*'; \
++ then echo 1>&2 'Nothing to install' ; \
++ else \
++ if test -n "$(DOC_MODULE_VERSION)"; then \
++ installdir="$(DESTDIR)$(TARGET_DIR)-$(DOC_MODULE_VERSION)"; \
++ else \
++ installdir="$(DESTDIR)$(TARGET_DIR)"; \
++ fi; \
++ $(mkinstalldirs) $${installdir} ; \
++ for i in $$installfiles; do \
++ echo ' $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$i ; \
++ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$i $${installdir}; \
++ done; \
++ if test -n "$(DOC_MODULE_VERSION)"; then \
++ mv -f $${installdir}/$(DOC_MODULE).devhelp2 \
++ $${installdir}/$(DOC_MODULE)-$(DOC_MODULE_VERSION).devhelp2; \
++ fi; \
++ $(GTKDOC_REBASE) --relative --dest-dir=$(DESTDIR) --html-dir=$${installdir}; \
++ fi
++
++uninstall-local:
++ @if test -n "$(DOC_MODULE_VERSION)"; then \
++ installdir="$(DESTDIR)$(TARGET_DIR)-$(DOC_MODULE_VERSION)"; \
++ else \
++ installdir="$(DESTDIR)$(TARGET_DIR)"; \
++ fi; \
++ rm -rf $${installdir}
++
++#
++# Require gtk-doc when making dist
++#
++if HAVE_GTK_DOC
++dist-check-gtkdoc: docs
++else
++dist-check-gtkdoc:
++ @echo "*** gtk-doc is needed to run 'make dist'. ***"
++ @echo "*** gtk-doc was not found when 'configure' ran. ***"
++ @echo "*** please install gtk-doc and rerun 'configure'. ***"
++ @false
++endif
++
++dist-hook: dist-check-gtkdoc all-gtk-doc dist-hook-local
++ @mkdir $(distdir)/html
++ @cp ./html/* $(distdir)/html
++ @-cp ./$(DOC_MODULE).pdf $(distdir)/
++ @-cp ./$(DOC_MODULE).types $(distdir)/
++ @-cp ./$(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt $(distdir)/
++ @cd $(distdir) && rm -f $(DISTCLEANFILES)
++ @$(GTKDOC_REBASE) --online --relative --html-dir=$(distdir)/html
++
++.PHONY : dist-hook-local docs
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- mode: makefile -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc.make - make rules for gtk-doc
++# Copyright (C) 2003 James Henstridge
++# 2004-2007 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007-2017 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
++
++####################################
++# Everything below here is generic #
++####################################
++
++if GTK_DOC_USE_LIBTOOL
++GTKDOC_CC = $(LIBTOOL) --tag=CC --mode=compile $(CC) $(INCLUDES) $(GTKDOC_DEPS_CFLAGS) $(AM_CPPFLAGS) $(CPPFLAGS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_LD = $(LIBTOOL) --tag=CC --mode=link $(CC) $(GTKDOC_DEPS_LIBS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(AM_LDFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_RUN = $(LIBTOOL) --mode=execute
++else
++GTKDOC_CC = $(CC) $(INCLUDES) $(GTKDOC_DEPS_CFLAGS) $(AM_CPPFLAGS) $(CPPFLAGS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_LD = $(CC) $(GTKDOC_DEPS_LIBS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(AM_LDFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_RUN =
++endif
++
++# We set GPATH here; this gives us semantics for GNU make
++# which are more like other make's VPATH, when it comes to
++# whether a source that is a target of one rule is then
++# searched for in VPATH/GPATH.
++#
++GPATH = $(srcdir)
++
++TARGET_DIR=$(HTML_DIR)/$(DOC_MODULE)
++
++SETUP_FILES = \
++ $(content_files) \
++ $(expand_content_files) \
++ $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt
++
++EXTRA_DIST = \
++ $(HTML_IMAGES) \
++ $(SETUP_FILES)
++
++DOC_STAMPS=setup-build.stamp scan-build.stamp sgml-build.stamp \
++ html-build.stamp pdf-build.stamp \
++ sgml.stamp html.stamp pdf.stamp
++
++SCANOBJ_FILES = \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).args \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).hierarchy \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).interfaces \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).prerequisites \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).signals
++
++REPORT_FILES = \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-undocumented.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-undeclared.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-unused.txt
++
++gtkdoc-check.test: Makefile
++ $(AM_V_GEN)echo "#!/bin/sh -e" > $@; \
++ echo "$(GTKDOC_CHECK_PATH) || exit 1" >> $@; \
++ chmod +x $@
++
++CLEANFILES = $(SCANOBJ_FILES) $(REPORT_FILES) $(DOC_STAMPS) gtkdoc-check.test
++
++if GTK_DOC_BUILD_HTML
++HTML_BUILD_STAMP=html-build.stamp
++else
++HTML_BUILD_STAMP=
++endif
++if GTK_DOC_BUILD_PDF
++PDF_BUILD_STAMP=pdf-build.stamp
++else
++PDF_BUILD_STAMP=
++endif
++
++all-gtk-doc: $(HTML_BUILD_STAMP) $(PDF_BUILD_STAMP)
++.PHONY: all-gtk-doc
++
++if ENABLE_GTK_DOC
++all-local: all-gtk-doc
++endif
++
++docs: $(HTML_BUILD_STAMP) $(PDF_BUILD_STAMP)
++
++$(REPORT_FILES): sgml-build.stamp
++
++#### setup ####
++
++GTK_DOC_V_SETUP=$(GTK_DOC_V_SETUP_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_SETUP_=$(GTK_DOC_V_SETUP_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_SETUP_0=@echo " DOC Preparing build";
++
++setup-build.stamp:
++ -$(GTK_DOC_V_SETUP)if test "$(abs_srcdir)" != "$(abs_builddir)" ; then \
++ files=`echo $(SETUP_FILES) $(DOC_MODULE).types`; \
++ if test "x$$files" != "x" ; then \
++ for file in $$files ; do \
++ destdir=`dirname $(abs_builddir)/$$file`; \
++ test -d "$$destdir" || mkdir -p "$$destdir"; \
++ test -f $(abs_srcdir)/$$file && \
++ cp -pf $(abs_srcdir)/$$file $(abs_builddir)/$$file || true; \
++ done; \
++ fi; \
++ fi
++ $(AM_V_at)touch setup-build.stamp
++
++#### scan ####
++
++GTK_DOC_V_SCAN=$(GTK_DOC_V_SCAN_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_SCAN_=$(GTK_DOC_V_SCAN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_SCAN_0=@echo " DOC Scanning header files";
++
++GTK_DOC_V_INTROSPECT=$(GTK_DOC_V_INTROSPECT_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_INTROSPECT_=$(GTK_DOC_V_INTROSPECT_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_INTROSPECT_0=@echo " DOC Introspecting gobjects";
++
++scan-build.stamp: setup-build.stamp $(HFILE_GLOB) $(CFILE_GLOB)
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_SCAN)_source_dir='' ; \
++ for i in $(DOC_SOURCE_DIR) ; do \
++ _source_dir="$${_source_dir} --source-dir=$$i" ; \
++ done ; \
++ gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --ignore-headers="$(IGNORE_HFILES)" $${_source_dir} $(SCAN_OPTIONS) $(EXTRA_HFILES)
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_INTROSPECT)if grep -l '^..*$$' $(DOC_MODULE).types > /dev/null 2>&1 ; then \
++ scanobj_options=""; \
++ gtkdoc-scangobj 2>&1 --help | grep >/dev/null "\-\-verbose"; \
++ if test "$$?" = "0"; then \
++ if test "x$(V)" = "x1"; then \
++ scanobj_options="--verbose"; \
++ fi; \
++ fi; \
++ CC="$(GTKDOC_CC)" LD="$(GTKDOC_LD)" RUN="$(GTKDOC_RUN)" CFLAGS="$(GTKDOC_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS)" LDFLAGS="$(GTKDOC_LIBS) $(LDFLAGS)" \
++ gtkdoc-scangobj $(SCANGOBJ_OPTIONS) $$scanobj_options --module=$(DOC_MODULE); \
++ else \
++ for i in $(SCANOBJ_FILES) ; do \
++ test -f $$i || touch $$i ; \
++ done \
++ fi
++ $(AM_V_at)touch scan-build.stamp
++
++$(DOC_MODULE)-decl.txt $(SCANOBJ_FILES) $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt: scan-build.stamp
++ @true
++
++#### xml ####
++
++GTK_DOC_V_XML=$(GTK_DOC_V_XML_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_XML_=$(GTK_DOC_V_XML_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_XML_0=@echo " DOC Building XML";
++
++sgml-build.stamp: setup-build.stamp $(DOC_MODULE)-decl.txt $(SCANOBJ_FILES) $(HFILE_GLOB) $(CFILE_GLOB) $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt $(expand_content_files) xml/gtkdocentities.ent
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_XML)_source_dir='' ; \
++ for i in $(DOC_SOURCE_DIR) ; do \
++ _source_dir="$${_source_dir} --source-dir=$$i" ; \
++ done ; \
++ gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --expand-content-files="$(expand_content_files)" --main-sgml-file=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $${_source_dir} $(MKDB_OPTIONS)
++ $(AM_V_at)touch sgml-build.stamp
++
++sgml.stamp: sgml-build.stamp
++ @true
++
++$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE): sgml-build.stamp
++ @true
++
++xml/gtkdocentities.ent: Makefile
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_XML)$(MKDIR_P) $(@D) && ( \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package \"$(PACKAGE)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_bugreport \"$(PACKAGE_BUGREPORT)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_name \"$(PACKAGE_NAME)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_string \"$(PACKAGE_STRING)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_tarname \"$(PACKAGE_TARNAME)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_url \"$(PACKAGE_URL)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_version \"$(PACKAGE_VERSION)\">"; \
++ ) > $@
++
++#### html ####
++
++GTK_DOC_V_HTML=$(GTK_DOC_V_HTML_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_HTML_=$(GTK_DOC_V_HTML_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_HTML_0=@echo " DOC Building HTML";
++
++html-build.stamp: sgml.stamp $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $(content_files) $(expand_content_files)
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_HTML)rm -rf html && mkdir html && \
++ mkhtml_options="--path=\"$(abs_srcdir)\""; \
++ if test "x$(V)" = "x1"; then \
++ mkhtml_options="$$mkhtml_options --verbose"; \
++ fi; \
++ cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml2 $$mkhtml_options $(MKHTML_OPTIONS) $(FIXXREF_OPTIONS) $(DOC_MODULE) ../$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)
++ -@test "x$(HTML_IMAGES)" = "x" || \
++ for file in $(HTML_IMAGES) ; do \
++ test -f $(abs_srcdir)/$$file && cp $(abs_srcdir)/$$file $(abs_builddir)/html; \
++ test -f $(abs_builddir)/$$file && cp $(abs_builddir)/$$file $(abs_builddir)/html; \
++ test -f $$file && cp $$file $(abs_builddir)/html; \
++ done;
++ $(AM_V_at)touch html-build.stamp
++
++#### pdf ####
++
++GTK_DOC_V_PDF=$(GTK_DOC_V_PDF_@AM_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_PDF_=$(GTK_DOC_V_PDF_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
++GTK_DOC_V_PDF_0=@echo " DOC Building PDF";
++
++pdf-build.stamp: sgml.stamp $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $(content_files) $(expand_content_files)
++ $(GTK_DOC_V_PDF)rm -f $(DOC_MODULE).pdf && \
++ mkpdf_options=""; \
++ gtkdoc-mkpdf 2>&1 --help | grep >/dev/null "\-\-verbose"; \
++ if test "$$?" = "0"; then \
++ if test "x$(V)" = "x1"; then \
++ mkpdf_options="$$mkpdf_options --verbose"; \
++ fi; \
++ fi; \
++ if test "x$(HTML_IMAGES)" != "x"; then \
++ for img in $(HTML_IMAGES); do \
++ part=`dirname $$img`; \
++ echo $$mkpdf_options | grep >/dev/null "\-\-imgdir=$$part "; \
++ if test $$? != 0; then \
++ mkpdf_options="$$mkpdf_options --imgdir=$$part"; \
++ fi; \
++ done; \
++ fi; \
++ gtkdoc-mkpdf --path="$(abs_srcdir)" $$mkpdf_options $(DOC_MODULE) $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $(MKPDF_OPTIONS)
++ $(AM_V_at)touch pdf-build.stamp
++
++##############
++
++clean-local:
++ @rm -f *~ *.bak
++ @rm -rf .libs
++ @if echo $(SCAN_OPTIONS) | grep -q "\-\-rebuild-types" ; then \
++ rm -f $(DOC_MODULE).types; \
++ fi
++ @if echo $(SCAN_OPTIONS) | grep -q "\-\-rebuild-sections" ; then \
++ rm -f $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt; \
++ fi
++
++distclean-local:
++ @rm -rf xml html $(REPORT_FILES) $(DOC_MODULE).pdf \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-decl-list.txt $(DOC_MODULE)-decl.txt
++ @if test "$(abs_srcdir)" != "$(abs_builddir)" ; then \
++ rm -f $(SETUP_FILES) $(DOC_MODULE).types; \
++ fi
++
++maintainer-clean-local:
++ @rm -rf xml html
++
++install-data-local:
++ @installfiles=`echo $(builddir)/html/*`; \
++ if test "$$installfiles" = '$(builddir)/html/*'; \
++ then echo 1>&2 'Nothing to install' ; \
++ else \
++ if test -n "$(DOC_MODULE_VERSION)"; then \
++ installdir="$(DESTDIR)$(TARGET_DIR)-$(DOC_MODULE_VERSION)"; \
++ else \
++ installdir="$(DESTDIR)$(TARGET_DIR)"; \
++ fi; \
++ $(mkinstalldirs) $${installdir} ; \
++ for i in $$installfiles; do \
++ echo ' $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$i ; \
++ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$i $${installdir}; \
++ done; \
++ if test -n "$(DOC_MODULE_VERSION)"; then \
++ mv -f $${installdir}/$(DOC_MODULE).devhelp2 \
++ $${installdir}/$(DOC_MODULE)-$(DOC_MODULE_VERSION).devhelp2; \
++ fi; \
++ $(GTKDOC_REBASE) --relative --dest-dir=$(DESTDIR) --html-dir=$${installdir}; \
++ fi
++
++uninstall-local:
++ @if test -n "$(DOC_MODULE_VERSION)"; then \
++ installdir="$(DESTDIR)$(TARGET_DIR)-$(DOC_MODULE_VERSION)"; \
++ else \
++ installdir="$(DESTDIR)$(TARGET_DIR)"; \
++ fi; \
++ rm -rf $${installdir}
++
++#
++# Require gtk-doc when making dist
++#
++if HAVE_GTK_DOC
++dist-check-gtkdoc: docs
++else
++dist-check-gtkdoc:
++ @echo "*** gtk-doc is needed to run 'make dist'. ***"
++ @echo "*** gtk-doc was not found when 'configure' ran. ***"
++ @echo "*** please install gtk-doc and rerun 'configure'. ***"
++ @false
++endif
++
++dist-hook: dist-check-gtkdoc all-gtk-doc dist-hook-local
++ @mkdir $(distdir)/html
++ @cp ./html/* $(distdir)/html
++ @-cp ./$(DOC_MODULE).pdf $(distdir)/
++ @-cp ./$(DOC_MODULE).types $(distdir)/
++ @-cp ./$(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt $(distdir)/
++ @cd $(distdir) && rm -f $(DISTCLEANFILES)
++ @$(GTKDOC_REBASE) --online --relative --html-dir=$(distdir)/html
++
++.PHONY : dist-hook-local docs
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/bin/sh
++
++progname=`echo "$0" | sed 's%^.*/%%'`
++
++PROGRAM=gtkdocize
++PACKAGE=@PACKAGE@
++VERSION=@VERSION@
++
++prefix=@prefix@
++datarootdir=@datarootdir@
++datadir=@datadir@
++
++# options
++copy=no
++makefile=gtk-doc.make
++flavour=no-tmpl
++
++# mini help
++usage="\
++usage: $progname [ --copy ] [ --docdir DIR ] [ --flavour {legacy|legacy-flat|no-tmpl|no-tmpl-flat|no-xslt|no-xslt-flat} ] [ --srcdir DIR ]"
++
++# Find the srcdir early (and ignore a srcdir set in configure).
++# https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=707426
++args="$*"
++while test $# -gt 0; do
++ case "$1" in
++ --srcdir)
++ shift
++ srcdir="$1"
++ shift ;;
++ --srcdir=*)
++ srcdir=`expr "X$1" : '[^=]*=\(.*\)'`
++ shift ;;
++ *)
++ shift ;;
++ esac
++done
++set - $args
++
++# assume working directory if srcdir is not set
++test "$srcdir" || srcdir=.
++test "$docdir" || docdir="$srcdir"
++
++# detect configure script
++no_configure_found=0
++if test -f "$srcdir"/configure.ac; then
++ configure="$srcdir"/configure.ac
++elif test -f "$srcdir"/configure.in; then
++ configure="$srcdir"/configure.in
++else
++ no_configure_found=1
++fi
++
++# check configure script for GTK_DOC_CHECK macro
++no_gtk_doc_check_found=0
++if test $no_configure_found -eq 0; then
++ macro=`grep '^GTK_DOC_CHECK' $configure 2>/dev/null`
++ if test $? -eq 0; then
++ # GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])
++ params=`echo $macro | sed -e 's/^GTK_DOC_CHECK(\ *\(.*\)).*$/\1/'`
++ if echo $params | grep -q '^.*\,\ *\[\{0,1\}'; then
++ extra_options=`echo $params | sed -e 's/^.*\,\ *\[\{0,1\}\([^]]*\)\]\{0,1\}\ *$/\1/'`
++ #echo >&2 "DEBUG: adding extra options [$extra_options] to [$*]"
++ set - $* $GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS $extra_options
++ else
++ set - $* $GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS
++ fi
++ else
++ no_gtk_doc_check_found=1;
++ fi
++fi
++
++while test $# -gt 0; do
++ #echo >&2 "DEBUG: parsing args [$1]";
++ case "$1" in
++ --help)
++ echo "$usage"
++ exit 0 ;;
++ --version)
++ echo "$PROGRAM ($PACKAGE) $VERSION"
++ exit 0 ;;
++ --copy)
++ copy=yes
++ shift ;;
++ --docdir)
++ shift
++ docdir="$1"
++ shift ;;
++ --docdir=*)
++ docdir=`expr "X$1" : '[^=]*=\(.*\)'`
++ shift ;;
++ --flavour)
++ shift
++ flavour="$1"
++ shift ;;
++ --flavour=*)
++ flavour=`expr "X$1" : '[^=]*=\(.*\)'`
++ shift ;;
++ --srcdir)
++ shift
++ # srcdir was set earlier.
++ shift ;;
++ --srcdir=*)
++ # srcdir was set earlier.
++ shift ;;
++ -*)
++ echo "$progname: unrecognised option '$1'" 1>&2
++ echo "$usage" 1>&2
++ exit 1 ;;
++ *)
++ echo "$progname: too many arguments" 1>&2
++ echo "$usage" 1>&2
++ exit 1 ;;
++ esac
++done
++
++case "$flavour" in
++ legacy-flat|no-tmpl-flat)
++ makefile=gtk-doc.flat.make
++ ;;
++ no-xslt)
++ makefile=gtk-doc.no-xslt.make
++ ;;
++ no-xslt-flat)
++ makefile=gtk-doc.no-xslt-flat.make
++ ;;
++ legacy|no-tmpl)
++ ;;
++ *)
++ echo "$progname: invalid value for --flavour" 1>&2
++ echo "$usage" 1>&2
++ exit 1 ;;
++esac
++
++if test $no_configure_found -eq 1; then
++ echo "$progname: neither configure.ac nor configure.in exist" 1>&2
++ exit 1
++fi
++if test $no_gtk_doc_check_found -eq 1; then
++ echo "$progname: GTK_DOC_CHECK not called in $configure" 1>&2
++ exit 1
++fi
++
++# If the AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR() macro is used, copy gtk-doc.m4 from our
++# prefix to that directory. This makes sure that the M4 macro used
++# matches the the automake fragment.
++# If AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR is not used, the macro won't be copied, and
++# the correct flags must be passed to aclocal for it to find the macro.
++m4dir="$srcdir"/`autoconf 2>/dev/null --trace 'AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR:$1' "$configure"`
++if test -n "$m4dir"; then
++ rm -f $m4dir/gtk-doc.m4
++ if test "$copy" = yes; then
++ cp -f $datadir/aclocal/gtk-doc.m4 $m4dir/ ||
++ exit 1
++ else
++ ln -sf $datadir/aclocal/gtk-doc.m4 $m4dir/ ||
++ cp -f $datadir/aclocal/gtk-doc.m4 $m4dir/ ||
++ exit 1
++ fi
++fi
++
++rm -f $docdir/gtk-doc.make
++if test "$copy" = yes; then
++ cp -f $datadir/gtk-doc/data/$makefile $docdir/gtk-doc.make ||
++ exit 1
++else
++ ln -sf $datadir/gtk-doc/data/$makefile $docdir/gtk-doc.make ||
++ cp -f $datadir/gtk-doc/data/$makefile $docdir/gtk-doc.make ||
++ exit 1
++fi
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++configure_file(
++ input: 'gtkdocize.in',
++ output: 'gtkdocize',
++ configuration: binary_in,
++ install: true,
++ install_dir: bindir,
++)
++
++custom_target(
++ 'gtk-doc.flat.make',
++ input: 'gtk-doc.make',
++ output: 'gtk-doc.flat.make',
++ install: true,
++ install_dir: pkgdatadir,
++ capture: true,
++ command: [
++ 'sed',
++ '-e',
++ 's/EXTRA_DIST =/EXTRA_DIST +=/',
++ '@INPUT@',
++ ]
++)
++
++custom_target(
++ 'gtk-doc.m4',
++ input: 'gtk-doc.m4',
++ output: 'gtk-doc.m4',
++ install: true,
++ install_dir: autoconfdatadir,
++ command: [
++ 'cp',
++ '-f',
++ '@INPUT@',
++ '@OUTPUT@',
++ ],
++)
++
++install_data(
++ ['gtk-doc.make'],
++ install_dir: pkgdatadir,
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# CMake macros to use the GtkDoc documentation system
++#
++# See the GTK-Doc manual (help/manual/C/index.docbook) for an example of how to
++# use this.
++
++# Output variables:
++#
++# GTKDOC_FOUND ... set to 1
++#
++# GTKDOC_SCAN_EXE ... the location of the gtkdoc-scan executable
++# GTKDOC_SCANGOBJ_EXE ... the location of the gtkdoc-scangobj executable
++# GTKDOC_MKDB_EXE ... the location of the gtkdoc-mkdb executable
++# GTKDOC_MKHTML_EXE ... the location of the gtkdoc-mkhtml executable
++# GTKDOC_FIXXREF_EXE ... the location of the gtkdoc-fixxref executable
++
++
++#=============================================================================
++# Copyright 2009 Rich Wareham
++# Copyright 2015 Lautsprecher Teufel GmbH
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
++#=============================================================================
++
++include(CMakeParseArguments)
++
++set(GTKDOC_FOUND 1)
++
++find_program(GTKDOC_SCAN_EXE gtkdoc-scan)
++find_program(GTKDOC_SCANGOBJ_EXE gtkdoc-scangobj)
++find_program(GTKDOC_MKDB_EXE gtkdoc-mkdb)
++find_program(GTKDOC_MKHTML_EXE gtkdoc-mkhtml)
++find_program(GTKDOC_FIXXREF_EXE gtkdoc-fixxref)
++
++get_filename_component(_this_dir ${CMAKE_CURRENT_LIST_FILE} PATH)
++find_file(GTKDOC_SCANGOBJ_WRAPPER GtkDocScanGObjWrapper.cmake PATH ${_this_dir})
++
++# ::
++#
++# gtk_doc_add_module(doc_prefix
++# SOURCE <sourcedir> [...]
++# XML xmlfile
++# [LIBRARIES depend1...]
++# [FIXXREFOPTS fixxrefoption1...]
++# [IGNOREHEADERS header1...]
++# [CONTENT_FILES example1...]
++# [SCANOPTS scanoption1...]
++# [SCANOBJOPTS scanobjoption1...]
++# [MKDBOPTS mkdboption1...]
++# [HTMLOPTS htmloption1...])
++#
++# Add a module with documentation to be processed with GTK-Doc.
++#
++# <sourcedir> must be the *full* path to the source directory.
++#
++# If omitted, xmlfile defaults to the auto generated ${doc_prefix}/${doc_prefix}-docs.xml.
++#
++# The `gtkdoc-scangobj` program is used to get introspection information for
++# the module. You should pass the target(s) to be scanned as LIRARIES. This
++# will try to set the correct compiler and link flags for the introspection
++# build to use, and the correct LD_LIBRARY_PATH for it to run, and the correct
++# dependencies for the doc target.
++#
++# You *can* also set the compile and link flags manually, using the 'CFLAGS'
++# and 'LDFLAGS' options. The 'LDPATH' option controls the LD_LIBRARY_PATH. You
++# can also manually add additional targets as dependencies of the
++# documentation build with the DEPENDS option.
++#
++# The 'CONTENT_FILES' option is here to copy the files extending the documentation
++# such as exemples and custom xml files.
++#
++# The 'SCANOPTS' option is here to pass arguments to 'gtkdoc-scan'
++# The 'SCANOBJOPTS' option is here to pass arguments to 'gtkdoc-scangobj'
++# The 'MKDBOPTS' option is here to pass arguments to 'gtkdoc-mkdb'
++# The 'HTMLOPTS' option is here to pass arguments to 'gtkdoc-mkhtml'
++#
++# This function a target named "doc-${doc_prefix}". You will need to manually
++# add it to the ALL target if you want it to be built by default, you can do
++# something like this:
++#
++# gtk_doc_add_module(doc-mymodule
++# SOURCE ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/module ${CMAKE_BINARY_DIR}/module
++# LIBRARIES mylibrary
++# LIBRARY_DIRS ${GLIB_LIBRARY_DIRS} ${FOO_LIBRARY_DIRS}
++# add_custom_target(all-documentation ALL)
++# add_dependencies(all-documentation doc-mymodule)
++#
++function(gtk_doc_add_module _doc_prefix)
++ set(_one_value_args "XML")
++ set(_multi_value_args "FIXXREFOPTS" "IGNOREHEADERS" "LIBRARIES" "LIBRARY_DIRS" "SOURCE" "SUFFIXES"
++ "CFLAGS" "DEPENDS" "LDFLAGS" "LDPATH" "CONTENT_FILES" "SCANOPTS" "SCANOBJOPTS"
++ "MKDBOPTS" "HTMLOPTS")
++ cmake_parse_arguments("GTK_DOC" "" "${_one_value_args}" "${_multi_value_args}" ${ARGN})
++
++ if(NOT GTK_DOC_SOURCE)
++ message(FATAL_ERROR "No SOURCE specified for gtk_doc_add_module ${_doc_prefix}")
++ endif()
++
++ set(_xml_file ${GTK_DOC_XML})
++
++ set(_fixxrefopts ${GTK_DOC_FIXXREFOPTS})
++ set(_ignore_headers ${GTK_DOC_IGNOREHEADERS})
++ set(_libraries ${GTK_DOC_LIBRARIES})
++ set(_library_dirs ${GTK_DOC_LIBRARY_DIRS})
++ set(_suffixes ${GTK_DOC_SUFFIXES})
++
++ set(_content_files ${GTK_DOC_CONTENT_FILES})
++ set(_scanopts ${GTK_DOC_SCANOPTS})
++ set(_scanobjopts ${GTK_DOC_SCANOBJOPTS})
++ set(_mkdbopts ${GTK_DOC_MKDBOPTS})
++ set(_htmlopts ${GTK_DOC_HTMLOPTS})
++
++ set(_extra_cflags ${GTK_DOC_CFLAGS})
++ set(_depends ${GTK_DOC_DEPENDS})
++ set(_extra_ldflags ${GTK_DOC_LDFLAGS})
++ set(_extra_ldpath ${GTK_DOC_LDPATH})
++
++ if(_suffixes)
++ set(_doc_source_suffixes "")
++ foreach(_suffix ${_suffixes})
++ if(_doc_source_suffixes)
++ set(_doc_source_suffixes "${_doc_source_suffixes},${_suffix}")
++ else(_doc_source_suffixes)
++ set(_doc_source_suffixes "${_suffix}")
++ endif(_doc_source_suffixes)
++ endforeach(_suffix)
++ else(_suffixes)
++ set(_doc_source_suffixes "h")
++ endif(_suffixes)
++
++ # Parse the LIBRARIES option and collect compile and link flags for those
++ # targets.
++ foreach(target ${_libraries})
++ _gtk_doc_get_cflags_for_target(_target_cflags ${target})
++ _gtk_doc_get_ldflags_for_target(_target_ldflags ${target} "${_libraries}")
++ list(APPEND _extra_cflags ${_target_cflags})
++ list(APPEND _extra_ldflags ${_target_ldflags})
++ list(APPEND _extra_ldpath $<TARGET_FILE_DIR:${target}>)
++
++ list(APPEND _depends ${target})
++ endforeach()
++
++ # Link directories can't be specified per target, only for every target
++ # under a given directory.
++ get_property(all_library_directories DIRECTORY PROPERTY LINK_DIRECTORIES)
++ foreach(library_dir ${all_library_directories})
++ list(APPEND _extra_ldflags ${CMAKE_LIBRARY_PATH_FLAG}${library_dir})
++ list(APPEND _extra_ldpath ${library_dir})
++ endforeach()
++
++ list(REMOVE_DUPLICATES _extra_cflags)
++ list(SORT _extra_cflags)
++
++ list(REMOVE_DUPLICATES _extra_ldflags)
++ list(SORT _extra_ldflags)
++
++ list(REMOVE_DUPLICATES _extra_ldpath)
++ list(SORT _extra_ldpath)
++
++ # a directory to store output.
++ set(_output_dir "${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}")
++ set(_output_dir_stamp "${_output_dir}/dir.stamp")
++
++ # set default sgml file if not specified
++ set(_default_xml_file "${_output_dir}/${_doc_prefix}-docs.xml")
++ get_filename_component(_default_xml_file ${_default_xml_file} ABSOLUTE)
++
++ # a directory to store html output.
++ set(_output_html_dir "${_output_dir}/html")
++ set(_output_html_dir_stamp "${_output_dir}/html_dir.stamp")
++
++ # The output files
++ set(_output_decl_list "${_output_dir}/${_doc_prefix}-decl-list.txt")
++ set(_output_decl "${_output_dir}/${_doc_prefix}-decl.txt")
++ set(_output_overrides "${_output_dir}/${_doc_prefix}-overrides.txt")
++ set(_output_sections "${_output_dir}/${_doc_prefix}-sections.txt")
++ set(_output_types "${_output_dir}/${_doc_prefix}.types")
++
++ set(_output_signals "${_output_dir}/${_doc_prefix}.signals")
++
++ set(_output_unused "${_output_dir}/${_doc_prefix}-unused.txt")
++ set(_output_undeclared "${_output_dir}/${_doc_prefix}-undeclared.txt")
++ set(_output_undocumented "${_output_dir}/${_doc_prefix}-undocumented.txt")
++
++ set(_output_xml_dir "${_output_dir}/xml")
++ set(_output_sgml_stamp "${_output_dir}/sgml.stamp")
++
++ set(_output_html_stamp "${_output_dir}/html.stamp")
++
++ # we depend on the content files being there before doing anything
++ if(_content_files)
++ list(APPEND _depends ${_content_files})
++ endif(_content_files)
++
++ # add a command to create output directory
++ add_custom_command(
++ OUTPUT "${_output_dir_stamp}" "${_output_dir}"
++ COMMAND ${CMAKE_COMMAND} -E make_directory "${_output_dir}"
++ COMMAND ${CMAKE_COMMAND} -E touch ${_output_dir_stamp}
++ VERBATIM)
++
++ set(_ignore_headers_opt "")
++ if(_ignore_headers)
++ set(_ignore_headers_opt "--ignore-headers=")
++ foreach(_header ${_ignore_headers})
++ set(_ignore_headers_opt "${_ignore_headers_opt}${_header} ")
++ endforeach(_header ${_ignore_headers})
++ endif(_ignore_headers)
++
++ foreach(source_dir ${GTK_DOC_SOURCE})
++ set(_source_dirs_opt ${_source_dirs_opt} --source-dir=${source_dir})
++ endforeach()
++
++ # add a command to scan the input
++ add_custom_command(
++ OUTPUT
++ "${_output_decl_list}"
++ "${_output_decl}"
++ "${_output_overrides}"
++ "${_output_sections}"
++ "${_output_types}"
++ DEPENDS
++ "${_output_dir_stamp}"
++ ${_depends}
++ COMMAND
++ ${GTKDOC_SCAN_EXE}
++ --module=${_doc_prefix}
++ ${_ignore_headers_opt}
++ ${_source_dirs_opt}
++ --rebuild-sections
++ --rebuild-types
++ ${_scanopts}
++ WORKING_DIRECTORY ${_output_dir}
++ VERBATIM)
++
++ # add a command to scan the input via gtkdoc-scangobj
++ # This is such a disgusting hack!
++ add_custom_command(
++ OUTPUT
++ ${_output_signals}
++ DEPENDS
++ ${_output_types}
++ COMMAND ${CMAKE_COMMAND}
++ -D "GTKDOC_SCANGOBJ_EXE:STRING=${GTKDOC_SCANGOBJ_EXE}"
++ -D "_scanobjopts:STRING=${_scanobjopts}"
++ -D "doc_prefix:STRING=${_doc_prefix}"
++ -D "output_types:STRING=${_output_types}"
++ -D "output_dir:STRING=${_output_dir}"
++ -D "EXTRA_CFLAGS:STRING=${_extra_cflags}"
++ -D "EXTRA_LDFLAGS:STRING=${_extra_ldflags}"
++ -D "EXTRA_LDPATH:STRING=${_extra_ldpath}"
++ -P ${GTKDOC_SCANGOBJ_WRAPPER}
++ WORKING_DIRECTORY "${_output_dir}"
++ VERBATIM)
++
++ set(_copy_xml_if_needed "")
++ if(_xml_file)
++ get_filename_component(_xml_file ${_xml_file} ABSOLUTE)
++ set(_copy_xml_if_needed
++ COMMAND ${CMAKE_COMMAND} -E copy "${_xml_file}" "${_default_xml_file}")
++ endif(_xml_file)
++
++ set(_remove_xml_if_needed "")
++ if(_xml_file)
++ set(_remove_xml_if_needed
++ COMMAND ${CMAKE_COMMAND} -E remove ${_default_xml_file})
++ endif(_xml_file)
++
++ set(_copy_content_files_if_needed "")
++ if(_content_files)
++ foreach(_content_file ${_content_files})
++ # We need to copy the content files to the build directory.
++ # We respect the folder tree if the file comes from the current
++ # source or binary directory but copy the file to the current binary
++ # directory if it comes from somewhere else.
++ get_filename_component(_content_file ${_content_file} ABSOLUTE)
++ string(REGEX MATCH "^${CMAKE_CURRENT_SOURCE_DIR}" _is_in_source ${_content_file})
++ string(REGEX MATCH "^${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}" _is_in_binary ${_content_file})
++ if (_is_in_source OR _is_in_binary)
++ if(_is_in_source)
++ file(RELATIVE_PATH _content_file_relative ${CMAKE_CURRENT_SOURCE_DIR} ${_content_file})
++ else(_is_in_source)
++ file(RELATIVE_PATH _content_file_relative ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR} ${_content_file})
++ endif(_is_in_source)
++ set(_content_file_destination
++ "${_output_dir}/${_content_file_relative}")
++ else(_is_in_source OR _is_in_binary)
++ get_filename_component(_content_file_name ${_content_file} NAME)
++ set(_content_file_destination
++ "${_output_dir}/${_content_file_name}")
++ endif(_is_in_source OR _is_in_binary)
++ get_filename_component(_content_file_destination ${_content_file_destination} ABSOLUTE)
++ if(NOT ${_content_file_destination} EQUAL ${_content_file})
++ set(_copy_content_files_if_needed
++ ${_copy_content_files_if_needed}
++ COMMAND ${CMAKE_COMMAND} -E copy "${_content_file}" "${_content_file_destination}")
++ endif(NOT ${_content_file_destination} EQUAL ${_content_file})
++ endforeach(_content_file)
++ endif(_content_files)
++
++ # add a command to make the database
++ add_custom_command(
++ OUTPUT
++ ${_output_sgml_stamp}
++ ${_default_xml_file}
++ DEPENDS
++ ${_output_types}
++ ${_output_signals}
++ ${_output_sections}
++ ${_output_overrides}
++ ${_depends}
++ ${_remove_xml_if_needed}
++ COMMAND ${CMAKE_COMMAND} -E remove_directory ${_output_xml_dir}
++ ${_copy_xml_if_needed}
++ ${_copy_content_files_if_needed}
++ COMMAND ${GTKDOC_MKDB_EXE}
++ --module=${_doc_prefix}
++ ${_source_dirs_opt}
++ --source-suffixes=${_doc_source_suffixes}
++ --output-format=xml
++ --main-sgml-file=${_default_xml_file}
++ ${_mkdbopts}
++ WORKING_DIRECTORY "${_output_dir}"
++ VERBATIM)
++
++ # add a command to create html directory
++ add_custom_command(
++ OUTPUT "${_output_html_dir_stamp}" "${_output_html_dir}"
++ COMMAND ${CMAKE_COMMAND} -E make_directory ${_output_html_dir}
++ COMMAND ${CMAKE_COMMAND} -E touch ${_output_html_dir_stamp}
++ VERBATIM)
++
++ # add a command to output HTML
++ add_custom_command(
++ OUTPUT
++ ${_output_html_stamp}
++ DEPENDS
++ ${_output_html_dir_stamp}
++ ${_output_sgml_stamp}
++ ${_xml_file}
++ ${_depends}
++ ${_copy_xml_if_needed}
++ # The binary dir needs adding to --path in order for mkhtml to pick up
++ # any version.xml file there might be in there
++ COMMAND
++ cd ${_output_html_dir} && ${GTKDOC_MKHTML_EXE}
++ ${_doc_prefix}
++ ${_default_xml_file}
++ ${_htmlopts}
++ COMMAND
++ cd ${_output_dir} && ${GTKDOC_FIXXREF_EXE}
++ --module=${_doc_prefix}
++ --module-dir=${_output_html_dir}
++ ${_fixxrefopts}
++ COMMENT
++ "Generating HTML documentation for ${_doc_prefix} module with gtkdoc-mkhtml"
++ VERBATIM)
++
++ add_custom_target(doc-${_doc_prefix}
++ DEPENDS "${_output_html_stamp}")
++endfunction(gtk_doc_add_module)
++
++# These two functions reimplement some of the core logic of CMake, in order
++# to generate compiler and linker flags from the relevant target properties.
++# It sucks that we have to do this, but CMake's own code for this doesn't seem
++# to be reusable -- there's no way to say "tell me the flags that you would
++# pass to a linker for this target".
++
++function(_gtk_doc_get_cflags_for_target result_var target)
++ get_target_property(target_definitions ${target} COMPILE_DEFINITIONS)
++ if(target_definitions)
++ foreach(target_definition ${target_definitions})
++ # We need to prepend -D to the definition flag
++ list(APPEND cflags -D${target_definition})
++ endforeach()
++ endif()
++
++ get_target_property(target_options ${target} COMPILE_OPTIONS)
++ if(target_options)
++ list(APPEND cflags ${target_options})
++ endif()
++
++ get_target_property(target_include_dirs ${target} INCLUDE_DIRECTORIES)
++ foreach(target_include_dir ${target_include_dirs})
++ list(APPEND cflags -I${target_include_dir})
++ endforeach()
++
++ list(REMOVE_DUPLICATES cflags)
++ list(SORT cflags)
++
++ set(${result_var} ${cflags} PARENT_SCOPE)
++endfunction()
++
++function(_gtk_doc_get_ldflags_for_target result_var target all_targets)
++ get_target_property(target_link_flags ${target} LINK_FLAGS)
++ if(target_link_flags)
++ list(APPEND ldflags ${target_link_flags})
++ endif()
++
++ get_target_property(target_link_libraries ${target} LINK_LIBRARIES)
++ foreach(target_library ${target_link_libraries})
++ # The IN_LIST operator is new in CMake 3.3, so I've tried to avoid using it.
++ list(FIND all_targets ${target_library} target_library_is_explicit_dependency)
++ if(NOT ${target_library_is_explicit_dependency} EQUAL -1)
++ # This target is part of the current project. We will add it to
++ # LDFLAGS explicitly, so don't try to add it as well.
++ # In fact, we can't do that, as the containing directory
++ # probably won't be in the linker search path, and we can't find
++ # that out and add it ourselves.
++ else()
++ list(APPEND ldflags "${target_library}")
++ endif()
++ endforeach()
++
++ # Link in the actual target, as well.
++ list(APPEND ldflags $<TARGET_FILE:${target}>)
++
++ list(REMOVE_DUPLICATES ldflags)
++ list(SORT ldflags)
++
++ set(${result_var} ${ldflags} PARENT_SCOPE)
++endfunction()
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# CMake package version configuration file for GTK-Doc.
++
++set(PACKAGE_VERSION @PACKAGE_VERSION@)
++
++# Check whether the requested PACKAGE_FIND_VERSION is compatible
++if("${PACKAGE_VERSION}" VERSION_LESS "${PACKAGE_FIND_VERSION}")
++ set(PACKAGE_VERSION_COMPATIBLE FALSE)
++else()
++ set(PACKAGE_VERSION_COMPATIBLE TRUE)
++ if ("${PACKAGE_VERSION}" VERSION_EQUAL "${PACKAGE_FIND_VERSION}")
++ set(PACKAGE_VERSION_EXACT TRUE)
++ endif()
++endif()
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# Internal -- for use with UseGtkDoc.cmake
++#
++#=============================================================================
++# Copyright 2009 Rich Wareham
++# Copyright 2015 Lautsprecher Teufel GmbH
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
++#=============================================================================
++
++# This is needed for find_package(PkgConfig) to work correctly --
++# CMAKE_MINIMUM_REQUIRED_VERSION needs to be defined.
++cmake_minimum_required(VERSION 3.2)
++
++if(NOT APPLE)
++ # We use pkg-config to find glib et al
++ find_package(PkgConfig)
++ # Find glib et al
++ pkg_check_modules(GLIB REQUIRED glib-2.0 gobject-2.0)
++
++foreach(_flag ${EXTRA_CFLAGS} ${GLIB_CFLAGS})
++ set(ENV{CFLAGS} "$ENV{CFLAGS} '${_flag}'")
++endforeach(_flag)
++
++foreach(_flag ${EXTRA_LDFLAGS} ${GLIB_LDFLAGS})
++ set(ENV{LDFLAGS} "$ENV{LDFLAGS} '${_flag}'")
++endforeach(_flag)
++
++foreach(_flag ${EXTRA_LDPATH})
++ if(DEFINED ENV{LD_LIBRARY_PATH})
++ set(ENV{LD_LIBRARY_PATH} "$ENV{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:${_flag}")
++ else(DEFINED ENV{LD_LIBRARY_PATH})
++ set(ENV{LD_LIBRARY_PATH} "${_flag}")
++ endif(DEFINED ENV{LD_LIBRARY_PATH})
++endforeach(_flag)
++
++message(STATUS "Executing gtkdoc-scangobj with:")
++message(STATUS " CFLAGS: $ENV{CFLAGS}")
++message(STATUS " LDFLAGS: $ENV{LDFLAGS}")
++message(STATUS " LDPATH: $ENV{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}")
++
++execute_process(COMMAND ${GTKDOC_SCANGOBJ_EXE}
++ "--module=${doc_prefix}"
++ "--types=${output_types}"
++ "--output-dir=${output_dir}"
++ ${_scanobjopts}
++ WORKING_DIRECTORY "${output_dir}"
++ RESULT_VARIABLE _scan_result)
++
++if(_scan_result EQUAL 0)
++ message(STATUS "Scan succeeded.")
++else(_scan_result EQUAL 0)
++ message(SEND_ERROR "Scan failed.")
++endif(_scan_result EQUAL 0)
++
++endif(NOT APPLE)
++
++# vim:sw=4:ts=4:et:autoindent
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++EXTRA_DIST = \
++ GtkDocConfig.cmake \
++ GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake.in \
++ GtkDocScanGObjWrapper.cmake
++
++CLEANFILES = \
++ GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake
++
++cmakedir = $(datadir)/cmake/GtkDoc
++cmake_DATA = \
++ GtkDocConfig.cmake \
++ GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake \
++ GtkDocScanGObjWrapper.cmake
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++cmake_in = configuration_data()
++cmake_in.set('PACKAGE_VERSION', version)
++
++configure_file(
++ input: 'GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake.in',
++ output: 'GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake',
++ configuration: cmake_in,
++ install: true,
++ install_dir: join_paths(
++ cmakedatadir,
++ 'GtkDoc',
++ )
++)
++
++gtkdoc_cmake_data = [
++ 'GtkDocConfig.cmake',
++ 'GtkDocScanGObjWrapper.cmake',
++]
++
++install_data(
++ gtkdoc_cmake_data,
++ install_dir: join_paths(
++ cmakedatadir,
++ 'GtkDoc',
++ )
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++dnl Process this file with autoconf to produce a configure script.
++AC_PREREQ([2.63])
++
++dnl We're using a two digit number for the releases and
++dnl a three digit number for the development version
++m4_define(gtk_doc_version, 1.32.1)
++
++AC_INIT([gtk-doc],[gtk_doc_version],[https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/issues],[gtk-doc])
++
++AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR([m4])
++AC_CONFIG_SRCDIR([gtk-doc.pc.in])
++AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR([build-aux])
++
++AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE([1.11 check-news std-options -Wno-portability tar-ustar no-dist-gzip dist-xz])
++AM_MAINTAINER_MODE([enable])
++
++# Support silent build rules, requires at least automake-1.11. Disable
++# by either passing --disable-silent-rules to configure or passing V=1
++# to make
++AM_SILENT_RULES([yes])
++
++# Check for programs
++AC_PROG_CC
++
++# Initialize libtool
++LT_PREREQ([2.2])
++LT_INIT
++
++dnl Make sure we have pkg-config >= 0.19, so installing in $(datadir) is OK.
++PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG([0.19])
++
++dnl
++dnl Check for Python.
++dnl
++AM_PATH_PYTHON([3.2])
++
++dnl
++dnl Check for xsltproc
++dnl
++AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])
++if test -z "$XSLTPROC"; then
++ AC_MSG_ERROR([xsltproc not found])
++fi
++
++dnl
++dnl Check for dblatex/fop (for pdf output)
++dnl
++AC_PATH_PROG([DBLATEX], [dblatex])
++if test -z "$DBLATEX"; then
++ AC_PATH_PROG([FOP], [fop])
++ if test -z "$FOP"; then
++ AC_MSG_WARN([neither dblatex nor fop found, so no pdf output from xml])
++ fi
++fi
++
++dnl check for DocBook DTD and stylesheets in the local catalog.
++JH_CHECK_XML_CATALOG([-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN], [DocBook XML DTD V4.3])
++JH_CHECK_XML_CATALOG([http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/html/chunk.xsl], [DocBook XSL Stylesheets])
++
++dnl
++dnl Set runtime package dirs so we can find the script containing common routines.
++dnl
++dnl From Autoconf Macro Archive:
++m4_define([AC_DEFINE_DIR], [
++ prefix_NONE=
++ exec_prefix_NONE=
++ test "x$prefix" = xNONE && prefix_NONE=yes && prefix=$ac_default_prefix
++ test "x$exec_prefix" = xNONE && exec_prefix_NONE=yes && exec_prefix=$prefix
++ eval ac_define_dir="\"[$]$2\""
++ eval ac_define_dir="\"$ac_define_dir\""
++ AC_SUBST($1, "$ac_define_dir")
++ test "$prefix_NONE" && prefix=NONE
++ test "$exec_prefix_NONE" && exec_prefix=NONE
++])
++PACKAGE_DATA_DIR="${datadir}/${PACKAGE}/data"
++AC_DEFINE_DIR([PACKAGE_DATA_DIR], [PACKAGE_DATA_DIR])
++PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR="${datadir}/${PACKAGE}/python"
++AC_DEFINE_DIR([PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR], [PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR])
++
++dnl Only use -Wall if we have gcc
++if test "x$GCC" = "xyes"; then
++ if test -z "`echo "$CFLAGS" | grep "\-Wall" 2> /dev/null`" ; then
++ CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -Wall"
++ fi
++fi
++
++dnl if glib is available we can enable the tests
++PKG_CHECK_MODULES(TEST_DEPS, [glib-2.0 >= 2.6.0 gobject-2.0 >= 2.6.0],
++ [ glib_prefix="`$PKG_CONFIG --variable=prefix glib-2.0`"
++ gtk_doc_use_libtool="yes"
++ build_tests="yes"
++ ],
++ [ gtk_doc_use_libtool="no"
++ build_tests="no"
++ ]
++)
++AM_CONDITIONAL(GTK_DOC_USE_LIBTOOL, test -n "$LIBTOOL" -a x$gtk_doc_use_libtool = xyes )
++dnl this enables the rule in test/Makefile.am
++AM_CONDITIONAL(BUILD_TESTS, test x$build_tests = xyes)
++AC_SUBST(glib_prefix)
++
++dnl enable runtime debugging code
++AC_MSG_CHECKING(whether to enable runtime debugging code)
++AC_ARG_ENABLE([debug],
++ AS_HELP_STRING([--enable-debug],
++ [enable runtime debugging code (default=no)]),,
++ [enable_debug="no"])
++AC_MSG_RESULT($enable_debug)
++
++dnl check what date format we can use for the makefile tracing in tests
++dnl this is mostly to detect the date command on macosx that is quite cripled
++dnl and broken too
++AC_MSG_CHECKING(whether date can output nanoseconds)
++date +%s.%N | grep -q 'N'
++if test "$?" = "1"; then
++ TS_FMT="+%s.%N"
++ ELAPSED_FMT="+%H:%M:%S.%N"
++ AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
++else
++ TS_FMT="+%s.0"
++ ELAPSED_FMT="+%H:%M:%S"
++ AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
++fi
++AC_SUBST(TS_FMT)
++AC_SUBST(ELAPSED_FMT)
++
++AC_MSG_CHECKING(whether date can format dates)
++date >/dev/null 2>&1 --utc --date @1.1 $ELAPSED_FMT
++if test "$?" = "0"; then
++ DATE_FMT_CMD="date --utc $ELAPSED_FMT --date @0"
++ AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
++else
++ DATE_FMT_CMD="echo "
++ AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
++fi
++AC_SUBST(DATE_FMT_CMD)
++
++dnl
++dnl Documentation
++dnl
++AC_MSG_CHECKING([for yelp-tools])
++have_yelp_tools=no
++m4_ifdef([YELP_HELP_INIT],[
++AC_MSG_RESULT([yes])
++YELP_HELP_INIT
++have_yelp_tools=yes
++])
++if test "x$have_yelp_tools" != "xyes"; then
++ AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
++fi
++AM_CONDITIONAL([HAVE_YELP_TOOLS],[test x$have_yelp_tools = xyes])
++
++dnl
++dnl Python modules
++dnl
++AX_PYTHON_MODULE("pygments")
++
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([Makefile
++gtk-doc.pc
++buildsystems/autotools/Makefile
++buildsystems/cmake/Makefile
++buildsystems/cmake/GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake
++gtkdoc/config_data.py
++help/Makefile
++help/manual/Makefile
++tests/Makefile
++tests/annotations/Makefile
++tests/annotations/src/Makefile
++tests/annotations/docs/Makefile
++tests/bugs/Makefile
++tests/bugs/src/Makefile
++tests/bugs/docs/Makefile
++tests/empty/Makefile
++tests/empty/src/Makefile
++tests/empty/docs/Makefile
++tests/fail/Makefile
++tests/fail/src/Makefile
++tests/fail/docs/Makefile
++tests/gobject/Makefile
++tests/gobject/src/Makefile
++tests/gobject/docs/Makefile
++tests/program/Makefile
++tests/program/src/Makefile
++tests/program/docs/Makefile
++tests/repro/Makefile
++tests/repro/src/Makefile
++tests/repro/docs/Makefile
++])
++
++dnl run chmod on these after parsing them.
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([gtkdoc-check], [chmod +x gtkdoc-check])
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([gtkdoc-depscan], [chmod +x gtkdoc-depscan])
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([gtkdoc-fixxref], [chmod +x gtkdoc-fixxref])
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([gtkdoc-mkdb], [chmod +x gtkdoc-mkdb])
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([gtkdoc-mkhtml], [chmod +x gtkdoc-mkhtml])
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([gtkdoc-mkhtml2], [chmod +x gtkdoc-mkhtml2])
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([gtkdoc-mkman], [chmod +x gtkdoc-mkman])
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([gtkdoc-mkpdf], [chmod +x gtkdoc-mkpdf])
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([gtkdoc-rebase], [chmod +x gtkdoc-rebase])
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([gtkdoc-scan], [chmod +x gtkdoc-scan])
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([gtkdoc-scangobj], [chmod +x gtkdoc-scangobj])
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([buildsystems/autotools/gtkdocize], [chmod +x buildsystems/autotools/gtkdocize])
++AC_CONFIG_FILES([tests/tools.sh], [chmod +x tests/tools.sh])
++AC_OUTPUT
++
++AC_MSG_NOTICE([
++gtk-doc was configured with the following options:
++==================================================])
++
++test -n "$DBLATEX$FOP" \
++ && AC_MSG_NOTICE([** PDF support enabled, using $DBLATEX$FOP]) \
++ || AC_MSG_NOTICE([ PDF support disabled, no dblatex or fop available])
++test "x$build_tests" != "xno" \
++ && AC_MSG_NOTICE([** Building regression tests]) \
++ || AC_MSG_NOTICE([ Skipping regression tests])
++test "x$enable_debug" != "xno" \
++ && AC_MSG_NOTICE([** Debug tracing enabled]) \
++ || AC_MSG_NOTICE([ Debug tracing disabled])
++test "x$have_yelp_tools" != "xno" \
++ && AC_MSG_NOTICE([** Documentation enabled]) \
++ || AC_MSG_NOTICE([ Documentation disabled])
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
++<!--
++get http://xml.fiforms.org/xs3p/ and generate docs
++xsltproc -o devhelp2.xsd.html $HOME/download/xs3p-1.1.3/xs3p.xsl devhelp2.xsd
++-->
++<xsd:schema
++ xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema"
++ targetNamespace="http://www.devhelp.net/book"
++ xmlns="http://www.devhelp.net/book"
++ elementFormDefault="qualified">
++
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Devhelp2 files are use in the 'devhelp' documentation browser.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++
++ <xsd:simpleType name="keyword-type">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Known keyword types.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:restriction base="xsd:string">
++ <xsd:enumeration value="constant"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="enum"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="function"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="macro"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="member"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="property"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="signal"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="struct"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="typedef"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="union"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="variable"/>
++ </xsd:restriction>
++ </xsd:simpleType>
++
++ <xsd:simpleType name="language-type">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Known programming languages.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:restriction base="xsd:string">
++ <xsd:enumeration value="c"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="c++"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="c#"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="java"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="javascript"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="perl"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="python"/>
++ <xsd:enumeration value="vala"/>
++ </xsd:restriction>
++ </xsd:simpleType>
++
++
++ <xsd:element name="sub">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Sub tags for the hierarchy of the chapters and parts.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:complexType>
++ <xsd:sequence>
++ <xsd:element ref="sub" minOccurs="0" maxOccurs="unbounded"/>
++ </xsd:sequence>
++ <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required"/>
++ <xsd:attribute name="link" type="xsd:string" use="required"/>
++ </xsd:complexType>
++ </xsd:element>
++
++ <xsd:element name="chapters">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ The chapters tag encloses the structure of the reference manual. Each
++ sub unit is represented by a sub tag.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:complexType>
++ <xsd:sequence>
++ <xsd:element ref="sub" minOccurs="0" maxOccurs="unbounded"/>
++ </xsd:sequence>
++ </xsd:complexType>
++ </xsd:element>
++
++ <xsd:element name="keyword">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ The keyword tag points to the documentation of a api symbol.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:complexType>
++ <xsd:attribute name="type" type="keyword-type" use="required">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Type of the keyword.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Keyword name.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ <xsd:attribute name="link" type="xsd:string" use="required">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Relative link for the keyword.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ <xsd:attribute name="since" type="xsd:string">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Version since that the keyword is part of the API.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ <xsd:attribute name="deprecated" type="xsd:string">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Marks the keyword as deprecated.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ <xsd:attribute name="stability" type="xsd:string">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Document the stability status.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ </xsd:complexType>
++ </xsd:element>
++
++ <xsd:element name="functions">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ The functions tag encloses all api symbols of the reference manual. Each
++ sub unit is represented by a keyword tag.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:complexType>
++ <xsd:sequence>
++ <xsd:element ref="keyword" minOccurs="0" maxOccurs="unbounded"/>
++ </xsd:sequence>
++ </xsd:complexType>
++ </xsd:element>
++
++ <xsd:element name="book">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Toplevel element of a devhelp book. A devhelp book list the structure of
++ a developer manual together with development related metadata.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:complexType>
++ <xsd:sequence>
++ <xsd:element ref="chapters" minOccurs="1" maxOccurs="1"/>
++ <xsd:element ref="functions" minOccurs="1" maxOccurs="1"/>
++ </xsd:sequence>
++ <xsd:attribute name="title" type="xsd:string" use="required">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Title of the reference manual.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ <xsd:attribute name="link" type="xsd:string" use="required">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Entry point to the manual. Can be given as a relative path to the
++ location of the devhelp2 file.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ <xsd:attribute name="author" type="xsd:string" use="required">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Author of the document. Multiple authors are separated by ','.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Short name of the manual.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ <xsd:attribute name="version" type="xsd:integer" use="required">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Version of the devhelp xml specification (2).
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ <xsd:attribute name="language" type="language-type">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ Programming language this manual refers to.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ <xsd:attribute name="online" type="xsd:string">
++ <xsd:annotation>
++ <xsd:documentation>
++ URL for the online version of the docs.
++ </xsd:documentation>
++ </xsd:annotation>
++ </xsd:attribute>
++ </xsd:complexType>
++ </xsd:element>
++</xsd:schema>
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<?xml version='1.0'?> <!--*- mode: xml -*-->
++<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform"
++ version='1.0'
++ xmlns="http://www.devhelp.net/book"
++ xmlns:str="http://exslt.org/strings"
++ exclude-result-prefixes="str">
++
++ <xsl:template name="generate.devhelp2">
++ <xsl:call-template name="write.chunk">
++ <xsl:with-param name="filename">
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="$gtkdoc.bookname">
++ <xsl:value-of select="$gtkdoc.bookname"/>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:text>book</xsl:text>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:text>.devhelp2</xsl:text>
++ </xsl:with-param>
++ <xsl:with-param name="method" select="'xml'"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="indent" select="'yes'"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="encoding" select="'utf-8'"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="doctype-public"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="content">
++ <xsl:call-template name="devhelp2"/>
++ </xsl:with-param>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:variable name="gtkdoc.refsect2" select="//refsect2"/>
++
++ <xsl:template name="devhelp2">
++ <xsl:variable name="title">
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="." mode="generate.devhelp2.toc.title.mode"/>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:variable name="link">
++ <xsl:call-template name="href.target"/>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:variable name="author">
++ <xsl:if test="articleinfo|bookinfo">
++ <xsl:apply-templates mode="generate.devhelp2.authors"
++ select="articleinfo|bookinfo"/>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:variable name="online">
++ <xsl:value-of select="/book/bookinfo/releaseinfo/ulink[@role='online-location']/@url"/>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:variable name="toc.nodes" select="part|reference|preface|chapter|
++ appendix|article|bibliography|
++ glossary|index|refentry|
++ bridgehead|sect1"/>
++
++ <book title="{$title}" link="{$link}" author="{$author}" name="{$gtkdoc.bookname}" version="2" language="c">
++ <xsl:if test="$online != ''">
++ <xsl:attribute name="online"><xsl:value-of select="$online"/></xsl:attribute>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:if test="$toc.nodes">
++ <chapters>
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="$toc.nodes"
++ mode="generate.devhelp2.toc.mode"/>
++ </chapters>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <functions>
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="$gtkdoc.refsect2[@role]"
++ mode="generate.devhelp2.index.mode"/>
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="$gtkdoc.refsect2/refsect3[@role='enum_members']/informaltable/tgroup/tbody/row[@role='constant']"
++ mode="generate.devhelp2.index.mode"/>
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="$gtkdoc.refsect2/refsect3[@role='struct_members']/informaltable/tgroup/tbody/row[@role='member']"
++ mode="generate.devhelp2.index.mode"/>
++ </functions>
++ </book>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template match="*" mode="generate.devhelp2.toc.mode">
++ <xsl:variable name="title">
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="." mode="generate.devhelp2.toc.title.mode"/>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:variable name="target">
++ <xsl:variable name="anchor" select="title/anchor"/>
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="$anchor">
++ <xsl:call-template name="href.target">
++ <xsl:with-param name="object" select="$anchor"/>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:call-template name="href.target"/>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:variable>
++
++ <sub name="{$title}" link="{$target}">
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="section|sect1|
++ refentry|refsect|
++ bridgehead|part|chapter|glossary|index"
++ mode="generate.devhelp2.toc.mode"/>
++ </sub>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template match="*" mode="generate.devhelp2.index.mode">
++ <xsl:variable name="title" select="title|
++ term/literal|
++ entry[@role='enum_member_name']/para|
++ entry[@role='struct_member_name']/para/structfield/@id"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="anchor" select="title/anchor|
++ entry[@role='enum_member_name']/para|
++ entry[@role='struct_member_name']/para/structfield"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="type" select="@role"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="condition" select="@condition"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="target">
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="$anchor">
++ <xsl:call-template name="href.target">
++ <xsl:with-param name="object" select="$anchor"/>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:call-template name="href.target"/>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <keyword type="{$type}" name="{$title}" link="{$target}">
++ <xsl:if test="$condition">
++ <xsl:for-each select="str:split($condition,'|')">
++ <xsl:variable name="attrname">
++ <xsl:value-of select="substring-before(.,':')"/>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="string-length($attrname)=0">
++ <xsl:variable name="attrname2">
++ <xsl:value-of select="."/>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:attribute name="{$attrname2}"/>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:attribute name="{$attrname}">
++ <xsl:value-of select="substring-after(.,':')"/>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:for-each>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </keyword>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- get title -->
++ <xsl:template match="article" mode="generate.devhelp2.toc.title.mode">
++ <xsl:value-of select="articleinfo/title"/>
++ </xsl:template>
++ <xsl:template match="book" mode="generate.devhelp2.toc.title.mode">
++ <xsl:value-of select="bookinfo/title"/>
++ </xsl:template>
++ <xsl:template match="refentry" mode="generate.devhelp2.toc.title.mode">
++ <xsl:value-of select="refmeta/refentrytitle"/>
++ </xsl:template>
++ <xsl:template match="*" mode="generate.devhelp2.toc.title.mode">
++ <xsl:value-of select="title"/>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- generate list of authors ... -->
++ <xsl:template match="articleinfo|bookinfo" mode="generate.devhelp2.authors">
++ <xsl:for-each select="authorgroup/author">
++ <xsl:value-of select="firstname"/>
++ <xsl:text> </xsl:text>
++ <xsl:value-of select="surname"/>
++ <xsl:if test="not(last())">
++ <xsl:text>, </xsl:text>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </xsl:for-each>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++</xsl:stylesheet>
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++Note
++====
++
++There is now a user manual which can be read using yelp and can be found under
++'development'. Please refer to this documentation for up-to-date information.
++
++
++Files
++=====
++
++setting-up.txt
++ 5-step guide to setting up a module to use gtk-doc.
++
++gnome.txt
++ information on the source code comments format which the Gnome project
++ has just started to use.
++
++sections-file.txt
++ describes the MODULE-sections.txt file which is used to organise the
++ documentation.
++
++style-guide.txt
++ Initial draft of a style guide for writing GTK+ docs.
++
++authors.txt
++ notes for authors of the GTK documentation. The abbreviations to use,
++ a few useful DocBook tags etc.
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++Note
++====
++
++There is now a user manual which can be read using yelp and can be found under
++'development'. Please refer to this documentation for up-to-date information.
++
++
++General
++=======
++
++The files to edit manually are generated in the tmpl/ directory.
++Remember to use < or > instead of '<' and '>', in these files.
++
++The first part of each function/macro/struct etc. description should be
++a very short summary of what it is. This may be used at some point to
++produce a short reference guide which can be printed out.
++
++For macros which return a value just like a function, you must manually
++add a '@Returns: ' field.
++
++You may want to rearrange the functions/macros etc. to split them into
++related sections. To do this rearrange the MODULE-sections.txt
++files. You can also add <SUBSECTION> between functions. Currently this just
++results in a blank line between them in the synopsis.
++
++If a function or macro has a very long description, you may want the table
++of parameters to go somewhere in the middle rather than after the description
++as would normally happen. To place the table of parameters in the middle of
++the description simple write "<!--PARAMETERS-->" on its own line at the
++desired location.
++
++
++Abbreviations
++=============
++
++These are expanded into appropriate DocBook tags, saving a lot of typing.
++I've used the Gnome ones (see gnome.txt) but also added '#'.
++
++ Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments.
++
++ Use @param to refer to parameters. (I've also used this when referring to
++ parameters of other functions, related to the one being described.)
++
++ Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS.
++
++ Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums
++ and macros which don't take arguments.
++
++
++
++Useful DocBook Tags
++===================
++
++These are the DocBook tags which I have used or I think could be useful.
++Let me know if I'm doing something wrong!
++
++
++To link to another section in the GTK docs:
++
++ <link linkend="glib-Hash-Tables">Hash Tables</link>
++
++ The linkend is the SGML id on the top item of the page you want to link to.
++ For most pages this is currently the part ("gtk", "gdk", glib") and then
++ the page title ("Hash Tables"). For widgets it is just the class name.
++ Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML.
++
++
++To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function:
++
++ <function>...</function>
++
++
++To include example code:
++
++ <example>
++ <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>
++ <programlisting>
++ ...
++ </programlisting>
++ </example>
++
++ or possibly this, for very short code fragments which don't need a title:
++
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting>
++ ...
++ </programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++
++
++To include bulleted lists:
++
++ <itemizedlist>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ ...
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ ...
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++
++ </itemizedlist>
++
++
++To include a note which stands out from the text:
++
++ <note>
++ <para>
++ Make sure you free the data after use.
++ </para>
++ </note>
++
++To refer to a type:
++
++ <type>unsigned char</type>
++
++
++To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs):
++
++ <structname>XFontStruct</structname>
++
++
++To refer to a field of a structure:
++
++ <structfield>len</structfield>
++
++
++To refer to a class name, we could possibly use:
++
++ <classname>GtkWidget</classname>
++
++ but you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create
++ a link to the GtkWidget page - see the abbreviations above).
++
++
++To emphasize text:
++
++ <emphasis>This is important</emphasis>
++
++ but I haven't been using it so far.
++
++
++For filenames use:
++
++ <filename>c:\windows</filename>
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++= gtk-doc-1.X =
++This document attempts to reverse engineer some design decisions in
++gtk-doc-1.X.
++
++== sgml-ids ==
++When creating SGML IDS, we append ":CAPS" to all
++all-caps identifiers to prevent name clashes (SGML ids are case-insensitive).
++(It basically never is the case that mixed-case identifiers would collide.)
++
++Unfortunately we create ambiguous ids. The document structure ids are e.g.
++GtkWidget.{top_of_page,synopsis,object-hierarchy,...}
++and that is ambiguous with eventual structure member of the same name.
++
++cd tests
++find . -name "*.xml" -exec grep -o "id=\"[a-zA-Z_:.\-]*\"" {} \; | sort | uniq
++
++== section-ids ==
++gtk-doc differentiates between plain-sections and gobject-sections:
+++---------+----------------+
++| type | section-id |
+++---------+----------------+
++| plain | $module-$title |
++| gobject | $title |
+++---------+----------------+
++
++- links to #GtkWidget would go to $title
++- linking to the struct would need #GtkWidget-struct
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++= gtk-doc-2.X =
++This documents purpose is to collect what needs to be changed for a potential
++gtk-doc-2.X.
++
++== name ==
++Its not about Gtk. Its about C APIs with GObject support. But it is probably not
++worth it.
++g-doc, gapi-doc, gnome-api-doc, ...
++
++== remove and deprecate =
++- tree_index and object_index are still named *.sgml
++- in the makefiles
++ sgml-build.stamp -> db-build.stamp
++ sgml.stamp -> db.stamp
++
++== design fixes ==
++=== proper xml-id namespaces ===
++We need proper xml-id namespaces for document structure and symbols to avoid
++clashes e.g. between GtkWidget as a section and as a struct. Normal symbols
++should only be mangled to be a valid xml-id. Document structure ids should
++contain a prefix.
++
++These are the rules regarding id-attributes:
++
++http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id:
++"ID and NAME tokens must begin with a letter ([A-Za-z]) and may be followed by
++ any number of letters, digits ([0-9]), hyphens ("-"), underscores ("_"), colons
++ (":"), and periods (".")."
++
++http://www.w3.org/TR/xml-id/#id-avn
++"Attributes of type ID are subject to additional normalization rules: removing
++ leading and trailing space characters and replacing sequences of spaces with a
++ single space."
++
++http://www.w3.org/TR/xml11/#NT-Name
++http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-xml/#NT-Name
++
++So we could easily use "DOC:" as a prefix for document structure ids.
++In 1.x we add :CAPS as a suffix to avoid clashes between lower and uppercase
++constructs. XML-IDs are not case insensitive, so we don't need that.
++
++If the ID contain a ':' xml processors believe it is using a namespace.
++
++=== less files to maintain ===
++- one needs to maintain $module-docs.xml
++- in most cases $module-sections.txt need manual maintenance
++ - we could have a "Section:" tag for non-section comments to add them to a non
++ default section
++ - we could have a "Private_Symbols:" tag in section to list symbols that
++ should be in private subsection
++- the $module.types file need manual maintenance if one need special includes
++ - can we make the scanner smarter?
++
++=== srcdir != builddir builds ===
++- all tools get a search path
++ - it contains builddir:srcdir if those are different or just one of them if
++ they are the same
++ - all files we read are checked through the path
++ - all files are written based on the first entry
++
++=== build dependencies ===
++
++=== error/warning reporting ===
++- don't fail the build on doc-issues, instead fail the tests
++- all diagnostic output from the tools run during build in gcc style
++- instead of having -{undocumented,undeclared,unused}.txt have just one file
++ 'doc-module.log'
++ - contains all the build diagnostics as well
++ - summary as 'INFO' level
++- gtkdoc-check will scan that file for 'ERROR'/'WARNING' lines
++ - depending on the CHECK_OPTIONS and the found lines if will fail certain
++ tests
++
++- TODO
++ - recheck all output and check whether we need Warnings/Errors or just
++ Warnings and flags to silence them
++ - Do we need a way to suppress false positives?
++
++=== docbook -> markdown ===
++The main performance culprit is the use of docbook (tools). Also writing docbook
++in source comments is cumbersome. Finally the docbook toolchain is a heavy
++dependency and harms portability. We already support lots of markdown, so we'd
++like to have a pure markdown based workflow.
++
++For that we'd like to provide a migration path:
++- convert existing docbook files to markdown (e.g. using pandoc)
++- convert/identify comments using docbook to markdown
++
++Next we would replace gtkdoc-mkdb+gtkdoc-fixxref with gtkdoc-mkhtml2. This would
++output html directly.
++
++We could change gtkdoc-mkpdf to use wkhtmltopdf/htmldoc. For man-pages we
++can use https://rtomayko.github.io/ronn/ronn.1.html.
++The devhelp2 files would be output directly from gtkdoc-mkhtml2.
++
++We can enable this new toolchain via the configure flavors option (needs support
++for cmake, meson, ...).
++
++These would be the steps to do this:
++1.) [in progress] write the docbook comment migation tool:
++see tools: tools/db2md.py
++At the same time improve the amount of markdown we handle:
++* or _: <emphasis>
++** or __: <empahsis role="strong">
++but be careful with already existing '*' and '_' chars (check warnings in
++tools/db2md.py).
++
++2.) [unassigned] create the plumbing for the new tool chain
++Add the new makefile flavour to run gtkdoc-mkhtml2 instead. Add --flavour
++options for gtkdocize. Create a stub gtkdoc-mkhtml2 tool.
++
++3.) [in progress] refactor gtkdoc/mkdb.py to extract reusable code
++- gtkdoc/md_to_db.py
++ - only have the parse there
++
++4.) [unassigned] write gtkdoc/mkhtml2.py
++- select a template engine (e.g. jinja)
++- create templates from the current html for the various page types (refentry,
++ index, ...).
++- we won't need content_files and expand_content_files in Makefile.am, as
++ mkhtml2 would read $(DOC_MODULE)-docs.md (rename to index.md?) and find local
++ links in there
++- convert all hand-written md files starting from the main-doc to html
++
++Open Issues:
++wkhtmltopdf html/*.html tester2.pdf
++Error: This version of wkhtmltopdf is build against an unpatched version of QT, and does not support more then one input document.
++
++htmldoc --book --outfile tester2.pdf html/*.html
++- need to pass html files in the logical order
++- unicode issues (passing --charset utf-8 fails)
++- --link seems to create bad links (opens file-browser)
++- no css rendering :/
++
++pandoc -r docbook -w markdown_github -o tester-docs.md tester-docs.xml
++- pandoc has no xi:include support
++- if we pipe it through xmllint we convert everything.
++xmllint --noent --xinclude tester-docs.xml | pandoc -r docbook -w markdown -o tester-docs.md
++- the index.md would need to represent the structure the docbook chunker would
++ create
++
++gdbus-codegen:
++- add an option to generate markdown comments
++
++gstreamer plugindocs:
++- generate markdown formatted files
++
++=== only drop docbook-xsl ===
++Since the processing with docbook-xsl is what is slow, we could also consider to
++keep the whole gtkdoc-mkdb and have 2 codepaths in gtkdoc-mkhtml. The new code-
++path would real the docbook with element-tree, replicate the chunking that
++docbook-xsl does and use a templating system to generate the html files
++(e.g. jinja).
++
++This is probably easier to achieve, but has less potential in the long run (e.g.
++incremental doc updates).
++
++On the plus side, we can do rarely used output-formats (like pdf, man) the way
++we do them right now.
++
++These would be the steps to do this:
++1.) [done] write a the chunker
++- standalone tool to load the docbook xml and chunk it (just touch the resulting
++ *.html files) until we produce the same
++
++2.) [unassigned] transform some docbook to html
++- evaluate template engines
++ - jinja2:
++ - we can use the block syntax to handle nesting
++- we need to warn when not handling certain docbook
++
++3.) [unassigned] integrate this into the gtkdoc library
++- add an option to gtkgoc-mkhtml (e.g. --engine={xslt,builtin} or just --noxlst)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++Note
++====
++
++There is now a user manual which can be read using yelp and can be found under
++'development'. Please refer to this documentation for up-to-date information.
++
++
++HowTo
++=====
++
++These are the comment blocks used in Gnome source files to document
++functions (and macros, signals and properties, if you want).
++
++/**
++ * function_name:
++ * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than
++ * one line.
++ * @par2: description of parameter 2
++ *
++ * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters
++ * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant
++ * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to
++ * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).
++ *
++ * Returns: an integer.
++ */
++
++The block starts with '/**'.
++Each line starts with ' * '.
++
++The second line is the function name, optionally followed by a ':'. In
++order to document signals in inline comments, use a name of the form
++class::signal, e.g. GtkWidget::notify-child. For properties, use a
++name of the form class:property, e.g. GtkAlignment:top-padding. Note
++that gtk-doc expects the signal and property names to be spelled with
++hyphens, not underlines.
++
++Following the function name are the parameters, e.g. '@par1:' above.
++
++A blank line MUST be used to separate parameter descriptions from the main
++description (otherwise it is assumed to be a continuation of the parameter
++description.)
++
++After the main description is a 'Returns:' line to describe the
++returned value of the function (if it is not void).
++
++Text inside the descriptions can use these special characters (they
++will be expanded into appropriate DocBook tags):
++
++ @name a parameter.
++ %name a constant.
++ name() reference to a function, or a macro which works like a function
++ (this will be turned into a hypertext link if the function is
++ documented anywhere).
++ #name reference to any other type of declaration, e.g. a struct, enum,
++ union, or macro (this will also be turned into a link if possible).
++
++To avoid problems, the characters '<', '>' and '&' in the descriptions are
++converted into the SGML entities < > and &.
++This means that you can't use Docbook SGML tags, unless specify the --sgml-mode
++option for gtkdoc-mkdb, which suppresses the escaping of '<', '>' and
++'&' and allows Docbook markup in inline comments.
++
++If you are using markup in inline comments, you must be careful to to
++not run into problems with the automatic splitting of the comment in
++paragraphs at empty lines. A line counts as empty for this purpose, if
++it is empty after the removal of the initial ' * ' prefix. Thus you
++can work around this problem by adding some trailing whitespace to
++lines which should appear as empty, but not end a paragraph. This is
++especially relevant in code examples, which often contain empty lines.
++
++Some more hints regarding examples: Hyperlinks in the formatted examples
++are confusing, therefore you should suppress the gtk-doc markup by using
++function(<!-- -->) instead of function(). Use character entities to refer
++to the characters %, &, < or #, e.g.
++
++ if (a < b && verbose)
++ printf ("bla %s %#x", bla, a);
++
++would become
++
++ if (a < b && verbose)
++ printf ("bla %s %#x", bla, a);
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++/* files and tools in gtk-doc workflow
++ * dot -Tpng gtkdoc.dot -ogtkdoc.png
++ */
++
++digraph gtkdoc {
++ /* graph attributes */
++ /*rankdir=BT;*/
++
++ /* default node attributes */
++ node [ shape=box];
++
++ /* tools nodes */
++ gtkdoc_scan [label="gtkdoc-scan",shape="ellipse" ];
++ gtkdoc_scangobj [label="gtkdoc-scangobj",shape="ellipse" ];
++ gtkdoc_mkdb [label="gtkdoc-mkdb",shape="ellipse" ];
++ gtkdoc_mkhtml [label="gtkdoc-mkhtml",shape="ellipse" ];
++ gtkdoc_fixxref [label="gtkdoc-fixxref",shape="ellipse" ];
++ gtkdoc_rebase [label="gtkdoc-rebase",shape="ellipse" ];
++ gtkdoc_check [label="gtkdoc-check",shape="ellipse" ];
++
++ /* file nodes */
++ headers [label="headers\nall headers under DOC_SOURCE_DIR\n+EXTRA_HFILES\n-IGNORE_HFILES"];
++ sources [label="source code\nall files under DOC_SOURCE_DIR\nmatching SUFFIXES or *.{c,h}"];
++ binary [label="compiled binary"];
++ xml [label="docbook xml"];
++ html [label="html"];
++ module_decl_list [label="*-decl-list.txt" ];
++ module_decl [label="*-decl.txt" ];
++ module_types [label="*.types" ];
++ module_sections [label="*-section.txt" ];
++ module_signals [label="*.signals" ];
++ module_hierarchy [label="*.hierarchy" ];
++ module_interfaces [label="*.interfaces" ];
++ module_prerequisites [label="*.prerequisites" ];
++ module_args [label="*.args" ];
++ module_undeclared [label="*-undeclared.txt" ];
++ module_undocumented [label="*-undocumented.txt" ];
++ module_unused [label="*-unused.txt" ];
++
++ /* tool invocation */
++ gtkdoc_scan -> gtkdoc_scangobj -> gtkdoc_mkdb -> gtkdoc_mkhtml -> gtkdoc_fixxref -> gtkdoc_rebase -> gtkdoc_check [style="dotted"];
++
++ /* file usage */
++ headers -> gtkdoc_scan;
++ gtkdoc_scan -> module_sections [label="--rebuild-sections", style="dashed"];
++ gtkdoc_scan -> module_types [label="--rebuild-types", style="dashed"];
++ gtkdoc_scan -> module_decl;
++ gtkdoc_scan -> module_decl_list;
++
++ binary -> gtkdoc_scangobj;
++ module_types -> gtkdoc_scangobj;
++ gtkdoc_scangobj -> module_signals;
++ gtkdoc_scangobj -> module_hierarchy;
++ gtkdoc_scangobj -> module_interfaces;
++ gtkdoc_scangobj -> module_prerequisites;
++ gtkdoc_scangobj -> module_args;
++
++ sources -> gtkdoc_mkdb;
++ module_sections -> gtkdoc_mkdb;
++ module_decl -> gtkdoc_mkdb;
++ module_signals -> gtkdoc_mkdb;
++ module_args -> gtkdoc_mkdb;
++ module_hierarchy -> gtkdoc_mkdb;
++ module_interfaces -> gtkdoc_mkdb;
++ module_prerequisites -> gtkdoc_mkdb;
++ gtkdoc_mkdb -> xml;
++ gtkdoc_mkdb -> module_undeclared;
++ gtkdoc_mkdb -> module_undocumented;
++ gtkdoc_mkdb -> module_unused;
++
++ xml -> gtkdoc_mkhtml -> html;
++
++ html -> gtkdoc_fixxref -> html;
++ html -> gtkdoc_rebase -> html;
++
++ module_undeclared -> gtkdoc_check;
++ module_undocumented -> gtkdoc_check;
++ module_unused -> gtkdoc_check;
++}
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++Note
++====
++
++There is now a user manual which can be read using yelp and can be found under
++'development'. Please refer to this documentation for up-to-date information.
++
++
++*-section.txt
++=============
++
++This describes the MODULE-sections.txt file which is used to organise the
++documentation output by gtk-doc.
++
++The file is divided into sections. Each section will be output to a separate
++file in the templates, which also corresponds to a SGML file, and a file in
++the final HTML files. Each section contains a list of function/macro etc.
++names, which can be rearranged into the desired order.
++
++The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, without any
++suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</FILE>' will result in the
++section declarations being output in the template file tmpl/gnome-config.sgml,
++which will be converted into the DocBook SGML file sgml/gnome-config.sgml.
++(The name of the html file is based on the module name and the section title,
++or for widgets it is based on the widget name converted to lower case).
++
++The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the section.
++It is only useful before the templates are initially created, since the title
++set in the template file overrides this.
++
++You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. Currently
++it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis section.
++You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GtkObject declarations
++(e.g. the functions like gtk_object_get_type and macros like GTK_OBJECT(),
++GTK_IS_OBJECT() etc.) Currently these are left out of the documentation.
++You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private declarations which will not
++be output (Its a handy way to avoid warning messages about unused
++declarations.). If your library contains private types which you don't want
++to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of implemented or required
++interfaces, add them to a Private subsection.
++
++You can also use <INCLUDE> ... <INCLUDE> to specify the #include files which
++are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-separate list of
++#include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it outside of any
++sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. If you set it
++within a section, it only applies to that section.
++
++If a line starts with a '#' it is treated as a comment and ignored.
++
++Example MODULE-sections.txt file:
++
++# This is a comment.
++<INCLUDE>gnome.h</INCLUDE>
++
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>gnome-dateedit</FILE>
++<TITLE>GnomeDateEdit</TITLE>
++gnome_date_edit_new
++gnome_date_edit_set_time
++gnome_date_edit_set_popup_range
++gnome_date_edit_get_date
++<SUBSECTION Standard>
++GNOME_DATE_EDIT
++GNOME_IS_DATE_EDIT
++gnome_date_edit_get_type
++GNOME_DATE_EDIT_CLASS
++</SECTION>
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++Note
++====
++
++There is now a user manual which can be read using yelp and can be found under
++'development'. Please refer to this documentation for up-to-date information.
++
++
++How to Set Up an Application or Library to use GTK-Doc
++======================================================
++
++This assumes that you are using autoconf & automake to build your package,
++and already have gtk-doc installed properly.
++
++
++1. Add this line to your autogen.sh, before the calls to autoheader, automake
++ or autoconf:
++
++ gtkdocize || exit 1
++
++ If you are using gnome-autogen.sh it already runs gtkdocize for you.
++ If you don't have an autogen.sh script you may need to run gtkdocize
++ manually. (All gtkdocize does is copy gtk-doc.make to your project.)
++
++
++2. Add this line to your configure.in (somewhere before the call to AC_OUTPUT)
++
++ GTK_DOC_CHECK(1.0)
++
++ The number in brackets is the minimum version of gtk-doc required.
++
++
++3. Create a directory in your project where you want the docs to be built,
++ e.g. 'myproject/docs/reference'. If you want to create several separate
++ pieces of documentation you can create subdirectories for each one here.
++ (e.g. GTK+ has subdirectories for gtk, gdk and gdk-pixbuf.)
++
++
++4. Copy examples/Makefile.am to this directory (or subdirectories) and edit
++ the variables at the top of the file. (See the GTK+ source for an example.)
++
++
++5. Add the new Makefile(s) to your configure.in's AC_OUTPUT call, and make sure
++ all the SUBDIRS variables are set properly so the docs directory is built.
++
++
++6. If your library or application includes GtkObjects/GObjects, and you want
++ their signals, arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be
++ documented:
++
++ Create a MODULE.types file in the docs directory, e.g. "myproject.types".
++ This should contain any '#include' directives needed to compile a program
++ with your module, and a list of functions to initialize all of the widgets
++ and objects in the library. For example, the gtk.types file starts like
++ this:
++
++ #include <gtk/gtk.h>
++
++ gtk_accel_label_get_type
++ gtk_adjustment_get_type
++ gtk_alignment_get_type
++ gtk_arrow_get_type
++
++=============================================================================
++
++That's it! If you now build the application or library you should get a
++complete set of documentation. gtk-doc is normally off by default so you
++may have to pass '--enable-gtk-doc' to autogen.sh or configure.in.
++
++(Note that due to a problem with make the build may fail the very first time
++it is run, but if you run make again it should work. It only fails because
++there are no files in the tmpl/ directory initially. As soon as these are
++created it works fine.)
++
++
++You can tweak the output in several ways:
++
++ o modify the main SGML file to add introductory sections or to split the
++ documentation into several chapters.
++
++ o modify the MODULE-sections.txt file to rearrange the documentation into
++ different sections or a different order (see sections-file.txt for info).
++
++ o add a MODULE-overrides.txt to override particular declarations.
++
++
++Damon
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++Note
++====
++
++There is now a user manual which can be read using yelp and can be found under
++'development'. Please refer to this documentation for up-to-date information.
++
++
++NOTE: This is only a draft version. Don't make major changes to your
++ documentation until we've agreed on all this.
++
++
++GTK+ Reference Documentation Style Guide
++========================================
++
++This file describes the way the GTK+ reference documentation should be written,
++so that we produce consistent documentation.
++
++We will also designate one or two of the template files as 'model' templates,
++i.e. they are to be taken as the 'correct' way to write the documentation:
++
++ GtkFontSelectionDialog - contains example code and descriptions of enums.
++ GtkMisc - contains description of fields in a widget struct.
++
++
++Language
++========
++
++Use American spelling rather than British, i.e. color rather than colour,
++organize rather than organise etc.
++
++End all descriptions of functions & parameters with a period '.'.
++
++
++Organizing Sections
++===================
++
++The organization of the sections is determined by the glib-sections.txt,
++gdk-sections.txt and gtk-sections.txt files.
++
++Group related functions/macros/enums etc. and place a "<SUBSECTION>" tag
++(on its own line) between groups. This results in a blank line in the synopsis
++between the groups, which makes it a bit easier to read.
++
++Order the groups sections by placing the most important/commonly-used
++functions/macros etc. first. For pairs of accessor functions place them
++together with the 'get' function first and then the 'set' function.
++
++Private functions etc. should be placed at the end of the "<SECTION>",
++after a "<SUBSECTION Private>" line. They will not appear in the HTML output
++and they do not have to be documented (they will disappear form the template
++files the next time 'make templates' is run).
++
++Enumerations should appear after the first function which uses them.
++
++
++Section Descriptions
++===================
++
++For widgets, start the main description with -
++
++<!-- ##### SECTION Long_Description ##### -->
++<para>
++The #GtkFontSelectionDialog widget ...
++
++
++If you want to include subsections in the main description, to conform to
++DocBook SGML you must have 0 or more leading paragraphs (or possibly other
++DocBook tags - see the DTD), then 1 or more <refsect2> subsections, with
++nothing after. e.g.
++
++<!-- ##### SECTION Long_Description ##### -->
++<para>
++Introduction to the section....
++</para>
++<refsect2>
++ <title>First Subsection</title>
++ <para>
++ This is the first subsection.
++ </para>
++</refsect2>
++<refsect2>
++ <title>Second Subsection</title>
++ <para>
++ This is the second subsection.
++ </para>
++</refsect2>
++
++
++Functions & Macro Descriptions
++==============================
++
++Start the description with a phrase like this:
++ 'Looks up a key in a GHashTable'.
++i.e. assume that 'This function' (or 'This macro') precedes it.
++
++
++Function Parameters
++===================
++
++For object-oriented code, denote the object parameter with 'a',
++e.g. 'a #GHashTable'.
++
++Use 'the' for the rest of the parameters.
++
++
++Widget Structs
++==============
++
++Some widget structs have fields which are useful to the developer, since
++there are currently no accessor functions to retrieve the particular field.
++
++These fields should be documented as follows:
++
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------
++<!-- ##### STRUCT GtkFixedChild ##### -->
++<para>
++The #GtkFixedChild-struct struct contains the following fields.
++(These fields should be considered read-only. They should never be set by
++an application.)
++</para>
++
++@widget: the child #GtkWidget.
++@x: the horizontal position of the widget within the #GtkFixed
++ container.
++@y: the vertical position of the widget within the #GtkFixed
++ container.
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------
++
++
++If a widget struct is completely private, use this:
++
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------
++<!-- ##### STRUCT GtkFontSelectionDialog ##### -->
++<para>
++The #GtkFontSelectionDialog-struct struct contains private data only, and
++should be accessed using the functions below.
++</para>
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------
++
++Note that the links to the widget names go to the top of the page,
++e.g. links to #GtkAccelLabel result in a link to the GtkAccelLabel page.
++If you want to link to the widget struct, you must append '-struct',
++e.g. #GtkAccelLabel-struct
++
++Whether a particular field in a structure is output in the
++documentation is determined by adding /*< public >*/ and
++/*< private >*/ comments into the header files. For instance,
++GtkEditable looks like:
++
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------
++struct _GtkEditable
++{
++ GtkWidget widget;
++
++ /*< public >*/
++ guint current_pos;
++
++ guint selection_start_pos;
++ guint selection_end_pos;
++ guint has_selection : 1;
++
++ /*< private >*/
++ guint editable : 1;
++ guint visible : 1;
++ GdkIC *ic;
++ GdkICAttr *ic_attr;
++
++ gchar *clipboard_text;
++};
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------
++
++You should add these as you go along. Please send these changes
++in along with your patches for the reference docs. Widget structures
++are by default all private, other structures are by default all public.
++
++
++Enumerations
++============
++
++A lot of the enumerations in GTK+ are currently placed in the "Standard
++Enumerations" section. However, some of these are specific to a particular
++widget and so should be moved to the widget's section and documented there.
++
++The enumeration values should be documented as follows:
++
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------
++<!-- ##### ENUM GtkFontFilterType ##### -->
++<para>
++A set of bit flags used to specify the filter being set
++when calling gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_filter() or
++gtk_font_selection_set_filter().
++</para>
++
++@GTK_FONT_FILTER_BASE: the base filter, which can't be changed by the user.
++@GTK_FONT_FILTER_USER: the user filter, which can be changed from within the 'Filter' page
++ of the #GtkFontSelection widget.
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------
++
++
++See Also
++========
++
++To link to related widgets/pages, use a <variablelist> like below.
++If there aren't any related pages, simply leave the See_Also section as it is,
++and it will not be output.
++Note that ancestors of widgets may automatically be added here, so
++don't add them yourself.
++
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------
++<!-- ##### SECTION See_Also ##### -->
++<para>
++<variablelist>
++
++<varlistentry>
++<term>#GtkFontSelection</term>
++<listitem><para>the underlying widget for selecting fonts.</para></listitem>
++</varlistentry>
++
++</variablelist>
++</para>
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------
++
++
++Including Hypertext Links
++=========================
++
++Use the <ulink> tag to include hypertext links, e.g.
++
++Gnome's home page is at <ulink url="www.gnome.org">www.gnome.org</ulink>.
++
++Remember that the documentation may be printed, so it is probably best
++to repeat the URL within the link.
++
++Damon, 1 June 1999
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- mode: makefile -*-
++#
++# Makefile.am - template makefile for gtk-doc module
++# Copyright (C) 2007-2017 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
++#
++# As a special exception, the above copyright owner gives unlimited
++# permission to copy, distribute and modify this Makefile.am template.
++# You need not follow the terms of the GNU General Public License when
++# using or distributing such Makefile.am files, even though portions of
++# the text of the Makefile.am appear in them. The GNU General Public
++# License (GPL) does govern all other use of the material that constitutes
++# the Makefile.am template.
++
++# This is a blank Makefile.am for using gtk-doc.
++# Copy this to your project's API docs directory and modify the variables to
++# suit your project. See the GTK+ Makefiles in gtk+/docs/reference for examples
++# of using the various options.
++
++# The name of the module, e.g. 'glib'.
++DOC_MODULE=
++
++# Uncomment for versioned docs and specify the version of the module, e.g. '2'.
++#DOC_MODULE_VERSION=2
++
++# The top-level XML file.
++DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MODULE)-docs.xml
++
++# Directories containing the source code.
++# gtk-doc will search all .c and .h files beneath these paths
++# for inline comments documenting functions and macros.
++# e.g. DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/gtk $(top_srcdir)/gdk
++DOC_SOURCE_DIR=
++
++# Extra options to pass to gtkdoc-scangobj. Normally not needed.
++SCANGOBJ_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-scan.
++# e.g. SCAN_OPTIONS=--deprecated-guards="GTK_DISABLE_DEPRECATED"
++SCAN_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkdb
++# e.g. MKDB_OPTIONS=--xml-mode --output-format=xml
++MKDB_OPTIONS=--xml-mode --output-format=xml
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkhtml
++MKHTML_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-fixref. Normally not needed.
++# e.g. FIXXREF_OPTIONS=--extra-dir=../gdk-pixbuf/html --extra-dir=../gdk/html
++FIXXREF_OPTIONS=
++
++# Used for dependencies. The docs will be rebuilt if any of these change.
++# e.g. HFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/*.h
++# e.g. CFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/*.c
++HFILE_GLOB=
++CFILE_GLOB=
++
++# Extra header to include when scanning, which are not under DOC_SOURCE_DIR
++# e.g. EXTRA_HFILES=$(top_srcdir}/contrib/extra.h
++EXTRA_HFILES=
++
++# Header files or dirs to ignore when scanning. Use base file/dir names
++# e.g. IGNORE_HFILES=gtkdebug.h gtkintl.h private_code
++IGNORE_HFILES=
++
++# Images to copy into HTML directory.
++# e.g. HTML_IMAGES=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/stock-icons/stock_about_24.png
++HTML_IMAGES=
++
++# Extra files that are included by $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE).
++# e.g. content_files=running.xml building.xml changes-2.0.xml
++content_files=
++
++# Files where gtk-doc abbreviations (#GtkWidget) are expanded
++# e.g. expand_content_files=running.xml
++expand_content_files=
++
++# CFLAGS and LDFLAGS for compiling gtkdoc-scangobj with your library.
++# Only needed if you are using gtkdoc-scangobj to dynamically query widget
++# signals and properties.
++# e.g. GTKDOC_CFLAGS=-I$(top_srcdir) -I$(top_builddir) $(GTK_DEBUG_FLAGS)
++# e.g. GTKDOC_LIBS=$(top_builddir)/gtk/$(gtktargetlib)
++GTKDOC_CFLAGS=
++GTKDOC_LIBS=
++
++# This includes the standard gtk-doc make rules, copied by gtkdocize.
++include $(top_srcdir)/gtk-doc.make
++
++# Comment this out if you don't want 'make check' to test you doc status
++# and run some sanity checks
++if ENABLE_GTK_DOC
++TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \
++ DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \
++ SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)
++TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)
++endif
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++
++The Makefile.am here should be copied to your project's API documentation
++directory, and the variables edited appropriately.
++
++See doc/setting-up.txt for documentation on setting up a project to use
++gtk-doc.
++
++See the GTK+ and libglade sources for example Makefile.am option settings.
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# git.mk, a small Makefile to autogenerate .gitignore files
++# for autotools-based projects.
++#
++# Copyright 2009, Red Hat, Inc.
++# Copyright 2010,2011,2012,2013 Behdad Esfahbod
++# Written by Behdad Esfahbod
++#
++# Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification,
++# is permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright
++# notice and this notice are preserved.
++#
++# The latest version of this file can be downloaded from:
++GIT_MK_URL = https://raw.githubusercontent.com/behdad/git.mk/master/git.mk
++#
++# Bugs, etc, should be reported upstream at:
++# https://github.com/behdad/git.mk
++#
++# To use in your project, import this file in your git repo's toplevel,
++# then do "make -f git.mk". This modifies all Makefile.am files in
++# your project to -include git.mk. Remember to add that line to new
++# Makefile.am files you create in your project, or just rerun the
++# "make -f git.mk".
++#
++# This enables automatic .gitignore generation. If you need to ignore
++# more files, add them to the GITIGNOREFILES variable in your Makefile.am.
++# But think twice before doing that. If a file has to be in .gitignore,
++# chances are very high that it's a generated file and should be in one
++# of MOSTLYCLEANFILES, CLEANFILES, DISTCLEANFILES, or MAINTAINERCLEANFILES.
++#
++# The only case that you need to manually add a file to GITIGNOREFILES is
++# when remove files in one of mostlyclean-local, clean-local, distclean-local,
++# or maintainer-clean-local make targets.
++#
++# Note that for files like editor backup, etc, there are better places to
++# ignore them. See "man gitignore".
++#
++# If "make maintainer-clean" removes the files but they are not recognized
++# by this script (that is, if "git status" shows untracked files still), send
++# me the output of "git status" as well as your Makefile.am and Makefile for
++# the directories involved and I'll diagnose.
++#
++# For a list of toplevel files that should be in MAINTAINERCLEANFILES, see
++# Makefile.am.sample in the git.mk git repo.
++#
++# Don't EXTRA_DIST this file. It is supposed to only live in git clones,
++# not tarballs. It serves no useful purpose in tarballs and clutters the
++# build dir.
++#
++# This file knows how to handle autoconf, automake, libtool, gtk-doc,
++# gnome-doc-utils, yelp.m4, mallard, intltool, gsettings, dejagnu, appdata,
++# appstream.
++#
++# This makefile provides the following targets:
++#
++# - all: "make all" will build all gitignore files.
++# - gitignore: makes all gitignore files in the current dir and subdirs.
++# - .gitignore: make gitignore file for the current dir.
++# - gitignore-recurse: makes all gitignore files in the subdirs.
++#
++# KNOWN ISSUES:
++#
++# - Recursive configure doesn't work as $(top_srcdir)/git.mk inside the
++# submodule doesn't find us. If you have configure.{in,ac} files in
++# subdirs, add a proxy git.mk file in those dirs that simply does:
++# "include $(top_srcdir)/../git.mk". Add more ..'s to your taste.
++# And add those files to git. See vte/gnome-pty-helper/git.mk for
++# example.
++#
++
++
++
++###############################################################################
++# Variables user modules may want to add to toplevel MAINTAINERCLEANFILES:
++###############################################################################
++
++#
++# Most autotools-using modules should be fine including this variable in their
++# toplevel MAINTAINERCLEANFILES:
++GITIGNORE_MAINTAINERCLEANFILES_TOPLEVEL = \
++ $(srcdir)/aclocal.m4 \
++ $(srcdir)/autoscan.log \
++ $(srcdir)/configure.scan \
++ `AUX_DIR=$(srcdir)/$$(cd $(top_srcdir); $(AUTOCONF) --trace 'AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR:$$1' ./configure.ac); \
++ test "x$$AUX_DIR" = "x$(srcdir)/" && AUX_DIR=$(srcdir); \
++ for x in \
++ ar-lib \
++ compile \
++ config.guess \
++ config.sub \
++ depcomp \
++ install-sh \
++ ltmain.sh \
++ missing \
++ mkinstalldirs \
++ test-driver \
++ ylwrap \
++ ; do echo "$$AUX_DIR/$$x"; done` \
++ `cd $(top_srcdir); $(AUTOCONF) --trace 'AC_CONFIG_HEADERS:$$1' ./configure.ac | \
++ head -n 1 | while read f; do echo "$(srcdir)/$$f.in"; done`
++#
++# All modules should also be fine including the following variable, which
++# removes automake-generated Makefile.in files:
++GITIGNORE_MAINTAINERCLEANFILES_MAKEFILE_IN = \
++ `cd $(top_srcdir); $(AUTOCONF) --trace 'AC_CONFIG_FILES:$$1' ./configure.ac | \
++ while read f; do \
++ case $$f in Makefile|*/Makefile) \
++ test -f "$(srcdir)/$$f.am" && echo "$(srcdir)/$$f.in";; esac; \
++ done`
++#
++# Modules that use libtool and use AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR() may also include this,
++# though it's harmless to include regardless.
++GITIGNORE_MAINTAINERCLEANFILES_M4_LIBTOOL = \
++ `MACRO_DIR=$(srcdir)/$$(cd $(top_srcdir); $(AUTOCONF) --trace 'AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR:$$1' ./configure.ac); \
++ if test "x$$MACRO_DIR" != "x$(srcdir)/"; then \
++ for x in \
++ libtool.m4 \
++ ltoptions.m4 \
++ ltsugar.m4 \
++ ltversion.m4 \
++ lt~obsolete.m4 \
++ ; do echo "$$MACRO_DIR/$$x"; done; \
++ fi`
++
++
++
++###############################################################################
++# Default rule is to install ourselves in all Makefile.am files:
++###############################################################################
++
++git-all: git-mk-install
++
++git-mk-install:
++ @echo "Installing git makefile"
++ @any_failed=; \
++ find "`test -z "$(top_srcdir)" && echo . || echo "$(top_srcdir)"`" -name Makefile.am | while read x; do \
++ if grep 'include .*/git.mk' $$x >/dev/null; then \
++ echo "$$x already includes git.mk"; \
++ else \
++ failed=; \
++ echo "Updating $$x"; \
++ { cat $$x; \
++ echo ''; \
++ echo '-include $$(top_srcdir)/git.mk'; \
++ } > $$x.tmp || failed=1; \
++ if test x$$failed = x; then \
++ mv $$x.tmp $$x || failed=1; \
++ fi; \
++ if test x$$failed = x; then : else \
++ echo "Failed updating $$x"; >&2 \
++ any_failed=1; \
++ fi; \
++ fi; done; test -z "$$any_failed"
++
++git-mk-update:
++ wget $(GIT_MK_URL) -O $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
++
++.PHONY: git-all git-mk-install git-mk-update
++
++
++
++###############################################################################
++# Actual .gitignore generation:
++###############################################################################
++
++$(srcdir)/.gitignore: Makefile.am $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
++ @echo "git.mk: Generating $@"
++ @{ \
++ if test "x$(DOC_MODULE)" = x -o "x$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)" = x; then :; else \
++ for x in \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-decl-list.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-decl.txt \
++ tmpl/$(DOC_MODULE)-unused.sgml \
++ "tmpl/*.bak" \
++ xml html \
++ ; do echo "/$$x"; done; \
++ FLAVOR=$$(cd $(top_srcdir); $(AUTOCONF) --trace 'GTK_DOC_CHECK:$$2' ./configure.ac); \
++ case $$FLAVOR in *no-tmpl*) echo /tmpl;; esac; \
++ fi; \
++ if test "x$(DOC_MODULE)$(DOC_ID)" = x -o "x$(DOC_LINGUAS)" = x; then :; else \
++ for lc in $(DOC_LINGUAS); do \
++ for x in \
++ $(if $(DOC_MODULE),$(DOC_MODULE).xml) \
++ $(DOC_PAGES) \
++ $(DOC_INCLUDES) \
++ ; do echo "/$$lc/$$x"; done; \
++ done; \
++ for x in \
++ $(_DOC_OMF_ALL) \
++ $(_DOC_DSK_ALL) \
++ $(_DOC_HTML_ALL) \
++ $(_DOC_MOFILES) \
++ $(DOC_H_FILE) \
++ "*/.xml2po.mo" \
++ "*/*.omf.out" \
++ ; do echo /$$x; done; \
++ fi; \
++ if test "x$(HELP_ID)" = x -o "x$(HELP_LINGUAS)" = x; then :; else \
++ for lc in $(HELP_LINGUAS); do \
++ for x in \
++ $(HELP_FILES) \
++ "$$lc.stamp" \
++ "$$lc.mo" \
++ ; do echo "/$$lc/$$x"; done; \
++ done; \
++ fi; \
++ if test "x$(gsettings_SCHEMAS)" = x; then :; else \
++ for x in \
++ $(gsettings_SCHEMAS:.xml=.valid) \
++ $(gsettings__enum_file) \
++ ; do echo "/$$x"; done; \
++ fi; \
++ if test "x$(appdata_XML)" = x; then :; else \
++ for x in \
++ $(appdata_XML:.xml=.valid) \
++ ; do echo "/$$x"; done; \
++ fi; \
++ if test "x$(appstream_XML)" = x; then :; else \
++ for x in \
++ $(appstream_XML:.xml=.valid) \
++ ; do echo "/$$x"; done; \
++ fi; \
++ if test -f $(srcdir)/po/Makefile.in.in; then \
++ for x in \
++ po/Makefile.in.in \
++ po/Makefile.in.in~ \
++ po/Makefile.in \
++ po/Makefile \
++ po/Makevars.template \
++ po/POTFILES \
++ po/Rules-quot \
++ po/stamp-it \
++ po/.intltool-merge-cache \
++ "po/*.gmo" \
++ "po/*.header" \
++ "po/*.mo" \
++ "po/*.sed" \
++ "po/*.sin" \
++ po/$(GETTEXT_PACKAGE).pot \
++ intltool-extract.in \
++ intltool-merge.in \
++ intltool-update.in \
++ ; do echo "/$$x"; done; \
++ fi; \
++ if test -f $(srcdir)/configure; then \
++ for x in \
++ autom4te.cache \
++ configure \
++ config.h \
++ stamp-h1 \
++ libtool \
++ config.lt \
++ ; do echo "/$$x"; done; \
++ fi; \
++ if test "x$(DEJATOOL)" = x; then :; else \
++ for x in \
++ $(DEJATOOL) \
++ ; do echo "/$$x.sum"; echo "/$$x.log"; done; \
++ echo /site.exp; \
++ fi; \
++ if test "x$(am__dirstamp)" = x; then :; else \
++ echo "$(am__dirstamp)"; \
++ fi; \
++ if test "x$(LTCOMPILE)" = x -a "x$(LTCXXCOMPILE)" = x -a "x$(GTKDOC_RUN)" = x; then :; else \
++ for x in \
++ "*.lo" \
++ ".libs" "_libs" \
++ ; do echo "$$x"; done; \
++ fi; \
++ for x in \
++ .gitignore \
++ $(GITIGNOREFILES) \
++ $(CLEANFILES) \
++ $(PROGRAMS) $(check_PROGRAMS) $(EXTRA_PROGRAMS) \
++ $(LIBRARIES) $(check_LIBRARIES) $(EXTRA_LIBRARIES) \
++ $(LTLIBRARIES) $(check_LTLIBRARIES) $(EXTRA_LTLIBRARIES) \
++ so_locations \
++ $(MOSTLYCLEANFILES) \
++ $(TEST_LOGS) \
++ $(TEST_LOGS:.log=.trs) \
++ $(TEST_SUITE_LOG) \
++ $(TESTS:=.test) \
++ "*.gcda" \
++ "*.gcno" \
++ $(DISTCLEANFILES) \
++ $(am__CONFIG_DISTCLEAN_FILES) \
++ $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) \
++ TAGS ID GTAGS GRTAGS GSYMS GPATH tags \
++ "*.tab.c" \
++ $(MAINTAINERCLEANFILES) \
++ $(BUILT_SOURCES) \
++ $(patsubst %.vala,%.c,$(filter %.vala,$(SOURCES))) \
++ $(filter %_vala.stamp,$(DIST_COMMON)) \
++ $(filter %.vapi,$(DIST_COMMON)) \
++ $(filter $(addprefix %,$(notdir $(patsubst %.vapi,%.h,$(filter %.vapi,$(DIST_COMMON))))),$(DIST_COMMON)) \
++ Makefile \
++ Makefile.in \
++ "*.orig" \
++ "*.rej" \
++ "*.bak" \
++ "*~" \
++ ".*.sw[nop]" \
++ ".dirstamp" \
++ ; do echo "/$$x"; done; \
++ for x in \
++ "*.$(OBJEXT)" \
++ $(DEPDIR) \
++ ; do echo "$$x"; done; \
++ } | \
++ sed "s@^/`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/\(.\)/[\1]/g'`/@/@" | \
++ sed 's@/[.]/@/@g' | \
++ LC_ALL=C sort | uniq > $@.tmp && \
++ mv $@.tmp $@;
++
++all: $(srcdir)/.gitignore gitignore-recurse-maybe
++gitignore: $(srcdir)/.gitignore gitignore-recurse
++
++gitignore-recurse-maybe:
++ @for subdir in $(DIST_SUBDIRS); do \
++ case " $(SUBDIRS) " in \
++ *" $$subdir "*) :;; \
++ *) test "$$subdir" = . -o -e "$$subdir/.git" || (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) gitignore || echo "Skipping $$subdir");; \
++ esac; \
++ done
++gitignore-recurse:
++ @for subdir in $(DIST_SUBDIRS); do \
++ test "$$subdir" = . -o -e "$$subdir/.git" || (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) gitignore || echo "Skipping $$subdir"); \
++ done
++
++maintainer-clean: gitignore-clean
++gitignore-clean:
++ -rm -f $(srcdir)/.gitignore
++
++.PHONY: gitignore-clean gitignore gitignore-recurse gitignore-recurse-maybe
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform"
++ xmlns:fo="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Format"
++ version="1.0">
++
++ <!-- import the chunked fo stylesheet -->
++ <xsl:import href="http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/fo/docbook.xsl"/>
++
++ <!-- change some parameters -->
++ <xsl:attribute-set name="monospace.verbatim.properties">
++ <!--xsl:attribute name="font-family">Monospace</xsl:attribute-->
++ <xsl:attribute name="font-size">7pt</xsl:attribute>
++ <xsl:attribute name="keep-together.within-column">always</xsl:attribute>
++ </xsl:attribute-set>
++
++ <xsl:param name="shade.verbatim" select="1"/>
++
++ <xsl:attribute-set name="shade.verbatim.style">
++ <xsl:attribute name="background-color">#D0D0D0</xsl:attribute>
++ <xsl:attribute name="border-width">0.5pt</xsl:attribute>
++ <xsl:attribute name="border-style">solid</xsl:attribute>
++ <xsl:attribute name="border-color">#575757</xsl:attribute>
++ <xsl:attribute name="padding">3pt</xsl:attribute>
++ </xsl:attribute-set>
++
++ <xsl:attribute-set name="xref.properties">
++ <xsl:attribute name="color">
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="self::ulink">blue</xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>inherit</xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ </xsl:attribute-set>
++
++</xsl:stylesheet>
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<Project xmlns:rdf="http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#"
++ xmlns:rdfs="http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#"
++ xmlns:foaf="http://xmlns.com/foaf/0.1/"
++ xmlns:gnome="http://api.gnome.org/doap-extensions#"
++ xmlns="http://usefulinc.com/ns/doap#">
++
++ <name xml:lang="en">gtk-doc</name>
++
++ <shortdesc xml:lang="en">Documentation generator for C code.</shortdesc>
++ <description>GTK-Doc is used to document C code.
++It is typically used to document the public
++API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries, but it can also be
++used to document application code.
++</description>
++
++ <homepage rdf:resource="http://www.gtk.org/gtk-doc/" />
++ <mailing-list rdf:resource="http://mail.gnome.org/mailman/listinfo/gtk-doc-devel-list" />
++ <download-page rdf:resource="http://download.gnome.org/sources/gtk-doc/" />
++ <bug-database rdf:resource="https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/issues/" />
++
++ <category rdf:resource="http://api.gnome.org/doap-extensions#core" />
++ <programming-language>C</programming-language>
++ <programming-language>Shell</programming-language>
++
++ <maintainer>
++ <foaf:Person>
++ <foaf:name>Stefan Sauer</foaf:name>
++ <foaf:mbox rdf:resource="mailto:ensonic@users.sf.net" />
++ <gnome:userid>stefkost</gnome:userid>
++ </foaf:Person>
++ </maintainer>
++ <maintainer>
++ <foaf:Person>
++ <foaf:name>Matthias Clasen</foaf:name>
++ <foaf:mbox rdf:resource="mailto:mclasen@redhat.com" />
++ <gnome:userid>matthiasc</gnome:userid>
++ </foaf:Person>
++ </maintainer>
++</Project>
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++prefix=@prefix@
++exec_prefix=@exec_prefix@
++data_dir=@datadir@/@PACKAGE@/data
++
++Name: gtk-doc
++Description: API documentation generator
++Version: @VERSION@
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<?xml version='1.0'?> <!--*- mode: xml -*-->
++<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform"
++ xmlns:l="http://docbook.sourceforge.net/xmlns/l10n/1.0"
++ exclude-result-prefixes="l"
++ version="1.0">
++
++ <!-- import the chunked XSL stylesheet -->
++ <!-- http://www.sagehill.net/docbookxsl/Chunking.html#FastChunking says we should use
++ "chunkfast.xsl", but I can't see a difference. Also it is not clear whether
++ one should still set "chunk.fast". Again, no meassuable difference. -->
++ <xsl:import href="http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/html/chunk.xsl"/>
++ <xsl:include href="devhelp2.xsl"/>
++ <xsl:include href="version-greater-or-equal.xsl"/>
++
++ <xsl:key name="acronym.key" match="glossentry/glossterm" use="."/>
++ <xsl:key name="gallery.key" match="para[@role='gallery']/link" use="@linkend"/>
++
++ <!-- change some parameters -->
++ <!-- http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/doc/html/index.html -->
++ <xsl:param name="admon.style"/>
++ <xsl:param name="toc.section.depth">2</xsl:param>
++ <xsl:param name="generate.toc">
++ book toc
++ chapter toc
++ glossary toc
++ index toc
++ part toc
++ reference toc
++ </xsl:param>
++ <xsl:param name="process.empty.source.toc">1</xsl:param>
++
++ <xsl:param name="chunker.output.encoding" select="'UTF-8'"/>
++ <xsl:param name="chunker.output.indent" select="'yes'"/>
++ <xsl:param name="chunker.output.doctype-public" select="'-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN'"/>
++ <xsl:param name="chunk.fast" select="1"/>
++
++ <xsl:param name="default.encoding" select="'UTF-8'"/>
++ <xsl:param name="chapter.autolabel" select="0"/>
++ <xsl:param name="use.id.as.filename" select="1"/>
++ <xsl:param name="generate.consistent.ids" select="1"/>
++ <xsl:param name="html.ext" select="'.html'"/>
++ <xsl:param name="refentry.generate.name" select="0"/>
++ <xsl:param name="refentry.generate.title" select="1"/>
++ <xsl:param name="abstract.notitle.enabled" select="1"/>
++ <!-- don't generate all those link tags (very slow and hardly used)
++ it does not show much effect as we have a user.head.content template
++ <xsl:param name="html.extra.head.links" select="0" />
++ -->
++
++ <!-- use index filtering (if available) -->
++ <xsl:param name="index.on.role" select="1"/>
++
++ <!-- display variablelists as tables -->
++ <xsl:param name="variablelist.as.table" select="1"/>
++
++ <!-- new things to consider
++ <xsl:param name="glossterm.auto.link" select="0"></xsl:param>
++ -->
++
++ <!-- this gets set on the command line ... -->
++ <xsl:param name="gtkdoc.version" select="''"/>
++ <xsl:param name="gtkdoc.bookname" select="''"/>
++
++ <!-- Override the typical template to prevent showing titles -->
++ <xsl:param name="admon.textlabel" select="0"/>
++
++ <!-- ========================================================= -->
++
++ <!-- l10n is slow, we don't ue it, so we'd like to turn it off
++ this at least avoid the re-evaluation -->
++ <xsl:template name="l10n.language">en</xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:param name="gtkdoc.l10n.xml" select="document('http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/common/en.xml')"/>
++
++ <xsl:key name="gtkdoc.gentext.key" match="l:gentext[@key]" use="@key"/>
++ <xsl:key name="gtkdoc.context.key" match="l:context[@name]" use="@name"/>
++
++ <xsl:template name="gentext">
++ <xsl:param name="key" select="local-name(.)"/>
++
++ <xsl:for-each select="$gtkdoc.l10n.xml">
++ <xsl:variable name="l10n.gentext" select="key('gtkdoc.gentext.key', $key)"/>
++
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="$l10n.gentext">
++ <xsl:value-of select="$l10n.gentext/@text"/>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:message>
++ <xsl:text>No "en" localization of "</xsl:text>
++ <xsl:value-of select="$key"/>
++ <xsl:text>" exists.</xsl:text>
++ </xsl:message>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:for-each>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template name="gentext.dingbat">
++ <xsl:param name="dingbat">bullet</xsl:param>
++
++ <xsl:variable name="l10n.dingbat"
++ select="($gtkdoc.l10n.xml/l:l10n/l:dingbat[@key=$dingbat])[1]"/>
++
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="$l10n.dingbat">
++ <xsl:value-of select="$l10n.dingbat/@text"/>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:message>
++ <xsl:text>No "en" localization of dingbat </xsl:text>
++ <xsl:value-of select="$dingbat"/>
++ <xsl:text> exists; using "en".</xsl:text>
++ </xsl:message>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template name="gentext.template">
++ <xsl:param name="context" select="'default'"/>
++ <xsl:param name="name" select="'default'"/>
++ <xsl:param name="origname" select="$name"/>
++
++ <!-- cut leading / if any to avoid one recursion -->
++ <xsl:variable name="rname">
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="starts-with($name, '/')">
++ <xsl:value-of select="substring-after($name, '/')"/>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:value-of select="$name"/>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:variable>
++
++ <!-- this is called with context="title|title-numbered|title-unnumbered>
++ <xsl:message>
++ <xsl:text>context:</xsl:text><xsl:value-of select="$context"/>
++ <xsl:text>;name:</xsl:text><xsl:value-of select="$rname"/>
++ <xsl:text>;origname:</xsl:text><xsl:value-of select="$origname"/>
++ </xsl:message>
++
++ see html/html.xsl:<xsl:template match="*" mode="html.title.attribute">
++ -->
++
++ <xsl:for-each select="$gtkdoc.l10n.xml">
++ <xsl:variable name="context.node" select="key('gtkdoc.context.key', $context)"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="template.node"
++ select="($context.node/l:template[@name=$rname])[1]"/>
++
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="$template.node/@text">
++ <xsl:value-of select="$template.node/@text"/>
++ <!-- debug
++ <xsl:message>
++ <xsl:text>=</xsl:text><xsl:value-of select="$template.node/@text"/>
++ </xsl:message>
++ -->
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="contains($rname, '/')">
++ <xsl:call-template name="gentext.template">
++ <xsl:with-param name="context" select="$context"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="name" select="substring-after($rname, '/')"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="origname" select="$origname"/>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:when>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:for-each>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- silently test whether a gentext template exists -->
++ <xsl:template name="gentext.template.exists">
++ <xsl:param name="context" select="'default'"/>
++ <xsl:param name="name" select="'default'"/>
++ <xsl:param name="origname" select="$name"/>
++
++ <xsl:variable name="template">
++ <xsl:call-template name="gentext.template">
++ <xsl:with-param name="context" select="$context"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="name" select="$name"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="origname" select="$origname"/>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:variable>
++
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="string-length($template) != 0">1</xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>0</xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- shortcut version -->
++ <!-- @bug: https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=617478 -->
++ <xsl:template name="generate.html.title"/>
++ <!--xsl:template name="generate.html.title">
++ <xsl:variable name="has.title.markup">
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="." mode="title.markup">
++ <xsl:with-param name="verbose" select="0"/>
++ </xsl:apply-templates>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:if test="$has.title.markup != '???TITLE???'">
++ <xsl:variable name="gentext.title">
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="." mode="object.title.markup.textonly"/>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="string-length($gentext.title) != 0">
++ <xsl:attribute name="title">
++ <xsl:value-of select="$gentext.title"/>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:when test="alt">
++ <xsl:attribute name="title">
++ <xsl:value-of select="normalize-space(alt)"/>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ </xsl:when>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </xsl:template-->
++
++ <!-- Generate a title attribute for the context node (e.g. links) -->
++ <xsl:template match="*" mode="html.title.attribute">
++ <xsl:variable name="has.title.markup">
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="." mode="title.markup">
++ <xsl:with-param name="verbose" select="0"/>
++ </xsl:apply-templates>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:if test="$has.title.markup != '???TITLE???'">
++ <xsl:variable name="is.title">
++ <xsl:call-template name="gentext.template.exists">
++ <xsl:with-param name="context" select="'title'"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="name" select="local-name(.)"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="lang">
++ <xsl:call-template name="l10n.language"/>
++ </xsl:with-param>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:variable>
++
++ <xsl:variable name="is.title-numbered">
++ <xsl:if test="$is.title = 0">
++ <xsl:call-template name="gentext.template.exists">
++ <xsl:with-param name="context" select="'title-numbered'"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="name" select="local-name(.)"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="lang">
++ <xsl:call-template name="l10n.language"/>
++ </xsl:with-param>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </xsl:variable>
++
++ <xsl:variable name="is.title-unnumbered">
++ <xsl:if test="$is.title = 0 and $is.title-numbered = 0">
++ <xsl:call-template name="gentext.template.exists">
++ <xsl:with-param name="context" select="'title-unnumbered'"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="name" select="local-name(.)"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="lang">
++ <xsl:call-template name="l10n.language"/>
++ </xsl:with-param>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </xsl:variable>
++
++ <xsl:variable name="gentext.title">
++ <xsl:if test="$is.title != 0 or
++ $is.title-numbered != 0 or
++ $is.title-unnumbered != 0">
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="."
++ mode="object.title.markup.textonly"/>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </xsl:variable>
++
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="string-length($gentext.title) != 0">
++ <xsl:attribute name="title">
++ <xsl:value-of select="$gentext.title"/>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:when test="alt">
++ <xsl:attribute name="title">
++ <xsl:value-of select="normalize-space(alt)"/>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ </xsl:when>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++
++
++
++ <!-- ========================================================= -->
++ <!-- template to create the index.sgml anchor index -->
++
++ <xsl:template match="book|article">
++ <xsl:variable name="tooldver">
++ <xsl:call-template name="version-greater-or-equal">
++ <xsl:with-param name="ver1" select="$VERSION" />
++ <xsl:with-param name="ver2">1.36</xsl:with-param>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:if test="$tooldver = 0">
++ <xsl:message terminate="yes">
++FATAL-ERROR: You need the DocBook XSL Stylesheets version 1.36 or higher
++to build the documentation.
++Get a newer version at http://docbook.sourceforge.net/projects/xsl/
++ </xsl:message>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:apply-imports/>
++
++ <!-- generate $book.devhelp2 -->
++ <xsl:call-template name="generate.devhelp2"/>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- ========================================================= -->
++ <!-- template to output gtkdoclink elements for the unknown targets -->
++
++ <xsl:template match="link">
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="id(@linkend)">
++ <xsl:apply-imports/>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <GTKDOCLINK HREF="{@linkend}">
++ <xsl:apply-templates/>
++ </GTKDOCLINK>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- ========================================================= -->
++ <!-- Below are the visual portions of the stylesheet. They provide
++ the normal gtk-doc output style. -->
++
++ <xsl:param name="shade.verbatim" select="0"/>
++ <xsl:param name="refentry.separator" select="0"/>
++
++ <xsl:template match="refsect2">
++ <xsl:if test="preceding-sibling::refsect2">
++ <hr/>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:apply-imports/>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template name="user.head.title">
++ <xsl:param name="node" select="."/>
++ <xsl:param name="title"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="home" select="/*[1]"/>
++ <title>
++ <xsl:copy-of select="$title"/>: <xsl:apply-templates select="$home" mode="object.title.markup"/>
++ </title>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template name="user.head.content">
++ <xsl:if test="$gtkdoc.version">
++ <meta name="generator" content="GTK-Doc V{$gtkdoc.version} (XML mode)"/>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <link rel="stylesheet" href="style.css" type="text/css"/>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template name="user.footer.content">
++ <div class="footer">
++ <hr />
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="$gtkdoc.version">
++ <xsl:text>Generated by GTK-Doc V</xsl:text><xsl:copy-of select="$gtkdoc.version" />
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:text>Generated by GTK-Doc</xsl:text>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </div>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template match="title" mode="book.titlepage.recto.mode">
++ <table class="navigation" id="top" width="100%"
++ cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
++ <tr>
++ <th valign="middle">
++ <p class="{name(.)}">
++ <xsl:value-of select="."/>
++ </p>
++ </th>
++ </tr>
++ </table>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template name="header.navigation">
++ <xsl:param name="prev" select="/foo"/>
++ <xsl:param name="next" select="/foo"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="home" select="/*[1]"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="up" select="parent::*"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="refsections" select="./refsect1[@role]"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="glssections" select="./glossdiv/title"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="idxsections" select="./indexdiv/indexdiv/title"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="section_id" select="./@id"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_object_hierarchy" select="./refsect1[@role='object_hierarchy']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_impl_interfaces" select="./refsect1[@role='impl_interfaces']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_prerequisites" select="./refsect1[@role='prerequisites']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_derived_interfaces" select="./refsect1[@role='derived_interfaces']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_implementations" select="./refsect1[@role='implementations']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_properties" select="./refsect1[@role='properties']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_actions" select="./refsect1[@role='actions']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_child_properties" select="./refsect1[@role='child_properties']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_style_properties" select="./refsect1[@role='style_properties']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_signal_proto" select="./refsect1[@role='signal_proto']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_desc" select="./refsect1[@role='desc']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_synopsis" select="./refsynopsisdiv[@role='synopsis']"/>
++ <!--
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_details" select="./refsect1[@id='details']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_property_details" select="./refsect1[@id='property_details']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_child_property_details" select="./refsect1[@id='child_property_details']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_style_property_details" select="./refsect1[@id='style_property_details']"/>
++ <xsl:variable name="sect_signals" select="./refsect1[@id='signals']"/>
++ -->
++
++ <xsl:if test="$suppress.navigation = '0' and $home != .">
++ <table class="navigation" id="top" width="100%"
++ summary = "Navigation header" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="5">
++ <tr valign="middle">
++ <td width="100%" align="left" class="shortcuts">
++ <!--<xsl:if test="name()='refentry'"-->
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="count($refsections) > 0">
++ <a href="#" class="shortcut">Top</a>
++ <xsl:if test="count($sect_desc) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_description">  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ <a href="#{$section_id}.description" class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:value-of select="./refsect1[@role='desc']/title"/>
++ </a></span>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:if test="count($sect_object_hierarchy) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_hierarchy">  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ <a href="#{$section_id}.object-hierarchy" class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:value-of select="./refsect1[@role='object_hierarchy']/title"/>
++ </a></span>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:if test="count($sect_impl_interfaces) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_interfaces">  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ <a href="#{$section_id}.implemented-interfaces" class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:value-of select="./refsect1[@role='impl_interfaces']/title"/>
++ </a></span>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:if test="count($sect_prerequisites) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_prerequisites">  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ <a href="#{$section_id}.prerequisites" class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:value-of select="./refsect1[@role='prerequisites']/title"/>
++ </a></span>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:if test="count($sect_derived_interfaces) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_derived_interfaces">  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ <a href="#{$section_id}.derived-interfaces" class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:value-of select="./refsect1[@role='derived_interfaces']/title"/>
++ </a></span>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:if test="count($sect_implementations) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_implementations">  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ <a href="#{$section_id}.implementations" class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:value-of select="./refsect1[@role='implementations']/title"/>
++ </a></span>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:if test="count($sect_properties) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_properties">  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ <a href="#{$section_id}.properties" class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:value-of select="./refsect1[@role='properties']/title"/>
++ </a></span>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:if test="count($sect_child_properties) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_child_properties">  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ <a href="#{$section_id}.child-properties" class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:value-of select="./refsect1[@role='child_properties']/title"/>
++ </a></span>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:if test="count($sect_style_properties) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_style_properties">  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ <a href="#{$section_id}.style-properties" class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:value-of select="./refsect1[@role='style_properties']/title"/>
++ </a></span>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:if test="count($sect_signal_proto) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_signals">  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ <a href="#{$section_id}.signals" class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:value-of select="./refsect1[@role='signal_proto']/title"/>
++ </a></span>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:if test="count($sect_actions) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_properties">  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ <a href="#{$section_id}.actions" class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:value-of select="./refsect1[@role='actions']/title"/>
++ </a></span>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <!-- this is not yet very nice, as it requires all glossdic/indexdiv
++ elements having a anchor element. maybe we can customize the xsl
++ to automatically create local anchors
++ -->
++ <xsl:when test="count($glssections) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_glossary">
++ <xsl:for-each select="./glossdiv">
++ <xsl:if test="position() > 1">
++  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ </xsl:if>
++ <a class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:attribute name="href">#gls<xsl:value-of select="./title"/></xsl:attribute>
++ <xsl:value-of select="./title"/>
++ </a>
++ </xsl:for-each>
++ </span>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:when test="count($idxsections) > 0">
++ <span id="nav_index">
++ <xsl:for-each select="./indexdiv/indexdiv">
++ <xsl:if test="position() > 1">
++  <span class="dim">|</span> 
++ </xsl:if>
++ <a class="shortcut">
++ <xsl:attribute name="href">#idx<xsl:value-of select="./title"/></xsl:attribute>
++ <xsl:value-of select="./title"/>
++ </a>
++ </xsl:for-each>
++ </span>
++ </xsl:when>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </td>
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="$home != .">
++ <td>
++ <a accesskey="h">
++ <xsl:attribute name="href">
++ <xsl:call-template name="href.target">
++ <xsl:with-param name="object" select="$home"/>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ <img src="home.png" width="16" height="16" border="0">
++ <xsl:attribute name="alt">
++ <xsl:call-template name="gentext">
++ <xsl:with-param name="key">nav-home</xsl:with-param>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ </img>
++ </a>
++ </td>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <td> </td>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="count($up) > 0 and $up != $home">
++ <td>
++ <a accesskey="u">
++ <xsl:attribute name="href">
++ <xsl:call-template name="href.target">
++ <xsl:with-param name="object" select="$up"/>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ <img src="up.png" width="16" height="16" border="0">
++ <xsl:attribute name="alt">
++ <xsl:call-template name="gentext">
++ <xsl:with-param name="key">nav-up</xsl:with-param>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ </img>
++ </a>
++ </td>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <td><img src="up-insensitive.png" width="16" height="16" border="0"/></td>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="count($prev) > 0">
++ <td>
++ <a accesskey="p">
++ <xsl:attribute name="href">
++ <xsl:call-template name="href.target">
++ <xsl:with-param name="object" select="$prev"/>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ <img src="left.png" width="16" height="16" border="0">
++ <xsl:attribute name="alt">
++ <xsl:call-template name="gentext">
++ <xsl:with-param name="key">nav-prev</xsl:with-param>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ </img>
++ </a>
++ </td>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <td><img src="left-insensitive.png" width="16" height="16" border="0"/></td>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="count($next) > 0">
++ <td>
++ <a accesskey="n">
++ <xsl:attribute name="href">
++ <xsl:call-template name="href.target">
++ <xsl:with-param name="object" select="$next"/>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ <img src="right.png" width="16" height="16" border="0">
++ <xsl:attribute name="alt">
++ <xsl:call-template name="gentext">
++ <xsl:with-param name="key">nav-next</xsl:with-param>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ </img>
++ </a>
++ </td>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <td><img src="right-insensitive.png" width="16" height="16" border="0"/></td>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </tr>
++ </table>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template name="footer.navigation">
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- avoid creating multiple identical indices
++ if the stylesheets don't support filtered indices
++ -->
++ <xsl:template match="index">
++ <xsl:variable name="has-filtered-index">
++ <xsl:call-template name="version-greater-or-equal">
++ <xsl:with-param name="ver1" select="$VERSION" />
++ <xsl:with-param name="ver2">1.66</xsl:with-param>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:if test="($has-filtered-index = 1) or (count(@role) = 0)">
++ <xsl:apply-imports/>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template match="index" mode="toc">
++ <xsl:variable name="has-filtered-index">
++ <xsl:call-template name="version-greater-or-equal">
++ <xsl:with-param name="ver1" select="$VERSION" />
++ <xsl:with-param name="ver2">1.66</xsl:with-param>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:if test="($has-filtered-index = 1) or (count(@role) = 0)">
++ <xsl:apply-imports/>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template match="para">
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="@role = 'gallery'">
++ <div class="container">
++ <div class="gallery-spacer"> </div>
++ <xsl:apply-templates mode="gallery.mode"/>
++ <div class="gallery-spacer"> </div>
++ </div>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:apply-imports/>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:template>
++ <!-- FIXME: try if that works too -->
++ <!--xsl:template match="para[@role='gallery']">
++ <div class="container">
++ <div class="gallery-spacer"> </div>
++ <xsl:apply-templates mode="gallery.mode"/>
++ <div class="gallery-spacer"> </div>
++ </div>
++ </xsl:template-->
++
++
++
++ <xsl:template match="link" mode="gallery.mode">
++ <div class="gallery-float">
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="."/>
++ </div>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- add gallery handling to refnamediv template -->
++ <xsl:template match="refnamediv">
++ <div class="{name(.)}">
++ <table width="100%">
++ <tr><td valign="top">
++ <xsl:call-template name="anchor"/>
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="$refentry.generate.name != 0">
++ <h2>
++ <xsl:call-template name="gentext">
++ <xsl:with-param name="key" select="'RefName'"/>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </h2>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:when test="$refentry.generate.title != 0">
++ <h2>
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="../refmeta/refentrytitle">
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="../refmeta/refentrytitle"/>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="refname[1]"/>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </h2>
++ </xsl:when>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ <p>
++ <xsl:apply-templates/>
++ </p>
++ </td>
++ <td class="gallery_image" valign="top" align="right">
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="../refmeta/refmiscinfo/inlinegraphic">
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="../refmeta/refmiscinfo/inlinegraphic"/>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <!-- find the gallery image to use here
++ - determine the id of the enclosing refentry
++ - look for an inlinegraphic inside a link with linkend == refentryid inside a para with role == gallery
++ - use it here
++ -->
++ <xsl:variable name="refentryid" select="../@id"/>
++ <xsl:apply-templates select="key('gallery.key', $refentryid)/inlinegraphic"/>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </td></tr>
++ </table>
++ </div>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- a copy from refentry.xsl to add the missing mode attribute,
++ see bug/729911, https://sourceforge.net/p/docbook/bugs/1358/
++ fixed in: https://sourceforge.net/p/docbook/code/9962/
++ -->
++ <xsl:template match="refpurpose" mode="no.anchor.mode">
++ <xsl:if test="node()">
++ <xsl:text> </xsl:text>
++ <xsl:call-template name="dingbat">
++ <xsl:with-param name="dingbat">em-dash</xsl:with-param>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ <xsl:text> </xsl:text>
++ <xsl:apply-templates mode="no.anchor.mode"/>
++ </xsl:if>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- add anchors for index sections -->
++ <xsl:template match="indexdiv">
++ <a><xsl:attribute name="name">idx<xsl:value-of select="./title"/></xsl:attribute></a>
++ <xsl:apply-templates/>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- add anchors for glossary sections -->
++ <xsl:template match="glossdiv">
++ <a><xsl:attribute name="name">gls<xsl:value-of select="./title"/></xsl:attribute></a>
++ <xsl:apply-templates/>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- Exterminate any trace of indexterms in the main flow -->
++ <xsl:template match="indexterm">
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- Extra link on the right side of doc-blobs -->
++ <xsl:template name="user.format.extralinks">
++ <xsl:if test="../ulink[@role='extralinks']">
++ <span class="extralinks">
++ <xsl:for-each select="../ulink[@role='extralinks']">
++ <xsl:if test="position() = 1">[ </xsl:if>
++ <xsl:if test="position() > 1">  <span class="dim">|</span> </xsl:if>
++ <a>
++ <xsl:attribute name="href"><xsl:value-of select="@url"/></xsl:attribute>
++ <xsl:copy-of select="text()" />
++ </a>
++ <xsl:if test="position() = last()">  ]</xsl:if>
++ </xsl:for-each>
++ </span>
++ </xsl:if>
++ <!--xsl:copy-of select="text()" /-->
++ <xsl:apply-templates/>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <!-- this is not in use yet (see gtkdoc-mkdb
++ <xsl:template match="//refsect2/ulink[@role='extralinks']"/>
++ <xsl:template match="//refsect1/ulink[@role='extralinks']"/>
++
++ <xsl:template match="//refsect2/title">
++ <h3><xsl:call-template name="user.format.extralinks"/></h3>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template match="//refsect1/title">
++ <h2><xsl:call-template name="user.format.extralinks"/></h2>
++ </xsl:template>
++ -->
++
++ <!-- ==================================================================== -->
++
++ <xsl:template match="acronym">
++ <xsl:call-template name="generate.acronym.link"/>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++ <xsl:template name="generate.acronym.link">
++ <xsl:param name="acronym">
++ <xsl:apply-templates/>
++ </xsl:param>
++ <xsl:param name="value" >
++ <xsl:value-of select="key('acronym.key', $acronym)/../glossdef/para[1]" />
++ </xsl:param>
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="$value=''">
++ <!-- debug -->
++ <xsl:message>
++ In gtk-doc.xsl: For acronym (<xsl:value-of select="$acronym"/>) no value found!
++ </xsl:message>
++ <a>
++ <xsl:attribute name="href">
++ <xsl:text>http://foldoc.org/</xsl:text>
++ <xsl:value-of select="$acronym"/>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ <xsl:call-template name="inline.charseq"/>
++ </a>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <!-- found -->
++ <acronym>
++ <xsl:attribute name="title">
++ <xsl:value-of select="$value"/>
++ </xsl:attribute>
++ <xsl:call-template name="inline.charseq"/>
++ </acronym>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:template>
++
++</xsl:stylesheet>
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!@PYTHON@
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2007 David Nečas
++# 2007-2017 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import argparse
++import sys
++
++try:
++ import gtkdoc_uninstalled
++except ModuleNotFoundError:
++ sys.path.append('@PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR@')
++
++from gtkdoc import common, check, config
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(
++ description='gtkdoc-check version %s - run documentation unit tests' % config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--version', action='version', version=config.version)
++ options = parser.parse_args()
++
++ common.setup_logging()
++
++ sys.exit(check.run(options))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!@PYTHON@
++
++from __future__ import print_function
++
++import gzip, os.path, re
++
++from os import environ, popen, walk
++from optparse import OptionParser
++from sys import stderr
++
++from xml.sax import ContentHandler, make_parser
++from xml.sax.handler import feature_external_ges
++
++default_books = ['atk', 'gdk', 'gdk-pixbuf', 'glib', 'gio', 'gobject', 'gtk', 'pango']
++
++__comment_regex = re.compile(r'/\*.*?\*/', re.DOTALL)
++__word_regex = re.compile(r'\b[A-Za-z_][A-Za-z0-9_]*\b')
++
++u2a_table = { 0x2018:0x27, 0x2019:0x27, 0x201C:0x22, 0x201D:0x22 }
++
++class Book(object):
++ def __init__(self, name, folders, version=None):
++ self.__catalog = None
++ self.__name = name
++ self.__symbols = None
++ self.__timestamp = 0
++ self.__title = None
++ self.__version = version
++
++ for f in folders:
++ catalogs = map(
++ lambda n: os.path.join(f, name, n % name),
++ ['%s.devhelp2', '%s.devhelp2.gz'])
++ catalogs = map(
++ lambda n: (os.path.getmtime(n), n),
++ filter(os.path.isfile, catalogs))
++
++ catalogs.sort()
++
++ if catalogs:
++ self.__catalog = catalogs[-1][1]
++ break
++
++ if not self.__catalog:
++ raise IOError('No devhelp book found for "%s"' % name)
++
++ def __cmp__(self, other):
++ if isinstance(other, Book):
++ return cmp(self.name, other.name)
++
++ return 0
++
++ def __repr__(self):
++ return '<Book name="%s">' % self.__name
++
++ def parse(self):
++ timestamp = os.path.getmtime(self.__catalog)
++
++ if not self.__symbols or timestamp > self.__timestamp:
++ class DevhelpContentHandler(ContentHandler):
++ def __init__(self, book, symbols):
++ self.__book = book
++ self.__symbols = symbols
++
++ def startElement(self, name, attrs):
++ if 'book' == name:
++ self.title = attrs.get('title')
++ return
++
++ if 'keyword' == name:
++ symbol = Symbol.from_xml(self.__book, attrs)
++ if symbol: self.__symbols[symbol.name] = symbol
++ return
++
++ self.__symbols, self.__timestamp = dict(), timestamp
++ handler = DevhelpContentHandler(self, self.__symbols)
++
++ parser = make_parser()
++ parser.setFeature(feature_external_ges, False)
++ parser.setContentHandler(handler)
++
++ if self.__catalog.endswith('.gz'):
++ parser.parse(gzip.open(self.__catalog))
++
++ else:
++ parser.parse(open(self.__catalog))
++
++ self.__title = handler.title
++
++ def _get_symbols(self):
++ self.parse(); return self.__symbols
++ def _get_title(self):
++ self.parse(); return self.__title
++
++ def find_requirements(self):
++ requirements = dict()
++
++ for symbol in self.symbols.values():
++ if not symbol.matches:
++ continue
++
++ if symbol.since and symbol.since > self.version:
++ symbol_list = requirements.get(symbol.since, [])
++ requirements[symbol.since] = symbol_list
++ symbol_list.append(symbol)
++
++ return requirements
++
++ catalog = property(lambda self: self.__catalog)
++ name = property(lambda self: self.__name)
++ version = property(lambda self: self.__version)
++
++ symbols = property(_get_symbols)
++ title = property(_get_title)
++
++class Symbol(object):
++ known_attributes = ('name', 'type', 'link', 'deprecated', 'since')
++
++ class DeprecationInfo(object):
++ def __init__(self, text):
++ if text.count(':'):
++ pair = text.split(':', 1)
++
++ self.__version = Symbol.VersionInfo(pair[0])
++ self.__details = pair[1].strip()
++
++ else:
++ self.__version = None
++ self.__details = text.strip()
++
++ def __cmp__(self, other):
++ if isinstance(other, Symbol.DeprecationInfo):
++ return cmp(self.version, other.version)
++
++ if isinstance(other, Symbol.VersionInfo):
++ return cmp(self.version, other)
++
++ return 1
++
++ def __str__(self):
++ if not self.__version:
++ return self.__details and str(self.__details) or 'Deprecated'
++
++ if self.__details:
++ return 'Since %s: %s' % (self.__version, self.__details)
++
++ return 'Since %s' % self.__version
++
++ details = property(lambda self: self.__details)
++ version = property(lambda self: self.__version)
++
++ class VersionInfo(object):
++ def __init__(self, text):
++ match = re.match(r'^\w*\s*((?:\d+\.)*\d+)', text)
++
++ self.__numbers = map(int, match.group(1).split('.'))
++ self.__hash = reduce(lambda x, y: x * 1000 + y, reversed(self.__numbers))
++ self.__text = text.strip()
++
++ def __get_number(self, index):
++ if len(self.__numbers) > index:
++ return self.__numbers[index]
++
++ return 0
++
++ def __cmp__(self, other):
++ if isinstance(other, Symbol.VersionInfo):
++ return cmp(self.numbers, other.numbers)
++
++ return 1
++
++ def __hash__(self):
++ return self.__hash
++
++ def __repr__(self):
++ return '.'.join(map(str, self.__numbers))
++
++ major = property(lambda self: self.__get_number(0))
++ minor = property(lambda self: self.__get_number(1))
++ patch = property(lambda self: self.__get_number(2))
++ numbers = property(lambda self: self.__numbers)
++ text = property(lambda self: self.__text)
++
++ @classmethod
++ def from_xml(cls, book, attrs):
++ name, type, link, deprecated, since = map(attrs.get, Symbol.known_attributes)
++
++ name = name.strip().translate(u2a_table)
++
++ if name.endswith('()'):
++ if not type in ('function', 'macro'):
++ type = (name[0].islower() and 'function' or 'macro')
++
++ name = name[:-2].strip()
++
++ words = name.split(' ')
++
++ if len(words) > 1:
++ if words[0] in ('enum', 'struct', 'union'):
++ if not type: type = words[0]
++ name = name[len(words[0]):].strip()
++ elif 'property' == words[-1]:
++ assert('The' == words[0])
++ owner = link.split('#', 1)[1].split('-', 1)[0]
++ type, name = 'property', '%s::%s' % (owner, name.split('"')[1])
++ elif 'signal' == words[-1]:
++ assert('The' == words[0])
++ owner = link.split('#', 1)[1].split('-', 1)[0]
++ type, name = 'signal', '%s:%s' % (owner, name.split('"')[1])
++
++ if not type: return None
++
++ if None != deprecated: deprecated = Symbol.DeprecationInfo(deprecated)
++ if since: since = Symbol.VersionInfo(since)
++
++ if name.count(' '):
++ print >>stderr, (
++ 'WARNING: Malformed symbol name: "%s" (type=%s) in %s.' % (
++ name, type, book.name))
++
++ return Symbol(book, name, type, link, deprecated, since)
++
++ def __init__(self, book, name, type, link=None, deprecated=None, since=None):
++ self.__book = book
++ self.__name = name
++ self.__type = type
++ self.__link = link
++ self.__deprecated = deprecated
++ self.__since = since
++ self.__matches = []
++
++ def __repr__(self):
++ return (
++ '<Symbol: %s, type=%s, since=%s, deprecated=%s>' % (
++ self.name, self.type, self.since, self.deprecated))
++
++
++ book = property(lambda self: self.__book)
++ name = property(lambda self: self.__name)
++ type = property(lambda self: self.__type)
++ link = property(lambda self: self.__link)
++ deprecated = property(lambda self: self.__deprecated)
++ matches = property(lambda self: self.__matches)
++ since = property(lambda self: self.__since)
++
++def parse_cmdline():
++ options = OptionParser(version="@VERSION@")
++
++ options.add_option('-b', '--book', dest='books',
++ help='name of a devhelp book to consider',
++ default=[], action='append')
++ options.add_option('-d', '--html-dir', metavar='PATH', dest='dirs',
++ help='path of additional folders with devhelp books',
++ default=[], action='append')
++ options.add_option('-s', '--summarize', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='print only a brief summary', dest='summarize')
++ options.add_option('-u', '--list-unknown', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='list symbols not found in any book', dest='unknown')
++ options.add_option('-v', '--verbose', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='print additional information')
++
++ return options.parse_args()
++
++def merge_gnome_path(options):
++ path = environ.get('GNOME2_PATH')
++ path = path and path.split(':') or []
++
++ prefix = popen(
++ '@PKG_CONFIG@ --variable=prefix glib-2.0'
++ ).readline().rstrip()
++
++ path.insert(0, prefix)
++ path = filter(None, [p.strip() for p in path])
++
++ path = [[
++ os.path.join(p, 'share', 'devhelp', 'books'),
++ os.path.join(p, 'share', 'gtk-doc', 'html')]
++ for p in path]
++
++ path = reduce(list.__add__, path)
++ path = filter(os.path.isdir, path)
++
++ options.dirs += path
++
++def summarize_matches(matches):
++ counts = {}
++ for filename, lineno, symbol in matches:
++ if not isinstance(symbol, Symbol):
++ if options.verbose:
++ print('%s:%d: unknown symbol %s' % (filename, lineno, symbol))
++ continue
++
++ since = '%s-%s' % (symbol.book.name, symbol.since)
++ name = symbol.name
++ if since not in counts:
++ counts[since] = {}
++ counts[since][name] = counts[since].get(name, 0) + 1
++
++ for since, stats in counts.items():
++ counts[since] = list(sorted(stats.items(), key=lambda x: -x[1]))
++
++ return counts
++
++if '__main__' == __name__:
++ options, args = parse_cmdline()
++
++ merge_gnome_path(options)
++
++ if not options.books:
++ options.books = default_books
++
++ def trace(message, *args):
++ if options.verbose: print(message % args)
++
++ def parse_book(name):
++ try:
++ match = re.match(r'^(.*?)(?::(\d+(?:\.\d+)*))?$', name)
++ name, version = match.groups()
++ trace('reading book: %s', name)
++
++ version = version and Symbol.VersionInfo(version)
++ return name, Book(name, options.dirs, version)
++
++ except IOError as e:
++ print >>stderr, 'WARNING: %s.' % e
++
++ def scan_source_file(name):
++ contents = None
++
++ try:
++ contents = __comment_regex.sub('', file(name).read())
++
++ except IOError as e:
++ print >>stderr, e
++
++ if contents:
++ trace('scanning: %s', name)
++ lines = contents.split('\n')
++
++ for lineno in range(len(lines)):
++ for word in __word_regex.findall(lines[lineno]):
++ symbol = symbols.get(word)
++
++ if symbol:
++ symbol.matches.append((name, lineno, symbol))
++
++ elif options.unknown and word.find('_') > 0:
++ unknown_symbols.append((name, lineno, word))
++
++ unknown_symbols = []
++ matches, symbols = dict(), dict()
++ books = dict(filter(None, map(parse_book, set(options.books))))
++
++ for book in books.values():
++ symbols.update(book.symbols)
++
++ for name in args:
++ if os.path.isdir(name):
++ for path, dirs, files in walk(name):
++ for f in files:
++ if f.endswith('.c'):
++ scan_source_file(os.path.join(path, f))
++
++ else:
++ scan_source_file(name)
++
++ matches = []
++
++ for book in books.values():
++ requirements = book.find_requirements().items()
++ requirements.sort()
++
++ if requirements:
++ for symbol in requirements[-1][1]:
++ matches += symbol.matches
++
++ if options.unknown:
++ matches += unknown_symbols
++
++ matches.sort()
++
++ if options.summarize:
++ summary = summarize_matches(matches)
++ for since in sorted(summary.keys()):
++ print('%s required for' % since)
++ for x in summary[since]:
++ print(' %u %s' % (x[1], x[0]))
++ else:
++ for filename, lineno, symbol in matches:
++ if isinstance(symbol, Symbol):
++ args = filename, lineno, symbol.book.name, symbol.since, symbol.name
++ print('%s:%d: %s-%s required for %s' % args)
++
++ elif options.verbose:
++ print('%s:%d: unknown symbol %s' % (filename, lineno, symbol))
++
++ if options.unknown:
++ unknown = [m[2].split('_')[0].lower() for m in unknown_symbols]
++ unknown = list(set(unknown))
++ unknown.sort()
++
++ print('unknown prefixes: %s' % ', '.join(unknown))
++
++ raise SystemExit(matches and 1 or 0)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!@PYTHON@
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007-2016 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import argparse
++import os
++import sys
++
++try:
++ import gtkdoc_uninstalled
++except ModuleNotFoundError:
++ sys.path.append('@PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR@')
++
++from gtkdoc import common, config, fixxref
++
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(
++ description='gtkdoc-fixxref version %s - fix cross references in html files' % config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--version', action='version', version=config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--module', required=True,
++ help='Name of the doc module being processed.')
++ parser.add_argument('--module-dir', default='',
++ help='The directory which contains the generated HTML.')
++ parser.add_argument('--html-dir', default='',
++ help='The directory where gtk-doc generated documentation is'
++ 'installed.')
++ parser.add_argument('--extra-dir', default=[], action='append',
++ help='Directories to recursively scan for indices (*.devhelp2)'
++ 'in addition to HTML_DIR')
++ parser.add_argument('--src-lang', default='c',
++ help='Programing language used for syntax highlighting. The'
++ 'available languages depend on the source'
++ 'highlighter you use.')
++
++ options = parser.parse_args()
++
++ if not options.module_dir:
++ options.module_dir = os.path.join(options.html_dir, options.module)
++
++ common.setup_logging()
++
++ fixxref.Run(options)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!@PYTHON@
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007-2016 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++from __future__ import print_function
++
++import argparse
++import sys
++
++try:
++ import gtkdoc_uninstalled
++except ModuleNotFoundError:
++ sys.path.append('@PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR@')
++
++from gtkdoc import common, config, mkdb
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser()
++ parser.add_argument('--version', action='version', version=config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--module', required=True,
++ help='Name of the doc module being parsed')
++ parser.add_argument('--source-dir', action='append', dest='source_dir', default=[])
++ parser.add_argument('--source-suffixes', dest='source_suffixes', default='')
++ parser.add_argument('--ignore-files', dest='ignore_files', default='')
++ parser.add_argument('--output-dir', dest='output_dir', default='')
++ parser.add_argument('--tmpl-dir', dest='tmpl_dir', help="DEPRECATED")
++ parser.add_argument('--main-sgml-file', dest='main_sgml_file', default='')
++ parser.add_argument('--expand-content-files', dest='expand_content_files', default='')
++ group = parser.add_mutually_exclusive_group()
++ group.add_argument('--sgml-mode', action='store_true', default=False, dest='sgml_mode')
++ group.add_argument('--xml-mode', action='store_true', default=False, dest='xml_mode')
++ parser.add_argument('--default-stability', dest='default_stability',
++ choices=['', 'Stable', 'Private', 'Unstable'], default='')
++ parser.add_argument('--default-includes', dest='default_includes', default='')
++ parser.add_argument('--output-format', default='xml') # MUST be 'xml', deprecate?
++ parser.add_argument('--name-space', dest='name_space', default='')
++ parser.add_argument('--outputallsymbols', default=False, action='store_true')
++ parser.add_argument('--outputsymbolswithoutsince', default=False, action='store_true')
++
++ options = parser.parse_args()
++
++ if options.output_format != "xml":
++ sys.exit('Invalid format "%s" passed to --output.format' % options.output_format)
++
++ common.setup_logging()
++
++ mkdb.Run(options)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!@PYTHON@
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Owen Taylor
++# 2001-2005 Damon Chaplin
++# 2009-2017 Stefan Sauer
++# 2017 Jussi Pakkanen
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import argparse
++import sys
++
++try:
++ import gtkdoc_uninstalled
++except ModuleNotFoundError:
++ sys.path.append('@PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR@')
++
++from gtkdoc import common, config, mkhtml
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(
++ description='gtkdoc-mkhtml version %s - generate documentation in html format' % config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--version', action='version', version=config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--verbose', default=False, action='store_true',
++ help='Print extra output while processing')
++ parser.add_argument('--path', default=[], action='append',
++ help='Extra source directories')
++ parser.add_argument('args', nargs='*',
++ help='MODULE DRIVER_FILE')
++ # TODO: only for testing, replace with env-var
++ parser.add_argument('--uninstalled', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='???')
++
++ options = parser.parse_args()
++ if len(options.args) < 2:
++ sys.exit('Too few arguments')
++
++ common.setup_logging()
++
++ sys.exit(mkhtml.run(options))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!@PYTHON@
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2018 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import argparse
++import sys
++
++try:
++ import gtkdoc_uninstalled
++except ModuleNotFoundError:
++ sys.path.append('@PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR@')
++
++from gtkdoc import common, config, mkhtml2
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(
++ description='gtkdoc-mkhtml version %s - generate documentation in html format' % config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--version', action='version', version=config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--output-dir', default='.',
++ help='The directory where the results are stored')
++ parser.add_argument('--path', default=[], action='append',
++ help='Extra source directories')
++ parser.add_argument('--extra-dir', default=[], action='append',
++ help='Directories to recursively scan for indices (*.devhelp2)'
++ 'in addition to HTML_DIR')
++ parser.add_argument('--src-lang', default='c',
++ help='Programing language used for syntax highlighting. This'
++ 'can be any language pygments supports.')
++ parser.add_argument('args', nargs='*',
++ help='MODULE DRIVER_FILE')
++ # TODO: only for testing, replace with env-var
++ parser.add_argument('--uninstalled', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='???')
++
++ options = parser.parse_args()
++ if len(options.args) != 2:
++ sys.exit('Too few arguments')
++
++ common.setup_logging()
++
++ sys.exit(mkhtml2.run(options))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!@PYTHON@
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Owen Taylor
++# 2001-2005 Damon Chaplin
++# 2009-2017 Stefan Sauer
++# 2017 Jussi Pakkanen
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import argparse
++import sys
++
++try:
++ import gtkdoc_uninstalled
++except ModuleNotFoundError:
++ sys.path.append('@PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR@')
++
++from gtkdoc import common, config, mkman
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(
++ description='gtkdoc-mkman version %s - generate documentation in man format' % config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--version', action='version', version=config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--verbose', default=False, action='store_true',
++ help='Print extra output while processing')
++ parser.add_argument('--path', default=[], action='append',
++ help='Extra source directories')
++ parser.add_argument('args', nargs=2,
++ help='MODULE DRIVER_FILE')
++ # TODO: only for testing, replace with env-var
++ parser.add_argument('--uninstalled', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='???')
++
++ options = parser.parse_args()
++
++ common.setup_logging()
++
++ sys.exit(mkman.run(options))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!@PYTHON@
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2009-2017 Stefan Sauer
++# 2017 Jussi Pakkanen
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import argparse
++import sys
++
++try:
++ import gtkdoc_uninstalled
++except ModuleNotFoundError:
++ sys.path.append('@PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR@')
++
++from gtkdoc import common, config, mkpdf
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(
++ description='gtkdoc-mkpdf version %s - generate documentation in pdf format' % config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--version', action='version', version=config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--verbose', default=False, action='store_true',
++ help='Print extra output while processing.')
++ parser.add_argument('--path', default=[], action='append',
++ help='Extra source directories.')
++ parser.add_argument('--imgdir', default=[], action='append',
++ help='Extra image directories.')
++ parser.add_argument('--uninstalled', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='???')
++ parser.add_argument('args', nargs=2,
++ help='MODULE DRIVER_FILE')
++
++ options = parser.parse_args()
++
++ common.setup_logging()
++
++ sys.exit(mkpdf.run(options))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!@PYTHON@
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007 David Necas (Yeti)
++# 2007-2016 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import argparse
++import sys
++
++try:
++ import gtkdoc_uninstalled
++except ModuleNotFoundError:
++ sys.path.append('@PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR@')
++
++from gtkdoc import common, config, rebase
++
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(
++ description='gtkdoc-rebase version %s - rewrite links in html docs' % config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--version', action='version', version=config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--html-dir', required=True,
++ help='The directory which contains the installed HTML')
++ parser.add_argument('--other-dir', default=[], action='append',
++ help='Directories to recursively scan for indices (*.devhelp2).'
++ 'May be used more than once for multiple directories.')
++ parser.add_argument('--dest-dir', default='',
++ help='Staging area virtual root, this prefix will be removed'
++ 'from HTML_DIR for relative link calculation.')
++ parser.add_argument('--aggressive', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='Rebase links to all files that are under a directory matching a package name.')
++ parser.add_argument('--verbose', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='Print extra output while processing')
++ parser.add_argument('--online', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='Prefer cross-references to online documents')
++ parser.add_argument('--relative', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='Prefer relative cross-references')
++
++ options = parser.parse_args()
++
++ common.setup_logging()
++
++ sys.exit(rebase.run(options))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!@PYTHON@
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007-2016 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++from __future__ import print_function
++
++import argparse
++import sys
++
++try:
++ import gtkdoc_uninstalled
++except ModuleNotFoundError:
++ sys.path.append('@PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR@')
++
++from gtkdoc import common, config, scan
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(
++ description='gtkdoc-scan version %s - scan header files for public symbols' % config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--version', action='version', version=config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--module', required=True,
++ help='Name of the doc module being processed.')
++ parser.add_argument('--source-dir', action='append', default=[],
++ help='Directories containing the source files to scan')
++ parser.add_argument('--ignore-headers', default='',
++ help='A space-separated list of header files/dirs not to scan')
++ parser.add_argument('--output-dir', default='.',
++ help='The directory where the results are stored')
++ parser.add_argument('--deprecated-guards', default='does_not_match_any_cpp_symbols_at_all_nope',
++ help='A |-separated list of symbols used as deprecation guards')
++ parser.add_argument('--ignore-decorators', default='(?=no)match',
++ help='A |-separated list of additional decorators in'
++ 'declarations that should be ignored')
++ parser.add_argument('--rebuild-sections', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='Rebuild (overwrite) the MODULE-sections.txt file')
++ parser.add_argument('--rebuild-types', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='Automatically recreate the MODULE.types file using'
++ 'all the *_get_type() functions found')
++ parser.add_argument('headers', nargs='*')
++
++ options = parser.parse_args()
++
++ common.setup_logging()
++
++ scan.Run(options)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!@PYTHON@
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007-2016 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import argparse
++import os
++import sys
++
++try:
++ import gtkdoc_uninstalled
++except ModuleNotFoundError:
++ sys.path.append('@PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR@')
++
++from gtkdoc import common, config, scangobj
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(
++ description='gtkdoc-rebase version %s - introspect g-objects' % config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--version', action='version', version=config.version)
++ parser.add_argument('--module', required=True,
++ help='Name of the doc module being parsed')
++ parser.add_argument('--types', default='',
++ help='The name of the file to store the types in')
++ parser.add_argument('--type-init-func', default='',
++ help='The init function(s) to call instead of g_type_init()')
++ parser.add_argument('--query-child-properties', default='',
++ help='A function that returns a list of child properties for a class')
++ parser.add_argument('--output-dir', default='.',
++ help='The directory where the results are stored')
++ parser.add_argument('--cc', default='', help='The compiler to use')
++ parser.add_argument('--ld', default='', help='The linker to use')
++ parser.add_argument('--cflags', type=str, default=[], help='Compiler flags',
++ action='append')
++ parser.add_argument('--ldflags', type=str, default=[], help='Linker flags',
++ action='append')
++ parser.add_argument('--run', default='',
++ help='Command for running the scanner')
++ parser.add_argument('--verbose', action='store_true', default=False,
++ help='Print extra output while processing')
++
++ options = parser.parse_args()
++
++ if options.types == '':
++ options.types = os.path.join(options.output_dir, options.module + '.types')
++ if options.cflags:
++ options.cflags = ' '.join(options.cflags)
++ if options.ldflags:
++ options.ldflags = ' '.join(options.ldflags)
++
++ if not options.cc:
++ options.cc = os.environ.get('CC', 'gcc')
++ if not options.ld:
++ options.ld = os.environ.get('LD', options.cc)
++ if not options.cflags:
++ options.cflags = os.environ.get('CFLAGS', '')
++ if not options.ldflags:
++ options.ldflags = os.environ.get('LDFLAGS', '')
++ if not options.run:
++ options.run = os.environ.get('RUN', '')
++
++ common.setup_logging()
++
++ sys.exit(scangobj.run(options))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2007 David Nečas
++# 2007-2017 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++"""
++The check tool runs various tests on built documentation and outputs test
++results. Can be run druring make check, by adding this to the documentations
++Makefile.am: TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK).
++"""
++
++import os
++import re
++from glob import glob
++
++
++class FileFormatError(Exception):
++ pass
++
++
++def grep(regexp, lines, what):
++ pattern = re.compile(regexp)
++ for line in lines:
++ for match in re.finditer(pattern, line):
++ return match.group(1)
++ raise FileFormatError(what)
++
++
++def check_empty(filename):
++ with open(filename, "rb") as f:
++ count = sum(1 for line in f if line.strip())
++ return count
++
++
++def read_file(filename):
++ with open(filename, 'r', encoding='utf-8') as f:
++ return f.read().splitlines()
++
++
++def check_includes(filename):
++ # Check that each XML file in the xml directory is included in doc_main_file
++ lines = read_file(filename)
++ num_missing = 0
++ for include in glob('xml/*.xml'):
++ try:
++ next(line for line in lines if include in line)
++ except StopIteration:
++ num_missing += 1
++ print('%s:1:E: doesn\'t appear to include "%s"' % (filename, include))
++
++ return num_missing
++
++
++def get_variable(env, lines, variable):
++ value = env.get(variable, None)
++ if value is None:
++ value = grep(r'^\s*' + variable + r'\s*=\s*(\S+)', lines, variable)
++ return value
++
++
++def run_tests(workdir, doc_module, doc_main_file):
++ checks = 4
++
++ print('Running suite(s): gtk-doc-' + doc_module)
++
++ # Test #1
++ statusfilename = os.path.join(workdir, doc_module + '-undocumented.txt')
++ statusfile = read_file(statusfilename)
++ try:
++ undocumented = int(grep(r'^(\d+)\s+not\s+documented\.\s*$',
++ statusfile, 'number of undocumented symbols'))
++ incomplete = int(grep(r'^(\d+)\s+symbols?\s+incomplete\.\s*$',
++ statusfile, 'number of incomplete symbols'))
++ except FileFormatError as e:
++ print('Cannot find %s in %s' % (str(e), statusfilename))
++ return checks # consider all failed
++
++ total = undocumented + incomplete
++ if total:
++ print(doc_module + '-undocumented.txt:1:E: %d undocumented or incomplete symbols' % total)
++
++ # Test #2
++ undeclared = check_empty(os.path.join(workdir, doc_module + '-undeclared.txt'))
++ if undeclared:
++ print(doc_module + '-undeclared.txt:1:E: %d undeclared symbols\n' % undeclared)
++
++ # Test #3
++ unused = check_empty(os.path.join(workdir, doc_module + '-unused.txt'))
++ if unused:
++ print(doc_module + '-unused.txt:1:E: %d unused documentation entries\n' % unused)
++
++ # Test #4
++ missing_includes = check_includes(os.path.join(workdir, doc_main_file))
++
++ # Test Summary
++ failed = (total > 0) + (undeclared != 0) + (unused != 0) + (missing_includes != 0)
++ rate = 100.0 * (checks - failed) / checks
++ print("%.1f%%: Checks %d, Failures: %d" % (rate, checks, failed))
++ return failed
++
++
++def run(options=None):
++ """Runs the tests.
++
++ Returns:
++ int: a system exit code.
++ """
++
++ # Get parameters from test env, if not there try to grab them from the makefile
++ # We like Makefile.am more but builddir does not necessarily contain one.
++ makefilename = 'Makefile.am'
++ if not os.path.exists(makefilename):
++ makefilename = 'Makefile'
++ makefile = []
++ try:
++ makefile = read_file(makefilename)
++ except (OSError, IOError):
++ pass
++
++ # For historic reasons tests are launched in srcdir
++ workdir = os.environ.get('BUILDDIR', None)
++ if not workdir:
++ workdir = '.'
++
++ try:
++ doc_module = get_variable(os.environ, makefile, 'DOC_MODULE')
++ doc_main_file = get_variable(os.environ, makefile, 'DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE')
++ except FileFormatError as e:
++ print('Cannot find %s in %s' % (str(e), makefilename))
++ return 1
++
++ doc_main_file = doc_main_file.replace('$(DOC_MODULE)', doc_module)
++
++ return run_tests(workdir, doc_module, doc_main_file)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2001 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007-2016 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++from collections import OrderedDict
++import logging
++import os
++import re
++import subprocess
++import sys
++
++from . import config
++
++
++def setup_logging():
++ """Check GTKDOC_TRACE environment variable.
++
++ Set python log level to the value of the environment variable (DEBUG, INFO,
++ WARNING, ERROR and CRITICAL) or INFO if the environment variable is empty.
++ """
++ log_level = os.environ.get('GTKDOC_TRACE', 'WARNING')
++ if log_level == '':
++ log_level = 'WARNING'
++ logging.basicConfig(stream=sys.stdout,
++ level=logging.getLevelName(log_level.upper()),
++ format='%(asctime)s:%(filename)s:%(funcName)s:%(lineno)d:%(levelname)s:%(message)s')
++ # When redirecting the output and running with a non utf-8 locale
++ # we get UnicodeEncodeError:
++ encoding = sys.stdout.encoding
++ if 'PYTHONIOENCODING' not in os.environ and (not encoding or encoding != 'UTF-8'):
++ sys.stdout.flush()
++ sys.stdout = open(sys.stdout.fileno(), mode='w', encoding='utf8', buffering=1)
++
++
++def UpdateFileIfChanged(old_file, new_file, make_backup):
++ """Compares the old version of the file with the new version and if the
++ file has changed it moves the new version into the old versions place. This
++ is used so we only change files if needed, so we can do proper dependency
++ tracking.
++
++ Args:
++ old_file (str): The pathname of the old file.
++ new_file (str): The pathname of the new version of the file.
++ make_backup (bool): True if a backup of the old file should be kept.
++ It will have the .bak suffix added to the file name.
++
++ Returns:
++ bool: It returns False if the file hasn't changed, and True if it has.
++ """
++
++ logging.debug("Comparing %s with %s...", old_file, new_file)
++
++ if os.path.exists(old_file):
++ old_contents = new_contents = None
++ with open(old_file, 'rb') as f:
++ old_contents = f.read()
++ with open(new_file, 'rb') as f:
++ new_contents = f.read()
++ if old_contents == new_contents:
++ os.unlink(new_file)
++ logging.debug("-> content is the same.")
++ return False
++
++ if make_backup:
++ backupname = old_file + '.bak'
++ if os.path.exists(backupname):
++ os.unlink(backupname)
++ os.rename(old_file, backupname)
++ else:
++ os.unlink(old_file)
++ logging.debug("-> content differs.")
++ else:
++ logging.debug("-> %s created.", old_file)
++
++ os.rename(new_file, old_file)
++ return True
++
++
++def GetModuleDocDir(module_name):
++ """Get the docdir for the given module via pkg-config
++
++ Args:
++ module_name (string): The module, e.g. 'glib-2.0'
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the doc directory or None
++ """
++ path = None
++ try:
++ path = subprocess.check_output([config.pkg_config, '--variable=prefix', module_name], universal_newlines=True)
++ except subprocess.CalledProcessError:
++ return None
++ return os.path.join(path.strip(), 'share/gtk-doc/html')
++
++
++def LogWarning(filename, line, message):
++ """Log a warning in gcc style format
++
++ Args:
++ file (str): The file the error comes from
++ line (int): line number in the file
++ message (str): the error message to print
++ """
++ filename = filename or "unknown"
++
++ # TODO: write to stderr
++ print("%s:%d: warning: %s" % (filename, line, message))
++
++
++def CreateValidSGMLID(xml_id):
++ """Creates a valid SGML 'id' from the given string.
++
++ According to http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id "ID and NAME
++ tokens must begin with a letter ([A-Za-z]) and may be followed by any number
++ of letters, digits ([0-9]), hyphens ("-"), underscores ("_"), colons (":"),
++ and periods (".")."
++
++ When creating SGML IDS, we append ":CAPS" to all all-caps identifiers to
++ prevent name clashes (SGML ids are case-insensitive). (It basically never is
++ the case that mixed-case identifiers would collide.)
++
++ Args:
++ id (str): The text to be converted into a valid SGML id.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: The converted id.
++ """
++
++ # Special case, '_' would end up as '' so we use 'gettext-macro' instead.
++ if xml_id == '_':
++ return "gettext-macro"
++
++ xml_id = re.sub(r'[,;]', '', xml_id)
++ xml_id = re.sub(r'[_ ]', '-', xml_id)
++ xml_id = re.sub(r'^-+', '', xml_id)
++ xml_id = xml_id.replace('::', '-')
++ xml_id = xml_id.replace(':', '--')
++
++ # Append ":CAPS" to all all-caps identifiers
++ # FIXME: there are some inconsistencies here, we have index files containing e.g. TRUE--CAPS
++ if xml_id.isupper() and not xml_id.endswith('-CAPS'):
++ xml_id += ':CAPS'
++
++ return xml_id
++
++
++# Parsing helpers (move to mkdb ?)
++
++class ParseError(Exception):
++ pass
++
++
++def PreprocessStructOrEnum(declaration):
++ """Trim a type declaration for display.
++
++ Removes private sections and comments from the declaration.
++
++ Args:
++ declaration (str): the type declaration (struct or enum)
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the trimmed declaration
++ """
++ # Remove private symbols
++ # Assume end of declaration if line begins with '}'
++ declaration = re.sub(r'\n?[ \t]*/\*\s*<\s*(private|protected)\s*>\s*\*/.*?(?:/\*\s*<\s*public\s*>\s*\*/|(?=^\}))',
++ '', declaration, flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL)
++
++ # Remove all other comments
++ declaration = re.sub(r'\n\s*/\*.*?\*/\s*\n', r'\n', declaration, flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL)
++ declaration = re.sub(r'/\*([^*]+|\*(?!/))*\*/', r' ', declaration)
++ declaration = re.sub(r'\n\s*//.*?\n', r'\n', declaration, flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL)
++ declaration = re.sub(r'//.*', '', declaration)
++
++ return declaration
++
++
++# TODO: output_function_params is always passed as 0
++# TODO: we always pass both functions
++def ParseStructDeclaration(declaration, is_object, output_function_params, typefunc=None, namefunc=None):
++ """ Parse a struct declaration.
++
++ Takes a structure declaration and breaks it into individual type declarations.
++
++ Args:
++ declaration (str): the declaration to parse
++ is_object (bool): true if this is an object structure
++ output_function_params (bool): true if full type is wanted for function pointer members
++ typefunc (func): function to apply to type
++ namefunc (func): function to apply to name
++
++ Returns:
++ dict: map of (symbol, decl) pairs describing the public declaration
++ """
++
++ # For forward struct declarations just return an empty array.
++ if re.search(r'(?:struct|union)\s+\S+\s*;', declaration, flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL):
++ return {}
++
++ # Remove all private parts of the declaration
++ # For objects, assume private
++ if is_object:
++ declaration = re.sub(r'''((?:struct|union)\s+\w*\s*\{)
++ .*?
++ (?:/\*\s*<\s*public\s*>\s*\*/|(?=\}))''',
++ r'\1', declaration, flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL | re.VERBOSE)
++
++ # Remove g_iface, parent_instance and parent_class if they are first member
++ declaration = re.sub(r'(\{)\s*(\w)+\s+(g_iface|parent_instance|parent_class)\s*;', r'\1', declaration)
++
++ declaration = PreprocessStructOrEnum(declaration)
++
++ if declaration.strip() == '':
++ return {}
++
++ # Prime match after "struct/union {" declaration
++ match = re.search(r'(?:struct|union)\s+\w*\s*\{', declaration, flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL)
++ if not match:
++ raise ParseError('Declaration "%s" does not begin with "struct/union [NAME] {"' % declaration)
++
++ logging.debug('public fields in struct/union: %s', declaration)
++
++ result = OrderedDict()
++
++ # Treat lines in sequence, allowing singly nested anonymous structs and unions.
++ for m in re.finditer(r'\s*([^{;]+(\{[^\}]*\}[^{;]+)?);', declaration[match.end():], flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL):
++ line = m.group(1)
++
++ logging.debug('checking "%s"', line)
++
++ if re.search(r'^\s*\}\s*\w*\s*$', line):
++ break
++
++ # FIXME: Just ignore nested structs and unions for now
++ if '{' in line:
++ continue
++
++ # ignore preprocessor directives
++ line = re.sub(r'^#.*?\n\s*', '', line, flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL)
++
++ if re.search(r'^\s*\}\s*\w*\s*$', line):
++ break
++
++ func_match = re.search(r'''^
++ (const\s+|G_CONST_RETURN\s+|unsigned\s+|signed\s+|long\s+|short\s+)*(struct\s+|enum\s+)? # mod1
++ (\w+)\s* # type
++ (\**(?:\s*restrict)?)\s* # ptr1
++ (const\s+)? # mod2
++ (\**\s*) # ptr2
++ (const\s+)? # mod3
++ \(\s*\*\s*(\w+)\s*\)\s* # name
++ \(([^)]*)\)\s* # func_params
++ $''', line, flags=re.VERBOSE)
++ vars_match = re.search(r'''^
++ ((?:const\s+|volatile\s+|unsigned\s+|signed\s+|short\s+|long\s+)?)(struct\s+|enum\s+)? # mod1
++ (\w+)\s* # type
++ (\** \s* const\s+)? # mod2
++ (.*) # variables
++ $''', line, flags=re.VERBOSE)
++
++ # Try to match structure members which are functions
++ if func_match:
++ mod1 = func_match.group(1) or ''
++ if func_match.group(2):
++ mod1 += func_match.group(2)
++ func_type = func_match.group(3)
++ ptr1 = func_match.group(4)
++ mod2 = func_match.group(5) or ''
++ ptr2 = func_match.group(6)
++ mod3 = func_match.group(7) or ''
++ name = func_match.group(8)
++ func_params = func_match.group(9)
++ ptype = func_type
++ if typefunc:
++ ptype = typefunc(func_type, '<type>%s</type>' % func_type)
++ pname = name
++ if namefunc:
++ pname = namefunc(name)
++
++ if output_function_params:
++ result[name] = '%s%s%s%s%s%s (*%s) (%s)' % (
++ mod1, ptype, ptr1, mod2, ptr2, mod3, pname, func_params)
++ else:
++ result[name] = '%s ()' % pname
++
++ # Try to match normal struct fields of comma-separated variables/
++ elif vars_match:
++ mod1 = vars_match.group(1) or ''
++ if vars_match.group(2):
++ mod1 += vars_match.group(2)
++ vtype = vars_match.group(3)
++ ptype = vtype
++ if typefunc:
++ ptype = typefunc(vtype, '<type>%s</type>' % vtype)
++ mod2 = vars_match.group(4) or ''
++ if mod2:
++ mod2 = ' ' + mod2
++ var_list = vars_match.group(5)
++
++ logging.debug('"%s" "%s" "%s" "%s"', mod1, vtype, mod2, var_list)
++
++ mod1 = mod1.replace(' ', ' ')
++ mod2 = mod2.replace(' ', ' ')
++
++ for n in var_list.split(','):
++ # Each variable can have any number of '*' before the identifier,
++ # and be followed by any number of pairs of brackets or a bit field specifier.
++ # e.g. *foo, ***bar, *baz[12][23], foo : 25.
++ m = re.search(
++ r'^\s* (\**(?:\s*restrict\b)?) \s* (\w+) \s* (?: ((?:\[[^\]]*\]\s*)+) | (:\s*\d+)?) \s* $',
++ n, flags=re.VERBOSE)
++ if m:
++ ptrs = m.group(1)
++ name = m.group(2)
++ array = m.group(3) or ''
++ bits = m.group(4)
++ if bits:
++ bits = ' ' + bits
++ else:
++ bits = ''
++ if ptrs and not ptrs.endswith('*'):
++ ptrs += ' '
++
++ array = array.replace(' ', ' ')
++ bits = bits.replace(' ', ' ')
++
++ pname = name
++ if namefunc:
++ pname = namefunc(name)
++
++ result[name] = '%s%s%s %s%s%s%s;' % (mod1, ptype, mod2, ptrs, pname, array, bits)
++
++ logging.debug('Matched line: %s%s%s %s%s%s%s', mod1, ptype, mod2, ptrs, pname, array, bits)
++ else:
++ logging.warning('Cannot parse struct field: "%s"', n)
++
++ else:
++ logging.warning('Cannot parse structure field: "%s"', line)
++
++ return result
++
++
++def ParseEnumDeclaration(declaration):
++ """Parse an enum declaration.
++
++ This function takes a enumeration declaration and breaks it into individual
++ enum member declarations.
++
++ Args:
++ declaration (str): the declaration to parse
++
++ Returns:
++ str: list of strings describing the public declaration
++ """
++
++ # For forward struct declarations just return an empty array.
++ if re.search(r'enum\s+\S+\s*;', declaration, flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL):
++ return ()
++
++ declaration = PreprocessStructOrEnum(declaration)
++
++ if declaration.strip() == '':
++ return ()
++
++ result = []
++
++ # Remove parenthesized expressions (in macros like GTK_BLAH = BLAH(1,3))
++ # to avoid getting confused by commas they might contain. This doesn't
++ # handle nested parentheses correctly.
++ declaration = re.sub(r'\([^)\n]+\)', '', declaration)
++
++ # Remove apostrophed characters (e.g. '}' or ',') values to avoid getting
++ # confused with end of enumeration.
++ # See https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=741305
++ declaration = re.sub(r'\'.\'', '', declaration)
++
++ # Remove comma from comma - possible whitespace - closing brace sequence
++ # since it is legal in GNU C and C99 to have a trailing comma but doesn't
++ # result in an actual enum member
++ declaration = re.sub(r',(\s*})', r'\1', declaration)
++
++ # Prime match after "typedef enum {" declaration
++ match = re.search(r'(typedef\s+)?enum\s*(\S+\s*)?\{', declaration, flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL)
++ if not match:
++ raise ParseError('Enum declaration "%s" does not begin with "typedef enum {" or "enum [NAME] {"' % declaration)
++
++ logging.debug("public fields in enum: %s'", declaration)
++
++ # Treat lines in sequence.
++ for m in re.finditer(r'\s*([^,\}]+)([,\}])', declaration[match.end():], flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL):
++ line = m.group(1)
++ terminator = m.group(2)
++
++ # ignore preprocessor directives
++ line = re.sub(r'^#.*?\n\s*', '', line, flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL)
++
++ m1 = re.search(r'^(\w+)\s*(=.*)?$', line, flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL)
++ # Special case for GIOCondition, where the values are specified by
++ # macros which expand to include the equal sign like '=1'.
++ m2 = re.search(r'^(\w+)\s*GLIB_SYSDEF_POLL', line, flags=re.MULTILINE | re.DOTALL)
++ if m1:
++ result.append(m1.group(1))
++ elif m2:
++ result.append(m2.group(1))
++ elif line.strip().startswith('#'):
++ # Special case include of <gdk/gdkcursors.h>, just ignore it
++ # Special case for #ifdef/#else/#endif, just ignore it
++ break
++ else:
++ logging.warning('Cannot parse enumeration member: %s', line)
++
++ if terminator == '}':
++ break
++
++ return result
++
++
++def ParseFunctionDeclaration(declaration, typefunc, namefunc):
++ """Parse a function declaration.
++
++ This function takes a function declaration and breaks it into individual
++ parameter declarations.
++
++ Args:
++ declaration (str): the declaration to parse
++ typefunc (func): function to apply to type
++ namefunc (func): function to apply to name
++
++ Returns:
++ dict: map of (symbol, decl) pairs describing the prototype
++ """
++
++ result = OrderedDict()
++
++ param_num = 0
++ while declaration:
++ logging.debug('decl=[%s]', declaration)
++
++ # skip whitespace and commas
++ declaration, n = re.subn(r'^[\s,]+', '', declaration)
++ if n:
++ continue
++
++ declaration, n = re.subn(r'^void\s*[,\n]', '', declaration)
++ if n:
++ if param_num != 0:
++ logging.warning('void used as parameter %d in function %s', param_num, declaration)
++ result['void'] = namefunc('<type>void</type>')
++ param_num += 1
++ continue
++
++ declaration, n = re.subn(r'^\s*[_a-zA-Z0-9]*\.\.\.\s*[,\n]', '', declaration)
++ if n:
++ result['...'] = namefunc('...')
++ param_num += 1
++ continue
++
++ # allow alphanumerics, '_', '[' & ']' in param names, try to match a standard parameter
++ # $1 $2 $3 $4 $5
++ regex = r'^\s*((?:(?:G_CONST_RETURN|G_GNUC_[A-Z_]+\s+|unsigned long|unsigned short|signed long|signed short|unsigned|signed|long|short|volatile|const)\s+)*)((?:struct\b|enum\b)?\s*\w+)\s*((?:(?:const\b|restrict\b|G_GNUC_[A-Z_]+\b)?\s*\*?\s*(?:const\b|restrict\b|G_GNUC_[A-Z_]+\b)?\s*)*)(\w+)?\s*((?:\[\S*\])*)\s*(?:G_GNUC_[A-Z_]+)?\s*[,\n]'
++ m = re.match(regex, declaration)
++ if m:
++ declaration = re.sub(regex, '', declaration)
++
++ pre = m.group(1) or ''
++ type = m.group(2)
++ ptr = m.group(3) or ''
++ name = m.group(4) or ''
++ array = m.group(5) or ''
++
++ pre = re.sub(r'\s+', ' ', pre)
++ type = re.sub(r'\s+', ' ', type)
++ ptr = re.sub(r'\s+', ' ', ptr)
++ ptr = re.sub(r'\s+$', '', ptr)
++ if ptr and not ptr.endswith('*'):
++ ptr += ' '
++
++ logging.debug('"%s" "%s" "%s" "%s" "%s"', pre, type, ptr, name, array)
++
++ m = re.search(r'^((un)?signed .*)\s?', pre)
++ if name == '' and m:
++ name = type
++ type = m.group(1)
++ pre = ''
++
++ if name == '':
++ name = 'Param' + str(param_num + 1)
++
++ logging.debug('"%s" "%s" "%s" "%s" "%s"', pre, type, ptr, name, array)
++
++ xref = typefunc(type, '<type>%s</type>' % type)
++ result[name] = namefunc('%s%s %s%s%s' % (pre, xref, ptr, name, array))
++ param_num += 1
++ continue
++
++ # Try to match parameters which are functions
++ # $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 $8
++ regex = r'^(const\s+|G_CONST_RETURN\s+|G_GNUC_[A-Z_]+\s+|signed\s+|unsigned\s+)*(struct\s+)?(\w+)\s*(\**)\s*(?:restrict\b)?\s*(const\s+)?\(\s*(\*[\s\*]*)\s*(\w+)\s*\)\s*\(([^)]*)\)\s*[,\n]'
++ m = re.match(regex, declaration)
++ if m:
++ declaration = re.sub(regex, '', declaration)
++
++ mod1 = m.group(1) or ''
++ if m.group(2):
++ mod1 += m.group(2)
++ type = m.group(3)
++ ptr1 = m.group(4)
++ mod2 = m.group(5) or ''
++ func_ptr = m.group(6)
++ name = m.group(7)
++ func_params = m.group(8) or ''
++
++ if ptr1 and not ptr1.endswith('*'):
++ ptr1 += ' '
++ func_ptr = re.sub(r'\s+', ' ', func_ptr)
++
++ logging.debug('"%s" "%s" "%s" "%s" "%s"', mod1, type, mod2, func_ptr, name)
++
++ xref = typefunc(type, '<type>%s</type>' % type)
++ result[name] = namefunc('%s%s%s%s (%s%s) (%s)' % (mod1, xref, ptr1, mod2, func_ptr, name, func_params))
++ param_num += 1
++ continue
++
++ logging.warning('Cannot parse args for function in "%s"', declaration)
++ break
++
++ return result
++
++
++def ParseMacroDeclaration(declaration, namefunc):
++ """Parse a macro declaration.
++
++ This function takes a macro declaration and breaks it into individual
++ parameter declarations.
++
++ Args:
++ declaration (str): the declaration to parse
++ namefunc (func): function to apply to name
++
++ Returns:
++ dict: map of (symbol, decl) pairs describing the macro
++ """
++
++ result = OrderedDict()
++
++ logging.debug('decl=[%s]', declaration)
++
++ m = re.search(r'^\s*#\s*define\s+\w+\(([^\)]*)\)', declaration)
++ if m:
++ params = m.group(1)
++ params = re.sub(r'\n', '', params)
++
++ logging.debug('params=[%s]', params)
++
++ for param in params.split(','):
++ param = param.strip()
++
++ # Allow varargs variations
++ if param.endswith('...'):
++ param = '...'
++
++ if param != '':
++ result[param] = namefunc(param)
++
++ return result
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++import os
++import sys
++
++try:
++ from gtkdoc_uninstalled import builddir
++ exec(open(os.path.join(builddir, 'gtkdoc', 'config_data.py')).read())
++except ModuleNotFoundError:
++ from gtkdoc.config_data import *
++
++
++def get_dirs(uninstalled):
++ try:
++ from gtkdoc_uninstalled import sourcedir
++ gtkdocdir = sourcedir
++ styledir = os.path.join(sourcedir, 'style')
++ except ModuleNotFoundError:
++ if uninstalled:
++ # this does not work from buiddir!=srcdir
++ gtkdocdir = os.path.split(sys.argv[0])[0]
++ if not os.path.exists(gtkdocdir + '/gtk-doc.xsl'):
++ # try 'srcdir' (set from makefiles) too
++ if os.path.exists(os.environ.get("ABS_TOP_SRCDIR", '') + '/gtk-doc.xsl'):
++ gtkdocdir = os.environ['ABS_TOP_SRCDIR']
++ styledir = gtkdocdir + '/style'
++ else:
++ gtkdocdir = os.path.join(datadir, 'gtk-doc/data')
++ styledir = gtkdocdir
++ return (gtkdocdir, styledir)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++version = "@VERSION@"
++
++# tools
++dblatex = '@DBLATEX@'
++fop = '@FOP@'
++pkg_config = '@PKG_CONFIG@'
++xsltproc = '@XSLTPROC@'
++
++# configured directories
++prefix = '@prefix@'
++datarootdir = "@datarootdir@".replace('${prefix}', prefix)
++datadir = "@datadir@".replace('${datarootdir}', datarootdir)
++
++exeext = '@EXEEXT@'
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007-2016 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++''"Fix cross-references in the HTML documentation.''"
++
++import logging
++import os
++import re
++
++from . import common, highlight
++
++# This contains all the entities and their relative URLs.
++Links = {}
++
++# failing link targets we don't warn about even once
++NoLinks = {
++ 'char',
++ 'double',
++ 'float',
++ 'int',
++ 'long',
++ 'main',
++ 'signed',
++ 'unsigned',
++ 'va-list',
++ 'void',
++}
++
++
++def Run(options):
++ logging.info('options: %s', str(options.__dict__))
++
++ LoadIndicies(options.module_dir, options.html_dir, options.extra_dir)
++ ReadSections(options.module)
++ FixCrossReferences(options.module_dir, options.module, options.src_lang)
++ highlight.append_style_defs(os.path.join(options.module_dir, 'style.css'))
++
++
++# TODO(ensonic): try to refactor so that we get a list of path's and then just
++# loop over them.
++# - module_dir is by default 'html'
++# - html_dir can be set by configure, defaults to $(docdir)
++def LoadIndicies(module_dir, html_dir, extra_dirs):
++ # Cache of dirs we already scanned for index files
++ dir_cache = {}
++
++ path_prefix = ''
++ m = re.search(r'(.*?)/share/gtk-doc/html', html_dir)
++ if m:
++ path_prefix = m.group(1)
++ logging.info('Path prefix: %s', path_prefix)
++ prefix_match = r'^' + re.escape(path_prefix) + r'/'
++
++ # We scan the directory containing GLib and any directories in GNOME2_PATH
++ # first, but these will be overridden by any later scans.
++ dir = common.GetModuleDocDir('glib-2.0')
++ if dir and os.path.exists(dir):
++ # Some predefined link targets to get links into type hierarchies as these
++ # have no targets. These are always absolute for now.
++ Links['GBoxed'] = dir + '/gobject/gobject-Boxed-Types.html'
++ Links['GEnum'] = dir + '/gobject/gobject-Enumeration-and-Flag-Types.html'
++ Links['GFlags'] = dir + '/gobject/gobject-Enumeration-and-Flag-Types.html'
++ Links['GInterface'] = dir + '/gobject/GTypeModule.html'
++
++ if dir != html_dir:
++ logging.info('Scanning GLib directory: %s', dir)
++ ScanIndices(dir, (re.search(prefix_match, dir) is None), dir_cache)
++ else:
++ NoLinks.add('GBoxed')
++ NoLinks.add('GEnum')
++ NoLinks.add('GFlags')
++ NoLinks.add('GInterface')
++
++ path = os.environ.get('GNOME2_PATH')
++ if path:
++ for dir in path.split(':'):
++ dir += 'share/gtk-doc/html'
++ if os.path.exists(dir) and dir != html_dir:
++ logging.info('Scanning GNOME2_PATH directory: %s', dir)
++ ScanIndices(dir, (re.search(prefix_match, dir) is None), dir_cache)
++
++ logging.info('Scanning HTML_DIR directory: %s', html_dir)
++ ScanIndices(html_dir, False, dir_cache)
++ logging.info('Scanning MODULE_DIR directory: %s', module_dir)
++ ScanIndices(module_dir, False, dir_cache)
++
++ # check all extra dirs, but skip already scanned dirs or subdirs of those
++ for dir in extra_dirs:
++ dir = dir.rstrip('/')
++ logging.info('Scanning EXTRA_DIR directory: %s', dir)
++
++ # If the --extra-dir option is not relative and is not sharing the same
++ # prefix as the target directory of the docs, we need to use absolute
++ # directories for the links
++ if not dir.startswith('..') and re.search(prefix_match, dir) is None:
++ ScanIndices(dir, True, dir_cache)
++ else:
++ ScanIndices(dir, False, dir_cache)
++
++
++def ScanIndices(scan_dir, use_absolute_links, dir_cache):
++ if not scan_dir or scan_dir in dir_cache:
++ return
++ dir_cache[scan_dir] = 1
++
++ logging.info('Scanning index directory: %s, absolute: %d', scan_dir, use_absolute_links)
++
++ # TODO(ensonic): this code is the same as in rebase.py
++ if not os.path.isdir(scan_dir):
++ logging.info('Cannot open dir "%s"', scan_dir)
++ return
++
++ subdirs = []
++ for entry in sorted(os.listdir(scan_dir)):
++ full_entry = os.path.join(scan_dir, entry)
++ if os.path.isdir(full_entry):
++ subdirs.append(full_entry)
++ continue
++
++ if entry.endswith('.devhelp2'):
++ # if devhelp-file is good don't read index.sgml
++ ReadDevhelp(full_entry, use_absolute_links)
++ elif entry == "index.sgml.gz" and not os.path.exists(os.path.join(scan_dir, 'index.sgml')):
++ # debian/ubuntu started to compress this as index.sgml.gz :/
++ print(''' Please fix https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+source/gtk-doc/+bug/77138 . For now run:
++gunzip %s
++''' % full_entry)
++ elif entry.endswith('.devhelp2.gz') and not os.path.exists(full_entry[:-3]):
++ # debian/ubuntu started to compress this as *devhelp2.gz :/
++ print('''Please fix https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+source/gtk-doc/+bug/1466210 . For now run:
++gunzip %s
++''' % full_entry)
++ # we could consider supporting: gzip module
++
++ # Now recursively scan the subdirectories.
++ for subdir in subdirs:
++ ScanIndices(subdir, use_absolute_links, dir_cache)
++
++
++def ReadDevhelp(file, use_absolute_links):
++ # Determine the absolute directory, to be added to links in $file
++ # if we need to use an absolute link.
++ # $file will be something like /prefix/gnome/share/gtk-doc/html/gtk/$file
++ # We want the part up to 'html/.*' since the links in $file include
++ # the rest.
++ dir = "../"
++ if use_absolute_links:
++ # For uninstalled index files we'd need to map the path to where it
++ # will be installed to
++ if not file.startswith('./'):
++ m = re.search(r'(.*\/)(.*?)\/.*?\.devhelp2', file)
++ dir = m.group(1) + m.group(2) + '/'
++ else:
++ m = re.search(r'(.*\/)(.*?)\/.*?\.devhelp2', file)
++ if m:
++ dir += m.group(2) + '/'
++ else:
++ dir = ''
++
++ logging.info('Scanning index file=%s, absolute=%d, dir=%s', file, use_absolute_links, dir)
++
++ for line in open(file, 'r', encoding='utf-8'):
++ m = re.search(r' link="([^#]*)#([^"]*)"', line)
++ if m:
++ link = m.group(1) + '#' + m.group(2)
++ logging.debug('Found id: %s href: %s', m.group(2), link)
++ Links[m.group(2)] = dir + link
++
++
++def ReadSections(module):
++ """We don't warn on missing links to non-public sysmbols."""
++ for line in open(module + '-sections.txt', 'r', encoding='utf-8'):
++ m1 = re.search(r'^<SUBSECTION\s*(.*)>', line)
++ if line.startswith('#') or line.strip() == '':
++ continue
++ elif line.startswith('<SECTION>'):
++ subsection = ''
++ elif m1:
++ subsection = m1.group(1)
++ elif line.startswith('<SUBSECTION>') or line.startswith('</SECTION>'):
++ continue
++ elif re.search(r'^<TITLE>(.*)<\/TITLE>', line):
++ continue
++ elif re.search(r'^<FILE>(.*)<\/FILE>', line):
++ continue
++ elif re.search(r'^<INCLUDE>(.*)<\/INCLUDE>', line):
++ continue
++ else:
++ symbol = line.strip()
++ if subsection == "Standard" or subsection == "Private":
++ NoLinks.add(common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol))
++
++
++def FixCrossReferences(module_dir, module, src_lang):
++ # TODO(ensonic): use glob.glob()?
++ for entry in sorted(os.listdir(module_dir)):
++ full_entry = os.path.join(module_dir, entry)
++ if os.path.isdir(full_entry):
++ continue
++ elif entry.endswith('.html') or entry.endswith('.htm'):
++ FixHTMLFile(src_lang, module, full_entry)
++
++
++def FixHTMLFile(src_lang, module, file):
++ logging.info('Fixing file: %s', file)
++
++ content = open(file, 'r', encoding='utf-8').read()
++
++ # FIXME: ideally we'd pass a clue about the example language to the highligher
++ # unfortunately the "language" attribute is not appearing in the html output
++ # we could patch the customization to have <code class="xxx"> inside of <pre>
++ def repl_func(m):
++ return HighlightSourcePygments(src_lang, m.group(1), m.group(2))
++ content = re.sub(
++ r'<div class=\"(example-contents|informalexample)\"><pre class=\"programlisting\">(.*?)</pre></div>',
++ repl_func, content, flags=re.DOTALL)
++ content = re.sub(r'\<GTKDOCLINK\s+HREF=\"(.*?)\"\>(.*?)\</GTKDOCLINK\>',
++ r'\<GTKDOCLINK\ HREF=\"\1\"\>\2\</GTKDOCLINK\>', content, flags=re.DOTALL)
++
++ # From the highlighter we get all the functions marked up. Now we can turn them into GTKDOCLINK items
++ def repl_func(m):
++ return MakeGtkDocLink(m.group(1), m.group(2), m.group(3))
++ content = re.sub(r'(<span class=\"function\">)(.*?)(</span>)', repl_func, content, flags=re.DOTALL)
++ # We can also try the first item in stuff marked up as 'normal'
++ content = re.sub(
++ r'(<span class=\"normal\">\s*)(.+?)((\s+.+?)?\s*</span>)', repl_func, content, flags=re.DOTALL)
++
++ lines = content.rstrip().split('\n')
++
++ def repl_func_with_ix(i):
++ def repl_func(m):
++ return MakeXRef(module, file, i + 1, m.group(1), m.group(2))
++ return repl_func
++
++ for i in range(len(lines)):
++ lines[i] = re.sub(r'<GTKDOCLINK\s+HREF="([^"]*)"\s*>(.*?)</GTKDOCLINK\s*>', repl_func_with_ix(i), lines[i])
++ if 'GTKDOCLINK' in lines[i]:
++ logging.info('make xref failed for line %d: "%s"', i, lines[i])
++
++ new_file = file + '.new'
++ content = '\n'.join(lines)
++ with open(new_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8') as h:
++ h.write(content)
++
++ os.unlink(file)
++ os.rename(new_file, file)
++
++
++def GetXRef(id):
++ href = Links.get(id)
++ if href:
++ return (id, href)
++
++ # This is a workaround for some inconsistency we have with CreateValidSGMLID
++ if ':' in id:
++ tid = id.replace(':', '--')
++ href = Links.get(tid)
++ if href:
++ return (tid, href)
++
++ # poor mans plural support
++ if id.endswith('es'):
++ tid = id[:-2]
++ href = Links.get(tid)
++ if href:
++ return (tid, href)
++ tid += '-struct'
++ href = Links.get(tid)
++ if href:
++ return (tid, href)
++ elif id.endswith('s'):
++ tid = id[:-1]
++ href = Links.get(tid)
++ if href:
++ return (tid, href)
++ tid += '-struct'
++ href = Links.get(tid)
++ if href:
++ return (tid, href)
++
++ tid = id + '-struct'
++ href = Links.get(tid)
++ if href:
++ return (tid, href)
++
++ return (id, None)
++
++
++def ReportBadXRef(file, line, id, text):
++ logging.info('no link for: id=%s, linktext=%s', id, text)
++
++ # don't warn multiple times and also skip blacklisted (ctypes)
++ if id in NoLinks:
++ return
++ # if it's a function, don't warn if it does not contain a "_"
++ # (transformed to "-")
++ # - gnome coding style would use '_'
++ # - will avoid wrong warnings for ansi c functions
++ if re.search(r' class=\"function\"', text) and '-' not in id:
++ return
++ # if it's a 'return value', don't warn (implicitly created link)
++ if re.search(r' class=\"returnvalue\"', text):
++ return
++ # if it's a 'type', don't warn if it starts with lowercase
++ # - gnome coding style would use CamelCase
++ if re.search(r' class=\"type\"', text) and id[0].islower():
++ return
++ # don't warn for self links
++ if text == id:
++ return
++
++ common.LogWarning(file, line, 'no link for: "%s" -> (%s).' % (id, text))
++ NoLinks.add(id)
++
++
++def MakeRelativeXRef(module, href):
++ # if it is a link to same module, remove path to make it work uninstalled
++ m = re.search(r'^\.\./' + module + '/(.*)$', href)
++ if m:
++ href = m.group(1)
++ return href
++
++
++def MakeXRef(module, file, line, id, text):
++ href = GetXRef(id)[1]
++
++ if href:
++ href = MakeRelativeXRef(module, href)
++ logging.info('Fixing link: %s, %s, %s', id, href, text)
++ return "<a href=\"%s\">%s</a>" % (href, text)
++ else:
++ ReportBadXRef(file, line, id, text)
++ return text
++
++
++def MakeGtkDocLink(pre, symbol, post):
++ id = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol)
++
++ # these are implicitly created links in highlighted sources
++ # we don't want warnings for those if the links cannot be resolved.
++ NoLinks.add(id)
++
++ return pre + '<GTKDOCLINK HREF="' + id + '">' + symbol + '</GTKDOCLINK>' + post
++
++
++def HighlightSourcePygments(src_lang, div_class, source):
++ # chop of leading and trailing empty lines, leave leading space in first real line
++ source = source.strip(' ')
++ source = source.strip('\n')
++ source = source.rstrip()
++
++ # cut common indent
++ m = re.search(r'^(\s+)', source)
++ if m:
++ source = re.sub(r'^' + m.group(1), '', source, flags=re.MULTILINE)
++ # avoid double entity replacement
++ source = source.replace('<', '<')
++ source = source.replace('>', '>')
++ source = source.replace('&', '&')
++
++ highlighted_source = highlight.highlight_code(source, src_lang)
++ if not highlighted_source:
++ highlighted_source = source
++
++ # chop of leading and trailing empty lines
++ highlighted_source = highlighted_source.strip()
++
++ # turn common urls in comments into links
++ highlighted_source = re.sub(r'<span class="url">(.*?)</span>',
++ r'<span class="url"><a href="\1">\1</a></span>',
++ highlighted_source, flags=re.DOTALL)
++
++ # we do own line-numbering
++ line_count = highlighted_source.count('\n')
++ source_lines = '\n'.join([str(i) for i in range(1, line_count + 2)])
++
++ return """<div class="%s">
++ <table class="listing_frame" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
++ <tbody>
++ <tr>
++ <td class="listing_lines" align="right"><pre>%s</pre></td>
++ <td class="listing_code"><pre class="programlisting">%s</pre></td>
++ </tr>
++ </tbody>
++ </table>
++</div>
++""" % (div_class, source_lines, highlighted_source)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/usr/bin/env python3
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2018 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++"""
++Highlight sourcecode snippets.
++"""
++import os
++
++from pygments import highlight
++from pygments.lexers import CLexer
++from pygments.lexers import get_lexer_by_name
++from pygments.formatters import HtmlFormatter
++
++# lazily constructed lexer cache
++LEXERS = {
++ 'c': CLexer()
++}
++HTML_FORMATTER = HtmlFormatter(nowrap=True)
++
++
++def highlight_code(code, lang='c'):
++ if lang not in LEXERS:
++ LEXERS[lang] = get_lexer_by_name(lang)
++ lexer = LEXERS.get(lang, None)
++ if not lexer:
++ return None
++ return highlight(code, lexer, HTML_FORMATTER)
++
++
++def append_style_defs(css_file_name):
++ os.chmod(css_file_name, 0o644)
++ with open(css_file_name, 'at', newline='\n', encoding='utf-8') as css:
++ css.write(HTML_FORMATTER.get_style_defs())
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007-2016 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++"""
++Markdown to Docbook converter
++"""
++
++import logging
++import re
++
++# external functions
++ExpandAbbreviations = MakeXRef = MakeHashXRef = tagify = None
++
++# Elements to consider non-block items in MarkDown parsing
++MD_TEXT_LEVEL_ELEMENTS = {
++ 'emphasis', 'envar', 'filename', 'firstterm', 'footnote', 'function', 'literal',
++ 'manvolnum', 'option', 'replaceable', 'structfield', 'structname', 'title',
++ 'varname'
++}
++MD_ESCAPABLE_CHARS = r'\`*_{}[]()>#+-.!'
++MD_GTK_ESCAPABLE_CHARS = r'@%'
++
++
++def Init():
++ # TODO(enonic): find a better way to do this
++ global ExpandAbbreviations, MakeXRef, MakeHashXRef, tagify
++ from .mkdb import ExpandAbbreviations, MakeXRef, MakeHashXRef, tagify
++
++
++def MarkDownParseBlocks(lines, symbol, context):
++ md_blocks = []
++ md_block = {"type": ''}
++
++ logging.debug("parsing %s lines", len(lines))
++ for line in lines:
++ logging.info("type='%s', int='%s', parsing '%s'", md_block["type"], md_block.get('interrupted'), line)
++ first_char = None
++ if line:
++ first_char = line[0]
++
++ if md_block["type"] == "markup":
++ if 'closed' not in md_block:
++ if md_block["start"] in line:
++ md_block["depth"] += 1
++
++ if md_block["end"] in line:
++ if md_block["depth"] > 0:
++ md_block["depth"] -= 1
++ else:
++ logging.info("closing tag '%s'", line)
++ md_block["closed"] = 1
++ # TODO(ensonic): reparse inner text with MarkDownParseLines?
++
++ md_block["text"] += "\n" + line
++ logging.info("add to markup: '%s'", line)
++ continue
++
++ deindented_line = line.lstrip()
++
++ if md_block["type"] == "heading":
++ # a heading is ended by any level less than or equal
++ if md_block["level"] == 1:
++ heading_match = re.search(r'^[#][ \t]+(.+?)[ \t]*[#]*[ \t]*(?:{#([^}]+)})?[ \t]*$', line)
++ if re.search(r'^={4,}[ \t]*$', line):
++ text = md_block["lines"].pop()
++ md_block.pop("interrupted", None)
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "heading",
++ 'text': text,
++ 'lines': [],
++ 'level': 1,
++ }
++ continue
++ elif heading_match:
++ md_block.pop("interrupted", None)
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "heading",
++ 'text': heading_match.group(1),
++ 'lines': [],
++ 'level': 1,
++ }
++ if heading_match.group(2):
++ md_block['id'] = heading_match.group(2)
++ continue
++ else:
++ # push lines into the block until the end is reached
++ md_block["lines"].append(line)
++ continue
++
++ else:
++ heading_match = re.search(r'^([#]{1,2})[ \t]+(.+?)[ \t]*[#]*[ \t]*(?:{#([^}]+)})?[ \t]*$', line)
++ if re.search(r'^[=]{4,}[ \t]*$', line):
++ text = md_block["lines"].pop()
++ md_block.pop("interrupted", None)
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "heading",
++ 'text': text,
++ 'lines': [],
++ 'level': 1,
++ }
++ continue
++ elif re.search(r'^[-]{4,}[ \t]*$', line):
++ text = md_block["lines"].pop()
++ md_block.pop("interrupted", None)
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "heading",
++ 'text': text,
++ 'lines': [],
++ 'level': 2,
++ }
++ continue
++ elif heading_match:
++ md_block.pop("interrupted", None)
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "heading",
++ 'text': heading_match.group(2),
++ 'lines': [],
++ 'level': len(heading_match.group(1))
++ }
++ if heading_match.group(3):
++ md_block['id'] = heading_match.group(3)
++ continue
++ else:
++ # push lines into the block until the end is reached
++ md_block["lines"].append(line)
++ continue
++ elif md_block["type"] == "code":
++ end_of_code_match = re.search(r'^[ \t]*\]\|(.*)', line)
++ if end_of_code_match:
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "paragraph",
++ 'text': end_of_code_match.group(1),
++ 'lines': [],
++ }
++ else:
++ md_block["lines"].append(line)
++ continue
++
++ if deindented_line == '':
++ logging.info('setting "interrupted" due to empty line')
++ md_block["interrupted"] = 1
++ continue
++
++ if md_block["type"] == "quote":
++ if 'interrupted' not in md_block:
++ line = re.sub(r'^[ ]*>[ ]?', '', line)
++ md_block["lines"].append(line)
++ continue
++
++ elif md_block["type"] == "li":
++ marker = md_block["marker"]
++ marker_match = re.search(r'^([ ]{0,3})(%s)[ ](.*)' % marker, line)
++ if marker_match:
++ indentation = marker_match.group(1)
++ if md_block["indentation"] != indentation:
++ md_block["lines"].append(line)
++ else:
++ ordered = md_block["ordered"]
++ md_block.pop('last', None)
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "li",
++ 'ordered': ordered,
++ 'indentation': indentation,
++ 'marker': marker,
++ 'last': 1,
++ 'lines': [re.sub(r'^[ ]{0,4}', '', marker_match.group(3))],
++ }
++ continue
++
++ if 'interrupted' in md_block:
++ if first_char == " ":
++ md_block["lines"].append('')
++ line = re.sub(r'^[ ]{0,4}', '', line)
++ md_block["lines"].append(line)
++ md_block.pop("interrupted", None)
++ continue
++ else:
++ line = re.sub(r'^[ ]{0,4}', '', line)
++ md_block["lines"].append(line)
++ continue
++
++ # indentation sensitive types
++ heading_match = re.search(r'^([#]{1,2})[ \t]+(.+?)[ \t]*[#]*[ \t]*(?:{#([^}]+)})?[ \t]*$', line)
++ code_match = re.search(r'^[ \t]*\|\[[ ]*(?:<!-- language="([^"]+?)" -->)?', line)
++ if heading_match:
++ # atx heading (#)
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "heading",
++ 'text': heading_match.group(2),
++ 'lines': [],
++ 'level': len(heading_match.group(1)),
++ }
++ if heading_match.group(3):
++ md_block['id'] = heading_match.group(3)
++ continue
++ elif re.search(r'^={4,}[ \t]*$', line):
++ # setext heading (====)
++
++ if md_block["type"] == "paragraph" and "interrupted" in md_block:
++ md_blocks.append(md_block.copy())
++ md_block["type"] = "heading"
++ md_block["lines"] = []
++ md_block["level"] = 1
++ continue
++ elif re.search(r'^-{4,}[ \t]*$', line):
++ # setext heading (-----)
++
++ if md_block["type"] == "paragraph" and "interrupted" in md_block:
++ md_blocks.append(md_block.copy())
++ md_block["type"] = "heading"
++ md_block["lines"] = []
++ md_block["level"] = 2
++
++ continue
++ elif code_match:
++ # code
++ md_block["interrupted"] = 1
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "code",
++ 'lines': [],
++ }
++ if code_match.group(1):
++ md_block['language'] = code_match.group(1)
++ continue
++
++ # indentation insensitive types
++ markup_match = re.search(r'^[ ]*<\??(\w+)[^>]*([\/\?])?[ \t]*>', line)
++ li_match = re.search(r'^([ ]*)[*+-][ ](.*)', line)
++ quote_match = re.search(r'^[ ]*>[ ]?(.*)', line)
++ if re.search(r'^[ ]*<!DOCTYPE/', line):
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "markup",
++ 'text': deindented_line,
++ 'start': '<',
++ 'end': '>',
++ 'depth': 0,
++ }
++
++ elif markup_match:
++ # markup, including <?xml version="1.0"?>
++ tag = markup_match.group(1)
++ is_self_closing = markup_match.group(2) is not None
++
++ # skip link markdown
++ # TODO(ensonic): consider adding more uri schemes (ftp, ...)
++ if re.search(r'https?', tag):
++ logging.info("skipping link '%s'", tag)
++ else:
++ # for TEXT_LEVEL_ELEMENTS, we want to keep them as-is in the paragraph
++ # instead of creation a markdown block.
++ scanning_for_end_of_text_level_tag = (
++ md_block["type"] == "paragraph" and
++ 'start' in md_block and
++ 'closed' not in md_block)
++ logging.info("markup found '%s', scanning %s ?", tag, scanning_for_end_of_text_level_tag)
++ if tag not in MD_TEXT_LEVEL_ELEMENTS and not scanning_for_end_of_text_level_tag:
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++
++ if is_self_closing:
++ logging.info("self-closing docbook '%s'", tag)
++ md_block = {'type': "self-closing tag",
++ 'text': deindented_line,
++ }
++ is_self_closing = 0
++ continue
++
++ logging.info("new markup '%s'", tag)
++ md_block = {'type': "markup",
++ 'text': deindented_line,
++ 'start': '<' + tag + '>',
++ 'end': '</' + tag + '>',
++ 'depth': 0,
++ }
++ if re.search(r'<\/%s>' % tag, deindented_line):
++ md_block["closed"] = 1
++
++ continue
++ else:
++ if tag in MD_TEXT_LEVEL_ELEMENTS:
++ logging.info("text level docbook '%s' in '%s' state", tag, md_block["type"])
++ # TODO(ensonic): handle nesting
++ if not scanning_for_end_of_text_level_tag:
++ if not re.search(r'<\/%s>' % tag, deindented_line):
++ logging.info("new text level markup '%s'", tag)
++ md_block["start"] = '<' + tag + '>'
++ md_block["end"] = '</' + tag + '>'
++ md_block.pop("closed", None)
++ logging.info("scanning for end of '%s'", tag)
++
++ else:
++ if md_block["end"] in deindented_line:
++ md_block["closed"] = 1
++ logging.info("found end of '%s'", tag)
++ elif li_match:
++ # li
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ indentation = li_match.group(1)
++ md_block = {'type': "li",
++ 'ordered': 0,
++ 'indentation': indentation,
++ 'marker': "[*+-]",
++ 'first': 1,
++ 'last': 1,
++ 'lines': [re.sub(r'^[ ]{0,4}', '', li_match.group(2))],
++ }
++ continue
++ elif quote_match:
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "quote",
++ 'lines': [quote_match.group(1)],
++ }
++ continue
++
++ # list item
++ list_item_match = re.search(r'^([ ]{0,4})\d+[.][ ]+(.*)', line)
++ if list_item_match:
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ indentation = list_item_match.group(1)
++ md_block = {'type': "li",
++ 'ordered': 1,
++ 'indentation': indentation,
++ 'marker': "\\d+[.]",
++ 'first': 1,
++ 'last': 1,
++ 'lines': [re.sub(r'^[ ]{0,4}', '', list_item_match.group(2))],
++ }
++ continue
++
++ # paragraph
++ if md_block["type"] == "paragraph":
++ if "interrupted" in md_block:
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "paragraph",
++ 'text': line,
++ }
++ logging.info("new paragraph due to interrupted")
++ else:
++ md_block["text"] += "\n" + line
++ logging.info("add to paragraph: '%s'", line)
++
++ else:
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_block = {'type': "paragraph",
++ 'text': line,
++ }
++ logging.info("new paragraph due to different block type")
++
++ md_blocks.append(md_block)
++ md_blocks.pop(0)
++
++ return md_blocks
++
++
++def MarkDownParseSpanElementsInner(text, markersref):
++ markup = ''
++ markers = {i: 1 for i in markersref}
++
++ while text != '':
++ closest_marker = ''
++ closest_marker_position = -1
++ text_marker = ''
++ offset = 0
++ markers_rest = []
++
++ for marker, use in markers.items():
++ if not use:
++ continue
++
++ marker_position = text.find(marker)
++
++ if marker_position < 0:
++ markers[marker] = 0
++ continue
++
++ if closest_marker == '' or marker_position < closest_marker_position:
++ closest_marker = marker
++ closest_marker_position = marker_position
++
++ if closest_marker_position >= 0:
++ text_marker = text[closest_marker_position:]
++
++ if text_marker == '':
++ markup += text
++ text = ''
++ continue
++
++ markup += text[:closest_marker_position]
++ text = text[closest_marker_position:]
++ markers_rest = {k: v for k, v in markers.items() if v and k != closest_marker}
++
++ if closest_marker == '![' or closest_marker == '[':
++ # 'id-ref' : local id reference
++ # 'title' : link short description/alt-text/tooltip
++ # 'a' : linked text
++ # 'href' : external link
++ # 'is-media': is link to media object
++ element = None
++
++ # FIXME: '(?R)' is a recursive subpattern
++ # match a [...] block with no ][ inside or this thing again
++ # m = re.search(r'\[((?:[^][]|(?R))*)\]', text)
++ m = re.search(r'\[((?:[^][])*)\]', text)
++ if ']' in text and m:
++ element = {'is-media': text[0] == '!',
++ 'a': EscapeEntities(m.group(1)),
++ }
++
++ offset = len(m.group(0))
++ if element['is-media']:
++ offset += 1
++ logging.debug("Recursive md-expr match: off=%d, text='%s', match='%s'", offset, text, m.group(1))
++
++ remaining_text = text[offset:]
++ # (link "alt-text")
++ m2 = re.search(r'''^\([ ]*([^)'"]*?)(?:[ ]+['"](.+?)['"])?[ ]*\)''', remaining_text)
++ # [id-reference]
++ m3 = re.search(r'^\s*\[([^\]<]*?)\]', remaining_text)
++ if m2:
++ element['href'] = m2.group(1)
++ if m2.group(2):
++ element['title'] = m2.group(2)
++ offset += len(m2.group(0))
++ elif m3:
++ element['id-ref'] = m3.group(1)
++ offset += len(m3.group(0))
++ else:
++ element = None
++
++ if element:
++ logging.debug("output link for", element)
++
++ if 'href' in element:
++ element['href'] = EscapeEntities(element['href'])
++
++ if element['is-media']:
++ # media link
++ markup += '<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="' + \
++ element['href'] + '"></imagedata></imageobject>'
++
++ if 'a' in element:
++ markup += "<textobject><phrase>" + element['a'] + "</phrase></textobject>"
++
++ markup += "</inlinemediaobject>"
++ elif 'id-ref' in element:
++ # internal link
++ element['a'] = MarkDownParseSpanElementsInner(element['a'], markers_rest)
++ markup += '<link linkend="' + element['id-ref'] + '"'
++
++ if 'title' in element:
++ # title attribute not supported
++ pass
++
++ markup += '>' + element['a'] + "</link>"
++ else:
++ # external link
++ element['a'] = MarkDownParseSpanElementsInner(element['a'], markers_rest)
++ markup += '<ulink url="' + element['href'] + '"'
++
++ if 'title' in element:
++ # title attribute not supported
++ pass
++
++ markup += '>' + element['a'] + "</ulink>"
++
++ else:
++ markup += closest_marker
++ if closest_marker == '![':
++ offset = 2
++ else:
++ offset = 1
++
++ elif closest_marker == '<':
++ m4 = re.search(r'^<(https?:[\/]{2}[^\s]+?)>', text, flags=re.I)
++ m5 = re.search(r'^<([A-Za-z0-9._-]+?@[A-Za-z0-9._-]+?)>', text)
++ m6 = re.search(r'^<[^>]+?>', text)
++ if m4:
++ element_url = EscapeEntities(m4.group(1))
++
++ markup += '<ulink url="' + element_url + '">' + element_url + '</ulink>'
++ offset = len(m4.group(0))
++ elif m5:
++ markup += "<ulink url=\"mailto:" + m5.group(1) + "\">" + m5.group(1) + "</ulink>"
++ offset = len(m5.group(0))
++ elif m6:
++ markup += m6.group(0)
++ offset = len(m6.group(0))
++ else:
++ markup += "<"
++ offset = 1
++
++ elif closest_marker == "\\":
++ special_char = ''
++ if len(text) > 1:
++ special_char = text[1]
++ if special_char in MD_ESCAPABLE_CHARS or special_char in MD_GTK_ESCAPABLE_CHARS:
++ markup += special_char
++ offset = 2
++ else:
++ markup += "\\"
++ offset = 1
++
++ elif closest_marker == "`":
++ m7 = re.search(r'^(`+)([^`]+?)\1(?!`)', text)
++ if m7:
++ element_text = EscapeEntities(m7.group(2))
++ markup += "<literal>" + element_text + "</literal>"
++ offset = len(m7.group(0))
++ else:
++ markup += "`"
++ offset = 1
++
++ elif closest_marker == "@":
++ # Convert '@param()'
++ # FIXME: we could make those also links ($symbol.$2), but that would be less
++ # useful as the link target is a few lines up or down
++ m7 = re.search(r'^(\A|[^\\])\@(\w+((\.|->)\w+)*)\s*\(\)', text)
++ m8 = re.search(r'^(\A|[^\\])\@(\w+((\.|->)\w+)*)', text)
++ m9 = re.search(r'^\\\@', text)
++ if m7:
++ markup += m7.group(1) + "<parameter>" + m7.group(2) + "()</parameter>\n"
++ offset = len(m7.group(0))
++ elif m8:
++ # Convert '@param', but not '\@param'.
++ markup += m8.group(1) + "<parameter>" + m8.group(2) + "</parameter>\n"
++ offset = len(m8.group(0))
++ elif m9:
++ markup += r"\@"
++ offset = len(m9.group(0))
++ else:
++ markup += "@"
++ offset = 1
++
++ elif closest_marker == '#':
++ m10 = re.search(r'^(\A|[^\\])#([\w\-:\.]+[\w]+)\s*\(\)', text)
++ m11 = re.search(r'^(\A|[^\\])#([\w\-:\.]+[\w]+)', text)
++ m12 = re.search(r'^\\#', text)
++ if m10:
++ # handle #Object.func()
++ markup += m10.group(1) + MakeXRef(m10.group(2), tagify(m10.group(2) + "()", "function"))
++ offset = len(m10.group(0))
++ elif m11:
++ # Convert '#symbol', but not '\#symbol'.
++ markup += m11.group(1) + MakeHashXRef(m11.group(2), "type")
++ offset = len(m11.group(0))
++ elif m12:
++ markup += '#'
++ offset = len(m12.group(0))
++ else:
++ markup += '#'
++ offset = 1
++
++ elif closest_marker == "%":
++ m12 = re.search(r'^(\A|[^\\])\%(-?\w+)', text)
++ m13 = re.search(r'^\\%', text)
++ if m12:
++ # Convert '%constant', but not '\%constant'.
++ # Also allow negative numbers, e.g. %-1.
++ markup += m12.group(1) + MakeXRef(m12.group(2), tagify(m12.group(2), "literal"))
++ offset = len(m12.group(0))
++ elif m13:
++ markup += r"\%"
++ offset = len(m13.group(0))
++ else:
++ markup += "%"
++ offset = 1
++
++ if offset > 0:
++ text = text[offset:]
++
++ return markup
++
++
++def MarkDownParseSpanElements(text):
++ markers = ["\\", '<', '![', '[', "`", '%', '#', '@']
++
++ text = MarkDownParseSpanElementsInner(text, markers)
++
++ # Convert 'function()' or 'macro()'.
++ # if there is abc_*_def() we don't want to make a link to _def()
++ # FIXME: also handle abc(def(....)) : but that would need to be done recursively :/
++ def f(m):
++ return m.group(1) + MakeXRef(m.group(2), tagify(m.group(2) + "()", "function"))
++ text = re.sub(r'([^\*.\w])(\w+)\s*\(\)', f, text)
++ return text
++
++
++def EscapeEntities(text):
++ return text.replace('&', '&').replace('<', '<').replace('>', '>')
++
++
++def ReplaceEntities(text):
++ entities = [["<", '<'],
++ [">", '>'],
++ ["*", '*'],
++ ["#", '#'],
++ ["%", '%'],
++ [":", ':'],
++ [""", '"'],
++ ["'", "'"],
++ [" ", ' '],
++ ["&", '&'], # Do this last, or the others get messed up.
++ ]
++
++ for i in entities:
++ text = re.sub(i[0], i[1], text)
++ return text
++
++
++def MarkDownOutputDocBook(blocksref, symbol, context):
++ output = ''
++ blocks = blocksref
++
++ for block in blocks:
++ # $output += "\n<!-- beg type='" . $block->{"type"} . "'-->\n"
++
++ if block["type"] == "paragraph":
++ text = MarkDownParseSpanElements(block["text"])
++ if context == "li" and output == '':
++ if 'interrupted' in block:
++ output += "\n<para>%s</para>\n" % text
++ else:
++ output += "<para>%s</para>" % text
++ if len(blocks) > 1:
++ output += "\n"
++ else:
++ output += "<para>%s</para>\n" % text
++
++ elif block["type"] == "heading":
++
++ title = MarkDownParseSpanElements(block["text"])
++
++ if block["level"] == 1:
++ tag = "refsect2"
++ else:
++ tag = "refsect3"
++
++ text = MarkDownParseLines(block["lines"], symbol, "heading")
++ if 'id' in block:
++ output += "<%s id=\"%s\">" % (tag, block["id"])
++ else:
++ output += "<%s>" % tag
++
++ output += "<title>%s</title>%s</%s>\n" % (title, text, tag)
++ elif block["type"] == "li":
++ tag = "itemizedlist"
++
++ if "first" in block:
++ if block["ordered"]:
++ tag = "orderedlist"
++ output += "<%s>\n" % tag
++
++ if "interrupted" in block:
++ block["lines"].append('')
++
++ text = MarkDownParseLines(block["lines"], symbol, "li")
++ output += "<listitem>" + text + "</listitem>\n"
++ if 'last' in block:
++ if block["ordered"]:
++ tag = "orderedlist"
++ output += "</%s>\n" % tag
++
++ elif block["type"] == "quote":
++ text = MarkDownParseLines(block["lines"], symbol, "quote")
++ output += "<blockquote>\n%s</blockquote>\n" % text
++ elif block["type"] == "code":
++ tag = "programlisting"
++
++ if "language" in block:
++ if block["language"] == "plain":
++ output += "<informalexample><screen><![CDATA[\n"
++ tag = "screen"
++ else:
++ output += "<informalexample><programlisting role=\"example\" language=\"%s\"><![CDATA[\n" % block['language']
++ else:
++ output += "<informalexample><programlisting role=\"example\"><![CDATA[\n"
++
++ logging.debug('listing for %s: [%s]', symbol, '\n'.join(block['lines']))
++ for line in block["lines"]:
++ output += ReplaceEntities(line) + "\n"
++
++ output += "]]></%s></informalexample>\n" % tag
++ elif block["type"] == "markup":
++ text = ExpandAbbreviations(symbol, block["text"])
++ output += text + "\n"
++ else:
++ output += block["text"] + "\n"
++
++ # $output += "\n<!-- end type='" . $block->{"type"} . "'-->\n"
++ return output
++
++
++def MarkDownParseLines(lines, symbol, context):
++ logging.info('md parse: ctx=%s, [%s]', context, '\n'.join(lines))
++ blocks = MarkDownParseBlocks(lines, symbol, context)
++ output = MarkDownOutputDocBook(blocks, symbol, context)
++ return output
++
++
++def MarkDownParse(text, symbol):
++ """Converts mark down syntax to the respective docbook.
++
++ http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Markdown
++ Inspired by the design of ParseDown
++ http://parsedown.org/
++ Copyright (c) 2013 Emanuil Rusev, erusev.com
++
++ SUPPORTED MARKDOWN
++ ==================
++
++ Atx-style Headers
++ -----------------
++
++ # Header 1
++
++ ## Header 2 ##
++
++ Setext-style Headers
++ --------------------
++
++ Header 1
++ ========
++
++ Header 2
++ --------
++
++ Ordered (unnested) Lists
++ ------------------------
++
++ 1. item 1
++
++ 1. item 2 with loooong
++ description
++
++ 3. item 3
++
++ Note: we require a blank line above the list items
++ """
++ # TODO(ensonic): it would be nice to add id parameters to the refsect2 elements
++
++ return MarkDownParseLines(text.splitlines(), symbol, '')
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++config_py = configuration_data()
++config_py.set('prefix', get_option('prefix'))
++config_py.set('datarootdir', join_paths('${prefix}', get_option('datadir')))
++config_py.set('datadir', '${datarootdir}')
++
++config_py.set('DBLATEX', dblatex_prg_path)
++config_py.set('FOP', fop_prg_path)
++config_py.set('PKG_CONFIG', pkgconfig_prg_path)
++config_py.set('XSLTPROC', xsltproc_prg_path)
++
++config_py.set('VERSION', version)
++config_py.set('EXEEXT', '')
++
++configure_file(
++ input: 'config_data.py.in',
++ output: 'config_data.py',
++ configuration: config_py,
++ install: true,
++ install_dir: join_paths(
++ pkgpythondir,
++ 'gtkdoc',
++ ),
++)
++
++gtkdoc_sources = [
++ '__init__.py',
++ 'check.py',
++ 'common.py',
++ 'config.py',
++ 'fixxref.py',
++ 'highlight.py',
++ 'md_to_db.py',
++ 'mkdb.py',
++ 'mkhtml.py',
++ 'mkhtml2.py',
++ 'mkman.py',
++ 'mkpdf.py',
++ 'rebase.py',
++ 'scan.py',
++ 'scangobj.py',
++]
++
++install_data(gtkdoc_sources,
++ install_dir: join_paths(pkgpythondir, 'gtkdoc')
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007-2016 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++"""
++Creates the DocBook files from the source comments.
++"""
++
++from collections import OrderedDict
++import logging
++import os
++import re
++import string
++
++from . import common, md_to_db
++
++# Options
++MODULE = None
++DB_OUTPUT_DIR = None
++INLINE_MARKUP_MODE = None
++NAME_SPACE = ''
++ROOT_DIR = '.'
++
++# These global arrays store information on signals. Each signal has an entry
++# in each of these arrays at the same index, like a multi-dimensional array.
++SignalObjects = [] # The GtkObject which emits the signal.
++SignalNames = [] # The signal name.
++SignalReturns = [] # The return type.
++SignalFlags = [] # Flags for the signal
++SignalPrototypes = [] # The rest of the prototype of the signal handler.
++
++# These global arrays store information on Args. Each Arg has an entry
++# in each of these arrays at the same index, like a multi-dimensional array.
++ArgObjects = [] # The GtkObject which has the Arg.
++ArgNames = [] # The Arg name.
++ArgTypes = [] # The Arg type - gint, GtkArrowType etc.
++ArgFlags = [] # How the Arg can be used - readable/writable etc.
++ArgNicks = [] # The nickname of the Arg.
++ArgBlurbs = [] # Docstring of the Arg.
++ArgDefaults = [] # Default value of the Arg.
++ArgRanges = [] # The range of the Arg type
++
++ActionObjects = []
++ActionNames = []
++ActionParams = []
++ActionProperties = []
++
++# These global hashes store declaration info keyed on a symbol name.
++Declarations = {}
++DeclarationTypes = {}
++DeclarationConditional = {}
++DeclarationOutput = {}
++Deprecated = {}
++Since = {}
++StabilityLevel = {}
++StructHasTypedef = {}
++
++# These global hashes store the existing documentation.
++SymbolDocs = {}
++SymbolParams = {}
++SymbolAnnotations = {}
++
++# These global hashes store documentation scanned from the source files.
++SourceSymbolDocs = {}
++SourceSymbolParams = {}
++SymbolSourceLocation = {}
++
++# all documentation goes in here, so we can do coverage analysis
++AllSymbols = {}
++AllIncompleteSymbols = {}
++AllUnusedSymbols = {}
++AllDocumentedSymbols = {}
++
++# Undeclared yet documented symbols
++UndeclaredSymbols = {}
++
++# These global arrays store GObject, subclasses and the hierarchy (also of
++# non-object derived types).
++Objects = []
++ObjectLevels = []
++ObjectRoots = {}
++
++Interfaces = {}
++Prerequisites = {}
++
++# holds the symbols which are mentioned in <MODULE>-sections.txt and in which
++# section they are defined
++KnownSymbols = {} # values are 1 for public symbols and 0 otherwise
++SymbolSection = {}
++SymbolSectionId = {}
++
++# collects index entries
++IndexEntriesFull = {}
++IndexEntriesSince = {}
++IndexEntriesDeprecated = {}
++
++# Standard C preprocessor directives, which we ignore for '#' abbreviations.
++PreProcessorDirectives = {
++ 'assert', 'define', 'elif', 'else', 'endif', 'error', 'if', 'ifdef', 'ifndef',
++ 'include', 'line', 'pragma', 'unassert', 'undef', 'warning'
++}
++
++# remember used annotation (to write minimal glossary)
++AnnotationsUsed = {}
++
++# the regexp that parses the annotation is in ScanSourceFile()
++AnnotationDefinition = {
++ # the GObjectIntrospection annotations are defined at:
++ # https://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations
++ 'allow-none': "NULL is OK, both for passing and for returning.",
++ 'nullable': "NULL may be passed as the value in, out, in-out; or as a return value.",
++ 'not nullable': "NULL must not be passed as the value in, out, in-out; or as a return value.",
++ 'optional': "NULL may be passed instead of a pointer to a location.",
++ 'not optional': "NULL must not be passed as the pointer to a location.",
++ 'array': "Parameter points to an array of items.",
++ 'attribute': "Deprecated free-form custom annotation, replaced by (attributes) annotation.",
++ 'attributes': "Free-form key-value pairs.",
++ 'closure': "This parameter is a 'user_data', for callbacks; many bindings can pass NULL here.",
++ 'constructor': "This symbol is a constructor, not a static method.",
++ 'destroy': "This parameter is a 'destroy_data', for callbacks.",
++ 'default': "Default parameter value (in case a function which shadows this one via <acronym>rename-to</acronym> has fewer parameters).",
++ 'element-type': "Generics and defining elements of containers and arrays.",
++ 'error-domains': "Typed errors. Similar to throws in Java.",
++ 'foreign': "This is a foreign struct.",
++ 'get-value-func': "The specified function is used to convert a struct from a GValue, must be a GTypeInstance.",
++ 'in': "Parameter for input. Default is <acronym>transfer none</acronym>.",
++ 'inout': "Parameter for input and for returning results. Default is <acronym>transfer full</acronym>.",
++ 'in-out': "Parameter for input and for returning results. Default is <acronym>transfer full</acronym>.",
++ 'method': "This is a method",
++ 'not-error': "A GError parameter is not to be handled like a normal GError.",
++ 'out': "Parameter for returning results. Default is <acronym>transfer full</acronym>.",
++ 'out caller-allocates': "Out parameter, where caller must allocate storage.",
++ 'out callee-allocates': "Out parameter, where callee must allocate storage.",
++ 'ref-func': "The specified function is used to ref a struct, must be a GTypeInstance.",
++ 'rename-to': "Rename the original symbol's name to SYMBOL.",
++ 'scope call': "The callback is valid only during the call to the method.",
++ 'scope async': "The callback is valid until first called.",
++ 'scope notified': "The callback is valid until the GDestroyNotify argument is called.",
++ 'set-value-func': "The specified function is used to convert from a struct to a GValue, must be a GTypeInstance.",
++ 'skip': "Exposed in C code, not necessarily available in other languages.",
++ 'transfer container': "Free data container after the code is done.",
++ 'transfer floating': "Alias for <acronym>transfer none</acronym>, used for objects with floating refs.",
++ 'transfer full': "Free data after the code is done.",
++ 'transfer none': "Don't free data after the code is done.",
++ 'type': "Override the parsed C type with given type.",
++ 'unref-func': "The specified function is used to unref a struct, must be a GTypeInstance.",
++ 'virtual': "This is the invoker for a virtual method.",
++ 'value': "The specified value overrides the evaluated value of the constant.",
++ # Stability Level definition
++ # https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=170860
++ 'Stable': '''The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third parties to
++develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have confidence that
++they will run on all minor releases of the product (after the one in which the
++interface was introduced, and within the same major release). Even at a major
++release, incompatible changes are expected to be rare, and to have strong
++justifications.
++''',
++ 'Unstable': '''Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are typically used to
++give outside developers early access to new or rapidly changing technology, or
++to provide an interim solution to a problem where a more general solution is
++anticipated. No claims are made about either source or binary compatibility from
++one minor release to the next.
++
++The Unstable interface level is a warning that these interfaces are subject to
++change without warning and should not be used in unbundled products.
++
++Given such caveats, customer impact need not be a factor when considering
++incompatible changes to an Unstable interface in a major or minor release.
++Nonetheless, when such changes are introduced, the changes should still be
++mentioned in the release notes for the affected release.
++''',
++ 'Private': '''An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but that is not
++documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in specified and
++documented ways.
++''',
++}
++
++# Function and other declaration output settings.
++RETURN_TYPE_FIELD_WIDTH = 20
++MAX_SYMBOL_FIELD_WIDTH = 40
++
++# XML header
++doctype_header = None
++
++# docbook templates
++DB_REFENTRY = string.Template('''${header}
++<refentry id="${section_id}">
++<refmeta>
++<refentrytitle role="top_of_page" id="${section_id}.top_of_page">${title}</refentrytitle>
++<manvolnum>3</manvolnum>
++<refmiscinfo>${MODULE} Library${image}</refmiscinfo>
++</refmeta>
++<refnamediv>
++<refname>${title}</refname>
++<refpurpose>${short_desc}</refpurpose>
++</refnamediv>
++${stability}
++${functions_synop}${args_synop}${signals_synop}${actions_synop}${object_anchors}${other_synop}${hierarchy}${prerequisites}${derived}${interfaces}${implementations}
++${include_output}
++<refsect1 id="${section_id}.description" role="desc">
++<title role="desc.title">Description</title>
++${extralinks}${long_desc}
++</refsect1>
++<refsect1 id="${section_id}.functions_details" role="details">
++<title role="details.title">Functions</title>
++${functions_details}
++</refsect1>
++${other_desc}${args_desc}${signals_desc}${actions_desc}${see_also}
++</refentry>
++''')
++
++DB_REFSECT1_SYNOPSIS3 = string.Template('''<refsect1 id="${section_id}.${type}" role="${role}">
++<title role="${role}.title">${title}</title>
++<informaltable frame="none">
++<tgroup cols="3">
++<colspec colname="${role}_type" colwidth="150px"/>
++<colspec colname="${role}_name" colwidth="300px"/>
++<colspec colname="${role}_flags" colwidth="200px"/>
++<tbody>
++${content}
++</tbody>
++</tgroup>
++</informaltable>
++</refsect1>
++''')
++
++DB_REFSECT1_SYNOPSIS2 = string.Template('''<refsect1 id="${section_id}.${type}" role="${role}">
++<title role="${role}.title">${title}</title>
++<informaltable pgwide="1" frame="none">
++<tgroup cols="2">
++<colspec colname="${role}_type" colwidth="150px"/>
++<colspec colname="${role}_name"/>
++<tbody>
++${content}
++</tbody>
++</tgroup>
++</informaltable>
++</refsect1>
++''')
++
++DB_REFSECT1_DESC = string.Template('''<refsect1 id="${section_id}.${type}" role="${role}">
++<title role="${role}.title">${title}</title>
++${content}
++</refsect1>
++''')
++
++
++def Run(options):
++ global MODULE, INLINE_MARKUP_MODE, NAME_SPACE, DB_OUTPUT_DIR, doctype_header
++
++ logging.info('options: %s', str(options.__dict__))
++
++ # We should pass the options variable around instead of this global variable horror
++ # but too much of the code expects these to be around. Fix this once the transition is done.
++ MODULE = options.module
++ INLINE_MARKUP_MODE = options.xml_mode or options.sgml_mode
++ NAME_SPACE = options.name_space
++ DB_OUTPUT_DIR = options.output_dir or os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, "xml")
++
++ main_sgml_file = options.main_sgml_file
++ if not main_sgml_file:
++ # backwards compatibility
++ if os.path.exists(MODULE + "-docs.sgml"):
++ main_sgml_file = MODULE + "-docs.sgml"
++ else:
++ main_sgml_file = MODULE + "-docs.xml"
++
++ # -- phase 1: read files produced by previous tools and scane sources
++
++ # extract docbook header or define default
++ doctype_header = GetDocbookHeader(main_sgml_file)
++
++ ReadKnownSymbols(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-sections.txt"))
++ ReadSignalsFile(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + ".signals"))
++ ReadArgsFile(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + ".args"))
++ ReadActionsFile(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + ".actions"))
++ obj_tree = ReadObjectHierarchy(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + ".hierarchy"))
++ ReadInterfaces(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + ".interfaces"))
++ ReadPrerequisites(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + ".prerequisites"))
++
++ ReadDeclarationsFile(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-decl.txt"), 0)
++ if os.path.isfile(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-overrides.txt")):
++ ReadDeclarationsFile(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-overrides.txt"), 1)
++
++ logging.info("Data files read")
++
++ # -- phase 2: scan sources
++
++ # TODO: move this to phase 3 once we fixed the call to OutputProgramDBFile()
++ if not os.path.isdir(DB_OUTPUT_DIR):
++ os.mkdir(DB_OUTPUT_DIR)
++
++ # Scan sources
++ if options.source_suffixes:
++ suffix_list = ['.' + ext for ext in options.source_suffixes.split(',')]
++ else:
++ suffix_list = ['.c', '.h']
++
++ source_dirs = options.source_dir
++ ignore_files = options.ignore_files and options.ignore_files.split(' ') or []
++ logging.info("Ignored files: " + options.ignore_files)
++
++ for sdir in source_dirs:
++ abs_ignored_files = [os.path.join(sdir, x) for x in ignore_files]
++ ReadSourceDocumentation(sdir, suffix_list, abs_ignored_files)
++
++ logging.info("Sources scanned")
++
++ # -- phase 3: write docbook files
++
++ changed, book_top, book_bottom = OutputDB(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-sections.txt"), options)
++ OutputBook(main_sgml_file, book_top, book_bottom, obj_tree)
++
++ # If any of the DocBook files have changed, update the timestamp file (so
++ # it can be used for Makefile dependencies).
++ if changed or not os.path.exists(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, "sgml.stamp")):
++ # TODO: MakeIndexterms() uses NAME_SPACE, but also fills IndexEntriesFull
++ # which DetermineNamespace is using
++ # Can we use something else?
++ # no: AllSymbols, KnownSymbols
++ # IndexEntriesFull: consist of all symbols from sections file + signals and properties
++ #
++ # logging.info('# index_entries_full=%d, # declarations=%d',
++ # len(IndexEntriesFull), len(Declarations))
++ # logging.info('known_symbols - index_entries_full: ' + str(Declarations.keys() - IndexEntriesFull.keys()))
++
++ # try to detect the common prefix
++ # GtkWidget, GTK_WIDGET, gtk_widget -> gtk
++ if NAME_SPACE == '':
++ NAME_SPACE = DetermineNamespace(IndexEntriesFull.keys())
++
++ logging.info('namespace prefix ="%s"', NAME_SPACE)
++
++ OutputObjectTree(obj_tree)
++ OutputObjectList(Objects)
++
++ OutputIndex("api-index-full", IndexEntriesFull)
++ OutputIndex("api-index-deprecated", IndexEntriesDeprecated)
++ OutputSinceIndexes()
++ OutputAnnotationGlossary()
++
++ with open(os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, 'sgml.stamp'), 'w') as h:
++ h.write('timestamp')
++
++ logging.info("All files created: %d", changed)
++
++
++def OutputObjectList(obj_list):
++ """This outputs the alphabetical list of objects, in a columned table."""
++ # FIXME: Currently this also outputs ancestor objects which may not actually
++ # be in this module.
++
++ # TODO(ensonic): consider not writing this unconditionally
++ if not obj_list:
++ return
++
++ cols = 3
++
++ # FIXME: use .xml
++ old_object_index = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, "object_index.sgml")
++ new_object_index = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, "object_index.new")
++
++ OUTPUT = open(new_object_index, 'w', encoding='utf-8')
++
++ OUTPUT.write('''%s
++<informaltable pgwide="1" frame="none">
++<tgroup cols="%s">
++<colspec colwidth="1*"/>
++<colspec colwidth="1*"/>
++<colspec colwidth="1*"/>
++<tbody>
++''' % (MakeDocHeader("informaltable"), cols))
++
++ count = 0
++ object = None
++ for object in sorted(Objects):
++ xref = MakeXRef(object)
++ if count % cols == 0:
++ OUTPUT.write("<row>\n")
++ OUTPUT.write("<entry>%s</entry>\n" % xref)
++ if count % cols == cols - 1:
++ OUTPUT.write("</row>\n")
++ count += 1
++
++ if count % cols > 0:
++ OUTPUT.write("</row>\n")
++
++ OUTPUT.write('''</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>\n''')
++ OUTPUT.close()
++
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_object_index, new_object_index, 0)
++
++
++def trim_leading_and_trailing_nl(text):
++ """Trims extra newlines.
++
++ Leaves a single trailing newline.
++
++ Args:
++ text (str): the text block to trim. May contain newlines.
++
++ Returns:
++ (str): trimmed text
++ """
++ text = re.sub(r'^\n*', '', text)
++ return re.sub(r'\n+$', '\n', text)
++
++
++def trim_white_spaces(text):
++ """Trims extra whitespace.
++
++ Empty lines inside a block are preserved. All whitespace and the end is
++ replaced with a single newline.
++
++ Args:
++ text (str): the text block to trim. May contain newlines.
++
++ Returns:
++ (str): trimmed text
++ """
++
++ # strip trailing spaces on every line
++ return re.sub(r'\s+$', '\n', text.lstrip(), flags=re.MULTILINE)
++
++
++def make_refsect1_synopsis(tmpl, content, title, section_id, section_type, role=None):
++ # TODO(ensonic): canonicalize xml to use the same string for section_type
++ # and role. Needs fixes on gtk-doc.xsl
++ if role is None:
++ role = section_type.replace('-', '_')
++
++ return tmpl.substitute({
++ 'content': content,
++ 'role': role,
++ 'section_id': section_id,
++ 'title': title,
++ 'type': section_type,
++ })
++
++
++def make_refsect1_synopsis2(content, title, section_id, section_type, role=None):
++ return make_refsect1_synopsis(DB_REFSECT1_SYNOPSIS2, content, title, section_id, section_type, role)
++
++
++def make_refsect1_synopsis3(content, title, section_id, section_type, role=None):
++ return make_refsect1_synopsis(DB_REFSECT1_SYNOPSIS3, content, title, section_id, section_type, role)
++
++
++def make_refsect1_desc(content, title, section_id, section_type, role=None):
++ content = trim_white_spaces(content)
++ if content == '':
++ return ''
++
++ # TODO(ensonic): canonicalize xml to use the same string for section_type
++ # and role. Needs fixes on gtk-doc.xsl
++ if role is None:
++ role = section_type.replace('-', '_')
++
++ return DB_REFSECT1_DESC.substitute({
++ 'content': content,
++ 'role': role,
++ 'section_id': section_id,
++ 'title': title,
++ 'type': section_type,
++ })
++
++
++def OutputDB(file, options):
++ """Generate docbook files.
++
++ This collects the output for each section of the docs, and outputs each file
++ when the end of the section is found.
++
++ Args:
++ file (str): the $MODULE-sections.txt file which contains all of the
++ functions/macros/structs etc. being documented, organised
++ into sections and subsections.
++ options: commandline options
++ """
++
++ logging.info("Reading: %s", file)
++ INPUT = open(file, 'r', encoding='utf-8')
++ filename = ''
++ book_top = ''
++ book_bottom = ''
++ includes = options.default_includes or ''
++ section_includes = ''
++ in_section = 0
++ title = ''
++ section_id = ''
++ subsection = ''
++ num_symbols = 0
++ changed = 0
++ functions_synop = ''
++ other_synop = ''
++ functions_details = ''
++ other_details = ''
++ other_desc = ''
++ signals_synop = ''
++ signals_desc = ''
++ args_synop = ''
++ child_args_synop = ''
++ style_args_synop = ''
++ args_desc = ''
++ child_args_desc = ''
++ style_args_desc = ''
++ actions_synop = ''
++ actions_desc = ''
++ hierarchy_str = ''
++ hierarchy = []
++ interfaces = ''
++ implementations = ''
++ prerequisites = ''
++ derived = ''
++ file_objects = []
++ file_def_line = {}
++ symbol_def_line = {}
++
++ MergeSourceDocumentation()
++
++ line_number = 0
++ for line in INPUT:
++ line_number += 1
++
++ if line.startswith('#'):
++ continue
++
++ logging.info("section file data: %d: %s", line_number, line)
++
++ m1 = re.search(r'^<SUBSECTION\s*(.*)>', line, re.I)
++ m2 = re.search(r'^<TITLE>(.*)<\/TITLE', line)
++ m3 = re.search(r'^<FILE>(.*)<\/FILE>', line)
++ m4 = re.search(r'^<INCLUDE>(.*)<\/INCLUDE>', line)
++ m5 = re.search(r'^(\S+)', line)
++
++ if line.startswith('<SECTION>'):
++ num_symbols = 0
++ in_section = False
++ file_objects = []
++ symbol_def_line = {}
++
++ elif m1:
++ other_synop += "\n"
++ functions_synop += "\n"
++ subsection = m1.group(1)
++
++ elif line.startswith('<SUBSECTION>'):
++ continue
++ elif m2:
++ title = m2.group(1)
++ logging.info("Section: %s", title)
++
++ # We don't want warnings if object & class structs aren't used.
++ DeclarationOutput[title] = 1
++ DeclarationOutput["%sClass" % title] = 1
++ DeclarationOutput["%sIface" % title] = 1
++ DeclarationOutput["%sInterface" % title] = 1
++
++ elif m3:
++ filename = m3.group(1)
++ if filename not in file_def_line:
++ file_def_line[filename] = line_number
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(file, line_number, "Double <FILE>%s</FILE> entry. Previous occurrence on line %s." %
++ (filename, file_def_line[filename]))
++ if title == '':
++ key = filename + ":title"
++ if key in SourceSymbolDocs:
++ title = SourceSymbolDocs[key].rstrip()
++
++ elif m4:
++ if in_section:
++ section_includes = m4.group(1)
++ else:
++ if options.default_includes:
++ common.LogWarning(file, line_number, "Default <INCLUDE> being overridden by command line option.")
++ else:
++ includes = m4.group(1)
++
++ elif re.search(r'^<\/SECTION>', line):
++ logging.info("End of section: %s", title)
++ # TODO: also output if we have sections docs?
++ # long_desc = SymbolDocs.get(filename + ":long_description")
++ if num_symbols > 0:
++ # collect documents
++ book_bottom += " <xi:include href=\"xml/%s.xml\"/>\n" % filename
++
++ key = filename + ":include"
++ if key in SourceSymbolDocs:
++ if section_includes:
++ common.LogWarning(file, line_number, "Section <INCLUDE> being overridden by inline comments.")
++ section_includes = SourceSymbolDocs[key]
++
++ if section_includes == '':
++ section_includes = includes
++
++ signals_synop = trim_leading_and_trailing_nl(signals_synop)
++ if signals_synop != '':
++ signals_synop = make_refsect1_synopsis3(
++ signals_synop, 'Signals', section_id, 'signals', 'signal_proto')
++ signals_desc = make_refsect1_desc(signals_desc, 'Signal Details',
++ section_id, 'signal-details', 'signals')
++
++ args_synop = trim_leading_and_trailing_nl(args_synop)
++ if args_synop != '':
++ args_synop = make_refsect1_synopsis3(args_synop, 'Properties', section_id, 'properties')
++ args_desc = make_refsect1_desc(args_desc, 'Property Details', section_id, 'property-details')
++
++ child_args_synop = trim_leading_and_trailing_nl(child_args_synop)
++ if child_args_synop != '':
++ args_synop += make_refsect1_synopsis3(child_args_synop,
++ 'Child Properties', section_id, 'child-properties')
++ args_desc += make_refsect1_desc(child_args_desc, 'Child Property Details',
++ section_id, 'child-property-details')
++
++ style_args_synop = trim_leading_and_trailing_nl(style_args_synop)
++ if style_args_synop != '':
++ args_synop += make_refsect1_synopsis3(style_args_synop,
++ 'Style Properties', section_id, 'style-properties')
++ args_desc += make_refsect1_desc(style_args_desc, 'Style Property Details',
++ section_id, 'style-property-details')
++
++ actions_synop = re.sub(r'^\n*', '', actions_synop)
++ actions_synop = re.sub(r'\n+$', '\n', actions_synop)
++ if actions_synop != '':
++ actions_synop = '''<refsect1 id="%s.actions" role="actions">
++<title role="actions.title">Actions</title>
++<informaltable frame="none">
++<tgroup cols="3">
++<colspec colname="actions_none" colwidth="150px"/>
++<colspec colname="actions_name" colwidth="300px"/>
++<colspec colname="actions_param" colwidth="200px"/>
++<tbody>
++%s
++</tbody>
++</tgroup>
++</informaltable>
++</refsect1>
++''' % (section_id, actions_synop)
++ actions_desc = trim_leading_and_trailing_nl(actions_desc)
++ actions_desc = '''<refsect1 id="%s.action-details" role="action_details">
++<title role="action_details.title">Action Details</title>
++%s
++</refsect1>
++''' % (section_id, actions_desc)
++
++ hierarchy_str = AddTreeLineArt(hierarchy)
++ if hierarchy_str != '':
++ hierarchy_str = make_refsect1_desc('<screen>' + hierarchy_str + '\n</screen>',
++ 'Object Hierarchy', section_id, 'object-hierarchy')
++
++ interfaces = make_refsect1_desc(interfaces, 'Implemented Interfaces', section_id,
++ 'implemented-interfaces', 'impl_interfaces')
++ implementations = make_refsect1_desc(
++ implementations, 'Known Implementations', section_id, 'implementations')
++ prerequisites = make_refsect1_desc(prerequisites, 'Prerequisites', section_id, 'prerequisites')
++ derived = make_refsect1_desc(derived, 'Known Derived Interfaces', section_id, 'derived-interfaces')
++
++ functions_synop = trim_leading_and_trailing_nl(functions_synop)
++ if functions_synop != '':
++ functions_synop = make_refsect1_synopsis2(
++ functions_synop, 'Functions', section_id, 'functions', 'functions_proto')
++
++ other_synop = trim_leading_and_trailing_nl(other_synop)
++ if other_synop != '':
++ other_synop = make_refsect1_synopsis2(
++ other_synop, 'Types and Values', section_id, 'other', 'other_proto')
++ other_desc += make_refsect1_desc(other_details, 'Types and Values',
++ section_id, 'other_details', 'details')
++
++ file_changed = OutputDBFile(filename, title, section_id,
++ section_includes,
++ functions_synop, other_synop,
++ functions_details, other_desc,
++ signals_synop, signals_desc,
++ args_synop, args_desc,
++ actions_synop, actions_desc,
++ hierarchy_str, interfaces,
++ implementations,
++ prerequisites, derived,
++ file_objects,
++ options.default_stability)
++ if file_changed:
++ changed = True
++
++ title = ''
++ section_id = ''
++ subsection = ''
++ in_section = 0
++ section_includes = ''
++ functions_synop = ''
++ other_synop = ''
++ functions_details = ''
++ other_details = ''
++ other_desc = ''
++ signals_synop = ''
++ signals_desc = ''
++ args_synop = ''
++ child_args_synop = ''
++ style_args_synop = ''
++ args_desc = ''
++ child_args_desc = ''
++ style_args_desc = ''
++ actions_synop = ''
++ actions_desc = ''
++ hierarchy_str = ''
++ hierarchy = []
++ interfaces = ''
++ implementations = ''
++ prerequisites = ''
++ derived = ''
++
++ elif m5:
++ symbol = m5.group(1)
++ logging.info(' Symbol: "%s" in subsection: "%s"', symbol, subsection)
++
++ # check for duplicate entries
++ if symbol not in symbol_def_line:
++ declaration = Declarations.get(symbol)
++ # FIXME: with this we'll output empty declaration
++ if declaration is not None:
++ if CheckIsObject(symbol):
++ file_objects.append(symbol)
++
++ # We don't want standard macros/functions of GObjects,
++ # or private declarations.
++ if subsection != "Standard" and subsection != "Private":
++ synop, desc = OutputDeclaration(symbol, declaration)
++ type = DeclarationTypes[symbol]
++
++ if type == 'FUNCTION' or type == 'USER_FUNCTION':
++ functions_synop += synop
++ functions_details += desc
++ elif type == 'MACRO' and re.search(symbol + r'\(', declaration):
++ functions_synop += synop
++ functions_details += desc
++ else:
++ other_synop += synop
++ other_details += desc
++
++ sig_synop, sig_desc = GetSignals(symbol)
++ arg_synop, child_arg_synop, style_arg_synop, arg_desc, child_arg_desc, style_arg_desc = GetArgs(
++ symbol)
++ action_synop, action_desc = GetActions(symbol)
++ ifaces = GetInterfaces(symbol)
++ impls = GetImplementations(symbol)
++ prereqs = GetPrerequisites(symbol)
++ der = GetDerived(symbol)
++ hierarchy = GetHierarchy(symbol, hierarchy)
++
++ signals_synop += sig_synop
++ signals_desc += sig_desc
++ args_synop += arg_synop
++ child_args_synop += child_arg_synop
++ style_args_synop += style_arg_synop
++ args_desc += arg_desc
++ child_args_desc += child_arg_desc
++ style_args_desc += style_arg_desc
++ actions_synop += action_synop
++ actions_desc += action_desc
++ interfaces += ifaces
++ implementations += impls
++ prerequisites += prereqs
++ derived += der
++
++ # Note that the declaration has been output.
++ DeclarationOutput[symbol] = True
++ elif subsection != "Standard" and subsection != "Private":
++ UndeclaredSymbols[symbol] = True
++ common.LogWarning(file, line_number, "No declaration found for %s." % symbol)
++
++ num_symbols += 1
++ symbol_def_line[symbol] = line_number
++
++ if section_id == '':
++ if title == '' and filename == '':
++ common.LogWarning(file, line_number, "Section has no title and no file.")
++
++ # FIXME: one of those would be enough
++ # filename should be an internal detail for gtk-doc
++ if title == '':
++ title = filename
++ elif filename == '':
++ filename = title
++
++ filename = filename.replace(' ', '_')
++
++ section_id = SourceSymbolDocs.get(filename + ":section_id")
++ if section_id and section_id.strip() != '':
++ # Remove trailing blanks and use as is
++ section_id = section_id.rstrip()
++ elif CheckIsObject(title):
++ # GObjects use their class name as the ID.
++ section_id = common.CreateValidSGMLID(title)
++ else:
++ section_id = common.CreateValidSGMLID(MODULE + '-' + title)
++
++ SymbolSection[symbol] = title
++ SymbolSectionId[symbol] = section_id
++
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(file, line_number, "Double symbol entry for %s. "
++ "Previous occurrence on line %d." % (symbol, symbol_def_line[symbol]))
++ INPUT.close()
++
++ OutputMissingDocumentation()
++ OutputUndeclaredSymbols()
++ OutputUnusedSymbols()
++
++ if options.outputallsymbols:
++ OutputAllSymbols()
++
++ if options.outputsymbolswithoutsince:
++ OutputSymbolsWithoutSince()
++
++ for filename in options.expand_content_files.split():
++ file_changed = OutputExtraFile(filename)
++ if file_changed:
++ changed = True
++
++ return (changed, book_top, book_bottom)
++
++
++def DetermineNamespace(symbols):
++ """Find common set of characters.
++
++ Args:
++ symbols (list): a list of symbols to scan for a common prefix
++
++ Returns:
++ str: a common namespace prefix (might be empty)
++ """
++ name_space = ''
++ pos = 0
++ ratio = 0.0
++ while True:
++ prefix = {}
++ letter = ''
++ for symbol in symbols:
++ if name_space == '' or name_space.lower() in symbol.lower():
++ if len(symbol) > pos:
++ letter = symbol[pos:pos + 1]
++ # stop prefix scanning
++ if letter == "_":
++ # stop on "_"
++ break
++ # Should we also stop on a uppercase char, if last was lowercase
++ # GtkWidget, if we have the 'W' and had the 't' before
++ # or should we count upper and lowercase, and stop one 2nd uppercase, if we already had a lowercase
++ # GtkWidget, the 'W' would be the 2nd uppercase and with 't','k' we had lowercase chars before
++ # need to recound each time as this is per symbol
++ ul = letter.upper()
++ if ul in prefix:
++ prefix[ul] += 1
++ else:
++ prefix[ul] = 1
++
++ if letter != '' and letter != "_":
++ maxletter = ''
++ maxsymbols = 0
++ for letter in prefix.keys():
++ logging.debug("ns prefix: %s: %s", letter, prefix[letter])
++ if prefix[letter] > maxsymbols:
++ maxletter = letter
++ maxsymbols = prefix[letter]
++
++ ratio = float(len(symbols)) / prefix[maxletter]
++ logging.debug('most symbols start with %s, that is %f', maxletter, (100 * ratio))
++ if ratio > 0.9:
++ # do another round
++ name_space += maxletter
++
++ pos += 1
++
++ else:
++ ratio = 0.0
++
++ if ratio < 0.9:
++ break
++ return name_space
++
++
++def OutputIndex(basename, apiindex):
++ """Writes an index that can be included into the main-document into an <index> tag.
++
++ Args:
++ basename (str): name of the index file without extension
++ apiindex (dict): the index data
++ """
++ old_index = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, basename + '.xml')
++ new_index = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, basename + '.new')
++ lastletter = " "
++ divopen = 0
++ symbol = None
++ short_symbol = None
++
++ OUTPUT = open(new_index, 'w')
++
++ OUTPUT.write(MakeDocHeader("indexdiv") + "\n<indexdiv id=\"%s\">\n" % basename)
++
++ logging.info("generate %s index (%d entries) with namespace %s", basename, len(apiindex), NAME_SPACE)
++
++ # do a case insensitive sort while chopping off the prefix
++ mapped_keys = [
++ {
++ 'original': x,
++ 'short': re.sub(r'^' + NAME_SPACE + r'\_?(.*)', r'\1', x.upper(), flags=re.I),
++ } for x in apiindex.keys()]
++ sorted_keys = sorted(mapped_keys, key=lambda d: (d['short'], d['original']))
++
++ for key in sorted_keys:
++ symbol = key['original']
++ short = key['short']
++ if short != '':
++ short_symbol = short
++ else:
++ short_symbol = symbol
++
++ # generate a short symbol description
++ symbol_desc = ''
++ symbol_section = ''
++ symbol_section_id = ''
++ symbol_type = ''
++ if symbol in DeclarationTypes:
++ symbol_type = DeclarationTypes[symbol].lower()
++
++ if symbol_type == '':
++ logging.info("trying symbol %s", symbol)
++ m1 = re.search(r'(.*)::(.*)', symbol)
++ m2 = re.search(r'(.*):(.*)', symbol)
++ m3 = re.search(r'(.*)\|(.*)', symbol)
++ if m1:
++ oname = m1.group(1)
++ osym = m1.group(2)
++ logging.info(" trying object signal %s:%s in %d signals", oname, osym, len(SignalNames))
++ for name in SignalNames:
++ logging.info(" " + name)
++ if name == osym:
++ symbol_type = "object signal"
++ if oname in SymbolSection:
++ symbol_section = SymbolSection[oname]
++ symbol_section_id = SymbolSectionId[oname]
++ break
++ elif m2:
++ oname = m2.group(1)
++ osym = m2.group(2)
++ logging.info(" trying object property %s::%s in %d properties", oname, osym, len(ArgNames))
++ for name in ArgNames:
++ logging.info(" " + name)
++ if name == osym:
++ symbol_type = "object property"
++ if oname in SymbolSection:
++ symbol_section = SymbolSection[oname]
++ symbol_section_id = SymbolSectionId[oname]
++ break
++ elif m3:
++ oname = m3.group(1)
++ osym = m3.group(2)
++ logging.info(" trying action %s|%s in %d actions", oname, osym, len(ActionNames))
++ for name in ActionNames:
++ logging.info(" " + name)
++ if name == osym:
++ symbol_type = "action"
++ if oname in SymbolSection:
++ symbol_section = SymbolSection[oname]
++ symbol_section_id = SymbolSectionId[oname]
++ break
++ else:
++ if symbol in SymbolSection:
++ symbol_section = SymbolSection[symbol]
++ symbol_section_id = SymbolSectionId[symbol]
++
++ if symbol_type != '':
++ symbol_desc = ", " + symbol_type
++ if symbol_section != '':
++ symbol_desc += " in <link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link>" % (symbol_section_id, symbol_section)
++ # symbol_desc +=" in " + ExpandAbbreviations(symbol, "#symbol_section")
++
++ curletter = short_symbol[0].upper()
++ ixid = apiindex[symbol]
++
++ logging.info(" add symbol %s with %s to index in section '%s' (derived from %s)",
++ symbol, ixid, curletter, short_symbol)
++
++ if curletter != lastletter:
++ lastletter = curletter
++
++ if divopen:
++ OUTPUT.write("</indexdiv>\n")
++
++ OUTPUT.write("<indexdiv><title>%s</title>\n" % curletter)
++ divopen = True
++
++ OUTPUT.write('<indexentry><primaryie linkends="%s"><link linkend="%s">%s</link>%s</primaryie></indexentry>\n' %
++ (ixid, ixid, symbol, symbol_desc))
++
++ if divopen:
++ OUTPUT.write("</indexdiv>\n")
++
++ OUTPUT.write("</indexdiv>\n")
++ OUTPUT.close()
++
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_index, new_index, 0)
++
++
++def OutputSinceIndexes():
++ """Generate the 'since' api index files."""
++ for version in sorted(set(Since.values())):
++ logging.info("Since : [%s]", version)
++ index = {x: IndexEntriesSince[x] for x in IndexEntriesSince.keys() if Since[x] == version}
++ OutputIndex("api-index-" + version, index)
++
++
++def OutputAnnotationGlossary():
++ """Writes a glossary of the used annotation terms.
++
++ The glossary file can be included into the main document.
++ """
++ # if there are no annotations used return
++ if not AnnotationsUsed:
++ return
++
++ old_glossary = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, "annotation-glossary.xml")
++ new_glossary = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, "annotation-glossary.new")
++ lastletter = " "
++ divopen = False
++
++ # add acronyms that are referenced from acronym text
++ rerun = True
++ while rerun:
++ rerun = False
++ for annotation in AnnotationsUsed:
++ if annotation not in AnnotationDefinition:
++ continue
++ m = re.search(r'<acronym>([\w ]+)<\/acronym>', AnnotationDefinition[annotation])
++ if m and m.group(1) not in AnnotationsUsed:
++ AnnotationsUsed[m.group(1)] = 1
++ rerun = True
++ break
++
++ OUTPUT = open(new_glossary, 'w', encoding='utf-8')
++
++ OUTPUT.write('''%s
++<glossary id="annotation-glossary">
++ <title>Annotation Glossary</title>
++''' % MakeDocHeader("glossary"))
++
++ for annotation in sorted(AnnotationsUsed.keys(), key=str.lower):
++ if annotation in AnnotationDefinition:
++ definition = AnnotationDefinition[annotation]
++ curletter = annotation[0].upper()
++
++ if curletter != lastletter:
++ lastletter = curletter
++
++ if divopen:
++ OUTPUT.write("</glossdiv>\n")
++
++ OUTPUT.write("<glossdiv><title>%s</title>\n" % curletter)
++ divopen = True
++
++ OUTPUT.write(''' <glossentry>
++ <glossterm><anchor id="annotation-glossterm-%s"/>%s</glossterm>
++ <glossdef>
++ <para>%s</para>
++ </glossdef>
++ </glossentry>
++''' % (annotation, annotation, definition))
++
++ if divopen:
++ OUTPUT.write("</glossdiv>\n")
++
++ OUTPUT.write("</glossary>\n")
++ OUTPUT.close()
++
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_glossary, new_glossary, 0)
++
++
++def OutputObjectTree(tree):
++ if not tree:
++ return
++
++ # FIXME: use xml
++ old_tree_index = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, "tree_index.sgml")
++ new_tree_index = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, "tree_index.new")
++
++ with open(new_tree_index, 'w', encoding='utf-8') as out:
++ out.write(MakeDocHeader("screen"))
++ out.write("\n<screen>\n")
++ out.write(AddTreeLineArt(tree))
++ out.write("\n</screen>\n")
++
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_tree_index, new_tree_index, 0)
++
++
++def ReadKnownSymbols(file):
++ """Collect the names of non-private symbols from the $MODULE-sections.txt file.
++
++ Args:
++ file: the $MODULE-sections.txt file
++ """
++
++ subsection = ''
++
++ logging.info("Reading: %s", file)
++ INPUT = open(file, 'r', encoding='utf-8')
++ for line in INPUT:
++ if line.startswith('#'):
++ continue
++
++ if line.startswith('<SECTION>'):
++ subsection = ''
++ continue
++
++ m = re.search(r'^<SUBSECTION\s*(.*)>', line, flags=re.I)
++ if m:
++ subsection = m.group(1)
++ continue
++
++ if line.startswith('<SUBSECTION>'):
++ continue
++
++ if re.search(r'^<TITLE>(.*)<\/TITLE>', line):
++ continue
++
++ m = re.search(r'^<FILE>(.*)<\/FILE>', line)
++ if m:
++ KnownSymbols[m.group(1) + ":long_description"] = 1
++ KnownSymbols[m.group(1) + ":short_description"] = 1
++ continue
++
++ m = re.search(r'^<INCLUDE>(.*)<\/INCLUDE>', line)
++ if m:
++ continue
++
++ m = re.search(r'^<\/SECTION>', line)
++ if m:
++ continue
++
++ m = re.search(r'^(\S+)', line)
++ if m:
++ symbol = m.group(1)
++ if subsection != "Standard" and subsection != "Private":
++ KnownSymbols[symbol] = 1
++ else:
++ KnownSymbols[symbol] = 0
++ INPUT.close()
++
++
++def OutputDeclaration(symbol, declaration):
++ """Returns the formatted documentation block for a symbol.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the name of the function/macro/...
++ declaration (str): the declaration of the function/macro.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the formatted documentation
++ """
++
++ dtype = DeclarationTypes[symbol]
++ logging.info('Output Symbol: "%s" "%s"', symbol, dtype)
++ if dtype == 'MACRO':
++ return OutputMacro(symbol, declaration)
++ elif dtype == 'TYPEDEF':
++ return OutputTypedef(symbol, declaration)
++ elif dtype == 'STRUCT':
++ return OutputStruct(symbol, declaration)
++ elif dtype == 'ENUM':
++ return OutputEnum(symbol, declaration)
++ elif dtype == 'UNION':
++ return OutputUnion(symbol, declaration)
++ elif dtype == 'VARIABLE':
++ return OutputVariable(symbol, declaration)
++ elif dtype == 'FUNCTION':
++ return OutputFunction(symbol, declaration, dtype)
++ elif dtype == 'USER_FUNCTION':
++ return OutputFunction(symbol, declaration, dtype)
++ else:
++ logging.warning("Unknown symbol type %s for symbol %s", dtype, symbol)
++ return ('', '')
++
++
++def OutputSymbolTraits(symbol):
++ """Returns the Since and StabilityLevel paragraphs for a symbol.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the name to describe
++
++ Returns:
++ str: paragraph or empty string
++ """
++
++ desc = ''
++
++ if symbol in Since:
++ link_id = "api-index-" + Since[symbol]
++ desc += "<para role=\"since\">Since: <link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link></para>" % (link_id, Since[symbol])
++
++ if symbol in StabilityLevel:
++ stability = StabilityLevel[symbol]
++ if stability in AnnotationDefinition:
++ AnnotationsUsed[stability] = True
++ stability = "<acronym>%s</acronym>" % stability
++ desc += "<para role=\"stability\">Stability Level: %s</para>" % stability
++ return desc
++
++
++def uri_escape(text):
++ if text is None:
++ return None
++
++ # Build a char to hex map
++ escapes = {chr(i): ("%%%02X" % i) for i in range(256)}
++
++ # Default unsafe characters. RFC 2732 ^(uric - reserved)
++ def do_escape(char):
++ return escapes[char]
++ return re.sub(r"([^A-Za-z0-9\-_.!~*'()]", do_escape, text)
++
++
++def extract_struct_body(symbol, decl, has_typedef, public):
++ """Returns a normalized struct body.
++
++ Normalizes whitespace and newlines and supresses non public members.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the nomalized struct declaration
++ """
++ decl_out = ''
++
++ m = re.search(
++ r'^\s*(typedef\s+)?struct\s*\w*\s*(?:\/\*.*\*\/)?\s*{(.*)}\s*\w*\s*;\s*$', decl, flags=re.DOTALL)
++ if m:
++ new_boby = ''
++ for line in m.group(2).splitlines():
++ logging.info("Struct line: %s", line)
++ m2 = re.search(r'/\*\s*<\s*public\s*>\s*\*/', line)
++ m3 = re.search(r'/\*\s*<\s*(private|protected)\s*>\s*\*/', line)
++ if m2:
++ public = True
++ elif m3:
++ public = False
++ elif public:
++ new_boby += line + "\n"
++
++ if new_boby:
++ # Strip any blank lines off the ends.
++ new_boby = re.sub(r'^\s*\n', '', new_boby)
++ new_boby = re.sub(r'\n\s*$', r'\n', new_boby)
++
++ if has_typedef:
++ decl_out = "typedef struct {\n%s} %s;\n" % (new_boby, symbol)
++ else:
++ decl_out = "struct %s {\n%s};\n" % (symbol, new_boby)
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Couldn't parse struct:\n%s" % decl)
++
++ if decl_out == '':
++ # If we couldn't parse the struct or it was all private, output an
++ # empty struct declaration.
++ if has_typedef:
++ decl_out = "typedef struct _%s %s;" % (symbol, symbol)
++ else:
++ decl_out = "struct %s;" % symbol
++
++ return decl_out
++
++
++def OutputSymbolExtraLinks(symbol):
++ """Returns extralinks for the symbol (if enabled).
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the name to describe
++
++ Returns:
++ str: paragraph or empty string
++ """
++ desc = ''
++
++ if False: # NEW FEATURE: needs configurability
++ sstr = uri_escape(symbol)
++ mstr = uri_escape(MODULE)
++ desc += '''<ulink role="extralinks" url="http://www.google.com/codesearch?q=%s">code search</ulink>
++<ulink role="extralinks" url="http://library.gnome.org/edit?module=%s&symbol=%s">edit documentation</ulink>
++''' % (sstr, mstr, sstr)
++
++ return desc
++
++
++def OutputSectionExtraLinks(symbol, docsymbol):
++ desc = ''
++
++ if False: # NEW FEATURE: needs configurability
++ sstr = uri_escape(symbol)
++ mstr = uri_escape(MODULE)
++ dsstr = uri_escape(docsymbol)
++ desc += '''<ulink role="extralinks" url="http://www.google.com/codesearch?q=%s">code search</ulink>
++<ulink role="extralinks" url="http://library.gnome.org/edit?module=%s&symbol=%s">edit documentation</ulink>
++''' % (sstr, mstr, dsstr)
++ return desc
++
++
++def OutputMacro(symbol, declaration):
++ """Returns the synopsis and detailed description of a macro.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the macro name.
++ declaration (str): the declaration of the macro.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the formatted docs
++ """
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol)
++ condition = MakeConditionDescription(symbol)
++ synop = "<row><entry role=\"define_keyword\">#define</entry><entry role=\"function_name\"><link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link>" % (
++ sid, symbol)
++
++ fields = common.ParseMacroDeclaration(declaration, CreateValidSGML)
++ title = symbol
++ if len(fields) > 0:
++ title += '()'
++
++ desc = '<refsect2 id="%s" role="macro"%s>\n<title>%s</title>\n' % (sid, condition, title)
++ desc += MakeIndexterms(symbol, sid)
++ desc += "\n"
++ desc += OutputSymbolExtraLinks(symbol)
++
++ if len(fields) > 0:
++ synop += "<phrase role=\"c_punctuation\">()</phrase>"
++
++ synop += "</entry></row>\n"
++
++ # Don't output the macro definition if is is a conditional macro or it
++ # looks like a function, i.e. starts with "g_" or "_?gnome_", or it is
++ # longer than 2 lines, otherwise we get lots of complicated macros like
++ # g_assert.
++ if symbol not in DeclarationConditional and not symbol.startswith('g_') \
++ and not re.search(r'^_?gnome_', symbol) and declaration.count('\n') < 2:
++ decl_out = CreateValidSGML(declaration)
++ desc += "<programlisting language=\"C\">%s</programlisting>\n" % decl_out
++ else:
++ desc += "<programlisting language=\"C\">" + "#define".ljust(RETURN_TYPE_FIELD_WIDTH) + symbol
++ m = re.search(r'^\s*#\s*define\s+\w+(\([^\)]*\))', declaration)
++ if m:
++ args = m.group(1)
++ pad = ' ' * (RETURN_TYPE_FIELD_WIDTH - len("#define "))
++ # Align each line so that if should all line up OK.
++ args = args.replace('\n', '\n' + pad)
++ desc += CreateValidSGML(args)
++
++ desc += "</programlisting>\n"
++
++ desc += MakeDeprecationNote(symbol)
++
++ parameters = OutputParamDescriptions("MACRO", symbol, fields)
++
++ if symbol in SymbolDocs:
++ symbol_docs = ConvertMarkDown(symbol, SymbolDocs[symbol])
++ desc += symbol_docs
++
++ desc += parameters
++ desc += OutputSymbolTraits(symbol)
++ desc += "</refsect2>\n"
++ return (synop, desc)
++
++
++def OutputTypedef(symbol, declaration):
++ """Returns the synopsis and detailed description of a typedef.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the typedef.
++ declaration (str): the declaration of the typedef,
++ e.g. 'typedef unsigned int guint;'
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the formatted docs
++ """
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol)
++ condition = MakeConditionDescription(symbol)
++ desc = "<refsect2 id=\"%s\" role=\"typedef\"%s>\n<title>%s</title>\n" % (sid, condition, symbol)
++ synop = "<row><entry role=\"typedef_keyword\">typedef</entry><entry role=\"function_name\"><link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link></entry></row>\n" % (
++ sid, symbol)
++
++ desc += MakeIndexterms(symbol, sid)
++ desc += "\n"
++ desc += OutputSymbolExtraLinks(symbol)
++
++ if symbol not in DeclarationConditional:
++ decl_out = CreateValidSGML(declaration)
++ desc += "<programlisting language=\"C\">%s</programlisting>\n" % decl_out
++
++ desc += MakeDeprecationNote(symbol)
++
++ if symbol in SymbolDocs:
++ desc += ConvertMarkDown(symbol, SymbolDocs[symbol])
++
++ desc += OutputSymbolTraits(symbol)
++ desc += "</refsect2>\n"
++ return (synop, desc)
++
++
++def OutputStruct(symbol, declaration):
++ """Returns the synopsis and detailed description of a struct.
++
++ We check if it is a object struct, and if so we only output parts of it that
++ are noted as public fields. We also use a different IDs for object structs,
++ since the original ID is used for the entire RefEntry.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the struct.
++ declaration (str): the declaration of the struct.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the formatted docs
++ """
++ is_gtype = False
++ default_to_public = True
++ if CheckIsObject(symbol):
++ logging.info("Found struct gtype: %s", symbol)
++ is_gtype = True
++ default_to_public = ObjectRoots[symbol] == 'GBoxed'
++
++ sid = None
++ condition = None
++ if is_gtype:
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol + "_struct")
++ condition = MakeConditionDescription(symbol + "_struct")
++ else:
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol)
++ condition = MakeConditionDescription(symbol)
++
++ # Determine if it is a simple struct or it also has a typedef.
++ has_typedef = False
++ if symbol in StructHasTypedef or re.search(r'^\s*typedef\s+', declaration):
++ has_typedef = True
++
++ type_output = None
++ desc = None
++ if has_typedef:
++ # For structs with typedefs we just output the struct name.
++ type_output = ''
++ desc = "<refsect2 id=\"%s\" role=\"struct\"%s>\n<title>%s</title>\n" % (sid, condition, symbol)
++ else:
++ type_output = "struct"
++ desc = "<refsect2 id=\"%s\" role=\"struct\"%s>\n<title>struct %s</title>\n" % (sid, condition, symbol)
++
++ synop = "<row><entry role=\"datatype_keyword\">%s</entry><entry role=\"function_name\"><link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link></entry></row>\n" % (
++ type_output, sid, symbol)
++
++ desc += MakeIndexterms(symbol, sid)
++ desc += "\n"
++ desc += OutputSymbolExtraLinks(symbol)
++
++ # Form a pretty-printed, private-data-removed form of the declaration
++
++ decl_out = ''
++ if re.search(r'^\s*$', declaration):
++ logging.info("Found opaque struct: %s", symbol)
++ decl_out = "typedef struct _%s %s;" % (symbol, symbol)
++ elif re.search(r'^\s*struct\s+\w+\s*;\s*$', declaration):
++ logging.info("Found opaque struct: %s", symbol)
++ decl_out = "struct %s;" % symbol
++ else:
++ decl_out = extract_struct_body(symbol, declaration, has_typedef, default_to_public)
++
++ decl_out = CreateValidSGML(decl_out)
++ desc += "<programlisting language=\"C\">%s</programlisting>\n" % decl_out
++
++ desc += MakeDeprecationNote(symbol)
++
++ if symbol in SymbolDocs:
++ desc += ConvertMarkDown(symbol, SymbolDocs[symbol])
++
++ # Create a table of fields and descriptions
++
++ # FIXME: Inserting  's into the produced type declarations here would
++ # improve the output in most situations ... except for function
++ # members of structs!
++ def pfunc(*args):
++ return '<structfield id="%s">%s</structfield>' % (common.CreateValidSGMLID(sid + '.' + args[0]), args[0])
++ fields = common.ParseStructDeclaration(declaration, not default_to_public, 0, MakeXRef, pfunc)
++ field_descrs, found = GetSymbolParams(symbol)
++
++ if found:
++ missing_parameters = ''
++ unused_parameters = ''
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol + ".members")
++
++ desc += '''<refsect3 id="%s" role="struct_members">\n<title>Members</title>
++<informaltable role="struct_members_table" pgwide="1" frame="none">
++<tgroup cols="3">
++<colspec colname="struct_members_name" colwidth="300px"/>
++<colspec colname="struct_members_description"/>
++<colspec colname="struct_members_annotations" colwidth="200px"/>
++<tbody>
++''' % sid
++
++ for field_name, text in fields.items():
++ param_annotations = ''
++
++ desc += "<row role=\"member\"><entry role=\"struct_member_name\"><para>%s</para></entry>\n" % text
++ if field_name in field_descrs:
++ field_descr, param_annotations = ExpandAnnotation(symbol, field_descrs[field_name])
++ field_descr = ConvertMarkDown(symbol, field_descr)
++ # trim
++ field_descr = re.sub(r'^(\s|\n)+', '', field_descr, flags=re.M | re.S)
++ field_descr = re.sub(r'(\s|\n)+$', '', field_descr, flags=re.M | re.S)
++ desc += "<entry role=\"struct_member_description\">%s</entry>\n<entry role=\"struct_member_annotations\">%s</entry>\n" % (
++ field_descr, param_annotations)
++ del field_descrs[field_name]
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Field description for %s::%s is missing in source code comment block." % (symbol, field_name))
++ if missing_parameters != '':
++ missing_parameters += ", " + field_name
++ else:
++ missing_parameters = field_name
++
++ desc += "<entry /><entry />\n"
++
++ desc += "</row>\n"
++
++ desc += "</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>\n</refsect3>\n"
++ for field_name in field_descrs:
++ # Documenting those standard fields is not required anymore, but
++ # we don't want to warn if they are documented anyway.
++ m = re.search(r'(g_iface|parent_instance|parent_class)', field_name)
++ if m:
++ continue
++
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Field description for %s::%s is not used from source code comment block." % (symbol, field_name))
++ if unused_parameters != '':
++ unused_parameters += ", " + field_name
++ else:
++ unused_parameters = field_name
++
++ # remember missing/unused parameters (needed in tmpl-free build)
++ if missing_parameters != '' and (symbol not in AllIncompleteSymbols):
++ AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] = missing_parameters
++
++ if unused_parameters != '' and (symbol not in AllUnusedSymbols):
++ AllUnusedSymbols[symbol] = unused_parameters
++ else:
++ if fields:
++ if symbol not in AllIncompleteSymbols:
++ AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] = "<items>"
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Field descriptions for struct %s are missing in source code comment block." % symbol)
++ logging.info("Remaining structs fields: " + ':'.join(fields) + "\n")
++
++ desc += OutputSymbolTraits(symbol)
++ desc += "</refsect2>\n"
++ return (synop, desc)
++
++
++def OutputUnion(symbol, declaration):
++ """Returns the synopsis and detailed description of a union.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the union.
++ declaration (str): the declaration of the union.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the formatted docs
++ """
++ is_gtype = False
++ if CheckIsObject(symbol):
++ logging.info("Found union gtype: %s", symbol)
++ is_gtype = True
++
++ sid = None
++ condition = None
++ if is_gtype:
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol + "_union")
++ condition = MakeConditionDescription(symbol + "_union")
++ else:
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol)
++ condition = MakeConditionDescription(symbol)
++
++ # Determine if it is a simple struct or it also has a typedef.
++ has_typedef = False
++ if symbol in StructHasTypedef or re.search(r'^\s*typedef\s+', declaration):
++ has_typedef = True
++
++ type_output = None
++ desc = None
++ if has_typedef:
++ # For unions with typedefs we just output the union name.
++ type_output = ''
++ desc = "<refsect2 id=\"%s\" role=\"union\"%s>\n<title>%s</title>\n" % (sid, condition, symbol)
++ else:
++ type_output = "union"
++ desc = "<refsect2 id=\"%s\" role=\"union\"%s>\n<title>union %s</title>\n" % (sid, condition, symbol)
++
++ synop = "<row><entry role=\"datatype_keyword\">%s</entry><entry role=\"function_name\"><link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link></entry></row>\n" % (
++ type_output, sid, symbol)
++
++ desc += MakeIndexterms(symbol, sid)
++ desc += "\n"
++ desc += OutputSymbolExtraLinks(symbol)
++ desc += MakeDeprecationNote(symbol)
++
++ if symbol in SymbolDocs:
++ desc += ConvertMarkDown(symbol, SymbolDocs[symbol])
++
++ # Create a table of fields and descriptions
++
++ # FIXME: Inserting  's into the produced type declarations here would
++ # improve the output in most situations ... except for function
++ # members of structs!
++ def pfunc(*args):
++ return '<structfield id="%s">%s</structfield>' % (common.CreateValidSGMLID(sid + '.' + args[0]), args[0])
++ fields = common.ParseStructDeclaration(declaration, 0, 0, MakeXRef, pfunc)
++ field_descrs, found = GetSymbolParams(symbol)
++
++ logging.debug('Union %s has %d entries, found=%d, has_typedef=%d', symbol, len(fields), found, has_typedef)
++
++ if found:
++ missing_parameters = ''
++ unused_parameters = ''
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID('%s.members' % symbol)
++
++ desc += '''<refsect3 id="%s" role="union_members">\n<title>Members</title>
++<informaltable role="union_members_table" pgwide="1" frame="none">
++<tgroup cols="3">
++<colspec colname="union_members_name" colwidth="300px"/>
++<colspec colname="union_members_description"/>
++<colspec colname="union_members_annotations" colwidth="200px"/>
++<tbody>
++''' % sid
++
++ for field_name, text in fields.items():
++ param_annotations = ''
++
++ desc += "<row><entry role=\"union_member_name\"><para>%s</para></entry>\n" % text
++ if field_name in field_descrs:
++ field_descr, param_annotations = ExpandAnnotation(symbol, field_descrs[field_name])
++ field_descr = ConvertMarkDown(symbol, field_descr)
++
++ # trim
++ field_descr = re.sub(r'^(\s|\n)+', '', field_descr, flags=re.M | re.S)
++ field_descr = re.sub(r'(\s|\n)+$', '', field_descr, flags=re.M | re.S)
++ desc += "<entry role=\"union_member_description\">%s</entry>\n<entry role=\"union_member_annotations\">%s</entry>\n" % (
++ field_descr, param_annotations)
++ del field_descrs[field_name]
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Field description for %s::%s is missing in source code comment block." % (symbol, field_name))
++ if missing_parameters != '':
++ missing_parameters += ", " + field_name
++ else:
++ missing_parameters = field_name
++
++ desc += "<entry /><entry />\n"
++
++ desc += "</row>\n"
++
++ desc += "</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>\n</refsect3>"
++ for field_name in field_descrs:
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Field description for %s::%s is not used from source code comment block." % (symbol, field_name))
++ if unused_parameters != '':
++ unused_parameters += ", " + field_name
++ else:
++ unused_parameters = field_name
++
++ # remember missing/unused parameters (needed in tmpl-free build)
++ if missing_parameters != '' and (symbol not in AllIncompleteSymbols):
++ AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] = missing_parameters
++
++ if unused_parameters != '' and (symbol not in AllUnusedSymbols):
++ AllUnusedSymbols[symbol] = unused_parameters
++ else:
++ if len(fields) > 0:
++ if symbol not in AllIncompleteSymbols:
++ AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] = "<items>"
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Field descriptions for union %s are missing in source code comment block." % symbol)
++ logging.info("Remaining union fields: " + ':'.join(fields) + "\n")
++
++ desc += OutputSymbolTraits(symbol)
++ desc += "</refsect2>\n"
++ return (synop, desc)
++
++
++def OutputEnum(symbol, declaration):
++ """Returns the synopsis and detailed description of a enum.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the enum.
++ declaration (str): the declaration of the enum.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the formatted docs
++ """
++ is_gtype = False
++ if CheckIsObject(symbol):
++ logging.info("Found enum gtype: %s", symbol)
++ is_gtype = True
++
++ sid = None
++ condition = None
++ if is_gtype:
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol + "_enum")
++ condition = MakeConditionDescription(symbol + "_enum")
++ else:
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol)
++ condition = MakeConditionDescription(symbol)
++
++ synop = "<row><entry role=\"datatype_keyword\">enum</entry><entry role=\"function_name\"><link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link></entry></row>\n" % (
++ sid, symbol)
++ desc = "<refsect2 id=\"%s\" role=\"enum\"%s>\n<title>enum %s</title>\n" % (sid, condition, symbol)
++
++ desc += MakeIndexterms(symbol, sid)
++ desc += "\n"
++ desc += OutputSymbolExtraLinks(symbol)
++ desc += MakeDeprecationNote(symbol)
++
++ if symbol in SymbolDocs:
++ desc += ConvertMarkDown(symbol, SymbolDocs[symbol])
++
++ # Create a table of fields and descriptions
++
++ fields = common.ParseEnumDeclaration(declaration)
++ field_descrs, found = GetSymbolParams(symbol)
++
++ missing_parameters = ''
++ unused_parameters = ''
++
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID("%s.members" % symbol)
++ desc += '''<refsect3 id="%s" role="enum_members">\n<title>Members</title>
++<informaltable role="enum_members_table" pgwide="1" frame="none">
++<tgroup cols="3">
++<colspec colname="enum_members_name" colwidth="300px"/>
++<colspec colname="enum_members_description"/>
++<colspec colname="enum_members_annotations" colwidth="200px"/>
++<tbody>
++''' % sid
++
++ for field_name in fields:
++ field_descr = field_descrs.get(field_name)
++ param_annotations = ''
++
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(field_name)
++ condition = MakeConditionDescription(field_name)
++ desc += "<row role=\"constant\"><entry role=\"enum_member_name\"><para id=\"%s\">%s</para></entry>\n" % (
++ sid, field_name)
++ if field_descr:
++ field_descr, param_annotations = ExpandAnnotation(symbol, field_descr)
++ field_descr = ConvertMarkDown(symbol, field_descr)
++ desc += "<entry role=\"enum_member_description\">%s</entry>\n<entry role=\"enum_member_annotations\">%s</entry>\n" % (
++ field_descr, param_annotations)
++ del field_descrs[field_name]
++ else:
++ if found:
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Value description for %s::%s is missing in source code comment block." % (symbol, field_name))
++ if missing_parameters != '':
++ missing_parameters += ", " + field_name
++ else:
++ missing_parameters = field_name
++ desc += "<entry /><entry />\n"
++ desc += "</row>\n"
++
++ desc += "</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>\n</refsect3>"
++ for field_name in field_descrs:
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Value description for %s::%s is not used from source code comment block." % (symbol, field_name))
++ if unused_parameters != '':
++ unused_parameters += ", " + field_name
++ else:
++ unused_parameters = field_name
++
++ # remember missing/unused parameters (needed in tmpl-free build)
++ if missing_parameters != '' and (symbol not in AllIncompleteSymbols):
++ AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] = missing_parameters
++
++ if unused_parameters != '' and (symbol not in AllUnusedSymbols):
++ AllUnusedSymbols[symbol] = unused_parameters
++
++ if not found:
++ if len(fields) > 0:
++ if symbol not in AllIncompleteSymbols:
++ AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] = "<items>"
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Value descriptions for %s are missing in source code comment block." % symbol)
++
++ desc += OutputSymbolTraits(symbol)
++ desc += "</refsect2>\n"
++ return (synop, desc)
++
++
++def OutputVariable(symbol, declaration):
++ """Returns the synopsis and detailed description of a variable.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the extern'ed variable.
++ declaration (str): the declaration of the variable.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the formatted docs
++ """
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol)
++ condition = MakeConditionDescription(symbol)
++
++ logging.info("ouputing variable: '%s' '%s'", symbol, declaration)
++
++ type_output = None
++ m1 = re.search(
++ r'^\s*extern\s+((const\s+|signed\s+|unsigned\s+|long\s+|short\s+)*\w+)(\s+\*+|\*+|\s)(\s*)(const\s+)*([A-Za-z]\w*)\s*;', declaration)
++ m2 = re.search(
++ r'\s*((const\s+|signed\s+|unsigned\s+|long\s+|short\s+)*\w+)(\s+\*+|\*+|\s)(\s*)(const\s+)*([A-Za-z]\w*)\s*=', declaration)
++ if m1:
++ mod1 = m1.group(1) or ''
++ ptr = m1.group(3) or ''
++ space = m1.group(4) or ''
++ mod2 = m1.group(5) or ''
++ type_output = "extern %s%s%s%s" % (mod1, ptr, space, mod2)
++ elif m2:
++ mod1 = m2.group(1) or ''
++ ptr = m2.group(3) or ''
++ space = m2.group(4) or ''
++ mod2 = m2.group(5) or ''
++ type_output = '%s%s%s%s' % (mod1, ptr, space, mod2)
++ else:
++ type_output = "extern"
++
++ synop = "<row><entry role=\"variable_type\">%s</entry><entry role=\"function_name\"><link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link></entry></row>\n" % (
++ type_output, sid, symbol)
++
++ desc = "<refsect2 id=\"%s\" role=\"variable\"%s>\n<title>%s</title>\n" % (sid, condition, symbol)
++
++ desc += MakeIndexterms(symbol, sid)
++ desc += "\n"
++ desc += OutputSymbolExtraLinks(symbol)
++
++ decl_out = CreateValidSGML(declaration)
++ desc += "<programlisting language=\"C\">%s</programlisting>\n" % decl_out
++
++ desc += MakeDeprecationNote(symbol)
++
++ if symbol in SymbolDocs:
++ desc += ConvertMarkDown(symbol, SymbolDocs[symbol])
++
++ if symbol in SymbolAnnotations:
++ param_desc = SymbolAnnotations[symbol]
++ param_desc, param_annotations = ExpandAnnotation(symbol, param_desc)
++ if param_annotations != '':
++ desc += "\n<para>%s</para>" % param_annotations
++
++ desc += OutputSymbolTraits(symbol)
++ desc += "</refsect2>\n"
++ return (synop, desc)
++
++
++def OutputFunction(symbol, declaration, symbol_type):
++ """Returns the synopsis and detailed description of a function.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the function.
++ declaration (str): the declaration of the function.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the formatted docs
++ """
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol)
++ condition = MakeConditionDescription(symbol)
++
++ # Take out the return type
++ # $1 $2 $3
++ regex = r'<RETURNS>\s*((?:const\s+|G_CONST_RETURN\s+|signed\s+|unsigned\s+|long\s+|short\s+|struct\s+|enum\s+)*)(\w+)(\s*\**\s*(?:const|G_CONST_RETURN)?\s*\**\s*(?:restrict)?\s*)<\/RETURNS>\n'
++ m = re.search(regex, declaration)
++ declaration = re.sub(regex, '', declaration)
++ type_modifier = m.group(1) or ''
++ type = m.group(2)
++ pointer = m.group(3)
++ pointer = pointer.rstrip()
++ xref = MakeXRef(type, tagify(type, "returnvalue"))
++ start = ''
++ # if (symbol_type == 'USER_FUNCTION')
++ # start = "typedef "
++ #
++
++ # We output const rather than G_CONST_RETURN.
++ type_modifier = re.sub(r'G_CONST_RETURN', 'const', type_modifier)
++ pointer = re.sub(r'G_CONST_RETURN', 'const', pointer)
++ pointer = re.sub(r'^\s+', ' ', pointer)
++
++ ret_type_output = "%s%s%s%s\n" % (start, type_modifier, xref, pointer)
++
++ indent_len = len(symbol) + 2
++ char1 = char2 = char3 = ''
++ if symbol_type == 'USER_FUNCTION':
++ indent_len += 3
++ char1 = "<phrase role=\"c_punctuation\">(</phrase>"
++ char2 = "*"
++ char3 = "<phrase role=\"c_punctuation\">)</phrase>"
++
++ symbol_output = "%s<link linkend=\"%s\">%s%s</link>%s" % (char1, sid, char2, symbol, char3)
++ if indent_len < MAX_SYMBOL_FIELD_WIDTH:
++ symbol_desc_output = "%s%s%s%s " % (char1, char2, symbol, char3)
++ else:
++ indent_len = MAX_SYMBOL_FIELD_WIDTH - 8
++ symbol_desc_output = ('%s%s%s%s\n' % (char1, char2, symbol, char3)) + (' ' * (indent_len - 1))
++
++ synop = "<row><entry role=\"function_type\">%s</entry><entry role=\"function_name\">%s <phrase role=\"c_punctuation\">()</phrase></entry></row>\n" % (
++ ret_type_output, symbol_output)
++
++ desc = "<refsect2 id=\"%s\" role=\"function\"%s>\n<title>%s ()</title>\n" % (sid, condition, symbol)
++
++ desc += MakeIndexterms(symbol, sid)
++ desc += "\n"
++ desc += OutputSymbolExtraLinks(symbol)
++
++ desc += "<programlisting language=\"C\">%s%s(" % (ret_type_output, symbol_desc_output)
++
++ def tagfun(*args):
++ return tagify(args[0], "parameter")
++
++ fields = common.ParseFunctionDeclaration(declaration, MakeXRef, tagfun)
++
++ first = True
++ for field_name in fields.values():
++ if first:
++ desc += field_name
++ first = False
++ else:
++ desc += ",\n" + (' ' * indent_len) + field_name
++
++ desc += ");</programlisting>\n"
++
++ desc += MakeDeprecationNote(symbol)
++
++ if symbol in SymbolDocs:
++ desc += ConvertMarkDown(symbol, SymbolDocs[symbol])
++
++ if symbol in SymbolAnnotations:
++ param_desc = SymbolAnnotations[symbol]
++ param_desc, param_annotations = ExpandAnnotation(symbol, param_desc)
++ if param_annotations != '':
++ desc += "\n<para>%s</para>" % param_annotations
++
++ desc += OutputParamDescriptions("FUNCTION", symbol, fields.keys())
++ desc += OutputSymbolTraits(symbol)
++ desc += "</refsect2>\n"
++ return (synop, desc)
++
++
++def OutputParamDescriptions(symbol_type, symbol, fields):
++ """Returns the DocBook output describing the parameters of a symbol.
++
++ This can be used for functions, macros or signal handlers.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol_type (str): 'FUNCTION', 'MACRO' or 'SIGNAL'. Signal
++ handlers have an implicit user_data parameter last.
++ symbol (str): the name of the symbol being described.
++ fields (list): parsed fields from the declaration, used to determine
++ undocumented/unused entries
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the formatted parameter docs
++ """
++ output = ''
++ num_params = 0
++ field_descrs = None
++
++ if fields:
++ field_descrs = [f for f in fields if f not in ['void', 'Returns']]
++ else:
++ field_descrs = []
++
++ params = SymbolParams.get(symbol)
++ logging.info("param_desc(%s, %s) = %s", symbol_type, symbol, str(params))
++ # This might be an empty dict, but for SIGNALS we append the user_data docs.
++ # TODO(ensonic): maybe create that docstring in GetSignals()
++ if params is not None:
++ returns = ''
++ params_desc = ''
++ missing_parameters = ''
++ unused_parameters = ''
++
++ for param_name, param_desc in params.items():
++ param_desc, param_annotations = ExpandAnnotation(symbol, param_desc)
++ param_desc = ConvertMarkDown(symbol, param_desc)
++ # trim
++ param_desc = re.sub(r'^(\s|\n)+', '', param_desc, flags=re.M | re.S)
++ param_desc = re.sub(r'(\s|\n)+$', '', param_desc, flags=re.M | re.S)
++ if param_name == "Returns":
++ returns = param_desc
++ if param_annotations != '':
++ returns += "\n<para>%s</para>" % param_annotations
++
++ elif param_name == "void":
++ # FIXME: &common.LogWarning()?
++ logging.info("!!!! void in params for %s?\n", symbol)
++ else:
++ if fields:
++ if param_name not in field_descrs:
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Parameter description for %s::%s is not used from source code comment block." % (symbol, param_name))
++ if unused_parameters != '':
++ unused_parameters += ", " + param_name
++ else:
++ unused_parameters = param_name
++ else:
++ field_descrs.remove(param_name)
++
++ if param_desc != '':
++ params_desc += "<row><entry role=\"parameter_name\"><para>%s</para></entry>\n<entry role=\"parameter_description\">%s</entry>\n<entry role=\"parameter_annotations\">%s</entry></row>\n" % (
++ param_name, param_desc, param_annotations)
++ num_params += 1
++
++ for param_name in field_descrs:
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Parameter description for %s::%s is missing in source code comment block." % (symbol, param_name))
++ if missing_parameters != '':
++ missing_parameters += ", " + param_name
++ else:
++ missing_parameters = param_name
++
++ # Signals have an implicit user_data parameter which we describe.
++ if symbol_type == "SIGNAL":
++ params_desc += "<row><entry role=\"parameter_name\"><simpara>user_data</simpara></entry>\n<entry role=\"parameter_description\"><simpara>user data set when the signal handler was connected.</simpara></entry>\n<entry role=\"parameter_annotations\"></entry></row>\n"
++
++ # Start a table if we need one.
++ if params_desc != '':
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID("%s.parameters" % symbol)
++
++ output += '''<refsect3 id="%s" role="parameters">\n<title>Parameters</title>
++<informaltable role="parameters_table" pgwide="1" frame="none">
++<tgroup cols="3">
++<colspec colname="parameters_name" colwidth="150px"/>
++<colspec colname="parameters_description"/>
++<colspec colname="parameters_annotations" colwidth="200px"/>
++<tbody>
++''' % sid
++ output += params_desc
++ output += "</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>\n</refsect3>"
++
++ # Output the returns info last
++ if returns != '':
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID("%s.returns" % symbol)
++
++ output += '''<refsect3 id="%s" role=\"returns\">\n<title>Returns</title>
++''' % sid
++ output += returns
++ output += "\n</refsect3>"
++
++ # remember missing/unused parameters (needed in tmpl-free build)
++ if missing_parameters != '' and (symbol not in AllIncompleteSymbols):
++ AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] = missing_parameters
++
++ if unused_parameters != '' and (symbol not in AllUnusedSymbols):
++ AllUnusedSymbols[symbol] = unused_parameters
++
++ if num_params == 0 and fields and field_descrs:
++ if symbol not in AllIncompleteSymbols:
++ AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] = "<parameters>"
++ return output
++
++
++def ParseStabilityLevel(stability, file, line, message):
++ """Parses a stability level and outputs a warning if it isn't valid.
++ Args:
++ stability (str): the stability text.
++ file, line: context for error message
++ message: description of where the level is from, to use in any error message.
++ Returns:
++ str: the parsed stability level string.
++ """
++ stability = stability.strip()
++ sl = stability.strip().lower()
++ if sl == 'stable':
++ stability = "Stable"
++ elif sl == 'unstable':
++ stability = "Unstable"
++ elif sl == 'private':
++ stability = "Private"
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(file, line,
++ "%s is %s. It should be one of these: Stable, "
++ "Unstable, or Private." % (
++ message, stability))
++ return str(stability)
++
++
++def OutputDBFile(file, title, section_id, includes, functions_synop, other_synop, functions_details, other_desc, signals_synop, signals_desc, args_synop, args_desc, actions_synop, actions_desc, hierarchy, interfaces, implementations, prerequisites, derived, file_objects, default_stability):
++ """Outputs the final DocBook file for one section.
++
++ Args:
++ file (str): the name of the file.
++ title (str): the title from the $MODULE-sections.txt file
++ section_id (str): the id to use for the toplevel tag.
++ includes (str): comma-separates list of include files added at top of
++ synopsis, with '<' '>' around them (if not already enclosed in '').
++ functions_synop (str): the DocBook for the Functions Synopsis part.
++ other_synop (str): the DocBook for the Types and Values Synopsis part.
++ functions_details (str): the DocBook for the Functions Details part.
++ other_desc (str): the DocBook for the Types and Values Details part.
++ signal_synop (str): the DocBook for the Signal Synopsis part
++ signal_desc (str): the DocBook for the Signal Description part
++ args_synop (str): the DocBook for the Arg Synopsis part
++ args_desc (str): the DocBook for the Arg Description part
++ actions_synop (str): the DocBook for the Action Synopsis part
++ actions_desc (str): the DocBook for the Action Description part
++ hierarchy (str): the DocBook for the Object Hierarchy part
++ interfaces (str): the DocBook for the Interfaces part
++ implementations (str): the DocBook for the Known Implementations part
++ prerequisites (str): the DocBook for the Prerequisites part
++ derived (str): the DocBook for the Derived Interfaces part
++ file_objects (list): objects in this file
++ default_stability (str): fallback if no api-stability is set (optional)
++
++ Returns:
++ bool: True if the docs where updated
++ """
++
++ logging.info("Output docbook for file %s with title '%s'", file, title)
++
++ # The edited title overrides the one from the sections file.
++ new_title = SymbolDocs.get(file + ":title")
++ if new_title and not new_title.strip() == '':
++ title = new_title
++ logging.info("Found title: %s", title)
++
++ short_desc = SymbolDocs.get(file + ":short_description")
++ if not short_desc or short_desc.strip() == '':
++ short_desc = ''
++ else:
++ # Don't use ConvertMarkDown here for now since we don't want blocks
++ short_desc = ExpandAbbreviations(title + ":short_description", short_desc)
++ logging.info("Found short_desc: %s", short_desc)
++
++ long_desc = SymbolDocs.get(file + ":long_description")
++ if not long_desc or long_desc.strip() == '':
++ long_desc = ''
++ else:
++ long_desc = ConvertMarkDown(title + ":long_description", long_desc)
++ logging.info("Found long_desc: %s", long_desc)
++
++ see_also = SymbolDocs.get(file + ":see_also")
++ if not see_also or re.search(r'^\s*(<para>)?\s*(</para>)?\s*$', see_also):
++ see_also = ''
++ else:
++ see_also = ConvertMarkDown(title + ":see_also", see_also)
++ logging.info("Found see_also: %s", see_also)
++
++ if see_also:
++ see_also = "<refsect1 id=\"%s.see-also\">\n<title>See Also</title>\n%s\n</refsect1>\n" % (section_id, see_also)
++
++ stability = SymbolDocs.get(file + ":stability")
++ if not stability or re.search(r'^\s*$', stability):
++ stability = ''
++ else:
++ line_number = GetSymbolSourceLocation(file + ":stability")[1]
++ stability = ParseStabilityLevel(stability, file, line_number, "Section stability level")
++ logging.info("Found stability: %s", stability)
++
++ if not stability:
++ stability = default_stability or ''
++
++ if stability:
++ if stability in AnnotationDefinition:
++ AnnotationsUsed[stability] = True
++ stability = "<acronym>%s</acronym>" % stability
++ stability = "<refsect1 id=\"%s.stability-level\">\n<title>Stability Level</title>\n%s, unless otherwise indicated\n</refsect1>\n" % (
++ section_id, stability)
++
++ image = SymbolDocs.get(file + ":image")
++ if not image or re.search(r'^\s*$', image):
++ image = ''
++ else:
++ image = image.strip()
++
++ format = None
++
++ il = image.lower()
++ if re.search(r'jpe?g$', il):
++ format = "format='JPEG'"
++ elif il.endswith('png'):
++ format = "format='PNG'"
++ elif il.endswith('svg'):
++ format = "format='SVG'"
++ else:
++ format = ''
++
++ image = " <inlinegraphic fileref='%s' %s/>\n" % (image, format)
++
++ include_output = ''
++ if includes:
++ include_output += "<refsect1 id=\"%s.includes\"><title>Includes</title><synopsis>" % section_id
++ for include in includes.split(','):
++ if re.search(r'^\".+\"$', include):
++ include_output += "#include %s\n" % include
++ else:
++ include = re.sub(r'^\s+|\s+$', '', include, flags=re.S)
++ include_output += "#include <%s>\n" % include
++
++ include_output += "</synopsis></refsect1>\n"
++
++ extralinks = OutputSectionExtraLinks(title, "Section:%s" % file)
++
++ old_db_file = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, file + '.xml')
++ new_db_file = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, file + '.xml.new')
++
++ OUTPUT = open(new_db_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8')
++
++ object_anchors = ''
++ for fobject in file_objects:
++ if fobject == section_id:
++ continue
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(fobject)
++ logging.info("Adding anchor for %s\n", fobject)
++ object_anchors += "<anchor id=\"%s\"/>" % sid
++
++ # Make sure we produce valid docbook
++ if not functions_details:
++ functions_details = "<para />"
++
++ # We used to output this, but is messes up our common.UpdateFileIfChanged code
++ # since it changes every day (and it is only used in the man pages):
++ # "<refentry id="$section_id" revision="$mday $month $year">"
++
++ OUTPUT.write(DB_REFENTRY.substitute({
++ 'actions_desc': actions_desc,
++ 'actions_synop': actions_synop,
++ 'args_desc': args_desc,
++ 'args_synop': args_synop,
++ 'derived': derived,
++ 'extralinks': extralinks,
++ 'functions_details': functions_details,
++ 'functions_synop': functions_synop,
++ 'header': MakeDocHeader('refentry'),
++ 'hierarchy': hierarchy,
++ 'image': image,
++ 'include_output': include_output,
++ 'interfaces': interfaces,
++ 'implementations': implementations,
++ 'long_desc': long_desc,
++ 'object_anchors': object_anchors,
++ 'other_desc': other_desc,
++ 'other_synop': other_synop,
++ 'prerequisites': prerequisites,
++ 'section_id': section_id,
++ 'see_also': see_also,
++ 'signals_desc': signals_desc,
++ 'signals_synop': signals_synop,
++ 'short_desc': short_desc,
++ 'stability': stability,
++ 'title': title,
++ 'MODULE': MODULE.upper(),
++ }))
++ OUTPUT.close()
++
++ return common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_db_file, new_db_file, 0)
++
++
++def OutputProgramDBFile(program, section_id):
++ """Outputs the final DocBook file for one program.
++
++ Args:
++ file (str): the name of the file.
++ section_id (str): the id to use for the toplevel tag.
++
++ Returns:
++ bool: True if the docs where updated
++ """
++ logging.info("Output program docbook for %s", program)
++
++ short_desc = SourceSymbolDocs.get(program + ":short_description")
++ if not short_desc or short_desc.strip() == '':
++ short_desc = ''
++ else:
++ # Don't use ConvertMarkDown here for now since we don't want blocks
++ short_desc = ExpandAbbreviations(program, short_desc)
++ logging.info("Found short_desc: %s", short_desc)
++
++ synopsis = SourceSymbolDocs.get(program + ":synopsis")
++ if synopsis and synopsis.strip() != '':
++ items = synopsis.split(' ')
++ for i in range(0, len(items)):
++ parameter = items[i]
++ choice = "plain"
++ rep = ''
++
++ # first parameter is the command name
++ if i == 0:
++ synopsis = "<command>%s</command>\n" % parameter
++ continue
++
++ # square brackets indicate optional parameters, curly brackets
++ # indicate required parameters ("plain" parameters are also
++ # mandatory, but do not get extra decoration)
++ m1 = re.search(r'^\[(.+?)\]$', parameter)
++ m2 = re.search(r'^\{(.+?)\}$', parameter)
++ if m1:
++ choice = "opt"
++ parameter = m1.group(1)
++ elif m2:
++ choice = "req"
++ parameter = m2.group(1)
++
++ # parameters ending in "..." are repeatable
++ if parameter.endswith('...'):
++ rep = ' rep=\"repeat\"'
++ parameter = parameter[:-3]
++
++ # italic parameters are replaceable parameters
++ parameter = re.sub(r'\*(.+?)\*', r'<replaceable>\1</replaceable>', parameter)
++
++ synopsis += "<arg choice=\"%s\"%s>" % (choice, rep)
++ synopsis += parameter
++ synopsis += "</arg>\n"
++
++ logging.info("Found synopsis: %s", synopsis)
++ else:
++ synopsis = "<command>%s</command>" % program
++
++ long_desc = SourceSymbolDocs.get(program + ":long_description")
++ if not long_desc or long_desc.strip() == '':
++ long_desc = ''
++ else:
++ long_desc = ConvertMarkDown("%s:long_description" % program, long_desc)
++ logging.info("Found long_desc: %s", long_desc)
++
++ options = ''
++ o = program + ":options"
++ if o in SourceSymbolDocs:
++ opts = SourceSymbolDocs[o].split('\t')
++
++ logging.info('options: %d, %s', len(opts), str(opts))
++
++ options = "<refsect1>\n<title>Options</title>\n<variablelist>\n"
++ for k in range(0, len(opts), 2):
++ opt_desc = opts[k + 1]
++
++ opt_desc = re.sub(r'\*(.+?)\*', r'<replaceable>\1</replaceable>', opt_desc)
++
++ options += "<varlistentry>\n<term>"
++ opt_names = opts[k].split(',')
++ for i in range(len(opt_names)):
++ prefix = ', ' if i > 0 else ''
++ # italic parameters are replaceable parameters
++ opt_name = re.sub(r'\*(.+?)\*', r'<replaceable>\1</replaceable>', opt_names[i])
++
++ options += "%s<option>%s</option>\n" % (prefix, opt_name)
++
++ options += "</term>\n"
++ options += "<listitem><para>%s</para></listitem>\n" % opt_desc
++ options += "</varlistentry>\n"
++
++ options += "</variablelist></refsect1>\n"
++
++ exit_status = SourceSymbolDocs.get(program + ":returns")
++ if exit_status and exit_status != '':
++ exit_status = ConvertMarkDown("%s:returns" % program, exit_status)
++ exit_status = "<refsect1 id=\"%s.exit-status\">\n<title>Exit Status</title>\n%s\n</refsect1>\n" % (
++ section_id, exit_status)
++ else:
++ exit_status = ''
++
++ see_also = SourceSymbolDocs.get(program + ":see_also")
++ if not see_also or re.search(r'^\s*(<para>)?\s*(</para>)?\s*$', see_also):
++ see_also = ''
++ else:
++ see_also = ConvertMarkDown("%s:see_also" % program, see_also)
++ logging.info("Found see_also: %s", see_also)
++
++ if see_also:
++ see_also = "<refsect1 id=\"%s.see-also\">\n<title>See Also</title>\n%s\n</refsect1>\n" % (section_id, see_also)
++
++ old_db_file = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, program + ".xml")
++ new_db_file = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, program + ".xml.new")
++
++ OUTPUT = open(new_db_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8')
++
++ OUTPUT.write('''%s
++<refentry id="%s">
++<refmeta>
++<refentrytitle role="top_of_page" id="%s.top_of_page">%s</refentrytitle>
++<manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
++<refmiscinfo>User Commands</refmiscinfo>
++</refmeta>
++<refnamediv>
++<refname>%s</refname>
++<refpurpose>%s</refpurpose>
++</refnamediv>
++<refsynopsisdiv>
++<cmdsynopsis>%s</cmdsynopsis>
++</refsynopsisdiv>
++<refsect1 id="%s.description" role="desc">
++<title role="desc.title">Description</title>
++%s
++</refsect1>
++%s%s%s
++</refentry>
++''' % (MakeDocHeader("refentry"), section_id, section_id, program, program, short_desc, synopsis, section_id, long_desc, options, exit_status, see_also))
++ OUTPUT.close()
++
++ return common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_db_file, new_db_file, 0)
++
++
++def OutputExtraFile(file):
++ """Copies an "extra" DocBook file into the output directory, expanding abbreviations.
++
++ Args:
++ file (str): the source file.
++
++ Returns:
++ bool: True if the docs where updated
++ """
++
++ basename = os.path.basename(file)
++
++ old_db_file = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, basename)
++ new_db_file = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, basename + ".new")
++
++ contents = open(file, 'r', encoding='utf-8').read()
++
++ with open(new_db_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8') as out:
++ out.write(ExpandAbbreviations(basename + " file", contents))
++
++ return common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_db_file, new_db_file, 0)
++
++
++def GetDocbookHeader(main_file):
++ if os.path.exists(main_file):
++ INPUT = open(main_file, 'r', encoding='utf-8')
++ header = ''
++ for line in INPUT:
++ if re.search(r'^\s*<(book|chapter|article)', line):
++ # check that the top-level tagSYSTEM or the doctype decl contain the xinclude namespace decl
++ if not re.search(r'http:\/\/www.w3.org\/200[13]\/XInclude', line) and \
++ not re.search(r'http:\/\/www.w3.org\/200[13]\/XInclude', header, flags=re.MULTILINE):
++ header = ''
++ break
++
++ # if there are SYSTEM ENTITIES here, we should prepend "../" to the path
++ # FIXME: not sure if we can do this now, as people already work-around the problem
++ # r'#<!ENTITY % ([a-zA-Z-]+) SYSTEM \"([^/][a-zA-Z./]+)\">', r'<!ENTITY % \1 SYSTEM \"../\2\">';
++ line = re.sub(
++ r'<!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM "([^"]*)">', r'<!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM "../\1">', line)
++ header += line
++ INPUT.close()
++ header = header.strip()
++ else:
++ header = '''<?xml version="1.0"?>
++<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
++ "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd"
++[
++ <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib "xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'">
++ <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM "../xml/gtkdocentities.ent">
++ %gtkdocentities;
++]>'''
++ return header
++
++
++def OutputBook(main_file, book_top, book_bottom, obj_tree):
++ """Outputs the entities that need to be included into the main docbook file for the module.
++
++ Args:
++ book_top (str): the declarations of the entities, which are added
++ at the top of the main docbook file.
++ book_bottom (str): the entities, which are added in the main docbook
++ file at the desired position.
++ obj_tree (list): object tree list
++ """
++
++ old_file = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, MODULE + "-doc.top")
++ new_file = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, MODULE + "-doc.top.new")
++
++ with open(new_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8') as out:
++ out.write(book_top)
++
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_file, new_file, 0)
++
++ old_file = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, MODULE + "-doc.bottom")
++ new_file = os.path.join(DB_OUTPUT_DIR, MODULE + "-doc.bottom.new")
++
++ with open(new_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8') as out:
++ out.write(book_bottom)
++
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_file, new_file, 0)
++
++ # If the main docbook file hasn't been created yet, we create it here.
++ # The user can tweak it later.
++ if main_file and not os.path.exists(main_file):
++ OUTPUT = open(main_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8')
++
++ logging.info("no master doc, create default one at: " + main_file)
++
++ OUTPUT.write('''%s
++<book id="index" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude">
++ <bookinfo>
++ <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>
++ <releaseinfo>
++ for &package_string;.
++ The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at
++ <ulink role="online-location" url="http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.
++ </releaseinfo>
++ </bookinfo>
++
++ <chapter>
++ <title>[Insert title here]</title>
++%s </chapter>
++''' % (MakeDocHeader("book"), book_bottom))
++ if obj_tree:
++ OUTPUT.write(''' <chapter id="object-tree">
++ <title>Object Hierarchy</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/tree_index.sgml"/>
++ </chapter>
++''')
++ else:
++ OUTPUT.write(''' <!-- enable this when you use gobject types
++ <chapter id="object-tree">
++ <title>Object Hierarchy</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/tree_index.sgml"/>
++ </chapter>
++ -->
++''')
++
++ OUTPUT.write(''' <index id="api-index-full">
++ <title>API Index</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-full.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++ <index id="deprecated-api-index" role="deprecated">
++ <title>Index of deprecated API</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-deprecated.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++''')
++ for version in sorted(set(Since.values())):
++ dash_version = version.replace('.', '-')
++ OUTPUT.write(''' <index id="api-index-%s" role="%s">
++ <title>Index of new API in %s</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-%s.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++''' % (dash_version, version, version, version))
++
++ if AnnotationsUsed:
++ OUTPUT.write(''' <xi:include href="xml/annotation-glossary.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++''')
++ else:
++ OUTPUT.write(''' <!-- enable this when you use gobject introspection annotations
++ <xi:include href="xml/annotation-glossary.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ -->
++''')
++
++ OUTPUT.write('''</book>
++''')
++
++ OUTPUT.close()
++
++
++def CreateValidSGML(text):
++ """Turn any chars which are used in XML into entities.
++
++ e.g. '<' into '<'
++
++ Args:
++ text (str): the text to turn into proper XML.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: escaped input
++ """
++
++ text = text.replace('&', '&') # Do this first, or the others get messed up.
++ text = text.replace('<', '<')
++ text = text.replace('>', '>')
++ # browsers render single tabs inconsistently
++ text = re.sub(r'([^\s])\t([^\s])', r'\1 \2', text)
++ return text
++
++
++def ConvertXMLChars(symbol, text):
++ """Escape XML chars.
++
++ This is used for text in source code comment blocks, to turn
++ chars which are used in XML into entities, e.g. '<' into
++ <'. Depending on INLINE_MARKUP_MODE, this is done
++ unconditionally or only if the character doesn't seem to be
++ part of an XML construct (tag or entity reference).
++ Args:
++ text (str): the text to turn into proper XML.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: escaped input
++ """
++
++ if INLINE_MARKUP_MODE:
++ # For the XML mode only convert to entities outside CDATA sections.
++ return ModifyXMLElements(text, symbol,
++ "<!\\[CDATA\\[|<programlisting[^>]*>",
++ ConvertXMLCharsEndTag,
++ ConvertXMLCharsCallback)
++ # For the simple non-sgml mode, convert to entities everywhere.
++
++ text = re.sub(r'&(?![a-zA-Z#]+;)', r'&', text) # Do this first, or the others get messed up.
++ # Allow '<' in verbatim markdown
++ # TODO: we don't want to convert any of them between ``
++ text = re.sub(r'(?<!`)<', r'<', text)
++ # Allow '>' at beginning of string for blockquote markdown
++ text = re.sub(r'''(?<=[^\w\n"'\/-])>''', r'>', text)
++
++ return text
++
++
++def ConvertXMLCharsEndTag(start_tag):
++ if start_tag == '<![CDATA[':
++ return "]]>"
++ return "</programlisting>"
++
++
++def ConvertXMLCharsCallback(text, symbol, tag):
++ if re.search(r'^<programlisting', tag):
++ logging.debug('call modifyXML')
++ # We can handle <programlisting> specially here.
++ return ModifyXMLElements(text, symbol,
++ "<!\\[CDATA\\[",
++ ConvertXMLCharsEndTag,
++ ConvertXMLCharsCallback2)
++ elif tag == '':
++ logging.debug('replace entities')
++ # If we're not in CDATA convert to entities.
++ text = re.sub(r'&(?![a-zA-Z#]+;)', r'&', text) # Do this first, or the others get messed up.
++ text = re.sub(r'<(?![a-zA-Z\/!])', r'<', text)
++ # Allow '>' at beginning of string for blockquote markdown
++ text = re.sub(r'''(?<=[^\w\n"'\/-])>''', r'>', text)
++
++ # Handle "#include <xxxxx>"
++ text = re.sub(r'#include(\s+)<([^>]+)>', r'#include\1<\2>', text)
++
++ return text
++
++
++def ConvertXMLCharsCallback2(text, symbol, tag):
++ # If we're not in CDATA convert to entities.
++ # We could handle <programlisting> differently, though I'm not sure it helps.
++ if tag == '':
++ # replace only if its not a tag
++ text = re.sub(r'&(?![a-zA-Z#]+;)', r'&', text) # Do this first, or the others get messed up.
++ text = re.sub(r'<(?![a-zA-Z\/!])', r'<', text)
++ text = re.sub(r'''(?<![a-zA-Z0-9"'\/-])>''', r'>', text)
++ # Handle "#include <xxxxx>"
++ text = re.sub(r'/#include(\s+)<([^>]+)>', r'#include\1<\2>', text)
++
++ return text
++
++
++def ExpandAnnotation(symbol, param_desc):
++ """This turns annotations into acronym tags.
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the symbol being documented, for error messages.
++ param_desc (str): the text to expand.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the remaining param_desc
++ str: the formatted annotations
++ """
++ param_annotations = ''
++
++ # look for annotations at the start of the comment part
++ # function level annotations don't end with a colon ':'
++ m = re.search(r'^\s*\((.*?)\)(:|$)', param_desc)
++ if m:
++ param_desc = param_desc[m.end():]
++
++ annotations = re.split(r'\)\s*\(', m.group(1))
++ logging.info("annotations for %s: '%s'\n", symbol, m.group(1))
++ for annotation in annotations:
++ # need to search for the longest key-match in %AnnotationDefinition
++ match_length = 0
++ match_annotation = ''
++
++ for annotationdef in AnnotationDefinition:
++ if annotation.startswith(annotationdef):
++ if len(annotationdef) > match_length:
++ match_length = len(annotationdef)
++ match_annotation = annotationdef
++
++ annotation_extra = ''
++ if match_annotation != '':
++ m = re.search(match_annotation + r'\s+(.*)', annotation)
++ if m:
++ annotation_extra = " " + m.group(1)
++
++ AnnotationsUsed[match_annotation] = 1
++ param_annotations += "[<acronym>%s</acronym>%s]" % (match_annotation, annotation_extra)
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "unknown annotation \"%s\" in documentation for %s." % (annotation, symbol))
++ param_annotations += "[%s]" % annotation
++
++ param_desc = param_desc.strip()
++ m = re.search(r'^(.*?)\.*\s*$', param_desc, flags=re.S)
++ param_desc = m.group(1) + '. '
++
++ if param_annotations != '':
++ param_annotations = "<emphasis role=\"annotation\">%s</emphasis>" % param_annotations
++
++ return (param_desc, param_annotations)
++
++
++def ExpandAbbreviations(symbol, text):
++ """Expand the shortcut notation for symbol references.
++
++ This turns the abbreviations function(), macro(), @param, %constant, and #symbol
++ into appropriate DocBook markup. CDATA sections and <programlisting> parts
++ are skipped.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the symbol being documented, for error messages.
++ text (str): the text to expand.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the expanded text
++ """
++ # Note: This is a fallback and normally done in the markdown parser
++
++ logging.debug('expand abbreviations for "%s", text: [%s]', symbol, text)
++ m = re.search(r'\|\[[^\n]*\n(.*)\]\|', text, flags=re.M | re.S)
++ if m:
++ logging.debug('replaced entities in code block')
++ text = text[:m.start(1)] + md_to_db.ReplaceEntities(m.group(1)) + text[m.end(1):]
++
++ # Convert "|[" and "]|" into the start and end of program listing examples.
++ # Support \[<!-- language="C" --> modifiers
++ text = re.sub(r'\|\[<!-- language="([^"]+)" -->',
++ r'<informalexample><programlisting role="example" language="\1"><![CDATA[', text)
++ text = re.sub(r'\|\[', r'<informalexample><programlisting role="example"><![CDATA[', text)
++ text = re.sub(r'\]\|', r']]></programlisting></informalexample>', text)
++
++ # keep CDATA unmodified, preserve ulink tags (ideally we preseve all tags
++ # as such)
++ return ModifyXMLElements(text, symbol,
++ "<!\\[CDATA\\[|<ulink[^>]*>|<programlisting[^>]*>|<!DOCTYPE",
++ ExpandAbbreviationsEndTag,
++ ExpandAbbreviationsCallback)
++
++
++def ExpandAbbreviationsEndTag(start_tag):
++ # Returns the end tag (as a regexp) corresponding to the given start tag.
++ if start_tag == r'<!\[CDATA\[':
++ return "]]>"
++ if start_tag == "<!DOCTYPE":
++ return '>'
++ m = re.search(r'<(\w+)', start_tag)
++ if m:
++ return "</%s>" % m.group(1)
++
++ logging.warning('no end tag for "%s"', start_tag)
++ return ''
++
++
++def ExpandAbbreviationsCallback(text, symbol, tag):
++ # Called inside or outside each CDATA or <programlisting> section.
++ if tag.startswith(r'^<programlisting'):
++ # Handle any embedded CDATA sections.
++ return ModifyXMLElements(text, symbol,
++ "<!\\[CDATA\\[",
++ ExpandAbbreviationsEndTag,
++ ExpandAbbreviationsCallback2)
++ elif tag == '':
++ # NOTE: this is a fallback. It is normally done by the Markdown parser.
++ # but is also used for OutputExtraFile
++
++ # We are outside any CDATA or <programlisting> sections, so we expand
++ # any gtk-doc abbreviations.
++
++ # Convert '@param()'
++ # FIXME: we could make those also links ($symbol.$2), but that would be less
++ # useful as the link target is a few lines up or down
++ text = re.sub(r'(\A|[^\\])\@(\w+((\.|->)\w+)*)\s*\(\)', r'\1<parameter>\2()</parameter>', text)
++
++ # Convert 'function()' or 'macro()'.
++ # if there is abc_*_def() we don't want to make a link to _def()
++ # FIXME: also handle abc(def(....)) : but that would need to be done recursively :/
++ def f1(m):
++ return m.group(1) + MakeXRef(m.group(2), tagify(m.group(2) + "()", "function"))
++ text = re.sub(r'([^\*.\w])(\w+)\s*\(\)', f1, text)
++ # handle #Object.func()
++ text = re.sub(r'(\A|[^\\])#([\w\-:\.]+[\w]+)\s*\(\)', f1, text)
++
++ # Convert '@param', but not '\@param'.
++ text = re.sub(r'(\A|[^\\])\@(\w+((\.|->)\w+)*)', r'\1<parameter>\2</parameter>', text)
++ text = re.sub(r'/\\\@', r'\@', text)
++
++ # Convert '%constant', but not '\%constant'.
++ # Also allow negative numbers, e.g. %-1.
++ def f2(m):
++ return m.group(1) + MakeXRef(m.group(2), tagify(m.group(2), "literal"))
++ text = re.sub(r'(\A|[^\\])\%(-?\w+)', f2, text)
++ text = re.sub(r'\\\%', r'\%', text)
++
++ # Convert '#symbol', but not '\#symbol'.
++ def f3(m):
++ return m.group(1) + MakeHashXRef(m.group(2), "type")
++ text = re.sub(r'(\A|[^\\])#([\w\-:\.]+[\w]+)', f3, text)
++ text = re.sub(r'\\#', '#', text)
++
++ return text
++
++
++def ExpandAbbreviationsCallback2(text, symbol, tag):
++ # This is called inside a <programlisting>
++ if tag == '':
++ # We are inside a <programlisting> but outside any CDATA sections,
++ # so we expand any gtk-doc abbreviations.
++ # FIXME: why is this different from &ExpandAbbreviationsCallback(),
++ # why not just call it
++ text = re.sub(r'#(\w+)', lambda m: '%s;' % MakeHashXRef(m.group(1), ''), text)
++ elif tag == "<![CDATA[":
++ # NOTE: this is a fallback. It is normally done by the Markdown parser.
++ text = md_to_db.ReplaceEntities(text, symbol)
++
++ return text
++
++
++def MakeHashXRef(symbol, tag):
++ text = symbol
++
++ # Check for things like '#include', '#define', and skip them.
++ if symbol in PreProcessorDirectives:
++ return "#%s" % symbol
++
++ # Get rid of special suffixes ('-struct','-enum').
++ text = re.sub(r'-struct$', '', text)
++ text = re.sub(r'-enum$', '', text)
++
++ # If the symbol is in the form "Object::signal", then change the symbol to
++ # "Object-signal" and use "signal" as the text.
++ if '::' in symbol:
++ o, s = symbol.split('::', 1)
++ symbol = '%s-%s' % (o, s)
++ text = u'“' + s + u'”'
++
++ # If the symbol is in the form "Object:property", then change the symbol to
++ # "Object--property" and use "property" as the text.
++ if ':' in symbol:
++ o, p = symbol.split(':', 1)
++ symbol = '%s--%s' % (o, p)
++ text = u'“' + p + u'”'
++
++ if tag != '':
++ text = tagify(text, tag)
++
++ return MakeXRef(symbol, text)
++
++
++def ModifyXMLElements(text, symbol, start_tag_regexp, end_tag_func, callback):
++ """Rewrite XML blocks.
++
++ Looks for given XML element tags within the text, and calls
++ the callback on pieces of text inside & outside those elements.
++ Used for special handling of text inside things like CDATA
++ and <programlisting>.
++
++ Args:
++ text (str): the text.
++ symbol (str): the symbol currently being documented (only used for
++ error messages).
++ start_tag_regexp (str): the regular expression to match start tags.
++ e.g. "<!\\[CDATA\\[|<programlisting[^>]*>" to
++ match CDATA sections or programlisting elements.
++ end_tag_func (func): function which is passed the matched start tag
++ and should return the appropriate end tag string
++ regexp.
++ callback - callback called with each part of the text. It is
++ called with a piece of text, the symbol being
++ documented, and the matched start tag or '' if the text
++ is outside the XML elements being matched.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: modified text
++ """
++ before_tag = start_tag = end_tag_regexp = end_tag = None
++ result = ''
++
++ logging.debug('modify xml for symbol: %s, regex: %s, text: [%s]', symbol, start_tag_regexp, text)
++
++ m = re.search(start_tag_regexp, text, flags=re.S)
++ while m:
++ before_tag = text[:m.start()] # Prematch for last successful match string
++ start_tag = m.group(0) # Last successful match
++ text = text[m.end():] # Postmatch for last successful match string
++ # get the matching end-tag for current tag
++ end_tag_regexp = end_tag_func(start_tag)
++
++ logging.debug('symbol: %s matched start: %s, end_tag: %s, text: [%s]', symbol, start_tag, end_tag_regexp, text)
++
++ logging.debug('converting before tag: [%s]', before_tag)
++ result += callback(before_tag, symbol, '')
++ result += start_tag
++
++ m2 = re.search(end_tag_regexp, text, flags=re.S)
++ if m2:
++ before_tag = text[:m2.start()]
++ end_tag = m2.group(0)
++ text = text[m2.end():]
++
++ logging.debug('symbol: %s matched end %s: text: [%s]', symbol, end_tag, text)
++
++ result += callback(before_tag, symbol, start_tag)
++ result += end_tag
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Can't find tag end: %s in docs for: %s." % (end_tag_regexp, symbol))
++ # Just assume it is all inside the tag.
++ result += callback(text, symbol, start_tag)
++ text = ''
++ m = re.search(start_tag_regexp, text, flags=re.S)
++
++ # Handle any remaining text outside the tags.
++ logging.debug('converting after tag: [%s]', text)
++ result += callback(text, symbol, '')
++ logging.debug('results for symbol: %s, text: [%s]', symbol, result)
++
++ return result
++
++
++def tagify(text, elem):
++ # Adds a tag around some text.
++ # e.g tagify("Text", "literal") => "<literal>Text</literal>".
++ return '<' + elem + '>' + text + '</' + elem + '>'
++
++
++def MakeDocHeader(tag):
++ """Builds a docbook header for the given tag.
++
++ Args:
++ tag (str): doctype tag
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the docbook header
++ """
++ header = re.sub(r'<!DOCTYPE \w+', r'<!DOCTYPE ' + tag, doctype_header)
++ # fix the path for book since this is one level up
++ if tag == 'book':
++ header = re.sub(
++ r'<!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM "../([a-zA-Z./]+)">', r'<!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM "\1">', header)
++ return header
++
++
++def MakeXRef(symbol, text=None):
++ """This returns a cross-reference link to the given symbol.
++
++ Though it doesn't try to do this for a few standard C types that it knows
++ won't be in the documentation.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the symbol to try to create a XRef to.
++ text (str): text to put inside the XRef, defaults to symbol
++
++ Returns:
++ str: a docbook link
++ """
++ symbol = symbol.strip()
++ if not text:
++ text = symbol
++
++ # Get rid of special suffixes ('-struct','-enum').
++ text = re.sub(r'-struct$', '', text)
++ text = re.sub(r'-enum$', '', text)
++
++ if ' ' in symbol:
++ return text
++
++ logging.info("Getting type link for %s -> %s", symbol, text)
++
++ symbol_id = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol)
++ return "<link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link>" % (symbol_id, text)
++
++
++def MakeIndexterms(symbol, sid):
++ """This returns a indexterm elements for the given symbol
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the symbol to create indexterms for
++
++ Returns:
++ str: doxbook index terms
++ """
++ terms = ''
++ sortas = ''
++
++ # make the index useful, by omitting the namespace when sorting
++ if NAME_SPACE != '':
++ m = re.search(r'^%s\_?(.*)' % NAME_SPACE, symbol, flags=re.I)
++ if m:
++ sortas = ' sortas="%s"' % m.group(1)
++
++ if symbol in Deprecated:
++ terms += "<indexterm zone=\"%s\" role=\"deprecated\"><primary%s>%s</primary></indexterm>" % (
++ sid, sortas, symbol)
++ IndexEntriesDeprecated[symbol] = sid
++ IndexEntriesFull[symbol] = sid
++ if symbol in Since:
++ since = Since[symbol].strip()
++ if since != '':
++ terms += "<indexterm zone=\"%s\" role=\"%s\"><primary%s>%s</primary></indexterm>" % (
++ sid, since, sortas, symbol)
++ IndexEntriesSince[symbol] = sid
++ IndexEntriesFull[symbol] = sid
++ if terms == '':
++ terms += "<indexterm zone=\"%s\"><primary%s>%s</primary></indexterm>" % (sid, sortas, symbol)
++ IndexEntriesFull[symbol] = sid
++ return terms
++
++
++def MakeDeprecationNote(symbol):
++ """This returns a deprecation warning for the given symbol.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the symbol to try to create a warning for.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: formatted warning or empty string if symbol is not deprecated
++ """
++ desc = ''
++ if symbol in Deprecated:
++ desc += "<warning><para><literal>%s</literal> " % symbol
++ note = Deprecated[symbol]
++
++ m = re.search(r'^\s*([0-9\.]+)\s*:?', note)
++ if m:
++ desc += "has been deprecated since version %s and should not be used in newly-written code.</para>" % m.group(
++ 1)
++ else:
++ desc += "is deprecated and should not be used in newly-written code.</para>"
++
++ note = re.sub(r'^\s*([0-9\.]+)\s*:?\s*', '', note)
++ note = note.strip()
++
++ if note != '':
++ note = ConvertMarkDown(symbol, note)
++ desc += " " + note
++
++ desc += "</warning>\n"
++
++ return desc
++
++
++def MakeConditionDescription(symbol):
++ """This returns a summary of conditions for the given symbol.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the symbol to create the summary for.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: formatted text or empty string if no special conditions apply.
++ """
++ desc = ''
++ if symbol in Deprecated:
++ if desc != '':
++ desc += "|"
++ m = re.search(r'^\s*(.*?)\s*$', Deprecated[symbol])
++ if m:
++ desc += "deprecated:%s" % m.group(1)
++ else:
++ desc += "deprecated"
++
++ if symbol in Since:
++ if desc != '':
++ desc += "|"
++ m = re.search(r'^\s*(.*?)\s*$', Since[symbol])
++ if m:
++ desc += "since:%s" % m.group(1)
++ else:
++ desc += "since"
++
++ if symbol in StabilityLevel:
++ if desc != '':
++ desc += "|"
++
++ desc += "stability:" + StabilityLevel[symbol]
++
++ if desc != '':
++ cond = re.sub(r'"', r'"', desc)
++ desc = ' condition=\"%s\"' % cond
++ logging.info("condition for '%s' = '%s'", symbol, desc)
++
++ return desc
++
++
++def GetHierarchy(gobject, hierarchy):
++ """Generate the object inheritance graph.
++
++ Returns the DocBook output describing the ancestors and
++ immediate children of a GObject subclass. It uses the
++ global Objects and ObjectLevels arrays to walk the tree.
++
++ Args:
++ object (str): the GtkObject subclass.
++ hierarchy (list) - previous hierarchy
++
++ Returns:
++ list: lines of docbook describing the hierarchy
++ """
++ # Find object in the objects array.
++ found = False
++ children = []
++ level = 0
++ j = 0
++ for i in range(len(Objects)):
++ if found:
++ if ObjectLevels[i] <= level:
++ break
++
++ elif ObjectLevels[i] == level + 1:
++ children.append(Objects[i])
++
++ elif Objects[i] == gobject:
++ found = True
++ j = i
++ level = ObjectLevels[i]
++
++ if not found:
++ return hierarchy
++
++ logging.info("=== Hierarchy for: %s (%d existing entries) ===", gobject, len(hierarchy))
++
++ # Walk up the hierarchy, pushing ancestors onto the ancestors array.
++ ancestors = [gobject]
++ logging.info("Level: %s", level)
++ while level > 1:
++ j -= 1
++ if ObjectLevels[j] < level:
++ ancestors.append(Objects[j])
++ level = ObjectLevels[j]
++ logging.info("Level: %s", level)
++
++ # Output the ancestors, indented and with links.
++ logging.info('%d ancestors', len(ancestors))
++ last_index = 0
++ level = 1
++ for i in range(len(ancestors) - 1, -1, -1):
++ ancestor = ancestors[i]
++ ancestor_id = common.CreateValidSGMLID(ancestor)
++ indent = ' ' * (level * 4)
++ # Don't add a link to the current object, i.e. when i == 0.
++ if i > 0:
++ entry_text = indent + "<link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link>" % (ancestor_id, ancestor)
++ alt_text = indent + ancestor
++ else:
++ entry_text = indent + ancestor
++ alt_text = indent + "<link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link>" % (ancestor_id, ancestor)
++
++ logging.info("Checking for '%s' or '%s'", entry_text, alt_text)
++ # Check if we already have this object
++ index = -1
++ for j in range(len(hierarchy)):
++ if hierarchy[j] == entry_text or (hierarchy[j] == alt_text):
++ index = j
++ break
++ if index == -1:
++ # We have a new entry, find insert position in alphabetical order
++ found = False
++ for j in range(last_index, len(hierarchy)):
++ if not re.search(r'^' + indent, hierarchy[j]):
++ last_index = j
++ found = True
++ break
++ elif re.search(r'^%s[^ ]' % indent, hierarchy[j]):
++ stripped_text = hierarchy[j]
++ if r'<link linkend' not in entry_text:
++ stripped_text = re.sub(r'<link linkend="[A-Za-z]*">', '', stripped_text)
++ stripped_text = re.sub(r'</link>', '', stripped_text)
++
++ if entry_text < stripped_text:
++ last_index = j
++ found = True
++ break
++
++ # Append to bottom
++ if not found:
++ last_index = len(hierarchy)
++
++ logging.debug('insert at %d: %s', last_index, entry_text)
++ hierarchy.insert(last_index, entry_text)
++ last_index += 1
++ else:
++ # Already have this one, make sure we use the not linked version
++ if r'<link linkend' not in entry_text:
++ hierarchy[j] = entry_text
++
++ # Remember index as base insert point
++ last_index = index + 1
++
++ level += 1
++
++ # Output the children, indented and with links.
++ logging.info('%d children', len(children))
++ for i in range(len(children)):
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(children[i])
++ indented_text = ' ' * (level * 4) + "<link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link>" % (sid, children[i])
++ logging.debug('insert at %d: %s', last_index, indented_text)
++ hierarchy.insert(last_index, indented_text)
++ last_index += 1
++ return hierarchy
++
++
++def GetInterfaces(gobject):
++ """Generate interface implementation graph.
++
++ Returns the DocBook output describing the interfaces
++ implemented by a class. It uses the global Interfaces hash.
++
++ Args:
++ object (str): the GObject subclass.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: implemented interfaces
++ """
++ text = ''
++ # Find object in the objects array.
++ if gobject in Interfaces:
++ ifaces = Interfaces[gobject].split()
++ text = '''<para>
++%s implements
++''' % gobject
++ count = len(ifaces)
++ for i in range(count):
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(ifaces[i])
++ text += " <link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link>" % (sid, ifaces[i])
++ if i < count - 2:
++ text += ', '
++ elif i < count - 1:
++ text += ' and '
++ else:
++ text += '.'
++ text += '</para>\n'
++ return text
++
++
++def GetImplementations(gobject):
++ """Generate interface usage graph.
++
++ Returns the DocBook output describing the implementations
++ of an interface. It uses the global Interfaces hash.
++
++ Args:
++ object (str): the GObject subclass.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: interface implementations
++ """
++ text = ''
++ impls = []
++ for key in Interfaces:
++ if re.search(r'\b%s\b' % gobject, Interfaces[key]):
++ impls.append(key)
++
++ count = len(impls)
++ if count > 0:
++ impls.sort()
++ text = '''<para>
++%s is implemented by
++''' % gobject
++ for i in range(count):
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(impls[i])
++ text += " <link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link>" % (sid, impls[i])
++ if i < count - 2:
++ text += ', '
++ elif i < count - 1:
++ text += ' and '
++ else:
++ text += '.'
++ text += '</para>\n'
++ return text
++
++
++def GetPrerequisites(iface):
++ """Generates interface requirements.
++
++ Returns the DocBook output describing the prerequisites
++ of an interface. It uses the global Prerequisites hash.
++ Args:
++ iface (str): the interface.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: required interfaces
++ """
++
++ text = ''
++ if iface in Prerequisites:
++ text = '''<para>
++%s requires
++''' % iface
++ prereqs = Prerequisites[iface].split()
++ count = len(prereqs)
++ for i in range(count):
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(prereqs[i])
++ text += " <link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link>" % (sid, prereqs[i])
++ if i < count - 2:
++ text += ', '
++ elif i < count - 1:
++ text += ' and '
++ else:
++ text += '.'
++ text += '</para>\n'
++ return text
++
++
++def GetDerived(iface):
++ """
++ Returns the DocBook output describing the derived interfaces
++ of an interface. It uses the global %Prerequisites hash.
++
++ Args:
++ iface (str): the interface.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: derived interfaces
++ """
++ text = ''
++ derived = []
++ for key in Prerequisites:
++ if re.search(r'\b%s\b' % iface, Prerequisites[key]):
++ derived.append(key)
++
++ count = len(derived)
++ if count > 0:
++ derived.sort()
++ text = '''<para>
++%s is required by
++''' % iface
++ for i in range(count):
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(derived[i])
++ text += " <link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link>" % (sid, derived[i])
++ if i < count - 2:
++ text += ', '
++ elif i < count - 1:
++ text += ' and '
++ else:
++ text += '.'
++ text += '</para>\n'
++ return text
++
++
++def GetSignals(gobject):
++ """Generate signal docs.
++
++ Returns the synopsis and detailed description DocBook output
++ for the signal handlers of a given GObject subclass.
++
++ Args:
++ object (str): the GObject subclass, e.g. 'GtkButton'.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: signal docs
++ """
++ synop = ''
++ desc = ''
++
++ for i in range(len(SignalObjects)):
++ if SignalObjects[i] == gobject:
++ logging.info("Found signal: %s", SignalNames[i])
++ name = SignalNames[i]
++ symbol = '%s::%s' % (gobject, name)
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID('%s-%s' % (gobject, name))
++
++ desc += u"<refsect2 id=\"%s\" role=\"signal\"><title>The <literal>“%s”</literal> signal</title>\n" % (
++ sid, name)
++ desc += MakeIndexterms(symbol, sid)
++ desc += "\n"
++ desc += OutputSymbolExtraLinks(symbol)
++
++ desc += "<programlisting language=\"C\">"
++
++ m = re.search(r'\s*(const\s+)?(\w+)\s*(\**)', SignalReturns[i])
++ type_modifier = m.group(1) or ''
++ gtype = m.group(2)
++ pointer = m.group(3)
++ xref = MakeXRef(gtype, tagify(gtype, "returnvalue"))
++
++ ret_type_output = '%s%s%s' % (type_modifier, xref, pointer)
++ callback_name = "user_function"
++ desc += '%s\n%s (' % (ret_type_output, callback_name)
++
++ indentation = ' ' * (len(callback_name) + 2)
++
++ sourceparams = SourceSymbolParams.get(symbol)
++ sourceparam_names = None
++ if sourceparams:
++ sourceparam_names = list(sourceparams) # keys as list
++ params = SignalPrototypes[i].splitlines()
++ type_len = len("gpointer")
++ name_len = len("user_data")
++ # do two passes, the first one is to calculate padding
++ for l in range(2):
++ for j in range(len(params)):
++ param_name = None
++ # allow alphanumerics, '_', '[' & ']' in param names
++ m = re.search(r'^\s*(\w+)\s*(\**)\s*([\w\[\]]+)\s*$', params[j])
++ if m:
++ gtype = m.group(1)
++ pointer = m.group(2)
++ if sourceparam_names:
++ if j < len(sourceparam_names):
++ param_name = sourceparam_names[j]
++ logging.info('from sourceparams: "%s" (%d: %s)', param_name, j, params[j])
++ # we're missing the docs for this param, don't warn here though
++ else:
++ param_name = m.group(3)
++ logging.info('from params: "%s" (%d: %s)', param_name, j, params[j])
++
++ if not param_name:
++ param_name = "arg%d" % j
++
++ if l == 0:
++ if len(gtype) + len(pointer) > type_len:
++ type_len = len(gtype) + len(pointer)
++ if len(param_name) > name_len:
++ name_len = len(param_name)
++ else:
++ logging.info("signal arg[%d]: '%s'", j, param_name)
++ xref = MakeXRef(gtype, tagify(gtype, "type"))
++ pad = ' ' * (type_len - len(gtype) - len(pointer))
++ desc += '%s%s %s%s,\n' % (xref, pad, pointer, param_name)
++ desc += indentation
++
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "Can't parse arg: %s\nArgs:%s" % (params[j], SignalPrototypes[i]))
++
++ xref = MakeXRef("gpointer", tagify("gpointer", "type"))
++ pad = ' ' * (type_len - len("gpointer"))
++ desc += '%s%s user_data)' % (xref, pad)
++ desc += "</programlisting>\n"
++
++ flags = SignalFlags[i]
++ flags_string = ''
++ if flags:
++ if 'f' in flags:
++ flags_string = "<link linkend=\"G-SIGNAL-RUN-FIRST:CAPS\">Run First</link>"
++
++ elif 'l' in flags:
++ flags_string = "<link linkend=\"G-SIGNAL-RUN-LAST:CAPS\">Run Last</link>"
++
++ elif 'c' in flags:
++ flags_string = "<link linkend=\"G-SIGNAL-RUN-CLEANUP:CAPS\">Cleanup</link>"
++ flags_string = "Cleanup"
++
++ if 'r' in flags:
++ if flags_string:
++ flags_string += " / "
++ flags_string = "<link linkend=\"G-SIGNAL-NO-RECURSE:CAPS\">No Recursion</link>"
++
++ if 'd' in flags:
++ if flags_string:
++ flags_string += " / "
++ flags_string = "<link linkend=\"G-SIGNAL-DETAILED:CAPS\">Has Details</link>"
++
++ if 'a' in flags:
++ if flags_string:
++ flags_string += " / "
++ flags_string = "<link linkend=\"G-SIGNAL-ACTION:CAPS\">Action</link>"
++
++ if 'h' in flags:
++ if flags_string:
++ flags_string += " / "
++ flags_string = "<link linkend=\"G-SIGNAL-NO-HOOKS:CAPS\">No Hooks</link>"
++
++ synop += "<row><entry role=\"signal_type\">%s</entry><entry role=\"signal_name\"><link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link></entry><entry role=\"signal_flags\">%s</entry></row>\n" % (
++ ret_type_output, sid, name, flags_string)
++
++ parameters = OutputParamDescriptions("SIGNAL", symbol, None)
++ logging.info("formatted signal params: '%s' -> '%s'", symbol, parameters)
++
++ AllSymbols[symbol] = 1
++ if symbol in SymbolDocs:
++ symbol_docs = ConvertMarkDown(symbol, SymbolDocs[symbol])
++
++ desc += symbol_docs
++
++ if not IsEmptyDoc(SymbolDocs[symbol]):
++ AllDocumentedSymbols[symbol] = 1
++
++ if symbol in SymbolAnnotations:
++ param_desc = SymbolAnnotations[symbol]
++ param_desc, param_annotations = ExpandAnnotation(symbol, param_desc)
++ if param_annotations != '':
++ desc += "\n<para>%s</para>" % param_annotations
++
++ desc += MakeDeprecationNote(symbol)
++
++ desc += parameters
++ if flags_string:
++ desc += "<para>Flags: %s</para>\n" % flags_string
++
++ desc += OutputSymbolTraits(symbol)
++ desc += "</refsect2>"
++
++ return (synop, desc)
++
++
++def GetArgs(gobject):
++ """Generate property docs.
++
++ Returns the synopsis and detailed description DocBook output
++ for the Args of a given GtkObject subclass.
++
++ Args:
++ object (str): the GObject subclass, e.g. 'GtkButton'.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: property docs
++ """
++ synop = ''
++ desc = ''
++ child_synop = ''
++ child_desc = ''
++ style_synop = ''
++ style_desc = ''
++
++ for i in range(len(ArgObjects)):
++ if ArgObjects[i] == gobject:
++ logging.info("Found arg: %s", ArgNames[i])
++ name = ArgNames[i]
++ flags = ArgFlags[i]
++ flags_string = ''
++ kind = ''
++ id_sep = ''
++
++ if 'c' in flags:
++ kind = "child property"
++ id_sep = "c-"
++ elif 's' in flags:
++ kind = "style property"
++ id_sep = "s-"
++ else:
++ kind = "property"
++
++ # Remember only one colon so we don't clash with signals.
++ symbol = '%s:%s' % (gobject, name)
++ # use two dashes and ev. an extra separator here for the same reason.
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID('%s--%s%s' % (gobject, id_sep, name))
++
++ atype = ArgTypes[i]
++ type_output = None
++ arange = ArgRanges[i]
++ range_output = CreateValidSGML(arange)
++ default = ArgDefaults[i]
++ default_output = CreateValidSGML(default)
++
++ if atype == "GtkString":
++ atype = "char *"
++
++ if atype == "GtkSignal":
++ atype = "GtkSignalFunc, gpointer"
++ type_output = MakeXRef("GtkSignalFunc") + ", " + MakeXRef("gpointer")
++ elif re.search(r'^(\w+)\*$', atype):
++ m = re.search(r'^(\w+)\*$', atype)
++ type_output = MakeXRef(m.group(1), tagify(m.group(1), "type")) + " *"
++ else:
++ type_output = MakeXRef(atype, tagify(atype, "type"))
++
++ if 'r' in flags:
++ flags_string = "Read"
++
++ if 'w' in flags:
++ if flags_string:
++ flags_string += " / "
++ flags_string += "Write"
++
++ if 'x' in flags:
++ if flags_string:
++ flags_string += " / "
++ flags_string += "Construct"
++
++ if 'X' in flags:
++ if flags_string:
++ flags_string += " / "
++ flags_string += "Construct Only"
++
++ AllSymbols[symbol] = 1
++ blurb = ''
++ if symbol in SymbolDocs and not IsEmptyDoc(SymbolDocs[symbol]):
++ blurb = ConvertMarkDown(symbol, SymbolDocs[symbol])
++ logging.info(".. [%s][%s]", SymbolDocs[symbol], blurb)
++ AllDocumentedSymbols[symbol] = 1
++
++ else:
++ if ArgBlurbs[i] != '':
++ blurb = "<para>" + CreateValidSGML(ArgBlurbs[i]) + "</para>"
++ AllDocumentedSymbols[symbol] = 1
++ else:
++ # FIXME: print a warning?
++ logging.info(".. no description")
++
++ pad1 = ''
++ if len(name) < 24:
++ pad1 = " " * (24 - len(name))
++
++ arg_synop = "<row><entry role=\"property_type\">%s</entry><entry role=\"property_name\"><link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link></entry><entry role=\"property_flags\">%s</entry></row>\n" % (
++ type_output, sid, name, flags_string)
++ arg_desc = u"<refsect2 id=\"%s\" role=\"property\"><title>The <literal>“%s”</literal> %s</title>\n" % (
++ sid, name, kind)
++ arg_desc += MakeIndexterms(symbol, sid)
++ arg_desc += "\n"
++ arg_desc += OutputSymbolExtraLinks(symbol)
++
++ arg_desc += u"<programlisting> “%s”%s %s</programlisting>\n" % (name, pad1, type_output)
++ arg_desc += blurb
++ if symbol in SymbolAnnotations:
++ param_desc = SymbolAnnotations[symbol]
++ param_desc, param_annotations = ExpandAnnotation(symbol, param_desc)
++ if param_annotations != '':
++ arg_desc += "\n<para>%s</para>" % param_annotations
++
++ arg_desc += MakeDeprecationNote(symbol)
++
++ arg_desc += "<para>Owner: %s</para>\n" % gobject
++
++ if flags_string:
++ arg_desc += "<para>Flags: %s</para>\n" % flags_string
++
++ if arange != '':
++ arg_desc += "<para>Allowed values: %s</para>\n" % range_output
++
++ if default != '':
++ arg_desc += "<para>Default value: %s</para>\n" % default_output
++
++ arg_desc += OutputSymbolTraits(symbol)
++ arg_desc += "</refsect2>\n"
++
++ if 'c' in flags:
++ child_synop += arg_synop
++ child_desc += arg_desc
++
++ elif 's' in flags:
++ style_synop += arg_synop
++ style_desc += arg_desc
++
++ else:
++ synop += arg_synop
++ desc += arg_desc
++
++ return (synop, child_synop, style_synop, desc, child_desc, style_desc)
++
++
++def GetActions(gobject):
++ """Generate action docs.
++
++ Returns the synopsis and detailed description DocBook output
++ for the actions of a given GtkWidget subclass.
++
++ Args:
++ object (str): the GObject subclass, e.g. 'GtkButton'.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: action docs
++ """
++ synop = ''
++ desc = ''
++
++ for i in range(len(ActionObjects)):
++ if ActionObjects[i] == gobject:
++ logging.info("Found action: %s", ActionNames[i])
++ name = ActionNames[i]
++ params = ActionParams[i]
++ prop = ActionProperties[i]
++
++ # Remember: pipe, so we don't clash with signals.
++ symbol = '%s|%s' % (gobject, name)
++ sid = common.CreateValidSGMLID(symbol)
++
++ AllSymbols[symbol] = 1
++ blurb = ''
++ if symbol in SymbolDocs and not IsEmptyDoc(SymbolDocs[symbol]):
++ blurb = ConvertMarkDown(symbol, SymbolDocs[symbol])
++ logging.info(".. [%s][%s]", SymbolDocs[symbol], blurb)
++ AllDocumentedSymbols[symbol] = 1
++
++ else:
++ # FIXME: print a warning?
++ logging.info(".. no description")
++
++ pad1 = ''
++ if len(name) < 24:
++ pad1 = " " * (24 - len(name))
++
++ action_synop = "<row><entry></entry><entry role=\"action_name\"><link linkend=\"%s\">%s</link></entry><entry role=\"parameter_type\">%s</entry></row>\n" % (
++ sid, name, params)
++ action_desc = u"<refsect2 id=\"%s\" role=\"action\"><title>The <literal>“%s”</literal> action</title>\n" % (
++ sid, name)
++ action_desc += MakeIndexterms(symbol, sid)
++ action_desc += "\n"
++ action_desc += OutputSymbolExtraLinks(symbol)
++ if blurb != '':
++ action_desc += blurb
++ elif prop != '':
++ action_desc += "<para>The %s action sets the %s property.</para>\n" % (name, MakeHashXRef (gobject + ':' + prop, "type"))
++ action_desc += MakeDeprecationNote(symbol)
++
++ if params != '':
++ action_desc += "<para>Parameter type: %s</para>\n" % params
++
++ action_desc += OutputParamDescriptions("ACTION", symbol, None)
++ action_desc += OutputSymbolTraits(symbol)
++ action_desc += "</refsect2>\n"
++
++ synop += action_synop
++ desc += action_desc
++
++ return (synop, desc)
++
++def IgnorePath(path, source_dirs, ignore_files):
++ for sdir in source_dirs:
++ # Cut off base directory
++ m1 = re.search(r'^%s/(.*)$' % re.escape(sdir), path)
++ if m1:
++ # Check if the filename is in the ignore list.
++ m2 = re.search(r'(\s|^)%s(\s|$)' % re.escape(m1.group(1)), ignore_files)
++ if m2:
++ logging.info("Skipping path: %s", path)
++ return True
++ else:
++ logging.info("No match for: %s", m1.group(1))
++ else:
++ logging.info("No match for: %s", path)
++ return False
++
++
++def ReadSourceDocumentation(source_dir, suffix_list, ignore_files):
++ """Read the documentation embedded in comment blocks in the source code.
++
++ It recursively descends the source directory looking for source files and
++ scans them looking for specially-formatted comment blocks.
++
++ Args:
++ source_dir (str): the directory to scan.
++ suffix_list (list): extensions to check
++ ignore_files (list): a list of ignored paths under source_dir
++ """
++ logging.info("Scanning source directory: %s", source_dir)
++
++ # This array holds any subdirectories found.
++ subdirs = []
++
++ for ifile in sorted(os.listdir(source_dir)):
++ logging.debug("... : %s", ifile)
++ if ifile.startswith('.'):
++ continue
++ fname = os.path.join(source_dir, ifile)
++ if os.path.isdir(fname):
++ subdirs.append(fname)
++ elif fname in ignore_files:
++ logging.info(f"File {fname} matches ignored files")
++ else:
++ for suffix in suffix_list:
++ if ifile.endswith(suffix):
++ ScanSourceFile(fname, ignore_files)
++ break
++
++ # Now recursively scan the subdirectories.
++ for sdir in subdirs:
++ if sdir in ignore_files:
++ logging.info(f"Directory {sdir} matches ignored files")
++ continue
++ ReadSourceDocumentation(sdir, suffix_list, ignore_files)
++
++
++def ScanSourceFile(ifile, ignore_files):
++ """Scans one source file looking for specially-formatted comment blocks.
++
++ Later MergeSourceDocumentation() is copying over the doc blobs that are not
++ suppressed/ignored.
++
++ Args:
++ ifile (str): the file to scan.
++ """
++ m = re.search(r'^.*[\/\\]([^\/\\]*)$', ifile)
++ if m:
++ basename = m.group(1)
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(ifile, 1, "Can't find basename for this filename.")
++ basename = ifile
++
++ # Check if the filename is in the list of files to ignore.
++ if ifile in ignore_files:
++ logging.info("Skipping source file: %s", ifile)
++ return
++
++ logging.info("Scanning %s", ifile)
++
++ with open(ifile, 'r', encoding='utf-8') as src:
++ input_lines = src.readlines()
++
++ for c in ScanSourceContent(input_lines, ifile):
++ ParseCommentBlock(c[0], c[1], ifile)
++
++ logging.info("Scanning %s done", ifile)
++
++
++def ScanSourceContent(input_lines, ifile=''):
++ """Scans the source code lines for specially-formatted comment blocks.
++
++ Updates global state in SourceSymbolDocs, SymbolSourceLocation,
++ Since, StabilityLevel, Deprecated, SymbolAnnotations.
++
++ Might read from global state in DeclarationTypes
++
++ Args:
++ input_lines (list): list of source code lines
++ ifile (str): file name of the source file (for reporting)
++
++ Returns:
++ list: tuples with comment block and its starting line
++ """
++ comments = []
++ in_comment_block = False
++ line_number = 0
++ comment = []
++ starting_line = 0
++ for line in input_lines:
++ line_number += 1
++
++ if not in_comment_block:
++ # Look for the start of a comment block.
++ if re.search(r'^\s*/\*.*\*/', line):
++ # one-line comment - not gtkdoc
++ pass
++ elif re.search(r'^\s*/\*\*\s', line):
++ logging.info("Found comment block start")
++
++ in_comment_block = True
++ comment = []
++ starting_line = line_number + 1
++ else:
++ # Look for end of comment
++ if re.search(r'^\s*\*+/', line):
++ comments.append((comment, starting_line))
++ in_comment_block = False
++ continue
++
++ # Get rid of ' * ' at start of every line in the comment block.
++ line = re.sub(r'^\s*\*\s?', '', line)
++ # But make sure we don't get rid of the newline at the end.
++ if not line.endswith('\n'):
++ line += "\n"
++
++ logging.info("scanning :%s", line.strip())
++ comment.append(line)
++
++ return comments
++
++
++def SegmentCommentBlock(lines, line_number=0, ifile=''):
++ """Cut a single comment block into segments.
++
++ Args:
++ lines (list): the comment block
++ line_number (int): the first line of the block (for reporting)
++ ifile (str): file name of the source file (for reporting)
++
++ Returns:
++ (str, dict): symbol name and dict of comment segments
++ """
++ symbol = None
++ in_part = ''
++ segments = {'body': ''}
++ params = OrderedDict()
++ param_name = None
++ param_indent = None
++ line_number -= 1
++ for line in lines:
++ line_number += 1
++ logging.info("scanning[%s] :%s", in_part, line.strip())
++
++ # If we haven't found the symbol name yet, look for it.
++ # We need to allow for the following cases:
++ # function:
++ # Class::signal:
++ # Class:property:
++ # Class|action:
++ # Signal and property names can contain dashes, action names
++ # can contain period.
++ # In all cases, there might be annotations in parentheses
++ # following the symbol name.
++ if not symbol:
++ m1 = re.search(r'^\s*((SECTION|PROGRAM):\s*\S+)', line)
++ m2 = re.search(r'^\s*([\w:.|-]*\w)\s*:?\s*(\(.+?\)\s*)*$', line)
++ if m1:
++ symbol = m1.group(1)
++ logging.info("docs found in source for : '%s'", symbol)
++ elif m2:
++ symbol = m2.group(1)
++ logging.info("docs found in source for : '%s'", symbol)
++ if m2.group(2):
++ annotation = m2.group(2).strip()
++ if annotation != '':
++ SymbolAnnotations[symbol] = annotation
++ logging.info("remaining text for %s: '%s'", symbol, annotation)
++
++ continue
++
++ if in_part == "body":
++ # Get rid of 'Description:'
++ line = re.sub(r'^\s*Description:', '', line)
++
++ m1 = re.search(r'^\s*(returns|return\s+value):', line, flags=re.I)
++ m2 = re.search(r'^\s*since:', line, flags=re.I)
++ m3 = re.search(r'^\s*deprecated:', line, flags=re.I)
++ m4 = re.search(r'^\s*stability:', line, flags=re.I)
++
++ if m1:
++ if in_part != '':
++ in_part = "return"
++ segments[in_part] = line[m1.end():]
++ continue
++ if m2:
++ if in_part != "param":
++ in_part = "since"
++ segments[in_part] = line[m2.end():]
++ continue
++ elif m3:
++ if in_part != "param":
++ in_part = "deprecated"
++ segments[in_part] = line[m3.end():]
++ continue
++ elif m4:
++ in_part = "stability"
++ segments[in_part] = line[m4.end():]
++ continue
++
++ if in_part in ["body", "return", "since", "stability", "deprecated"]:
++ segments[in_part] += line
++ continue
++
++ # We must be in the parameters. Check for the empty line below them.
++ if re.search(r'^\s*$', line):
++ # TODO: only switch if next line starts without indent?
++ in_part = "body"
++ continue
++
++ # Look for a parameter name.
++ m = re.search(r'^\s*@(.+?)\s*:\s*', line)
++ if m:
++ param_name = m.group(1)
++ param_desc = line[m.end():]
++ param_indent = None
++
++ # Allow varargs variations
++ if re.search(r'^\.\.\.$', param_name):
++ param_name = "..."
++
++ logging.info("Found param for symbol %s : '%s'= '%s'", symbol, param_name, line)
++ params[param_name] = param_desc
++ in_part = "param"
++ continue
++ elif in_part == '':
++ logging.info("continuation for %s annotation '%s'", symbol, line)
++ annotation = re.sub(r'^\s+|\s+$', '', line)
++ if symbol in SymbolAnnotations:
++ SymbolAnnotations[symbol] += annotation
++ else:
++ SymbolAnnotations[symbol] = annotation
++ continue
++
++ # We must be in the middle of a parameter description, so add it on
++ # to the last element in @params.
++ if not param_name:
++ common.LogWarning(ifile, line_number,
++ "Parsing comment block file : parameter expected, but got '%s'" % line)
++ else:
++ if not param_indent:
++ # determine indentation of first continuation line
++ spc = len(line) - len(line.lstrip(' '))
++ if spc > 0:
++ param_indent = spc
++ logging.debug("Found param-indentation of %d", param_indent)
++ if param_indent:
++ # cut common indentation (after double checking that it is all spaces)
++ if line[:param_indent].strip() == '':
++ line = line[param_indent:]
++ else:
++ logging.warning("Not cutting param-indentation for %s: '%s'",
++ param_name, line[:param_indent])
++
++ params[param_name] += line
++
++ return (symbol, segments, params)
++
++
++def ParseCommentBlockSegments(symbol, segments, params, line_number=0, ifile=''):
++ """Parse the comemnts block segments.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol (str): the symbol name
++ segments(dict): the comment block segments (except params)
++ parans (dict): the comment block params
++ line_number (int): the first line of the block (for reporting)
++ ifile (str): file name of the source file (for reporting)
++
++ """
++ # Add the return value description to the end of the params.
++ if "return" in segments:
++ # TODO(ensonic): check for duplicated Return docs
++ # common.LogWarning(file, line_number, "Multiple Returns for %s." % symbol)
++ params['Returns'] = segments["return"]
++
++ # Convert special characters
++ segments["body"] = ConvertXMLChars(symbol, segments["body"])
++ for (param_name, param_desc) in params.items():
++ params[param_name] = ConvertXMLChars(symbol, param_desc)
++
++ # Handle Section docs
++ m = re.search(r'SECTION:\s*(.*)', symbol)
++ m2 = re.search(r'PROGRAM:\s*(.*)', symbol)
++ if m:
++ real_symbol = m.group(1)
++
++ logging.info("SECTION DOCS found in source for : '%s'", real_symbol)
++ for param_name, param_desc in params.items():
++ logging.info(" '" + param_name + "'")
++ param_name = param_name.lower()
++ if param_name in ['image', 'include', 'section_id', 'see_also', 'short_description', 'stability', 'title']:
++ key = real_symbol + ':' + param_name
++ SourceSymbolDocs[key] = param_desc
++ SymbolSourceLocation[key] = (ifile, line_number)
++
++ key = real_symbol + ":long_description"
++ if key not in KnownSymbols or KnownSymbols[key] != 1:
++ common.LogWarning(
++ ifile, line_number, "Section %s is not defined in the %s-sections.txt file." % (real_symbol, MODULE))
++ SourceSymbolDocs[key] = segments["body"]
++ SymbolSourceLocation[key] = (ifile, line_number)
++ elif m2:
++ real_symbol = m2.group(1)
++ section_id = None
++
++ logging.info("PROGRAM DOCS found in source for '%s'", real_symbol)
++ for param_name, param_desc in params.items():
++ logging.info("PROGRAM key %s: '%s'", real_symbol, param_name)
++ param_name = param_name.lower()
++ if param_name in ['returns', 'section_id', 'see_also', 'short_description', 'synopsis']:
++ key = real_symbol + ':' + param_name
++ logging.info("PROGRAM value %s: '%s'", real_symbol, param_desc.rstrip())
++ SourceSymbolDocs[key] = param_desc.rstrip()
++ SymbolSourceLocation[key] = (ifile, line_number)
++ elif re.search(r'^(-.*)', param_name):
++ logging.info("PROGRAM opts: '%s': '%s'", param_name, param_desc)
++ key = real_symbol + ":options"
++ opts = []
++ opts_str = SourceSymbolDocs.get(key)
++ if opts_str:
++ opts = opts_str.split('\t')
++ opts.append(param_name)
++ opts.append(param_desc)
++
++ logging.info("Setting options for symbol: %s: '%s'", real_symbol, '\t'.join(opts))
++ SourceSymbolDocs[key] = '\t'.join(opts)
++
++ key = real_symbol + ":long_description"
++ SourceSymbolDocs[key] = segments["body"]
++ SymbolSourceLocation[key] = (ifile, line_number)
++
++ # TODO(ensonic): we need to track these somehow and output the files
++ # later, see comment in Run()
++ section_id = SourceSymbolDocs.get(real_symbol + ":section_id")
++ if section_id and section_id.strip() != '':
++ # Remove trailing blanks and use as is
++ section_id = section_id.rstrip()
++ else:
++ section_id = common.CreateValidSGMLID('%s-%s' % (MODULE, real_symbol))
++ OutputProgramDBFile(real_symbol, section_id)
++
++ else:
++ logging.info("SYMBOL DOCS found in source for : '%s'", symbol)
++ SourceSymbolDocs[symbol] = segments["body"]
++ SourceSymbolParams[symbol] = params
++ SymbolSourceLocation[symbol] = (ifile, line_number)
++
++ if "since" in segments:
++ arr = segments["since"].splitlines()
++ desc = arr[0].strip()
++ extra_lines = arr[1:]
++ logging.info("Since(%s) : [%s]", symbol, desc)
++ Since[symbol] = ConvertXMLChars(symbol, desc)
++ if len(extra_lines) > 1:
++ common.LogWarning(ifile, line_number, "multi-line since docs found")
++
++ if "stability" in segments:
++ desc = ParseStabilityLevel(
++ segments["stability"], ifile, line_number, "Stability level for %s" % symbol)
++ StabilityLevel[symbol] = ConvertXMLChars(symbol, desc)
++
++ if "deprecated" in segments:
++ if symbol not in Deprecated:
++ # don't warn for signals and properties
++ # if ($symbol !~ m/::?(.*)/)
++ if symbol in DeclarationTypes:
++ common.LogWarning(ifile, line_number,
++ "%s is deprecated in the inline comments, but no deprecation guards were found around the declaration. (See the --deprecated-guards option for gtkdoc-scan.)" % symbol)
++
++ Deprecated[symbol] = ConvertXMLChars(symbol, segments["deprecated"])
++
++
++def ParseCommentBlock(lines, line_number=0, ifile=''):
++ """Parse a single comment block.
++
++ Args:
++ lines (list): the comment block
++ line_number (int): the first line of the block (for reporting)
++ ifile (str): file name of the source file (for reporting)
++ """
++ (symbol, segments, params) = SegmentCommentBlock(lines, line_number, ifile)
++ if not symbol:
++ # maybe its not even meant to be a gtk-doc comment?
++ common.LogWarning(ifile, line_number, "Symbol name not found at the start of the comment block.")
++ return
++
++ ParseCommentBlockSegments(symbol, segments, params, line_number, ifile)
++
++
++def OutputMissingDocumentation():
++ """Outputs report of documentation coverage to a file.
++
++ Returns:
++ bool: True if the report was updated
++ """
++ old_undocumented_file = os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-undocumented.txt")
++ new_undocumented_file = os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-undocumented.new")
++
++ n_documented = 0
++ n_incomplete = 0
++ total = 0
++ symbol = None
++ percent = None
++ buffer = ''
++ buffer_deprecated = ''
++ buffer_descriptions = ''
++
++ UNDOCUMENTED = open(new_undocumented_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8')
++
++ for symbol in sorted(AllSymbols.keys()):
++ # FIXME: should we print common.LogWarnings for undocumented stuff?
++ m = re.search(
++ r':(title|long_description|short_description|see_also|stability|include|section_id|image)', symbol)
++ m2 = re.search(r':(long_description|short_description)', symbol)
++ if not m:
++ total += 1
++ if symbol in AllDocumentedSymbols:
++ n_documented += 1
++ if symbol in AllIncompleteSymbols:
++ n_incomplete += 1
++ buffer += symbol + " (" + AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] + ")\n"
++
++ elif symbol in Deprecated:
++ if symbol in AllIncompleteSymbols:
++ n_incomplete += 1
++ buffer_deprecated += symbol + " (" + AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] + ")\n"
++ else:
++ buffer_deprecated += symbol + "\n"
++
++ else:
++ if symbol in AllIncompleteSymbols:
++ n_incomplete += 1
++ buffer += symbol + " (" + AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] + ")\n"
++ else:
++ buffer += symbol + "\n"
++
++ elif m2:
++ total += 1
++ if (symbol in SymbolDocs and len(SymbolDocs[symbol]) > 0)\
++ or (symbol in AllDocumentedSymbols and AllDocumentedSymbols[symbol] > 0):
++ n_documented += 1
++ else:
++ buffer_descriptions += symbol + "\n"
++
++ if total == 0:
++ percent = 100
++ else:
++ percent = (n_documented / total) * 100.0
++
++ UNDOCUMENTED.write("%.0f%% symbol docs coverage.\n" % percent)
++ UNDOCUMENTED.write("%s symbols documented.\n" % n_documented)
++ UNDOCUMENTED.write("%s symbols incomplete.\n" % n_incomplete)
++ UNDOCUMENTED.write("%d not documented.\n" % (total - n_documented))
++
++ if buffer_deprecated != '':
++ buffer += "\n" + buffer_deprecated
++
++ if buffer_descriptions != '':
++ buffer += "\n" + buffer_descriptions
++
++ if buffer != '':
++ UNDOCUMENTED.write("\n\n" + buffer)
++
++ UNDOCUMENTED.close()
++
++ return common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_undocumented_file, new_undocumented_file, 0)
++
++
++def OutputUndeclaredSymbols():
++ """Reports undeclared symbols.
++
++ Outputs symbols that are listed in the section file, but have no declaration
++ in the sources.
++
++ Returns:
++ bool: True if the report was updated
++ """
++ old_undeclared_file = os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-undeclared.txt")
++ new_undeclared_file = os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-undeclared.new")
++
++ with open(new_undeclared_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8') as out:
++ if UndeclaredSymbols:
++ out.write("\n".join(sorted(UndeclaredSymbols.keys())))
++ out.write("\n")
++ print("See %s-undeclared.txt for the list of undeclared symbols." % MODULE)
++
++ return common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_undeclared_file, new_undeclared_file, 0)
++
++
++def OutputUnusedSymbols():
++ """Reports unused documentation.
++
++ Outputs symbols that are documented in comments, but not declared in the
++ sources.
++
++ Returns:
++ bool: True if the report was updated
++ """
++ num_unused = 0
++ old_unused_file = os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-unused.txt")
++ new_unused_file = os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-unused.new")
++
++ with open(new_unused_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8') as out:
++
++ for symbol in sorted(Declarations.keys()):
++ if symbol not in DeclarationOutput:
++ out.write("%s\n" % symbol)
++ num_unused += 1
++
++ for symbol in sorted(AllUnusedSymbols.keys()):
++ out.write(symbol + "(" + AllUnusedSymbols[symbol] + ")\n")
++ num_unused += 1
++
++ if num_unused != 0:
++ common.LogWarning(
++ old_unused_file, 1, "%d unused declarations. They should be added to %s-sections.txt in the appropriate place." % (num_unused, MODULE))
++
++ return common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_unused_file, new_unused_file, 0)
++
++
++def OutputAllSymbols():
++ """Outputs list of all symbols to a file."""
++ new_symbols_file = os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-symbols.txt")
++ with open(new_symbols_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8') as out:
++ for symbol in sorted(AllSymbols.keys()):
++ out.write(symbol + "\n")
++
++
++def OutputSymbolsWithoutSince():
++ """Outputs list of all symbols without a since tag to a file."""
++ new_nosince_file = os.path.join(ROOT_DIR, MODULE + "-nosince.txt")
++ with open(new_nosince_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8') as out:
++ for symbol in sorted(SourceSymbolDocs.keys()):
++ if symbol in Since:
++ out.write(symbol + "\n")
++
++
++def CheckParamsDocumented(symbol, params):
++ stype = DeclarationTypes.get(symbol)
++
++ item = "Parameter"
++ if stype:
++ if stype == 'STRUCT':
++ item = "Field"
++ elif stype == 'ENUM':
++ item = "Value"
++ elif stype == 'UNION':
++ item = "Field"
++ else:
++ stype = "SIGNAL"
++ logging.info("Check param docs for %s, params: %s entries, type=%s", symbol, len(params), stype)
++
++ if len(params) > 0:
++ logging.info("params: %s", str(params))
++ for (param_name, param_desc) in params.items():
++ # Output a warning if the parameter is empty and remember for stats.
++ if param_name != "void" and not re.search(r'\S', param_desc):
++ if symbol in AllIncompleteSymbols:
++ AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] += ", " + param_name
++ else:
++ AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] = param_name
++
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "%s description for %s::%s is missing in source code comment block." % (item, symbol, param_name))
++
++ elif len(params) == 0:
++ AllIncompleteSymbols[symbol] = "<items>"
++ common.LogWarning(*GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol),
++ "%s descriptions for %s are missing in source code comment block." % (item, symbol))
++
++
++def MergeSourceDocumentation():
++ """Merges documentation read from a source file.
++
++ Parameter descriptions override any in the template files.
++ Function descriptions are placed before any description from
++ the template files.
++ """
++
++ # add what's found in the source
++ symbols = set(SourceSymbolDocs.keys())
++
++ # and add known symbols from -sections.txt
++ for symbol in KnownSymbols.keys():
++ if KnownSymbols[symbol] == 1:
++ symbols.add(symbol)
++
++ logging.info("num source entries: %d", len(symbols))
++
++ for symbol in symbols:
++ AllSymbols[symbol] = 1
++
++ if symbol in SourceSymbolDocs:
++ logging.info("merging [%s] from source", symbol)
++
++ # remove leading and training whitespaces
++ src_docs = SourceSymbolDocs[symbol].strip()
++ if src_docs != '':
++ AllDocumentedSymbols[symbol] = 1
++
++ SymbolDocs[symbol] = src_docs
++
++ # merge parameters
++ if symbol in SourceSymbolParams:
++ param_docs = SourceSymbolParams[symbol]
++ SymbolParams[symbol] = param_docs
++ # if this symbol is documented, check if docs are complete
++ # remove all xml-tags and whitespaces
++ check_docs = re.sub(r'\s', '', re.sub(r'<.*?>', '', src_docs))
++ if check_docs != '' and param_docs:
++ CheckParamsDocumented(symbol, param_docs)
++ else:
++ logging.info("[%s] undocumented", symbol)
++
++ logging.info("num doc entries: %d / %d", len(SymbolDocs), len(SourceSymbolDocs))
++
++
++def IsEmptyDoc(doc):
++ """Check if a doc-string is empty.
++
++ It is also regarded as empty if it only consist of whitespace or e.g. FIXME.
++
++ Args:
++ doc (str): the doc-string
++
++ Returns:
++ bool: True if empty
++ """
++ if re.search(r'^\s*$', doc):
++ return True
++ if re.search(r'^\s*<para>\s*(FIXME)?\s*<\/para>\s*$', doc):
++ return True
++ return False
++
++
++def ConvertMarkDown(symbol, text):
++ md_to_db.Init()
++ return md_to_db.MarkDownParse(text, symbol)
++
++
++def ReadDeclarationsFile(ifile, override):
++ """Reads in a file containing the function/macro/enum etc. declarations.
++
++ Note that in some cases there are several declarations with
++ the same name, e.g. for conditional macros. In this case we
++ set a flag in the DeclarationConditional hash so the
++ declaration is not shown in the docs.
++
++ If a macro and a function have the same name, e.g. for
++ g_object_ref, the function declaration takes precedence.
++
++ Some opaque structs are just declared with 'typedef struct
++ _name name;' in which case the declaration may be empty.
++ The structure may have been found later in the header, so
++ that overrides the empty declaration.
++
++ Args:
++ file (str): the declarations file to read
++ override (bool): if declarations in this file should override
++ any current declaration.
++ """
++ if override == 0:
++ Declarations.clear()
++ DeclarationTypes.clear()
++ DeclarationConditional.clear()
++ DeclarationOutput.clear()
++
++ INPUT = open(ifile, 'r', encoding='utf-8')
++ declaration_type = ''
++ declaration_name = None
++ declaration = None
++ is_deprecated = 0
++ line_number = 0
++ for line in INPUT:
++ line_number += 1
++ # logging.debug("%s:%d: %s", ifile, line_number, line)
++ if not declaration_type:
++ m1 = re.search(r'^<([^>]+)>', line)
++ if m1:
++ declaration_type = m1.group(1)
++ declaration_name = ''
++ logging.info("Found declaration: %s", declaration_type)
++ declaration = ''
++ else:
++ m2 = re.search(r'^<NAME>(.*)</NAME>', line)
++ m3 = re.search(r'^<DEPRECATED/>', line)
++ m4 = re.search(r'^</%s>' % declaration_type, line)
++ if m2:
++ declaration_name = m2.group(1)
++ elif m3:
++ is_deprecated = True
++ elif m4:
++ logging.info("Found end of declaration: %s, %s", declaration_type, declaration_name)
++ # Check that the declaration has a name
++ if declaration_name == '':
++ common.LogWarning(ifile, line_number, declaration_type + " has no name.\n")
++
++ # If the declaration is an empty typedef struct _XXX XXX
++ # set the flag to indicate the struct has a typedef.
++ if (declaration_type == 'STRUCT' or declaration_type == 'UNION') \
++ and re.search(r'^\s*$', declaration):
++ logging.info("Struct has typedef: %s", declaration_name)
++ StructHasTypedef[declaration_name] = 1
++
++ # Check if the symbol is already defined.
++ if declaration_name in Declarations and override == 0:
++ # Function declarations take precedence.
++ if DeclarationTypes[declaration_name] == 'FUNCTION':
++ # Ignore it.
++ pass
++ elif declaration_type == 'FUNCTION':
++ if is_deprecated:
++ Deprecated[declaration_name] = ''
++
++ Declarations[declaration_name] = declaration
++ DeclarationTypes[declaration_name] = declaration_type
++ elif DeclarationTypes[declaration_name] == declaration_type:
++ # If the existing declaration is empty, or is just a
++ # forward declaration of a struct, override it.
++ if declaration_type == 'STRUCT' or declaration_type == 'UNION':
++ if re.search(r'^\s*((struct|union)\s+\w+\s*;)?\s*$', Declarations[declaration_name]):
++ if is_deprecated:
++ Deprecated[declaration_name] = ''
++ Declarations[declaration_name] = declaration
++ elif re.search(r'^\s*((struct|union)\s+\w+\s*;)?\s*$', declaration):
++ # Ignore an empty or forward declaration.
++ pass
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(
++ ifile, line_number, "Structure %s has multiple definitions." % declaration_name)
++
++ else:
++ # set flag in %DeclarationConditional hash for
++ # multiply defined macros/typedefs.
++ DeclarationConditional[declaration_name] = 1
++
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(ifile, line_number, declaration_name + " has multiple definitions.")
++
++ else:
++ if is_deprecated:
++ Deprecated[declaration_name] = ''
++
++ Declarations[declaration_name] = declaration
++ DeclarationTypes[declaration_name] = declaration_type
++ logging.debug("added declaration: %s, %s, [%s]", declaration_type, declaration_name, declaration)
++
++ declaration_type = ''
++ is_deprecated = False
++ else:
++ declaration += line
++ INPUT.close()
++
++
++def ReadSignalsFile(ifile):
++ """Reads information about object signals.
++
++ It creates the arrays @SignalNames and @SignalPrototypes containing details
++ about the signals. The first line of the SignalPrototype is the return type
++ of the signal handler. The remaining lines are the parameters passed to it.
++ The last parameter, "gpointer user_data" is always the same so is not included.
++
++ Args:
++ ifile (str): the file containing the signal handler prototype information.
++ """
++ in_signal = 0
++ signal_object = None
++ signal_name = None
++ signal_returns = None
++ signal_flags = None
++ signal_prototype = None
++
++ # Reset the signal info.
++ SignalObjects[:] = []
++ SignalNames[:] = []
++ SignalReturns[:] = []
++ SignalFlags[:] = []
++ SignalPrototypes[:] = []
++
++ if not os.path.isfile(ifile):
++ return
++
++ INPUT = open(ifile, 'r', encoding='utf-8')
++ line_number = 0
++ for line in INPUT:
++ line_number += 1
++ if not in_signal:
++ if re.search(r'^<SIGNAL>', line):
++ in_signal = 1
++ signal_object = ''
++ signal_name = ''
++ signal_returns = ''
++ signal_prototype = ''
++
++ else:
++ m = re.search(r'^<NAME>(.*)<\/NAME>', line)
++ m2 = re.search(r'^<RETURNS>(.*)<\/RETURNS>', line)
++ m3 = re.search(r'^<FLAGS>(.*)<\/FLAGS>', line)
++ if m:
++ signal_name = m.group(1)
++ m1_2 = re.search(r'^(.*)::(.*)$', signal_name)
++ if m1_2:
++ signal_object = m1_2.group(1)
++ signal_name = m1_2.group(2).replace('_', '-')
++ logging.info("Found signal: %s", signal_name)
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(ifile, line_number, "Invalid signal name: %s." % signal_name)
++
++ elif m2:
++ signal_returns = m2.group(1)
++ elif m3:
++ signal_flags = m3.group(1)
++ elif re.search(r'^</SIGNAL>', line):
++ logging.info("Found end of signal: %s::%s\nReturns: %s\n%s",
++ signal_object, signal_name, signal_returns, signal_prototype)
++ SignalObjects.append(signal_object)
++ SignalNames.append(signal_name)
++ SignalReturns.append(signal_returns)
++ SignalFlags.append(signal_flags)
++ SignalPrototypes.append(signal_prototype)
++ in_signal = False
++ else:
++ signal_prototype += line
++ INPUT.close()
++
++
++def ReadObjectHierarchy(ifile):
++ """Reads the $MODULE-hierarchy file.
++
++ This contains all the GObject subclasses described in this module (and their
++ ancestors).
++ It places them in the Objects array, and places their level
++ in the object hierarchy in the ObjectLevels array, at the
++ same index. GObject, the root object, has a level of 1.
++
++ Args:
++ ifile (str): the input filename.
++ """
++
++ if not os.path.isfile(ifile):
++ logging.debug('no %s file found', ifile)
++ return
++
++ Objects[:] = []
++ ObjectLevels[:] = []
++
++ INPUT = open(ifile, 'r', encoding='utf-8')
++
++ # Only emit objects if they are supposed to be documented, or if
++ # they have documented children. To implement this, we maintain a
++ # stack of pending objects which will be emitted if a documented
++ # child turns up.
++ pending_objects = []
++ pending_levels = []
++ root = None
++ tree = []
++ for line in INPUT:
++ m1 = re.search(r'\S+', line)
++ if not m1:
++ continue
++
++ gobject = m1.group(0)
++ level = len(line[:m1.start()]) // 2 + 1
++
++ if level == 1:
++ root = gobject
++
++ while pending_levels and pending_levels[-1] >= level:
++ pending_objects.pop()
++ pending_levels.pop()
++
++ pending_objects.append(gobject)
++ pending_levels.append(level)
++
++ if gobject in KnownSymbols:
++ while len(pending_levels) > 0:
++ gobject = pending_objects.pop(0)
++ level = pending_levels.pop(0)
++ xref = MakeXRef(gobject)
++
++ tree.append(' ' * (level * 4) + xref)
++ Objects.append(gobject)
++ ObjectLevels.append(level)
++ ObjectRoots[gobject] = root
++ # else
++ # common.LogWarning(ifile, line_number, "unknown type %s" % object)
++ #
++
++ INPUT.close()
++ logging.debug('got %d entries for hierarchy', len(tree))
++ return tree
++
++
++def ReadInterfaces(ifile):
++ """Reads the $MODULE.interfaces file.
++
++ Args:
++ ifile (str): the input filename.
++ """
++
++ Interfaces.clear()
++
++ if not os.path.isfile(ifile):
++ return
++
++ INPUT = open(ifile, 'r', encoding='utf-8')
++
++ for line in INPUT:
++ line = line.strip()
++ ifaces = line.split()
++ gobject = ifaces.pop(0)
++ if gobject in KnownSymbols and KnownSymbols[gobject] == 1:
++ knownIfaces = []
++
++ # filter out private interfaces, but leave foreign interfaces
++ for iface in ifaces:
++ if iface not in KnownSymbols or KnownSymbols[iface] == 1:
++ knownIfaces.append(iface)
++
++ Interfaces[gobject] = ' '.join(knownIfaces)
++ logging.info("Interfaces for %s: %s", gobject, Interfaces[gobject])
++ else:
++ logging.info("skipping interfaces for unknown symbol: %s", gobject)
++
++ INPUT.close()
++
++
++def ReadPrerequisites(ifile):
++ """This reads in the $MODULE.prerequisites file.
++
++ Args:
++ ifile (str): the input filename.
++ """
++ Prerequisites.clear()
++
++ if not os.path.isfile(ifile):
++ return
++
++ INPUT = open(ifile, 'r', encoding='utf-8')
++
++ for line in INPUT:
++ line = line.strip()
++ prereqs = line.split()
++ iface = prereqs.pop(0)
++ if iface in KnownSymbols and KnownSymbols[iface] == 1:
++ knownPrereqs = []
++
++ # filter out private prerequisites, but leave foreign prerequisites
++ for prereq in prereqs:
++ if prereq not in KnownSymbols or KnownSymbols[prereq] == 1:
++ knownPrereqs.append(prereq)
++
++ Prerequisites[iface] = ' '.join(knownPrereqs)
++
++ INPUT.close()
++
++
++def ReadArgsFile(ifile):
++ """Reads information about object properties
++
++ It creates the arrays ArgObjects, ArgNames, ArgTypes, ArgFlags, ArgNicks and
++ ArgBlurbs containing info on the args.
++
++ Args:
++ ifile (str): the input filename.
++ """
++ in_arg = False
++ arg_object = None
++ arg_name = None
++ arg_type = None
++ arg_flags = None
++ arg_nick = None
++ arg_blurb = None
++ arg_default = None
++ arg_range = None
++
++ # Reset the args info.
++ ArgObjects[:] = []
++ ArgNames[:] = []
++ ArgTypes[:] = []
++ ArgFlags[:] = []
++ ArgNicks[:] = []
++ ArgBlurbs[:] = []
++ ArgDefaults[:] = []
++ ArgRanges[:] = []
++
++ if not os.path.isfile(ifile):
++ return
++
++ INPUT = open(ifile, 'r', encoding='utf-8')
++ line_number = 0
++ for line in INPUT:
++ line_number += 1
++ if not in_arg:
++ if line.startswith('<ARG>'):
++ in_arg = True
++ arg_object = ''
++ arg_name = ''
++ arg_type = ''
++ arg_flags = ''
++ arg_nick = ''
++ arg_blurb = ''
++ arg_default = ''
++ arg_range = ''
++
++ else:
++ m1 = re.search(r'^<NAME>(.*)</NAME>', line)
++ m2 = re.search(r'^<TYPE>(.*)</TYPE>', line)
++ m3 = re.search(r'^<RANGE>(.*)</RANGE>', line)
++ m4 = re.search(r'^<FLAGS>(.*)</FLAGS>', line)
++ m5 = re.search(r'^<NICK>(.*)</NICK>', line)
++ m6 = re.search(r'^<BLURB>(.*)</BLURB>', line)
++ m7 = re.search(r'^<DEFAULT>(.*)</DEFAULT>', line)
++ if m1:
++ arg_name = m1.group(1)
++ m1_1 = re.search(r'^(.*)::(.*)$', arg_name)
++ if m1_1:
++ arg_object = m1_1.group(1)
++ arg_name = m1_1.group(2).replace('_', '-')
++ logging.info("Found arg: %s", arg_name)
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(ifile, line_number, "Invalid argument name: " + arg_name)
++
++ elif m2:
++ arg_type = m2.group(1)
++ elif m3:
++ arg_range = m3.group(1)
++ elif m4:
++ arg_flags = m4.group(1)
++ elif m5:
++ arg_nick = m5.group(1)
++ elif m6:
++ arg_blurb = m6.group(1)
++ if arg_blurb == "(null)":
++ arg_blurb = ''
++ common.LogWarning(
++ ifile, line_number, "Property %s:%s has no documentation." % (arg_object, arg_name))
++
++ elif m7:
++ arg_default = m7.group(1)
++ elif re.search(r'^</ARG>', line):
++ logging.info("Found end of arg: %s::%s\n%s : %s", arg_object, arg_name, arg_type, arg_flags)
++ ArgObjects.append(arg_object)
++ ArgNames.append(arg_name)
++ ArgTypes.append(arg_type)
++ ArgRanges.append(arg_range)
++ ArgFlags.append(arg_flags)
++ ArgNicks.append(arg_nick)
++ ArgBlurbs.append(arg_blurb)
++ ArgDefaults.append(arg_default)
++ in_arg = False
++
++ INPUT.close()
++
++def ReadActionsFile(ifile):
++ """Reads information about object actions
++
++ It creates the arrays ActionObjects, ActionNames, ActionParams
++ and ActionProperties containing info on the actions.
++
++ Args:
++ ifile (str): the input filename.
++ """
++ in_action = False
++ action_object = None
++ action_name = None
++ action_param = None
++ action_prop = None
++
++ # Reset the args info.
++ ActionObjects[:] = []
++ ActionNames[:] = []
++ ActionParams[:] = []
++ ActionProperties[:] = []
++
++ if not os.path.isfile(ifile):
++ return
++
++ INPUT = open(ifile, 'r', encoding='utf-8')
++ line_number = 0
++ for line in INPUT:
++ line_number += 1
++ if not in_action:
++ if line.startswith('<ACTION>'):
++ in_action = True
++ action_object = ''
++ action_name = ''
++ action_param = ''
++ action_prop = ''
++
++ else:
++ m1 = re.search(r'^<NAME>(.*)</NAME>', line)
++ m2 = re.search(r'^<PARAMETER>(.*)</PARAMETER>', line)
++ m3 = re.search(r'^<PROPERTY>(.*)</PROPERTY>', line)
++ if m1:
++ action_name = m1.group(1)
++ m1_1 = re.search(r'^(.*):::(.*)$', action_name)
++ if m1_1:
++ action_object = m1_1.group(1)
++ action_name = m1_1.group(2).replace('_', '-')
++ logging.info("Found action: %s", action_name)
++ else:
++ common.LogWarning(ifile, line_number, "Invalid action name: " + action_name)
++
++ elif m2:
++ action_param = m2.group(1)
++ elif m3:
++ action_prop = m3.group(1)
++ elif re.search(r'^</ACTION>', line):
++ logging.info("Found end of action: %s::%s", action_object, action_name)
++ ActionObjects.append(action_object)
++ ActionNames.append(action_name)
++ ActionParams.append(action_param)
++ ActionProperties.append(action_prop)
++ in_action = False
++
++ INPUT.close()
++
++
++def AddTreeLineArt(tree):
++ """Generate a line art tree.
++
++ Add unicode lineart to a pre-indented string array and returns
++ it as as multiline string.
++
++ Args:
++ tree (list): of indented strings.
++
++ Returns:
++ str: multiline string with tree line art
++ """
++ # iterate bottom up over the tree
++ for i in range(len(tree) - 1, -1, -1):
++ # count leading spaces
++ m = re.search(r'^([^<A-Za-z]*)', tree[i])
++ indent = len(m.group(1))
++ # replace with ╰───, if place of ╰ is not space insert ├
++ if indent > 4:
++ if tree[i][indent - 4] == " ":
++ tree[i] = tree[i][:indent - 4] + "--- " + tree[i][indent:]
++ else:
++ tree[i] = tree[i][:indent - 4] + "+-- " + tree[i][indent:]
++
++ # go lines up while space and insert |
++ j = i - 1
++ while j >= 0 and tree[j][indent - 4] == ' ':
++ tree[j] = tree[j][:indent - 4] + '|' + tree[j][indent - 3:]
++ j -= 1
++
++ res = "\n".join(tree)
++ # unicode chars for: ╰──
++ res = re.sub(r'---', '<phrase role=\"lineart\">╰──</phrase>', res)
++ # unicde chars for: ├──
++ res = re.sub(r'\+--', '<phrase role=\"lineart\">├──</phrase>', res)
++ # unicode char for: │
++ res = re.sub(r'\|', '<phrase role=\"lineart\">│</phrase>', res)
++
++ return res
++
++
++def CheckIsObject(name):
++ """Check if symbols is an object.
++
++ It uses the global Objects array. Note that the Objects array only contains
++ classes in the current module and their ancestors - not all GObject classes.
++
++ Args:
++ name (str): the object name to check.
++
++ Returns:
++ bool: True if the given name is a GObject or a subclass.
++ """
++ root = ObjectRoots.get(name)
++ # Let GBoxed pass as an object here to get -struct appended to the id
++ # and prevent conflicts with sections.
++ return root and root != 'GEnum' and root != 'GFlags'
++
++
++def GetSymbolParams(symbol):
++ """Get the symbol params and check that they are not empty.
++
++ If no parameters are filled in, we don't generate the description table,
++ for backwards compatibility.
++
++ Args:
++ symbol: the symbol to check the parameters for
++
++ Returns:
++ dict: The parameters
++ bool: True if empty
++ """
++ params = SymbolParams.get(symbol, {})
++ # TODO: strip at parsing stage?
++ found = next((True for p in params.values() if p.strip() != ''), False)
++ return (params, found)
++
++
++def GetSymbolSourceLocation(symbol):
++ """Get the filename and line where the symbol docs where taken from."""
++ return SymbolSourceLocation.get(symbol, ('', 0))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Owen Taylor
++# 2001-2005 Damon Chaplin
++# 2009-2017 Stefan Sauer
++# 2017 Jussi Pakkanen
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import logging
++import os
++import sys
++import subprocess
++import shutil
++from glob import glob
++
++from . import config
++
++
++def run_xsltproc(options, args):
++ command = [config.xsltproc]
++ # we could do "$path_option $PWD " to avoid needing rewriting entities that
++ # are copied from the header into docs under xml
++ if os.environ.get("GTKDOC_PROFILE", '') == '':
++ if len(options.path):
++ command += ['--path', ':'.join(options.path)]
++ logging.info('running "%s"', ' '.join(command + args))
++ return subprocess.call(command + args)
++ else:
++ command += ['--profile']
++ if len(options.path):
++ command += ['--path', ':'.join(options.path)]
++ logging.info('running "%s"', ' '.join(command + args))
++ return subprocess.call(command + args, stderr=open('profile.txt', 'w'))
++
++
++def run(options):
++ logging.info('options: %s', str(options.__dict__))
++
++ module = options.args[0]
++ document = options.args[1]
++ if options.verbose:
++ quiet = '0'
++ else:
++ quiet = '1'
++ remaining_args = options.args[2:]
++
++ (gtkdocdir, styledir) = config.get_dirs(options.uninstalled)
++
++ res = run_xsltproc(options, [
++ '--nonet',
++ '--xinclude',
++ '--stringparam',
++ 'gtkdoc.bookname',
++ module,
++ '--stringparam',
++ 'gtkdoc.version',
++ config.version,
++ '--stringparam',
++ 'chunk.quietly',
++ quiet,
++ '--stringparam',
++ 'chunker.output.quiet',
++ quiet] + remaining_args + [gtkdocdir + '/gtk-doc.xsl', document])
++
++ # profiling
++ if os.environ.get("GTKDOC_PROFILE", '') != '':
++ subprocess.check_call('cat profile.txt | gprof2dot.py -e 0.01 -n 0.01 | dot -Tpng -o profile.png', shell=True)
++
++ # copy navigation images and stylesheets to html directory ...
++ for f in glob(styledir + '/*.png') + glob(styledir + '/*.css'):
++ shutil.copy(f, '.')
++
++ with open('../html.stamp', 'w') as h:
++ h.write('timestamp')
++ return res
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/usr/bin/env python3
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2018 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++"""Generate html from docbook
++
++The tool loads the main xml document (<module>-docs.xml) and chunks it
++like the xsl-stylesheets would do. For that it resolves all the xml-includes.
++Each chunk is converted to html using python functions.
++
++In contrast to our previous approach of running gtkdoc-mkhtml + gtkdoc-fixxref,
++this tools will replace both without relying on external tools such as xsltproc
++and source-highlight.
++
++Please note, that we're not aiming for complete docbook-xml support. All tags
++used in the generated xml are of course handled. More tags used in handwritten
++xml can be easily supported, but for some combinations of tags we prefer
++simplicity.
++
++TODO:
++- tag converters:
++ - 'section'/'simplesect' - the first we convert as a chunk, the nested ones we
++ need to convert as 'sect{2,3,4,...}, we can track depth in 'ctx'
++ - inside 'footnote' one can have many tags, we only handle 'para'/'simpara'
++ - inside 'glossentry' we're only handling 'glossterm' and 'glossdef'
++ - convert_{figure,table} need counters.
++- check each docbook tag if it can contain #PCDATA, if not don't check for
++ xml.text/xml.tail and add a comment (# no PCDATA allowed here)
++- find a better way to print context for warnings
++ - we use 'xml.sourceline', but this all does not help a lot due to xi:include
++- consolidate title handling:
++ - always use the titles-dict
++ - convert_title(): uses titles.get(tid)['title']
++ - convert_xref(): uses titles[tid]['tag'], ['title'] and ['xml']
++ - create_devhelp2_refsect2_keyword(): uses titles[tid]['title']
++ - there only store what we have (xml, tag, ...)
++ - when chunking generate 'id's and add entries to titles-dict
++ - add accessors for title and raw_title that lazily get them
++ - see if any of the other ~10 places that call convert_title() could use this
++ cache
++- performance
++ - consider some perf-warnings flag
++ - see 'No "id" attribute on'
++ - xinclude processing in libxml2 is slow
++ - if we disable it, we get '{http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude}include' tags
++ and we could try handling them ourself, in some cases those are subtrees
++ that we extract for chunking anyway
++
++DIFFERENCES:
++- titles
++ - we add the chunk label to the title in toc, on the page and in nav tooltips
++ - docbook xsl only sometimes adds the label to the titles and when it does it
++ adds name chunk type too (e.g. 'Part I.' instead of 'I.')
++- navigation
++ - we always add an up-link except on the first page
++- footer
++ - we're nov omitting the footer
++- tocs
++ - we always add "Table of Contents' before a toc
++ - docbook does that for some pages, it is configurable
++
++OPTIONAL:
++- minify html: https://pypi.python.org/pypi/htmlmin/
++
++Requirements:
++sudo pip3 install anytree lxml pygments
++
++Example invocation:
++cd tests/bugs/docs/
++mkdir -p db2html
++cd dbhtml
++../../../../gtkdoc-mkhtml2 tester ../tester-docs.xml
++cd ..
++xdg-open db2html/index.html
++meld html db2html
++
++Benchmarking:
++cd tests/bugs/docs/;
++rm html-build.stamp; time make html-build.stamp
++"""
++
++import logging
++import os
++import shutil
++import sys
++
++from anytree import Node, PreOrderIter
++from copy import deepcopy
++from glob import glob
++from lxml import etree
++from timeit import default_timer as timer
++
++from . import config, highlight, fixxref
++
++
++class ChunkParams(object):
++ def __init__(self, prefix, parent=None, min_idx=0):
++ self.prefix = prefix
++ self.parent = parent
++ self.min_idx = min_idx
++ self.idx = 1
++
++
++DONT_CHUNK = float('inf')
++# docbook-xsl defines the chunk tags here.
++# http://www.sagehill.net/docbookxsl/Chunking.html#GeneratedFilenames
++# https://github.com/oreillymedia/HTMLBook/blob/master/htmlbook-xsl/chunk.xsl#L33
++# If not defined, we can just create an example without an 'id' attr and see
++# docbook xsl does.
++#
++# For toc levels see http://www.sagehill.net/docbookxsl/TOCcontrol.html
++# TODO: this list has also a flag that controls whether we add the
++# 'Table of Contents' heading in convert_chunk_with_toc()
++CHUNK_PARAMS = {
++ 'appendix': ChunkParams('app', 'book'),
++ 'book': ChunkParams('bk'),
++ 'chapter': ChunkParams('ch', 'book'),
++ 'glossary': ChunkParams('go', 'book'),
++ 'index': ChunkParams('ix', 'book'),
++ 'part': ChunkParams('pt', 'book'),
++ 'preface': ChunkParams('pr', 'book'),
++ 'refentry': ChunkParams('re', 'book'),
++ 'reference': ChunkParams('rn', 'book'),
++ 'sect1': ChunkParams('s', 'chapter', 1),
++ 'section': ChunkParams('s', 'chapter', 1),
++ 'sect2': ChunkParams('s', 'sect1', DONT_CHUNK),
++ 'sect3': ChunkParams('s', 'sect2', DONT_CHUNK),
++ 'sect4': ChunkParams('s', 'sect3', DONT_CHUNK),
++ 'sect5': ChunkParams('s', 'sect4', DONT_CHUNK),
++}
++# TAGS we don't support:
++# 'article', 'bibliography', 'colophon', 'set', 'setindex'
++
++TITLE_XPATHS = {
++ '_': (etree.XPath('./title'), None),
++ 'book': (etree.XPath('./bookinfo/title'), None),
++ 'refentry': (
++ etree.XPath('./refmeta/refentrytitle'),
++ etree.XPath('./refnamediv/refpurpose')
++ ),
++}
++
++ID_XPATH = etree.XPath('//*[@id]')
++
++GLOSSENTRY_XPATH = etree.XPath('//glossentry')
++glossary = {}
++
++footnote_idx = 1
++
++# nested dict with subkeys:
++# title: textual title
++# tag: chunk tag
++# xml: title xml node
++titles = {}
++
++# files to copy
++assets = set()
++
++
++def encode_entities(text):
++ return text.replace('&', '&').replace('<', '<').replace('>', '>')
++
++
++def raw_text(xml):
++ return etree.tostring(xml, method="text", encoding=str).strip()
++
++
++def gen_chunk_name(node, chunk_params):
++ """Generate a chunk file name
++
++ This is either based on the id or on the position in the doc. In the latter
++ case it uses a prefix from CHUNK_PARAMS and a sequence number for each chunk
++ type.
++ """
++ idval = node.attrib.get('id')
++ if idval is not None:
++ return idval
++
++ name = ('%s%02d' % (chunk_params.prefix, chunk_params.idx))
++ chunk_params.idx += 1
++
++ # handle parents to make names of nested tags like in docbook
++ # - we only need to prepend the parent if there are > 1 of them in the
++ # xml. None, the parents we have are not sufficient, e.g. 'index' can
++ # be in 'book' or 'part' or ... Maybe we can track the chunk_parents
++ # when we chunk explicitly and on each level maintain the 'idx'
++ # while chunk_params.parent:
++ # parent = chunk_params.parent
++ # if parent not in CHUNK_PARAMS:
++ # break;
++ # chunk_params = CHUNK_PARAMS[parent]
++ # name = ('%s%02d' % (chunk_params.prefix, chunk_params.idx)) + name
++
++ logging.info('Gen chunk name: "%s"', name)
++ return name
++
++
++def get_chunk_titles(module, node, tree_node):
++ tag = node.tag
++ (title, subtitle) = TITLE_XPATHS.get(tag, TITLE_XPATHS['_'])
++
++ ctx = {
++ 'module': module,
++ 'files': [],
++ 'node': tree_node,
++ }
++ result = {
++ 'title': None,
++ 'title_tag': None,
++ 'subtitle': None,
++ 'subtitle_tag': None
++ }
++ res = title(node)
++ if res:
++ # handle chunk label for tocs
++ label = node.attrib.get('label')
++ if label:
++ label += '. '
++ else:
++ label = ''
++
++ xml = res[0]
++ # TODO: consider to eval 'title'/'raw_title' lazily
++ result['title'] = label + ''.join(convert_title(ctx, xml))
++ result['raw_title'] = encode_entities(raw_text(xml))
++ if xml.tag != 'title':
++ result['title_tag'] = xml.tag
++ else:
++ result['title_tag'] = tag
++
++ if subtitle:
++ res = subtitle(node)
++ if res:
++ xml = res[0]
++ result['subtitle'] = ''.join(convert_title(ctx, xml))
++ result['subtitle_tag'] = xml.tag
++ return result
++
++
++def chunk(xml_node, module, depth=0, idx=0, parent=None):
++ """Chunk the tree.
++
++ The first time, we're called with parent=None and in that case we return
++ the new_node as the root of the tree. For each tree-node we generate a
++ filename and process the children.
++ """
++ tag = xml_node.tag
++ chunk_params = CHUNK_PARAMS.get(tag)
++ if chunk_params:
++ title_args = get_chunk_titles(module, xml_node, parent)
++ chunk_name = gen_chunk_name(xml_node, chunk_params)
++
++ # check idx to handle 'sect1'/'section' special casing and title-only
++ # segments
++ if idx >= chunk_params.min_idx:
++ logging.info('chunk tag: "%s"[%d]', tag, idx)
++ if parent:
++ # remove the xml-node from the parent
++ sub_tree = etree.ElementTree(deepcopy(xml_node)).getroot()
++ xml_node.getparent().remove(xml_node)
++ xml_node = sub_tree
++
++ parent = Node(tag, parent=parent, xml=xml_node, depth=depth,
++ idx=idx,
++ filename=chunk_name + '.html', anchor=None,
++ **title_args)
++ else:
++ parent = Node(tag, parent=parent, xml=xml_node, depth=depth,
++ idx=idx,
++ filename=parent.filename, anchor='#' + chunk_name,
++ **title_args)
++
++ depth += 1
++ idx = 0
++ for child in xml_node:
++ chunk(child, module, depth, idx, parent)
++ if child.tag in CHUNK_PARAMS:
++ idx += 1
++
++ return parent
++
++
++def add_id_links_and_titles(files, links):
++ for node in files:
++ chunk_name = node.filename[:-5]
++ chunk_base = node.filename + '#'
++ for elem in ID_XPATH(node.xml):
++ attr = elem.attrib['id']
++ if attr == chunk_name:
++ links[attr] = node.filename
++ else:
++ links[attr] = chunk_base + attr
++
++ title = TITLE_XPATHS.get(elem.tag, TITLE_XPATHS['_'])[0]
++ res = title(elem)
++ if res:
++ xml = res[0]
++ # TODO: consider to eval 'title' lazily
++ titles[attr] = {
++ 'title': encode_entities(raw_text(xml)),
++ 'xml': xml,
++ 'tag': elem.tag,
++ }
++
++
++def build_glossary(files):
++ for node in files:
++ if node.xml.tag != 'glossary':
++ continue
++ for term in GLOSSENTRY_XPATH(node.xml):
++ # TODO: there can be all kind of things in a glossary. This only supports
++ # what we commonly use, glossterm is mandatory
++ key_node = term.find('glossterm')
++ val_node = term.find('glossdef')
++ if key_node is not None and val_node is not None:
++ glossary[raw_text(key_node)] = raw_text(val_node)
++ else:
++ debug = []
++ if key_node is None:
++ debug.append('missing key')
++ if val_node is None:
++ debug.append('missing val')
++ logging.warning('Broken glossentry "%s": %s',
++ term.attrib['id'], ','.join(debug))
++
++
++# conversion helpers
++
++
++def convert_inner(ctx, xml, result):
++ for child in xml:
++ result.extend(convert_tags.get(child.tag, convert__unknown)(ctx, child))
++
++
++def convert_ignore(ctx, xml):
++ result = []
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_skip(ctx, xml):
++ return []
++
++
++def append_idref(attrib, result):
++ idval = attrib.get('id')
++ if idval is not None:
++ result.append('<a name="%s"></a>' % idval)
++
++
++def append_text(ctx, text, result):
++ if text and ('no-strip' in ctx or text.strip()):
++ result.append(encode_entities(text))
++
++
++missing_tags = {}
++
++
++def convert__unknown(ctx, xml):
++ # don't recurse on subchunks
++ if xml.tag in CHUNK_PARAMS:
++ return []
++ if isinstance(xml, etree._Comment):
++ return ['<!-- ' + xml.text + '-->\n']
++ else:
++ # warn only once
++ if xml.tag not in missing_tags:
++ logging.warning('Add tag converter for "%s"', xml.tag)
++ missing_tags[xml.tag] = True
++ result = ['<!-- ' + xml.tag + '-->\n']
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('<!-- /' + xml.tag + '-->\n')
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_mediaobject_children(ctx, xml, result):
++ # look for textobject/phrase
++ alt_text = ''
++ textobject = xml.find('textobject')
++ if textobject is not None:
++ phrase = textobject.findtext('phrase')
++ if phrase:
++ alt_text = ' alt="%s"' % phrase
++
++ # look for imageobject/imagedata
++ imageobject = xml.find('imageobject')
++ if imageobject is not None:
++ imagedata = imageobject.find('imagedata')
++ if imagedata is not None:
++ # TODO(ensonic): warn on missing fileref attr?
++ fileref = imagedata.attrib.get('fileref', '')
++ if fileref:
++ assets.add(fileref)
++ result.append('<img src="%s"%s>' % (fileref, alt_text))
++
++
++def convert_sect(ctx, xml, h_tag, inner_func=convert_inner):
++ result = ['<div class="%s">\n' % xml.tag]
++ title_tag = xml.find('title')
++ if title_tag is not None:
++ append_idref(xml.attrib, result)
++ result.append('<%s>%s</%s>' % (
++ h_tag, ''.join(convert_title(ctx, title_tag)), h_tag))
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ inner_func(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</div>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def xml_get_title(ctx, xml):
++ title_tag = xml.find('title')
++ if title_tag is not None:
++ return ''.join(convert_title(ctx, title_tag))
++ else:
++ logging.warning('%s: Expected title tag under "%s %s"', xml.sourceline, xml.tag, str(xml.attrib))
++ return ''
++
++
++# docbook tags
++
++
++def convert_abstract(ctx, xml):
++ result = ["""<div class="abstract">
++ <p class="title"><b>Abstract</b></p>"""]
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</div>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_acronym(ctx, xml):
++ key = xml.text
++ title = glossary.get(key, '')
++ # TODO: print a sensible warning if missing
++ result = ['<acronym title="%s"><span class="acronym">%s</span></acronym>' % (title, key)]
++ if xml.tail:
++ result.append(xml.tail)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_anchor(ctx, xml):
++ return ['<a name="%s"></a>' % xml.attrib['id']]
++
++
++def convert_bookinfo(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<div class="titlepage">']
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append("""<hr>
++</div>""")
++ if xml.tail:
++ result.append(xml.tail)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_blockquote(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<div class="blockquote">\n<blockquote class="blockquote">']
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</blockquote>\n</div>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_code(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<code class="%s">' % xml.tag]
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</code>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_colspec(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<col']
++ colname = xml.attrib.get('colname')
++ if colname is not None:
++ result.append(' class="%s"' % colname)
++ colwidth = xml.attrib.get('colwidth')
++ if colwidth is not None:
++ result.append(' width="%s"' % colwidth)
++ result.append('>\n')
++ # is in tgroup and there can be no 'text'
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_command(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<strong class="userinput"><code>']
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</code></strong>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_corpauthor(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<div><h3 class="corpauthor">\n']
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</h3></div>\n')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_div(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<div class="%s">\n' % xml.tag]
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</div>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_emphasis(ctx, xml):
++ role = xml.attrib.get('role')
++ if role is not None:
++ result = ['<span class="%s">' % role]
++ end = '</span>'
++ else:
++ result = ['<span class="emphasis"><em>']
++ end = '</em></span>'
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append(end)
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_em(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<em class="%s">' % xml.tag]
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</em>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_em_code(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<em class="%s"><code>' % xml.tag]
++ append_idref(xml.attrib, result)
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</code></em>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_entry(ctx, xml):
++ entry_type = ctx['table.entry']
++ result = ['<' + entry_type]
++ role = xml.attrib.get('role')
++ if role is not None:
++ result.append(' class="%s"' % role)
++ morerows = xml.attrib.get('morerows')
++ if morerows is not None:
++ result.append(' rowspan="%s"' % (1 + int(morerows)))
++ result.append('>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</' + entry_type + '>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_figure(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<div class="figure">\n']
++ append_idref(xml.attrib, result)
++ title_tag = xml.find('title')
++ if title_tag is not None:
++ # TODO(ensonic): Add a 'Figure X. ' prefix, needs a figure counter
++ result.append('<p><b>%s</b></p>' % ''.join(convert_title(ctx, title_tag)))
++ result.append('<div class="figure-contents">')
++ # TODO(ensonic): title can become alt on inner 'graphic' element
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</div></div><br class="figure-break"/>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_footnote(ctx, xml):
++ footnotes = ctx.get('footnotes', [])
++ # footnotes idx is not per page, but per doc
++ global footnote_idx
++ idx = footnote_idx
++ footnote_idx += 1
++
++ # need a pair of ids for each footnote (docbook generates different ids)
++ this_id = 'footnote-%d' % idx
++ that_id = 'ftn.' + this_id
++
++ inner = ['<div id="%s" class="footnote">' % that_id]
++ inner.append('<p><a href="#%s" class="para"><sup class="para">[%d] </sup></a>' % (
++ this_id, idx))
++ # TODO(ensonic): this can contain all kind of tags, if we convert them we'll
++ # get double nested paras :/.
++ # convert_inner(ctx, xml, inner)
++ para = xml.find('para')
++ if para is None:
++ para = xml.find('simpara')
++ if para is not None:
++ inner.append(para.text)
++ else:
++ logging.warning('%s: Unhandled footnote content: %s', xml.sourceline, raw_text(xml))
++ inner.append('</p></div>')
++ footnotes.append(inner)
++ ctx['footnotes'] = footnotes
++ return ['<a href="#%s" class="footnote" name="%s"><sup class="footnote">[%s]</sup></a>' % (
++ that_id, this_id, idx)]
++
++
++def convert_formalpara(ctx, xml):
++ result = None
++ title_tag = xml.find('title')
++ result = ['<p><b>%s</b>' % ''.join(convert_title(ctx, title_tag))]
++ para_tag = xml.find('para')
++ append_text(ctx, para_tag.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, para_tag, result)
++ append_text(ctx, para_tag.tail, result)
++ result.append('</p>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_glossdef(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<dd class="glossdef">']
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</dd>\n')
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_glossdiv(ctx, xml):
++ title_tag = xml.find('title')
++ title = title_tag.text
++ xml.remove(title_tag)
++ result = [
++ '<a name="gls%s"></a><h3 class="title">%s</h3>' % (title, title)
++ ]
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_glossentry(ctx, xml):
++ result = []
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_glossterm(ctx, xml):
++ glossid = ''
++ text = ''
++ anchor = xml.find('anchor')
++ if anchor is not None:
++ glossid = anchor.attrib.get('id', '')
++ text += anchor.tail or ''
++ text += xml.text or ''
++ if glossid == '':
++ glossid = 'glossterm-' + text
++ return [
++ '<dt><span class="glossterm"><a name="%s"></a>%s</span></dt>' % (
++ glossid, text)
++ ]
++
++
++def convert_graphic(ctx, xml):
++ # TODO(ensonic): warn on missing fileref attr?
++ fileref = xml.attrib.get('fileref', '')
++ if fileref:
++ assets.add(fileref)
++ return ['<div><img src="%s"></div>' % fileref]
++
++
++def convert_indexdiv(ctx, xml):
++ title_tag = xml.find('title')
++ title = title_tag.text
++ xml.remove(title_tag)
++ result = [
++ '<a name="idx%s"></a><h3 class="title">%s</h3>' % (title, title)
++ ]
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_informaltable(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<div class="informaltable"><table class="informaltable"']
++ if xml.attrib.get('pgwide') == '1':
++ result.append(' width="100%"')
++ if xml.attrib.get('frame') == 'none':
++ result.append(' border="0"')
++ result.append('>\n')
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</table></div>')
++ if xml.tail:
++ result.append(xml.tail)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_inlinegraphic(ctx, xml):
++ # TODO(ensonic): warn on missing fileref attr?
++ fileref = xml.attrib.get('fileref', '')
++ if fileref:
++ assets.add(fileref)
++ return ['<img src="%s">' % fileref]
++
++
++def convert_inlinemediaobject(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<span class="inlinemediaobject">']
++ # no PCDATA allowed here
++ convert_mediaobject_children(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</span>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_itemizedlist(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" style="list-style-type: disc; ">']
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</ul></div>')
++ if xml.tail:
++ result.append(xml.tail)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_link(ctx, xml):
++ linkend = xml.attrib['linkend']
++ result = []
++ if linkend:
++ link_text = []
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, link_text)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, link_text)
++ text = ''.join(link_text)
++
++ (tid, href) = fixxref.GetXRef(linkend)
++ if href:
++ title_attr = ''
++ title = titles.get(tid)
++ if title:
++ title_attr = ' title="%s"' % title['title']
++
++ href = fixxref.MakeRelativeXRef(ctx['module'], href)
++ result = ['<a href="%s"%s>%s</a>' % (href, title_attr, text)]
++ else:
++ # TODO: filename is for the output and xml.sourceline is on the masterdoc ...
++ fixxref.ReportBadXRef(ctx['node'].filename, 0, linkend, text)
++ result = [text]
++ else:
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_listitem(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<li class="listitem">']
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</li>')
++ # no PCDATA allowed here, is in itemizedlist
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_literallayout(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<div class="literallayout"><p><br>\n']
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</p></div>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_mediaobject(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<div class="mediaobject">\n']
++ # no PCDATA allowed here
++ convert_mediaobject_children(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</div>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_orderedlist(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1">']
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</ol></div>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_para(ctx, xml):
++ result = []
++ role = xml.attrib.get('role')
++ if role is not None:
++ result.append('<p class="%s">' % role)
++ else:
++ result.append('<p>')
++ append_idref(xml.attrib, result)
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</p>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_para_like(ctx, xml):
++ result = []
++ append_idref(xml.attrib, result)
++ result.append('<p class="%s">' % xml.tag)
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</p>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_phrase(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<span']
++ role = xml.attrib.get('role')
++ if role is not None:
++ result.append(' class="%s">' % role)
++ else:
++ result.append('>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</span>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_primaryie(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<dt>\n']
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('\n</dt>\n<dd></dd>\n')
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_pre(ctx, xml):
++ # Since we're inside <pre> don't skip newlines
++ ctx['no-strip'] = True
++ result = ['<pre class="%s">' % xml.tag]
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</pre>')
++ del ctx['no-strip']
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_programlisting(ctx, xml):
++ result = []
++ if xml.attrib.get('role', '') == 'example':
++ if xml.text:
++ lang = xml.attrib.get('language', ctx['src-lang']).lower()
++ highlighted = highlight.highlight_code(xml.text, lang)
++ if highlighted:
++ # we do own line-numbering
++ line_count = highlighted.count('\n')
++ source_lines = '\n'.join([str(i) for i in range(1, line_count + 1)])
++ result.append("""<table class="listing_frame" border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
++ <tbody>
++ <tr>
++ <td class="listing_lines" align="right"><pre>%s</pre></td>
++ <td class="listing_code"><pre class="programlisting">%s</pre></td>
++ </tr>
++ </tbody>
++</table>
++""" % (source_lines, highlighted))
++ else:
++ logging.warn('No pygments lexer for language="%s"', lang)
++ result.append('<pre class="programlisting">')
++ result.append(xml.text)
++ result.append('</pre>')
++ else:
++ result.append('<pre class="programlisting">')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</pre>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_quote(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<span class="quote">"<span class="quote">']
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</span>"</span>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_refsect1(ctx, xml):
++ # Add a divider between two consequitive refsect2
++ def convert_inner(ctx, xml, result):
++ prev = None
++ for child in xml:
++ if child.tag == 'refsect2' and prev is not None and prev.tag == child.tag:
++ result.append('<hr>\n')
++ result.extend(convert_tags.get(child.tag, convert__unknown)(ctx, child))
++ prev = child
++ return convert_sect(ctx, xml, 'h2', convert_inner)
++
++
++def convert_refsect2(ctx, xml):
++ return convert_sect(ctx, xml, 'h3')
++
++
++def convert_refsect3(ctx, xml):
++ return convert_sect(ctx, xml, 'h4')
++
++
++def convert_row(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<tr>\n']
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</tr>\n')
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_sbr(ctx, xml):
++ return ['<br>']
++
++
++def convert_sect1_tag(ctx, xml):
++ return convert_sect(ctx, xml, 'h2')
++
++
++def convert_sect2(ctx, xml):
++ return convert_sect(ctx, xml, 'h3')
++
++
++def convert_sect3(ctx, xml):
++ return convert_sect(ctx, xml, 'h4')
++
++
++def convert_simpara(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<p>']
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</p>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_span(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<span class="%s">' % xml.tag]
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</span>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_table(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<div class="table">']
++ append_idref(xml.attrib, result)
++ title_tag = xml.find('title')
++ if title_tag is not None:
++ result.append('<p class="title"><b>')
++ # TODO(ensonic): Add a 'Table X. ' prefix, needs a table counter
++ result.extend(convert_title(ctx, title_tag))
++ result.append('</b></p>')
++ result.append('<div class="table-contents"><table class="table" summary="g_object_new" border="1">')
++
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++
++ result.append('</table></div></div>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_tag(ctx, xml):
++ classval = xml.attrib.get('class')
++ if classval is not None:
++ result = ['<code class="sgmltag-%s">' % classval]
++ else:
++ result = ['<code>']
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ result.append('</code>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_tbody(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<tbody>']
++ ctx['table.entry'] = 'td'
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</tbody>')
++ # is in tgroup and there can be no 'text'
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_tgroup(ctx, xml):
++ # tgroup does not expand to anything, but the nested colspecs need to
++ # be put into a colgroup
++ cols = xml.findall('colspec')
++ result = []
++ if cols:
++ result.append('<colgroup>\n')
++ for col in cols:
++ result.extend(convert_colspec(ctx, col))
++ xml.remove(col)
++ result.append('</colgroup>\n')
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ # is in informaltable and there can be no 'text'
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_thead(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<thead>']
++ ctx['table.entry'] = 'th'
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</thead>')
++ # is in tgroup and there can be no 'text'
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_title(ctx, xml):
++ # This is always explicitly called from some context
++ result = []
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_ulink(ctx, xml):
++ if xml.text:
++ result = ['<a class="%s" href="%s">%s</a>' % (xml.tag, xml.attrib['url'], xml.text)]
++ else:
++ url = xml.attrib['url']
++ result = ['<a class="%s" href="%s">%s</a>' % (xml.tag, url, url)]
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_userinput(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<span class="command"><strong>']
++ append_text(ctx, xml.text, result)
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append('</strong></span>')
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_variablelist(ctx, xml):
++ result = ["""<div class="variablelist"><table border="0" class="variablelist">
++<colgroup>
++<col align="left" valign="top">
++<col>
++</colgroup>
++<tbody>"""]
++ convert_inner(ctx, xml, result)
++ result.append("""</tbody>
++</table></div>""")
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_varlistentry(ctx, xml):
++ result = ['<tr>']
++
++ result.append('<td><p>')
++ term = xml.find('term')
++ result.extend(convert_span(ctx, term))
++ result.append('</p></td>')
++
++ result.append('<td>')
++ listitem = xml.find('listitem')
++ convert_inner(ctx, listitem, result)
++ result.append('</td>')
++
++ result.append('<tr>')
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_xref(ctx, xml):
++ result = []
++ linkend = xml.attrib['linkend']
++ (tid, href) = fixxref.GetXRef(linkend)
++ try:
++ title = titles[tid]
++ # all sectN need to become 'section
++ tag = title['tag']
++ tag = {
++ 'sect1': 'section',
++ 'sect2': 'section',
++ 'sect3': 'section',
++ 'sect4': 'section',
++ 'sect5': 'section',
++ }.get(tag, tag)
++ result = [
++ '<a class="xref" href="%s" title="%s">the %s called “%s”</a>' %
++ (href, title['title'], tag, ''.join(convert_title(ctx, title['xml'])))
++ ]
++ except KeyError:
++ logging.warning('invalid linkend "%s"', tid)
++
++ append_text(ctx, xml.tail, result)
++ return result
++
++
++# TODO(ensonic): turn into class with converters as functions and ctx as self
++convert_tags = {
++ 'abstract': convert_abstract,
++ 'acronym': convert_acronym,
++ 'anchor': convert_anchor,
++ 'application': convert_span,
++ 'bookinfo': convert_bookinfo,
++ 'blockquote': convert_blockquote,
++ 'classname': convert_code,
++ 'caption': convert_div,
++ 'code': convert_code,
++ 'colspec': convert_colspec,
++ 'constant': convert_code,
++ 'command': convert_command,
++ 'corpauthor': convert_corpauthor,
++ 'emphasis': convert_emphasis,
++ 'entry': convert_entry,
++ 'envar': convert_code,
++ 'footnote': convert_footnote,
++ 'figure': convert_figure,
++ 'filename': convert_code,
++ 'firstterm': convert_em,
++ 'formalpara': convert_formalpara,
++ 'function': convert_code,
++ 'glossdef': convert_glossdef,
++ 'glossdiv': convert_glossdiv,
++ 'glossentry': convert_glossentry,
++ 'glossterm': convert_glossterm,
++ 'graphic': convert_graphic,
++ 'indexdiv': convert_indexdiv,
++ 'indexentry': convert_ignore,
++ 'indexterm': convert_skip,
++ 'informalexample': convert_div,
++ 'informaltable': convert_informaltable,
++ 'inlinegraphic': convert_inlinegraphic,
++ 'inlinemediaobject': convert_inlinemediaobject,
++ 'interfacename': convert_code,
++ 'itemizedlist': convert_itemizedlist,
++ 'legalnotice': convert_div,
++ 'link': convert_link,
++ 'listitem': convert_listitem,
++ 'literal': convert_code,
++ 'literallayout': convert_literallayout,
++ 'mediaobject': convert_mediaobject,
++ 'note': convert_div,
++ 'option': convert_code,
++ 'orderedlist': convert_orderedlist,
++ 'para': convert_para,
++ 'partintro': convert_div,
++ 'parameter': convert_em_code,
++ 'phrase': convert_phrase,
++ 'primaryie': convert_primaryie,
++ 'programlisting': convert_programlisting,
++ 'quote': convert_quote,
++ 'releaseinfo': convert_para_like,
++ 'refsect1': convert_refsect1,
++ 'refsect2': convert_refsect2,
++ 'refsect3': convert_refsect3,
++ 'replaceable': convert_em_code,
++ 'returnvalue': convert_span,
++ 'row': convert_row,
++ 'sbr': convert_sbr,
++ 'screen': convert_pre,
++ 'section': convert_sect2, # FIXME: need tracking of nesting
++ 'sect1': convert_sect1_tag,
++ 'sect2': convert_sect2,
++ 'sect3': convert_sect3,
++ 'simpara': convert_simpara,
++ 'simplesect': convert_sect2, # FIXME: need tracking of nesting
++ 'structfield': convert_em_code,
++ 'structname': convert_span,
++ 'synopsis': convert_pre,
++ 'symbol': convert_span,
++ 'table': convert_table,
++ 'tag': convert_tag,
++ 'tbody': convert_tbody,
++ 'term': convert_span,
++ 'tgroup': convert_tgroup,
++ 'thead': convert_thead,
++ 'title': convert_skip,
++ 'type': convert_span,
++ 'ulink': convert_ulink,
++ 'userinput': convert_userinput,
++ 'varname': convert_code,
++ 'variablelist': convert_variablelist,
++ 'varlistentry': convert_varlistentry,
++ 'warning': convert_div,
++ 'xref': convert_xref,
++}
++
++# conversion helpers
++
++HTML_HEADER = """<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
++<html>
++<head>
++<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
++<title>%s</title>
++%s<link rel="stylesheet" href="style.css" type="text/css">
++</head>
++<body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF">
++"""
++
++
++def generate_head_links(ctx):
++ n = ctx['nav_home']
++ result = [
++ '<link rel="home" href="%s" title="%s">\n' % (n.filename, n.raw_title)
++ ]
++
++ n = ctx.get('nav_up')
++ if n is not None:
++ result.append('<link rel="up" href="%s" title="%s">\n' % (n.filename, n.raw_title))
++
++ n = ctx.get('nav_prev')
++ if n is not None:
++ result.append('<link rel="prev" href="%s" title="%s">\n' % (n.filename, n.raw_title))
++
++ n = ctx.get('nav_next')
++ if n is not None:
++ result.append('<link rel="next" href="%s" title="%s">\n' % (n.filename, n.raw_title))
++
++ return ''.join(result)
++
++
++def generate_nav_links(ctx):
++ n = ctx['nav_home']
++ result = [
++ '<td><a accesskey="h" href="%s"><img src="home.png" width="16" height="16" border="0" alt="Home"></a></td>' % n.filename
++ ]
++
++ n = ctx.get('nav_up')
++ if n is not None:
++ result.append(
++ '<td><a accesskey="u" href="%s"><img src="up.png" width="16" height="16" border="0" alt="Up"></a></td>' % n.filename)
++ else:
++ result.append('<td><img src="up-insensitive.png" width="16" height="16" border="0"></td>')
++
++ n = ctx.get('nav_prev')
++ if n is not None:
++ result.append(
++ '<td><a accesskey="p" href="%s"><img src="left.png" width="16" height="16" border="0" alt="Prev"></a></td>' % n.filename)
++ else:
++ result.append('<td><img src="left-insensitive.png" width="16" height="16" border="0"></td>')
++
++ n = ctx.get('nav_next')
++ if n is not None:
++ result.append(
++ '<td><a accesskey="n" href="%s"><img src="right.png" width="16" height="16" border="0" alt="Next"></a></td>' % n.filename)
++ else:
++ result.append('<td><img src="right-insensitive.png" width="16" height="16" border="0"></td>')
++
++ return ''.join(result)
++
++
++def generate_toc(ctx, node):
++ result = []
++ for c in node.children:
++ # TODO: urlencode the filename: urllib.parse.quote_plus()
++ link = c.filename
++ if c.anchor:
++ link += c.anchor
++ result.append('<dt><span class="%s"><a href="%s">%s</a></span>\n' % (
++ c.title_tag, link, c.title))
++ if c.subtitle:
++ result.append('<span class="%s"> — %s</span>' % (c.subtitle_tag, c.subtitle))
++ result.append('</dt>\n')
++ if c.children:
++ result.append('<dd><dl>')
++ result.extend(generate_toc(ctx, c))
++ result.append('</dl></dd>')
++ return result
++
++
++def generate_basic_nav(ctx):
++ return """<table class="navigation" id="top" width="100%%" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="5">
++ <tr valign="middle">
++ <td width="100%%" align="left" class="shortcuts"></td>
++ %s
++ </tr>
++</table>
++ """ % generate_nav_links(ctx)
++
++
++def generate_alpha_nav(ctx, divs, prefix, span_id):
++ ix_nav = []
++ for s in divs:
++ title = xml_get_title(ctx, s)
++ ix_nav.append('<a class="shortcut" href="#%s%s">%s</a>' % (prefix, title, title))
++
++ return """<table class="navigation" id="top" width="100%%" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="5">
++ <tr valign="middle">
++ <td width="100%%" align="left" class="shortcuts">
++ <span id="nav_%s">
++ %s
++ </span>
++ </td>
++ %s
++ </tr>
++</table>
++ """ % (span_id, '\n<span class="dim">|</span>\n'.join(ix_nav), generate_nav_links(ctx))
++
++
++def generate_refentry_nav(ctx, refsect1s, result):
++ result.append("""<table class="navigation" id="top" width="100%" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="5">
++ <tr valign="middle">
++ <td width="100%" align="left" class="shortcuts">
++ <a href="#" class="shortcut">Top</a>""")
++
++ for s in refsect1s:
++ # don't list TOC sections (role="xxx_proto")
++ if s.attrib.get('role', '').endswith("_proto"):
++ continue
++ # skip section without 'id' attrs
++ ref_id = s.attrib.get('id')
++ if ref_id is None:
++ continue
++
++ # skip foreign sections
++ if '.' not in ref_id:
++ continue
++
++ title = xml_get_title(ctx, s)
++ span_id = ref_id.split('.')[1].replace('-', '_')
++
++ result.append("""
++ <span id="nav_%s">
++ <span class="dim">|</span>
++ <a href="#%s" class="shortcut">%s</a>
++ </span>
++ """ % (span_id, ref_id, title))
++ result.append("""
++ </td>
++ %s
++ </tr>
++</table>
++""" % generate_nav_links(ctx))
++
++
++def generate_footer(ctx):
++ footnotes = ctx.get('footnotes')
++ if footnotes is None:
++ return []
++
++ result = ["""<div class="footnotes">\n
++<br><hr style="width:100; text-align:left;margin-left: 0">
++"""]
++ for f in footnotes:
++ result.extend(f)
++ result.append('</div>\n')
++ return result
++
++
++def get_id_path(node):
++ """ Generate the 'id'.
++ We need to walk up the xml-tree and check the positions for each sibling.
++ When reaching the top of the tree we collect remaining index entries from
++ the chunked-tree.
++ """
++ ix = []
++ xml = node.xml
++ parent = xml.getparent()
++ while parent is not None:
++ children = parent.getchildren()
++ ix.insert(0, str(children.index(xml) + 1))
++ xml = parent
++ parent = xml.getparent()
++ while node is not None:
++ ix.insert(0, str(node.idx + 1))
++ node = node.parent
++
++ return ix
++
++
++def get_id(node):
++ xml = node.xml
++ node_id = xml.attrib.get('id', None)
++ if node_id:
++ return node_id
++
++ # TODO: this is moot if nothing links to it, we could also consider to omit
++ # the <a name="$id"></a> tag.
++ logging.info('%d: No "id" attribute on "%s", generating one',
++ xml.sourceline, xml.tag)
++ ix = get_id_path(node)
++ # logging.warning('%s: id indexes: %s', node.filename, str(ix))
++ return 'id-' + '.'.join(ix)
++
++
++def convert_chunk_with_toc(ctx, div_class, title_tag):
++ node = ctx['node']
++ result = [
++ HTML_HEADER % (node.title + ": " + node.root.title, generate_head_links(ctx)),
++ generate_basic_nav(ctx),
++ '<div class="%s">' % div_class,
++ ]
++ if node.title:
++ result.append("""
++<div class="titlepage">
++<%s class="title"><a name="%s"></a>%s</%s>
++</div>""" % (
++ title_tag, get_id(node), node.title, title_tag))
++
++ toc = generate_toc(ctx, node)
++ if toc:
++ # TODO: not all docbook page types use this extra heading
++ result.append("""<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
++ <div class="toc">
++ <dl class="toc">
++ """)
++ result.extend(toc)
++ result.append("""</dl>
++ </div>
++ """)
++ convert_inner(ctx, node.xml, result)
++ result.extend(generate_footer(ctx))
++ result.append("""</div>
++</body>
++</html>""")
++ return result
++
++
++# docbook chunks
++
++
++def convert_book(ctx):
++ node = ctx['node']
++ result = [
++ HTML_HEADER % (node.title, generate_head_links(ctx)),
++ """<table class="navigation" id="top" width="100%%" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
++ <tr><th valign="middle"><p class="title">%s</p></th></tr>
++</table>
++<div class="book">
++""" % node.title
++ ]
++ bookinfo = node.xml.findall('bookinfo')[0]
++ result.extend(convert_bookinfo(ctx, bookinfo))
++ result.append("""<div class="toc">
++ <dl class="toc">
++""")
++ result.extend(generate_toc(ctx, node.root))
++ result.append("""</dl>
++</div>
++""")
++ result.extend(generate_footer(ctx))
++ result.append("""</div>
++</body>
++</html>""")
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_chapter(ctx):
++ return convert_chunk_with_toc(ctx, 'chapter', 'h2')
++
++
++def convert_glossary(ctx):
++ node = ctx['node']
++ glossdivs = node.xml.findall('glossdiv')
++
++ result = [
++ HTML_HEADER % (node.title + ": " + node.root.title, generate_head_links(ctx)),
++ generate_alpha_nav(ctx, glossdivs, 'gls', 'glossary'),
++ """<div class="glossary">
++<div class="titlepage"><h%1d class="title">
++<a name="%s"></a>%s</h%1d>
++</div>""" % (node.depth, get_id(node), node.title, node.depth)
++ ]
++ for i in glossdivs:
++ result.extend(convert_glossdiv(ctx, i))
++ result.extend(generate_footer(ctx))
++ result.append("""</div>
++</body>
++</html>""")
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_index(ctx):
++ node = ctx['node']
++ # Get all indexdivs under indexdiv
++ indexdivs = []
++ indexdiv = node.xml.find('indexdiv')
++ if indexdiv is not None:
++ indexdivs = indexdiv.findall('indexdiv')
++
++ result = [
++ HTML_HEADER % (node.title + ": " + node.root.title, generate_head_links(ctx)),
++ generate_alpha_nav(ctx, indexdivs, 'idx', 'index'),
++ """<div class="index">
++<div class="titlepage"><h%1d class="title">
++<a name="%s"></a>%s</h%1d>
++</div>""" % (node.depth, get_id(node), node.title, node.depth)
++ ]
++ for i in indexdivs:
++ result.extend(convert_indexdiv(ctx, i))
++ result.extend(generate_footer(ctx))
++ result.append("""</div>
++</body>
++</html>""")
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_part(ctx):
++ return convert_chunk_with_toc(ctx, 'part', 'h1')
++
++
++def convert_preface(ctx):
++ node = ctx['node']
++ result = [
++ HTML_HEADER % (node.title + ": " + node.root.title, generate_head_links(ctx)),
++ generate_basic_nav(ctx),
++ '<div class="preface">'
++ ]
++ if node.title:
++ result.append("""
++<div class="titlepage">
++<h2 class="title"><a name="%s"></a>%s</h2>
++</div>""" % (get_id(node), node.title))
++ convert_inner(ctx, node.xml, result)
++ result.extend(generate_footer(ctx))
++ result.append("""</div>
++</body>
++</html>""")
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_reference(ctx):
++ return convert_chunk_with_toc(ctx, 'reference', 'h1')
++
++
++def convert_refentry(ctx):
++ node = ctx['node']
++ node_id = get_id(node)
++ refsect1s = node.xml.findall('refsect1')
++
++ gallery = ''
++ refmeta = node.xml.find('refmeta')
++ if refmeta is not None:
++ refmiscinfo = refmeta.find('refmiscinfo')
++ if refmiscinfo is not None:
++ inlinegraphic = refmiscinfo.find('inlinegraphic')
++ if inlinegraphic is not None:
++ gallery = ''.join(convert_inlinegraphic(ctx, inlinegraphic))
++
++ result = [
++ HTML_HEADER % (node.title + ": " + node.root.title, generate_head_links(ctx))
++ ]
++ generate_refentry_nav(ctx, refsect1s, result)
++ result.append("""
++<div class="refentry">
++<a name="%s"></a>
++<div class="refnamediv">
++ <table width="100%%"><tr>
++ <td valign="top">
++ <h2><span class="refentrytitle"><a name="%s.top_of_page"></a>%s</span></h2>
++ <p>%s — %s</p>
++ </td>
++ <td class="gallery_image" valign="top" align="right">%s</td>
++ </tr></table>
++</div>
++""" % (node_id, node_id, node.title, node.title, node.subtitle, gallery))
++
++ for s in refsect1s:
++ result.extend(convert_refsect1(ctx, s))
++ result.extend(generate_footer(ctx))
++ result.append("""</div>
++</body>
++</html>""")
++ return result
++
++
++def convert_section(ctx):
++ return convert_chunk_with_toc(ctx, 'section', 'h2')
++
++
++def convert_sect1(ctx):
++ return convert_chunk_with_toc(ctx, 'sect1', 'h2')
++
++
++# TODO(ensonic): turn into class with converters as functions and ctx as self
++convert_chunks = {
++ 'book': convert_book,
++ 'chapter': convert_chapter,
++ 'glossary': convert_glossary,
++ 'index': convert_index,
++ 'part': convert_part,
++ 'preface': convert_preface,
++ 'reference': convert_reference,
++ 'refentry': convert_refentry,
++ 'section': convert_section,
++ 'sect1': convert_sect1,
++}
++
++
++def generate_nav_nodes(files, node):
++ nav = {
++ 'nav_home': node.root,
++ }
++ # nav params: up, prev, next
++ if node.parent:
++ nav['nav_up'] = node.parent
++ ix = files.index(node)
++ if ix > 0:
++ nav['nav_prev'] = files[ix - 1]
++ if ix < len(files) - 1:
++ nav['nav_next'] = files[ix + 1]
++ return nav
++
++
++def convert_content(module, files, node, src_lang):
++ converter = convert_chunks.get(node.name)
++ if converter is None:
++ logging.warning('Add chunk converter for "%s"', node.name)
++ return []
++
++ ctx = {
++ 'module': module,
++ 'files': files,
++ 'node': node,
++ 'src-lang': src_lang,
++ }
++ ctx.update(generate_nav_nodes(files, node))
++ return converter(ctx)
++
++
++def convert(out_dir, module, files, node, src_lang):
++ """Convert the docbook chunks to a html file.
++
++ Args:
++ out_dir: already created output dir
++ files: list of nodes in the tree in pre-order
++ node: current tree node
++ """
++
++ logging.info('Writing: %s', node.filename)
++ with open(os.path.join(out_dir, node.filename), 'wt',
++ newline='\n', encoding='utf-8') as html:
++ for line in convert_content(module, files, node, src_lang):
++ html.write(line)
++
++
++def create_devhelp2_toc(node):
++ result = []
++ for c in node.children:
++ if c.children:
++ result.append('<sub name="%s" link="%s">\n' % (c.raw_title, c.filename))
++ result.extend(create_devhelp2_toc(c))
++ result.append('</sub>\n')
++ else:
++ result.append('<sub name="%s" link="%s"/>\n' % (c.raw_title, c.filename))
++ return result
++
++
++def create_devhelp2_condition_attribs(node):
++ condition = node.attrib.get('condition')
++ if condition is not None:
++ # condition -> since, deprecated, ... (separated with '|')
++ cond = condition.replace('"', '"').split('|')
++ keywords = []
++ for c in cond:
++ if ':' in c:
++ keywords.append('{}="{}"'.format(*c.split(':', 1)))
++ else:
++ # deprecated can have no description
++ keywords.append('{}="{}"'.format(c, ''))
++ return ' ' + ' '.join(keywords)
++ else:
++ return ''
++
++
++def create_devhelp2_refsect2_keyword(node, base_link):
++ node_id = node.attrib['id']
++ return' <keyword type="%s" name="%s" link="%s"%s/>\n' % (
++ node.attrib['role'], titles[node_id]['title'], base_link + node_id,
++ create_devhelp2_condition_attribs(node))
++
++
++def create_devhelp2_refsect3_keyword(node, base_link, title, name):
++ return' <keyword type="%s" name="%s" link="%s"%s/>\n' % (
++ node.attrib['role'], title, base_link + name,
++ create_devhelp2_condition_attribs(node))
++
++
++def create_devhelp2_content(module, xml, files):
++ title = ''
++ online_attr = ''
++ bookinfo_nodes = xml.xpath('/book/bookinfo')
++ if len(bookinfo_nodes):
++ bookinfo = bookinfo_nodes[0]
++ title = bookinfo.xpath('./title/text()')[0]
++ online_url = bookinfo.xpath('./releaseinfo/ulink[@role="online-location"]/@url')
++ if len(online_url):
++ online_attr = ' online="' + online_url[0] + '"'
++ # TODO: support author too (see devhelp2.xsl), it is hardly used though
++ # locate *.devhelp2 | xargs grep -Hn --color ' author="[^"]'
++ # TODO: fixxref uses '--src-lang' to set the language, we have this in options too
++ result = [
++ """<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" standalone="no"?>
++<book xmlns="http://www.devhelp.net/book" title="%s" link="index.html" author="" name="%s" version="2" language="c"%s>
++ <chapters>
++""" % (title, module, online_attr)
++ ]
++ # toc
++ result.extend(create_devhelp2_toc(files[0].root))
++ result.append(""" </chapters>
++ <functions>
++""")
++ # keywords from all refsect2 and refsect3
++ refsect2 = etree.XPath('//refsect2[@role]')
++ refsect3_enum = etree.XPath('refsect3[@role="enum_members"]/informaltable/tgroup/tbody/row[@role="constant"]')
++ refsect3_enum_details = etree.XPath('entry[@role="enum_member_name"]/para')
++ refsect3_struct = etree.XPath('refsect3[@role="struct_members"]/informaltable/tgroup/tbody/row[@role="member"]')
++ refsect3_struct_details = etree.XPath('entry[@role="struct_member_name"]/para/structfield')
++ for node in files:
++ base_link = node.filename + '#'
++ refsect2_nodes = refsect2(node.xml)
++ for refsect2_node in refsect2_nodes:
++ result.append(create_devhelp2_refsect2_keyword(refsect2_node, base_link))
++ refsect3_nodes = refsect3_enum(refsect2_node)
++ for refsect3_node in refsect3_nodes:
++ details_node = refsect3_enum_details(refsect3_node)[0]
++ name = details_node.attrib['id']
++ result.append(create_devhelp2_refsect3_keyword(refsect3_node, base_link, details_node.text, name))
++ refsect3_nodes = refsect3_struct(refsect2_node)
++ for refsect3_node in refsect3_nodes:
++ details_node = refsect3_struct_details(refsect3_node)[0]
++ name = details_node.attrib['id']
++ result.append(create_devhelp2_refsect3_keyword(refsect3_node, base_link, name, name))
++
++ result.append(""" </functions>
++</book>
++""")
++ return result
++
++
++def create_devhelp2(out_dir, module, xml, files):
++ with open(os.path.join(out_dir, module + '.devhelp2'), 'wt',
++ newline='\n', encoding='utf-8') as idx:
++ for line in create_devhelp2_content(module, xml, files):
++ idx.write(line)
++
++
++class FakeDTDResolver(etree.Resolver):
++ """Don't load the docbookx.dtd since we disable the validation anyway.
++
++ libxsml2 does not cache DTDs. If we produce a docbook file with 100 chunks
++ loading such a doc with xincluding will load and parse the docbook DTD 100
++ times. This cases tons of memory allocations and is slow.
++ """
++
++ def resolve(self, url, id, context):
++ if not url.endswith('.dtd'):
++ return None
++ # http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.5/docbookx.dtd
++ return self.resolve_string('', context)
++
++
++def main(module, index_file, out_dir, uninstalled, src_lang, paths):
++
++ # == Loading phase ==
++ # the next 3 steps could be done in parallel
++
++ # 1) load the docuemnt
++ _t = timer()
++ parser = etree.XMLParser(dtd_validation=False, collect_ids=False)
++ parser.resolvers.add(FakeDTDResolver())
++ tree = etree.parse(index_file, parser)
++ logging.warning("1a: %7.3lf: load doc", timer() - _t)
++ _t = timer()
++ tree.xinclude()
++ logging.warning("1b: %7.3lf: xinclude doc", timer() - _t)
++
++ # 2) copy datafiles
++ _t = timer()
++ # TODO: handle additional images
++ (gtkdocdir, styledir) = config.get_dirs(uninstalled)
++ # copy navigation images and stylesheets to html directory ...
++ css_file = os.path.join(styledir, 'style.css')
++ for f in glob(os.path.join(styledir, '*.png')) + [css_file]:
++ shutil.copy(f, out_dir)
++ highlight.append_style_defs(os.path.join(out_dir, 'style.css'))
++ logging.warning("2: %7.3lf: copy datafiles", timer() - _t)
++
++ # 3) load xref targets
++ _t = timer()
++ # TODO: migrate options from fixxref
++ # TODO: ideally explicitly specify the files we need, this will save us the
++ # globbing and we'll load less files.
++ fixxref.LoadIndicies(out_dir, '/usr/share/gtk-doc/html', [])
++ logging.warning("3: %7.3lf: load xrefs", timer() - _t)
++
++ # == Processing phase ==
++
++ # 4) recursively walk the tree and chunk it into a python tree so that we
++ # can generate navigation and link tags.
++ _t = timer()
++ files = chunk(tree.getroot(), module)
++ files = [f for f in PreOrderIter(files) if f.anchor is None]
++ logging.warning("4: %7.3lf: chunk doc", timer() - _t)
++
++ # 5) extract tables:
++ _t = timer()
++ # TODO: can be done in parallel
++ # - find all 'id' attribs and add them to the link map
++ # - .. get their titles and store them into the titles map
++ add_id_links_and_titles(files, fixxref.Links)
++ # - build glossary dict
++ build_glossary(files)
++ logging.warning("5: %7.3lf: extract tables", timer() - _t)
++
++ # == Output phase ==
++ # the next two step could be done in parllel
++
++ # 6) create a xxx.devhelp2 file
++ _t = timer()
++ create_devhelp2(out_dir, module, tree.getroot(), files)
++ logging.warning("6: %7.3lf: create devhelp2", timer() - _t)
++
++ # 7) iterate the tree and output files
++ _t = timer()
++ # TODO: can be done in parallel, figure out why this is not faster
++ # from multiprocessing.pool import Pool
++ # with Pool(4) as p:
++ # p.apply_async(convert, args=(out_dir, module, files))
++ # from multiprocessing.pool import ThreadPool
++ # with ThreadPool(4) as p:
++ # p.apply_async(convert, args=(out_dir, module, files))
++ for node in files:
++ convert(out_dir, module, files, node, src_lang)
++ logging.warning("7: %7.3lf: create html", timer() - _t)
++
++ # 8) copy assets over
++ _t = timer()
++ paths = set(paths + [os.getcwd()])
++ for a in assets:
++ logging.info('trying %s in %s', a, str(paths))
++ copied = False
++ for p in paths:
++ try:
++ shutil.copy(os.path.join(p, a), out_dir)
++ copied = True
++ except FileNotFoundError:
++ pass
++ if not copied:
++ logging.warning('file %s not found in path (did you add --path?)', a)
++ logging.warning("8: %7.3lf: copy assets", timer() - _t)
++
++
++def run(options):
++ logging.info('options: %s', str(options.__dict__))
++ module = options.args[0]
++ document = options.args[1]
++
++ output_dir = options.output_dir or os.getcmd()
++ if options.output_dir and not os.path.isdir(output_dir):
++ os.mkdir(output_dir)
++
++ # TODO: pass options.extra_dir
++ sys.exit(main(module, document, output_dir, options.uninstalled, options.src_lang,
++ options.path))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Owen Taylor
++# 2001-2005 Damon Chaplin
++# 2009-2017 Stefan Sauer
++# 2017 Jussi Pakkanen
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import logging
++import subprocess
++
++from . import config
++
++
++def run(options):
++ logging.info('options: %s', str(options.__dict__))
++
++ module = options.args[0]
++ document = options.args[1]
++ if options.verbose:
++ quiet = '0'
++ else:
++ quiet = '1'
++
++ # we could do "--path $PWD " to avoid needing rewriting entities that
++ # are copied from the header into docs under xml
++ path_arg = []
++ for path in options.path:
++ path_arg += ['--path', path]
++
++ # would it make sense to create man pages only for certain refentries
++ # e.g. for tools
++ # see http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=467488
++ return subprocess.call([config.xsltproc] + path_arg + [
++ '--nonet',
++ '--xinclude',
++ '--stringparam',
++ 'gtkdoc.bookname',
++ module,
++ '--stringparam',
++ 'gtkdoc.version',
++ config.version,
++ '--stringparam',
++ 'chunk.quietly ',
++ quiet,
++ '--stringparam',
++ 'chunker.output.quiet',
++ quiet,
++ 'http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl',
++ document])
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2009-2017 Stefan Sauer
++# 2017 Jussi Pakkanen
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import logging
++import os
++import sys
++import subprocess
++
++from . import config
++
++
++def run_xsltproc(options, args):
++ command = [config.xsltproc]
++ # we could do "--path $PWD " to avoid needing rewriting entities that are
++ # copied from the header into docs under xml
++ if len(options.path):
++ command += ['--path', ':'.join(options.path)]
++ logging.info('running "%s"', ' '.join(command + args))
++ pc = subprocess.Popen(command + args, stderr=subprocess.PIPE)
++ (o, stde) = pc.communicate()
++ with open('profile.txt', 'wb') as h:
++ h.write(stde)
++ return pc.returncode
++
++
++def run(options):
++ logging.info('options: %s', str(options.__dict__))
++
++ module = options.args[0]
++ document = options.args[1]
++
++ gtkdocdir, _ = config.get_dirs(options.uninstalled)
++
++ if config.dblatex != '':
++ # extra options to consider
++ # -I FIG_PATH
++ # -V is useful for debugging
++ # -T db2latex : different style
++ # -d : keep transient files (for debugging)
++ # -P abc.def=$quiet : once the stylesheets have a quiet mode
++ # -x "--path /path/to/more/files"
++ # xsltproc is already called with --xinclude
++ # does not work: --xslt-opts "--path $searchpath --nonet $@"
++ dblatex_options = ['-o', module + '.pdf']
++ for i in options.imgdir:
++ dblatex_options += ['-I', i]
++ if len(options.path):
++ dblatex_options += ['-x', '--path ' + ':'.join(options.path)]
++ dblatex_options.append(document)
++ if not options.verbose:
++ pc = subprocess.Popen([config.dblatex, '--help'], stdout=subprocess.PIPE, stderr=subprocess.PIPE)
++ (stdo, stde) = pc.communicate()
++ if b'--quiet' in stdo or b'--quiet' in stde:
++ dblatex_options = ['--quiet'] + dblatex_options
++ dbcmd = [config.dblatex] + dblatex_options
++ pc = subprocess.Popen(dbcmd, stdout=subprocess.PIPE, stderr=subprocess.STDOUT)
++ (stde, _) = pc.communicate()
++ for line in stde.decode('utf-8').split('\n'):
++ if not line.strip():
++ continue
++ if 'programlisting or screen' in line:
++ continue
++ # This happens when dblatex has no support for some special chars
++ if 'Missing character' in line:
++ continue
++ print(line)
++ res = pc.returncode
++ elif config.fop != '':
++ if options.verbose:
++ quiet = '0'
++ else:
++ quiet = '1'
++ res = run_xsltproc(options, ['--nonet',
++ '--xinclude',
++ '--stringparam',
++ 'gtkdoc.bookname',
++ module,
++ '--stringparam',
++ 'gtkdoc.version',
++ config.version,
++ '--stringparam',
++ 'chunk.quietly',
++ quiet,
++ '--stringparam',
++ 'chunker.output.quiet',
++ quiet,
++ module,
++ document,
++ '-o',
++ module + '.fo',
++ gtkdocdir + '/gtk-doc-fo.xsl',
++ document])
++ # TODO: fop dies too easily :(
++ # res = subprocess.call([config.fop, module + '.fo', module + '.pdf'))
++ fname = module + '.fo'
++ if os.path.exists(fname):
++ os.unlink(fname)
++ else:
++ print("dblatex or fop must be installed to use gtkdoc-mkpdf.")
++ res = 1
++
++ with open('pdf.stamp', 'w') as h:
++ h.write('timestamp')
++ return res
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007 David Necas (Yeti)
++# 2007-2016 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++"""
++The rebase tool rewrites URI references in installed HTML documentation.
++"""
++
++import logging
++import os
++import re
++
++from . import common
++
++# Maps.
++# These two point to the last seen URI of given type for a package:
++# OnlineMap: package => on-line URI
++# LocalMap: package => local URI
++# This maps all seen URIs of a package to fix broken links in the process:
++# RevMap: URI => package
++OnlineMap = {}
++LocalMap = {}
++RevMap = {}
++# Remember what mangling we did.
++Mapped = {}
++
++
++def log(options, *msg):
++ if options.verbose:
++ print(*msg)
++
++
++def run(options):
++ other_dirs = []
++
++ # We scan the directory containing GLib and any directories in GNOME2_PATH
++ # first, but these will be overridden by any later scans.
++ if "GNOME2_PATH" in os.environ:
++ for dir in os.environ["GNOME2_PATH"].split(':'):
++ dir = os.path.join(dir, "share/gtk-doc/html")
++ if os.path.isdir(dir):
++ log(options, "Prepending GNOME2_PATH directory:", dir)
++ other_dirs = [dir] + other_dirs
++
++ glib_dir = common.GetModuleDocDir('glib-2.0')
++ if glib_dir:
++ log(options, "Prepending GLib directory", glib_dir)
++ other_dirs = [glib_dir] + other_dirs
++
++ # Check all other dirs, but skip already scanned dirs ord subdirs of those
++
++ for dir in other_dirs:
++ ScanDirectory(dir, options)
++
++ if options.relative:
++ RelativizeLocalMap(options.html_dir, options)
++
++ RebaseReferences(options.html_dir, options)
++ PrintWhatWeHaveDone()
++
++
++def ScanDirectory(scan_dir, options):
++ log(options, "Scanning documentation directory %s", scan_dir)
++
++ if scan_dir == options.html_dir:
++ log(options, "Excluding self")
++ return
++
++ if not os.path.isdir(scan_dir):
++ logging.info('Cannot open dir "%s"', scan_dir)
++ return
++
++ subdirs = []
++ onlinedir = None
++ have_index = False
++ for entry in sorted(os.listdir(scan_dir)):
++ full_entry = os.path.join(scan_dir, entry)
++ if os.path.isdir(full_entry):
++ subdirs.append(full_entry)
++ continue
++
++ if entry.endswith('.devhelp2'):
++ log(options, "Reading index from " + entry)
++ o = ReadDevhelp(scan_dir, entry)
++ # Prefer this location over possibly stale index.sgml
++ if o is not None:
++ onlinedir = o
++ have_index = True
++
++ if onlinedir and entry == "index.sgml":
++ log(options, "Reading index from index.sgml")
++ onlinedir = ReadIndex(scan_dir, entry)
++ have_index = True
++ elif entry == "index.sgml.gz" and not os.path.exists(os.path.join(scan_dir, 'index.sgml')):
++ # debian/ubuntu started to compress this as index.sgml.gz :/
++ print(''' Please fix https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+source/gtk-doc/+bug/77138 . For now run:
++gunzip %s/%s
++''' % (scan_dir, entry))
++ elif entry.endswith('.devhelp2.gz') and not os.path.exists(full_entry[:-3]):
++ # debian/ubuntu started to compress this as *devhelp2.gz :/
++ print('''Please fix https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+source/gtk-doc/+bug/1466210 . For now run:
++gunzip %s/%s
++''' % (scan_dir, entry))
++ # we could consider supporting: gzip module
++
++ if have_index:
++ AddMap(scan_dir, onlinedir, options)
++
++ # Now recursively scan the subdirectories.
++ for subdir in subdirs:
++ ScanDirectory(subdir, options)
++
++
++def ReadDevhelp(dir, file):
++ onlinedir = None
++
++ for line in open(os.path.join(dir, file), mode='r', encoding='utf-8'):
++ # online must come before chapter/functions
++ if '<chapters' in line or '<functions' in line:
++ break
++ match = re.search(r' online="([^"]*)"', line)
++ if match:
++ # Remove trailing non-directory component.
++ onlinedir = re.sub(r'(.*/).*', r'\1', match.group(1))
++ return onlinedir
++
++
++def ReadIndex(dir, file):
++ onlinedir = None
++
++ for line in open(os.path.join(dir, file), mode='r', encoding='utf-8'):
++ # ONLINE must come before any ANCHORs
++ if '<ANCHOR' in line:
++ break
++ match = re.match(r'''^<ONLINE\s+href\s*=\s*"([^"]+)"\s*>''', line)
++ if match:
++ # Remove trailing non-directory component.
++ onlinedir = re.sub(r'''(.*/).*''', r'\1', match.group(1))
++ return onlinedir
++
++
++def AddMap(dir, onlinedir, options):
++ package = None
++
++ package = os.path.split(dir)[1]
++ if options.dest_dir != '' and dir.startswith(options.dest_dir):
++ dir = dir[len(options.dest_dir) - 1:]
++
++ if onlinedir:
++ log(options, "On-line location of %s." % onlinedir)
++ OnlineMap[package] = onlinedir
++ RevMap[onlinedir] = package
++ else:
++ log(options, "No On-line location for %s found" % package)
++
++ log(options, "Local location of $package: " + dir)
++ LocalMap[package] = dir
++ RevMap[dir] = package
++
++
++def RelativizeLocalMap(dirname, options):
++ prefix = None
++ dir = None
++
++ dirname = os.path.realpath(dirname)
++ prefix = os.path.split(dirname)
++ for package, dir in LocalMap.items():
++ if dir.startswith(prefix):
++ dir = os.path.join("..", dir[len(prefix):])
++ LocalMap[package] = dir
++ log(options, "Relativizing local location of $package to " + dir)
++
++
++def RebaseReferences(dirname, options):
++ for ifile in sorted(os.listdir(dirname)):
++ if ifile.endswith('.html'):
++ RebaseFile(os.path.join(dirname, ifile), options)
++
++
++def RebaseFile(filename, options):
++ log(options, "Fixing file: " + filename)
++ regex = re.compile(r'''(<a(?:\s+\w+=(?:"[^"]*"|'[^']*'))*\s+href=")([^"]*)(")''',
++ flags=re.MULTILINE)
++
++ def repl_func(match):
++ return match.group(1) + RebaseLink(match.group(2), options) + match.group(3)
++
++ contents = open(filename, mode='r', encoding='utf-8').read()
++ processed = re.sub(regex, repl_func, contents)
++ newfilename = filename + '.new'
++ with open(newfilename, mode='w', encoding='utf-8') as h:
++ h.write(processed)
++ os.unlink(filename)
++ os.rename(newfilename, filename)
++
++
++def RebaseLink(href, options):
++ match = re.match(r'^(.*/)([^/]*)$', href)
++ package = None
++ origdir = 'INVALID'
++
++ if match:
++ dir = origdir = match.group(1)
++ file = match.group(2)
++ if dir in RevMap:
++ package = RevMap[dir]
++ else:
++ match = re.match(r'\.\./([^/]+)', href)
++ if match is not None:
++ package = match.group(1)
++ elif options.aggressive:
++ match = re.search(r'''([^/]+)/$''', href)
++ package = match.group(1)
++
++ if package:
++ if options.online and package in OnlineMap:
++ dir = OnlineMap[package]
++ elif package in LocalMap:
++ dir = LocalMap[package]
++ href = os.path.join(dir, file)
++ else:
++ log(options, "Can't determine package for '%s'" % href)
++
++ if dir != origdir:
++ if origdir in Mapped:
++ Mapped[origdir][1] += 1
++ else:
++ Mapped[origdir] = [dir, 1]
++ return href
++
++
++def PrintWhatWeHaveDone():
++ for origdir in sorted(Mapped.keys()):
++ info = Mapped[origdir]
++ print(origdir, "->", info[0], "(%s)" % info[1])
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007-2016 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++"""
++Extracts declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs and unions from
++header files.
++
++It is called with a module name, an optional source directory, an optional
++output directory, and the header files to scan.
++
++It outputs all declarations found to a file named '$MODULE-decl.txt', and the
++list of decarations to another file '$MODULE-decl-list.txt'.
++
++This second list file is typically copied to '$MODULE-sections.txt' and
++organized into sections ready to output the XML pages.
++"""
++
++import logging
++import os
++import re
++import shutil
++
++from . import common
++
++TYPE_MODIFIERS = ['const', 'signed', 'unsigned', 'long', 'short', 'struct', 'union', 'enum']
++VAR_TYPE_MODIFIER = '(?:' + '|'.join([t + '\s+' for t in TYPE_MODIFIERS]) + ')*'
++RET_TYPE_MODIFIER = '(?:' + '|'.join([t + '\s+' for t in TYPE_MODIFIERS + ['G_CONST_RETURN']]) + ')*'
++
++# Matchers for current line
++CLINE_MATCHER = [
++ # 0: MACROS
++ re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*\#\s*define\s+
++ (\w+) # 1: name
++ """, re.VERBOSE),
++ # 1-4: TYPEDEF'D FUNCTIONS
++ re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*typedef\s+
++ (%s\w+) # 1: return type
++ (\s+const)?\s* # 2: 2nd const
++ (\**)\s* # 3: ptr
++ \(\*\s*
++ (\w+) # 4: name
++ \)\s*\(""" % RET_TYPE_MODIFIER, re.VERBOSE),
++ re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*
++ (%s?\w+) # 1: return type
++ (\s+const)?\s* # 2: 2nd const
++ (\**)\s* # 3: ptr
++ \(\*\s*
++ (\w+) # 4: name
++ \)\s*\(""" % RET_TYPE_MODIFIER, re.VERBOSE),
++ re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*
++ (\**)\s* # 1: ptr
++ \(\*\s*
++ (\w+) # 2: name
++ \)\s*\(""", re.VERBOSE),
++ # 4: FUNCTION POINTER VARIABLES
++ None, # in InitScanner()
++ # 5-7: ENUMS
++ re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*enum\s+
++ _?(\w+) # 1: name
++ \s+\{""", re.VERBOSE),
++ None, # in InitScanner()
++ re.compile(r'^\s*typedef\s+enum'),
++ # 8-11: STRUCTS AND UNIONS
++ None, # in InitScanner()
++ re.compile(r'^\s*(?:struct|union)\s+_(\w+)\s*;'),
++ re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*
++ (struct|union)\s+ # 1: struct/union
++ (\w+) # 2: name
++ \s*;""", re.VERBOSE),
++ re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*typedef\s+
++ (struct|union)\s*
++ \w*\s*{""", re.VERBOSE),
++ # 12-14: OTHER TYPEDEFS
++ None, # in InitScanner()
++ None, # in InitScanner()
++ re.compile(r'^\s*typedef\s+'),
++ # 15: VARIABLES (extern'ed variables)
++ None, # in InitScanner()
++ # 16: VARIABLES
++ re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*
++ (?:%s\w+)
++ (?:\s+\*+|\*+|\s)\s*
++ (?:const\s+)*
++ ([A-Za-z]\w*) # 1: name
++ \s*\=""" % VAR_TYPE_MODIFIER, re.VERBOSE),
++ # 17: G_DECLARE_*
++ re.compile(
++ r""".*(G_DECLARE_|GDK_DECLARE_)
++ (FINAL_TYPE|DERIVABLE_TYPE|INTERNAL_TYPE|INTERFACE) # 1: variant
++ \s*\(""", re.VERBOSE),
++ # 18-21: FUNCTIONS
++ None, # in InitScanner()
++ None, # in InitScanner()
++ re.compile(r'^\s*\(?([A-Za-z]\w*)\)?\s*\('),
++ re.compile(r'^\s*\('),
++ # 22-23: STRUCTS
++ re.compile(r'^\s*struct\s+_?(\w+)\s*\*'),
++ re.compile(r'^\s*struct\s+_?(\w+)'),
++ # 24-25: UNIONS
++ re.compile(r'^\s*union\s+_(\w+)\s*\*'),
++ re.compile(r'^\s*union\s+_?(\w+)'),
++]
++
++# Matchers for previous line
++PLINE_MATCHER = [
++ # 0-1: TYPEDEF'D FUNCTIONS
++ re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*typedef\s*
++ (%s\w+) # 1: return type
++ (\s+const)?\s* # 2: 2nd const
++ (\**)\s* # 3: ptr
++ """ % RET_TYPE_MODIFIER, re.VERBOSE),
++ re.compile(r'^\s*typedef\s*'),
++ # 2-4 :FUNCTIONS
++ None, # in InitScanner()
++ None, # in InitScanner()
++ None, # in InitScanner()
++]
++
++# Matchers for 2nd previous line
++PPLINE_MATCHER = None
++
++# Matchers for sub expressions
++SUB_MATCHER = [
++ # 0: STRUCTS AND UNIONS
++ re.compile(r'^(\S+)(Class|Iface|Interface)\b'),
++]
++
++
++def Run(options):
++ logging.info('options: %s', str(options.__dict__))
++
++ InitScanner(options)
++
++ if not os.path.isdir(options.output_dir):
++ os.mkdir(options.output_dir)
++
++ base_filename = os.path.join(options.output_dir, options.module)
++ old_decl_list = base_filename + '-decl-list.txt'
++ new_decl_list = base_filename + '-decl-list.new'
++ old_decl = base_filename + '-decl.txt'
++ new_decl = base_filename + '-decl.new'
++ old_types = base_filename + '.types'
++ new_types = base_filename + '.types.new'
++ sections_file = base_filename + '-sections.txt'
++
++ # If this is the very first run then we create the .types file automatically.
++ if not os.path.exists(sections_file) and not os.path.exists(old_types):
++ options.rebuild_types = True
++
++ section_list = {}
++ decl_list = []
++ get_types = []
++
++ # do not read files twice; checking it here permits to give both srcdir and
++ # builddir as --source-dir without fear of duplicates
++ seen_headers = {}
++
++ # split all the ignored files and directories
++ ignored_headers = options.ignore_headers and options.ignore_headers.split(' ') or []
++
++ for file in options.headers:
++ # We assume that the specific headers we have been told to scan
++ # are not going to be placed in a blocklist
++ ScanHeader(file, section_list, decl_list, get_types, seen_headers, [], options)
++
++ for dir in options.source_dir:
++ # Ignored headers are relative to a source directory; since we
++ # pass the full path of each header to ScanHeader(), we need to
++ # build a list of absolute paths from the ignored headers list
++ src_ignored_headers = [os.path.join(dir, x) for x in ignored_headers]
++ ScanHeaders(dir, section_list, decl_list, get_types, seen_headers, src_ignored_headers, options)
++
++ with open(new_decl_list, 'w', encoding='utf-8') as f:
++ for section in sorted(section_list.keys()):
++ f.write(section_list[section])
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_decl_list, new_decl_list, True)
++
++ with open(new_decl, 'w', encoding='utf-8') as f:
++ for decl in decl_list:
++ f.write(decl)
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_decl, new_decl, True)
++
++ if options.rebuild_types:
++ with open(new_types, 'w', encoding='utf-8') as f:
++ for func in sorted(get_types):
++ f.write(func + '\n')
++
++ # remove the file if empty
++ if len(get_types) == 0:
++ os.unlink(new_types)
++ if os.path.exists(old_types):
++ os.rename(old_types, old_types + '.bak')
++ else:
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_types, new_types, True)
++
++ # If there is no MODULE-sections.txt file yet or we are asked to rebuild it,
++ # we copy the MODULE-decl-list.txt file into its place. The user can tweak it
++ # later if they want.
++ if options.rebuild_sections or not os.path.exists(sections_file):
++ new_sections_file = base_filename + '-sections.new'
++ shutil.copyfile(old_decl_list, new_sections_file)
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(sections_file, new_sections_file, False)
++
++ # If there is no MODULE-overrides.txt file we create an empty one
++ # because EXTRA_DIST in gtk-doc.make requires it.
++ overrides_file = base_filename + '-overrides.txt'
++ if not os.path.exists(overrides_file):
++ open(overrides_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8').close()
++
++
++def InitScanner(options):
++ """Apply options to regexps.
++ """
++
++ # avoid generating regex with |'' (matching no string)
++ # TODO(ensonic): keep in sync with ScanHeaderContent()
++ ignore_decorators = ''
++ optional_decorators_regex = ''
++ if options.ignore_decorators:
++ ignore_decorators = '|' + options.ignore_decorators.replace('()', '\(\w*\)')
++ optional_decorators_regex = '(?:\s+(?:%s))?' % ignore_decorators[1:]
++
++ # FUNCTION POINTER VARIABLES
++ CLINE_MATCHER[4] = re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*(?:\b(?:extern|static|inline|G_INLINE_FUNC%s)\s*)*
++ ((?:const\s+|G_CONST_RETURN\s+)?\w+) # 1: 1st const
++ (\s+const)?\s* # 2: 2nd const
++ (\**)\s* # 3: ptr
++ \(\*\s*
++ (\w+) # 4: name
++ \)\s*\(""" % ignore_decorators, re.VERBOSE)
++
++ CLINE_MATCHER[6] = re.compile(r'^\s*typedef\s+enum\s+_?(\w+)\s+\1%s\s*;' % optional_decorators_regex)
++ CLINE_MATCHER[8] = re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*typedef\s+
++ (struct|union)\s+ # 1: struct/union
++ _(\w+)\s+\2 # 2: name
++ %s # 3: optional decorator
++ \s*;""" % optional_decorators_regex, re.VERBOSE)
++ # OTHER TYPEDEFS
++ CLINE_MATCHER[12] = re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*typedef\s+
++ (?:struct|union)\s+\w+[\s\*]+
++ (\w+) # 1: name
++ %s # 2: optional decorator
++ \s*;""" % optional_decorators_regex, re.VERBOSE)
++ CLINE_MATCHER[13] = re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*
++ (?:G_GNUC_EXTENSION\s+)?
++ typedef\s+
++ (.+?[\s\*]) # 1: e.g. 'unsigned int'
++ (\w+) # 2: name
++ (?:\s*\[[^\]]+\])*
++ %s # 3: optional decorator
++ \s*;""" % optional_decorators_regex, re.VERBOSE)
++ CLINE_MATCHER[15] = re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*
++ (?:extern|[A-Za-z_]+VAR%s)\s+
++ (?:%s\w+)
++ (?:\s+\*+|\*+|\s)\s*
++ (?:const\s+)*
++ ([A-Za-z]\w*) # 1: name
++ \s*;""" % (ignore_decorators, RET_TYPE_MODIFIER), re.VERBOSE)
++ # FUNCTIONS
++ CLINE_MATCHER[18] = re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*
++ (?:\b(?:extern|static|inline|G_INLINE_FUNC%s)\s*)*
++ (%s\w+) # 1: return type
++ ([\s*]+(?:\s*(?:\*+|\bconst\b|\bG_CONST_RETURN\b))*)\s* # 2: .. cont'
++ (_[A-Za-z]\w*) # 3: name
++ \s*\(""" % (ignore_decorators, RET_TYPE_MODIFIER), re.VERBOSE)
++ CLINE_MATCHER[19] = re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*
++ (?:\b(?:extern|static|inline|G_INLINE_FUNC%s)\s*)*
++ (%s\w+) # 1: return type
++ ([\s*]+(?:\s*(?:\*+|\bconst\b|\bG_CONST_RETURN\b))*)\s* # 2: .. cont'
++ \(?([A-Za-z]\w*)\)? # 3: name
++ \s*\(""" % (ignore_decorators, RET_TYPE_MODIFIER), re.VERBOSE)
++
++ PLINE_MATCHER[2] = re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*
++ (?:\b(?:extern%s)\s*)*
++ (%s\w+) # 1: retun type
++ ((?:\s*(?:\*+|\bconst\b|\bG_CONST_RETURN\b))*) # 2: .. cont'
++ \s*$""" % (ignore_decorators, RET_TYPE_MODIFIER), re.VERBOSE)
++
++ PLINE_MATCHER[3] = re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*(?:\b(?:extern|static|inline|G_INLINE_FUNC%s)\s*)*
++ (%s\w+) # 1: return type
++ ((?:\s*(?:\*+|\bconst\b|\bG_CONST_RETURN\b))*) # 2: .. cont'
++ \s*$""" % (ignore_decorators, RET_TYPE_MODIFIER), re.VERBOSE)
++
++ PLINE_MATCHER[4] = re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*(?:\b(?:extern|static|inline|G_INLINE_FUNC%s)\s*)*
++ (%s\w+) # 1: return type
++ (\s+\*+|\*+|\s)\s* # 2: ptr?
++ ([A-Za-z]\w*) # 3: symbols
++ \s*$""" % (ignore_decorators, RET_TYPE_MODIFIER), re.VERBOSE)
++
++ # Matchers for 2nd previous line
++ global PPLINE_MATCHER
++ PPLINE_MATCHER = [
++ # 0: FUNCTIONS
++ re.compile(
++ r"""^\s*(?:\b(?:extern|static|inline|G_INLINE_FUNC%s)\s*)*
++ (
++ (?:const\s+|G_CONST_RETURN\s+|signed\s+|unsigned\s+|struct\s+|union\s+|enum\s+)*
++ \w+
++ (?:\**\s+\**(?:const|G_CONST_RETURN))?
++ (?:\s+|\s*\*+)
++ )\s*$""" % ignore_decorators, re.VERBOSE)
++ ]
++
++
++def ScanHeaders(source_dir, section_list, decl_list, get_types, seen_headers, ignored_headers, options):
++ """Scans a directory tree looking for header files.
++
++ Args:
++ source_dir (str): the directory to scan.
++ section_list (dict): map of section to filenames.
++ decl_list (list): list of declarations
++ get_types (list): list of symbols that have a get_type function
++ seen_headers (set): set to avoid scanning headers twice
++ ignored_headers (list): list of ignored headers
++ options: command line options
++ """
++
++ logging.info('Scanning source directory: %s', source_dir)
++
++ # This array holds any subdirectories found.
++ subdirs = []
++
++ for filename in sorted(os.listdir(source_dir)):
++ if filename.startswith('.'):
++ continue
++ fullname = os.path.join(source_dir, filename)
++ if os.path.isdir(fullname):
++ subdirs.append(fullname)
++ elif filename.endswith('.h'):
++ if fullname in ignored_headers:
++ logging.info(f"File {fullname} matches ignored headers")
++ continue
++ ScanHeader(fullname, section_list, decl_list, get_types,
++ seen_headers, ignored_headers, options)
++
++ # Now recursively scan the subdirectories.
++ for d in subdirs:
++ if d in ignored_headers:
++ logging.info(f"Directory {d} matches ignored headers")
++ continue
++ ScanHeaders(d, section_list, decl_list,
++ get_types, seen_headers, ignored_headers, options)
++
++
++def ScanHeader(input_file, section_list, decl_list, get_types, seen_headers, ignored_headers, options):
++ """Scan a header file for doc commants.
++
++ Look for doc comments and extract them. Parse each doc comments and the
++ symbol declaration.
++
++ Args:
++ input_file (str): the header file to scan.
++ section_list (dict): a map of section per filename
++ decl_list (list): a list of declarations
++ get_types (list): list of symbols that have a get_type function
++ seen_headers (set): set to avoid scanning headers twice
++ ignored_headers (list): a list of ignored headers
++ options: command line options
++ """
++
++ # Skip ignored headers
++ if input_file in ignored_headers:
++ logging.info(f"File {input_file} matches ignored headers")
++ return
++
++ # Don't scan headers twice
++ canonical_input_file = os.path.realpath(input_file)
++ if canonical_input_file in seen_headers:
++ logging.info('File already scanned: %s', input_file)
++ return
++
++ seen_headers[canonical_input_file] = 1
++
++ file_basename = os.path.split(input_file)[1][:-2] # filename ends in .h
++
++ if not os.path.exists(input_file):
++ logging.warning('File does not exist: %s', input_file)
++ return
++
++ logging.info('Scanning %s', input_file)
++
++ with open(input_file, 'r', encoding='utf-8') as hdr:
++ input_lines = hdr.readlines()
++
++ try:
++ slist, doc_comments = ScanHeaderContent(input_lines, decl_list, get_types, options)
++ logging.info("Scanning %s done", input_file)
++
++ liststr = SeparateSubSections(slist, doc_comments)
++ if liststr != '':
++ if file_basename not in section_list:
++ section_list[file_basename] = ''
++ section_list[file_basename] += "<SECTION>\n<FILE>%s</FILE>\n%s</SECTION>\n\n" % (file_basename, liststr)
++
++ except RuntimeError as e:
++ common.LogWarning(input_file, 0, str(e))
++
++
++def ScanHeaderContent(input_lines, decl_list, get_types, options):
++ """Scan the the given content lines.
++
++ Args:
++ input_lines (list):
++ decl_list (list): symbols declarations
++ get_types (list): list of symbols that have a get_type function
++ options: commandline options
++
++ Returns:
++ list: a list of symbols found and a set of symbols for which we have a
++ doc-comment
++ """
++
++ # Holds the resulting list of declarations.
++ slist = []
++ # Holds the title of the section
++ title = None
++ # True if we are in a comment.
++ in_comment = 0
++ # The type of declaration we are in, e.g. 'function' or 'macro'.
++ in_declaration = ''
++ # True if we should skip a block.
++ skip_block = False
++ # The current symbol being declared.
++ symbol = None
++ # Holds the declaration of the current symbol.
++ decl = ''
++ # For functions and function typedefs this holds the function's return type.
++ ret_type = None
++ # The pre-previous line read in - some Gnome functions have the return type
++ # on one line, the function name on the next, and the rest of the
++ # declaration after.
++ pre_previous_line = ''
++ # The previous line read in - some Gnome functions have the return type on
++ # one line and the rest of the declaration after.
++ previous_line = ''
++ # Used to try to skip the standard #ifdef XXX #define XXX at the start of
++ # headers.
++ first_macro = 1
++ # Used to handle structs/unions which contain nested structs or unions.
++ level = None
++ # Set to 1 for internal symbols, we need to fully parse, but don't add them
++ # to docs
++ internal = 0
++ # Dict of forward declarations, we skip them if we find the real declaration
++ # later.
++ forward_decls = {}
++ # Dict of doc-comments we found. The key is lowercase symbol name, val=1.
++ doc_comments = {}
++
++ deprecated_conditional_nest = 0
++ ignore_conditional_nest = 0
++
++ deprecated = ''
++ doc_comment = ''
++
++ # avoid generating regex with |'' (matching no string)
++ # TODO(ensonic): keep in sync with InitScanner()
++ # TODO(ensonic): extract the remaining regexps
++ ignore_decorators = '' # 1 uses
++ optional_decorators_regex = '' # 4 uses
++ if options.ignore_decorators:
++ ignore_decorators = '|' + options.ignore_decorators.replace('()', '\(\w*\)')
++ optional_decorators_regex = '(?:\s+(?:%s))?' % ignore_decorators[1:]
++
++ for line in input_lines:
++ # If this is a private header, skip it.
++ # TODO: consider scanning this first, so that we don't modify: decl_list
++ # and get_types
++ if re.search(r'^\s*/\*\s*<\s*private_header\s*>\s*\*/', line):
++ return [], {}
++
++ # Skip to the end of the current comment.
++ if in_comment:
++ logging.info('Comment: %s', line.strip())
++ doc_comment += line
++ if re.search(r'\*/', line):
++ m = re.search(r'\* ([a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]+):', doc_comment)
++ if m:
++ doc_comments[m.group(1).lower()] = 1
++ in_comment = 0
++ doc_comment = ''
++ continue
++
++ # Keep a count of #if, #ifdef, #ifndef nesting,
++ # and if we enter a deprecation-symbol-bracketed
++ # zone, take note.
++ m = re.search(r'^\s*#\s*if(?:n?def\b|\s+!?\s*defined\s*\()\s*(\w+)', line)
++ if m:
++ define_name = m.group(1)
++ if deprecated_conditional_nest < 1 and re.search(options.deprecated_guards, define_name):
++ deprecated_conditional_nest = 1
++ elif deprecated_conditional_nest >= 1:
++ deprecated_conditional_nest += 1
++ if ignore_conditional_nest == 0 and '__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__' in define_name:
++ ignore_conditional_nest = 1
++ elif ignore_conditional_nest > 0:
++ ignore_conditional_nest = 1
++
++ elif re.search(r'^\s*#\sif', line):
++ if deprecated_conditional_nest >= 1:
++ deprecated_conditional_nest += 1
++ if ignore_conditional_nest > 0:
++ ignore_conditional_nest += 1
++ elif re.search(r'^\s*#endif', line):
++ if deprecated_conditional_nest >= 1:
++ deprecated_conditional_nest -= 1
++ if ignore_conditional_nest > 0:
++ ignore_conditional_nest -= 1
++
++ # If we find a line containing _DEPRECATED, we hope that this is
++ # attribute based deprecation and also treat this as a deprecation
++ # guard, unless it's a macro definition or the end of a deprecation
++ # section (#endif /* XXX_DEPRECATED */
++ if deprecated_conditional_nest == 0 and '_DEPRECATED' in line:
++ m = re.search(r'^\s*#\s*(if*|define|endif)', line)
++ if not (m or in_declaration == 'enum' or in_declaration == 'struct'):
++ logging.info('Found deprecation annotation (decl: "%s"): "%s"',
++ in_declaration, line.strip())
++ deprecated_conditional_nest += 0.1
++
++ # set flag that is used later when we do AddSymbolToList
++ if deprecated_conditional_nest > 0:
++ deprecated = '<DEPRECATED/>\n'
++ else:
++ deprecated = ''
++
++ if ignore_conditional_nest:
++ continue
++
++ if not in_declaration:
++ # Skip top-level comments.
++ m = re.search(r'^\s*/\*', line)
++ if m:
++ re.sub(r'^\s*/\*', '', line)
++ if re.search(r'\*/', line):
++ logging.info('Found one-line comment: %s', line.strip())
++ else:
++ in_comment = 1
++ doc_comment = line
++ logging.info('Found start of comment: %s', line.strip())
++ continue
++
++ # Skip begin/end deprecation macros.
++ m = re.search(r'^\s*G_GNUC_(BEGIN|END)_IGNORE_DEPRECATIONS', line)
++ if m:
++ continue
++
++ logging.info('no decl: %s', line.strip())
++
++ cm = [m.match(line) for m in CLINE_MATCHER]
++ pm = [m.match(previous_line) for m in PLINE_MATCHER]
++ ppm = [m.match(pre_previous_line) for m in PPLINE_MATCHER]
++
++ # MACROS
++
++ if cm[0]:
++ symbol = cm[0].group(1)
++ decl = line
++ # We assume all macros which start with '_' are private, but
++ # we accept '_' itself which is the standard gettext macro.
++ # We also try to skip the first macro if it looks like the
++ # standard #ifndef HEADER_FILE #define HEADER_FILE etc.
++ # And we only want TRUE & FALSE defined in GLib.
++ if not symbol.startswith('_') \
++ and (not re.search(r'#ifndef\s+' + symbol, previous_line)
++ or first_macro == 0) \
++ and ((symbol != 'TRUE' and symbol != 'FALSE')
++ or options.module == 'glib') \
++ or symbol == '_':
++ in_declaration = 'macro'
++ logging.info('Macro: "%s"', symbol)
++ else:
++ logging.info('skipping Macro: "%s"', symbol)
++ in_declaration = 'macro'
++ internal = 1
++ first_macro = 0
++
++ # TYPEDEF'D FUNCTIONS (i.e. user functions)
++ elif cm[1]:
++ ret_type = format_ret_type(cm[1].group(1), cm[1].group(2), cm[1].group(3))
++ symbol = cm[1].group(4)
++ decl = line[cm[1].end():]
++ in_declaration = 'user_function'
++ logging.info('user function (1): "%s", Returns: "%s"', symbol, ret_type)
++
++ elif pm[1] and cm[2]:
++ ret_type = format_ret_type(cm[2].group(1), cm[2].group(2), cm[2].group(3))
++ symbol = cm[2].group(4)
++ decl = line[cm[2].end():]
++ in_declaration = 'user_function'
++ logging.info('user function (2): "%s", Returns: "%s"', symbol, ret_type)
++
++ elif pm[1] and cm[3]:
++ ret_type = cm[3].group(1)
++ symbol = cm[3].group(2)
++ decl = line[cm[3].end():]
++ if pm[0]:
++ ret_type = format_ret_type(pm[0].group(1), pm[0].group(2), pm[0].group(3)) + ret_type
++ in_declaration = 'user_function'
++ logging.info('user function (3): "%s", Returns: "%s"', symbol, ret_type)
++
++ # FUNCTION POINTER VARIABLES
++ elif cm[4]:
++ ret_type = format_ret_type(cm[4].group(1), cm[4].group(2), cm[4].group(3))
++ symbol = cm[4].group(4)
++ decl = line[cm[4].end():]
++ in_declaration = 'user_function'
++ logging.info('function pointer variable: "%s", Returns: "%s"', symbol, ret_type)
++
++ # ENUMS
++
++ elif cm[5]:
++ re.sub(r'^\s*enum\s+_?(\w+)\s+\{', r'enum \1 {', line)
++ # We assume that 'enum _<enum_name> {' is really the
++ # declaration of enum <enum_name>.
++ symbol = cm[5].group(1)
++ decl = line
++ in_declaration = 'enum'
++ logging.info('plain enum: "%s"', symbol)
++
++ elif cm[6]:
++ # We skip 'typedef enum <enum_name> _<enum_name>;' as the enum will
++ # be declared elsewhere.
++ logging.info('skipping enum typedef: "%s"', line)
++
++ elif cm[7]:
++ symbol = ''
++ decl = line
++ in_declaration = 'enum'
++ logging.info('typedef enum: -')
++
++ # STRUCTS AND UNIONS
++
++ elif cm[8]:
++ # We've found a 'typedef struct _<name> <name>;'
++ # This could be an opaque data structure, so we output an
++ # empty declaration. If the structure is actually found that
++ # will override this (technically if will just be another entry
++ # in the output file and will be joined when reading the file).
++ structsym = cm[8].group(1).upper()
++ logging.info('%s typedef: "%s"', structsym, cm[8].group(2))
++ forward_decls[cm[8].group(2)] = '<%s>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s</%s>\n' % (
++ structsym, cm[8].group(2), deprecated, structsym)
++
++ m = SUB_MATCHER[0].match(cm[8].group(2))
++ if m:
++ objectname = m.group(1)
++ logging.info('Found object: "%s"', objectname)
++ title = '<TITLE>%s</TITLE>' % objectname
++
++ elif cm[9]:
++ # Skip private structs/unions.
++ logging.info('private struct/union')
++
++ elif cm[10]:
++ # Do a similar thing for normal structs as for typedefs above.
++ # But we output the declaration as well in this case, so we
++ # can differentiate it from a typedef.
++ structsym = cm[10].group(1).upper()
++ logging.info('%s:%s', structsym, cm[10].group(2))
++ forward_decls[cm[10].group(2)] = '<%s>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s%s</%s>\n' % (
++ structsym, cm[10].group(2), line, deprecated, structsym)
++
++ elif cm[11]:
++ symbol = ''
++ decl = line
++ level = 0
++ in_declaration = cm[11].group(1)
++ logging.info('typedef struct/union "%s"', in_declaration)
++
++ # OTHER TYPEDEFS
++
++ elif cm[12]:
++ logging.info('Found struct/union(*) typedef "%s": "%s"', cm[12].group(1), line)
++ if AddSymbolToList(slist, cm[12].group(1)):
++ decl_list.append('<TYPEDEF>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s%s</TYPEDEF>\n' %
++ (cm[12].group(1), deprecated, line))
++
++ elif cm[13]:
++ if cm[13].group(1).split()[0] not in ('struct', 'union'):
++ logging.info('Found typedef: "%s"', line)
++ if AddSymbolToList(slist, cm[13].group(2)):
++ decl_list.append(
++ '<TYPEDEF>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s%s</TYPEDEF>\n' % (cm[13].group(2), deprecated, line))
++ elif cm[14]:
++ logging.info('Skipping typedef: "%s"', line)
++
++ # VARIABLES (extern'ed variables)
++
++ elif cm[15]:
++ symbol = cm[15].group(1)
++ line = re.sub(r'^\s*([A-Za-z_]+VAR)\b', r'extern', line)
++ decl = line
++ logging.info('Possible extern var "%s": "%s"', symbol, decl)
++ if AddSymbolToList(slist, symbol):
++ decl_list.append('<VARIABLE>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s%s</VARIABLE>\n' % (symbol, deprecated, decl))
++
++ # VARIABLES
++
++ elif cm[16]:
++ symbol = cm[16].group(1)
++ decl = line
++ logging.info('Possible global var" %s": "%s"', symbol, decl)
++ if AddSymbolToList(slist, symbol):
++ decl_list.append('<VARIABLE>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s%s</VARIABLE>\n' % (symbol, deprecated, decl))
++
++ # G_DECLARE_*
++
++ elif cm[17]:
++ in_declaration = 'g-declare'
++ symbol = cm[17].group(1) + cm[17].group(2)
++ decl = line[cm[17].end():]
++
++ # FUNCTIONS
++
++ elif cm[18]:
++ # We assume that functions starting with '_' are private and skip them.
++ ret_type = format_ret_type(cm[18].group(1), None, cm[18].group(2))
++ symbol = cm[18].group(3)
++ decl = line[cm[18].end():]
++ logging.info('internal Function: "%s", Returns: "%s""%s"', symbol, cm[18].group(1), cm[18].group(2))
++ in_declaration = 'function'
++ internal = 1
++ skip_block |= is_inline_func(line)
++
++ elif cm[19]:
++ ret_type = format_ret_type(cm[19].group(1), None, cm[19].group(2))
++ symbol = cm[19].group(3)
++ decl = line[cm[19].end():]
++ logging.info('Function (1): "%s", Returns: "%s""%s"', symbol, cm[19].group(1), cm[19].group(2))
++ in_declaration = 'function'
++ skip_block |= is_inline_func(line)
++
++ # Try to catch function declarations which have the return type on
++ # the previous line. But we don't want to catch complete functions
++ # which have been declared G_INLINE_FUNC, e.g. g_bit_nth_lsf in
++ # glib, or 'static inline' functions.
++ elif cm[20]:
++ symbol = cm[20].group(1)
++ decl = line[cm[20].end():]
++
++ if is_inline_func(previous_line):
++ skip_block = True
++ if pm[3]:
++ ret_type = format_ret_type(pm[3].group(1), None, pm[3].group(2))
++ logging.info('Function (3): "%s", Returns: "%s"', symbol, ret_type)
++ in_declaration = 'function'
++ else:
++ if pm[2]:
++ ret_type = format_ret_type(pm[2].group(1), None, pm[2].group(2))
++ logging.info('Function (2): "%s", Returns: "%s"', symbol, ret_type)
++ in_declaration = 'function'
++
++ # Try to catch function declarations with the return type and name
++ # on the previous line(s), and the start of the parameters on this.
++ elif cm[21]:
++ decl = line[cm[21].end():]
++ if pm[4]:
++ ret_type = pm[4].group(1) + ' ' + pm[4].group(2).strip()
++ symbol = pm[4].group(3)
++ in_declaration = 'function'
++ logging.info('Function (5): "%s", Returns: "%s"', symbol, ret_type)
++
++ elif re.search(r'^\s*\w+\s*$', previous_line) and ppm[0]:
++ ret_type = ppm[0].group(1)
++ ret_type = re.sub(r'\s*\n', '', ret_type, flags=re.MULTILINE)
++ in_declaration = 'function'
++
++ symbol = previous_line
++ symbol = re.sub(r'^\s+', '', symbol)
++ symbol = re.sub(r'\s*\n', '', symbol, flags=re.MULTILINE)
++ logging.info('Function (6): "%s", Returns: "%s"', symbol, ret_type)
++
++ # } elsif (m/^extern\s+/) {
++ # print "DEBUG: Skipping extern: $_"
++
++ # STRUCTS
++ elif cm[22]:
++ # Skip 'struct _<struct_name> *', since it could be a
++ # return type on its own line.
++ pass
++ elif cm[23]:
++ # We assume that 'struct _<struct_name>' is really the
++ # declaration of struct <struct_name>.
++ symbol = cm[23].group(1)
++ decl = line
++ # we will find the correct level as below we do $level += tr/{//
++ level = 0
++ in_declaration = 'struct'
++ logging.info('Struct(_): "%s"', symbol)
++
++ # UNIONS
++ elif cm[24]:
++ # Skip 'union _<union_name> *' (see above)
++ pass
++ elif cm[25]:
++ symbol = cm[25].group(1)
++ decl = line
++ level = 0
++ in_declaration = 'union'
++ logging.info('Union(_): "%s"', symbol)
++ else:
++ logging.info('in decl %s: skip=%s %s', in_declaration, skip_block, line.strip())
++ decl += line
++
++ if skip_block and '{' in decl:
++ (skip_block, decl) = remove_braced_content(decl)
++ logging.info('in decl: skip=%s decl=[%s]', skip_block, decl)
++
++ pre_previous_line = previous_line
++ previous_line = line
++
++ if skip_block:
++ logging.info('skipping, in decl %s, decl=[%s]', in_declaration, decl)
++ continue
++
++ if in_declaration == "g-declare":
++ dm = re.search(r'\s*(\w+)\s*,\s*(\w+)\s*,\s*(\w+)\s*,\s*(\w+)\s*,\s*(\w+)\s*\).*$', decl)
++ # FIXME the original code does s// stuff here and we don't. Is it necessary?
++ if dm:
++ ModuleObjName = dm.group(1)
++ module_obj_name = dm.group(2)
++ if options.rebuild_types:
++ get_types.append(module_obj_name + '_get_type')
++ forward_decls[ModuleObjName] = '<STRUCT>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s</STRUCT>\n' % (ModuleObjName, deprecated)
++ if symbol.startswith('G_DECLARE_DERIVABLE'):
++ forward_decls[ModuleObjName + 'Class'] = '<STRUCT>\n<NAME>%sClass</NAME>\n%s</STRUCT>\n' % (
++ ModuleObjName, deprecated)
++ if symbol.startswith('G_DECLARE_INTERFACE'):
++ forward_decls[ModuleObjName + 'Interface'] = '<STRUCT>\n<NAME>%sInterface</NAME>\n%s</STRUCT>\n' % (
++ ModuleObjName, deprecated)
++ in_declaration = ''
++
++ if in_declaration == 'function':
++ # Note that sometimes functions end in ') G_GNUC_PRINTF (2, 3);' or
++ # ') __attribute__ (...);'.
++ regex = r'\)\s*(G_GNUC_.*|.*DEPRECATED.*%s\s*|__attribute__\s*\(.*\)\s*)*;.*$' % ignore_decorators
++ pm = re.search(regex, decl, flags=re.MULTILINE)
++ if pm:
++ logging.info('scrubbing:[%s]', decl.strip())
++ decl = re.sub(regex, '', decl, flags=re.MULTILINE)
++ logging.info('scrubbed:[%s]', decl.strip())
++ if internal == 0:
++ decl = re.sub(r'/\*.*?\*/', '', decl, flags=re.MULTILINE) # remove comments.
++ decl = re.sub(r'\s*\n\s*(?!$)', ' ', decl, flags=re.MULTILINE) # remove newlines
++ # consolidate whitespace at start/end of lines.
++ decl = decl.strip()
++ ret_type = re.sub(r'/\*.*?\*/', '', ret_type).strip() # remove comments in ret type.
++ if AddSymbolToList(slist, symbol):
++ decl_list.append('<FUNCTION>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s<RETURNS>%s</RETURNS>\n%s\n</FUNCTION>\n' %
++ (symbol, deprecated, ret_type, decl))
++ if options.rebuild_types:
++ # check if this looks like a get_type function and if so remember
++ if symbol.endswith('_get_type') and 'GType' in ret_type and re.search(r'^(void|)$', decl):
++ logging.info(
++ "Adding get-type: [%s] [%s] [%s]", ret_type, symbol, decl)
++ get_types.append(symbol)
++ else:
++ internal = 0
++ deprecated_conditional_nest = int(deprecated_conditional_nest)
++ in_declaration = ''
++ skip_block = False
++
++ if in_declaration == 'user_function':
++ if re.search(r'\).*$', decl):
++ decl = re.sub(r'\).*$', '', decl)
++ # TODO: same as above
++ decl = re.sub(r'/\*.*?\*/', '', decl, flags=re.MULTILINE) # remove comments.
++ decl = re.sub(r'\s*\n\s*(?!$)', ' ', decl, flags=re.MULTILINE) # remove newlines
++ # TODO: don't stip here (it works above, but fails some test
++ # consolidate whitespace at start/end of lines.
++ # decl = decl.strip()
++ if AddSymbolToList(slist, symbol):
++ decl_list.append('<USER_FUNCTION>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s<RETURNS>%s</RETURNS>\n%s</USER_FUNCTION>\n' %
++ (symbol, deprecated, ret_type, decl))
++ deprecated_conditional_nest = int(deprecated_conditional_nest)
++ in_declaration = ''
++
++ if in_declaration == 'macro':
++ if not re.search(r'\\\s*$', decl):
++ if internal == 0:
++ if AddSymbolToList(slist, symbol):
++ decl_list.append('<MACRO>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s%s</MACRO>\n' % (symbol, deprecated, decl))
++ else:
++ logging.info('skip internal macro: [%s]', symbol)
++ internal = 0
++ deprecated_conditional_nest = int(deprecated_conditional_nest)
++ in_declaration = ''
++ else:
++ logging.info('skip empty macro: [%s]', symbol)
++
++ if in_declaration == 'enum':
++ # Examples:
++ # "};"
++ # "} MyEnum;"
++ # "} MyEnum DEPRECATED_FOR(NewEnum);"
++ # "} DEPRECATED_FOR(NewEnum);"
++ em = re.search(r'\n\s*\}\s*(?:(\w+)?%s)?;\s*$' % optional_decorators_regex, decl)
++ if em:
++ if symbol == '':
++ symbol = em.group(1)
++ # Enums could contain deprecated values and that doesn't mean
++ # the whole enum is deprecated, so they are ignored when setting
++ # deprecated_conditional_nest above. Here we can check if the
++ # _DEPRECATED is between '}' and ';' which would mean the enum
++ # as a whole is deprecated.
++ if re.search(r'\n\s*\}.*_DEPRECATED.*;\s*$', decl):
++ deprecated = '<DEPRECATED/>\n'
++ if AddSymbolToList(slist, symbol):
++ stripped_decl = re.sub(optional_decorators_regex, '', decl)
++ decl_list.append('<ENUM>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s%s</ENUM>\n' % (symbol, deprecated, stripped_decl))
++ deprecated_conditional_nest = int(deprecated_conditional_nest)
++ in_declaration = ''
++
++ # We try to handle nested structs/unions, but unmatched brackets in
++ # comments will cause problems.
++ if in_declaration == 'struct' or in_declaration == 'union':
++ # Same regex as for enum
++ sm = re.search(r'\n\}\s*(?:(\w+)?%s)?;\s*$' % optional_decorators_regex, decl)
++ if level <= 1 and sm:
++ if symbol == '':
++ symbol = sm.group(1)
++
++ bm = re.search(r'^(\S+)(Class|Iface|Interface)\b', symbol)
++ if bm:
++ objectname = bm.group(1)
++ logging.info('Found object: "%s"', objectname)
++ title = '<TITLE>%s</TITLE>' % objectname
++
++ logging.info('Store struct: "%s"', symbol)
++ # Structs could contain deprecated members and that doesn't
++ # mean the whole struct is deprecated, so they are ignored when
++ # setting deprecated_conditional_nest above. Here we can check
++ # if the _DEPRECATED is between '}' and ';' which would mean
++ # the struct as a whole is deprecated.
++ if re.search(r'\n\s*\}.*_DEPRECATED.*;\s*$', decl):
++ deprecated = '<DEPRECATED/>\n'
++ if AddSymbolToList(slist, symbol):
++ structsym = in_declaration.upper()
++ regex = r'(?:\s+(?:G_GNUC_\w+(?:\(\w*\))?%s))' % ignore_decorators
++ stripped_decl = re.sub(regex, '', decl)
++ decl_list.append('<%s>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s%s</%s>\n' %
++ (structsym, symbol, deprecated, stripped_decl, structsym))
++ if symbol in forward_decls:
++ del forward_decls[symbol]
++ deprecated_conditional_nest = int(deprecated_conditional_nest)
++ in_declaration = ''
++ else:
++ # We use tr to count the brackets in the line, and adjust
++ # $level accordingly.
++ level += line.count('{')
++ level -= line.count('}')
++ logging.info('struct/union level : %d', level)
++
++ # here we want in_declaration=='', otherwise we have a partial declaration
++ if in_declaration != '':
++ raise RuntimeError('partial declaration (%s) : %s ' % (in_declaration, decl))
++
++ # print remaining forward declarations
++ for symbol in sorted(forward_decls.keys()):
++ if forward_decls[symbol]:
++ AddSymbolToList(slist, symbol)
++ decl_list.append(forward_decls[symbol])
++
++ # add title
++ if title:
++ slist = [title] + slist
++ return slist, doc_comments
++
++
++def remove_braced_content(decl):
++ """Remove all nested pairs of curly braces.
++
++ Args:
++ decl (str): the decl
++
++ Returns:
++ str: a declaration stripped of braced content
++ """
++
++ skip_block = True
++ # Remove all nested pairs of curly braces.
++ brace_remover = r'{[^{]*?}'
++ bm = re.search(brace_remover, decl)
++ while bm:
++ decl = re.sub(brace_remover, '', decl)
++ logging.info('decl=[%s]' % decl)
++ bm = re.search(brace_remover, decl)
++
++ # If all '{' have been matched and removed, we're done
++ bm = re.search(r'(.*?){', decl)
++ if not bm:
++ # this is a hack to detect the end of declaration
++ decl = decl.rstrip() + ';'
++ skip_block = False
++ logging.info('skip_block done')
++
++ return skip_block, decl
++
++
++def is_inline_func(line):
++ line = line.strip()
++ if line.startswith('G_INLINE_FUNC'):
++ logging.info('skip block after G_INLINE_FUNC function')
++ return True
++ if re.search(r'static\s+inline', line):
++ logging.info('skip block after static inline function')
++ return True
++ return False
++
++
++def format_ret_type(base_type, const, ptr):
++ ret_type = base_type
++ if const:
++ ret_type += const
++ if ptr:
++ ret_type += ' ' + ptr.strip()
++ return ret_type
++
++
++def SeparateSubSections(slist, doc_comments):
++ """Separate the standard macros and functions.
++
++ Place them at the end of the current section, in a subsection named
++ 'Standard'. Do this in a loop to catch objects, enums and flags.
++
++ Args:
++ slist (list): list of symbols
++ doc_comments (dict): comments for each symbol
++
++ Returns:
++ str: the section doc xml fomatted as string
++ """
++
++ klass = lclass = prefix = lprefix = None
++ standard_decl = []
++ liststr = '\n'.join(s for s in slist if s) + '\n'
++ while True:
++ m = re.search(r'^(\S+)_IS_(\S*)_CLASS\n', liststr, flags=re.MULTILINE)
++ m2 = re.search(r'^(\S+)_IS_(\S*)\n', liststr, flags=re.MULTILINE)
++ m3 = re.search(r'^(\S+?)_(\S*)_get_type\n', liststr, flags=re.MULTILINE)
++ if m:
++ prefix = m.group(1)
++ lprefix = prefix.lower()
++ klass = m.group(2)
++ lclass = klass.lower()
++ logging.info("Found gobject type '%s_%s' from is_class macro", prefix, klass)
++ elif m2:
++ prefix = m2.group(1)
++ lprefix = prefix.lower()
++ klass = m2.group(2)
++ lclass = klass.lower()
++ logging.info("Found gobject type '%s_%s' from is_ macro", prefix, klass)
++ elif m3:
++ lprefix = m3.group(1)
++ prefix = lprefix.upper()
++ lclass = m3.group(2)
++ klass = lclass.upper()
++ logging.info("Found gobject type '%s_%s' from get_type function", prefix, klass)
++ else:
++ break
++
++ cclass = lclass
++ cclass = cclass.replace('_', '')
++ mtype = lprefix + cclass
++
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_once(liststr, standard_decl, r'^%sPrivate\n' % mtype)
++
++ # We only leave XxYy* in the normal section if they have docs
++ if mtype not in doc_comments:
++ logging.info(" Hide instance docs for %s", mtype)
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_once(liststr, standard_decl, r'^%s\n' % mtype)
++
++ if mtype + 'class' not in doc_comments:
++ logging.info(" Hide class docs for %s", mtype)
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_once(liststr, standard_decl, r'^%sClass\n' % mtype)
++
++ if mtype + 'interface' not in doc_comments:
++ logging.info(" Hide iface docs for %s", mtype)
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_once(liststr, standard_decl, r'%sInterface\n' % mtype)
++
++ if mtype + 'iface' not in doc_comments:
++ logging.info(" Hide iface docs for " + mtype)
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_once(liststr, standard_decl, r'%sIface\n' % mtype)
++
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_all(liststr, standard_decl, r'^\S+_IS_%s\n' % klass)
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_all(liststr, standard_decl, r'^\S+_TYPE_%s\n' % klass)
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_all(liststr, standard_decl, r'^\S+_%s_get_type\n' % lclass)
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_all(liststr, standard_decl, r'^\S+_IS_%s_CLASS\n' % klass)
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_all(liststr, standard_decl, r'^\S+_%s_CLASS\n' % klass)
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_all(liststr, standard_decl, r'^\S+_%s_GET_CLASS\n' % klass)
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_all(liststr, standard_decl, r'^\S+_%s_GET_IFACE\n' % klass)
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_all(liststr, standard_decl, r'^\S+_%s_GET_INTERFACE\n' % klass)
++ # We do this one last, otherwise it tends to be caught by the IS_$class macro
++ liststr, standard_decl = replace_all(liststr, standard_decl, r'^\S+_%s\n' % klass)
++
++ logging.info('Decl:%s---', liststr)
++ logging.info('Std :%s---', ''.join(sorted(standard_decl)))
++ if len(standard_decl):
++ # sort the symbols
++ liststr += '<SUBSECTION Standard>\n' + ''.join(sorted(standard_decl))
++ return liststr
++
++
++def replace_once(liststr, standard_decl, regex):
++ mre = re.search(regex, liststr, flags=re.IGNORECASE | re.MULTILINE)
++ if mre:
++ standard_decl.append(mre.group(0))
++ liststr = re.sub(regex, '', liststr, flags=re.IGNORECASE | re.MULTILINE)
++ return liststr, standard_decl
++
++
++def replace_all(liststr, standard_decl, regex):
++ mre = re.search(regex, liststr, flags=re.MULTILINE)
++ while mre:
++ standard_decl.append(mre.group(0))
++ liststr = re.sub(regex, '', liststr, flags=re.MULTILINE)
++ mre = re.search(regex, liststr, flags=re.MULTILINE)
++ return liststr, standard_decl
++
++
++def AddSymbolToList(slist, symbol):
++ """ Adds symbol to list of declaration if not already present.
++
++ Args:
++ slist: The list of symbols.
++ symbol: The symbol to add to the list.
++ """
++ if symbol in slist:
++ # logging.info('Symbol %s already in list. skipping', symbol)
++ # we return False to skip outputting another entry to -decl.txt
++ # this is to avoid redeclarations (e.g. in conditional sections).
++ return False
++ slist.append(symbol)
++ return True
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 1998 Damon Chaplin
++# 2007-2016 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++"""
++The scangobj tool gets information about object hierarchies and signals by
++compiling and running a small C program. CFLAGS and LDFLAGS must be set
++appropriately before running this script.
++"""
++
++import logging
++import os
++import string
++import subprocess
++import shlex
++
++from . import common, config
++
++
++COMMON_INCLUDES = """
++#include <string.h>
++#include <stdlib.h>
++#include <stdio.h>
++#include <errno.h>
++#include <glib-object.h>
++"""
++
++QUERY_CHILD_PROPS_PROTOTYPE = "extern GParamSpec** %s (gpointer class, guint *n_properties);"
++
++QUERY_CHILD_PROPS_CODE = """
++ if (!child_prop) {
++ properties = %s (class, &n_properties);
++ if (properties) {
++ child_prop = TRUE;
++ continue;
++ }
++ }
++"""
++
++MAIN_CODE = """
++
++#ifdef GTK_IS_WIDGET_CLASS
++#include <gtk/gtk.h>
++#endif
++static GType object_types[${ntypes}];
++
++static GType *
++get_object_types (void)
++{
++ gpointer g_object_class;
++ gint i = 0;
++
++${get_types}
++ object_types[i] = G_TYPE_INVALID;
++
++ /* reference the GObjectClass to initialize the param spec pool
++ * potentially needed by interfaces. See http://bugs.gnome.org/571820 */
++ g_object_class = g_type_class_ref (G_TYPE_OBJECT);
++
++ /* Need to make sure all the types are loaded in and initialize
++ * their signals and properties.
++ */
++ for (i=0; object_types[i]; i++) {
++ if (G_TYPE_IS_CLASSED (object_types[i]))
++ g_type_class_ref (object_types[i]);
++ if (G_TYPE_IS_INTERFACE (object_types[i]))
++ g_type_default_interface_ref (object_types[i]);
++ }
++
++ g_type_class_unref (g_object_class);
++
++ return object_types;
++}
++
++/*
++ * This uses GObject type functions to output signal prototypes and the object
++ * hierarchy.
++ */
++
++/* The output files */
++const gchar *signals_filename = "${new_signals_filename}";
++const gchar *hierarchy_filename = "${new_hierarchy_filename}";
++const gchar *interfaces_filename = "${new_interfaces_filename}";
++const gchar *prerequisites_filename = "${new_prerequisites_filename}";
++const gchar *args_filename = "${new_args_filename}";
++const gchar *actions_filename = "${new_actions_filename}";
++
++static void output_signals (void);
++static void output_object_signals (FILE *fp,
++ GType object_type);
++static void output_object_signal (FILE *fp,
++ const gchar *object_class_name,
++ guint signal_id);
++static const gchar * get_type_name (GType type,
++ gboolean * is_pointer);
++static void output_object_hierarchy (void);
++static void output_hierarchy (FILE *fp,
++ GType type,
++ guint level);
++
++static void output_object_interfaces (void);
++static void output_interfaces (FILE *fp,
++ GType type);
++
++static void output_interface_prerequisites (void);
++static void output_prerequisites (FILE *fp,
++ GType type);
++
++static void output_args (void);
++static void output_object_args (FILE *fp, GType object_type);
++
++static void output_actions (void);
++static void output_object_actions (FILE *fp, GType object_type);
++
++int
++main (${main_func_params})
++{
++ ${type_init_func};
++
++ get_object_types ();
++
++ output_signals ();
++ output_object_hierarchy ();
++ output_object_interfaces ();
++ output_interface_prerequisites ();
++ output_args ();
++ output_actions ();
++
++ return 0;
++}
++
++static void
++output_signals (void)
++{
++ FILE *fp;
++ gint i;
++
++ fp = fopen (signals_filename, "w");
++ if (fp == NULL) {
++ g_warning ("Couldn't open output file: %s : %s", signals_filename, g_strerror(errno));
++ return;
++ }
++
++ for (i = 0; object_types[i]; i++)
++ output_object_signals (fp, object_types[i]);
++
++ fclose (fp);
++}
++
++static gint
++compare_signals (const void *a, const void *b)
++{
++ const guint *signal_a = a;
++ const guint *signal_b = b;
++
++ return strcmp (g_signal_name (*signal_a), g_signal_name (*signal_b));
++}
++
++/* This outputs all the signals of one object. */
++static void
++output_object_signals (FILE *fp, GType object_type)
++{
++ const gchar *object_class_name;
++ guint *signals, n_signals;
++ guint sig;
++
++ if (G_TYPE_IS_INSTANTIATABLE (object_type) ||
++ G_TYPE_IS_INTERFACE (object_type)) {
++
++ object_class_name = g_type_name (object_type);
++
++ signals = g_signal_list_ids (object_type, &n_signals);
++ qsort (signals, n_signals, sizeof (guint), compare_signals);
++
++ for (sig = 0; sig < n_signals; sig++) {
++ output_object_signal (fp, object_class_name, signals[sig]);
++ }
++ g_free (signals);
++ }
++}
++
++/* This outputs one signal. */
++static void
++output_object_signal (FILE *fp,
++ const gchar *object_name,
++ guint signal_id)
++{
++ GSignalQuery query_info;
++ const gchar *type_name, *ret_type, *object_arg, *arg_name;
++ gchar *pos, *object_arg_lower;
++ gboolean is_pointer;
++ gchar buffer[1024];
++ guint i, param;
++ gint param_num, widget_num, event_num, callback_num;
++ gint *arg_num;
++ gchar signal_name[128];
++ gchar flags[16];
++
++ /* g_print ("Object: %s Signal: %u\\n", object_name, signal_id);*/
++
++ param_num = 1;
++ widget_num = event_num = callback_num = 0;
++
++ g_signal_query (signal_id, &query_info);
++
++ /* Output the signal object type and the argument name. We assume the
++ * type is a pointer - I think that is OK. We remove "Gtk" or "Gnome" and
++ * convert to lower case for the argument name. */
++ pos = buffer;
++ sprintf (pos, "%s ", object_name);
++ pos += strlen (pos);
++
++ /* Try to come up with a sensible variable name for the first arg
++ * It chops off 2 know prefixes :/ and makes the name lowercase
++ * It should replace lowercase -> uppercase with '_'
++ * GFileMonitor -> file_monitor
++ * GIOExtensionPoint -> extension_point
++ * GtkTreeView -> tree_view
++ * if 2nd char is upper case too
++ * search for first lower case and go back one char
++ * else
++ * search for next upper case
++ */
++ if (!strncmp (object_name, "Gtk", 3))
++ object_arg = object_name + 3;
++ else if (!strncmp (object_name, "Gnome", 5))
++ object_arg = object_name + 5;
++ else
++ object_arg = object_name;
++
++ object_arg_lower = g_ascii_strdown (object_arg, -1);
++ sprintf (pos, "*%s\\n", object_arg_lower);
++ pos += strlen (pos);
++ if (!strncmp (object_arg_lower, "widget", 6))
++ widget_num = 2;
++ g_free(object_arg_lower);
++
++ /* Convert signal name to use underscores rather than dashes '-'. */
++ strncpy (signal_name, query_info.signal_name, 127);
++ signal_name[127] = '\\0';
++ for (i = 0; signal_name[i]; i++) {
++ if (signal_name[i] == '-')
++ signal_name[i] = '_';
++ }
++
++ /* Output the signal parameters. */
++ for (param = 0; param < query_info.n_params; param++) {
++ type_name = get_type_name (query_info.param_types[param] & ~G_SIGNAL_TYPE_STATIC_SCOPE, &is_pointer);
++
++ /* Most arguments to the callback are called "arg1", "arg2", etc.
++ GtkWidgets are called "widget", "widget2", ...
++ GtkCallbacks are called "callback", "callback2", ... */
++ if (!strcmp (type_name, "GtkWidget")) {
++ arg_name = "widget";
++ arg_num = &widget_num;
++ }
++ else if (!strcmp (type_name, "GtkCallback")
++ || !strcmp (type_name, "GtkCCallback")) {
++ arg_name = "callback";
++ arg_num = &callback_num;
++ }
++ else {
++ arg_name = "arg";
++ arg_num = ¶m_num;
++ }
++ sprintf (pos, "%s ", type_name);
++ pos += strlen (pos);
++
++ if (!arg_num || *arg_num == 0)
++ sprintf (pos, "%s%s\\n", is_pointer ? "*" : " ", arg_name);
++ else
++ sprintf (pos, "%s%s%i\\n", is_pointer ? "*" : " ", arg_name,
++ *arg_num);
++ pos += strlen (pos);
++
++ if (arg_num) {
++ if (*arg_num == 0)
++ *arg_num = 2;
++ else
++ *arg_num += 1;
++ }
++ }
++
++ pos = flags;
++ /* We use one-character flags for simplicity. */
++ if (query_info.signal_flags & G_SIGNAL_RUN_FIRST)
++ *pos++ = 'f';
++ if (query_info.signal_flags & G_SIGNAL_RUN_LAST)
++ *pos++ = 'l';
++ if (query_info.signal_flags & G_SIGNAL_RUN_CLEANUP)
++ *pos++ = 'c';
++ if (query_info.signal_flags & G_SIGNAL_NO_RECURSE)
++ *pos++ = 'r';
++ if (query_info.signal_flags & G_SIGNAL_DETAILED)
++ *pos++ = 'd';
++ if (query_info.signal_flags & G_SIGNAL_ACTION)
++ *pos++ = 'a';
++ if (query_info.signal_flags & G_SIGNAL_NO_HOOKS)
++ *pos++ = 'h';
++ *pos = 0;
++
++ /* Output the return type and function name. */
++ ret_type = get_type_name (query_info.return_type & ~G_SIGNAL_TYPE_STATIC_SCOPE, &is_pointer);
++
++ fprintf (fp,
++ "<SIGNAL>\\n<NAME>%s::%s</NAME>\\n<RETURNS>%s%s</RETURNS>\\n<FLAGS>%s</FLAGS>\\n%s</SIGNAL>\\n\\n",
++ object_name, query_info.signal_name, ret_type, is_pointer ? "*" : "", flags, buffer);
++}
++
++
++/* Returns the type name to use for a signal argument or return value, given
++ the GtkType from the signal info. It also sets is_pointer to TRUE if the
++ argument needs a '*' since it is a pointer. */
++static const gchar *
++get_type_name (GType type, gboolean * is_pointer)
++{
++ const gchar *type_name;
++
++ *is_pointer = FALSE;
++ type_name = g_type_name (type);
++
++ switch (type) {
++ case G_TYPE_NONE:
++ case G_TYPE_UCHAR:
++ case G_TYPE_BOOLEAN:
++ case G_TYPE_UINT:
++ case G_TYPE_LONG:
++ case G_TYPE_ULONG:
++ case G_TYPE_POINTER:
++ /* These all have normal C type names so they are OK. */
++ return type_name;
++
++ case G_TYPE_CHAR:
++ return "char";
++
++ case G_TYPE_INT:
++ return "int";
++
++ case G_TYPE_FLOAT:
++ return "float";
++
++ case G_TYPE_DOUBLE:
++ return "double";
++
++ case G_TYPE_STRING:
++ /* A GtkString is really a gchar*. */
++ *is_pointer = TRUE;
++ return "char";
++
++ case G_TYPE_ENUM:
++ case G_TYPE_FLAGS:
++ /* We use a gint for both of these. Hopefully a subtype with a decent
++ name will be registered and used instead, as GTK+ does itself. */
++ return "int";
++
++ case G_TYPE_BOXED:
++ /* The boxed type shouldn't be used itself, only subtypes. Though we
++ return 'gpointer' just in case. */
++ return "gpointer";
++
++ case G_TYPE_PARAM:
++ /* A GParam is really a GParamSpec*. */
++ *is_pointer = TRUE;
++ return "GParamSpec";
++
++#if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION (2, 25, 9)
++ case G_TYPE_VARIANT:
++ *is_pointer = TRUE;
++ return "GVariant";
++#endif
++
++default:
++ break;
++ }
++
++ /* For all GObject subclasses we can use the class name with a "*",
++ e.g. 'GtkWidget *'. */
++ if (g_type_is_a (type, G_TYPE_OBJECT))
++ *is_pointer = TRUE;
++
++ /* Also catch non GObject root types */
++ if (G_TYPE_IS_CLASSED (type))
++ *is_pointer = TRUE;
++
++ /* All boxed subtypes will be pointers as well. */
++ /* Exception: GStrv */
++ if (g_type_is_a (type, G_TYPE_BOXED) &&
++ !g_type_is_a (type, G_TYPE_STRV))
++ *is_pointer = TRUE;
++
++ /* All pointer subtypes will be pointers as well. */
++ if (g_type_is_a (type, G_TYPE_POINTER))
++ *is_pointer = TRUE;
++
++ /* But enums are not */
++ if (g_type_is_a (type, G_TYPE_ENUM) ||
++ g_type_is_a (type, G_TYPE_FLAGS))
++ *is_pointer = FALSE;
++
++ return type_name;
++}
++
++
++/* This outputs the hierarchy of all objects which have been initialized,
++ i.e. by calling their XXX_get_type() initialization function. */
++static void
++output_object_hierarchy (void)
++{
++ FILE *fp;
++ gint i,j;
++ GType root, type;
++ GType root_types[${ntypes}] = { G_TYPE_INVALID, };
++
++ fp = fopen (hierarchy_filename, "w");
++ if (fp == NULL) {
++ g_warning ("Couldn't open output file: %s : %s", hierarchy_filename, g_strerror(errno));
++ return;
++ }
++ output_hierarchy (fp, G_TYPE_OBJECT, 0);
++ output_hierarchy (fp, G_TYPE_INTERFACE, 0);
++
++ for (i=0; object_types[i]; i++) {
++ root = object_types[i];
++ while ((type = g_type_parent (root))) {
++ root = type;
++ }
++ if ((root != G_TYPE_OBJECT) && (root != G_TYPE_INTERFACE)) {
++ for (j=0; root_types[j]; j++) {
++ if (root == root_types[j]) {
++ root = G_TYPE_INVALID; break;
++ }
++ }
++ if(root) {
++ root_types[j] = root;
++ output_hierarchy (fp, root, 0);
++ }
++ }
++ }
++
++ fclose (fp);
++}
++
++/* This is called recursively to output the hierarchy of a object. */
++static void
++output_hierarchy (FILE *fp,
++ GType type,
++ guint level)
++{
++ guint i;
++ GType *children;
++ guint n_children;
++
++ if (!type)
++ return;
++
++ for (i = 0; i < level; i++)
++ fprintf (fp, " ");
++ fprintf (fp, "%s\\n", g_type_name (type));
++
++ children = g_type_children (type, &n_children);
++
++ for (i=0; i < n_children; i++)
++ output_hierarchy (fp, children[i], level + 1);
++
++ g_free (children);
++}
++
++static void output_object_interfaces (void)
++{
++ guint i;
++ FILE *fp;
++
++ fp = fopen (interfaces_filename, "w");
++ if (fp == NULL) {
++ g_warning ("Couldn't open output file: %s : %s", interfaces_filename, g_strerror(errno));
++ return;
++ }
++ output_interfaces (fp, G_TYPE_OBJECT);
++
++ for (i = 0; object_types[i]; i++) {
++ if (!g_type_parent (object_types[i]) &&
++ (object_types[i] != G_TYPE_OBJECT) &&
++ G_TYPE_IS_INSTANTIATABLE (object_types[i])) {
++ output_interfaces (fp, object_types[i]);
++ }
++ }
++ fclose (fp);
++}
++
++static void
++output_interfaces (FILE *fp,
++ GType type)
++{
++ guint i;
++ GType *children, *interfaces;
++ guint n_children, n_interfaces;
++
++ if (!type)
++ return;
++
++ interfaces = g_type_interfaces (type, &n_interfaces);
++
++ if (n_interfaces > 0) {
++ fprintf (fp, "%s", g_type_name (type));
++ for (i=0; i < n_interfaces; i++)
++ fprintf (fp, " %s", g_type_name (interfaces[i]));
++ fprintf (fp, "\\n");
++ }
++ g_free (interfaces);
++
++ children = g_type_children (type, &n_children);
++
++ for (i=0; i < n_children; i++)
++ output_interfaces (fp, children[i]);
++
++ g_free (children);
++}
++
++static void output_interface_prerequisites (void)
++{
++ FILE *fp;
++
++ fp = fopen (prerequisites_filename, "w");
++ if (fp == NULL) {
++ g_warning ("Couldn't open output file: %s : %s", prerequisites_filename, g_strerror(errno));
++ return;
++ }
++ output_prerequisites (fp, G_TYPE_INTERFACE);
++ fclose (fp);
++}
++
++static void
++output_prerequisites (FILE *fp,
++ GType type)
++{
++#if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,0)
++ guint i;
++ GType *children, *prerequisites;
++ guint n_children, n_prerequisites;
++
++ if (!type)
++ return;
++
++ prerequisites = g_type_interface_prerequisites (type, &n_prerequisites);
++
++ if (n_prerequisites > 0) {
++ fprintf (fp, "%s", g_type_name (type));
++ for (i=0; i < n_prerequisites; i++)
++ fprintf (fp, " %s", g_type_name (prerequisites[i]));
++ fprintf (fp, "\\n");
++ }
++ g_free (prerequisites);
++
++ children = g_type_children (type, &n_children);
++
++ for (i=0; i < n_children; i++)
++ output_prerequisites (fp, children[i]);
++
++ g_free (children);
++#endif
++}
++
++static void
++output_actions (void)
++{
++ FILE *fp;
++ gint i;
++
++ fp = fopen (actions_filename, "w");
++ if (fp == NULL) {
++ g_warning ("Couldn't open output file: %s : %s", actions_filename, g_strerror(errno));
++ return;
++ }
++
++ for (i = 0; object_types[i]; i++) {
++ output_object_actions (fp, object_types[i]);
++ }
++
++ fclose (fp);
++}
++
++static void
++output_object_actions (FILE *fp, GType object_type)
++{
++ gpointer class;
++
++ if (!G_TYPE_IS_OBJECT (object_type))
++ return;
++
++ class = g_type_class_peek (object_type);
++ if (!class)
++ return;
++
++#ifdef GTK_IS_WIDGET_CLASS
++#if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(3,96,0)
++ if (GTK_IS_WIDGET_CLASS (class)) {
++ guint i = 0;
++ const char *action_name;
++ GType owner;
++ const GVariantType *parameter_type;
++ const char *property_name;
++ const gchar *object_class_name;
++
++ object_class_name = g_type_name (object_type);
++ while (gtk_widget_class_query_action (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (class),
++ i,
++ &owner,
++ &action_name,
++ ¶meter_type,
++ &property_name)) {
++ i++;
++ if (owner == G_TYPE_FROM_CLASS (class))
++ fprintf (fp, "<ACTION>\\n"
++ "<NAME>%s:::%s</NAME>\\n"
++ "<PARAMETER>%s</PARAMETER>\\n"
++ "<PROPERTY>%s</PROPERTY>\\n"
++ "</ACTION>\\n\\n",
++ object_class_name,
++ action_name,
++ parameter_type ? g_variant_type_peek_string (parameter_type) : "",
++ property_name ? property_name : "");
++ }
++ }
++#endif
++#endif
++}
++
++static void
++output_args (void)
++{
++ FILE *fp;
++ gint i;
++
++ fp = fopen (args_filename, "w");
++ if (fp == NULL) {
++ g_warning ("Couldn't open output file: %s : %s", args_filename, g_strerror(errno));
++ return;
++ }
++
++ for (i = 0; object_types[i]; i++) {
++ output_object_args (fp, object_types[i]);
++ }
++
++ fclose (fp);
++}
++
++static gint
++compare_param_specs (const void *a, const void *b)
++{
++ GParamSpec *spec_a = *(GParamSpec **)a;
++ GParamSpec *spec_b = *(GParamSpec **)b;
++
++ return strcmp (g_param_spec_get_name (spec_a), g_param_spec_get_name (spec_b));
++}
++
++/* Its common to have unsigned properties restricted
++ * to the signed range. Therefore we make this look
++ * a bit nicer by spelling out the max constants.
++ */
++
++/* Don't use "==" with floats, it might trigger a gcc warning. */
++#define GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT(x, y) (x <= y && x >= y)
++
++static gchar*
++describe_double_constant (gdouble value)
++{
++ gchar *desc;
++
++ if (GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT (value, G_MAXDOUBLE))
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXDOUBLE");
++ else if (GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT (value, G_MINDOUBLE))
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MINDOUBLE");
++ else if (GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT (value, -G_MAXDOUBLE))
++ desc = g_strdup ("-G_MAXDOUBLE");
++ else if (GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT (value, (gdouble)G_MAXFLOAT))
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXFLOAT");
++ else if (GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT (value, (gdouble)G_MINFLOAT))
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MINFLOAT");
++ else if (GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT (value, (gdouble)-G_MAXFLOAT))
++ desc = g_strdup ("-G_MAXFLOAT");
++ else{
++ /* make sure floats are output with a decimal dot irrespective of
++ * current locale. Use formatd since we want human-readable numbers
++ * and do not need the exact same bit representation when deserialising */
++ desc = g_malloc0 (G_ASCII_DTOSTR_BUF_SIZE);
++ g_ascii_formatd (desc, G_ASCII_DTOSTR_BUF_SIZE, "%g", value);
++ }
++
++ return desc;
++}
++
++static gchar*
++describe_signed_constant (gsize size, gint64 value)
++{
++ gchar *desc = NULL;
++
++ switch (size) {
++ case 2:
++ if (sizeof (int) == 2) {
++ if (value == G_MAXINT)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXINT");
++ else if (value == G_MININT)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MININT");
++ }
++ break;
++ case 4:
++ if (sizeof (int) == 4) {
++ if (value == G_MAXINT)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXINT");
++ else if (value == G_MININT)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MININT");
++ }
++ if (value == G_MAXLONG)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXLONG");
++ else if (value == G_MINLONG)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MINLONG");
++ break;
++ case 8:
++ if (value == G_MAXINT64)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXINT64");
++ else if (value == G_MININT64)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MININT64");
++ break;
++ default:
++ break;
++ }
++ if (!desc)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%" G_GINT64_FORMAT, value);
++
++ return desc;
++}
++
++static gchar*
++describe_unsigned_constant (gsize size, guint64 value)
++{
++ gchar *desc = NULL;
++
++ switch (size) {
++ case 2:
++ if (sizeof (int) == 2) {
++ if (value == (guint64)G_MAXINT)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXINT");
++ else if (value == G_MAXUINT)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXUINT");
++ }
++ break;
++ case 4:
++ if (sizeof (int) == 4) {
++ if (value == (guint64)G_MAXINT)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXINT");
++ else if (value == G_MAXUINT)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXUINT");
++ }
++ if (desc == NULL) {
++ if (value == (guint64)G_MAXLONG)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXLONG");
++ else if (value == G_MAXULONG)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXULONG");
++ }
++ break;
++ case 8:
++ if (value == G_MAXINT64)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXINT64");
++ else if (value == G_MAXUINT64)
++ desc = g_strdup ("G_MAXUINT64");
++ break;
++ default:
++ break;
++ }
++ if (!desc)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%" G_GUINT64_FORMAT, value);
++
++ return desc;
++}
++
++static gchar*
++describe_type (GParamSpec *spec)
++{
++ gchar *desc;
++ gchar *lower;
++ gchar *upper;
++
++ if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_CHAR (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecChar *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_CHAR (spec);
++
++ lower = describe_signed_constant (sizeof(gchar), pspec->minimum);
++ upper = describe_signed_constant (sizeof(gchar), pspec->maximum);
++ if (pspec->minimum == G_MININT8 && pspec->maximum == G_MAXINT8)
++ desc = g_strdup ("");
++ else if (pspec->minimum == G_MININT8)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("<= %s", upper);
++ else if (pspec->maximum == G_MAXINT8)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf (">= %s", lower);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("[%s,%s]", lower, upper);
++ g_free (lower);
++ g_free (upper);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_UCHAR (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecUChar *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_UCHAR (spec);
++
++ lower = describe_unsigned_constant (sizeof(guchar), pspec->minimum);
++ upper = describe_unsigned_constant (sizeof(guchar), pspec->maximum);
++ if (pspec->minimum == 0 && pspec->maximum == G_MAXUINT8)
++ desc = g_strdup ("");
++ else if (pspec->minimum == 0)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("<= %s", upper);
++ else if (pspec->maximum == G_MAXUINT8)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf (">= %s", lower);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("[%s,%s]", lower, upper);
++ g_free (lower);
++ g_free (upper);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_INT (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecInt *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_INT (spec);
++
++ lower = describe_signed_constant (sizeof(gint), pspec->minimum);
++ upper = describe_signed_constant (sizeof(gint), pspec->maximum);
++ if (pspec->minimum == G_MININT && pspec->maximum == G_MAXINT)
++ desc = g_strdup ("");
++ else if (pspec->minimum == G_MININT)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("<= %s", upper);
++ else if (pspec->maximum == G_MAXINT)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf (">= %s", lower);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("[%s,%s]", lower, upper);
++ g_free (lower);
++ g_free (upper);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_UINT (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecUInt *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_UINT (spec);
++
++ lower = describe_unsigned_constant (sizeof(guint), pspec->minimum);
++ upper = describe_unsigned_constant (sizeof(guint), pspec->maximum);
++ if (pspec->minimum == 0 && pspec->maximum == G_MAXUINT)
++ desc = g_strdup ("");
++ else if (pspec->minimum == 0)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("<= %s", upper);
++ else if (pspec->maximum == G_MAXUINT)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf (">= %s", lower);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("[%s,%s]", lower, upper);
++ g_free (lower);
++ g_free (upper);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_LONG (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecLong *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_LONG (spec);
++
++ lower = describe_signed_constant (sizeof(glong), pspec->minimum);
++ upper = describe_signed_constant (sizeof(glong), pspec->maximum);
++ if (pspec->minimum == G_MINLONG && pspec->maximum == G_MAXLONG)
++ desc = g_strdup ("");
++ else if (pspec->minimum == G_MINLONG)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("<= %s", upper);
++ else if (pspec->maximum == G_MAXLONG)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf (">= %s", lower);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("[%s,%s]", lower, upper);
++ g_free (lower);
++ g_free (upper);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_ULONG (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecULong *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_ULONG (spec);
++
++ lower = describe_unsigned_constant (sizeof(gulong), pspec->minimum);
++ upper = describe_unsigned_constant (sizeof(gulong), pspec->maximum);
++ if (pspec->minimum == 0 && pspec->maximum == G_MAXULONG)
++ desc = g_strdup ("");
++ else if (pspec->minimum == 0)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("<= %s", upper);
++ else if (pspec->maximum == G_MAXULONG)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf (">= %s", lower);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("[%s,%s]", lower, upper);
++ g_free (lower);
++ g_free (upper);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_INT64 (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecInt64 *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_INT64 (spec);
++
++ lower = describe_signed_constant (sizeof(gint64), pspec->minimum);
++ upper = describe_signed_constant (sizeof(gint64), pspec->maximum);
++ if (pspec->minimum == G_MININT64 && pspec->maximum == G_MAXINT64)
++ desc = g_strdup ("");
++ else if (pspec->minimum == G_MININT64)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("<= %s", upper);
++ else if (pspec->maximum == G_MAXINT64)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf (">= %s", lower);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("[%s,%s]", lower, upper);
++ g_free (lower);
++ g_free (upper);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_UINT64 (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecUInt64 *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_UINT64 (spec);
++
++ lower = describe_unsigned_constant (sizeof(guint64), pspec->minimum);
++ upper = describe_unsigned_constant (sizeof(guint64), pspec->maximum);
++ if (pspec->minimum == 0 && pspec->maximum == G_MAXUINT64)
++ desc = g_strdup ("");
++ else if (pspec->minimum == 0)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("<= %s", upper);
++ else if (pspec->maximum == G_MAXUINT64)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf (">= %s", lower);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("[%s,%s]", lower, upper);
++ g_free (lower);
++ g_free (upper);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_FLOAT (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecFloat *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_FLOAT (spec);
++
++ lower = describe_double_constant (pspec->minimum);
++ upper = describe_double_constant (pspec->maximum);
++ if (GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT (pspec->minimum, -G_MAXFLOAT)) {
++ if (GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT (pspec->maximum, G_MAXFLOAT))
++ desc = g_strdup ("");
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("<= %s", upper);
++ }
++ else if (GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT (pspec->maximum, G_MAXFLOAT))
++ desc = g_strdup_printf (">= %s", lower);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("[%s,%s]", lower, upper);
++ g_free (lower);
++ g_free (upper);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_DOUBLE (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecDouble *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_DOUBLE (spec);
++
++ lower = describe_double_constant (pspec->minimum);
++ upper = describe_double_constant (pspec->maximum);
++ if (GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT (pspec->minimum, -G_MAXDOUBLE)) {
++ if (GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT (pspec->maximum, G_MAXDOUBLE))
++ desc = g_strdup ("");
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("<= %s", upper);
++ }
++ else if (GTKDOC_COMPARE_FLOAT (pspec->maximum, G_MAXDOUBLE))
++ desc = g_strdup_printf (">= %s", lower);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("[%s,%s]", lower, upper);
++ g_free (lower);
++ g_free (upper);
++ }
++#if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION (2, 12, 0)
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_GTYPE (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecGType *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_GTYPE (spec);
++ gboolean is_pointer;
++
++ desc = g_strdup (get_type_name (pspec->is_a_type, &is_pointer));
++ }
++#endif
++#if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION (2, 25, 9)
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_VARIANT (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecVariant *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_VARIANT (spec);
++ gchar *variant_type;
++
++ variant_type = g_variant_type_dup_string (pspec->type);
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("GVariant<%s>", variant_type);
++ g_free (variant_type);
++ }
++#endif
++ else {
++ desc = g_strdup ("");
++ }
++
++ return desc;
++}
++
++static gchar*
++describe_default (GParamSpec *spec)
++{
++ gchar *desc;
++
++ if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_CHAR (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecChar *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_CHAR (spec);
++
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%d", pspec->default_value);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_UCHAR (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecUChar *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_UCHAR (spec);
++
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%u", pspec->default_value);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_BOOLEAN (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecBoolean *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_BOOLEAN (spec);
++
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%s", pspec->default_value ? "TRUE" : "FALSE");
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_INT (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecInt *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_INT (spec);
++
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%d", pspec->default_value);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_UINT (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecUInt *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_UINT (spec);
++
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%u", pspec->default_value);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_LONG (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecLong *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_LONG (spec);
++
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%ld", pspec->default_value);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_LONG (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecULong *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_ULONG (spec);
++
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%lu", pspec->default_value);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_INT64 (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecInt64 *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_INT64 (spec);
++
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%" G_GINT64_FORMAT, pspec->default_value);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_UINT64 (spec))
++ {
++ GParamSpecUInt64 *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_UINT64 (spec);
++
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%" G_GUINT64_FORMAT, pspec->default_value);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_UNICHAR (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecUnichar *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_UNICHAR (spec);
++
++ if (g_unichar_isprint (pspec->default_value))
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("'%c'", pspec->default_value);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%u", pspec->default_value);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_ENUM (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecEnum *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_ENUM (spec);
++
++ GEnumValue *value = g_enum_get_value (pspec->enum_class, pspec->default_value);
++ if (value)
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%s", value->value_name);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%d", pspec->default_value);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_FLAGS (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecFlags *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_FLAGS (spec);
++ guint default_value;
++ GString *acc;
++
++ default_value = pspec->default_value;
++ acc = g_string_new ("");
++
++ while (default_value) {
++ GFlagsValue *value = g_flags_get_first_value (pspec->flags_class, default_value);
++
++ if (!value)
++ break;
++
++ if (acc->len > 0)
++ g_string_append (acc, " | ");
++ g_string_append (acc, value->value_name);
++
++ default_value &= ~value->value;
++ }
++
++ if (default_value == 0)
++ desc = g_string_free (acc, FALSE);
++ else {
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("%d", pspec->default_value);
++ g_string_free (acc, TRUE);
++ }
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_FLOAT (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecFloat *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_FLOAT (spec);
++
++ /* make sure floats are output with a decimal dot irrespective of
++ * current locale. Use formatd since we want human-readable numbers
++ * and do not need the exact same bit representation when deserialising */
++ desc = g_malloc0 (G_ASCII_DTOSTR_BUF_SIZE);
++ g_ascii_formatd (desc, G_ASCII_DTOSTR_BUF_SIZE, "%g",
++ pspec->default_value);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_DOUBLE (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecDouble *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_DOUBLE (spec);
++
++ /* make sure floats are output with a decimal dot irrespective of
++ * current locale. Use formatd since we want human-readable numbers
++ * and do not need the exact same bit representation when deserialising */
++ desc = g_malloc0 (G_ASCII_DTOSTR_BUF_SIZE);
++ g_ascii_formatd (desc, G_ASCII_DTOSTR_BUF_SIZE, "%g",
++ pspec->default_value);
++ }
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_STRING (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecString *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_STRING (spec);
++
++ if (pspec->default_value) {
++ gchar *esc = g_strescape (pspec->default_value, NULL);
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("\\"%s\\"", esc);
++ g_free (esc);
++ }
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup_printf ("NULL");
++ }
++#if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION (2, 25, 9)
++ else if (G_IS_PARAM_SPEC_VARIANT (spec)) {
++ GParamSpecVariant *pspec = G_PARAM_SPEC_VARIANT (spec);
++
++ if (pspec->default_value)
++ desc = g_variant_print (pspec->default_value, TRUE);
++ else
++ desc = g_strdup ("NULL");
++ }
++#endif
++ else {
++ desc = g_strdup ("");
++ }
++
++ return desc;
++}
++
++
++static void
++output_object_args (FILE *fp, GType object_type)
++{
++ gpointer class;
++ const gchar *object_class_name;
++ guint arg;
++ gchar flags[16], *pos;
++ GParamSpec **properties;
++ guint n_properties;
++ gboolean child_prop;
++ gboolean style_prop;
++ gboolean is_pointer;
++ const gchar *type_name;
++ gchar *type_desc;
++ gchar *default_value;
++
++ if (G_TYPE_IS_OBJECT (object_type)) {
++ class = g_type_class_peek (object_type);
++ if (!class)
++ return;
++
++ properties = g_object_class_list_properties (class, &n_properties);
++ }
++#if GLIB_MAJOR_VERSION > 2 || (GLIB_MAJOR_VERSION == 2 && GLIB_MINOR_VERSION >= 3)
++ else if (G_TYPE_IS_INTERFACE (object_type)) {
++ class = g_type_default_interface_ref (object_type);
++
++ if (!class)
++ return;
++
++ properties = g_object_interface_list_properties (class, &n_properties);
++ }
++#endif
++ else
++ return;
++
++ object_class_name = g_type_name (object_type);
++
++ child_prop = FALSE;
++ style_prop = FALSE;
++
++ while (TRUE) {
++ qsort (properties, n_properties, sizeof (GParamSpec *), compare_param_specs);
++ for (arg = 0; arg < n_properties; arg++) {
++ GParamSpec *spec = properties[arg];
++ const gchar *nick, *blurb, *dot;
++
++ if (spec->owner_type != object_type)
++ continue;
++
++ pos = flags;
++ /* We use one-character flags for simplicity. */
++ if (child_prop && !style_prop)
++ *pos++ = 'c';
++ if (style_prop)
++ *pos++ = 's';
++ if (spec->flags & G_PARAM_READABLE)
++ *pos++ = 'r';
++ if (spec->flags & G_PARAM_WRITABLE)
++ *pos++ = 'w';
++ if (spec->flags & G_PARAM_CONSTRUCT)
++ *pos++ = 'x';
++ if (spec->flags & G_PARAM_CONSTRUCT_ONLY)
++ *pos++ = 'X';
++ *pos = 0;
++
++ nick = g_param_spec_get_nick (spec);
++ blurb = g_param_spec_get_blurb (spec);
++
++ dot = "";
++ if (blurb) {
++ int str_len = strlen (blurb);
++ if (str_len > 0 && blurb[str_len - 1] != '.')
++ dot = ".";
++ }
++
++ type_desc = describe_type (spec);
++ default_value = describe_default (spec);
++ type_name = get_type_name (spec->value_type, &is_pointer);
++ fprintf (fp, "<ARG>\\n"
++ "<NAME>%s::%s</NAME>\\n"
++ "<TYPE>%s%s</TYPE>\\n"
++ "<RANGE>%s</RANGE>\\n"
++ "<FLAGS>%s</FLAGS>\\n"
++ "<NICK>%s</NICK>\\n"
++ "<BLURB>%s%s</BLURB>\\n"
++ "<DEFAULT>%s</DEFAULT>\\n"
++ "</ARG>\\n\\n",
++ object_class_name, g_param_spec_get_name (spec), type_name,
++ is_pointer ? "*" : "", type_desc, flags, nick ? nick : "(null)",
++ blurb ? blurb : "(null)", dot, default_value);
++ g_free (type_desc);
++ g_free (default_value);
++ }
++
++ g_free (properties);
++
++#ifdef GTK_IS_CONTAINER_CLASS
++#if !GTK_CHECK_VERSION(3,96,0)
++ if (!child_prop && GTK_IS_CONTAINER_CLASS (class)) {
++ properties = gtk_container_class_list_child_properties (class, &n_properties);
++ child_prop = TRUE;
++ continue;
++ }
++#endif
++#endif
++
++#ifdef GTK_IS_CELL_AREA_CLASS
++ if (!child_prop && GTK_IS_CELL_AREA_CLASS (class)) {
++ properties = gtk_cell_area_class_list_cell_properties (class, &n_properties);
++ child_prop = TRUE;
++ continue;
++ }
++#endif
++
++#ifdef GTK_IS_WIDGET_CLASS
++#if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,0) && !GTK_CHECK_VERSION(3,89,2)
++ if (!style_prop && GTK_IS_WIDGET_CLASS (class)) {
++ properties = gtk_widget_class_list_style_properties (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (class), &n_properties);
++ style_prop = TRUE;
++ continue;
++ }
++#endif
++#endif
++
++"""
++
++MAIN_CODE_END = """
++ break;
++ }
++}
++"""
++
++
++def execute_command(options, description, command, env=None):
++ if options.verbose:
++ call = subprocess.check_call
++ else:
++ call = subprocess.check_output
++
++ try:
++ call(command, env=env)
++ except subprocess.CalledProcessError as e:
++ logging.warning('%s scanner failed: %d, command: %s', description,
++ e.returncode, ' '.join(command))
++ return e.returncode
++ except OSError as e:
++ logging.warning('%s scanner failed: %s, command: %s', description,
++ str(e), ' '.join(command))
++ return 1
++ return 0
++
++
++def run(options):
++ logging.info('options: %s', str(options.__dict__))
++
++ c_file = options.module + '-scan.c'
++ output = open(c_file, 'w', encoding='utf-8')
++
++ base_filename = os.path.join(options.output_dir, options.module)
++ old_signals_filename = base_filename + '.signals'
++ new_signals_filename = base_filename + '.signals.new'
++ old_hierarchy_filename = base_filename + '.hierarchy'
++ new_hierarchy_filename = base_filename + '.hierarchy.new'
++ old_interfaces_filename = base_filename + '.interfaces'
++ new_interfaces_filename = base_filename + '.interfaces.new'
++ old_prerequisites_filename = base_filename + '.prerequisites'
++ new_prerequisites_filename = base_filename + '.prerequisites.new'
++ old_args_filename = base_filename + '.args'
++ new_args_filename = base_filename + '.args.new'
++ old_actions_filename = base_filename + '.actions'
++ new_actions_filename = base_filename + '.actions.new'
++
++ # generate a C program to scan the types
++
++ includes = ""
++ forward_decls = ""
++ get_types = ""
++ ntypes = 1
++
++ for line in open(options.types, 'r', encoding='utf-8'):
++ if line.startswith('#include'):
++ includes += line
++ elif line.startswith('%') or line.strip() == '':
++ continue
++ else:
++ line = line.strip()
++ get_types += ' object_types[i++] = ' + line + ' ();\n'
++ forward_decls += 'extern GType ' + line + ' (void);\n'
++ ntypes += 1
++
++ output.write(COMMON_INCLUDES)
++
++ if includes:
++ output.write(includes)
++ else:
++ output.write(forward_decls)
++
++ if options.query_child_properties:
++ output.write(QUERY_CHILD_PROPS_PROTOTYPE % options.query_child_properties)
++
++ # substitute local vars in the template
++ type_init_func = options.type_init_func
++ main_func_params = "int argc, char *argv[]"
++ if "argc" in type_init_func and "argv" not in type_init_func:
++ main_func_params = "int argc, G_GNUC_UNUSED char *argv[]"
++ elif "argc" not in type_init_func and "argv" in type_init_func:
++ main_func_params = "G_GNUC_UNUSED int argc, char *argv[]"
++ elif "argc" not in type_init_func and "argv" not in type_init_func:
++ main_func_params = "void"
++
++ # TODO: we should explicitly reference the vars that we substitute
++ # template_vars = {
++ # 'get_types': get_types,
++ # 'ntypes': ntypes,
++ # 'main_func_params', main_func_params,
++ # 'new_args_filename': new_args_filename,
++ # 'new_hierarchy_filename': new_hierarchy_filename,
++ # 'new_interfaces_filename': new_interfaces_filename,
++ # 'new_prerequisites_filename': new_prerequisites_filename,
++ # 'new_signals_filename': new_signals_filename,
++ # 'type_init_func': type_init_func
++ # }
++ # output.write(string.Template(MAIN_CODE).substitute(template_vars))
++ output.write(string.Template(MAIN_CODE).substitute(locals()))
++
++ if options.query_child_properties:
++ output.write(QUERY_CHILD_PROPS_CODE % options.query_child_properties)
++
++ output.write(MAIN_CODE_END)
++
++ output.close()
++
++ # Compile and run our file
++ if 'libtool' in options.cc:
++ o_file = options.module + '-scan.lo'
++ else:
++ o_file = options.module + '-scan.o'
++
++ x_file = options.module + '-scan' + config.exeext
++
++ logging.debug('Intermediate scanner files: %s, %s, %s', c_file, o_file, x_file)
++
++ res = execute_command(options, 'Compiling',
++ shlex.split(options.cc) + shlex.split(options.cflags) +
++ ["-c", "-o", o_file, c_file])
++ if res:
++ return res
++
++ res = execute_command(options, 'Linking',
++ shlex.split(options.ld) + [o_file] +
++ shlex.split(options.ldflags) + ['-o', x_file])
++ if res:
++ return res
++
++ run_env = os.environ.copy()
++ run_env['LC_MESSAGES'] = 'C'
++ run_env.pop('LC_ALL', None)
++ res = execute_command(options, 'Running',
++ shlex.split(options.run) + ['./' + x_file],
++ env=run_env)
++ if res:
++ return res
++
++ logging.debug('Scan complete')
++ if 'GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE' not in os.environ:
++ os.unlink(c_file)
++ os.unlink(o_file)
++ os.unlink(x_file)
++ if 'libtool' in options.cc:
++ o_file = options.module + '-scan.o'
++ if os.path.exists(o_file):
++ os.unlink(o_file)
++ else:
++ logging.debug('Keeping generated sources for analysis: %s, %s, %s',
++ c_file, o_file, x_file)
++
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_signals_filename, new_signals_filename, False)
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_hierarchy_filename, new_hierarchy_filename, False)
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_interfaces_filename, new_interfaces_filename, False)
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_prerequisites_filename, new_prerequisites_filename, False)
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_args_filename, new_args_filename, False)
++ common.UpdateFileIfChanged(old_actions_filename, new_actions_filename, False)
++
++ return 0
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++import sys
++
++sourcedir = "@sourcedir@"
++builddir = "@builddir@"
++sys.path.append(sourcedir)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++if HAVE_YELP_TOOLS
++SUBDIRS = manual
++endif
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<!--
++ The GNU Free Documentation License 1.1 in DocBook
++ Markup by Eric Baudais <baudais@okstate.edu>
++ Maintained by the GNOME Documentation Project
++ http://developer.gnome.org/projects/gdp
++ Version: 1.0.1
++ Last Modified: Nov 16, 2000
++-->
++
++<appendix id="fdl">
++ <appendixinfo>
++ <releaseinfo>
++ Version 1.1, March 2000
++ </releaseinfo>
++ <copyright>
++ <year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>
++ </copyright>
++ <legalnotice id="fdl-legalnotice">
++ <para>
++ <address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street,
++ Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state>
++ <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country></address>
++ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
++ license document, but changing it is not allowed.
++ </para>
++ </legalnotice>
++ </appendixinfo>
++ <title>GNU Free Documentation License</title>
++
++ <sect1 id="fdl-preamble">
++ <title>0. PREAMBLE</title>
++ <para>
++ The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or
++ other written document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of
++ freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and
++ redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either
++ commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License
++ preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for
++ their work, while not being considered responsible for
++ modifications made by others.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means
++ that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in
++ the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License,
++ which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
++ free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
++ free program should come with manuals providing the same
++ freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited
++ to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work,
++ regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a
++ printed book. We recommend this License principally for works
++ whose purpose is instruction or reference.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++ <sect1 id="fdl-section1">
++ <title>1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS</title>
++ <para id="fdl-document">
++ This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
++ notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
++ distributed under the terms of this License. The
++ <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such manual or
++ work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed
++ as <quote>you</quote>.
++ </para>
++
++ <para id="fdl-modified">
++ A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work
++ containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied
++ verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another
++ language.
++ </para>
++
++ <para id="fdl-secondary">
++ A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a
++ front-matter section of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> that deals exclusively
++ with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the
++ Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related
++ matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within
++ that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a
++ textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any
++ mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
++ connection with the subject or with related matters, or of
++ legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
++ regarding them.
++ </para>
++
++ <para id="fdl-invariant">
++ The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link
++ linkend="fdl-secondary"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles
++ are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
++ notice that says that the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> is released under this
++ License.
++ </para>
++
++ <para id="fdl-cover-texts">
++ The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of
++ text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts,
++ in the notice that says that the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> is released under this
++ License.
++ </para>
++
++ <para id="fdl-transparent">
++ A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document"> Document</link> means a machine-readable
++ copy, represented in a format whose specification is available
++ to the general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited
++ directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for
++ images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for
++ drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is
++ suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic
++ translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text
++ formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format
++ whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage
++ subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy
++ that is not <quote>Transparent</quote> is called
++ <quote>Opaque</quote>.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include
++ plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input
++ format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
++ standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human
++ modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF,
++ proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by
++ proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD
++ and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the
++ machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for
++ output purposes only.
++ </para>
++
++ <para id="fdl-title-page">
++ The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the
++ title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to
++ hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in
++ the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title
++ page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> means the text near the
++ most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the
++ beginning of the body of the text.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="fdl-section2">
++ <title>2. VERBATIM COPYING</title>
++ <para>
++ You may copy and distribute the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> in any medium, either
++ commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
++ copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
++ applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that
++ you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this
++ License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or
++ control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or
++ distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for
++ copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you
++ must also follow the conditions in <link
++ linkend="fdl-section3">section 3</link>.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated
++ above, and you may publicly display copies.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="fdl-section3">
++ <title>3. COPYING IN QUANTITY</title>
++ <para>
++ If you publish printed copies of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> numbering more than 100,
++ and the Document's license notice requires <link
++ linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Cover Texts</link>, you must enclose
++ the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these
++ Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
++ Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also
++ clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these
++ copies. The front cover must present the full title with all
++ words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add
++ other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes
++ limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the
++ <link linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> and satisfy these
++ conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other
++ respects.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
++ legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
++ reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
++ adjacent pages.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ If you publish or distribute <link
++ linkend="fdl-transparent">Opaque</link> copies of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> numbering more than 100,
++ you must either include a machine-readable <link
++ linkend="fdl-transparent">Transparent</link> copy along with
++ each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a
++ publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a
++ complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added
++ material, which the general network-using public has access to
++ download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network
++ protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take
++ reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque
++ copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will
++ remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one
++ year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly
++ or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the
++ public.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors
++ of the <link linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> well before
++ redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance
++ to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="fdl-section4">
++ <title>4. MODIFICATIONS</title>
++ <para>
++ You may copy and distribute a <link
++ linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version</link> of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> under the conditions of
++ sections <link linkend="fdl-section2">2</link> and <link
++ linkend="fdl-section3">3</link> above, provided that you release
++ the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the
++ Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
++ licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version
++ to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do
++ these things in the Modified Version:
++ </para>
++
++ <itemizedlist mark="opencircle">
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>A</title>
++ <para>
++ Use in the <link linkend="fdl-title-page">Title
++ Page</link> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
++ from that of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link>, and from those of
++ previous versions (which should, if there were any, be
++ listed in the History section of the Document). You may
++ use the same title as a previous version if the original
++ publisher of that version gives permission.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>B</title>
++ <para>
++ List on the <link linkend="fdl-title-page">Title
++ Page</link>, as authors, one or more persons or entities
++ responsible for authorship of the modifications in the
++ <link linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version</link>,
++ together with at least five of the principal authors of
++ the <link linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> (all of
++ its principal authors, if it has less than five).
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>C</title>
++ <para>
++ State on the <link linkend="fdl-title-page">Title
++ Page</link> the name of the publisher of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version</link>, as the
++ publisher.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>D</title>
++ <para>
++ Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link>.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>E</title>
++ <para>
++ Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
++ adjacent to the other copyright notices.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>F</title>
++ <para>
++ Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a
++ license notice giving the public permission to use the
++ <link linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version</link> under
++ the terms of this License, in the form shown in the
++ Addendum below.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>G</title>
++ <para>
++ Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link
++ linkend="fdl-invariant"> Invariant Sections</link> and
++ required <link linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Cover
++ Texts</link> given in the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document's</link> license notice.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>H</title>
++ <para>
++ Include an unaltered copy of this License.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>I</title>
++ <para>
++ Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and
++ its title, and add to it an item stating at least the
++ title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version</link> as given on
++ the <link linkend="fdl-title-page">Title Page</link>. If
++ there is no section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the
++ <link linkend="fdl-document">Document</link>, create one
++ stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the
++ Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item
++ describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous
++ sentence.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>J</title>
++ <para>
++ Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> for public access
++ to a <link linkend="fdl-transparent">Transparent</link>
++ copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations
++ given in the Document for previous versions it was based
++ on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote>
++ section. You may omit a network location for a work that
++ was published at least four years before the Document
++ itself, or if the original publisher of the version it
++ refers to gives permission.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>K</title>
++ <para>
++ In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or
++ <quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title,
++ and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of
++ each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or
++ dedications given therein.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>L</title>
++ <para>
++ Preserve all the <link linkend="fdl-invariant">Invariant
++ Sections</link> of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link>, unaltered in their
++ text and in their titles. Section numbers or the
++ equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>M</title>
++ <para>
++ Delete any section entitled
++ <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may not be
++ included in the <link linkend="fdl-modified">Modified
++ Version</link>.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <formalpara>
++ <title>N</title>
++ <para>
++ Do not retitle any existing section as
++ <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to conflict in title with
++ any <link linkend="fdl-invariant">Invariant
++ Section</link>.
++ </para>
++ </formalpara>
++ </listitem>
++ </itemizedlist>
++
++ <para>
++ If the <link linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version</link>
++ includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as
++ <link linkend="fdl-secondary">Secondary Sections</link> and
++ contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your
++ option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To
++ do this, add their titles to the list of <link
++ linkend="fdl-invariant">Invariant Sections</link> in the
++ Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be
++ distinct from any other section titles.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>,
++ provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your <link
++ linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version</link> by various
++ parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
++ has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
++ definition of a standard.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link
++ linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage
++ of up to 25 words as a <link
++ linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of
++ the list of <link linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Cover Texts</link>
++ in the <link linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version</link>.
++ Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text
++ may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one
++ entity. If the <link linkend="fdl-document">Document</link>
++ already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously
++ added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are
++ acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
++ replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
++ publisher that added the old one.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> do not by this License
++ give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
++ assert or imply endorsement of any <link
++ linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version </link>.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="fdl-section5">
++ <title>5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS</title>
++ <para>
++ You may combine the <link linkend="fdl-document">Document</link>
++ with other documents released under this License, under the
++ terms defined in <link linkend="fdl-section4">section 4</link>
++ above for modified versions, provided that you include in the
++ combination all of the <link linkend="fdl-invariant">Invariant
++ Sections</link> of all of the original documents, unmodified,
++ and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in
++ its license notice.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The combined work need only contain one copy of this License,
++ and multiple identical <link linkend="fdl-invariant">Invariant
++ Sections</link> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are
++ multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different
++ contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding
++ at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
++ author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique
++ number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the
++ list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined
++ work.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
++ <quote>History</quote> in the various original documents,
++ forming one section entitled <quote>History</quote>; likewise
++ combine any sections entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote>,
++ and any sections entitled <quote>Dedications</quote>. You must
++ delete all sections entitled <quote>Endorsements.</quote>
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="fdl-section6">
++ <title>6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS</title>
++ <para>
++ You may make a collection consisting of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> and other documents
++ released under this License, and replace the individual copies
++ of this License in the various documents with a single copy that
++ is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
++ rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
++ documents in all other respects.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
++ distribute it individually under this License, provided you
++ insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and
++ follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim
++ copying of that document.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="fdl-section7">
++ <title>7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS</title>
++ <para>
++ A compilation of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> or its derivatives with
++ other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a
++ volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole
++ count as a <link linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version</link>
++ of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed
++ for the compilation. Such a compilation is called an
++ <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not apply to the
++ other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on
++ account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves
++ derivative works of the Document. If the <link
++ linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Cover Text</link> requirement of <link
++ linkend="fdl-section3">section 3</link> is applicable to these
++ copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one
++ quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may
++ be placed on covers that surround only the Document within the
++ aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole
++ aggregate.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="fdl-section8">
++ <title>8. TRANSLATION</title>
++ <para>
++ Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
++ distribute translations of the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> under the terms of <link
++ linkend="fdl-section4">section 4</link>. Replacing <link
++ linkend="fdl-invariant"> Invariant Sections</link> with
++ translations requires special permission from their copyright
++ holders, but you may include translations of some or all
++ Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these
++ Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this
++ License provided that you also include the original English
++ version of this License. In case of a disagreement between the
++ translation and the original English version of this License,
++ the original English version will prevail.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="fdl-section9">
++ <title>9. TERMINATION</title>
++ <para>
++ You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link
++ linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> except as expressly
++ provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy,
++ modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
++ automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
++ parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
++ License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
++ parties remain in full compliance.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="fdl-section10">
++ <title>10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE</title>
++ <para>
++ The <ulink type="http"
++ url="http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html">Free Software
++ Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU
++ Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions
++ will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ
++ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See <ulink
++ type="http"
++ url="http://www.gnu.org/copyleft">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
++ number. If the <link linkend="fdl-document">Document</link>
++ specifies that a particular numbered version of this License
++ <quote>or any later version</quote> applies to it, you have the
++ option of following the terms and conditions either of that
++ specified version or of any later version that has been
++ published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If
++ the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
++ you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by
++ the Free Software Foundation.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="fdl-using">
++ <title>Addendum</title>
++ <para>
++ To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
++ the License in the document and put the following copyright and
++ license notices just after the title page:
++ </para>
++
++ <blockquote>
++ <para>
++ Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME.
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
++ document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation
++ License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the
++ Free Software Foundation; with the <link
++ linkend="fdl-invariant">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST
++ THEIR TITLES, with the <link
++ linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST,
++ and with the <link linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Back-Cover
++ Texts</link> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in
++ the section entitled <quote>GNU Free Documentation
++ License</quote>.
++ </para>
++ </blockquote>
++
++ <para>
++ If you have no <link linkend="fdl-invariant">Invariant
++ Sections</link>, write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote>
++ instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no
++ <link linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Front-Cover Texts</link>, write
++ <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of
++ <quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link
++ linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Back-Cover Texts</link>.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code,
++ we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your
++ choice of free software license, such as the <ulink type="http"
++ url="http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html"> GNU General Public
++ License</ulink>, to permit their use in free software.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++</appendix>
++
++
++
++
++
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<?xml version="1.0" standalone="no"?>
++<?xml-stylesheet type="text/xml" href="params.xsl"?>
++<!-- vim: set ai tw=80 ts=3 sw=3: -->
++<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN" "
++ http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd" [
++
++<!ENTITY FDL SYSTEM "fdl-appendix.xml">
++<!ENTITY FDLlink "<link linkend='fdl'>included</link>">
++]><!-- =============Document Header ============================= -->
++<book id="index">
++ <bookinfo>
++ <title>GTK-Doc Manual</title>
++ <edition>1.24.1</edition>
++ <abstract role="description"><para>User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage.</para></abstract>
++ <authorgroup>
++ <author>
++ <firstname>Chris</firstname>
++ <surname>Lyttle</surname>
++ <affiliation>
++ <address>
++ <email>chris@wilddev.net</email>
++ </address>
++ </affiliation>
++ </author>
++ <author>
++ <firstname>Dan</firstname>
++ <surname>Mueth</surname>
++ <affiliation>
++ <address>
++ <email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email>
++ </address>
++ </affiliation>
++ </author>
++ <author>
++ <firstname>Stefan</firstname>
++ <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname>
++ <affiliation>
++ <address>
++ <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email>
++ </address>
++ </affiliation>
++ </author>
++ </authorgroup>
++ <publisher role="maintainer">
++ <publishername>GTK-Doc project</publishername>
++ <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>
++ </publisher>
++ <copyright>
++ <year>2000, 2005</year>
++ <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>
++ </copyright>
++ <copyright>
++ <year>2007-2019</year>
++ <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>
++ </copyright>
++
++ <!-- translators: uncomment this:
++ <copyright>
++ <year>2000</year>
++ <holder>ME-THE-TRANSLATOR (Latin translation)</holder>
++ </copyright>
++ -->
++
++ <legalnotice>
++ <para>
++ Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
++ document under the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation
++ License</citetitle>, Version 1.1 or any later version published
++ by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no
++ Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license
++ is &FDLlink;.
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and
++ services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any
++ GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members
++ of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps
++ or initial caps.
++ </para>
++ </legalnotice>
++
++ <revhistory>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.32.1</revnumber>
++ <date>15 Aug 2019</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>dev version</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.32</revnumber>
++ <date>15 Aug 2019</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>hotfix release</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.31</revnumber>
++ <date>05 Aug 2019</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>refactorings and more test coverage</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.30</revnumber>
++ <date>08 May 2019</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>more test coverage</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.29</revnumber>
++ <date>28 Aug 2018</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.28</revnumber>
++ <date>24 Mar 2018</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.27</revnumber>
++ <date>07 Dec 2017</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>fine tuning of the python port</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.26</revnumber>
++ <date>11 Aug 2017</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>port all tools from perl/bash to python</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.25</revnumber>
++ <date>21 March 2016</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bug fixes, test cleanups</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.24</revnumber>
++ <date>29 May 2015</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bug fix</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.23</revnumber>
++ <date>17 May 2015</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bug fix</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.22</revnumber>
++ <date>07 May 2015</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.21</revnumber>
++ <date>17 Jul 2014</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.20</revnumber>
++ <date>16 Feb 2014</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bug fixes, markdown support, style improvements</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.19</revnumber>
++ <date>05 Jun 2013</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.18</revnumber>
++ <date>14 Sep 2011</date>
++ <authorinitials>ss</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bug fixes, speedups, markdown support</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.17</revnumber>
++ <date>26 Feb 2011</date>
++ <authorinitials>sk</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>urgent bug fix update</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.16</revnumber>
++ <date>14 Jan 2011</date>
++ <authorinitials>sk</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.15</revnumber>
++ <date>21 May 2010</date>
++ <authorinitials>sk</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.14</revnumber>
++ <date>28 March 2010</date>
++ <authorinitials>sk</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>bugfixes and performance improvements</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.13</revnumber>
++ <date>18 December 2009</date>
++ <authorinitials>sk</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>broken tarball update</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.12</revnumber>
++ <date>18 December 2009</date>
++ <authorinitials>sk</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>new tool features and bugfixes</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ <revision>
++ <revnumber>1.11</revnumber>
++ <date>16 November 2008</date>
++ <authorinitials>mal</authorinitials>
++ <revremark>GNOME doc-utils migration</revremark>
++ </revision>
++ </revhistory>
++
++ </bookinfo>
++
++ <!-- ======== Chapter 1: Introduction ======================== -->
++
++ <chapter id="introduction">
++ <title>Introduction</title>
++
++ <para>
++ This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and
++ how it is used.
++ </para>
++
++ <sect1 id="whatisgtkdoc">
++ <title>What is GTK-Doc?</title>
++
++ <para>
++ GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the public
++ API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can also be
++ used to document application code.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="howdoesgtkdocwork">
++ <title>How Does GTK-Doc Work?</title>
++
++ <para>
++ GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source files in
++ specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the template files
++ which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only document functions that
++ are declared in header files; it won't produce output for static functions).
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ GTK-Doc consists of a number of python scripts, each performing a different step
++ in the process.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ There are 5 main steps in the process:
++ </para>
++
++ <orderedlist>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ <guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel>
++
++ The author fills in the source files with the documentation for each
++ function, macro, structs or unions, etc.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ <guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel>
++
++ <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the
++ code looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions.
++ It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> containing a list of the
++ declarations, placing them into sections according to which header file they
++ are in. On the first run this file is copied to <filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>.
++ The author can rearrange the sections, and the order of the
++ declarations within them, to produce the final desired order.
++ The second file it generates is <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>.
++ This file contains the full declarations found by the scanner. If for
++ some reason one would like some symbols to show up in the docs, where
++ the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or the declaration
++ should appear differently, one can place entities similar to the ones in
++ <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>.
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ <application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> can also be used to dynamically query a library about
++ any GObject subclasses it exports. It saves information about each
++ object's position in the class hierarchy and about any GObject properties
++ and signals it provides.
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ <application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> should not be used anymore.
++ It was needed in the past when GObject was still GtkObject inside gtk+.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ <guilabel>Generating the XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel>
++
++ <application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> turns the template files into
++ XML files in the <filename class='directory'>xml/</filename> subdirectory.
++ If the source code contains documentation on functions, using the
++ special comment blocks, it gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used
++ it only reads docs from sources and introspection data.
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ <application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the XML files into HTML
++ files in the <filename class='directory'>html/</filename> subdirectory.
++ Likewise <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the XML files into a PDF
++ document called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>.
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ Files in <filename class='directory'>xml/</filename> and
++ <filename class='directory'>html/</filename> directories are always
++ overwritten. One should never edit them directly.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ <guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel>
++
++ After installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be run to fix up any
++ cross-references between separate documents. For example, the GTK+
++ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in the GLib manual.
++
++ When creating the source tarball for distribution, <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application>
++ turns all external links into web-links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs
++ the same application will try to turn links back to local links
++ (where those docs are installed).
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </orderedlist>
++
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="gettinggtkdoc">
++ <title>Getting GTK-Doc</title>
++
++ <sect2 id="requirements">
++ <title>Requirements</title>
++ <para>
++ <guilabel>python 2/3</guilabel> - the main scripts are written in python.
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ <guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> - the xslt processor from libxslt
++ <ulink url="http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/" type="http">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ <guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> - the docbook xsl stylesheets
++ <ulink url="http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/" type="http">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ One of <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</guilabel> or
++ <guilabel>vim</guilabel> - optional - used for syntax highlighting of examples
++ </para>
++ </sect2>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="aboutgtkdoc">
++ <title>About GTK-Doc</title>
++
++ <para>
++ Historically GTK-Doc was used to generate template files from the sources
++ code. These template files could be used by developers to enter the
++ API documentation. This approach was rather inconvenient because it
++ required to keep the generated files under version control.
++ Since GTK-Doc 1.9 it became possible to place all API information
++ into source comments, which made the template support obsolete.
++ In version 1.26 template support has been removed.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ (FIXME)
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ (authors, web pages, mailing list, license, future plans,
++ comparison with other similar systems.)
++ </para>
++
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="aboutthismanual">
++ <title>About this Manual</title>
++
++ <para>
++ (FIXME)
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ (who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)
++ </para>
++
++ </sect1>
++
++ </chapter>
++
++ <chapter id="settingup">
++ <title>Project Setup</title>
++
++ <para>
++ This Chapter describes the steps that are necessary to integrate GTK-Doc
++ into your project. The integration of GTK-Doc into a project includes the
++ following steps:
++ </para>
++
++ <itemizedlist>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Preparation of the directory structure and creating required
++ configuration files for your GTK-Doc documentation (see
++ <link linkend="settingup_docfiles">
++ Setting up a skeleton documentation</link>).
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Adjusting the build system to build your documentation using the
++ GTK-Doc tools. Multiple build systems are supported, in
++ this manual we describe how to integrate GTK-Doc with
++ <link linkend="settingup_autotools">Autotools</link>,
++ <link linkend="settingup_cmake">CMake</link>, and
++ <link linkend="settingup_plain_makefiles">plain Makefiles</link>.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Adding GTK-Doc specific files to version control and deciding which
++ files to ignore (see <link linkend="settingup_vcs">
++ Integration with version control systems</link>).
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </itemizedlist>
++
++ <para>
++ The following sections assume we work on a project called
++ <code>meep</code>.
++ This project contains two packages (or modules),
++ a library called <code>libmeep</code> and an end-user app
++ called <code>meeper</code>.
++ </para>
++
++ <sect1 id="settingup_docfiles">
++ <title>Setting up a skeleton documentation</title>
++
++ <para>
++ A common convention is to place documentation into a folder called
++ <code>docs</code> inside your top-level project directory.
++ We usually distinguish between <emphasis>reference
++ documentation</emphasis> intended for developers and an
++ <emphasis>user manual</emphasis> intended for end-users.
++ Again the convention is to have separate folders for both.
++ We usually place the reference documentation in a folder named
++ <code>reference</code> and the end-user manual in a folder named
++ <code>help</code> as.
++
++ According to the above convention the documentation for our
++ <code>libmeep</code> package would be placed into:
++ <code>docs/reference/libmeep</code>.
++
++ For packages with just one library or application
++ the documentation could also be placed directly into
++ <code>docs/reference</code>.
++
++ It is not mandatory to use the above convention, but if you
++ choose to use a different directory structure you must adjust
++ your build system configuration to match your directory
++ structure.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ In the following sections we will assume a directory structure
++ for our <emphasis>meep</emphasis> project that uses the above
++ conventions.
++
++ <example>
++ <title>Example directory structure of <emphasis>meep</emphasis>
++ project</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++meep/
++ docs/
++ reference/ # reference documentation
++ libmeep/
++ meeper/
++ help/ # optional: user manual
++ meeper/
++ src/
++ libmeep/
++ meeper/
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="settingup_autotools">
++ <title>Integration with Autotools</title>
++ <para>
++ Integration of GTK-Doc into an autotools-based build system requires the
++ following steps:
++ </para>
++ <itemizedlist>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Ensure that <application>gtkdocize</application> is run once before
++ the <filename>configure</filename> script. If an
++ <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script is present, adjust it to
++ check for GTK-Doc and add a call to
++ <application>gtkdocize</application>.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The main purpose of <application>gtkdocize</application> is to
++ make the <filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> Makefile and the
++ <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename> macro definition file available
++ to the build system, either by copying or linking it
++ into the project.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Add the necessary <application>autoconf</application> macros to
++ <filename>configure.ac</filename> to enable GTK-Doc in your build
++ system to allow configuration of GTK-Doc via the generated
++ <filename>configure</filename> script.
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ Among others with registers the <code>--enable-gtk-doc</code>
++ option with the <filename>configure</filename> script.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Create an <application>automake</application> script for each
++ application or library in your project. In the example used in this
++ documentation this step applies to both <code>meeper</code> and
++ <code>libmeep</code>.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </itemizedlist>
++
++ <para>
++ In the following sections, we will perform the above steps in reverse
++ order. We start with the <application>automake</application> scripts
++ and work our way up to <filename>configure.ac</filename> and
++ <filename>autogen.sh</filename>.
++ Then we show how enable Gtk-Doc in the build system and
++ how to build the documentation.
++ </para>
++
++ <sect2 id="settingup_automake">
++ <title>Integration with automake</title>
++
++ <para>
++ First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the
++ <filename class='directory'>examples</filename> sub-directory of the
++ <ulink url="https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/raw/master/examples/Makefile.am">
++ gtkdoc-sources</ulink>
++ to your project's reference documentation directory (e.g.
++ <filename class='directory'>docs/reference/<package></filename>).
++ A local copy should be available under e.g.
++ <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-tools/examples/Makefile.am</filename>.
++ If you have multiple packages repeat this for each one.
++ </para>
++
++ <note>
++ <simpara>
++ Do not forget to add each <filename>Makefile.am</filename>
++ to the <function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function> macro in
++ <filename>configure.ac</filename>. For
++ <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile.am</filename> you will
++ need to add the entry
++ <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile</filename>
++ to <function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function>.
++ </simpara>
++ </note>
++
++ <example>
++ <title>
++ Example directory structure with <filename>Makefiles.am</filename>
++ </title>
++ <programlisting>
++meep/
++ docs/
++ reference/ # reference documentation
++ libmeep/
++ Makefile.am
++ meeper/
++ Makefile.am
++ help/ # optional: user manual
++ meeper/
++ src/
++ libmeep/
++ meeper/
++</programlisting>
++ </example>
++
++ <para>
++ Next, you need to customize the copied Makefiles
++ and provide values for the various parameters in each
++ <filename>Makefile.am</filename>.
++
++ All settings have a comment above them that describes their purpose
++ and how to customize the setting.
++
++ Most settings are used to supply extra flags to the respective tools
++ to which they apply. Every tool
++ has a variable of the form <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>
++ (e.g. the tool <application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> has
++ an option named <code>MKHTML_OPTIONS</code>).
++
++ All the tools support <option>--help</option> to list the supported
++ options.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The following list explains the most relevant options. Check the
++ example <filename>Makefile.am</filename> for additional options.
++
++ <itemizedlist>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ <option>DOC_MODULE</option> is used to provide the name of the
++ package that is being documentated (e.g. <code>meeper</code>, or
++ <code>libmeep</code>).
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ <option>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</option>
++ is used to specify the location
++ of source directory which GTK-Doc searches for your API
++ documentation. This will usually be
++ <code>
++ DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/src
++ </code>
++ or a sub-directory of that directory.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ <option>HFILE_GLOB</option>
++ and
++ <option>CFILE_GLOB</option>
++ are used for dependencies. Each option take a file-glob (e.g.
++ <code>HFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/src/*.c</code>).
++ The documentation will be rebuilt if any of the matched files
++ change.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ <option>EXTRA_HFILES</option>
++ allows to specify extra header files
++ to include when scanning for API documentation, which are not
++ found under <code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</code> (e.g. <code>
++ EXTRA_HFILES=$(top_srcdir}/contrib/extra.h</code>).
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ <option>IGNORE_HFILES</option>
++ allows to specify header files
++ or directories to ignore when scanning for API documentation.
++ Use the basename of the file or directory (e.g. <code>
++ IGNORE_HFILES=gtkdebug.h gtkintl.h private_code_folder</code>).
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ <option>HTML_IMAGES</option>
++ allows to specify images files which
++ will be copied into the <filename>html/</filename> directory of
++ the generated documentation.
++ If your API documentation includes any images they need to be
++ added to this
++ option (e.g. <code>
++ HTML_IMAGES=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/stock-icons/stock_about_24.png</code>).
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ <option>content_files</option>
++ allows to specify extra files
++ that are included by
++ <code>$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)</code>
++ (e.g. <code>
++ content_files=running.xml building.xml changes-2.0.xml</code>).
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ <option>expand_content_files</option>
++ allows to specify files
++ where <emphasis>gtk-doc abbreviations</emphasis> such as
++ <code>#GtkWidget</code>
++ are expanded (e.g. <code>
++ expand_content_files=running.xml</code>).
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </itemizedlist>
++ </para>
++
++ </sect2>
++
++ <sect2 id="settingup_autoconf">
++ <title>Integration with autoconf</title>
++
++ <para>
++ Integration with <application>autoconf</application> is very simple
++ and includes one required step and an additional optional
++ (but recommended) step.
++
++ The first step is to add the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro
++ to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This registers
++ several configure options to enable GTK-Doc and allows you
++ to set default arguments for <application>gtkdocize</application>.
++ </para>
++
++ <warning>
++ <simpara>
++ Make sure that the <code>GTK_DOC_CHECK</code> macro is not indented.
++ The macro must start at the beginning of the line and should not
++ start with whitespace.
++ </simpara>
++ </warning>
++
++ <para>
++ The second step is to add the <code>AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)</code>
++ to your <filename>configure.ac</filename>. This is not required
++ but helps <application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy
++ the macro definition (e.g <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename>) which
++ contains the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro to your
++ project's macro directory. Without this, the GTK_DOC_CHECK macro
++ might not be found and you would need to explicitly tell the
++ <application>aclocal</application> tool where to find the macro
++ definition file.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ <example><title>Minimal integration with autoconf</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++# recommended: set m4 directory
++AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)
++# optional: register gtk-doc in configure
++GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The above example works, but will require all developers to have
++ gtk-doc installed. A better way is to make building the documentation
++ optional as shown in the next example:
++
++ <example>
++ <title>Integration with optional gtk-doc dependency</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [
++# recommended: set m4 directory
++AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)
++# optional: register gtk-doc in configure
++GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])
++],[
++AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)
++])
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The first argument is used to check for the Gtk-Doc version at
++ configure time. The 2nd, optional argument is used by
++ <application>gtkdocize</application>.
++ The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several configure
++ switches:
++ </para>
++
++ <orderedlist>
++ <listitem><para>--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs</para></listitem>
++ <listitem><para>--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]</para></listitem>
++ <listitem><para>--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]</para></listitem>
++ <listitem><para>--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]</para></listitem>
++ </orderedlist>
++
++ <important>
++ <para>
++ GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option
++ <option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next
++ <filename>configure</filename> run. Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed
++ (which makes sense for users but not for developers).
++ </para>
++ </important>
++
++ <para>
++ After all changes to <filename>configure.ac</filename> are made,
++ update the <filename>configure</filename> file. This can be done by
++ re-running <code>autogen.sh</code>.
++ </para>
++ </sect2>
++
++ <sect2 id="settingup_autogen">
++ <title>Integration with autogen</title>
++
++ <para>
++ Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to
++ setup the build infrastructure after the project was checked out from
++ a version control system (such as git or svn). GTK-Doc comes with a
++ script called <application>gtkdocize</application> which can be used
++ to copy the necessary files needed by Gtk-Doc to the source directory.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ It should be run before autoreconf, autoheader, automake or autoconf.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ <example><title>Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++gtkdocize || exit 1
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ <example>
++ <title>Conditionally run gtkdocize from autogen.sh</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++GTKDOCIZE=$(which gtkdocize 2>/dev/null)
++if test $? -ne 0; then
++ echo "No gtk-doc support found. You can't build the docs."
++else
++ $GTKDOCIZE || exit 1
++fi
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies
++ <filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> to your project root (or any
++ directory specified by the <option>--docdir</option> option).
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ <application>gtkdocize</application> checks your
++ <filename>configure.ac</filename> script for
++ the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro.
++ The <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro can be used to pass
++ extra arguments to the <application>gtkdocize</application> script.
++ the 2nd parameter in the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ Alternatively, additional arguments can also be passed to
++ <application>gtkdocize</application> via the
++ <function>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</function> environment variable, or by
++ directly specifying them to <application>gtkdocize</application>
++ in <filename>autogen.sh</filename>.
++ </para>
++
++ </sect2>
++
++ <sect2 id="settingup_firstrun">
++ <title>Executing GTK-Doc from the Build System</title>
++
++ <para>
++ After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to
++ rerun <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure
++ for you, then give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option.
++ Otherwise manually run <filename>configure</filename> with this option
++ afterwards.
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-directories.
++ The important ones are:
++ <filename><package>.types</filename>,
++ <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past .sgml),
++ <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>.
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ <example><title>Running the doc build</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc
++make
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ Now you can point your browser to
++ <filename>docs/reference/<package>/index.html</filename>.
++ With this initial setup you will only see a very simple document.
++ The next chapter will teach you how to add API documentation to your
++ code via special comment blocks. The Chapter afterwards introduces
++ <link linkend="metafiles">additional files</link> and shows how to
++ edit the <link linkend="metafiles_master">master template</link> to
++ add additional chapters and sections to your documentation files.
++ </para>
++
++ </sect2>
++
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="settingup_cmake">
++ <title>Integration with CMake build systems</title>
++
++ <para>
++ GTK-Doc now provides a <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename> module
++ (and the corresponding <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename>
++ module). This provides a <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal>
++ command that you can set in your <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename>
++ file.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The following example shows how to use this command.
++ <example><title>Example of using GTK-Doc from CMake</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)
++
++# Create the doc-libmeep target.
++gtk_doc_add_module(
++ libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep
++ XML meep-docs.xml
++ LIBRARIES libmeep
++)
++
++# Build doc-libmeep as part of the default target. Without this, you would
++# have to explicitly run something like `make doc-libmeep` to build the docs.
++add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)
++
++# Install the docs. (This assumes you're using the GNUInstallDirs CMake module
++# to set the CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR variable correctly).
++install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html
++ DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="settingup_plain_makefiles">
++ <title>Integration with plain makefiles or other build systems</title>
++
++ <para>
++ In the case one does not want to use automake and therefore
++ <filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> one will need to call the gtkdoc tools
++ in the right order in own makefiles (or other build tools).
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ <example><title>Documentation build steps</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++DOC_MODULE=meep
++// sources have changed
++gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <source-dir>
++gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)
++gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<source-dir>
++// xml files have changed
++mkdir html
++cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml
++gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ One will need to look at the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> and
++ <filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> to pick the extra options needed.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="settingup_vcs">
++ <title>Integration with version control systems</title>
++
++ <para>
++ As a rule of thumb, it's the files you edit which should go under
++ version control. For typical projects it's these files:
++ <filename><package>.types</filename>,
++ <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past .sgml),
++ <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>,
++ <filename>Makefile.am</filename>.
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ Files in the <filename>xml/</filename> and <filename>html/</filename>
++ directories should not go under version control. Neither should any of
++ the <filename>.stamp</filename> files.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ </chapter>
++
++ <chapter id="documenting">
++ <title>Documenting the code</title>
++
++ <para>
++ GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code documentation.
++ Further it retrieves information about your project structure from other
++ sources. During the next section you will find all information about the
++ syntax of the comments.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The GTK-Doc scanner can handle the majority of C headers fine. In the
++ case of receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special
++ case, one can hint GTK-Doc to skip over them.
++ <example><title>GTK-Doc comment block</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__
++/* unparseable code here */
++#endif
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <note>
++ <title>Limitations</title>
++ <para>
++ Note, that GTK-Doc's supports
++ <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> but not
++ <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> or other combinations.
++ </para>
++ </note>
++
++ <!-- -->
++
++ <sect1 id="documenting_syntax">
++ <title>Documentation comments</title>
++
++ <para>
++ A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a
++ documentation block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools.
++ <example><title>GTK-Doc comment block</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++/**
++ * identifier:
++ * documentation ...
++ */
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is
++ related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item.
++ (TODO add table showing identifiers)
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol
++ types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter
++ description first followed by a blank line (just a '*').
++ Afterwards follows the detailed description. All lines (outside program
++ listings and CDATA sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are
++ converted to paragraph breaks.
++ If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * '
++ (blank-asterisk-blank-blank). This is useful in preformatted text (code
++ listings).
++ </para>
++
++ <tip>
++ <para>
++ When documenting code, describe two aspects:
++ <itemizedlist>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ What it is: The name for a class or function can sometimes
++ be misleading for people coming from a different background.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ What it does: Tell about common uses. Put it in relation
++ with the other API.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </itemizedlist>
++ </para>
++ </tip>
++
++ <para>
++ One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links
++ in the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious
++ though. GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations.
++ <itemizedlist>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to
++ parameters of other functions, related to the one being described.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and
++ enums and macros which don't take arguments.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure and
++ #GObjectClass.foo_bar() to refer to a vmethod.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </itemizedlist>
++ </para>
++
++ <tip>
++ <para>
++ If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@',
++ '%', or '#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you
++ can use the XML entities "&lt;", "&gt;", "&lpar;",
++ "&rpar;", "&commat;", "&percnt;" and "&num;"
++ respectively or escape them with a backslash '\'.
++ </para>
++ </tip>
++
++ <para>
++ DocBook can do more than just links. One can also have lists,
++ examples, headings, and images. As of version 1.20, the
++ preferred way is to use a subset of the basic text formatting
++ syntax called
++ <ulink url="http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/">Markdown</ulink>.
++ On older GTK-Doc versions any documentation that includes
++ Markdown will be rendered as is. For example, list items will
++ appear as lines starting with a dash.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ While markdown is now preferred one can mix both. One limitation here is
++ that one can use docbook xml within markdown, but markdown within
++ docbook xml is not supported.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ In older GTK-Doc releases, if you need support for additional
++ formatting, you would need to enable the usage of docbook
++ XML tags inside doc-comments by putting <option>--xml-mode</option>
++ (or <option>--sgml-mode</option>) in the variable
++ <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</filename>.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ <example><title>GTK-Doc comment block using Markdown</title>
++ <programlisting><
++ *
++ * 
++ *
++ * [A link to the heading anchor above][heading-two]
++ *
++ * A C-language example:
++ * |[<!-- language="C" -->
++ * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new ("Gorgeous!");
++ * ]|
++ */
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ More examples of what markdown tags are supported can be found in the
++ <ulink url="https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/Markdown">GTK+ Documentation Markdown Syntax Reference</ulink>.
++ </para>
++
++ <tip>
++ <para>
++ As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus
++ one cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good
++ to comment those symbols too. This helps other developers to understand
++ your code.
++ Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the
++ 2nd '*' in the first line).
++ If later the function needs to be made public, all one needs to do is to
++ add another '*' in the comment block and insert the symbol name at the
++ right place inside the sections file.
++ </para>
++ </tip>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="documenting_sections">
++ <title>Documenting sections</title>
++
++ <para>
++ Each section of the documentation contains information about one class
++ or module. To introduce the component one can write a section block.
++ The short description is also used inside the table of contents.
++ All the @fields are optional.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ <example><title>Section comment block</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++/**
++ * SECTION:meepapp
++ * @short_description: the application class
++ * @title: Meep application
++ * @section_id:
++ * @see_also: #MeepSettings
++ * @stability: Stable
++ * @include: meep/app.h
++ * @image: application.png
++ *
++ * The application class handles ...
++ */
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <variablelist>
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>SECTION:<name></term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ The name links the section documentation to the respective part in
++ the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The
++ name given here should match the <FILE> tag in the
++ <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>@short_description</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ A one line description of the section, that later will appear after
++ the links in the TOC and at the top of the section page.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>@title</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION
++ declaration. It can be overridden with the @title field.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>@section_id</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects
++ the <title> is used as a section_id and for other sections
++ it is <MODULE>-<title>.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>@see_also</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ A list of symbols that are related to this section.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>@stability</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ An informal description of the stability level this API has.
++ We recommend the use of one of these terms:
++ <itemizedlist>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Stable
++ - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary
++ third parties to develop applications to these interfaces,
++ release them, and have confidence that they will run on all
++ minor releases of the product (after the one in which the
++ interface was introduced, and within the same major release).
++ Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected
++ to be rare, and to have strong justifications.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Unstable
++ - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional.
++ They are typically used to give outside developers early
++ access to new or rapidly changing technology, or to provide
++ an interim solution to a problem where a more general
++ solution is anticipated.
++ No claims are made about either source or binary
++ compatibility from one minor release to the next.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Private
++ - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack
++ itself, but that is not documented for end-users. Such
++ functions should only be used in specified and documented
++ ways.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Internal
++ - An interface that is internal to a module and does not
++ require end-user documentation. Functions that are
++ undocumented are assumed to be Internal.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </itemizedlist>
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>@include</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section
++ synopsis (a comma separated list), overriding the global
++ value from the <link linkend="metafiles_sections">section
++ file</link> or command line. This item is optional.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>@image</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ The image to display at the top of the reference page for this
++ section. This will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate
++ the visual appearance of a class or a diagram of its relationship
++ to other classes. This item is optional.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ </variablelist>
++
++ <tip>
++ <para>
++ To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section
++ docs into the c-source where possible.
++ </para>
++ </tip>
++
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="documenting_symbols">
++ <title>Documenting symbols</title>
++
++ <para>
++ Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is
++ documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the
++ definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync.
++ Thus functions are usually documented in the c-source and macros,
++ structs and enums in the header file.
++ </para>
++
++ <sect2><title>General tags</title>
++
++ <para>
++ You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell
++ when an API was introduced, or when it was deprecated.
++ </para>
++
++ <variablelist><title>Versioning Tags</title>
++ <varlistentry><term>Since:</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Description since which version of the code the API is available.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ <varlistentry><term>Deprecated:</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore.
++ The description should point the reader to the new API.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ </variablelist>
++
++ <para>
++ You can also add stability information to all documentation elements
++ to indicate whether API stability is guaranteed for them for all
++ future minor releases of the project.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The default stability level for all documentation elements can be set
++ by passing the <option>--default-stability</option> argument to
++ <application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> with one of the values below.
++ </para>
++
++ <variablelist><title>Stability Tags</title>
++ <varlistentry><term>Stability: Stable</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Mark the element as stable. This is for public APIs which are
++ guaranteed to remain stable for all future minor releases of the
++ project.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ <varlistentry><term>Stability: Unstable</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Mark the element as unstable. This is for public APIs which are
++ released as a preview before being stabilised.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ <varlistentry><term>Stability: Private</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Mark the element as private. This is for interfaces which can be
++ used by tightly coupled modules, but not by arbitrary third
++ parties.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ </variablelist>
++
++ <example><title>General tags</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++/**
++ * foo_get_bar:
++ * @foo: some foo
++ *
++ * Retrieves @foo's bar.
++ *
++ * Returns: @foo's bar
++ *
++ * Since: 2.6
++ * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.
++ */
++Bar *
++foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)
++{
++...
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </sect2>
++
++ <sect2><title>Annotations</title>
++
++ <para>
++ Documentation blocks can contain annotation-tags. These tags will be
++ rendered with tooltips describing their meaning. The tags are used by
++ gobject-introspection to generate language bindings. A detailed list
++ of the supported tags can be found on
++ <ulink url="http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations" type="http">the wiki</ulink>.
++ </para>
++
++ <example><title>Annotations</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++/**
++ * foo_get_bar: (annotation)
++ * @foo: (annotation): some foo
++ *
++ * Retrieves @foo's bar.
++ *
++ * Returns: (annotation): @foo's bar
++ */
++...
++/**
++ * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (annotation) (another annotation)
++ * (and another annotation)
++ * @foo: (annotation) (another annotation): some foo
++ *
++ * Sets bar on @foo.
++ */
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </sect2>
++
++ <sect2><title>Function comment block</title>
++
++ <para>
++ Please remember to:
++ <itemizedlist>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be
++ freed/unrefed/released.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </itemizedlist>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are
++ private. They are treated like static functions.
++ </para>
++
++ <example><title>Function comment block</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++/**
++ * function_name:
++ * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than
++ * one line.
++ * @par2: description of parameter 2
++ * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars
++ *
++ * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters
++ * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant
++ * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to
++ * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).
++ *
++ * Returns: an integer.
++ *
++ * Since: 2.2
++ * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.
++ */
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++
++ <variablelist><title>Function tags</title>
++ <varlistentry><term>Returns:</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Paragraph describing the returned result.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ <varlistentry><term>@...:</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this
++ tag (@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons).
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++ </variablelist>
++
++ </sect2>
++
++ <sect2><title>Property comment block</title>
++
++ <example><title>Property comment block</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++/**
++ * SomeWidget:some-property:
++ *
++ * Here you can document a property.
++ */
++g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++
++ </sect2>
++
++ <sect2><title>Signal comment block</title>
++
++ <para>
++ Please remember to:
++ <itemizedlist>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before
++ or after other signals.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Document what an application might do in the signal handler.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </itemizedlist>
++ </para>
++
++ <example><title>Signal comment block</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++/**
++ * FooWidget::foobarized:
++ * @widget: the widget that received the signal
++ * @foo: some foo
++ * @bar: some bar
++ *
++ * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.
++ */
++foo_signals[FOOBARIZED] =
++ g_signal_new ("foobarized",
++ ...
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++
++ </sect2>
++
++ <sect2><title>Struct comment block</title>
++ <example><title>Struct comment block</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++/**
++ * FooWidget:
++ * @bar: some #gboolean
++ *
++ * This is the best widget, ever.
++ */
++typedef struct _FooWidget {
++ GtkWidget parent_instance;
++
++ gboolean bar;
++} FooWidget;
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++
++ <para>
++ Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields
++ you want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse
++ behaviour.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ If the first field is "g_iface", "parent_instance" or "parent_class"
++ it will be considered private automatically and doesn't need to be
++ mentioned in the comment block.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ Struct comment blocks can also be used for GObjects and GObjectClasses.
++ It is usually a good idea to add a comment block for a class, if it has
++ vmethods (as this is how they can be documented). For the GObject
++ itself one can use the related section docs, having a separate block
++ for the instance struct would be useful if the instance has public
++ fields. One disadvantage here is that this creates two index entries
++ of the same name (the structure and the section).
++ </para>
++
++ </sect2>
++
++ <sect2><title>Enum comment block</title>
++ <example><title>Enum comment block</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++/**
++ * Something:
++ * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo
++ * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar
++ *
++ * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.
++ */
++typedef enum {
++ SOMETHING_FOO,
++ SOMETHING_BAR,
++ /*< private >*/
++ SOMETHING_COUNT
++} Something;
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++
++ <para>
++ Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values
++ you want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse
++ behaviour.
++ </para>
++
++ </sect2>
++ </sect1>
++
++
++ <sect1 id="documenting_inline_program">
++ <title>Inline program documentation</title>
++ <para>
++ You can document programs and their commandline interface using inline
++ documentation.
++ </para>
++
++ <variablelist>
++ <title>Tags</title>
++
++ <varlistentry><term>PROGRAM</term>
++
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Defines the start of a program documentation.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>@short_description:</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Defines a short description of the program. (Optional)
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>@synopsis:</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Defines the arguments, or list of arguments that the program can take.
++ (Optional)
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>@see_also:</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ See Also manual page section. (Optional)
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>@arg:</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Argument(s) passed to the program and their description. (Optional)
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>Description:</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ A longer description of the program.
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++
++ <varlistentry>
++ <term>Returns:</term>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ Specify what value(s) the program returns. (Optional)
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ </varlistentry>
++
++ </variablelist>
++
++ <sect2>
++ <title>Example of program documentation.</title>
++ <example><title>Program documentation block</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++/**
++ * PROGRAM:test-program
++ * @short_description: A test program
++ * @synopsis: test-program [*OPTIONS*...] --arg1 *arg* *FILE*
++ * @see_also: test(1)
++ * @--arg1 *arg*: set arg1 to *arg*
++ * @--arg2 *arg*: set arg2 to *arg*
++ * @-v, --version: Print the version number
++ * @-h, --help: Print the help message
++ *
++ * Long description of program.
++ *
++ * Returns: Zero on success, non-zero on failure
++ */
++int main(int argc, char *argv[])
++{
++ return 0;
++}
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++
++ </sect2>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="documenting_docbook">
++ <title>Useful DocBook tags</title>
++
++ <para>
++ Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the
++ code.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ To link to another section in the GTK docs:
++
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<link linkend="glib-Hash-Tables">Hash Tables</link>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ The linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to.
++ For most pages this is currently the part ("gtk", "gdk", "glib") and then
++ the page title ("Hash Tables"). For widgets it is just the class name.
++ Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function:
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<function>...</function>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ To include example code:
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<example>
++ <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>
++ <programlisting language="C">
++ ...
++ </programlisting>
++</example>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ or possibly this, for very short code fragments which don't need a title:
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<informalexample>
++ <programlisting language="C">
++ ...
++ </programlisting>
++</informalexample>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ In both cases, the language attribute is optional and is used as a hint
++ to the syntax highlighting engine (pygments for html output).
++ For the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation:
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++|[<!-- language="C" -->
++ ...
++]|
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ To include bulleted lists:
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<itemizedlist>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ ...
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++ <listitem>
++ <para>
++ ...
++ </para>
++ </listitem>
++</itemizedlist>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ To include a note which stands out from the text:
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<note>
++ <para>
++ Make sure you free the data after use.
++ </para>
++</note>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ To refer to a type:
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<type>unsigned char</type>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs):
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<structname>XFontStruct</structname>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ To refer to a field of a structure:
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<structfield>len</structfield>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ To refer to a class name, we could possibly use:
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<classname>GtkWidget</classname>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ but you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create
++ a link to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend="documenting_syntax">the abbreviations</link>).
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ To emphasize text:
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ For filenames use:
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ To refer to keys use:
++ <informalexample>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </informalexample>
++ </para>
++
++ </sect1>
++ </chapter>
++
++ <chapter id="metafiles">
++ <title>Filling the extra files</title>
++
++ <para>
++ There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with
++ the inline source code comments:
++ <filename><package>.types</filename>,
++ <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past .sgml),
++ <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>.
++ </para>
++
++ <sect1 id="metafiles_types">
++ <title>Editing the types file</title>
++
++ <para>
++ If your library or application includes GObjects, you want
++ their signals, arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be
++ shown in the documentation. All you need to do, is to list the
++ <function>xxx_get_type</function> functions together with their include
++ inside the <filename><package>.types</filename> file.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ <example><title>Example <package>.types file</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++#include <gtk/gtk.h>
++
++gtk_accel_label_get_type
++gtk_adjustment_get_type
++gtk_alignment_get_type
++gtk_arrow_get_type
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this list for you.
++ Just add "--rebuild-types" to SCAN_OPTIONS in <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you
++ use this approach you should not dist the types file nor have it under version control.
++ </para>
++
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="metafiles_master">
++ <title>Editing the master document</title>
++
++ <para>
++ GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the
++ inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation
++ page per class or module as a separate file. The master document
++ includes them and place them in an order.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later runs will
++ not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the
++ documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages.
++ GTK-Doc has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from scratch.
++ Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there are
++ some new goodies introduced there.
++ </para>
++
++ <tip>
++ <para>
++ Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters.
++ The benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into
++ the API documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to
++ symbol documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets
++ updates along with the library.
++ </para>
++ </tip>
++
++ <para>
++ So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start
++ is only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets)
++ there which you should take care of.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ <example><title>Master document header</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<bookinfo>
++ <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>
++ <releaseinfo>
++ for MODULENAME [VERSION]
++ The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at
++ <ulink role="online-location" url="http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.
++ </releaseinfo>
++</bookinfo>
++
++<chapter>
++ <title>[Insert title here]</title>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ In addition a few option elements are created in commented form. You can
++ review these and enable them as you like.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ <example><title>Optional part in the master document</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++ <!-- enable this when you use gobject introspection annotations
++ <xi:include href="xml/annotation-glossary.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ -->
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ Finally you need to add new section whenever you introduce one. The
++ <link linkend="modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16">gtkdoc-check</link> tool will
++ remind you of newly generated xml files that are not yet included into
++ the doc.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ <example><title>Including generated sections</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++ <chapter>
++ <title>my library</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/object.xml"/>
++ ...
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="metafiles_sections">
++ <title>Editing the section file</title>
++
++ <para>
++ The section file is used to organise the documentation output by
++ GTK-Doc. Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or
++ class and control the visibility (public or private).
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The section file is a plain text file with tags delimiting sections.
++ Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as
++ comment lines.
++ </para>
++
++ <note>
++ <para>
++ While the tags make the file look like xml, it is not. Please do not
++ close tags like <SUBSECTION>.
++ </para>
++ </note>
++
++ <para>
++ <example><title>Including generated sections</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>
++
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>meepapp</FILE>
++<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>
++MeepApp
++<SUBSECTION Standard>
++MEEP_APP
++...
++MeepAppClass
++meep_app_get_type
++</SECTION>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name,
++ without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</FILE>'
++ will result in the section declarations being output in the template
++ file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be
++ converted into the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.sgml</filename>
++ or the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>.
++ (The name of the HTML file is based on the module name and the section
++ title, or for GObjects it is based on the GObjects class name converted
++ to lower case).
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of
++ the section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are
++ initially created, since the title set in the template file overrides
++ this. Also if one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag.
++ Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis
++ section.
++ You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject
++ declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like
++ G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.).
++ Currently these are left out of the documentation.
++ You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private declarations
++ which will not be output (it is a handy way to avoid warning messages
++ about unused declarations).
++ If your library contains private types which you don't want to appear in
++ the object hierarchy and the list of implemented or required interfaces,
++ add them to a Private subsection.
++ Whether you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs in public
++ or Standard section depends if they have public entries (variables,
++ vmethods).
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the
++ #include files which are shown in the synopsis sections.
++ It contains a comma-separate list of #include files, without the angle
++ brackets. If you set it outside of any sections, it acts for all
++ sections until the end of the file. If you set it within a section, it
++ only applies to that section.
++ </para>
++
++ </sect1>
++
++ </chapter>
++
++ <chapter id="reports">
++ <title>Controlling the result</title>
++
++ <para>
++ A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory.
++ The generated files are named:
++ <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename>,
++ <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and
++ <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>.
++ All those are plain text files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with
++ the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by
++ blank lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols.
++ The second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are
++ those, which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been
++ added.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols
++ given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not
++ found in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are
++ misspelled.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol
++ names, where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not
++ know where to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to
++ the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file.
++ </para>
++
++ <tip>
++ <para>
++ Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile.am.
++ If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during
++ <command>make check</command> run.
++ </para>
++ </tip>
++
++ <para>
++ One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner:
++ <filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and
++ <filename><package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first one can be
++ compared with the section file if that is manually maintained. The second
++ lists all declarations from the headers. If a symbol is missing one could
++ check if this file contains it.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced
++ by the object scanner:
++ <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>,
++ <filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>,
++ <filename><package>.interfaces.txt</filename>,
++ <filename><package>.prerequisites.txt</filename> and
++ <filename><package>.signals.txt</filename>. If there are missing
++ symbols in any of those, one can ask GTK-Doc to keep the intermediate
++ scanner file for further analysis, by running it as
++ <command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>.
++ </para>
++ </chapter>
++
++ <chapter id="modernizing">
++ <title>Modernizing the documentation</title>
++
++ <para>
++ GTK-Doc has been around for quite some time. In this section we list new
++ features together with the version since when it is available.
++ </para>
++
++ <sect1 id="modernizing-gtk-doc-1-9">
++ <title>GTK-Doc 1.9</title>
++
++ <para>
++ When using xml instead of sgml, one can actually name the master
++ document <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename>.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option>
++ in <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the
++ <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> is autogenerated and
++ can be removed from the vcs. This only works nicely for projects that
++ have a very regular structure (e.g. each .{c,h} pair will create new
++ section). If one organize a project close to that updating a manually
++ maintained section file can be as simple as running
++ <code>meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-sections.txt</code>.
++ </para>
++
++ <para>
++ Version 1.8 already introduced the syntax for documenting sections in
++ the sources instead of the separate files under <filename class='directory'>tmpl</filename>.
++ This version adds options to switch the whole doc module to not use the
++ extra tmpl build step at all, by using <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option>
++ in <filename>configure.ac</filename>. If you don't have a <filename class='directory'>tmpl</filename>
++ checked into your source control system and haven't yet switched, just
++ add the flag to <filename>configure.ac</filename> and you are done.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="modernizing-gtk-doc-1-10">
++ <title>GTK-Doc 1.10</title>
++
++ <para>
++ This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> in
++ <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the
++ <filename><package>.types</filename> is autogenerated and can be
++ removed from the vcs. When using this feature it is important to also
++ setup the <varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> in
++ <filename>Makefile.am</filename> for code that is build conditionally.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16">
++ <title>GTK-Doc 1.16</title>
++
++ <para>
++ This version includes a new tool called gtkdoc-check. This tool can run
++ a set of sanity checks on your documentation. It is enabled by adding
++ these lines to the end of <filename>Makefile.am</filename>.
++ <example><title>Enable gtkdoc-check</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++if ENABLE_GTK_DOC
++TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \
++ DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \
++ SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)
++TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)
++endif
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="modernizing-gtk-doc-1-20">
++ <title>GTK-Doc 1.20</title>
++
++ <para>
++ Version 1.18 brought some initial markdown support. Using markdown in
++ doc comments is less intrusive than writing docbook xml. This version
++ improves a lot on this and add a lot more styles. The section that
++ explains the <link linkend="documenting_syntax">comment syntax</link>
++ has all the details.
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="modernizing-gtk-doc-1-25">
++ <title>GTK-Doc 1.25</title>
++
++ <para>
++ The makefiles shipped with this version generate an entity file at <filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename>,
++ containing entities for e.g. package_name and package_version. You can
++ use this e.g. in the main xml file to avoid hardcoding the version
++ number. Below is an example that shows how the entity file is included
++ in the master template and how the entities are used.
++ The entities can also be used in all
++ generated files, GTK-Doc will use the same xml header in generated xml
++ files.
++ <example><title>Use pre-generated entities</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++<?xml version="1.0"?>
++<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
++ "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd"
++[
++ <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib "xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'">
++ <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM "xml/gtkdocentities.ent">
++ %gtkdocentities;
++]>
++<book id="index" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude">
++ <bookinfo>
++ <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>
++ <releaseinfo>
++ for &package_string;.
++ The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at
++ <ulink role="online-location" url="http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.
++ </releaseinfo>
++ </bookinfo>
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++ </chapter>
++
++ <chapter id="documenting-others">
++ <title>Documenting other interfaces</title>
++
++ <para>
++ So far we have been using GTK-Doc to document the API of code. The next
++ sections contain suggestions how the tools can be used to document other
++ interfaces too.
++ </para>
++
++ <sect1 id="commandline-interfaces">
++ <title>Command line options and man pages</title>
++
++ <para>
++ As one can generate man pages for a docbook refentry as well, it sounds
++ like a good idea to use it for that purpose. This way the interface is
++ part of the reference and one gets the man-page for free.
++ </para>
++
++ <sect2 id="commandline-interfaces-file">
++ <title>Document the tool</title>
++
++ <para>
++ Create one refentry file per tool. Following
++ <link linkend="settingup_docfiles">our example</link> we would call it
++ <filename>meep/docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. For the xml
++ tags that should be used and can look at generated file in the xml
++ subdirectory as well as examples e.g. in glib.
++ </para>
++ </sect2>
++
++ <sect2 id="commandline-interfaces-configure">
++ <title>Adding the extra configure check</title>
++
++ <para>
++ <example><title>Extra configure checks</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,
++ [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],
++ [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,
++ enable_man=no)
++
++AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])
++AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++ </sect2>
++
++ <sect2 id="commandline-interfaces-make">
++ <title>Adding the extra makefile rules</title>
++
++ <para>
++ <example><title>Extra configure checks</title>
++ <programlisting><![CDATA[
++man_MANS = \
++ meeper.1
++
++if ENABLE_GTK_DOC
++if ENABLE_MAN
++
++%.1 : %.xml
++ @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<
++
++endif
++endif
++
++BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)
++EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml
++]]></programlisting>
++ </example>
++ </para>
++ </sect2>
++ </sect1>
++
++ <sect1 id="dbus-interfaces">
++ <title>DBus interfaces</title>
++
++ <para>
++ (FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html,
++http://cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)
++ </para>
++ </sect1>
++
++ </chapter>
++
++ <chapter id="faq">
++ <title>Frequently asked questions</title>
++
++ <segmentedlist>
++ <?dbhtml list-presentation="list"?>
++ <segtitle>Question</segtitle>
++ <segtitle>Answer</segtitle>
++ <seglistitem>
++ <seg>No class hierarchy.</seg>
++ <seg>
++ The objects <function>xxx_get_type()</function> function has not been
++ entered into the <filename><package>.types</filename> file.
++ </seg>
++ </seglistitem>
++ <seglistitem>
++ <seg>Still no class hierarchy.</seg>
++ <seg>
++ Missing or wrong naming in <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>
++ file (see <ulink url="http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-doc-list/2003-October/msg00006.html">explanation</ulink>).
++ </seg>
++ </seglistitem>
++ <seglistitem>
++ <seg>Damn, I have still no class hierarchy.</seg>
++ <seg>
++ Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <type>GtkWidget</type>)
++ part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private
++ subsections).
++ </seg>
++ </seglistitem>
++ <seglistitem>
++ <seg>No symbol index.</seg>
++ <seg>
++ Does the <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contain a
++ index that xi:includes the generated index?
++ </seg>
++ </seglistitem>
++ <seglistitem>
++ <seg>Symbols are not linked to their doc-section.</seg>
++ <seg>
++ Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())?
++ Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs.
++ </seg>
++ </seglistitem>
++ <seglistitem>
++ <seg>A new class does not appear in the docs.</seg>
++ <seg>
++ Is the new page xi:included from
++ <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>.
++ </seg>
++ </seglistitem>
++ <seglistitem>
++ <seg>A new symbol does not appear in the docs.</seg>
++ <seg>
++ Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in
++ the begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about
++ unresolvable xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the
++ <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> in a public subsection.
++ </seg>
++ </seglistitem>
++ <seglistitem>
++ <seg>A type is missing from the class hierarchy.</seg>
++ <seg>
++ If the type is listed in <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename>
++ but not in <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> then double check
++ that the type is correctly placed in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>.
++ If the type instance (e.g. <type>GtkWidget</type>) is not listed or
++ incidentally marked private it will not be shown.
++ </seg>
++ </seglistitem>
++ <seglistitem>
++ <seg>I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations.</seg>
++ <seg>
++ Check that <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> is
++ xi:included from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>.
++ </seg>
++ </seglistitem>
++
++ <!-- gtk-doc warnings: -->
++ <seglistitem>
++ <seg>Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist</seg>
++ <seg>Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the source.</seg>
++ </seglistitem>
++
++ <!-- docbook warnings: -->
++ <seglistitem>
++ <seg>multiple "IDs" for constraint linkend: XYZ</seg>
++ <seg>Symbol XYZ appears twice in <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file.</seg>
++ </seglistitem>
++ <seglistitem>
++ <seg>Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template matches.</seg>
++ <seg />
++ </seglistitem>
++ </segmentedlist>
++ </chapter>
++
++ <chapter id="contrib">
++ <title>Tools related to gtk-doc</title>
++
++ <para>
++ GtkDocPlugin - a <ulink url="http://trac-hacks.org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin">Trac GTK-Doc</ulink>
++ integration plugin, that adds API docs to a trac site and integrates with
++ the trac search.
++ </para>
++ <para>
++ Gtkdoc-depscan - a tool (part of gtk-doc) to check used API against since
++ tags in the API to determine the minimum required version.
++ </para>
++
++ </chapter>
++
++ <!-- ======== Appendix: FDL ================================== -->
++ &FDL;
++
++</book>
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++2010-01-25 Sweta Kothari <swkothar@redhat.com>
++
++ * gu/gu.po: Updated Gujarati translation
++
++2009-04-09 Jorge Gonzalez <jorgegonz@svn.gnome.org>
++
++ * es/es.po: Updated Spanish translation
++
++2009-04-07 Simos Xenitellis <simos@gnome.org>
++
++ * el/el.po: Added Greek translation.
++ * Makefile.am: Added el.
++
++2009-03-25 Philip Withnall <philip@tecnocode.co.uk>
++
++ * Makefile.am:
++ * en_GB/en_GB.po: Added British English translation by Jen Ockwell
++ <jenfraggleubuntu@gmail.com> and myself.
++
++2009-03-24 Jorge Gonzalez <jorgegonz@svn.gnome.org>
++
++ * es/es.po: Updated Spanish translation
++
++2009-03-23 Jorge Gonzalez <jorgegonz@svn.gnome.org>
++
++ * es/es.po: Updated Spansih translation
++
++2009-03-22 Jorge Gonzalez <jorgegonz@svn.gnome.org>
++
++ * es/es.po: Updated Spansih translation
++
++2009-03-17 Jorge Gonzalez <jorgegonz@svn.gnome.org>
++
++ * es/es.po: Updated Spansih translation
++
++2009-03-16 Mario Blättermann <mariobl@svn.gnome.org>
++
++ * de/de.po: Added initial German translation
++ * Makefile.am: Added de to DOC_LINGUAS
++
++2009-03-15 Jorge Gonzalez <jorgegonz@svn.gnome.org>
++
++ * es/es.po: Added initial Spanish translation
++ * Makefile.am: Added es to DOC_LINGUAS
++
++2008-09-08 Rob Bradford <rob@linux.intel.com>
++
++ * C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ Correct the command for non-tmpl Makefile and highlight it within a
++ <command> block.
++
++2007-08-14 Marc-Andre Lureau <marcandre.lureau@gmail.com>
++
++ * GNOME doc-utils migration, ChangeLog moved to help/manual
++
++2007-07-23 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ Tell about $(DOC_MODULE)-undeclared.txt.
++
++2007-07-15 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ Bump version. Add more markup. Tell that one can use toolname --help to
++ get the allowed opetion for Makefile.am. Improve 'how does it work' section.
++
++2007-06-11 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml: added tip about using entities like # to
++ use a '#' without gtk-doc changing it. (Part of #445596)
++
++2007-01-21 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml: document "@include:" tag. #395023
++
++2006-12-10 J.H.M. Dassen (Ray) <jdassen@debian.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml: Spelling fixes.
++
++2006-10-13 Damon Chaplin <damon@gnome.org>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml: use "GNOME" instead of "Gnome". (#352160)
++
++2006-03-24 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ correct format of new shortcuts
++
++2006-03-21 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ document signal and property link short cuts
++
++2005-12-09 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual-C.omf.in:
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ added more details about doc-comments
++ added section about revision control systems
++
++2005-09-07 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ integrated most of the notes from the text files under doc/*.txt
++
++2005-08-24 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ more notes in the faq
++ setup chapter is nearly complete
++ more notes about doc comment format
++
++2005-08-15 Stefan Kost <ensonic@users.sf.net>
++
++ * .cvsignore:
++ * ChangeLog:
++ * Makefile:
++ * Makefile.am:
++ * fdl-appendix.xml:
++ * gtk-doc-manual-C.omf.in:
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml:
++ reanimated gtkdoc manual
++ added new chapters
++
++2004-05-07 Geert Stappers <stappers@stappers.nl>
++
++ * README: new file.
++ * gtk-doc-manual.sgml: Deleted.
++ * fdl-appendix.sgml: Deleted.
++
++2004-05-06 Geert Stappers <stappers@stappers.nl>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml: repaired the crossreference to FDL
++
++ * Makefile: new file, to "document" the build process.
++
++2004-05-06 Keith Sharp <kms@passback.co.uk>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.xml: New file, XML version of
++ gtk-doc-manual.sgml
++ * fdl-appendix.xml: New file, XML version of
++ fdl-appendix.sgml
++
++2000-11-26 Dan Mueth <d-mueth@uchicago.edu>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.sgml: Committing changes made by
++ Chris Lyttle <chris@wilddev.net>. (Text for Chapter 1)
++
++2000-11-25 Dan Mueth <d-mueth@uchicago.edu>
++
++ * gtk-doc-manual.sgml: Put part of the outline into SGML.
++ Chris plans to put rest of outline in here and start
++ writing.
++ * fdl-appendix.sgml: The FDL in SGML. We will probably post
++ these on the web as a single document (book) so we will
++ need the FDL to be included as an appendix.
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# Please keep this list sorted alphabetically.
++#
++bn_IN
++cs
++de
++el
++en_GB
++es
++fr
++gl
++gu
++pt_BR
++sl
++sv
++ta
++te
++zh_CN
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++if HAVE_YELP_TOOLS
++@YELP_HELP_RULES@
++endif
++
++HELP_ID = gtk-doc-manual
++
++HELP_FILES = \
++ index.docbook \
++ fdl-appendix.xml
++
++HELP_LINGUAS = bn_IN cs de el en_GB es fr gl gu pt_BR sl sv ta te zh_CN
++
++CLEANFILES = $(_HELP_LC_FILES) $(_HELP_LC_STAMPS) $(_HELP_MOFILES)
++
++GITIGNOREFILES = ??_??/$(HELP_ID).xml ??/$(HELP_ID).xml
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# translation of bn_IN.po to Bengali INDIA
++# Runa Bhattacharjee <runab@redhat.com>, 2010.
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: bn_IN\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-01-27 10:26+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-02-02 15:40+0530\n"
++"Last-Translator: Runa Bhattacharjee <runab@redhat.com>\n"
++"Language-Team: Bengali INDIA <anubad@lists.ankur.org.in>\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"X-Generator: KBabel 1.11.4\n"
++"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:12(title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc সহায়িকা"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:13(edition) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:92(revnumber)
++msgid "1.12"
++msgstr "১.১২"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:14(para)
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr "GTK-Doc ব্যবহারের নির্দেশাবলী সহ, ডিভেলপরদের উদ্দেশ্যে নির্মিত সহায়িকা।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:17(firstname)
++msgid "Chris"
++msgstr "ক্রিস"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:18(surname)
++msgid "Lyttle"
++msgstr "লিটল"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:21(email)
++msgid "chris@wilddev.net"
++msgstr "chris@wilddev.net"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:26(firstname)
++msgid "Dan"
++msgstr "ড্যান"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:27(surname)
++msgid "Mueth"
++msgstr "মুয়েথ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:30(email)
++msgid "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++msgstr "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:35(firstname)
++msgid "Stefan"
++msgstr "স্টেফান"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:36(surname)
++msgid "Kost"
++msgstr "কোস্ট"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:39(email)
++msgid "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++msgstr "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:45(publishername)
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc প্রজেক্ট"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:46(email)
++msgid "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++msgstr "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:49(year)
++msgid "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++msgstr "২০০০, ২০০৫, ২০০৭-২০০৯"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:50(holder)
++msgid "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle and Stefan Kost"
++msgstr "ড্যান মুয়েথ ও ক্রিস লিটল ও স্টেফান কোস্ট"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:61(para)
++msgid "Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:69(para)
++msgid "Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial caps."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:80(revnumber)
++msgid "1.14"
++msgstr "১.১৪"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:81(date)
++msgid "19 December 2009"
++msgstr "১৯ ডিসেম্বর ২০০৯"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:82(authorinitials) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:88(authorinitials) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:94(authorinitials)
++msgid "sk"
++msgstr "sk"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:83(revremark)
++msgid "development version"
++msgstr "ডিভেলপমেন্ট সংস্করণ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:86(revnumber)
++msgid "1.13"
++msgstr "১.১৩"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:87(date) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:93(date)
++msgid "18 December 2009"
++msgstr "১৮ ডিসেম্বর ২০০৯"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:89(revremark)
++msgid "broken tarball update"
++msgstr "ক্ষতিগ্রস্ত tarball আপডেট করা হয়েছে"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:95(revremark)
++msgid "new tool features and bugfixes"
++msgstr "নতুন সরঞ্জামের বৈশিষ্ট্য ও সংশোধিত বাগের তথ্য"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:98(revnumber)
++msgid "1.11"
++msgstr "১.১১"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:99(date)
++msgid "16 Novemebr 2008"
++msgstr "১৬ ডিসেম্বর ২০০৯"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:100(authorinitials)
++msgid "mal"
++msgstr "mal"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:101(revremark)
++msgid "GNOME doc-utils migration"
++msgstr "GNOME doc-utils মাইগ্রেশন"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:110(title)
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "ভূমিকা"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:112(para)
++msgid "This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how it is used."
++msgstr "এই অধ্যায়ে GTK-Doc সম্বন্ধে প্রারম্ভিক তথ্য ও এটির ব্যবহার ও মূল বিষয়বস্তু সম্পর্কে তথ্য উপস্থিত করা হয়েছে।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:118(title)
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc কী?"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:120(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can also be used to document application code."
++msgstr "GTK-Doc-র সাহায্যে C কোডের জন্য নথি তৈরি করা হয়। বিভিন্ন লাইব্রেরি যেমন GTK+ ও GNOME লাইব্রেরির পাবলিক API সম্বন্ধীয় নথি তৈরি করার জন্য এটি ব্যবহৃত হয়। অ্যাপ্লিকেশনের কোড সম্পর্কিত তথ্য লেখার জন্যও এটি ব্যবহার করা হয়।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:128(title)
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc কীভাবে ব্যবহার করা যাবে?"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:130(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:137(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc consists of a number of perl scripts, each performing a different step in the process."
++msgstr "GTK-Doc-র মধ্যে অনেকগুলি perl স্ক্রিপ্ট উপস্থিত রয়েছে ও প্রতিটি স্ক্রিপ্ট দ্বারা সম্পর্ণ প্রক্রিয়ার একটি ভিন্ন ধাপের কর্ম সঞ্চালন করা হয়।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:142(para)
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "এই প্রক্রিয়ার মধ্যে ৫-টি প্রধান ধাপ উপস্থিত রয়েছে:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:149(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the source files with the documentation for each function, macro, union etc. (In the past information was entered in generated template files, which is not recommended anymore)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:159(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> containg a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to <filename><module>-sections.txt</filename> The author can rearrange the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some sybols to show up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by th scanner or the declaration should appear differently, one can place enties similar to the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>. <application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> can also be used to dynamically query a library about any GtkObject subclasses it exports. It saves information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about any GTK Args and Signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:184(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the information gathered in the first step. (Note that this can be run repeatedly. It will try to ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++msgstr "<guilabel>\"template\" ফাইল নির্মাণ।</guilabel> প্রথম ধাপে সংগ্রহ করা তথ্যের ভিত্তিতে <application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> দ্বারা <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> সাব-ডিরেক্টরির মধ্যে বেশ কয়েকটি ফাইল নির্মাণ করা হয়। (উল্লেখ্য, কোনো নথিপত্র হারিয়ে না ফেলার লক্ষ্যে, এই কাজটি পুনরাবৃত্তি করা হতে পারে।)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:193(para)
++msgid "Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand, please remove the dir (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:205(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Generating the SGML/XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> turns the template files into SGML or XML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads takes docs from sources and introspection data."
++msgstr "<guilabel>SGML/XML ও HTML/PDF নির্মাণের প্রণালী।</guilabel> <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> অথবা <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> সাব-ডিরেক্টরির মধ্যে উপস্থিত SGML অথবা XML ফাইলগুলিকে <application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> দ্বারা টেমপ্লেট ফাইল রূপে পরিবর্তন করা হয়। সোর্স কোডের মধ্যে ফাংশান সংক্রান্ত নতিপত্র উপস্থিত থাকলে, বিশেষ কমেন্ট ব্লক প্রয়োগ করে সংশ্লিষ্ট অংশগুলি এইখানে অন্তর্ভুক্ত করা হয়। কোনো tmpl ফাইল ব্যবহার না করা হলে, শুধুমাত্র সোর্স থেকে নথি ও বিশ্লেষণের তথ্য সংগ্রহ করা হয়।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:215(para)
++msgid "<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the SGML/XML files into HTML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. Likewise <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the SGML/XML files into a PDF docuemnt called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr "<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> দ্বারা SGML/XML ফাইলগুলিকে HTML <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> সাব-ডিরেক্টরির মধ্যে HTML ফাইল রূপে পরিবর্তন করা হয়। একই পদ্ধতিতে <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> দ্বারা SGML/XML ফাইলগুলিকে PDF <filename><package>.pdf</filename> নামক একটি PDF নথিতে রূপান্তর করা হয়।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:221(para)
++msgid "Files in <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One should never edit them directly."
++msgstr "<filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> অথবা <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> ও <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> ডিরেক্টরির মধ্যে উপস্থিত ফাইলগুলি সর্বদা নতুন করে লেখা হবে। এই ফাইলগুলি সরাসরি পরিবর্তন করা উচিত নয়।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:229(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:247(title)
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc প্রাপ্ত করার প্রণালী"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:250(title)
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "আবশ্যক মান"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:251(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - the main scripts are in Perl."
++msgstr "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - প্রধান স্ক্রিপ্টগুলি Perl-এ লেখা হয়েছে।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:254(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - This is the DocBook SGML DTD. <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>"
++msgstr "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - এটি DocBook SGML DTD। <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:258(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - This is a DSSSL processor for converting SGML to various formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type=\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++msgstr "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - SGML-কে বিভিন্ন বিন্যাসে পরিবর্তনের জন্য ব্যবহৃত এটি একটি DSSSL প্রসেসর। <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type=\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:262(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> This is the DSSSL code to convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together with jade. I've customized the DSSSL code slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to colour the program code listings/declarations, and to support global cross-reference indices in the generated HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:271(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - if you want to create man pages from the DocBook. I've customized the 'translation spec' slightly, to capitalise section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of the pages and the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink> NOTE: This does not work yet."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:282(title)
++msgid "Installation"
++msgstr "ইনস্টলেশনের প্রণালী"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:283(para)
++msgid "There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are installed."
++msgstr "DocBook মডিউলার স্টাইল-শিট ইনস্টল করার কোনো প্রমিত স্থান উপস্থিত নেই।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:286(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically:"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc-র কনফিগার স্ক্রিপ্ট দ্বারা স্বয়ংক্রিয়ভাবে নিম্নলিখিত তিনটি ডিরেক্টরির মধ্যে অনুসন্ধান করা হয়:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:289(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (used by RedHat)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (RedHat দ্বারা ব্যবহৃত)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:292(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (used by Debian)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (Debian দ্বারা ব্যবহৃত)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:295(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (used by SuSE)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (SuSE দ্বারা ব্যবহৃত)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:298(para)
++msgid "If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to configure GTK-Doc using the option: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++msgstr "স্টাইল-শিটগুলি অন্য কোনো স্থানে ইনস্টল করা হয়ে থাকলে, নিম্নলিখিত বিকল্প সহয়োগে GTK-Doc কনফিগার করতে হবে: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:322(title)
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc পরিচিতি"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:324(para) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:338(para)
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(FIXME)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:328(para)
++msgid "(History, authors, web pages, license, future plans, comparison with other similar systems.)"
++msgstr "(পূর্ববর্তী তথ্য, লেখক, ওয়েব-পেজ, লাইসেন্স, ভবিষ্যতের প্রকল্প, অন্যান্য সমতূল্য সিস্টেমের সাথে তূলনা।)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:336(title)
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "এই সহায়িকার পরিচিতি"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:342(para)
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr "(উদ্দিষ্ট পাঠকবৃন্দ, প্রাপ্তির স্থান, লাইসেন্স)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:351(title)
++msgid "Setting up your project"
++msgstr "প্রজেক্ট প্রস্তুত করার প্রণালী"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:353(para)
++msgid "The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc into your project. Theses section assume we work on a project called 'meep'. This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user app called 'meeper'."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:361(title)
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "নথির একটি পরিকাঠামো নির্ধারণের প্রণালী"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:363(para)
++msgid "Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/reference (this way you can also have docs/help for end-user documentation). It is recommended to create another subdirectory with the name of the doc-package. For packages with just one library this step is not necessary."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:372(title)
++msgid "Example directory structure"
++msgstr "ডিরেক্টরির বিন্যাসের উদাহরণ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:370(para)
++msgid "This can then look as show below: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "নিম্নলিখিত উদাহরণের অনুরূপ হবে: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:390(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:397(title)
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "autoconf সহযোগে একত্রিত করার প্রণালী"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:392(para)
++msgid "Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script."
++msgstr "এই কাজ অতিমাত্রায় সহজ! <filename>configure.ac</filename> স্ক্রিপ্টের মধ্যে একটি পংক্তি যোগ করুন।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:407(para)
++msgid "The first argument is used to check for the gtkdocversion at configure time. The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</application>. The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several configure switches:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:413(para)
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr "--with-html-dir=PATH : ইনস্টল করা ডকুমেন্টের পাথ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:414(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:415(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:416(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:420(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:428(para)
++msgid "Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside you <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows <application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:436(title)
++msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++msgstr "gtkdocize-র প্রস্তুতি"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:447(title)
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "automake সহযোগে একত্রিত করার প্রণালী"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:449(para)
++msgid "First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the examples subdirectory of the gtkdoc-sources to your project's API documentation directory ( <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></filename>). If you have multiple doc-packages repeat this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:456(para)
++msgid "The next step is to edit the setting inside the <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. All the settings have a comment above that describes their purpose. Most settings are extra flags passed to the respective tools. Every tool has a variable of the form <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>. All the tools support <option>--help</option> to list the supported parameters."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. FIXME: explain options ?
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:467(para)
++msgid "You may also want to enable GTK-Doc for the distcheckmake target. Just add then one-liner show in the next example to you top-level <filename>Makefile.am</filename>:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:474(title)
++msgid "Enable GTK-Doc during make distcheck"
++msgstr "make distcheck-র সময় GTK-Doc সক্রিয় করুন"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:486(title)
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "autogen সহযোগে একত্রিত করার প্রণালী"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:488(para)
++msgid "Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup the build infrastructure after a checkout from version control system (such as cvs/svn/git). GTK-Doc comes with a tool called <application>gtkdocize</application> which can be used in such a script. It should be run before autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:497(title)
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "autogen.sh থেকে gtkdocsize সঞ্চালনার প্রণালী"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:506(para)
++msgid "When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> to you project root (or any directory specified by the <option>--docdir</option> option). If also check you configure script for the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> invocation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:514(para)
++msgid "Historically GTK-Doc was gerating template files where developers entered the docs. this turned out to be not so good. Since a few version GTK-Doc could also get all the information from source comments. Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. Besides adding the option directly to the command invocation, they can be added also to a environment variable called <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> or set as a 2nd parameter in <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro in the configure script. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand and migrating from older gtkdoc versions, please remove the dir (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:530(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:547(title)
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "doc build সঞ্চালনার প্রণালী"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:532(para)
++msgid "After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run <filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:539(para)
++msgid "The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-dirs. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:556(para)
++msgid "Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. But hang-on, during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages with life."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:564(title)
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "ভার্সান কনট্রোল সিস্টেমের সাথে একত্রিত করার প্রণালী"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:566(para)
++msgid "As a rule of the thumb, it's those files you edit, that should go under version control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><package>.types</filename><filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename><filename><package>-sections.txt</filename><filename>Makefile.am</filename>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:579(title)
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "কোডের জন্য সহায়ক নথি লেখার প্রণালী"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:581(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure from other sources. During the next section you find all information about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:589(title)
++msgid "Documentation placement"
++msgstr "নথিপত্রের স্থাপনা"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:590(para)
++msgid "In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing inside the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the disadvantages that the information is often not updated and also that the file tend to cause conflicts with version control systems."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:596(para)
++msgid "The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the documentation inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way of documenting code."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:606(title)
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "নথিপত্রের মধ্যে বিবৃতি"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:611(title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc বিবৃতির অংশ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:608(para)
++msgid "A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:623(para)
++msgid "The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:629(para)
++msgid "The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows the detailed description. All lines (outside program- listings and CDATA sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-asterisk-blank-blank)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:646(para)
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr "আর্গুমেন্ট গ্রহণকারী ফাংশান অথবা ম্যাক্রোর জন্য function() ব্যবহার করা হবে।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:651(para)
++msgid "Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:657(para)
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:662(para)
++msgid "Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:668(para)
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal"
++msgstr "GObject signal-র জন্য #Object::signal ব্যবহার করুন"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:673(para)
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property"
++msgstr "GObject property-র জন্য #Object:property ব্যবহার করুন"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:678(para)
++msgid "Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure."
++msgstr "স্ট্রাকচারের মধ্যে কোনো ফিল্ড চিহ্নিত করার জন্য #Struct.field প্রয়োগ করুন।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:640(para)
++msgid "One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "প্লেইন-টেক্সটের পরিবর্তে হাইপার-লিংক ব্যবহার করা হলে ডকুমেন্টের মধ্যে লিংক অন্তর্ভুক্ত করা সম্ভব হবে। কিন্তু লিংকের ক্ষেত্রে সঠিক markup লেখা পরিশ্রমের কাজ হতে পারে। GTK-Doc দ্বারা উপলব্ধ কয়েকটি সংক্ষিপ্ত শব্দের সাহায্যে এই কাজ হ্রাস করা যাবে। <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:686(para)
++msgid "If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or '#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr "নথির মধ্যে কিছু বিশেষ অক্ষর যেমন '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', অথবা '#' প্রভৃতি ব্যবহার করতে ইচ্ছুক হলে GTK-Doc দ্বারা এইগুলিকে পরিবর্তন করতে প্রতিরোধ করার জন্য যথাক্রমে \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" XML এনটিটিগুলি ব্যবহার করুন অথবা ব্যাক-স্ল্যাশ চিহ্ন '\\' সহযোগে এস্কেপ করানো আবশ্যক।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:695(para)
++msgid "DocBook can do more that just links. One can also have lists, tables and examples. To enable the usage of SGML/XML tags inside doc-comments you need to have <option>--sgml-mode</option> in the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:703(para)
++msgid "As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to comment those symbols too. This helps other to understand you code. Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the 2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made public, all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and insert the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:717(title)
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "নথিপত্রের বিভাগ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:719(para)
++msgid "Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are optional."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:727(title)
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "বিভাগ কমেন্ট ব্লক"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:749(term)
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr "SECTION:<name>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:751(para)
++msgid "The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name give here should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:760(term)
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@short_description"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:762(para)
++msgid "A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr "এক পংক্তি দ্বারা উল্লিখিত বিভাগের বিবরণ, সূচিপত্রের লিংকের পরে ও বিভাগের পৃষ্ঠার উপরে এই বিবরণ পরে প্রদর্শন করা হবে।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:769(term)
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr "@title"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:771(para)
++msgid "The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:778(term)
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr "@section_id"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:780(para)
++msgid "Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <title> is used as a section_id and for other section it is <MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:788(term)
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@see_also"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:790(para)
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section.."
++msgstr "এই বিভাগ সম্বন্ধীয় সংকেতের তালিকা.."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:796(term)
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:803(para)
++msgid "Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:815(para)
++msgid "Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:827(para)
++msgid "Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:836(para)
++msgid "Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be Internal."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:798(para)
++msgid "A informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend the use of one of these terms: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "চিহ্নিত API-র স্থায়ীত্বের পরিমানের আনুমানিক বিবরণ। চিহ্নিত কোনো অভিব্যক্তির ব্যবহার বাঞ্ছনীয়: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:848(term)
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:850(para)
++msgid "The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is optional."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:859(term)
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr "@image"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:861(para)
++msgid "The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is optional."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:872(para)
++msgid "To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:881(title)
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "নথিপত্রের সংকেত"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:883(para)
++msgid "Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus function are usually documented in the c-source and macros, struct and enum in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:891(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:920(title)
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr "সাধারণ ট্যাগ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:893(para)
++msgid "You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell when an api was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:898(title)
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr "সংস্করণ সংক্রান্ত ট্যাগ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:899(term)
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "প্রারম্ভ:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:901(para)
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr "API-টি কোডের কোন সংস্করণ থেকে উপলব্ধ রয়েছে সেটির বিবরণ।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:906(term)
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "অবচিত:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:908(para)
++msgid "Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr "উল্লিখিত ফাংশান ব্যবহার না করার চিহ্নকারী অনুচ্ছেদ। এই বিবরণের সাহায্যে পাঠাকদেরকে নতুন API নির্দেশ করা হবে।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:916(para)
++msgid "(FIXME : Stability information)"
++msgstr "(FIXME : স্থায়ীত্ব সংক্রান্ত তথ্য)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:943(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:979(title)
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "ফাংশান কমেন্টের ব্লক"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:949(para)
++msgid "Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:955(para)
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:960(para)
++msgid "Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:945(para) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1042(para)
++msgid "Please remember to: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "অনুগ্রহ করে খেয়াল রাখবেন: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:967(para)
++msgid "Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:972(para)
++msgid "Also, take a look at gobject introspection annotation tags: http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++msgstr "উপরন্তু, gobject introspection annotation ট্যাগ দেখুন: http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1003(title)
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr "ফাংশান সংক্রান্ত ট্যাগ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1004(term)
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "প্রাপ্ত মান:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1006(para)
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr "প্রাপ্ত ফলাফলের বর্ণনা উপলব্ধকারী অনুচ্ছেদ।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1011(term)
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr "@...:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1013(para)
++msgid "In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag (@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1023(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1025(title)
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "Property কমেন্টের ব্লক"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1040(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1059(title)
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "Signal কমেন্টের ব্লক"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1046(para)
++msgid "Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or after other signals."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1052(para)
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1079(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1080(title)
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "Struct কমেন্টের ব্লক"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1100(para)
++msgid "Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse behavirour."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1108(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1109(title)
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr "Enum কমেন্টের ব্লক"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1130(para)
++msgid "Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse behavirour."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1140(title)
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr "সুবিধাজনক DocBook ট্যাগ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1142(para)
++msgid "Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr "কোড নথিভুক্ত করার সময় সহায়ক কিছু DocBook ট্যাগ এইখানে উল্লেখ করা হল।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1147(para)
++msgid "To link to another section in the GTK docs: <placeholder-1/> The linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1163(para)
++msgid "To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1174(para)
++msgid "To include example code: <placeholder-1/> or possibly this, for very short code fragments which don't need a title: <placeholder-2/> For the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation: <![CDATA[\n|[\n ...\n]|\n]]>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1208(para)
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "বুলেট চিহ্ন সহ তালিকা অন্তর্ভুক্ত করার জন্য ব্যবহার করুন: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1230(para)
++msgid "To include a note which stands out from the text: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1245(para)
++msgid "To refer to a type: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "কোনো টাইপ উল্লেখ করা জন্য: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1256(para)
++msgid "To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1267(para)
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "কোনো স্ট্রাকচারের ফিল্ড উল্লেখ করার জন্য: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1278(para)
++msgid "To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <placeholder-1/> but you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1291(para)
++msgid "To emphasize text: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "টেক্সট বিশেষভাবে উল্লেখ করার জন্য: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1302(para)
++msgid "For filenames use: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "ফাইলের নামের জন্য ব্যবহার করুন: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1313(para)
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "কি উল্লেখ করার জন্য ব্যবহার করুন: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1328(title)
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1330(para)
++msgid "There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1339(title)
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1341(para)
++msgid "If your library or application includes GtkObjects/GObjects, you want their signals, arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1350(title)
++msgid "Example types file snippet"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1364(para)
++msgid "Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1373(title)
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr "প্রধান নথি সম্পাদনা"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1375(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them and place them in a order."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1382(para)
++msgid "While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later run will not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1392(para)
++msgid "Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along with the library."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1401(para)
++msgid "So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1408(title)
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr "প্রধা নথির হেডার"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1430(title)
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr "বিভাগের ফাইল সম্পাদনা"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1432(para)
++msgid "The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1438(para)
++msgid "The section file is a plain test file with xml like syntax (using tags). Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1444(para)
++msgid "The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be converted into the DocBook SGML/XML file <filename>sgml/gnome-config.sgml</filename> or .DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. (The name of the html file is based on the module name and the section title, or for gobjects it is based on the gobjects class name converted to lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1456(para)
++msgid "The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1463(para)
++msgid "You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private declarations which will not be output (It is a handy way to avoid warning messages about unused declarations.). If your library contains private types which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1479(para)
++msgid "You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the #include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1493(title)
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr "ফলাফল নিয়ন্ত্রণের প্রণালী"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1495(para)
++msgid "A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1504(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1513(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1520(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1528(para)
++msgid "Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile.am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during <command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1535(para)
++msgid "One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: <filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first and can be compared with the section file if that is manualy maintained. The second lists all declarations fromt he headers If a symbol is missing one could check if this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1544(para)
++msgid "If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask gtkdoc to keep the intermedia scanner file for further analysis, but running it as <command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1559(title)
++msgid "Frequently asked question"
++msgstr "সাধারণ প্রশ্নোত্তর"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1563(segtitle)
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "প্রশ্ন"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1564(segtitle)
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "উত্তর"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1566(seg)
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "কোনো ক্লাস অনুক্রম নেই।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1568(function)
++msgid "xxx_get_type()"
++msgstr "xxx_get_type()"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1569(filename)
++msgid "<package>.types"
++msgstr "<package>.types"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1567(seg)
++msgid "The objects <placeholder-1/> function has not been entered into the <placeholder-2/> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1573(seg)
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "তথাপি ক্লাসের কোনো অনুক্রম নেই।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1575(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1614(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1622(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1644(filename)
++msgid "<package>-sections.txt"
++msgstr "<package>-sections.txt"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1576(ulink)
++msgid "explanation"
++msgstr "বর্ণনা"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1574(seg)
++msgid "Missing or wrong naming in <placeholder-1/> file (see <placeholder-2/>)."
++msgstr "<placeholder-1/> ফাইলের মধ্যে নাম অনুপস্থিত অথবা ভুল (<placeholder-2/> দেখুন)।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1580(seg)
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "এখনো কোনো ক্লাস অনুক্রম নেই।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1582(type) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1623(type)
++msgid "GtkWidget"
++msgstr "GtkWidget"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1581(seg)
++msgid "Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <placeholder-1/>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1588(seg)
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr "সংকেতের ইন্ডেক্স অনুপস্থিত।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1590(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1605(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1631(filename)
++msgid "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++msgstr "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1589(seg)
++msgid "Does the <placeholder-1/> contain a index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1595(seg)
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr "সিম্বলগুলি doc-section-র সাথে যুক্ত নয়।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1596(seg)
++msgid "Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1602(seg)
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "নথির মধ্যে নতুন শ্রেণী উপস্থিত নেই।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1603(seg)
++msgid "Is the new page xi:included from <placeholder-1/>."
++msgstr "নতুন পৃষ্ঠাটি <placeholder-1/> থেকে xi:include করে নির্মিত হয়েছে কি।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1609(seg)
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "নথির মধ্যে নতুন সিম্বল অন্তর্ভুক্ত নয়।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1610(seg)
++msgid "Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <placeholder-1/> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1618(seg)
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr "ক্লাস অনুক্রম থেকে টাইপ অনুপস্থিত।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1620(filename)
++msgid "<package>.hierarchy"
++msgstr "<package>.hierarchy"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1621(filename)
++msgid "xml/tree_index.sgml"
++msgstr "xml/tree_index.sgml"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1619(seg)
++msgid "If the type is listed in <placeholder-1/> but not in <placeholder-2/> then double check that the type is correctly placed in the <placeholder-3/>. If the type instance (e.g. <placeholder-4/>) is not listed or incidentialy makred private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1628(seg)
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr "সকল gobject অ্যানোটেশনের জন্য foldoc লিংক পাওয়া গিয়েছে।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1630(filename)
++msgid "xml/annotation-glossary.xml"
++msgstr "xml/annotation-glossary.xml"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1629(seg)
++msgid "Check that <placeholder-1/> is xi:included from <placeholder-2/>."
++msgstr "<placeholder-1/>-কে <placeholder-2/> থেকে xi:included করা হয়েছে কি না পরীক্ষা করুন।"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1637(seg)
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1638(seg)
++msgid "Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the source."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1643(seg)
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1644(seg)
++msgid "Symbol XYZ appears twice in <placeholder-1/> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1647(seg)
++msgid "Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template matches."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:12(releaseinfo)
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:16(year)
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:16(holder)
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:19(para)
++msgid "<address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state><postcode>02110-1301</postcode><country>USA</country></address> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:28(title)
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:31(title)
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr "0. PREAMBLE"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:32(para)
++msgid "The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:43(para)
++msgid "This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:50(para)
++msgid "We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:62(title)
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:63(para)
++msgid "This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:72(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:79(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:94(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:103(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:111(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not <quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:128(para)
++msgid "Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:141(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:153(title)
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:154(para)
++msgid "You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:169(para)
++msgid "You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:176(title)
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:177(para)
++msgid "If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:195(para)
++msgid "If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:202(para)
++msgid "If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:222(para)
++msgid "It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:231(title)
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:232(para)
++msgid "You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:248(title)
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "A"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:249(para)
++msgid "Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:264(title)
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "B"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:265(para)
++msgid "List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:279(title)
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "C"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:280(para)
++msgid "State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:291(title)
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "D"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:292(para)
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:301(title)
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "E"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:302(para)
++msgid "Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:311(title)
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "F"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:312(para)
++msgid "Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:324(title)
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "G"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:325(para)
++msgid "Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:337(title)
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "H"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:338(para)
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:346(title)
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "I"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:347(para)
++msgid "Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>as given on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:365(title)
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "J"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:366(para)
++msgid "Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:383(title)
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "K"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:384(para)
++msgid "In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or <quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:396(title)
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "L"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:397(para)
++msgid "Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:409(title)
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "M"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:410(para)
++msgid "Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:421(title)
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "N"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:422(para)
++msgid "Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:432(para)
++msgid "If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:444(para)
++msgid "You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:453(para)
++msgid "You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:470(para)
++msgid "The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:480(title)
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:481(para)
++msgid "You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:492(para)
++msgid "The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:505(para)
++msgid "In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled <quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled <quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled <quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:516(title)
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:517(para)
++msgid "You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:527(para)
++msgid "You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:537(title)
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:538(para)
++msgid "A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:561(title)
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:562(para)
++msgid "Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License provided that you also include the original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original English version of this License, the original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:580(title)
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:581(para)
++msgid "You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:594(title)
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:595(para)
++msgid "The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:606(para)
++msgid "Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:621(title)
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:622(para)
++msgid "To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:629(para)
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:632(para)
++msgid "Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:647(para)
++msgid "If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of <quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:657(para)
++msgid "If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:0(None)
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr "রুণা ভট্টাচার্য্য (runab@redhat.com)"
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# Czech translation of gtk-doc.
++# Copyright (C) 2009 gtk-doc's COPYRIGHT HOLDER
++# This file is distributed under the same license as the gtk-doc package.
++# Marek Černocký <marek@manet.cz>, 2009, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018, 2020.
++#
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc master\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-02 10:49+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2020-03-08 10:38+0100\n"
++"Last-Translator: Marek Černocký <marek@manet.cz>\n"
++"Language-Team: čeština <gnome-cs-list@gnome.org>\n"
++"Language: cs\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n==1) ? 0 : (n>=2 && n<=4) ? 1 : 2;\n"
++"X-Generator: Gtranslator 2.91.7\n"
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++msgctxt "_"
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr "Marek Černocký <marek@manet.cz>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/title
++#: C/index.docbook:12
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "Příručka ke GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/edition
++#: C/index.docbook:13
++msgid "1.24.1"
++msgstr "1.24.1"
++
++#. (itstool) path: abstract/para
++#: C/index.docbook:14
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr "Uživatelská příručka pro vývojáře s instrukcemi k používání GTK-Doc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:16
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> "
++"<affiliation><address><email>chris@wilddev.net</email></address></"
++"affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:25
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> "
++"<affiliation><address><email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email></address></"
++"affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:34
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> "
++"<affiliation><address><email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email></address></"
++"affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: publisher/publishername
++#: C/index.docbook:45
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "Projekt GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/publisher
++#: C/index.docbook:44
++msgid ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++msgstr ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:48
++msgid "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:52
++msgid "<year>2007-2019</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2007-2019</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:65
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, "
++"Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation "
++"with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A "
++"copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Je povoleno kopírovat, šířit a/nebo upravovat tento dokument za podmínek "
++"<citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle> ve verzi 1.1 nebo v "
++"jakékoli další verzi vydané nadací Free Software Foundation, s neměnnými "
++"oddíly, bez textů předních desek a bez textů zadních desek. Kopie licence je "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl\">součástí</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:73
++msgid ""
++"Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and "
++"services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME "
++"documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the "
++"GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial "
++"caps."
++msgstr ""
++"Mnoho názvů použitých firmami k zviditelnění produktů nebo služeb jsou "
++"ochranné známky. Na místech, kde jsou tyto názvy v dokumentaci použity a "
++"členové Dokumentačního projektu GNOME jsou si vědomi skutečnosti, že se "
++"jedná o ochrannou známku, je takovýto název psán velkými písmeny celý nebo s "
++"velkým písmenem na začátku."
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:83
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.32.1</revnumber> <date>15 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>dev version</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.32.1</revnumber> <date>15. srpna 2019</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>vývojová verze</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:89
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.32</revnumber> <date>15 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>hotfix release</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.32</revnumber> <date>15. srpna 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>opravné vydání</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:95
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.31</revnumber> <date>05 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>refactorings and more test coverage</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.31</revnumber> <date>5. srpna 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>přepracování a větší pokrytí testy</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:101
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.30</revnumber> <date>08 May 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>more test coverage</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.30</revnumber> <date>8. května 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>větší pokrytí testy</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:107
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28 Aug 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28. srpna 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>opravy chyb</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:113
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.28</revnumber> <date>24 Mar 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.28</revnumber> <date>24. března 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>opravy chyb</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:119
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.27</revnumber> <date>07 Dec 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>fine tuning of the python port</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.27</revnumber> <date>7. prosince 2017</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>detailní vyladění portu v "
++"jazyce Python</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:125
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.26</revnumber> <date>11 Aug 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>port all tools from perl/bash to python</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.26</revnumber> <date>11. srpen 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>přenesení všech nástrojů z jazyků Perl/Bash do "
++"jazyka Python</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:131
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21 March 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, test cleanups</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21. březen 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>opravy chyb, pročištění testů</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:137
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29. května 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>oprava chyby</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:143
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17. květen 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>oprava chyby</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:149
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>07 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>07. květen 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>opravy chyb, odstranění zastaralých věcí</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:155
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 Jul 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17. červenec 2014</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>opravy chyb, odstranění "
++"zastaralých věcí</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:161
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16 Feb 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, markdown support, style improvements</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16. únor 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>opravy chyb, podpora značkovacího jazyka, "
++"vylepšení stylů</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:167
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 Jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05. červen 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>opravy chyb</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:173
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 Sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, speedups, markdown support</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14. září 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>opravy chyb, zrychlení, podpora značkovacího "
++"jazyka</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:179
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 Feb 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>urgent bug fix update</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26. únor 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>aktualizace kvůli neodkladné opravě chyby</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:185
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14. leden 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>opravy chyb, vylepšení vzhledu</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:191
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 May 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21. květen 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>opravy chyb a regresí</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:197
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 March 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes and performance improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28. březen 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>opravy chyb a vylepšení výkonu</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:203
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>broken tarball update</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18. prosinec 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>aktualizace poškozeného "
++"balíčku</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:209
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>new tool features and "
++"bugfixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18. prosinec 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>nové funkce nástroje a opravy "
++"chyb</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:215
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 November 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>GNOME doc-utils migration</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16. listopad 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>přechod na doc-utils z "
++"GNOME</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:228
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "Úvod"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:230
++msgid ""
++"This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how "
++"it is used."
++msgstr ""
++"Tato kapitola je úvodem do GTK-Doc a podává přehled o tom, co to je a jak to "
++"použít."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:236
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "Co je to GTK-Doc?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:238
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the "
++"public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can "
++"also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc se používá k dokumentaci kódu jazyka C. Typické použití je pro "
++"dokumentaci veřejného API knihoven, jako jsou knihovny GTK+ a GNOME. Lze jej "
++"ale použít i k dokumentaci aplikačního kódu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:246
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "Jak GTK-Doc pracuje?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:248
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source "
++"files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the "
++"template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only "
++"document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce "
++"output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc pracuje na základě dokumentace funkcí umístěné přímo v souborech se "
++"zdrojovým kódem ve speciálně formátovaných komentářových blocích, nebo "
++"dokumentace přidané do souborů šablon, které GTK-Doc používá (ačkoliv je "
++"nutno poznamenat, že GTK-Doc dokumentuje pouze funkce, které jsou "
++"deklarované v hlavičkových souborech; pro statické funkce žádný výstup "
++"nevytváří)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:255
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc consists of a number of python scripts, each performing a different "
++"step in the process."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc sestává z řady skriptů v jazyce Python, z nichž každý provádí jinou "
++"část procesu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:260
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "Celý proces se skládá z pěti hlavních kroků:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:267
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the "
++"source files with the documentation for each function, macro, structs or "
++"unions, etc."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Psaní dokumentace.</guilabel> Autor doplní soubory se zdrojovým "
++"kódem s dokumentací pro každou funkci, makro, strukturu, výčet atd."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:276
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code "
++"looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. "
++"It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> "
++"containing a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according "
++"to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to "
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. The author can rearrange "
++"the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the "
++"final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><"
++"module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations "
++"found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some symbols to show "
++"up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or "
++"the declaration should appear differently, one can place entities similar to "
++"the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><"
++"module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Shromáždění informací o kódu.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-scan</"
++"application> projde hlavičkové soubory kódu a vyhledá při tom deklarace "
++"funkcí, maker, výčtů, struktur a sjednocení. Tím se vytvoří soubor "
++"<filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> obsahující seznam "
++"deklarací, které jsou rozdělené do oddílů podle hlavičkového souboru, ze "
++"kterého pochází. Při prvním spuštění se tento soubor zkopíruje do "
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. Autor může změnit "
++"uspořádání oddílů a jejich pořadí v rámci deklarací tak, jak to požaduje ve "
++"výsledku. Druhý soubor, který se vytvoří, je <filename><module>-decl."
++"txt</filename>. Tento soubor obsahuje úplné deklarace nalezené při "
++"procházení. Pokud byste z nějakého důvodu chtěli v dokumentaci zahrnout "
++"symbol, který při procházení nebyl nalezen, nebo jeho deklarace vypadá "
++"jinak, můžete jej umístit podobně jako v <filename><module>-decl.txt</"
++"filename> do <filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:293
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> can also be used to dynamically "
++"query a library about any GObject subclasses it exports. It saves "
++"information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about "
++"any GObject properties and signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++"Dá se také použít <application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> k dynamickým "
++"dotazům do knihoven na podtřídy objektu GObject, které exportují. Tím se "
++"uloží informace o pozici každého objektu v hierarchii tříd a o argumentech a "
++"signálech objektu GObject, které poskytují."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:299
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> should not be used anymore. It was "
++"needed in the past when GObject was still GtkObject inside gtk+."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> by se ale již používat nemělo. "
++"Bylo zapotřebí v minulosti, kdy byl GObject ještě GtkObject v rámci gtk+."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:306
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mkdb</application> turns the template files into XML files in the <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code "
++"contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it "
++"gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads docs from "
++"sources and introspection data."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Generování XML a HTML/PDF.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-mkdb</"
++"application> přemění soubory šablon na soubory XML v podsložce <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">xml/</filename>. Pokud zdrojový kód obsahuje dokumentaci "
++"funkcí za použití speciálních komentářových bloků, tak zde se sloučí. V "
++"případě, že není použitý žádný soubor šablon, načte se dokumentace pouze ze "
++"zdrojového kódu a introspektivních dat."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:315
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the XML files into HTML files "
++"in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. Likewise "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the XML files into a PDF "
++"document called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> převádí soubory XML na soubory HTML "
++"v podsložce <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename>. Obdobně "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> převádí soubory XML na dokument PDF "
++"nazvaný <filename><balíček>.pdf</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:321
++msgid ""
++"Files in <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class="
++"\"directory\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One "
++"should never edit them directly."
++msgstr ""
++"Soubory ve složkách <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> a "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> jsou vždy přepsány. Nikdy by "
++"neměly být upravovány přímo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:329
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After "
++"installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be "
++"run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, "
++"the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in "
++"the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, "
++"<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-"
++"links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application "
++"will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Opravy křížových odkazů mezi dokumenty.</guilabel> Po "
++"nainstalování souborů HTML můžete spustit <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</"
++"application>, aby se opravily křížové odkazy mezi samostanými dokumenty. "
++"Například dokumentace GTK+ obsahuje křížové odkazy na typy zdokumentované v "
++"příručce GLib. Když vytváříte zdrojový balíček pro distribuci, "
++"<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> předělá všechny externí odkazy na "
++"webové odkazy. Když se distribuovaná (předgenerovaná) dokumentace instaluje, "
++"pokusí se tatáž aplikace předělat odkazy zpátky na místní odkazy (na "
++"dokumenty, které jsou nainstalované)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:347
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "Jak získat GTK-Doc?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:350
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "Požadavky"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:351
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>python 2/3</guilabel> - the main scripts are written in python."
++msgstr "<guilabel>Python 2/3</guilabel> – hlavní skripty jsou v jazyce Python."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:354
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> - the xslt processor from libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> – procesor xslt z knihovny libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:358
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> - the docbook xsl stylesheets <ulink url="
++"\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type=\"http"
++"\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> – stylopisy XSL pro docbook <ulink url="
++"\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type=\"http"
++"\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:362
++msgid ""
++"One of <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</guilabel> "
++"or <guilabel>vim</guilabel> - optional - used for syntax highlighting of "
++"examples"
++msgstr ""
++"Něco z <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</guilabel> "
++"nebo <guilabel>vim</guilabel> – (volitelné) používá se pro zvýraznění "
++"syntaxe u příkladů"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:370
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "O aplikaci GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:372
++msgid ""
++"Historically GTK-Doc was used to generate template files from the sources "
++"code. These template files could be used by developers to enter the API "
++"documentation. This approach was rather inconvenient because it required to "
++"keep the generated files under version control. Since GTK-Doc 1.9 it became "
++"possible to place all API information into source comments, which made the "
++"template support obsolete. In version 1.26 template support has been removed."
++msgstr ""
++"Historicky se GTK-Doc používalo ke generování šablonových souborů ze "
++"zdrojových kódů. Tyto šablonové soubory pak mohli vývojáři používat ke "
++"vkládání dokumentace k API. Tento postup byl dosti nepohodlný, protože "
++"vyžadovat udržování vygenerovaných souborů ve správě verzí. Proto od verze "
++"1.9 přichází GTK-Doc s možností vkládat všechny informace o API do komentářů "
++"ve zdrojových kódech, čímž se podpora šablon stává nadbytečnou. Ve verzi "
++"1.26 byla podpora šablon odstraněna."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:382 C/index.docbook:396
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(DOPLNIT)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:386
++msgid ""
++"(authors, web pages, mailing list, license, future plans, comparison with "
++"other similar systems.)"
++msgstr ""
++"(autoři, webové stránky, poštovní konference, licence, plány do budoucna, "
++"srovnání s ostatními podobnými systémy.)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:394
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "O této příručce"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:400
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr "(k čemu je určená, kde ji můžete získat, licence)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:409
++msgid "Project Setup"
++msgstr "Nastavení projektu"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:411
++msgid ""
++"This Chapter describes the steps that are necessary to integrate GTK-Doc "
++"into your project. The integration of GTK-Doc into a project includes the "
++"following steps:"
++msgstr ""
++"Tato kapitola popisuje kroky, které jsou nutné pro integraci GTK-Doc do "
++"vašeho projektu. Integrace GTK-Doc do projektu zahrnuje následující kroky:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:419
++msgid ""
++"Preparation of the directory structure and creating required configuration "
++"files for your GTK-Doc documentation (see <link linkend=\"settingup_docfiles"
++"\"> Setting up a skeleton documentation</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Přípravu struktury složek a vytvoření požadovaných konfiguračních souborů "
++"pro dokumentaci GTK-Doc (viz <link linkend=\"settingup_docfiles\">Nastavení "
++"kostry dokumentace</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:427
++msgid ""
++"Adjusting the build system to build your documentation using the GTK-Doc "
++"tools. Multiple build systems are supported, in this manual we describe how "
++"to integrate GTK-Doc with <link linkend=\"settingup_autotools\">Autotools</"
++"link>, <link linkend=\"settingup_cmake\">CMake</link>, and <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_plain_makefiles\">plain Makefiles</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Přizpůsobení sestavovacího systému, aby sestavoval vaši dokumentaci pomocí "
++"nástrojů GTK-Doc. Je podporováno více sestavovacích systémů, v této příručce "
++"je popsáno, jak integrovat GTK-Doc s <link linkend=\"settingup_autotools"
++"\">Autotools</link>, <link linkend=\"settingup_cmake\">CMake</link> a <link "
++"linkend=\"settingup_plain_makefiles\">prostými soubory Makefiles</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:437
++msgid ""
++"Adding GTK-Doc specific files to version control and deciding which files to "
++"ignore (see <link linkend=\"settingup_vcs\"> Integration with version "
++"control systems</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Přidání souborů specifických pro GTK-Doc do správy verzí a rozhodnutí, které "
++"soubory se mají ignorovat (viz <link linkend=\"settingup_vcs\">Integrace se "
++"systémem správy verzí</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:445
++msgid ""
++"The following sections assume we work on a project called <code>meep</code>. "
++"This project contains two packages (or modules), a library called "
++"<code>libmeep</code> and an end-user app called <code>meeper</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Následující oddíly předpokládají, že pracujeme na projektu nazvaném "
++"<code>meep</code>. Tento projekt obsahuje dva balíčky (nebo moduly), "
++"knihovnu nazvanou <code>libmeep</code> a uživatelskou aplikaci nazvanou "
++"<code>meeper</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:454
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "Nastavení kostry dokumentace"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:456
++msgid ""
++"A common convention is to place documentation into a folder called "
++"<code>docs</code> inside your top-level project directory. We usually "
++"distinguish between <emphasis>reference documentation</emphasis> intended "
++"for developers and an <emphasis>user manual</emphasis> intended for end-"
++"users. Again the convention is to have separate folders for both. We usually "
++"place the reference documentation in a folder named <code>reference</code> "
++"and the end-user manual in a folder named <code>help</code> as. According to "
++"the above convention the documentation for our <code>libmeep</code> package "
++"would be placed into: <code>docs/reference/libmeep</code>. For packages with "
++"just one library or application the documentation could also be placed "
++"directly into <code>docs/reference</code>. It is not mandatory to use the "
++"above convention, but if you choose to use a different directory structure "
++"you must adjust your build system configuration to match your directory "
++"structure."
++msgstr ""
++"Zaběhnutým zvykem je umístit dokumentaci do složky nazvané <code>docs</code> "
++"ve složce nejvyšší úrovně projektu. Obvykle rozlišujeme mezi "
++"<emphasis>referenční dokumentací</emphasis> zaměřenou na vývojáře a "
++"<emphasis>uživatelskou příručkou</emphasis> zaměřenou na koncového "
++"uživatele. Opět je zvykem mít zvláštní složku pro každou z obou zmíněných. "
++"Obvykle umisťujeme referenční dokumentaci do složky nazvané <code>reference</"
++"code> a uživatelskou příručku do složky nazvané <code>help</code>. V souladu "
++"se zmíněnými zvyky by dokumentace pro naši knihovnu <code>libmeep</code> "
++"byla umístěna do <code>docs/reference/libmeep</code>. U balíčků s jedinou "
++"knihovnou nebo referenční dokumentací by bylo možné ji umístit přímo do "
++"<code>docs/reference</code>. Není povinné použít uvedenou konvenci, ale "
++"pokud se rozhodnete použít jinou strukturu složek, musíte upravit "
++"konfiguraci sestavovacího systému, aby se s ní shodoval."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:487
++msgid "Example directory structure of <emphasis>meep</emphasis> project"
++msgstr "Příklad struktury složek projektu <emphasis>meep</emphasis>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:489
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # referenční dokumentace\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" help/ # volitelné: uživatelská příručka\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++msgid ""
++"In the following sections we will assume a directory structure for our "
++"<emphasis>meep</emphasis> project that uses the above conventions. <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"V následujících oddílech budeme uvažovat strukturu složek pro náš projekt "
++"<emphasis>meep</emphasis>, který používá výše uvedené konvence. <_:example-1/"
++">"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:506
++msgid "Integration with Autotools"
++msgstr "Integrace s Autotools"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:507
++msgid ""
++"Integration of GTK-Doc into an autotools-based build system requires the "
++"following steps:"
++msgstr ""
++"Integrace GTK-Doc do sestavovacího systému založeného na Autotools vyžaduje "
++"následující kroky:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:513
++msgid ""
++"Ensure that <application>gtkdocize</application> is run once before the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> script. If an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> "
++"script is present, adjust it to check for GTK-Doc and add a call to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"Zajistit, že <application>gtkdocize</application> se spustí právě jednou "
++"před skriptem <filename>configure</filename>. Pokud je přítomen skript "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>, upravte jej, aby kontroloval GTK-Doc a "
++"přidejte volání <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:521
++msgid ""
++"The main purpose of <application>gtkdocize</application> is to make the "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> Makefile and the <filename>gtk-doc.m4</"
++"filename> macro definition file available to the build system, either by "
++"copying or linking it into the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Hlavním účelem <application>gtkdocize</application> je vytvořit Makefile "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> a definici makra <filename>gtk-doc.m4</"
++"filename> dostupnou sestavovacímu systému, buď zkopírováním do projektu nebo "
++"vytvořením odkazu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:530
++msgid ""
++"Add the necessary <application>autoconf</application> macros to "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> to enable GTK-Doc in your build system to "
++"allow configuration of GTK-Doc via the generated <filename>configure</"
++"filename> script."
++msgstr ""
++"Přidat potřebná makra <application>autoconf</application> do "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>, abyste povolili GTK-Doc v sestavovacím "
++"systému a konfigurace GTK-Doc mohla jít přes generovaný skript "
++"<filename>configure</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:536
++msgid ""
++"Among others with registers the <code>--enable-gtk-doc</code> option with "
++"the <filename>configure</filename> script."
++msgstr ""
++"Mimo jiné pomocí registrace přepínače <code>--enable-gtk-doc</code> ve "
++"skriptu <filename>configure</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:542
++msgid ""
++"Create an <application>automake</application> script for each application or "
++"library in your project. In the example used in this documentation this step "
++"applies to both <code>meeper</code> and <code>libmeep</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Vytvořit skript <application>automake</application> pro jednotlivé aplikace "
++"a knihovny ve svém projektu. V příkladu použitém v této dokumentaci je tento "
++"krok použit jak pro <code>meeper</code>, tak pro <code>libmeep</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:551
++msgid ""
++"In the following sections, we will perform the above steps in reverse order. "
++"We start with the <application>automake</application> scripts and work our "
++"way up to <filename>configure.ac</filename> and <filename>autogen.sh</"
++"filename>. Then we show how enable Gtk-Doc in the build system and how to "
++"build the documentation."
++msgstr ""
++"V následujícím oddíle provedeme výše zmíněné kroky v opačném pořadí. Začneme "
++"se skripty <application>automake</application> a budeme postupovat až k "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> a <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. Pak si "
++"ukážeme, jak povolit GTK-Doc v sestavovacím systému a jak sestavit "
++"dokumentaci."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:561
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "Integrace s automake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:563
++msgid ""
++"First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">examples</filename> sub-directory of the <ulink url=\"https://"
++"gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/raw/master/examples/Makefile.am\"> gtkdoc-"
++"sources</ulink> to your project's reference documentation directory (e.g. "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">docs/reference/<package></filename>). A "
++"local copy should be available under e.g. <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-"
++"tools/examples/Makefile.am</filename>. If you have multiple packages repeat "
++"this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++"Jako první nakopírujte <filename>Makefile.am</filename> z podsložky "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">examples</filename> ve složce <ulink url="
++"\"https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/raw/master/examples/Makefile.am"
++"\">gtkdoc-sources</ulink> do složky s referenční dokumentací svého projektu "
++"(např. <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></"
++"filename>). Místní kopie by měla být k dispozici např. pod <filename>/usr/"
++"share/doc/gtk-doc-tools/examples/Makefile.am</filename>. Pokud máte více "
++"balíčků s dokumentací, opakujte tento krok pro každý z nich."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/simpara
++#: C/index.docbook:576
++msgid ""
++"Do not forget to add each <filename>Makefile.am</filename> to the "
++"<function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function> macro in <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename>. For <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile.am</filename> you "
++"will need to add the entry <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile</"
++"filename> to <function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function>."
++msgstr ""
++"Nezapomeňte přidat jednotlivé <filename>Makefile.am</filename> do makra "
++"<function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function> v <filename>configure.ac</filename>. "
++"Pro <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile.am</filename> budete "
++"potřebovat přidat záznam <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile</"
++"filename> do <function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:588
++msgid "Example directory structure with <filename>Makefiles.am</filename>"
++msgstr "Příklad struktury složek s <filename>Makefiles.am</filename>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:591
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # referenční dokumentace\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" help/ # volitelné: uživatelská příručka\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:607
++msgid ""
++"Next, you need to customize the copied Makefiles and provide values for the "
++"various parameters in each <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. All settings "
++"have a comment above them that describes their purpose and how to customize "
++"the setting. Most settings are used to supply extra flags to the respective "
++"tools to which they apply. Every tool has a variable of the form <option><"
++"TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option> (e.g. the tool <application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</"
++"application> has an option named <code>MKHTML_OPTIONS</code>). All the tools "
++"support <option>--help</option> to list the supported options."
++msgstr ""
++"Dále je třeba přizpůsobit zkopírované soubory Makefile a dodat hodnoty pro "
++"různé parametry v jednotlivých <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Všechna "
++"nastavení mají komentáře s popisem svého účelu a jak nastavení přizpůsobit. "
++"Většina nastavení má doplňující příznaky předávané do dotyčných nástrojů, "
++"které je umí použít. Každý nástroj má proměnnou ve formátu <option><"
++"NÁZEVNÁSTROJE>_OPTIONS</option> (např. nástroj <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mkhtml</application> má volbu nazvanou <code>MKHTML_OPTIONS</code>). Všechny "
++"nástroje podporují <option>--help</option> pro vypsání podporovaných "
++"přepínačů."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:631
++msgid ""
++"<option>DOC_MODULE</option> is used to provide the name of the package that "
++"is being documentated (e.g. <code>meeper</code>, or <code>libmeep</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>DOC_MODULE</option> se používá k poskytnutí názvu balíčku, který je "
++"dokumentován (např. <code>meeper</code> nebo <code>libmeep</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:638
++msgid ""
++"<option>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</option> is used to specify the location of source "
++"directory which GTK-Doc searches for your API documentation. This will "
++"usually be <code> DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/src </code> or a sub-"
++"directory of that directory."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</option> se používá k určení umístění zdrojové "
++"složky, ve které GTK-Doc hledá dokumentaci API. Obvykle to je "
++"<code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/src </code> nebo podsložka této složky."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:651
++msgid ""
++"<option>HFILE_GLOB</option> and <option>CFILE_GLOB</option> are used for "
++"dependencies. Each option take a file-glob (e.g. <code>HFILE_GLOB="
++"$(top_srcdir)/src/*.c</code>). The documentation will be rebuilt if any of "
++"the matched files change."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>HFILE_GLOB</option> a <option>CFILE_GLOB</option> se používají pro "
++"závislosti. Obě volby přebírají file-glob (např. <code>HFILE_GLOB="
++"$(top_srcdir)/src/*.c</code>). Dokumentace se znovu sestaví, když se "
++"kterýkoliv z odpovídajících souborů změní."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:663
++msgid ""
++"<option>EXTRA_HFILES</option> allows to specify extra header files to "
++"include when scanning for API documentation, which are not found under "
++"<code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</code> (e.g. <code> EXTRA_HFILES=$(top_srcdir}/contrib/"
++"extra.h</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>EXTRA_HFILES</option> umožňuje určit dodatečné hlavičkové soubory, "
++"které se mají zahrnout při procházení pro dokumentaci k API, a které nejsou "
++"k nalezení pod složkou <code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</code> (např. <code>EXTRA_HFILES="
++"$(top_srcdir}/contrib/extra.h</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:673
++msgid ""
++"<option>IGNORE_HFILES</option> allows to specify header files or directories "
++"to ignore when scanning for API documentation. Use the basename of the file "
++"or directory (e.g. <code> IGNORE_HFILES=gtkdebug.h gtkintl.h "
++"private_code_folder</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>IGNORE_HFILES</option> umožňuje určit dodatečné hlavičkové soubory "
++"nebo složky, které se mají ignorovat při procházení pro dokumentaci k API. "
++"Použijte základní název ze souboru nebo složky (např. "
++"<code>IGNORE_HFILES=gtkdebug.h gtkintl.h private_code_folder</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:683
++msgid ""
++"<option>HTML_IMAGES</option> allows to specify images files which will be "
++"copied into the <filename>html/</filename> directory of the generated "
++"documentation. If your API documentation includes any images they need to be "
++"added to this option (e.g. <code> HTML_IMAGES=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/stock-icons/"
++"stock_about_24.png</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>HTML_IMAGES</option> umožňuje určit soubory s obrázky, které se "
++"zkopírují do složky <option>html/</option> s generovanou dokumentací. Pokud "
++"jsou součástí vaší dokumentace API nějaké obrázky, je třeba je přidat do "
++"této volby (např. <code>HTML_IMAGES=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/stock-icons/"
++"stock_about_24.png</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:696
++msgid ""
++"<option>content_files</option> allows to specify extra files that are "
++"included by <code>$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)</code> (e.g. <code> "
++"content_files=running.xml building.xml changes-2.0.xml</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>content_files</option> umožňuje určit dodatečné soubory, které se "
++"mají vložit pomocí <code>$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)</code> (např. "
++"<code>content_files=running.xml building.xml changes-2.0.xml</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:707
++msgid ""
++"<option>expand_content_files</option> allows to specify files where "
++"<emphasis>gtk-doc abbreviations</emphasis> such as <code>#GtkWidget</code> "
++"are expanded (e.g. <code> expand_content_files=running.xml</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>expand_content_files</option> umožňuje určit soubory, ve kterých "
++"jsou rozvinuty <emphasis>zkratky gtk-doc</emphasis>, jako je třeba "
++"<code>#GtkWidget</code> (např. <code>expand_content_files=running.xml</"
++"code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:625
++msgid ""
++"The following list explains the most relevant options. Check the example "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename> for additional options. <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Následující seznam vysvětluje nejpodstatnější volby. Na další volby se "
++"podívejte do ukázkového <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:722
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Integrace s autoconf"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:724
++msgid ""
++"Integration with <application>autoconf</application> is very simple and "
++"includes one required step and an additional optional (but recommended) "
++"step. The first step is to add the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro "
++"to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This registers several "
++"configure options to enable GTK-Doc and allows you to set default arguments "
++"for <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"Integrace s <application>autoconf</application> je velmi jednoduchá a skládá "
++"se z jednoho povinného kroku a dalšího volitelného (ale doporučeného) kroku. "
++"Prvním krokem je přidat makro <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> do skriptu "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. Tím se zaregistruje několik "
++"konfiguračních voleb, které povolí GTK-Doc a umožní vám nastavit výchozí "
++"argumenty pro <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: warning/simpara
++#: C/index.docbook:736
++msgid ""
++"Make sure that the <code>GTK_DOC_CHECK</code> macro is not indented. The "
++"macro must start at the beginning of the line and should not start with "
++"whitespace."
++msgstr ""
++"Ujistěte se, že makro <code>GTK_DOC_CHECK</code> není odsazené od kraje. "
++"Makro musí začínat na začátku řádku a nesmí začínat bílými znaky."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:743
++msgid ""
++"The second step is to add the <code>AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)</code> to your "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. This is not required but helps "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++"definition (e.g <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename>) which contains the "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro to your project's macro directory. "
++"Without this, the GTK_DOC_CHECK macro might not be found and you would need "
++"to explicitly tell the <application>aclocal</application> tool where to find "
++"the macro definition file."
++msgstr ""
++"Druhým krokem je přidat do <filename>configure.ac</filename> makro "
++"<code>AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)</code>. Není to sice nutné, ale pomůže to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> automaticky zkopírovat definici makra "
++"(např. <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename>), která obsahuje makro "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>, do složky s makry ve vašem projektu. Bez "
++"toho se může stát, že makro <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> nemusí být "
++"nalezeno a budete muset nástroji <application>aclocal</application> výslovně "
++"uvést, kde soubor s definicí makra najít."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:756
++msgid "Minimal integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Minimální integrace s autoconf"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:757
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"# doporučeno: nastaví složku m4\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# volitelné: zaregistruje gtk-doc v configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:772
++msgid "Integration with optional gtk-doc dependency"
++msgstr "Integrace s volitelnými závislostttmi gtk-doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:773
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"# doporučeno: nastaví složku m4\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# volitelné: zaregistruje gtk-doc v configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:766
++msgid ""
++"The above example works, but will require all developers to have gtk-doc "
++"installed. A better way is to make building the documentation optional as "
++"shown in the next example: <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Výše uvedený příklad funguje, ale vyžaduje, aby všichni vývojáři měli "
++"nainstalováno gtk-doc. Lepším způsobem je zařídit, aby sestavení dokumentace "
++"bylo volitelné, jak je ukázáno v následujícím příkladu: <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:786
++msgid ""
++"The first argument is used to check for the Gtk-Doc version at configure "
++"time. The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application>. The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several "
++"configure switches:"
++msgstr ""
++"První argument se používá ke kontrole verze GTK-Doc v průběhu konfigurace. "
++"Druhý, volitelný argument používá nástroj <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application>. Makro <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> také přidává několik "
++"přepínačů pro configure:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:795
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr "--with-html-dir=CESTA: cesta, kam se má dokumentace nainstalovat"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:796
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc: použít k sestavení dokumentace gtk-doc [výchozí je ne]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:797
++msgid ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html: sestavit dokumentaci ve formátu HTML [výchozí je ano]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:798
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-pdf: sestavit dokumentaci ve formátu PDF [výchozí je ne]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: important/para
++#: C/index.docbook:802
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--"
++"enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. "
++"Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for "
++"users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc je standardně vypnuté! Nezapomeňte zadat přepínač „<option>--enable-"
++"gtk-doc</option>“ při dalším spuštění <filename>configure</filename>. Jinak "
++"se nainstaluje předgenerovaná dokumentace (která může mít význam pro "
++"uživatele, ale ne pro vývojáře)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:810
++msgid ""
++"After all changes to <filename>configure.ac</filename> are made, update the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> file. This can be done by re-running "
++"<code>autogen.sh</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Po provedení změn v <filename>configure.ac</filename> aktualizujte soubor "
++"<filename>configure</filename>. To se dá udělat opětovným spuštěním "
++"<code>autogen.sh</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:818
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "Integrace s autogen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:820
++msgid ""
++"Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup "
++"the build infrastructure after the project was checked out from a version "
++"control system (such as git or svn). GTK-Doc comes with a script called "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> which can be used to copy the necessary "
++"files needed by Gtk-Doc to the source directory."
++msgstr ""
++"Většina projektů má skript <filename>autogen.sh</filename>, který po stažení "
++"projektu ze systému pro správu verzí (jako je Git nebo SVN), nastaví "
++"infrastrukturu pro sestavení. GTK-Doc se dodává se skriptem nazvaným "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>, který lze použít ke zkopírování "
++"nezbytných souborů požadovaných GTK-Doc do zdrojové složky."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:828
++msgid "It should be run before autoreconf, autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr "Měl by být spuštěn před autoheader, automake nebo autoconf."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:833
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Spuštění gtkdocize z autogen.sh"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:834
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:842
++msgid "Conditionally run gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Podmíněné spuštění gtkdocize z autogen.sh"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:843
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"GTKDOCIZE=$(which gtkdocize 2>/dev/null)\n"
++"if test $? -ne 0; then\n"
++" echo \"No gtk-doc support found. You can't build the docs.\"\n"
++"else\n"
++" $GTKDOCIZE || exit 1\n"
++"fi\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"GTKDOCIZE=$(which gtkdocize 2>/dev/null)\n"
++"if test $? -ne 0; then\n"
++" echo \"No gtk-doc support found. You can't build the docs.\"\n"
++"else\n"
++" $GTKDOCIZE || exit 1\n"
++"fi\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:854
++msgid ""
++"When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.make</filename> to your project root (or any directory specified by the "
++"<option>--docdir</option> option)."
++msgstr ""
++"Když spustíte <filename>gtkdocize</filename>, tak nakopíruje do kořenové "
++"složky vašeho projektu (nebo složky určené přepínačem <option>--docdir</"
++"option>) soubor <filename>gtk-doc.make</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:860
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> checks your <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename> script for the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro. The "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro can be used to pass extra arguments "
++"to the <application>gtkdocize</application> script. the 2nd parameter in the "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro."
++msgstr ""
++"<filename>gtkdocize</filename> kontroluje váš skript <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename> ohledně makra <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>. Toto makro "
++"můžete použít k předání dalších parametrů do skriptu <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application>. Konkrétně k tomu slouží druhý argument makra."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:869
++msgid ""
++"Alternatively, additional arguments can also be passed to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> via the <function>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</"
++"function> environment variable, or by directly specifying them to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> in <filename>autogen.sh</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Alternativně lze další argumenty skriptu <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application> předat přes proměnnou prostředí <function>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</"
++"function> nebo je zadat přímo za volání <application>gtkdocize</application> "
++"v <filename>autogen.sh</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:880
++msgid "Executing GTK-Doc from the Build System"
++msgstr "Spouštění GTK-Doc ze sestavovacího systému"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:882
++msgid ""
++"After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then "
++"give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run "
++"<filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++"Po dokončení předchozích kroků nastal čas spustit sestavení. Nejdříve musíte "
++"znovu spustit <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. Pokud tento skript pro vás "
++"provádí nastavení, předejte mu přepínač <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option>. "
++"Jinak potom ručně spusťte <filename>configure</filename> s tímto přepínačem."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:889
++msgid ""
++"The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-"
++"directories. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past ."
++"sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"První make spustí vygenerování několika doplňujících souborů ve složkách "
++"doc. Podstatné jsou tyto: <filename><package>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (dříve .sgml) a <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:897
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "Sestavení dokumentace"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:898
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:905
++msgid ""
++"Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename>. With this initial setup you will only see a very "
++"simple document. The next chapter will teach you how to add API "
++"documentation to your code via special comment blocks. The Chapter "
++"afterwards introduces <link linkend=\"metafiles\">additional files</link> "
++"and shows how to edit the <link linkend=\"metafiles_master\">master "
++"template</link> to add additional chapters and sections to your "
++"documentation files."
++msgstr ""
++"Nyní si můžete ve svém webovém prohlížeči zobrazit <filename>docs/reference/"
++"<package>/index.html</filename>. S tímto počátečním nastavením uvidíte "
++"jen velmi jednoduchý dokument. Následující kapitola vás naučí, jak do svého "
++"zdrojového kódu přidat dokumentaci k API pomocí speciálních komentářových "
++"bloků. Dále pak kapitola seznamuje s <link linkend=\"metafiles\">dodatečnými "
++"soubory</link> a ukazuje, jak upravit <link linkend=\"metafiles_master"
++"\">hlavní šablonu</link>, abyste do svých souborů s dokumentací dostali "
++"doplňující kapitoly a oddíly."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:921
++msgid "Integration with CMake build systems"
++msgstr "Integrace se sestavovacím systémem CMake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:923
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc now provides a <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename> module (and "
++"the corresponding <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename> module). "
++"This provides a <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal> command that you can "
++"set in your <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc nyní nabízí modul <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename> (a "
++"příslušný modul <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename>). Ten "
++"poskytuje příkaz <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal>, který můžete "
++"nastavit ve svém souboru <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:933
++msgid "Example of using GTK-Doc from CMake"
++msgstr "Příklad použití GTK-Doc z CMake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:934
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Create the doc-libmeep target.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Build doc-libmeep as part of the default target. Without this, you would\n"
++"# have to explicitly run something like `make doc-libmeep` to build the docs.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Install the docs. (This assumes you're using the GNUInstallDirs CMake module\n"
++"# to set the CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR variable correctly).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Vytvoření cíle doc-libmeep.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Sestavení doc-libmeep jako součásti výchozího cíle. Bez tohoto byste museli\n"
++"# ručně spouštět něco jako `make doc-libmeep`, aby se dokumentace sestavila.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Instalace dokumentace. (Předpokládá to, že používáte modul CMake GNUInstallDirs\n"
++"# ke správnému nastavení proměnné CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:931
++msgid "The following example shows how to use this command. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr "Následující příklad ukazuje, jak tento příkaz použít: <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:958
++msgid "Integration with plain makefiles or other build systems"
++msgstr ""
++"Integrace s prostými soubory Makefile nebo jinými sestavovacími systémy"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:960
++msgid ""
++"In the case one does not want to use automake and therefore <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.mak</filename> one will need to call the gtkdoc tools in the right order "
++"in own makefiles (or other build tools)."
++msgstr ""
++"Když někdo nechce používat automake, a tím pádem <filename>gtk-doc.mak</"
++"filename>, bude muset volat nástroje gtkdoc ve správném pořadí ve vlastních "
++"souborech make (nebo jiných nástrojích)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:967
++msgid "Documentation build steps"
++msgstr "Kroky sestavení dokumentace"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:968
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <source-dir>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<source-dir>\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <zdrojová-složka>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<zdrojová-složka>\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:982
++msgid ""
++"One will need to look at the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> and "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> to pick the extra options needed."
++msgstr ""
++"Na výběr dalších potřebných voleb se musíte se podívat do <filename>Makefile."
++"am</filename> a <filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:989
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "Integrace se systémem pro správu verzí"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:991
++msgid ""
++"As a rule of thumb, it's the files you edit which should go under version "
++"control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><package>."
++"types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the "
++"past .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Podle nepsaných pravidel byste soubory, které upravujete, měli udržovat ve "
++"správě verzí. U typických projektů to jsou tyto soubory: <filename><"
++"balíček>.types</filename>, <filename><balíček>-docs.xml</filename> "
++"(dříve .sgml), <filename><balíček>-sections.txt</filename> a "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:999
++msgid ""
++"Files in the <filename>xml/</filename> and <filename>html/</filename> "
++"directories should not go under version control. Neither should any of the "
++"<filename>.stamp</filename> files."
++msgstr ""
++"Soubory ze složek <filename>xml/</filename> a <filename>html/</filename> by "
++"neměly být zařazeny do správy verzí. A ani žádné soubory <filename>.stamp</"
++"filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1009
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "Dokumentování v kódu"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1011
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code "
++"documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure "
++"from other sources. During the next section you will find all information "
++"about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc používá pro kód dokumentace komentáře se speciální syntaxí ve "
++"zdrojovém kódu. K tomu se ještě získávají informace o struktuře vašeho "
++"projektu z dalších zdrojů. V následujícím oddílu najdete všechny informace o "
++"syntaxi komentářů."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1022 C/index.docbook:1048
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "Komentářový blok GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1023
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* kód zde se nezpracovává */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1018
++msgid ""
++"The GTK-Doc scanner can handle the majority of C headers fine. In the case "
++"of receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special case, one "
++"can hint GTK-Doc to skip over them. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Skener GTK-Doc zvládá dobře většinu hlavičkových souborů C. V případě, že od "
++"něj obdržíte varování, které vypadá jako speciální případ, můžete GTK-Doc "
++"poradit, aby jej přeskakovala. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1032
++msgid "Limitations"
++msgstr "Omezení"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1033
++msgid ""
++"Note, that GTK-Doc's supports <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> but "
++"not <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> or other combinations."
++msgstr ""
++"Uvědomte si, že GTK-Doc podporuje <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code>, "
++"ale ne <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> nebo jiné kombinace."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1043
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "Dokumentační komentáře"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1049
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifikátor:\n"
++" * dokumentace …\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1045
++msgid ""
++"A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation "
++"block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Každý víceřádkový komentář, který je označený další „*“ navíc, je "
++"dokumentačním blokem a bude zpracovaný nástroji GTK-Doc. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1058
++msgid ""
++"The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is "
++"related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add "
++"table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++"„identifikátor“ je jeden řádek s názvem položky, ke které se komentář "
++"vztahuje. Syntaxe se částečně liší podle položky. (DOPLNIT: přidat tabulku "
++"se seznamem identifikátorů)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1064
++msgid ""
++"The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol "
++"types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter "
++"description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows "
++"the detailed description. All lines (outside program listings and CDATA "
++"sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph "
++"breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-"
++"asterisk-blank-blank). This is useful in preformatted text (code listings)."
++msgstr ""
++"Blok „dokumentace“ se rovněž liší pro různé typy symbolů. Symboly, které "
++"přebírají parametry, jako jsou funkce nebo makra, mají nejdříve popsané "
++"parametry, za kterými následuje prázdný řádek (pouze „*“). Za ním pak "
++"následuje podrobný popis. Všechny řádky (mimo seznamu programů a oddílu "
++"CDATA), které obsahují „ *“ (mezera hvězdička) se převedou na zalomení "
++"odstavce. Pokud zalomení odstavce nechcete, změňte to na „ * “ (mezera "
++"hvězdička mezera mezera). To se hodí na text s pevným formátem (výpis kódu)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1081
++msgid ""
++"What it is: The name for a class or function can sometimes be misleading for "
++"people coming from a different background."
++msgstr ""
++"Co to je: Název třídy nebo funkce může být občas matoucí pro lidi, kteří "
++"používají něco jiného."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1087
++msgid ""
++"What it does: Tell about common uses. Put it in relation with the other API."
++msgstr ""
++"K čemu to je: Uveďte běžném použití. Dejte ho do souvislosti se zbytkem API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1077
++msgid "When documenting code, describe two aspects: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Když píšete dokumentaci ke kódu, popište dva aspekty: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1102
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Použijte funkce() pro odkaz na funkci nebo makro, které mají argumenty."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1107
++msgid ""
++"Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to "
++"parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr ""
++"Použijte @parametr pro odkaz na parametry. Použijte to rovněž, když se "
++"odkazujete na parametry jiných funkcí, vztahujících se k popisované funkci."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1113
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr "Použijte %konstanta pro odkaz na konstantu, např. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1118
++msgid ""
++"Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and "
++"macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Použijte #symbol pro odkaz na jiný typ symbolu, např. strukturu, výčet a "
++"makro, který nemá argumenty."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1124
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal."
++msgstr "Použijte #Objekt::signál pro odkaz na signál objektu GObject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1129
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property."
++msgstr "Použijte #Objekt:vlastnost pro odkaz na vlastnost objektu GObject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1134
++msgid ""
++"Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure and #GObjectClass."
++"foo_bar() to refer to a vmethod."
++msgstr ""
++"Použijte #Struktura.pole pro odkaz na pole uvnitř struktury a #GObjectTřída."
++"neco() pro odkaz na virtuální metodu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1096
++msgid ""
++"One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in "
++"the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. "
++"GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Jednou z výhod hypertextu, oproti prostému textu, je možnost mít v dokumentu "
++"odkazy. Zápis správných značek pro odkazy může být úmorná práce. GTK-Doc se "
++"vám snaží pomoci několika užitečnými zkratkami. <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1143
++msgid ""
++"If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or "
++"'#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML "
++"entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&"
++"commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them "
++"with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++"V případě, že potřebujete ve své dokumentaci použít speciální znaky „<“, "
++"„>“, „()“, „@“, „%“ nebo „#“, aniž by je GTK-Doc změnilo, můžete místo "
++"nich použít použít entity XML „&lt;“, „&gt;“, „&lpar;“, „&"
++"rpar;“, „&commat;“, „&percnt;“ a „&num;“ nebo únikovou sekvenci "
++"se zpětným lomítkem „\\“."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1152
++msgid ""
++"DocBook can do more than just links. One can also have lists, examples, "
++"headings, and images. As of version 1.20, the preferred way is to use a "
++"subset of the basic text formatting syntax called <ulink url=\"http://"
++"daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink>. On older GTK-Doc "
++"versions any documentation that includes Markdown will be rendered as is. "
++"For example, list items will appear as lines starting with a dash."
++msgstr ""
++"DocBook toho ale umí více, než jen odkazy. Může mít také seznamy, příklady, "
++"nadpisy a obrázky. Od verze 1.20 je dána přednost použití jen podmnožiny ze "
++"základní syntaxe formátování textu. Tato podmnožina se nazývá <ulink url="
++"\"http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink>. "
++"Dokumentace ze starší verze GTK-Doc, která obsahuje Markdown, bude "
++"vygenerována tak, jak je. Například položky seznamu se objeví s pomlčkou na "
++"začátku."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1163
++msgid ""
++"While markdown is now preferred one can mix both. One limitation here is "
++"that one can use docbook xml within markdown, but markdown within docbook "
++"xml is not supported."
++msgstr ""
++"I když je markdown v současnosti preferovaný, můžete míchat oba dohromady. "
++"Má to jediné omezení v tom, že můžete použít docbook xml v markdown, ale "
++"markdown v docbook xml podporován není."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1169
++msgid ""
++"In older GTK-Doc releases, if you need support for additional formatting, "
++"you would need to enable the usage of docbook XML tags inside doc-comments "
++"by putting <option>--xml-mode</option> (or <option>--sgml-mode</option>) in "
++"the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Když ve starších vydáních GTK-Doc potřebujete podporu pro dodatečné "
++"formátování, musíte zapnout použití značek XML pro DocBook uvnitř "
++"dokumentačních komentářů pomocí <option>--xml-mode</option> (nebo <option>--"
++"sgml-mode</option>) v proměnné <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> v souboru "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1178
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block using Markdown"
++msgstr "Komentářový blok GTK-Doc používající značkovací jazyk"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1179
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * documentation paragraph ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Second Sub Heading\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading With a Link Anchor # {#heading-two}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * more documentation:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 1\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Paragraph inside a list item.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. another numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Another paragraph. [A Link to the GNOME Website](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [A link to the heading anchor above][heading-two]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * A C-language example:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Gorgeous!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifikátor:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * odstavec dokumentace…\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Podnadpis #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Podnadpis druhé úrovně\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Podnadpis s kotvou pro odkazy # {#heading-two}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * další dokumentace:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - položka seznamu 1\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Odstavec v rámci položky seznamu.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - položka seznamu 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. číslovaná položka seznamu\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. další číslovaná položka seznamu\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Další odstavec. [Odkazy na webové stránky GNOME](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [Odkaz na nadpis pomocí kotvy uvedené výše][heading-two]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Příklad v jazyce C:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Paráda!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1218
++msgid ""
++"More examples of what markdown tags are supported can be found in the <ulink "
++"url=\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/Markdown"
++"\">GTK+ Documentation Markdown Syntax Reference</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Více příkladů k podporovaným značkám Markdown můžete najít v <ulink url="
++"\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/Markdown"
++"\">Referenční příručce k syntaxi Markdown pro dokumentaci GTK+</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1224
++msgid ""
++"As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one "
++"cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to "
++"comment those symbols too. This helps other developers to understand your "
++"code. Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without "
++"the 2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made "
++"public, all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and "
++"insert the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++"Jak již bylo zmíněno dříve, slouží GTK-Doc pro dokumentování veřejného API. "
++"Tím pádem nemůžete psát dokumentaci pro statické symboly. Nicméně je vhodné "
++"komentovat i tyto symboly. Pomůže to ostatním vývojářům porozumět vašemu "
++"kódu. Proto doporučujeme komentovat je pomocí normálních komentářů (bez "
++"druhé „*“ na prvním řádku). Pokud je budete v budoucnu chtít předělat na "
++"veřejné, jediné co budete muset udělat, je přidat do komentářového bloku "
++"jednu „*“ a na správné místo v souboru oddílů vložit název symbolu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1239
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "Dokumentování oddílů"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1241
++msgid ""
++"Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or "
++"module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short "
++"description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Každý oddíl dokumentace obsahuje informaci o jedné třídě nebo modulu. Můžete "
++"do oddílu napsat blok, ve kterém je představíte. Stručný popis se rovněž "
++"použije v rámci tabulky s obsahem. Všechna @pole jsou volitelná."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1249
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "Komentářový blok oddílu"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1250
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: třída plikace\n"
++" * @title: Aplikace Meep\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Třída aplikace starající se o…\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1269
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr "SECTION:<název>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1271
++msgid ""
++"The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name given here "
++"should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Název prováže oddíl dokumentace s příslušnou částí v souboru <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename>. Zde zadaný název musí odpovídat značce "
++"<SOUBOR> v souboru <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1280
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@short_description"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1282
++msgid ""
++"A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the "
++"links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr ""
++"Jednořádkový popis oddílu, který se později objeví za odkazy v tabulce s "
++"obsahem a na začátku stránky oddílu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1289
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr "@title"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1291
++msgid ""
++"The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It "
++"can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr ""
++"Název oddílu se standardně zvolí podle <name> v deklaraci SECTION. Lze "
++"jej ale určit i přímo v poli @title."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1298
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr "@section_id"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1300
++msgid ""
++"Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <"
++"title> is used as a section_id and for other sections it is <"
++"MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++"Přepíše použití názvu jako identifikátoru oddílu. Pro objekty GObject se "
++"jako section_id použije <title> a pro ostatní oddíly to je <"
++"MODULE>-<title>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1308
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@see_also"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1310
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section."
++msgstr "Seznam symbolů, které se vztahují k tomuto oddílu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1316
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1323
++msgid ""
++"Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third "
++"parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have "
++"confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after "
++"the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major "
++"release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be "
++"rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++"Stable (stabilní) – Záměrem stabilního rozhraní je umožnit libovolné třetí "
++"straně vyvinout aplikace využívající toto rozhraní, vydat je a moci se "
++"spolehnout, že poběží na všech podružných vydáních produktu (po té, co je "
++"rozhraní vydáno a v rámci stejné hlavní verze). I mezi hlavními vydáními se "
++"nekompatibilní změny očekávají zřídka v opravdu odůvodněných případech."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1335
++msgid ""
++"Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are "
++"typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly "
++"changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a "
++"more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source "
++"or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++"Unstable (nestabilní) – Nestabilní rozhraní je experimentální a přechodné. "
++"Typicky bývá dáno vývojářům k dispozici kvůli včasnému přístupu k novým a "
++"rychle se měnícím technologiím nebo kvůli poskytnutí provizorního řešení "
++"problému, kdy je předpokládané více obecné řešení. Není žádná záruka ohledně "
++"zdrojové či binární kompatibility při přechodu z jedné podružné verze na "
++"následujíc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1347
++msgid ""
++"Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but "
++"that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in "
++"specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++"Private (soukromé) – Rozhraní, které může být použité v rámci zásobníku "
++"GNOME, ale není dokumentované pro koncového uživatele. Takové funkce by se "
++"měly používat jen určeným a dokumentovaným způsobem."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1356
++msgid ""
++"Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require "
++"end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be "
++"Internal."
++msgstr ""
++"Internal (interní) – Rozhraní, které je určené pro interní potřeby modulu a "
++"nevyžaduje dokumentaci pro koncového uživatele. Funkce, které jsou "
++"nedokumentované, jsou považované za interní."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1318
++msgid ""
++"An informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend "
++"the use of one of these terms: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Informační popis úrovně stability tohoto API. Doporučujeme použít jeden z "
++"těchto termínů: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1368
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1370
++msgid ""
++"The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a "
++"comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Seznam souborů z <literal>#include</literal> oddělených čárkou, aby se "
++"zobrazily v oddílu anotace. Přepisuje globální hodnotu ze <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_sections\">souboru oddílů</link> nebo příkazové řádky. Tato "
++"položka je volitelná."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1379
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr "@image"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1381
++msgid ""
++"The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This "
++"will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of "
++"a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Obrázek, který se má zobrazit na začátku referenční stránky k tomuto oddílu. "
++"Často se jedná o nějaký nákres, který schématicky znázorňuje podobu třídy "
++"nebo nákres se vztahy vůči jiným třídám. Tato položka je volitelná."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1392
++msgid ""
++"To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs "
++"into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++"Aby se po změně dokumentace předešlo rekompilacím, které nejsou nutné, "
++"vložte, kde je to možné, dokumentaci oddílu do zdrojového kódu c."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1401
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "Dokumentování symbolů"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1403
++msgid ""
++"Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is "
++"documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the "
++"definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus "
++"functions are usually documented in the c-source and macros, structs and "
++"enums in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++"Každý symbol (funkce, makro, struktura, výčet, signál a vlastnost) se "
++"dokumentuje v odděleném bloku. Blok je nejlepší umístit v rámci definice "
++"symbolu, protože se tak snadno udržuje synchronizovaný. Z tohoto důvodu se "
++"funkce obvykle dokumentují ve zdrojovém kódu C a makra, struktury a výčty v "
++"hlavičkovém souboru."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1411 C/index.docbook:1477
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr "Obecné značky"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1413
++msgid ""
++"You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell "
++"when an API was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++"Informace o verzích můžete přidat ke všem prvkům dokumentace, abyste "
++"sdělili, kdy bylo API zavedeno, nebo kdy bylo označeno za zastaralé."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1418
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr "Značky pro verzování"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1419
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "Since:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1421
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr "Popisuje, od které verze kódu je API dostupné."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1426
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "Deprecated:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1428
++msgid ""
++"Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The "
++"description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr ""
++"Odstavec upozorňující, že by se tato funkce neměla nadále používat. Popis by "
++"měl čtenáře odkazovat na nové API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1436
++msgid ""
++"You can also add stability information to all documentation elements to "
++"indicate whether API stability is guaranteed for them for all future minor "
++"releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Můžete také ke všem prvkům dokumentace přidat informaci o stabilitě, abyste "
++"dali najevo, že je u API zaručena stabilita pro všechna následující "
++"minoritní vydání projektu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1442
++msgid ""
++"The default stability level for all documentation elements can be set by "
++"passing the <option>--default-stability</option> argument to "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> with one of the values below."
++msgstr ""
++"Výchozí stabilitu pro všechny prvky dokumentace můžete pomocí argumentu "
++"<option>--default-stability</option> s jednou u níže uvedených hodnot předat "
++"do <application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1448
++msgid "Stability Tags"
++msgstr "Značky pro stabilitu"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1449
++msgid "Stability: Stable"
++msgstr "Stability: Stable"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1451
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as stable. This is for public APIs which are guaranteed to "
++"remain stable for all future minor releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Označuje prvek jako stabilní. Je to určeno pro veřejná API, která zaručují, "
++"že zůstanou stabilní po všechna minoritní vydání projektu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1458
++msgid "Stability: Unstable"
++msgstr "Stability: Unstable"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1460
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as unstable. This is for public APIs which are released as "
++"a preview before being stabilised."
++msgstr ""
++"Označuje prvek jako nestabilní. Je to určeno pro veřejná API, která jsou "
++"vydána jako ukázky před tím, než jsou stabilizována."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1466
++msgid "Stability: Private"
++msgstr "Stability: Private"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1468
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as private. This is for interfaces which can be used by "
++"tightly coupled modules, but not by arbitrary third parties."
++msgstr ""
++"Označuje prvek jako soukromý. Je to určeno pro rozhraní, která mohou být "
++"použita přímo v modulu, ale ne kterýmikoliv třetími stranami."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1478
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: nějaké něco\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Získá @foo něčeho.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo něčeho\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Místo toho použijte foo_baz_get_bar().\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1498 C/index.docbook:1508
++msgid "Annotations"
++msgstr "Anotace"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1500
++msgid ""
++"Documentation blocks can contain annotation-tags. These tags will be "
++"rendered with tooltips describing their meaning. The tags are used by "
++"gobject-introspection to generate language bindings. A detailed list of the "
++"supported tags can be found on <ulink url=\"http://live.gnome.org/"
++"GObjectIntrospection/Annotations\" type=\"http\">the wiki</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Dokumentační bloky mohou obsahovat anotační štítky. Tyto štítky budou "
++"zpracovány jako vysvětlivky popisující jejich význam. Používají se "
++"introspekcí objektu GObjekt k vygenerování vazby na další jazyky. Podrobný "
++"seznam podporovaných štítků můžete najít na <ulink url=\"http://live.gnome."
++"org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations\" type=\"http\">wiki</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1509
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: (annotation): @foo's bar\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (annotation) (another annotation)\n"
++" * (and another annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation) (another annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Sets bar on @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation): nějaké něco\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Získá @foo něčeho.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: (annotation): @foo něčeho\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (annotation) (annotation)\n"
++" * (annotation) …\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation) (annotation) …: nějaké něco\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Nastaví něco na @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1530 C/index.docbook:1559
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "Komentářový blok pro funkci"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1536
++msgid ""
++"Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/"
++"unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++"Zdokumentovat, jestli je třeba vracené objekty, seznamy, řetězce apod. "
++"uvolnit z paměti."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1542
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr ""
++"Zdokumentovat, jestli může parametr být NULL a co se stane, když tomu tak je."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1547
++msgid ""
++"Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr "Kde je to vhodné, zmínit úvodní a koncové podmínky."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1532 C/index.docbook:1618
++msgid "Please remember to: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "Nezapomeňte prosím: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1554
++msgid ""
++"Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are "
++"private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++"Gtk-doc předpokládá, že všechny symboly (makra, funkce) začínající znakem "
++"„_“, jsou soukromé. Potom se s nimi zachází jako se statickými funkcemi."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1560
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: popis parametru 1. Může zabírat více jak\n"
++" * jeden řádek.\n"
++" * @par2: popis parametru 2\n"
++" * @...: seznam proměnných parametrů zakončených NULL\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Zde pokračuje popis funkce. K odkazu na parametr můžete použit @par1,\n"
++" * takže bude ve výstupu zvýrazněný. Můžete také použít %constant pro\n"
++" * konstanty, function_name() pro funkce a #GtkWidget pro odkazy na jiné\n"
++" * deklarace (které mohou být zdokumentované jinde).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: celé číslo.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Místo toho použijte other_function().\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1581
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr "Značky pro funkce"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1582 C/index.docbook:1789
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "Returns:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1584
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr "Odstavec popisující vracený výsledek."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1589
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr "@…:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1591
++msgid ""
++"In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag "
++"(@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++"Když má funkce proměnný počet argumentů, měli byste použít tuto značku (z "
++"historických důvodů funguje i @Varargs:)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1601 C/index.docbook:1603
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "Komentářový blok pro vlastnost"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1604
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Zde vlastnost zdokumentujte.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, …);\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1616 C/index.docbook:1635
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "Komentářový blok pro signál"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1622
++msgid ""
++"Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or "
++"after other signals."
++msgstr ""
++"Zdokumentovat, kdy je signál vyslán a jestli je vyslána před nebo po "
++"ostatních signálech."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1628
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr "Zdokumentovat, co aplikace smí v obsluze signálu provádět."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1636
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZED] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarized\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: widget, který signál přijímá\n"
++" * @foo: nějaké něco\n"
++" * @bar: jiné něco\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Signál ::foobarized je vyslán pokaždé, když někdo zkusí něco s @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZED] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarized\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1653 C/index.docbook:1654
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "Komentářový blok pro strukturu"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1655
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: nějaká #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Tohle je ten nejlepší widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1670
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Před privátními poli struktury použijte <code>/*< private >*/</code>, "
++"abyste je skryli. K přesně opačnému účelu se používá <code>/*< public >"
++"*/</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1676
++msgid ""
++"If the first field is \"g_iface\", \"parent_instance\" or \"parent_class\" "
++"it will be considered private automatically and doesn't need to be mentioned "
++"in the comment block."
++msgstr ""
++"Pokud je prvním polem „g_iface“, „parent_instance“ nebo „parent_class“, bude "
++"za privátní považováno automaticky a není to zapotřebí zmiňovat v "
++"komentářovém bloku."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1682
++msgid ""
++"Struct comment blocks can also be used for GObjects and GObjectClasses. It "
++"is usually a good idea to add a comment block for a class, if it has "
++"vmethods (as this is how they can be documented). For the GObject itself one "
++"can use the related section docs, having a separate block for the instance "
++"struct would be useful if the instance has public fields. One disadvantage "
++"here is that this creates two index entries of the same name (the structure "
++"and the section)."
++msgstr ""
++"Komentářové bloky struktur můžete použít také pro objekty GObject a třídy "
++"GObjectClass. Obvykle je rozumné přidat komentářový blok pro třídu, pokud má "
++"virtuální metody (protože to je způsob, jakým je lze zdokumentovat). Pro "
++"vlastní GObject je možné použít příslušnou dokumentaci oddílu, který bude "
++"mít samostatný blok pro strukturu instance, což se může hodit, když má "
++"instance veřejná pole. Jedinou nevýhodou je, že se tím vytvoří dvě položky v "
++"rejstříku se stejným názvem (struktura a oddíl)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1694 C/index.docbook:1695
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr "Komentářový blok pro výčty"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1696
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: nějaké něco\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: jiné něco\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Výčtové hodnoty používané pro určení věci.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1713
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Před privátními výčtovými hodnotami použijte <code>/*< private >*/</"
++"code>, abyste je skryli. K přesně opačnému účelu se používá <code>/*< "
++"public >*/</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1724
++msgid "Inline program documentation"
++msgstr "Dokumentaci k vloženým programům"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1725
++msgid ""
++"You can document programs and their commandline interface using inline "
++"documentation."
++msgstr ""
++"Programy a jejich rozhraní příkazového řádku můžete zdokumentovat pomocí "
++"vložené dokumentace."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1731
++msgid "Tags"
++msgstr "Značky"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1733
++msgid "PROGRAM"
++msgstr "PROGRAM"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1736
++msgid "Defines the start of a program documentation."
++msgstr "Definuje začátek dokumentace k programu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1743
++msgid "@short_description:"
++msgstr "@short_description:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1745
++msgid "Defines a short description of the program. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Definuje krátký popis programu. (volitelné)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1752
++msgid "@synopsis:"
++msgstr "@synopsis:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1754
++msgid ""
++"Defines the arguments, or list of arguments that the program can take. "
++"(Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++"Definuje argumenty nebo seznam argumentů, které program přebírá. (volitelné)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1762
++msgid "@see_also:"
++msgstr "@see_also:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1764
++msgid "See Also manual page section. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Část stránky oddílu „Viz také“. (volitelné)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1771
++msgid "@arg:"
++msgstr "@arg:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1773
++msgid "Argument(s) passed to the program and their description. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Argument(y) předávané do programu a jejich popis. (volitelné)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1780
++msgid "Description:"
++msgstr "Description:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1782
++msgid "A longer description of the program."
++msgstr "Úplný popis programu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1791
++msgid "Specify what value(s) the program returns. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Specifikuje, jakou hodnotu či více hodnot program vrací. (volitelné)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1800
++msgid "Example of program documentation."
++msgstr "Příklad dokumentace k programu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1801
++msgid "Program documentation block"
++msgstr "Komentářový blok pro program"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1802
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * PROGRAM:test-program\n"
++" * @short_description: A test program\n"
++" * @synopsis: test-program [*OPTIONS*...] --arg1 *arg* *FILE*\n"
++" * @see_also: test(1)\n"
++" * @--arg1 *arg*: set arg1 to *arg*\n"
++" * @--arg2 *arg*: set arg2 to *arg*\n"
++" * @-v, --version: Print the version number\n"
++" * @-h, --help: Print the help message\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Long description of program.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: Zero on success, non-zero on failure\n"
++" */\n"
++"int main(int argc, char *argv[])\n"
++"{\n"
++"\treturn 0;\n"
++"}\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * PROGRAM:test-program\n"
++" * @short_description: Testovací program\n"
++" * @synopsis: test-program [*OPTIONS*...] --arg1 *arg* *FILE*\n"
++" * @see_also: test(1)\n"
++" * @--arg1 *arg*: nastaví arg1 do *arg*\n"
++" * @--arg2 *arg*: nastaví arg2 do *arg*\n"
++" * @-v, --version: Vypíše verzi programu\n"
++" * @-h, --help: Vypíše nápovědu k programu\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Úplný popis programu.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: Vrací nulu při úspěchu, nenulovou hodnotu při selhání.\n"
++" */\n"
++"int main(int argc, char *argv[])\n"
++"{\n"
++"\treturn 0;\n"
++"}\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1828
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr "Užitečné značky DocBook"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1830
++msgid ""
++"Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr ""
++"Zde jsou některé značky DocBook, které mají pro dokumentaci kódu největší "
++"význam."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1839
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hašovací tabulky</link>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1835
++msgid ""
++"To link to another section in the GTK docs: <_:informalexample-1/> The "
++"linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. "
++"For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and "
++"then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class "
++"name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++"Odkaz na jiný oddíl v dokumentaci GTK: <_:informalexample-1/> Odkazem je id "
++"SGML/XML v první položce stránky, na kterou chcete odkazovat. Pro většinu "
++"stránek je to v současnosti část („gtk“, „gdk“, „glib“) a potom název "
++"stránky („Hašovací tabulka“). Pro ovládací prvky je to název třídy. Mezery a "
++"podtržítka se převedou na „-“, aby to vyhovovalo SGML/XML."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1852
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<function>…</function>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1849
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Odkaz na externí funkci, například standardní funkci C: <_:informalexample-1/"
++">"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1861
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Používání GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1872
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1884
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"|[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" ...\n"
++"]|\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"|[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" ...\n"
++"]|\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1858
++msgid ""
++"To include example code: <_:informalexample-1/> or possibly this, for very "
++"short code fragments which don't need a title: <_:informalexample-2/> In "
++"both cases, the language attribute is optional and is used as a hint to the "
++"syntax highlighting engine (pygments for html output). For the latter GTK-"
++"Doc also supports an abbreviation: <_:informalexample-3/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Vložení ukázky kódu: <_:informalexample-1/> nebo pro velmi krátké úseky "
++"kódu, které nepotřebují nadpisy, je případně možné i: <_:informalexample-2/> "
++"V obou případech je atribut language volitelnáý a je používán jako rada pro "
++"program provádějící zvýrazňování syntaxe (pygments pro výstup v html).V "
++"novějších verzích GTK-Doc je také podporované zkracování: "
++"<_:informalexample-3/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1895
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" …\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" …\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1892
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Vložení seznamu s odrážkami: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1915
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Ujistěte se, že data po použití uvolníte.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1912
++msgid ""
++"To include a note which stands out from the text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Vložení poznámky, která se objeví mimo text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1928
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1925
++msgid "To refer to a type: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Odkaz na typ: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1937
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1934
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Odkaz na externí strukturu (která není popsaná v dokumentaci GTK): <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1946
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1943
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Odkaz na pole struktury: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1955
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1952
++msgid ""
++"To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <_:informalexample-1/> but "
++"you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link "
++"to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the "
++"abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Pro odkaz na název třídy by se dal nejspíše použít: <_:informalexample-1/> "
++"ale pravděpodobně místo toho použijete #GtkWidget (aby se automaticky "
++"vytvořil odkaz na stránku ovládacího prvku, viz <link linkend="
++"\"documenting_syntax\">zkratky</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1966
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>Toto je důležité</emphasis>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1963
++msgid "To emphasize text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Zvýrazněný text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1975
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1972
++msgid "For filenames use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Pro název souboru použijte: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1984
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1981
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Odkaz na použití klávesy: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1994
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr "Vyplňování dodatečných souborů"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1996
++msgid ""
++"There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the "
++"inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past .sgml), "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Mimo komentářů vložených ve zdrojovém kódu je zde ještě pár dodatečných "
++"souborů, které je potřeba udržovat:<filename><balíček>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><balíček>-docs.xml</filename> (dříve .sgml) a "
++"<filename><balíček>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2005
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr "Úprava souboru s typy"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2007
++msgid ""
++"If your library or application includes GObjects, you want their signals, "
++"arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the "
++"documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</"
++"function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Pokud vaše knihovna nebo aplikace vkládá objekty GObject, chcete jejich "
++"signály, argumenty/parametry a pozici v hierarchii ukázat v dokumentaci. "
++"Vše, co pro to potřebujete udělat, je vypsat funkce <function>xxx_get_type</"
++"function> spolu s jejich include v souboru <filename><balíček>.types</"
++"filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2016
++msgid "Example <package>.types file"
++msgstr "Příklad souboru <balíček>.types"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2017
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2028
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this "
++"list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not "
++"dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++"Od GTK-Doc verze 1.8 vám tento seznam vygeneruje <application>gtkdoc-scan</"
++"application>. Stačí jen přidat „--rebuild-types“ do SCAN_OPTIONS v "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Pokud tento přístup použijete, neměli "
++"byste soubor s typy šířit do správy verzí."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2037
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr "Úprava hlavního dokumentu"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2039
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the "
++"inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page "
++"per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them "
++"and place them in an order."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc produkuje dokumentaci v SGML/XML standardu DocBook. Když se "
++"zpracovávají komentáře vložené ve zdrojovém kódu, generují nástroje GTK-Doc "
++"pro každou třídu nebo modul jednu stránku dokumentace jako samostatný "
++"soubor. Všechny jsou pak uvedené seřazené v hlavním dokumentu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2046
++msgid ""
++"While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later runs will "
++"not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the "
++"documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc "
++"has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from "
++"scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there "
++"are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++"Jakmile pro vás GTK-Doc vytvoří šablonu hlavního dokumentu, při pozdějším "
++"spuštění již do ní nezasahuje. To znamená, že můžete dokumentaci bez omezení "
++"strukturovat. A to včetně seskupování stránek a přidávání doplňujících "
++"stránek. GTK-Doc má v současnosti testovací sadu, ve které je také hlavní "
++"dokument vytvořen znovu od začátku. Je dobré se čas od času do něj "
++"nahlédnout, jestli se v něm neobjevily nějaké nové věci."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2056
++msgid ""
++"Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The "
++"benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API "
++"documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol "
++"documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along "
++"with the library."
++msgstr ""
++"Nevytvářejte výukové dokumenty (tutorial) jako zvláštní dokumenty. Napište "
++"je jako zvláštní kapitolu. Výhodou přímého spojení výukového dokumentu k "
++"vaší knihovně s dokumentací API je snadné vytváření odkazů pro symboly. "
++"Zvyšuje se tím také šance, že výukový dokument bude reflektovat aktualizace "
++"v knihovně."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2065
++msgid ""
++"So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is "
++"only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there "
++"which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++"Nyní se podívejme, které věci můžete v hlavním dokumentu měnit. Pro začátek "
++"je to pouze název. Je zde několik zástupných hodnot (text v hranatých "
++"závorkách), o které byste se měli postarat."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2072
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr "Hlavička hlavního dokumentu"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2073
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>Referenční příručka k NÁZEV_MODULU</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" pro NÁZEV_MODULU [VERSION]\n"
++" Nejvnovější verzi tohoto dokumentu můžete najít on-line na\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/NÁZEV_MODULU/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/NÁZEV_MODULU/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2089
++msgid ""
++"In addition a few option elements are created in commented form. You can "
++"review these and enable them as you like."
++msgstr ""
++"Navíc se vytvoří pár volitelných prvků ve formě komentáře. Můžete si je "
++"projít a případně povolit."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2095
++msgid "Optional part in the master document"
++msgstr "Volitelná část hlavního dokumentu"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2096
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- enable this when you use gobject introspection annotations\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" -->\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- enable this when you use gobject introspection annotations\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" -->\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2104
++msgid ""
++"Finally you need to add new section whenever you introduce one. The <link "
++"linkend=\"modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</link> tool will remind "
++"you of newly generated xml files that are not yet included into the doc."
++msgstr ""
++"Nakonec musíte přidat nový oddíl, kdekoliv chcete. Nástroj <link linkend="
++"\"modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</link> vás upozorní na nově "
++"vygenerované soubory XML, které zatím nejsou v dokumentaci zahrnuté."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2112 C/index.docbook:2147
++msgid "Including generated sections"
++msgstr "Vkládání generovaných oddílů"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2113
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>my library</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>moje knihovna</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" …\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2125
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr "Úprava souboru oddílů"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2127
++msgid ""
++"The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. "
++"Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control "
++"the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++"Soubor oddílů se používá k organizování výstupu dokumentace z GTK-Doc. Zde "
++"se určuje, který symbol náleží ke kterému modulu nebo třídě, a řídí se "
++"viditelnost (jestli je veřejný nebo soukromý)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2133
++msgid ""
++"The section file is a plain text file with tags delimiting sections. Blank "
++"lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines."
++msgstr ""
++"Soubor oddílů je prostý textový soubor, ve kterém jsou oddíly oddělené "
++"značkami. Prázdné řádky se ignorují a s řádky začínajícími „#“ se zachází "
++"jako s komentářovými řádky."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2140
++msgid ""
++"While the tags make the file look like xml, it is not. Please do not close "
++"tags like <SUBSECTION>."
++msgstr ""
++"Přestože díky značkám vypadá soubor podobně jako XML, není tomu tak. "
++"Neuzavírejte prosím značky jako je <SUBSECTION>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2148
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2165
++msgid ""
++"The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, "
++"without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++"FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++"template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++"converted into the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename> or the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. "
++"(The name of the HTML file is based on the module name and the section "
++"title, or for GObjects it is based on the GObjects class name converted to "
++"lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++"Značka <FILE> … </FILE> se používá k určení názvu souboru bez "
++"přípony. Například použití „<FILE>gnome-config</FILE>“ bude mít "
++"v deklaracích oddílu za následek výstup do souboru šablony <filename>tmpl/"
++"gnome-config.sgml</filename>, který bude převeden do souboru <filename>sgml/"
++"gnome-config.sgml</filename> ve formátu DocBook SGML nebo do souboru "
++"<filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename> ve formátu DocBook XML. (Název "
++"souboru HTML vychází z názvu modulu a názvu oddílu, případně pro GObject z "
++"názvu třídy GObject převedeného na malá písmena.)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2177
++msgid ""
++"The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the "
++"section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially "
++"created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if "
++"one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++"Značka <TITLE> … </TITLE> se používá k určení názvu oddílu. To "
++"je použitelné pouze dříve, než je poprvé vytvořena šablona (pokud se "
++"používá), protože název nastavený v šabloně tento název přepíše. Navíc je "
++"považována za zastaralou v případě, že se používá komentář SECTION ve "
++"zdrojovém kódu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2184
++msgid ""
++"You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. "
++"Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis "
++"section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject "
++"declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the "
++"documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private "
++"declarations which will not be output (it is a handy way to avoid warning "
++"messages about unused declarations). If your library contains private types "
++"which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of "
++"implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection. "
++"Whether you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs in public or "
++"Standard section depends if they have public entries (variables, vmethods)."
++msgstr ""
++"Můžete také seskupovat položky v oddílu pomocí značky <SUBSECTION>. V "
++"současnosti způsobí prázdný řádek mezi pododdíly v souhrnné části. Můžete "
++"také použít <SUBSECTION Standard> pro standardní deklarace GObject "
++"(například funkce jako je g_object_get_type, makra jako G_OBJECT(), "
++"G_IS_OBJECT() atd.). V současnosti jsou tyto v dokumentaci vynechané. Můžete "
++"také použít <SUBSECTION Private> pro privátní deklarace, které ve "
++"výsledku nebudou (jedná se o ruční způsob, jak zabránit varovným hlášením o "
++"nepoužitých deklaracích). Pokud vaše knihovna obsahuje privátní typy, u "
++"kterých nechcete, aby se objevily v hierarchii objektů a v seznamu "
++"implementovaných nebo vyžadovaných rozhraní, přidejte je do pododdílu "
++"Private. Jestli umístit struktury jako GObject a GObjectClass do veřejné "
++"nebo standardní části záleží na tom, jestli mají veřejné položky (proměnné, "
++"virtuální metody)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2203
++msgid ""
++"You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the "
++"#include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-"
++"separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it "
++"outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. "
++"If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++"Můžete také použít <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> k určení #include "
++"souborů, které jsou zobrazené v souhrnné části. Obsahuje čárkami oddělený "
++"seznam jednotlivých #include souborů, bez lomených závorek. Když je "
++"nastavíte mimo kterýkoliv oddíl, budou fungovat pro všechny oddíly až do "
++"konce souboru. Když je nastavíte v konkrétním oddílu, použijí se jen pro něj."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2217
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr "Ovlivnění výsledku"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2219
++msgid ""
++"A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The "
++"generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and "
++"<filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text "
++"files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++"Spuštění GTK-Doc vygeneruje ve složkách pro dokumentaci soubory s výstupními "
++"sestavami. Generované soubory jsou nazvané: <filename><balíček>-"
++"undocumented.txt</filename>, <filename><balíček>-undeclared.txt</"
++"filename> a <filename><balíček>-unused.txt</filename>. Všechno to jsou "
++"prosté textové soubory, které si lze jednoduše prohlížet a zpracovávat je."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2228
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with "
++"the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank "
++"lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The "
++"second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, "
++"which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++"Soubor <filename><balíček>-undocumented.txt</filename> začíná "
++"souhrnnými údaji o dokumentaci. Následují dva oddíly oddělené prázdnými "
++"řádky. První oddíl je seznam nezdokumentovaných nebo neúplných symbolů. "
++"Druhý oddíl je to stejné, ale pro dokumentace oddílů. Neúplné položky jsou "
++"takové, které mají dokumentaci, ale u kterých byl například přidán nový "
++"parametr."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2237
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols "
++"given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found "
++"in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++"Soubor <filename><balíček>-undeclared.txt</filename> uvádí symboly, "
++"které jsou zadané v <filename><balíček>-section.txt</filename>, ale "
++"nebyly nalezené ve zdrojových kódech. Ověřte, jestli nebyly odstraněny, nebo "
++"v nich není překlep."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2244
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, "
++"where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where "
++"to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Soubor <filename><balíček>-unused.txt</filename> uvádí názvy symbolů, "
++"které GTK-Doc při procházení dokumentace nalezl, ale neví, kam je zařadit. "
++"To znamená, že tyto symboly nejsou zatím zařazené v souboru <filename><"
++"balíček>-section.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2252
++msgid ""
++"Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile."
++"am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during "
++"<command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++"Povolte nebo přidejte řádek <option>TESTS=($GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> v "
++"Makefile.am. Pokud máte nainstalované GTK-Doc ve verzi minimálně 1.9, bude "
++"se díky tomu při spuštění <command>make check</command> provádět kontrola "
++"správnosti údajů."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2259
++msgid ""
++"One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: "
++"<filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><"
++"package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first one can be compared with the "
++"section file if that is manually maintained. The second lists all "
++"declarations from the headers. If a symbol is missing one could check if "
++"this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++"Můžete se také podívat do souborů vytvořených skenerem zdrojového kódu: "
++"<filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> a <filename><"
++"package>-decl.txt</filename>. První můžete porovnat se souborem s oddíly, "
++"pokud je ručně spravován. Ve druhém jsou uvedené všechny deklarace z "
++"hlavičkových souborů. Pokud v dokumentaci schází některý symbol, můžete "
++"zkontrolovat, jestli se vyskytuje v tomto souboru."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2268
++msgid ""
++"If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced "
++"by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>."
++"prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</"
++"filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask GTK-Doc "
++"to keep the intermediate scanner file for further analysis, by running it as "
++"<command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++"Pokud je základem projektu GObject, můžete se také podívat do souborů "
++"vytvořených skenerem objektů: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>."
++"prerequisites.txt</filename> a <filename><package>.signals.txt</"
++"filename>. Jestliže v kterémkoliv z nich jsou chybějící symboly, můžete "
++"spuštěním <command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command> požádat GTK-"
++"Doc, aby přechodně zachovat soubor pro pozdější analýzu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2283
++msgid "Modernizing the documentation"
++msgstr "Modernizace dokumentu"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2285
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc has been around for quite some time. In this section we list new "
++"features together with the version since when it is available."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc existuje již nějakou dobu. V této části je uveden seznam nových "
++"funkcí spolu s číslem verze, od které je tato funkčnost k dispozici."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2291
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2293
++msgid ""
++"When using xml instead of sgml, one can actually name the master document "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Když používáte XML namísto SGML, můžete ve skutečnosti pojmenovat hlavní "
++"dokument <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2298
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from "
++"the vcs. This only works nicely for projects that have a very regular "
++"structure (e.g. each .{c,h} pair will create new section). If one organize a "
++"project close to that updating a manually maintained section file can be as "
++"simple as running <code>meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-"
++"sections.txt</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Tato verze podporuje <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> v "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Když je tato volba zapnutá, je "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> generován automaticky a "
++"můžete jej odstranit ze správy verzí. To funguje hezky je u projektů, které "
++"mají pravidelnou strukturu (například jednotlivé páry souboru .c a .h "
++"vytvoří nový oddíl). Pokud máte projekt takto pečlivě organizovaný, vystačí "
++"si aktualizace ručně spravovaného souboru s oddíly s prostým spuštěním "
++"<code>meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-sections.txt</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2309
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.8 already introduced the syntax for documenting sections in the "
++"sources instead of the separate files under <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">tmpl</filename>. This version adds options to switch the whole doc module "
++"to not use the extra tmpl build step at all, by using <option>--flavour no-"
++"tmpl</option> in <filename>configure.ac</filename>. If you don't have a "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> checked into your source "
++"control system and haven't yet switched, just add the flag to "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> and you are done."
++msgstr ""
++"Již verze 1.18 zavedla syntax pro dokumentování oddílů ve zdrojovém kódu "
++"namísto zvláštních souborů ve složce <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</"
++"filename>. Tato verze přidává pomocí <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> in "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> volbu pro přepnutí celého modulu "
++"dokumentace, aby nepoužíval speciální složku tmp během sestavení. Jestliže "
++"nepotřebujete udržovat <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> v "
++"systému pro správu verzí ještě jste zatím přepnutí neprovedli, stačí přidat "
++"tuto volbu do <filename>configure.ac</filename> a je to."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2321
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2323
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from the "
++"vcs. When using this feature it is important to also setup the "
++"<varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> in <filename>Makefile.am</filename> for "
++"code that is build conditionally."
++msgstr ""
++"Tato verze podporuje <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> v "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Když je tato volba zapnutá, je "
++"<filename><package>.types</filename> generován automaticky a můžete "
++"jej odstranit ze správy verzí. Jestliže tuto funkci využíváte, je důležité "
++"nastavit také <varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> v <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename> pro kód, který je sestavován podmíněně."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2334
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2340
++msgid "Enable gtkdoc-check"
++msgstr "Povolení gtkdoc-check"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2341
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2336
++msgid ""
++"This version includes a new tool called gtkdoc-check. This tool can run a "
++"set of sanity checks on your documentation. It is enabled by adding these "
++"lines to the end of <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Součástí této verze je nový nástroj s názvem gtkdoc-check. Jeho spuštěním se "
++"provede kontrola správnosti vašeho dokumentu. Povolit jej můžete přidáním "
++"těchto řádků na konec souboru <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. <_:example-1/"
++">"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2354
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2356
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.18 brought some initial markdown support. Using markdown in doc "
++"comments is less intrusive than writing docbook xml. This version improves a "
++"lot on this and add a lot more styles. The section that explains the <link "
++"linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">comment syntax</link> has all the details."
++msgstr ""
++"Verze 1.18 přinesla počáteční podporu pro Markdown. Jeho použití v "
++"dokumentačních komentářích je méně rušivé, než zápis XML z DocBook. Tato "
++"verze jeho podporu značně vylepšuje a přidává mnohem více stylů. Více "
++"podrobností je uvedeno v oddílu, který vysvětluje <link linkend="
++"\"documenting_syntax\">syntax komentářů</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2366
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2377
++msgid "Use pre-generated entities"
++msgstr "Používání předgenerovaných entit"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2378
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for &package_string;.\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&Referenční příručka k package_name;</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for &package_string;.\n"
++" Nejnovější verzi této dokumentace můžete najít on-line na\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2368
++msgid ""
++"The makefiles shipped with this version generate an entity file at "
++"<filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename>, containing entities for e.g. "
++"package_name and package_version. You can use this e.g. in the main xml file "
++"to avoid hardcoding the version number. Below is an example that shows how "
++"the entity file is included in the master template and how the entities are "
++"used. The entities can also be used in all generated files, GTK-Doc will use "
++"the same xml header in generated xml files. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Soubory Makefile dodávané s touto verzí generují do <filename>xml/"
++"gtkdocentities.ent</filename> soubor s entitami, který obsahuje entity "
++"například pro package_name a package_version. Můžete je použít třeba v "
++"hlavním souboru XML, abyste nemuseli mít číslo verze zapsané natvrdo. Níže "
++"je uveden příklad, jak soubor s entitami vložit do hlavní šablony a jak "
++"entity použít. Použít je lze také ve všech generovaných souborech, GTK-Doc "
++"bude používat tu samou hlavičku XML v generovaných souborech XML. <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2403
++msgid "Documenting other interfaces"
++msgstr "Dokumentování ostatních rozhraní"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2405
++msgid ""
++"So far we have been using GTK-Doc to document the API of code. The next "
++"sections contain suggestions how the tools can be used to document other "
++"interfaces too."
++msgstr ""
++"Doposud jsme pomocí GTK-Doc dokumentovali API kódu. Následující oddíl "
++"obsahuje doporučení, jak se dají nástroje použít také k dokumentování "
++"dalších rozhraní."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2412
++msgid "Command line options and man pages"
++msgstr "Přepínače příkazového řádku a manuálové stránky"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2414
++msgid ""
++"As one can generate man pages for a docbook refentry as well, it sounds like "
++"a good idea to use it for that purpose. This way the interface is part of "
++"the reference and one gets the man-page for free."
++msgstr ""
++"Protože je stejně možné generovat manuálové stránky pro referenční položky "
++"DocBook, zní jako dobrý nápad použít to pro tento účel. Tímto způsobem se "
++"rozhraní stane součástí referenční příručky a získáte tak bez námahy "
++"manuálovou stránku."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2421
++msgid "Document the tool"
++msgstr "Dokumentování nástrojů"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2423
++msgid ""
++"Create one refentry file per tool. Following <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">our example</link> we would call it <filename>meep/"
++"docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. For the xml tags that should be "
++"used and can look at generated file in the xml subdirectory as well as "
++"examples e.g. in glib."
++msgstr ""
++"Vytvořte jeden soubor s referenční příručkou pro každý z nástrojů. V <link "
++"linkend=\"settingup_docfiles\">našem příkladu</link> by se měl nazývat "
++"<filename>meep/docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. Na značky XML, "
++"který by se měly použít, se podívejte do nějakého ukázkového vygenerovaného "
++"souboru v podsložce XML, například v glib."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2433
++msgid "Adding the extra configure check"
++msgstr "Přidání doplňkových kontrol do configure"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2436 C/index.docbook:2454
++msgid "Extra configure checks"
++msgstr "Dodatečné kontroly nastavení"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2437
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2451
++msgid "Adding the extra makefile rules"
++msgstr "Přidání doplňkových pravidel do Makefile"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2455
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2477
++msgid "DBus interfaces"
++msgstr "Rozhraní D-Bus"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2479
++msgid ""
++"(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++msgstr ""
++"(OPRAVIT: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2488
++msgid "Frequently asked questions"
++msgstr "Často kladené dotazy"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2492
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "Dotaz"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2493
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "Odpověď"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2495
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Schází hierarchie třídy."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2496
++msgid ""
++"The objects <function>xxx_get_type()</function> function has not been "
++"entered into the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Do souboru <filename><balíček>.types</filename> nebyla vložena funkce "
++"objektu <function>xxx_get_type()</function>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2502
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Stále schází hierarchie třídy."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2503
++msgid ""
++"Missing or wrong naming in <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> "
++"file (see <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-doc-list/2003-"
++"October/msg00006.html\">explanation</ulink>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Chybějící nebo nesprávné pojmenování souboru <filename><balíček>-"
++"sections.txt</filename> (viz <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-"
++"doc-list/2003-October/msg00006.html\">vysvětlení</ulink>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2509
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Do háje, pořád nemám hierarchii třídy."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2510
++msgid ""
++"Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <type>GtkWidget</"
++"type>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private "
++"subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++"Je název objektu (název struktury instance, například <type>GtkWidget</"
++"type>) součástí normálního oddílu? (Nedávejte je do pododdílu Standard nebo "
++"Private)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2517
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr "Chybí rejstřík symbolů."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2518
++msgid ""
++"Does the <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contain a "
++"index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++"Obsahuje <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> rejstřík, "
++"který vloží pomocí xi:include vygenerovaný rejstřík?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2524
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr "Symbol nemá odkaz do svého oddílu dokumentace."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2525
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the "
++"gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++"Používá dokumentační komentář správnou značku (přidané znaky #,% nebo ())? "
++"Podívejte se na varování gtkdoc-fixxref o nevyřešených křížových odkazech."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2531
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "Nová třída se neobjevila v dokumentaci."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2532
++msgid ""
++"Is the new page xi:included from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Je nový balíček vložený pomocí xi:include z <filename><package>-docs."
++"{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2538
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "Nový symbol se neobjevil v dokumentaci."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2539
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the "
++"begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable "
++"xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++"Je dokumentační komentář správně naformátovaný? Zkontrolujte překlepy na "
++"začátku komentáře. Podívejte se po varováních gtkdoc-fixxref o nevyřešených "
++"křížových odkazech. Zkontrolujte, jestli je symbol správně uvedený v "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> ve veřejném pododdíle."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2547
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr "V hierarchii třídy schází typ."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2548
++msgid ""
++"If the type is listed in <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> but "
++"not in <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> then double check that the "
++"type is correctly placed in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>. If the type instance (e.g. <type>GtkWidget</type>) is not listed "
++"or incidentally marked private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++"Jestliže je typ uvedený v <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename>, "
++"ale není v <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename>, tak raději dvakrát "
++"zkontrolujte, jestli je typ správně uvedený v <filename><package>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>. Jestliže instance typu (například <type>GtkWidget</"
++"type>) není uvedená, nebo je nedopatřením označení jako privátní, nebude "
++"zobrazena."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2557
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr ""
++"Vytvořily se mi odkazy na složku s dokumentací pro všechny anotace k GObject"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2558
++msgid ""
++"Check that <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> is xi:included "
++"from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Zkontrolujte, že <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> je vložené "
++"pomocí xi:include z <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2566
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr ""
++"Parametr je v komentářovém bloku zdrojového kódu popsaný, ale neexistuje."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2567
++msgid ""
++"Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the "
++"source."
++msgstr ""
++"Zkontrolujte, za nemá prototyp v hlavičkovém souboru jiné názvy parametrů, "
++"než ve zdrojovém kódu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2572
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr "Více „ID“ pro tentýž cíl odkazu: XYZ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2573
++msgid ""
++"Symbol XYZ appears twice in <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Symbol XYZ se v souboru <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> "
++"objevuje dvakrát."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2576
++msgid ""
++"Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template "
++"matches."
++msgstr ""
++"Element typename ve jmenném prostoru '' je uvedený v rodiči, ale neodpovídá "
++"mu žádná šablona."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2583
++msgid "Tools related to gtk-doc"
++msgstr "Nástroje související s GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2585
++msgid ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - a <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac "
++"GTK-Doc</ulink> integration plugin, that adds API docs to a trac site and "
++"integrates with the trac search."
++msgstr ""
++"GtkDocPlugin – zásuvný modul pro integraci <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks."
++"org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">GTK-Doc do systému Track</ulink>, který přidává "
++"dokumentaci k API na sledovací web a integruje ji do vyhledávání."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2590
++msgid ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - a tool (part of gtk-doc) to check used API against since "
++"tags in the API to determine the minimum required version."
++msgstr ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan – nástroj (součást GTK-Doc), který kontroluje použité API "
++"vůči štítku since v API, aby určil minimální požadovanou verzi."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/releaseinfo
++#: C/index.docbook:12 C/fdl-appendix.xml:12
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr "Verze 1.1, březen 2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:15
++msgid "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/index.docbook:20
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:19 C/fdl-appendix.xml:19
++msgid ""
++"<_:address-1/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies "
++"of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr ""
++"<_:address-1/> Kdokoliv je oprávněn kopírovat a šířit doslovné kopie tohoto "
++"dokumentu s licencí, ale nesmí v něm provádět žádné změny."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendix/title
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/index.docbook:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:642
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr "GNU Free Documentation License"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:31 C/fdl-appendix.xml:31
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that "
++"derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. "
++"It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license "
++"designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:50 C/fdl-appendix.xml:50
++msgid ""
++"We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free "
++"software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program "
++"should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. "
++"But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any "
++"textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a "
++"printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose "
++"is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:62 C/fdl-appendix.xml:62
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such "
++"manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "
++"<quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:72
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing "
++"the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with "
++"modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:79
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter "
++"section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals "
++"exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the "
++"Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and "
++"contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For "
++"example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary "
++"Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter "
++"of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of "
++"legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding "
++"them."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:94
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being "
++"those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:103
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are "
++"listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says "
++"that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under "
++"this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:111
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> "
++"Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose "
++"specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be "
++"viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors "
++"or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) "
++"some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text "
++"formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for "
++"input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file "
++"format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent "
++"modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "
++"<quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:128 C/fdl-appendix.xml:128
++msgid ""
++"Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII "
++"without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using "
++"a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for "
++"human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary "
++"formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, "
++"SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally "
++"available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors "
++"for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:141
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page "
++"itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the "
++"material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in "
++"formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> "
++"means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, "
++"preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:153 C/fdl-appendix.xml:153
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that "
++"this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this "
++"License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you "
++"add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use "
++"technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of "
++"the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in "
++"exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you "
++"must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:169 C/fdl-appendix.xml:169
++msgid ""
++"You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you "
++"may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:176 C/fdl-appendix.xml:176
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license "
++"notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you "
++"must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these "
++"Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on "
++"the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as "
++"the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title "
++"with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as "
++"verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:195 C/fdl-appendix.xml:195
++msgid ""
++"If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, "
++"you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the "
++"actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> "
++"copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more "
++"than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state "
++"in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location "
++"containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added "
++"material, which the general network-using public has access to download "
++"anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use "
++"the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin "
++"distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent "
++"copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one "
++"year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through "
++"your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any "
++"large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated "
++"version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:231 C/fdl-appendix.xml:231
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under "
++"the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the "
++"Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version "
++"filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:248 C/fdl-appendix.xml:248
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "A"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the "
++"covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which "
++"should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the "
++"Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original "
++"publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:264 C/fdl-appendix.xml:264
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "B"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, "
++"one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the "
++"modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has "
++"less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:279 C/fdl-appendix.xml:279
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "C"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of "
++"the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:291 C/fdl-appendix.xml:291
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "D"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:292
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:301 C/fdl-appendix.xml:301
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "E"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:302 C/fdl-appendix.xml:302
++msgid ""
++"Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the "
++"other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:311 C/fdl-appendix.xml:311
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "F"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the "
++"Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:324 C/fdl-appendix.xml:324
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "G"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:337 C/fdl-appendix.xml:337
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "H"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:338 C/fdl-appendix.xml:338
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:346 C/fdl-appendix.xml:346
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "I"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add "
++"to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> as given on "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no "
++"section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and "
++"publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:365 C/fdl-appendix.xml:365
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "J"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the "
++"network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based "
++"on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit "
++"a network location for a work that was published at least four years before "
++"the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers "
++"to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:383 C/fdl-appendix.xml:383
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "K"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in "
++"the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor "
++"acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:396 C/fdl-appendix.xml:396
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "L"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their "
++"text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not "
++"considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:409 C/fdl-appendix.xml:409
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "M"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may "
++"not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:421 C/fdl-appendix.xml:421
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "N"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to "
++"conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant "
++"Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new "
++"front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from "
++"the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections "
++"as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's "
++"license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it "
++"contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of "
++"peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the "
++"authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list "
++"of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover "
++"Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements "
++"made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by "
++"you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, "
++"you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit "
++"permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names "
++"for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:480 C/fdl-appendix.xml:480
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with "
++"other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, "
++"unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in "
++"its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be "
++"replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with "
++"the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section "
++"unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original "
++"author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make "
++"the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections "
++"in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</"
++"quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled "
++"<quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled "
++"<quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:516 C/fdl-appendix.xml:516
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and "
++"replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with "
++"a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow "
++"the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in "
++"all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:527 C/fdl-appendix.xml:527
++msgid ""
++"You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it "
++"individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License "
++"into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects "
++"regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:537 C/fdl-appendix.xml:537
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its "
++"derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on "
++"a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, "
++"provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a "
++"compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</"
++"link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:561 C/fdl-appendix.xml:561
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the "
++"terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations "
++"requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may "
++"include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the "
++"original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation "
++"of this License provided that you also include the original English version "
++"of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the "
++"original English version of this License, the original English version will "
++"prevail."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:580 C/fdl-appendix.xml:580
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this "
++"License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the "
++"Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this "
++"License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you "
++"under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such "
++"parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:594 C/fdl-appendix.xml:594
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:595
++msgid ""
++"The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU "
++"Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be "
++"similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to "
++"address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www."
++"gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular "
++"numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies "
++"to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of "
++"that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not "
++"as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not "
++"specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever "
++"published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:621 C/fdl-appendix.xml:621
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:622 C/fdl-appendix.xml:622
++msgid ""
++"To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the "
++"License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices "
++"just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:629 C/fdl-appendix.xml:629
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, "
++"and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being "
++"LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU "
++"Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, "
++"write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover "
++"Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of "
++"<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++"gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/year
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/holder
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/street
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++msgstr "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/city
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "Boston"
++msgstr "Boston"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/state
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "MA"
++msgstr "MA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/postcode
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "02110-1301"
++msgstr "02110-1301"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/country
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "USA"
++msgstr "USA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:34
++msgid "free"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <_:quote-1/> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:44
++msgid "copyleft"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <_:quote-1/>, which means that derivative works of "
++"the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the "
++"GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:67 C/fdl-appendix.xml:82 C/fdl-appendix.xml:99
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:107 C/fdl-appendix.xml:113 C/fdl-appendix.xml:156
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:179 C/fdl-appendix.xml:190 C/fdl-appendix.xml:205
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:224 C/fdl-appendix.xml:235 C/fdl-appendix.xml:253
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:271 C/fdl-appendix.xml:294 C/fdl-appendix.xml:354
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:368 C/fdl-appendix.xml:400 C/fdl-appendix.xml:462
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:472 C/fdl-appendix.xml:482 C/fdl-appendix.xml:519
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:540 C/fdl-appendix.xml:565 C/fdl-appendix.xml:583
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:608
++msgid "Document"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:69
++msgid "you"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <_:quote-1/>, below, refers to any such manual or work. "
++"Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <_:quote-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:73 C/fdl-appendix.xml:234 C/fdl-appendix.xml:269
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:283 C/fdl-appendix.xml:315 C/fdl-appendix.xml:351
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:413 C/fdl-appendix.xml:433 C/fdl-appendix.xml:447
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:459 C/fdl-appendix.xml:475 C/fdl-appendix.xml:543
++msgid "Modified Version"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:72
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a "
++"portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or "
++"translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:80
++msgid "Secondary Section"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:79
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <_:"
++"link-2/> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or "
++"authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related "
++"matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall "
++"subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, "
++"a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could "
++"be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related "
++"matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political "
++"position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:95 C/fdl-appendix.xml:327 C/fdl-appendix.xml:398
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:439 C/fdl-appendix.xml:486 C/fdl-appendix.xml:494
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:567 C/fdl-appendix.xml:637 C/fdl-appendix.xml:648
++msgid "Invariant Sections"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:96 C/fdl-appendix.xml:435
++msgid "Secondary Sections"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:94
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain <_:link-2/> whose titles are designated, as "
++"being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-3/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:104 C/fdl-appendix.xml:181 C/fdl-appendix.xml:328
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:458
++msgid "Cover Texts"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:103
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as "
++"Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-2/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:112 C/fdl-appendix.xml:124 C/fdl-appendix.xml:207
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:369
++msgid "Transparent"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:125 C/fdl-appendix.xml:204
++msgid "Opaque"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:111
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> copy of the <_:link-2/> means a machine-readable copy, "
++"represented in a format whose specification is available to the general "
++"public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and "
++"straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of "
++"pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available "
++"drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for "
++"automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text "
++"formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup "
++"has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers "
++"is not Transparent. A copy that is not <_:quote-3/> is called <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:142 C/fdl-appendix.xml:146 C/fdl-appendix.xml:250
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:266 C/fdl-appendix.xml:281 C/fdl-appendix.xml:352
++msgid "Title Page"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:141
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such "
++"following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License "
++"requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have "
++"any title page as such, <_:quote-2/> means the text near the most prominent "
++"appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the "
++"text."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:166 C/fdl-appendix.xml:551
++msgid "section 3"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <_:link-1/> in any medium, either "
++"commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright "
++"notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document "
++"are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions "
++"whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to "
++"obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or "
++"distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If "
++"you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the "
++"conditions in <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <_:link-1/> numbering more than 100, "
++"and the Document's license notice requires <_:link-2/>, you must enclose the "
++"copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: "
++"Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back "
++"cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the "
++"publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with "
++"all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <_:link-3/> and satisfy "
++"these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <_:link-1/> copies of the <_:link-2/> numbering "
++"more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <_:link-3/> copy "
++"along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-"
++"accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy "
++"of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using "
++"public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard "
++"network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably "
++"prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to "
++"ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated "
++"location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an "
++"Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition "
++"to the public."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <_:"
++"link-1/> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them "
++"a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:236
++msgid "2"
++msgstr "2"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:237
++msgid "3"
++msgstr "3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/> under the "
++"conditions of sections <_:link-3/> and <_:link-4/> above, provided that you "
++"release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified "
++"Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <_:link-1/> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from "
++"that of the <_:link-2/>, and from those of previous versions (which should, "
++"if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You "
++"may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of "
++"that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <_:link-1/>, as authors, one or more persons or entities "
++"responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <_:link-2/>, together "
++"with at least five of the principal authors of the <_:link-3/> (all of its "
++"principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <_:link-1/> the name of the publisher of the <_:link-2/>, as "
++"the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:292
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <_:link-1/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <_:link-1/> under the terms of this "
++"License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:330
++msgid "Document's"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <_:link-1/> and required "
++"<_:link-2/> given in the <_:link-3/> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:348 C/fdl-appendix.xml:353 C/fdl-appendix.xml:372
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:507 C/fdl-appendix.xml:508
++msgid "History"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <_:quote-1/>, and its title, and add to it an "
++"item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <_:"
++"link-2/> as given on the <_:link-3/>. If there is no section entitled <_:"
++"quote-4/> in the <_:link-5/>, create one stating the title, year, authors, "
++"and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <_:link-1/> for public "
++"access to a <_:link-2/> copy of the Document, and likewise the network "
++"locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These "
++"may be placed in the <_:quote-3/> section. You may omit a network location "
++"for a work that was published at least four years before the Document "
++"itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives "
++"permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:385 C/fdl-appendix.xml:509
++msgid "Acknowledgements"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:386 C/fdl-appendix.xml:510
++msgid "Dedications"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <_:quote-1/> or <_:quote-2/>, preserve the section's "
++"title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the "
++"contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/>, unaltered in their text and "
++"in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part "
++"of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:412 C/fdl-appendix.xml:424 C/fdl-appendix.xml:445
++msgid "Endorsements"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <_:quote-1/>. Such a section may not be included "
++"in the <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:425
++msgid "Invariant Section"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <_:quote-1/> or to conflict in title "
++"with any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <_:link-1/> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that "
++"qualify as <_:link-2/> and contain no material copied from the Document, you "
++"may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To "
++"do this, add their titles to the list of <_:link-3/> in the Modified "
++"Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other "
++"section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <_:quote-1/>, provided it contains nothing "
++"but endorsements of your <_:link-2/> by various parties--for example, "
++"statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an "
++"organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:455
++msgid "Front-Cover Text"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:457
++msgid "Back-Cover Text"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <_:link-1/>, and a passage of "
++"up to 25 words as a <_:link-2/>, to the end of the list of <_:link-3/> in "
++"the <_:link-4/>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover "
++"Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If "
++"the <_:link-5/> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously "
++"added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on "
++"behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on "
++"explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <_:link-1/> do not by this License "
++"give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply "
++"endorsement of any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:484 C/fdl-appendix.xml:566
++msgid "section 4"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <_:link-1/> with other documents released under this "
++"License, under the terms defined in <_:link-2/> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <_:link-3/> of all "
++"of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant "
++"Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <_:link-1/> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are "
++"multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make "
++"the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in "
++"parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if "
++"known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section "
++"titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the "
++"combined work."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:511
++msgid "Endorsements."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <_:quote-1/> in "
++"the various original documents, forming one section entitled <_:quote-2/>; "
++"likewise combine any sections entitled <_:quote-3/>, and any sections "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>. You must delete all sections entitled <_:quote-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <_:link-1/> and other documents "
++"released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this "
++"License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the "
++"collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim "
++"copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:546
++msgid "aggregate"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:550
++msgid "Cover Text"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <_:link-1/> or its derivatives with other separate and "
++"independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or "
++"distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <_:link-2/> of the "
++"Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. "
++"Such a compilation is called an <_:quote-3/>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <_:link-4/> requirement of <_:link-5/> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <_:link-1/> under the terms of <_:link-2/>. Replacing <_:"
++"link-3/> with translations requires special permission from their copyright "
++"holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections "
++"in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may "
++"include a translation of this License provided that you also include the "
++"original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between "
++"the translation and the original English version of this License, the "
++"original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <_:link-1/> except "
++"as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, "
++"modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will "
++"automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who "
++"have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have "
++"their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:597
++msgid "Free Software Foundation"
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:603
++msgid "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++msgstr "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:595
++msgid ""
++"The <_:ulink-1/> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free "
++"Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar "
++"in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new "
++"problems or concerns. See <_:ulink-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:610
++msgid "or any later version"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<_:link-1/> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <_:"
++"quote-2/> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and "
++"conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has "
++"been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the "
++"Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose "
++"any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:639 C/fdl-appendix.xml:651
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:640 C/fdl-appendix.xml:654
++msgid "Back-Cover Texts"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <_:link-1/> "
++"being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <_:link-2/> being LIST, and with the <_:"
++"link-3/> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:649
++msgid "with no Invariant Sections"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:652
++msgid "no Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:653
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <_:link-1/>, write <_:quote-2/> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <_:link-3/>, write <_:quote-4/> instead of <_:"
++"quote-5/>; likewise for <_:link-6/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:661
++msgid "GNU General Public License"
++msgstr "GNU General Public License"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <_:ulink-1/>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# German translation of the gtk-doc manual.
++# Mario Blättermann <mario.blaettermann@gmail.com>, 2009-2010, 2012-2013, 2016, 2018.
++# Wolfgang Stöggl <c72578@yahoo.de>, 2015.
++# Christian Kirbach <christian.kirbach@gmail.com>, 2013, 2015, 2018.
++#
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc help master\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-03 08:17+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-03-25 01:57+0100\n"
++"Last-Translator: Christian Kirbach <christian.kirbach@gmail.com>\n"
++"Language-Team: German <gnome-de@gnome.org>\n"
++"Language: de\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"X-Generator: Poedit 2.2.1\n"
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++msgctxt "_"
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr ""
++"Mario Blättermann <mario.blaettermann@gmail.com>, 2009-2013, 2016, 2018\n"
++"Christian Kirbach <christian.kirbach@gmail.com>, 2013, 2015-2019"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/title
++#: C/index.docbook:12
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc-Handbuch"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/edition
++#: C/index.docbook:13
++msgid "1.24.1"
++msgstr "1.24.1"
++
++#. (itstool) path: abstract/para
++#: C/index.docbook:14
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr ""
++"Benutzerhandbuch für Entwickler mit Anweisungen für die Benutzung von GTK-"
++"Doc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:16
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:25
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:34
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: publisher/publishername
++#: C/index.docbook:45
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc-Projekt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/publisher
++#: C/index.docbook:44
++msgid ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++msgstr ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:48
++msgid "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth und Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:52
++msgid "<year>2007-2015</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2007-2015</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:65
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, "
++"Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation "
++"with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A "
++"copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Das vorliegende Dokument kann gemäß den Bedingungen der GNU Free "
++"Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 oder jeder späteren, von der Free "
++"Software Foundation veröffentlichten Version ohne unveränderbare Abschnitte "
++"sowie ohne Texte auf dem vorderen und hinteren Buchdeckel kopiert, verteilt "
++"und/oder modifiziert werden. Eine Kopie der GFDL finden Sie unter diesem "
++"<ulink type=\"help\" url=\"ghelp:fdl\">Link</ulink> oder in der mit diesem "
++"Handbuch gelieferten Datei COPYING-DOCS."
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:73
++msgid ""
++"Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and "
++"services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME "
++"documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the "
++"GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial "
++"caps."
++msgstr ""
++"Bei vielen der von Firmen zur Unterscheidung ihrer Produkte und "
++"Dienstleistungen verwendeten Namen handelt es sich um Marken. An den "
++"Stellen, an denen derartige Namen in einer GNOME-Dokumentation vorkommen und "
++"wenn die Mitglieder des GNOME-Dokumentationsprojekts über diese Marken "
++"informiert wurden, sind die Namen in Großbuchstaben oder mit großen "
++"Anfangsbuchstaben geschrieben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:83
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.29.1</revnumber> <date>28 Aug 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>development</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.29.1</revnumber> <date>28. August 2018</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>Entwicklerversion</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:89
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28 Aug 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>development</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28. August 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>Entwicklerversion</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:95
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.28</revnumber> <date>24 Mar 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.28</revnumber> <date>24. März 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>Fehlerbehebungen</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:101
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.27</revnumber> <date>07 Dec 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>fine tuning of the python port</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.27</revnumber> <date>07. Dezember 2017</date>> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>Detailanpassungen der Python-"
++"Portierung</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:107
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.26</revnumber> <date>11 Aug 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>port all tools from perl/bash to python</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.26.1</revnumber> <date>11. August 2017</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>Alle Werkzeuge von Perl/Bash "
++"nach Python portiert</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:113
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21 March 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, test cleanups</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21. März 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>Fehlerbehebungen, Test-Cleanups</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:119
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29. Mai 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>Fehlerbehebungen</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:125
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17. Mai 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>Fehlerbehebungen</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:131
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>07 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>7. Mai 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>Fehlerbehebungen, veraltete Funktionen verworfen</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:137
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 Jul 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17. Juli 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>Fehlerbehebungen, veraltete Funktionen verworfen</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:143
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16 Feb 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, markdown support, style improvements</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16. Februar 2014</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>Fehlerberhebungen, "
++"Unterstützung für Markdown, Layoutverbesserungen</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:149
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 Jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05. Juni 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>Fehlerbehebungen</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:155
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 Sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, speedups, markdown support</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14. September 2011</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>Fehlerbehebungen, Verbesserte "
++"Geschwindigkeit, Unterstützung für markdown</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:161
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 Feb 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>urgent bug fix update</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26. Februar 2011</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>Dringende Bugfix-"
++"Aktualisierung</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:167
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14. Januar 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>Bugfixes, Layoutverbesserungen</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:173
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 May 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21. Mai 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>Bug- und Regressionsfixes</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:179
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 March 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes and performance improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28. März 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>Bugfixes und Leistungsverbesserungen</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:185
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>broken tarball update</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18. Dezember 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>Aktualisierung eines "
++"beschädigten Tarballs</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:191
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>new tool features and "
++"bugfixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18. Dezember 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>Neue Features und Bugfixes</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:197
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 November 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>GNOME doc-utils migration</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16. November 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>Migration auf die GNOME doc-"
++"utils</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:210
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "Einführung"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:212
++msgid ""
++"This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how "
++"it is used."
++msgstr ""
++"Dieses Kapitel führt in GTK-Doc ein und gibt einen Überblick darüber, worum "
++"es sich dabei handelt und wie es benutzt wird."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:218
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "Was ist GTK-Doc?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:220
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the "
++"public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can "
++"also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++"GTL-Doc wird zur Dokumentation von C-Code verwendet. Üblicherweise wird "
++"damit die öffentliche API von Bibliotheken dokumentiert, wie die der GTK+- "
++"und GNOME-Bibliotheken. Es kann aber auch zur Dokumentation von "
++"Anwendungscode verwendet werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:228
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "Wie funktioniert GTK-Doc?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:230
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source "
++"files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the "
++"template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only "
++"document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce "
++"output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc verwendet Funktionsdokumentationen, die sich in den Quelldateien "
++"innerhalb speziell formatierter Kommentarblöcke befinden, oder "
++"Dokumentation, die zu den von GTK-Doc verwendeten Vorlagendateien "
++"hinzugefügt wurde. Beachten Sie jedoch, dass GTK-Doc nur Funktionen "
++"dokumentieren wird, die in den Header-Dateien deklariert sind. Es erstellt "
++"keine Ausgaben für statische Funktionen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:237
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc consists of a number of python scripts, each performing a different "
++"step in the process."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc besteht aus einer Anzahl von Python-Skripten, wovon jedes einen "
++"bestimmten Schritt in dem Prozess ausführt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:242
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "Dieser Vorgang umfasst fünf Hauptschritte:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:249
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the "
++"source files with the documentation for each function, macro, structs or "
++"unions, etc."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Schreiben der Dokumentation.</guilabel> Der Autor ergänzt die "
++"Quelldateien um die Dokumentation für jede Funktion, jedes Makro usw."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:258
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code "
++"looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. "
++"It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> "
++"containing a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according "
++"to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to "
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. The author can rearrange "
++"the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the "
++"final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><"
++"module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations "
++"found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some symbols to show "
++"up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or "
++"the declaration should appear differently, one can place entities similar to "
++"the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><"
++"module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Informationen über den Code sammeln.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> analysiert die Header-Dateien des "
++"Code und sucht nach Funktionsdeklarationen, Macros, enum (Aufzählung), "
++"struct (Strukturen) und »unions«. Es erstellt die Datei <filename><"
++"module>-decl-list.txt</filename>, welche eine Liste der Deklarationen "
++"enthält, und platziert diese in Abschnitte entsprechend der Header-Dateien, "
++"in der sie sind. Bei erster Ausführung wird diese Datei nach <filename><"
++"module>-sections.txt</filename> kopiert. Der Autor kann die Abschnitte "
++"und die Reihenfolge der Deklarationen in gewünschter Reihenfolge neu "
++"anordnen. Die zweite erstellte Datei ist <filename><module>-decl.txt</"
++"filename>. Diese Datei enthält alle Deklarationen, die vom Scanner gefunden "
++"wurden. Wenn aus irgendeinem Grund einige Symbole in der Dokumentation "
++"erscheinen sollen, wenn die volle Deklaration nicht vom Scanner gefunden "
++"werden kann oder die Deklaration anders erscheinen soll, kann man Entitäten "
++"ähnlich derer in<filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> innerhalb "
++"<filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename> platzieren."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:275
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> can also be used to dynamically "
++"query a library about any GObject subclasses it exports. It saves "
++"information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about "
++"any GObject properties and signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> kann ebenso dazu verwendet "
++"werden, dynamisch eine Bibliothek über irgendeine GObject-Subklasse "
++"anzufragen, die sie exportiert. Es speichert Informationen über jede "
++"Objektposition in der Klassenhierarchie und über alle GObjekt-Eigenschaften "
++"und -Signale, die es bietet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:281
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> should not be used anymore. It was "
++"needed in the past when GObject was still GtkObject inside gtk+."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> sollte nicht weiter verwendet "
++"werden. Es war in der Vergangenheit notwendig, als GObject noch ein "
++"GtkObject innerhalb von gtk+ war."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:288
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mkdb</application> turns the template files into XML files in the <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code "
++"contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it "
++"gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads docs from "
++"sources and introspection data."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Erstellen des SGML/XML und HTML/PDF.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> wandelt die Vorlagen-Dateien in XML-"
++"Dateien in den Unterordner <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> um. "
++"Wenn der Quellcode Dokumentation über Funktionen mittels speziellen "
++"Kommentarblöcken enthält, so wird diese hier eingepflegt. Wenn keine tmpl-"
++"Dateien eingesetzt werden, so wird nur Dokumentation von den Quell- und "
++"introspection-Daten gelesen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:297
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the XML files into HTML files "
++"in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. Likewise "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the XML files into a PDF "
++"document called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> konvertiert die XML-Dateien in HTML-"
++"Dateien im Unterordner <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename>. "
++"Ebenso konvertiert <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> die XML-Dateien "
++"in ein PDF-Dokument namens <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:303
++msgid ""
++"Files in <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class="
++"\"directory\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One "
++"should never edit them directly."
++msgstr ""
++"Dateien in <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> und <filename class="
++"\"directory\">html/</filename>-Ordnern werden immer überschrieben. Niemand "
++"sollte diese direkt bearbeiten."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:311
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After "
++"installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be "
++"run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, "
++"the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in "
++"the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, "
++"<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-"
++"links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application "
++"will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Querverweise zwischen Dokumenten korrigieren.</guilabel> Nach "
++"Intallation der HTML-Dateien kann <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> "
++"ausgeführt werden, um alle Querverweise zwischen separaten Dokumenten zu "
++"korrigieren. Die GTK+-Dokumentation zum Beispiel enthält viele Querverweise "
++"zu Typen, die im GLib-Handbuch dokumentiert sind. Beim Erstellen des Quellen-"
++"tarball zur Verteilung wandelt <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> alle "
++"externen Verweise in Web-Verweise um. Beim Installieren verteilter (zuvor "
++"erstellter) Dokumente wird dieselbe Anwendung versuchen, Verweise zurück in "
++"lokale Verweise umzuwandeln (wo diese Dokumente installiert werden)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:329
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc bekommen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:332
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "Erfordernisse"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:333
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>python 2/3</guilabel> - the main scripts are written in python."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Python 2/3</guilabel> - Die Hauptskripte wurden in Python "
++"geschrieben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:336
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> - the xslt processor from libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> - der xslt-Verarbeiter von libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:340
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> - the docbook xsl stylesheets <ulink url="
++"\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type=\"http"
++"\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> - die docbook xsl-Stilvorlagen <ulink url="
++"\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type=\"http"
++"\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:344
++msgid ""
++"One of <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</guilabel> "
++"or <guilabel>vim</guilabel> - optional - used for syntax highlighting of "
++"examples"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</guilabel> oder "
++"<guilabel>vim</guilabel> - optional - für Syntax-Hervorhebung von Beispielen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:352
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "Info zu GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:354
++msgid ""
++"Historically GTK-Doc was used to generate template files from the sources "
++"code. These template files could be used by developers to enter the API "
++"documentation. This approach was rather inconvenient because it required to "
++"keep the generated files under version control. Since GTK-Doc 1.9 it became "
++"possible to place all API information into source comments, which made the "
++"template support obsolete. In version 1.26 template support has been removed."
++msgstr ""
++"In der Vergangenheit wurde GTK-Doc zur Erstellung von Vorlagendateien aus "
++"dem Quellcode verwendet. Diese Vorlagendateien konnten von Entwicklern zur "
++"Eingabe der API-Dokumentation verwendet werden. Jedoch war dieser Ansatz "
++"eher unbequem, weil die erzeugten Dateien unter Versionskontrolle gehalten "
++"werden mussten. Ab GTK-Doc 1.9 wurde es möglich, sämtliche API-Informationen "
++"in Quellcode-Kommentaren zu platzieren, wodurch die Unterstützung für "
++"Vorlagen obsolet wurde. In der Version 1.26 wurde die Vorlagenunterstützung "
++"gänzlich entfernt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:364 C/index.docbook:378
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(FIXME)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:368
++msgid ""
++"(authors, web pages, mailing list, license, future plans, comparison with "
++"other similar systems.)"
++msgstr ""
++"(Autoren, Webseiten, Mailingliste, Lizenz, Zukunftspläne, Vergleich mit "
++"ähnlichen Systemen)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:376
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "Über dieses Handbuch"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:382
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr "(wofür es bestimmt ist, wo Sie es erhalten können, Lizenz)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:391
++msgid "Project Setup"
++msgstr "Einrichtung in einem Projekt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:393
++msgid ""
++"This Chapter describes the steps that are necessary to integrate GTK-Doc "
++"into your project. The integration of GTK-Doc into a project includes the "
++"following steps:"
++msgstr ""
++"Dieses Kapitel beschreibt die notwendigen Schritte, um GTK-Doc in Ihr "
++"Projekt zu integrieren. Im einzelnen sind dies folgende Schritte:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:401
++msgid ""
++"Preparation of the directory structure and creating required configuration "
++"files for your GTK-Doc documentation (see <link linkend=\"settingup_docfiles"
++"\"> Setting up a skeleton documentation</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Vorbereitung der Ordnerstruktur und Erstellung der erforderlichen "
++"Konfigurationsdateien für Ihre GTK-Doc-Dokumentation (siehe <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">Einrichten des Grundgerüsts der Dokumentation</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:409
++msgid ""
++"Adjusting the build system to build your documentation using the GTK-Doc "
++"tools. Multiple build systems are supported, in this manual we describe how "
++"to integrate GTK-Doc with <link linkend=\"settingup_autotools\">Autotools</"
++"link>, <link linkend=\"settingup_cmake\">CMake</link>, and <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_plain_makefiles\">plain Makefiles</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Anpassen des Erstellungssystems, so dass Ihre Dokumentation durch die "
++"Werkzeuge von GTK-Doc erstellt wird. Es werden mehrere Erstellungssysteme "
++"unterstützt. In diesem Handbuch beschreiben wir die Integration von GTK-Doc "
++"in <link linkend=\"settingup_autotools\">Autotools</link>, <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_cmake\">CMake</link> und <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_plain_makefiles\">einfache Makefiles</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:419
++msgid ""
++"Adding GTK-Doc specific files to version control and deciding which files to "
++"ignore (see <link linkend=\"settingup_vcs\"> Integration with version "
++"control systems</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Hinzufügen GTK-Doc-spezifischer Dateien zur Versionsverwaltung, wobei zu "
++"entscheiden ist, welche Dateien ignoriert werden sollen (siehe <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_vcs\">Integration in Versionsverwaltungssysteme</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:427
++msgid ""
++"The following sections assume we work on a project called <code>meep</code>. "
++"This project contains two packages (or modules), a library called "
++"<code>libmeep</code> and an end-user app called <code>meeper</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"In den folgenden Abschnitten wird ein fiktives Projekt namens <code>meep</"
++"code> angenommen, an dem wir arbeiten. Das Projekt enthält zwei Pakete (oder "
++"Module), eine Bibliothek namens <code>libmeep</code> und eine Endbenutzer-"
++"Anwendung namens <code>meeper</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:436
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "Einrichten des Grundgerüsts der Dokumentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:438
++msgid ""
++"A common convention is to place documentation into a folder called "
++"<code>docs</code> inside your top-level project directory. We usually "
++"distinguish between <emphasis>reference documentation</emphasis> intended "
++"for developers and an <emphasis>user manual</emphasis> intended for end-"
++"users. Again the convention is to have separate folders for both. We usually "
++"place the reference documentation in a folder named <code>reference</code> "
++"and the end-user manual in a folder named <code>help</code> as. According to "
++"the above convention the documentation for our <code>libmeep</code> package "
++"would be placed into: <code>docs/reference/libmeep</code>. For packages with "
++"just one library or application the documentation could also be placed "
++"directly into <code>docs/reference</code>. It is not mandatory to use the "
++"above convention, but if you choose to use a different directory structure "
++"you must adjust your build system configuration to match your directory "
++"structure."
++msgstr ""
++"Üblicherweise wir die Dokumentation in einem Ordner namens <code>docs</code> "
++"in der obersten Ebene Ihres Projektordners platziert. Wir unterscheiden "
++"stets zwischen der für Entwickler bestimmten "
++"<emphasis>Referenzdokumentation</emphasis> und dem "
++"<emphasis>Benutzerhandbuch</emphasis>, das sich an Endbenutzer richtet. Es "
++"ist wiederum üblich, dass für beide Werke getrennte Ordner verwendet werden. "
++"Wir legen die Referenzdokumentation in einem Ordner namens <code>reference</"
++"code> und das Benutzerhandbuch in <code>help</code>. Nach der oben gennanten "
++"Konvention würde dann die Dokumentation für unser <code>libmeep</code>-Paket "
++"in <code>docs/reference/libmeep</code> platziert werden. Bei Paketen, die "
++"nur eine Bibliothek oder Anwendung enthalten, kann die Dokumentation auch "
++"direkt in <code>docs/reference</code> abgelegt werden. Es ist nicht "
++"obligatorisch, genau nach diesem Schema vorzugehen, aber wenn Sie von dieser "
++"Ordnerstruktur abweichen, müssen Sie die Konfiguration Ihres "
++"Erstellungssystems entsprechend anpassen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:469
++msgid "Example directory structure of <emphasis>meep</emphasis> project"
++msgstr "Beispielhafte Ordnerstruktur des <emphasis>meep</emphasis>-Projekts"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:471
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:463
++msgid ""
++"In the following sections we will assume a directory structure for our "
++"<emphasis>meep</emphasis> project that uses the above conventions. <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"In den folgenden Abschnitten gehen wir für unser <emphasis>meep</emphasis>-"
++"Projekt von einer Ordnerstruktur aus, die die oben genannten Konventionen "
++"berücksichtigt. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:488
++msgid "Integration with Autotools"
++msgstr "Integration in Autotools"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:489
++msgid ""
++"Integration of GTK-Doc into an autotools-based build system requires the "
++"following steps:"
++msgstr ""
++"Für die Integration von GTK-Doc in ein Autotools-basiertes Projekt sind die "
++"folgenden Schritte auszuführen:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:495
++msgid ""
++"Ensure that <application>gtkdocize</application> is run once before the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> script. If an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> "
++"script is present, adjust it to check for GTK-Doc and add a call to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"Stellen Sie sicher, dass <application>gtkdocize</application> einmal vor dem "
++"<filename>configure</filename>-Skript ausgeführt wird. Falls es ein "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>-Skript gibt, passen Sie es so an, dass es "
++"nach GTK-Doc sucht und einen <application>gtkdocize</application>-Aufruf "
++"hinzufügt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:503
++msgid ""
++"The main purpose of <application>gtkdocize</application> is to make the "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> Makefile and the <filename>gtk-doc.m4</"
++"filename> macro definition file available to the build system, either by "
++"copying or linking it into the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Der Hauptzweck von <application>gtkdocize</application> ist die Erstellung "
++"der <filename>gtk-doc.make</filename>-Steuerdatei und der Makro-"
++"Definitionsdatei <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename> für das Erstellungssystem, "
++"entweder durch Kopieren oder Verlinken im Projekt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:512
++msgid ""
++"Add the necessary <application>autoconf</application> macros to "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> to enable GTK-Doc in your build system to "
++"allow configuration of GTK-Doc via the generated <filename>configure</"
++"filename> script."
++msgstr ""
++"Fügen Sie die notwendigen <application>autoconf</application>-Makros zu "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> hinzu, um GTK-Doc in Ihrem "
++"Erstellungssystem zu aktivieren, so dass die Konfiguration von GTK-Doc über "
++"das erzeugte <filename>configure</filename>-Skript erfolgt."
++
++# Das hier verstehe ich nicht so recht...
++# CK: Das Original ist kein richtiges Englisch.
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:518
++msgid ""
++"Among others with registers the <code>--enable-gtk-doc</code> option with "
++"the <filename>configure</filename> script."
++msgstr ""
++"Unter anderem wird die Option <code>--enable-gtk-doc</code> mit dem "
++"<filename>configure</filename>-Skript registriert."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:524
++msgid ""
++"Create an <application>automake</application> script for each application or "
++"library in your project. In the example used in this documentation this step "
++"applies to both <code>meeper</code> and <code>libmeep</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Erstellen Sie ein <application>automake</application>-Skript für jede "
++"Anwendung oder Bibliothek in Ihrem Projekt. In dem in dieser Dokumentation "
++"verwendeten Beispiel wird dieser Schritt sowohl auf <code>meeper</code> als "
++"auch <code>libmeep</code> angewendet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:533
++msgid ""
++"In the following sections, we will perform the above steps in reverse order. "
++"We start with the <application>automake</application> scripts and work our "
++"way up to <filename>configure.ac</filename> and <filename>autogen.sh</"
++"filename>. Then we show how enable Gtk-Doc in the build system and how to "
++"build the documentation."
++msgstr ""
++"In den folgenden Abschnitten führen wir die oben beschriebenen Schritte in "
++"umgekehrter Reihenfolge aus. Wir beginnen mit den <application>automake</"
++"application>-Skripten und arbeiten uns bis hinauf zu <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename> und <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. Dann zeigen wir, wie GTK-Doc "
++"im Erstellungssystem aktiviert und wie die Dokumentation erstellt wird."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:543
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "Integration in automake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:545
++msgid ""
++"First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">examples</filename> sub-directory of the <ulink url=\"https://"
++"gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/raw/master/examples/Makefile.am\"> gtkdoc-"
++"sources</ulink> to your project's reference documentation directory (e.g. "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">docs/reference/<package></filename>). A "
++"local copy should be available under e.g. <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-"
++"tools/examples/Makefile.am</filename>. If you have multiple packages repeat "
++"this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++"Kopieren Sie zunächst die Datei <filename>Makefile.am</filename> aus dem "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">examples</filename>-Unterordner der <ulink url="
++"\"https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/raw/master/examples/Makefile.am"
++"\">gtkdoc-Quellen</ulink> in den API-Dokumentationsordner Ihres Projekts "
++"( <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></"
++"filename>). Eine lokale Kopie sollte beispielsweise unter <filename>/usr/"
++"share/doc/gtk-doc-tools/examples/Makefile.am</filename> verfügbar sein. "
++"Falls Sie mehrere Dokumentationspakete haben, müssen Sie dies für jedes "
++"davon wiederholen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/simpara
++#: C/index.docbook:558
++msgid ""
++"Do not forget to add each <filename>Makefile.am</filename> to the "
++"<function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function> macro in <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename>. For <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile.am</filename> you "
++"will need to add the entry <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile</"
++"filename> to <function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function>."
++msgstr ""
++"Vergessen Sie nicht, jedes <filename>Makefile.am</filename> zum Makro "
++"<function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function> in <filename>configure.ac</filename> "
++"hinzuzufügen. Für <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile.am</filename> "
++"müssen Sie den Eintrag <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile</filename> "
++"zu <function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function> hinzufügen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:570
++msgid "Example directory structure with <filename>Makefiles.am</filename>"
++msgstr "Beispielhafte Ordnerstruktur mit <filename>Makefiles.am</filename>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:573
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:589
++msgid ""
++"Next, you need to customize the copied Makefiles and provide values for the "
++"various parameters in each <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. All settings "
++"have a comment above them that describes their purpose and how to customize "
++"the setting. Most settings are used to supply extra flags to the respective "
++"tools to which they apply. Every tool has a variable of the form <option><"
++"TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option> (e.g. the tool <application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</"
++"application> has an option named <code>MKHTML_OPTIONS</code>). All the tools "
++"support <option>--help</option> to list the supported options."
++msgstr ""
++"Im nächsten Schritt passen Sie die kopierten Makefiles an und geben Werte "
++"für die verschiedenen Parameter in jedem <filename>Makefile.am</filename> "
++"an. Allen Einstellungen ist ein Kommentar vorangestellt, der den jeweiligen "
++"Zweck beschreibt. Die meisten Einstellungen sind zusätzliche Flags, die an "
++"verschiedene Werkzeuge übergeben werden. Jedes der Werkzeuge hat eine "
++"Variable der Form <option><WERKZEUGNAME>_OPTIONEN</option>. Alle "
++"Werkzeuge unterstützen <option>--help</option> zur Auflistung der "
++"unterstützten Parameter."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:613
++msgid ""
++"<option>DOC_MODULE</option> is used to provide the name of the package that "
++"is being documentated (e.g. <code>meeper</code>, or <code>libmeep</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>DOC_MODULE</option> stellt den Namen des Pakets bereit, das "
++"dokumentiert werden soll (z.B. <code>meeper</code> oder <code>libmeep</"
++"code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:620
++msgid ""
++"<option>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</option> is used to specify the location of source "
++"directory which GTK-Doc searches for your API documentation. This will "
++"usually be <code> DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/src </code> or a sub-"
++"directory of that directory."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</option> gibt den Ort des Quellordners an, wo GTK-Doc "
++"nach Ihrer API-Dokumentation suchen soll. Üblicherweise ist das <code> "
++"DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/src </code> oder einer von dessen Unterordnern."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:633
++msgid ""
++"<option>HFILE_GLOB</option> and <option>CFILE_GLOB</option> are used for "
++"dependencies. Each option take a file-glob (e.g. <code>HFILE_GLOB="
++"$(top_srcdir)/src/*.c</code>). The documentation will be rebuilt if any of "
++"the matched files change."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>HFILE_GLOB</option> und <option>CFILE_GLOB</option> werden für "
++"Abhängigkeiten verwendet. Jed Option akzeptiert ein file-glob (z.B. "
++"<code>HFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/src/*.c</code>). Die Dokumentation wird neu "
++"erstellt, wenn sich eine der Dateien ändert."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:645
++msgid ""
++"<option>EXTRA_HFILES</option> allows to specify extra header files to "
++"include when scanning for API documentation, which are not found under "
++"<code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</code> (e.g. <code> EXTRA_HFILES=$(top_srcdir}/contrib/"
++"extra.h</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Mit <option>EXTRA_HFILES</option> können Sie zusätzliche einzuschließende "
++"Header-Dateien angeben, wenn nach API-Dokumentation gesucht wird, falls "
++"diese nicht unter <code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</code> zu finden ist (z.B. <code> "
++"EXTRA_HFILES=$(top_srcdir}/contrib/extra.h</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:655
++msgid ""
++"<option>IGNORE_HFILES</option> allows to specify header files or directories "
++"to ignore when scanning for API documentation. Use the basename of the file "
++"or directory (e.g. <code> IGNORE_HFILES=gtkdebug.h gtkintl.h "
++"private_code_folder</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Mit <option>IGNORE_HFILES</option> können Sie zu ignorierende Header-Dateien "
++"angeben, wenn nach API-Dokumentation gesucht wird. Verwenden Sie dabei den "
++"Basisnamen der Datei oder des Ordners (z.B. <code> IGNORE_HFILES=gtkdebug.h "
++"gtkintl.h private_code_folder</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:665
++msgid ""
++"<option>HTML_IMAGES</option> allows to specify images files which will be "
++"copied into the <filename>html/</filename> directory of the generated "
++"documentation. If your API documentation includes any images they need to be "
++"added to this option (e.g. <code> HTML_IMAGES=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/stock-icons/"
++"stock_about_24.png</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"In <option>HTML_IMAGES</option> können Sie Bilder angeben, die in den "
++"<filename>html/</filename>-Ordner der erzeugten Dokumentation kopiert "
++"werden. Falls Ihre API-Dokumentation Bilder enthält, müssen diese zu dieser "
++"Option hinzugefügt werden (z.B. <code> HTML_IMAGES=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/stock-"
++"icons/stock_about_24.png</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:678
++msgid ""
++"<option>content_files</option> allows to specify extra files that are "
++"included by <code>$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)</code> (e.g. <code> "
++"content_files=running.xml building.xml changes-2.0.xml</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"In <option>content_files</option> können Sie zusätzliche Dateien angeben, "
++"die in <code>$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)</code> einbezogen werden sollen (z.B. "
++"<code> content_files=running.xml building.xml changes-2.0.xml</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:689
++msgid ""
++"<option>expand_content_files</option> allows to specify files where "
++"<emphasis>gtk-doc abbreviations</emphasis> such as <code>#GtkWidget</code> "
++"are expanded (e.g. <code> expand_content_files=running.xml</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"In <option>expand_content_files</option> geben Sie Dateien an, in denen "
++"<emphasis>gtk-doc Abkürzungen</emphasis> wie <code>#GtkWidget</code> "
++"expandiert werden (z.B. <code> expand_content_files=running.xml</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:607
++msgid ""
++"The following list explains the most relevant options. Check the example "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename> for additional options. <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"In der folgenden Liste werden einige der relevantesten Optionen erläutert. "
++"Im Beispiel für <filename>Makefile.am</filename> finden Sie weitere "
++"Optionen. <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:704
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Integration in autoconf"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:706
++msgid ""
++"Integration with <application>autoconf</application> is very simple and "
++"includes one required step and an additional optional (but recommended) "
++"step. The first step is to add the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro "
++"to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This registers several "
++"configure options to enable GTK-Doc and allows you to set default arguments "
++"for <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"Die Integration in <application>autoconf</application> ist recht einfach. Es "
++"ist nur ein Schritt zwingend erforderlich sowie ein weiterer optional (aber "
++"empfehlenswert). Zunächst fügen Sie das Makro <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</"
++"function> zu Ihrem <filename>configure.ac</filename> Skript hinzu. Dadurch "
++"werden verschiedene Konfigurationsoptionen zur Aktivierung von GTK-Doc "
++"registriert sowie Standardargumente für <application>gtkdocize</application> "
++"gesetzt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: warning/simpara
++#: C/index.docbook:718
++msgid ""
++"Make sure that the <code>GTK_DOC_CHECK</code> macro is not indented. The "
++"macro must start at the beginning of the line and should not start with "
++"whitespace."
++msgstr ""
++"Achten Sie darauf, dass das <code>GTK_DOC_CHECK</code>-Makro nicht "
++"eingerückt ist. Es muss zwingend am Anfang der Zeile stehen und sollte nicht "
++"mit einem Leerzeichen beginnen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:725
++msgid ""
++"The second step is to add the <code>AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)</code> to your "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. This is not required but helps "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++"definition (e.g <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename>) which contains the "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro to your project's macro directory. "
++"Without this, the GTK_DOC_CHECK macro might not be found and you would need "
++"to explicitly tell the <application>aclocal</application> tool where to find "
++"the macro definition file."
++msgstr ""
++"Danach fügen Sie <code>AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)</code> zu Ihrer "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>-Datei hinzu. Dies ist nicht zwingend "
++"erforderlich, aber hilft <application>gtkdocize</application> dabei, die "
++"Makrodefinition (e.g <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename>), welche das Makro "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> enthält, in den Makro-Ordner Ihres "
++"Projekts zu kopieren. Wenn Sie diesen Schritt auslassen, könnte das Makro "
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK möglicherweise nicht gefunden werden, und Sie müssten den Ort "
++"der Makro-Definitionsdatei explizit für <application>aclocal</application> "
++"angeben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:738
++msgid "Minimal integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Minimale Integration in autoconf"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:739
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:754
++msgid "Integration with optional gtk-doc dependency"
++msgstr "Integration mit optionaler Abhängigkeit zu gtk-doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:755
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:748
++msgid ""
++"The above example works, but will require all developers to have gtk-doc "
++"installed. A better way is to make building the documentation optional as "
++"shown in the next example: <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Das obige Beispiel funktioniert, aber es erfordert, dass alle Entwickler gtk-"
++"doc installiert haben. Eine bessere Lösung ist die optional Erstellung der "
++"Dokumentation, wie das nächste Beispiel zeigt: <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:768
++msgid ""
++"The first argument is used to check for the Gtk-Doc version at configure "
++"time. The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application>. The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several "
++"configure switches:"
++msgstr ""
++"Das erste Argument wird zur Überprüfung von der Version von GTK-Doc während "
++"des configure-Durchlaufs benutzt. Das zweite, optionale Argument wird von "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> verwendet. Das Makro "
++"<symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> fügt verschiedene Schalter für configure "
++"hinzu:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:777
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr "--with-html-dir=PATH : Pfad zur installierten Dokumentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:778
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc : gtk-doc zur Erstellung der Dokumentation verwenden "
++"[Vorgabe=no]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:779
++msgid ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : Erstellung der Dokumentation im HTML-Format "
++"[Vorgabe=yes]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:780
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : Erstellung der Dokumentation im PDF-Format "
++"[Vorgabe=no]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: important/para
++#: C/index.docbook:784
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--"
++"enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. "
++"Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for "
++"users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc ist standardmäßig deaktiviert! Denken Sie daran, die Option "
++"<option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option> beim nächsten Durchlauf von "
++"<filename>configure</filename> zu übergeben. Anderenfalls wird die vorher "
++"erstellte Dokumentation installiert. Dies ergibt für Benutzer durchaus Sinn, "
++"aber nicht für Entwickler."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:792
++msgid ""
++"After all changes to <filename>configure.ac</filename> are made, update the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> file. This can be done by re-running "
++"<code>autogen.sh</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Nachdem alle Änderungen auf <filename>configure.ac</filename> angewendet "
++"wurden, aktualisieren Sie die Datei <filename>configure</filename>. Dies "
++"geschieht durch erneutes Ausführen von <code>autogen.sh</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:800
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "Integration in autogen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:802
++msgid ""
++"Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup "
++"the build infrastructure after the project was checked out from a version "
++"control system (such as git or svn). GTK-Doc comes with a script called "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> which can be used to copy the necessary "
++"files needed by Gtk-Doc to the source directory."
++msgstr ""
++"Die meisten Projekte dürften über ein <filename>autogen.sh</filename>-Skript "
++"verfügen, welches die Build-Infrastruktur nach dem Auschecken aus einem "
++"Versionsverwaltungssystem wie SVN oder Git erzeugt. GTK-Doc liefert ein "
++"Werkzeug namens <application>gtkdocize</application> mit, das zum Kopieren "
++"der für GTK-Doc erforderlichen Dateien in den Quellordner verwendet werden "
++"kann."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:810
++msgid "It should be run before autoreconf, autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr ""
++"Es sollte vor autoreconf, autoheader, automake oder autoconf ausgeführt "
++"werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:815
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Ausführen von gtkdocize durch autogen.sh"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:816
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:824
++msgid "Conditionally run gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Bedingtes Ausführen von gtkdocize durch autogen.sh"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:825
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"GTKDOCIZE=$(which gtkdocize 2>/dev/null)\n"
++"if test $? -ne 0; then\n"
++" echo \"No gtk-doc support found. You can't build the docs.\"\n"
++"else\n"
++" $GTKDOCIZE || exit 1\n"
++"fi\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"GTKDOCIZE=$(which gtkdocize 2>/dev/null)\n"
++"if test $? -ne 0; then\n"
++" echo \"No gtk-doc support found. You can't build the docs.\"\n"
++"else\n"
++" $GTKDOCIZE || exit 1\n"
++"fi\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:836
++msgid ""
++"When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.make</filename> to your project root (or any directory specified by the "
++"<option>--docdir</option> option)."
++msgstr ""
++"Beim Ausführen von <application>gtkdocize</application> wird <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.make</filename> in die Wurzel Ihres Projekts oder in jeden anderen durch "
++"die Option <option>--docdir</option> festgelegten Ordner kopiert."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:842
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> checks your <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename> script for the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro. The "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro can be used to pass extra arguments "
++"to the <application>gtkdocize</application> script. the 2nd parameter in the "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> überprüft das <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename>-Skript daraufhin, ob <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> enthalten "
++"ist. Dieses Makro kann verwendet werden, um weitere Parameter an "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> zu übergeben, den zweiten Parameter im "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>-Makro."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:851
++msgid ""
++"Alternatively, additional arguments can also be passed to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> via the <function>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</"
++"function> environment variable, or by directly specifying them to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> in <filename>autogen.sh</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Alternativ können zusätzliche Argumente auch über die Umgebungsvariable "
++"<function>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</function> an <application>gtkdocize</application> "
++"übergeben werden, oder durch direktes Anfügen an <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application> in <filename>autogen.sh</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:862
++msgid "Executing GTK-Doc from the Build System"
++msgstr "Aufruf von GTK-Doc aus dem Erstellungssystem heraus"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:864
++msgid ""
++"After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then "
++"give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run "
++"<filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++"Nach den bisher absolvierten Schritten ist es Zeit für den Build-Vorgang. "
++"Zunächst muss <filename>autogen.sh</filename> erneut ausgeführt werden. "
++"Falls dieses Skript auch den configure-Aufruf enthält, sollten Sie die "
++"Option <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> hinzufügen. Anderenfalls führen Sie "
++"danach <filename>configure</filename> manuell aus, ebenfalls mit dieser "
++"Option."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:871
++msgid ""
++"The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-"
++"directories. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past ."
++"sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Der erste Durchlauf von make erstellt verschiedene zusätzliche Dateien in "
++"den Dokumentationsordnern. Die bedeutendsten davon sind: <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> "
++"(früher .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:879
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "Erstellung der Dokumentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:880
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:887
++msgid ""
++"Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename>. With this initial setup you will only see a very "
++"simple document. The next chapter will teach you how to add API "
++"documentation to your code via special comment blocks. The Chapter "
++"afterwards introduces <link linkend=\"metafiles\">additional files</link> "
++"and shows how to edit the <link linkend=\"metafiles_master\">master "
++"template</link> to add additional chapters and sections to your "
++"documentation files."
++msgstr ""
++"Nun können Sie Ihren Browser auf <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename> stellen. Mit dieser initialen Einrichtung werden Sie "
++"allerdings nur ein sehr simples Dokument sehen. Im nächsten Kapitel "
++"erläutern wir, wie Sie API-Dokumentation mittels spezieller Kommentarblöcke "
++"in Ihren Code einbauen können. Das Kapitel danach führt in <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles\">zusätzliche Dateien</link> ein und zeigt, wie die <link "
++"linkend=\"metafiles_master\">Master-Vorlage</link> bearbeitet wird, um "
++"zusätzliche Kapitel und Abschnitte zu Ihren Dokumentationsdateien "
++"hinzuzufügen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:903
++msgid "Integration with CMake build systems"
++msgstr "Integration in CMake-Erstellungssysteme"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:905
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc now provides a <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename> module (and "
++"the corresponding <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename> module). "
++"This provides a <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal> command that you can "
++"set in your <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc stellt nun ein <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename>-Modul (und "
++"das korrespondierende <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename>-Modul) "
++"bereit. Dadurch steht Ihnen der Befehl <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal> "
++"zur Verfügung, den Sie in die Datei <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename> "
++"integrieren können."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:915
++msgid "Example of using GTK-Doc from CMake"
++msgstr "Beispiel zur Verwendung von GTK-Doc mit CMake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:916
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Create the doc-libmeep target.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Build doc-libmeep as part of the default target. Without this, you would\n"
++"# have to explicitly run something like `make doc-libmeep` to build the docs.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Install the docs. (This assumes you're using the GNUInstallDirs CMake module\n"
++"# to set the CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR variable correctly).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Create the doc-libmeep target.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Build doc-libmeep as part of the default target. Without this, you would\n"
++"# have to explicitly run something like `make doc-libmeep` to build the docs.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Install the docs. (This assumes you're using the GNUInstallDirs CMake module\n"
++"# to set the CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR variable correctly).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:913
++msgid "The following example shows how to use this command. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Das folgende Beispiel zeigt, wie dieser Befehl eingesetzt wird. <_:example-1/"
++">"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:940
++msgid "Integration with plain makefiles or other build systems"
++msgstr "Integration in Klartext-Makefiles oder andere Erstellungssysteme"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:942
++msgid ""
++"In the case one does not want to use automake and therefore <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.mak</filename> one will need to call the gtkdoc tools in the right order "
++"in own makefiles (or other build tools)."
++msgstr ""
++"Für den Fall, dass jemand nicht automake und damit <filename>gtk-doc.mak</"
++"filename> einsetzen will, muss man die gtkdoc-Werkzeuge in eigenen Makefiles "
++"(oder andere Werkzeugen) in der richtigen Reihenfolge aufrufen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:949
++msgid "Documentation build steps"
++msgstr "Schritte zur Erstellung der Dokumentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:950
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <source-dir>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<source-dir>\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <source-dir>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<source-dir>\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:964
++msgid ""
++"One will need to look at the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> and "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> to pick the extra options needed."
++msgstr ""
++"Man muss sich <filename>Makefile.am</filename> und <filename>gtk-doc.mak</"
++"filename> anschauen, um die zusätzlich notwendigen Optionen herauszusuchen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:971
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "Integration in Versionsverwaltungssysteme"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:973
++msgid ""
++"As a rule of thumb, it's the files you edit which should go under version "
++"control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><package>."
++"types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the "
++"past .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Als Faustregel gilt, dass alle von Ihnen bearbeiteten Dateien auch unter "
++"Versionsverwaltung stehen sollten. In typischen Projekten sind das folgende "
++"Dateien: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>-docs.xml</filename> (früher .sgml), <filename><package>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>, <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:981
++msgid ""
++"Files in the <filename>xml/</filename> and <filename>html/</filename> "
++"directories should not go under version control. Neither should any of the "
++"<filename>.stamp</filename> files."
++msgstr ""
++"Dateien in den Ordnern <filename>xml/</filename> und <filename>html/</"
++"filename> sollten nicht unter Versionsverwaltung gestellt werden, ebenso "
++"keine der <filename>.stamp</filename>-Dateien."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:991
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "Dokumentieren des Codes"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:993
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code "
++"documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure "
++"from other sources. During the next section you will find all information "
++"about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc benutzt Quellcode-Kommentare mit einer speziellen Syntax für Code-"
++"Dokumentation. Weiterhin werden Informationen über Ihre Projektstruktur aus "
++"anderen Quellen geholt. Im nächsten Abschnitt finden Sie umfassende "
++"Informationen über die Syntax der Kommentare."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1004 C/index.docbook:1030
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc-Kommentarblock"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1005
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1000
++msgid ""
++"The GTK-Doc scanner can handle the majority of C headers fine. In the case "
++"of receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special case, one "
++"can hint GTK-Doc to skip over them. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Der Scanner von GTK-Doc kann mit den meisten C-Kopfdateien umgehen. Im Falle "
++"von Warnungen des Scanners, die wie ein Spezialfall aussehen, kann man GTK-"
++"Doc anweisen, diese zu überspringen. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1014
++msgid "Limitations"
++msgstr "Einschränkungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1015
++msgid ""
++"Note, that GTK-Doc's supports <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> but "
++"not <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> or other combinations."
++msgstr ""
++"Beachten Sie, dass GTK-Doc zwar <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> "
++"unterstützt, aber nicht <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> oder "
++"andere Kombinationen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1025
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "Kommentare zur Dokumentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1031
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1027
++msgid ""
++"A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation "
++"block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Ein mehrzeiliger Kommentar, der mit einem zusätzlichen »*« beginnt, markiert "
++"einen Kommentarblock, der von den Werkzeugen in GTK-Doc verarbeitet wird. <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1040
++msgid ""
++"The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is "
++"related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add "
++"table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++"Der »identifier« ist eine Zeile mit dem Namen des Objekts, auf das sich der "
++"Kommentar bezieht. Die Syntax kann abhängig von der Art des Objekts "
++"variieren."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1046
++msgid ""
++"The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol "
++"types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter "
++"description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows "
++"the detailed description. All lines (outside program listings and CDATA "
++"sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph "
++"breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-"
++"asterisk-blank-blank). This is useful in preformatted text (code listings)."
++msgstr ""
++"Der Block »documentation« ist ebenfalls für jeden Symboltyp unterschiedlich. "
++"Symboltypen mit Parametern wie Funktionen oder Makros haben eine "
++"Parameterbeschreibung, auf die eine leere Zeile folgt (keine echte "
++"Leerzeile, sondern ein »*«). Danach folgt eine detaillierte Beschreibung. "
++"Alle Zeilen (außerhalb von Programmlistings und CDATA-Abschnitten), die nur "
++"ein » *« (Leerzeichen-Asterisk) enthalten, werden in Absatzumbrüche "
++"umgewandelt. Falls Sie keinen Absatzumbruch wünschen, verwenden Sie "
++"stattdessen ein » * «, d.h. setzen Sie ein Leerzeichen jeweils davor und "
++"dahinter. Dies ist in vorformatiertem Text nützlich (Code-Auflistungen)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1063
++msgid ""
++"What it is: The name for a class or function can sometimes be misleading for "
++"people coming from a different background."
++msgstr ""
++"Was es ist: Der Name für eine Klasse oder Funktion kann manchmal irreführend "
++"sein für Personen, die einen anderen Hintergrund haben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1069
++msgid ""
++"What it does: Tell about common uses. Put it in relation with the other API."
++msgstr ""
++"Was es ist: Berichtet über normale Anwendungsfälle. Stellen Sie es ins "
++"Verhältnis mit der anderen API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1059
++msgid "When documenting code, describe two aspects: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Beim Dokumentieren von Code beschreiben Sie zwei Aspekte: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1084
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Verwenden Sie function(), um einen Bezug zu Funktionen oder Makros "
++"herzustellen, die Argumente akzeptieren."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1089
++msgid ""
++"Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to "
++"parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr ""
++"Verwenden Sie @param, um einen Bezug zu Parametern herzustellen. Verwenden "
++"Sie dies auch, wenn es um einen Bezug zu Parametern anderer Funktionen geht, "
++"bezogen auf jene, die Sie gerade beschreiben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1095
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr ""
++"Benutzen Sie %constant, um einen Bezug auf eine Konstante herzustellen, z.B. "
++"%G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1100
++msgid ""
++"Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and "
++"macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Verwenden Sie #symbol, um auf andere Symboltypen zu verweisen, z.B. "
++"»structs« und »enums« und Makros, die keine Argumente benötigen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1106
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal."
++msgstr "Verwenden Sie #Object::signal, um auf ein GObject-Signal zu verweisen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1111
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property."
++msgstr ""
++"Verwenden Sie #Object:property, um auf eine GObject-Eigenschaft zu verweisen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1116
++msgid ""
++"Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure and #GObjectClass."
++"foo_bar() to refer to a vmethod."
++msgstr ""
++"Verwenden Sie #Struct.field, um auf ein Feld innerhalb einer Struktur zu "
++"verweisen und #GObjectClass.foo_bar() für eine vmethod."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1078
++msgid ""
++"One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in "
++"the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. "
++"GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Ein Vorteil von Hypertext gegenüber Klartext ist die Möglichkeit, "
++"Verknüpfungen im Dokument zu verwenden. Das Schreiben eines korrekten "
++"Markups für eine solche Verknüpfung kann allerdings langatmig sein, deshalb "
++"stellt GTK-Doc eine Reihe von praktischen Abkürzungen bereit. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1125
++msgid ""
++"If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or "
++"'#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML "
++"entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&"
++"commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them "
++"with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++"Falls Sie die Sonderzeichen »<«, »>«, »()«, »@«, »%« oder »#« in Ihrer "
++"Dokumentation verwenden wollen, ohne dass GTK-Doc diese ändert, können Sie "
++"die XML-Entitäten »&lt;«, »&gt;«, »&lpar;«, »&rpar;«, »&"
++"commat;«, »&percnt;« und »&num;« verwenden oder die Zeichen mit "
++"einem Backslash »\\« maskieren."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1134
++msgid ""
++"DocBook can do more than just links. One can also have lists, examples, "
++"headings, and images. As of version 1.20, the preferred way is to use a "
++"subset of the basic text formatting syntax called <ulink url=\"http://"
++"daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink>. On older GTK-Doc "
++"versions any documentation that includes Markdown will be rendered as is. "
++"For example, list items will appear as lines starting with a dash."
++msgstr ""
++"DocBook kann mehr als nur Verweise zu erzeugen. Sie können Listen, "
++"Beispiele, Überschriften und Bilder einfügen. In Version 1.20 ist der "
++"bevorzugte Weg, ein Subset grundlegender Textformatierungssyntax namens "
++"<ulink url=\"http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink> "
++"zu verwenden. In älteren Versionen von GTK-Doc wird jede Dokumentation, die "
++"Markdown enthält, unverändert gerendert. Zum Beispiel erscheinen "
++"Listenobjekte als Zeilen, die mit einem Gedankenstrich beginnen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1145
++msgid ""
++"While markdown is now preferred one can mix both. One limitation here is "
++"that one can use docbook xml within markdown, but markdown within docbook "
++"xml is not supported."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenngleich Markdown bevorzugt wird, können Sie beide Formate mischen. Eine "
++"Einschränkung ist jedoch, dass Sie DocBook XML innerhalb von Markdown "
++"verwenden können, während Markdown in DocBook XML nicht unterstützt wird."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1151
++msgid ""
++"In older GTK-Doc releases, if you need support for additional formatting, "
++"you would need to enable the usage of docbook XML tags inside doc-comments "
++"by putting <option>--xml-mode</option> (or <option>--sgml-mode</option>) in "
++"the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Um die Nutzung der DocBook-XML-Markierungen innerhalb der "
++"Dokumentationskommentare zu aktivieren, übergeben Sie der Variable "
++"<symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> in der Datei <filename>Makefile.am</filename> "
++"die Option <option>--xml-mode</option> (oder <option>--sgml-mode</option>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1160
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block using Markdown"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc-Kommentarblock in Markdown-Syntax"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1161
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * documentation paragraph ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Second Sub Heading\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading With a Link Anchor # {#heading-two}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * more documentation:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 1\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Paragraph inside a list item.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. another numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Another paragraph. [A Link to the GNOME Website](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [A link to the heading anchor above][heading-two]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * A C-language example:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Gorgeous!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * documentation paragraph ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Second Sub Heading\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading With a Link Anchor # {#heading-two}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * more documentation:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 1\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Paragraph inside a list item.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. another numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Another paragraph. [A Link to the GNOME Website](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [A link to the heading anchor above][heading-two]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * A C-language example:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Gorgeous!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1200
++msgid ""
++"More examples of what markdown tags are supported can be found in the <ulink "
++"url=\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/Markdown"
++"\">GTK+ Documentation Markdown Syntax Reference</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Weitere Beispiele zu den unterstützten Markdown-Formatierungen finden Sie in "
++"der <ulink url=\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/"
++"Markdown\">GTK+ Documentation Markdown Syntax Reference</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1206
++msgid ""
++"As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one "
++"cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to "
++"comment those symbols too. This helps other developers to understand your "
++"code. Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without "
++"the 2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made "
++"public, all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and "
++"insert the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++"Wie an früherer Stelle bereits erwähnt, ist GTK-Doc für das Dokumentieren "
++"der öffentlichen API gedacht. Daher kann man keine Dokumentation für "
++"statische Symbole schreiben. Nichtsdestotrotz ist es jedoch gut, diese "
++"Symbole trotzdem zu dokumentieren. Dies hilft anderen, Ihren Code besser zu "
++"verstehen. Deswegen empfehlen wir, hierfür normale Kommentare zu verwenden, "
++"ohne das zweite »*« in der ersten Zeile. Falls später die Funktion "
++"veröffentlicht werden soll, ist es lediglich nötig, im Kommentarblock ein "
++"zweites »*« hinzuzufügen und den Symbolnamen an der richtigen Stelle in die "
++"Abschnittsdatei einzubauen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1221
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "Dokumentieren in Abschnitten"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1223
++msgid ""
++"Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or "
++"module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short "
++"description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Jeder Abschnitt der Dokumentation enthält Informationen über eine Klasse "
++"oder ein Modul. Um eine Komponente hinzuzufügen, können Sie einen "
++"Abschnittsblock schreiben. Die Kurzbeschreibung wird auch im "
++"Inhaltsverzeichnis verwendet. Alle @-Felder sind optional."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1231
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "Abschnitts-Kommentarblock"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1232
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1251
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr "SECTION:<name>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1253
++msgid ""
++"The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name given here "
++"should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Der Name verweist auf die Abschnittsdokumentation des entsprechenden Teils "
++"der Datei <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>. Der hier "
++"angegebene Name sollte der Markierung <FILE> in der Datei "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> entsprechen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1262
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@short_description"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1264
++msgid ""
++"A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the "
++"links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr ""
++"Eine einzeilige Beschreibung des Abschnitts, die später hinter den Verweisen "
++"im Inhaltsverzeichnis und oben in der Abschnittsseite erscheint."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1271
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr "@title"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1273
++msgid ""
++"The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It "
++"can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr ""
++"Der Abschnittstitel in der SECTION-Deklaration, Vorgabe ist <name>. Er "
++"kann im Feld @title überschrieben werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1280
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr "@section_id"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1282
++msgid ""
++"Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <"
++"title> is used as a section_id and for other sections it is <"
++"MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++"Überschreibt den Einsatz von Titeln als Abschnitts-Bezeichner. Für GObjects "
++"wird der <Titel> als section_id verwendet and für andere Abschnitte "
++"<MODUL>-<Titel>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1290
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@see_also"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1292
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section."
++msgstr "Eine Liste von Symbolen, welche sich auf diesen Abschnitt beziehen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1298
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1305
++msgid ""
++"Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third "
++"parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have "
++"confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after "
++"the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major "
++"release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be "
++"rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++"Stabil - Die Absicht einer stabilen Schnittstelle ist es, beliebigen Dritten "
++"es zu ermöglichen, Anwendungen zu diesen Schnittstellen zu entwickeln, diese "
++"freizugeben und sich darauf verlassen zu können, dass diese mit allen "
++"Unterversionen des Produkts laufen (nach derjenigen, wo die Schnittstelle "
++"eingeführt wurde, und innerhalb der gleichen Hauptversion). Selbst bei einer "
++"Hauptversion kann man nicht von inkompatiblen Änderungen ausgehen, abgesehen "
++"von stark berechtigten."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1317
++msgid ""
++"Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are "
++"typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly "
++"changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a "
++"more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source "
++"or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++"Instabil - Instabile Schnittstellen sind experimentell oder vorübergehend. "
++"Sie werden typischerweise verwendet, um außenstehenden Entwicklern frühen "
++"Zugang zu neuen oder sich schnell ändernden Technologien zu geben, oder um "
++"eine Übergangslösung für ein Problem zu liefern, für das eine allgemeinere "
++"Lösung erwartet wird. Es werden keine Garantien zu Quell- oder "
++"Binärkompatibilität von einer minor-Freigabe zur nächsten gegeben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1329
++msgid ""
++"Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but "
++"that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in "
++"specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++"Privat - Eine Schnittstelle, die im GNOME-Stack selbst verwendet werden "
++"kann, aber nicht für Endanwender dokumentiert ist. Solche Funktionen sollten "
++"nur auf spezifizierte und dokumentierte Weisen verwendet werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1338
++msgid ""
++"Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require "
++"end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be "
++"Internal."
++msgstr ""
++"Intern - Eine Schnittstelle, die für ein Modul intern ist und keine "
++"Endanwender-Dokumentation erfordert. Undokumentierte Funktionen werden als "
++"intern angesehen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1300
++msgid ""
++"An informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend "
++"the use of one of these terms: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Eine informelle Beschreibung der Stabilitätsstufe dieser API. Wir empfehlen "
++"dafür einen der folgenden Begriffe: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1350
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1352
++msgid ""
++"The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a "
++"comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Die <literal>#include</literal> -Dateien werden im Abschnitt »synopsis« "
++"angezeigt (eine durch Kommata getrennte Liste). Der globale Wert aus der "
++"<link linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">Abschnittsdatei</link> oder von der "
++"Befehlszeile wird überschrieben. Dieser Punkt ist optional."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1361
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr "@image"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1363
++msgid ""
++"The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This "
++"will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of "
++"a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Das Bild, das am Beginn einer Referenzseite für diesen Abschnitt angezeigt "
++"wird. Meist wird es eine Art Diagramm für das visuelle Erscheinungsbild "
++"einer Klasse oder ein Diagramm sein, das die Beziehungen zu anderen Klassen "
++"darstellt. Dieses Objekt ist optional."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1374
++msgid ""
++"To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs "
++"into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++"Um unnötiges Rekompilieren nach Dokumentationsänderungen zu vermeiden, "
++"platzieren Sie die Abschnittsdokumentation in die C-Quellen, wo immer es "
++"möglich ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1383
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "Dokumentieren von Symbolen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1385
++msgid ""
++"Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is "
++"documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the "
++"definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus "
++"functions are usually documented in the c-source and macros, structs and "
++"enums in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++"Jedes Symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal und property) wird in "
++"einem separaten Block dokumentiert. Der Block wird am besten nahe der "
++"Definition der Symbole platziert, so dass es leichter ist, diese synchron zu "
++"halten. Die Funktion wird üblicherweise in den C-Quellen definiert, »macro«, "
++"»struct« und »enum« dagegen in der Header-Datei."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1393 C/index.docbook:1459
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr "Allgemeine Markierungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1395
++msgid ""
++"You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell "
++"when an API was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie können Versionsinformationen zu allen Dokumentationselementen "
++"hinzufügen, um darauf hinzuweisen, wann eine API eingeführt oder wann sie "
++"als veraltet markiert wurde."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1400
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr "Versionierungs-Markierungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1401
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "Since:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1403
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr "Beschreibung, seit welcher Version des Codes die API verfügbar ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1408
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "Deprecated:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1410
++msgid ""
++"Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The "
++"description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr ""
++"Absatz, der darüber informiert, dass diese Funktion nicht mehr genutzt "
++"werden sollte. Die Beschreibung sollte einen Verweis auf die neue API "
++"enthalten."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1418
++msgid ""
++"You can also add stability information to all documentation elements to "
++"indicate whether API stability is guaranteed for them for all future minor "
++"releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie können Stabilitätsinformationen zu allen Dokumentationselementen "
++"hinzufügen, um darauf hinzuweisen, ob API-Stabilität für alle Minor-"
++"Veröffentlichungen des Projekts garantiert wird."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1424
++msgid ""
++"The default stability level for all documentation elements can be set by "
++"passing the <option>--default-stability</option> argument to "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> with one of the values below."
++msgstr ""
++"Die Standard-Stabilitätsstufe für alle Dokumentationselemente setzen Sie "
++"durch Übergabe des Arguments <option>--default-stability</option> an "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> in einem der nachfolgend "
++"beschriebenen Werte."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1430
++msgid "Stability Tags"
++msgstr "Stabilitäts-Markierungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1431
++msgid "Stability: Stable"
++msgstr "Stability: Stable"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1433
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as stable. This is for public APIs which are guaranteed to "
++"remain stable for all future minor releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Markiert das Element als stabil. Dies bezieht sich auf öffentliche APIs, für "
++"die für alle zukünftigen Minor-Veröffentlichungen des Projekts Stabilität "
++"gewährleistet ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1440
++msgid "Stability: Unstable"
++msgstr "Stability: Unstable"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1442
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as unstable. This is for public APIs which are released as "
++"a preview before being stabilised."
++msgstr ""
++"Markiert das Element als instabil. Dies bezieht sich auf öffentliche APIs, "
++"die als Vorschau vor der endgültigen Stabilisierung gedacht sind."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1448
++msgid "Stability: Private"
++msgstr "Stability: Private"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1450
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as private. This is for interfaces which can be used by "
++"tightly coupled modules, but not by arbitrary third parties."
++msgstr ""
++"Markiert das Element als privat. Dies bezieht sich auf Schnittstellen, die "
++"von eng damit verknüpften Modulen genutzt werden kann, aber nicht von "
++"beliebigen Drittanbietern."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1460
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1480 C/index.docbook:1490
++msgid "Annotations"
++msgstr "Anmerkungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1482
++msgid ""
++"Documentation blocks can contain annotation-tags. These tags will be "
++"rendered with tooltips describing their meaning. The tags are used by "
++"gobject-introspection to generate language bindings. A detailed list of the "
++"supported tags can be found on <ulink url=\"http://live.gnome.org/"
++"GObjectIntrospection/Annotations\" type=\"http\">the wiki</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Dokumentationsblöcke können Anmerkungs-Markierungen enthalten. Diese "
++"Markierungen werden als Tooltips (Minihilfen) dargestellt, die die jeweilige "
++"Bedeutung anzeigen. Sie werden von gobject-introspection genutzt, um "
++"Sprachbindungen zu erzeugen. Eine detaillierte Liste der unterstützten "
++"Markierungen finden Sie im <ulink url=\"http://live.gnome.org/"
++"GObjectIntrospection/Annotations\" type=\"http\">Wiki</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1491
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: (annotation): @foo's bar\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (annotation) (another annotation)\n"
++" * (and another annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation) (another annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Sets bar on @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: (annotation): @foo's bar\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (annotation) (another annotation)\n"
++" * (and another annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation) (another annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Sets bar on @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1512 C/index.docbook:1541
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "Kommentarblock einer Funktion"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1518
++msgid ""
++"Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/"
++"unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++"Dokumentieren, ob zurückgegebene Objekte, Listen, Zeichenketten usw. befreit/"
++"dereferenziert/freigegeben werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1524
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr ""
++"Dokumentiert, ob Parameter NULL sein können, und was in diesem Fall "
++"geschieht."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1529
++msgid ""
++"Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr ""
++"Erwähnen Sie interessante Vorbedingungen (und nachfolgende Bedingungen), wo "
++"es nützlich erscheint."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1514 C/index.docbook:1600
++msgid "Please remember to: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "Bitte denken Sie an: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1536
++msgid ""
++"Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are "
++"private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc nimmt an, dass alle Symbole (Makros, Funktionen), die mit »_« "
++"beginnen, privat sind. Sie werden wie statische Funktionen behandelt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1542
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1563
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr "Funktions-Markierungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1564 C/index.docbook:1771
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "Returns:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1566
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr "Abschnitt, der das zurückgegebene Ergebnis beschreibt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1571
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr "@...:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1573
++msgid ""
++"In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag "
++"(@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn die Funktion variadische Argumente enthält, sollten Sie diese "
++"Markierung verwenden (@Varargs: funktioniert aus historischen Gründen "
++"ebenfalls)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1583 C/index.docbook:1585
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "Property-Kommentarblock"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1586
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1598 C/index.docbook:1617
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "Signal-Kommentarblock"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1604
++msgid ""
++"Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or "
++"after other signals."
++msgstr ""
++"Dokumentiert, wann ein Signal ausgegeben wird und ob es vor oder nach "
++"anderen Signalen ausgegeben wird."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1610
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr "Dokumentiert, was eine Anwendung in dem Signal-Handler tun könnte."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1618
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZED] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarized\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZED] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarized\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1635 C/index.docbook:1636
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "Struct-Kommentarblock"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1637
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1652
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Verwenden Sie <code>/*< private >*/</code> vor den privaten »struct«-"
++"Feldern, die Sie verbergen wollen. Um das umgekehrte Verhalten zu erzielen, "
++"verwenden Sie <code>/*< public >*/</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1658
++msgid ""
++"If the first field is \"g_iface\", \"parent_instance\" or \"parent_class\" "
++"it will be considered private automatically and doesn't need to be mentioned "
++"in the comment block."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn das erste Feld »g_iface«, »parent_instance« oder »parent_class« ist, "
++"wird es automatisch als privat angesehen und muss nicht im Kommentarblock "
++"erwähnt werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1664
++msgid ""
++"Struct comment blocks can also be used for GObjects and GObjectClasses. It "
++"is usually a good idea to add a comment block for a class, if it has "
++"vmethods (as this is how they can be documented). For the GObject itself one "
++"can use the related section docs, having a separate block for the instance "
++"struct would be useful if the instance has public fields. One disadvantage "
++"here is that this creates two index entries of the same name (the structure "
++"and the section)."
++msgstr ""
++"Struct-Kommentarblöcke können auch für GObjects und GObjectClasses verwendet "
++"werden. Es ist ratsam, einen Kommentarblock für eine Klasse hinzuzufügen, "
++"wenn diese vmethods enthält (dies ist die Art der Dokumentation dafür). Für "
++"GObject selbst können Sie die jeweiligen Abschnittsdokumentationen "
++"verwenden, wobei ein separater Block für das Instanz-Struct sinnvoll ist, "
++"sofern die Instanz öffentliche Felder enthält. Ein Nachteil ist hier, dass "
++"dadurch zwei gleichnamige Indexeinträge erstellt werden (die Struktur und "
++"der Abschnitt)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1676 C/index.docbook:1677
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr "Enum-Kommentarblock"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1678
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1695
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Verwenden Sie <code>/*< private >*/</code> vor den privaten »enum«-"
++"Werten, die Sie verbergen wollen. Um das umgekehrte Verhalten zu erzielen, "
++"verwenden Sie <code>/*< public >*/</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1706
++msgid "Inline program documentation"
++msgstr "Eingebettete Programmdokumentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1707
++msgid ""
++"You can document programs and their commandline interface using inline "
++"documentation."
++msgstr ""
++"Dokumentieren Sie ein Programm und dessen Befehlszeilen-Schnittstelle mit "
++"eingebetteter Dokumentation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1713
++msgid "Tags"
++msgstr "Markierungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1715
++msgid "PROGRAM"
++msgstr "PROGRAM"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1718
++msgid "Defines the start of a program documentation."
++msgstr "Definiert den Start einer Programmdokumentation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1725
++msgid "@short_description:"
++msgstr "@short_description:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1727
++msgid "Defines a short description of the program. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Definiert eine Kurzbeschreibung des Programms (optional)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1734
++msgid "@synopsis:"
++msgstr "@synopsis:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1736
++msgid ""
++"Defines the arguments, or list of arguments that the program can take. "
++"(Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++"Definiert die Argumente oder eine Liste von Argumenten, die das Programm "
++"akzeptiert (optional)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1744
++msgid "@see_also:"
++msgstr "@see_also:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1746
++msgid "See Also manual page section. (Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++"Der Abschnitt »SEE ALSO« in den man-Pages (Unix-Handbuchseiten, optional)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1753
++msgid "@arg:"
++msgstr "@arg:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1755
++msgid "Argument(s) passed to the program and their description. (Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++"Argument(e), die dem Programm übergeben wurden, und die zugehörige "
++"Beschreibung (optional)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1762
++msgid "Description:"
++msgstr "Description:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1764
++msgid "A longer description of the program."
++msgstr "Eine ausführlichere Beschreibung des Programms."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1773
++msgid "Specify what value(s) the program returns. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Geben Sie an, welche Wert(e) das Programm zurück gibt (optional)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1782
++msgid "Example of program documentation."
++msgstr "Beispiel einer Programmdokumentation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1783
++msgid "Program documentation block"
++msgstr "Programm-Dokumentationsblock"
++
++# Würde ich nicht übersetzen. Ein Entwickler schreibt stets in Englisch,
++# die Übersetzung ist unsere Sache.
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1784
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * PROGRAM:test-program\n"
++" * @short_description: A test program\n"
++" * @synopsis: test-program [*OPTIONS*...] --arg1 *arg* *FILE*\n"
++" * @see_also: test(1)\n"
++" * @--arg1 *arg*: set arg1 to *arg*\n"
++" * @--arg2 *arg*: set arg2 to *arg*\n"
++" * @-v, --version: Print the version number\n"
++" * @-h, --help: Print the help message\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Long description of program.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: Zero on success, non-zero on failure\n"
++" */\n"
++"int main(int argc, char *argv[])\n"
++"{\n"
++"\treturn 0;\n"
++"}\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * PROGRAM:test-program\n"
++" * @short_description: A test program\n"
++" * @synopsis: test-program [*OPTIONS*...] --arg1 *arg* *FILE*\n"
++" * @see_also: test(1)\n"
++" * @--arg1 *arg*: set arg1 to *arg*\n"
++" * @--arg2 *arg*: set arg2 to *arg*\n"
++" * @-v, --version: Print the version number\n"
++" * @-h, --help: Print the help message\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Long description of program.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: Zero on success, non-zero on failure\n"
++" */\n"
++"int main(int argc, char *argv[])\n"
++"{\n"
++"\treturn 0;\n"
++"}\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1810
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr "Nützliche DocBook-Markierungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1812
++msgid ""
++"Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr ""
++"Nachfolgend finden Sie einige DocBook-Markierungen, die beim Dokumentieren "
++"von Code nützlich sein können."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1821
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1817
++msgid ""
++"To link to another section in the GTK docs: <_:informalexample-1/> The "
++"linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. "
++"For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and "
++"then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class "
++"name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++"So erstellen Sie eine Verknüpfung zu einem anderen Abschnitt in den GTK-"
++"Docs: <_:informalexample-1/> »linkend« ist dabei die SGML-XML-Kennung des "
++"obersten Elements der Seite, auf welche die Verknüpfung zielt (»gtk«, »gdk«, "
++"»glib«), danach folgt der Seitentitel (\"Hash Tables\"). Für Widgets ist "
++"dies einfach der Klassenname. Leerzeichen und Unterstriche werden SGML/XML-"
++"konform in »-« umgewandelt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1834
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1831
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Für einen Bezug zu einer externen Funktion, z.B. einer C-Standardfunktion: "
++"<_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1843
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1854
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1840
++msgid ""
++"To include example code: <_:informalexample-1/> or possibly this, for very "
++"short code fragments which don't need a title: <_:informalexample-2/> For "
++"the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation: |[ ... ]|"
++msgstr ""
++"So fügen Sie Beispielcode ein: <placeholder-1/> Vielleicht auch so, für sehr "
++"kurze Codeschnipsel, die keinen Titel benötigen: <_:informalexample-2/> "
++"Außerdem unterstützt GTK-Doc auch eine Abkürzung: |[ ... ]|"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1873
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1870
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Für eine Liste mit Aufzählungszeichen: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1893
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1890
++msgid ""
++"To include a note which stands out from the text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Für eine nicht zum eigentlichen Text gehörende Notiz: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1906
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1903
++msgid "To refer to a type: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Für einen Bezug zu einem Typ: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1915
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1912
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Für einen Bezug zu einer externen Struktur (die nicht in den GTK-Docs "
++"beschrieben wird): <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1924
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1921
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Für einen Bezug zu einem Feld einer Struktur: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1933
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1930
++msgid ""
++"To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <_:informalexample-1/> but "
++"you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link "
++"to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the "
++"abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Um sich auf einen Klassennamen zu beziehen, kann man möglicherweise "
++"folgendes verwenden: <_:informalexample-1/> Aber Sie verwenden vermutlich "
++"stattdessen #GtkWidget (um automatisch eine Verknüpfung zur GtkWidget-Seite "
++"zu erstellen - lesen Sie <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">die "
++"Abkürzungen</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1944
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1941
++msgid "To emphasize text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Zum Hervorheben von Text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1953
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1950
++msgid "For filenames use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Für Dateinamen: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1962
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1959
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Für einen Bezug zu einem Schlüssel: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1972
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr "Füllen der zusätzlichen Dateien"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1974
++msgid ""
++"There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the "
++"inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past .sgml), "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Es gibt eine Menge zusätzlicher Dateien, die mit den eingebetteten Quellcode-"
++"Kommentaren verwaltet werden müssen: <filename><package>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (früher .sgml), "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1983
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr "Bearbeiten der Typendatei"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1985
++msgid ""
++"If your library or application includes GObjects, you want their signals, "
++"arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the "
++"documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</"
++"function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Falls Ihre Bibliothek oder Anwendung GObjects beinhaltet, sollten deren "
++"Signale, Argumente/Parameter und Positionen in der Hierarchie in der "
++"Dokumentation erscheinen. Alles was Sie tun müssen, ist die "
++"<function>xxx_get_type</function>-Funktionen zusammen mit deren Includes in "
++"der Datei <filename><package>.types</filename> aufzulisten."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1994
++msgid "Example <package>.types file"
++msgstr "Beispiel-Schnipsel einer <package>.types-Datei"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1995
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2006
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this "
++"list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not "
++"dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++"Seit GTK-Doc 1.8 kann <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> diese Liste für "
++"Sie erstellen. Fügen Sie einfach »--rebuild-types« zu SCAN_OPTIONS in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename> hinzu. Wenn Sie so vorgehen, sollten Sie "
++"weder Typen-Datei mit veröffentlichen noch diese unter Versionsverwaltung "
++"stellen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2015
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr "Bearbeiten des Master-Dokuments"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2017
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the "
++"inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page "
++"per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them "
++"and place them in an order."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc erstellt die Dokumentation in DocBook-SGML/XML. Beim Verarbeiten der "
++"in den Quellcode eingebetteten Kommentare erzeugt GTK-Doc eine "
++"Dokumentationsseite pro Klasse oder Modul als separate Datei. Das "
++"Hauptdokument schließt diese ein und setzt sie in die passende Reihenfolge."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2024
++msgid ""
++"While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later runs will "
++"not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the "
++"documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc "
++"has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from "
++"scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there "
++"are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++"Während GTK-Doc ein Vorlagen-Hauptdokument für Sie erstellt, wird eine "
++"spätere Ausführung es nicht mehr verändern. Das bedeutet, dass Sie das "
++"Dokument beliebig strukturieren können. Dies schließt Gruppieren von Seiten "
++"und Hinzufügen von zusätzlichen Seiten ein. GTK-Doc hat eine neue Test-"
++"Suite, wo auch das Hauptdokument von Grund auf neu erstellt wird. Es ist "
++"ratsam, sich diese von Zeit zu Zeit anzusehen und zu schauen, ob dort einige "
++"Neuigkeiten eingeführt werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2034
++msgid ""
++"Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The "
++"benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API "
++"documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol "
++"documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along "
++"with the library."
++msgstr ""
++"Erstellen Sie keine Schritt-für-Schritt-Anleitungen als zusätzliche "
++"Dokumente. Schreiben Sie lediglich zusätzliche Kapitel. Der Vorteil des "
++"direkten Einbettens einer Anleitung für Ihre Bibliothek in die API ist die "
++"Möglichkeit der einfachen Verknüpfung der Schritt-für-Schritt-Anleitung zur "
++"Symboldokumentation. Außerdem sind die Chancen größer, dass die Anleitung "
++"die gleichen Aktualisierungen erfährt wie die Bibliothek selbst."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2043
++msgid ""
++"So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is "
++"only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there "
++"which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++"Was sollte nun innerhalb des Master-Dokuments geändert werden? Zunächst "
++"recht wenig. Es gibt einige Platzhalter (Text in eckigen Klammern), die Sie "
++"beachten sollten."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2050
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr "Kopfzeile des Master-Dokuments"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2051
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2067
++msgid ""
++"In addition a few option elements are created in commented form. You can "
++"review these and enable them as you like."
++msgstr ""
++"Zusätzlich werden einige Optionselemente in Kommentarform erstellt. Sie "
++"können sich diese anschauen und aktivieren, wenn Sie wollen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2073
++msgid "Optional part in the master document"
++msgstr "Optionaler Teil im Master-Dokument"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2074
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- enable this when you use gobject introspection annotations\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" -->\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- aktivieren Sie dieses, wenn sie gobject introspection-Anmerkungen verwenden\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" --> \n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2082
++msgid ""
++"Finally you need to add new section whenever you introduce one. The <link "
++"linkend=\"modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</link> tool will remind "
++"you of newly generated xml files that are not yet included into the doc."
++msgstr ""
++"Schlussendlich müssen Sie einen neuen Abschnitt explizit einfügen, sobald "
++"Sie einen öffnen. Das Werkzeug <link linkend=\"modernizing-gtk-"
++"doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</link> erinnert Sie an neu erzeugte XML-Dateien, die "
++"in der Dokumentation noch nicht erfasst sind."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2090 C/index.docbook:2125
++msgid "Including generated sections"
++msgstr "Einbeziehen erzeugter Abschnitte"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2091
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>my library</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>my library</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2103
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr "Bearbeiten der Abschnittsdatei"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2105
++msgid ""
++"The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. "
++"Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control "
++"the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++"Die Abschnittsdatei wird verwendet, um die Dokumentations-Ausgaben von GTK-"
++"Doc zu organisieren. Man gibt an, welches Symbol zu welchem Modul oder "
++"welcher Klasse gehört und regelt die Sichtbarkeit (öffentlich oder privat)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2111
++msgid ""
++"The section file is a plain text file with tags delimiting sections. Blank "
++"lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines."
++msgstr ""
++"Die Abschnittsdatei ist eine reine Textdatei mit Markierungen, welche die "
++"Abschnitte voneinander trennen. Leere Zeilen werden ignoriert und Zeilen, "
++"die mit »#« beginnen, werden als Kommentarzeilen behandelt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2118
++msgid ""
++"While the tags make the file look like xml, it is not. Please do not close "
++"tags like <SUBSECTION>."
++msgstr ""
++"Zwar lassen die Markierungen die Datei wie XML erscheinen, doch der Schein "
++"trügt. Bitte schließen Sie keine Markierungen wie <SUBSECTION>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2126
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2143
++msgid ""
++"The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, "
++"without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++"FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++"template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++"converted into the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename> or the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. "
++"(The name of the HTML file is based on the module name and the section "
++"title, or for GObjects it is based on the GObjects class name converted to "
++"lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++"Die Markierung <FILE> ... </FILE> wird verwendet, um den "
++"Dateinamen ohne Suffix anzugeben. Zum Beispiel wird »<FILE>gnome-"
++"config</FILE>« dazu führen, dass der Deklarationsabschnitt in die "
++"Vorlage-Datei <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename> ausgegeben wird, "
++"welche in die DocBook-XML-Datei <filename>sgml/gnome-config.sgml</filename> "
++"oder die DocBook-XML-Datei <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename> "
++"umgewandelt wird. (Der Name der HTML-Datei basiert auf dem Modulnamen und "
++"dem Abschnittstitel. Für GObject basiert er auf dem GObject-Klassennamen in "
++"Kleinbuchstaben)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2155
++msgid ""
++"The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the "
++"section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially "
++"created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if "
++"one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++"Das Tag <TITLE> ... </TITLE> wird zur Angabe des Abschnitttitels "
++"verwendet. Es ist nur nützlich bevor die Vorlagen (falls verwendet) anfangs "
++"erstellt werden, weil der Titel in der Vorlage diesen überschreibt. Wenn man "
++"das SECTION-Kommentar in den Quellen einsetzt, ist dies überflüssig."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2162
++msgid ""
++"You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. "
++"Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis "
++"section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject "
++"declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the "
++"documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private "
++"declarations which will not be output (it is a handy way to avoid warning "
++"messages about unused declarations). If your library contains private types "
++"which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of "
++"implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection. "
++"Whether you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs in public or "
++"Standard section depends if they have public entries (variables, vmethods)."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie können Objekte im Abschnitt mittels der Markierung <SUBSECTION> "
++"gruppieren. Derzeit gibt es eine Leerzeile zwischen Unterabschnitten im "
++"Inhaltsangabe-Abschnitt aus. Sie können auch <SUBSECTION Standard> für "
++"Standard GObject-Deklarationen verwenden (z.B. Funktionen wie "
++"g_object_get_type und Makros wie G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Derzeit "
++"werden diese nicht in die Dokumentation aufgenommen. Sie können auch <"
++"SUBSECTION Private> für private Deklarationen verwenden, welche nicht "
++"ausgegeben werden. Dies ist eine praktische Möglichkeit, Warnmeldungen "
++"bezüglich ungenutzter Deklarationen zu vermeiden. Wenn Ihre Bibliothek "
++"private Typen enthält, die nicht in der Objekthierarchie und der Liste der "
++"implementierten oder benötigten Schnittstellen erscheinen sollen, fügen Sie "
++"diese zu einem »Private«-Unterabschnitt hinzu. Ob Sie GObject oder "
++"GObjectClass wie Structs im öffentlichen oder im Standardabschnitt "
++"einsetzen, hängt davon ab, ob öffentliche Einträge vorhanden sind "
++"(Variablen, vmethods)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2181
++msgid ""
++"You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the "
++"#include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-"
++"separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it "
++"outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. "
++"If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie können auch <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> verwenden, um die "
++"#include-Dateien anzugeben, die in den Abschnitten zur Inhaltsangabe gezeigt "
++"werden. Es enthält eine durch Kommata getrennte Liste von #include-Dateien "
++"ohne eckige Klammern. Wenn Sie es außerhalb aller Abschnitte festlegen, "
++"wirkt es in allen Abschnitten bis zum Dateiende. Wenn Sie es innerhalb eines "
++"Abschnitts festlegen, wirkt es nur in diesem Abschnitt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2195
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr "Überprüfung des Ergebnisses"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2197
++msgid ""
++"A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The "
++"generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and "
++"<filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text "
++"files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++"Ein GTK-Doc-Durchlauf erzeugt Protokolldateien im Dokumentationsordner. Die "
++"Namen der erzeugten Dateien sind: <filename><package>-undocumented."
++"txt</filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> und "
++"<filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. Sie liegen alle als "
++"Klartext vor und können daher einfach betrachtet und weiterverarbeitet "
++"werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2206
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with "
++"the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank "
++"lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The "
++"second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, "
++"which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++"Die Datei <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> beginnt mit "
++"der Zusammenfassung der Dokumentation. Darunter sind zwei durch Leerzeilen "
++"getrennte Abschnitte. Der erste Abschnitt listet undokumentierte oder "
++"unvollständige Symbole. Der zweite Abschnitt macht das gleiche für "
++"Abschnitts-Dokumente. Unvollständige Einträge sind jene, welche "
++"Dokumentation haben, aber z.B. ein neuer Parameter hinzugefügt worden ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2215
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols "
++"given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found "
++"in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++"Die Datei <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> listet die in "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> gelieferten, aber nicht in "
++"den Quellen gefundenen Symbole. Prüfen Sie, ob diese entfernt oder falsch "
++"geschrieben wurden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2222
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, "
++"where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where "
++"to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Die Datei <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> listet Symbolnamen "
++"auf, in denen der GTK-Doc-Scanner Dokumentation gefunden hat, aber nicht "
++"weiß, wo sie abgelegt werden soll. Dies bedeutet, dass das Symbol noch nicht "
++"der Datei <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> hinzugefügt "
++"wurde."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2230
++msgid ""
++"Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile."
++"am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during "
++"<command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++"Aktivieren Sie oder fügen Sie die Zeile <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</"
++"option> in Makefile.am hinzu. Wenn zumindest GTK-Doc 1.9 installiert ist, so "
++"wird damit eine Plausibilitätsprüfung während <command>make check</command> "
++"ausgeführt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2237
++msgid ""
++"One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: "
++"<filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><"
++"package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first one can be compared with the "
++"section file if that is manually maintained. The second lists all "
++"declarations from the headers. If a symbol is missing one could check if "
++"this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++"Man kann sich auch die Dateien ansehen, die durch den Quellcode-Scanner "
++"erzeugt wurden: <filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> und "
++"<filename><package>-decl.txt</filename>. Die erste kann mit der "
++"Abschnittsdatei verglichen werden, falls diese händisch verwaltet wird. Die "
++"zweite listet alle Deklarationen aus den Kopfdateien. Falls ein Symbol fehlt "
++"kann man prüfen, ob diese Datei es enthält."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2246
++msgid ""
++"If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced "
++"by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>."
++"prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</"
++"filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask GTK-Doc "
++"to keep the intermediate scanner file for further analysis, by running it as "
++"<command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn das Projekt auf GObject basiert, kann man auch in die Dateien schauen, "
++"die der Objekt-Scanner erzeugt hat: <filename><package>.args.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>."
++"prerequisites.txt</filename> und <filename><package>.signals.txt</"
++"filename>. Falls in irgendeiner Datei Symbole fehlen, können Sie Gtk-Doc "
++"anweisen, die zwischenläufige Scanner-Datei zur weiteren Analyse zu "
++"behalten, indem Sie <command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command> "
++"ausführen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2261
++msgid "Modernizing the documentation"
++msgstr "Die Dokumentation modernisieren"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2263
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc has been around for quite some time. In this section we list new "
++"features together with the version since when it is available."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc ist schon seit längerer Zeit verfügbar. In diesem Abschnitt zeigen "
++"wir neue Features und die Version, mit der sie eingeführt wurden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2269
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2271
++msgid ""
++"When using xml instead of sgml, one can actually name the master document "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn Sie XML anstatt SGML verwenden, können Sie das Hauptdokument "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> nennen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2276
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from "
++"the vcs. This only works nicely for projects that have a very regular "
++"structure (e.g. each .{c,h} pair will create new section). If one organize a "
++"project close to that updating a manually maintained section file can be as "
++"simple as running <code>meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-"
++"sections.txt</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Diese Version unterstützt <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> "
++"in <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Wenn dies aktiviert ist, wird die Datei "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> automatisch erzeugt und "
++"kann aus der Versionsverwaltung entfernt werden. Dies funktioniert nur "
++"sauber in Projekten, die eine strikt »reguläre« Struktur haben (zum Beispiel "
++"erzeugt jedes .{c,h}-Paar einen neuen Abschnitt). In einem solch sauber "
++"organisierten Projekt kann dann mit dem Befehl <code>meld <package>-"
++"decl-list.txt <package>-sections.txt</code> eine manuell verwaltete "
++"Abschnittsdatei sehr einfach aktualisiert werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2287
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.8 already introduced the syntax for documenting sections in the "
++"sources instead of the separate files under <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">tmpl</filename>. This version adds options to switch the whole doc module "
++"to not use the extra tmpl build step at all, by using <option>--flavour no-"
++"tmpl</option> in <filename>configure.ac</filename>. If you don't have a "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> checked into your source "
++"control system and haven't yet switched, just add the flag to "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> and you are done."
++msgstr ""
++"In Version 1.8 wurde bereits die Syntax für Dokumentationsabschnitte in den "
++"Quelltexten anstelle von separaten Dateien unter <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">tmpl</filename> eingeführt. Diese Version fügt Optionen zur Umstellung "
++"des gesamten Dokumentationsmoduls auf das neue Verhalten hinzu, so dass kein "
++"zusätzlicher tmpl-Erstellungsschritt mehr nötig ist. Dazu dient die Option "
++"<option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> in <filename>configure.ac</filename>. "
++"Wenn Sie keinen Ordner namens <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> "
++"in die Versionsverwaltung eingestellt haben und noch nicht umgestellt haben, "
++"fügen Sie einfach die Option zu <filename>configure.ac</filename> hinzu, und "
++"die Sache ist erledigt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2299
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2301
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from the "
++"vcs. When using this feature it is important to also setup the "
++"<varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> in <filename>Makefile.am</filename> for "
++"code that is build conditionally."
++msgstr ""
++"Diese Version unterstützt <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-typess</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Wenn dies aktiviert ist, wird die Datei "
++"<filename><package>.types</filename> automatisch erzeugt und kann aus "
++"der Versionsverwaltung entfernt werden. Dieses Feature erfordert die "
++"Einrichtung von <varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> in <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename> für Code, der nur unter bestimmten Bedingungen erstellt werden "
++"soll."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2312
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2318
++msgid "Enable gtkdoc-check"
++msgstr "gtkdoc-check einschalten"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2319
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2314
++msgid ""
++"This version includes a new tool called gtkdoc-check. This tool can run a "
++"set of sanity checks on your documentation. It is enabled by adding these "
++"lines to the end of <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Diese Version führt ein neues Werkzeug namens gtkdoc-check ein. Damit können "
++"Sie eine Reihe von Plausibilitätsprüfungen auf Ihre Dokumentation anwenden. "
++"Um es zu aktivieren, fügen Sie folgende Zeilen am Ende von "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename> hinzu. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2332
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2334
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.18 brought some initial markdown support. Using markdown in doc "
++"comments is less intrusive than writing docbook xml. This version improves a "
++"lot on this and add a lot more styles. The section that explains the <link "
++"linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">comment syntax</link> has all the details."
++msgstr ""
++"In Version 1.18 wurde erstmals Unterstützung für Markdown eingeführt. Die "
++"Verwendung von Markdown in Dokumentationskommentaren ist weniger aufwändig "
++"als das Schreiben von DocBook XML. Diese Version bringt diesbezüglich "
++"wesentliche Verbesserungen und fügt zahlreiche weitere Stile hinzu. Alle "
++"Details hierzu finden Sie im Abschnitt zur <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax"
++"\">Kommentarsyntax</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2344
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2355
++msgid "Use pre-generated entities"
++msgstr "Vorerzeugte Entitäten verwenden"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2356
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for &package_string;.\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for &package_string;.\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2346
++msgid ""
++"The makefiles shipped with this version generate an entity file at "
++"<filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename>, containing entities for e.g. "
++"package_name and package_version. You can use this e.g. in the main xml file "
++"to avoid hardcoding the version number. Below is an example that shows how "
++"the entity file is included in the master template and how the entities are "
++"used. The entities can also be used in all generated files, GTK-Doc will use "
++"the same xml header in generated xml files. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Die in dieser Version enthaltenen Make-Steuerdateien erzeugen die "
++"Entitätsdatei <filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename>, die Entitäten für "
++"beispielsweise package_name und package_version enthält. Sie können diese in "
++"der XML-Hauptdatei verwenden, um eine fest codierte Versionsnummer zu "
++"vermeiden. Nachfolgend finden Sie ein Beispiel, wie die Entitätsdatei "
++"einbezogen wird und und wie die Einträge verwendet werden. Die Entitäten "
++"können auch in allen generierten Dateien verwendet werden. GTK-Doc verwendet "
++"die gleichen XML-Kopfeinträge auch in generierten Dateien. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2381
++msgid "Documenting other interfaces"
++msgstr "Dokumentieren anderer Schnittstellen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2383
++msgid ""
++"So far we have been using GTK-Doc to document the API of code. The next "
++"sections contain suggestions how the tools can be used to document other "
++"interfaces too."
++msgstr ""
++"Bis jetzt haben wir GTK-Doc nur dazu verwendet, die API des Codes zu "
++"dokumentieren. In den nächsten Abschnitten finden Sie Vorschläge, wie die "
++"Werkzeuge zum Dokumentieren anderer Schnittstellen eingesetzt werden können."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2390
++msgid "Command line options and man pages"
++msgstr "Befehlszeilenoptionen und Handbuchseiten"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2392
++msgid ""
++"As one can generate man pages for a docbook refentry as well, it sounds like "
++"a good idea to use it for that purpose. This way the interface is part of "
++"the reference and one gets the man-page for free."
++msgstr ""
++"Weil man ebenso man-Hilfeseiten für einen docbook-Referenzeintrag erstellen "
++"kann, klingt es nach einer guten Idee, es für diesen Zweck einzusetzen. Auf "
++"diese Weise ist die Schnittstelle Teil der Referenz und man erhält "
++"kostenfrei die man-Hilfeseite."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2399
++msgid "Document the tool"
++msgstr "Dokumentieren des Werkzeuges"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2401
++msgid ""
++"Create one refentry file per tool. Following <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">our example</link> we would call it <filename>meep/"
++"docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. For the xml tags that should be "
++"used and can look at generated file in the xml subdirectory as well as "
++"examples e.g. in glib."
++msgstr ""
++"Erstellen Sie eine Referenzeintragsdatei pro Werkzeug. In <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">unserem Beispiel</link> nennen wir sie <filename>meep/"
++"docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. Für die zu verwendenden XML-"
++"Markierungen können Sie die generierte Datei im XML-Unterordner oder "
++"Beispiele (z.B. in glib) ansehen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2411
++msgid "Adding the extra configure check"
++msgstr "Hinzufügen der zusätzlichen Configure-Überprüfungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2414 C/index.docbook:2432
++msgid "Extra configure checks"
++msgstr "Zusätzliche Configure-Überprüfungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2415
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2429
++msgid "Adding the extra makefile rules"
++msgstr "Hinzufügen der zusätzlichen Makefile-Regeln"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2433
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2455
++msgid "DBus interfaces"
++msgstr "DBus-Schnittstellen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2457
++msgid ""
++"(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++msgstr ""
++"(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2466
++msgid "Frequently asked questions"
++msgstr "Häufig gestellte Fragen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2470
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "Frage"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2471
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "Antwort"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2473
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Keine Klassenhierarchie."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2474
++msgid ""
++"The objects <function>xxx_get_type()</function> function has not been "
++"entered into the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Die <function>xxx_get_type()</function>-Funktion des Objekts wurde nicht in "
++"die Datei <filename><package>.types</filename> eingegeben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2480
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Noch immer keine Klassenhierarchie."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2481
++msgid ""
++"Missing or wrong naming in <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> "
++"file (see <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-doc-list/2003-"
++"October/msg00006.html\">explanation</ulink>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Fehlende oder falsche Benennung in der Datei <filename><Paket>-"
++"sections.txt</filename> (lesen Sie die <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/"
++"archives/gtk-doc-list/2003-October/msg00006.html\">Erklärung</ulink>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2487
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Verdammt, ich habe immer noch keine Klassenhierarchie."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2488
++msgid ""
++"Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <type>GtkWidget</"
++"type>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private "
++"subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++"Ist der Objektname (Name des Instanz-struct, z.B. <type>GtkWidget</type>) "
++"Teil des normalen Abschnitts (nicht in den Standard- oder Unterabschnitten)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2495
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr "Kein Symbolindex."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2496
++msgid ""
++"Does the <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contain a "
++"index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++"Enthält <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> einen Index, "
++"der den erstellten Index xi:enthält?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2502
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr "Symbole werden nicht mit deren Dokumentationsabschnitt verknüpft."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2503
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the "
++"gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++"Verwendet das doc-comment das richtige Markup (hinzugefügtes »#«,»%« oder "
++"»()«)? Prüfen Sie, ob gtkdoc-fixxref wegen nicht auflösbarer xrefs warnt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2509
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "Eine neue Klasse erscheint nicht in der Dokumentation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2510
++msgid ""
++"Is the new page xi:included from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Ist die neue Seite xi:eingebunden von <filename><package>-docs.{xml,"
++"sgml}</filename>?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2516
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "Ein neues Symbol erscheint nicht in der Dokumentation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2517
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the "
++"begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable "
++"xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++"Ist doc-comment ordnungsgemäß formatiert? Prüfen Sie den Anfang des "
++"Dokuments auf Rechtschreibfehler im Kommentar. Prüfen Sie, ob gtkdoc-fixxref "
++"wegen unauflösbarer xrefs warnt. Prüfen Sie, ob das Symbol richtig in "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> in einem öffentlichen "
++"Abschnitt gelistet ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2525
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Ein Typ fehlt in der Klassenhierarchie."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2526
++msgid ""
++"If the type is listed in <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> but "
++"not in <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> then double check that the "
++"type is correctly placed in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>. If the type instance (e.g. <type>GtkWidget</type>) is not listed "
++"or incidentally marked private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn der Typ in <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> gelistet ist, "
++"aber nicht in <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename>, dann prüfen Sie "
++"sorgfältig, ob der Typ ordnungsgemäß in <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> abgelegt ist. Falls die Typ-Instanz (z.B. <type>GtkWidget</"
++"type>) nicht aufgelistet oder versehentlich als privat markiert ist, so wird "
++"sie nicht angezeigt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2535
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr "Ich erhalte foldoc-Verweise für alle gobjekt-Anmerkungen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2536
++msgid ""
++"Check that <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> is xi:included "
++"from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Prüfen Sie, ob <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> von "
++"<filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> xi:eingebunden ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2544
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr ""
++"Parameter wird im Kommentarblock des Quellcodes beschrieben, aber existiert "
++"nicht"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2545
++msgid ""
++"Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the "
++"source."
++msgstr ""
++"Überprüfen Sie, ob die Parameternamen der Prototypen in der Quelle und im "
++"Header unterschiedlich sind."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2550
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr "Mehrfache »IDs« für »constraint linkend: XYZ«"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2551
++msgid ""
++"Symbol XYZ appears twice in <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Das Symbol XYZ erscheint zweifach in der Datei <filename><package>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2554
++msgid ""
++"Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template "
++"matches."
++msgstr ""
++"Element-Typname im Namensraum '' in einem Abschnitt, der keiner Vorlage "
++"entspricht."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2561
++msgid "Tools related to gtk-doc"
++msgstr "Werkzeuge mit Bezug zu gtk-doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2563
++msgid ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - a <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac "
++"GTK-Doc</ulink> integration plugin, that adds API docs to a trac site and "
++"integrates with the trac search."
++msgstr ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - ein <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin"
++"\">Trac GTK-Doc</ulink> Integrations-Plugin, das API-Dokumente zu einer trac-"
++"Seite hinzufügt und die trac-Suche einbindet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2568
++msgid ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - a tool (part of gtk-doc) to check used API against since "
++"tags in the API to determine the minimum required version."
++msgstr ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - ein Werkzeug (Teil von gtk-doc), um die verwendete API für "
++"die minimal erforderliche Version zu prüfen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/releaseinfo
++#: C/index.docbook:12 C/fdl-appendix.xml:12
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr "Version 1.1, März 2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:15
++msgid "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/index.docbook:20
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:19 C/fdl-appendix.xml:19
++msgid ""
++"<_:address-1/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies "
++"of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr ""
++"<_:address-1/>. Es ist jedermann erlaubt, wortwörtliche Kopien dieses "
++"Lizenzdokuments zu erstellen und zu verbreiten, Änderungen sind jedoch nicht "
++"zulässig. Dies ist eine inoffizielle Übersetzung der GNU Free Documentation "
++"License (GFDL), Version 1.1, ins Deutsche. Sie wurde nicht von der Free "
++"Software Foundation veröffentlicht, und legt nicht gesetzlich die "
++"Verteilungsbedingungen für Dokumente fest, die die GFDL nutzen -- nur der "
++"<ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/fdl.html\">originale "
++"englische Text</ulink> der GFDL tut dies. Wie auch immer, ich hoffe, dass "
++"sie Deutschsprachigen hilft, die GFDL besser zu verstehen. Dieser Text wurde "
++"von der spanischen Version übertragen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendix/title
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/index.docbook:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:642
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr "GNU Freie Dokumentationslizenz"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:31 C/fdl-appendix.xml:31
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr "0. VORWORT"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"Der Zweck dieser Lizenz ist es, eine Anleitung, ein Textbuch oder andere "
++"geschriebene Dokumente <quote>frei</quote> im Sinne von Freiheit zu halten: "
++"jedem die effektive Freiheit zu sichern, es zu kopieren und weiter zu "
++"verteilen, mit oder ohne es zu ändern, entweder kommerziell oder "
++"nichtkommerziell. Zweitens sichert diese Lizenz dem Autor und "
++"Veröffentlicher einen Weg, Anerkennung für seine Arbeit zu bekommen, ohne "
++"dabei für Änderungen anderer verantwortlich zu sein."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that "
++"derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. "
++"It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license "
++"designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++"Diese Lizenz ist eine Art <quote>copyleft</quote>, das heißt, dass "
++"abgeleitete Arbeiten des Dokumentes selbst wieder im gleichen Sinne frei "
++"sein müssen. Es ergänzt die GNU General Public License, die eine Copyleft-"
++"Lizenz für freie Software darstellt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:50 C/fdl-appendix.xml:50
++msgid ""
++"We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free "
++"software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program "
++"should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. "
++"But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any "
++"textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a "
++"printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose "
++"is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++"Wir haben diese Lizenz gestaltet, um sie für Anleitungen von freier Software "
++"zu benutzen, weil freie Software freie Dokumentation benötigt: Ein freies "
++"Programm sollte mit Anleitungen kommen, die dieselbe Freiheit wie die "
++"Software bieten. Aber diese Lizenz ist nicht auf Software-Anleitungen "
++"beschränkt; sie kann für alle textlichen Arbeiten verwendet werden, "
++"unabhängig vom Thema, oder ob es als gedrucktes Buch veröffentlicht wird. "
++"Wir empfehlen diese Lizenz prinzipiell für Arbeiten, deren Zweck Anleitungen "
++"oder Referenzen sind."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:62 C/fdl-appendix.xml:62
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr "1. ANWENDBARKEIT UND DEFINITIONEN"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such "
++"manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "
++"<quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Diese Lizenz betrifft jede Anleitung oder andere Arbeit, die einen Hinweis "
++"des Copyright-Halters enthält, welcher besagt, dass sie unter den "
++"Bedingungen dieser Lizenz verteilt werden kann. Das <quote>Dokument</quote>, "
++"weiter unten, bezieht sich auf jede dieser Anleitungen oder Arbeiten. Jedes "
++"Mitglied der Öffentlichkeit ist ein Lizenznehmer, und wird mit <quote>Sie</"
++"quote> bezeichnet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:72
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing "
++"the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with "
++"modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"Eine <quote>Modifizierte Version</quote> von dem Dokument bezeichnet "
++"jegliche Arbeit, die das Dokument oder einen Teil davon enthält, entweder "
++"wortwörtlich kopiert oder mit Modifikationen und/oder in eine andere Sprache "
++"übersetzt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:79
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter "
++"section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals "
++"exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the "
++"Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and "
++"contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For "
++"example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary "
++"Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter "
++"of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of "
++"legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding "
++"them."
++msgstr ""
++"Ein <quote>Sekundärer Abschnitt</quote> ist ein benannter Anhang oder ein "
++"wichtiger Abschnitt des <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokumentes</link>, "
++"der exklusiv mit der Beziehung des Veröffentlichers zu dem Gesamtthema des "
++"Dokumentes (oder verwandten Themen) handelt und nichts enthält, was direkt "
++"unter das Gesamtthema fällt. (Wenn zum Beispiel das Dokument teilweise ein "
++"Textbuch der Mathematik ist, erklärt ein <quote>Sekundärer Abschnitt</quote> "
++"keine Mathematik.) Die Beziehung könnte eine Angelegenheit einer "
++"historischen Verbindung mit dem Thema oder einer verwandten Sache sein, oder "
++"einer gesetzlichen, kommerziellen, philosophischen, ethnischen oder "
++"politischen Position ihr gegenüber."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:94
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being "
++"those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"<quote>Unveränderliche Abschnitte</quote> sind spezielle <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Sekundäre Abschnitte</link>, deren Titel in dem Hinweis, der "
++"besagt, dass das <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokument</link> unter dieser "
++"Lizenz veröffentlicht ist, gekennzeichnet sind, Unveränderte Abschnitte zu "
++"sein."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:103
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are "
++"listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says "
++"that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under "
++"this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Die <quote>Covertexte</quote> sind spezielle kurze Textpassagen, die, als "
++"Vorderseitentexte oder Rückseitentexte, in dem Hinweis aufgeführt sind, der "
++"besagt, dass das <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokument</link> unter dieser "
++"Lizenz veröffentlicht ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:111
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> "
++"Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose "
++"specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be "
++"viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors "
++"or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) "
++"some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text "
++"formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for "
++"input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file "
++"format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent "
++"modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "
++"<quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Eine <quote>Transparente</quote> Kopie des <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Dokumentes</link> meint eine maschinenlesbare Kopie, die in einem der "
++"Allgemeinheit zugänglichen Format repräsentiert ist, deren Inhalt direkt und "
++"einfach mit gebräuchlichen Texteditoren oder (bei aus Pixeln bestehenden "
++"Bildern) gebräuchlichen Zeichenprogrammen oder (bei Bildern) weit "
++"verbreiteten Bildverarbeitungsprogramm besehen und verändert werden kann, "
++"und das geeignet ist, in Textformatierern eingegeben werden zu können oder "
++"automatisch in eine Vielzahl von Formaten übersetzt werden kann, die "
++"geeignet sind, in Textformatierern eingegeben werden zu können. Eine Kopie "
++"in einem anderen Transparenten Dateiformat, dessen Aufbau gestaltet wurde, "
++"eine ständige Veränderung durch den Leser zu vereiteln oder abzuwenden, ist "
++"nicht Transparent. Eine Kopie die nicht <quote>Transparent</quote> ist, "
++"nennt man <quote>Undurchsichtig</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:128 C/fdl-appendix.xml:128
++msgid ""
++"Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII "
++"without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using "
++"a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for "
++"human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary "
++"formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, "
++"SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally "
++"available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors "
++"for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++"Beispiele von passenden Formaten für Transparente Kopien enthalten reines "
++"ASCII ohne Codierung, das Texinfo-Eingabeformat, das LaTeX-Eingabeformat, "
++"SGML oder XML die eine öffentlich zugängliche DTD nutzen, und dem Standard "
++"entsprechendes HTML, das für die Veränderung durch Menschen gestaltet wurde. "
++"Undurchsichtige Formate enthalten PostScript, PDF, proprietäre Formate die "
++"nur von proprietären Textverarbeitungen gelesen und bearbeitet werden, SGML "
++"oder XML für die die DTD und/oder die Verarbeitungswerkzeuge nicht allgemein "
++"erhältlich sind, und maschinengeneriertes HTML, das von einigen "
++"Textverarbeitungen nur zu Ausgabezwecken produziert wurde."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:141
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page "
++"itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the "
++"material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in "
++"formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> "
++"means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, "
++"preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++"Die <quote>Titelseite</quote> meint bei einem gedruckten Buch die Titelseite "
++"selbst, und die folgenden Seiten, die gebraucht werden, um leserlich das "
++"Material zu beinhalten, das die Lizenz benötigt, um auf der Titelseite zu "
++"erscheinen. Für Arbeiten, die als solche keine Titelseiten haben, meint "
++"<quote>Titelseite</quote> den Text, der der wirkungsvollsten Erscheinung des "
++"Arbeitstitels am nächsten kommt und den Textkörper einleitet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:153 C/fdl-appendix.xml:153
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr "3. WORTWÖRTLICHE KOPIEN"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that "
++"this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this "
++"License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you "
++"add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use "
++"technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of "
++"the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in "
++"exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you "
++"must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen das <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokument</link> auf jedem "
++"Medium kopieren und verteilen, entweder kommerziell oder nichtkommerziell, "
++"vorausgesetzt, dass die Lizenz, die Copyrighthinweise und der Lizenzhinweis, "
++"der besagt, dass die Lizenz für das Dokument gilt, in allen Kopien "
++"reproduziert werden, und dass Sie keine wie auch immer lautenden andere "
++"Bedingungen als die der Lizenz hinzufügen. Sie dürfen keine technischen "
++"Möglichkeiten nutzen, die das Lesen oder Weiterkopieren der Kopien, die Sie "
++"machen oder weiterkopieren, kontrollieren oder behindern. Wie auch immer, "
++"Sie dürfen im Gegenzug Vergütungen für Kopien akzeptieren. Wenn Sie eine "
++"genügend große Anzahl von Kopien verteilen, müssen Sie auch den Bedingungen "
++"in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">Abschnitt 3</link> zustimmen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:169 C/fdl-appendix.xml:169
++msgid ""
++"You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you "
++"may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen auch Kopien unter den oben genannten Bedingungen verleihen, und "
++"Sie dürfen Kopien öffentlich zeigen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:176 C/fdl-appendix.xml:176
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr "3. KOPIEREN IN MENGEN"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license "
++"notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you "
++"must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these "
++"Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on "
++"the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as "
++"the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title "
++"with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as "
++"verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn Sie mehr als 100 gedruckte Kopien des <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Dokumentes</link> veröffentlichen, und die Lizenz des Dokumentes <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover-Texte</link> verlangt, müssen Sie die "
++"Kopien in Verpackungen einschließen, die sauber und leserlich all diese "
++"Cover-Texte enthalten: Vorderseitentexte auf der Vorderseite, und "
++"Rückseitentexte auf der Rückseite. Beide Seiten müssen auch sauber und "
++"leserlich Sie als den Veröffentlicher dieser Kopien identifizieren. Die "
++"Vorderseite muß den vollen Titel mit allen Wörtern des Titels gleich "
++"auffällig und sichtbar darstellen. Sie dürfen andere Materialien zusätzlich "
++"der Seite hinzufügen. Kopieren mit Veränderungen der Seiten, solange diese "
++"den Titel des <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokumentes</link> absichern und "
++"diese Bedingungen erfüllen, können in anderer Hinsicht als wortwörtliche "
++"Kopien behandelt werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:195 C/fdl-appendix.xml:195
++msgid ""
++"If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, "
++"you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the "
++"actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn die geforderten Texte für jede Seite zu groß sind, um leserlich darauf "
++"zu passen, sollten Sie die erstgenannten (so viele wie vernünftig darauf "
++"passen) auf die aktuelle Seite setzen, und mit dem Rest auf angrenzenden "
++"Seiten fortfahren."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> "
++"copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more "
++"than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state "
++"in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location "
++"containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added "
++"material, which the general network-using public has access to download "
++"anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use "
++"the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin "
++"distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent "
++"copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one "
++"year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through "
++"your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn Sie mehr als 100 <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Undurchsichtige "
++"Kopien</link> des <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokumentes</link> "
++"veröffentlichen oder verteilen, müssen Sie entweder zusammen mit jeder "
++"Undurchsichtigen Kopie eine <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparente "
++"Kopie</link> einfügen, oder in oder mit jeder Undurchsichtigen Kopie eine "
++"öffentlich zugängliche Computer-Netzwerk-Adresse angeben, die eine komplette "
++"Transparente Kopie des Dokumentes enthält, die frei von hinzugefügtem "
++"Material ist und die sich die allgemeine netzwerknutzende Öffentlichkeit mit "
++"Standard-Netzwerkprotokollen unentgeltlich herunterladen kann. Wenn Sie die "
++"letzte Option verwenden, müssen Sie, wenn Sie beginnen, Undurchsichtige "
++"Kopien in Mengen zu verteilen, vernünftige umsichtige Schritte unternehmen, "
++"die sicherstellen, dass die Transparente Kopie unter der genannten Adresse "
++"mindestens ein Jahr, nachdem Sie das letzte Mal eine Undurchsichtige Kopie "
++"dieser Edition (direkt oder über Ihre Vermittler oder Händler) an die "
++"Öffentlichkeit verteilt haben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any "
++"large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated "
++"version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"Es wird erbeten, aber nicht verlangt, dass Sie die Autoren des <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Dokumentes</link> kontaktieren, bevor Sie eine große Anzahl "
++"an Kopien weiterverteilen, um ihnen zu ermöglichen, Sie mit einer "
++"aktualisierten Version des Dokumentes zu versorgen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:231 C/fdl-appendix.xml:231
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr "4. MODIFIKATIONEN"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under "
++"the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the "
++"Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version "
++"filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen eine <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modifizierte Version</link> "
++"eines <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokumentes</link> unter den in den "
++"Abschnitten <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> und <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"section3\">3</link> oben stehenden Bedingungen kopieren und verteilen, "
++"vorausgesetzt, Sie veröffentlichen die Modifizierte Version unter genau "
++"dieser Lizenz, so dass die modifizierte Version die Stelle des Dokumentes "
++"einnimmt, folglich auch das Lizenzieren der Verteilung und Modifikation der "
++"Modifizierten Version an jeden, der eine Kopie davon besitzt. Zusätzlich "
++"müssen Sie diese Dinge in der Modifizierten Version tun:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:248 C/fdl-appendix.xml:248
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "A"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the "
++"covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which "
++"should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the "
++"Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original "
++"publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Auf der <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Titelseite</link> (und auf den "
++"Covern, falls vorhanden) einen Titel verwenden, der sich von dem des <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokumentes</link> unterscheidet, und von denen "
++"vorhergehender Versionen (die, falls vorhanden, in dem History-Abschnitt des "
++"Dokumentes aufgeführt sein sollten). Sie dürfen denselben Titel wie in einer "
++"vorhergehenden Version nutzen, wenn der ursprüngliche Veröffentlicher sein "
++"Einverständnis gibt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:264 C/fdl-appendix.xml:264
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "B"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, "
++"one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the "
++"modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has "
++"less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"Auf der <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Titelseite</link>, eine oder "
++"mehrere Personen als Autoren benennen, die für das Einbringen von "
++"Veränderungen in die <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modifizierte Version</"
++"link> verantwortlich sind, zusammen mit mindesten fünf eigentlichen Autoren "
++"des <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokumentes</link> (allen eigentlichen "
++"Autoren, wenn es weniger als fünf sind)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:279 C/fdl-appendix.xml:279
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "C"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of "
++"the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++"Auf der <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Titelseite</link> den Namen des "
++"Veröffentlichers der <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modifizierten Version</"
++"link> als Veröffentlicher kennzeichnen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:291 C/fdl-appendix.xml:291
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "D"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:292
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Alle Copyright-Hinweise des <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokumentes</link> "
++"beibehalten."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:301 C/fdl-appendix.xml:301
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "E"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:302 C/fdl-appendix.xml:302
++msgid ""
++"Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the "
++"other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++"Einen passenden Copyright-Hinweis für Ihre Modifikationen angrenzend an die "
++"anderen Copyright-Hinweise hinzufügen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:311 C/fdl-appendix.xml:311
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "F"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the "
++"Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Gleich hinter dem Copyright-Hinweis einen Lizenzhinweis einfügen, der die "
++"öffentliche Erlaubnis gibt, die <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modifizierte "
++"Version</link> unter den Bedingungen dieser Lizenz zu nutzen, in einer Form, "
++"die weiter unten im Anhang dargestellt ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:324 C/fdl-appendix.xml:324
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "G"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"In dem Lizenzhinweis die volle Liste der <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant"
++"\">Unveränderlichen Abschnitte</link> und benötigten <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Cover-Texte</link>, die in dem Lizenzhinweis des <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Dokumentes</link> gegeben ist, beibehalten."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:337 C/fdl-appendix.xml:337
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "H"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:338 C/fdl-appendix.xml:338
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr "Eine unveränderte Kopie dieser Lizenz einfügen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:346 C/fdl-appendix.xml:346
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "I"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add "
++"to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> as given on "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no "
++"section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and "
++"publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Den Abschnitt, der mit <quote>History</quote> (Geschichte) betitelt ist, und "
++"seinen Titel beibehalten und ihn zu einem Punkt hinzufügen, der mindestens "
++"Titel, Jahr, neue Autoren, und Veröffentlicher der <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"modified\">Modifizierten Version</link> wie auf der <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"title-page\">Titelseite</link> gegeben, benennt. Wenn es keinen mit "
++"<quote>History</quote> betitelten Abschnitt gibt, erstellen Sie einen, der "
++"den Titel, Jahr, Autoren, und Veröffentlicher des <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Dokumentes</link> wie auf der Titelseite gegeben, benennt, und "
++"fügen Sie dann einen Punkt hinzu, der die Modifizierte Version beschreibt "
++"wie im vorhergehenden Satz."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:365 C/fdl-appendix.xml:365
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "J"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the "
++"network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based "
++"on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit "
++"a network location for a work that was published at least four years before "
++"the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers "
++"to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Die Netzwerk-Adresse, falls aufgeführt, beibehalten, die im <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Dokument</link> aufgeführt ist, um öffentlichen Zugriff zu "
++"einer <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparenten</link> Kopie des "
++"Dokumentes zu ermöglichen, und genauso die Netzwerk-Adressen, die im "
++"Dokument für frühere Versionen, auf denen es basiert, aufgeführt sind. Diese "
++"können in den <quote>History</quote>-Abschnitt gestellt werden. Sie können "
++"eine Netzwerk-Adresse für ein Werk auslassen, das mindestens vier Jahre vor "
++"dem Dokument selbst veröffentlicht wurde, oder wenn der ursprüngliche Autor, "
++"auf den sich die jeweilige Version bezieht, es erlaubt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:383 C/fdl-appendix.xml:383
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "K"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in "
++"the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor "
++"acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"In jeglichem Abschnitt, der mit <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> "
++"(Anerkennungen) oder <quote>Dedications</quote> (Widmungen) betitelt ist, "
++"den Titel des Abschnittes beibehalten, und in dem Abschnitt allen Inhalt und "
++"Ton von jeder Anerkennung und/oder Widmung jedes Beitragenden beibehalten, "
++"der dort aufgeführt ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:396 C/fdl-appendix.xml:396
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "L"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their "
++"text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not "
++"considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Alle <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Unveränderlichen Abschnitte</link> des "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokumentes</link> beibehalten, unverändert in "
++"ihrem Text und ihren Titeln. Abschnittsnummern oder ähnliches werden nicht "
++"als Teil von Abschnittstiteln betrachtet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:409 C/fdl-appendix.xml:409
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "M"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may "
++"not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Alle Abschnitte, die mit <quote>Endorsements</quote> (Billigungen) betitelt "
++"sind, löschen. Solche Abschnitte dürfen nicht mit in die <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"modified\">Modifizierte Version</link> aufgenommen werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:421 C/fdl-appendix.xml:421
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "N"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to "
++"conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant "
++"Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Betiteln Sie keine existierenden Abschnitte mit <quote>Endorsements</quote> "
++"oder so, dass sie im Widerspruch zu Titeln von <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant"
++"\">Unveränderlichen Abschnitten</link> stehen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new "
++"front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from "
++"the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections "
++"as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's "
++"license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn die <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modifizierte Version</link> neue "
++"wichtige Abschnitte enthält oder Anhänge, die <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary"
++"\">Sekundäre Abschnitte</link> darstellen, und kein Material enthalten, das "
++"aus dem Dokument kopiert wurde, dürfen Sie nach Ihrer Wahl einige oder alle "
++"diese Abschnitte als Unveränderlich bezeichnen. Um dies zu tun, fügen Sie "
++"ihre Titel der Liste der <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Unveränderlichen "
++"Abschnitte</link> in dem Lizenzhinweis der Modifizierten Version hinzu. "
++"Diese Titel müssen sich von allen anderen Abschnittstiteln unterscheiden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it "
++"contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of "
++"peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the "
++"authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen einen Abschnitt <quote>Endorsements</quote> hinzufügen, "
++"vorausgesetzt, er enthält nichts außer Bewilligungen Ihrer <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modifizierten Version</link> von verschiedenen Seiten -- "
++"zum Beispiel Aussagen von Beurteilungen, oder dass der Text von einer "
++"Organisation als für die autoritäre Definition eines Standards befunden "
++"wurde."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list "
++"of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover "
++"Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements "
++"made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by "
++"you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, "
++"you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit "
++"permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen eine Passage aus bis zu fünf Wörtern als <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Vorderseitentext</link> hinzufügen, und eine Passage von bis "
++"zu 25 Wörtern als <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Rückseitentext</link>, "
++"ans Ende der Liste von <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Covertexten</link> "
++"in der <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modifizierten Version</link>. "
++"Höchstens eine Passage von Vorderseitentexten und eine von Rückseitentexten "
++"darf von (oder durch Abmachungen von) irgendeinem Wesen hinzugefügt werden. "
++"Wenn das <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokument</link> für die "
++"entsprechende Seite schon einen Covertext hat, der vorher von Ihnen oder "
++"durch Abmachungen von demselben Wesen, in dessen Namen Sie handeln, "
++"hinzugefügt wurde, dürfen Sie keinen anderen hinzufügen; aber Sie dürfen den "
++"alten, wenn es der ursprüngliche Veröffentlicher, der den alten hinzugefügt "
++"hat, explizit erlaubt, ersetzen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names "
++"for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Der/die Autor(en) und Veröffentlicher des <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Dokumentes</link> erteilen durch diese Lizenz nicht die Erlaubnis, ihre "
++"Namen für Veröffentlichungen für Bewilligungen irgendeiner <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modifizierten Version</link> oder deren Durchsetzungen oder "
++"Andeutungen zu nutzen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:480 C/fdl-appendix.xml:480
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "5. DOKUMENTE KOMBINIEREN"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with "
++"other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, "
++"unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in "
++"its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen das <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokument</link> mit anderen "
++"Dokumenten, die unter dieser Lizenz veröffentlicht wurden, unter den "
++"Bedingungen in <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">Abschnitt 4</link> für "
++"Modifizierte Versionen kombinieren, vorausgesetzt, Sie beinhalten in der "
++"Kombination alle <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Unveränderlichen "
++"Abschnitte</link> aller ursprünglichen Dokumente unverändert, und führen Sie "
++"alle als Unveränderliche Abschnitte Ihrer kombinierten Arbeit in deren "
++"Lizenzhinweis auf."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be "
++"replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with "
++"the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section "
++"unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original "
++"author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make "
++"the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections "
++"in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"Die kombinierte Arbeit braucht nur eine Kopie dieser Lizenz zu beinhalten, "
++"und mehrfache identische <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Unveränderliche "
++"Abschnitte</link> können durch eine einzige Kopie ersetzt werden. Wenn es "
++"mehrere Unveränderliche Abschnitte mit demselben Titel, aber "
++"unterschiedlichem Inhalt gibt, machen Sie den Titel jedes Abschnittes durch "
++"Hinzufügen (in Klammern) des Namens des ursprünglichen Autors oder "
++"Veröffentlichers dieses Abschnittes, falls bekannt, unverwechselbar, oder "
++"ansonsten durch eine einzigartige Nummer. Führen Sie dieselben Änderungen in "
++"der Liste der Unveränderlichen Abschnitte im Lizenzhinweis der kombinierten "
++"Arbeit durch."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</"
++"quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled "
++"<quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled "
++"<quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++"In der Kombination müssen Sie alle mit <quote>History</quote> betitelten "
++"Abschnitte aus den verschiedenen ursprünglichen Dokumenten zusammenführen, "
++"und daraus einen Abschnitt <quote>History</quote> bilden; genauso "
++"kombinieren Sie jeden mit <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> betitelten "
++"Abschnitt, und jeden mit <quote>Dedications</quote> betitelten Abschnitt. "
++"Sie müssen jeden mit <quote>Endorsements</quote> betitelten Abschnitt "
++"löschen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:516 C/fdl-appendix.xml:516
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "6. SAMMLUNGEN VON DOKUMENTEN"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and "
++"replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with "
++"a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow "
++"the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in "
++"all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen eine Sammlung erstellen, die aus dem <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Dokument</link> und anderen, unter dieser Lizenz veröffentlichten "
++"Dokumenten besteht, und die individuellen Kopien der Lizenz in den einzelnen "
++"Dokumenten durch eine einzige Kopie ersetzen, die sich in der Sammlung "
++"befindet, vorausgesetzt, Sie folgen den Regeln dieser Lizenz für "
++"wortwörtliches Kopieren jedes dieser Dokumente in jeglicher Hinsicht."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:527 C/fdl-appendix.xml:527
++msgid ""
++"You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it "
++"individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License "
++"into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects "
++"regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen ein einzelnes Dokument aus einer solchen Sammlung heraustrennen, "
++"und es individuell unter dieser Lizenz verteilen, vorausgesetzt, Sie fügen "
++"eine Kopie dieser Lizenz in das herausgetrennte Dokument ein und folgen der "
++"Lizenz in jeglicher Hinsicht bezüglich dem wortwörtlichen Kopieren des "
++"Dokuments."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:537 C/fdl-appendix.xml:537
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr "7. AGGREGATION MIT UNABHÄNGIGEN ARBEITEN"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its "
++"derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on "
++"a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, "
++"provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a "
++"compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</"
++"link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"Eine Zusammenstellung dieses <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokumentes</"
++"link> oder seinen Ableitungen mit anderen separaten und unabhängigen "
++"Dokumenten oder Arbeiten, in oder auf einem Teil eines Speicher- oder "
++"Verteilungsmediums, zählt nicht als Ganzes als <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Modifizierte Version</link> des Dokumentes, vorausgesetzt, kein Gesamt-"
++"Copyright wurde für die Zusammenstellung festgelegt. Solch eine "
++"Zusammenstellung wird <quote>Aggregat</quote> (Mischung) genannt, und diese "
++"Lizenz gilt nicht für die anderen selbstenthaltenen Arbeiten, die mit dem "
++"Dokument zusammengestellt wurden, im Falle, dass sie zusammengestellt "
++"wurden, wenn sie nicht selbst abgeleitete Arbeiten des Dokumentes sind. Wenn "
++"die <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Covertext</link>-Bedingung von <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section3\">Abschnitt 3</link> auf diese Kopien des Dokumentes "
++"anwendbar ist, dann können, wenn das Dokument weniger als ein Viertel des "
++"gesamten Aggregates ist, die Covertexte des Dokumentes auf Seiten platziert "
++"werden, die nur das Dokument innerhalb des Aggregates umgeben. Ansonsten "
++"müssen sie auf Seiten erscheinen, die das gesamte Aggregat umgeben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:561 C/fdl-appendix.xml:561
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr "8. ÜBERSETZUNG"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the "
++"terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations "
++"requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may "
++"include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the "
++"original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation "
++"of this License provided that you also include the original English version "
++"of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the "
++"original English version of this License, the original English version will "
++"prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"Übersetzung wird als eine Art Modifikation angesehen, also dürfen Sie "
++"Übersetzungen des <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokumentes</link> unter den "
++"Bedingungen von <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">Abschnitt 4</link> verteilen. "
++"Das Ersetzen von <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Unveränderlichen "
++"Abschnitten</link> mit Übersetzungen erfordert spezielle Einwilligung des "
++"Copyright-Halters, aber Sie dürfen Übersetzungen von einigen oder allen "
++"Unveränderlichen Abschnitten zusätzlich zu den ursprünglichen Versionen "
++"dieser Unveränderlichen Abschnitte einfügen. Sie dürfen eine Übersetzung "
++"dieser Lizenz hinzufügen, vorausgesetzt Sie beinhalten auch die "
++"ursprüngliche englische Version dieser Lizenz. Im Falle einer "
++"Nichtübereinstimmung zwischen der Übersetzung und der ursprünglichen "
++"englischen Version dieser Lizenz hat die ursprüngliche englische Version "
++"Vorrang."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:580 C/fdl-appendix.xml:580
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr "9. TERMINATION"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this "
++"License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the "
++"Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this "
++"License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you "
++"under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such "
++"parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen das <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokument</link> nicht "
++"kopieren, modifizieren, sublizenzieren oder verteilen, außer wie es diese "
++"Lizenz ausdrücklich vorschreibt. Jegliche andere Absicht, das Dokument zu "
++"kopieren, modifizieren, sublizenzieren oder verteilen, ist nichtig und "
++"beendet automatisch Ihre Rechte unter dieser Lizenz. Wie auch immer, "
++"Parteien, die Kopien oder Rechte von Ihnen unter dieser Lizenz bekommen "
++"haben, wird nicht die Lizenz beendet, solange diese Parteien in voller "
++"Zustimmung verbleiben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:594 C/fdl-appendix.xml:594
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr "10. ZUKÜNFTIGE REVISIONEN DIESER LIZENZ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:595
++msgid ""
++"The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU "
++"Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be "
++"similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to "
++"address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www."
++"gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Die <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> kann von Zeit zu Zeit neue, revidierte Versionen "
++"der GNU Free Documentation License veröffentlichen. Solche neue Versionen "
++"werden vom Grundprinzip her der vorliegenden Version gleichen, können sich "
++"aber im Detail unterscheiden, um neue Probleme oder Anliegen anzusprechen. "
++"Siehe auch <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft\">http://"
++"www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular "
++"numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies "
++"to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of "
++"that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not "
++"as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not "
++"specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever "
++"published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"Jeder Version dieser Lizenz wird eine unterscheidende Versionsnummer "
++"gegeben. Wenn das <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Dokument</link> angibt, "
++"dass eine spezielle Version dieser Lizenz <quote>oder eine spätere Version</"
++"quote> darauf zutrifft, haben Sie die Wahl, den Bestimmungen und Bedingungen "
++"von entweder der angegebenen Version oder einer beliebigen späteren Version, "
++"die von der Free Software Foundation (nicht als Entwurf) veröffentlicht "
++"wurde, zu folgen. Wenn das Dokument keine Versionsnummer angibt, können Sie "
++"irgendeine, jemals von der Free Software Foundation (nicht als Entwurf) "
++"veröffentlichte Version wählen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:621 C/fdl-appendix.xml:621
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr "Anhang"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:622 C/fdl-appendix.xml:622
++msgid ""
++"To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the "
++"License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices "
++"just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++"Um diese Lizenz in einem von Ihnen geschriebenen Dokument nutzen zu können, "
++"fügen Sie eine Kopie der Lizenz in das Dokument ein und setzen Sie die "
++"folgenden Copyright- und Lizenzhinweise gleich hinter die Titelseite:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:629 C/fdl-appendix.xml:629
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr "Copyright (c) JAHR IHR NAME."
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, "
++"and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being "
++"LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU "
++"Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Es wird die Erlaubnis gegeben, dieses Dokument zu kopieren, verteilen und/"
++"oder zu verändern unter den Bedingungen der GNU Free Documentation License, "
++"Version 1.1 oder einer späteren, von der Free Software Foundation "
++"veröffentlichten Version; mit den <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant"
++"\">Unveränderlichen Abschnitten</link>. DEREN TITEL AUFGEZÄHLT sind, mit den "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Vorderseitentexten</link>, die AUFGEZÄHLT "
++"sind, und mit den <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Rückseitentexten</link>, "
++"die AUFGEZÄHLT sind. Eine Kopie dieser Lizenz ist in dem Abschnitt "
++"enthalten, der mit <quote>GNU Free Documentation License</quote> betitelt "
++"ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, "
++"write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover "
++"Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of "
++"<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn Sie keine <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Unveränderlichen Abschnitte</"
++"link> haben, schreiben Sie <quote>mit keinen Unveränderlichen Abschnitten</"
++"quote>, anstatt anzugeben, welche unveränderlich sind. Wenn Sie keine <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Vorderseitentexte</link> haben, schreiben Sie "
++"<quote>keine Vorderseitentexte</quote> anstatt <quote>Vorderseitentexte die "
++"AUFGEZÄHLT sind</quote>; genauso bei den <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts"
++"\">Rückseitentexten</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++"gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn Ihr Dokument nicht-triviale Beispiele von Programmcode enthält, "
++"empfehlen wir, diese Beispiele parallel unter einer freien Software-Lizenz, "
++"wie der <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html"
++"\">GNU General Public License</ulink>, zu veröffentlichen, um ihren Gebrauch "
++"in freier Software zu erlauben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/year
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/holder
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/street
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++msgstr "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/city
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "Boston"
++msgstr "Boston"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/state
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "MA"
++msgstr "MA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/postcode
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "02110-1301"
++msgstr "02110-1301"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/country
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "USA"
++msgstr "USA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:34
++msgid "free"
++msgstr "frei"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <_:quote-1/> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"Der Zweck dieser Lizenz ist es, eine Anleitung, ein Textbuch oder andere "
++"geschriebene Dokumente <_:quote-1/> im Sinne von Freiheit zu halten: jedem "
++"die effektive Freiheit zu sichern, es zu kopieren und weiter zu verteilen, "
++"mit oder ohne es zu ändern, entweder kommerziell oder nichtkommerziell. "
++"Zweitens sichert diese Lizenz dem Autor und Veröffentlicher einen Weg, "
++"Anerkennung für seine Arbeit zu bekommen, ohne dabei für Änderungen anderer "
++"verantwortlich zu sein."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:44
++msgid "copyleft"
++msgstr "copyleft"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <_:quote-1/>, which means that derivative works of "
++"the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the "
++"GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"Diese Lizenz ist eine Art <_:quote-1/>, das heißt, dass abgeleitete Arbeiten "
++"des Dokumentes selbst wieder im gleichen Sinne frei sein müssen. Es ergänzt "
++"die GNU General Public License, die eine Copyleft-Lizenz für freie Software "
++"darstellt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:67 C/fdl-appendix.xml:82 C/fdl-appendix.xml:99
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:107 C/fdl-appendix.xml:113 C/fdl-appendix.xml:156
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:179 C/fdl-appendix.xml:190 C/fdl-appendix.xml:205
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:224 C/fdl-appendix.xml:235 C/fdl-appendix.xml:253
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:271 C/fdl-appendix.xml:294 C/fdl-appendix.xml:354
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:368 C/fdl-appendix.xml:400 C/fdl-appendix.xml:462
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:472 C/fdl-appendix.xml:482 C/fdl-appendix.xml:519
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:540 C/fdl-appendix.xml:565 C/fdl-appendix.xml:583
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:608
++msgid "Document"
++msgstr "Dokument"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:69
++msgid "you"
++msgstr "Sie"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <_:quote-1/>, below, refers to any such manual or work. "
++"Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <_:quote-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Diese Lizenz betrifft jede Anleitung oder andere Arbeit, die einen Hinweis "
++"des Copyright-Halters enthält, welcher besagt, dass sie unter den "
++"Bedingungen dieser Lizenz verteilt werden kann. Das <_:quote-1/>, weiter "
++"unten, bezieht sich auf jede dieser Anleitungen oder Arbeiten. Jedes "
++"Mitglied der Öffentlichkeit ist ein Lizenznehmer, und wird mit <_:quote-2/> "
++"bezeichnet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:73 C/fdl-appendix.xml:234 C/fdl-appendix.xml:269
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:283 C/fdl-appendix.xml:315 C/fdl-appendix.xml:351
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:413 C/fdl-appendix.xml:433 C/fdl-appendix.xml:447
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:459 C/fdl-appendix.xml:475 C/fdl-appendix.xml:543
++msgid "Modified Version"
++msgstr "Modifizierte Version"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:72
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a "
++"portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or "
++"translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"Eine <_:quote-1/> von dem Dokument bezeichnet jegliche Arbeit, die das "
++"Dokument oder einen Teil davon enthält, entweder wortwörtlich kopiert oder "
++"mit Modifikationen und/oder in eine andere Sprache übersetzt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:80
++msgid "Secondary Section"
++msgstr "Sekundärer Abschnitt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:79
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <_:"
++"link-2/> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or "
++"authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related "
++"matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall "
++"subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, "
++"a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could "
++"be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related "
++"matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political "
++"position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++"Ein <_:quote-1/> ist ein benannter Anhang oder ein wichtiger Abschnitt des "
++"<_:link-2/>, der exklusiv mit der Beziehung des Veröffentlichers zu dem "
++"Gesamtthema des Dokumentes (oder verwandten Themen) handelt und nichts "
++"enthält, was direkt unter das Gesamtthema fällt. (Wenn zum Beispiel das "
++"Dokument teilweise ein Textbuch der Mathematik ist, erklärt ein "
++"<quote>Sekundärer Abschnitt</quote> keine Mathematik.) Die Beziehung könnte "
++"eine Angelegenheit einer historischen Verbindung mit dem Thema oder einer "
++"verwandten Sache sein, oder einer gesetzlichen, kommerziellen, "
++"philosophischen, ethnischen oder politischen Position ihr gegenüber."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:95 C/fdl-appendix.xml:327 C/fdl-appendix.xml:398
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:439 C/fdl-appendix.xml:486 C/fdl-appendix.xml:494
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:567 C/fdl-appendix.xml:637 C/fdl-appendix.xml:648
++msgid "Invariant Sections"
++msgstr "Unveränderliche Abschnitte"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:96 C/fdl-appendix.xml:435
++msgid "Secondary Sections"
++msgstr "Sekundäre Abschnitte"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:94
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain <_:link-2/> whose titles are designated, as "
++"being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-3/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"<_:quote-1/> sind spezielle <_:link-2/>, deren Titel in dem Hinweis, der "
++"besagt, dass das <_:link-3/> unter dieser Lizenz veröffentlicht ist, "
++"gekennzeichnet sind, Unveränderliche Abschnitte zu sein."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:104 C/fdl-appendix.xml:181 C/fdl-appendix.xml:328
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:458
++msgid "Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Cover-Texte"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:103
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as "
++"Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-2/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Die <_:quote-1/> sind spezielle kurze Textpassagen, die, als "
++"Vorderseitentexte oder Rückseitentexte, in dem Hinweis aufgeführt sind, der "
++"besagt, dass das <_:link-2/> unter dieser Lizenz veröffentlicht ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:112 C/fdl-appendix.xml:124 C/fdl-appendix.xml:207
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:369
++msgid "Transparent"
++msgstr "transparente"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:125 C/fdl-appendix.xml:204
++msgid "Opaque"
++msgstr "Undurchsichtig"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:111
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> copy of the <_:link-2/> means a machine-readable copy, "
++"represented in a format whose specification is available to the general "
++"public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and "
++"straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of "
++"pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available "
++"drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for "
++"automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text "
++"formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup "
++"has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers "
++"is not Transparent. A copy that is not <_:quote-3/> is called <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Eine <_:quote-1/> Kopie des <_:link-2/> meint eine maschinenlesbare Kopie, "
++"die in einem der Allgemeinheit zugänglichen Format repräsentiert ist, deren "
++"Inhalt direkt und einfach mit gebräuchlichen Texteditoren oder (bei aus "
++"Pixeln bestehenden Bildern) gebräuchlichen Zeichenprogrammen oder (bei "
++"Bildern) weit verbreiteten Bildverarbeitungsprogramm besehen und verändert "
++"werden kann, und das geeignet ist, in Textformatierern eingegeben werden zu "
++"können oder automatisch in eine Vielzahl von Formaten übersetzt werden kann, "
++"die geeignet sind, in Textformatierern eingegeben werden zu können. Eine "
++"Kopie in einem anderen Transparenten Dateiformat, dessen Aufbau gestaltet "
++"wurde, eine ständige Veränderung durch den Leser zu vereiteln oder "
++"abzuwenden, ist nicht Transparent. Eine Kopie die nicht <quote>Transparent</"
++"quote> ist, nennt man <quote>Undurchsichtig</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:142 C/fdl-appendix.xml:146 C/fdl-appendix.xml:250
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:266 C/fdl-appendix.xml:281 C/fdl-appendix.xml:352
++msgid "Title Page"
++msgstr "Titelseite"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:141
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such "
++"following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License "
++"requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have "
++"any title page as such, <_:quote-2/> means the text near the most prominent "
++"appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the "
++"text."
++msgstr ""
++"Die <_:quote-1/> meint bei einem gedruckten Buch die Titelseite selbst, und "
++"die folgenden Seiten, die gebraucht werden, um leserlich das Material zu "
++"beinhalten, das die Lizenz benötigt, um auf der Titelseite zu erscheinen. "
++"Für Arbeiten, die als solche keine Titelseiten haben, meint <_:quote-2/> den "
++"Text, der der wirkungsvollsten Erscheinung des Arbeitstitels am nächsten "
++"kommt und den Textkörper einleitet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:166 C/fdl-appendix.xml:551
++msgid "section 3"
++msgstr "Abschnitt 3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <_:link-1/> in any medium, either "
++"commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright "
++"notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document "
++"are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions "
++"whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to "
++"obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or "
++"distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If "
++"you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the "
++"conditions in <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen das <_:link-1/> auf jedem Medium kopieren und verteilen, entweder "
++"kommerziell oder nichtkommerziell, vorausgesetzt, dass die Lizenz, die "
++"Copyrighthinweise und der Lizenzhinweis, der besagt, dass die Lizenz für das "
++"Dokument gilt, in allen Kopien reproduziert werden, und dass Sie keine wie "
++"auch immer lautenden andere Bedingungen als die der Lizenz hinzufügen. Sie "
++"dürfen keine technischen Möglichkeiten nutzen, die das Lesen oder "
++"Weiterkopieren der Kopien, die Sie machen oder weiterkopieren, kontrollieren "
++"oder behindern. Wie auch immer, Sie dürfen im Gegenzug Vergütungen für "
++"Kopien akzeptieren. Wenn Sie eine genügend große Anzahl von Kopien "
++"verteilen, müssen Sie auch den Bedingungen in <_:link-2/> zustimmen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <_:link-1/> numbering more than 100, "
++"and the Document's license notice requires <_:link-2/>, you must enclose the "
++"copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: "
++"Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back "
++"cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the "
++"publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with "
++"all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <_:link-3/> and satisfy "
++"these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn Sie mehr als 100 gedruckte Kopien des<_:link-1/> veröffentlichen, und "
++"die Lizenz des Dokumentes <_:link-2/> verlangt, müssen Sie die Kopien in "
++"Verpackungen einschließen, die sauber und leserlich all diese Cover-Texte "
++"enthalten: Vorderseitentexte auf der Vorderseite, und Rückseitentexte auf "
++"der Rückseite. Beide Seiten müssen auch sauber und leserlich Sie als den "
++"Veröffentlicher dieser Kopien identifizieren. Die Vorderseite muß den vollen "
++"Titel mit allen Wörtern des Titels gleich auffällig und sichtbar darstellen. "
++"Sie dürfen andere Materialien zusätzlich der Seite hinzufügen. Kopieren mit "
++"Veränderungen der Seiten, solange diese den Titel des <_:link-3/> "
++"beibehalten und diese Bedingungen erfüllen, können in anderer Hinsicht als "
++"wortwörtliche Kopien behandelt werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <_:link-1/> copies of the <_:link-2/> numbering "
++"more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <_:link-3/> copy "
++"along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-"
++"accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy "
++"of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using "
++"public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard "
++"network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably "
++"prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to "
++"ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated "
++"location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an "
++"Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition "
++"to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn Sie mehr als 100 <_:link-1/> Kopien des <_:link-2/> veröffentlichen "
++"oder verteilen, müssen Sie entweder zusammen mit jeder Undurchsichtigen "
++"Kopie eine maschinenlesbare <_:link-3/> Kopie einfügen, oder in oder mit "
++"jeder Undurchsichtigen Kopie eine öffentlich zugängliche Computer-Netzwerk-"
++"Adresse angeben, die eine komplette Transparente Kopie des Dokumentes "
++"enthält, die frei von hinzugefügtem Material ist und die sich die allgemeine "
++"netzwerknutzende Öffentlichkeit mit Standard-Netzwerkprotokollen "
++"unentgeltlich herunterladen kann. Wenn Sie die letzte Option verwenden, "
++"müssen Sie, wenn Sie beginnen, Undurchsichtige Kopien in Mengen zu "
++"verteilen, vernünftige umsichtige Schritte unternehmen, die sicherstellen, "
++"dass die Transparente Kopie unter der genannten Adresse mindestens ein Jahr, "
++"nachdem Sie das letzte Mal eine Undurchsichtige Kopie dieser Edition (direkt "
++"oder über Ihre Vermittler oder Händler) an die Öffentlichkeit verteilt haben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <_:"
++"link-1/> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them "
++"a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"Es wird erbeten, aber nicht verlangt, dass Sie die Autoren des <_:link-1/> "
++"kontaktieren, bevor Sie eine große Anzahl an Kopien weiterverteilen, um "
++"ihnen zu ermöglichen, Sie mit einer aktualisierten Version des Dokumentes zu "
++"versorgen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:236
++msgid "2"
++msgstr "2"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:237
++msgid "3"
++msgstr "3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/> under the "
++"conditions of sections <_:link-3/> and <_:link-4/> above, provided that you "
++"release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified "
++"Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen eine <_:link-1/> eines <_:link-2/> unter den in den Abschnitten "
++"<_:link-3/> und <_:link-4/> oben stehenden Bedingungen kopieren und "
++"verteilen, vorausgesetzt, Sie veröffentlichen die Modifizierte Version unter "
++"genau dieser Lizenz, so dass die modifizierte Version die Stelle des "
++"Dokumentes einnimmt, folglich auch das Lizenzieren der Verteilung und "
++"Modifikation der Modifizierten Version an jeden, der eine Kopie davon "
++"besitzt. Zusätzlich müssen Sie diese Dinge in der Modifizierten Version tun:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <_:link-1/> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from "
++"that of the <_:link-2/>, and from those of previous versions (which should, "
++"if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You "
++"may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of "
++"that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Auf der <_:link-1/> (und auf den Covern, falls vorhanden) einen Titel "
++"verwenden, der sich von dem des <_:link-2/> unterscheidet, und von denen "
++"vorhergehender Versionen (die, falls vorhanden, in dem History-Abschnitt des "
++"Dokumentes aufgeführt sein sollten). Sie dürfen denselben Titel wie in einer "
++"vorhergehenden Version nutzen, wenn der ursprüngliche Veröffentlicher sein "
++"Einverständnis gibt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <_:link-1/>, as authors, one or more persons or entities "
++"responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <_:link-2/>, together "
++"with at least five of the principal authors of the <_:link-3/> (all of its "
++"principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"Auf der <_:link-1/>, eine oder mehrere Personen als Autoren benennen, die "
++"für das Einbringen von Veränderungen in die <_:link-2/> verantwortlich sind, "
++"zusammen mit mindesten fünf eigentlichen Autoren des <_:link-3/> (allen "
++"eigentlichen Autoren, wenn es weniger als fünf sind)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <_:link-1/> the name of the publisher of the <_:link-2/>, as "
++"the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++"Auf der <_:link-1/> den Namen des Veröffentlichers der <_:link-2/> als "
++"Veröffentlicher kennzeichnen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:292
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <_:link-1/>."
++msgstr "Alle Copyright-Hinweise des <_:link-1/> beibehalten."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <_:link-1/> under the terms of this "
++"License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Gleich hinter dem Copyright-Hinweis einen Lizenzhinweis einfügen, der die "
++"öffentliche Erlaubnis gibt, die <_:link-1/> unter den Bedingungen dieser "
++"Lizenz zu nutzen, in einer Form, die weiter unten im Anhang dargestellt ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:330
++msgid "Document's"
++msgstr "des Dokuments"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <_:link-1/> and required "
++"<_:link-2/> given in the <_:link-3/> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"In dem Lizenzhinweis die volle Liste der <_:link-1/> und benötigten <_:"
++"link-2/>, die in dem Lizenzhinweis des <_:link-3/> gegeben ist, beibehalten."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:348 C/fdl-appendix.xml:353 C/fdl-appendix.xml:372
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:507 C/fdl-appendix.xml:508
++msgid "History"
++msgstr "Chronik"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <_:quote-1/>, and its title, and add to it an "
++"item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <_:"
++"link-2/> as given on the <_:link-3/>. If there is no section entitled <_:"
++"quote-4/> in the <_:link-5/>, create one stating the title, year, authors, "
++"and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Den Abschnitt, der mit <_:quote-1/> betitelt ist, und seinen Titel "
++"beibehalten und ihn zu einem Punkt hinzufügen, der mindestens Titel, Jahr, "
++"neue Autoren, und Veröffentlicher der <_:link-2/> wie auf der <_:link-3/> "
++"gegeben, benennt. Wenn es keinen mit <_:quote-4/> betitelten Abschnitt gibt, "
++"erstellen Sie einen, der den Titel, Jahr, Autoren, und Veröffentlicher des "
++"<_:link-5/> wie auf der Titelseite gegeben, benennt, und fügen Sie dann "
++"einen Punkt hinzu, der die Modifizierte Version beschreibt wie im "
++"vorhergehenden Satz."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <_:link-1/> for public "
++"access to a <_:link-2/> copy of the Document, and likewise the network "
++"locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These "
++"may be placed in the <_:quote-3/> section. You may omit a network location "
++"for a work that was published at least four years before the Document "
++"itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives "
++"permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Die Netzwerk-Adresse, falls aufgeführt, beibehalten, die im <_:link-1/> "
++"aufgeführt ist, um öffentlichen Zugriff zu einer <_:link-2/> Kopie des "
++"Dokumentes zu ermöglichen, und genauso die Netzwerk-Adressen, die im "
++"Dokument für frühere Versionen, auf denen es basiert, aufgeführt sind. Diese "
++"können in den <_:quote-3/>-Abschnitt gestellt werden. Sie können eine "
++"Netzwerk-Adresse für ein Werk auslassen, das mindestens vier Jahre vor dem "
++"Dokument selbst veröffentlicht wurde, oder wenn der ursprüngliche Autor, auf "
++"den sich die jeweilige Version bezieht, es erlaubt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:385 C/fdl-appendix.xml:509
++msgid "Acknowledgements"
++msgstr "Danksagungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:386 C/fdl-appendix.xml:510
++msgid "Dedications"
++msgstr "Widmungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <_:quote-1/> or <_:quote-2/>, preserve the section's "
++"title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the "
++"contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"In jeglichem Abschnitt, der mit <_:quote-1/> oder <_:quote-2/> betitelt ist, "
++"den Titel des Abschnittes beibehalten, und in dem Abschnitt allen Inhalt und "
++"Ton von jeder Anerkennung und/oder Widmung jedes Beitragenden beibehalten, "
++"der dort aufgeführt ist."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/>, unaltered in their text and "
++"in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part "
++"of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Alle <_:link-1/> des <_:link-2/> beibehalten, unverändert in ihrem Text und "
++"ihren Titeln. Abschnittsnummern oder ähnliches werden nicht als Teil von "
++"Abschnittstiteln betrachtet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:412 C/fdl-appendix.xml:424 C/fdl-appendix.xml:445
++msgid "Endorsements"
++msgstr "Billigungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <_:quote-1/>. Such a section may not be included "
++"in the <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Alle Abschnitte, die mit <_:quote-1/> betitelt sind, löschen. Solche "
++"Abschnitte dürfen nicht mit in die <_:link-2/> aufgenommen werden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:425
++msgid "Invariant Section"
++msgstr "Unveränderlicher Abschnitt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <_:quote-1/> or to conflict in title "
++"with any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Betiteln Sie keine existierenden Abschnitte mit <_:quote-1/> oder so, dass "
++"sie im Widerspruch zu Titeln von <_:link-2/> stehen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <_:link-1/> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that "
++"qualify as <_:link-2/> and contain no material copied from the Document, you "
++"may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To "
++"do this, add their titles to the list of <_:link-3/> in the Modified "
++"Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other "
++"section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn die <_:link-1/> neue wichtige Abschnitte enthält oder Anhänge, die <_:"
++"link-2/> darstellen, und kein Material enthalten, das aus dem Dokument "
++"kopiert wurde, dürfen Sie nach Ihrer Wahl einige oder alle diese Abschnitte "
++"als Unveränderlich bezeichnen. Um dies zu tun, fügen Sie ihre Titel der "
++"Liste der <_:link-3/> in dem Lizenzhinweis der Modifizierten Version hinzu. "
++"Diese Titel müssen sich von allen anderen Abschnittstiteln unterscheiden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <_:quote-1/>, provided it contains nothing "
++"but endorsements of your <_:link-2/> by various parties--for example, "
++"statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an "
++"organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen einen Abschnitt <_:quote-1/> hinzufügen, vorausgesetzt, er "
++"enthält nichts außer Bewilligungen Ihrer <_:link-2/> von verschiedenen "
++"Seiten – zum Beispiel Aussagen von Beurteilungen, oder dass der Text von "
++"einer Organisation als für die autoritäre Definition eines Standards "
++"befunden wurde."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:455
++msgid "Front-Cover Text"
++msgstr "Vorderseitentext"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:457
++msgid "Back-Cover Text"
++msgstr "Rückseitentext"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <_:link-1/>, and a passage of "
++"up to 25 words as a <_:link-2/>, to the end of the list of <_:link-3/> in "
++"the <_:link-4/>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover "
++"Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If "
++"the <_:link-5/> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously "
++"added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on "
++"behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on "
++"explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen eine Passage aus bis zu fünf Wörtern als <_:link-1/> hinzufügen, "
++"und eine Passage von bis zu 25 Wörtern als <_:link-2/>, ans Ende der Liste "
++"von <_:link-3/> in der <_:link-4/>. Höchstens eine Passage von "
++"Vorderseitentexten und eine von Rückseitentexten darf von (oder durch "
++"Abmachungen von) irgendeinem Wesen hinzugefügt werden. Wenn das <_:link-5/> "
++"für die entsprechende Seite schon einen Covertext hat, der vorher von Ihnen "
++"oder durch Abmachungen von demselben Wesen, in dessen Namen Sie handeln, "
++"hinzugefügt wurde, dürfen Sie keinen anderen hinzufügen; aber Sie dürfen den "
++"alten ersetzen, wenn es der ursprüngliche Veröffentlicher, der den alten "
++"hinzugefügt hat, explizit erlaubt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <_:link-1/> do not by this License "
++"give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply "
++"endorsement of any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Der/die Autor(en) und Veröffentlicher des <_:link-1/> erteilen durch diese "
++"Lizenz nicht die Erlaubnis, ihre Namen für Veröffentlichungen für "
++"Bewilligungen irgendeiner <_:link-2/> oder deren Durchsetzungen oder "
++"Andeutungen zu nutzen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:484 C/fdl-appendix.xml:566
++msgid "section 4"
++msgstr "Abschnitt 4"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <_:link-1/> with other documents released under this "
++"License, under the terms defined in <_:link-2/> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <_:link-3/> of all "
++"of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant "
++"Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen das <_:link-1/> mit anderen Dokumenten, die unter dieser Lizenz "
++"veröffentlicht wurden, unter den Bedingungen in <_:link-2/> für Modifizierte "
++"Versionen kombinieren, vorausgesetzt, Sie beinhalten in der Kombination alle "
++"<_:link-3/> aller ursprünglichen Dokumente unverändert, und führen Sie alle "
++"als Unveränderliche Abschnitte Ihrer kombinierten Arbeit in deren "
++"Lizenzhinweis auf."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <_:link-1/> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are "
++"multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make "
++"the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in "
++"parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if "
++"known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section "
++"titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the "
++"combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"Die kombinierte Arbeit braucht nur eine Kopie dieser Lizenz zu beinhalten, "
++"und mehrfache identische <_:link-1/> können durch eine einzige Kopie ersetzt "
++"werden. Wenn es mehrere Unveränderliche Abschnitte mit demselben Titel, aber "
++"unterschiedlichem Inhalt gibt, machen Sie den Titel jedes Abschnittes durch "
++"Hinzufügen (in Klammern) des Namens des ursprünglichen Autors oder "
++"Veröffentlichers dieses Abschnittes, falls bekannt, unverwechselbar, oder "
++"ansonsten durch eine einzigartige Nummer. Führen Sie dieselben Änderungen in "
++"der Liste der Unveränderlichen Abschnitte im Lizenzhinweis der kombinierten "
++"Arbeit durch."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:511
++msgid "Endorsements."
++msgstr "Billigungen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <_:quote-1/> in "
++"the various original documents, forming one section entitled <_:quote-2/>; "
++"likewise combine any sections entitled <_:quote-3/>, and any sections "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>. You must delete all sections entitled <_:quote-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"In der Kombination müssen Sie alle mit <_:quote-1/> betitelten Abschnitte "
++"aus den verschiedenen ursprünglichen Dokumenten zusammenführen, und daraus "
++"einen Abschnitt <_:quote-2/> bilden; genauso kombinieren Sie jeden mit <_:"
++"quote-3/> betitelten Abschnitt, und jeden mit <_:quote-4/> betitelten "
++"Abschnitt. Sie müssen jeden mit <_:quote-5/> betitelten Abschnitt löschen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <_:link-1/> and other documents "
++"released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this "
++"License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the "
++"collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim "
++"copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen eine Sammlung erstellen, die aus dem <_:link-1/> und anderen, "
++"unter dieser Lizenz veröffentlichten Dokumenten besteht, und die "
++"individuellen Kopien der Lizenz in den einzelnen Dokumenten durch eine "
++"einzige Kopie ersetzen, die sich in der Sammlung befindet, vorausgesetzt, "
++"Sie folgen den Regeln dieser Lizenz für wortwörtliches Kopieren jedes dieser "
++"Dokumente in jeglicher Hinsicht."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:546
++msgid "aggregate"
++msgstr "Aggregate"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:550
++msgid "Cover Text"
++msgstr "Cover-Text"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <_:link-1/> or its derivatives with other separate and "
++"independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or "
++"distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <_:link-2/> of the "
++"Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. "
++"Such a compilation is called an <_:quote-3/>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <_:link-4/> requirement of <_:link-5/> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"Eine Zusammenstellung dieses <_:link-1/> oder seinen Ableitungen mit anderen "
++"separaten und unabhängigen Dokumenten oder Arbeiten, in oder auf einem Teil "
++"eines Speicher- oder Verteilungsmediums, zählt nicht als Ganzes als <_:"
++"link-2/> des Dokumentes, vorausgesetzt, kein Gesamt-Copyright wurde für die "
++"Zusammenstellung festgelegt. Solch eine Zusammenstellung wird <_:quote-3/> "
++"(Mischung) genannt, und diese Lizenz gilt nicht für die anderen "
++"selbstenthaltenen Arbeiten, die mit dem Dokument zusammengestellt wurden, im "
++"Falle, dass sie zusammengestellt wurden, wenn sie nicht selbst abgeleitete "
++"Arbeiten des Dokumentes sind. Wenn die <_:link-4/>-Bedingung von <_:link-5/> "
++"auf diese Kopien des Dokumentes anwendbar ist, dann können, wenn das "
++"Dokument weniger als ein Viertel des gesamten Aggregates ist, die Covertexte "
++"des Dokumentes auf Seiten platziert werden, die nur das Dokument innerhalb "
++"des Aggregates umgeben. Ansonsten müssen sie auf Seiten erscheinen, die das "
++"gesamte Aggregat umgeben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <_:link-1/> under the terms of <_:link-2/>. Replacing <_:"
++"link-3/> with translations requires special permission from their copyright "
++"holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections "
++"in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may "
++"include a translation of this License provided that you also include the "
++"original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between "
++"the translation and the original English version of this License, the "
++"original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"Übersetzung wird als eine Art Modifikation angesehen, also dürfen Sie "
++"Übersetzungen des <_:link-1/> unter den Bedingungen von <_:link-2/> "
++"verteilen. Das Ersetzen von <_:link-3/> mit Übersetzungen erfordert "
++"spezielle Einwilligung des Copyright-Halters, aber Sie dürfen Übersetzungen "
++"von einigen oder allen Unveränderlichen Abschnitten zusätzlich zu den "
++"ursprünglichen Versionen dieser Unveränderlichen Abschnitte einfügen. Sie "
++"dürfen eine Übersetzung dieser Lizenz hinzufügen, vorausgesetzt Sie "
++"beinhalten auch die ursprüngliche englische Version dieser Lizenz. Im Falle "
++"einer Nichtübereinstimmung zwischen der Übersetzung und der ursprünglichen "
++"englischen Version dieser Lizenz hat die ursprüngliche englische Version "
++"Vorrang."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <_:link-1/> except "
++"as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, "
++"modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will "
++"automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who "
++"have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have "
++"their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++"Sie dürfen das <_:link-1/> nicht kopieren, modifizieren, sublizenzieren oder "
++"verteilen, außer wie es diese Lizenz ausdrücklich vorschreibt. Jegliche "
++"andere Absicht, das Dokument zu kopieren, modifizieren, sublizenzieren oder "
++"verteilen, ist nichtig und beendet automatisch Ihre Rechte unter dieser "
++"Lizenz. Wie auch immer, Parteien, die Kopien oder Rechte von Ihnen unter "
++"dieser Lizenz bekommen haben, wird nicht die Lizenz beendet, solange diese "
++"Parteien in voller Zustimmung verbleiben."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:597
++msgid "Free Software Foundation"
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:603
++msgid "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++msgstr "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:595
++msgid ""
++"The <_:ulink-1/> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free "
++"Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar "
++"in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new "
++"problems or concerns. See <_:ulink-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Die <_:ulink-1/> kann von Zeit zu Zeit neue, revidierte Versionen der GNU "
++"Free Documentation License veröffentlichen. Solche neue Versionen werden vom "
++"Grundprinzip her der vorliegenden Version gleichen, können sich aber im "
++"Detail unterscheiden, um neue Probleme oder Anliegen anzusprechen. Siehe "
++"auch <_:ulink-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:610
++msgid "or any later version"
++msgstr "oder jeder späteren Version"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<_:link-1/> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <_:"
++"quote-2/> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and "
++"conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has "
++"been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the "
++"Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose "
++"any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"Jeder Version dieser Lizenz wird eine unterscheidende Versionsnummer "
++"gegeben. Wenn das <_:link-1/> angibt, dass eine spezielle Version dieser "
++"Lizenz <_:quote-2/> darauf zutrifft, haben Sie die Wahl, den Bestimmungen "
++"und Bedingungen von entweder der angegebenen Version oder einer beliebigen "
++"späteren Version, die von der Free Software Foundation (nicht als Entwurf) "
++"veröffentlicht wurde, zu folgen. Wenn das Dokument keine Versionsnummer "
++"angibt, können Sie irgendeine, jemals von der Free Software Foundation "
++"(nicht als Entwurf) veröffentlichte Version wählen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:639 C/fdl-appendix.xml:651
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Vorderseitentexten"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:640 C/fdl-appendix.xml:654
++msgid "Back-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Rückseitentexten"
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <_:link-1/> "
++"being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <_:link-2/> being LIST, and with the <_:"
++"link-3/> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Es wird die Erlaubnis gegeben, dieses Dokument zu kopieren, verteilen und/"
++"oder zu verändern unter den Bedingungen der GNU Free Documentation License, "
++"Version 1.1 oder einer späteren, von der Free Software Foundation "
++"veröffentlichten Version; mit den <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant"
++"\">Unveränderlichen Abschnitten</link>. DEREN TITEL AUFGEZÄHLT sind, mit den "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Vorderseitentexten</link>, die AUFGEZÄHLT "
++"sind, und mit den <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Rückseitentexten</link>, "
++"die AUFGEZÄHLT sind. Eine Kopie dieser Lizenz ist im Abschnitt <_:quote-4/> "
++"enthalten."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:649
++msgid "with no Invariant Sections"
++msgstr "ohne unveränderliche Abschnitte"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:652
++msgid "no Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "keine Vorderseitentexte"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:653
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"
++msgstr "Vorderseitentexte aufzulisten"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <_:link-1/>, write <_:quote-2/> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <_:link-3/>, write <_:quote-4/> instead of <_:"
++"quote-5/>; likewise for <_:link-6/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Falls Sie keine <_:link-1/> haben, schreiben Sie <_:quote-2/> anstatt zu "
++"sagen, welche unveränderlich sind. Falls Sie keine <_:link-3/> haben, "
++"schreiben Sie <_:quote-4/> anstelle von <_:quote-5/>; entsprechend für <_:"
++"link-6/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:661
++msgid "GNU General Public License"
++msgstr "GNU General Public License"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <_:ulink-1/>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
++"Wenn Ihr Dokument nicht-triviale Beispiele von Programmcode enthält, "
++"empfehlen wir, diese Beispiele parallel unter einer freien Software-Lizenz, "
++"wie der <_:ulink-1/>, zu veröffentlichen, um ihren Gebrauch in freier "
++"Software zu erlauben."
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# translation of gtk-doc-help.master.po to Greek
++# Simos Xenitellis <simos@gnome.org>, 2009.
++# Jennie Petoumenou <epetoumenou@gmail.com>, 2009.
++# Marios Zindilis <m.zindilis@dmajor.org>, 2010.
++# Tsivikis Vasilis <undersec.tr3los@gmail.com>, 2010.
++# Dimitris Spingos (Δημήτρης Σπίγγος) <dmtrs32@gmail.com>, 2013, 2014, 2015.
++# Efstathios Iosifidis <iosifidis@opensuse.org>, 2015.
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc-help.master\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2016-03-21 21:32+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2016-04-10 22:03+0300\n"
++"Last-Translator: Tom Tryfonidis <tomtryf@gmail.com>\n"
++"Language-Team: team@lists.gnome.gr\n"
++"Language: el\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n"
++"X-Generator: Poedit 1.8.7.1\n"
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++msgctxt "_"
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr ""
++"Ελληνική μεταφραστική ομάδα GNOME <team@gnome.gr>, 2009-2016\n"
++"Τζένη Πετούμενου <epetoumenou@gmail.com>, 2009\n"
++"Θάνος Τρυφωνίδης <tomtryf@gnome.org>, 2012, 2015, 2016\n"
++"Δημήτρης Σπίγγος <dmtrs32@gmail.com>, 2013-2015\n"
++"Μαρία Θουκυδίδου <marablack3@gmail.com>, 2014\n"
++"Μαρία Μαυρίδου <mavridou@gmail.com>, 2014"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/title
++#: C/index.docbook:12
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "Εγχειρίδιο GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/edition
++#: C/index.docbook:13
++msgid "1.24.1"
++msgstr "1.24.1"
++
++#. (itstool) path: abstract/para
++#: C/index.docbook:14
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr ""
++"Εγχειρίδιο χρήστη για προγραμματιστές με οδηγίες για τη χρήση του GTK-Doc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:16
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:25
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:34
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: publisher/publishername
++#: C/index.docbook:45
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "Έργο GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/publisher
++#: C/index.docbook:44
++msgid ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++msgstr ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:48
++msgid "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth και Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:52
++msgid "<year>2007-2015</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2007-2015</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:65
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, "
++"Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation "
++"with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A "
++"copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Χορηγείται άδεια αντιγραφής, διανομής και/ή τροποποίησης του παρόντος "
++"εγγράφου υπό τους όρους της έκδοσης 1.1 της <citetitle>Ελεύθερης Άδειας "
++"Τεκμηρίωσης GNU (GFDL)</citetitle>, ή οποιασδήποτε μεταγενέστερης έκδοσής "
++"αυτής από το Ίδρυμα Ελεύθερου Λογισμικού (FSF), χωρίς αμετάβλητα τμήματα, "
++"κείμενα εξωφύλλου και κείμενα οπισθοφύλλου. Συμπεριλαμβάνεται <link linkend="
++"\"fdl\">αντίγραφο της άδειας</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:73
++msgid ""
++"Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and "
++"services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME "
++"documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the "
++"GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial "
++"caps."
++msgstr ""
++"Πολλές από τις ονομασίες που χρησιμοποιούνται από εταιρείες για την "
++"διαφοροποίηση των προϊόντων και υπηρεσιών τους έχουν καταχωρισθεί ως "
++"εμπορικά σήματα. Σε όποιο σημείο της τεκμηρίωσης GNOME τυχόν εμφανίζονται "
++"αυτές οι ονομασίες, και εφόσον τα μέλη του Έργου τεκμηρίωσης GNOME έχουν "
++"λάβει γνώση αυτών των εμπορικών σημάτων, οι ονομασίες ή τα αρχικά αυτών θα "
++"γράφονται με κεφαλαίους χαρακτήρες."
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:83
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.24.1</revnumber> <date>30 May 2015</date> "
++#| "<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>development version</"
++#| "revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.25.1</revnumber> <date>21 March 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>development version</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.25.1</revnumber> <date>21 Μαρτίου 2016</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>έκδοση ανάπτυξης</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:89
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21 March 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, test cleanups</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21 Μαρτίου 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>διορθώσεις σφαλμάτων, εκαθάρριση δοκιμαστικού "
++"κώδικα</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:95
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 Μαΐου 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>διόρθωση σφαλμάτων</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:101
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 Μαΐου 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>διόρθωση σφαλμάτων</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:107
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>07 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>07 Μαΐου 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>διορθώσεις σφαλμάτων, απόρριψη παρωχημένων "
++"λειτουργιών</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:113
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 Jul 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 Ιουλ 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>διορθώσεις σφαλμάτων, απόρριψη παρωχημένων "
++"λειτουργιών</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:119
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16 Feb 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, markdown support, style improvements</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16 Φεβ 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>διορθώσεις σφαλμάτων, υποστήριξη markdown, και "
++"βελτιώσεις στυλ</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:125
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 Jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 Ιουν 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>διόρθωση σφαλμάτων</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:131
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 Sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, speedups, markdown support</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 Σεπτ 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>διορθώσεις σφαλμάτων, επιταχύνσεις, υποστήριξη "
++"markdown</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:137
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 Feb 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>urgent bug fix update</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 Φεβ 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>επείγουσα διόρθωση σφάλματος</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:143
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Ιαν 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>διορθώσεις σφαλμάτων και βελτιώσεις διάταξης</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:149
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 May 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 Μαίου 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>διορθώσεις σφαλμάτων και αναδρομής</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:155
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 March 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes and performance improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 Μαρτίου 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>διορθώσεις σφαλμάτων και βελτιώσεις επίδοσης</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:161
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>broken tarball update</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 Δεκεμβρίου 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>ανανέωση κατεστραμμένου "
++"συμπιεσμένου αρχείου</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:167
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>new tool features and "
++"bugfixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 Δεκεμβρίου 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>νέα χαρακτηριστικά εργαλείων "
++"και διορθώσεις σφαλμάτων</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:173
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 November 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>GNOME doc-utils migration</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 Νοεμβρίου 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>Μετάβαση σε GNOME doc-utils</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:186
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "Εισαγωγή"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:188
++msgid ""
++"This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how "
++"it is used."
++msgstr ""
++"Αυτό το κεφάλαιο αποτελεί μια εισαγωγή στο GTK-Doc. Περιγράφει το GTK-Doc "
++"και τον τρόπο χρήσης του."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:194
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "Τι είναι το GTK-Doc;"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:196
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the "
++"public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can "
++"also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++"Το GTK-Doc χρησιμοποιείται για την τεκμηρίωση κώδικα C. Συνήθως, "
++"χρησιμοποιείται για την τεκμηρίωση του δημόσιου API βιβλιοθηκών όπως η GTK+ "
++"και η GNOME. Μπορεί όμως να χρησιμοποιηθεί και για την τεκμηρίωση κώδικα "
++"εφαρμογών."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:204
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "Πώς λειτουργεί το GTK-Doc;"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:206
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source "
++"files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the "
++"template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only "
++"document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce "
++"output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++"Το GTK-Doc χρησιμοποιεί την τεκμηρίωση συναρτήσεων που έχει συμπεριληφθεί "
++"στα πηγαία αρχεία (εντός μπλοκ σχολίων με ειδική μορφή), ή την τεκμηρίωση "
++"που έχει προστεθεί στα πρότυπα αρχεία που χρησιμοποιεί το GTK-Doc (σημειώστε "
++"όμως ότι το GTK-Doc παράγει τεκμηρίωση μόνο για τις συναρτήσεις που "
++"δηλώνονται σε αρχεία κεφαλίδας· δεν παράγει τεκμηρίωση για στατικές "
++"συναρτήσεις)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:213
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc consists of a number of perl scripts, each performing a different "
++"step in the process."
++msgstr ""
++"Το GTK-Doc αποτελείται από μια σειρά δέσμης ενεργειών perl, καθένα από τα "
++"οποία είναι υπεύθυνο για διαφορετικό στάδιο της όλης διαδικασίας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:218
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "Η διαδικασία περιλαμβάνει 5 κύρια στάδια:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:225
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the "
++"source files with the documentation for each function, macro, union etc. (In "
++"the past information was entered in generated template files, which is not "
++"recommended anymore)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Συγγραφή της τεκμηρίωσης</guilabel> Ο συγγραφέας συμπληρώνει τα "
++"πηγαία αρχεία με τεκμηρίωση για όλες τις συναρτήσεις, μακροεντολές, ενώσεις "
++"κτλ. (Στο παρελθόν, οι πληροφορίες συμπληρώνονταν σε πρότυπα αρχεία που "
++"παράγονταν αυτόματα, αλλά αυτός ο τρόπος δεν συνιστάται πλέον.)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:235
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code "
++"looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. "
++"It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> "
++"containing a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according "
++"to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to "
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. The author can rearrange "
++"the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the "
++"final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><"
++"module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations "
++"found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some symbols to show "
++"up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or "
++"the declaration should appear differently, one can place entities similar to "
++"the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><"
++"module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Συλλέγοντας πληροφορίες για τον κώδικα.</guilabel> Το "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> σαρώνει τα αρχεία κεφαλίδων του "
++"κώδικα ψάχνοντας για δηλώσεις συναρτήσεων, μακροεντολές, enums, δομές και "
++"ενώσεις. Δημιουργεί το αρχείο <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</"
++"filename> που περιέχει μια λίστα με τις δηλώσεις, και τις τοποθετεί σε "
++"ενότητες αναλόγως με το αρχείο κεφαλίδας στο οποίο βρίσκονται. Από την πρώτη "
++"εκτέλεση του προγράμματος το αρχείο αντιγράφεται στο <filename><"
++"module>-sections.txt</filename>. Ο συγγραφέας μπορεί να τακτοποιεί τις "
++"ενότητες και τη σειρά των δηλώσεων, για να παραγάγει το επιθυμητό τελικό "
++"αποτέλεσμα. Το δεύτερο αρχείο δημιουργεί το <filename><module>-decl."
++"txt</filename>. Το αρχείο αυτό περιέχει τις πλήρεις δηλώσεις που βρέθηκαν "
++"από τον σαρωτή.Αν για κάποιο λόγο θέλετε μερικά σύμβολα να εμφανίζονται στην "
++"τεκμηρίωση, όπου η πλήρης δήλωση δεν μπορεί να βρεθεί από τον σαρωτή, ή "
++"πρέπει να εμφανίζεται διαφορετικά, μπορεί κάποιος να τοποθετήσει οντότητες "
++"παρόμοιες με αυτές <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> στο αρχείο "
++"<filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:252
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> can also be used to dynamically "
++"query a library about any GObject subclasses it exports. It saves "
++"information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about "
++"any GObject properties and signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++"Το <application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> μπορεί επίσης να χρησιμοποιηθεί "
++"για να κάνει δυναμική αναζήτηση σε μια βιβλιοθήκη για ενδεχόμενες υποκλάσεις "
++"GObject. Αποθηκεύει τις πληροφορίες για τη θέση κάθε αντικειμένου στην "
++"ιεραρχία κλάσεων καθώς και για τις ιδιότητες και σήματα GObject που περιέχει."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:258
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> should not be used anymore. It was "
++"needed in the past when GObject was still GtkObject inside gtk+."
++msgstr ""
++"Το <application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> δεν πρέπει να χρησιμοποιείται "
++"πλέον. Χρειαζόταν στο παρελθόν όταν το GObject ήταν ακόμα GtkObject μέσα στη "
++"gtk+."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:265
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the information gathered "
++"in the first step. (Note that this can be run repeatedly. It will try to "
++"ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Δημιουργία \"πρότυπων\" αρχείων</guilabel> Το <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mktmpl</application> παράγει μια σειρά από αρχεία στον υποκατάλογο <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename>, χρησιμοποιώντας τις πληροφορίες που "
++"συλλέχθηκαν κατά το πρώτο στάδιο. (Σημειώστε ότι μπορεί να εκτελεσθεί "
++"περισσότερες από μία φορές. Προσπαθεί να διασφαλίσει ότι δεν χάνεται ποτέ "
++"και κανενός είδους τεκμηρίωση.)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:274
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep "
++"documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now "
++"a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that "
++"skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand, "
++"please remove the directory (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++"Από την έκδοση GTK-Doc 1.9 και μετά, τα πρότυπα αρχεία δεν είναι πλέον "
++"απαραίτητα. Σας συνιστούμε να διατηρείτε την τεκμηρίωση στον κώδικα. Το "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> υποστηρίζει πλέον την επιλογή <option>--"
++"flavour no-tmpl</option> η οποία επιλέγει ένα αρχείο makefile που δεν "
++"χρησιμοποιεί καθόλου πρότυπα tmpl. Αν δεν έχετε κάνει ποτέ αλλαγές με το "
++"χέρι σε αρχεία προτύπων tmpl, παρακαλώ αφαιρέστε τον κατάλογο (π.χ. από ένα "
++"σύστημα ελέγχου εκδόσεων)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:286
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mkdb</application> turns the template files into XML files in the <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code "
++"contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it "
++"gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads docs from "
++"sources and introspection data."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Δημιουργία του XML και του HTML/PDF</guilabel>. Το "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> μετατρέπει τα αρχεία προτύπων σε "
++"αρχεία XML στον υποκατάλογο <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename>. "
++"Αν ο πηγαίος κώδικας περιέχει τεκμηρίωση συναρτήσεων, χρησιμοποιώντας τις "
++"ειδικές ομάδες σχολίων, συγχωνεύεται εδώ. Αν δεν υπάρχουν χρησιμοποιούμενα "
++"αρχεία tmpl, διαβάζει μόνο έγγραφα από τα δεδομένα πηγών και αυτοελέγχου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:295
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the XML files into HTML files "
++"in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. Likewise "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the XML files into a PDF "
++"document called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Το <application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> μετατρέπει τα αρχεία XML σε "
++"αρχεία HTML στον υποκατάλογο <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename>. "
++"Ομοίως, το <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> μετατρέπει τα αρχεία XML "
++"σε ένα έγγραφο PDF που ονομάζεται <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:301
++msgid ""
++"Files in <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class="
++"\"directory\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One "
++"should never edit them directly."
++msgstr ""
++"Τα αρχεία στους καταλόγους <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> και "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> αντικαθίστανται πάντα. "
++"Επομένως, δεν πρέπει να τα επεξεργάζεστε απευθείας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:309
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After "
++"installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be "
++"run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, "
++"the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in "
++"the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, "
++"<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-"
++"links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application "
++"will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Διόρθωση διασταυρούμενων παραπομπών μεταξύ εγγράφων</guilabel> "
++"Μετά την εγκατάσταση των αρχείων HTML, μπορείτε να εκτελέσετε το "
++"<application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> για να διορθώσετε τυχόν "
++"διασταυρούμενες παραπομπές σε διαφορετικά έγγραφα. Για παράδειγμα, η "
++"τεκμηρίωση του GTK+ περιέχει πολλές παραπομπές σε τύπους που επεξηγούνται "
++"στο εγχειρίδιο του GLib. Όταν ετοιμάζετε πακέτα κώδικα για διανομή, μπορείτε "
++"να χρησιμοποιείτε το <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> για να "
++"μετατρέπετε όλους τους εξωτερικούς συνδέσμους σε διαδικτυακούς συνδέσμους. "
++"Κατά την εγκατάσταση της τεκμηρίωσης που περιλαμβάνεται στον διανεμηθέντα "
++"κώδικα (παράγεται αυτόματα), η ίδια εφαρμογή θα προσπαθήσει να μετατρέψει "
++"ξανά τους συνδέσμους σε τοπικούς συνδέσμους (προς τις τοποθεσίες όπου είναι "
++"εγκατεστημένη η τεκμηρίωση)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:327
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "Λήψη GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:330
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "Απαιτήσεις"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:331
++msgid "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - the main scripts are in Perl."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - οι κύριες δέσμες ενεργειών είναι γραμμένες σε "
++"Perl."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:334
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> - the xslt processor from libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> - το πρόγραμμα xslt processor από τη "
++"βιβλιοθήκη libxslt <ulink url=\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http"
++"\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:338
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> - the docbook xsl stylesheets <ulink url="
++"\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type=\"http"
++"\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> - τα φύλλα στυλ docbook xsl <ulink url="
++"\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type=\"http"
++"\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:342
++msgid "<guilabel>Python</guilabel> - optional - for gtkdoc-depscan"
++msgstr "<guilabel>Python</guilabel> - προαιρετική - για το gtkdoc-depscan"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:345
++msgid ""
++"One of <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</guilabel> "
++"or <guilabel>vim</guilabel> - optional - used for syntax highlighting of "
++"examples"
++msgstr ""
++"Ένα από τα <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</"
++"guilabel> ή <guilabel>vim</guilabel> - προαιρετικά - που χρησιμοποιούνται "
++"για την επισήμανση της σύνταξης στα παραδείγματα"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:353
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "Περί GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:355 C/index.docbook:369
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(ΠΡΟΣ ΔΙΟΡΘΩΣΗ)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:359
++msgid ""
++"(History, authors, web pages, mailing list, license, future plans, "
++"comparison with other similar systems.)"
++msgstr ""
++"(Ιστορικό, συγγραφείς, ιστοσελίδες, λίστα αλληλογραφίας, άδεια, μελλοντικά "
++"σχέδια, σύγκριση με άλλα παρόμοια συστήματα.)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:367
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "Περί του εγχειριδίου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:373
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr "(σε ποιους απευθύνεται, πού θα το βρείτε, άδεια)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:382
++msgid "Setting up your project"
++msgstr "Δημιουργώντας το δικό σας έργο"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:384
++msgid ""
++"The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc into "
++"your project. Theses sections assume we work on a project called 'meep'. "
++"This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user app called "
++"'meeper'. We also assume you will be using autoconf and automake. In "
++"addition section <link linkend=\"plain_makefiles\">plain makefiles or other "
++"build systems</link> will describe the basics needed to work in a different "
++"build setup."
++msgstr ""
++"Οι επόμενες ενότητες περιγράφουν τα βήματα που απαιτούνται για να "
++"ενσωματώσετε το GTK-Doc στο έργο σας. Αυτές οι ενότητες προϋποθέτουν ότι "
++"εργάζεσθε σε ένα έργο που λέγεται 'meep'. Το έργο περιέχει τη βιβλιοθήκη "
++"'libmeep' και την εφαρμογή 'meeper' για τον τελικό χρήστη. Θεωρούμε επίσης, "
++"ότι θα χρησιμοποιείτε το autoconf και το automake. Επιπλέον, η ενότητα <link "
++"linkend=\"plain_makefiles\">αρχεία makefiles ή άλλα συστήματα ανάπτυξης</"
++"link> θα περιγράψει τα βασικά στοιχεία που απαιτούνται για να εργαστείτε σε "
++"μια διαφορετική δόμηση ρυθμίσεων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:395
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "Δημιουργία του σκελετού τεκμηρίωσης"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:397
++msgid ""
++"Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/reference "
++"(this way you can also have docs/help for end-user documentation). It is "
++"recommended to create another subdirectory with the name of the doc-package. "
++"For packages with just one library this step is not necessary."
++msgstr ""
++"Εντός του ριζικού καταλόγου του έργου δημιουργήστε το φάκελο docs/reference "
++"(ώστε να μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε το όνομα docs/help για την τεκμηρίωση "
++"του τελικού χρήστη). Συνιστάται να δημιουργήσετε έναν ακόμη υποκατάλογο με "
++"το όνομα του πακέτου τεκμηρίωσης. Αυτό δε χρειάζεται για πακέτα που "
++"περιλαμβάνουν μόνο μία βιβλιοθήκη."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:406
++msgid "Example directory structure"
++msgstr "Παράδειγμα δομής καταλόγου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:407
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:404
++msgid "This can then look as shown below: <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr "Αυτό θα φαίνεται, λοιπόν, όπως εμφανίζεται παρακάτω: <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:422 C/index.docbook:429
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Ενσωμάτωση στο autoconf"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:424
++msgid ""
++"Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> "
++"script."
++msgstr ""
++"Πολύ εύκολα! Απλά προσθέτετε μία γραμμή στη δέσμη ενεργειών "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:430
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"# check for gtk-doc\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"# έλεγχος για gtk-doc\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:442
++msgid "Keep gtk-doc optional"
++msgstr "Προαιρετικά διατηρήστε το gtk-doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:443
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"# check for gtk-doc\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"# έλεγχος για gtk-doc\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:437
++msgid ""
++"This will require all developers to have gtk-doc installed. If it is okay "
++"for your project to have optional api-doc build setup, you can solve this as "
++"below. Keep it as is, as gtkdocize is looking for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</"
++"function> at the start of a line. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Αυτό απαιτεί από όλους τους προγραμματιστές να έχουν εγκατεστημένο το gtk-"
++"doc. Αν είναι εντάξει για το έργο σας να έχετε μια επιπλέον δόμηση ρυθμίσεων "
++"για το api-doc, μπορείτε να το επιλύσετε όπως αναφέρεται παρακάτω. Αφήστε το "
++"ως έχει, όσο το gtkdocize αναζητά την αρχή της σειράς για το "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:454
++msgid ""
++"The first argument is used to check for the gtkdocversion at configure time. "
++"The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</application>. "
++"The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several configure "
++"switches:"
++msgstr ""
++"Το πρώτο όρισμα χρησιμοποιείται για έλεγχο του gtkdocversion κατά τη "
++"ρύθμιση. Το δεύτερο, προαιρετικό όρισμα χρησιμοποιείται από το "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>. Η μακροεντολή <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</"
++"symbol> επίσης προσθέτει αρκετούς διακόπτες ρύθμισης:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:460
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr "--with-html-dir= PATH : διαδρομή προς την εγκατεστημένη τεκμηρίωση"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:461
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc : χρήση gtk-doc για τη δόμηση τεκμηρίωσης [προεπιλογή=no]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:462
++msgid ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : δόμηση τεκμηρίωσης σε μορφή html [προεπιλογή=yes]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:463
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : δόμηση τεκμηρίωσης σε μορφή pdf [προεπιλογή=no]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: important/para
++#: C/index.docbook:467
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--"
++"enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. "
++"Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for "
++"users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++"Το GTK-Doc είναι απενεργοποιημένο από προεπιλογή! Να θυμάστε να "
++"χρησιμοποιείτε την επιλογή <option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option> στην επόμενη "
++"εκτέλεση του <filename>configure</filename>. Διαφορετικά, εγκαθίσταται η "
++"προπαραχθείσα τεκμηρίωση (δυνατότητα χρήσιμη για τον χρήστη, αλλά όχι για "
++"τον προγραμματιστή)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:475
++msgid ""
++"Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside you "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++"definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++msgstr ""
++"Επίσης, συνιστάται να προσθέσετε την ακόλουθη γραμμή στη δέσμη ενεργειών "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. Αυτό επιτρέπει στο <filename>gtkdocize</"
++"filename> να αντιγράφει αυτόματα τον ορισμό της μακροεντολής για το "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> στο έργο σας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:483
++msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++msgstr "Προετοιμασία για το gtkdocize"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:484
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:489
++msgid ""
++"After all changes to <filename>configure.ac</filename> are made, update the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> file. This can be done by re-running "
++"<code>autoreconf -i</code> or <code>autogen.sh</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Όταν όλες οι αλλαγές στο <filename>configure.ac</filename> έχουν γίνει, "
++"ενημερώστε το αρχείο <filename>configure</filename>. Αυτό μπορείτε να το "
++"κάνετε επανεκετελώντας το <code>autoreconf -i</code> ή το <code>autogen.sh</"
++"code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:497
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "Ενσωμάτωση στο automake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:499
++msgid ""
++"First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">examples</filename> sub directory of the <ulink url=\"https://"
++"git.gnome.org/browse/gtk-doc/tree/examples/Makefile.am\">gtkdoc-sources</"
++"ulink> to your project's API documentation directory ( <filename class="
++"\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></filename>). A local copy "
++"should be available under e.g. <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-tools/"
++"examples/Makefile.am</filename>. If you have multiple doc-packages repeat "
++"this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++"Πρώτα αντιγράψτε το <filename>Makefile.am</filename> από τον υποκατάλογο με "
++"τα <filename class=\"directory\">παραδείγματα</filename> των <ulink url="
++"\"https://git.gnome.org/browse/gtk-doc/tree/examples/Makefile.am\">gtkdoc-"
++"sources</ulink> στον κατάλογο της τεκμηρίωσης API του έργου σας ( <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></filename>). Ένα τοπικό "
++"αντίγραφο θα πρέπει να είναι διαθέσιμο π.χ. στο <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-"
++"doc-tools/examples/Makefile.am</filename>. Αν έχετε πολλά doc-packages "
++"επαναλάβετε αυτό το βήμα για το καθένα απο αυτά."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:510
++msgid ""
++"The next step is to edit the settings inside the <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>. All the settings have a comment above that describes their "
++"purpose. Most settings are extra flags passed to the respective tools. Every "
++"tool has a variable of the form <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>. "
++"All the tools support <option>--help</option> to list the supported "
++"parameters."
++msgstr ""
++"Το επόμενο βήμα είναι να τροποποιήσετε τις ρυθμίσεις στο <filename>Makefile."
++"am</filename>. Πριν από κάθε ρύθμιση υπάρχει ένα σχόλιο που εξηγεί τη "
++"χρησιμότητά της. Οι περισσότερες είναι σημαίες που στέλνονται στα αντίστοιχα "
++"εργαλεία. Κάθε εργαλείο διαθέτει μια μεταβλητή της μορφής <option><"
++"TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>. Όλα τα εργαλεία υποστηρίζουν την επιλογή "
++"<option>--help</option> για την παραγωγή λίστας με τις υποστηριζόμενες "
++"παραμέτρους."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:524
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "Ενσωμάτωση στο autogen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:526
++msgid ""
++"Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup "
++"the build infrastructure after a checkout from version control system (such "
++"as cvs/svn/git). GTK-Doc comes with a tool called <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application> which can be used in such a script. It should be run before "
++"autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr ""
++"Τα περισσότερα έργα διαθέτουν ένα σενάριο <filename>autogen.sh</filename> "
++"για τη δόμηση υποδομών μετά από έναν έλεγχο από το σύστημα ελέγχου εκδόσεων "
++"(π.χ., cvs/svn/git). Το GTK-Doc διαθέτει το εργαλείο <filename>gtkdocize</"
++"filename>, το οποίο μπορεί να χρησιμοποιηθεί για ένα τέτοιο σενάριο. Θα "
++"πρέπει να εκτελείται πριν το autoheader, το automake ή το autoconf."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:535
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Εκτέλεση του gtkdocize από το autogen.sh"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:536
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:542
++msgid ""
++"When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.make</filename> to your project root (or any directory specified by the "
++"<option>--docdir</option> option). It also checks you configure script for "
++"the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> invocation. This macro can be used to "
++"pass extra parameters to <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"Κατά την εκτέλεσή του, το <filename>gtkdocize</filename> αντιγράφει το "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> στο ριζικό κατάλογο του έργου σας (ή στον "
++"κατάλογο που ορίζει η επιλογή <option>--docdir</option>). Επίσης, ελέγχει τη "
++"δέσμη ενεργειών configure για να βρει την κλήση στο <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</"
++"function>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:551
++msgid ""
++"Historically GTK-Doc was generating template files where developers entered "
++"the docs. This turned out to be not so good (e.g. the need for having "
++"generated files under version control). Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the tools can get "
++"all the information from source comments and thus the templates can be "
++"avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-"
++"tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. "
++"Besides adding the option directly to the command invocation, they can be "
++"added also to an environment variable called <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</"
++"symbol> or set as a 2nd parameter in <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro in "
++"the configure script. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand and "
++"migrating from older gtkdoc versions, please remove the directory (e.g. from "
++"version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++"Αρχικά, το GTK-Doc δημιουργούσε αρχεία προτύπων εκεί που οι προγραμματιστές "
++"εισήγαγαν την τεκμηρίωση. Δυστυχώς, αυτή η προσέγγιση δεν ήταν ιδιαίτερα "
++"επιτυχής (π.χ η ανάγκη για παραγωγή αρχείων στο σύστημα ελέγχου εκδόσεων). "
++"Από την έκδοση 1.9 και μετά, τα πρότυπα αρχεία δεν είναι πλέον απαραίτητα. "
++"Σας συνιστούμε να διατηρείτε την τεκμηρίωση στον κώδικα. To "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> υποστηρίζει πλέον την επιλογή <option>--"
++"flavour no-tmpl</option> που επιλέγει ένα αρχείο makefile που δεν "
++"χρησιμοποιεί καθόλου πρότυπα tmpl. Πέρα από την άμεση προσθήκη της επιλογής "
++"στην κλήση της εντολής, μπορεί να προστεθεί και σε μια μεταβλητή "
++"περιβάλλοντος που ονομάζεται <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> ή να ορισθεί "
++"ως δεύτερη παράμετρος στη μακροεντολή <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> στο "
++"σενάριο configure. Αν δεν έχετε κάνει ποτέ αλλαγές με το χέρι σε αρχεία "
++"προτύπων και μεταβαίνετε από μια παλιότερη έκδοση του gtkdoc, παρακαλώ "
++"αφαιρέστε τον κατάλογο (π.χ. από το σύστημα ελέγχου εκδόσεων)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:568 C/index.docbook:585
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "Εκτέλεση της δόμησης τεκμηρίωσης"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:570
++msgid ""
++"After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then "
++"give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run "
++"<filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++"Αφού ολοκληρωθούν τα προηγούμενα βήματα, προχωρήστε στην δόμηση. Πρώτα, θα "
++"πρέπει να εκτελεσθεί εκ νέου το <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. Αν το "
++"σενάριο εκτελεί και το configure, προσθέστε την επιλογή <option>--enable-gtk-"
++"doc</option>. Διαφορετικά, εκτελέστε εσείς το<filename>configure</filename> "
++"με αυτή την επιλογή."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:577
++msgid ""
++"The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-"
++"directories. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past ."
++"sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Η πρώτη εκτέλεση του make δημιουργεί μια σειρά από πρόσθετα αρχεία στους "
++"καταλόγους της τεκμηρίωσης. Τα σημαντικά είναι τα: <filename><package>."
++"types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (στο "
++"παρελθόν .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:586
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:592
++msgid ""
++"Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. But hang-on, "
++"during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages with life."
++msgstr ""
++"Τώρα, μπορείτε να εμφανίσετε το <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename> στον περιηγητή σας. Είναι αλήθεια ότι προς το παρόν το "
++"αποτέλεσμα είναι μάλλον απογοητευτικό. Μην ανησυχείτε όμως. Στο επόμενο "
++"κεφάλαιο θα μάθετε πώς μπορείτε να ζωντανέψετε τις σελίδες σας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:600
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "Ενσωμάτωση σε συστήματα ελέγχου εκδόσεων"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:602
++msgid ""
++"As a rule of thumb, it's the files you edit which should go under version "
++"control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><package>."
++"types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the "
++"past .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Ο εμπειρικός κανόνας είναι ότι αυτά τα αρχεία που επεξεργασθήκατε πρέπει να "
++"περάσουν από τον έλεγχο έκδοσης. Για τυπικά έργα, πρόκειται για τα αρχεία: "
++"<filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs."
++"xml</filename> (στο παρελθόν .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:610
++msgid ""
++"Files in the <filename>xml/</filename> and <filename>html/</filename> "
++"directories should not go under version control. Neither should any of the "
++"<filename>.stamp</filename> files."
++msgstr ""
++"Αρχεία στους καταλόγους <filename>xml/</filename> και <filename>html/</"
++"filename> δεν θα πρέπει να υποβληθούν σε έλεγχο έκδοσης. Ούτε και αρχεία "
++"<filename>xml/</filename> and <filename>html/</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:618
++msgid "Integration with plain makefiles or other build systems"
++msgstr "Ενσωμάτωση στα αρχεία makefiles ή άλλα συστήματα δόμησης"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:620
++msgid ""
++"In the case one does not want to use automake and therefore <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.mak</filename> one will need to call the gtkdoc tools in the right order "
++"in own makefiles (or other build tools)."
++msgstr ""
++"Στην περίπτωση που κάποιος δε θέλει να χρησιμοποιήσει το automake και, "
++"επομένως, το <filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> θα χρειαστεί να καλέσει τα "
++"εργαλεία του gtkdoc στη σωστή σειρά στα makefiles (ή άλλα εργαλεία δόμησης)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:627
++msgid "Documentation build steps"
++msgstr "Βήματα δόμησης τεκμηρίωσης"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:628
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <source-dir>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<source-dir>\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --source-dir=...\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:642
++msgid ""
++"One will need to look at the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> and "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> to pick the extra options needed."
++msgstr ""
++"Πρέπει να κοιτάξετε στα αρχεία <filename>Makefile.am</filename> και "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> για να επιλέξετε τις ρυθμίσεις που "
++"χρειάζονται."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:649
++msgid "Integration with CMake build systems"
++msgstr "Ενσωμάτωση με συστήματα δόμησης CMake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:651
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc now provides a <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename> module (and "
++"the corresponding <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename> module). "
++"This provides a <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal> command that you can "
++"set in your <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Το GTK-Doc παρέχει το άρθρωμα <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename> (και "
++"το αντίστοιχο άρθρωμα <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename>). "
++"Επίσης παρέχει την εντολή <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal> την οποία "
++"μπορείτε να ορίσετε στο αρχείο <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:661
++msgid "Example of using GTK-Doc from CMake"
++msgstr "Παράδειγμα χρήσης του GTK-Doc από το CMake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:662
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Create the doc-libmeep target.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Build doc-libmeep as part of the default target. Without this, you would\n"
++"# have to explicitly run something like `make doc-libmeep` to build the docs.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Install the docs. (This assumes you're using the GNUInstallDirs CMake module\n"
++"# to set the CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR variable correctly).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Create the doc-libmeep target.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Build doc-libmeep as part of the default target. Without this, you would\n"
++"# have to explicitly run something like `make doc-libmeep` to build the docs.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Install the docs. (This assumes you're using the GNUInstallDirs CMake module\n"
++"# to set the CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR variable correctly).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:659
++msgid "The following example shows how to use this command. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Το ακόλουθο παράδειγμα δείχνει πως να χρησιμοποιήσετε την εντολή. <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:687
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "Τεκμηρίωση κώδικα"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:689
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code "
++"documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure "
++"from other sources. During the next section you will find all information "
++"about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++"Το GTK-Doc χρησιμοποιεί σχόλια με ειδική σύνταξη για την προσθήκη "
++"τεκμηρίωσης στον κώδικα. Παράλληλα, ανακαλεί πληροφορίες για τη δομή του "
++"έργου σας από άλλες πηγές. Στην επόμενη ενότητα περιέχονται όλες οι "
++"λεπτομέρειες για τη σύνταξη αυτών των σχολίων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/title
++#: C/index.docbook:697
++msgid "Documentation placement"
++msgstr "Τοποθέτηση τεκμηρίωσης"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:698
++msgid ""
++"In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing inside "
++"the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the disadvantages that the "
++"information is often not updated and also that the file tend to cause "
++"conflicts with version control systems."
++msgstr ""
++"Στο παρελθόν, η τεκμηρίωση έπρεπε να συμπληρώνεται σε αρχεία του καταλόγου "
++"<filename>tmpl</filename>. Αυτή η προσέγγιση εμφανίζει το μειονέκτημα ότι οι "
++"πληροφορίες δεν ενημερώνονται συχνά, καθώς και το ότι προκύπτουν περιοδικές "
++"συγκρούσεις με τα συστήματα ελέγχου εκδόσεων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:704
++msgid ""
++"The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the documentation "
++"inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way of documenting "
++"code."
++msgstr ""
++"Για να αποφύγετε αυτά τα προβλήματα, σας προτείνουμε να ενσωματώνετε την "
++"τεκμηρίωση στον πηγαίο κώδικα. Αυτή είναι και η μόνη μέθοδος που θα "
++"περιγράψουμε σε αυτό το εγχειρίδιο."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:715 C/index.docbook:741
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "Μπλοκ σχολίου GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:716
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:711
++msgid ""
++"The scanner can handle the majority of C headers fine. In the case of "
++"receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special case, one can "
++"hint GTK-Doc to skip over them. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Ο σαρωτής μπορεί να χειρισθεί άνετα την πλειοψηφία των κεφαλίδων C. Σε "
++"περίπτωση που παίρνετε προειδοποιήσεις από τον σαρωτή οι οποίες μοιάζουν με "
++"έναν ειδικό χαρακτήρα, μπορείτε να υποδείξετε στο GTK-Doc να τους "
++"παραλείψει. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/title
++#: C/index.docbook:725
++msgid "Limitations"
++msgstr "Περιορισμοί"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:726
++msgid ""
++"Note, that GTK-Doc's supports <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> but "
++"not <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> or other combinations."
++msgstr ""
++"Σημειώστε, ότι το GTK-Doc υποστηρίζει το <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</"
++"code>, αλλά όχι το <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> ή άλλους "
++"συνδυασμούς."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:736
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "Σχόλια τεκμηρίωσης"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:742
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:738
++msgid ""
++"A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation "
++"block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Ένα σχόλιο πολλαπλών γραμμών που διαθέτει ένα επιπλέον «*» στην αρχή "
++"αποτελεί ένα μπλοκ τεκμηρίωσης που λαμβάνεται υπόψη από τα εργαλεία του GTK-"
++"Doc. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:751
++msgid ""
++"The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is "
++"related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add "
++"table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++"Το 'αναγνωριστικό' είναι μία γραμμή που περιέχει το όνομα του στοιχείου στο "
++"οποίο αναφέρεται το σχόλιο. Η σύνταξή του εξαρτάται από τον τύπο του "
++"στοιχείου. (ΜΕΛΛΟΝΤΙΚΑ: να προστεθεί πίνακας με τα αναγνωριστικά)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:757
++msgid ""
++"The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol "
++"types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter "
++"description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows "
++"the detailed description. All lines (outside program listings and CDATA "
++"sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph "
++"breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-"
++"asterisk-blank-blank). This is useful in preformatted text (code listings)."
++msgstr ""
++"Η ομάδα 'τεκμηρίωσης' επίσης διαφέρει ανάλογα με τον τύπο συμβόλου. Για τους "
++"τύπους συμβόλων που δέχονται παραμέτρους όπως συναρτήσεις ή μακροεντολές "
++"προηγείται η περιγραφή των παραμέτρων και ακολουθεί μια κενή γραμμή (μόνο "
++"'*'). Ακολουθεί η λεπτομερής περιγραφή. Όλες οι γραμμές (εκτός από τις "
++"λίστες προγράμματος και τις ενότητες CDATA) που περιέχουν μόνο ένα ' "
++"*' (διάστημα-αστερίσκο) μετατρέπονται σε αλλαγές παραγράφου. Αν δεν "
++"επιθυμείτε αλλαγή παραγράφου, αλλάξτε το σε ' * ' (διάστημα-αστερίσκος-"
++"διάστημα-διάστημα). Αυτό είναι χρήσιμο σε προδιαμορφωμένο κείμενο (λίστες "
++"κώδικα)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:774
++msgid ""
++"What it is: The name for a class or function can sometimes be misleading for "
++"people coming from a different background."
++msgstr ""
++"Τι είναι: Το όνομα της κλάσης ή της συνάρτησης μπορεί μερικές φορές να είναι "
++"παραπλανητικό για ανθρώπους που δεν έχουν τεχνογνωσία στο θέμα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:780
++msgid ""
++"What it does: Tell about common uses. Put it in relation with the other API."
++msgstr ""
++"Τι κάνει: Αναφέρει τις κοινές χρήσεις και τις βάζει σε σχέση με άλλο API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:770
++msgid "When documenting code, describe two aspects: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "Όταν τεκμηριώνετε κώδικα, περιγράψτε δύο πλευρές: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:795
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Χρησιμοποιήστε το function() για να αναφερθείτε σε συναρτήσεις ή "
++"μακροεντολές που δέχονται ορίσματα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:800
++msgid ""
++"Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to "
++"parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr ""
++"Χρησιμοποιήστε το @param για να αναφερθείτε σε παραμέτρους. Επίσης, "
++"χρησιμοποιήστε αυτή τη γραφή για να αναφερθείτε σε παραμέτρους άλλων "
++"συναρτήσεων, σχετικών με την περιγραφόμενη."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:806
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr ""
++"Χρησιμοποιήστε το %constant για να αναφερθείτε σε σταθερές, π.χ. "
++"%G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:811
++msgid ""
++"Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and "
++"macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Χρησιμοποιήστε το #symbol για να αναφερθείτε σε άλλους τύπους συμβόλων, π.χ. "
++"δομές, αριθμήσεις και μακροεντολές που δε δέχονται ορίσματα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:817
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal."
++msgstr ""
++"Χρησιμοποιήστε το #Object::signal για να αναφερθείτε σε ένα σήμα GObject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:822
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property."
++msgstr ""
++"Χρησιμοποιήστε το #Object::property για να αναφερθείτε σε μία ιδιότητα "
++"GObject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:827
++msgid ""
++"Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure and #GObjectClass."
++"foo_bar() to refer to a vmethod."
++msgstr ""
++"Χρησιμοποιήστε το #Struct.field για να αναφερθείτε σε ένα πεδίο μέσα σε μια "
++"δομή και #GObjectClass.foo_bar() για να αναφερθείτε σε μια vmethod."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:789
++msgid ""
++"One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in "
++"the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. "
++"GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Ένα πλεονέκτημα της χρήσης υπερκειμένου αντί για απλό κείμενο, είναι η "
++"δυνατότητα προσθήκης συνδέσμων στο έγγραφο. Ωστόσο, η συγγραφή της σωστής "
++"επισήμανσης για έναν σύνδεσμο μπορεί να είναι αρκετά κουραστική διαδικασία. "
++"Το GTK-Doc σας βοηθάει, παρέχοντάς σας μια σειρά από χρήσιμες συντομεύσεις. "
++"<_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:836
++msgid ""
++"If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or "
++"'#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML "
++"entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&"
++"commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them "
++"with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν θέλετε να χρησιμοποιήσετε τους ειδικούς χαρακτήρες «<», «>», «()», "
++"«@», «%» ή «#» στην τεκμηρίωση, χωρίς να φοβάστε ότι θα τους αλλάξει το GTK-"
++"Doc, μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε τις οντότητες XML «&lt;», «&gt;», "
++"«&lpar;», «&rpar;», «&commat;», «&percnt;» και «&num;», "
++"αντίστοιχα, ή να χρησιμοποιήσετε την ανάποδη κάθετο «\\» ως χαρακτήρα "
++"διαφυγής."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:845
++msgid ""
++"DocBook can do more than just links. One can also have lists, examples, "
++"headings, and images. As of version 1.20, the preferred way is to use a "
++"subset of the basic text formatting syntax called <ulink url=\"http://"
++"daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink>. On older GTK-Doc "
++"versions any documentation that includes Markdown will be rendered as is. "
++"For example, list items will appear as lines starting with a dash."
++msgstr ""
++"Το DocBook μπορεί να κάνει παραπάνω από απλούς συνδέσμους. Μπορεί κάποιος να "
++"έχει και λίστες, παραδείγματα, κεφαλίδες και εικόνες. Από την έκδοση 1.20 "
++"και μετά, ο προτιμώμενος τρόπος είναι με τη χρήση ενός υποσυνόλου της "
++"βασικής σύνταξης για μορφοποίηση κειμένου που ονομάζεται <ulink url=\"http://"
++"daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink>. Σε παλιότερες "
++"εκδόσεις GTK-Doc οποιαδήποτε τεκμηρίωση που περιλαμβάνει Markdown θα "
++"αποδίδεται ως έχει. Για παράδειγμα, οι καταχωρήσεις της λίστας θα "
++"εμφανίζονται σαν γραμμές που αρχίζουν με μια παύλα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:856
++msgid ""
++"While markdown is now preferred one can mix both. One limitation here is "
++"that one can use docbook xml within markdown, but markdown within docbook "
++"xml is not supported."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν και τώρα προτιμάται η Markdown μπορεί κάποιος να αναμείξει και τις δύο. "
++"Ένας περιορισμός εδώ είναι ότι κάποιος μπορεί να χρησιμοποιήσει το docbook "
++"xml μέσα στο markdown, αλλά το markdown μέσα στο docbook xml δεν "
++"υποστηρίζεται."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:862
++msgid ""
++"In older GTK-Doc releases, if you need support for additional formatting, "
++"you would need to enable the usage of docbook XML tags inside doc-comments "
++"by putting <option>--xml-mode</option> (or <option>--sgml-mode</option>) in "
++"the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Σε παλιότερες εκδόσεις του GTK-Doc, αν χρειάζεστε υποστήριξη για πρόσθετη "
++"μορφοποίηση, θα πρέπει να ενεργοποιήσετε τη χρήση των ετικετών docbook XML "
++"μέσα στα doc-comments θέτοντας το <option>--xml-mode</option> (ή το "
++"<option>--sgml-mode</option>) στη μεταβλητή <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> "
++"μέσα στο <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:871
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block using Markdown"
++msgstr "Μπλοκ σχολίου GTK-Doc χρησιμοποιώντας Markdown"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:872
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * documentation paragraph ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Second Sub Heading\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading With a Link Anchor # {#heading-two}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * more documentation:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 1\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Paragraph inside a list item.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. another numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Another paragraph. [A Link to the GNOME Website](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [A link to the heading anchor above][heading-two]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * A C-language example:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Gorgeous!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * ταυτοποιητής:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * παράγραφος τεκμηρίωσης ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Δευτερεύουσα επικεφαλίδα #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Δεύτερη δευτερεύουσα επικεφαλίδα\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Δευτερεύουσα επικεφαλίδα με μια άγκυρα συνδέσμου # {#επικεφαλίδα-δύο}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * περισσότερη τεκμηρίωση:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - στοιχείο 1 καταλόγου\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Παράγραφος μέσα σε ένα στοιχείο καταλόγου.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - στοιχείο καταλόγου 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. αριθμημένο στοιχείο καταλόγου\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. άλλο αριθμημένο στοιχείο καταλόγου\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Μια άλλη παράγραφος. [Ένας σύνδεσμος στην ιστοσελίδα GNOME](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [Ένας σύνδεσμος στην από πάνω άγκυρα επικεφαλίδας][επικεφαλίδα-δύο]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Ένα παράδειγμα γλώσσας C:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Gorgeous!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:911
++msgid ""
++"More examples of what markdown tags are supported can be found in the <ulink "
++"url=\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/Markdown"
++"\">GTK+ Documentation Markdown Syntax Reference</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε να βρείτε περισσότερα παραδείγματα για το ποιες ετικέτες markdown "
++"υποστηρίζονται στη διεύθυνση <ulink url=\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK"
++"%2B/DocumentationSyntax/Markdown\">GTK+ Documentation Markdown Syntax "
++"Reference</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:917
++msgid ""
++"As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one "
++"cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to "
++"comment those symbols too. This helps other to understand you code. "
++"Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the "
++"2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made public, "
++"all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and insert "
++"the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++"Όπως αναφέρθηκε και προηγουμένως το GTK-Doc στοχεύει στην τεκμηρίωση του "
++"δημόσιου API. Άρα, δεν μπορεί κάποιος να γράψει τεκμηρίωση για στατικά "
++"σύμβολα. Παρόλα αυτά, συνιστάται ο σχολιασμός και αυτών των συμβόλων, γιατί "
++"βοηθά στην κατανόηση του κώδικα. Σας προτείνουμε λοιπόν να τα σχολιάζετε "
++"χρησιμοποιώντας κανονικά σχόλια (χωρίς το δεύτερο «*» στην πρώτη γραμμή). Αν "
++"αργότερα χρειαστεί να μετατραπεί η συνάρτηση σε δημόσια, το μόνο που θα "
++"πρέπει να γίνει είναι να προστεθεί άλλο ένα «*» στο μπλοκ του σχολίου, και "
++"να εισαχθεί το όνομα του συμβόλου στην κατάλληλη θέση του αρχείου ενοτήτων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:931
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "Τεκμηρίωση ενοτήτων"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:933
++msgid ""
++"Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or "
++"module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short "
++"description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Κάθε ενότητα της τεκμηρίωσης περιέχει πληροφορίες για μια κλάση ή ένα "
++"άρθρωμα. Για να εισάγετε το συστατικό μπορείτε να γράψετε ένα μπλοκ σχολίου "
++"ενότητας. Η σύντομη αυτή περιγραφή χρησιμοποιείται και για τον πίνακα "
++"περιεχομένων. Όλα τα πεδία @fields είναι προαιρετικά."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:941
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "Μπλοκ σχολίου ενότητας"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:942
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:961
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr "SECTION:<name>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:963
++msgid ""
++"The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name give here "
++"should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Το name συνδέει την τεκμηρίωση της ενότητας με το αντίστοιχο μέρος στο "
++"αρχείο <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>. Το όνομα που "
++"δίνεται εδώ πρέπει να ταιριάζει με την ετικέτα <FILE> στο αρχείο "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:972
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@short_description"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:974
++msgid ""
++"A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the "
++"links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr ""
++"Περιγραφή της ενότητας σε μια γραμμή, η οποία θα εμφανίζεται, στη συνέχεια, "
++"μετά από τους συνδέσμους του πίνακα περιεχομένων και στην αρχή της σελίδας "
++"της ενότητας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:981
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr "@title"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:983
++msgid ""
++"The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It "
++"can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr ""
++"Ο τίτλος της ενότητας από προεπιλογή έχει όνομα <name> από τη δήλωση "
++"SECTION. Μπορεί να παρακαμφθεί με το πεδίο @title."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:990
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr "@section_id"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:992
++msgid ""
++"Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <"
++"title> is used as a section_id and for other sections it is <"
++"MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++"Παρακάμπτει τη χρήση του τίτλου ως αναγνωριστικό της ενότητας. Για "
++"αντικείμενα GOBject το <title> χρησιμοποιείται ως section_id και για "
++"άλλες ενότητες είναι <MODULE>-<title>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1000
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@see_also"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1002
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section."
++msgstr "Λίστα συμβόλων σχετικών με αυτή την ενότητα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1008
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1015
++msgid ""
++"Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third "
++"parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have "
++"confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after "
++"the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major "
++"release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be "
++"rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++"Σταθερή - Μια σταθερή διεπαφή επιτρέπει σε τρίτους να αναπτύσσουν εφαρμογές "
++"για τις διεπαφές αυτές, να τις δημοσιεύουν και να είναι βέβαιοι ότι οι "
++"εφαρμογές θα τρέχουν σε όλες τις ελάσσονες εκδόσεις του προϊόντος (οι οποίες "
++"θα είναι μεταγενέστερες της διεπαφής και θα ανήκουν στην ίδια μείζονα "
++"έκδοση). Ακόμη και όταν πρόκειται για μείζονες νέες εκδόσεις, οι "
++"ασυμβατότητες αναμένεται να είναι σπάνιες και να οφείλονται σε σοβαρούς "
++"λόγους."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1027
++msgid ""
++"Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are "
++"typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly "
++"changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a "
++"more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source "
++"or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++"Ασταθής - Ασταθείς είναι οι πειραματικές ή μεταβατικές διεπαφές. Συνήθως "
++"χρησιμοποιούνται για να παρέχουν σε τρίτους πρώιμη πρόσβαση σε νέες ή "
++"διαρκώς εξελισσόμενες τεχνολογίες, ή ως ενδιάμεσες λύσεις για προβλήματα για "
++"τα οποία αναμένεται μια γενικότερη λύση. Δεν υφίσταται καμία εγγύηση "
++"συμβατότητας μεταξύ μιας ελάσσονας έκδοσης και της επόμενης."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1039
++msgid ""
++"Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but "
++"that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in "
++"specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++"Ιδιωτική - Διεπαφή που μπορεί να χρησιμοποιηθεί εντός της στοίβας του GNOME, "
++"αλλά δε διαθέτει τεκμηρίωση που να απευθύνεται στους τελικούς χρήστες. "
++"Τέτοιου είδους συναρτήσεις μπορούν να χρησιμοποιούνται μόνο στο πλαίσιο "
++"σαφώς καθορισμένων και τεκμηριωμένων διαδικασιών."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1048
++msgid ""
++"Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require "
++"end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be "
++"Internal."
++msgstr ""
++"Εσωτερική - Μια διεπαφή που είναι εσωτερική σε ένα άρθρωμα και δεν απαιτεί "
++"την ύπαρξη τεκμηρίωσης για τον τελικό χρήστη. Οι συναρτήσεις που δεν "
++"περιέχουν τεκμηρίωση εκλαμβάνονται ως εσωτερικές."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1010
++msgid ""
++"An informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend "
++"the use of one of these terms: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Άτυπη περιγραφή του επιπέδου σταθερότητας του συγκεκριμένου API. Σας "
++"συνιστούμε τη χρήση ενός από τους ακόλουθους όρους: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1060
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1062
++msgid ""
++"The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a "
++"comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Αρχεία <literal>#include</literal> που εμφανίζονται στη συνοπτική παρουσίαση "
++"των ενοτήτων (λίστα αρχείων που χωρίζονται με κόμματα), αντικαθιστώντας την "
++"καθολική τιμή στο <link linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">αρχείο ενότητας</"
++"link> ή στη γραμμή εντολών. Πρόκειται για προαιρετικό στοιχείο."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1071
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr "@image"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1073
++msgid ""
++"The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This "
++"will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of "
++"a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Η εικόνα που θα εμφανίζεται στο πάνω μέρος της σελίδας αναφοράς για αυτή την "
++"ενότητα. Αυτή συχνά θα είναι κάποιου είδους διάγραμμα για την απεικόνιση μια "
++"κλάσης ή ενός διαγράμματος της σχέσης της με άλλες κλάσεις. Αυτή η "
++"καταχώρηση είναι προαιρετική."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1084
++msgid ""
++"To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs "
++"into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++"Για να μη χρειαστεί να κάνετε εκ νέου μεταγλώττιση μετά από αλλαγές στην "
++"τεκμηρίωση, σας προτείνουμε να ενσωματώνετε την τεκμηρίωση των ενοτήτων στο "
++"αρχείο του πηγαίου κώδικα, όπου αυτό είναι δυνατό."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1093
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "Τεκμηρίωση συμβόλων"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1095
++msgid ""
++"Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is "
++"documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the "
++"definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus "
++"functions are usually documented in the c-source and macros, structs and "
++"enums in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++"Κάθε σύμβολο (συνάρτηση, μακροεντολή, δομή, αρίθμηση, σήμα, ιδιότητα) "
++"τεκμηριώνεται σε ξεχωριστή ομάδα. Η καταλληλότερη θέση για τις ομάδες είναι "
++"δίπλα στους ορισμούς των συμβόλων, γιατί διευκολύνει το έργο συγχρονισμού. "
++"Επομένως, η τεκμηρίωση των συναρτήσεων συνήθως βρίσκεται στο αρχείο του "
++"πηγαίου κώδικα, ενώ των μακροεντολών, δομών και αριθμήσεων στο αρχείο "
++"κεφαλίδας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1103 C/index.docbook:1169
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr "Γενικές ετικέτες"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1105
++msgid ""
++"You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell "
++"when an API was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε να προσθέσετε πληροφορίες εκδόσεων σε όλα τα στοιχεία της "
++"τεκμηρίωσης για να πείτε πότε εισήχθηκε ένα API, ή πότε καταργήθηκε."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1110
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr "Εκδόσεις Ετικετών"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1111
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "Από:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1113
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr "Περιγραφή οπό ποια έκδοση του κώδικα και μετά είναι διαθέσιμο το API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1118
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "Παρωχημένη:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1120
++msgid ""
++"Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The "
++"description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr ""
++"Παράγραφος που επισημαίνει ότι θα πρέπει να σταματήσει η χρήση της "
++"συνάρτησης. Η περιγραφή θα πρέπει να παραπέμπει τον αναγνώστη στο νέο API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1128
++msgid ""
++"You can also add stability information to all documentation elements to "
++"indicate whether API stability is guaranteed for them for all future minor "
++"releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε επίσης να προσθέσετε πληροφορίες σταθερότητας σε όλα τα στοιχεία "
++"της τεκμηρίωσης για να δείξετε αν η σταθερότητα API είναι εγγυημένη για αυτά "
++"για όλες τις μελλοντικές δευτερεύουσες εκδόσεις του έργου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1134
++msgid ""
++"The default stability level for all documentation elements can be set by "
++"passing the <option>--default-stability</option> argument to "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> with one of the values below."
++msgstr ""
++"Το επίπεδο προεπιλεγμένης σταθερότητας για όλα τα στοιχεία τεκμηρίωσης "
++"μπορούν να οριστούν μεταφέροντας το όρισμα <option>--default-stability</"
++"option> στην <application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> με μια άπω τις παρακάτω "
++"τιμές."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1140
++msgid "Stability Tags"
++msgstr "Ετικέτες σταθερότητας"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1141
++msgid "Stability: Stable"
++msgstr "Σταθερότητα: σταθερό"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1143
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as stable. This is for public APIs which are guaranteed to "
++"remain stable for all future minor releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Σημείωση του στοιχείου ως σταθερού. Αυτό είναι για δημόσια APIs που είναι "
++"βέβαια ότι παραμένουν σταθερά για όλες τις μελλοντικές δευτερεύουσες "
++"εκδόσεις του έργου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1150
++msgid "Stability: Unstable"
++msgstr "Σταθερότητα: ασταθές"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1152
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as unstable. This is for public APIs which are released as "
++"a preview before being stabilised."
++msgstr ""
++"Σημείωση του στοιχείου ως ασταθούς. Αυτό είναι για τα δημόσια APIs που "
++"εκδίδονται ως μια προεπισκόπηση πριν να σταθεροποιηθούν."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1158
++msgid "Stability: Private"
++msgstr "Σταθερότητα: προσωπική"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1160
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as private. This is for interfaces which can be used by "
++"tightly coupled modules, but not by arbitrary third parties."
++msgstr ""
++"Σημείωση του στοιχείου ως προσωπικό. Αυτό είναι για διεπαφές που μπορούν να "
++"χρησιμοποιηθούν με σφικτά συνδυασμένες ενότητες, αλλά όχι από ελεύθερα τρίτα "
++"μέρη."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1170
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1190 C/index.docbook:1200
++msgid "Annotations"
++msgstr "Σχόλια"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1192
++msgid ""
++"Documentation blocks can contain annotation-tags. These tags will be "
++"rendered with tooltips describing their meaning. The tags are used by "
++"gobject-introspection to generate language bindings. A detailed list of the "
++"supported tags can be found on <ulink url=\"http://live.gnome.org/"
++"GObjectIntrospection/Annotations\" type=\"http\">the wiki</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Οι ομάδες τεκμηρίωσης μπορούν να περιέχουν ετικέτες σχολιασμού. Αυτές οι "
++"ετικέτες θα αποδοθούν με συμβουλές οθόνης που περιγράφουν το νόημά τους. Οι "
++"ετικέτες χρησιμοποιούνται από το gobject-introspection για τη δημιουργία των "
++"συνδέσεων γλώσσας. Ένας λεπτομερής κατάλογος των υποστηριζόμενων ετικετών "
++"μπορεί να βρεθεί στο <ulink url=\"http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/"
++"Annotations\" type=\"http\">η βίκι</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1201
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: (annotation): @foo's bar\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (annotation) (another annotation)\n"
++" * (and another annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation) (another annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Sets bar on @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (σχόλιο)\n"
++" * @foo: (σχόλιο): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Ανακτά @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Επιστρέφει: (σχόλιο): @foo's bar\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (σχόλιο) (ένα άλλο σχόλιο)\n"
++" * (και ένα άλλο σχόλιο)\n"
++" * @foo: (σχόλιο) (ένα άλλο σχόλιο): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Ορίζει γραμμή στο @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1222 C/index.docbook:1251
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "Ομάδα σχολίων συνάρτησης"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1228
++msgid ""
++"Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/"
++"unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++"Τεκμηριώστε κατά πόσο τα επιστρεφόμενα αντικείμενα, λίστες, συμβολοσειρές, κ."
++"λπ, θα πρέπει να ελευθερώνονται, να μην ελευθερώνονται ή να απορρίπτονται."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1234
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr ""
++"Τεκμηριώσετε κατά πόσο οι παράμετροι μπορούν να είναι μηδενικές (NULL) και "
++"τι συμβαίνει αν είναι."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1239
++msgid ""
++"Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr ""
++"Αναφέρετε ενδιαφέρουσες προ-καταστάσεις και μετα-καταστάσεις όπου χρειάζεται."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1224 C/index.docbook:1310
++msgid "Please remember to: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "Παρακαλούμε να θυμηθείτε να: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1246
++msgid ""
++"Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are "
++"private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++"Το Gtk-doc θεωρεί ότι όλα τα σύμβολα (μακροεντολές, συναρτήσεις, κτλ.) που "
++"ξεκινούν με '_' είναι ιδιωτικά και τα μεταχειρίζεται σαν στατικές "
++"συναρτήσεις."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1252
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1273
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr "Ετικέτες συναρτήσεων"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1274
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "Επιστροφές:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1276
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr "Παράγραφος που περιγράφει το επιστρεφόμενο αποτέλεσμα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1281
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr "@...:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1283
++msgid ""
++"In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag "
++"(@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++"Σε περίπτωση που η συνάρτηση μπορεί να δεχθεί μεταβλητό αριθμό ορισμάτων "
++"(variadic), πρέπει να χρησιμοποιήσετε αυτή την ετικέτα (η ετικέτα @Varargs: "
++"λειτουργεί επίσης, για ιστορικούς λόγους)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1293 C/index.docbook:1295
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "Ομάδα σχολίων ιδιότητας"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1296
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1308 C/index.docbook:1327
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "Ομάδα σχολίων σήματος"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1314
++msgid ""
++"Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or "
++"after other signals."
++msgstr ""
++"Τεκμηριώστε πότε εκπέμπεται το σήμα και κατά πόσο εκπέμπεται πριν ή μετά από "
++"άλλα σήματα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1320
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr "Τεκμηριώστε τι μπορεί να κάνει μια εφαρμογή στον διαχειριστή σημάτων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1328
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZE] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarize\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZE] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarize\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1345 C/index.docbook:1346
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "Ομάδα σχολίων δομής"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1347
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1362
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Χρησιμοποιήστε το <code>/*< private >*/</code> πριν από πεδία "
++"ιδιωτικών δομών που θέλετε να αποκρύψετε. Χρησιμοποιήστε το <code>/*< "
++"public >*/</code>για την αντίστροφη συμπεριφορά."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1368
++msgid ""
++"If the first field is \"g_iface\", \"parent_instance\" or \"parent_class\" "
++"it will be considered private automatically and doesn't need to be mentioned "
++"in the comment block."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν το πρώτο πεδίο είναι \"g_iface\", \"parent_instance\" ή \"parent_class\" "
++"θα θεωρηθεί αυτόματα ιδιωτικό και δεν θα χρειαστεί να αναφερθεί στην περιοχή "
++"των σχολίων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1374
++msgid ""
++"Struct comment blocks can also be used for GObjects and GObjectClasses. It "
++"is usually a good idea to add a comment block for a class, if it has "
++"vmethods (as this is how they can be documented). For the GObject itself one "
++"can use the related section docs, having a separate block for the instance "
++"struct would be useful if the instance has public fields. One disadvantage "
++"here is that this creates two index entries of the same name (the structure "
++"and the section)."
++msgstr ""
++"Οι ομάδες σχολίων μιας δομής μπορούν επίσης να χρησιμοποιηθούν για GObjects "
++"και για GObjectClasses. Είναι συνήθως καλή ιδέα να προσθέτετε μία ομάδα "
++"σχολίου για μια κλάση, εάν έχει vmethods (γιατί έτσι μπορούν να "
++"τεκμηριωθούν). Για το ίδιο το GObject μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε τα σχετικά "
++"έγγραφα τμημάτων, έχοντας μία ξεχωριστή ομάδα για το στιγμιότυπο δομής θα "
++"ήταν χρήσιμο εάν το στιγμιότυπο έχει δημόσια πεδία. Ένα μειονέκτημα εδώ "
++"είναι ότι θα δημιουργηθούν δύο καταχωρήσεις δεικτών για το ίδιο όνομα (για "
++"την δομή και για το τμήμα)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1386 C/index.docbook:1387
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr "Ομάδα σχολίων Enum"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1388
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1405
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Χρησιμοποιήστε το <code>/*< private >*/</code> πριν από ιδιωτικές "
++"τιμές enum που θέλετε να αποκρύψετε. Χρησιμοποιήστε το <code>/*< public "
++">*/</code> για την αντίστροφη συμπεριφορά."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1415
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr "Χρήσιμες ετικέτες DocBook"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1417
++msgid ""
++"Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr ""
++"Ακολουθούν ορισμένες ετικέτες DocBook, ιδιαίτερα χρήσιμες για την τεκμηρίωση "
++"του κώδικα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1426
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1422
++msgid ""
++"To link to another section in the GTK docs: <_:informalexample-1/> The "
++"linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. "
++"For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and "
++"then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class "
++"name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++"Για να συνδεθείτε με μια άλλη ενότητα στην τεκμηρίωση GTK: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/> Ο προορισμός είναι το αναγνωριστικό του SGML/XML στο "
++"πρώτο στοιχείο της σελίδας στην οποία παραπέμπει ο σύνδεσμος. Για τις "
++"περισσότερες σελίδες είναι το (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", glib\"), ακολουθούμενο από "
++"τον τίτλο της σελίδας (\"Πίνακες Hash\"). Για τα γραφικά συστατικά είναι το "
++"όνομα της κλάσης. Τα διαστήματα και τα «_» μετατρέπονται σε «-» για να "
++"υπάρχει συμμόρφωση με το SGML/XML."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1439
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1436
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Αναφορά σε εξωτερική συνάρτηση, π.χ. τυποποιημένη συνάρτηση C: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1448
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1459
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1445
++msgid ""
++"To include example code: <_:informalexample-1/> or possibly this, for very "
++"short code fragments which don't need a title: <_:informalexample-2/> For "
++"the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation: |[ ... ]|"
++msgstr ""
++"Συμπερίληψη παραδειγμάτων κώδικα: <_:informalexample-1/> ή, ενδεχομένως, για "
++"πολύ σύντομο κώδικα που δεν χρειάζεται τίτλο: <_:informalexample-2/>. Στην "
++"τελευταία περίπτωση το GTK-Doc υποστηρίζει επίσης μια συντόμευση: |[ ... ]|"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1478
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1475
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Συμπερίληψη λιστών με κουκκίδες: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1498
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1495
++msgid ""
++"To include a note which stands out from the text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Συμπερίληψη σημειώσεων που ξεχωρίζουν από το υπόλοιπο κείμενο: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1511
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1508
++msgid "To refer to a type: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Για να αναφερθείτε σε έναν τύπο: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1520
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1517
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Για να αναφερθείτε σε μια εξωτερική δομή (που δεν περιγράφεται στην "
++"τεκμηρίωση GTK): <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1529
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1526
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Για να αναφερθείτε σε ένα πεδίο μιας δομής: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1538
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1535
++msgid ""
++"To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <_:informalexample-1/> but "
++"you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link "
++"to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the "
++"abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Για να αναφερθείτε σε ένα όνομα κλάσης, θα μπορούσατε να χρησιμοποιήσετε "
++"το : <_:informalexample-1/>, αλλά μάλλον θα χρησιμοποιήσετε το #GtkWidget "
++"(για αυτόματη δημιουργία συνδέσμου προς τη σελίδα GtkWidget, δείτε <link "
++"linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">τις συντομεύσεις</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1549
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1546
++msgid "To emphasize text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Χρήση έντονων χαρακτήρων: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1558
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1555
++msgid "For filenames use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Για ονόματα αρχείων χρησιμοποιήστε: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1567
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1564
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Για να αναφερθείτε σε κλειδιά χρησιμοποιήστε: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1577
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr "Συμπλήρωση των επιπλέον αρχείων"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1579
++msgid ""
++"There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the "
++"inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past .sgml), "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Υπάρχουν ορισμένα επιπλέον αρχεία που πρέπει να ενημερώνονται παράλληλα με "
++"τα σχόλια εντός του πηγαίου κώδικα: <filename><package>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (στο παρελθόν ."
++"sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1588
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr "Επεξεργασία του αρχείου types"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1590
++msgid ""
++"If your library or application includes GObjects, you want their signals, "
++"arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the "
++"documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</"
++"function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν η βιβλιοθήκη ή η εφαρμογή σας περιέχει GObjects, θα θέλετε να "
++"εμφανίζονται στην τεκμηρίωση τα σήματα, τα ορίσματα/παράμετροι καθώς και η "
++"θέση τους στην ιεραρχία. Για να το πετύχετε, απλά καταγράψτε τις συναρτήσεις "
++"<function>xxx_get_type</function> μαζί με την συμπερίληψή τους στο αρχείο "
++"<filename><package>.types</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1599
++msgid "Example types file snippet"
++msgstr "Υπόδειγμα αποσπάσματος αρχείου types"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1600
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1611
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this "
++"list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not "
++"dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++"Από την έκδοση 1.8 και μετά το <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> μπορεί "
++"να παράγει αυτόματα αυτή τη λίστα. Απλά προσθέστε την επιλογή \"--rebuild-"
++"types\" στο SCAN_OPTIONS του <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Αν "
++"προτιμήσετε αυτή την προσέγγιση, θα πρέπει να μη συμπεριλάβετε το αρχείο "
++"types ούτε στη διανομή ούτε στον έλεγχο εκδόσεων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1620
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr "Επεξεργασία κύριου εγγράφου (master)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1622
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the "
++"inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page "
++"per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them "
++"and place them in an order."
++msgstr ""
++"Το GTK-Doc παράγει τεκμηρίωση σε μορφή SGML/XML DocBook. Κατά την "
++"επεξεργασία των σχολίων εντός του πηγαίου κώδικα, τα εργαλεία του GTK-Doc "
++"παράγουν μία σελίδα τεκμηρίωσης ανά κλάση ή άρθρωμα, η οποία αποθηκεύεται ως "
++"ξεχωριστό αρχείο. Το κύριο έγγραφο συμπεριλαμβάνει αυτά τα αρχεία και τα "
++"ταξινομεί."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1629
++msgid ""
++"While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later runs will "
++"not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the "
++"documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc "
++"has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from "
++"scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there "
++"are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν και το GTK-Doc παράγει αυτόματα ένα πρότυπο κύριο έγγραφο για σας, οι "
++"επόμενες εκτελέσεις δεν θα το ξαναθίξουν. Αυτό σημαίνει ότι μπορείτε να "
++"δομήσετε την τεκμηρίωση ελεύθερα. Αυτό περιλαμβάνει την ομαδοποίηση των "
++"σελίδων και την προσθήκη πρόσθετων σελίδων. Το GTK-Doc διαθέτει πλέον μια "
++"σουίτα για δοκιμές, στην οποία το κύριο έγγραφο αναδημιουργείται από την "
++"αρχή. Είναι καλό να το κοιτάτε κάπου-κάπου για να δείτε αν υπάρχουν κάποια "
++"νέα καλούδια που εισήχθησαν εκεί."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1639
++msgid ""
++"Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The "
++"benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API "
++"documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol "
++"documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along "
++"with the library."
++msgstr ""
++"Μη δημιουργείτε εγχειρίδια ως νέα έγγραφα. Απλά προσθέστε επιπλέον κεφάλαια. "
++"Το όφελος της ενσωμάτωσης απευθείας του εγχειριδίου για μια βιβλιοθήκη στην "
++"τεκμηρίωση API είναι ότι έτσι διευκολύνεται η διαδικασία δημιουργίας "
++"συνδέσμων από το εγχειρίδιο προς την τεκμηρίωση των συμβόλων. Επίσης, έτσι "
++"καθίσταται πιθανότερη η ενημέρωση του εγχειριδίου μαζί με τη βιβλιοθήκη."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1648
++msgid ""
++"So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is "
++"only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there "
++"which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++"Ποιες είναι λοιπόν οι αλλαγές που πρέπει να γίνουν στο κύριο έγγραφο; "
++"Πρόκειται για λίγες μόνο αλλαγές σε ορισμένα placeholders (κείμενα εντός "
++"αγκυλών) που πρέπει να διευκρινήσετε."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1655
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr "Κεφαλίδα κύριου εγγράφου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1656
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1672
++msgid ""
++"In addition a few option elements are created in commented form. You can "
++"review these and enable them as you like."
++msgstr ""
++"Επιπλέον κάποια στοιχεία επιλογής δημιουργούνται με μορφή σχολίου. Μπορείτε "
++"να τα ελέγξετε και να τα ενεργοποιήσετε όπως θέλετε."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1678
++msgid "Optional part in the master document"
++msgstr "Προαιρετικό τμήμα στο κύριο έγγραφο"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1679
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- enable this when you use gobject introspection annotations\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" --> \n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- ενεργοποιήστε το όταν χρησιμοποιείτε σχόλια αυτοελέγχου gobject\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" --> \n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1687
++msgid ""
++"Finally you need to add new section whenever you introduce one. The <link "
++"linkend=\"modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</link> tool will remind "
++"you of newly generated xml files that are not yet included into the doc."
++msgstr ""
++"Τέλος, χρειάζεται να προσθέσετε νέα ενότητα όποτε εισάγετε μία. Το εργαλείο "
++"<link linkend=\"modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</link> θα σας "
++"θυμίσει τα νεοδημιουργούμενα αρχεία xml που δεν περιλαμβάνονται ακόμα στο "
++"έγγραφο."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1695 C/index.docbook:1730
++msgid "Including generated sections"
++msgstr "Συμπερίληψη των δημιουργούμενων ενοτήτων"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1696
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>my library</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>my library</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1708
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr "Επεξεργασία αρχείου ενοτήτων"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1710
++msgid ""
++"The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. "
++"Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control "
++"the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++"Το αρχείο ενοτήτων χρησιμεύει στην οργάνωση της τεκμηρίωσης που παράγεται "
++"από το GTK-Doc. Εδώ διευκρινίζεται σε ποιο άρθρωμα ή κλάση ανήκει κάθε "
++"σύμβολο και αποφασίζεται η ορατότητά του (αν θα είναι δημόσιο ή ιδιωτικό)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1716
++msgid ""
++"The section file is a plain text file with tags delimiting sections. Blank "
++"lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines."
++msgstr ""
++"Το αρχείο ενοτήτων είναι ένα αρχείο απλού κειμένου με ετικέτες οριοθετημένων "
++"περιοχών. Οι κενές γραμμές αγνοούνται, ενώ οι γραμμές που ξεκινούν με '#' "
++"αντιμετωπίζονται ως γραμμές σχολίων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1723
++msgid ""
++"While the tags make the file look like xml, it is not. Please do not close "
++"tags like <SUBSECTION>."
++msgstr ""
++"Ενώ οι ετικέτες δείχνουν πως είναι ένα αρχείο xml, στην πραγματικότητα δεν "
++"είναι. Παρακαλούμε μην κλείνετε τις ετικέτες όπως <SUBSECTION>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1731
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1748
++msgid ""
++"The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, "
++"without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++"FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++"template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++"converted into the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename> or the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. "
++"(The name of the HTML file is based on the module name and the section "
++"title, or for GObjects it is based on the GObjects class name converted to "
++"lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++"Η ετικέτα <FILE> ... </FILE> χρησιμοποιείται για να δηλώσει το "
++"όνομα του αρχείου, χωρίς οποιοδήποτε επίθημα. Παραδείγματος χάρη, η χρήση "
++"του '<FILE>gnome-config</FILE>' θα καταλήξει στην ενότητα "
++"δηλώσεων που εξάγονται στο αρχείο προτύπου <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename>, το οποίο θα μετατραπεί στο αρχείο DocBook XML <filename>xml/gnome-"
++"config.sgml</filename> ή στο αρχείο DocBook XML <filename>xml/gnome-config."
++"xml</filename>. (Το όνομα του αρχείου HTML βασίζεται στο όνομα του "
++"αρθρώματος και τον τίτλο της ενότητας, ή για τα GObjects βασίζεται στο όνομα "
++"κλάσης GObjects που μετατράπηκε σε πεζά γράμματα)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1760
++msgid ""
++"The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the "
++"section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially "
++"created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if "
++"one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++"Η ετικέτα <TITLE> ... </TITLE> χρησιμοποιείται για να ορίσει "
++"τους τίτλους των ενοτήτων. Χρησιμεύει μόνο πριν τη δημιουργία των προτύπων, "
++"καθώς ο τίτλος που περιέχεται στα αρχεία προτύπων αντικαθιστά αυτούς τους "
++"τίτλους. Επίσης, αν χρησιμοποιείται το σχόλιο SECTION στον πηγαίο κώδικα, "
++"αυτό είναι παρωχημένο."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1767
++msgid ""
++"You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. "
++"Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis "
++"section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject "
++"declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the "
++"documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private "
++"declarations which will not be output (it is a handy way to avoid warning "
++"messages about unused declarations). If your library contains private types "
++"which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of "
++"implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection. "
++"Whether you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs in public or "
++"Standard section depends if they have public entries (variables, vmethods)."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε να ομαδοποιήσετε στοιχεία στην ενότητα χρησιμοποιώντας την ετικέτα "
++"<SUBSECTION>. Με την τωρινή της μορφή, εμφανίζει μία κενή γραμμή "
++"μεταξύ υποενοτήτων στη συνοπτική παρουσίαση. Μπορείτε επίσης να "
++"χρησιμοποιήσετε την <SUBSECTION Standard> για κλασικές δηλώσεις "
++"GObject (π.χ. συναρτήσεις όπως η g_object_get_type και μακροεντολές όπως οι "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT(), κτλ.). Προς το παρόν αυτές οι δηλώσεις μένουν "
++"εκτός τεκμηρίωσης. Μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε την ετικέτα <SUBSECTION "
++"Private> για ιδιωτικές δηλώσεις που δεν πρόκειται να εμφανιστούν στην "
++"τεκμηρίωση (έτσι αποφεύγετε τις προειδοποιήσεις για δηλώσεις που δεν "
++"χρησιμοποιούνται). Αν η βιβλιοθήκη σας περιέχει ιδιωτικούς τύπους, για τους "
++"οποίους δεν επιθυμείτε να εμφανίζονται στην ιεραρχία αντικειμένων και στη "
++"λίστα υλοποιημένων ή απαιτούμενων διεπαφών, προσθέσετε τους σε μία ιδιωτική "
++"υποενότητα. Αν θα τοποθετήσετε κλάσεις GObject και GObjectClass σε δημόσιες "
++"ή κλασσικές ενότητες εξαρτάται από το αν έχετε δημόσιες καταχωρήσεις "
++"(μεταβλητές,vmethods)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1786
++msgid ""
++"You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the "
++"#include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-"
++"separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it "
++"outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. "
++"If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε, επίσης, να χρησιμοποιήσετε την ετικέτα <INCLUDE> ... </"
++"INCLUDE> για τα αρχεία #include που περιλαμβάνονται στις ενότητες "
++"συνοπτικής παρουσίασης. Περιέχει μία λίστα με αρχεία #include, χωρισμένα με "
++"κόμματα και χωρίς τα '<' και '>'. Αν δεν τη χρησιμοποιήσετε στο "
++"εσωτερικό κάποιας ενότητας, θα αφορά όλες τις ενότητες μέχρι το τέλος του "
++"αρχείου. Αν τη χρησιμοποιήσετε στο εσωτερικό μιας ενότητας, τότε θα αφορά "
++"μόνο τη συγκεκριμένη ενότητα. "
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1800
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr "Έλεγχος αποτελέσματος"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1802
++msgid ""
++"A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The "
++"generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and "
++"<filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text "
++"files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++"Κατά την εκτέλεση του GTK-Doc παράγονται αρχεία αναφορών που τοποθετούνται "
++"στον κατάλογο της τεκμηρίωσης. Πρόκειται για τα αρχεία: <filename><"
++"package>-undocumented.txt</filename>, <filename><package>-"
++"undeclared.txt</filename> και <filename><package>-unused.txt</"
++"filename>. Είναι αρχεία απλού κειμένου, εύκολα στην ανάγνωση και επεξεργασία."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1811
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with "
++"the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank "
++"lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The "
++"second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, "
++"which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++"Το αρχείο <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> ξεκινά με "
++"μία περίληψη της κάλυψης της τεκμηρίωσης. Ακολουθούν δύο ενότητες που "
++"χωρίζονται μεταξύ τους με κενές γραμμές. Η πρώτη ενότητα αναφέρει τα σύμβολα "
++"που δε διαθέτουν τεκμηρίωση ή είναι ημιτελή. Η δεύτερη καταγράφει τα ίδια "
++"στοιχεία για την τεκμηρίωση των ενοτήτων. Ημιτελείς θεωρούνται οι "
++"καταχωρήσεις για τις οποίες υπάρχει τεκμηρίωση, αλλά στις οποίες π.χ. "
++"προστέθηκε μια νέα παράμετρος."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1820
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols "
++"given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found "
++"in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++"Το αρχείο <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> περιέχει "
++"σύμβολα που αναφέρονται στο αρχείο <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>, αλλά δε βρέθηκαν στον πηγαίο κώδικα. Θα πρέπει να ελέγξετε αν "
++"έχουν αφαιρεθεί ή αν περιέχουν συντακτικά λάθη."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1827
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, "
++"where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where "
++"to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Το αρχείο <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> περιέχει ονόματα "
++"συμβόλων για τα οποία η σάρωση του GTK-Doc βρήκε τεκμηρίωση, αλλά δεν "
++"γνωρίζει πού να την τοποθετήσει. Aυτό σημαίνει ότι τα σύμβολα δεν έχουν "
++"προστεθεί ακόμη στο αρχείο <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1835
++msgid ""
++"Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile."
++"am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during "
++"<command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++"Ενεργοποιήστε ή προσθέστε τη γραμμή <option>TESTS=($GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> "
++"στο Makefile.am. Αν έχετε εγκατεστημένη την έκδοση GTK-Doc 1.9 ή "
++"μεταγενέστερη, θα πραγματοποιεί διάφορους ελέγχους κατά την εκτέλεση του "
++"<command>make check</command>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1842
++msgid ""
++"One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: "
++"<filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><"
++"package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first one can be compared with the "
++"section file if that is manually maintained. The second lists all "
++"declarations from the headers. If a symbol is missing one could check if "
++"this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε επίσης να δείτε τα αρχεία που παράγονται από το σαρωτή του πηγαίου "
++"κώδικα: <filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> και <filename><"
++"package>-decl.txt</filename>. Το πρώτο μπορεί να συγκριθεί με το αρχείο "
++"της ενότητας, αν αυτό συντηρείται χειροκίνητα. Το δεύτερο περιέχει όλες τις "
++"δηλώσεις από τις κεφαλίδες. Αν ένα σύμβολο λείπει μπορείτε να ελέγξετε αν "
++"περιέχεται σε αυτό το αρχείο."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1851
++msgid ""
++"If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced "
++"by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>."
++"prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</"
++"filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask GTK-Doc "
++"to keep the intermediate scanner file for further analysis, by running it as "
++"<command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν το έργο βασίζεται στο GObject, μπορείτε επίσης να δείτε τα αρχεία που "
++"παράγονται από το σαρωτή αντικειμένων: <filename><package>.args.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>."
++"prerequisites.txt</filename> και <filename><package>.signals.txt</"
++"filename>. Αν υπάρχουν σύμβολα που λείπουν από οποιοδήποτε από αυτά, "
++"μπορείτε να ζητήσετε από το gtkdoc να κρατήσει το ενδιάμεσο αρχείο σάρωσης "
++"για περαιτέρω ανάλυση, εκτελώντας το ως μια εντολή "
++"<command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1866
++msgid "Modernizing the documentation"
++msgstr "Εκσυγχρονίζοντας την τεκμηρίωση"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1868
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc has been around for quite some time. In this section we list new "
++"features together with the version since when it is available."
++msgstr ""
++"Το GTK-Doc κυκλοφορεί εδώ και αρκετό καιρό. Σε αυτό το κεφάλαιο θα "
++"παραθέσουμε τις νέες λειτουργίες μαζί με την έκδοση στην οποία είναι "
++"διαθέσιμες."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1874
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1876
++msgid ""
++"When using xml instead of sgml, one can actually name the master document "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Όταν χρησιμοποιείτε το xml αντί για το sgml, μπορείτε πράγματι να ονομάσετε "
++"το κύριο έγγραφο <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1881
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from "
++"the vcs. This only works nicely for projects that have a very regular "
++"structure (e.g. each .{c,h} pair will create new section). If one organize a "
++"project close to that updating a manually maintained section file can be as "
++"simple as running <code>meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-"
++"sections.txt</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Αυτή η έκδοση υποστηρίζει <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> "
++"στο <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Αν αυτό ενεργοποιηθεί, το "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> αυτοδημιουργείται και "
++"μπορεί να αφαιρεθεί από το vcs. Αυτό λειτουργεί καλά μόνο για έργα που έχουν "
++"μια πολύ κανονική δομή (π.χ. το κάθε ζεύγος .{c,h} θα δημιουργεί μια νέα "
++"ενότητα). Αν κάποιος οργανώσει ένα έργο κοντά σε αυτό, τότε η ενημέρωση μιας "
++"ενότητας αρχείων που συντηρούνται χειρονακτικά μπορεί να είναι τόσο απλή όσο "
++"και το να εκτελούμε <code>meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-"
++"sections.txt</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1892
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.8 already introduced the syntax for documenting sections in the "
++"sources instead of the separate files under <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">tmpl</filename>. This version adds options to switch the whole doc module "
++"to not use the extra tmpl build step at all, by using <option>--flavour no-"
++"tmpl</option> in <filename>configure.ac</filename>. If you don't have a "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> checked into you source "
++"control system and haven't yet switched, just add the flag to "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> and you are done."
++msgstr ""
++"Η εκδοση 1.8 εισήγαγε ήδη τη σύνταξη για τις ενότητες τεκμηρίωσης στις "
++"πηγές, αντί για τα ξεχωριστά αρχεία, κάτω από το <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">tmpl</filename>. Αυτή η έκδοση προσθέτει επιλογές για τη μετατροπή "
++"ολόκληρου του αρθρώματος doc ώστε να μη χρησιμοποιεί καθόλου το επιπλέον "
++"στάδιο δόμησης tmpl, με τη χρήση του <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> στο "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. Εάν δεν έχετε ένα <filename class="
++"\"directory\">tmpl</filename> σημειωμένο στο σύστημα ελέγχου πηγής και δεν "
++"έχετε ακόμα αλλάξει, προσθέστε απλά τη σημαία στο <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename> και τελειώσατε."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1904
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1906
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from the "
++"vcs. When using this feature it is important to also setup the "
++"<varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> in <filename>Makefile.am</filename> for "
++"code that is build conditionally."
++msgstr ""
++"Αυτή η έκδοση υποστηρίζει τα <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> "
++"στο <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Αν αυτό ενεργοποιηθεί, το "
++"<filename><package>.types</filename> αυτοδημιουργείται και μπορεί να "
++"αφαιρεθεί από το vcs. Όταν χρησιμοποιείτε αυτή τη λειτουργία είναι σημαντικό "
++"να ρυθμίσετε και το <varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> στο <filename>Makefile."
++"am</filename> για τον κώδικα που δομείται υπό όρους."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1917
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1923
++msgid "Enable gtkdoc-check"
++msgstr "Ενεργοποίηση του gtkdoc-check"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1924
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1919
++msgid ""
++"This version includes a new tool called gtkdoc-check. This tool can run a "
++"set of sanity checks on your documentation. It is enabled by adding these "
++"lines to the end of <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Αυτή η έκδοση περιλαμβάνει ένα νέο εργαλείο που λέγεται gtkdoc-check. Αυτό "
++"το εργαλείο μπορέι να εκτελεί ένα σύνολο ελέγχων στην τεκμηρίωσή σας. "
++"Ενεργοποιείται προσθέτοντας αυτές τις γραμμές στο τέλος του "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1937
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1939
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.18 brought some initial markdown support. Using markdown in doc "
++"comments is less intrusive than writing docbook xml. This version improves a "
++"lot on this and add a lot more styles. The section that explains the <link "
++"linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">comment syntax</link> has all the details."
++msgstr ""
++"Η έκδοση 1.18 έφερε μια αρχική υποστήριξη για το markdown. Η χρήση markdown "
++"στα σχόλια του doc είναι λιγότερο ενοχλητική από το να γράφει κανείς docbook "
++"xml. Αυτή η έκδοση επιφέρει μεγάλες βελτιώσεις σε αυτό και προσθέτει "
++"περισσότερα στυλ. Η ενότητα που εξηγεί τη <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax"
++"\">σύνταξη σχολίων</link> έχει όλες τις λεπτομέρειες."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1949
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1959
++msgid "Use pre-generated entities"
++msgstr "Χρήση προδημιουργημένων οντοτήτων"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1960
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for &package_string;.\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for &package_string;.\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1951
++msgid ""
++"The makefiles shipped with this version generate an entity file at "
++"<filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename>, containing entities for e.g. "
++"package_name and package_version. You can use this e.g. in the main xml file "
++"to avoid hardcoding the version number. Below is any example that shows how "
++"the entity file is included and how the entities are used. The entities can "
++"also be used in all generated files, GTK-Doc will use the same xml header in "
++"generated xml files. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Τα αρχεία makefiles που έρχονται με αυτή την έκδοση παράγουν ένα αρχείο "
++"οντοτήτων στο <filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename>, το οποίο "
++"περιλαμβάνει οντότητες π.χ. package_name και package_version. Μπορείτε να το "
++"χρησιμοποιήσετε π.χ. στο κύριο αρχείο xml για να αποφύγετε τον στατικό "
++"ορισμό του αριθμού έκδοσης. Παρακάτω είναι ένα παράδειγμα που σας δείχνει "
++"πως συμπεριλαμβάνεται το αρχείο οντοτήτων και πως οι οντότητες "
++"χρησιμοποιούνται. Οι οντότητες μπορούν να χρησιμοποιηθούν και σε όλα τα "
++"δημιουργημένα αρχεία, καθώς το GTK-Doc θα χρησιμοποιήσει την ίδια κεφαλίδα "
++"xml σε όλα τα δημιουργημένα αρχεία xml. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1985
++msgid "Documenting other interfaces"
++msgstr "Τεκμηρίωση άλλων διεπαφών"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1987
++msgid ""
++"So far we have been using GTK-Doc to document the API of code. The next "
++"sections contain suggestions how the tools can be used to document other "
++"interfaces too."
++msgstr ""
++"Μέχρ τώρα, χρησιμοποιούσαμε το GTK-Doc για να καταγράφουμε το API του "
++"κώδικα. Οι επόμενες συνεδρίες περιέχουν προτάσεις για το πώς τα εργαλεία "
++"μπορούν να χρησιμοποιηθούν για να καταγράφετε και άλλες διεπαφές."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1994
++msgid "Command line options and man pages"
++msgstr "Επιλογές γραμμής εντολών και σελίδες τεκμηρίωσης man"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1996
++msgid ""
++"As one can generate man pages for a docbook refentry as well, it sounds like "
++"a good idea to use it for that purpose. This way the interface is part of "
++"the reference and one gets the man-page for free."
++msgstr ""
++"Δεδομένου ότι κάποιος μπορεί να παραγάγει σελίδες man για ένα docbook "
++"refentry επίσης, θα ήταν καλή ιδέα να χρησιμοποιηθεί και για αυτόν τον "
++"σκοπό. Με αυτόν τον τρόπο η διεπαφή γίνεται μέρος της αναφοράς και αποκτά "
++"δωρεάν την σελίδα-man."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2003
++msgid "Document the tool"
++msgstr "Τεκμηρίωση του εργαλείου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2005
++msgid ""
++"Create one refentry file per tool. Following <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">our example</link> we would call it <filename>meep/"
++"docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. For the xml tags that should be "
++"used and can look at generated file in the xml subdirectory as well as "
++"examples e.g. in glib."
++msgstr ""
++"Δημιουργήστε ένα refentry αρχείο ανά εργαλείο. Ακολουθώντας <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\"> το παράδειγμά μας </link> θα το ονομάσουμε "
++"<filename>meep/docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. Για τις ετικέτες "
++"xml που πρέπει να χρησιμοποιηθούν και μπορούν να εξετάσουν το παραγόμενο "
++"αρχείο στον υποκατάλογο xml καθώς επίσης και τα παραδείγματα π.χ. στο glib."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2015
++msgid "Adding the extra configure check"
++msgstr "Προσθήκη του έξτρα ελέγχου διαμόρφωσης"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2018 C/index.docbook:2036
++msgid "Extra configure checks"
++msgstr "Επιπλέον έλεγχοι ρυθμίσεων"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2019
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2033
++msgid "Adding the extra makefile rules"
++msgstr "Προσθήκη των επιπλέον κανόνων makefile"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2037
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2059
++msgid "DBus interfaces"
++msgstr "Διεπαφές DBus"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2061
++msgid ""
++"(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++msgstr ""
++"(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2070
++msgid "Frequently asked questions"
++msgstr "Συχνές ερωτήσεις"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2074
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "Ερώτηση"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2075
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "Απάντηση"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2077
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Δεν υπάρχει ιεραρχία κλάσεων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2078
++msgid ""
++"The objects <function>xxx_get_type()</function> function has not been "
++"entered into the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Η συνάρτηση αντικειμένου <function>xxx_get_type()</function> δεν έχει "
++"εισαχθεί στο αρχείο <filename><package>.types</filename>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2084
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Εξακολουθεί να μην υπάρχει ιεραρχία κλάσεων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2085
++msgid ""
++"Missing or wrong naming in <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> "
++"file (see <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-doc-list/2003-"
++"October/msg00006.html\">explanation</ulink>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Ελλιπής ή λανθασμένη ονομασία στο αρχείο <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> (δείτε την <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-"
++"doc-list/2003-October/msg00006.html\">αιτιολόγηση</ulink>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2091
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Στο καλό του, πάλι δεν έχω ιεραρχία κλάσεων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2092
++msgid ""
++"Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <type>GtkWidget</"
++"type>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private "
++"subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++"Ελέγξτε αν το όνομα του αντικειμένου (δηλαδή το όνομα του συγκεκριμένου "
++"παραδείγματος της δομής, π.χ. <type>GtkWidget</type>) περιλαμβάνεται στην "
++"κανονική ενότητα (δεν πρέπει να βρίσκεται εντός υποενότητας Standard ή "
++"Private)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2099
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr "Δεν υπάρχει ευρετήριο συμβόλων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2100
++msgid ""
++"Does the <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contain a "
++"index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++"Το <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> περιέχει ένα "
++"ευρετήριο το οποίο περιλαμβάνει με xi:includes το παραγόμενο ευρετήριο;"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2106
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr ""
++"Δεν υπάρχουν σύνδεσμοι μεταξύ των συμβόλων και των κατάλληλων ενοτήτων της "
++"τεκμηρίωσης."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2107
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the "
++"gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++"Το doc-comment χρησιμοποιεί σωστά τις επισημάνσεις (έχουν προστεθεί #,% ή "
++"()); Ελέγξτε αν το gtkdoc-fixxref προειδοποιεί για ανεπίλυτα xrefs."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2113
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "Μια νέα κλάση δεν εμφανίζεται στην τεκμηρίωση."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2114
++msgid ""
++"Is the new page xi:included from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Συμπεριλαμβάνεται η νέα σελίδα xi:included από το <filename><package>-"
++"docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>;"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2120
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "Ένα νέο σύμβολο δεν εμφανίζεται στην τεκμηρίωση."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2121
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the "
++"begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable "
++"xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++"Το doc-comment είναι κανονικά μορφοποιημένο; Ελέγξτε για συντακτικά λάθη "
++"στην αρχή του σχολίου. Ελέγξτε αν το gtkdoc-fixxref προειδοποιεί για "
++"ανεπίλυτα xref. Ελέγξτε αν το σύμβολο είναι σωστά καταχωρημένο στο "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> σε μια δημόσια υποενότητα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2129
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Λείπει ένας τύπος από την ιεραρχία κλάσεων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2130
++msgid ""
++"If the type is listed in <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> but "
++"not in <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> then double check that the "
++"type is correctly placed in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>. If the type instance (e.g. <type>GtkWidget</type>) is not listed "
++"or incidentally marked private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν ο τύπος υπάρχει στο <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> αλλά "
++"όχι στο <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> τότε ελέγξτε ξανά ότι ο "
++"τύπος είναι σωστά τοποθετημένος στο <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>. Αν ο τύπος του παραδείγματος (π.χ. <type>GtkWidget</type>) δεν "
++"είναι καταχωρημένος, ή είναι κατά λάθος σημειωμένος ως ιδιωτικός, τότε δε θα "
++"εμφανιστεί."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2139
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr "Λαμβάνω συνδέσμους foldoc για όλες τις σημειώσεις gobject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2140
++msgid ""
++"Check that <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> is xi:included "
++"from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Ελέγξτε ότι το <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> είναι xi:"
++"included από το <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2148
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr ""
++"Μια παράμετρος περιγράφεται σε σχόλιο του πηγαίου κώδικα, αλλά δεν υπάρχει"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2149
++msgid ""
++"Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the "
++"source."
++msgstr ""
++"Ελέγξτε αν το πρωτότυπο στην κεφαλίδα περιέχει διαφορετικό όνομα για την "
++"παράμετρο από αυτό που αναφέρεται στον κώδικα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2154
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr "Πολλαπλά \"Αναγνωριστικά\" για τον προορισμό συνδέσμου: XYZ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2155
++msgid ""
++"Symbol XYZ appears twice in <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Το σύμβολο XYZ εμφανίζεται δύο φορές στο αρχείο <filename><package>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2158
++msgid ""
++"Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template "
++"matches."
++msgstr ""
++"Βρέθηκε το όνομα τύπου του στοιχείου στην ονοματοθεσία '', αλλά δεν "
++"αντιστοιχεί σε κανένα πρότυπο."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2165
++msgid "Tools related to gtk-doc"
++msgstr "Εργαλεία σχετικά με το gtk-doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2167
++msgid ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - a <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac "
++"GTK-Doc</ulink> integration plugin, that adds API docs to a trac site and "
++"integrates with the trac search."
++msgstr ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - ένα πρόσθετο ενσωμάτωσης <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/"
++"wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac GTK-Doc</ulink>, που προσθέτει έγγραφα API σε "
++"ιστοσελίδες trac και ενσωματώνεται με την αναζήτηση trac."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2172
++msgid ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - a tool (part of gtk-doc) to check used API against since "
++"tags in the API to determine the minimum required version."
++msgstr ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - ένα εργαλείο (μέρος του gtk-doc) για έλεγχο του "
++"χρησιμοποιούμενου API, επειδή οι ετικέτες στο API καθορίζουν την ελάχιστη "
++"απαιτούμενη έκδοση."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/releaseinfo
++#: C/index.docbook:12 C/fdl-appendix.xml:12
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr "Έκδοση 1.1, Μάρτιος 2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:15
++msgid "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000</year><holder>Ίδρυμα Ελεύθερου Λογισμικού, Inc.</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/index.docbook:20
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:19 C/fdl-appendix.xml:19
++msgid ""
++"<_:address-1/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies "
++"of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr ""
++"<_:address-1/> Επιτρέπεται σε όλους η αντιγραφή και διανομή ακριβούς "
++"αντιγράφου του κειμένου αυτής της άδειας αλλά απαγορεύεται η αλλοίωση του "
++"περιεχομένου του."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendix/title
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/index.docbook:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:642
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr "Άδεια Ελεύθερης Τεκμηρίωσης GNU (GFDL)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:31 C/fdl-appendix.xml:31
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr "0. ΠΡΟΟΙΜΙΟ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"Σκοπός της παρούσας Άδειας είναι η δημιουργία εγχειριδίων, συγγραμμάτων ή "
++"άλλων εγγράφων που είναι <quote>ελεύθερα</quote> υπό την έννοια ότι παρέχουν "
++"σε όλους πραγματική ελευθερία αντιγραφής και αναδιανομής τους, με ή χωρίς "
++"τροποποιήσεις, για εμπορικούς ή μη εμπορικούς σκοπούς. Δευτερευόντως, η "
++"παρούσα Άδεια παρέχει έναν τρόπο για να αναγνωρίζεται το έργο του συγγραφέα "
++"και του εκδότη ενός έργου, χωρίς να μπορούν να θεωρηθούν υπεύθυνοι για "
++"τροποποιήσεις που έγιναν από τρίτους."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that "
++"derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. "
++"It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license "
++"designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++"Η παρούσα Άδεια είναι μια άδεια τύπου <quote>copyleft</quote>, το οποίο "
++"σημαίνει ότι τα παράγωγα έργα του εγγράφου θα πρέπει να είναι και αυτά "
++"ελεύθερα υπό την ίδια έννοια. Πρόκειται για άδεια συμπληρωματική της Γενικής "
++"Άδειας Δημόσιας Χρήσης GNU, που είναι άδεια copyleft σχεδιασμένη για "
++"ελεύθερο λογισμικό."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:50 C/fdl-appendix.xml:50
++msgid ""
++"We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free "
++"software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program "
++"should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. "
++"But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any "
++"textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a "
++"printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose "
++"is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++"Σχεδιάσαμε αυτήν την Άδεια για χρήση με εγχειρίδια ελεύθερου λογισμικού, "
++"γιατί το ελεύθερο λογισμικό χρειάζεται και ελεύθερη τεκμηρίωση: τα ελεύθερα "
++"προγράμματα πρέπει να συνοδεύονται από εγχειρίδια που παρέχουν τις ίδιες "
++"ελευθερίες που παρέχει και το λογισμικό. Ωστόσο, αυτή η Άδεια δεν "
++"περιορίζεται στα εγχειρίδια λογισμικού· μπορεί να χρησιμοποιηθεί για "
++"οποιοδήποτε έργο κειμένου, ανεξάρτητα από το θέμα του ή από το αν εκδίδεται "
++"σε έντυπη μορφή. Συνιστούμε αυτή την Άδεια, κυρίως, για διδακτικό υλικό ή "
++"έργα αναφοράς."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:62 C/fdl-appendix.xml:62
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr "1. ΙΣΧΥΣ ΚΑΙ ΟΡΙΣΜΟΙ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such "
++"manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "
++"<quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Η Άδεια αυτή εφαρμόζεται σε κάθε εγχειρίδιο ή άλλο έργο που περιέχει ένδειξη "
++"του δικαιούχου δικαιωμάτων πνευματικής ιδιοκτησίας, ότι επιτρέπεται η "
++"διανομή του υπό τους όρους αυτής της Άδειας. Ως <quote>Έγγραφο</quote>, "
++"κατωτέρω, αναφέρεται κάθε τέτοιο εγχειρίδιο. Ως κάτοχος της άδειας χρήσης "
++"θεωρείται κάθε άτομο, και αναφέρεται ως <quote>εσείς</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:72
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing "
++"the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with "
++"modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"Ως <quote>Τροποποιημένη Έκδοση</quote> του Εγγράφου θεωρείται κάθε έργο που "
++"περιέχει το Έγγραφο ή μέρος αυτού, είτε ως ακριβές αντίγραφο, είτε "
++"τροποποιημένο και/είτε μεταφρασμένο σε άλλη γλώσσα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:79
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter "
++"section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals "
++"exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the "
++"Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and "
++"contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For "
++"example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary "
++"Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter "
++"of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of "
++"legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding "
++"them."
++msgstr ""
++"Ως <quote>Δευτερεύουσα Ενότητα</quote> θεωρείται κάθε παράρτημα ή αρχική "
++"ενότητα του <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφου</link> που αναφέρεται "
++"αποκλειστικά στη σχέση των εκδοτών ή συγγραφέων του Εγγράφου με το συνολικό "
++"θέμα του Εγγράφου (ή σχετικά ζητήματα), και που δεν περιέχει οτιδήποτε "
++"μπορεί να θεωρηθεί ότι εντάσσεται άμεσα στο συνολικό αυτό θέμα. (Επί "
++"παραδείγματι, αν το Έγγραφο αποτελεί, εν μέρει, σύγγραμμα μαθηματικών, η "
++"Δευτερεύουσα Ενότητα δεν επιτρέπεται να επεξηγεί μαθηματικές έννοιες.) Η "
++"σχέση μπορεί να αποτελεί ιστορική σύνδεση με το θέμα ή σχετικά ζητήματα, ή "
++"νομική, εμπορική, φιλοσοφική, ηθική ή πολιτική θέση επί του θέματος ή "
++"σχετικών ζητημάτων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:94
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being "
++"those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"<quote>Αμετάβλητες Ενότητες</quote> είναι ορισμένες <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Δευτερεύουσες Ενότητες</link> των οποίων οι τίτλοι αναφέρονται "
++"ρητώς ως τίτλοι Αμετάβλητων Ενοτήτων στην ένδειξη όπου αναφέρεται ότι το "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Έγγραφο</link> δημοσιεύεται υπό τους όρους "
++"αυτής της Άδειας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:103
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are "
++"listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says "
++"that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under "
++"this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Τα <quote>Κείμενα Εξωφύλλου</quote> είναι σύντομα αποσπάσματα κειμένου που "
++"αναφέρονται ρητώς ως Κείμενα Εμπροσθοφύλλου ή Κείμενα Οπισθοφύλλου στην "
++"ένδειξη όπου αναφέρεται ότι το <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Έγγραφο</link> "
++"δημοσιεύεται υπό τους όρους αυτής της Άδειας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:111
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> "
++"Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose "
++"specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be "
++"viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors "
++"or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) "
++"some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text "
++"formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for "
++"input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file "
++"format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent "
++"modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "
++"<quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Ως <quote>Διαφανές</quote> αντίγραφο του <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Εγγράφου</link> θεωρείται κάθε αντίγραφο σε μορφή αναγνώσιμη από μηχανή, "
++"όταν συντρέχουν οι εξής προϋποθέσεις: Οι τεχνικές προδιαγραφές τις μορφής "
++"αυτής είναι διαθέσιμες για δημόσια χρήση· τα περιεχόμενα του αντιγράφου "
++"μπορούν να προβληθούν και να τύχουν επεξεργασίας άμεσα και απλά, με χρήση "
++"γενόσημων επεξεργαστών κειμένου ή ( για εικόνες αποτελούμενες από "
++"εικονοστοιχεία) γενόσημων προγραμμάτων ζωγραφικής ή (για σχέδια) ευρέως "
++"διαθέσιμων επεξεργαστών σχεδίων· το αντίγραφο είναι κατάλληλο για είσοδο σε "
++"μορφοποιητές κειμένου ή για αυτόματη μετάφραση σε ποικίλες μορφές κατάλληλες "
++"για είσοδο σε μορφοποιητές κειμένου. Δεν θεωρείται Διαφανές ένα αντίγραφο σε "
++"Διαφανή, κατά τα λοιπά, μορφή αρχείου, του οποίου η επισήμανση έχει "
++"σχεδιαστεί κατά τρόπο που να αποτρέπει ή να αποθαρρύνει τη μελλοντική "
++"τροποποίηση του αντιγράφου από τους αναγνώστες. Το αντίγραφο που δεν είναι "
++"<quote>Διαφανές</quote> ονομάζεται <quote>Αδιαφανές</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:128 C/fdl-appendix.xml:128
++msgid ""
++"Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII "
++"without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using "
++"a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for "
++"human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary "
++"formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, "
++"SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally "
++"available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors "
++"for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++"Παραδείγματα μορφών κατάλληλων για τη δημιουργία Διαφανών αντιγράφων είναι η "
++"απλή ASCII χωρίς επισήμανση, η μορφή εισόδου Texinfo, η μορφή εισόδου LaTeX, "
++"η SGML ή XML που χρησιμοποιούν δημοσίως διαθέσιμη DTD, και η HTML που "
++"συμμορφώνεται με πρότυπα και έχει σχεδιαστεί για τροποποίηση από τον "
++"άνθρωπο. Στις Αδιαφανείς μορφές συμπεριλαμβάνονται η PostScript, η PDF, οι "
++"ιδιοταγείς μορφές που αναγιγνώσκονται μόνο από ιδιοταγείς επεξεργαστές "
++"κειμένου, η SGML ή XML των οποίων η DTD και/ή τα εργαλεία επεξεργασίας δεν "
++"είναι δημοσίως διαθέσιμα, και η HTML με αποκλειστικό προορισμό την έξοδο που "
++"παράγουν μηχανοκίνητα ορισμένοι επεξεργαστές κειμένου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:141
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page "
++"itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the "
++"material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in "
++"formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> "
++"means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, "
++"preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++"Ως <quote>Σελίδα Τίτλου</quote> θεωρείται, για τα έντυπα βιβλία, η σελίδα "
++"τίτλου αυτή καθαυτή, καθώς και τυχόν επόμενες σελίδες που απαιτούνται για "
++"την ευανάγνωστη συμπερίληψη του υλικού που οφείλει να εμφανίζεται στη σελίδα "
++"τίτλου σύμφωνα με την παρούσα Άδεια. Για τα έργα σε μορφές που δεν "
++"περιλαμβάνουν σελίδα τίτλου αυτή καθαυτή, ως <quote>Σελίδα Τίτλου</quote> "
++"θεωρείται το κείμενο που βρίσκεται κοντά στην εμφανέστερη εμφάνιση του "
++"τίτλου του έργου και το οποίο προηγείται του σώματος του κειμένου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:153 C/fdl-appendix.xml:153
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr "2. ΑΚΡΙΒΗ ΑΝΤΙΓΡΑΦΑ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that "
++"this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this "
++"License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you "
++"add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use "
++"technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of "
++"the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in "
++"exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you "
++"must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Σας χορηγείται άδεια αντιγραφής και διανομής του <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Εγγράφου</link> σε οποιοδήποτε μέσο, για εμπορικό ή μη εμπορικό σκοπό, με "
++"την προϋπόθεση ότι σε κάθε αντίγραφο θα συμπεριλαμβάνετε την παρούσα Άδεια, "
++"τις ενδείξεις δικαιωμάτων πνευματικής ιδιοκτησίας και την ένδειξη άδειας "
++"χρήσης που αναφέρει ότι για το έγγραφο ισχύει η παρούσα Άδεια, και με την "
++"προϋπόθεση ότι δεν θα προσθέσετε κανένα επιπρόσθετο όρο πέρα από τους όρους "
++"της Άδειας. Δεν σας επιτρέπεται να χρησιμοποιήσετε τεχνικά μέτρα για την "
++"παρεμπόδιση ή τον έλεγχο της ανάγνωσης ή περαιτέρω αντιγραφής των αντιγράφων "
++"που δημιουργείτε ή διανέμετε. Ωστόσο, μπορείτε να αποδεχτείτε αποζημίωση σε "
++"αντάλλαγμα των αντιγράφων. Αν διανέμετε επαρκή αριθμό αντιγράφων, θα πρέπει "
++"να συμμορφωθείτε και με τους όρους της <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"section3\">ενότητας 3</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:169 C/fdl-appendix.xml:169
++msgid ""
++"You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you "
++"may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++"Επίσης, μπορείτε να δανείζετε αντίγραφα σύμφωνα με τους ως άνω όρους και να "
++"προβάλλετε δημοσίως τα αντίγραφα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:176 C/fdl-appendix.xml:176
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr "3. ΑΝΤΙΓΡΑΦΗ ΣΕ ΜΕΓΑΛΕΣ ΠΟΣΟΤΗΤΕΣ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license "
++"notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you "
++"must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these "
++"Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on "
++"the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as "
++"the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title "
++"with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as "
++"verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν εκδώσετε περισσότερα από 100 στον αριθμό έντυπα αντίγραφα του <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφου</link>, και η ένδειξη άδειας χρήσης του "
++"Εγγράφου προϋποθέτει την ύπαρξη <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Κειμένων "
++"Εξωφύλλου</link>, θα πρέπει να εσωκλείσετε τα αντίγραφα σε εξώφυλλα που θα "
++"περιέχουν, με καθαρό και ευανάγνωστο τρόπο, όλα τα ακόλουθα κείμενα "
++"εξωφύλλου: Κείμενα Εμπροσθοφύλλου στο εμπροσθόφυλλο και Κείμενα Οπισθοφύλλου "
++"στο οπισθόφυλλο. Επίσης, και τα δύο εξώφυλλα θα πρέπει να αναφέρουν, καθαρά "
++"και ευανάγνωστα, εσάς ως εκδότη των αντιγράφων. Στο εμπροσθόφυλλο θα πρέπει "
++"να αναφέρεται ο πλήρης τίτλος του Εγγράφου, και όλες οι λέξεις του τίτλου θα "
++"πρέπει να είναι εξίσου προβεβλημένες και εμφανείς. Επιτρέπεται να προσθέσετε "
++"επιπρόσθετο υλικό στα εξώφυλλα. Η παραγωγή αντιγράφων που διαφέρουν μόνο ως "
++"προς τα εξώφυλλα, εφόσον διατηρείται ο τίτλος του <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Εγγράφου</link> και τηρούνται οι παρούσες προϋποθέσεις, μπορεί να "
++"θεωρηθεί, κατά τα λοιπά, ως παραγωγή ακριβών αντιγράφων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:195 C/fdl-appendix.xml:195
++msgid ""
++"If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, "
++"you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the "
++"actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν τα απαιτούμενα κείμενα ενός ή και των δύο εξωφύλλων είναι υπερβολικά "
++"μεγάλα για να παραμείνουν ευανάγνωστα αν συμπεριληφθούν σε μία σελίδα, θα "
++"πρέπει να τοποθετήσετε τα πρώτα εξώφυλλα του καταλόγου (όσα χωρούν κανονικά) "
++"στο εξώφυλλο αυτό καθ' αυτό, και να τοποθετήσετε τα υπόλοιπα στις γειτονικές "
++"σελίδες."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> "
++"copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more "
++"than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state "
++"in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location "
++"containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added "
++"material, which the general network-using public has access to download "
++"anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use "
++"the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin "
++"distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent "
++"copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one "
++"year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through "
++"your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν εκδώσετε περισσότερα από 100 στον αριθμό <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent"
++"\">Αδιαφανή</link> αντίγραφα του <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφου</"
++"link>, είτε θα πρέπει να συμπεριλάβετε ένα <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent"
++"\">Διαφανές</link> αντίγραφο (σε μορφή αναγνώσιμη από μηχανή) σε κάθε "
++"Αδιαφανές αντίγραφο, είτε θα πρέπει να αναφέρετε — μαζί ή σε κάθε Αδιαφανές "
++"αντίγραφο — μια δημοσίως προσβάσιμη τοποθεσία δικτύου υπολογιστών από την "
++"οποία θα μπορεί το ευρύ κοινό που χρησιμοποιεί δίκτυα να λάβει ανώνυμα, "
++"δωρεάν, και με χρήση πρωτοκόλλων δικτύου δημοσίων προτύπων, ένα ολοκληρωμένο "
++"Διαφανές αντίγραφο του Εγγράφου, χωρίς προσθήκες. Αν επιλέξετε τη δεύτερη "
++"επιλογή, όταν ξεκινήσετε τη διανομή των Αδιαφανών αντιγράφων, θα πρέπει να "
++"λάβετε λελογισμένα μέτρα για να διασφαλίσετε ότι το Διαφανές αντίγραφο θα "
++"παραμείνει προσβάσιμο στην ως άνωθεν τοποθεσία για τουλάχιστον ένα έτος μετά "
++"την τελευταία δημόσια διανομή Αδιαφανούς αντιγράφου αυτής της έκδοσης (είτε "
++"πρόκειται για άμεση διανομή είτε για διανομή μέσω των πρακτόρων ή "
++"λιανοπωλητών σας)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any "
++"large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated "
++"version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"Σας ζητείται, αλλά δεν απαιτείται, να επικοινωνήσετε εγκαίρως με τους "
++"συγγραφείς του <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφου</link>, πριν "
++"αναδιανείμετε μεγάλο αριθμό αντιγράφων, ώστε να έχουν τη δυνατότητα να σας "
++"παράσχουν αναθεωρημένη έκδοση του Εγγράφου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:231 C/fdl-appendix.xml:231
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr "4. ΤΡΟΠΟΠΟΙΗΣΕΙΣ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under "
++"the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the "
++"Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version "
++"filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"Σας χορηγείται άδεια αντιγραφής και διανομής <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Τροποποιημένων Εκδόσεων</link> του <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Εγγράφου</link> υπό τους όρους των ενοτήτων <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"section2\">2</link> και <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> ανωτέρω, με "
++"την προϋπόθεση ότι θα δημοσιεύσετε την Τροποποιημένη Έκδοση υπό την παρούσα "
++"Άδεια ως έχει, όπου ως Έγγραφο θα νοείται η Τροποποιημένη Έκδοση. Άρα, θα "
++"χορηγείται άδεια διανομής και τροποποίησης της Τροποποιημένης Έκδοσης σε "
++"οποιονδήποτε κατέχει αντίγραφό της. Επιπροσθέτως, στην Τροποποιημένη Έκδοση "
++"θα πρέπει να κάνετε τα εξής:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:248 C/fdl-appendix.xml:248
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "Α"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the "
++"covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which "
++"should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the "
++"Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original "
++"publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Στη <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Σελίδα Τίτλου</link> (και τα εξώφυλλα, "
++"αν υφίστανται), χρησιμοποιήστε τίτλο διακριτό από τον τίτλο του <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφου</link> και των προηγούμενων εκδόσεών του "
++"(τυχόν προηγούμενες εκδόσεις οφείλουν να αναφέρονται στην ενότητα Ιστορικού "
++"του Εγγράφου). Μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε τον ίδιο τίτλο με τον τίτλο "
++"προηγούμενης έκδοσης, αν λάβετε άδεια από τον αρχικό εκδότη της προηγούμενης "
++"έκδοσης."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:264 C/fdl-appendix.xml:264
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "Β"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, "
++"one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the "
++"modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has "
++"less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"Αναφέρετε στη <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Σελίδα Τίτλου</link>, υπό την "
++"ιδιότητα του συγγραφέα, όλα τα άτομα ή τους φορείς που ευθύνονται για τη "
++"συγγραφή ή την τροποποίηση της <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Τροποποιημένης "
++"Έκδοσης</link>, μαζί με τουλάχιστον πέντε από τους κύριους συγγραφείς του "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφου</link> ( ή όλους τους κύριους "
++"συγγραφείς, αν είναι λιγότεροι από πέντε)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:279 C/fdl-appendix.xml:279
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "Γ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of "
++"the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++"Αναφέρετε στη <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Σελίδα Τίτλου</link>, υπό την "
++"ιδιότητα του εκδότη, το όνομα του εκδότη της <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Τροποποιημένης Έκδοσης</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:291 C/fdl-appendix.xml:291
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "Δ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:292
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Διατηρήστε όλες τις ενδείξεις δικαιωμάτων πνευματικής ιδιοκτησίας του <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφου</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:301 C/fdl-appendix.xml:301
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "Ε"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:302 C/fdl-appendix.xml:302
++msgid ""
++"Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the "
++"other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++"Προσθέστε την κατάλληλη ένδειξη δικαιωμάτων πνευματικής ιδιοκτησίας για τις "
++"τροποποιήσεις σας στις υπόλοιπες ενδείξεις δικαιωμάτων πνευματικής "
++"ιδιοκτησίας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:311 C/fdl-appendix.xml:311
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "ΣΤ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the "
++"Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Συμπεριλάβετε, αμέσως μετά τις ενδείξεις δικαιωμάτων πνευματικής "
++"ιδιοκτησίας, μια ένδειξη άδειας χρήσης που θα χορηγεί δημόσια άδεια χρήσης "
++"της <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Τροποποιημένης Έκδοσης</link> υπό τους "
++"όρους της παρούσας Άδειας. Η μορφή της ένδειξης αυτής παρατίθεται στο "
++"Συμπλήρωμα που ακολουθεί."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:324 C/fdl-appendix.xml:324
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "Ζ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Διατηρήστε σε αυτή την ένδειξη άδειας χρήσης τους πλήρεις καταλόγους <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Αμετάβλητων Ενοτήτων</link> και απαιτούμενων <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Κειμένων Εξωφύλλου</link> που παρατίθενται στην "
++"ένδειξη άδειας χρήσης του <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφου</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:337 C/fdl-appendix.xml:337
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "Η"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:338 C/fdl-appendix.xml:338
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr "Συμπεριλάβετε αντίγραφο, χωρίς τροποποιήσεις, της παρούσας Άδειας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:346 C/fdl-appendix.xml:346
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "Θ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add "
++"to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> as given on "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no "
++"section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and "
++"publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Διατηρήστε την ενότητα με τίτλο <quote>Ιστορικό</quote>, καθώς και τον τίτλο "
++"της, και προσθέστε μία εγγραφή που θα αναφέρει τουλάχιστον τον τίτλο, το "
++"έτος, τους νέους συγγραφείς και τον εκδότη της <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Τροποποιημένης Έκδοσης</link> όπως αυτά αναφέρονται στη <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-title-page\">Σελίδα Τίτλου</link>. Αν δεν υπάρχει ενότητα με τίτλο "
++"<quote>Ιστορικό</quote> στο <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Έγγραφο</link>, "
++"δημιουργήστε αυτήν την ενότητα, αναγράφοντας τον τίτλο, το έτος, τους νέους "
++"συγγραφείς και τον εκδότη του Εγγράφου, όπως αυτά αναφέρονται στη Σελίδα "
++"Τίτλου, και προσθέτοντας μία εγγραφή που θα περιγράφει την Τροποποιημένη "
++"Έκδοση σύμφωνα με την προηγούμενη πρόταση."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:365 C/fdl-appendix.xml:365
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "Ι"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the "
++"network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based "
++"on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit "
++"a network location for a work that was published at least four years before "
++"the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers "
++"to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Διατηρήστε την τοποθεσία δικτύου που ενδεχομένως παρέχεται στο <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Έγγραφο</link> για δημόσια πρόσβαση σε <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Περατό</link> αντίγραφο του Εγγράφου, καθώς και τυχόν άλλες "
++"τοποθεσίες δικτύου που παρέχονται στο έγγραφο και αφορούν προηγούμενες "
++"εκδόσεις του. Οι τοποθεσίες αυτές μπορούν να τοποθετηθούν στην ενότητα "
++"<quote>Ιστορικό</quote>. Μπορείτε να παραλείψετε τοποθεσίες δικτύου για έργα "
++"που εκδόθηκαν τουλάχιστον τέσσερα έτη πριν από το ίδιο το Έγγραφο, ή αν ο "
++"αρχικός εκδότης της αντίστοιχης έκδοσης σας δώσει την άδεια."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:383 C/fdl-appendix.xml:383
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "ΙΑ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in "
++"the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor "
++"acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν υπάρχει ενότητα με τίτλο <quote>Ευχαριστίες</quote> ή <quote>Αφιέρωση</"
++"quote>, διατηρήστε τον τίτλο της ενότητας, και διατηρήστε στο σώμα της "
++"ενότητας την ουσία και το ύφος των ευχαριστιών και/ή αφιερώσεων που "
++"συμπεριλαμβάνονται σε αυτή."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:396 C/fdl-appendix.xml:396
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "ΙΒ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their "
++"text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not "
++"considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Διατηρήστε όλες τις <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Αμετάβλητες Ενότητες</"
++"link> του <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφου</link>, χωρίς καμία "
++"τροποποίηση στο κείμενο και τον τίτλο τους. Η αρίθμηση των ενοτήτων, —ή άλλο "
++"ισοδύναμό της—, δεν θεωρείται τμήμα του τίτλου των ενοτήτων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:409 C/fdl-appendix.xml:409
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "ΙΓ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may "
++"not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Διαγράψτε τυχόν ενότητες με τίτλο <quote>Έγκριση</quote>. Αυτού του είδους "
++"οι ενότητες δεν επιτρέπεται να συμπεριληφθούν στην <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"modified\">Τροποποιημένη Έκδοση</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:421 C/fdl-appendix.xml:421
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "ΙΔ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to "
++"conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant "
++"Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Μην αλλάζετε τον τίτλο καμίας προϋπάρχουσας ενότητα σε <quote>Έγκριση</"
++"quote> ή σε τίτλο που να συγκρούεται με τον τίτλο οποιασδήποτε <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Αμετάβλητης Ενότητας</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new "
++"front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from "
++"the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections "
++"as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's "
++"license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν η <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Τροποποιημένη Έκδοση</link> περιλαμβάνει "
++"νέες αρχικές ενότητες ή παραρτήματα, που εμπίπτουν στον ορισμό των <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Δευτερευουσών Ενοτήτων</link>, και δεν περιέχουν "
++"υλικό που να είναι προϊόν αντιγραφής του Εγγράφου, μπορείτε, εφόσον το "
++"επιθυμείτε, να ορίσετε ορισμένες ή όλες αυτές τις ενότητες ως αμετάβλητες. "
++"Για να το πράξετε, προσθέστε τους τίτλους αυτών των ενοτήτων στον κατάλογο "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\">Αμετάβλητων Ενοτήτων</link> στην ένδειξη "
++"άδειας χρήσης της Τροποποιημένης Έκδοσης. Οι τίτλοι αυτοί θα πρέπει να είναι "
++"διακριτοί από τους υπόλοιπους τίτλους ενοτήτων.."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it "
++"contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of "
++"peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the "
++"authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε να προσθέσετε ενότητα με τίτλο <quote>Έγκριση</quote>, με την "
++"προϋπόθεση ότι περιλαμβάνει αποκλειστικά εγκρίσεις της δικής σας <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Τροποποιημένης Έκδοσης</link> από διάφορους φορείς, "
++"—επί παραδείγματι, δηλώσεις αξιολόγησης ομοτίμων ή δηλώσεις ότι το κείμενο "
++"έχει εγκριθεί από έναν οργανισμό ως έγκυρος ορισμός ενός προτύπου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list "
++"of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover "
++"Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements "
++"made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by "
++"you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, "
++"you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit "
++"permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε να προσθέσετε κείμενο μέχρι και πέντε λέξεις ως <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Κείμενο Εμπροσθοφύλλου</link>, καθώς και κείμενο μέχρι και 25 "
++"λέξεις ως <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Κείμενο Οπισθοφύλλου</link>, στο "
++"τέλος του καταλόγου <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Κειμένων Εξωφύλλου</"
++"link> της <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Τροποποιημένης Έκδοσης</link>. Κάθε "
++"μεμονωμένος φορέας επιτρέπεται να προσθέτει μόνο ένα Κείμενο Εμπροσθοφύλλου "
++"και ένα Κείμενο Οπισθοφύλλου (ο ίδιος ή εξ ονόματος του ίδιου). Αν το <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Έγγραφο</link> περιέχει ήδη κείμενο εξωφύλλου για "
++"το ίδιο εξώφυλλο, —που είχατε προσθέσει προηγουμένως είτε εξ ονόματός σας "
++"είτε εξ ονόματος του φορέα που εκπροσωπείτε—, δεν σας επιτρέπεται να "
++"προσθέσετε επιπλέον εξώφυλλο· σας επιτρέπεται ωστόσο να αντικαταστήσετε το "
++"προηγούμενο, με ρητή άδεια από τον εκδότη που είχε προσθέσει το προηγούμενο "
++"εξώφυλλο."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names "
++"for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Μέσω της παρούσας άδειας, ο/οι συγγραφείς και ο/οι εκδότες του <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφου</link> δεν χορηγούν άδεια χρήσης των ονομάτων τους "
++"για διαφημιστικούς σκοπούς ή για την έγκριση, —ρητή ή υπονοούμενη—, "
++"οποιασδήποτε <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Τροποποιημένης Έκδοσης</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:480 C/fdl-appendix.xml:480
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "5. ΣΥΝΔΥΑΣΜΟΣ ΕΓΓΡΑΦΩΝ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with "
++"other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, "
++"unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in "
++"its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε να συνδυάσετε το <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Έγγραφο</link> με "
++"άλλα έγγραφα που υπόκεινται στους όρους της παρούσας Άδειας, σύμφωνα με τους "
++"ανωτέρω όρους της <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">ενότητας 4</link> για τις "
++"τροποποιημένες εκδόσεις, με την προϋπόθεση ότι ο συνδυασμός θα περιλαμβάνει "
++"όλες τις <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Αμετάβλητες Ενότητες</link> όλων "
++"των πρωτότυπων εγγράφων, χωρίς τροποποιήσεις, και ότι θα αναφέρονται ως "
++"Αμετάβλητες Ενότητες του συνδυασμένου έργου στην ένδειξη άδειας χρήσης του."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be "
++"replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with "
++"the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section "
++"unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original "
++"author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make "
++"the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections "
++"in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"Το συνδυασμένο έργο οφείλει να περιέχει ένα μόνο αντίγραφο της παρούσας "
++"Άδειας, και επιτρέπεται η αντικατάσταση πολλαπλών ταυτόσημων <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Αμετάβλητων Ενοτήτων</link> από ένα μόνο αντίγραφό τους. "
++"Αν υφίστανται πολλαπλές Αμετάβλητες Ενότητες με τον ίδιο τίτλο αλλά "
++"διαφορετικό περιεχόμενο, φροντίστε να κατασταθεί μοναδικός ο τίτλος κάθε "
++"ενότητας, προσθέτοντας στο τέλος του τίτλου, εντός παρενθέσεων, το όνομα του "
++"αρχικού συγγραφέα ή εκδότη της ενότητας εφόσον τα γνωρίζετε, ή, εναλλακτικά, "
++"ένα μοναδικό αριθμό. Φροντίστε να κάνετε τις ίδιες αλλαγές στους τίτλους των "
++"ενοτήτων που αναγράφονται στον κατάλογο Αμετάβλητων Ενοτήτων στην ένδειξη "
++"άδειας χρήσης του συνδυασμένου έργου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</"
++"quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled "
++"<quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled "
++"<quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++"Στο συνδυασμό θα πρέπει να συνδυάσετε όλες τις ενότητες με τίτλο "
++"<quote>Ιστορικό</quote> που ενδεχομένως διαθέτουν τα πρωτότυπα έγγραφα, "
++"δημιουργώντας μία μοναδική ενότητα με τίτλο <quote>Ιστορικό</quote>. Κατά "
++"τον ίδιο τρόπο θα πρέπει να συνδυάσετε και όλες τις ενότητες με τίτλο "
++"<quote>Ευχαριστίες</quote> ή όλες τις ενότητες με τίτλο <quote>Αφιέρωση</"
++"quote>. Θα πρέπει να διαγράψετε όλες τις ενότητες με τίτλο <quote>Έγκριση</"
++"quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:516 C/fdl-appendix.xml:516
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "6. ΣΥΛΛΟΓΗ ΕΓΓΡΑΦΩΝ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and "
++"replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with "
++"a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow "
++"the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in "
++"all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε να δημιουργήσετε συλλογή που θα περιλαμβάνει το παρόν <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Έγγραφο</link> μαζί με άλλα έγγραφα που υπόκεινται στους "
++"όρους της παρούσας Άδειας, και να συμπεριλάβετε στη συλλογή ένα μόνο "
++"αντίγραφο της παρούσας Άδειας, που θα αντικαθιστά τα μεμονωμένα αντίγραφά "
++"της στα διάφορα έγγραφα, με την προϋπόθεση ότι, κατά τα λοιπά, θα "
++"συμμορφωθείτε με τους κανόνες της παρούσας Άδειας για την παραγωγή πιστών "
++"αντιγράφων καθενός από αυτά τα έγγραφα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:527 C/fdl-appendix.xml:527
++msgid ""
++"You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it "
++"individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License "
++"into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects "
++"regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε να εξάγετε ένα μεμονωμένο έγγραφο από μια συλλογή τέτοιου είδους, "
++"και να το διανείμετε ξεχωριστά υπό τους όρους της παρούσας Άδειας, με την "
++"προϋπόθεση ότι θα προσθέσετε αντίγραφο της παρούσας Άδειας στο εξαχθέν "
++"έγγραφο, και ότι, κατά τα λοιπά, θα συμμορφωθείτε με τους κανόνες της "
++"παρούσας Άδειας για την παραγωγή ακριβών αντιγράφων αυτού του εγγράφου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:537 C/fdl-appendix.xml:537
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr "7. ΣΥΡΡΑΦΗ ΜΕ ΑΝΕΞΑΡΤΗΤΑ ΕΡΓΑ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its "
++"derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on "
++"a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, "
++"provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a "
++"compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</"
++"link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν το <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφο</link> ή τα παράγωγά του "
++"συμπεριληφθούν, μαζί με άλλα ξεχωριστά και ανεξάρτητα έγγραφα ή έργα, σε "
++"τόμο ενός μέσου αποθήκευσης ή διανομής, ο τόμος αυτός, στο σύνολό του, δεν "
++"θεωρείται <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Τροποποιημένη Έκδοση</link> του "
++"εγγράφου, με την προϋπόθεση ότι δεν διεκδικούνται δικαιώματα πνευματικής "
++"ιδιοκτησίας για αυτόν. Ο εν λόγω τόμος ονομάζεται <quote>συρραφή</quote> και "
++"η παρούσα άδεια δεν ισχύει για τα υπόλοιπα αυθύπαρκτα έργα που "
++"συμπεριλαμβάνονται σε αυτόν, πέραν του Έγγραφο, απλώς και μόνο επειδή "
++"ανήκουν σε αυτή τη συρραφή, εκτός εάν αποτελούν και αυτά παράγωγα έργα του "
++"Εγγράφου. Αν για αυτά τα αντίγραφα του Εγγράφου ισχύουν οι όροι για τα <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Κείμενα Εξωφύλλου</link> της <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"section3\">ενότητας 3</link>, τότε, αν το Έγγραφο αντιστοιχεί σε λιγότερο "
++"από το ένα τέταρτο του συνόλου της συρραφής, τα Κείμενα Εξωφύλλου του "
++"Εγγράφου επιτρέπεται να τοποθετηθούν σε εξώφυλλα εντός της συρραφής που "
++"εσωκλείουν μόνο το Έγγραφο. Ειδάλλως, θα πρέπει να τοποθετηθούν σε εξώφυλλα "
++"που εσωκλείουν ολόκληρη τη συρραφή."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:561 C/fdl-appendix.xml:561
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr "8. ΜΕΤΑΦΡΑΣΗ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the "
++"terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations "
++"requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may "
++"include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the "
++"original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation "
++"of this License provided that you also include the original English version "
++"of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the "
++"original English version of this License, the original English version will "
++"prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"Η μετάφραση θεωρείται μορφή τροποποίησης, άρα μπορείτε να διανέμετε "
++"μεταφράσεις του <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφου</link> υπό τους "
++"όρους της <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">ενότητας 4</link>. Η αντικατάσταση "
++"των <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Αμετάβλητων Ενοτήτων</link> από "
++"μεταφράσεις απαιτεί ειδική άδεια από τους κατόχους των δικαιωμάτων "
++"πνευματικής ιδιοκτησίας, αλλά επιτρέπεται η συμπερίληψη στο Έγγραφο "
++"μεταφράσεων ορισμένων ή όλων των Αμετάβλητων Ενοτήτων, επιπλέον των "
++"πρωτότυπων εκδόσεων αυτών των Αμετάβλητων Ενοτήτων. Μπορείτε να προσθέσετε "
++"μεταφράσεις της παρούσας Άδειας, με την προϋπόθεση ότι θα συμπεριλάβετε και "
++"την πρωτότυπη Αγγλική έκδοση της Άδειας. Σε περίπτωση ασυμφωνίας μεταξύ "
++"μετάφρασης και πρωτότυπης Αγγλικής έκδοσης της Άδειας, ισχύει η πρωτότυπη "
++"Αγγλική έκδοση."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:580 C/fdl-appendix.xml:580
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr "9. ΚΑΤΑΡΓΗΣΗ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this "
++"License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the "
++"Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this "
++"License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you "
++"under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such "
++"parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++"Δεν σας επιτρέπεται η αντιγραφή, τροποποίηση, περαιτέρω παραχώρηση άδειας "
++"εκμετάλλευσης ή διανομή του <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Εγγράφου</link> "
++"παρά μόνο με τον τρόπο που ρητά προβλέπεται από αυτήν την Άδεια. Κάθε άλλη "
++"απόπειρα αντιγραφής, τροποποίησης, περαιτέρω παραχώρησης άδειας "
++"εκμετάλλευσης ή διανομής του Εγγράφου είναι άκυρη και αυτομάτως καταργεί τα "
++"δικαιώματα που σας παραχωρεί η παρούσα Άδεια. Ωστόσο, τα μέρη στα οποία "
++"παρείχατε αντίγραφα ή δικαιώματα υπό τους όρους της παρούσας Άδειας, δεν θα "
++"απωλέσουν τα δικαιώματα χρήσης τους, εφόσον εξακολουθούν να συμμορφώνονται "
++"πλήρως με τους όρους της Άδειας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:594 C/fdl-appendix.xml:594
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr "10. ΜΕΛΛΟΝΤΙΚΕΣ ΑΝΑΘΕΩΡΗΣΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑΣ ΑΔΕΙΑΣ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:595
++msgid ""
++"The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU "
++"Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be "
++"similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to "
++"address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www."
++"gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Το <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Ίδρυμα "
++"Ελεύθερου Λογισμικού</ulink> έχει το δικαίωμα να δημοσιεύει περιστασιακά "
++"αναθεωρημένες ή/και νέες εκδόσεις της Ελεύθερης Άδειας Τεκμηρίωσης GNU "
++"(GFDL). Αυτές οι νέες εκδόσεις θα είναι συναφείς στο πνεύμα με την παρούσα "
++"έκδοση, όμως ενδέχεται να διαφέρουν στις λεπτομέρειες, καθώς επιλαμβάνονται "
++"νέων προβλημάτων και ζητημάτων. Βλέπε <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www."
++"gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular "
++"numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies "
++"to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of "
++"that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not "
++"as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not "
++"specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever "
++"published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"Σε κάθε έκδοση δίνεται ένας διακριτικός αριθμός έκδοσης. Εάν στο <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Έγγραφο</link> καθορίζεται ότι ισχύει ένας "
++"συγκεκριμένος αριθμός έκδοσης της παρούσας Άδειας ή <quote>οποιαδήποτε "
++"μεταγενέστερη έκδοση</quote>, μπορείτε να επιλέξετε μεταξύ των όρων και "
++"προϋποθέσεων είτε αυτής της έκδοσης, είτε οποιασδήποτε μεταγενέστερης "
++"έκδοσης έχει δημοσιευτεί (όχι με μορφή σχεδίου) από το Ίδρυμα Ελεύθερου "
++"Λογισμικού. Εάν στο Πρόγραμμα δεν καθορίζεται αριθμός έκδοσης της Άδειας, "
++"μπορείτε να επιλέξετε οποιαδήποτε έκδοση έχει δημοσιευθεί (όχι με μορφή "
++"σχεδίου) από το Ίδρυμα Ελεύθερου Λογισμικού (FSF)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:621 C/fdl-appendix.xml:621
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr "Συμπλήρωμα"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:622 C/fdl-appendix.xml:622
++msgid ""
++"To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the "
++"License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices "
++"just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++"Για να χρησιμοποιήσετε την παρούσα Άδεια σε έγγραφο το οποίο συγγράψατε, θα "
++"πρέπει να συμπεριλάβετε ένα αντίγραφο της Άδειας στο έγγραφο και να "
++"τοποθετήσετε τις ακόλουθες ενδείξεις δικαιωμάτων πνευματικής ιδιοκτησίας και "
++"άδειας χρήσης αμέσως μετά τη σελίδα τίτλου: "
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:629 C/fdl-appendix.xml:629
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr "Copyright © ΕΤΟΣ ΤΟ ΟΝΟΜΑ ΣΑΣ."
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, "
++"and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being "
++"LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU "
++"Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Χορηγείται άδεια αντιγραφής, διανομής και/ή τροποποίησης του παρόντος "
++"εγγράφου υπό τους όρους της έκδοσης 1.1 της Ελεύθερης Άδειας Τεκμηρίωσης GNU "
++"(GFDL), ή οποιασδήποτε μεταγενέστερης έκδοσής αυτής από το Ίδρυμα Ελεύθερου "
++"Λογισμικού (FSF)· οι <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Αμετάβλητες Ενότητες</"
++"link> είναι οι ΚΑΤΑΛΟΓΟΣ ΤΙΤΛΩΝ, τα <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts"
++"\">Κείμενα εμπροσθοφύλλου</link> είναι τα ΚΑΤΑΛΟΓΟΣ, και τα <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Κείμενα Οπισθοφύλλου</link> είναι τα ΚΑΤΑΛΟΓΟΣ. "
++"Αντίγραφο της άδειας συμπεριλαμβάνεται στην ενότητα με τίτλο <quote>GNU Free "
++"Documentation License</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, "
++"write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover "
++"Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of "
++"<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν δεν περιέχονται <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Αμετάβλητες Ενότητες</"
++"link>, γράψτε <quote>χωρίς Αμετάβλητες Ενότητες</quote>, αντί να "
++"απαριθμήσετε τις αμετάβλητες ενότητες. Αν δεν περιέχονται <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Κείμενα Εμπροσθοφύλλου</link>, γράψτε <quote>χωρίς "
++"Κείμενα Εμπροσθοφύλλου</quote> αντί για <quote>τα Κείμενα Εμπροσθοφύλλου "
++"είναι τα ΚΑΤΑΛΟΓΟΣ</quote>· ομοίως για τα <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts"
++"\">Κείμενα Οπισθοφύλλου</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++"gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν το έγγραφό σας περιέχει μη ασήμαντα παραδείγματα πηγαίου κώδικα, "
++"συνιστούμε την παράλληλη δημοσίευσή τους υπό τους όρους της άδειας ελεύθερου "
++"λογισμικού της αρεσκείας σας, ώστε να επιτρέψετε τη χρήση τους σε ελεύθερο "
++"λογισμικό. Παράδειγμα τέτοιας άδειας αποτελεί η <ulink type=\"http\" url="
++"\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html\">Γενική Άδεια Δημόσιας Χρήσης GNU</"
++"ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/year
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/holder
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr "Ίδρυμα Ελεύθερου Λογισμικού, Inc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/street
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++msgstr "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/city
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "Boston"
++msgstr "Βοστόνη"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/state
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "MA"
++msgstr "MA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/postcode
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "02110-1301"
++msgstr "02110-1301"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/country
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "USA"
++msgstr "Η.Π.Α"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Ίδρυμα Ελεύθερου Λογισμικού, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> "
++"<_:postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:34
++msgid "free"
++msgstr "ελεύθερα"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <_:quote-1/> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"Σκοπός της παρούσας Άδειας είναι η δημιουργία εγχειριδίων, συγγραμμάτων ή "
++"άλλων εγγράφων που είναι <_:quote-1/> υπό την έννοια ότι παρέχουν σε όλους "
++"πραγματική ελευθερία αντιγραφής και αναδιανομής τους, με ή χωρίς "
++"τροποποιήσεις, για εμπορικούς ή μη εμπορικούς σκοπούς. Δευτερευόντως, η "
++"παρούσα Άδεια παρέχει έναν τρόπο για να αναγνωρίζεται το έργο του συγγραφέα "
++"και του εκδότη ενός έργου, χωρίς να μπορούν να θεωρηθούν υπεύθυνοι για "
++"τροποποιήσεις που έγιναν από τρίτους."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:44
++msgid "copyleft"
++msgstr "copyleft"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <_:quote-1/>, which means that derivative works of "
++"the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the "
++"GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"Η παρούσα Άδεια είναι άδεια τύπου <_:quote-1/>, το οποίο σημαίνει ότι τα "
++"παράγωγα έργα του εγγράφου θα πρέπει να είναι και αυτά ελεύθερα υπό την ίδια "
++"έννοια. Πρόκειται για άδεια συμπληρωματική της Γενικής Άδειας Δημόσιας "
++"Χρήσης GNU, που είναι άδεια copyleft σχεδιασμένη για ελεύθερο λογισμικό."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:67 C/fdl-appendix.xml:82 C/fdl-appendix.xml:99
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:107 C/fdl-appendix.xml:113 C/fdl-appendix.xml:156
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:179 C/fdl-appendix.xml:190 C/fdl-appendix.xml:205
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:224 C/fdl-appendix.xml:235 C/fdl-appendix.xml:253
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:271 C/fdl-appendix.xml:294 C/fdl-appendix.xml:354
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:368 C/fdl-appendix.xml:400 C/fdl-appendix.xml:462
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:472 C/fdl-appendix.xml:482 C/fdl-appendix.xml:519
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:540 C/fdl-appendix.xml:565 C/fdl-appendix.xml:583
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:608
++msgid "Document"
++msgstr "Έγγραφo"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:69
++msgid "you"
++msgstr "εσείς"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <_:quote-1/>, below, refers to any such manual or work. "
++"Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <_:quote-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Η Άδεια αυτή εφαρμόζεται σε κάθε εγχειρίδιο ή άλλο έργο που περιέχει ένδειξη "
++"του δικαιούχου δικαιωμάτων πνευματικής ιδιοκτησίας, ότι επιτρέπεται η "
++"διανομή του υπό τους όρους αυτής της Άδειας. Ως <_:quote-1/>, κατωτέρω, "
++"αναφέρεται κάθε τέτοιο εγχειρίδιο. Ως κάτοχος της άδειας χρήσης θεωρείται "
++"κάθε άτομο, και αναφέρεται ως <_:quote-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:73 C/fdl-appendix.xml:234 C/fdl-appendix.xml:269
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:283 C/fdl-appendix.xml:315 C/fdl-appendix.xml:351
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:413 C/fdl-appendix.xml:433 C/fdl-appendix.xml:447
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:459 C/fdl-appendix.xml:475 C/fdl-appendix.xml:543
++msgid "Modified Version"
++msgstr "Τροποποιημένη Έκδοση"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:72
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a "
++"portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or "
++"translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"Ως <_:quote-1/> του Εγγράφου θεωρείται κάθε έργο που περιέχει το Έγγραφο ή "
++"μέρος αυτού, είτε ως ακριβές αντίγραφο, είτε τροποποιημένο και/είτε "
++"μεταφρασμένο σε άλλη γλώσσα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:80
++msgid "Secondary Section"
++msgstr "Δευτερεύουσα Ενότητα"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:79
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <_:"
++"link-2/> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or "
++"authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related "
++"matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall "
++"subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, "
++"a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could "
++"be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related "
++"matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political "
++"position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++"Ως <_:quote-1/> θεωρείται κάθε παράρτημα ή αρχική ενότητα του <_:link-2/> "
++"που αναφέρεται αποκλειστικά στη σχέση των εκδοτών ή συγγραφέων του Εγγράφου "
++"με το συνολικό θέμα του Εγγράφου (ή σχετικά ζητήματα), και που δεν περιέχει "
++"οτιδήποτε μπορεί να θεωρηθεί ότι εντάσσεται άμεσα στο συνολικό αυτό θέμα. "
++"(Επί παραδείγματι, αν το Έγγραφο αποτελεί, εν μέρει, σύγγραμμα μαθηματικών, "
++"η Δευτερεύουσα Ενότητα δεν επιτρέπεται να επεξηγεί μαθηματικές έννοιες.) Η "
++"σχέση μπορεί να αποτελεί ιστορική σύνδεση με το θέμα ή σχετικά ζητήματα, ή "
++"νομική, εμπορική, φιλοσοφική, ηθική ή πολιτική θέση επί του θέματος ή "
++"σχετικών ζητημάτων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:95 C/fdl-appendix.xml:327 C/fdl-appendix.xml:398
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:439 C/fdl-appendix.xml:486 C/fdl-appendix.xml:494
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:567 C/fdl-appendix.xml:637 C/fdl-appendix.xml:648
++msgid "Invariant Sections"
++msgstr "Αμετάβλητες Ενότητες"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:96 C/fdl-appendix.xml:435
++msgid "Secondary Sections"
++msgstr "Δευτερεύουσες Ενότητες"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:94
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain <_:link-2/> whose titles are designated, as "
++"being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-3/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"<_:quote-1/> είναι ορισμένες <_:link-2/> των οποίων οι τίτλοι αναφέρονται "
++"ρητώς ως τίτλοι Αμετάβλητων Ενοτήτων στην ένδειξη όπου αναφέρεται ότι το <_:"
++"link-3/> δημοσιεύεται υπό τους όρους αυτής της Άδειας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:104 C/fdl-appendix.xml:181 C/fdl-appendix.xml:328
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:458
++msgid "Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Κείμενα Εξωφύλλου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:103
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as "
++"Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-2/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Τα <_:quote-1/> είναι σύντομα αποσπάσματα κειμένου που αναφέρονται ρητώς ως "
++"Κείμενα Εμπροσθοφύλλου ή Κείμενα Οπισθοφύλλου στην ένδειξη όπου αναφέρεται "
++"ότι το <_:link-2/> δημοσιεύεται υπό τους όρους αυτής της Άδειας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:112 C/fdl-appendix.xml:124 C/fdl-appendix.xml:207
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:369
++msgid "Transparent"
++msgstr "Διαφανές"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:125 C/fdl-appendix.xml:204
++msgid "Opaque"
++msgstr "Αδιαφανές"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:111
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> copy of the <_:link-2/> means a machine-readable copy, "
++"represented in a format whose specification is available to the general "
++"public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and "
++"straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of "
++"pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available "
++"drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for "
++"automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text "
++"formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup "
++"has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers "
++"is not Transparent. A copy that is not <_:quote-3/> is called <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Ως <_:quote-1/> αντίγραφο από το <_:link-2/> θεωρείται κάθε αντίγραφο σε "
++"μορφή αναγνώσιμη από μηχανή, όταν συντρέχουν οι εξής προϋποθέσεις: Οι "
++"τεχνικές προδιαγραφές τις μορφής αυτής είναι διαθέσιμες για δημόσια χρήση· "
++"τα περιεχόμενα του αντιγράφου μπορούν να προβληθούν και να τύχουν "
++"επεξεργασίας άμεσα και απλά, με χρήση γενόσημων επεξεργαστών κειμένου ή "
++"( για εικόνες αποτελούμενες από εικονοστοιχεία) γενόσημων προγραμμάτων "
++"ζωγραφικής ή (για σχέδια) ευρέως διαθέσιμων επεξεργαστών σχεδίων· το "
++"αντίγραφο είναι κατάλληλο για είσοδο σε μορφοποιητές κειμένου ή για αυτόματη "
++"μετάφραση σε ποικίλες μορφές κατάλληλες για είσοδο σε μορφοποιητές κειμένου. "
++"Δεν θεωρείται Διαφανές ένα αντίγραφο σε Διαφανή, κατά τα λοιπά, μορφή "
++"αρχείου, του οποίου η επισήμανση έχει σχεδιαστεί κατά τρόπο που να αποτρέπει "
++"ή να αποθαρρύνει τη μελλοντική τροποποίηση του αντιγράφου από τους "
++"αναγνώστες. Το αντίγραφο που δεν είναι <_:quote-3/> ονομάζεται <_:quote-4/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:142 C/fdl-appendix.xml:146 C/fdl-appendix.xml:250
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:266 C/fdl-appendix.xml:281 C/fdl-appendix.xml:352
++msgid "Title Page"
++msgstr "Σελίδα Τίτλου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:141
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such "
++"following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License "
++"requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have "
++"any title page as such, <_:quote-2/> means the text near the most prominent "
++"appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the "
++"text."
++msgstr ""
++"Ως <_:quote-1/> θεωρείται, για τα έντυπα βιβλία, η σελίδα τίτλου αυτή "
++"καθαυτή, καθώς και τυχόν επόμενες σελίδες που απαιτούνται για την "
++"ευανάγνωστη συμπερίληψη του υλικού που οφείλει να εμφανίζεται στη σελίδα "
++"τίτλου σύμφωνα με την παρούσα Άδεια. Για τα έργα σε μορφές που δεν "
++"περιλαμβάνουν σελίδα τίτλου αυτή καθαυτή, ως <_:quote-2/> θεωρείται το "
++"κείμενο που βρίσκεται κοντά στην εμφανέστερη εμφάνιση του τίτλου του έργου "
++"και το οποίο προηγείται του σώματος του κειμένου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:166 C/fdl-appendix.xml:551
++msgid "section 3"
++msgstr "ενότητας 3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <_:link-1/> in any medium, either "
++"commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright "
++"notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document "
++"are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions "
++"whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to "
++"obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or "
++"distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If "
++"you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the "
++"conditions in <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Σας χορηγείται άδεια αντιγραφής και διανομής του <_:link-1/> σε οποιοδήποτε "
++"μέσο, για εμπορικό ή μη εμπορικό σκοπό, με την προϋπόθεση ότι σε κάθε "
++"αντίγραφο θα συμπεριλαμβάνετε την παρούσα Άδεια, τις ενδείξεις δικαιωμάτων "
++"πνευματικής ιδιοκτησίας και την ένδειξη άδειας χρήσης που αναφέρει ότι για "
++"το έγγραφο ισχύει η παρούσα Άδεια, και με την προϋπόθεση ότι δεν θα "
++"προσθέσετε κανένα επιπρόσθετο όρο πέρα από τους όρους της Άδειας. Δεν σας "
++"επιτρέπεται να χρησιμοποιήσετε τεχνικά μέτρα για την παρεμπόδιση ή τον "
++"έλεγχο της ανάγνωσης ή περαιτέρω αντιγραφής των αντιγράφων που δημιουργείτε "
++"ή διανέμετε. Ωστόσο, μπορείτε να αποδεχτείτε αποζημίωση σε αντάλλαγμα των "
++"αντιγράφων. Αν διανέμετε επαρκή αριθμό αντιγράφων, θα πρέπει να "
++"συμμορφωθείτε και με τους όρους της <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <_:link-1/> numbering more than 100, "
++"and the Document's license notice requires <_:link-2/>, you must enclose the "
++"copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: "
++"Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back "
++"cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the "
++"publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with "
++"all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <_:link-3/> and satisfy "
++"these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν εκδώσετε περισσότερα από 100 στον αριθμό έντυπα αντίγραφα του <_:link-1/"
++">, και η ένδειξη άδειας χρήσης του Εγγράφου προϋποθέτει την ύπαρξη <_:link-2/"
++">, θα πρέπει να εσωκλείσετε τα αντίγραφα σε εξώφυλλα που θα περιέχουν, με "
++"καθαρό και ευανάγνωστο τρόπο, όλα τα ακόλουθα κείμενα εξωφύλλου: Κείμενα "
++"Εμπροσθοφύλλου στο εμπροσθόφυλλο και Κείμενα Οπισθοφύλλου στο οπισθόφυλλο. "
++"Επίσης, και τα δύο εξώφυλλα θα πρέπει να αναφέρουν, καθαρά και ευανάγνωστα, "
++"εσάς ως εκδότη των αντιγράφων. Στο εμπροσθόφυλλο θα πρέπει να αναφέρεται ο "
++"πλήρης τίτλος του Εγγράφου, και όλες οι λέξεις του τίτλου θα πρέπει να είναι "
++"εξίσου προβεβλημένες και εμφανείς. Επιτρέπεται να προσθέσετε επιπρόσθετο "
++"υλικό στα εξώφυλλα. Η παραγωγή αντιγράφων που διαφέρουν μόνο ως προς τα "
++"εξώφυλλα, εφόσον διατηρείται ο τίτλος του <_:link-3/> και τηρούνται οι "
++"παρούσες προϋποθέσεις, μπορεί να θεωρηθεί, κατά τα λοιπά, ως παραγωγή "
++"ακριβών αντιγράφων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <_:link-1/> copies of the <_:link-2/> numbering "
++"more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <_:link-3/> copy "
++"along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-"
++"accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy "
++"of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using "
++"public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard "
++"network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably "
++"prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to "
++"ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated "
++"location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an "
++"Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition "
++"to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν εκδώσετε περισσότερα από 100 στον αριθμό <_:link-1/> αντίγραφα του <_:"
++"link-2/>, είτε θα πρέπει να συμπεριλάβετε ένα <_:link-3/> αντίγραφο (σε "
++"μορφή αναγνώσιμη από μηχανή) σε κάθε Αδιαφανές αντίγραφο, είτε θα πρέπει να "
++"αναφέρετε — μαζί ή σε κάθε Αδιαφανές αντίγραφο — μια δημοσίως προσβάσιμη "
++"τοποθεσία δικτύου υπολογιστών από την οποία θα μπορεί το ευρύ κοινό που "
++"χρησιμοποιεί δίκτυα να λάβει ανώνυμα, δωρεάν, και με χρήση πρωτοκόλλων "
++"δικτύου δημοσίων προτύπων, ένα ολοκληρωμένο Διαφανές αντίγραφο του Εγγράφου, "
++"χωρίς προσθήκες. Αν επιλέξετε τη δεύτερη επιλογή, όταν ξεκινήσετε τη διανομή "
++"των Αδιαφανών αντιγράφων, θα πρέπει να λάβετε λελογισμένα μέτρα για να "
++"διασφαλίσετε ότι το Διαφανές αντίγραφο θα παραμείνει προσβάσιμο στην ως "
++"άνωθεν τοποθεσία για τουλάχιστον ένα έτος μετά την τελευταία δημόσια διανομή "
++"Αδιαφανούς αντιγράφου αυτής της έκδοσης (είτε πρόκειται για άμεση διανομή "
++"είτε για διανομή μέσω των πρακτόρων ή λιανοπωλητών σας)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <_:"
++"link-1/> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them "
++"a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"Σας ζητείται, αλλά δεν απαιτείται, να επικοινωνήσετε εγκαίρως με τους "
++"συγγραφείς του <_:link-1/>, πριν αναδιανείμετε μεγάλο αριθμό αντιγράφων, "
++"ώστε να έχουν τη δυνατότητα να σας παράσχουν αναθεωρημένη έκδοση του "
++"Εγγράφου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:236
++msgid "2"
++msgstr "2"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:237
++msgid "3"
++msgstr "3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/> under the "
++"conditions of sections <_:link-3/> and <_:link-4/> above, provided that you "
++"release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified "
++"Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"Σας χορηγείται άδεια αντιγραφής και διανομής <_:link-1/> του <_:link-2/> υπό "
++"τους όρους των ενοτήτων <_:link-3/> και <_:link-4/> ανωτέρω, με την "
++"προϋπόθεση ότι θα δημοσιεύσετε την Τροποποιημένη Έκδοση υπό την παρούσα "
++"Άδεια ως έχει, όπου ως Έγγραφο θα νοείται η Τροποποιημένη Έκδοση. Άρα, θα "
++"χορηγείται άδεια διανομής και τροποποίησης της Τροποποιημένης Έκδοσης σε "
++"οποιονδήποτε κατέχει αντίγραφό της. Επιπροσθέτως, στην Τροποποιημένη Έκδοση "
++"θα πρέπει να κάνετε τα εξής:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <_:link-1/> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from "
++"that of the <_:link-2/>, and from those of previous versions (which should, "
++"if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You "
++"may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of "
++"that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Στη <_:link-1/> (και τα εξώφυλλα, αν υφίστανται), χρησιμοποιήστε τίτλο "
++"διακριτό από τον τίτλο του <_:link-2/> και των προηγούμενων εκδόσεών του "
++"(τυχόν προηγούμενες εκδόσεις οφείλουν να αναφέρονται στην ενότητα Ιστορικού "
++"του Εγγράφου). Μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε τον ίδιο τίτλο με τον τίτλο "
++"προηγούμενης έκδοσης, αν λάβετε άδεια από τον αρχικό εκδότη της προηγούμενης "
++"έκδοσης."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <_:link-1/>, as authors, one or more persons or entities "
++"responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <_:link-2/>, together "
++"with at least five of the principal authors of the <_:link-3/> (all of its "
++"principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"Αναφέρετε στη <_:link-1/>, υπό την ιδιότητα του συγγραφέα, όλα τα άτομα ή "
++"τους φορείς που ευθύνονται για τη συγγραφή ή την τροποποίηση της <_:link-2/"
++">, μαζί με τουλάχιστον πέντε από τους κύριους συγγραφείς του <_:link-3/> ( ή "
++"όλους τους κύριους συγγραφείς, αν είναι λιγότεροι από πέντε)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <_:link-1/> the name of the publisher of the <_:link-2/>, as "
++"the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++"Αναφέρετε στη <_:link-1/>, υπό την ιδιότητα του εκδότη, το όνομα του εκδότη "
++"της <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:292
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <_:link-1/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Διατηρήστε όλες τις ενδείξεις δικαιωμάτων πνευματικής ιδιοκτησίας του <_:"
++"link-1/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <_:link-1/> under the terms of this "
++"License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Συμπεριλάβετε, αμέσως μετά τις ενδείξεις δικαιωμάτων πνευματικής "
++"ιδιοκτησίας, μια ένδειξη άδειας χρήσης που θα χορηγεί δημόσια άδεια χρήσης "
++"από την <_:link-1/> υπό τους όρους της παρούσας Άδειας. Η μορφή της ένδειξης "
++"αυτής παρατίθεται στο Συμπλήρωμα που ακολουθεί."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:330
++msgid "Document's"
++msgstr "Εγγράφου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <_:link-1/> and required "
++"<_:link-2/> given in the <_:link-3/> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Διατηρήστε σε αυτή την ένδειξη άδειας χρήσης τους πλήρεις καταλόγους <_:"
++"link-1/> και απαιτούμενων <_:link-2/> που παρατίθενται στην ένδειξη άδειας "
++"χρήσης του <_:link-3/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:348 C/fdl-appendix.xml:353 C/fdl-appendix.xml:372
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:507 C/fdl-appendix.xml:508
++msgid "History"
++msgstr "Ιστορικό"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <_:quote-1/>, and its title, and add to it an "
++"item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <_:"
++"link-2/> as given on the <_:link-3/>. If there is no section entitled <_:"
++"quote-4/> in the <_:link-5/>, create one stating the title, year, authors, "
++"and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Διατηρήστε την ενότητα με τίτλο <_:quote-1/>, καθώς και τον τίτλο της, και "
++"προσθέστε μία εγγραφή που θα αναφέρει τουλάχιστον τον τίτλο, το έτος, τους "
++"νέους συγγραφείς και τον εκδότη της <_:link-2/>, όπως αυτά αναφέρονται στη "
++"<_:link-3/>. Αν δεν υπάρχει ενότητα με τίτλο <_:quote-4/> στο <_:link-5/>, "
++"δημιουργήστε αυτήν την ενότητα, αναγράφοντας τον τίτλο, το έτος, τους νέους "
++"συγγραφείς και τον εκδότη του Εγγράφου, όπως αυτά αναφέρονται στη Σελίδα "
++"Τίτλου, και προσθέτοντας μία εγγραφή που θα περιγράφει την Τροποποιημένη "
++"Έκδοση σύμφωνα με την προηγούμενη πρόταση."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <_:link-1/> for public "
++"access to a <_:link-2/> copy of the Document, and likewise the network "
++"locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These "
++"may be placed in the <_:quote-3/> section. You may omit a network location "
++"for a work that was published at least four years before the Document "
++"itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives "
++"permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Διατηρήστε την τοποθεσία δικτύου που ενδεχομένως παρέχεται στο <_:link-1/> "
++"για δημόσια πρόσβαση σε <_:link-2/> αντίγραφο του Εγγράφου, καθώς και τυχόν "
++"άλλες τοποθεσίες δικτύου που παρέχονται στο έγγραφο και αφορούν προηγούμενες "
++"εκδόσεις του. Οι τοποθεσίες αυτές μπορούν να τοποθετηθούν στην ενότητα <_:"
++"quote-3/>. Μπορείτε να παραλείψετε τοποθεσίες δικτύου για έργα που εκδόθηκαν "
++"τουλάχιστον τέσσερα έτη πριν από το ίδιο το Έγγραφο, ή αν ο αρχικός εκδότης "
++"της αντίστοιχης έκδοσης σας δώσει την άδεια."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:385 C/fdl-appendix.xml:509
++msgid "Acknowledgements"
++msgstr "Ευχαριστίες"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:386 C/fdl-appendix.xml:510
++msgid "Dedications"
++msgstr "Αφιέρωση"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <_:quote-1/> or <_:quote-2/>, preserve the section's "
++"title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the "
++"contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν υπάρχει ενότητα με τίτλο <_:quote-1/> ή <_:quote-2/>, διατηρήστε τον "
++"τίτλο της ενότητας, και διατηρήστε στο σώμα της ενότητας την ουσία και το "
++"ύφος των ευχαριστιών και/ή αφιερώσεων που συμπεριλαμβάνονται σε αυτή."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/>, unaltered in their text and "
++"in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part "
++"of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Διατηρήστε όλες τις <_:link-1/> του <_:link-2/>, χωρίς καμία τροποποίηση στο "
++"κείμενο και τον τίτλο τους. Η αρίθμηση των ενοτήτων, —ή άλλο ισοδύναμό της—, "
++"δεν θεωρείται τμήμα του τίτλου των ενοτήτων."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:412 C/fdl-appendix.xml:424 C/fdl-appendix.xml:445
++msgid "Endorsements"
++msgstr "Έγκριση"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <_:quote-1/>. Such a section may not be included "
++"in the <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Διαγράψτε τυχόν ενότητες με τίτλο <_:quote-1/>. Αυτού του είδους οι ενότητες "
++"δεν επιτρέπεται να συμπεριληφθούν στην <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:425
++msgid "Invariant Section"
++msgstr "Αμετάβλητης Ενότητας"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <_:quote-1/> or to conflict in title "
++"with any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Μη μετατρέπετε τον τίτλο καμίας προϋπάρχουσας ενότητας στον τίτλο <_:quote-1/"
++"> ή σε τίτλο που συγκρούεται με τον τίτλο <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <_:link-1/> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that "
++"qualify as <_:link-2/> and contain no material copied from the Document, you "
++"may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To "
++"do this, add their titles to the list of <_:link-3/> in the Modified "
++"Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other "
++"section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν η <_:link-1/> περιλαμβάνει νέες αρχικές ενότητες ή παραρτήματα, που "
++"εμπίπτουν στον ορισμό των <_:link-2/>, και δεν περιέχουν υλικό που να είναι "
++"προϊόν αντιγραφής του Εγγράφου, μπορείτε, εφόσον το επιθυμείτε, να ορίσετε "
++"ορισμένες ή όλες αυτές τις ενότητες ως αμετάβλητες. Για να το πράξετε, "
++"προσθέστε τους τίτλους αυτών των ενοτήτων στον κατάλογο <_:link-3/> στην "
++"ένδειξη άδειας χρήσης της Τροποποιημένης Έκδοσης. Οι τίτλοι αυτοί θα πρέπει "
++"να είναι διακριτοί από τους υπόλοιπους τίτλους ενοτήτων.."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <_:quote-1/>, provided it contains nothing "
++"but endorsements of your <_:link-2/> by various parties--for example, "
++"statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an "
++"organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε να προσθέσετε ενότητα με τίτλο <_:quote-1/>, με την προϋπόθεση ότι "
++"περιλαμβάνει αποκλειστικά εγκρίσεις της δικής σας <_:link-2/> από διάφορους "
++"φορείς, —επί παραδείγματι, δηλώσεις αξιολόγησης ομοτίμων ή δηλώσεις ότι το "
++"κείμενο έχει εγκριθεί από έναν οργανισμό ως έγκυρος ορισμός ενός προτύπου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:455
++msgid "Front-Cover Text"
++msgstr "Κείμενο Εμπροσθοφύλλου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:457
++msgid "Back-Cover Text"
++msgstr "Κείμενο Οπισθοφύλλου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <_:link-1/>, and a passage of "
++"up to 25 words as a <_:link-2/>, to the end of the list of <_:link-3/> in "
++"the <_:link-4/>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover "
++"Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If "
++"the <_:link-5/> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously "
++"added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on "
++"behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on "
++"explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε να προσθέσετε κείμενο μέχρι και πέντε λέξεις ως <_:link-1/>, καθώς "
++"και κείμενο μέχρι και 25 λέξεις ως <_:link-2/>, στο τέλος του καταλόγου <_:"
++"link-3/> της <_:link-4/>. Κάθε μεμονωμένος φορέας επιτρέπεται να προσθέτει "
++"μόνο ένα Κείμενο Εμπροσθοφύλλου και ένα Κείμενο Οπισθοφύλλου (ο ίδιος ή εξ "
++"ονόματος του ίδιου). Αν το <_:link-5/> περιέχει ήδη κείμενο εξωφύλλου για το "
++"ίδιο εξώφυλλο, —που είχατε προσθέσει προηγουμένως είτε εξ ονόματός σας είτε "
++"εξ ονόματος του φορέα που εκπροσωπείτε—, δεν σας επιτρέπεται να προσθέσετε "
++"επιπλέον εξώφυλλο· σας επιτρέπεται ωστόσο να αντικαταστήσετε το προηγούμενο, "
++"με ρητή άδεια από τον εκδότη που είχε προσθέσει το προηγούμενο εξώφυλλο."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <_:link-1/> do not by this License "
++"give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply "
++"endorsement of any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Μέσω της παρούσας άδειας, ο/οι συγγραφείς και ο/οι εκδότες του <_:link-1/> "
++"δεν χορηγούν άδεια χρήσης των ονομάτων τους για διαφημιστικούς σκοπούς ή για "
++"την έγκριση, —ρητή ή υπονοούμενη—, οποιασδήποτε <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:484 C/fdl-appendix.xml:566
++msgid "section 4"
++msgstr "ενότητας 4"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <_:link-1/> with other documents released under this "
++"License, under the terms defined in <_:link-2/> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <_:link-3/> of all "
++"of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant "
++"Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε να συνδυάσετε το <_:link-1/> με άλλα έγγραφα που υπόκεινται στους "
++"όρους της παρούσας Άδειας, σύμφωνα με τους ανωτέρω όρους της <_:link-2/> για "
++"τις τροποποιημένες εκδόσεις, με την προϋπόθεση ότι ο συνδυασμός θα "
++"περιλαμβάνει όλες τις <_:link-3/> όλων των πρωτότυπων εγγράφων, χωρίς "
++"τροποποιήσεις, και ότι θα αναφέρονται ως Αμετάβλητες Ενότητες του "
++"συνδυασμένου έργου στην ένδειξη άδειας χρήσης του."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <_:link-1/> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are "
++"multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make "
++"the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in "
++"parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if "
++"known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section "
++"titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the "
++"combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"Το συνδυασμένο έργο οφείλει να περιέχει ένα μόνο αντίγραφο της παρούσας "
++"Άδειας, και επιτρέπεται η αντικατάσταση πολλαπλών ταυτόσημων <_:link-1/> από "
++"ένα μόνο αντίγραφό τους. Αν υφίστανται πολλαπλές Αμετάβλητες Ενότητες με τον "
++"ίδιο τίτλο αλλά διαφορετικό περιεχόμενο, φροντίστε να κατασταθεί μοναδικός ο "
++"τίτλος κάθε ενότητας, προσθέτοντας στο τέλος του τίτλου, εντός παρενθέσεων, "
++"το όνομα του αρχικού συγγραφέα ή εκδότη της ενότητας εφόσον τα γνωρίζετε, ή, "
++"εναλλακτικά, ένα μοναδικό αριθμό. Φροντίστε να κάνετε τις ίδιες αλλαγές "
++"στους τίτλους των ενοτήτων που αναγράφονται στον κατάλογο Αμετάβλητων "
++"Ενοτήτων στην ένδειξη άδειας χρήσης του συνδυασμένου έργου."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:511
++msgid "Endorsements."
++msgstr "Έγκριση."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <_:quote-1/> in "
++"the various original documents, forming one section entitled <_:quote-2/>; "
++"likewise combine any sections entitled <_:quote-3/>, and any sections "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>. You must delete all sections entitled <_:quote-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Στο συνδυασμό θα πρέπει να συνδυάσετε όλες τις ενότητες με τίτλο <_:quote-1/"
++"> που ενδεχομένως διαθέτουν τα πρωτότυπα έγγραφα, δημιουργώντας μία μοναδική "
++"ενότητα με τίτλο <_:quote-2/>. Κατά τον ίδιο τρόπο θα πρέπει να συνδυάσετε "
++"και όλες τις ενότητες με τίτλο <_:quote-3/> ή όλες τις ενότητες με τίτλο <_:"
++"quote-4/>. Θα πρέπει να διαγράψετε όλες τις ενότητες με τίτλο <_:quote-5/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <_:link-1/> and other documents "
++"released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this "
++"License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the "
++"collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim "
++"copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Μπορείτε να δημιουργήσετε συλλογή που θα περιλαμβάνει το παρόν <_:link-1/> "
++"μαζί με άλλα έγγραφα που υπόκεινται στους όρους της παρούσας Άδειας, και να "
++"συμπεριλάβετε στη συλλογή ένα μόνο αντίγραφο της παρούσας Άδειας, που θα "
++"αντικαθιστά τα μεμονωμένα αντίγραφά της στα διάφορα έγγραφα, με την "
++"προϋπόθεση ότι, κατά τα λοιπά, θα συμμορφωθείτε με τους κανόνες της παρούσας "
++"Άδειας για την παραγωγή πιστών αντιγράφων καθενός από αυτά τα έγγραφα."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:546
++msgid "aggregate"
++msgstr "συρραφή"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:550
++msgid "Cover Text"
++msgstr "Κείμενα Εξωφύλλου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <_:link-1/> or its derivatives with other separate and "
++"independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or "
++"distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <_:link-2/> of the "
++"Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. "
++"Such a compilation is called an <_:quote-3/>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <_:link-4/> requirement of <_:link-5/> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν το <_:link-1/> ή τα παράγωγά του συμπεριληφθούν, μαζί με άλλα ξεχωριστά "
++"και ανεξάρτητα έγγραφα ή έργα, σε τόμο ενός μέσου αποθήκευσης ή διανομής, ο "
++"τόμος αυτός, στο σύνολό του, δεν θεωρείται <_:link-2/> του εγγράφου, με την "
++"προϋπόθεση ότι δεν διεκδικούνται δικαιώματα πνευματικής ιδιοκτησίας για "
++"αυτόν. Ο εν λόγω τόμος ονομάζεται <_:quote-3/> και η παρούσα άδεια δεν "
++"ισχύει για τα υπόλοιπα αυθύπαρκτα έργα που συμπεριλαμβάνονται σε αυτόν, "
++"πέραν του Έγγραφο, απλώς και μόνο επειδή ανήκουν σε αυτή τη συρραφή, εκτός "
++"εάν αποτελούν και αυτά παράγωγα έργα του Εγγράφου. Αν για αυτά τα αντίγραφα "
++"του Εγγράφου ισχύουν οι όροι για τα <_:link-4/> της <_:link-5/>, τότε, αν το "
++"Έγγραφο αντιστοιχεί σε λιγότερο από το ένα τέταρτο του συνόλου της συρραφής, "
++"τα Κείμενα Εξωφύλλου του Εγγράφου επιτρέπεται να τοποθετηθούν σε εξώφυλλα "
++"εντός της συρραφής που εσωκλείουν μόνο το Έγγραφο. Ειδάλλως, θα πρέπει να "
++"τοποθετηθούν σε εξώφυλλα που εσωκλείουν ολόκληρη τη συρραφή."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <_:link-1/> under the terms of <_:link-2/>. Replacing <_:"
++"link-3/> with translations requires special permission from their copyright "
++"holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections "
++"in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may "
++"include a translation of this License provided that you also include the "
++"original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between "
++"the translation and the original English version of this License, the "
++"original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"Η μετάφραση θεωρείται μορφή τροποποίησης, άρα μπορείτε να διανέμετε "
++"μεταφράσεις του <_:link-1/> υπό τους όρους της <_:link-2/>. Η αντικατάσταση "
++"των <_:link-3/> από μεταφράσεις απαιτεί ειδική άδεια από τους κατόχους των "
++"δικαιωμάτων πνευματικής ιδιοκτησίας, αλλά επιτρέπεται η συμπερίληψη στο "
++"Έγγραφο μεταφράσεων ορισμένων ή όλων των Αμετάβλητων Ενοτήτων, επιπλέον των "
++"πρωτότυπων εκδόσεων αυτών των Αμετάβλητων Ενοτήτων. Μπορείτε να προσθέσετε "
++"μεταφράσεις της παρούσας Άδειας, με την προϋπόθεση ότι θα συμπεριλάβετε και "
++"την πρωτότυπη Αγγλική έκδοση της Άδειας. Σε περίπτωση ασυμφωνίας μεταξύ "
++"μετάφρασης και πρωτότυπης Αγγλικής έκδοσης της Άδειας, ισχύει η πρωτότυπη "
++"Αγγλική έκδοση."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <_:link-1/> except "
++"as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, "
++"modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will "
++"automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who "
++"have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have "
++"their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++"Δεν σας επιτρέπεται η αντιγραφή, τροποποίηση, περαιτέρω παραχώρηση άδειας "
++"εκμετάλλευσης ή διανομή του <_:link-1/> παρά μόνο με τον τρόπο που ρητά "
++"προβλέπεται από αυτήν την Άδεια. Κάθε άλλη απόπειρα αντιγραφής, "
++"τροποποίησης, περαιτέρω παραχώρησης άδειας εκμετάλλευσης ή διανομής του "
++"Εγγράφου είναι άκυρη και αυτομάτως καταργεί τα δικαιώματα που σας παραχωρεί "
++"η παρούσα Άδεια. Ωστόσο, τα μέρη στα οποία παρείχατε αντίγραφα ή δικαιώματα "
++"υπό τους όρους της παρούσας Άδειας, δεν θα απωλέσουν τα δικαιώματα χρήσης "
++"τους, εφόσον εξακολουθούν να συμμορφώνονται πλήρως με τους όρους της Άδειας."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:597
++msgid "Free Software Foundation"
++msgstr "Ίδρυμα Ελεύθερου Λογισμικού"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:603
++msgid "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++msgstr "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:595
++msgid ""
++"The <_:ulink-1/> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free "
++"Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar "
++"in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new "
++"problems or concerns. See <_:ulink-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Το <_:ulink-1/> έχει το δικαίωμα να δημοσιεύει περιστασιακά αναθεωρημένες ή/"
++"και νέες εκδόσεις της Ελεύθερης Άδειας Τεκμηρίωσης GNU (GFDL). Αυτές οι νέες "
++"εκδόσεις θα είναι συναφείς στο πνεύμα με την παρούσα έκδοση, όμως ενδέχεται "
++"να διαφέρουν στις λεπτομέρειες, καθώς επιλαμβάνονται νέων προβλημάτων και "
++"ζητημάτων. Βλέπε <_:ulink-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:610
++msgid "or any later version"
++msgstr "οποιαδήποτε μεταγενέστερη έκδοση"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<_:link-1/> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <_:"
++"quote-2/> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and "
++"conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has "
++"been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the "
++"Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose "
++"any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"Σε κάθε έκδοση δίνεται ένας διακριτικός αριθμός έκδοσης. Εάν στο <_:link-1/> "
++"καθορίζεται ότι ισχύει ένας συγκεκριμένος αριθμός έκδοσης της παρούσας "
++"Άδειας ή <_:quote-2/>, μπορείτε να επιλέξετε μεταξύ των όρων και "
++"προϋποθέσεων είτε αυτής της έκδοσης, είτε οποιασδήποτε μεταγενέστερης "
++"έκδοσης έχει δημοσιευτεί (όχι με μορφή σχεδίου) από το Ίδρυμα Ελεύθερου "
++"Λογισμικού. Εάν στο Πρόγραμμα δεν καθορίζεται αριθμός έκδοσης της Άδειας, "
++"μπορείτε να επιλέξετε οποιαδήποτε έκδοση έχει δημοσιευθεί (όχι με μορφή "
++"σχεδίου) από το Ίδρυμα Ελεύθερου Λογισμικού (FSF)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:639 C/fdl-appendix.xml:651
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Κείμενα Εμπροσθοφύλλου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:640 C/fdl-appendix.xml:654
++msgid "Back-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Κείμενα Οπισθοφύλλου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <_:link-1/> "
++"being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <_:link-2/> being LIST, and with the <_:"
++"link-3/> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Χορηγείται άδεια αντιγραφής, διανομής και/ή τροποποίησης του παρόντος "
++"εγγράφου υπό τους όρους της έκδοσης 1.1 της Ελεύθερης Άδειας Τεκμηρίωσης GNU "
++"(GFDL), ή οποιασδήποτε μεταγενέστερης έκδοσής αυτής από το Ίδρυμα Ελεύθερου "
++"Λογισμικού (FSF)· οι <_:link-1/> είναι οι ΚΑΤΑΛΟΓΟΣ ΤΙΤΛΩΝ, τα <_:link-2/> "
++"είναι τα ΚΑΤΑΛΟΓΟΣ, και τα <_:link-3/> είναι τα ΚΑΤΑΛΟΓΟΣ. Αντίγραφο της "
++"άδειας συμπεριλαμβάνεται στην ενότητα με τίτλο <_:quote-4/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:649
++msgid "with no Invariant Sections"
++msgstr "χωρίς Αμετάβλητες Ενότητες"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:652
++msgid "no Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "χωρίς Κείμενα Εμπροσθοφύλλου"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:653
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"
++msgstr "τα Κείμενα Εμπροσθοφύλλου είναι τα ΚΑΤΑΛΟΓΟΣ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <_:link-1/>, write <_:quote-2/> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <_:link-3/>, write <_:quote-4/> instead of <_:"
++"quote-5/>; likewise for <_:link-6/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν δεν περιέχονται <_:link-1/>, γράψτε <_:quote-2/> αντί να απαριθμήσετε τις "
++"αμετάβλητες ενότητες. Αν δεν περιέχονται <_:link-3/>, γράψτε <_:quote-4/> "
++"αντί για <_:quote-5/>, επίσης για <_:link-6/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:661
++msgid "GNU General Public License"
++msgstr "Γενική Άδεια Δημόσιας Χρήσης GNU"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <_:ulink-1/>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
++"Αν το έγγραφό σας περιέχει μη-ασήμαντα παραδείγματα πηγαίου κώδικα, "
++"συνιστούμε την παράλληλη δημοσίευσή τους, υπό τους όρους της άδειας "
++"ελεύθερου λογισμικού της αρεσκείας σας,όπως η <_:ulink-1/>, ώστε να "
++"επιτρέψετε τη χρήση τους σε ελεύθερο λογισμικό. "
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "/**\n"
++#~ " * FooWidget:\n"
++#~ " * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++#~ " */\n"
++#~ "typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++#~ " /*< private >*/\n"
++#~ " GtkWidget parent;\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " /*< public >*/\n"
++#~ " gboolean bar;\n"
++#~ "} FooWidget;\n"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "/**\n"
++#~ " * FooWidget:\n"
++#~ " * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++#~ " */\n"
++#~ "typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++#~ " /*< private >*/\n"
++#~ " GtkWidget parent;\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " /*< public >*/\n"
++#~ " gboolean bar;\n"
++#~ "} FooWidget;\n"
++
++#~ msgid "(FIXME : Stability information)"
++#~ msgstr "(FIXME : Πληροφορίες σταθερότητας)"
++
++#~ msgid "1.20"
++#~ msgstr "1.20"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Also, take a look at GObject Introspection annotation tags: http://live."
++#~ "gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Επίσης, ρίξτε μια ματιά στις ετικέτες σημείωσης ενδοσκόπησης: http://live."
++#~ "gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++
++#~ msgid "1.18.1"
++#~ msgstr "1.18.1"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - This is the DocBook SGML DTD. "
++#~ "<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora."
++#~ "com/davenport</ulink>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - Πρόκειται για την DocBook SGML "
++#~ "DTD. <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www."
++#~ "ora.com/davenport</ulink>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - This is a DSSSL processor for converting "
++#~ "SGML to various formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type="
++#~ "\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - Πρόκειται για επεξεργαστή DSSSL που "
++#~ "μετατρέπει τη SGML σε διάφορες άλλες μορφές. <ulink url=\"http://www."
++#~ "jclark.com/jade\" type=\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> This is the DSSSL code "
++#~ "to convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together "
++#~ "with jade. I've customized the DSSSL code slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to "
++#~ "colour the program code listings/declarations, and to support global "
++#~ "cross-reference indices in the generated HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh."
++#~ "com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> Πρόκειται για τον κώδικα "
++#~ "DSSSL που απαιτείται για τη μετατροπή από DocBook σε HTML (και ορισμένες "
++#~ "άλλες μορφές). Χρησιμοποιείται σε συνδυασμό με το jade. Έχουν γίνει "
++#~ "κάποιες μικρές προσαρμογές του κώδικα DSSSL, στο gtk-doc.dsl, για το "
++#~ "χρωματισμό κώδικα/δηλώσεων και για την υποστήριξη των καθολικών "
++#~ "ευρετηρίων παραπομπών στα παραγόμενα HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/"
++#~ "docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - if you want to create man pages "
++#~ "from the DocBook. I've customized the 'translation spec' slightly, to "
++#~ "capitalise section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of "
++#~ "the pages and the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on "
++#~ "<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora."
++#~ "com/davenport</ulink> NOTE: This does not work yet."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - Σε περίπτωση που θέλετε να "
++#~ "δημιουργήσετε σελίδες man από το DocBook. Έχουν γίνει κάποιες μικρές "
++#~ "προσαρμογές των 'προδιαγραφών μετάφρασης', για να εμφανίζονται με "
++#~ "κεφαλαία οι τίτλοι ενοτήτων και να προστίθενται ο τίτλος 'Βιβλιοθήκη GTK' "
++#~ "στην αρχή της σελίδας και η ημερομηνία αναθεώρησης στο τέλος της. Βλέπε "
++#~ "<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora."
++#~ "com/davenport</ulink> ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Αυτή η δυνατότητα δε λειτουργεί προς το "
++#~ "παρόν."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are "
++#~ "installed."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Δεν υπάρχει σταθερή τοποθεσία για την εγκατάσταση των DocBook Modular "
++#~ "Stylesheets."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "GTK-Doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically:"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Το σενάριο εντολών configure του GTK-Doc ψάχνει αυτόματα τους τρεις "
++#~ "παρακάτω καταλόγους:"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (used by "
++#~ "RedHat)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> "
++#~ "(χρησιμοποιείται από το RedHat)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (used by Debian)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> "
++#~ "(χρησιμοποιείται από το Debian)"
++
++#~ msgid "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (used by SuSE)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (χρησιμοποιείται από το "
++#~ "SuSE)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to "
++#~ "configure GTK-Doc using the option: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<"
++#~ "PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Αν τα φύλλα στυλ είναι εγκατεστημένα κάπου αλλού, θα πρέπει να ρυθμίσετε "
++#~ "GTK-Doc με την επιλογή: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=< "
++#~ "ΔΙΑΔΡΟΜΗ_ΠΡΟΣ_ΡΙΖΙΚΟ_ΚΑΤΑΛΟΓΟ_ΦΥΛΛΩΝ_ΣΤΥΛ> </command>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "You may also want to enable GTK-Doc for the distcheck make target. Just "
++#~ "add the one line shown in the next example to your top-level "
++#~ "<filename>Makefile.am</filename>:"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Μπορείτε, επίσης, να ενεργοποιήσετε το GTK-Doc για το distcheckmake "
++#~ "target. Απλά προσθέστε τη γραμμή του επόμενου παραδείγματος στο ριζικό "
++#~ "<filename>Makefile.am</filename>:"
++
++#~ msgid "Enable GTK-Doc during make distcheck"
++#~ msgstr "Ενεργοποίηση του GTK-Doc κατά το make distcheck"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "DISTCHECK_CONFIGURE_FLAGS=--enable-gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "DISTCHECK_CONFIGURE_FLAGS=--enable-gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "/**\n"
++#~ " * identifier:\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * documentation ...\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * # Sub heading #\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * more documentation:\n"
++#~ " * - list item 1\n"
++#~ " * - list item 2\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * Even more docs.\n"
++#~ " */\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "/**\n"
++#~ " * identifier:\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * documentation ...\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * # Sub heading #\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * more documentation:\n"
++#~ " * - list item 1\n"
++#~ " * - list item 2\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * Even more docs.\n"
++#~ " */\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Since GTK-Doc-1.18 the tool supports a subset or the <ulink url=\"http://"
++#~ "daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">markdown language</ulink>. One "
++#~ "can use it for sub-headings and simple itemized lists. On older GTK-Doc "
++#~ "versions the content will be rendered as it (the list items will appear "
++#~ "in one line separated by dashes). <_:example-1/>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Από το GTK-Doc-1.18 το εργαλείο υποστηρίζει υποσύνολα ή <ulink url="
++#~ "\"http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">γλώσσα markdown</ulink>. "
++#~ "Κάποιος μπορεί να τα χρησιμοποιήσει για υπό-κεφαλίδες και για απλές "
++#~ "κατηγοριοποιημένες λίστες. Στις παλαιότερες εκδόσεις του GTK-Doc το "
++#~ "περιεχόμενο θα πρέπει να καταστεί ως έχει (τα στοιχεία της λίστας θα "
++#~ "εμφανιστούν σε μία γραμμή χωρισμένες με παύλες). <_:example-1/>"
++
++#~ msgid "Chris"
++#~ msgstr "Chris"
++
++#~ msgid "Lyttle"
++#~ msgstr "Lyttle"
++
++#~ msgid "chris@wilddev.net"
++#~ msgstr "chris@wilddev.net"
++
++#~ msgid "Dan"
++#~ msgstr "Dan"
++
++#~ msgid "Mueth"
++#~ msgstr "Mueth"
++
++#~ msgid "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++#~ msgstr "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++
++#~ msgid "Stefan"
++#~ msgstr "Stefan"
++
++#~ msgid "Kost"
++#~ msgstr "Kost"
++
++#~ msgid "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++#~ msgstr "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++
++#~ msgid "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++#~ msgstr "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# Abigail Brady <morwen@evilmagic.org>, 2009.
++# Jen Ockwell <jenfraggleubuntu@gmail.com>, 2009
++# Philip Withnall <philip@tecnocode.co.uk>, 2009
++#
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: GTK Doc\n"
++"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2009-03-18 12:43+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2009-03-19 20:30+0000\n"
++"Last-Translator: Jen Ockwell <jenfraggleubuntu@gmail.com>\n"
++"Language-Team: British English <en@li.org>\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:12(title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc Manual"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:13(edition)
++msgid "1.12"
++msgstr "1.12"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:14(para)
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr "User manual for developers with instructions on GTK-Doc usage."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:17(firstname)
++msgid "Chris"
++msgstr "Chris"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:18(surname)
++msgid "Lyttle"
++msgstr "Lyttle"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:21(email)
++msgid "chris@wilddev.net"
++msgstr "chris@wilddev.net"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:26(firstname)
++msgid "Dan"
++msgstr "Dan"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:27(surname)
++msgid "Mueth"
++msgstr "Mueth"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:30(email)
++msgid "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++msgstr "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:35(firstname)
++msgid "Stefan"
++msgstr "Stefan"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:36(surname)
++msgid "Kost"
++msgstr "Kost"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:39(email)
++msgid "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++msgstr "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:45(publishername)
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc project"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:46(email)
++msgid "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++msgstr "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:49(year)
++msgid "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++msgstr "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:50(holder)
++msgid "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle and Stefan Kost"
++msgstr "Dan Mueth, Chris Lyttle and Stefan Kost"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:61(para)
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, "
++"Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation "
++"with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A "
++"copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation Licence</citetitle>, "
++"Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation "
++"with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A "
++"copy of the licence is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:69(para)
++msgid ""
++"Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and "
++"services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME "
++"documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the "
++"GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial "
++"caps."
++msgstr ""
++"Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and "
++"services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME "
++"documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the "
++"GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial "
++"caps."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:80(revnumber)
++msgid "1.11"
++msgstr "1.11"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:81(date)
++msgid "22 March 2008"
++msgstr "22 March 2008"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:82(authorinitials)
++msgid "mal"
++msgstr "mal"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:83(revremark)
++msgid "GNOME doc-utils migration"
++msgstr "GNOME doc-utils migration"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:92(title)
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "Introduction"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:94(para)
++msgid ""
++"This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how "
++"it is used."
++msgstr ""
++"This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how "
++"it is used."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:100(title)
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "What is GTK-Doc?"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:102(para)
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the "
++"public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can "
++"also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the "
++"public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries, but it can "
++"also be used to document application code."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:110(title)
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:112(para)
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source "
++"files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the "
++"template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only "
++"document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce "
++"output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source "
++"files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the "
++"template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only "
++"document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce "
++"output for static functions)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:119(para)
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc consists of a number of perl scripts, each performing a different "
++"step in the process."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc consists of a number of Perl scripts, each performing a different "
++"step in the process."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:124(para)
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:131(para)
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the "
++"source files with the documentation for each function, macro, union etc. (In "
++"the past information was entered in generated template files, which is not "
++"recommended anymore)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the "
++"source files with the documentation for each function, macro, union etc. (In "
++"the past information was entered in generated template files, which is not "
++"recommended any more)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:141(para)
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</"
++"guilabel><application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of "
++"the code looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and "
++"unions. It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</"
++"filename> containg a list of the declarations, placing them into sections "
++"according to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is "
++"copied to <filename><module>-sections.txt</filename> The author can "
++"rearrange the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to "
++"produce the final desired order. The second file it generates is "
++"<filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full "
++"declarations found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some "
++"sybols to show up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by "
++"th scanner or the declaration should appear differently, one can place "
++"enties similar to the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> "
++"into <filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>. <application>gtkdoc-"
++"scanobj</application> can also be used to dynamically query a library about "
++"any GtkObject subclasses it exports. It saves information about each "
++"object's position in the class hierarchy and about any GTK Args and Signals "
++"it provides."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</"
++"guilabel><application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of "
++"the code looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and "
++"unions. It creates the file <filename><replaceable>module</replaceable>-decl-list.txt</"
++"filename> containg a list of the declarations, placing them into sections "
++"according to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is "
++"copied to <filename><replaceable>module</replaceable>-sections.txt</filename> The author can "
++"rearrange the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to "
++"produce the final desired order. The second file it generates is "
++"<filename><replaceable>module</replaceable>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full "
++"declarations found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some "
++"symbols to show up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found "
++"by the scanner or the declaration should appear differently, one can place "
++"enties similar to the ones in <filename><replaceable>module</replaceable>-decl.txt</filename> "
++"into <filename><replaceable>module</replaceable>-overrides.txt</filename>. <application>gtkdoc-"
++"scanobj</application> can also be used to dynamically query a library about "
++"any GtkObject subclasses it exports. It saves information about each "
++"object's position in the class hierarchy and about any GTK Args and Signals "
++"it provides."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:166(para)
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-"
++"mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the information gathered "
++"in the first step. (Note that this can be run repeatedly. It will try to "
++"ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the information gathered "
++"in the first step. (Note that this can be run repeatedly. It will try to "
++"ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:175(para)
++msgid ""
++"Since gtk-doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep "
++"documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now "
++"a <command>--flavour no-tmpl</command> option that chooses a makefile that "
++"skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand, "
++"please remove the dir once."
++msgstr ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep "
++"documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now "
++"a <command>--flavour no-tmpl</command> option that chooses a makefile that "
++"skips <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> usage totally. If you have "
++"never changed file in <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> by hand, "
++"please remove the directory at once."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:185(para)
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the SGML/XML and HTML.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-"
++"mkdb</application> turns the template files into SGML or XML files in the "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code contains documentation "
++"on functions, using the special comment blocks, it gets merged in here. If "
++"there are no tmpl files used it only reads takes docs from sources and "
++"introspection data. <application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the SGML "
++"files into HTML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> "
++"subdirectory. Files in <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One should never "
++"edit them directly."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the SGML/XML and HTML.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mkdb</application> turns the template files into SGML or XML files in the "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code contains documentation "
++"on functions, using the special comment blocks, it gets merged in here. If "
++"there are no <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> files used it only reads takes docs from sources and "
++"introspection data. <application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the SGML "
++"files into HTML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> "
++"subdirectory. Files in <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One should never "
++"edit them directly."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:205(para)
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After "
++"installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be "
++"run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, "
++"the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in "
++"the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, "
++"<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-"
++"links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application "
++"will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After "
++"installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be "
++"run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, "
++"the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in "
++"the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, "
++"<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-"
++"links. When installing distributed (pre-generated) docs the same application "
++"will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:223(title)
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "Getting GTK-Doc"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:226(title)
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "Requirements"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:227(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - the main scripts are in Perl."
++msgstr "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> — the main scripts are in Perl."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:230(para)
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - This is the DocBook SGML DTD. <ulink "
++"url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/"
++"davenport</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> — This is the DocBook SGML DTD. <ulink "
++"url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/"
++"davenport</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:234(para)
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - This is a DSSSL processor for converting "
++"SGML to various formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type="
++"\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> — This is a DSSSL processor for converting "
++"SGML to various formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type="
++"\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:238(para)
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> This is the DSSSL code to "
++"convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together with "
++"jade. I've customized the DSSSL code slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to colour the "
++"program code listings/declarations, and to support global cross-reference "
++"indices in the generated HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl"
++"\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> This is the DSSSL code to "
++"convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together with "
++"jade. The DSSSL code has been customised slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to colour the "
++"program code listings/declarations, and to support global cross-reference "
++"indices in the generated HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl"
++"\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:247(para)
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - if you want to create man pages from "
++"the DocBook. I've customized the 'translation spec' slightly, to capitalise "
++"section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of the pages and "
++"the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on <ulink url="
++"\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</"
++"ulink> NOTE: This does not work yet."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> — if you want to create man pages from "
++"the DocBook. The 'translation spec' has been customised slightly, to capitalise "
++"section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of the pages and "
++"the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on <ulink url="
++"\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</"
++"ulink> NOTE: This does not work yet."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:258(title)
++msgid "Installation"
++msgstr "Installation"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:259(para)
++msgid ""
++"There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are "
++"installed."
++msgstr ""
++"There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are "
++"installed."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:262(para)
++msgid "gtk-doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically:"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:265(para)
++msgid ""
++"<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (used by "
++"RedHat)"
++msgstr ""
++"<filename>/usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular</filename> (used by "
++"Red Hat)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:268(para)
++msgid ""
++"<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (used by Debian)"
++msgstr ""
++"<filename>/usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook</filename> (used by Debian)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:271(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (used by SuSE)"
++msgstr "<filename>/usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl</filename> (used by SuSE)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:274(para)
++msgid ""
++"If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to configure "
++"gtk-doc using the option: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<"
++"PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++msgstr ""
++"If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to configure "
++"GTK-Doc using the option: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<"
++"PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:297(title)
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "About GTK-Doc"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:299(para) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:313(para)
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(FIXME)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:303(para)
++msgid ""
++"(History, authors, web pages, license, future plans, comparison with other "
++"similar systems.)"
++msgstr ""
++"(History, authors, web pages, licence, future plans, comparison with other "
++"similar systems.)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:311(title)
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "About this Manual"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:317(para)
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, licence)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:326(title)
++msgid "Setting up your project"
++msgstr "Setting up your project"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:328(para)
++msgid ""
++"The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc into "
++"your project. Theses section assume we work on a project called 'meep'. This "
++"project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user app called "
++"'meeper'."
++msgstr ""
++"The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc into "
++"your project. Theses section assume we work on a project called 'meep'. This "
++"project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user app called "
++"'meeper'."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:336(title)
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:338(para)
++msgid ""
++"Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/reference "
++"(this way you can also have docs/help for end-user documentation). It is "
++"recommended to create another subdirectory with the name of the doc-package. "
++"For packages with just one library this step is not necessary."
++msgstr ""
++"Under your top-level project directory create a folder called <filename class=\"directory\">docs/reference</filename> "
++"(this way you can also have <filename class=\"directory\">docs/help</filename> for end-user documentation). It is "
++"recommended to create another subdirectory with the name of the doc-package. "
++"For packages with just one library this step is not necessary."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:347(title)
++msgid "Example directory structure"
++msgstr "Example directory structure"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:345(para)
++msgid "This can then look as show below: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "This can then look as show below: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:365(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:372(title)
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Integration with autoconf"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:367(para)
++msgid ""
++"Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> "
++"script."
++msgstr ""
++"Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> "
++"script."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:382(para)
++msgid ""
++"Besides checking for the required Gtk-Doc version, this adds two configure "
++"switches:"
++msgstr ""
++"Besides checking for the required GTK-Doc version, this adds two configure "
++"switches:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:387(para)
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:388(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:392(para)
++msgid ""
++"Gtk-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--"
++"enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. "
++"Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for "
++"users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>--"
++"enable-gtk-doc</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. "
++"Otherwise pre-generated documentation is installed (which makes sense for "
++"users but not for developers)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:400(para)
++msgid ""
++"Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside you "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows <filename>gtkdocize</"
++"filename> to automatically copy the macro definition for "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++msgstr ""
++"Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside your "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows <filename>gtkdocize</"
++"filename> to automatically copy the macro definition for "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:408(title)
++msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++msgstr "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:419(title)
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "Integration with automake"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:421(para)
++msgid ""
++"First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the examples "
++"subdirectory of the gtkdoc-sources to your project's API documentation "
++"directory ( <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></"
++"filename>). If you have multiple doc-packages repeat this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++"First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the <filename class=\"directory\">examples</filename> "
++"subdirectory of the GTK-Doc sources to your project's API documentation "
++"directory (<filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<replaceable>package</replaceable></"
++"filename>). If you have multiple doc-packages, repeat this for each one."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:428(para)
++msgid ""
++"The next step is to edit the setting inside the <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>. All the settings have a comment above that describes their "
++"purpose. Most settings are extra flags passed to the respective tools. Every "
++"tool has a variable of the form <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>. "
++"All the tools support <option>--help</option> to list the supported "
++"parameters."
++msgstr ""
++"The next step is to edit the settings inside the <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>. All the settings have a comment above that describes their "
++"purpose. Most settings are extra flags passed to the respective tools. Every "
++"tool has a variable of the form <option><replaceable>TOOLNAME</replaceable>_OPTIONS</option>. "
++"All the tools support <option>--help</option> to list the supported "
++"parameters."
++
++#. FIXME: explain options ?
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:439(para)
++msgid ""
++"You may also want to enable gtk-doc for the distcheckmake target. Just add "
++"then one-liner show in the next example to you top-level <filename>Makefile."
++"am</filename>:"
++msgstr ""
++"You may also want to enable GTK-Doc for the <literal>distcheckmake</literal> target. Just add "
++"the line shown in the next example to your top-level <filename>Makefile."
++"am</filename>:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:446(title)
++msgid "Enable gtk-doc during make distcheck"
++msgstr "Enable GTK-Doc during make distcheck"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:458(title)
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "Integration with autogen"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:460(para)
++msgid ""
++"Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup "
++"the build infrastructure after a checkout from version control system (such "
++"as cvs). Gtk-Doc comes with a tool called <filename>gtkdocize</filename> "
++"which can be used in such a script. It should be run before autoheader, "
++"automake or autoconf."
++msgstr ""
++"Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to set up "
++"the build infrastructure after a checkout from version control system (such "
++"as CVS). GTK-Doc comes with a tool called <filename>gtkdocize</filename> "
++"which can be used in such a script. It should be run before autoheader, "
++"automake or autoconf."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:469(title)
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:478(para)
++msgid ""
++"When running <filename>gtkdocize</filename> it copies <filename>gtk-doc."
++"make</filename> to you project root (or any directory specified by the --"
++"docdir option). If also check you configure script for the "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> invocation."
++msgstr ""
++"When running <filename>gtkdocize</filename> it copies <filename>gtk-doc."
++"make</filename> to your project root (or any directory specified by the <option>--"
++"docdir</option> option). It also checks your configure script for the "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> invocation."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:485(para)
++msgid ""
++"Historically gtk-doc was gerating template files where developers entered "
++"the docs. this turned out to be not so good. Since a few version gtk-doc "
++"could also get all the information from source comments. Since gtk-doc 1.9 "
++"the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in "
++"the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a --flavour=no-"
++"tmpl option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. If you "
++"have never changed file in tmpl by hand, please remove the dir once."
++msgstr ""
++"Historically GTK-Doc was generating template files where developers entered "
++"the docs. this turned out to be not so good. Since a few versions ago, GTK-Doc "
++"can also get all the information from source comments. Since GTK-Doc 1.9 "
++"the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in "
++"the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> now supports a <option>--flavour=no-"
++"tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> usage totally. If you "
++"have never changed a file in <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> by hand, please remove the directory at once."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:497(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:514(title)
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "Running the doc build"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:499(para)
++msgid ""
++"After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then "
++"give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run "
++"<filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++"After the previous steps it is time to run the build. First we need to rerun "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs <filename>configure</filename> for you, then "
++"give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run "
++"<filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:506(para)
++msgid ""
++"The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-dirs. The "
++"important ones are: <filename><package>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-dirs. The "
++"important ones are: <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-docs.sgml</filename> and <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:523(para)
++msgid ""
++"Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. But hang-on, "
++"during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages with life."
++msgstr ""
++"Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<replaceable>package</replaceable>/"
++"index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. But hang on; "
++"during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages with life."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:531(title)
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "Integration with version control systems"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:533(para)
++msgid ""
++"As a rule of the thumb, it's those files you edit, that should go under "
++"version control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename><filename><package>-docs.sgml</"
++"filename><filename><package>-sections.txt</filename><filename>Makefile."
++"am</filename>"
++msgstr ""
++"As a rule of thumb, it is the files you edit that should go under version "
++"control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>."
++"types</filename>, <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><replaceable>"
++"package</replaceable>-sections.txt</filename> and <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:546(title)
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "Documenting the code"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:548(para)
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code "
++"documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure "
++"from other sources. During the next section you find all information about "
++"the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code "
++"documentation. Furthermore, it retrieves information about your project structure "
++"from other sources. During the next section you will find all the information about "
++"the syntax of the comments."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:556(title)
++msgid "Documentation placement"
++msgstr "Documentation placement"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:557(para)
++msgid ""
++"In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing inside "
++"the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the disadvantages that the "
++"information is often not updated and also that the file tend to cause "
++"conflicts with version control systems."
++msgstr ""
++"In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing inside "
++"the <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> directory. This has the disadvantages that the "
++"information is often not updated and also that the file tend to cause "
++"conflicts with version control systems."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:563(para)
++msgid ""
++"The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the documentation "
++"inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way of documenting "
++"code."
++msgstr ""
++"To avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the documentation "
++"inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way of documenting "
++"code."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:573(title)
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "Documentation comments"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:578(title)
++msgid "Gtk-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc comment block"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:575(para)
++msgid ""
++"A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation "
++"block that will be processed by the Gtk-Doc tools. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"A multiline comment that starts with an additional <literal>*</literal> marks a documentation "
++"block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:590(para)
++msgid ""
++"The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is "
++"related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add "
++"table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++"The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item to which the comment is "
++"related. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add "
++"table showing identifiers)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:596(para)
++msgid ""
++"The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol "
++"types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter "
++"description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows "
++"the detailed description. All lines (outside program- listings and CDATA "
++"sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph "
++"breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-"
++"asterisk-blank-blank)."
++msgstr ""
++"The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol "
++"types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter "
++"description first followed by a blank line (just a <literal>*</literal>). Afterwards follows "
++"the detailed description. All lines (outside program listings and CDATA "
++"sections) just containing a <literal> *</literal> (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph "
++"breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into <literal> * </literal> (blank-"
++"asterisk-blank-blank)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:613(para)
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr "Use <literal>function()</literal> to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:618(para)
++msgid ""
++"Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to "
++"parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr ""
++"Use <literal>@param</literal> to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to "
++"parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:624(para)
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr "Use <literal>%constant</literal> to refer to a constant, e.g. <literal>%G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS</literal>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:629(para)
++msgid ""
++"Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and "
++"macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Use <literal>#symbol</literal> to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and "
++"macros which don't take arguments."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:635(para)
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal"
++msgstr "Use <literal>#Object::signal</literal> to refer to a GObject signal"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:640(para)
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property"
++msgstr "Use <literal>#Object:property</literal> to refer to a GObject property"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:645(para)
++msgid "Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure."
++msgstr "Use <literal>#Struct.field</literal> to refer to a field inside a structure."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:607(para)
++msgid ""
++"One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in "
++"the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. "
++"Gtk-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. "
++"<placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in "
++"the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. "
++"GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. "
++"<placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:653(para)
++msgid ""
++"If you need to use the special characters '()', '@', '%', or '#' in your "
++"documentation without gtk-doc changing them you can use the XML entities "
++"\"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and "
++"\"&num;\" respectively or escape them with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++"If you need to use the special characters '()', '@', '%', or '#' in your "
++"documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML entities "
++"\"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and "
++"\"&num;\" respectively or escape them with a backslash '\\'."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:662(para)
++msgid ""
++"DocBook can do more that just links. One can also have lists, tables and "
++"examples. To enable the usage of SGML/XML tags inside doc-comments you need "
++"to have <option>--sgml-mode</option> in the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</"
++"symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"DocBook can do more that just links. One can also have lists, tables and "
++"examples. To enable the usage of SGML/XML tags inside doc-comments you need "
++"to have <option>--sgml-mode</option> in the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</"
++"symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:670(para)
++msgid ""
++"As already mentioned earlier Gtk-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one "
++"cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to "
++"comment those symbols too. This helps other to understand you code. "
++"Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the "
++"2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made public, "
++"all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and insert "
++"the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++"As already mentioned earlier, GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one "
++"cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to "
++"comment those symbols too; this helps other to understand your code. "
++"Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the "
++"second <literal>*</literal> in the first line). If later the function needs to be made public, "
++"all one needs to do is to add another <literal>*</literal> in the comment block and insert "
++"the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:684(title)
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "Documenting sections"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:686(para)
++msgid ""
++"Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or "
++"module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short "
++"description is also used inside the table of contents."
++msgstr ""
++"Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or "
++"module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short "
++"description is also used inside the table of contents."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:693(title)
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "Section comment block"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:712(term)
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@short_description"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:714(para)
++msgid ""
++"A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the "
++"links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr ""
++"A one line description of the section that later will appear after the links "
++"in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:721(term)
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@see_also"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:723(para)
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section.."
++msgstr "A list of symbols that are related to this section."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:729(term)
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:736(para)
++msgid ""
++"Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third "
++"parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have "
++"confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after "
++"the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major "
++"release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be "
++"rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++"Stable — The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third "
++"parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have "
++"confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after "
++"the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major "
++"release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be "
++"rare, and to have strong justifications."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:748(para)
++msgid ""
++"Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are "
++"typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly "
++"changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a "
++"more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source "
++"or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++"Unstable — Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are "
++"typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly-"
++"changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a "
++"more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source "
++"or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:760(para)
++msgid ""
++"Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but "
++"that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in "
++"specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++"Private — An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but "
++"that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in "
++"specified and documented ways."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:769(para)
++msgid ""
++"Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require "
++"end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be "
++"Internal."
++msgstr ""
++"Internal — An interface that is internal to a module and does not require "
++"end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be "
++"Internal."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:731(para)
++msgid ""
++"A informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend the "
++"use of one of these terms: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"A informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend the "
++"use of one of these terms: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:781(term)
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:783(para)
++msgid ""
++"The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a "
++"comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a "
++"comma-separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is "
++"optional."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:793(para)
++msgid ""
++"FIXME having @title here, would put this title into a newly generated "
++"section file, but later would be obsolete (right?)"
++msgstr ""
++"FIXME having @title here, would put this title into a newly generated "
++"section file, but later would be obsolete (right?)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:800(para)
++msgid ""
++"To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs "
++"into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++"To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs "
++"into the C source where possible."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:809(title)
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "Documenting symbols"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:811(para)
++msgid ""
++"Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is "
++"documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the "
++"definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus "
++"function are usually documented in the c-source and macros, struct and enum "
++"in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++"Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is "
++"documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the "
++"definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in synchronisation. Thus "
++"functions are usually documented in the C source and macros, structs and enums "
++"in the header files."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:820(title)
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "Function comment block"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:843(term)
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "Returns:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:845(para)
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:851(term)
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "Deprecated:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:853(para)
++msgid ""
++"Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The "
++"description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr ""
++"Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used any more. The "
++"description should point the reader to the new API."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:860(term)
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "Since:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:862(para)
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:869(para)
++msgid ""
++"Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are "
++"private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with <literal>_</literal> are "
++"private. They are treated like static functions."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:874(para)
++msgid "(FIXME) (stability) (glib-enums, ...)"
++msgstr "(FIXME) (stability) (glib-enums, ...)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:880(title)
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "Property comment block"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:892(title)
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "Signal comment block"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:909(title)
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "Struct comment block"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:928(title)
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr "Useful DocBook tags"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:930(para)
++msgid ""
++"Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr ""
++"Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:935(para)
++msgid ""
++"To link to another section in the GTK docs: <placeholder-1/> The linkend is "
++"the SGML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. For most pages "
++"this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", glib\") and then the page "
++"title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class name. Spaces and "
++"underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML."
++msgstr ""
++"To link to another section in the GTK docs: <placeholder-1/> The linkend is "
++"the SGML ID on the top item of the page to which you want to link. For most pages "
++"this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", glib\") and then the page "
++"title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class name. Spaces and "
++"underscores are converted to <literal>-</literal> to conform to SGML."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:951(para)
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <placeholder-1/"
++">"
++msgstr ""
++"To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <placeholder-1/"
++">"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:962(para)
++msgid ""
++"To include example code: <placeholder-1/> or possibly this, for very short "
++"code fragments which don't need a title: <placeholder-2/> For the latter gtk-"
++"doc also supports an abbreviation: <![CDATA[\n"
++"|[\n"
++" ...\n"
++"]|\n"
++"]]>"
++msgstr ""
++"To include example code: <placeholder-1/> or possibly this, for very short "
++"code fragments which don't need a title: <placeholder-2/> For the latter, GTK-"
++"Doc also supports an abbreviation: <![CDATA[\n"
++"|[\n"
++" ...\n"
++"]|\n"
++"]]>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:996(para)
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "To include bulleted lists: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1018(para)
++msgid "To include a note which stands out from the text: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "To include a note which stands out from the text: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1033(para)
++msgid "To refer to a type: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "To refer to a type: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1044(para)
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): "
++"<placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): "
++"<placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1055(para)
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "To refer to a field of a structure: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1066(para)
++msgid ""
++"To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <placeholder-1/> but you'll "
++"probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link to the "
++"GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the abbreviations</"
++"link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <placeholder-1/> but you'll "
++"probably be using <literal>#GtkWidget</literal> instead (to automatically create a link to the "
++"GtkWidget page — see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the abbreviations</"
++"link>)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1079(para)
++msgid "To emphasize text: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "To emphasise text: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1090(para)
++msgid "For filenames use: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "For filenames use: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1105(title)
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr "Filling the extra files"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1107(para)
++msgid ""
++"There are a couple of extra file, that need to be maintained along with the "
++"inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"There are a couple of extra files that need to be maintained along with the "
++"inline source code comments: <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-docs.sgml</filename> and <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1116(title)
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr "Editing the types file"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1118(para)
++msgid ""
++"If your library or application includes GtkObjects/GObjects, you want their "
++"signals, arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in "
++"the documentation. All you need to do, is to list the "
++"<function>xxx_get_type</function> functions together with their include "
++"inside the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"If your library or application includes GtkObjects/GObjects, you want their "
++"signals, arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in "
++"the documentation. All you need to do is to list the "
++"<function>xxx_get_type</function> functions together with their include "
++"inside the <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>.types</filename> file."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1127(title)
++msgid "Example types file snippet"
++msgstr "Example types file snippet"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1141(para)
++msgid ""
++"Since gtk-doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this "
++"list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not "
++"dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this "
++"list for you. Just add <option>--rebuild-types</option> to <symbol>SCAN_OPTIONS</symbol> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not "
++"distribute the types file, nor have it under version control."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1150(title)
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr "Editing the master document"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1152(para)
++msgid ""
++"Gtk-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the "
++"inline source comments, the Gtk-Doc tools generate one documentation page "
++"per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them "
++"and place them in a order."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the "
++"inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page "
++"per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them "
++"and place them in a order."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1159(para)
++msgid ""
++"While Gtk-Doc creates a template master document for you, later run will not "
++"touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the documentation. "
++"That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. Gtk-doc has now a test "
++"suite, where also the master-document is recreated from scratch. Its a good "
++"idea to look at this from time to time to see if there are some new goodies "
++"introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++"While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later runs will not "
++"touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the documentation. "
++"That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-doc has now a test "
++"suite, where the master-document is also recreated from scratch. It is a good "
++"idea to look at this from time to time to see if there are some new goodies "
++"introduced there."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1169(para)
++msgid ""
++"Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The "
++"benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API "
++"documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol "
++"documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along "
++"with the library."
++msgstr ""
++"Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The "
++"benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API "
++"documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol "
++"documentation. Also, chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along "
++"with the library."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1178(para)
++msgid ""
++"So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is "
++"only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there "
++"which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++"So what are the things to change inside the master document? "
++"There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there "
++"which you should take care of."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1185(title)
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr "Master document header"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1207(title)
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr "Editing the section file"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1209(para)
++msgid ""
++"The section file is used to organise the documentation output by Gtk-Doc. "
++"Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control "
++"the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++"The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. "
++"Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control "
++"the visibility (public or private)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1215(para)
++msgid ""
++"The section file is a plain test file with xml like syntax (using tags). "
++"Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment "
++"lines."
++msgstr ""
++"The section file is a plain test file with XML-like syntax (using tags). "
++"Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a <literal>#</literal> are treated as comment "
++"lines."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1221(para)
++msgid ""
++"The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, "
++"without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++"FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++"template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++"converted into the DocBook SGML file <filename>sgml/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename> or .DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. "
++"(The name of the html file is based on the module name and the section "
++"title, or for gobjects it is based on the gobjects class name converted to "
++"lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++"The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the filename, "
++"without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++"FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++"template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++"converted into the DocBook SGML file <filename>sgml/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename> or DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. "
++"(The name of the HTML file is based on the module name and the section "
++"title, or for GObjects it is based on the GObject's class name converted to "
++"lowercase)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1233(para)
++msgid ""
++"The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the "
++"section. It is only useful before the templates are initially created, since "
++"the title set in the template file overrides this."
++msgstr ""
++"The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the "
++"section. It is only useful before the templates are initially created, since "
++"the title set in the template file overrides this."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1239(para)
++msgid ""
++"You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. "
++"Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis "
++"section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject "
++"declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the "
++"documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private "
++"declarations which will not be output (It is a handy way to avoid warning "
++"messages about unused declarations.). If your library contains private types "
++"which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of "
++"implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection."
++msgstr ""
++"You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. "
++"Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis "
++"section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject "
++"declarations (e.g. the functions like <function>g_object_get_type</function> and macros like "
++"<symbol>G_OBJECT()</symbol>, <symbol>G_IS_OBJECT()</symbol> etc.). Currently these are left out of the "
++"documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private "
++"declarations which will not be output (it is a handy way to avoid warning "
++"messages about unused declarations). If your library contains private types "
++"which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of "
++"implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1255(para)
++msgid ""
++"You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the "
++"#include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-"
++"separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it "
++"outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. "
++"If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++"You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the "
++"<literal>#include</literal> files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-"
++"separated list of <literal>#include</literal> files, without the angle brackets. If you set it "
++"outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. "
++"If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1269(title)
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr "Controlling the result"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1271(para)
++msgid ""
++"A Gtk-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The "
++"generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and "
++"<filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text "
++"files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++"A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The "
++"generated files are named: <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-undocumented.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-undeclared.txt</filename> and "
++"<filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text "
++"files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1280(para)
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with "
++"the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank "
++"lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The "
++"second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, "
++"which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++"The <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with "
++"the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank "
++"lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The "
++"second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, "
++"which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1289(para)
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols "
++"given in the <filename><package>-section.txt</filename> but not found "
++"in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++"The <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols "
++"given in the <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-section.txt</filename> but not found "
++"in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1296(para)
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, "
++"where the Gtk-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where "
++"to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the "
++"<filename><package>-section.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"The <filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names "
++"where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where "
++"to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the "
++"<filename><replaceable>package</replaceable>-section.txt</filename> file."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1304(para)
++msgid ""
++"Enable or add the <option>TESTS=($GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile."
++"am. If at least gtk-doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during "
++"make check run."
++msgstr ""
++"Enable or add the <option>TESTS=($GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile."
++"am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during "
++"<command>make check</command> run."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1314(title)
++msgid "Frequently asked question"
++msgstr "Frequently asked questions"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1318(segtitle)
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "Question"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1319(segtitle)
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "Answer"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1321(seg)
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "No class hierarchy."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1322(filename)
++msgid ".types"
++msgstr ".types"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1322(seg)
++msgid ""
++"The objects _get_type() function has not been entered into the <placeholder-"
++"1/> file."
++msgstr ""
++"The object's <function>_get_type()</function> function has not been entered into the <placeholder-"
++"1/> file."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1325(seg)
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Still no class hierarchy."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1326(ulink)
++msgid "explanation"
++msgstr "explanation"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1326(seg)
++msgid "Wrong naming in section file (see <placeholder-1/>)"
++msgstr "Wrong naming in section file (see <placeholder-1/>)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1329(seg)
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Damn, I still have no class hierarchy."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1330(seg)
++msgid ""
++"Is the object name (name of the instance struct) part of the normal section "
++"(don't put this into Standard or Private)."
++msgstr ""
++"Is the object name (name of the instance struct) part of the normal section "
++"(don't put this into Standard or Private)?"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1333(seg)
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr "No symbol index."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1334(seg)
++msgid "FIXME (<index> tag in main sgml file)"
++msgstr "FIXME (<index> tag in main sgml file)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1337(seg)
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1338(seg)
++msgid "FIXME (added #,% or () ?)"
++msgstr "FIXME (added #,% or () ?)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1341(seg)
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1342(seg)
++msgid "FIXME (section file, types file, main-sgml file)"
++msgstr "FIXME (section file, types file, main-sgml file)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1345(seg)
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1346(seg)
++msgid "FIXME (section file, proper doc comment)"
++msgstr "FIXME (section file, proper doc comment)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1351(seg)
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1352(seg)
++msgid ""
++"Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the "
++"source."
++msgstr ""
++"Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names to the "
++"source."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1356(seg)
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1357(seg)
++msgid "Symbol XYZ appears twice in -section.txt file."
++msgstr "Symbol XYZ appears twice in the -section.txt file."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1360(seg)
++msgid ""
++"Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template "
++"matches."
++msgstr ""
++"Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template "
++"matches."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:12(releaseinfo)
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:16(year)
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:16(holder)
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:19(para)
++msgid ""
++"<address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, Suite "
++"330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state><postcode>02110-1301</"
++"postcode><country>USA</country></address> Everyone is permitted to copy and "
++"distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not "
++"allowed."
++msgstr ""
++"<address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, Suite "
++"330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state><postcode>02110-1301</"
++"postcode><country>USA</country></address> Everyone is permitted to copy and "
++"distribute verbatim copies of this licence document, but changing it is not "
++"allowed."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:28(title)
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr "GNU Free Documentation Licence"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:31(title)
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr "0. PREAMBLE"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:32(para)
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"The purpose of this Licence is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this Licence preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:43(para)
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that "
++"derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. "
++"It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license "
++"designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++"This Licence is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that "
++"derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. "
++"It complements the GNU General Public Licence, which is a copyleft licence "
++"designed for free software."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:50(para)
++msgid ""
++"We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free "
++"software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program "
++"should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. "
++"But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any "
++"textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a "
++"printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose "
++"is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++"We have designed this Licence in order to use it for manuals for free "
++"software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program "
++"should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. "
++"But this Licence is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any "
++"textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a "
++"printed book. We recommend this Licence principally for works whose purpose "
++"is instruction or reference."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:62(title)
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:63(para)
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such "
++"manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "
++"<quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"This Licence applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this Licence. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such "
++"manual or work. Any member of the public is a licencee, and is addressed as "
++"<quote>you</quote>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:72(para)
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing "
++"the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with "
++"modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing "
++"the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with "
++"modifications and/or translated into another language."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:79(para)
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter "
++"section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals "
++"exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the "
++"Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and "
++"contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For "
++"example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary "
++"Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter "
++"of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of "
++"legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding "
++"them."
++msgstr ""
++"A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter "
++"section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals "
++"exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the "
++"Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and "
++"contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For "
++"example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary "
++"Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter "
++"of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of "
++"legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding "
++"them."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:94(para)
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being "
++"those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being "
++"those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this Licence."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:103(para)
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are "
++"listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says "
++"that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under "
++"this License."
++msgstr ""
++"The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are "
++"listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says "
++"that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under "
++"this Licence."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:111(para)
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> "
++"Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose "
++"specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be "
++"viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors "
++"or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) "
++"some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text "
++"formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for "
++"input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file "
++"format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent "
++"modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "
++"<quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> "
++"Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose "
++"specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be "
++"viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors "
++"or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) "
++"some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text "
++"formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for "
++"input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file "
++"format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent "
++"modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "
++"<quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:128(para)
++msgid ""
++"Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII "
++"without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using "
++"a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for "
++"human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary "
++"formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, "
++"SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally "
++"available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors "
++"for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++"Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII "
++"without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using "
++"a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for "
++"human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary "
++"formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, "
++"SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally "
++"available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors "
++"for output purposes only."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:141(para)
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page "
++"itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the "
++"material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in "
++"formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> "
++"means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, "
++"preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++"The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page "
++"itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the "
++"material this Licence requires to appear in the title page. For works in "
++"formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> "
++"means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, "
++"preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:153(title)
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:154(para)
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that "
++"this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this "
++"License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you "
++"add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use "
++"technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of "
++"the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in "
++"exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you "
++"must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that "
++"this Licence, the copyright notices, and the licence notice saying this "
++"Licence applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you "
++"add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this Licence. You may not use "
++"technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of "
++"the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in "
++"exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you "
++"must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</"
++"link>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:169(para)
++msgid ""
++"You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you "
++"may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++"You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you "
++"may publicly display copies."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:176(title)
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:177(para)
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license "
++"notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you "
++"must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these "
++"Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on "
++"the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as "
++"the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title "
++"with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as "
++"verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's licence "
++"notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you "
++"must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these "
++"Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on "
++"the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as "
++"the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title "
++"with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as "
++"verbatim copying in other respects."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:195(para)
++msgid ""
++"If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, "
++"you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the "
++"actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++"If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, "
++"you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the "
++"actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:202(para)
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> "
++"copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more "
++"than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state "
++"in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location "
++"containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added "
++"material, which the general network-using public has access to download "
++"anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use "
++"the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin "
++"distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent "
++"copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one "
++"year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through "
++"your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> "
++"copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more "
++"than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state "
++"in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location "
++"containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added "
++"material, which the general network-using public has access to download "
++"anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use "
++"the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin "
++"distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent "
++"copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one "
++"year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through "
++"your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:222(para)
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any "
++"large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated "
++"version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any "
++"large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated "
++"version of the Document."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:231(title)
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:232(para)
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under "
++"the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the "
++"Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version "
++"filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under "
++"the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the "
++"Modified Version under precisely this Licence, with the Modified Version "
++"filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:248(title)
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "A"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:249(para)
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the "
++"covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which "
++"should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the "
++"Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original "
++"publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the "
++"covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which "
++"should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the "
++"Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original "
++"publisher of that version gives permission."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:264(title)
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "B"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:265(para)
++msgid ""
++"List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, "
++"one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the "
++"modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has "
++"less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, "
++"one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the "
++"modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has "
++"less than five)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:279(title)
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "C"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:280(para)
++msgid ""
++"State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of "
++"the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++"State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of "
++"the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"as the publisher."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:291(title)
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "D"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:292(para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:301(title)
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "E"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:302(para)
++msgid ""
++"Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the "
++"other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++"Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the "
++"other copyright notices."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:311(title)
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "F"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:312(para)
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the "
++"Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a licence notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> under the terms of this Licence, in the form shown in the "
++"Addendum below."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:324(title)
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "G"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:325(para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Preserve in that licence notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document's</link> licence notice."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:337(title)
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "H"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:338(para)
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr "Include an unaltered copy of this Licence."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:346(title)
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "I"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:347(para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add "
++"to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>as given on "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no "
++"section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and "
++"publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add "
++"to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>as given on "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no "
++"section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and "
++"publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:365(title)
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "J"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:366(para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the "
++"network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based "
++"on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit "
++"a network location for a work that was published at least four years before "
++"the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers "
++"to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the "
++"network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based "
++"on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit "
++"a network location for a work that was published at least four years before "
++"the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers "
++"to gives permission."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:383(title)
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "K"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:384(para)
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in "
++"the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor "
++"acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in "
++"the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor "
++"acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:396(title)
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "L"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:397(para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their "
++"text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not "
++"considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their "
++"text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not "
++"considered part of the section titles."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:409(title)
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "M"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:410(para)
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may "
++"not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may "
++"not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</"
++"link>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:421(title)
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "N"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:422(para)
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to "
++"conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant "
++"Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to "
++"conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant "
++"Section</link>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:432(para)
++msgid ""
++"If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new "
++"front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from "
++"the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections "
++"as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's "
++"license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new "
++"front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from "
++"the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections "
++"as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's "
++"licence notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:444(para)
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it "
++"contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of "
++"peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the "
++"authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it "
++"contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of "
++"peer review or that the text has been approved by an organisation as the "
++"authoritative definition of a standard."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:453(para)
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list "
++"of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover "
++"Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements "
++"made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by "
++"you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, "
++"you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit "
++"permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list "
++"of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover "
++"Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements "
++"made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by "
++"you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, "
++"you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit "
++"permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:470(para)
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names "
++"for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> do not by this Licence give permission to use their names "
++"for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:480(title)
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:481(para)
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with "
++"other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, "
++"unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in "
++"its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with "
++"other documents released under this Licence, under the terms defined in "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, "
++"unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in "
++"its licence notice."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:492(para)
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be "
++"replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with "
++"the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section "
++"unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original "
++"author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make "
++"the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections "
++"in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this Licence, and multiple "
++"identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be "
++"replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with "
++"the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section "
++"unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original "
++"author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make "
++"the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections "
++"in the licence notice of the combined work."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:505(para)
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</"
++"quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled "
++"<quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled "
++"<quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</"
++"quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled "
++"<quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled "
++"<quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:516(title)
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:517(para)
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and "
++"replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with "
++"a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow "
++"the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in "
++"all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> and other documents released under this Licence, and "
++"replace the individual copies of this Licence in the various documents with "
++"a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow "
++"the rules of this Licence for verbatim copying of each of the documents in "
++"all other respects."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:527(para)
++msgid ""
++"You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it "
++"individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License "
++"into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects "
++"regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++"You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it "
++"individually under this Licence, provided you insert a copy of this Licence "
++"into the extracted document, and follow this Licence in all other respects "
++"regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:537(title)
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:538(para)
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its "
++"derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on "
++"a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, "
++"provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a "
++"compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</"
++"link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its "
++"derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on "
++"a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, "
++"provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a "
++"compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this Licence does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</"
++"link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:561(title)
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr "8. TRANSLATION"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:562(para)
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the "
++"terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations "
++"requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may "
++"include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the "
++"original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation "
++"of this License provided that you also include the original English version "
++"of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the "
++"original English version of this License, the original English version will "
++"prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the "
++"terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations "
++"requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may "
++"include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the "
++"original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation "
++"of this Licence provided that you also include the original English version "
++"of this Licence. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the "
++"original English version of this Licence, the original English version will "
++"prevail."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:580(title)
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr "9. TERMINATION"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:581(para)
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this "
++"License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the "
++"Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this "
++"License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you "
++"under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such "
++"parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicence, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this "
++"Licence. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicence or distribute the "
++"Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this "
++"Licence. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you "
++"under this Licence will not have their licences terminated so long as such "
++"parties remain in full compliance."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:594(title)
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENCE"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:595(para)
++msgid ""
++"The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU "
++"Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be "
++"similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to "
++"address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www."
++"gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU "
++"Free Documentation Licence from time to time. Such new versions will be "
++"similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to "
++"address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www."
++"gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:606(para)
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular "
++"numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies "
++"to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of "
++"that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not "
++"as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not "
++"specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever "
++"published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"Each version of the Licence is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular "
++"numbered version of this Licence <quote>or any later version</quote> applies "
++"to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of "
++"that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not "
++"as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not "
++"specify a version number of this Licence, you may choose any version ever "
++"published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:621(title)
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr "Addendum"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:622(para)
++msgid ""
++"To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the "
++"License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices "
++"just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++"To use this Licence in a document you have written, include a copy of the "
++"Licence in the document and put the following copyright and licence notices "
++"just after the title page:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:629(para)
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:632(para)
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, "
++"and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being "
++"LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU "
++"Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation Licence, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, "
++"and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being "
++"LIST. A copy of the licence is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU "
++"Free Documentation Licence</quote>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:647(para)
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, "
++"write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover "
++"Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of "
++"<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, "
++"write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover "
++"Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of "
++"<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:657(para)
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++"gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"licence, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++"gpl.html\"> GNU General Public Licence</ulink>, to permit their use in free "
++"software."
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2.
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:0(None)
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr "Jen Ockwell <jenfraggleubuntu@gmail.com>, 2009\n"
++"Philip Withnall <philip@tecnocode.co.uk>, 2009"
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# translation of gtk-doc-help.master.po to Español\r
++# Francisco Javier Fernandez Serrador <fserrador@gmail.com>, 2009, 2010\r
++# Jorge Gonzalez <jorgegonz@svn.gnome.org>, 2009.\r
++# Jorge González <jorgegonz@svn.gnome.org>, 2009, 2010, 2011.\r
++# \r
++# \r
++# Daniel Mustieles <daniel.mustieles@gmail.com>, 2019-2020.
++#
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc-help.master\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2020-02-01 19:18+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2020-02-12 12:11+0100\n"
++"Last-Translator: Daniel Mustieles <daniel.mustieles@gmail.com>\n"
++"Language-Team: Spanish - Spain <gnome-es-list@gnome.org>\n"
++"Language: es_ES\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"X-Generator: Gtranslator 3.34.0\n"
++"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n"
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++msgctxt "_"
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr ""
++"Daniel Mustieles <daniel.mustieles@gmail.com>, 2009 - 2020\n"
++"Jorge González <jorgegonz@svn.gnome.org>, 2009 - 2011\n"
++"Francisco Javier F. Serrador <serrrador@svn.gnome.org>, 2009, 2010"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/title
++#: C/index.docbook:12
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "Manual de GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/edition
++#: C/index.docbook:13
++msgid "1.24.1"
++msgstr "1.24.1"
++
++#. (itstool) path: abstract/para
++#: C/index.docbook:14
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr ""
++"Manual del usuario para desarrolladores con instrucciones del uso de GTK-Doc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:16
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:25
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:34
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: publisher/publishername
++#: C/index.docbook:45
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "Proyecto GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/publisher
++#: C/index.docbook:44
++msgid ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++msgstr ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:48
++msgid "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:52
++msgid "<year>2007-2019</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2007-2019</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:65
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, "
++"Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation "
++"with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A "
++"copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Se concede autorización para copiar, distribuir o modificar este documento "
++"según los términos de la <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</"
++"citetitle>, Versión 1.1, o cualquier otra versión posterior publicada por "
++"Free Software Foundation sin secciones invariables, textos de portada ni "
++"textos de contraportada. Se <link linkend=\"fdl\">incluye</link> una copia "
++"de la licencia."
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:73
++msgid ""
++"Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and "
++"services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME "
++"documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the "
++"GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial "
++"caps."
++msgstr ""
++"Muchos de los nombres usados por compañías para distinguir sus productos y "
++"servicios se mencionan como marcas comerciales. Donde aparezcan dichos "
++"nombres en cualquier documentación GNOME, y para que los miembros del "
++"proyecto de documentación las reconozcan dichas marcas comerciales, dichos "
++"nombres se imprimen en mayúsculas o iniciales mayúsculas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:83
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.32.1</revnumber> <date>15 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>dev version</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.32.1</revnumber> <date>15 de agosto de 2019</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>desarrollo</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:89
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.32</revnumber> <date>15 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>hotfix release</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.32</revnumber> <date>15 de agosto de 2019</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:95
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.31</revnumber> <date>05 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>refactorings and more test coverage</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.31</revnumber> <date>5 de agosto de 2019</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>cobertura para más pruebas</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:101
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.30</revnumber> <date>08 May 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>more test coverage</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.30</revnumber> <date>8 de mayo de 2019</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>cobertura para más pruebas</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:107
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28 Aug 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28 de agosto de 2018</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:113
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.28</revnumber> <date>24 Mar 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.28</revnumber> <date>24 de marzo de 2018</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:119
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.27</revnumber> <date>07 Dec 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>fine tuning of the python port</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.27</revnumber> <date>07 de diciembre de 2017</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>ajustes para la migración a "
++"python</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:125
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.26</revnumber> <date>11 Aug 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>port all tools from perl/bash to python</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.26</revnumber> <date>11 de agosto de 2017</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>portar todas las herramientas "
++"de perl/bash a python</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:131
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21 March 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, test cleanups</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21 de marzo de 2016</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores, "
++"limpieza</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:137
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 de mayo de 2015</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:143
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 de mayo de 2015</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:149
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>07 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>7 de mayo de 2015</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores, "
++"eliminadas funcionalidades obsoletas</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:155
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 Jul 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 de julio de 2014</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores, "
++"eliminadas funcionalidades obsoletas</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:161
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16 Feb 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, markdown support, style improvements</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16 de febrero de 2014</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>errores corregidos, soporte "
++"de marcado, mejoras en los estilos</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:167
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 Jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 de junio de 2013</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:173
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 Sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, speedups, markdown support</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 de septiembre de 2011</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores, "
++"mejoras en la velocidad y soporte de marcado</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:179
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 Feb 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>urgent bug fix update</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 de febrero de 2011</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>actualización urgente de "
++"corrección de error</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:185
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 de enero de 2011</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores y "
++"mejoras en la distribución</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:191
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 May 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 de mayo de 2010</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores y "
++"regresiones</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:197
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 March 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes and performance improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 de marzo de 2010</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores y "
++"mejoras en el rendimiento</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:203
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>broken tarball update</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 de diciembre de 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>actualización del tarball "
++"roto</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:209
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>new tool features and "
++"bugfixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 de diciembre de 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>correcciones de errores y "
++"nuevas características</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:215
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 November 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>GNOME doc-utils migration</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 de noviembre de 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>Migración a GNOME doc-utils</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:228
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "Introducción"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:230
++msgid ""
++"This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how "
++"it is used."
++msgstr ""
++"Este capítulo introduce GTK-Doc y proporciona una visión general de lo que "
++"es y cómo usarlo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:236
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "¿Qué es GTK-Doc?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:238
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the "
++"public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can "
++"also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc se usa para documentar código C. Generalmente se usa para documentar "
++"la API pública de bibliotecas, tales como las bibliotecas GTK+ y de GNOME. "
++"Pero también se puede usar para documentar código de aplicaciones."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:246
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "¿Cómo funciona GTK-Doc?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:248
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source "
++"files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the "
++"template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only "
++"document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce "
++"output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc funciona usando documentación de las funciones ubicadas dentro de "
++"los archivos de fuentes en bloques de comentarios especialmente formateados, "
++"o documentación añadida a los archivos de plantillas que GTK-Doc usa (aunque "
++"debe notar que GTK-Doc sólo documentará las funciones declaradas en los "
++"archivos de cabecera; no produce salida para funciones estáticas)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:255
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc consists of a number of python scripts, each performing a different "
++"step in the process."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc consiste en un número de scripts en python, cada uno realiza un paso "
++"diferente en el proceso."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:260
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "Existen 5 pasos importantes en el proceso:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:267
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the "
++"source files with the documentation for each function, macro, structs or "
++"unions, etc."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Escribir la documentación.</guilabel> El autor rellena los "
++"archivos de fuentes con la documentación para cada función, macro, unión, "
++"etc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:276
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code "
++"looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. "
++"It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> "
++"containing a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according "
++"to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to "
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. The author can rearrange "
++"the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the "
++"final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><"
++"module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations "
++"found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some symbols to show "
++"up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or "
++"the declaration should appear differently, one can place entities similar to "
++"the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><"
++"module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Obtener información acerca del código</guilabel>. "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> analiza los archivos de cabecera del "
++"código buscando declaraciones de funciones, macros, enumeraciones, "
++"estructuras y uniones. Crea el archivo <filename><module>-decl-list."
++"txt</filename> que contiene una lista de las declaraciones, ubicándolas en "
++"secciones de acuerdo con el archivo de cabecera en el que están. Durante la "
++"primera ejecución este archivo se copia en <filename><module>-sections."
++"txt</filename>. El autor puede reordenar las secciones y el orden de las "
++"declaraciones en ellas, para producir la salida que quiere. El segundo "
++"archivo que genera es <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>. Este "
++"archivo contiene las declaraciones completas que encontró el análisis. Si "
++"por alguna razón quisiese que algunos símbolos apareciesen en los "
++"documentos, donde el análisis no puede encontrar la declaración completa o "
++"la declaración debería aparecer de forma diferente, puede introducir "
++"entradas de forma similar a las que hay en <filename><module>-decl."
++"txt</filename> dentro de <filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:293
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> can also be used to dynamically "
++"query a library about any GObject subclasses it exports. It saves "
++"information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about "
++"any GObject properties and signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> también se puede usar para "
++"consultar dinámicamente una biblioteca sobre cualquiera de las subclases "
++"GObject que exporta. Guarda información sobre la posición de cada objeto en "
++"la jerarquía de clases y sobre cualquier propiedad de GObject y las señales "
++"que proporciona."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:299
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> should not be used anymore. It was "
++"needed in the past when GObject was still GtkObject inside gtk+."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> no se debería usar más. Se "
++"necesitó en el pasado, cuando GObject todavía era GtkObject dentro de GTK+."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:306
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mkdb</application> turns the template files into XML files in the <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code "
++"contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it "
++"gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads docs from "
++"sources and introspection data."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Generar el XML y el HTML/PDF.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mkdb</"
++"application> convierte los archivos de plantilla en archivos SGML o XML en "
++"la subcarpeta <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename>. Si el código "
++"fuente contiene documentación de funciones, usando los bloques especiales de "
++"comentarios, entonces se mezclarán aquí. Si no se usan archivos tmpl sólo "
++"obtiene los documentos de los fuentes y los datos obtenidos en introspección."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:315
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the XML files into HTML files "
++"in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. Likewise "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the XML files into a PDF "
++"document called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> convierte los archivos XML en "
++"archivos HTML en la subcarpeta <filename class=\"directory\">html/</"
++"filename>. De la misma forma <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> "
++"convierte los archivos XML en un documento PDF llamado <filename><"
++"paquete>.pdf</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:321
++msgid ""
++"Files in <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class="
++"\"directory\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One "
++"should never edit them directly."
++msgstr ""
++"Los archivos en las carpetas <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> y "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> y siempre se sobrescriben. "
++"Nunca se deben editar directamente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:329
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After "
++"installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be "
++"run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, "
++"the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in "
++"the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, "
++"<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-"
++"links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application "
++"will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Arreglar referencias cruzadas entre documentos.</guilabel> Después "
++"de instalar los archivos HTML se puede ejecutar <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</"
++"application> para arreglar cualquier referencia cruzada entre documentos "
++"separados. Por ejemplo, la documentación GTK+ contiene muchas referencias "
++"cruzadas a tipos documentados en el manual de GLib. Al crear los "
++"archivadores «tarball» para su distribución, <application>gtkdoc-rebase</"
++"application> convierte todos los enlaces externos en enlaces web. Al "
++"instalar la documentación distribuida (pregenerada) la misma aplicación "
++"intentará convertir de nuevo los enlaces, esta vez a enlaces locales (donde "
++"esa documentación está instalada)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:347
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "Obtener GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:350
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "Requerimientos"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:351
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>python 2/3</guilabel> - the main scripts are written in python."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>python 2/3</guilabel> - los scripts principales están escritos en "
++"python."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:354
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> - the xslt processor from libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel>: el procesador xslt de libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:358
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> - the docbook xsl stylesheets <ulink url="
++"\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type=\"http"
++"\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel>: las hojas de estilo XLS de docbook <ulink "
++"url=\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type="
++"\"http\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:362
++msgid ""
++"One of <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</guilabel> "
++"or <guilabel>vim</guilabel> - optional - used for syntax highlighting of "
++"examples"
++msgstr ""
++"Una de <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</guilabel> "
++"o <guilabel>vim</guilabel>: opcional, usada para el resaltado de sintaxis de "
++"los ejemplos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:370
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "Acerca de GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:372
++msgid ""
++"Historically GTK-Doc was used to generate template files from the sources "
++"code. These template files could be used by developers to enter the API "
++"documentation. This approach was rather inconvenient because it required to "
++"keep the generated files under version control. Since GTK-Doc 1.9 it became "
++"possible to place all API information into source comments, which made the "
++"template support obsolete. In version 1.26 template support has been removed."
++msgstr ""
++"Históricamente, GTK-Doc se utilizaba para generar archivos de plantilla a "
++"partir del código fuente. Los desarrolladores pueden usar estos archivos de "
++"plantilla para introducir la documentación de la API. Este enfoque era "
++"bastante incómodo porque requería mantener los archivos generados bajo "
++"control de versiones. Desde GTK-Doc 1.9 se hizo posible colocar toda la "
++"información de la API en los comentarios de origen, lo que dejó obsoleto el "
++"soporte de la plantilla. En la versión 1.26 se ha eliminado el soporte de "
++"plantillas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:382 C/index.docbook:396
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(ARRÉGLAME)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:386
++msgid ""
++"(authors, web pages, mailing list, license, future plans, comparison with "
++"other similar systems.)"
++msgstr ""
++"(autores, páginas web, listas de correo, licencias, planes futuros, "
++"comparación con otros sistemas similares.)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:394
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "Acerca de este manual"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:400
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr "(a quién está dirigido, dónde puede obtenerse, licencia)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:409
++msgid "Project Setup"
++msgstr "Configuración del proyecto"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:411
++msgid ""
++"This Chapter describes the steps that are necessary to integrate GTK-Doc "
++"into your project. The integration of GTK-Doc into a project includes the "
++"following steps:"
++msgstr ""
++"Este capítulo describe los pasos para integrar GTK-Doc en su proyecto. La "
++"integración de GTK-Doc incluye:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:419
++msgid ""
++"Preparation of the directory structure and creating required configuration "
++"files for your GTK-Doc documentation (see <link linkend=\"settingup_docfiles"
++"\"> Setting up a skeleton documentation</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Preparación de la estructura de carpetas y crear los archivos de "
++"configuración necesarios para su documentación GTK-Doc (consulte <link "
++"linkend=\"settingup_docfiles\"> Configurar el esqueleto de la documentación</"
++"link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:427
++msgid ""
++"Adjusting the build system to build your documentation using the GTK-Doc "
++"tools. Multiple build systems are supported, in this manual we describe how "
++"to integrate GTK-Doc with <link linkend=\"settingup_autotools\">Autotools</"
++"link>, <link linkend=\"settingup_cmake\">CMake</link>, and <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_plain_makefiles\">plain Makefiles</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Ajustar el sistema de construcción para construir su documentación usando "
++"las herramientas de GTK-Doc. Hay varios sistemas de construcción soportados, "
++"en este manual se describe cómo integrar GTK-Doc con <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_autotools\">Autotools</link>, <link linkend=\"settingup_cmake"
++"\">CMake</link>, y <link linkend=\"settingup_plain_makefiles\">archivos "
++"Makefile</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:437
++msgid ""
++"Adding GTK-Doc specific files to version control and deciding which files to "
++"ignore (see <link linkend=\"settingup_vcs\"> Integration with version "
++"control systems</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Añadir archivos específicos de GTK-Doc al control de versiones y decidir qué "
++"archivos ignorar (consulte <link linkend=\"settingup_vcs\">Integración con "
++"sistemas de control de versiones</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:445
++msgid ""
++"The following sections assume we work on a project called <code>meep</code>. "
++"This project contains two packages (or modules), a library called "
++"<code>libmeep</code> and an end-user app called <code>meeper</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"La siguiente sección asume que se trabaja con un proyecto llamado "
++"<code>meep</code>. Este proyecto contiene dos paquetes (o módulos), una "
++"biblioteca llamada <code>libmeep</code> y una aplicación de usuario final "
++"llamada <code>meeper</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:454
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "Configurar el esquema de la documentación"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:456
++msgid ""
++"A common convention is to place documentation into a folder called "
++"<code>docs</code> inside your top-level project directory. We usually "
++"distinguish between <emphasis>reference documentation</emphasis> intended "
++"for developers and an <emphasis>user manual</emphasis> intended for end-"
++"users. Again the convention is to have separate folders for both. We usually "
++"place the reference documentation in a folder named <code>reference</code> "
++"and the end-user manual in a folder named <code>help</code> as. According to "
++"the above convention the documentation for our <code>libmeep</code> package "
++"would be placed into: <code>docs/reference/libmeep</code>. For packages with "
++"just one library or application the documentation could also be placed "
++"directly into <code>docs/reference</code>. It is not mandatory to use the "
++"above convention, but if you choose to use a different directory structure "
++"you must adjust your build system configuration to match your directory "
++"structure."
++msgstr ""
++"Un convenio común es colocar la documentación en una carpeta llamada "
++"<code>docs</code> dentro de su carpeta de proyecto de nivel superior. "
++"Normalmente se distingue entre <emphasis>documentación de referencia</"
++"emphasis> destinada a desarrolladores y un <emphasis>manual de usuario</"
++"emphasis> destinado a usuarios finales. Nuevamente, el convenio es tener "
++"carpetas separadas para ambos. Por lo general, colocamos la documentación de "
++"referencia en una carpeta llamada <code>reference</code> y el manual del "
++"usuario final en una carpeta llamada <code>help</code> como. De acuerdo con "
++"el convenio anterior, la documentación de nuestro paquete <code>libmeep</"
++"code> se colocaría en: <code>docs/reference/libmeep</code>. Para paquetes "
++"con una sola biblioteca o aplicación, la documentación también se puede "
++"colocar directamente en <code>docs/reference </code>. No es obligatorio usar "
++"el convenio anterior, pero si elige usar una estructura de carpetas "
++"diferente, debe ajustar la configuración del sistema de compilación para que "
++"coincida con la estructura de su carpeta."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:487
++msgid "Example directory structure of <emphasis>meep</emphasis> project"
++msgstr ""
++"Ejemplo de estructura de carpetas para el proyecto <emphasis>meep</emphasis>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:489
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++msgid ""
++"In the following sections we will assume a directory structure for our "
++"<emphasis>meep</emphasis> project that uses the above conventions. <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"En las siguientes secciones se asumirá que la estructura de carpetas de "
++"nuestro proyecto <emphasis>meep</emphasis> usa los convenios anteriores. <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:506
++msgid "Integration with Autotools"
++msgstr "Integración con Autotools"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:507
++msgid ""
++"Integration of GTK-Doc into an autotools-based build system requires the "
++"following steps:"
++msgstr ""
++"La integración de GTK-Doc en un sistema de construcción basado en autotools "
++"requiere los siguientes pasos:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:513
++msgid ""
++"Ensure that <application>gtkdocize</application> is run once before the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> script. If an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> "
++"script is present, adjust it to check for GTK-Doc and add a call to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"Asegúrese de que <application>gtkdocize</application> se ejecuta antes del "
++"script <filename>configure</filename>. Si existe un script <filename>autogen."
++"sh</filename> ajústelo para que compruebe que existe GTK-Doc y añada una "
++"llamada a <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:521
++msgid ""
++"The main purpose of <application>gtkdocize</application> is to make the "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> Makefile and the <filename>gtk-doc.m4</"
++"filename> macro definition file available to the build system, either by "
++"copying or linking it into the project."
++msgstr ""
++"El propósito principal de <application>gtkdocize</application> es hacer que "
++"el Makefile <filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> y el archivo de definición de "
++"macros <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename> estén disponibles para el sistema de "
++"construcción, bien copiándolos o enlazándolos en el proyecto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:530
++msgid ""
++"Add the necessary <application>autoconf</application> macros to "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> to enable GTK-Doc in your build system to "
++"allow configuration of GTK-Doc via the generated <filename>configure</"
++"filename> script."
++msgstr ""
++"Añada las macros de <application>autoconf</application> necesarias a "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> para activar GTK-Doc en su sistema de "
++"construcción y permitir la configuración de GTK-Doc generada en el script "
++"<filename>configure</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:536
++msgid ""
++"Among others with registers the <code>--enable-gtk-doc</code> option with "
++"the <filename>configure</filename> script."
++msgstr ""
++"Entre otras la que registra la opción <code>--enable-gtk-doc</code> en el "
++"script <filename>configure</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:542
++msgid ""
++"Create an <application>automake</application> script for each application or "
++"library in your project. In the example used in this documentation this step "
++"applies to both <code>meeper</code> and <code>libmeep</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Cree un script <application>automake</application> para cada aplicación o "
++"biblioteca de su proyecto. En el ejemplo usado en esta documentación este "
++"paso se aplica a <code>meeper</code> y a <code>libmeep</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:551
++msgid ""
++"In the following sections, we will perform the above steps in reverse order. "
++"We start with the <application>automake</application> scripts and work our "
++"way up to <filename>configure.ac</filename> and <filename>autogen.sh</"
++"filename>. Then we show how enable Gtk-Doc in the build system and how to "
++"build the documentation."
++msgstr ""
++"En las siguientes secciones, se realizan los pasos anteriores en orden "
++"inverso. Comienza con los scripts <application>automake</application> y "
++"avanza hasta <filename>configure.ac</filename> y <filename> autogen.sh </"
++"filename>. Luego se muestra cómo activar Gtk-Doc en el sistema de "
++"compilación y cómo compilar la documentación."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:561
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "Integración con automake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:563
++msgid ""
++"First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">examples</filename> sub-directory of the <ulink url=\"https://"
++"gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/raw/master/examples/Makefile.am\"> gtkdoc-"
++"sources</ulink> to your project's reference documentation directory (e.g. "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">docs/reference/<package></filename>). A "
++"local copy should be available under e.g. <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-"
++"tools/examples/Makefile.am</filename>. If you have multiple packages repeat "
++"this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++"Primero copie el archivo <filename>Makefile.am</filename> de la subcarpeta "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">examples</filename> de <ulink url=\"https://"
++"gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/raw/master/examples/Makefile.am\"> gtkdoc-"
++"sources</ulink> a la carpeta de documentación de la API de su proyecto "
++"(<filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<paquete></filename>). "
++"Debería haber una copia local disponible en <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-"
++"tools/examples/Makefile.am</filename>. Si tiene varios paquetes de "
++"documentación, repítalo para cada uno de ellos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/simpara
++#: C/index.docbook:576
++msgid ""
++"Do not forget to add each <filename>Makefile.am</filename> to the "
++"<function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function> macro in <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename>. For <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile.am</filename> you "
++"will need to add the entry <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile</"
++"filename> to <function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function>."
++msgstr ""
++"No olvide añadir cada <filename>Makefile.am</filename> a la macro "
++"<function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function> en <filename>configure.ac</filename>. "
++"Para <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile.am</filename> deberá añadir "
++"la entrada <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile</filename> a "
++"<function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:588
++msgid "Example directory structure with <filename>Makefiles.am</filename>"
++msgstr ""
++"Ejemplo de estructura de carpetas con <filename>Makefiles.am</filename>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:591
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:607
++msgid ""
++"Next, you need to customize the copied Makefiles and provide values for the "
++"various parameters in each <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. All settings "
++"have a comment above them that describes their purpose and how to customize "
++"the setting. Most settings are used to supply extra flags to the respective "
++"tools to which they apply. Every tool has a variable of the form <option><"
++"TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option> (e.g. the tool <application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</"
++"application> has an option named <code>MKHTML_OPTIONS</code>). All the tools "
++"support <option>--help</option> to list the supported options."
++msgstr ""
++"A continuación, debe personalizar los Makefiles copiados y proporcionar "
++"valores para los distintos parámetros en cada <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>. Todas las configuraciones tienen un comentario sobre ellas que "
++"describe su propósito y cómo personalizar la configuración. La mayoría de "
++"las configuraciones se utilizan para proporcionar indicadores adicionales a "
++"las herramientas respectivas a las que se aplican. Cada herramienta tiene "
++"una variable de la forma <option> <TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS </option> (por "
++"ejemplo, la herramienta <application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> tiene una "
++"opción llamada <code>MKHTML_OPTIONS</code>). Todas las herramientas admiten "
++"<option>--help</option> para enumerar las opciones admitidas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:631
++msgid ""
++"<option>DOC_MODULE</option> is used to provide the name of the package that "
++"is being documentated (e.g. <code>meeper</code>, or <code>libmeep</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>DOC_MODULE</option> se usa para proporcionar el nombre del paquete "
++"que se está documentando (ej. <code>meeper</code>, o <code>libmeep</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:638
++msgid ""
++"<option>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</option> is used to specify the location of source "
++"directory which GTK-Doc searches for your API documentation. This will "
++"usually be <code> DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/src </code> or a sub-"
++"directory of that directory."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</option> se utiliza para especificar la ubicación de "
++"la carpeta de origen en el que GTK-Doc busca la documentación de su API. "
++"Esto generalmente será <code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/src</code> o una "
++"subcarpeta de ese carpeta."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:651
++msgid ""
++"<option>HFILE_GLOB</option> and <option>CFILE_GLOB</option> are used for "
++"dependencies. Each option take a file-glob (e.g. <code>HFILE_GLOB="
++"$(top_srcdir)/src/*.c</code>). The documentation will be rebuilt if any of "
++"the matched files change."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>HFILE_GLOB</option> y <option>CFILE_GLOB</option> se usan para "
++"dependencias. Cada opción toma un archivo glob (por ejemplo, "
++"<code>HFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/src/*.C</code>). La documentación se "
++"reconstruirá si alguno de los archivos coincidentes cambia."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:663
++msgid ""
++"<option>EXTRA_HFILES</option> allows to specify extra header files to "
++"include when scanning for API documentation, which are not found under "
++"<code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</code> (e.g. <code> EXTRA_HFILES=$(top_srcdir}/contrib/"
++"extra.h</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>EXTRA_HFILES</option> permite especificar archivos de cabeceras "
++"adicionales que incluir al analizar la documentación de la API y que no "
++"están en <code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</code> (ej. <code> EXTRA_HFILES=$(top_srcdir}/"
++"contrib/extra.h</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:673
++msgid ""
++"<option>IGNORE_HFILES</option> allows to specify header files or directories "
++"to ignore when scanning for API documentation. Use the basename of the file "
++"or directory (e.g. <code> IGNORE_HFILES=gtkdebug.h gtkintl.h "
++"private_code_folder</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>IGNORE_HFILES</option> permite especificar archivos de cabeceras o "
++"carpetas que ignorar al analizar la documentación de la API. Use el nombre "
++"base del archivo o la carpta (ej. <code> IGNORE_HFILES=gtkdebug.h gtkintl.h "
++"private_code_folder</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:683
++msgid ""
++"<option>HTML_IMAGES</option> allows to specify images files which will be "
++"copied into the <filename>html/</filename> directory of the generated "
++"documentation. If your API documentation includes any images they need to be "
++"added to this option (e.g. <code> HTML_IMAGES=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/stock-icons/"
++"stock_about_24.png</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>HTML_IMAGES</option> permite especificar archivos de imágenes que se "
++"copiarán en la carpeta <filename>html/</filename> de la documentación "
++"generada. Si su documentación de la API incluye imágenes, deben agregarse a "
++"esta opción (por ejemplo, <code>HTML_IMAGES=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/stock-icons/"
++"stock_about_24.png</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:696
++msgid ""
++"<option>content_files</option> allows to specify extra files that are "
++"included by <code>$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)</code> (e.g. <code> "
++"content_files=running.xml building.xml changes-2.0.xml</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>content_files</option> permite especificar archivos adicionales que "
++"están incluidos en <code>$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)</code> (por ejemplo, "
++"<code>content_files=running.xml building.xml changes-2.0.xml</code>)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:707
++msgid ""
++"<option>expand_content_files</option> allows to specify files where "
++"<emphasis>gtk-doc abbreviations</emphasis> such as <code>#GtkWidget</code> "
++"are expanded (e.g. <code> expand_content_files=running.xml</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>expand_content_files</option> permite especificar archivos donde "
++"<emphasis>gtk-doc abbreviations</emphasis> como <code>#GtkWidget</code> se "
++"expanden (por ejemplo, <code>expand_content_files=running.xml</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:625
++msgid ""
++"The following list explains the most relevant options. Check the example "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename> for additional options. <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"La siguiente lista explica las opciones más relevantes. Consulte el ejemplo "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename> para obtener opciones adicionales. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:722
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Integración con autoconf"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:724
++msgid ""
++"Integration with <application>autoconf</application> is very simple and "
++"includes one required step and an additional optional (but recommended) "
++"step. The first step is to add the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro "
++"to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This registers several "
++"configure options to enable GTK-Doc and allows you to set default arguments "
++"for <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"La integración con <application>autoconf</application> es muy simple e "
++"incluye un paso requerido y un paso opcional adicional (pero recomendado). "
++"El primer paso es agregar la macro <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> a su "
++"script <filename>configure.ac</filename>. Esto registra varias opciones de "
++"configuración para habilitar GTK-Doc y le permite establecer argumentos "
++"predeterminados para <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: warning/simpara
++#: C/index.docbook:736
++msgid ""
++"Make sure that the <code>GTK_DOC_CHECK</code> macro is not indented. The "
++"macro must start at the beginning of the line and should not start with "
++"whitespace."
++msgstr ""
++"Asegúrese de que la macro <code>GTK_DOC_CHECK</code> no esté sangrada. La "
++"macro debe comenzar al principio de la línea y no debe comenzar con espacios "
++"en blanco."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:743
++msgid ""
++"The second step is to add the <code>AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)</code> to your "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. This is not required but helps "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++"definition (e.g <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename>) which contains the "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro to your project's macro directory. "
++"Without this, the GTK_DOC_CHECK macro might not be found and you would need "
++"to explicitly tell the <application>aclocal</application> tool where to find "
++"the macro definition file."
++msgstr ""
++"El segundo paso es agregar el <code>AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR (m4)</code> a su "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. Esto no es obligatorio, pero ayuda a "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> a copiar automáticamente la definición "
++"de macro (Ej., <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename>) que contiene la macro "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> en la carpeta de macros de su proyecto. "
++"Sin esto, es posible que no se encuentre la macro GTK_DOC_CHECK y "
++"necesitaría decirle explícitamente a la herramienta <application>aclocal</"
++"application> dónde encontrar el archivo de definición de macro."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:756
++msgid "Minimal integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Integración mínima con autoconf"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:757
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:772
++msgid "Integration with optional gtk-doc dependency"
++msgstr "Integración con dependencias opcionales de gtk-doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:773
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:766
++msgid ""
++"The above example works, but will require all developers to have gtk-doc "
++"installed. A better way is to make building the documentation optional as "
++"shown in the next example: <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"El ejemplo anterior funciona, pero requerirá que todos los desarrolladores "
++"tengan instalado gtk-doc. Una mejor manera es hacer que la creación de la "
++"documentación sea opcional como se muestra en el siguiente ejemplo: <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:786
++msgid ""
++"The first argument is used to check for the Gtk-Doc version at configure "
++"time. The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application>. The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several "
++"configure switches:"
++msgstr ""
++"El primer argumento se utiliza para verificar la versión de Gtk-Doc en el "
++"momento de la configuración. El segundo argumento opcional es usado por "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>. La macro <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</"
++"symbol> también agrega varios modificadores de configuración:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:795
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr "--with-html-dir=RUTA: ruta a los documentos instalados"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:796
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc: usar gtk-doc para construir la documentación "
++"[predeterminado=no]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:797
++msgid ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc: usar gtk-doc para construir la documentación "
++"[predeterminado=sí]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:798
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc: usar gtk-doc para construir la documentación "
++"[predeterminado=no]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: important/para
++#: C/index.docbook:802
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--"
++"enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. "
++"Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for "
++"users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc está desactivado de forma predeterminada. Recuerde pasar la opción "
++"<option>«--enable-gtk-doc»</option> en la siguiente ejecución de "
++"<filename>configure</filename>. De otra forma, la documentación pregenerada "
++"se instala (lo que tiene sentido para usuarios, pero no para "
++"desarrolladores)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:810
++msgid ""
++"After all changes to <filename>configure.ac</filename> are made, update the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> file. This can be done by re-running "
++"<code>autogen.sh</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Después de hacer los cambios en el <filename>configure.ac</filename> "
++"actualice el archivo <filename>configure</filename>. Esto se puede hacer "
++"volviendo a ejecutar <code>autogen.sh</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:818
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "Integración con autogen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:820
++msgid ""
++"Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup "
++"the build infrastructure after the project was checked out from a version "
++"control system (such as git or svn). GTK-Doc comes with a script called "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> which can be used to copy the necessary "
++"files needed by Gtk-Doc to the source directory."
++msgstr ""
++"La mayoría de los proyectos tendrán un script <filename>autogen.sh</"
++"filename> para configurar la infraestructura de compilación después de que "
++"el proyecto se haya extraído de un sistema de control de versiones (como git "
++"o svn). GTK-Doc viene con un script llamado <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application> que puede usarse para copiar los archivos necesarios que "
++"necesita Gtk-Doc en la carpeta fuente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:828
++msgid "It should be run before autoreconf, autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr "Se debe ejecutar antes de autoreconf, autoheader, automake o autoconf."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:833
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Ejecutar gtkdocize desde autogen.sh"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:834
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:842
++msgid "Conditionally run gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Condicionalmente, ejecutar gtkdocize desde autogen.sh"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:843
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"GTKDOCIZE=$(which gtkdocize 2>/dev/null)\n"
++"if test $? -ne 0; then\n"
++" echo \"No gtk-doc support found. You can't build the docs.\"\n"
++"else\n"
++" $GTKDOCIZE || exit 1\n"
++"fi\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"GTKDOCIZE=$(which gtkdocize 2>/dev/null)\n"
++"if test $? -ne 0; then\n"
++" echo \"No gtk-doc support found. You can't build the docs.\"\n"
++"else\n"
++" $GTKDOCIZE || exit 1\n"
++"fi\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:854
++msgid ""
++"When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.make</filename> to your project root (or any directory specified by the "
++"<option>--docdir</option> option)."
++msgstr ""
++"Al ejecutar <filename>gtkdocize</filename> copia <filename>gtk-doc.make</"
++"filename> a la raíz de su proyecto (o cualquier carpeta especificada por la "
++"opción <option>--docdir</option>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:860
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> checks your <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename> script for the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro. The "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro can be used to pass extra arguments "
++"to the <application>gtkdocize</application> script. the 2nd parameter in the "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> comprueba su script <filename> "
++"configure.ac </filename> para la macro <function> GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>. "
++"La macro <function> GTK_DOC_CHECK </function> se puede usar para pasar "
++"argumentos adicionales al script <application>gtkdocize</application>. el "
++"segundo parámetro en la macro <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:869
++msgid ""
++"Alternatively, additional arguments can also be passed to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> via the <function>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</"
++"function> environment variable, or by directly specifying them to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> in <filename>autogen.sh</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Alternativamente, también se pueden pasar argumentos adicionales a "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> a través de la variable de entorno "
++"<function>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</function>, o especificándolos directamente a "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> en <filename>autogen.sh</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:880
++msgid "Executing GTK-Doc from the Build System"
++msgstr "Ejecutar GTH-Doc desde el sistema de construcción"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:882
++msgid ""
++"After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then "
++"give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run "
++"<filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++"Después de los pasos anteriores es hora de ejecutar el constructor. Primero "
++"se debe volver a ejecutar <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. Si este script "
++"ejecuta configure automáticamente, entonces debe pasar la opción <option>--"
++"enable-gtk-doc</option>. De otra forma, ejecute posteriormente "
++"<filename>configure</filename> con esta opción."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:889
++msgid ""
++"The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-"
++"directories. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past ."
++"sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"El primer make genera diversas líneas adicionales en las carpetas de "
++"documentación. Las importantes son: <filename><paquete>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><paquete>-docs.xml</filename> (.sgml en el "
++"pasado), <filename><paquete>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:897
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "Ejecutar la construcción de la documentación"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:898
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:905
++msgid ""
++"Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename>. With this initial setup you will only see a very "
++"simple document. The next chapter will teach you how to add API "
++"documentation to your code via special comment blocks. The Chapter "
++"afterwards introduces <link linkend=\"metafiles\">additional files</link> "
++"and shows how to edit the <link linkend=\"metafiles_master\">master "
++"template</link> to add additional chapters and sections to your "
++"documentation files."
++msgstr ""
++"Ahora puede apuntar su navegador a <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename>. Con esta configuración inicial, solo verá un "
++"documento muy simple. El siguiente capítulo le enseñará cómo agregar "
++"documentación API a su código a través de bloques de comentarios especiales. "
++"Posteriormente, el Capítulo presenta <link linkend=\"metafiles\">archivos "
++"adicionales</link> y muestra cómo editar la plantilla maestra <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_master\"></link> para agregar capítulos y secciones adicionales "
++"a sus archivos de documentación."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:921
++msgid "Integration with CMake build systems"
++msgstr "Integración con sistemas de construcción CMake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:923
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc now provides a <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename> module (and "
++"the corresponding <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename> module). "
++"This provides a <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal> command that you can "
++"set in your <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Ahroa, GTK-Doc proporciona un módulo <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename> "
++"(y el correspondiente módulo <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</"
++"filename>). Esto proporciona un comando <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</"
++"literal> que puede configurar en su archivo <filename>CMakeLists.txt</"
++"filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:933
++msgid "Example of using GTK-Doc from CMake"
++msgstr "Ejeplo de uso de GTK-Doc desde CMake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:934
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Create the doc-libmeep target.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Build doc-libmeep as part of the default target. Without this, you would\n"
++"# have to explicitly run something like `make doc-libmeep` to build the docs.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Install the docs. (This assumes you're using the GNUInstallDirs CMake module\n"
++"# to set the CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR variable correctly).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Create the doc-libmeep target.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Build doc-libmeep as part of the default target. Without this, you would\n"
++"# have to explicitly run something like `make doc-libmeep` to build the docs.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Install the docs. (This assumes you're using the GNUInstallDirs CMake module\n"
++"# to set the CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR variable correctly).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:931
++msgid "The following example shows how to use this command. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr "El siguiente ejemplo muestra cómo usar este comando. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:958
++msgid "Integration with plain makefiles or other build systems"
++msgstr "Integración con makefiles u otros sistemas de construcción"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:960
++msgid ""
++"In the case one does not want to use automake and therefore <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.mak</filename> one will need to call the gtkdoc tools in the right order "
++"in own makefiles (or other build tools)."
++msgstr ""
++"En el caso de que no quiera usar automake y por ello <filename>gtk-doc.mak</"
++"filename> deberá llamar a las herramientas gtkdoc en el orden correcto en "
++"makefiles propios (o en otras herramientas de construcción)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:967
++msgid "Documentation build steps"
++msgstr "Pasos de construcción de la documentación"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:968
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <source-dir>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<source-dir>\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <source-dir>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<source-dir>\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:982
++msgid ""
++"One will need to look at the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> and "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> to pick the extra options needed."
++msgstr ""
++"Deberá mirar en el archivo <filename>Makefile.am</filename> y <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.mak</filename> para elegir las opciones adicionales necesarias."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:989
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "Integración con los sistemas de control de versiones"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:991
++msgid ""
++"As a rule of thumb, it's the files you edit which should go under version "
++"control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><package>."
++"types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the "
++"past .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Como regla principal, son los archivos que edita los que deberían estar bajo "
++"el control de versiones. Para proyectos típicos son los archivos: "
++"<filename><paquete>.types</filename>, <filename><paquete>-docs."
++"xml</filename> (anteriormente .sgml), <filename><paquete>-sections."
++"txt</filename>, <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:999
++msgid ""
++"Files in the <filename>xml/</filename> and <filename>html/</filename> "
++"directories should not go under version control. Neither should any of the "
++"<filename>.stamp</filename> files."
++msgstr ""
++"Los archivos de las carpetas <filename>xml/</filename> y <filename>html/</"
++"filename> No deberían estar bajo control de versiones. Tampoco ninguno de "
++"los archivos <filename>.stamp</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1009
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "Documentar el código"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1011
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code "
++"documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure "
++"from other sources. During the next section you will find all information "
++"about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc usa código fuente comentado con una sintaxis especial para "
++"documentar el código. Además obtiene información acerca de la estructura de "
++"su proyecto de otras fuentes. En la siguiente sección encontrará información "
++"acerca de la sintaxis de los comentarios."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1022 C/index.docbook:1048
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "Bloque de comentario de GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1023
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1018
++msgid ""
++"The GTK-Doc scanner can handle the majority of C headers fine. In the case "
++"of receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special case, one "
++"can hint GTK-Doc to skip over them. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"El escáner GTK-Doc puede manejar bien la mayoría de los encabezados C. En el "
++"caso de recibir advertencias del escáner que se vean como un caso especial, "
++"uno puede indicarle a GTK-Doc que las omita. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1032
++msgid "Limitations"
++msgstr "Limitaciones"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1033
++msgid ""
++"Note, that GTK-Doc's supports <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> but "
++"not <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> or other combinations."
++msgstr ""
++"Tenga en cuenta que GTK-Doc soporta <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> "
++"pero <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> u otras combinaciones."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1043
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "Comentarios de la documentación"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1049
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1045
++msgid ""
++"A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation "
++"block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Un comentario de varias líneas que comienza con un «*» adicional marca un "
++"bloque de documentación que GTK-Doc tools procesarán. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1058
++msgid ""
++"The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is "
++"related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add "
++"table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++"El «identificador» es una línea con el nombre del elemento relacionado con "
++"el comentario. La sintaxis difiere un poco dependiendo del elemento. (Por "
++"hacer: añadir una tabla mostrando los identificadores)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1064
++msgid ""
++"The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol "
++"types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter "
++"description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows "
++"the detailed description. All lines (outside program listings and CDATA "
++"sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph "
++"breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-"
++"asterisk-blank-blank). This is useful in preformatted text (code listings)."
++msgstr ""
++"El bloque de «Documentación» también es diferente para cada tipo de símbolo. "
++"Los tipos de símbolos que obtienen parámetros tales como funciones o macros, "
++"tienen primero las descripciones seguidas por una línea blanca (exactamente "
++"un «*»). Después siguen las descripciones detalladas. Todas las líneas "
++"(fuera de los programas; listados y CDATA de la secciones) que solo "
++"contengan un « *» (asterisco con espacio) se convierten en párrafos. Si no "
++"quiere un espaciado de párrafo, cámbielo a un « * » (espacio-asterisco-"
++"espacio). Esto es útil para texto preformateado (listados de código)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1081
++msgid ""
++"What it is: The name for a class or function can sometimes be misleading for "
++"people coming from a different background."
++msgstr ""
++"Qué es: el nombre de la clase o la función puede confundir a veces a "
++"personas que provengan de otros entornos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1087
++msgid ""
++"What it does: Tell about common uses. Put it in relation with the other API."
++msgstr "Qué hace: indique los usos comunes, en relación con las otras API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1077
++msgid "When documenting code, describe two aspects: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "Al documentar código, describa dos aspectos: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1102
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Use función() para referirse a funciones o macros que toman argumentos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1107
++msgid ""
++"Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to "
++"parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr ""
++"Use @parámetro para referirse a parámetros. Úselo también al referirse a "
++"parámetros de otras funciones, relacionados al que se describe."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1113
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr "Use %constant para referirse a una constante, ej: %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1118
++msgid ""
++"Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and "
++"macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Use #símbolo para referirse a otro tipo de símbolos, como por ejemplo "
++"estructuras, enumeraciones y macros que no toman argumentos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1124
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal."
++msgstr "Use #Object::signal para referirse a una señal de GObject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1129
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property."
++msgstr "Use #Object:property para referirse a una propiedad de GObject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1134
++msgid ""
++"Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure and #GObjectClass."
++"foo_bar() to refer to a vmethod."
++msgstr ""
++"Use #Struct.field para referirse a un campo dentro de una estructura y "
++"#GObjectClass.foo_bar() para referirse a un vmethod."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1096
++msgid ""
++"One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in "
++"the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. "
++"GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Una ventaja del hipertexto sobre el texto plano es la capacidad de tener "
++"enlaces en el documento. Escribir las marcas adecuadas para un enlace puede "
++"ser tedioso aunque GTK-Doc le ayuda proporcionando abreviaturas útiles. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1143
++msgid ""
++"If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or "
++"'#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML "
++"entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&"
++"commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them "
++"with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++"Si necesita usar los caracteres especiales «<», «>», «()», «@», «%», o "
++"«#» en su documentación sin que GTK-Doc los cambie, puede usar las entidades "
++"XML «&lt;», «&gt;», «amp;lpar;», «amp;rpar;», «amp;commat;» «&"
++"percnt;» y «&num;» respectivamente o escaparlas con una contrabarra "
++"doble «\\»."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1152
++msgid ""
++"DocBook can do more than just links. One can also have lists, examples, "
++"headings, and images. As of version 1.20, the preferred way is to use a "
++"subset of the basic text formatting syntax called <ulink url=\"http://"
++"daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink>. On older GTK-Doc "
++"versions any documentation that includes Markdown will be rendered as is. "
++"For example, list items will appear as lines starting with a dash."
++msgstr ""
++"DocBook puede crear algo más que enlaces. También se pueden tener listas, "
++"ejemplos, cabeceras e imágenes. En la versión 1.20, la manera prefefira de "
++"hacer esto es usando un subconjunto de la sintaxis básica de formateado de "
++"texto llamada <ulink url=\"http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/"
++"\">Marcado</ulink>. En versiones anteriores de GTK-Doc, cualquier "
++"documentación que incluya marcado se renderizará como tal. Por ejemplo, los "
++"elementos de una lista aparecerán como líneas que empiezan con un guión."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1163
++msgid ""
++"While markdown is now preferred one can mix both. One limitation here is "
++"that one can use docbook xml within markdown, but markdown within docbook "
++"xml is not supported."
++msgstr ""
++"Aunque el marcado es el preferido, puede mezclar ambos. Una limitación aquí "
++"es que se puede usar docbook xml con marcado, pero el marcado con docbook "
++"xml no está soportado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1169
++msgid ""
++"In older GTK-Doc releases, if you need support for additional formatting, "
++"you would need to enable the usage of docbook XML tags inside doc-comments "
++"by putting <option>--xml-mode</option> (or <option>--sgml-mode</option>) in "
++"the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"En versiones anteriores de GTK-Doc, si necesitaba soporte para formato "
++"adicional, necesitaba activar el uso de etiquetas XML dentro de comentarios "
++"en la documentación poniendo <option>--xml-mode</option> o <option>--sgml-"
++"mode</option> en la variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> dentro de "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1178
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block using Markdown"
++msgstr "Bloque de comentario de GTK-Doc usando marcado"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1179
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * documentation paragraph ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Second Sub Heading\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading With a Link Anchor # {#heading-two}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * more documentation:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 1\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Paragraph inside a list item.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. another numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Another paragraph. [A Link to the GNOME Website](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [A link to the heading anchor above][heading-two]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * A C-language example:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Gorgeous!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * documentation paragraph ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Second Sub Heading\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading With a Link Anchor # {#heading-two}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * more documentation:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 1\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Paragraph inside a list item.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. another numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Another paragraph. [A Link to the GNOME Website](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [A link to the heading anchor above][heading-two]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * A C-language example:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Gorgeous!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1218
++msgid ""
++"More examples of what markdown tags are supported can be found in the <ulink "
++"url=\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/Markdown"
++"\">GTK+ Documentation Markdown Syntax Reference</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Se pueden encontrar más ejemplos de las etiquetas de marcado soportadas en "
++"el <ulink url=\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/"
++"Markdown\">Manual de referencia de sintaxis de marcado de documentación de "
++"GTK+</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1224
++msgid ""
++"As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one "
++"cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to "
++"comment those symbols too. This helps other developers to understand your "
++"code. Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without "
++"the 2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made "
++"public, all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and "
++"insert the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++"Como ya se mencionó anteriormente, GTK-Doc es para documentar API públicas. "
++"Por lo tanto, no se puede escribir documentación para símbolos estáticos. "
++"Sin embargo, también es bueno comentar esos símbolos. Esto ayuda a otros "
++"desarrolladores a comprender su código. Por lo tanto, recomendamos "
++"comentarlos usando comentarios normales (sin el segundo «*» en la primera "
++"línea). Si luego la función necesita hacerse pública, todo lo que se debe "
++"hacer es agregar otro «*» en el bloque de comentarios e insertar el nombre "
++"del símbolo en el lugar correcto dentro del archivo de secciones."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1239
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "Documentar secciones"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1241
++msgid ""
++"Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or "
++"module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short "
++"description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Cada sección del documento contiene información acerca de una clase o un "
++"módulo. Para introducir el componente puede escribir un bloque de sección. "
++"La descripción corta además se usa dentro de la tabla de contenidos. Todos "
++"los campos @ son opcionales."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1249
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "Bloque de comentarios en una sección"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1250
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1269
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr "SECCIÓN <nombre>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1271
++msgid ""
++"The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name given here "
++"should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"El nombre enlaza la sección de la documentación con la parte respectiva en "
++"el archivo <filename><paquete>-sections.txt</filename>. El nombre aquí "
++"proporcionado debería coincidir con la etiqueta <ARCHIVO> en el "
++"archivo <filename><paquete>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1280
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@short_description"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1282
++msgid ""
++"A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the "
++"links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr ""
++"Una línea descrita en la sección, que después aparece tras los enlaces en el "
++"TOC y en la página de la sección."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1289
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr "@title"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1291
++msgid ""
++"The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It "
++"can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr ""
++"De forma predeterminada el título de la sección es <name> de la "
++"declaración SECTION. Se puede sobrescribir con el campo @title."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1298
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr "@section_id"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1300
++msgid ""
++"Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <"
++"title> is used as a section_id and for other sections it is <"
++"MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++"Sobrescribe el uso del título como el identificador de sección. <"
++"title> se usa en GObjects como el identificador de sección (section_id) y "
++"para otra sección es <MÓDULO>-<title>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1308
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@see_also"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1310
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section."
++msgstr "Una lista de símbolos relacionados con esta sección."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1316
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1323
++msgid ""
++"Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third "
++"parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have "
++"confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after "
++"the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major "
++"release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be "
++"rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++"Estable: La intención de una interfaz estable es la de permitir que terceras "
++"partes arbitrarias desarrollen aplicaciones para esas interfaces, las "
++"liberen, y confíen que que se podrán ejecutar en todas las publicaciones "
++"menores del producto (después de que se introdujese la interfaz en una de "
++"ellas, y dentro de la misma versión principal de la publicación). Incluso en "
++"publicaciones importantes no se espera que existan cambios incompatibles, y "
++"de haberlos habrá buenas razones para ello."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1335
++msgid ""
++"Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are "
++"typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly "
++"changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a "
++"more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source "
++"or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++"Inestable: Las interfaces inestables son experimentales o de transición. "
++"Generalmente se usan para dar a los desarrolladores externos acceso a "
++"tecnología nueva o cambiante, o para proporcionar una solución a un "
++"problema, anticipándose a una solución más general. No se realizan "
++"reclamaciones acerca de la compatibilidad del código o del binario desde una "
++"publicación menor a la siguiente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1347
++msgid ""
++"Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but "
++"that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in "
++"specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++"Privada: Una interfaz que se puede usar en la pila de GNOME en si misma, "
++"pero que no está documentada para usuarios finales. Tales funciones sólo se "
++"deberían usar de formas especificadas y documentadas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1356
++msgid ""
++"Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require "
++"end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be "
++"Internal."
++msgstr ""
++"Interna: Una interfaz que es interna a un módulo y no requiere documentación "
++"para el usuario final. Se asume que las funciones que están sin documentar "
++"son internas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1318
++msgid ""
++"An informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend "
++"the use of one of these terms: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Esta API tiene una descripción informal del nivel de estabilidad. Se "
++"recomienda el uso de uno de estos términos: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1368
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1370
++msgid ""
++"The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a "
++"comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Los archivos <literal>#include</literal> para mostrar en la sección del "
++"resumen (una lista separada por comas), sobrescribiendo el valor global del "
++"<link linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">archivo de secciones</link> o de la "
++"línea de comandos. Este elemento es opcional."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1379
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr "@image"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1381
++msgid ""
++"The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This "
++"will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of "
++"a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"La imagen para mostrar en la parte superior de la página de referencia, para "
++"esta sección. Generalmente será un tipo de diagrama para ilustrar la "
++"apariencia visual de una clase o diagrama de su relación con otras clases. "
++"Este elemento es opcional."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1392
++msgid ""
++"To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs "
++"into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++"Para evitar recompilaciones innecesarias después de cambios en la "
++"documentación ponga los documentos de sección en el código fuente C cuando "
++"sea posible."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1401
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "Documentar símbolos"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1403
++msgid ""
++"Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is "
++"documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the "
++"definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus "
++"functions are usually documented in the c-source and macros, structs and "
++"enums in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++"Cada símbolo (función, macro, estructura, enum, señal y propiedad) está "
++"documentado en un bloque separado. La mejor posición para el bloque es junto "
++"a la definición del símbolo de tal forma que sea fácil mantenerlos "
++"sincronizados. Por ello las funciones generalmente se documentan en el "
++"código C y las macros, estructuras y enum en el archivo de cabecera."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1411 C/index.docbook:1477
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr "Etiquetas generales"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1413
++msgid ""
++"You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell "
++"when an API was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++"Puede añadir información de versiones a todos los elementos de la "
++"documentación para mostrar cuándo se introdujo una API o cuándo se declaró "
++"obsoleta."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1418
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr "Versionado de etiquetas"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1419
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "Desde:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1421
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr "Descripción desde qué versión del código está disponible la API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1426
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "Obsoleto:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1428
++msgid ""
++"Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The "
++"description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr ""
++"Párrafo que denota que esta función no se debería usar más. La descripción "
++"debería informar al lector de la nueva API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1436
++msgid ""
++"You can also add stability information to all documentation elements to "
++"indicate whether API stability is guaranteed for them for all future minor "
++"releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"También puede añadir información de estabilidad a todos los elementos de la "
++"documentación para indicar si la se garantiza la estabilidad de la API en "
++"todas las versiones menores futuras del proyecto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1442
++msgid ""
++"The default stability level for all documentation elements can be set by "
++"passing the <option>--default-stability</option> argument to "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> with one of the values below."
++msgstr ""
++"El nivel de estabilidad predeterminado para todos los elementos de la "
++"documentación se puede establecer pasando el argumento <option>--default-"
++"stability</option> a <application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> con uno de los "
++"siguientes valores."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1448
++msgid "Stability Tags"
++msgstr "Etiquetas de estabilidad"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1449
++msgid "Stability: Stable"
++msgstr "Estabilidad: estable"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1451
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as stable. This is for public APIs which are guaranteed to "
++"remain stable for all future minor releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Marcar el elemento como estable. Esto es para API públicas que está "
++"garantizado que serán estables para todas las versiones menores futuras del "
++"proyecto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1458
++msgid "Stability: Unstable"
++msgstr "Estabilidad: inestable"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1460
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as unstable. This is for public APIs which are released as "
++"a preview before being stabilised."
++msgstr ""
++"Marcar el elemento como inestable. Esto es para las API públicas que se "
++"publican como versión previa antes de estabilizarse."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1466
++msgid "Stability: Private"
++msgstr "Estabilidad: privado"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1468
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as private. This is for interfaces which can be used by "
++"tightly coupled modules, but not by arbitrary third parties."
++msgstr ""
++"Marcar el elemento como privado. Esto es para interfaces que se pueden usar "
++"en módulos fuertemente acoplados, pero no en terceras partes aleatorias."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1478
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1498 C/index.docbook:1508
++msgid "Annotations"
++msgstr "Anotaciones"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1500
++msgid ""
++"Documentation blocks can contain annotation-tags. These tags will be "
++"rendered with tooltips describing their meaning. The tags are used by "
++"gobject-introspection to generate language bindings. A detailed list of the "
++"supported tags can be found on <ulink url=\"http://live.gnome.org/"
++"GObjectIntrospection/Annotations\" type=\"http\">the wiki</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Los bloques de documentación pueden contener etiquetas de anotaciones. Estas "
++"etiquetas se renderizarán con consejos que describan su significado. Las "
++"etiquetas se usan en la introspección de GObject para generar vinculaciones "
++"del lenguaje. Puede obtener una lista detallada de las etiquetas soportadas "
++"en <ulink url=\"http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations\" "
++"type=\"http\">el wiki</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1509
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: (annotation): @foo's bar\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (annotation) (another annotation)\n"
++" * (and another annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation) (another annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Sets bar on @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: (annotation): @foo's bar\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (annotation) (another annotation)\n"
++" * (and another annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation) (another annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Sets bar on @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1530 C/index.docbook:1559
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "Bloque de comentario de función"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1536
++msgid ""
++"Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/"
++"unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++"El documento, dependiendo de si devuelve objetos, listas, cadenas, etc. "
++"debería liberarse/desreferenciarse/etc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1542
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr ""
++"El documento, dependiendo de si sus parámetros pueden ser nulos, y qué "
++"sucede si lo son."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1547
++msgid ""
++"Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr ""
++"Mencionar precondiciones y postcondiciones interesantes donde sea apropiado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1532 C/index.docbook:1618
++msgid "Please remember to: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "Recuerde: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1554
++msgid ""
++"Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are "
++"private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc asume que todos los símbolos (macros, funciones) que empiezan por "
++"«_» son privados. Se tratan como funciones estáticas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1560
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1581
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr "Etiquetas de funciones"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1582 C/index.docbook:1789
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "Devuelve:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1584
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr "Párrafo que describe el resultado devuelto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1589
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr "@...:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1591
++msgid ""
++"In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag "
++"(@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++"En el caso de que la función tenga argumentos variados debe usar esta "
++"etiqueta (@Vargargs: también funciona por razones históricas)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1601 C/index.docbook:1603
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "Bloque de comentario de propiedad"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1604
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1616 C/index.docbook:1635
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "Bloque de comentario de señal"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1622
++msgid ""
++"Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or "
++"after other signals."
++msgstr ""
++"Documentar cuando la señal se emite e indica si se emite antes o después de "
++"otras señales."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1628
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr "Documentar qué aplicación debe gestionar las señales."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1636
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZED] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarized\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZED] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarized\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1653 C/index.docbook:1654
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "Bloque de comentario de estructura"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1655
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1670
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> antes de campos de estructuras "
++"privadas que quiera ocultar. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> para "
++"revertir el comportamiento anterior."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1676
++msgid ""
++"If the first field is \"g_iface\", \"parent_instance\" or \"parent_class\" "
++"it will be considered private automatically and doesn't need to be mentioned "
++"in the comment block."
++msgstr ""
++"Si el primer campo es «g_iface», «parent_instance» o «parent_class» se "
++"considerará como privado automáticamente y no necesita mencionarse en el "
++"bloque de comentario."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1682
++msgid ""
++"Struct comment blocks can also be used for GObjects and GObjectClasses. It "
++"is usually a good idea to add a comment block for a class, if it has "
++"vmethods (as this is how they can be documented). For the GObject itself one "
++"can use the related section docs, having a separate block for the instance "
++"struct would be useful if the instance has public fields. One disadvantage "
++"here is that this creates two index entries of the same name (the structure "
++"and the section)."
++msgstr ""
++"También se pueden usar bloques de comentario para GObjects y GObjectClasses. "
++"Generalmente es buena idea añadir un bloque de comentario para una clase, si "
++"tiene «vmethods» (ya que así se pueden documentar). Para el GObject en si, "
++"se puede usar la sección relativa a la documentación, tener un bloque "
++"separado para la estructura de la instancia sería útil si la instancia tiene "
++"campos públicos. Una desventaja aquí es que esto crea dos entradas de índice "
++"con el mismo nombre (la estructura y la sección)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1694 C/index.docbook:1695
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr "Enumerar bloques de comentarios"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1696
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1713
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> antes de enumerar valores privados "
++"que quiera ocultar. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> para revertir el "
++"comportamiento anterior."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1724
++msgid "Inline program documentation"
++msgstr "Documentación en línea del programa"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1725
++msgid ""
++"You can document programs and their commandline interface using inline "
++"documentation."
++msgstr ""
++"Puede documentar programas y su interfaz de línea de comandos usando la "
++"documentación en línea."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1731
++msgid "Tags"
++msgstr "Etiquetas"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1733
++msgid "PROGRAM"
++msgstr "PROGRAM"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1736
++msgid "Defines the start of a program documentation."
++msgstr "Define el inicio de la documentación de un programa."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1743
++msgid "@short_description:"
++msgstr "@short_description:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1745
++msgid "Defines a short description of the program. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Define una descripción corta del programa. (Opcional)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1752
++msgid "@synopsis:"
++msgstr "@synopsis:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1754
++msgid ""
++"Defines the arguments, or list of arguments that the program can take. "
++"(Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++"Define el argumento o la lista de argumentos que el programa puede usar. "
++"(Opcional)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1762
++msgid "@see_also:"
++msgstr "@see_also:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1764
++msgid "See Also manual page section. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Página del manual Ver también. (Opcional)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1771
++msgid "@arg:"
++msgstr "@arg:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1773
++msgid "Argument(s) passed to the program and their description. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Argumentos pasados al programa y su descripción. (Opcional)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1780
++msgid "Description:"
++msgstr "Description:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1782
++msgid "A longer description of the program."
++msgstr "Una descripción más larga del programa."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1791
++msgid "Specify what value(s) the program returns. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Especifique qué valores devuelve el programa. (Opcional)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1800
++msgid "Example of program documentation."
++msgstr "Ejemplo de documentación de un programa."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1801
++msgid "Program documentation block"
++msgstr "Bloque de documentación del programa"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1802
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * PROGRAM:test-program\n"
++" * @short_description: A test program\n"
++" * @synopsis: test-program [*OPTIONS*...] --arg1 *arg* *FILE*\n"
++" * @see_also: test(1)\n"
++" * @--arg1 *arg*: set arg1 to *arg*\n"
++" * @--arg2 *arg*: set arg2 to *arg*\n"
++" * @-v, --version: Print the version number\n"
++" * @-h, --help: Print the help message\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Long description of program.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: Zero on success, non-zero on failure\n"
++" */\n"
++"int main(int argc, char *argv[])\n"
++"{\n"
++"\treturn 0;\n"
++"}\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * PROGRAM:test-program\n"
++" * @short_description: A test program\n"
++" * @synopsis: test-program [*OPTIONS*...] --arg1 *arg* *FILE*\n"
++" * @see_also: test(1)\n"
++" * @--arg1 *arg*: set arg1 to *arg*\n"
++" * @--arg2 *arg*: set arg2 to *arg*\n"
++" * @-v, --version: Print the version number\n"
++" * @-h, --help: Print the help message\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Long description of program.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: Zero on success, non-zero on failure\n"
++" */\n"
++"int main(int argc, char *argv[])\n"
++"{\n"
++"\treturn 0;\n"
++"}\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1828
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr "Etiquetas DocBook útiles"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1830
++msgid ""
++"Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr ""
++"Aquí están varias etiquetas de DocBook muy útiles al documentar código."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1839
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1835
++msgid ""
++"To link to another section in the GTK docs: <_:informalexample-1/> The "
++"linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. "
++"For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and "
++"then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class "
++"name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++"Para enlazar otra sección en GTK docs: <_:informalexample-1/>. El enlace es "
++"el id SGML en el elemento superior de la página a la que quiere enlazar. "
++"Para la mayoría de las páginas esta es la parte («gtk», «gdk», «glib») y "
++"después el título de página («Tablas hash»). Para los widgets es simplemente "
++"el nombre de la clase. Los espacios y guiones bajos se convierten a «-» para "
++"ajustarse a SGML/XML."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1852
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1849
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Para referirse a una función externa, ej. una función de C estándar: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1861
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1872
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1884
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"|[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" ...\n"
++"]|\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"|[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" ...\n"
++"]|\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1858
++msgid ""
++"To include example code: <_:informalexample-1/> or possibly this, for very "
++"short code fragments which don't need a title: <_:informalexample-2/> In "
++"both cases, the language attribute is optional and is used as a hint to the "
++"syntax highlighting engine (pygments for html output). For the latter GTK-"
++"Doc also supports an abbreviation: <_:informalexample-3/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Para incluir código de ejemplo: <_:informalexample-1/> o posiblemente esto, "
++"para fragmentos de código muy cortos que no necesitan un título: <_:"
++"informalexample-2/> En ambos casos, el atributo de lenguaje es opcional y se "
++"utiliza como una pista para el motor de resaltado de sintaxis (pygments para "
++"salida html). Para este último, GTK-Doc también admite una abreviatura: <_:"
++"informalexample-3/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1895
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1892
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para incluir listas de topos: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1915
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1912
++msgid ""
++"To include a note which stands out from the text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para incluir una nota que sobresale del texto: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1928
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1925
++msgid "To refer to a type: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para referirse a un tipo: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1937
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1934
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Para referirse a una estructura externa (no una descrita en la documentación "
++"de GTK): <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1946
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1943
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para referirse a un campo o a una estructura: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1955
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1952
++msgid ""
++"To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <_:informalexample-1/> but "
++"you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link "
++"to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the "
++"abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Para referirse a un nombre de clase, se podría usar: <_:informalexample-1/> "
++"pero probablemente estará usando #GtkWidget en su lugar (para crear "
++"automáticamente un enlace a la página GtkWidget; consulte <link linkend="
++"\"documenting_syntax\">abreviaciones</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1966
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1963
++msgid "To emphasize text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para enfatizar un texto: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1975
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1972
++msgid "For filenames use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para uso de nombres de archivo: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1984
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1981
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para referirse a claves: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1994
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr "Rellenar campos adicionales"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1996
++msgid ""
++"There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the "
++"inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past .sgml), "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Existen tres archivos adicionales que deben mantenerse junto con los "
++"comentarios en línea del código fuente: <filename><paquete>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><paquete>-docs.xml</filename> (.sgml en el "
++"pasado) y <filename><paquete>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2005
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr "Editar los tipos de archivo"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2007
++msgid ""
++"If your library or application includes GObjects, you want their signals, "
++"arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the "
++"documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</"
++"function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Si su biblioteca o aplicación incluye GObjects puede querer que sus señales, "
++"argumentos y/o parámetros y posición en la jerarquía se muestre en la "
++"documentación. Todo lo que debe hacer es listar las funciones "
++"<function>xxx_get_type</function> junto con sus «include» en el archivo "
++"<filename><paquete>.types</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2016
++msgid "Example <package>.types file"
++msgstr "Ejemplo de archivo <paquete>.tipos"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2017
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2028
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this "
++"list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not "
++"dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++"Desde GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> puede genera esta "
++"lista. Simplemente añada «--rebuild-types» a SCAN_OPTIONS en el "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Si usa esto no debería ejecutar dist sobre "
++"los tipos de archivo ni tenerlos bajo el control de versiones."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2037
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr "Editar la sección maestra del documento"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2039
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the "
++"inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page "
++"per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them "
++"and place them in an order."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc produce documentación en DocBook SGML/XML. Cuando se procesan los "
++"comentarios en las líneas del código, las herramientas de GTK-Doc generan "
++"una página de documentación por clase o módulo en un archivo aparte. El "
++"documento maestro las incluye y ordena."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2046
++msgid ""
++"While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later runs will "
++"not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the "
++"documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc "
++"has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from "
++"scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there "
++"are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++"Puesto que GTK-Doc crea una documento maestro de plantilla, una posterior "
++"ejecución no lo modificará de nuevo. Esto significa que se puede estructurar "
++"libremente la documentación. Esto incluye agrupar páginas y añadir páginas "
++"adicionales. Ahora GTK-Doc tiene un entorno de pruebas, donde también el "
++"documento maestro se vuelve a crear desde cero. Es una buena idea mirarlo de "
++"vez en cuando para ver si se han introducido algunas mejoras."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2056
++msgid ""
++"Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The "
++"benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API "
++"documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol "
++"documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along "
++"with the library."
++msgstr ""
++"No crear tutoriales como documentos adicionales. Solamente escriba capítulos "
++"adicionales. La ventaja de integrar directamente el tutorial para su "
++"biblioteca en la documentación de la API es que es fácil para el tutorial "
++"enlazar la documentación de símbolos. Además las posibilidades de actualizar "
++"el tutorial junto con la biblioteca son mayores."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2065
++msgid ""
++"So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is "
++"only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there "
++"which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++"¿Así que qué es lo que hay que cambiar en el documento maestro? Para empezar "
++"es muy poco. Existen algunos «placeholders» (texto entre corchetes) de los "
++"que habría que encargarse."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2072
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr "Cabecera del documento maestro"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2073
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2089
++msgid ""
++"In addition a few option elements are created in commented form. You can "
++"review these and enable them as you like."
++msgstr ""
++"Se crean además unos pocos elementos de opciones de la manera comentada. "
++"Puede revisarlos y activarlos como quiera."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2095
++msgid "Optional part in the master document"
++msgstr "Parte opcional en el documento maestro"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2096
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- enable this when you use gobject introspection annotations\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" -->\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- active esto cuando use anotaciones de introspección de gobject\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" --> \n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2104
++msgid ""
++"Finally you need to add new section whenever you introduce one. The <link "
++"linkend=\"modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</link> tool will remind "
++"you of newly generated xml files that are not yet included into the doc."
++msgstr ""
++"Por último, necesita añadir una sección nueva siempre que quiera introducir "
++"una. La herramienta <link linkend=\"modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</"
++"link> le recordará los nuevos archivos xml generados que no estén inclídos "
++"todavía en la documentación."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2112 C/index.docbook:2147
++msgid "Including generated sections"
++msgstr "Incluir secciones generadas"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2113
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>my library</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>mi biblioteca</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2125
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr "Editar el archivo de sección"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2127
++msgid ""
++"The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. "
++"Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control "
++"the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++"El archivo de sección se usa para organizar la salida de la documentación "
++"por GTK-Doc. Aquí se especifica qué símbolos pertenecen a qué módulo o clase "
++"y el control de la visibilidad (pública o privada)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2133
++msgid ""
++"The section file is a plain text file with tags delimiting sections. Blank "
++"lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines."
++msgstr ""
++"El archivo de sección es un archivo de texto plano con etiquetas que "
++"delimitan las secciones. Se ignoran las líneas vacías y las líneas que "
++"comiencen con «#» se tratan como comentarios."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2140
++msgid ""
++"While the tags make the file look like xml, it is not. Please do not close "
++"tags like <SUBSECTION>."
++msgstr ""
++"Aunque las etiquetas hacen que el archivo parezca XML, no lo es. No incluya "
++"etiquetas del tipo <SUBSECTION>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2148
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2165
++msgid ""
++"The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, "
++"without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++"FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++"template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++"converted into the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename> or the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. "
++"(The name of the HTML file is based on the module name and the section "
++"title, or for GObjects it is based on the GObjects class name converted to "
++"lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++"La etiqueta <FILE> ... </FILE> se usa para especificar el nombre "
++"del archivo, sin sufijo. Por ejemplo, usar «<FILE>gnome-config</"
++"FILE>» dará como resultado en la sección de declaraciones la salida "
++"<filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename> en el archivo de plantilla, que "
++"se convertirá al archivo DocBook XML <filename>sgml/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename> o al archivo DocBook XML <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</"
++"filename>. (El nombre del archivo HTML está basado en el nombre del módulo y "
++"en el título de la sección, o para GObjects está basado en el nombre de "
++"clase de GObject convertido a minúscula.)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2177
++msgid ""
++"The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the "
++"section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially "
++"created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if "
++"one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++"La etiqueta <TITLE> ... </TITLE> se usa para especificar el "
++"título de una sección. Sólo es útil antes de que las plantillas (si se usan) "
++"se creen inicialmente, ya que el título configurado en la plantilla lo "
++"sobrescribe. Además, si una usa comentarios SECTION en los fuentes, se queda "
++"obsoleto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2184
++msgid ""
++"You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. "
++"Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis "
++"section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject "
++"declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the "
++"documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private "
++"declarations which will not be output (it is a handy way to avoid warning "
++"messages about unused declarations). If your library contains private types "
++"which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of "
++"implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection. "
++"Whether you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs in public or "
++"Standard section depends if they have public entries (variables, vmethods)."
++msgstr ""
++"Puede agrupar elementos en la sección usando la etiqueta <SUBSECTION>. "
++"Actualmente esto genera una línea en blanco entre subsecciones en la sección "
++"de resumen. También puede usar <SUBSECTION Standard> para "
++"declaraciones estándar de GObject (ej. funciones como g_object_get_type and "
++"macros como G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Actualmente éstas se han dejado "
++"fuera de la documentación. También puede usar <SUBSECTION Private> "
++"para declaraciones privadas que no producirán ninguna salida (s una manera "
++"práctica de evitar mensajes de advertencia sobre declaraciones sin usar). Si "
++"sus bibliotecas contienen tipos privados que no quiere que aparezcan en la "
++"jerarquía de objetos o en la lista de interfaces implementados o necesarios, "
++"añádalos a una subsección Privada. Si ubica GObject y GObjectClass como "
++"estructuras en la sección pública o estándar, depende de si tienen entradas "
++"públicas (variables, vmethods)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2203
++msgid ""
++"You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the "
++"#include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-"
++"separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it "
++"outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. "
++"If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++"También puede usar <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> para especificar qué "
++"archivos #include se muestran en la sección de resumen. Contiene una lista "
++"de archivos #include separados por comas, sin las almohadillas. Si lo "
++"configura fuera de cualquier sección, actúa para todas las secciones hasta "
++"el final del archivo. Si lo configura dentro de una sección, sólo se aplica "
++"a esa sección."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2217
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr "Controlar el resultado"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2219
++msgid ""
++"A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The "
++"generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and "
++"<filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text "
++"files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++"Una ejecución de GTK-Doc genera archivos de informe dentro de la carpeta de "
++"la documentación. Los archivos generados se llaman <filename><paquete>-"
++"undocumented.txt</filename>, <filename><paquete>-undeclared.txt</"
++"filename> y <filename><paquete>-unused.txt</filename>.Todos son "
++"archivos de texto plano y se pueden ver y posprocesar fácilmente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2228
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with "
++"the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank "
++"lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The "
++"second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, "
++"which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++"El archivo <filename><paquete>-undocumented.txt</filename> comienza "
++"con el resumen de cobertura de la documentación. Debajo hay dos secciones "
++"divididas por líneas vacías. La primera sección lista los símbolos "
++"incompletos o indocumentados. La segunda sección hace lo mismo para los "
++"documentos de sección. Las entradas incompletas son aquellas que tienen "
++"documentación pero dónde; p.e. se ha añadido un parámetro nuevo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2237
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols "
++"given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found "
++"in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++"El archivo <filename><paquete>-undeclared.txt</filename> lista "
++"símbolos proporcionados en el archivo <filename><paquete>-sections."
++"txt</filename>, pero no encontrados en los fuentes. Compruebe si se han "
++"eliminado o no se han escrito correctamente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2244
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, "
++"where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where "
++"to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"El archivo <filename><paquete>-unused.txt</filename> lista nombres de "
++"símbolos, donde el analizador de GTK-Doc ha encontrado documentación, pero "
++"no sabe dónde ponerla. Esto significa que el símbolo no se ha añadido "
++"todavía al archivo <filename><paquete>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2252
++msgid ""
++"Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile."
++"am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during "
++"<command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++"Activar o añadir la línea <option>TESTS=($GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> en Makefile."
++"am. Si como mínimo está instalado GTK-Doc 1.9, esto ejecutará comprobaciones "
++"de integridad durante la ejecución de make check."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2259
++msgid ""
++"One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: "
++"<filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><"
++"package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first one can be compared with the "
++"section file if that is manually maintained. The second lists all "
++"declarations from the headers. If a symbol is missing one could check if "
++"this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++"También puede mirar los archivos producidos por el analizador del código "
++"fuente: <filename><paquete>-decl-list.txt</filename> y <filename><"
++"paquete>-decl.txt</filename>. El primero se puede comparar con el archivo "
++"de sección si se mantiene manualmente. El segundo lista todas las "
++"declaraciones desde las cabeceras. Si falta un símbolo, se puede comprobar "
++"si este archivo lo contiene."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2268
++msgid ""
++"If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced "
++"by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>."
++"prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</"
++"filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask GTK-Doc "
++"to keep the intermediate scanner file for further analysis, by running it as "
++"<command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++"Si el proyecto está basado en GObject, también se puede mirar en los "
++"archivos producidos por el analizador de objetos: <filename><paquete>."
++"args.txt</filename>, <filename><paquete>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename><paquete>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"paquete>.prerequisites.txt</filename> y <filename><paquete>.signals."
++"txt</filename>. Si faltan símbolos en cualquiera de ellos, puede hacer que "
++"GTK-Doc guarde el análisis de archivos para futuros análisis, pero "
++"ejecutándolo como <command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2283
++msgid "Modernizing the documentation"
++msgstr "Modernizar la documentación"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2285
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc has been around for quite some time. In this section we list new "
++"features together with the version since when it is available."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc ha existido durante mucho tiempo. En esta sección se listan las "
++"características nuevas junto con la versión desde la que están disponibles."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2291
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2293
++msgid ""
++"When using xml instead of sgml, one can actually name the master document "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Al usar XML en lugar de SGML, actualmente se puede nombrar el documento "
++"maestro <filename><paquete>-docs.xml</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2298
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from "
++"the vcs. This only works nicely for projects that have a very regular "
++"structure (e.g. each .{c,h} pair will create new section). If one organize a "
++"project close to that updating a manually maintained section file can be as "
++"simple as running <code>meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-"
++"sections.txt</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Esta versión soporta <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> en "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Cuando está activada, el archivo "
++"<filename><paquete>-sections.txt</filename> se genera automáticamente "
++"y se puede quitar del control de versiones. Esto sólo funciona en proyectos "
++"que tienen una estructura regular (ej. cada pareja .{c,h} creará una sección "
++"nueva). Si se organiza un proyecto parecido a esto, actualizar una sección "
++"mantenida manualmente puede ser tan sencillo como ejecutar <code>meld <"
++"paquete>-decl-list.txt <paquete>-sections.txt</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2309
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.8 already introduced the syntax for documenting sections in the "
++"sources instead of the separate files under <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">tmpl</filename>. This version adds options to switch the whole doc module "
++"to not use the extra tmpl build step at all, by using <option>--flavour no-"
++"tmpl</option> in <filename>configure.ac</filename>. If you don't have a "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> checked into your source "
++"control system and haven't yet switched, just add the flag to "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> and you are done."
++msgstr ""
++"La versión 1.18 ya introdujo la sintaxis para documentar secciones en las "
++"fuentes en lugar de tener que hacerlo en archivos separados bajo <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename>. Esta versión añade opciones para "
++"cambiar todo el módulo «doc» del documento para que no realice el paso de "
++"construcción de tmpl adicional, usando <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> en "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. Si no tiene una <filename class="
++"\"directory\">tmpl</filename> marcada en su sistema de control de versiones "
++"y todavía no ha cambiado, simplemente añada la opción al archivo "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> y lo tendrá hecho."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2321
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2323
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from the "
++"vcs. When using this feature it is important to also setup the "
++"<varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> in <filename>Makefile.am</filename> for "
++"code that is build conditionally."
++msgstr ""
++"Esta versión soporta <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> en "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Cuando está activado, el archivo "
++"<filename><package>.types</filename> se genera automáticamente y se "
++"puede eliminar del control de versiones. Al usar esta característica es "
++"importante configurar la variable <varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> en el "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename> para el código que se construye de manera "
++"condicional."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2334
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2340
++msgid "Enable gtkdoc-check"
++msgstr "Activar gtkdoc-check"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2341
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2336
++msgid ""
++"This version includes a new tool called gtkdoc-check. This tool can run a "
++"set of sanity checks on your documentation. It is enabled by adding these "
++"lines to the end of <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Esta versión incluye una herramienta nueva llamada gtkdoc-check. Esta "
++"herramienta puede ejecutar una serie de comprobaciones de integridad de la "
++"documentación. Se activa añadiendo las siguientes líneas al final del "
++"archivo <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2354
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2356
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.18 brought some initial markdown support. Using markdown in doc "
++"comments is less intrusive than writing docbook xml. This version improves a "
++"lot on this and add a lot more styles. The section that explains the <link "
++"linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">comment syntax</link> has all the details."
++msgstr ""
++"La versión 1.18 incluía soporte para cierto marcado inicial. Usar el marcado "
++"en los comentarios del documento es menos intrusivo que escribir el XML del "
++"«docbook». Esta versión mejora mucho esto y añade muchos más estilos. La "
++"sección que explica la <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">sintaxis de los "
++"comentarios</link> contiene todos los detalles."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2366
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2377
++msgid "Use pre-generated entities"
++msgstr "Usar entidades generadas previamenet"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2378
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for &package_string;.\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for &package_string;.\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2368
++msgid ""
++"The makefiles shipped with this version generate an entity file at "
++"<filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename>, containing entities for e.g. "
++"package_name and package_version. You can use this e.g. in the main xml file "
++"to avoid hardcoding the version number. Below is an example that shows how "
++"the entity file is included in the master template and how the entities are "
++"used. The entities can also be used in all generated files, GTK-Doc will use "
++"the same xml header in generated xml files. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Los makefiles distribuidos con esta versión generan un archivo de entidad en "
++"<filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename>, que contiene entidades para, "
++"por ejemplo, nombre_paquete y versión_paquete. Puedes usar esto, por "
++"ejemplo, en el archivo xml principal para evitar codificar el número de "
++"versión. A continuación se muestra un ejemplo que muestra cómo se incluye el "
++"archivo de entidad en la plantilla maestra y cómo se utilizan las entidades. "
++"Las entidades también se pueden usar en todos los archivos generados, GTK-"
++"Doc usará el mismo encabezado xml en los archivos xml generados. <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2403
++msgid "Documenting other interfaces"
++msgstr "Documentar otras interfaces"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2405
++msgid ""
++"So far we have been using GTK-Doc to document the API of code. The next "
++"sections contain suggestions how the tools can be used to document other "
++"interfaces too."
++msgstr ""
++"Hasta ahora se ha usado GTK-Doc para documentar la API del código. Las "
++"siguientes secciones contienen sugerencias acerca de cómo se pueden usar las "
++"herramientas para documentar otras interfaces."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2412
++msgid "Command line options and man pages"
++msgstr "Opciones de la línea de comandos y páginas man"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2414
++msgid ""
++"As one can generate man pages for a docbook refentry as well, it sounds like "
++"a good idea to use it for that purpose. This way the interface is part of "
++"the reference and one gets the man-page for free."
++msgstr ""
++"Ya que también se pueden generar páginas man para referencias de entrada "
++"docbook, parece buena idea usarlas para ese propósito. De esta forma la "
++"interfaz es parte de la referencia y se obtienen las páginas man sin trabajo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2421
++msgid "Document the tool"
++msgstr "Documentar la herramienta"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2423
++msgid ""
++"Create one refentry file per tool. Following <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">our example</link> we would call it <filename>meep/"
++"docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. For the xml tags that should be "
++"used and can look at generated file in the xml subdirectory as well as "
++"examples e.g. in glib."
++msgstr ""
++"Cree un archivo de entrada de referencia para cada herramienta. Siguiendo "
++"<link linkend=\"settingup_docfiles\">el ejemplo</link> se llamará "
++"<filename>meep/docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. Para las etiquetas "
++"xml que se deben usar puede mirar al archivo generado en la subcarpeta xml "
++"así como los ejemplos en, por ejemplo, glib."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2433
++msgid "Adding the extra configure check"
++msgstr "Añadir la comprobación de configuración adicional"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2436 C/index.docbook:2454
++msgid "Extra configure checks"
++msgstr "Comprobaciones de configuración adicionales"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2437
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2451
++msgid "Adding the extra makefile rules"
++msgstr "Añadir reglas de makefile adicionales"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2455
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2477
++msgid "DBus interfaces"
++msgstr "Interfaces de DBus"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2479
++msgid ""
++"(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++msgstr ""
++"(ARREGLAR: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2488
++msgid "Frequently asked questions"
++msgstr "Preguntas más frecuentes"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2492
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "Pregunta"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2493
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "Respuesta"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2495
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Sin jerarquía de clases."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2496
++msgid ""
++"The objects <function>xxx_get_type()</function> function has not been "
++"entered into the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Los objetos de la función <function>xxx_get_type()</function> no se han "
++"introducido en el archivo <filename><package>.types</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2502
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Aún sin jerarquía de clases."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2503
++msgid ""
++"Missing or wrong naming in <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> "
++"file (see <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-doc-list/2003-"
++"October/msg00006.html\">explanation</ulink>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Nombre incorrecto o ausente en el archivo <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> (consulte la <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-"
++"doc-list/2003-October/msg00006.html\">explicación</ulink>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2509
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Maldición, aún no hay una jerarquía de clases."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2510
++msgid ""
++"Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <type>GtkWidget</"
++"type>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private "
++"subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++"Es el nombre del objeto (nombre de la estructura de la instancia, ej. "
++"<type>GtkWidget</type>) parte de la sección normal (no ponga esto en "
++"Estándar o Privado)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2517
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr "Sin índice de símbolos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2518
++msgid ""
++"Does the <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contain a "
++"index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++"¿<filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contiene un índice que "
++"«xi:includes» el índice generado?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2524
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr "Los símbolos no se enlazan con su sección en el documento."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2525
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the "
++"gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++"¿Está doc-comment usando el marcado correcto (añadido #,% o ())? Compruebe "
++"si gtk-doc-fixxref avisa de alguna referencia xref sin resolver."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2531
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "Una clase nueva no aparece en la documentación."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2532
++msgid ""
++"Is the new page xi:included from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Es la página nueva «xi:included» desde <filename><package>-docs.{xml,"
++"sgml}</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2538
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "Un símbolo nuevo no aparece en la documentación."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2539
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the "
++"begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable "
++"xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++"Comprobar que el doc-comment está formateado correctamente. Compruebe "
++"errores de escritura al principio del comentario. Compruebe si gtkdoc-"
++"fixxref avisa acerca de referencias xref no solventables. Compruebe si el "
++"símbolo está listado correctamente en <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> en una subsección pública."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2547
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Falta un tipo en la clase de jerarquías"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2548
++msgid ""
++"If the type is listed in <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> but "
++"not in <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> then double check that the "
++"type is correctly placed in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>. If the type instance (e.g. <type>GtkWidget</type>) is not listed "
++"or incidentally marked private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++"Si el tipo está listado en <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> "
++"pero no en <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename>, entonces compruebe dos "
++"veces que el tipo está correctamente ubicado en la <filename><package>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>. No se mostrará el tipo de instancia (ej. "
++"<type>GtkWidget</type>) si no está listada o accidentalmente marcada como "
++"privada."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2557
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr ""
++"Obtengo enlaces de seguimiento de documentos para todas las anotaciones "
++"gobject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2558
++msgid ""
++"Check that <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> is xi:included "
++"from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Compruebe que <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> está «xi:"
++"included» desde <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2566
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr ""
++"Parámetro descrito en el bloque de comentarios del código fuente pero no "
++"existe"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2567
++msgid ""
++"Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the "
++"source."
++msgstr ""
++"Compruebe si el prototipo en la cabecera tiene nombres de parámetro "
++"diferentes de la fuente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2572
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr "múltiples «ID» para la restricción enlazada: XYZ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2573
++msgid ""
++"Symbol XYZ appears twice in <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"El símbolo XYZ aparece dos veces en el archivo <filename><package>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2576
++msgid ""
++"Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template "
++"matches."
++msgstr ""
++"Elemento typename en namespace «» encontrado en para, pero ninguna plantilla "
++"coincide."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2583
++msgid "Tools related to gtk-doc"
++msgstr "Herramientas relacionadas con GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2585
++msgid ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - a <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac "
++"GTK-Doc</ulink> integration plugin, that adds API docs to a trac site and "
++"integrates with the trac search."
++msgstr ""
++"GtkDocPlugin: un complemento de integración <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks."
++"org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac GTK-Doc</ulink> que añade documentos de la API "
++"a un sitio «trac» y se integra con la búsqueda de «trac»."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2590
++msgid ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - a tool (part of gtk-doc) to check used API against since "
++"tags in the API to determine the minimum required version."
++msgstr ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan: una herramienta (parte de gtk-doc) para comprobar la API "
++"usada contra etiquetas en la API para determinar la versión mínima necesaria."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/releaseinfo
++#: C/index.docbook:12 C/fdl-appendix.xml:12
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr "Versión 1.1, marzo de 2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:15
++msgid "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/index.docbook:20
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:19 C/fdl-appendix.xml:19
++msgid ""
++"<_:address-1/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies "
++"of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr ""
++"<_:address-1/>. Se permite la copia y distribución de copias literales de "
++"este documento, pero no se permite su modificación."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendix/title
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/index.docbook:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:642
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr "Licencia de documentación libre de GNU"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:31 C/fdl-appendix.xml:31
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr "0. PREÁMBULO"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"El propósito de esta Licencia es permitir que un manual, libro de texto, u "
++"otro documento escrito sea <quote>libre</quote> en el sentido de libertad: "
++"asegurar a todo el mundo la libertad efectiva de copiarlo y redistribuirlo, "
++"con o sin modificaciones, de manera comercial o no. En segundo término, esta "
++"Licencia proporciona al autor y al editor una manera de obtener "
++"reconocimiento por su trabajo, sin que se le considere responsable de las "
++"modificaciones realizadas por otros."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that "
++"derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. "
++"It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license "
++"designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++"Esta Licencia es de tipo <quote>copyleft</quote>, lo que significa que los "
++"trabajos derivados del documento deben a su vez ser libres en el mismo "
++"sentido. Complementa la Licencia Pública General de GNU, que es una licencia "
++"tipo copyleft diseñada para el software libre."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:50 C/fdl-appendix.xml:50
++msgid ""
++"We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free "
++"software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program "
++"should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. "
++"But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any "
++"textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a "
++"printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose "
++"is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++"Hemos diseñado esta Licencia para usarla en manuales de software libre, ya "
++"que el software libre necesita documentación libre: Un programa libre debe "
++"venir con los manuales que ofrezcan la mismas libertades que da el software. "
++"Pero esta licencia no se limita a manuales de software; puede ser usada para "
++"cualquier trabajo textual, sin tener en cuenta su temática o si se publica "
++"como libro impreso. Recomendamos esta licencia principalmente para trabajos "
++"cuyo fin sea instructivo o de referencia."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:62 C/fdl-appendix.xml:62
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr "1. APLICABILIDAD Y DEFINICIONES"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such "
++"manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "
++"<quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Esta Licencia se aplica a cualquier manual u otro trabajo que contenga un "
++"aviso colocado por el poseedor del copyright diciendo que puede distribuirse "
++"bajo los términos de esta Licencia. El <quote>Documento</quote>, abajo, se "
++"refiere a cualquier manual o trabajo. Cualquier miembro del público es un "
++"licenciatario, y será referido como <quote>Usted</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:72
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing "
++"the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with "
++"modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"Una <quote>Versión Modificada</quote> del Documento significa cualquier "
++"trabajo que contenga el Documento o una porción del mismo, ya sea una copia "
++"literal o con modificaciones y/o traducciones a otro idioma."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:79
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter "
++"section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals "
++"exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the "
++"Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and "
++"contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For "
++"example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary "
++"Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter "
++"of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of "
++"legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding "
++"them."
++msgstr ""
++"Una <quote>Sección Secundaria</quote> es un apéndice con título o una "
++"sección preliminar del Documento que trata exclusivamente de la relación "
++"entre los autores o editores y el tema general del<link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Documento</link> que trata exclusivamente con la relación entre "
++"los editores o autores del Documento con el asunto general del Documento (o "
++"asuntos relacionados) y no contiene nada que pueda considerarse dentro del "
++"tema principal. (Por ejemplo, si el Documento es en parte un libro de texto "
++"de matemáticas, una Sección Secundaria no explicará nada de matemáticas.) La "
++"relación puede ser una conexión histórica con el asunto o temas "
++"relacionados, o una opinión legal, comercial, filosófica, ética o política "
++"acerca de ellos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:94
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being "
++"those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Las <quote>Secciones Invariantes</quote> son ciertas <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secciones Secundarias</link> cuyos títulos son designados como "
++"Secciones Invariantes en la nota que indica que el <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Documento</link> se publica bajo esta Licencia."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:103
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are "
++"listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says "
++"that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under "
++"this License."
++msgstr ""
++" Los <quote>Textos de Cubierta</quote> son ciertos pasajes cortos de texto "
++"que se listan como Textos de Cubierta Delantera o Textos de Cubierta Trasera "
++"en la nota que indica que el <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> "
++"se publica bajo esta Licencia."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:111
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> "
++"Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose "
++"specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be "
++"viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors "
++"or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) "
++"some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text "
++"formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for "
++"input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file "
++"format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent "
++"modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "
++"<quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Una copia <quote>Transparente</quote> del <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Documento</link>, significa una copia para lectura en máquina, "
++"representada en un formato cuya especificación está disponible al público en "
++"general, cuyo contenido puede ser visto y editados directamente con editores "
++"de texto genéricos o (para imágenes compuestas por píxeles) con programas "
++"genéricos de manipulación de imágenes o (para dibujos) con algún editor de "
++"dibujos ampliamente disponible, y que sea adecuado como entrada para "
++"formateadores de texto o para su traducción automática a formatos adecuados "
++"para formateadores de texto. Una copia hecha en un formato definido como "
++"Transparente, pero cuyo marcaje o ausencia de él haya sido diseñado para "
++"impedir o dificultar modificaciones posteriores por parte de los lectores no "
++"es Transparente. Una copia que no es <quote>Transparente</quote> se denomina "
++"<quote>Opaca</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:128 C/fdl-appendix.xml:128
++msgid ""
++"Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII "
++"without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using "
++"a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for "
++"human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary "
++"formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, "
++"SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally "
++"available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors "
++"for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++"Como ejemplos de formatos adecuados para copias Transparentes están ASCII "
++"puro sin marcaje, formato de entrada de Texinfo, formato de entrada de "
++"LaTeX, SGML o XML usando una DTD disponible públicamente, y HTML, PostScript "
++"o PDF simples, que sigan los estándares y diseños para que los modifiquen "
++"personas.Los formatos Opacos incluyen formatos propietarios que pueden ser "
++"leídos y editados únicamente en procesadores de textos propietarios, SGML o "
++"XML para los cuáles las DTD y/o herramientas de procesamiento no estén "
++"ampliamente disponibles, y HTML, PostScript o PDF generados por algunos "
++"procesadores de textos sólo como salida."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:141
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page "
++"itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the "
++"material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in "
++"formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> "
++"means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, "
++"preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++" La <quote>Portada</quote> significa, en un libro impreso, la página de "
++"título, más las páginas siguientes que sean necesarias para mantener "
++"legiblemente el material que esta Licencia requiere en la portada. Para "
++"trabajos en formatos que no tienen página de portada como tal, "
++"<quote>Portada</quote>significa el texto cercano a la aparición más "
++"prominente del título del trabajo,precediendo el comienzo del cuerpo del "
++"texto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:153 C/fdl-appendix.xml:153
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr "2. COPIA LITERAL"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that "
++"this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this "
++"License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you "
++"add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use "
++"technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of "
++"the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in "
++"exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you "
++"must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Usted puede copiar y distribuir el <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</"
++"link> en cualquier soporte, sea en forma comercial o no, siempre y cuando "
++"proporcione esta Licencia, las notas de copyright y la nota que indica que "
++"esta Licencia se aplica al Documento reproduciéndola en todas las copias y "
++"que usted no añada ninguna otra condición a las expuestas en esta Licencia. "
++"Usted no puede usar medidas técnicas para obstruir o controlar la lectura o "
++"copia posterior de las copias que usted haga o distribuya. Sin embargo, "
++"usted puede aceptar compensación a cambio de las copias. Si distribuye un "
++"número suficientemente grande de copias también deberá seguir las "
++"condiciones de la <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">sección 3</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:169 C/fdl-appendix.xml:169
++msgid ""
++"You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you "
++"may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++"Usted también puede prestar copias, bajo las mismas condiciones establecidas "
++"anteriormente, y puede exhibir copias públicamente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:176 C/fdl-appendix.xml:176
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr "3. COPIAR EN CANTIDAD"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license "
++"notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you "
++"must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these "
++"Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on "
++"the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as "
++"the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title "
++"with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as "
++"verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++" Si publica copias impresas del <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</"
++"link> que sobrepasen las 100, y la nota de licencia del Documento exige "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textos de Cubierta</link>, debe incluirlas "
++"copias con cubiertas que lleven en forma clara y legible todos esos Textos "
++"de Cubierta: Textos de Cubierta Delantera en la cubierta delantera y Textos "
++"de Cubierta Trasera en la cubierta trasera. Ambas cubiertas deben "
++"identificarlo a Usted clara y legiblemente como editor de tales copias. La "
++"cubierta debe mostrar el título completo con todas las palabras igualmente "
++"prominentes y visibles. Además puede añadir otro material en las cubiertas. "
++"Las copias con cambios limitados a las cubiertas, siempre que conserven el "
++"título del <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> y satisfagan "
++"estas condiciones, pueden considerarse como copias literales en todos los "
++"aspectos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:195 C/fdl-appendix.xml:195
++msgid ""
++"If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, "
++"you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the "
++"actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++" Si los textos requeridos para la cubierta son muy voluminosos para que "
++"ajusten legiblemente, debe colocar los primeros (tantos como sea razonable "
++"colocar) en la verdadera cubierta y situar el resto en páginas adyacentes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> "
++"copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more "
++"than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state "
++"in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location "
++"containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added "
++"material, which the general network-using public has access to download "
++"anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use "
++"the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin "
++"distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent "
++"copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one "
++"year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through "
++"your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"Si Usted publica o distribuye copias <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent"
++"\">Opacas</link> del <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> cuya "
++"cantidad exceda las 100, debe incluir una copia <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparente</link>, que pueda ser leída por una máquina, con "
++"cada copia Opaca, o bien mostrar, en cada copia Opaca, una dirección de red "
++"donde cualquier usuario de la misma tenga acceso por medio de protocolos "
++"públicos y estandarizados a una copia Transparente del Documento completa, "
++"sin material adicional. Si usted hace uso de la última opción, deberá tomar "
++"las medidas necesarias, cuando comience la distribución de las copias Opacas "
++"en cantidad, para asegurar que esta copia Transparente permanecerá accesible "
++"en el sitio establecido por lo menos un año después de la última vez que "
++"distribuya una copia Opaca de esa edición al público (directamente o a "
++"través de sus agentes o distribuidores)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any "
++"large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated "
++"version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"Se solicita, aunque no es requisito, que se ponga en contacto con los "
++"autores del <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> antes de "
++"redistribuir gran número de copias, para darles la oportunidad de que le "
++"proporcionen una versión actualizada del Documento."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:231 C/fdl-appendix.xml:231
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr "4. MODIFICACIONES"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under "
++"the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the "
++"Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version "
++"filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"Puede copiar y distribuir una <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versión "
++"Modificada</link> del <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> bajo "
++"las condiciones de las secciones <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> y "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> anteriores, siempre que Usted libere "
++"la Versión Modificada bajo esta misma Licencia, con la Versión Modificada "
++"haciendo el rol del Documento, por lo tanto dando Licencia de distribución y "
++"modificación de la Versión Modificada a quienquiera posea una copia de la "
++"misma. Además, debe hacer lo siguiente en la Versión Modificada:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:248 C/fdl-appendix.xml:248
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "A"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the "
++"covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which "
++"should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the "
++"Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original "
++"publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Usar en la <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Portada</link> (y en las "
++"cubiertas, si hay alguna) un título distinto al del <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Documento</link> y de sus versiones anteriores (que deberían, si "
++"hay alguna, estar listadas en la sección de Historia del Documento). Puede "
++"usar el mismo título de versiones anteriores al original siempre y cuando "
++"quien las publicó originalmente otorgue permiso."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:264 C/fdl-appendix.xml:264
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "B"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, "
++"one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the "
++"modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has "
++"less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"Listar en la <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Portada</link>, como autores, "
++"una o más personas o entidades responsables de la autoría de las "
++"modificaciones de la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versión Modificada</"
++"link>, junto con por lo menos cinco de los autores principales del <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> (todos sus autores principales, si "
++"hay menos de cinco), a menos que le eximan de tal requisito."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:279 C/fdl-appendix.xml:279
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "C"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of "
++"the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++"Mostrar en la <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Portada</link> como editor "
++"el nombre del editor de la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versión "
++"Modificada</link>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:291 C/fdl-appendix.xml:291
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "D"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:292
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Conservar todas las notas de copyright del <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Documento</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:301 C/fdl-appendix.xml:301
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "E"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:302 C/fdl-appendix.xml:302
++msgid ""
++"Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the "
++"other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++"Añadir una nota de copyright apropiada a sus modificaciones, adyacente a las "
++"otras notas de copyright."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:311 C/fdl-appendix.xml:311
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "F"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the "
++"Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Incluir, inmediatamente después de los avisos de copyright, una nota de "
++"licencia dando el permiso público para usar la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Versión Modificada</link> bajo los términos de esta Licencia, de la forma "
++"mostrada en el Adenda de más abajo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:324 C/fdl-appendix.xml:324
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "G"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Incluir, inmediatamente después de ese aviso de licencia, la lista completa "
++"de <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Secciones invariantes</link> y de los "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textos de Cubierta</link> que sean "
++"requeridos en el aviso de Licencia del <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Documento</link> original."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:337 C/fdl-appendix.xml:337
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "H"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:338 C/fdl-appendix.xml:338
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr "Incluir una copia sin modificación de esta Licencia."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:346 C/fdl-appendix.xml:346
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "I"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add "
++"to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> as given on "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no "
++"section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and "
++"publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Conservar la sección titulada <quote>Historia</quote>, conservar su Título y "
++"añadirle un elemento que declare al menos el título, el año, los nuevos "
++"autores y el editor de la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versión Modificada</"
++"link>, tal como figuran en la <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Portada</"
++"link>. Si no hay una sección titulada <quote>Historia</quote> en el <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link>, crear una estableciendo el "
++"título, el año, los autores y el editor del Documento, tal como figuran en "
++"su Portada, añadiendo además un elemento describiendo la Versión Modificada, "
++"como se estableció en la sentencia anterior."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:365 C/fdl-appendix.xml:365
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "J"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the "
++"network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based "
++"on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit "
++"a network location for a work that was published at least four years before "
++"the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers "
++"to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Conservar la dirección en red, si la hay, dada en el <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Documento</link> para el acceso público a una copia <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-transparent\">Transparente</link> del mismo, así como las otras "
++"direcciones de red dadas en el Documento para versiones anteriores en las "
++"que estuviese basado. Pueden ubicarse en la sección <quote>Historia</quote>. "
++"Se puede omitir la ubicación en red de un trabajo que haya sido publicado "
++"por lo menos cuatro años antes que el Documento mismo, o si el editor "
++"original de dicha versión da permiso."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:383 C/fdl-appendix.xml:383
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "K"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in "
++"the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor "
++"acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"En cualquier sección titulada <quote>Agradecimientos</quote> o "
++"<quote>Dedicatorias</quote>, conservar el título de la sección y conservar "
++"en ella toda la sustancia y el tono de los agradecimientos y/o dedicatorias "
++"incluidas por cada contribuyente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:396 C/fdl-appendix.xml:396
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "L"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their "
++"text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not "
++"considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Conservar todas las <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Secciones Invariantes</"
++"link> del <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link>, sin alterar su "
++"texto ni sus títulos. Los números de sección o equivalentes no se consideran "
++"parte de los títulos de la sección."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:409 C/fdl-appendix.xml:409
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "M"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may "
++"not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Eliminar cualquier sección titulada <quote>Aprobaciones</quote>. Tales "
++"secciones no pueden estar incluidas en las <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Versiones Modificadas</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:421 C/fdl-appendix.xml:421
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "N"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to "
++"conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant "
++"Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"No cambiar el título de ninguna sección existente a <quote>Aprobaciones</"
++"quote> ni a uno que entre en conflicto con el de alguna <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Sección Invariante</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new "
++"front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from "
++"the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections "
++"as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's "
++"license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++" Si la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versión Modificada</link> incluye "
++"secciones o apéndices nuevos que cualifiquen como <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secciones Secundarias</link> y no contienen ningún material "
++"copiado del Documento, puede opcionalmente designar algunas o todas esas "
++"secciones como invariantes. Para hacerlo, añada sus títulos a la lista de "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Secciones Invariantes</link> en el aviso de "
++"licencia de la Versión Modificada. Tales títulos deben ser distintos de "
++"cualquier otro título de sección."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it "
++"contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of "
++"peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the "
++"authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"Puede añadir una sección titulada <quote>Aprobaciones</quote>, siempre que "
++"contenga únicamente aprobaciones de su <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Versión Modificada</link> por otras fuentes --por ejemplo, observaciones "
++"de compañeros o que el texto ha sido aprobado por una organización como "
++"definición oficial de un estándar."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list "
++"of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover "
++"Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements "
++"made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by "
++"you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, "
++"you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit "
++"permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"Puede añadir un pasaje de hasta cinco palabras como <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Texto de Cubierta Delantera</link> y un pasaje de hasta 25 "
++"palabras como <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Texto de Cubierta Trasera</"
++"link> al final de la lista de <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Texto de "
++"Cubierta</link> en la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versión Modificada</"
++"link>. Una entidad sólo puede añadir (o hacer que se añada) un pasaje al "
++"Texto de Cubierta Delantera y uno al de Cubierta Trasera. Si el <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> ya incluye un textos de cubiertas "
++"añadidos previamente por usted o por acuerdo previo con la entidad que usted "
++"representa, usted no puede añadir otro; pero puede reemplazar el anterior, "
++"con permiso explícito del editor anterior que agregó el texto anterior."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names "
++"for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Con esta Licencia ni los autores ni los editores del <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Documento</link> dan permiso para usar sus nombres para "
++"publicidad ni para asegurar o implicar aprobación de cualquier <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Versión Modificada</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:480 C/fdl-appendix.xml:480
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "5. COMBINAR DOCUMENTOS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with "
++"other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, "
++"unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in "
++"its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Usted puede combinar el <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> con "
++"otros documentos liberados bajo esta Licencia, bajo los términos definidos "
++"en la sección <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> más arriba "
++"para versiones modificadas, siempre que incluya en la combinación todas las "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Secciones Invariantes</link> de todos los "
++"documentos originales, sin modificaciones, y las liste todas como Secciones "
++"Invariantes de su trabajo combinado en su aviso de licencia."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be "
++"replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with "
++"the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section "
++"unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original "
++"author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make "
++"the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections "
++"in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"El trabajo combinado necesita contener solamente una copia de esta Licencia, "
++"y múltiples <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Secciones Invariantes</link> "
++"idénticas pueden reemplazarse por una sola copia. Si hay múltiples Secciones "
++"Invariantes con el mismo nombre pero con contenidos diferentes, haga el "
++"título de cada una de estas secciones único añadiéndolo al final de este, "
++"entre paréntesis, el nombre del autor o de quien editó originalmente esa "
++"sección, si es conocido, o si no, un número único. Haga el mismo ajuste a "
++"los títulos de sección en la lista de Secciones Invariantes en la nota de "
++"licencia del trabajo combinado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</"
++"quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled "
++"<quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled "
++"<quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++"En la combinación, debe combinar cualquier sección titulada <quote>Historia</"
++"quote> de los distintos documentos originales, formando una sección titulada "
++"<quote>Historia</quote>; de la misma forma, combine cualquier sección "
++"titulada <quote>Reconocimientos</quote> y cualquier sección titulada "
++"<quote>Dedicatorias</quote>. Debe eliminar todas las secciones tituladas "
++"<quote>Aprobaciones</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:516 C/fdl-appendix.xml:516
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "6. COLECCIONES DE DOCUMENTOS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and "
++"replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with "
++"a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow "
++"the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in "
++"all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Puede hacer una colección que conste del <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Documento</link> y de otros documentos publicados bajo esta Licencia, y "
++"reemplazar las copias individuales de esta Licencia en todos los documentos "
++"por una sola copia que esté incluida en la colección, siempre que siga las "
++"reglas de esta Licencia para cada copia literal de cada uno de los "
++"documentos en cualquiera de los demás aspectos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:527 C/fdl-appendix.xml:527
++msgid ""
++"You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it "
++"individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License "
++"into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects "
++"regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++"Puede extraer un solo documento de una de tales colecciones y distribuirlo "
++"individualmente bajo esta Licencia, siempre que inserte una copia de esta "
++"Licencia en el documento extraído, y siga esta Licencia en todos los demás "
++"aspectos relativos a la copia literal de dicho documento."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:537 C/fdl-appendix.xml:537
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr "7. AGREGACIÓN CON TRABAJOS INDEPENDIENTES"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its "
++"derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on "
++"a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, "
++"provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a "
++"compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</"
++"link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"Una recopilación que conste del <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</"
++"link> o sus derivados y de otros documentos o trabajos separados e "
++"independientes, en cualquier soporte de almacenamiento o distribución, no "
++"cuenta como un todo como una <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versión "
++"Modificada</link> del Documento, siempre que no se reclame ningún derecho de "
++"copyright por la compilación. Dicha compilación se denomina un "
++"<quote>agregado</quote>, y esta Licencia no se aplica a otros trabajos "
++"autocontenidos incluidos con el Documento. teniendo en cuenta que son "
++"compilados, si no son los mismos trabajos derivados del Documento. Si el "
++"requisito de <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Texto de Cubierta</link> de "
++"la <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">sección 3</link> es aplicable a estas "
++"copias del Documento, entonces si el Documento es menor que un cuarto del "
++"agregado completo, los Textos de Cubierta del Documento pueden colocarse en "
++"cubiertas que enmarquen solamente el Documento dentro del agregado. En caso "
++"contrario deben aparecer en cubiertas impresas enmarcando todo el agregado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:561 C/fdl-appendix.xml:561
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr "8. TRADUCCIÓN"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the "
++"terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations "
++"requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may "
++"include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the "
++"original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation "
++"of this License provided that you also include the original English version "
++"of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the "
++"original English version of this License, the original English version will "
++"prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"La traducción se considera un tipo de modificación, así que puede distribuir "
++"traducciones del <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> bajo los "
++"términos de la <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">sección 4</link>. Reemplazar "
++"las <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Secciones invariantes</link> con "
++"traducciones requiere permiso especial de los mantenedores de la "
++"propietarios del copyright, pero puede incluir traducciones de algunos o "
++"todas las Secciones invariantes. Puede incluir una traducción de esta "
++"licencia proporcionada que además incluya la versión original de esta "
++"Sección invariante en adición de esta licencia. En caso de desacuerdo "
++"prevalecerá la versión original en inglés."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:580 C/fdl-appendix.xml:580
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr "9. TERMINACIÓN"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this "
++"License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the "
++"Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this "
++"License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you "
++"under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such "
++"parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++" Usted no puede copiar, modificar, sublicenciar o distribuir el <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> salvo por lo permitido "
++"expresamente por esta Licencia. Cualquier otro intento de copia, "
++"modificación, sublicenciamiento o distribución del Documento es nulo, y dará "
++"por terminados automáticamente sus derechos bajo esa Licencia. Sin embargo, "
++"los terceros que hayan recibido copias, o derechos, de usted bajo esta "
++"Licencia no verán terminadas sus licencias, siempre que permanezcan en total "
++"conformidad con ella."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:594 C/fdl-appendix.xml:594
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr "10. FUTURAS REVISIONES DE ESTA LICENCIA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:595
++msgid ""
++"The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU "
++"Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be "
++"similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to "
++"address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www."
++"gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"La <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> puede publicar versiones nuevas y revisadas de "
++"la Licencia de Documentación Libre GNU de vez en cuando. Dichas versiones "
++"nuevas serán similares en espíritu a la presente versión, pero pueden "
++"diferir en detalles para solucionar nuevos problemas o preocupaciones. Vea "
++"<ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/"
++"copyleft/</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular "
++"numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies "
++"to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of "
++"that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not "
++"as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not "
++"specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever "
++"published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"Cada versión de la licencia tiene un número de versión. Si la <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Documentación</link> especifica que el número particular de "
++"versión de esta Licencia <quote>o cualquier posterior versión</quote> "
++"aplicado sobre él, tiene la opción de seguir los términos y condiciones de "
++"cualquiera de esas versiones especificadas o de cualquiera de las versiones "
++"publicadas (no como borrador) por la Free Software Foundation. Si el "
++"Documento no especifica un número de versión de la licencia, puede elegir "
++"cualquier versión publicada (no como borrador) por la Free Software "
++"Foundation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:621 C/fdl-appendix.xml:621
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr "Addendum"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:622 C/fdl-appendix.xml:622
++msgid ""
++"To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the "
++"License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices "
++"just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++"Para usar esta licencia en un documento que ha escrito, incluya una copia de "
++"la Licencia en el documento y ponga el siguiente copyright y las notas justo "
++"después del título de la página."
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:629 C/fdl-appendix.xml:629
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr ""
++"Copyright 2009-2016 Daniel Mustieles\n"
++"Copyright 2009-2010 Jorge González González\n"
++"Copyright 2009-2010 Francisco Javier Fernández Serrador"
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, "
++"and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being "
++"LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU "
++"Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Se otorga permiso para copiar, distribuir y/o modificar este documento bajo "
++"los términos de la Licencia de Documentación Libre de GNU, Versión 1.1 o "
++"cualquier otra versión posterior publicada por la Free Software Foundation; "
++"con las <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Secciones Invariantes</link> siendo "
++"su LISTE SUS TÍTULOS, con <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textos de "
++"Cubierta Delantera</link> siendo LISTA, y con los <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Textos de Cubierta Trasera</link> siendo LISTA. Una copia de la "
++"licencia está incluida en la sección titulada <quote>GNU Free Documentation "
++"License</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, "
++"write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover "
++"Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of "
++"<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Si no tiene <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Secciones Invariantes</link>, "
++"escriba <quote>sin Secciones Invariantes</quote> en vez de decir cuáles son "
++"invariantes. Si no tiene <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textos de "
++"Cubierta Frontal</link>, escriba <quote>sin Textos de Cubierta Frontal</"
++"quote>; de la misma manera para <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textos de "
++"Cubierta Trasera</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++"gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"Si su documento contiene ejemplos de código de programa no triviales, "
++"recomendamos liberar estos ejemplos en paralelo bajo la licencia de software "
++"libre que usted elija, como la <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/"
++"copyleft/gpl.html\">Licencia Pública General de GNU (GNU General Public "
++"License)</ulink>, para permitir su uso en software libre."
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/year
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/holder
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/street
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++msgstr "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/city
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "Boston"
++msgstr "Boston"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/state
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "MA"
++msgstr "MA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/postcode
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "02110-1301"
++msgstr "02110-1301"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/country
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "USA"
++msgstr "EE.UU."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:34
++msgid "free"
++msgstr "libre"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <_:quote-1/> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"El propósito de esta Licencia es permitir que un manual, libro de texto, u "
++"otro documento escrito sea <_:quote-1/> en el sentido de libertad: asegurar "
++"a todo el mundo la libertad efectiva de copiarlo y redistribuirlo, con o sin "
++"modificaciones, de manera comercial o no. En segundo término, esta Licencia "
++"proporciona al autor y al editor una manera de obtener reconocimiento por su "
++"trabajo, sin que se le considere responsable de las modificaciones "
++"realizadas por otros."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:44
++msgid "copyleft"
++msgstr "copyleft"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <_:quote-1/>, which means that derivative works of "
++"the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the "
++"GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"Esta Licencia es de tipo <_:quote-1/>, lo que significa que los trabajos "
++"derivados del documento deben a su vez ser libres en el mismo sentido. "
++"Complementa la Licencia Pública General de GNU, que es una licencia tipo "
++"copyleft diseñada para el software libre."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:67 C/fdl-appendix.xml:82 C/fdl-appendix.xml:99
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:107 C/fdl-appendix.xml:113 C/fdl-appendix.xml:156
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:179 C/fdl-appendix.xml:190 C/fdl-appendix.xml:205
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:224 C/fdl-appendix.xml:235 C/fdl-appendix.xml:253
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:271 C/fdl-appendix.xml:294 C/fdl-appendix.xml:354
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:368 C/fdl-appendix.xml:400 C/fdl-appendix.xml:462
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:472 C/fdl-appendix.xml:482 C/fdl-appendix.xml:519
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:540 C/fdl-appendix.xml:565 C/fdl-appendix.xml:583
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:608
++msgid "Document"
++msgstr "Documento"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:69
++msgid "you"
++msgstr "usted"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <_:quote-1/>, below, refers to any such manual or work. "
++"Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <_:quote-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Esta Licencia se aplica a cualquier manual u otro trabajo que contenga un "
++"aviso colocado por el poseedor del copyright diciendo que puede distribuirse "
++"bajo los términos de esta Licencia. El <_:quote-1/>, abajo, se refiere a "
++"cualquier manual o trabajo. Cualquier miembro del público es un "
++"licenciatario, y será referido como <_:quote-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:73 C/fdl-appendix.xml:234 C/fdl-appendix.xml:269
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:283 C/fdl-appendix.xml:315 C/fdl-appendix.xml:351
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:413 C/fdl-appendix.xml:433 C/fdl-appendix.xml:447
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:459 C/fdl-appendix.xml:475 C/fdl-appendix.xml:543
++msgid "Modified Version"
++msgstr "Versión modificada"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:72
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a "
++"portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or "
++"translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"Una <_:quote-1/> del Documento significa cualquier trabajo que contenga el "
++"Documento o una porción del mismo, ya sea una copia literal o con "
++"modificaciones y/o traducciones a otro idioma."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:80
++msgid "Secondary Section"
++msgstr "Sección secundaria"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:79
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <_:"
++"link-2/> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or "
++"authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related "
++"matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall "
++"subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, "
++"a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could "
++"be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related "
++"matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political "
++"position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++"Una <_:quote-1/> es un apéndice con título o una sección preliminar del "
++"Documento que trata exclusivamente de la relación entre los autores o "
++"editores y el tema general del <_:link-2/> que trata exclusivamente con la "
++"relación entre los editores o autores del Documento con el asunto general "
++"del Documento (o asuntos relacionados) y no contiene nada que pueda "
++"considerarse dentro del tema principal. (Por ejemplo, si el Documento es en "
++"parte un libro de texto de matemáticas, una Sección Secundaria no explicará "
++"nada de matemáticas.) La relación puede ser una conexión histórica con el "
++"asunto o temas relacionados, o una opinión legal, comercial, filosófica, "
++"ética o política acerca de ellos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:95 C/fdl-appendix.xml:327 C/fdl-appendix.xml:398
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:439 C/fdl-appendix.xml:486 C/fdl-appendix.xml:494
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:567 C/fdl-appendix.xml:637 C/fdl-appendix.xml:648
++msgid "Invariant Sections"
++msgstr "Secciones invariantes"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:96 C/fdl-appendix.xml:435
++msgid "Secondary Sections"
++msgstr "Secciones secundarias"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:94
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain <_:link-2/> whose titles are designated, as "
++"being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-3/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Las <_:quote-1/> son ciertas <_:link-2/> cuyos títulos son designados como "
++"Secciones Invariantes en la nota que indica que el <_:link-3/> se publica "
++"bajo esta Licencia."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:104 C/fdl-appendix.xml:181 C/fdl-appendix.xml:328
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:458
++msgid "Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Textos de cubierta"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:103
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as "
++"Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-2/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++" Los <_:quote-1/> son ciertos pasajes cortos de texto que se listan como "
++"Textos de Cubierta Delantera o Textos de Cubierta Trasera en la nota que "
++"indica que el <_:link-2/> se publica bajo esta Licencia."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:112 C/fdl-appendix.xml:124 C/fdl-appendix.xml:207
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:369
++msgid "Transparent"
++msgstr "Transparente"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:125 C/fdl-appendix.xml:204
++msgid "Opaque"
++msgstr "Opacas"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:111
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> copy of the <_:link-2/> means a machine-readable copy, "
++"represented in a format whose specification is available to the general "
++"public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and "
++"straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of "
++"pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available "
++"drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for "
++"automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text "
++"formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup "
++"has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers "
++"is not Transparent. A copy that is not <_:quote-3/> is called <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Una copia <_:quote-1/> del <_:link-2/>, significa una copia para lectura en "
++"máquina, representada en un formato cuya especificación está disponible al "
++"público en general, cuyo contenido puede ser visto y editados directamente "
++"con editores de texto genéricos o (para imágenes compuestas por píxeles) con "
++"programas genéricos de manipulación de imágenes o (para dibujos) con algún "
++"editor de dibujos ampliamente disponible, y que sea adecuado como entrada "
++"para formateadores de texto o para su traducción automática a formatos "
++"adecuados para formateadores de texto. Una copia hecha en un formato "
++"definido como Transparente, pero cuyo marcaje o ausencia de él haya sido "
++"diseñado para impedir o dificultar modificaciones posteriores por parte de "
++"los lectores no es Transparente. Una copia que no es <_:quote-3/> se "
++"denomina <_:quote-4/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:142 C/fdl-appendix.xml:146 C/fdl-appendix.xml:250
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:266 C/fdl-appendix.xml:281 C/fdl-appendix.xml:352
++msgid "Title Page"
++msgstr "Portada"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:141
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such "
++"following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License "
++"requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have "
++"any title page as such, <_:quote-2/> means the text near the most prominent "
++"appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the "
++"text."
++msgstr ""
++"La <_:quote-1/> significa, en un libro impreso, la página de título, más las "
++"páginas siguientes que sean necesarias para mantener legiblemente el "
++"material que esta Licencia requiere en la portada. Para trabajos en formatos "
++"que no tienen página de portada como tal, <_:quote-2/> significa el texto "
++"cercano a la aparición más prominente del título del trabajo,precediendo el "
++"comienzo del cuerpo del texto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:166 C/fdl-appendix.xml:551
++msgid "section 3"
++msgstr "sección 3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <_:link-1/> in any medium, either "
++"commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright "
++"notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document "
++"are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions "
++"whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to "
++"obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or "
++"distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If "
++"you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the "
++"conditions in <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Usted puede copiar y distribuir el <_:link-1/> en cualquier soporte, sea en "
++"forma comercial o no, siempre y cuando proporcione esta Licencia, las notas "
++"de copyright y la nota que indica que esta Licencia se aplica al Documento "
++"reproduciéndola en todas las copias y que usted no añada ninguna otra "
++"condición a las expuestas en esta Licencia. Usted no puede usar medidas "
++"técnicas para obstruir o controlar la lectura o copia posterior de las "
++"copias que usted haga o distribuya. Sin embargo, usted puede aceptar "
++"compensación a cambio de las copias. Si distribuye un número suficientemente "
++"grande de copias también deberá seguir las condiciones de la <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <_:link-1/> numbering more than 100, "
++"and the Document's license notice requires <_:link-2/>, you must enclose the "
++"copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: "
++"Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back "
++"cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the "
++"publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with "
++"all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <_:link-3/> and satisfy "
++"these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++" Si publica copias impresas del <_:link-1/> que sobrepasen las 100, y la "
++"nota de licencia del Documento exige <_:link-2/>, debe incluirlas copias con "
++"cubiertas que lleven en forma clara y legible todos esos Textos de Cubierta: "
++"Textos de Cubierta Delantera en la cubierta delantera y Textos de Cubierta "
++"Trasera en la cubierta trasera. Ambas cubiertas deben identificarlo a Usted "
++"clara y legiblemente como editor de tales copias. La cubierta debe mostrar "
++"el título completo con todas las palabras igualmente prominentes y visibles. "
++"Además puede añadir otro material en las cubiertas. Las copias con cambios "
++"limitados a las cubiertas, siempre que conserven el título del <_:link-3/> y "
++"satisfagan estas condiciones, pueden considerarse como copias literales en "
++"todos los aspectos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <_:link-1/> copies of the <_:link-2/> numbering "
++"more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <_:link-3/> copy "
++"along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-"
++"accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy "
++"of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using "
++"public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard "
++"network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably "
++"prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to "
++"ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated "
++"location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an "
++"Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition "
++"to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"Si Usted publica o distribuye copias <_:link-1/> del <_:link-2/> cuya "
++"cantidad exceda las 100, debe incluir una copia <_:link-3/>, que pueda ser "
++"leída por una máquina, con cada copia Opaca, o bien mostrar, en cada copia "
++"Opaca, una dirección de red donde cualquier usuario de la misma tenga acceso "
++"por medio de protocolos públicos y estandarizados a una copia Transparente "
++"del Documento completa, sin material adicional. Si usted hace uso de la "
++"última opción, deberá tomar las medidas necesarias, cuando comience la "
++"distribución de las copias Opacas en cantidad, para asegurar que esta copia "
++"Transparente permanecerá accesible en el sitio establecido por lo menos un "
++"año después de la última vez que distribuya una copia Opaca de esa edición "
++"al público (directamente o a través de sus agentes o distribuidores)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <_:"
++"link-1/> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them "
++"a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"Se solicita, aunque no es requisito, que se ponga en contacto con los "
++"autores del <_:link-1/> antes de redistribuir gran número de copias, para "
++"darles la oportunidad de que le proporcionen una versión actualizada del "
++"Documento."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:236
++msgid "2"
++msgstr "2"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:237
++msgid "3"
++msgstr "3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/> under the "
++"conditions of sections <_:link-3/> and <_:link-4/> above, provided that you "
++"release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified "
++"Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"Puede copiar y distribuir una <_:link-1/> del <_:link-2/> bajo las "
++"condiciones de las secciones <_:link-3/> y <_:link-4/> anteriores, siempre "
++"que Usted libere la Versión Modificada bajo esta misma Licencia, con la "
++"Versión Modificada haciendo el rol del Documento, por lo tanto dando "
++"Licencia de distribución y modificación de la Versión Modificada a "
++"quienquiera posea una copia de la misma. Además, debe hacer lo siguiente en "
++"la Versión Modificada:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <_:link-1/> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from "
++"that of the <_:link-2/>, and from those of previous versions (which should, "
++"if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You "
++"may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of "
++"that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Usar en la <_:link-1/> (y en las cubiertas, si hay alguna) un título "
++"distinto al del <_:link-2/> y de sus versiones anteriores (que deberían, si "
++"hay alguna, estar listadas en la sección de Historia del Documento). Puede "
++"usar el mismo título de versiones anteriores al original siempre y cuando "
++"quien las publicó originalmente otorgue permiso."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <_:link-1/>, as authors, one or more persons or entities "
++"responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <_:link-2/>, together "
++"with at least five of the principal authors of the <_:link-3/> (all of its "
++"principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"Listar en la <_:link-1/>, como autores, una o más personas o entidades "
++"responsables de la autoría de las modificaciones de la <_:link-2/>, junto "
++"con por lo menos cinco de los autores principales del <_:link-3/> (todos sus "
++"autores principales, si hay menos de cinco), a menos que le eximan de tal "
++"requisito."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <_:link-1/> the name of the publisher of the <_:link-2/>, as "
++"the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++"Mostrar en la <_:link-1/> como editor el nombre del editor de la <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:292
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <_:link-1/>."
++msgstr "Conservar todas las notas de copyright del <_:link-1/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <_:link-1/> under the terms of this "
++"License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Incluir, inmediatamente después de los avisos de copyright, una nota de "
++"licencia dando el permiso público para usar la <_:link-1/>. bajo los "
++"términos de esta Licencia, de la forma mostrada en el Adenda de más abajo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:330
++msgid "Document's"
++msgstr "Documento"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <_:link-1/> and required "
++"<_:link-2/> given in the <_:link-3/> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Incluir, inmediatamente después de ese aviso de licencia, la lista completa "
++"de <_:link-1/> y de los <_:link-2/> que sean requeridos en el aviso de "
++"Licencia del <_:link-3/> original."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:348 C/fdl-appendix.xml:353 C/fdl-appendix.xml:372
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:507 C/fdl-appendix.xml:508
++msgid "History"
++msgstr "Historia"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <_:quote-1/>, and its title, and add to it an "
++"item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <_:"
++"link-2/> as given on the <_:link-3/>. If there is no section entitled <_:"
++"quote-4/> in the <_:link-5/>, create one stating the title, year, authors, "
++"and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Conservar la sección titulada <_:quote-1/>, conservar su Título y añadirle "
++"un elemento que declare al menos el título, el año, los nuevos autores y el "
++"editor de la <_:link-2/>, tal como figuran en la <_:link-3/>. Si no hay una "
++"sección titulada <_:quote-4/> en el <_:link-5/>, crear una estableciendo el "
++"título, el año, los autores y el editor del Documento, tal como figuran en "
++"su Portada, añadiendo además un elemento describiendo la Versión Modificada, "
++"como se estableció en la sentencia anterior."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <_:link-1/> for public "
++"access to a <_:link-2/> copy of the Document, and likewise the network "
++"locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These "
++"may be placed in the <_:quote-3/> section. You may omit a network location "
++"for a work that was published at least four years before the Document "
++"itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives "
++"permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Conservar la dirección en red, si la hay, dada en el <_:link-1/> para el "
++"acceso público a una copia <_:link-2/> del mismo, así como las otras "
++"direcciones de red dadas en el Documento para versiones anteriores en las "
++"que estuviese basado. Pueden ubicarse en la sección <_:quote-3/>. Se puede "
++"omitir la ubicación en red de un trabajo que haya sido publicado por lo "
++"menos cuatro años antes que el Documento mismo, o si el editor original de "
++"dicha versión da permiso."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:385 C/fdl-appendix.xml:509
++msgid "Acknowledgements"
++msgstr "Agradecimientos"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:386 C/fdl-appendix.xml:510
++msgid "Dedications"
++msgstr "Dedicatorias"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <_:quote-1/> or <_:quote-2/>, preserve the section's "
++"title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the "
++"contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"En cualquier sección titulada <_:quote-1/> o <_:quote-2/>, conservar el "
++"título de la sección y conservar en ella toda la sustancia y el tono de los "
++"agradecimientos y/o dedicatorias incluidas por cada contribuyente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/>, unaltered in their text and "
++"in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part "
++"of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Conservar todas las <_:link-1/> del <_:link-2/>, sin alterar su texto ni sus "
++"títulos. Los números de sección o equivalentes no se consideran parte de los "
++"títulos de la sección."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:412 C/fdl-appendix.xml:424 C/fdl-appendix.xml:445
++msgid "Endorsements"
++msgstr "Aprobaciones"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <_:quote-1/>. Such a section may not be included "
++"in the <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Elimine cualquier sección titulada <_:quote-1/>. Tales secciones no pueden "
++"estar incluidas en las <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:425
++msgid "Invariant Section"
++msgstr "Sección invariante"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <_:quote-1/> or to conflict in title "
++"with any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"No cambiar el título de ninguna sección existente a <_:quote-1/> ni a uno "
++"que entre en conflicto con el de alguna <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <_:link-1/> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that "
++"qualify as <_:link-2/> and contain no material copied from the Document, you "
++"may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To "
++"do this, add their titles to the list of <_:link-3/> in the Modified "
++"Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other "
++"section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Si la <_:link-1/> incluye secciones o apéndices nuevos que cualifiquen como "
++"<_:link-2/> y no contienen ningún material copiado del Documento, puede "
++"opcionalmente designar algunas o todas esas secciones como invariantes. Para "
++"hacerlo, añada sus títulos a la lista de <_:link-3/> en el aviso de licencia "
++"de la Versión Modificada. Tales títulos deben ser distintos de cualquier "
++"otro título de sección."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <_:quote-1/>, provided it contains nothing "
++"but endorsements of your <_:link-2/> by various parties--for example, "
++"statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an "
++"organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"Puede añadir una sección titulada <_:quote-1/>, siempre que contenga "
++"únicamente aprobaciones de su <_:link-2/> por otras fuentes --por ejemplo, "
++"observaciones de compañeros o que el texto ha sido aprobado por una "
++"organización como definición oficial de un estándar."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:455
++msgid "Front-Cover Text"
++msgstr "Texto de cubierta delantera"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:457
++msgid "Back-Cover Text"
++msgstr "Texto de cubierta trasera"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <_:link-1/>, and a passage of "
++"up to 25 words as a <_:link-2/>, to the end of the list of <_:link-3/> in "
++"the <_:link-4/>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover "
++"Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If "
++"the <_:link-5/> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously "
++"added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on "
++"behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on "
++"explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"Puede añadir un pasaje de hasta cinco palabras como <_:link-1/> y un pasaje "
++"de hasta 25 palabras como <_:link-2/> al final de la lista de <_:link-3/> en "
++"la <_:link-4/>. Una entidad sólo puede añadir (o hacer que se añada) un "
++"pasaje al Texto de Cubierta Delantera y uno al de Cubierta Trasera. Si el <_:"
++"link-5/> ya incluye un textos de cubiertas añadidos previamente por usted o "
++"por acuerdo previo con la entidad que usted representa, usted no puede "
++"añadir otro; pero puede reemplazar el anterior, con permiso explícito del "
++"editor anterior que agregó el texto anterior."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <_:link-1/> do not by this License "
++"give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply "
++"endorsement of any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Con esta Licencia ni los autores ni los editores del <_:link-1/> dan permiso "
++"para usar sus nombres para publicidad ni para asegurar o implicar aprobación "
++"de cualquier <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:484 C/fdl-appendix.xml:566
++msgid "section 4"
++msgstr "sección 4"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <_:link-1/> with other documents released under this "
++"License, under the terms defined in <_:link-2/> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <_:link-3/> of all "
++"of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant "
++"Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Usted puede combinar el <_:link-1/> con otros documentos liberados bajo esta "
++"Licencia, bajo los términos definidos en la sección <_:link-2/> más arriba "
++"para versiones modificadas, siempre que incluya en la combinación todas las "
++"<_:link-3/> de todos los documentos originales, sin modificaciones, y las "
++"liste todas como Secciones Invariantes de su trabajo combinado en su aviso "
++"de licencia."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <_:link-1/> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are "
++"multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make "
++"the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in "
++"parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if "
++"known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section "
++"titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the "
++"combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"El trabajo combinado necesita contener solamente una copia de esta Licencia, "
++"y múltiples <_:link-1/> idénticas pueden reemplazarse por una sola copia. Si "
++"hay múltiples Secciones Invariantes con el mismo nombre pero con contenidos "
++"diferentes, haga el título de cada una de estas secciones único añadiéndolo "
++"al final de este, entre paréntesis, el nombre del autor o de quien editó "
++"originalmente esa sección, si es conocido, o si no, un número único. Haga el "
++"mismo ajuste a los títulos de sección en la lista de Secciones Invariantes "
++"en la nota de licencia del trabajo combinado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:511
++msgid "Endorsements."
++msgstr "Aprobaciones."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <_:quote-1/> in "
++"the various original documents, forming one section entitled <_:quote-2/>; "
++"likewise combine any sections entitled <_:quote-3/>, and any sections "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>. You must delete all sections entitled <_:quote-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"En la combinación, debe combinar cualquier sección titulada <_:quote-1/> de "
++"los distintos documentos originales, formando una sección titulada <_:"
++"quote-2/>; de la misma forma, combine cualquier sección titulada <_:quote-3/"
++"> y cualquier sección titulada <_:quote-4/>. Debe eliminar todas las "
++"secciones tituladas <_:quote-5/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <_:link-1/> and other documents "
++"released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this "
++"License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the "
++"collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim "
++"copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Puede hacer una colección que conste del <_:link-1/> y de otros documentos "
++"publicados bajo esta Licencia, y reemplazar las copias individuales de esta "
++"Licencia en todos los documentos por una sola copia que esté incluida en la "
++"colección, siempre que siga las reglas de esta Licencia para cada copia "
++"literal de cada uno de los documentos en cualquiera de los demás aspectos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:546
++msgid "aggregate"
++msgstr "agregado"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:550
++msgid "Cover Text"
++msgstr "Texto de cubierta"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <_:link-1/> or its derivatives with other separate and "
++"independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or "
++"distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <_:link-2/> of the "
++"Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. "
++"Such a compilation is called an <_:quote-3/>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <_:link-4/> requirement of <_:link-5/> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"Una recopilación que conste del <_:link-1/> o sus derivados y de otros "
++"documentos o trabajos separados e independientes, en cualquier soporte de "
++"almacenamiento o distribución, no cuenta como un todo como un <_:link-2/> "
++"del Documento, siempre que no se reclame ningún derecho de copyright por la "
++"compilación. Dicha compilación se denomina un <_:quote-3/>, y esta Licencia "
++"no se aplica a otros trabajos autocontenidos incluidos con el Documento. "
++"teniendo en cuenta que son compilados, si no son los mismos trabajos "
++"derivados del Documento. Si el requisito de <_:link-4/> de la <_:link-5/> es "
++"aplicable a estas copias del Documento, entonces si el Documento es menor "
++"que un cuarto del agregado completo, los Textos de Cubierta del Documento "
++"pueden colocarse en cubiertas que enmarquen solamente el Documento dentro "
++"del agregado. En caso contrario deben aparecer en cubiertas impresas "
++"enmarcando todo el agregado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <_:link-1/> under the terms of <_:link-2/>. Replacing <_:"
++"link-3/> with translations requires special permission from their copyright "
++"holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections "
++"in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may "
++"include a translation of this License provided that you also include the "
++"original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between "
++"the translation and the original English version of this License, the "
++"original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"La traducción se considera un tipo de modificación, así que puede distribuir "
++"traducciones del <_:link-1/> bajo los términos de la <_:link-2/>. Reemplazar "
++"las <_:link-3/> con traducciones requiere permiso especial de los "
++"mantenedores de la propietarios del copyright, pero puede incluir "
++"traducciones de algunos o todas las Secciones invariantes. Puede incluir una "
++"traducción de esta licencia proporcionada que además incluya la versión "
++"original de esta Sección invariante en adición de esta licencia. En caso de "
++"desacuerdo prevalecerá la versión original en inglés."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <_:link-1/> except "
++"as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, "
++"modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will "
++"automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who "
++"have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have "
++"their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++" Usted no puede copiar, modificar, sublicenciar o distribuir el <_:link-1/> "
++"salvo por lo permitido expresamente por esta Licencia. Cualquier otro "
++"intento de copia, modificación, sublicenciamiento o distribución del "
++"Documento es nulo, y dará por terminados automáticamente sus derechos bajo "
++"esa Licencia. Sin embargo, los terceros que hayan recibido copias, o "
++"derechos, de usted bajo esta Licencia no verán terminadas sus licencias, "
++"siempre que permanezcan en total conformidad con ella."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:597
++msgid "Free Software Foundation"
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:603
++msgid "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++msgstr "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:595
++msgid ""
++"The <_:ulink-1/> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free "
++"Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar "
++"in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new "
++"problems or concerns. See <_:ulink-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"La <_:ulink-1/> puede publicar versiones nuevas y revisadas de la Licencia "
++"de Documentación Libre GNU de vez en cuando. Dichas versiones nuevas serán "
++"similares en espíritu a la presente versión, pero pueden diferir en detalles "
++"para solucionar nuevos problemas o preocupaciones. Consulte <_:ulink-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:610
++msgid "or any later version"
++msgstr "o cualquier versión posterior"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<_:link-1/> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <_:"
++"quote-2/> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and "
++"conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has "
++"been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the "
++"Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose "
++"any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"Cada versión de la licencia tiene un número de versión. Si la <_:link-1/> "
++"especifica que el número particular de versión de esta Licencia <_:quote-2/> "
++"aplicado sobre él, tiene la opción de seguir los términos y condiciones de "
++"cualquiera de esas versiones especificadas o de cualquiera de las versiones "
++"publicadas (no como borrador) por la Free Software Foundation. Si el "
++"Documento no especifica un número de versión de la licencia, puede elegir "
++"cualquier versión publicada (no como borrador) por la Free Software "
++"Foundation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:639 C/fdl-appendix.xml:651
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Textos de cubierta delantera"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:640 C/fdl-appendix.xml:654
++msgid "Back-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Textos de cubierta trasera"
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <_:link-1/> "
++"being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <_:link-2/> being LIST, and with the <_:"
++"link-3/> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Se otorga permiso para copiar, distribuir y/o modificar este documento bajo "
++"los términos de la Licencia de Documentación Libre de GNU, Versión 1.1 o "
++"cualquier otra versión posterior publicada por la Free Software Foundation; "
++"con las <_:link-1/> siendo su LISTE SUS TÍTULOS, con <_:link-2/> siendo "
++"LISTA, y con los <_:link-3/> siendo LISTA. Una copia de la licencia está "
++"incluida en la sección titulada <_:quote-4/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:649
++msgid "with no Invariant Sections"
++msgstr "sin secciones invariantes"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:652
++msgid "no Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "sin textos de cubierta delantera"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:653
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"
++msgstr "Textos de cubierta LISTADOS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <_:link-1/>, write <_:quote-2/> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <_:link-3/>, write <_:quote-4/> instead of <_:"
++"quote-5/>; likewise for <_:link-6/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Si no tiene <_:link-1/>, escriba <_:quote-2/> en lugar de indicar los que "
++"son invariantes. Si no tiene <_:link-3/>, escriba <_:quote-4/> en lugar de "
++"<_:quote-5/>; lo mismo para <_:link-6/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:661
++msgid "GNU General Public License"
++msgstr "Licencia Pública General GNU"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <_:ulink-1/>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
++"Si su documento contiene ejemplos de código de programa no triviales, "
++"recomendamos liberar estos ejemplos en paralelo bajo la licencia de software "
++"libre que usted elija, como la <_:ulink-1/>, para permitir su uso en "
++"software libre."
++
++#~| msgid ""
++#~| "<revnumber>1.29.1</revnumber> <date>28 Aug 2018</date> "
++#~| "<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>development</revremark>"
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<revnumber>1.30.1</revnumber> <date>09 May 2019</date> "
++#~ "<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>development</revremark>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<revnumber>1.30.1</revnumber> <date>9 de mayo de 2019</date> "
++#~ "<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>desarrollo</revremark>"
++
++#~ msgid "Setting up your project"
++#~ msgstr "Configurando su proyecto"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc "
++#~ "into your project. Theses sections assume we work on a project called "
++#~ "'meep'. This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user "
++#~ "app called 'meeper'. We also assume you will be using autoconf and "
++#~ "automake. In addition section <link linkend=\"plain_makefiles\">plain "
++#~ "makefiles or other build systems</link> will describe the basics needed "
++#~ "to work in a different build setup."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Las siguientes secciones describen los pasos que realizar para integrar "
++#~ "GTK-Doc en su proyecto. Estas secciones asumen que se trabaja en un "
++#~ "proyecto llamado «meep». Este proyecto contiene una biblioteca llamada "
++#~ "«libmeep» y una aplicación final de usuario llamada «meeper». También se "
++#~ "asume que usará «autoconf» y «automake». En la sección <link linkend="
++#~ "\"plain_makefiles\">Integración con makefiles u otros sistemas de "
++#~ "construcción</link> se describen las necesidades básicas para trabajar "
++#~ "con un sistema de construcción diferente."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/"
++#~ "reference (this way you can also have docs/help for end-user "
++#~ "documentation). It is recommended to create another subdirectory with the "
++#~ "name of the doc-package. For packages with just one library this step is "
++#~ "not necessary."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Bajo su carpeta de nivel superior cree carpetas llamadas docs/reference "
++#~ "(de esta forma también puede tener docs/help para la documentación final "
++#~ "de usuario). Se recomienda crear otra subcarpeta con el nombre doc-"
++#~ "package. Para paquetes con una sola biblioteca este paso no es necesario."
++
++#~ msgid "Example directory structure"
++#~ msgstr "Ejemplo de estructura de carpetas"
++
++#~ msgid "This can then look as shown below: <_:example-1/>"
++#~ msgstr "Esto después aparecerá como se muestra debajo: <_:example-1/>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> "
++#~ "script."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Muy fácil, simplemente añada una línea a su script <filename>configure."
++#~ "ac</filename>."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "# check for gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "# check for gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++
++#~ msgid "Keep gtk-doc optional"
++#~ msgstr "Mantener gtk-doc como opcional"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "# check for gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++#~ "GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++#~ "],[\n"
++#~ "AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++#~ "])\n"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "# check for gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++#~ "GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++#~ "],[\n"
++#~ "AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++#~ "])\n"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "This will require all developers to have gtk-doc installed. If it is okay "
++#~ "for your project to have optional api-doc build setup, you can solve this "
++#~ "as below. Keep it as is, as gtkdocize is looking for "
++#~ "<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> at the start of a line. <_:example-1/>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Esto requerirá que todos los desarrolladores tengan gtk-doc instalado. Si "
++#~ "para su proyecto es correcto tener una configuración de construcción de "
++#~ "api-doc opcional, puede resolver esto como sigue. Manténgalo como está, "
++#~ "ya que gtkdocize busca en <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> al inicio de "
++#~ "la línea. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside "
++#~ "your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows "
++#~ "<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++#~ "definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Aún más, se recomienda que tenga la siguiente línea en su script "
++#~ "<filename>configure.ac</filename>. Esto permite que "
++#~ "<application>gtkdocize</application> copie automáticamente la definición "
++#~ "de la macro para <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> a su proyecto."
++
++#~ msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++#~ msgstr "Preparación para gtkdocize"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Historically GTK-Doc was generating template files where developers "
++#~ "entered the docs. This turned out to be not so good (e.g. the need for "
++#~ "having generated files under version control). Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the "
++#~ "tools can get all the information from source comments and thus the "
++#~ "templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in "
++#~ "the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--"
++#~ "flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl "
++#~ "usage totally. Besides adding the option directly to the command "
++#~ "invocation, they can be added also to an environment variable called "
++#~ "<symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> or set as a 2nd parameter in "
++#~ "<symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro in the configure script. If you have "
++#~ "never changed file in tmpl by hand and migrating from older gtkdoc "
++#~ "versions, please remove the directory (e.g. from version control system)."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Históricamente GTK-Doc generaba plantillas de archivos donde los "
++#~ "desarrolladores introducían los documentos. Al final esto resulto no ser "
++#~ "muy bueno (por ejemplo, por la necesidad de tener archivos generados bajo "
++#~ "un control de versiones). Desde la versión de DTK-Doc 1.9 las "
++#~ "herramientas pueden obtener toda la información desde los comentarios del "
++#~ "código fuente y por ello se pueden evitar las plantillas. Se anima a los "
++#~ "desarrolladores a mantener su documentación en el código. "
++#~ "<application>gtkdocize</application> ahora soporta una opción <option>--"
++#~ "flavour no-tmpl</option> que elije un makefile que omite completamente el "
++#~ "uso de plantillas. Además de añadir la opción directamente a la línea de "
++#~ "comandos al invocarlo, se pueden añadir a una variable de entorno llamada "
++#~ "<symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> o configurar como un segundo parámetro "
++#~ "en la macro <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> en el script de configuración. "
++#~ "Si nunca ha cambiado un archivo tmpl (plantilla) a mano, elimine la "
++#~ "carpeta una vez (ej. desde el sistema de control de versiones)."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<"
++#~ "package>/index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. "
++#~ "But hang-on, during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages "
++#~ "with life."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Ahora puede apuntar su navegador a <filename>docs/reference/<"
++#~ "paquete>/index.html</filename>. Sí, aún es un poco decepcionante. Pero "
++#~ "espere, durante el siguiente capítulo aprenderá a rellenar las páginas "
++#~ "con información."
++
++#~ msgid "Documentation placement"
++#~ msgstr "Ubicación de la documentación"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing "
++#~ "inside the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the "
++#~ "disadvantages that the information is often not updated and also that the "
++#~ "file tend to cause conflicts with version control systems."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "En el pasado la mayoría de la documentación se debía rellenar en campos "
++#~ "dentro de la carpeta <filename>tmpl</filename>. Esto tiene las "
++#~ "desventajas de que la información. Esto tiene las desventajas de que la "
++#~ "información no se actualiza muy a menudo y que el archivo tiene tendencia "
++#~ "a causar conflictos con los sistemas de control de versiones."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the "
++#~ "documentation inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way "
++#~ "of documenting code."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Para evitar los problemas anteriormente mencionados, se sugiere dejar la "
++#~ "documentación dentro de los fuentes. Este manual sólo describe esta forma "
++#~ "de documentar el código."
++
++#~ msgid "Example types file snippet"
++#~ msgstr "Fragmento de ejemplo de tipos de archivo"
++
++#~ msgid "<guilabel>Python</guilabel> - optional - for gtkdoc-depscan"
++#~ msgstr "<guilabel>Python</guilabel>: opcional, para gtkdoc-depscan"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel> "
++#~ "<application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the "
++#~ "<filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the "
++#~ "information gathered in the first step. (Note that this can be run "
++#~ "repeatedly. It will try to ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Generar los archivos «plantilla».</guilabel> "
++#~ "<application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> crea un número de archivos en la "
++#~ "subcarpeta <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename>, usando la "
++#~ "información obtenida en el primer paso. (Tenga en cuenta que esto se "
++#~ "puede ejecutar de forma separada. Intentará asegurarse de que la "
++#~ "documentación nunca se pierde.)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to "
++#~ "keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> "
++#~ "supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a "
++#~ "makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in "
++#~ "tmpl by hand, please remove the directory (e.g. from version control "
++#~ "system)."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Desde de GTK-Doc 1.9 se pueden evitar las plantillas. Animamos a la gente "
++#~ "a que mantenga la documentación en el código. <application>gtkdocize</"
++#~ "application> ahora soporta una opción <command>--flavour no-tmpl</"
++#~ "command> que elige un archivo makefile que omite completamente el uso de "
++#~ "tmpl. Si nunca ha cambiado a mano el archivo tmpl, elimine la carpeta una "
++#~ "vez (por ejemplo, desde el sistema de control de versiones)."
++
++#~ msgid "(FIXME : Stability information)"
++#~ msgstr "(ARREGLAR: estabilidad de la información)"
++
++#~ msgid "1.23"
++#~ msgstr "1.23"
++
++#~ msgid "1.20"
++#~ msgstr "1.20"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Also, take a look at GObject Introspection annotation tags: http://live."
++#~ "gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Consulte también las anotaciones de las etiquetas de introspección de "
++#~ "GObject: http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - This is the DocBook SGML DTD. "
++#~ "<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora."
++#~ "com/davenport</ulink>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel>: Este es el DocBook SGML DTD. "
++#~ "<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora."
++#~ "com/davenport</ulink>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - This is a DSSSL processor for converting "
++#~ "SGML to various formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type="
++#~ "\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel>: Este es el procesador DSSSL para "
++#~ "convertir SGML a varios formatos. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade"
++#~ "\" type=\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> This is the DSSSL code "
++#~ "to convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together "
++#~ "with jade. I've customized the DSSSL code slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to "
++#~ "colour the program code listings/declarations, and to support global "
++#~ "cross-reference indices in the generated HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh."
++#~ "com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Hojas de estilo DocBook modulares:</guilabel> Éste es el código "
++#~ "DSSSL para convertir DocBook a HTML (y otros cuantos formatos). Se usa "
++#~ "junto con jade. El código DSSSL está algo personalizado, en GTK-Doc dsl, "
++#~ "para colorear el código de listas/declaraciones del programa y soportar "
++#~ "índices de referencias cruzadas globales en el HTML generado. <ulink url="
++#~ "\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/"
++#~ "docbook/dsssl</ulink>."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - if you want to create man pages "
++#~ "from the DocBook. I've customized the 'translation spec' slightly, to "
++#~ "capitalise section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of "
++#~ "the pages and the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on "
++#~ "<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora."
++#~ "com/davenport</ulink> NOTE: This does not work yet."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel>: Si quiere crear páginas man desde el "
++#~ "DocBook. «translation spec» se ha personalizado un poco para capitalizar "
++#~ "la sección de cabeceras y añadir un título de «Biblioteca GTK» en la "
++#~ "parte superior de las páginas y la fecha de revisión al final. Existe un "
++#~ "enlace acerca de esto en <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type="
++#~ "\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>. NOTA: Esto aún no funciona."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are "
++#~ "installed."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "No existe ningún sitio estándar donde se instalan las hojas de estilo "
++#~ "modulares de DocBook."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "GTK-Doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically:"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "El script de configuración de GTK-Doc busca estas tres carpetas "
++#~ "automáticamente:"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (used by "
++#~ "RedHat)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (usado "
++#~ "por RedHat)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (used by Debian)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (usado por "
++#~ "Debian)"
++
++#~ msgid "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (used by SuSE)"
++#~ msgstr "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (usado por SuSE)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to "
++#~ "configure GTK-Doc using the option: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<"
++#~ "PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Si tiene las hojas de estilo instaladas en algún otro sitio, deberá "
++#~ "configurar GTK-Doc usando la opción: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<"
++#~ "RUTA_A_LA_CARPETA_DE_NIVEL_SUPERIOR_DE_LAS_HOJAS_DE_ESTILO> </command>"
++
++#~ msgid "1.18.1"
++#~ msgstr "1.18.1"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "/**\n"
++#~ " * identifier:\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * documentation ...\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * # Sub heading #\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * more documentation:\n"
++#~ " * - list item 1\n"
++#~ " * - list item 2\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * Even more docs.\n"
++#~ " */\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "/**\n"
++#~ " * identifier:\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * documentation ...\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * # Sub heading #\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * more documentation:\n"
++#~ " * - list item 1\n"
++#~ " * - list item 2\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * Even more docs.\n"
++#~ " */\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++
++#~| msgid ""
++#~| "Since GTK-Doc-1.18 the tool supports a subset of the <ulink url=\"http://"
++#~| "daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">markdown language</ulink>. One "
++#~| "can use it for sub-headings and simple itemized lists. On older GTK-Doc "
++#~| "versions the content will be rendered as it (the list items will appear "
++#~| "in one line separated by dashes). <_:example-1/>"
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Since GTK-Doc-1.18 the tool supports a subset of the <ulink url=\"http://"
++#~ "daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">markdown language</ulink>. The "
++#~ "support has improved a lot with version 1.20. On older GTK-Doc versions "
++#~ "the content will be rendered as it (the list items will appear in one "
++#~ "line separated by dashes). <_:example-1/>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Desde GTK-Doc-1.18 la herramienta soporta un subconjunto de <ulink url="
++#~ "\"http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">lenguajes de marcado</"
++#~ "ulink>. En la versión 1.20 se ha mejorado ucho este soporte. En versiones "
++#~ "más antiguas de GTK-Doc el contenido se puede renderizar como tal (la "
++#~ "lista de elementos aparecerá en una línea separada por guiones). <_:"
++#~ "example-1/>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "You may also want to enable GTK-Doc for the distcheck make target. Just "
++#~ "add the one line shown in the next example to your top-level "
++#~ "<filename>Makefile.am</filename>:"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Puede que también quiera activar GTK-Doc para el objetivo distcheckmate. "
++#~ "Simplemente añada la línea mostrada en el siguiente ejemplo a su nivel "
++#~ "superior de <filename>Makefile.am</filename>:"
++
++#~ msgid "Enable GTK-Doc during make distcheck"
++#~ msgstr "Activar GTK-Doc durante make distcheck"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "DISTCHECK_CONFIGURE_FLAGS=--enable-gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "DISTCHECK_CONFIGURE_FLAGS=--enable-gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++
++#~ msgid "Chris"
++#~ msgstr "Chris"
++
++#~ msgid "Lyttle"
++#~ msgstr "Lyttle"
++
++#~ msgid "chris@wilddev.net"
++#~ msgstr "chris@wilddev.net"
++
++#~ msgid "Dan"
++#~ msgstr "Dan"
++
++#~ msgid "Mueth"
++#~ msgstr "Mueth"
++
++#~ msgid "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++#~ msgstr "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++
++#~ msgid "Stefan"
++#~ msgstr "Stefan"
++
++#~ msgid "Kost"
++#~ msgstr "Kost"
++
++#~ msgid "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++#~ msgstr "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++
++#~ msgid "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++#~ msgstr "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++
++#~ msgid "2000, 2005"
++#~ msgstr "2000, 2005"
++
++#~ msgid "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle"
++#~ msgstr "Dan Mueth y Chris Lyttle"
++
++#~ msgid "2007-2011"
++#~ msgstr "2007-2011"
++
++#~ msgid "Stefan Sauer (Kost)"
++#~ msgstr "Stefan Sauer (Kost)"
++
++#~ msgid "20 Sep 2011"
++#~ msgstr "20 de septiembre de 2011"
++
++#~ msgid "ss"
++#~ msgstr "ss"
++
++#~ msgid "development version"
++#~ msgstr "versión de desarrollo"
++
++#~ msgid "1.18"
++#~ msgstr "1.18"
++
++#~ msgid "14 sep 2011"
++#~ msgstr "14 de septiembre 2011"
++
++#~ msgid "bug fixes, speedups, markdown support"
++#~ msgstr "correcciones de errores, mejoras de velocidad, soporte de marcado"
++
++#~ msgid "1.17"
++#~ msgstr "1.17"
++
++#~ msgid "26 Feb 2011"
++#~ msgstr "26 de febrero de 2011"
++
++#~ msgid "sk"
++#~ msgstr "sk"
++
++#~ msgid "urgent bug fix update"
++#~ msgstr "actualización de corrección de error urgente"
++
++#~ msgid "1.16"
++#~ msgstr "1.16"
++
++#~ msgid "14 Jan 2011"
++#~ msgstr "4 de enero de 2011"
++
++#~ msgid "bugfixes, layout improvements"
++#~ msgstr "correcciones de errores, mejoras de diseño"
++
++#~ msgid "1.15"
++#~ msgstr "1.15"
++
++#~ msgid "21 May 2010"
++#~ msgstr "21 de mayo de 2010"
++
++#~ msgid "bug and regression fixes"
++#~ msgstr "arreglos de errores y regresiones"
++
++#~ msgid "1.14"
++#~ msgstr "1.14"
++
++#~ msgid "28 March 2010"
++#~ msgstr "28 de marzo de 2010"
++
++#~ msgid "bugfixes and performance improvements"
++#~ msgstr "solución de errores y mejoras de rendimiento"
++
++#~ msgid "1.13"
++#~ msgstr "1.13"
++
++#~ msgid "18 December 2009"
++#~ msgstr "18 de diciembre de 2009"
++
++#~ msgid "broken tarball update"
++#~ msgstr "actualización de archivador «tarball» roto"
++
++#~ msgid "1.12"
++#~ msgstr "1.12"
++
++#~ msgid "new tool features and bugfixes"
++#~ msgstr "nuevas característicacs de la herramienta y errores solucionados"
++
++#~ msgid "1.11"
++#~ msgstr "1.11"
++
++#~ msgid "16 Novemebr 2008"
++#~ msgstr "16 de noviembre de 2008"
++
++#~ msgid "mal"
++#~ msgstr "mal"
++
++#~ msgid "GNOME doc-utils migration"
++#~ msgstr "Migración de GNOME doc-utils"
++
++#~ msgid "xxx_get_type()"
++#~ msgstr "xxx_get_type()"
++
++#~ msgid "<package>-sections.txt"
++#~ msgstr "<paquete>-sections.txt"
++
++#~ msgid "explanation"
++#~ msgstr "explicación"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Missing or wrong naming in <placeholder-1/> file (see <placeholder-2/>)."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Faltan nombres o son erróneos en el archivo <placeholder-1/> (consultar "
++#~ "<placeholder-2/>)."
++
++#~ msgid "GtkWidget"
++#~ msgstr "GtkWidget"
++
++#~ msgid "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++#~ msgstr "<paquete>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++
++#~ msgid "<package>.hierarchy"
++#~ msgstr "<paquete>.jerarquía"
++
++#~ msgid "xml/tree_index.sgml"
++#~ msgstr "xml/tree_index.sgml"
++
++#~ msgid "xml/annotation-glossary.xml"
++#~ msgstr "xml/annotation-glossary.xml"
++
++#~ msgid "Check that <placeholder-1/> is xi:included from <placeholder-2/>."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Compruebe que <placeholder-1/> está «xi:included» desde <placeholder-2/>."
++
++#~| msgid "21 May 2010"
++#~ msgid "17 Jan 2011"
++#~ msgstr "17 de enero 2011"
++
++#~ msgid "6 April 2010"
++#~ msgstr "6 de abril de 2010"
++
++#~ msgid "19 December 2009"
++#~ msgstr "19 de diciembre de 2009"
++
++#~ msgid "(FIXME) (stability) (glib-enums, ...)"
++#~ msgstr "(ARRÉGLAME) (estabilidad) (glib-enums, ...)"
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# French translation of gtk-doc
++# This file is distributed under the same license as the gtk-doc package.
++#
++#
++# Yannick Tailliez <ytdispatch-libre02@yahoo.com>, 2009.
++# Bruno Brouard <annoa.b@gmail.com>, 2009-2010,2012.
++# Claude Paroz <claude@2xlibre.net>, 2010.
++# Gérard Baylard <Geodebay@gmail.com>, 2010.
++# Luc Pionchon <pionchon.luc@gmail.com>, 2011.
++#
++# Ajoutez votre nom aussi à la chaîne translator-credits
++# Daniel Mustieles <daniel.mustieles@gmail.com>, 2012.
++#
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc-help HEAD\n"
++"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-08-11 11:08+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2017-10-19 11:24+0200\n"
++"Last-Translator: Daniel Mustieles <daniel.mustieles@gmail.com>\n"
++"Language-Team: Español <gnome-es-list@gnome.org>\n"
++"Language: fr\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n>1;\n"
++"X-Generator: Poedit 2.0.1\n"
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++msgctxt "_"
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr ""
++"Yannick Tailliez <ytdispatch-libre02@yahoo.com>, 2009\n"
++"Frédéric Péters <fpeters@0d.be>, 2009\n"
++"Bruno Brouard <annoa.b@gmail.com>, 2010,2012\n"
++"Claude Paroz <claude@2xlibre.net>, 2010\n"
++"Gérard Baylard <Geodebay@gmail.com>, 2010\n"
++"Luc Pionchon <pionchon.luc@gmail.com>, 2011"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/title
++#: C/index.docbook:12
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "Manuel de GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/edition
++#: C/index.docbook:13
++msgid "1.24.1"
++msgstr "1.24.1"
++
++#. (itstool) path: abstract/para
++#: C/index.docbook:14
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr ""
++"Manuel utilisateur pour les développeurs contenant les instructions sur "
++"l'usage de GTK-Doc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:16
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:25
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:34
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Kost</surname> <affiliation> "
++#| "<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: publisher/publishername
++#: C/index.docbook:45
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "Projet GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/publisher
++#: C/index.docbook:44
++msgid ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++msgstr ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:48
++msgid "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth et Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:52
++#| msgid "<year>2007-2011</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++msgid "<year>2007-2015</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2007-2015</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:65
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, "
++"Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation "
++"with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A "
++"copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Permission vous est donnée de copier, distribuer et/ou modifier ce document "
++"selon les termes de la <citetitle>licence de documentation libre GNU</"
++"citetitle>, version 1.1 ou ultérieure publiée par la Free Software "
++"Foundation sans section inaltérable, sans texte de première page de "
++"couverture ni texte de dernière page de couverture. Vous trouverez un "
++"exemplaire de cette licence en suivant ce <link linkend=\"fdl\">lien</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:73
++msgid ""
++"Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and "
++"services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME "
++"documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the "
++"GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial "
++"caps."
++msgstr ""
++"La plupart des noms utilisés par les entreprises pour distinguer leurs "
++"produits et services sont des marques déposées. Lorsque ces noms "
++"apparaissent dans la documentation GNOME et que les membres du projet de "
++"Documentation GNOME sont informés de l'existence de ces marques déposées, "
++"soit ces noms entiers, soit leur première lettre est en majuscule."
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:83
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.18.1</revnumber> <date>20 Sep 2011</date> "
++#| "<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>development version</"
++#| "revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.26.1</revnumber> <date>11 Aug 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>development</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.26.1</revnumber> <date>11 Aug 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>développement</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:89
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.18.1</revnumber> <date>20 Sep 2011</date> "
++#| "<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>development version</"
++#| "revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.26</revnumber> <date>11 Aug 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>port all tools from perl/bash to python</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.26</revnumber> <date>11 Aug 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>portage de tous les outils depuis perl/bash vers "
++"python</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:95
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 May 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21 March 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, test cleanups</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21 March 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>corrections d'anomalies, nettoyages de test</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:101
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 May 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>corrections d'anomalies</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:107
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 May 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>corrections d'anomalies\n"
++"</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:113
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>07 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>07 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>corrections d'anomalies, abandon de "
++"fonctionnalités obsolètes</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:119
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 Jul 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 Jul 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>corrections d'anomalies, abandon de "
++"fonctionnalités obsolètes</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:125
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16 Feb 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, markdown support, style improvements</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 janvier 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correctifs et améliorations de mise en page</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:131
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 Feb 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>urgent bug fix update</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 Jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 Jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>corrections d'anomalies</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:137
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, speedups, markdown support</"
++#| "revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 Sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, speedups, markdown support</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 Sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correction de bogues, amélioration de la vitesse "
++"de traitement, prise en charge de markdown</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:143
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 Feb 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>urgent bug fix update</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 février 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>mise à jour pour une correction de bogue urgente</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:149
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 janvier 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correctifs et améliorations de mise en page</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:155
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 May 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 mai 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>corrections d'anomalies et de régressions</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:161
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 March 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes and performance improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 mars 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correctifs et amélioration de performances</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:167
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>broken tarball update</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 décembre 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>mise à jour du tarball brisé</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:173
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>new tool features and "
++"bugfixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 décembre 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>nouvelles fonctionnalités aux "
++"outils et résolution de bogues</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:179
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 November 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>GNOME doc-utils migration</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 novembre 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>Migration à GNOME doc-utils</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:192
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "Introduction"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:194
++msgid ""
++"This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how "
++"it is used."
++msgstr ""
++"Ce chapitre présente GTK-Doc et fournit un aperçu de ce que c'est et de la "
++"manière de l'utiliser."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:200
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "Qu'est-ce que GTK-Doc ?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:202
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the "
++"public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can "
++"also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc est utilisé pour documenter du code C. Il est typiquement utilisé "
++"pour documenter les API publiques de bibliothèques, comme les bibliothèques "
++"GTK+ et GNOME. Mais il peut aussi être utilisé pour documenter du code "
++"d'application."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:210
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "Fonctionnement de GTK-Doc ?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:212
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source "
++"files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the "
++"template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only "
++"document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce "
++"output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc fonctionne en utilisant la documentation de fonctions placées dans "
++"le code source sous la forme de blocs de commentaires avec un formatage "
++"spécifique ou la documentation ajoutée aux fichiers prototypes que GTK-Doc "
++"utilise (notez cependant que GTK-Doc ne documente que les fonctions "
++"déclarées dans des fichiers d'en-tête ; il ne fait rien pour les fonctions "
++"statiques)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:219
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc consists of a number of python scripts, each performing a different "
++"step in the process."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc consiste en un certain nombre de scripts Python, chacun réalisant "
++"une étape du processus."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:224
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "Il y a 5 étapes principales :"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:231
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the "
++"source files with the documentation for each function, macro, union etc. (In "
++"the past information was entered in generated template files, which is not "
++"recommended anymore)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Écriture de la documentation.</guilabel> L'auteur complète les "
++"fichiers sources avec la documentation pour chaque fonction, macro, union, "
++"etc. (dans le passé, l'information était saisie dans les fichiers prototypes "
++"générés mais ce n'est plus recommandé)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:241
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code "
++"looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. "
++"It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> "
++"containing a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according "
++"to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to "
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. The author can rearrange "
++"the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the "
++"final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><"
++"module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations "
++"found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some symbols to show "
++"up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or "
++"the declaration should appear differently, one can place entities similar to "
++"the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><"
++"module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Collecte des informations sur le code.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> analyse les fichiers d'en-tête du "
++"code à la recherche des déclarations de fonctions, de macros, "
++"d'énumérations, de structures et d'unions. Il crée le fichier <filename><"
++"module>-decl-list.txt</filename> contenant une liste des déclarations en "
++"les plaçant dans des sections en accord avec le fichier d'en-tête d'où elles "
++"proviennent. Lors du premier lancement, ce fichier est copié dans "
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. L'auteur peut réorganiser "
++"les sections et l'ordre des déclarations dans celui-ci, pour obtenir l'ordre "
++"final souhaité. Le deuxième fichier généré est <filename><module>-decl."
++"txt</filename>. Ce fichier contient les déclarations complètes trouvées lors "
++"de l'analyse. Si, pour une raison quelconque, on souhaite voir apparaître "
++"dans la documentation des éléments qui n'ont pas été trouvé lors de "
++"l'analyse, ou dont la déclaration doit apparaître différemment, il est "
++"possible d'ajouter des entrées dans <filename><module>-overrides.txt</"
++"filename> similaires à celle de <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:258
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> can also be used to dynamically "
++"query a library about any GObject subclasses it exports. It saves "
++"information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about "
++"any GObject properties and signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> peut aussi être utilisé pour "
++"interroger de manière dynamique une bibliothèque à propos de n'importe "
++"quelle sous-classe de GtkObject qu'elle exporte. Il enregistre les "
++"informations sur la position de chaque objet dans la hiérarchie de classe et "
++"sur tous les arguments et signaux GTK fournis."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:264
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> should not be used anymore. It was "
++"needed in the past when GObject was still GtkObject inside gtk+."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> ne devrait plus être utilisé. Il "
++"était nécessaire par le passé lorsque GObject était encore GtkObject dans gtk"
++"+."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:271
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<guilabel>Generating the SGML/XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel> "
++#| "<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> turns the template files into SGML "
++#| "or XML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or "
++#| "<filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source "
++#| "code contains documentation on functions, using the special comment "
++#| "blocks, it gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only "
++#| "reads docs from sources and introspection data. We recommend to use "
++#| "Docbook XML."
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mkdb</application> turns the template files into XML files in the <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code "
++"contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it "
++"gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads docs from "
++"sources and introspection data."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Génération du SGML/XML et du HTML/PDF.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> transforme les fichiers prototypes en "
++"fichiers SGML ou XML dans le répertoire <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</"
++"filename> ou <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename>. Si le code "
++"source contient de la documentation sur les fonctions, en utilisant les "
++"blocs de commentaires spéciaux, elle sera fusionnée ici. Si aucun fichier "
++"tmpl n'est utilisé, seule la documentation contenue dans les sources et les "
++"données d'introspection seront lues. Nous recommandons l'utilisation de XML "
++"DocBook."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:280
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the SGML/XML files into "
++#| "HTML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> "
++#| "subdirectory. Likewise <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the "
++#| "SGML/XML files into a PDF document called <filename><package>.pdf</"
++#| "filename>."
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the XML files into HTML files "
++"in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. Likewise "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the XML files into a PDF "
++"document called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> transforme les fichiers SGML/XML en "
++"fichiers HTML dans le répertoire <filename class=\"directory\">html/</"
++"filename>. De même <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> transforme les "
++"fichiers SGML/XML en documents PDF appelés <filename><package>.pdf</"
++"filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:286
++msgid ""
++"Files in <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class="
++"\"directory\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One "
++"should never edit them directly."
++msgstr ""
++"Les fichiers dans les répertoires <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</"
++"filename> et <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> sont toujours "
++"écrasés. Il ne faut pas les modifier directement."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:294
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After "
++"installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be "
++"run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, "
++"the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in "
++"the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, "
++"<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-"
++"links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application "
++"will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Résolution des références croisées entre les documents.</guilabel> "
++"Après installation des fichiers HTML, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</"
++"application> peut être exécuté pour résoudre toutes les références croisées "
++"entre les différents documents. Par exemple, la documentation de GTK+ "
++"contient beaucoup de références croisées vers des types documentés dans le "
++"manuel de GLib. Lors de la création de l'archive des sources pour la "
++"distribution, <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> transforme tous les "
++"liens externes en liens Web. Lorsque vous installez la documentation "
++"distribuée (pré-générée), la même application va essayer de retransformer "
++"les liens en liens locaux (là où ces documentations sont installées)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:312
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "Obtention de GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:315
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "Pré-requis"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:316
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>python 2/3</guilabel> - the main scripts are written in python."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>python 2/3</guilabel> - les principaux scripts sont écrits en "
++"Python."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:319
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> - the xslt processor from libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:323
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> - the docbook xsl stylesheets <ulink url="
++"\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type=\"http"
++"\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:327
++msgid ""
++"One of <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</guilabel> "
++"or <guilabel>vim</guilabel> - optional - used for syntax highlighting of "
++"examples"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:335
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "À propos de GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:337 C/index.docbook:351
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(À COMPLETER)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:341
++msgid ""
++"(History, authors, web pages, mailing list, license, future plans, "
++"comparison with other similar systems.)"
++msgstr ""
++"(Historique, auteurs, pages Web, liste de diffusion, licence, projets "
++"futurs, comparaison avec des systèmes similaires.)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:349
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "À propos de ce manuel"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:355
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr "(qui est concerné, où le récupérer, licence)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:364
++msgid "Setting up your project"
++msgstr "Mise en place de votre projet"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:366
++msgid ""
++"The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc into "
++"your project. Theses sections assume we work on a project called 'meep'. "
++"This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user app called "
++"'meeper'. We also assume you will be using autoconf and automake. In "
++"addition section <link linkend=\"plain_makefiles\">plain makefiles or other "
++"build systems</link> will describe the basics needed to work in a different "
++"build setup."
++msgstr ""
++"Les sections suivantes décrivent les étapes à suivre pour intégrer GTK-Doc "
++"dans votre projet. Nous allons supposer que vous travaillez sur un projet "
++"appelé « meep ». Ce projet contient une bibliothèque appelée « libmeep » et "
++"une application « meeper ». Nous supposons également que vous utilisez "
++"autoconf et automake. Dans le cas contraire, la section <link linkend="
++"\"plain_makefiles\">« makefiles » simples et autres systèmes de compilation</"
++"link> décrit les éléments de base à respecter pour travailler dans une autre "
++"configuration de construction."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:377
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "Mise en place du squelette de documentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:379
++msgid ""
++"Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/reference "
++"(this way you can also have docs/help for end-user documentation). It is "
++"recommended to create another subdirectory with the name of the doc-package. "
++"For packages with just one library this step is not necessary."
++msgstr ""
++"Dans le répertoire racine de votre projet, créez les répertoires appelés "
++"docs/reference (de la même façon, vous pouvez avoir docs/help pour la "
++"documentation utilisateur). Il est recommandé de créer un autre sous-"
++"répertoire portant le nom du paquet de documentation. Pour les paquets qui "
++"contiennent seulement une bibliothèque, cette étape n'est pas nécessaire."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:388
++msgid "Example directory structure"
++msgstr "Exemple d'arborescence de répertoires"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:389
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "meep/\n"
++#| " docs/\n"
++#| " reference/\n"
++#| " libmeep/\n"
++#| " meeper/\n"
++#| " src/\n"
++#| " libmeep/\n"
++#| " meeper/\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:386
++msgid "This can then look as shown below: <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr "Cela peut ressembler à ce qui suit : <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:404 C/index.docbook:411
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Intégration avec autoconf"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:406
++msgid ""
++"Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> "
++"script."
++msgstr ""
++"C'est très simple ! Il faut juste ajouter une ligne dans votre script "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:412
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"# check for gtk-doc\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"# check for gtk-doc\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:424
++msgid "Keep gtk-doc optional"
++msgstr "Laisser gtk-doc optionnel"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:425
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"# check for gtk-doc\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"# check for gtk-doc\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:419
++msgid ""
++"This will require all developers to have gtk-doc installed. If it is okay "
++"for your project to have optional api-doc build setup, you can solve this as "
++"below. Keep it as is, as gtkdocize is looking for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</"
++"function> at the start of a line. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Cela impose à tous les développeurs d'installer gtk-doc. Si pour votre "
++"projet, vous pouvez avoir une configuration de construction api-doc "
++"optionnelle, vous pouvez résoudre ce problème comme ci-dessous. Ne le "
++"modifiez pas car gtkdocize recherche <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> au "
++"début d'une ligne. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:436
++msgid ""
++"The first argument is used to check for the gtkdocversion at configure time. "
++"The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</application>. "
++"The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several configure "
++"switches:"
++msgstr ""
++"Le premier argument est utilisé pour vérifier le paramètre gtkdocversion au "
++"moment de la configuration. Le second, en option, est utilisé par "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>. La macro <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</"
++"symbol> ajoute également plusieurs drapeaux de configuration :"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:442
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr ""
++"--with-html-dir=CHEMIN : répertoire d'installation de la documentation,"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:443
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc : utilisation de gtk-doc pour construire la documentation "
++"[par défaut=no],"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:444
++msgid ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : construction de la documentation au format html [par "
++"défaut=yes],"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:445
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: important/para
++#: C/index.docbook:449
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--"
++"enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. "
++"Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for "
++"users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc est désactivé par défaut ! N'oubliez pas de passer l'option "
++"<option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option> lors de la prochaine exécution du script "
++"<filename>configure</filename>. Dans le cas contraire, la documentation pré-"
++"générée est installée (ce qui a du sens pour les utilisateurs mais pas pour "
++"les développeurs)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:457
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside you "
++#| "<filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows "
++#| "<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++#| "definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++msgid ""
++"Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside your "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++"definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++msgstr ""
++"De plus, il est recommandé d'avoir la ligne suivante dans votre script "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. Cela permet à <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application> de copier automatiquement les définitions de macro pour "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> à votre projet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:465
++msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++msgstr "Préparation pour gtkdocize"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:466
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:471
++msgid ""
++"After all changes to <filename>configure.ac</filename> are made, update the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> file. This can be done by re-running "
++"<code>autoreconf -i</code> or <code>autogen.sh</code>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:479
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "Intégration avec automake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the examples "
++#| "subdirectory of the gtkdoc-sources to your project's API documentation "
++#| "directory ( <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package>"
++#| "</filename>). If you have multiple doc-packages repeat this for each one."
++msgid ""
++"First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">examples</filename> sub directory of the <ulink url=\"https://"
++"git.gnome.org/browse/gtk-doc/tree/examples/Makefile.am\">gtkdoc-sources</"
++"ulink> to your project's API documentation directory ( <filename class="
++"\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></filename>). A local copy "
++"should be available under e.g. <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-tools/"
++"examples/Makefile.am</filename>. If you have multiple doc-packages repeat "
++"this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++"Pour commencer, copiez le fichier <filename>Makefile.am</filename> depuis le "
++"sous-répertoire des exemples de gtkdoc-sources vers le répertoire de "
++"documentation d'API du projet (<filename class=\"directory\">./docs/"
++"reference/<paquet></filename>). S'il y a plusieurs paquets de "
++"documentation, répétez cette étape pour chacun d'eux."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:492
++msgid ""
++"The next step is to edit the settings inside the <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>. All the settings have a comment above that describes their "
++"purpose. Most settings are extra flags passed to the respective tools. Every "
++"tool has a variable of the form <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>. "
++"All the tools support <option>--help</option> to list the supported "
++"parameters."
++msgstr ""
++"L'étape suivante est de modifier les options dans le fichier "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Toutes les options sont accompagnées d'un "
++"commentaire au-dessus qui explique leur fonction. La plupart des options "
++"sont des paramètres supplémentaires qui sont passés aux outils respectifs. "
++"Chaque outil possède une variable de la forme <option><NOM_DE_L_OUTIL>"
++"_OPTIONS</option>. Tous les outils prennent en charge l'option <option>--"
++"help</option> qui affiche la liste des options prises en charge."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:506
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "Intégration avec autogen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:508
++msgid ""
++"Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup "
++"the build infrastructure after a checkout from version control system (such "
++"as cvs/svn/git). GTK-Doc comes with a tool called <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application> which can be used in such a script. It should be run before "
++"autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr ""
++"La plupart des projets possède un script <filename>autogen.sh</filename> "
++"pour configurer l'infrastructure de compilation après un « checkout » depuis "
++"un système de gestion de versions (comme cvs/svn/git). GTK-Doc est livré "
++"avec un outil appelé <application>gtkdocize</application>, qui peut être "
++"utilisé dans un script comme celui-ci. Il doit être lancé avant autoheader, "
++"automake ou autoconf."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:517
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Exécution de gtkdocize depuis autogen.sh"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:518
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:524
++msgid ""
++"When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.make</filename> to your project root (or any directory specified by the "
++"<option>--docdir</option> option). It also checks you configure script for "
++"the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> invocation. This macro can be used to "
++"pass extra parameters to <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"Lorsque <filename>gtkdocize</filename> est exécuté, il copie <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.make</filename> vers le répertoire racine de votre projet (ou tout autre "
++"répertoire désigné par l'option <option>--docdir</option>). Il vérifie "
++"également l'invocation de <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> dans le script "
++"configure. Cette macro peut être utilisée pour transmettre des paramètres "
++"supplémentaires à <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:533
++msgid ""
++"Historically GTK-Doc was generating template files where developers entered "
++"the docs. This turned out to be not so good (e.g. the need for having "
++"generated files under version control). Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the tools can get "
++"all the information from source comments and thus the templates can be "
++"avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-"
++"tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. "
++"Besides adding the option directly to the command invocation, they can be "
++"added also to an environment variable called <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</"
++"symbol> or set as a 2nd parameter in <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro in "
++"the configure script. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand and "
++"migrating from older gtkdoc versions, please remove the directory (e.g. from "
++"version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++"Historiquement, GTK-Doc générait des fichiers prototypes dans lesquels les "
++"développeurs saisissaient la documentation. Il s'est avéré que ce n'était "
++"pas une bonne idée (comme le besoin de placer les fichiers générés dans le "
++"gestionnaire de versions). Depuis GTK-Doc 1.9, les outils peuvent récupérer "
++"toutes les informations à partir des commentaires dans les sources, ce qui "
++"permet d'éviter d'avoir des prototypes. Nous vous encourageons à conserver "
++"la documentation dans le code. <application>gtkdocize</application> prend "
++"maintenant en charge une option <option>--flavour=no-tmpl</option> qui "
++"choisit un makefile qui s'affranchit totalement de l'utilisation des "
++"fichiers prototypes (tmpl). En plus d'ajouter les options directement au "
++"moment de l'appel de la commande, elles peuvent être ajoutées également dans "
++"une variable d'environnement appelée <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> ou "
++"choisies comme deuxième paramètre dans la macro <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</"
++"symbol> dans le script de configuration. Si aucune modification n'a été "
++"faite à la main dans les fichiers prototypes et si vous migrez à partir "
++"d'anciennes versions de gtkdoc, supprimez le répertoire (par ex. à partir du "
++"système de gestion de versions)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:550 C/index.docbook:567
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "Lancement de la construction de la documentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:552
++msgid ""
++"After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then "
++"give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run "
++"<filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++"Après toutes ces étapes, il est temps de lancer la construction. Tout "
++"d'abord, il faut relancer <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. Si ce script "
++"lance « configure » pour vous, alors il faut ajouter l'option <option>--"
++"enable-gtk-doc</option>, sinon lancez manuellement <filename>configure</"
++"filename> suivi de cette option."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:559
++msgid ""
++"The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-"
++"directories. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past ."
++"sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"La première exécution de make génère plusieurs fichiers supplémentaires dans "
++"les répertoires de documentation (doc-directories). Les plus importants "
++"sont : <filename><paquet>.types</filename>, <filename><paquet>-"
++"docs.xml</filename> (anciennement .sgml), <filename><paquet>-sections."
++"txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:568
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++#| "make\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:574
++msgid ""
++"Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. But hang-on, "
++"during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages with life."
++msgstr ""
++"Maintenant, vous pouvez saisir l'adresse <filename>docs/reference/<"
++"paquet>/index.html</filename> dans votre navigateur. Le résultat est "
++"encore un peu décevant mais le prochain chapitre va expliquer comment donner "
++"de la vie à ces pages."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:582
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "Intégration avec des systèmes de gestion de versions"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:584
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "As a rule of the thumb, it's those files you edit, that should go under "
++#| "version control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><"
++#| "package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs..xml</"
++#| "filename> (in the past .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++#| "filename>, <filename>Makefile.am</filename>"
++msgid ""
++"As a rule of thumb, it's the files you edit which should go under version "
++"control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><package>."
++"types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the "
++"past .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Comme le veut la règle de base, ce sont les fichiers que vous modifiez qui "
++"doivent être placés dans le système de gestion de versions. Pour les projets "
++"typiques, ce sont ces fichiers : <filename><paquet>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><paquet>-docs.xml</filename> (anciennement .sgml), "
++"<filename><paquet>-sections.txt</filename>, <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:592
++msgid ""
++"Files in the <filename>xml/</filename> and <filename>html/</filename> "
++"directories should not go under version control. Neither should any of the "
++"<filename>.stamp</filename> files."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:600
++msgid "Integration with plain makefiles or other build systems"
++msgstr ""
++"Intégration avec des « makefiles » simples et d'autres systèmes de "
++"compilation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:602
++msgid ""
++"In the case one does not want to use automake and therefore <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.mak</filename> one will need to call the gtkdoc tools in the right order "
++"in own makefiles (or other build tools)."
++msgstr ""
++"Dans les cas où l'emploi de automake n'est pas souhaité et donc sans fichier "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename>, il s'agit alors d'appeler les outils "
++"gtkdoc dans le bon ordre dans les fichiers « makefiles » ad hoc (ou d'autres "
++"systèmes)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:609
++msgid "Documentation build steps"
++msgstr "Étapes de construction de la documentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:610
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++#| "// sources have changed\n"
++#| "gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --source-dir=...\n"
++#| "gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++#| "gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml\n"
++#| "// xml files have changed\n"
++#| "mkdir html\n"
++#| "cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++#| "gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <source-dir>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<source-dir>\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <source-dir>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<source-dir>\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:624
++msgid ""
++"One will need to look at the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> and "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> to pick the extra options needed."
++msgstr ""
++"Il s'agit d'examiner les fichiers <filename>Makefile.am</filename> et "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> pour y trouver les options supplémentaires "
++"nécessaires."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:631
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid "Integration with plain makefiles or other build systems"
++msgid "Integration with CMake build systems"
++msgstr ""
++"Intégration avec des « makefiles » simples et d'autres systèmes de "
++"compilation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:633
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc now provides a <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename> module (and "
++"the corresponding <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename> module). "
++"This provides a <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal> command that you can "
++"set in your <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:643
++msgid "Example of using GTK-Doc from CMake"
++msgstr "Exemple d'utilisation de GTK-Doc depuis CMake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:644
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Create the doc-libmeep target.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Build doc-libmeep as part of the default target. Without this, you would\n"
++"# have to explicitly run something like `make doc-libmeep` to build the docs.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Install the docs. (This assumes you're using the GNUInstallDirs CMake module\n"
++"# to set the CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR variable correctly).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Create the doc-libmeep target.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Build doc-libmeep as part of the default target. Without this, you would\n"
++"# have to explicitly run something like `make doc-libmeep` to build the docs.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Install the docs. (This assumes you're using the GNUInstallDirs CMake module\n"
++"# to set the CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR variable correctly).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:641
++msgid "The following example shows how to use this command. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"L'exemple suivant montre comment utiliser cette commande. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:669
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "Documentation du code"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:671
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code "
++"documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure "
++"from other sources. During the next section you will find all information "
++"about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc utilise les commentaires du code source, avec une syntaxe spéciale "
++"pour la documentation du code. En outre, il récupère des informations sur la "
++"structure de votre projet à partir d'autres sources. La section suivante "
++"vous donne toutes les informations concernant la syntaxe des commentaires."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/title
++#: C/index.docbook:679
++msgid "Documentation placement"
++msgstr "Emplacement de la documentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:680
++msgid ""
++"In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing inside "
++"the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the disadvantages that the "
++"information is often not updated and also that the file tend to cause "
++"conflicts with version control systems."
++msgstr ""
++"Par le passé, la plupart de la documentation devait être placé dans des "
++"fichiers dans le répertoire <filename>tmpl</filename>. Les inconvénients "
++"étaient que l'information n'était pas souvent mise à jour et que ces "
++"fichiers avaient tendance à provoquer des conflits avec les systèmes de "
++"gestion de versions."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:686
++msgid ""
++"The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the documentation "
++"inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way of documenting "
++"code."
++msgstr ""
++"Pour éviter ces problèmes, il est conseillé de placer la documentation dans "
++"le code source. Ce manuel ne décrit que cette manière de documenter du code."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:697 C/index.docbook:723
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "Bloc de commentaire GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:698
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++#| "/* unparseable code here */\n"
++#| "#endif\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:693
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "The scanner can handle the majority of c headers fine. In the case of "
++#| "receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special case, one "
++#| "can hint GTK-Doc to skip over them. <_:example-1/>"
++msgid ""
++"The scanner can handle the majority of C headers fine. In the case of "
++"receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special case, one can "
++"hint GTK-Doc to skip over them. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"L'analyse peut prendre en charge de manière correcte la majorité des en-"
++"têtes C. Au cours de l'analyse, en cas d'apparition d'avertissements qui ont "
++"l'air d'être des cas spéciaux, vous pouvez indiquer à GTK-Doc de les passer. "
++"<_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/title
++#: C/index.docbook:707
++#| msgid "Dedications"
++msgid "Limitations"
++msgstr "Limitations"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:708
++msgid ""
++"Note, that GTK-Doc's supports <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> but "
++"not <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> or other combinations."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:718
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "Commentaires de documentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:724
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "/**\n"
++#| " * identifier:\n"
++#| " * documentation ...\n"
++#| " */\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:720
++msgid ""
++"A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation "
++"block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Un commentaire multi-ligne qui commence avec un symbole « * » supplémentaire "
++"indique un bloc de documentation qui sera traité par les outils GTK-Doc. <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:733
++msgid ""
++"The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is "
++"related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add "
++"table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++"L'« identifier » (identifiant) est une ligne contenant le nom de l'élément "
++"avec lequel le commentaire est lié. La syntaxe diffère légèrement en "
++"fonction de l'élément. (À FAIRE : ajouter un tableau montrant les "
++"identifiants)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:739
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol "
++#| "types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter "
++#| "description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards "
++#| "follows the detailed description. All lines (outside program- listings "
++#| "and CDATA sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted "
++#| "to paragraph breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that "
++#| "into ' * ' (blank-asterisk-blank-blank). This is useful in preformatted "
++#| "text (code listings)."
++msgid ""
++"The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol "
++"types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter "
++"description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows "
++"the detailed description. All lines (outside program listings and CDATA "
++"sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph "
++"breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-"
++"asterisk-blank-blank). This is useful in preformatted text (code listings)."
++msgstr ""
++"Le bloc « documentation » est aussi différent pour chaque type de symbole. "
++"Les type de symbole qui prennent des paramètres comme les fonctions ou les "
++"macros commencent par une description des paramètres suivie par une ligne "
++"blanche (juste un « * »). Ensuite, vient la description détaillée. Toutes "
++"les lignes (à l'exception des sections de code et des sections CDATA) "
++"contenant seulement un « * » (espace-astérisque) sont converties en saut de "
++"paragraphe. Si vous ne désirez pas de saut de paragraphe, modifiez-les en "
++"« * » (espace-astérisque-espace-espace)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:756
++msgid ""
++"What it is: The name for a class or function can sometimes be misleading for "
++"people coming from a different background."
++msgstr ""
++"Ce que c'est : le nom d'une classe ou d'une fonction peut parfois être "
++"trompeur pour les personnes habituées à d'autres environnements."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:762
++msgid ""
++"What it does: Tell about common uses. Put it in relation with the other API."
++msgstr ""
++"Ce qu'il fait : indiquer les usages courants. À mettre en relation avec les "
++"autres API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:752
++msgid "When documenting code, describe two aspects: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"En documentant le code, deux aspects doivent être abordés : <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:777
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Utilisez fonction() pour vous référer à des fonctions ou des macros qui "
++"prennent des arguments."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:782
++msgid ""
++"Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to "
++"parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr ""
++"Utilisez @paramètre pour vous référer aux paramètres. Utilisez-le aussi pour "
++"les paramètres d'autres fonctions, en relation avec celle décrite."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:788
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr ""
++"Utilisez %constante pour vous référer à une constante, par ex. : "
++"%MA_CONSTANTE."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:793
++msgid ""
++"Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and "
++"macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Utilisez #symbole pour vous référer à d'autres types de symbole. Par exemple "
++"des structures, énumérations ou macros qui ne prennent pas d'arguments."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:799
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal"
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal."
++msgstr "Utilisez #Objet::signal pour vous référer à un signal GObject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:804
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property"
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property."
++msgstr "Utilisez #Objet::propriété pour vous référer à une propriété GObject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:809
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid "Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure."
++msgid ""
++"Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure and #GObjectClass."
++"foo_bar() to refer to a vmethod."
++msgstr "Utilisez #Structure.champ pour vous référer au champ d'une stucture."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:771
++msgid ""
++"One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in "
++"the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. "
++"GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"L'un des avantages de l'hypertexte par rapport au texte simple, c'est la "
++"possibilité d'avoir des liens dans les documents. Écrire correctement le "
++"balisage d'un lien peut être fastidieux. GTK-Doc fournit plusieurs "
++"raccourcis utiles pour vous aider. <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:818
++msgid ""
++"If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or "
++"'#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML "
++"entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&"
++"commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them "
++"with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++"Si vous avez besoin d'utiliser les caractères spéciaux « '<', '> », "
++"« () », « @ », « % » ou « # » dans votre documentation sans que GTK-Doc ne "
++"les interprète, vous pouvez utiliser les entités XML « &lt; », « &"
++"gt; », « &lpar; », « &rpar; », « &commat; », « &percnt; », "
++"« &num; » ou les échapper en les précédant d'un antislash « \\ »."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:827
++msgid ""
++"DocBook can do more than just links. One can also have lists, examples, "
++"headings, and images. As of version 1.20, the preferred way is to use a "
++"subset of the basic text formatting syntax called <ulink url=\"http://"
++"daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink>. On older GTK-Doc "
++"versions any documentation that includes Markdown will be rendered as is. "
++"For example, list items will appear as lines starting with a dash."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:838
++msgid ""
++"While markdown is now preferred one can mix both. One limitation here is "
++"that one can use docbook xml within markdown, but markdown within docbook "
++"xml is not supported."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:844
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "DocBook can do more than just links. One can also have lists, tables and "
++#| "examples. To enable the usage of docbook SGML/XML tags inside doc-"
++#| "comments you need to have <option>--xml-mode</option> or <option>--sgml-"
++#| "mode</option> in the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside "
++#| "<filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgid ""
++"In older GTK-Doc releases, if you need support for additional formatting, "
++"you would need to enable the usage of docbook XML tags inside doc-comments "
++"by putting <option>--xml-mode</option> (or <option>--sgml-mode</option>) in "
++"the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"DocBook peut faire plus que des liens. Il peut aussi générer des listes, des "
++"tableaux et des exemples. Pour activer l'utilisation des balises SGML/XML "
++"DocBook dans les commentaires de documentation, vous devez avoir une des "
++"options <option>--xml-mode</option> ou <option>--sgml-mode</option> dans la "
++"variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> du fichier <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:853
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid "GTK-Doc comment block using markdown"
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block using Markdown"
++msgstr "Bloc de commentaire GTK-Doc utilisant la syntaxe markdown"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:854
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * documentation paragraph ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Second Sub Heading\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading With a Link Anchor # {#heading-two}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * more documentation:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 1\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Paragraph inside a list item.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. another numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Another paragraph. [A Link to the GNOME Website](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [A link to the heading anchor above][heading-two]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * A C-language example:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Gorgeous!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:893
++msgid ""
++"More examples of what markdown tags are supported can be found in the <ulink "
++"url=\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/Markdown"
++"\">GTK+ Documentation Markdown Syntax Reference</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:899
++msgid ""
++"As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one "
++"cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to "
++"comment those symbols too. This helps other to understand you code. "
++"Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the "
++"2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made public, "
++"all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and insert "
++"the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++"Comme indiqué plus tôt, GTK-Doc est fait pour documenter les API publiques. "
++"On ne peut donc pas écrire de la documentation pour les symboles statiques. "
++"Néanmoins, il est bon de commenter ces symboles aussi. Cela aide les autres "
++"à comprendre votre code. Par conséquent, nous recommandons de les documenter "
++"à l'aide de commentaires normaux (sans le second « * » à la première ligne). "
++"Si, plus tard, la fonction doit être rendue publique, il suffira juste "
++"d'ajouter un « * » dans le bloc de commentaires et d'ajouter le nom du "
++"symbole à la bonne place à l'intérieur du fichier des sections."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:913
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "Documentation des sections"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:915
++msgid ""
++"Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or "
++"module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short "
++"description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Chaque section de la documentation contient des informations sur une classe "
++"ou un module. Pour introduire le composant, il est possible d'écrire un bloc "
++"de section. La description courte est également utilisée dans la table des "
++"matières. Tous les @champs sont facultatifs."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:923
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "Bloc de commentaires de section"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:924
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "/**\n"
++#| " * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++#| " * @short_description: the application class\n"
++#| " * @title: Meep application\n"
++#| " * @section_id:\n"
++#| " * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++#| " * @stability: Stable\n"
++#| " * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++#| " * @image: application.png\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * The application class handles ...\n"
++#| " */\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:943
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr "SECTION:<nom>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:945
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the "
++#| "<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name give "
++#| "here should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-"
++#| "sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgid ""
++"The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name given here "
++"should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Le nom relie la section de la documentation à la partie respective dans le "
++"fichier <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>. Le nom fourni ici "
++"doit correspondre à la balise <FILE> du fichier <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:954
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@short_description"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:956
++msgid ""
++"A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the "
++"links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr ""
++"Une description de la section en une seule ligne, elle apparaîtra derrière "
++"les liens dans la table des matières et au début de la page de la section."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:963
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr "@title"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:965
++msgid ""
++"The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It "
++"can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr ""
++"Par défaut, la section titre est celle de la déclaration SECTION: <"
++"nom>. Elle peut être modifiée grâce au champ @title."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:972
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr "@section_id"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:974
++msgid ""
++"Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <"
++"title> is used as a section_id and for other sections it is <"
++"MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++"Remplace l'utilisation du titre comme identificateur de section. Pour "
++"GObjects, <title> est utilisé à la place de section_id et pour les "
++"autres sections, c'est <MODULE>-<title>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:982
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@see_also"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:984
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section."
++msgstr "Une liste de symboles qui ont un lien avec cette section."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:990
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:997
++msgid ""
++"Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third "
++"parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have "
++"confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after "
++"the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major "
++"release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be "
++"rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++"« Stable » - L'intention d'une interface stable est de permettre à des "
++"parties tierces de développer des applications pour ces interfaces, de les "
++"distribuer et d'avoir l'assurance qu'elles fonctionneront avec toutes les "
++"versions mineures du produit (après celle où l'interface a été introduite et "
++"pour le même numéro de version majeur). De plus, à chaque version majeure, "
++"les modifications incompatibles doivent être rares et être sérieusement "
++"justifiées."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1009
++msgid ""
++"Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are "
++"typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly "
++"changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a "
++"more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source "
++"or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++"« Unstable » - Les interfaces instables sont expérimentales ou en "
++"transition. Elles sont généralement utilisées pour que les développeurs "
++"extérieurs aient un accès précoce aux technologies nouvelles ou en évolution "
++"rapide, ou de fournir une solution temporaire à un problème pour lequel une "
++"solution plus générale est prévue. Aucune exigence n'est demandée à propos "
++"de la compatibilité binaire ou de celle des sources, d'une version mineure à "
++"l'autre."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1021
++msgid ""
++"Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but "
++"that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in "
++"specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++"« Private » - C'est une interface qui peut être utilisée dans le noyau GNOME "
++"lui-même, mais qui n'est pas documentée pour les utilisateurs finaux. Ce "
++"type de fonctions ne doit être utilisé que dans des cas spécifiques et "
++"documentés."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1030
++msgid ""
++"Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require "
++"end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be "
++"Internal."
++msgstr ""
++"« Internal » - C'est une interface qui est interne à un module et qui ne "
++"nécessite pas de documentation pour l'utilisateur final. Les fonctions non "
++"documentées sont considérées comme internes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:992
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "A informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend "
++#| "the use of one of these terms: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgid ""
++"An informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend "
++"the use of one of these terms: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Une description informelle du niveau de stabilité de cet API. Il est "
++"recommandé d'utiliser l'un de ces termes : <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1042
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1044
++msgid ""
++"The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a "
++"comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Les fichiers <literal>#include</literal> à afficher dans le résumé de la "
++"section (liste d'éléments séparés par des virgules), elle outrepasse la "
++"valeur globale du <link linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">fichier de section</"
++"link> ou de la ligne de commande. Cet élément est facultatif."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1053
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr "@image"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1055
++msgid ""
++"The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This "
++"will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of "
++"a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"L'image à afficher en haut de la page de référence pour cette section. C'est "
++"très souvent une espèce de diagramme pour illustrer l'apparence visuelle "
++"d'une classe ou un diagramme de ses relations avec d'autres classes. Cet "
++"élément est facultatif."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1066
++msgid ""
++"To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs "
++"into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++"Pour éviter des recompilations inutiles après des modifications de la "
++"documentation, placez la documentation de section dans les fichiers sources "
++"C, lorsque cela est possible."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1075
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "Documentation des symboles"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1077
++msgid ""
++"Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is "
++"documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the "
++"definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus "
++"functions are usually documented in the c-source and macros, structs and "
++"enums in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++"Chaque symbole (fonction, macro, structure, énumération, signal et "
++"propriété) est documenté dans un bloc séparé. Il est mieux de placer le bloc "
++"près de la définition de son symbole pour faciliter sa synchronisation. Par "
++"conséquent, les fonctions sont habituellement documentées dans les fichiers "
++"sources C et les macros et les structures et les énumérations le sont dans "
++"le fichier d'en-tête."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1085 C/index.docbook:1151
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr "Étiquettes générales"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1087
++msgid ""
++"You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell "
++"when an API was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez ajouter des informations de version à tous les éléments de "
++"documentation pour indiquer quand l'API a été introduite ou quand elle est "
++"devenue obsolète."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1092
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr "Étiquettes de version"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1093
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "« Since »:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1095
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr ""
++"Texte indiquant depuis quelle version du code cette API est disponible."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1100
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "« Deprecated » :"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1102
++msgid ""
++"Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The "
++"description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr ""
++"Texte indiquant que cette fonction ne doit plus être utilisée. La "
++"description doit rediriger le lecteur vers la nouvelle API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1110
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell "
++#| "when an API was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgid ""
++"You can also add stability information to all documentation elements to "
++"indicate whether API stability is guaranteed for them for all future minor "
++"releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez ajouter des informations de version à tous les éléments de "
++"documentation pour indiquer quand l'API a été introduite ou quand elle est "
++"devenue obsolète."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1116
++msgid ""
++"The default stability level for all documentation elements can be set by "
++"passing the <option>--default-stability</option> argument to "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> with one of the values below."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1122
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid "@stability"
++msgid "Stability Tags"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1123
++msgid "Stability: Stable"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1125
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as stable. This is for public APIs which are guaranteed to "
++"remain stable for all future minor releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1132
++msgid "Stability: Unstable"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1134
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as unstable. This is for public APIs which are released as "
++"a preview before being stabilised."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1140
++msgid "Stability: Private"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1142
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as private. This is for interfaces which can be used by "
++"tightly coupled modules, but not by arbitrary third parties."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1152
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "/**\n"
++#| " * foo_get_bar:\n"
++#| " * @foo: some foo\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * Since: 2.6\n"
++#| " * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++#| " **/\n"
++#| "Bar *\n"
++#| "foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++#| "{\n"
++#| "...\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1172 C/index.docbook:1182
++#| msgid "Installation"
++msgid "Annotations"
++msgstr "Annotations"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1174
++msgid ""
++"Documentation blocks can contain annotation-tags. These tags will be "
++"rendered with tooltips describing their meaning. The tags are used by "
++"gobject-introspection to generate language bindings. A detailed list of the "
++"supported tags can be found on <ulink url=\"http://live.gnome.org/"
++"GObjectIntrospection/Annotations\" type=\"http\">the wiki</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1183
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: (annotation): @foo's bar\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (annotation) (another annotation)\n"
++" * (and another annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation) (another annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Sets bar on @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1204 C/index.docbook:1233
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "Bloc de commentaires pour les fonctions"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1210
++msgid ""
++"Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/"
++"unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++"d'indiquer si les objets, listes, chaînes, etc. retournés doivent être freed/"
++"unfreed/released,"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1216
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr ""
++"d'indiquer si les paramètres peuvent être NULL et ce qui se passe dans ce "
++"cas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1221
++msgid ""
++"Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr ""
++"Mentionner les pré-conditions et post-conditions intéressantes si nécessaire."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1206 C/index.docbook:1292
++msgid "Please remember to: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "N'oubliez pas : <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1228
++msgid ""
++"Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are "
++"private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc considère que tous les symboles (macros, fonctions) commençant par "
++"« _ » sont privés. Ils sont traités comme des fonctions statiques."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1234
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "/**\n"
++#| " * function_name:\n"
++#| " * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++#| " * one line.\n"
++#| " * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++#| " * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++#| " * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++#| " * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++#| " * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * Returns: an integer.\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * Since: 2.2\n"
++#| " * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++#| " */\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1255
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr "Étiquettes de fonction"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1256 C/index.docbook:1463
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "« Returns » :"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1258
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr "Paragraphe décrivant le résultat retourné."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1263
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr "@...:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1265
++msgid ""
++"In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag "
++"(@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++"Au cas où la fonction possède des arguments variables, vous devriez utiliser "
++"cette étiquette (@Varargs : peut également être utilisé pour des raisons "
++"historiques)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1275 C/index.docbook:1277
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "Bloc de commentaires pour les propriétés"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1278
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "/**\n"
++#| " * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * Here you can document a property.\n"
++#| " */\n"
++#| "g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1290 C/index.docbook:1309
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "Bloc de commentaires pour les signaux"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1296
++msgid ""
++"Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or "
++"after other signals."
++msgstr ""
++"Documenter lorsque le signal est émis et s'il est émis avant ou après "
++"d'autres signaux,"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1302
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr ""
++"Documenter ce qu'une application pourrait faire dans le gestionnaire du "
++"signal."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1310
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "/**\n"
++#| " * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++#| " * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++#| " * @foo: some foo\n"
++#| " * @bar: some bar\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++#| " */\n"
++#| "foo_signals[FOOBARIZE] =\n"
++#| " g_signal_new (\"foobarize\",\n"
++#| " ...\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZE] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarize\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZE] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarize\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1327 C/index.docbook:1328
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "Bloc de commentaire pour les structures"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1329
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "/**\n"
++#| " * FooWidget:\n"
++#| " * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++#| " */\n"
++#| "typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++#| " /*< private >*/\n"
++#| " GtkWidget parent;\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " /*< public >*/\n"
++#| " gboolean bar;\n"
++#| "} FooWidget;\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1344
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Utilisez <code>/*< private >*/</code> avant les champs de structures "
++"privées que vous voulez cacher. Utilisez <code>/*< public >*/</code> "
++"dans le cas contraire."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1350
++msgid ""
++"If the first field is \"g_iface\", \"parent_instance\" or \"parent_class\" "
++"it will be considered private automatically and doesn't need to be mentioned "
++"in the comment block."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1356
++msgid ""
++"Struct comment blocks can also be used for GObjects and GObjectClasses. It "
++"is usually a good idea to add a comment block for a class, if it has "
++"vmethods (as this is how they can be documented). For the GObject itself one "
++"can use the related section docs, having a separate block for the instance "
++"struct would be useful if the instance has public fields. One disadvantage "
++"here is that this creates two index entries of the same name (the structure "
++"and the section)."
++msgstr ""
++"Les blocs de commentaire pour les structures peuvent aussi être utilisés "
++"avec GObjects et GObjectClasses. Il est normalement recommandé d'ajouter un "
++"bloc de commentaire pour une classe, si elle contient des vmethods (car "
++"c'est la manière de les documenter). Pour GObject, il est possible "
++"d'utiliser la documentation de section correspondante ; la présence d'un "
++"bloc séparé pour la structure de l'instance serait utile si l'instance "
++"possède des champs publics. Le désavantage ici étant que cela crée deux "
++"entrées d'index pour le même nom (la structure et la section)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1368 C/index.docbook:1369
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr "Bloc de commentaire pour les énumérations"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1370
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "/**\n"
++#| " * Something:\n"
++#| " * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++#| " * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " **/\n"
++#| "typedef enum {\n"
++#| " SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++#| " SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++#| " /*< private >*/\n"
++#| " SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++#| "} Something;\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1387
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Utilisez <code>/*< private >*/</code> avant les valeurs d'énumérations "
++"privées que vous voulez cacher. Utilisez <code>/*< public >*/</code> "
++"dans le cas contraire."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1398
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgid "Inline program documentation"
++msgstr "Mise en place du squelette de documentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1399
++msgid ""
++"You can document programs and their commandline interface using inline "
++"documentation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1405
++msgid "Tags"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1407
++msgid "PROGRAM"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1410
++msgid "Defines the start of a program documentation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1417
++#| msgid "@short_description"
++msgid "@short_description:"
++msgstr "@short_description:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1419
++msgid "Defines a short description of the program. (Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1426
++msgid "@synopsis:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1428
++msgid ""
++"Defines the arguments, or list of arguments that the program can take. "
++"(Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1436
++#| msgid "@see_also"
++msgid "@see_also:"
++msgstr "@see_also:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1438
++msgid "See Also manual page section. (Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1445
++msgid "@arg:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1447
++msgid "Argument(s) passed to the program and their description. (Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1454
++#| msgid "@short_description"
++msgid "Description:"
++msgstr "Description:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1456
++msgid "A longer description of the program."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1465
++msgid "Specificy what value(s) the program returns. (Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1474
++msgid "Example of program documentation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1475
++msgid "Program documentation block"
++msgstr "Bloc de documentation programme"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1476
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * PROGRAM:test-program\n"
++" * @short_description: A test program\n"
++" * @synopsis: test-program [*OPTIONS*...] --arg1 *arg* *FILE*\n"
++" * @see_also: test(1)\n"
++" * @--arg1 *arg*: set arg1 to *arg*\n"
++" * @--arg2 *arg*: set arg2 to *arg*\n"
++" * @-v, --version: Print the version number\n"
++" * @-h, --help: Print the help message\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Long description of program.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: Zero on success, non-zero on failure\n"
++" */\n"
++"int main(int argc, char *argv[])\n"
++"{\n"
++"\treturn 0;\n"
++"}\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1502
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr "Balises DocBook utiles"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1504
++msgid ""
++"Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr ""
++"Voici quelques balises DocBook très utiles pendant la conception de la "
++"documentation d'un code."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1513
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1509
++msgid ""
++"To link to another section in the GTK docs: <_:informalexample-1/> The "
++"linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. "
++"For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and "
++"then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class "
++"name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++"Pour créer un lien vers une autre section dans la documentation GTK : <_:"
++"informalexample-1/> l'élément « linkend » est l'identifiant SGML/XML de "
++"l'élément le plus haut sur la page vers laquelle vous voulez pointer. Pour "
++"la plupart des pages, c'est en général la partie (« gtk », « gdk », "
++"« glib ») suivi du titre de la page (« Hash Tables »). Pour les éléments "
++"graphiques, c'est simplement le nom de la classe. Les espaces et les "
++"caractères de soulignement sont convertis en « - » pour être conforme au "
++"SGML/XML."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1526
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<function>...</function>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1523
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Pour faire référence à une fonction externe comme, par exemple, à une "
++"fonction C standard : <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1535
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<example>\n"
++#| " <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++#| " <programlisting>\n"
++#| " ...\n"
++#| " </programlisting>\n"
++#| "</example>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1546
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<informalexample>\n"
++#| " <programlisting>\n"
++#| " ...\n"
++#| " </programlisting>\n"
++#| "</informalexample>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1532
++msgid ""
++"To include example code: <_:informalexample-1/> or possibly this, for very "
++"short code fragments which don't need a title: <_:informalexample-2/> For "
++"the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation: |[ ... ]|"
++msgstr ""
++"Pour inclure des extraits de code : <_:informalexample-1/> ou ceci, pour des "
++"petits fragments de code qui ne nécessitent pas de titre : <_:"
++"informalexample-2/> Pour ces derniers, GTK-Doc prend également en charge une "
++"abréviation : |[ ... ]|"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1565
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<itemizedlist>\n"
++#| " <listitem>\n"
++#| " <para>\n"
++#| " ...\n"
++#| " </para>\n"
++#| " </listitem>\n"
++#| " <listitem>\n"
++#| " <para>\n"
++#| " ...\n"
++#| " </para>\n"
++#| " </listitem>\n"
++#| "</itemizedlist>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1562
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Pour ajouter une liste à puces : <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1585
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<note>\n"
++#| " <para>\n"
++#| " Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++#| " </para>\n"
++#| "</note>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1582
++msgid ""
++"To include a note which stands out from the text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Pour ajouter une note de bas de page : <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1598
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1595
++msgid "To refer to a type: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Pour se référer à un type : <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1607
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1604
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Pour se référer à une structure externe (non décrite dans la documentation "
++"GTK) : <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1616
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1613
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Pour se référer à un champ d'une structure : <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1625
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1622
++msgid ""
++"To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <_:informalexample-1/> but "
++"you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link "
++"to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the "
++"abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Pour se référer au nom d'une classe, il est possible d'utiliser : <_:"
++"informalexample-1/> mais vous utiliserez probablement #GtkWidget à la place "
++"(pour créer automatiquement un lien vers la page GtkWidget - consultez <link "
++"linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">les raccourcis</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1636
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1633
++msgid "To emphasize text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Pour mettre en évidence un texte : <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1645
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1642
++msgid "For filenames use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Pour les noms de fichiers : <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1654
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1651
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Pour se référer à des touches : <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1664
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr "Remplissage des fichiers supplémentaires"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1666
++msgid ""
++"There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the "
++"inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past .sgml), "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Il y a plusieurs fichiers supplémentaires, qui ont besoin d'être maintenus "
++"en parallèle aux commentaires dans le code source : <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> "
++"(anciennement .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1675
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr "Édition des fichiers types"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1677
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "If your library or application includes GtkObjects/GObjects, you want "
++#| "their signals, arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be "
++#| "shown in the documentation. All you need to do, is to list the "
++#| "<function>xxx_get_type</function> functions together with their include "
++#| "inside the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgid ""
++"If your library or application includes GObjects, you want their signals, "
++"arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the "
++"documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</"
++"function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Si votre bibliothèque ou application contient des GtkObjects ou GObjects, "
++"vous voudrez que leurs signaux, arguments/paramètres et position dans la "
++"hiérarchie soient affichés dans la documentation. Il vous suffit juste de "
++"lister les fonctions <function>xxx_get_type</function> ainsi que leur "
++"fichier inclus dans le fichier <filename><package>.types</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1686
++msgid "Example types file snippet"
++msgstr "Extrait d'un exemple de fichiers types"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1687
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++#| "gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++#| "gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++#| "gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1698
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this "
++"list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not "
++"dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++"Depuis GTK-Doc 1.8, <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> peut générer "
++"cette liste pour vous. Ajoutez simplement l'option « --rebuild-types » à "
++"SCAN_OPTIONS dans le fichier <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Si vous "
++"utilisez cette approche vous ne devriez pas distribuer le fichier « types », "
++"ni l'avoir dans le système de gestion de versions."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1707
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr "Édition du document maître"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1709
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the "
++"inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page "
++"per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them "
++"and place them in an order."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc génère de la documentation au format SGML/XML DocBook. Lors du "
++"traitement des commentaires dans les fichiers sources, les outils GTK-Doc "
++"génèrent une page de documentation par classe ou par module dans un fichier "
++"séparé. Le document maître les inclut et les place dans l'ordre."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1716
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later run will "
++#| "not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the "
++#| "documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-"
++#| "Doc has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated "
++#| "from scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if "
++#| "there are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgid ""
++"While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later runs will "
++"not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the "
++"documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc "
++"has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from "
++"scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there "
++"are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++"Une fois que GTK-Doc a créé un prototype de document maître pour vous, il ne "
++"va plus y toucher par la suite. Vous pouvez ainsi structurer votre "
++"documentation comme vous l'entendez. Vous pouvez regrouper des pages et en "
++"ajouter. GTK-Doc possède maintenant une panoplie de tests, dans laquelle "
++"même le document maître est recréé à partir de zéro. C'est une bonne idée de "
++"regarder cela de temps en temps pour voir s'il n'y a pas des nouveautés "
++"intéressantes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1726
++msgid ""
++"Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The "
++"benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API "
++"documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol "
++"documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along "
++"with the library."
++msgstr ""
++"Ne créez pas de tutoriels comme documents supplémentaires. Écrivez juste des "
++"chapitres supplémentaires. L'avantage d'inclure le tutoriel de votre "
++"bibliothèque directement dans la documentation de l'API est qu'il est facile "
++"d'y ajouter des liens qui pointent vers la documentation des symboles. De "
++"plus, il y aura plus de chance que votre tutoriel soit mis à jour en même "
++"temps que la bibliothèque."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1735
++msgid ""
++"So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is "
++"only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there "
++"which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++"Alors, quelles sont les choses à modifier dans le document maître ? Pour "
++"commencer, très peu de choses. Il n'y a quelques paramètres substituables "
++"(texte entre crochets) que vous devrez prendre en charge."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1742
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr "En-tête du document maître"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1743
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<bookinfo>\n"
++#| " <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++#| " <releaseinfo>\n"
++#| " for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++#| " The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++#| " <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++#| " </releaseinfo>\n"
++#| "</bookinfo>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "<chapter>\n"
++#| " <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1759
++msgid ""
++"In addition a few option elements are created in commented form. You can "
++"review these and enable them as you like."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1765
++msgid "Optional part in the master document"
++msgstr "Partie optionnelle dans le document maître"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1766
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- enable this when you use gobject introspection annotations\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" -->\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1774
++msgid ""
++"Finally you need to add new section whenever you introduce one. The <link "
++"linkend=\"modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</link> tool will remind "
++"you of newly generated xml files that are not yet included into the doc."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1782 C/index.docbook:1817
++msgid "Including generated sections"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1783
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>my library</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>my library</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1795
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr "Édition du fichier section"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1797
++msgid ""
++"The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. "
++"Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control "
++"the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++"Le fichier section est utilisé pour organiser la documentation générée par "
++"GTK-Doc. C'est ici qu'il faut indiquer quels symboles sont attachés à quels "
++"modules ou classes et contrôler la visibilité (« public » ou « private »)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1803
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "The section file is a plain test file with xml like syntax (using tags). "
++#| "Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as "
++#| "comment lines."
++msgid ""
++"The section file is a plain text file with tags delimiting sections. Blank "
++"lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines."
++msgstr ""
++"Le fichier section est un fichier texte plat, avec une syntaxe type XML "
++"(utilisant des balises). Les lignes blanches sont ignorées et celles "
++"commençant par un « # » sont considérées comme des lignes de commentaires."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1810
++msgid ""
++"While the tags make the file look like xml, it is not. Please do not close "
++"tags like <SUBSECTION>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1818
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1835
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, "
++#| "without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++#| "FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++#| "template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++#| "converted into the DocBook SGML/XML file <filename>sgml/gnome-config."
++#| "sgml</filename> or .DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</"
++#| "filename>. (The name of the html file is based on the module name and the "
++#| "section title, or for gobjects it is based on the gobjects class name "
++#| "converted to lower case)."
++msgid ""
++"The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, "
++"without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++"FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++"template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++"converted into the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename> or the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. "
++"(The name of the HTML file is based on the module name and the section "
++"title, or for GObjects it is based on the GObjects class name converted to "
++"lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++"La balise <FILE> ... </FILE> est utilisée pour indiquer le nom "
++"du fichier, sans extension. Par exemple, utiliser <FILE>gnome-"
++"config</FILE> va entraîner la sortie des déclarations de section dans "
++"le fichier prototype <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, qui seront "
++"converties dans le fichier SGML/XML DocBook <filename>sgml/gnome-config."
++"sgml</filename> ou le fichier XML DocBook <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</"
++"filename> (le nom du fichier html est basé sur le nom du module et le titre "
++"de la section, ou, pour les gobjects, sur le nom de la classe gobjects "
++"converti en minuscule)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1847
++msgid ""
++"The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the "
++"section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially "
++"created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if "
++"one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++"La balise <TITLE> ... </TITLE> est utilisée pour indiquer le "
++"titre de la section. C'est utile seulement avant la création initiale des "
++"prototypes, car ensuite le titre défini dans le prototype est prioritaire. "
++"Elle est également obsolète si des commentaires de SECTION sont utilisés "
++"dans les fichiers sources."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1854
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. "
++#| "Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis "
++#| "section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard "
++#| "GObject declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and "
++#| "macros like G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out "
++#| "of the documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for "
++#| "private declarations which will not be output (It is a handy way to avoid "
++#| "warning messages about unused declarations.). If your library contains "
++#| "private types which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and "
++#| "the list of implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private "
++#| "subsection. Whether you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs "
++#| "in public or Standard section depends if they have public entries "
++#| "(variables, vmethods)."
++msgid ""
++"You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. "
++"Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis "
++"section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject "
++"declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the "
++"documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private "
++"declarations which will not be output (it is a handy way to avoid warning "
++"messages about unused declarations). If your library contains private types "
++"which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of "
++"implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection. "
++"Whether you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs in public or "
++"Standard section depends if they have public entries (variables, vmethods)."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez regrouper les éléments dans la section en utilisant la balise "
++"<SUBSECTION>. Actuellement, une ligne blanche est ajoutée entre les "
++"sous-sections dans la section résumé. Vous pouvez également utiliser <"
++"SUBSECTION Standard> pour les déclarations GObject standards (par "
++"exemple, les fonctions comme g_object_get_type et les macros comme "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT(), etc.). Actuellement, elles ne sont pas intégrées "
++"dans la documentation. Vous pouvez utiliser <SUBSECTION Private> pour "
++"les déclarations privées qui ne seront pas affichées (c'est un moyen "
++"pratique d'éviter les messages d'avertissement sur les déclarations "
++"inutilisées). Si votre bibliothèque contient des types privés que vous ne "
++"souhaitez pas voir apparaître dans la hiérarchie des objets et dans la liste "
++"des interfaces implémentées ou nécessaires, ajoutez-les à une sous-section "
++"privée. Le choix de placer des GObject ou GObjectClass comme des structures "
++"dans une section standard ou publique dépend de la présence d'éléments "
++"publics (variables, vmethods)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1873
++msgid ""
++"You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the "
++"#include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-"
++"separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it "
++"outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. "
++"If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez utiliser les balises <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> pour "
++"indiquer les fichiers #include qui sont affichés dans les sections résumé. "
++"Elles contiennent une liste de fichiers #include, séparés par des virgules, "
++"sans les chevrons. Si vous les placez en dehors d'une section, elles "
++"s'appliquent à toutes les sections jusqu'à la fin du fichier. Si vous les "
++"placez dans une section, elles s'appliquent seulement à cette section."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1887
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr "Contrôle du résultat"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1889
++msgid ""
++"A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The "
++"generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and "
++"<filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text "
++"files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++"Une exécution de GTK-Doc produit des fichiers de compte-rendu dans le "
++"répertoire de documentation. Ces fichiers sont nommés : <filename><"
++"package>-undocumented.txt</filename>, <filename><package>-"
++"undeclared.txt</filename> et <filename><package>-unused.txt</"
++"filename>. Tous ces fichiers texte peuvent être lus et post-traités "
++"facilement."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1898
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with "
++"the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank "
++"lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The "
++"second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, "
++"which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++"Le fichier <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> commence "
++"avec un résumé du sujet couvert par la documentation. Suivent deux sections "
++"séparées par des lignes blanches. La première section liste les symboles non "
++"documentés ou incomplets. La seconde section fait de même pour les "
++"documentations de sections. Les éléments incomplets sont ceux qui possèdent "
++"une documentation mais auxquels, par exemple, un paramètre a été ajouté."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1907
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols "
++"given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found "
++"in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++"Le fichier <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> liste les "
++"symboles contenus dans le fichier <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename> mais non trouvés dans les fichiers sources. Vérifiez s'ils n'ont "
++"pas été supprimés ou mal orthographiés."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1914
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, "
++"where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where "
++"to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Le fichier <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> liste les noms "
++"des symboles pour lesquels l'analyseur GTK-Doc a trouvé de la documentation "
++"mais ne sait pas où la placer. Cela signifie que le symbole n'a pas encore "
++"été ajouté au fichier <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1922
++msgid ""
++"Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile."
++"am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during "
++"<command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++"Activez ou ajoutez la ligne <option>TESTS=($GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> dans le "
++"fichier Makefile.am. Si la version installée de GTK-Doc est supérieure à "
++"1.9, des contrôles de validité seront lancés pendant l'exécution de "
++"<command>make check</command>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1929
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: "
++#| "<filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><"
++#| "package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first one can be compared with the "
++#| "section file if that is manually maintained. The second lists all "
++#| "declarations from the headers If a symbol is missing one could check if "
++#| "this file contains it."
++msgid ""
++"One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: "
++"<filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><"
++"package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first one can be compared with the "
++"section file if that is manually maintained. The second lists all "
++"declarations from the headers. If a symbol is missing one could check if "
++"this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez également regarder les fichiers produits par le scanneur de code "
++"source : <filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> et <filename><"
++"package>-decl.txt</filename>. Le premier peut être comparé avec le "
++"fichier section s'il est maintenu manuellement. Le second liste toutes les "
++"déclarations contenues dans les fichiers en-tête. Si un symbole est "
++"manquant, il faut vérifier si ce fichier le contient."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1938
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files "
++#| "produced by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</"
++#| "filename>, <filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, "
++#| "<filename><package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++#| "package>.prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>."
++#| "signals.txt</filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one "
++#| "can ask gtkdoc to keep the intermediate scanner file for further "
++#| "analysis, but running it as <command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</"
++#| "command>."
++msgid ""
++"If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced "
++"by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>."
++"prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</"
++"filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask GTK-Doc "
++"to keep the intermediate scanner file for further analysis, by running it as "
++"<command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++"Si le projet est basé sur GObject, il est possible de regarder dans les "
++"fichiersgénérés par le scanneur d'objet : <filename><package>.args."
++"txt</filename>, <filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.prerequisites.txt</filename> et <filename><package>."
++"signals.txt</filename>. S'il manque des symboles dans l'un d'eux, il est "
++"possible de demander à gtkdoc de conserver le fichier de scanneur "
++"intermédiaire pour en faire une analyse ultérieure mais en le lançant comme "
++"<command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1953
++msgid "Modernizing the documentation"
++msgstr "Modernisation de la documentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1955
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc has been around for quite some time. In this section we list new "
++"features together with the version since when it is available."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1961
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++msgstr "Manuel de GTK-Doc 1.9"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1963
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "Is the new page xi:included from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++#| "</filename>."
++msgid ""
++"When using xml instead of sgml, one can actually name the master document "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Est-ce que la nouvelle page est xi:included à partir de <filename><"
++"module>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1968
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from "
++"the vcs. This only works nicely for projects that have a very regular "
++"structure (e.g. each .{c,h} pair will create new section). If one organize a "
++"project close to that updating a manually maintained section file can be as "
++"simple as running <code>meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-"
++"sections.txt</code>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1979
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.8 already introduced the syntax for documenting sections in the "
++"sources instead of the separate files under <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">tmpl</filename>. This version adds options to switch the whole doc module "
++"to not use the extra tmpl build step at all, by using <option>--flavour no-"
++"tmpl</option> in <filename>configure.ac</filename>. If you don't have a "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> checked into your source "
++"control system and haven't yet switched, just add the flag to "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> and you are done."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1991
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++msgstr "Manuel de GTK-Doc 1.10"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1993
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from the "
++"vcs. When using this feature it is important to also setup the "
++"<varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> in <filename>Makefile.am</filename> for "
++"code that is build conditionally."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2004
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++msgstr "Manuel de GTK-Doc 1.16"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2010
++msgid "Enable gtkdoc-check"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2011
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2006
++msgid ""
++"This version includes a new tool called gtkdoc-check. This tool can run a "
++"set of sanity checks on your documentation. It is enabled by adding these "
++"lines to the end of <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2024
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++msgstr "Manuel de GTK-Doc 1.20"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2026
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.18 brought some initial markdown support. Using markdown in doc "
++"comments is less intrusive than writing docbook xml. This version improves a "
++"lot on this and add a lot more styles. The section that explains the <link "
++"linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">comment syntax</link> has all the details."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2036
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++msgstr "Manuel de GTK-Doc 1.25"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2046
++msgid "Use pre-generated entities"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2047
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for &package_string;.\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for &package_string;.\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2038
++msgid ""
++"The makefiles shipped with this version generate an entity file at "
++"<filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename>, containing entities for e.g. "
++"package_name and package_version. You can use this e.g. in the main xml file "
++"to avoid hardcoding the version number. Below is an example that shows how "
++"the entity file is included and how the entities are used. The entities can "
++"also be used in all generated files, GTK-Doc will use the same xml header in "
++"generated xml files. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2072
++msgid "Documenting other interfaces"
++msgstr "Documentation d'autres interfaces"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2074
++msgid ""
++"So far we have been using GTK-Doc to document the API of code. The next "
++"sections contain suggestions how the tools can be used to document other "
++"interfaces too."
++msgstr ""
++"Nous avons jusqu'ici utilisé GTK-Doc pour documenter les API du code. Les "
++"sections qui suivent contiennent des suggestions sur la manière d'utiliser "
++"les outils pour documenter aussi d'autres interfaces."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2081
++msgid "Command line options and man pages"
++msgstr "Options de ligne de commande et pages de manuel"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2083
++msgid ""
++"As one can generate man pages for a docbook refentry as well, it sounds like "
++"a good idea to use it for that purpose. This way the interface is part of "
++"the reference and one gets the man-page for free."
++msgstr ""
++"Comme il est possible de générer aussi des pages de manuel à partir d'une "
++"« refentry » DocBook, il semble donc intéressant de l'utiliser dans ce but. "
++"Ainsi, l'interface fait partie de la référence et l'on obtient en cadeau la "
++"page de manuel."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2090
++msgid "Document the tool"
++msgstr "Documentation de l'outil"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2092
++msgid ""
++"Create one refentry file per tool. Following <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">our example</link> we would call it <filename>meep/"
++"docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. For the xml tags that should be "
++"used and can look at generated file in the xml subdirectory as well as "
++"examples e.g. in glib."
++msgstr ""
++"Créez un fichier « refentry » par outil. En suivant <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">notre exemple</link>, nous l'appellerons "
++"<filename>meep/docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. Pour connaître les "
++"balises XML pouvant être utilisées, on peut observer le fichier généré dans "
++"le sous-répertoire xml ou des exemples comme dans glib."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2102
++msgid "Adding the extra configure check"
++msgstr "Ajout de contrôles « configure » supplémentaires"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2105 C/index.docbook:2123
++msgid "Extra configure checks"
++msgstr "Contrôles « configure » supplémentaires"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2106
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++#| " [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++#| " [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++#| " enable_man=no)\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++#| "AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2120
++msgid "Adding the extra makefile rules"
++msgstr "Ajout de règles « makefile » supplémentaires"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2124
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "man_MANS = \\\n"
++#| " meeper.1\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++#| "if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "%.1 : %.xml\n"
++#| " @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "endif\n"
++#| "endif\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++#| "EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2146
++msgid "DBus interfaces"
++msgstr "Interfaces DBus"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2148
++msgid ""
++"(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++msgstr ""
++"(À_CORRIGER : http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, "
++"http://cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2157
++msgid "Frequently asked questions"
++msgstr "Foire aux questions"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2161
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "Question"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2162
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "Réponse"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2164
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Pas de hiérarchie de classe."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2165
++msgid ""
++"The objects <function>xxx_get_type()</function> function has not been "
++"entered into the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Les fonctions objet <function>xxx_get_type()</function> n'ont pas été "
++"saisies dans le fichier <filename><module>.types</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2171
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Toujours pas de hiérarchie de classe."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2172
++msgid ""
++"Missing or wrong naming in <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> "
++"file (see <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-doc-list/2003-"
++"October/msg00006.html\">explanation</ulink>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Mauvais nom ou nom absent dans le fichier <filename><module>-sections."
++"txt</filename> (consultez une <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/"
++"gtk-doc-list/2003-October/msg00006.html\">explication</ulink>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2178
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Zut, je n'ai toujours pas de hiérarchie de classe."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2179
++msgid ""
++"Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <type>GtkWidget</"
++"type>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private "
++"subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++"Est-ce que le nom de l'objet (nom de la structure de l'instance, par ex. "
++"<type>GtkWidget</type>) fait parti de la section « normal » (ne pas le "
++"mettre dans les sous-sections « Standard » ou « Private »)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2186
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr "Pas d'index des symboles."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2187
++msgid ""
++"Does the <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contain a "
++"index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++"Est-ce que <filename><module>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contient un "
++"index qui « xi:includes » l'index généré ?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2193
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr "Les symboles ne sont pas liés à leur section de documentation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2194
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the "
++"gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++"Est-ce que doc-comment utilise le markup correct (ajout d'un #, % ou ()) ? "
++"Contrôlez si gtkdoc-fixxref affiche des avertissements à propos de xrefs non "
++"résolus."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2200
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "Une nouvelle classe n'apparaît pas dans les documents."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2201
++msgid ""
++"Is the new page xi:included from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Est-ce que la nouvelle page est xi:included à partir de <filename><"
++"module>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2207
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "Un nouveau symbole n'apparaît pas dans les documents."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2208
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the "
++"begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable "
++"xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++"Est-ce que le doc-comment est correctement formaté. Vérifiez qu'il n'y a pas "
++"d'erreur de frappe au début du commentaire. Vérifiez que gtkdoc-fixxref ne "
++"vous indique pas de xrefs non résolus. Vérifiez que le symbole est "
++"correctement listé dans une section publique de <filename><module>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2216
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Un type est absent dans la hiérarchie de classe."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2217
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "If the type is listed in <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> "
++#| "but not in <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> then double check "
++#| "that the type is correctly placed in the <filename><package>-"
++#| "sections.txt</filename>. If the type instance (e.g. <type>GtkWidget</"
++#| "type>) is not listed or incidentialy makred private it will not be shown."
++msgid ""
++"If the type is listed in <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> but "
++"not in <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> then double check that the "
++"type is correctly placed in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>. If the type instance (e.g. <type>GtkWidget</type>) is not listed "
++"or incidentally marked private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++"Si le type est listé dans <filename><module>.hierarchy</filename> mais "
++"pas dans <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> alors contrôlez deux-fois "
++"que le type est correctement placé dans <filename><module>-sections."
++"txt</filename>. Si l'instance du type (par ex. <type>GtkWidget</type>) n'est "
++"pas listée ou marquée par accident comme privée, elle ne sera pas affichée."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2226
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr "J'obtiens des liens foldoc pour toutes les annotations gobject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2227
++msgid ""
++"Check that <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> is xi:included "
++"from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Vérifiez que <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> est xi:"
++"included à partir de <filename><module>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2235
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr ""
++"Un paramètre est décrit dans le bloc de commentaires dans le code source "
++"mais il n'existe pas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2236
++msgid ""
++"Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the "
++"source."
++msgstr ""
++"Vérifiez si le prototype dans le fichier d'en-tête possède des noms de "
++"paramètres différents de ceux du fichier source."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2241
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr "« ID » multiples pour le linkend: XYZ contraint"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2242
++msgid ""
++"Symbol XYZ appears twice in <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Le symbole XYZ apparaît en double dans le fichier <filename><package>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2245
++msgid ""
++"Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template "
++"matches."
++msgstr ""
++"Élément typename dans l'espace de nom '' rencontré dans para mais aucun "
++"prototype ne correspond."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2252
++msgid "Tools related to gtk-doc"
++msgstr "Outils liés à gtk-doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2254
++msgid ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - a <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac "
++"GTK-Doc</ulink> integration plugin, that adds API docs to a trac site and "
++"integrates with the trac search."
++msgstr ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - un greffon d'intégration à <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/"
++"wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac GTK-Doc</ulink>, qui ajoute la documentation d'API "
++"à un site Trac et s'intègre à la recherche Trac."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2259
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "Gtkdoc-depscan - a tool (part of gtk-doc) to check used API against since "
++#| "tags in the api to determine the minimum required version."
++msgid ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - a tool (part of gtk-doc) to check used API against since "
++"tags in the API to determine the minimum required version."
++msgstr ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - un outil (intégré à gtk-doc) qui vérifie les API utilisées "
++"pour déterminer la version minimale requise."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/releaseinfo
++#: C/index.docbook:12 C/fdl-appendix.xml:12
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr "Version 1.1, mars 2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:15
++msgid "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/index.docbook:20
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:19 C/fdl-appendix.xml:19
++msgid ""
++"<_:address-1/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies "
++"of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr ""
++"<_:address-1/> Chacun est libre de copier et de distribuer des copies "
++"conformes de cette Licence, mais nul n'est autorisé à la modifier."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendix/title
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/index.docbook:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:642
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr "Licence de Documentation Libre GNU"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:31 C/fdl-appendix.xml:31
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr "0. Préambule"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"L'objet de cette Licence est de rendre tout manuel, livre ou autre document "
++"écrit <quote>libre</quote> au sens de la liberté d'utilisation, à savoir : "
++"assurer à chacun la liberté effective de le copier ou de le redistribuer, "
++"avec ou sans modifications, commercialement ou non. En outre, cette Licence "
++"garantit à l'auteur et à l'éditeur la reconnaissance de leur travail, sans "
++"qu'ils soient pour autant considérés comme responsables des modifications "
++"réalisées par des tiers."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that "
++"derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. "
++"It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license "
++"designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++"Cette Licence est une sorte de <quote>copyleft</quote>, ce qui signifie que "
++"les travaux dérivés du document d'origine sont eux-mêmes « libres » selon "
++"les mêmes termes. Elle complète la Licence Publique Générale GNU, qui est "
++"également une Licence copyleft, conçue pour les logiciels libres."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:50 C/fdl-appendix.xml:50
++msgid ""
++"We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free "
++"software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program "
++"should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. "
++"But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any "
++"textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a "
++"printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose "
++"is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++"Nous avons conçu cette Licence pour la documentation des logiciels libres, "
++"car les logiciels libres ont besoin d'une documentation elle-même libre : un "
++"logiciel libre doit être accompagné d'un manuel garantissant les mêmes "
++"libertés que celles accordées par le logiciel lui-même. Mais cette Licence "
++"n'est pas limitée aux seuls manuels des logiciels ; elle peut être utilisée "
++"pour tous les documents écrits, sans distinction particulière relative au "
++"sujet traité ou au mode de publication. Nous recommandons l'usage de cette "
++"Licence principalement pour les travaux destinés à des fins d'enseignement "
++"ou devant servir de documents de référence."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:62 C/fdl-appendix.xml:62
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr "1. APPLICABILITÉ ET DÉFINITIONS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such "
++"manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "
++"<quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Cette Licence couvre tout manuel ou tout autre travail écrit contenant une "
++"notice de copyright autorisant la redistribution selon les termes de cette "
++"Licence. Le mot <quote>Document</quote> se réfère ci-après à un tel manuel "
++"ou travail. Toute personne en est par définition concessionnaire et est "
++"référencée ci-après par le terme <quote>Vous</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:72
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing "
++"the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with "
++"modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"Une <quote>Version modifiée</quote> du Document désigne tout travail en "
++"contenant la totalité ou seulement une portion de celui-ci, copiée mot pour "
++"mot, modifiée et/ou traduite dans une autre langue."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:79
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter "
++"section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals "
++"exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the "
++"Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and "
++"contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For "
++"example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary "
++"Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter "
++"of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of "
++"legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding "
++"them."
++msgstr ""
++"Une <quote>Section secondaire</quote> désigne une annexe au <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, ou toute information indiquant les "
++"rapports entre l'auteur ou l'éditeur et le sujet (ou tout autre sujet "
++"connexe) du Document, sans toutefois être en rapport direct avec le sujet "
++"lui-même (par exemple, si le Document est un manuel de mathématiques, une "
++"Section secondaire ne traitera d'aucune notion mathématique). Cette section "
++"peut contenir des informations relatives à l'historique du Document, des "
++"sources documentaires, des dispositions légales, commerciales, "
++"philosophiques, ou des positions éthiques ou politiques susceptibles de "
++"concerner le sujet traité."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:94
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being "
++"those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Les <quote>Sections inaltérables</quote> sont des <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">sections secondaires</link> considérées comme ne pouvant être "
++"modifiées et citées comme telles dans la notice légale qui place le <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> sous cette Licence."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:103
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are "
++"listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says "
++"that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under "
++"this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Les <quote>Textes de couverture</quote> sont les textes courts situés sur "
++"les pages de couverture avant et arrière du <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>, et cités comme tels dans la mention légale de ce <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:111
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> "
++"Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose "
++"specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be "
++"viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors "
++"or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) "
++"some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text "
++"formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for "
++"input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file "
++"format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent "
++"modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "
++"<quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Le terme <quote>Copie transparente</quote> désigne une version numérique du "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> Document</link> représentée dans un format "
++"dont les spécifications sont publiquement disponibles et dont le contenu "
++"peut être visualisé et édité directement et immédiatement par un éditeur de "
++"texte quelconque, ou (pour les images composées de pixels) par un programme "
++"de traitement d'images quelconque, ou (pour les dessins) par un éditeur de "
++"dessins courant. Ce format doit pouvoir être accepté directement ou être "
++"convertible facilement dans des formats utilisables directement par des "
++"logiciels de formatage de texte. Une copie publiée dans un quelconque format "
++"numérique ouvert mais dont la structure a été conçue dans le but exprès de "
++"prévenir les modifications ultérieures du Document ou dans le but d'en "
++"décourager les lecteurs n'est pas considérée comme une Copie Transparente. "
++"Une copie qui n'est pas <quote>Transparente</quote> est considérée, par "
++"opposition, comme <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:128 C/fdl-appendix.xml:128
++msgid ""
++"Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII "
++"without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using "
++"a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for "
++"human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary "
++"formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, "
++"SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally "
++"available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors "
++"for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++"Le format de fichier texte codé en ASCII générique et n'utilisant pas de "
++"balises, les formats de fichiers Texinfo ou LaTeX, les formats de fichiers "
++"SGML ou XML utilisant une DTD publiquement accessible, ainsi que les formats "
++"de fichiers HTML simple et standard, écrits de telle sorte qu'ils sont "
++"modifiables sans outil spécifique, sont des exemples de formats acceptables "
++"pour la réalisation de Copies Transparentes. Les formats suivants sont "
++"opaques : PostScript, PDF, formats de fichiers propriétaires qui ne peuvent "
++"être visualisés ou édités que par des traitements de textes propriétaires, "
++"SGML et XML utilisant des DTD et/ou des outils de formatage qui ne sont pas "
++"disponibles publiquement, et du code HTML généré par une machine à l'aide "
++"d'un traitement de texte quelconque et dans le seul but de la génération "
++"d'un format de sortie."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:141
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page "
++"itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the "
++"material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in "
++"formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> "
++"means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, "
++"preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++"La <quote>Page de titre</quote> désigne, pour les ouvrages imprimés, la page "
++"de titre elle-même, ainsi que les pages supplémentaires nécessaires pour "
++"fournir clairement les informations dont cette Licence impose la présence "
++"sur la page de titre. Pour les travaux n'ayant pas de Page de titre comme "
++"décrit ci-dessus, la <quote>Page de titre</quote> désigne le texte qui "
++"s'apparente le plus au titre du document et situé avant le texte principal."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:153 C/fdl-appendix.xml:153
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr "2. COPIES CONFORMES"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that "
++"this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this "
++"License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you "
++"add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use "
++"technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of "
++"the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in "
++"exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you "
++"must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez copier et distribuer le <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> sur tout type de support, commercialement ou non, à condition que "
++"cette Licence, la notice de copyright et la notice de la Licence indiquant "
++"que cette Licence s'applique à ce Document soient reproduits dans toutes les "
++"copies, et que vous n'y ajoutiez aucune condition restrictive "
++"supplémentaire. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser un quelconque moyen technique "
++"visant à empêcher ou à contrôler la lecture ou la reproduction ultérieure "
++"des copies que vous avez créées ou distribuées. Toutefois, vous pouvez "
++"solliciter une rétribution en échange des copies. Si vous distribuez une "
++"grande quantité de copies, référez-vous aux dispositions de la <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:169 C/fdl-appendix.xml:169
++msgid ""
++"You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you "
++"may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez également prêter des copies, sous les mêmes conditions que "
++"celles suscitées, et vous pouvez afficher publiquement des copies de ce "
++"Document."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:176 C/fdl-appendix.xml:176
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr "3. COPIES EN NOMBRE"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license "
++"notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you "
++"must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these "
++"Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on "
++"the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as "
++"the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title "
++"with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as "
++"verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Si vous publiez des copies imprimées de ce <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> à plus de 100 exemplaires et que la Licence du Document "
++"indique la présence de <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textes de "
++"couverture</link>, vous devez fournir une couverture pour chaque copie, qui "
++"présente les Textes de couverture des première et dernière pages de "
++"couverture du Document. Les première et dernière pages de couverture doivent "
++"également vous identifier clairement et sans ambiguïté comme étant l'éditeur "
++"de ces copies. La première page de couverture doit comporter le titre du "
++"Document en mots d'importance et de visibilité égales. Vous pouvez ajouter "
++"des informations complémentaires sur les pages de couverture. Les copies du "
++"Document dont seule la couverture a été modifiée peuvent être considérées "
++"comme des copies conformes, à condition que le titre du <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> soit préservé et que les conditions indiquées "
++"précédemment soient respectées."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:195 C/fdl-appendix.xml:195
++msgid ""
++"If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, "
++"you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the "
++"actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++"Si les textes devant se trouver sur la couverture sont trop importants pour "
++"y tenir de manière claire, vous pouvez ne placer que les premiers sur la "
++"première page et placer les suivants sur les pages consécutives."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> "
++"copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more "
++"than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state "
++"in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location "
++"containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added "
++"material, which the general network-using public has access to download "
++"anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use "
++"the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin "
++"distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent "
++"copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one "
++"year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through "
++"your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"Si vous publiez plus de 100 <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Copies "
++"opaques</link> du <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, vous devez "
++"soit fournir une Copie transparente pour chaque Copie opaque, soit préciser "
++"ou fournir avec chaque Copie opaque une adresse réseau publiquement "
++"accessible d'une <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Copie transparente</link> "
++"et complète du Document, sans aucun ajout ou modification, et à laquelle "
++"tout le monde peut accéder en téléchargement anonyme et sans frais, selon "
++"des protocoles réseau communs et standard. Si vous choisissez cette dernière "
++"option, vous devez prendre les dispositions nécessaires, dans la limite du "
++"raisonnable, afin de garantir l'accès non restrictif à la Copie transparente "
++"durant une année pleine après la diffusion publique de la dernière Copie "
++"opaque(directement ou via vos revendeurs)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any "
++"large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated "
++"version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"Nous recommandons, mais ce n'est pas obligatoire, que vous contactiez "
++"l'auteur du <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> suffisamment tôt "
++"avant toute publication d'un grand nombre de copies, afin de lui permettre "
++"de vous donner une version à jour du Document."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:231 C/fdl-appendix.xml:231
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under "
++"the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the "
++"Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version "
++"filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez copier et distribuer une <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Version "
++"modifiée</link> du <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> en "
++"respectant les conditions des sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</"
++"link> et <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> précédentes, à condition de "
++"placer cette Version modifiée sous la présente Licence, dans laquelle le "
++"terme « Document » doit être remplacé par les termes « Version modifiée », "
++"donnant ainsi l'autorisation de redistribuer et de modifier cette Version "
++"modifiée à quiconque en possède une copie. De plus, vous devez effectuer les "
++"actions suivantes dans la Version modifiée :"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:248 C/fdl-appendix.xml:248
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "A"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the "
++"covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which "
++"should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the "
++"Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original "
++"publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Utiliser sur la <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Page de titre</link> (et "
++"sur la page de couverture éventuellement présente) un titre distinct de "
++"celui du <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> d'origine et de "
++"toutes ses versions antérieures (qui, si elles existent, doivent être "
++"mentionnées dans la section Historique du Document). Vous pouvez utiliser le "
++"même titre si l'éditeur d'origine vous en a donné expressément la permission."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:264 C/fdl-appendix.xml:264
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "B"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, "
++"one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the "
++"modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has "
++"less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"Mentionner sur la <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Page de titre</link> en "
++"tant qu'auteurs une ou plusieurs des personnes ou entités responsables des "
++"modifications de la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Version modifiée</link>, "
++"avec au moins les cinq principaux auteurs du <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> (ou tous les auteurs s'il y en a moins de cinq)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:279 C/fdl-appendix.xml:279
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "C"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of "
++"the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++"Préciser sur la <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Page de titre</link> le nom "
++"de l'éditeur de la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Version modifiée</link>, "
++"en tant qu'éditeur du Document."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:291 C/fdl-appendix.xml:291
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "D"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:292
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Préserver intégralement toutes les notices de copyright du <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:301 C/fdl-appendix.xml:301
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "E"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:302 C/fdl-appendix.xml:302
++msgid ""
++"Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the "
++"other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++"Ajouter une notice de copyright adjacente aux autres notices pour vos "
++"propres modifications."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:311 C/fdl-appendix.xml:311
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "F"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the "
++"Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Inclure immédiatement après les notices de copyright une notice donnant à "
++"quiconque l'autorisation d'utiliser la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Version modifiée</link> selon les termes de cette Licence, sous la forme "
++"présentée dans l'annexe indiquée ci-dessous."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:324 C/fdl-appendix.xml:324
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "G"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Préserver dans cette notice la liste complète des <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Sections inaltérables</link> et les <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Textes de couverture</link> donnés avec la notice de la Licence du "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:337 C/fdl-appendix.xml:337
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "H"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:338 C/fdl-appendix.xml:338
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr "Inclure une copie non modifiée de cette Licence."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:346 C/fdl-appendix.xml:346
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "I"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add "
++"to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> as given on "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no "
++"section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and "
++"publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Préserver la section nommée <quote>Historique</quote> et son titre, et y "
++"ajouter une nouvelle entrée décrivant le titre, l'année, les nouveaux "
++"auteurs et l'éditeur de la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Version modifiée</"
++"link>, tels que décrits sur la <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Page de "
++"titre</link>, ainsi qu'un descriptif des modifications apportées depuis la "
++"précédente version. S'il n'y a pas de section nommée <quote>Historique</"
++"quote> dans le <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, créer une "
++"telle section précisant le titre, l'année, les auteurs et l'éditeur du "
++"Document tel que précisé sur la <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Page de "
++"titre</link>, et ajouter une entrée décrivant la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Version modifiée</link> tel que précisé dans la phrase précédente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:365 C/fdl-appendix.xml:365
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "J"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the "
++"network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based "
++"on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit "
++"a network location for a work that was published at least four years before "
++"the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers "
++"to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Conserver l'adresse réseau éventuellement indiquée dans le <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> permettant à quiconque d'accéder à une "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Copie transparente</link> du Document, "
++"ainsi que les adresses réseau indiquées dans le Document pour les versions "
++"précédentes sur lesquelles le Document se base. Ces liens peuvent être "
++"placés dans la section <quote>Historique</quote>. Vous pouvez ne pas "
++"conserver les liens pour un travail datant de plus de quatre ans avant la "
++"version courante ou si l'éditeur d'origine vous en accorde la permission."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:383 C/fdl-appendix.xml:383
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "K"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in "
++"the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor "
++"acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"Si une section <quote>Remerciements</quote> ou une section <quote>Dédicaces</"
++"quote> sont présentes, les informations et les appréciations concernant les "
++"contributeurs et les personnes auxquelles s'adressent ces remerciements "
++"doivent être conservées, ainsi que le titre de ces sections."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:396 C/fdl-appendix.xml:396
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "L"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their "
++"text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not "
++"considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Conserver sans modification les <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Sections "
++"inaltérables</link> du <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, ni "
++"dans leurs textes, ni dans leurs titres. Les numéros de sections ne sont pas "
++"considérés comme faisant partie du texte des sections."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:409 C/fdl-appendix.xml:409
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "M"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may "
++"not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Effacer toute section intitulée <quote>Approbations</quote>. Une telle "
++"section ne peut pas être incluse dans une <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Version modifiée</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:421 C/fdl-appendix.xml:421
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "N"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to "
++"conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant "
++"Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Ne pas renommer une section existante sous le titre <quote>Approbations</"
++"quote> ou sous un autre titre entrant en conflit avec le titre d'une <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Section inaltérable</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new "
++"front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from "
++"the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections "
++"as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's "
++"license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Si la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Version modifiée</link> contient de "
++"nouvelles sections préliminaires ou de nouvelles annexes considérées comme "
++"des <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\">Sections secondaires</link> et que "
++"celles-ci ne contiennent aucun élément copié à partir du Document, vous "
++"pouvez à votre convenance en désigner une ou plusieurs comme étant des "
++"Sections inaltérables. Pour ce faire, ajoutez leurs titres dans la liste des "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Sections inaltérables</link> au sein de la "
++"notice de Licence de la Version modifiée. Ces titres doivent êtres distincts "
++"des titres des autres sections."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it "
++"contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of "
++"peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the "
++"authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez ajouter une section nommée <quote>Approbations</quote> à "
++"condition que ces approbations ne concernent que les modifications ayant "
++"donné naissance à la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Version modifiée</link> "
++"(par exemple, comptes rendus de revue du document ou acceptation du texte "
++"par une organisation le reconnaissant comme étant la définition d'un "
++"standard)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list "
++"of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover "
++"Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements "
++"made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by "
++"you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, "
++"you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit "
++"permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez ajouter un passage comprenant jusqu'à cinq mots en <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">première page de couverture</link>, et jusqu'à vingt-"
++"cinq mots en <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">dernière page de couverture</"
++"link>, à la liste des <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textes de "
++"couverture</link> de la <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Version modifiée</"
++"link>. Il n'est autorisé d'ajouter qu'un seul passage en première et en "
++"dernière pages de couverture par personne ou groupe de personnes ou "
++"organisation ayant contribué à la modification du Document. Si le <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> comporte déjà un passage sur la "
++"même couverture, ajouté en votre nom ou au nom de l'organisation au nom de "
++"laquelle vous agissez, vous ne pouvez pas ajouter de passage "
++"supplémentaire ; mais vous pouvez remplacer un ancien passage si vous avez "
++"expressément obtenu l'autorisation de l'éditeur de celui-ci."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names "
++"for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Cette Licence ne vous donne pas le droit d'utiliser le nom des auteurs et "
++"des éditeurs de ce <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> à des fins "
++"publicitaires ou pour prétendre à l'approbation d'une <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"modified\">Version modifiée</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:480 C/fdl-appendix.xml:480
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "5. FUSION DE DOCUMENTS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with "
++"other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, "
++"unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in "
++"its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez fusionner le <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> avec "
++"d'autres documents soumis à cette Licence, suivant les spécifications de la "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> pour les Versions modifiées, "
++"à condition d'inclure dans le document résultant toutes les <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Sections inaltérables</link> des documents originaux sans "
++"modification, et de toutes les lister dans la liste des Sections "
++"inaltérables de la notice de Licence du document résultant de la fusion."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be "
++"replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with "
++"the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section "
++"unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original "
++"author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make "
++"the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections "
++"in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"Le document résultant de la fusion n'a besoin que d'une seule copie de cette "
++"Licence, et les <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Sections inaltérables</link> "
++"existant en multiples exemplaires peuvent être remplacées par une copie "
++"unique. S'il existe plusieurs Sections inaltérables portant le même nom mais "
++"de contenu différent, rendez unique le titre de chaque section en ajoutant, "
++"à la fin de celui-ci, entre parenthèses, le nom de l'auteur ou de l'éditeur "
++"d'origine, ou, à défaut, un numéro unique. Les mêmes modifications doivent "
++"être réalisées dans la liste des Sections inaltérables de la notice de "
++"Licence du document final."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</"
++"quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled "
++"<quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled "
++"<quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++"Dans le document résultant de la fusion, vous devez rassembler en une seule "
++"toutes les sections <quote>Historique</quote> des documents d'origine. De "
++"même, vous devez rassembler les sections <quote>Remerciements</quote> et "
++"<quote>Dédicaces</quote>. Vous devez supprimer toutes les sections "
++"<quote>Approbations</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:516 C/fdl-appendix.xml:516
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "6. REGROUPEMENTS DE DOCUMENTS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and "
++"replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with "
++"a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow "
++"the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in "
++"all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez créer un regroupement de documents comprenant le <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> et d'autres documents soumis à cette "
++"Licence, et remplacer les copies individuelles de cette Licence des "
++"différents documents par une unique copie incluse dans le regroupement de "
++"documents, à condition de respecter pour chacun de ces documents l'ensemble "
++"des règles de cette Licence concernant les copies conformes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:527 C/fdl-appendix.xml:527
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute "
++#| "it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this "
++#| "License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other "
++#| "respects regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgid ""
++"You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it "
++"individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License "
++"into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects "
++"regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez extraire un document d'un tel regroupement et le distribuer "
++"individuellement sous couvert de cette Licence, à condition d'y inclure une "
++"copie de cette Licence et d'en respecter l'ensemble des règles concernant "
++"les copies conformes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:537 C/fdl-appendix.xml:537
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr "7. AGRÉGATION AVEC DES TRAVAUX INDÉPENDANTS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its "
++"derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on "
++"a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, "
++"provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a "
++"compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</"
++"link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"La compilation du <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> ou de ses "
++"dérivés avec d'autres documents ou travaux séparés et indépendants sur un "
++"support de stockage ou sur un média de distribution quelconque ne représente "
++"pas une <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Version modifiée</link> du Document "
++"tant qu'aucun copyright n'est déposé pour cette compilation. Une telle "
++"compilation est appelée <quote>agrégat</quote> et cette Licence ne "
++"s'applique pas aux autres travaux indépendants compilés avec le Document "
++"s'ils ne sont pas eux-mêmes des travaux dérivés du Document. Si les "
++"exigences de la <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> concernant "
++"les <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textes de couverture</link> sont "
++"applicables à ces copies du Document, et si le Document représente un volume "
++"inférieur à un quart du volume total de l'agrégat, les Textes de couverture "
++"du Document peuvent être placés sur des pages de couverture qui n'encadrent "
++"que le Document au sein de l'agrégat. Dans le cas contraire, ils doivent "
++"apparaître sur les pages de couverture de l'agrégat complet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:561 C/fdl-appendix.xml:561
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr "8. TRADUCTION"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the "
++"terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations "
++"requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may "
++"include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the "
++"original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation "
++"of this License provided that you also include the original English version "
++"of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the "
++"original English version of this License, the original English version will "
++"prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"La traduction est considérée comme une forme de modification, vous pouvez "
++"donc distribuer les traductions du <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> selon les termes de la <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</"
++"link>. Vous devez obtenir l'autorisation spéciale des auteurs des <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Sections inaltérables</link> pour les remplacer "
++"par des traductions, mais vous pouvez inclure les traductions des Sections "
++"inaltérables en plus des textes originaux. Vous pouvez inclure une "
++"traduction de cette Licence à condition d'inclure également la version "
++"originale en anglais. En cas de contradiction entre la traduction et la "
++"version originale en anglais, c'est cette dernière qui prévaut."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:580 C/fdl-appendix.xml:580
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr "9. RÉVOCATION"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this "
++"License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the "
++"Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this "
++"License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you "
++"under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such "
++"parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous ne pouvez pas copier, modifier, sous-licencier ou distribuer le <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> autrement que selon les termes de "
++"cette Licence. Tout autre acte de copie, modification, sous-Licence ou "
++"distribution du Document est sans objet et vous prive automatiquement des "
++"droits que cette Licence vous accorde. En revanche, les personnes qui ont "
++"reçu de votre part des copies ou les droits sur le document sous couvert de "
++"cette Licence ne voient pas leurs droits révoqués tant qu'elles en "
++"respectent les principes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:594 C/fdl-appendix.xml:594
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr "10. RÉVISIONS FUTURES DE CETTE LICENCE"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:595
++msgid ""
++"The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU "
++"Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be "
++"similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to "
++"address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www."
++"gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"La <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> peut publier de temps en temps de nouvelles "
++"versions révisées de cette Licence. Ces nouvelles versions seront semblables "
++"à la présente version dans l'esprit, mais pourront différer sur des points "
++"particuliers en fonction de nouvelles questions ou nouveaux problèmes. Voyez "
++"<ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/"
++"copyleft/</ulink> pour plus de détails."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular "
++"numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies "
++"to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of "
++"that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not "
++"as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not "
++"specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever "
++"published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"Chaque version de cette Licence est dotée d'un numéro de version distinct. "
++"Si un <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> spécifie un numéro de "
++"version particulier de cette Licence, et porte la mention <quote>ou toute "
++"autre version ultérieure</quote>, vous pouvez choisir de suivre les termes "
++"de la version spécifiée ou ceux de n'importe quelle version ultérieure "
++"publiée par la Free Software Foundation. Si aucun numéro de version n'est "
++"spécifié, vous pouvez choisir n'importe quelle version officielle publiée "
++"par la Free Software Foundation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:621 C/fdl-appendix.xml:621
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr "Addendum"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:622 C/fdl-appendix.xml:622
++msgid ""
++"To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the "
++"License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices "
++"just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++"Pour utiliser cette Licence avec un document que vous avez écrit, incorporez "
++"une copie du texte de cette Licence en anglais et placez le texte ci-dessous "
++"juste après la page de titre :"
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:629 C/fdl-appendix.xml:629
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr "Copyright © 2010 Bruno Brouard."
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, "
++"and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being "
++"LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU "
++"Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Permission vous est donnée de copier, distribuer et/ou modifier ce document "
++"selon les termes de la Licence GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 "
++"ou ultérieure publiée par la Free Software Foundation ; avec <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">les sections inaltérables</link> suivantes LISTE DES "
++"TITRES DES SECTIONS INALTÉRABLES, avec le <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts"
++"\">texte de première page de couverture</link> suivant TEXTE DE PREMIÈRE "
++"PAGE DE COUVERTURE et avec le <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">texte de "
++"dernière page de couverture</link> suivant TEXTE DE DERNIÈRE PAGE DE "
++"COUVERTURE. Une copie de cette Licence est incluse dans la section appelée "
++"<quote>GNU Free Documentation License</quote> de ce document."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, "
++"write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover "
++"Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of "
++"<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Si votre Document ne comporte pas de <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">section "
++"inaltérable</link> écrivez <quote>pas de section inaltérable</quote> au lieu "
++"de la liste des sections inaltérables. Si votre Document ne comporte pas de "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">texte de première page de couverture</"
++"link>, écrivez <quote>pas de texte de première page de couverture</quote> au "
++"lieu de <quote>texte de première page de couverture suivant TEXTE DE "
++"PREMIÈRE PAGE DE COUVERTURE</quote> ; de même pour le <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">texte de dernière page de couverture</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++"gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"Si votre Document contient des exemples non triviaux de code programme, nous "
++"recommandons de distribuer ces exemples en parallèle sous <ulink type=\"http"
++"\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html\">Licence GNU General Public "
++"License</ulink>, qui permet leur usage dans les logiciels libres."
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/year
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/holder
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/street
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++msgstr "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/city
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "Boston"
++msgstr "Boston"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/state
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "MA"
++msgstr "MA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/postcode
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "02110-1301"
++msgstr "02110-1301"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/country
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "USA"
++msgstr "USA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:34
++msgid "free"
++msgstr "libre"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <_:quote-1/> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"L'objet de cette Licence est de rendre tout manuel, livre ou autre document "
++"écrit « <_:quote-1/> » au sens de la liberté d'utilisation, à savoir : "
++"assurer à chacun la liberté effective de le copier ou de le redistribuer, "
++"avec ou sans modifications, commercialement ou non. En outre, cette Licence "
++"garantit à l'auteur et à l'éditeur la reconnaissance de leur travail, sans "
++"qu'ils soient pour autant considérés comme responsables des modifications "
++"réalisées par des tiers."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:44
++msgid "copyleft"
++msgstr "copyleft"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <_:quote-1/>, which means that derivative works of "
++"the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the "
++"GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"Cette Licence est une sorte de <_:quote-1/>, ce qui signifie que les travaux "
++"dérivés du document d'origine sont eux-mêmes « libres » selon les mêmes "
++"termes. Elle complète la Licence Publique Générale GNU, qui est également "
++"une Licence copyleft, conçue pour les logiciels libres."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:67 C/fdl-appendix.xml:82 C/fdl-appendix.xml:99
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:107 C/fdl-appendix.xml:113 C/fdl-appendix.xml:156
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:179 C/fdl-appendix.xml:190 C/fdl-appendix.xml:205
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:224 C/fdl-appendix.xml:235 C/fdl-appendix.xml:253
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:271 C/fdl-appendix.xml:294 C/fdl-appendix.xml:354
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:368 C/fdl-appendix.xml:400 C/fdl-appendix.xml:462
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:472 C/fdl-appendix.xml:482 C/fdl-appendix.xml:519
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:540 C/fdl-appendix.xml:565 C/fdl-appendix.xml:583
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:608
++msgid "Document"
++msgstr "Document"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:69
++msgid "you"
++msgstr "Vous"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <_:quote-1/>, below, refers to any such manual or work. "
++"Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <_:quote-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Cette Licence couvre tout manuel ou tout autre travail écrit contenant une "
++"notice de copyright autorisant la redistribution selon les termes de cette "
++"Licence. Le mot <_:quote-1/> se réfère ci-après à un tel manuel ou travail. "
++"Toute personne en est par définition concessionnaire et est référencée ci-"
++"après par le terme <_:quote-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:73 C/fdl-appendix.xml:234 C/fdl-appendix.xml:269
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:283 C/fdl-appendix.xml:315 C/fdl-appendix.xml:351
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:413 C/fdl-appendix.xml:433 C/fdl-appendix.xml:447
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:459 C/fdl-appendix.xml:475 C/fdl-appendix.xml:543
++msgid "Modified Version"
++msgstr "Version modifiée"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:72
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a "
++"portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or "
++"translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"Une <_:quote-1/> du Document désigne tout travail en contenant la totalité "
++"ou seulement une portion de celui-ci, copiée mot pour mot, modifiée et/ou "
++"traduite dans une autre langue."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:80
++msgid "Secondary Section"
++msgstr "Section secondaire"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:79
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <_:"
++"link-2/> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or "
++"authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related "
++"matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall "
++"subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, "
++"a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could "
++"be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related "
++"matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political "
++"position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++"Une <_:quote-1/> désigne une annexe au <_:link-2/>, ou toute information "
++"indiquant les rapports entre l'auteur ou l'éditeur et le sujet (ou tout "
++"autre sujet connexe) du Document, sans toutefois être en rapport direct avec "
++"le sujet lui-même (par exemple, si le Document est un manuel de "
++"mathématiques, une Section secondaire ne traitera d'aucune notion "
++"mathématique). Cette section peut contenir des informations relatives à "
++"l'historique du Document, des sources documentaires, des dispositions "
++"légales, commerciales, philosophiques, ou des positions éthiques ou "
++"politiques susceptibles de concerner le sujet traité."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:95 C/fdl-appendix.xml:327 C/fdl-appendix.xml:398
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:439 C/fdl-appendix.xml:486 C/fdl-appendix.xml:494
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:567 C/fdl-appendix.xml:637 C/fdl-appendix.xml:648
++msgid "Invariant Sections"
++msgstr "Sections inaltérables"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:96 C/fdl-appendix.xml:435
++msgid "Secondary Sections"
++msgstr "sections secondaires"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:94
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain <_:link-2/> whose titles are designated, as "
++"being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-3/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Les <_:quote-1/> sont des <_:link-2/> considérées comme ne pouvant être "
++"modifiées et citées comme telles dans la notice légale qui place le <_:"
++"link-3/> sous cette Licence."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:104 C/fdl-appendix.xml:181 C/fdl-appendix.xml:328
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:458
++msgid "Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Textes de couverture"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:103
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as "
++"Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-2/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Les <_:quote-1/> sont les textes courts situés sur les pages de couverture "
++"avant et arrière, et cités comme tels dans la mention légale de ce <_:link-2/"
++">."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:112 C/fdl-appendix.xml:124 C/fdl-appendix.xml:207
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:369
++msgid "Transparent"
++msgstr "Copie transparente"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:125 C/fdl-appendix.xml:204
++msgid "Opaque"
++msgstr "Opaque"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:111
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> copy of the <_:link-2/> means a machine-readable copy, "
++"represented in a format whose specification is available to the general "
++"public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and "
++"straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of "
++"pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available "
++"drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for "
++"automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text "
++"formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup "
++"has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers "
++"is not Transparent. A copy that is not <_:quote-3/> is called <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Le terme <_:quote-1/> désigne une version numérique du <_:link-2/> "
++"représentée dans un format dont les spécifications sont publiquement "
++"disponibles et dont le contenu peut être visualisé et édité directement et "
++"immédiatement par un éditeur de texte quelconque, ou (pour les images "
++"composées de pixels) par un programme de traitement d'images quelconque, ou "
++"(pour les dessins) par un éditeur de dessins courant. Ce format doit pouvoir "
++"être accepté directement ou être convertible facilement dans des formats "
++"utilisables directement par des logiciels de formatage de texte. Une copie "
++"publiée dans un quelconque format numérique ouvert mais dont la structure a "
++"été conçue dans le but exprès de prévenir les modifications ultérieures du "
++"Document ou dans le but d'en décourager les lecteurs n'est pas considérée "
++"comme une Copie Transparente. Une copie qui n'est pas <_:quote-3/> est "
++"considérée, par opposition, comme <_:quote-4/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:142 C/fdl-appendix.xml:146 C/fdl-appendix.xml:250
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:266 C/fdl-appendix.xml:281 C/fdl-appendix.xml:352
++msgid "Title Page"
++msgstr "Page de titre"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:141
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such "
++"following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License "
++"requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have "
++"any title page as such, <_:quote-2/> means the text near the most prominent "
++"appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the "
++"text."
++msgstr ""
++"La <_:quote-1/> désigne, pour les ouvrages imprimés, la page de titre elle-"
++"même, ainsi que les pages supplémentaires nécessaires pour fournir "
++"clairement les informations dont cette Licence impose la présence sur la "
++"page de titre. Pour les travaux n'ayant pas de Page de titre comme décrit ci-"
++"dessus, la <_:quote-2/> désigne le texte qui s'apparente le plus au titre du "
++"document et situé avant le texte principal."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:166 C/fdl-appendix.xml:551
++msgid "section 3"
++msgstr "section 3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <_:link-1/> in any medium, either "
++"commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright "
++"notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document "
++"are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions "
++"whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to "
++"obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or "
++"distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If "
++"you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the "
++"conditions in <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez copier et distribuer le <_:link-1/> sur tout type de support, "
++"commercialement ou non, à condition que cette Licence, la notice de "
++"copyright et la notice de la Licence indiquant que cette Licence s'applique "
++"à ce Document soient reproduits dans toutes les copies, et que vous n'y "
++"ajoutiez aucune condition restrictive supplémentaire. Vous ne pouvez pas "
++"utiliser un quelconque moyen technique visant à empêcher ou à contrôler la "
++"lecture ou la reproduction ultérieure des copies que vous avez créées ou "
++"distribuées. Toutefois, vous pouvez solliciter une rétribution en échange "
++"des copies. Si vous distribuez une grande quantité de copies, référez-vous "
++"aux dispositions de la <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <_:link-1/> numbering more than 100, "
++"and the Document's license notice requires <_:link-2/>, you must enclose the "
++"copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: "
++"Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back "
++"cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the "
++"publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with "
++"all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <_:link-3/> and satisfy "
++"these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Si vous publiez des copies imprimées de ce <_:link-1/> à plus de 100 "
++"exemplaires et que la Licence du Document indique la présence de <_:link-2/"
++">, vous devez fournir une couverture pour chaque copie, qui présente les "
++"Textes de couverture des première et dernière pages de couverture du "
++"Document. Les première et dernière pages de couverture doivent également "
++"vous identifier clairement et sans ambiguïté comme étant l'éditeur de ces "
++"copies. La première page de couverture doit comporter le titre du Document "
++"en mots d'importance et de visibilité égales. Vous pouvez ajouter des "
++"informations complémentaires sur les pages de couverture. Les copies du "
++"Document dont seule la couverture a été modifiée peuvent être considérées "
++"comme des copies conformes, à condition que le titre du <_:link-3/> soit "
++"préservé et que les conditions indiquées précédemment soient respectées."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <_:link-1/> copies of the <_:link-2/> numbering "
++"more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <_:link-3/> copy "
++"along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-"
++"accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy "
++"of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using "
++"public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard "
++"network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably "
++"prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to "
++"ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated "
++"location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an "
++"Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition "
++"to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"Si vous publiez plus de 100 <_:link-1/> du <_:link-2/>, vous devez soit "
++"fournir une Copie transparente pour chaque Copie opaque, soit préciser ou "
++"fournir avec chaque Copie opaque une adresse réseau publiquement accessible "
++"d'une <_:link-3/> et complète du Document, sans aucun ajout ou modification, "
++"et à laquelle tout le monde peut accéder en téléchargement anonyme et sans "
++"frais, selon des protocoles réseau communs et standard. Si vous choisissez "
++"cette dernière option, vous devez prendre les dispositions nécessaires, dans "
++"la limite du raisonnable, afin de garantir l'accès non restrictif à la Copie "
++"transparente durant une année pleine après la diffusion publique de la "
++"dernière Copie opaque(directement ou via vos revendeurs)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <_:"
++"link-1/> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them "
++"a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"Nous recommandons, mais ce n'est pas obligatoire, que vous contactiez "
++"l'auteur du <_:link-1/> suffisamment tôt avant toute publication d'un grand "
++"nombre de copies, afin de lui permettre de vous donner une version à jour du "
++"Document."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:236
++msgid "2"
++msgstr "2"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:237
++msgid "3"
++msgstr "3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/> under the "
++"conditions of sections <_:link-3/> and <_:link-4/> above, provided that you "
++"release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified "
++"Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez copier et distribuer une <_:link-1/> du <_:link-2/> en "
++"respectant les conditions des sections <_:link-3/> et <_:link-4/> "
++"précédentes, à condition de placer cette Version modifiée sous la présente "
++"Licence, dans laquelle le terme « Document » doit être remplacé par les "
++"termes « Version modifiée », donnant ainsi l'autorisation de redistribuer et "
++"de modifier cette Version modifiée à quiconque en possède une copie. De "
++"plus, vous devez effectuer les actions suivantes dans la Version modifiée :"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <_:link-1/> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from "
++"that of the <_:link-2/>, and from those of previous versions (which should, "
++"if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You "
++"may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of "
++"that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Utiliser sur la <_:link-1/> (et sur la page de couverture éventuellement "
++"présente) un titre distinct de celui du <_:link-2/> d'origine et de toutes "
++"ses versions antérieures (qui, si elles existent, doivent être mentionnées "
++"dans la section Historique du Document). Vous pouvez utiliser le même titre "
++"si l'éditeur d'origine vous en a donné expressément la permission."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <_:link-1/>, as authors, one or more persons or entities "
++"responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <_:link-2/>, together "
++"with at least five of the principal authors of the <_:link-3/> (all of its "
++"principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"Mentionner sur la <_:link-1/> en tant qu'auteurs une ou plusieurs des "
++"personnes ou entités responsables des modifications de la <_:link-2/>, avec "
++"au moins les cinq principaux auteurs du <_:link-3/> (ou tous les auteurs "
++"s'il y en a moins de cinq)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <_:link-1/> the name of the publisher of the <_:link-2/>, as "
++"the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++"Préciser sur la <_:link-1/> le nom de l'éditeur de la <_:link-2/>, en tant "
++"qu'éditeur du Document."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:292
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <_:link-1/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Préserver intégralement toutes les notices de copyright du <_:link-1/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <_:link-1/> under the terms of this "
++"License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Inclure immédiatement après les notices de copyright une notice donnant à "
++"quiconque l'autorisation d'utiliser la <_:link-1/> selon les termes de cette "
++"Licence, sous la forme présentée dans l'annexe indiquée ci-dessous."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:330
++msgid "Document's"
++msgstr "Document"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <_:link-1/> and required "
++"<_:link-2/> given in the <_:link-3/> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Préserver dans cette notice la liste complète des <_:link-1/> et les <_:"
++"link-2/> donnés avec la notice de la Licence du <_:link-3/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:348 C/fdl-appendix.xml:353 C/fdl-appendix.xml:372
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:507 C/fdl-appendix.xml:508
++msgid "History"
++msgstr "Historique"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <_:quote-1/>, and its title, and add to it an "
++"item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <_:"
++"link-2/> as given on the <_:link-3/>. If there is no section entitled <_:"
++"quote-4/> in the <_:link-5/>, create one stating the title, year, authors, "
++"and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Préserver la section nommée <_:quote-1/> et son titre, et y ajouter une "
++"nouvelle entrée décrivant le titre, l'année, les nouveaux auteurs et "
++"l'éditeur de la <_:link-2/>, tels que décrits sur la <_:link-3/>, ainsi "
++"qu'un descriptif des modifications apportées depuis la précédente version. "
++"S'il n'y a pas de section nommée <_:quote-4/> dans le <_:link-5/>, créer une "
++"telle section précisant le titre, l'année, les auteurs et l'éditeur du "
++"Document tel que précisé sur la Page de titre,et ajouter une entrée "
++"décrivant la Version modifiée tel que précisé dans la phrase précédente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <_:link-1/> for public "
++"access to a <_:link-2/> copy of the Document, and likewise the network "
++"locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These "
++"may be placed in the <_:quote-3/> section. You may omit a network location "
++"for a work that was published at least four years before the Document "
++"itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives "
++"permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Conserver l'adresse réseau éventuellement indiquée dans le <_:link-1/> "
++"permettant à quiconque d'accéder à une <_:link-2/> du Document, ainsi que "
++"les adresses réseau indiquées dans le Document pour les versions précédentes "
++"sur lesquelles le Document se base. Ces liens peuvent être placés dans la "
++"section <_:quote-3/>. Vous pouvez ne pas conserver les liens pour un travail "
++"datant de plus de quatre ans avant la version courante ou si l'éditeur "
++"d'origine vous en accorde la permission."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:385 C/fdl-appendix.xml:509
++msgid "Acknowledgements"
++msgstr "Remerciements"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:386 C/fdl-appendix.xml:510
++msgid "Dedications"
++msgstr "Dédicaces"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <_:quote-1/> or <_:quote-2/>, preserve the section's "
++"title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the "
++"contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"Si une section <_:quote-1/> ou une section <_:quote-2/> sont présentes, les "
++"informations et les appréciations concernant les contributeurs et les "
++"personnes auxquelles s'adressent ces remerciements doivent être conservées, "
++"ainsi que le titre de ces sections."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/>, unaltered in their text and "
++"in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part "
++"of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Conserver sans modification les <_:link-1/> du <_:link-2/>, ni dans leurs "
++"textes, ni dans leurs titres. Les numéros de sections ne sont pas considérés "
++"comme faisant partie du texte des sections."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:412 C/fdl-appendix.xml:424 C/fdl-appendix.xml:445
++msgid "Endorsements"
++msgstr "Approbations"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <_:quote-1/>. Such a section may not be included "
++"in the <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Effacer toute section intitulée <_:quote-1/>. Une telle section ne peut pas "
++"être incluse dans une <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:425
++msgid "Invariant Section"
++msgstr "Section inaltérable"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <_:quote-1/> or to conflict in title "
++"with any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Ne pas renommer une section existante sous le titre <_:quote-1/> ou sous un "
++"autre titre entrant en conflit avec le titre d'une <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <_:link-1/> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that "
++"qualify as <_:link-2/> and contain no material copied from the Document, you "
++"may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To "
++"do this, add their titles to the list of <_:link-3/> in the Modified "
++"Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other "
++"section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Si la <_:link-1/> contient de nouvelles sections préliminaires ou de "
++"nouvelles annexes considérées comme des <_:link-2/> et que celles-ci ne "
++"contiennent aucun élément copié à partir du Document, vous pouvez à votre "
++"convenance en désigner une ou plusieurs comme étant des Sections "
++"inaltérables. Pour ce faire, ajoutez leurs titres dans la liste des <_:"
++"link-3/> au sein de la notice de Licence de la Version modifiée. Ces titres "
++"doivent êtres distincts des titres des autres sections."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <_:quote-1/>, provided it contains nothing "
++"but endorsements of your <_:link-2/> by various parties--for example, "
++"statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an "
++"organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez ajouter une section nommée <_:quote-1/> à condition que ces "
++"approbations ne concernent que les modifications ayant donné naissance à la "
++"<_:link-2/> (par exemple, comptes rendus de revue du document ou acceptation "
++"du texte par une organisation le reconnaissant comme étant la définition "
++"d'un standard)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:455
++msgid "Front-Cover Text"
++msgstr "première page de couverture"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:457
++msgid "Back-Cover Text"
++msgstr "dernière page de couverture"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <_:link-1/>, and a passage of "
++"up to 25 words as a <_:link-2/>, to the end of the list of <_:link-3/> in "
++"the <_:link-4/>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover "
++"Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If "
++"the <_:link-5/> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously "
++"added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on "
++"behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on "
++"explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez ajouter un passage comprenant jusqu'à cinq mots en <_:link-1/>, "
++"et jusqu'à vingt-cinq mots en <_:link-2/>, à la liste des <_:link-3/> de la "
++"<_:link-4/>. Il n'est autorisé d'ajouter qu'un seul passage en première et "
++"en dernière pages de couverture par personne ou groupe de personnes ou "
++"organisation ayant contribué à la modification du Document. Si le <_:link-5/"
++"> comporte déjà un passage sur la même couverture, ajouté en votre nom ou au "
++"nom de l'organisation au nom de laquelle vous agissez, vous ne pouvez pas "
++"ajouter de passage supplémentaire ; mais vous pouvez remplacer un ancien "
++"passage si vous avez expressément obtenu l'autorisation de l'éditeur de "
++"celui-ci."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <_:link-1/> do not by this License "
++"give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply "
++"endorsement of any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Cette Licence ne vous donne pas le droit d'utiliser le nom des auteurs et "
++"des éditeurs de ce <_:link-1/> à des fins publicitaires ou pour prétendre à "
++"l'approbation d'une <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:484 C/fdl-appendix.xml:566
++msgid "section 4"
++msgstr "section 4"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <_:link-1/> with other documents released under this "
++"License, under the terms defined in <_:link-2/> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <_:link-3/> of all "
++"of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant "
++"Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez fusionner le <_:link-1/> avec d'autres documents soumis à cette "
++"Licence, suivant les spécifications de la <_:link-2/> pour les Versions "
++"modifiées, à condition d'inclure dans le document résultant toutes les <_:"
++"link-3/> des documents originaux sans modification, et de toutes les lister "
++"dans la liste des Sections inaltérables de la notice de Licence du document "
++"résultant de la fusion."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <_:link-1/> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are "
++"multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make "
++"the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in "
++"parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if "
++"known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section "
++"titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the "
++"combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"Le document résultant de la fusion n'a besoin que d'une seule copie de cette "
++"Licence, et les <_:link-1/> existant en multiples exemplaires peuvent être "
++"remplacées par une copie unique. S'il existe plusieurs Sections inaltérables "
++"portant le même nom mais de contenu différent, rendez unique le titre de "
++"chaque section en ajoutant, à la fin de celui-ci, entre parenthèses, le nom "
++"de l'auteur ou de l'éditeur d'origine, ou, à défaut, un numéro unique. Les "
++"mêmes modifications doivent être réalisées dans la liste des Sections "
++"inaltérables de la notice de Licence du document final."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:511
++msgid "Endorsements."
++msgstr "Approbations"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <_:quote-1/> in "
++"the various original documents, forming one section entitled <_:quote-2/>; "
++"likewise combine any sections entitled <_:quote-3/>, and any sections "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>. You must delete all sections entitled <_:quote-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Dans le document résultant de la fusion, vous devez rassembler toutes les "
++"sections <_:quote-1/> des documents d'origine en une seule section <_quote-2/"
++">. De même, vous devez rassembler les sections <_:quote-3/> et <_:quote-4/>. "
++"Vous devez supprimer toutes les sections <_:quote-5/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <_:link-1/> and other documents "
++"released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this "
++"License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the "
++"collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim "
++"copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous pouvez créer un regroupement de documents comprenant le <_:link-1/> "
++"d'autres documents soumis à cette Licence, et remplacer les copies "
++"individuelles de cette Licence des différents documents par une unique copie "
++"incluse dans le regroupement de documents, à condition de respecter pour "
++"chacun de ces documents l'ensemble des règles de cette Licence concernant "
++"les copies conformes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:546
++msgid "aggregate"
++msgstr "agrégat"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:550
++msgid "Cover Text"
++msgstr "Textes de couverture"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <_:link-1/> or its derivatives with other separate and "
++"independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or "
++"distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <_:link-2/> of the "
++"Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. "
++"Such a compilation is called an <_:quote-3/>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <_:link-4/> requirement of <_:link-5/> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"La compilation du <_:link-1/> ou de ses dérivés avec d'autres documents ou "
++"travaux séparés et indépendants sur un support de stockage ou sur un média "
++"de distribution quelconque ne représente pas une <_:link-2/> du Document "
++"tant qu'aucun copyright n'est déposé pour cette compilation. Une telle "
++"compilation est appelée <_:quote-3/> et cette Licence ne s'applique pas aux "
++"autres travaux indépendants compilés avec le Document s'ils ne sont pas eux-"
++"mêmes des travaux dérivés du Document. Si les exigences de la <_:link-4/> "
++"concernant les <_:link-5/> sont applicables à ces copies du Document, et si "
++"le Document représente un volume inférieur à un quart du volume total de "
++"l'agrégat, les Textes de couverture du Document peuvent être placés sur des "
++"pages de couverture qui n'encadrent que le Document au sein de l'agrégat. "
++"Dans le cas contraire, ils doivent apparaître sur les pages de couverture de "
++"l'agrégat complet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <_:link-1/> under the terms of <_:link-2/>. Replacing <_:"
++"link-3/> with translations requires special permission from their copyright "
++"holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections "
++"in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may "
++"include a translation of this License provided that you also include the "
++"original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between "
++"the translation and the original English version of this License, the "
++"original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"La traduction est considérée comme une forme de modification, vous pouvez "
++"donc distribuer les traductions du <_:link-1/> selon les termes de la <_:"
++"link-2/>. Vous devez obtenir l'autorisation spéciale des auteurs des <_:"
++"link-3/> pour les remplacer par des traductions, mais vous pouvez inclure "
++"les traductions des Sections inaltérables en plus des textes originaux. Vous "
++"pouvez inclure une traduction de cette Licence à condition d'inclure "
++"également la version originale en anglais. En cas de contradiction entre la "
++"traduction et la version originale en anglais, c'est cette dernière qui "
++"prévaut."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <_:link-1/> except "
++"as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, "
++"modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will "
++"automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who "
++"have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have "
++"their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++"Vous ne pouvez pas copier, modifier, sous-licencier ou distribuer le <_:"
++"link-1/> autrement que selon les termes de cette Licence. Tout autre acte de "
++"copie, modification, sous-Licence ou distribution du Document est sans objet "
++"et vous prive automatiquement des droits que cette Licence vous accorde. En "
++"revanche, les personnes qui ont reçu de votre part des copies ou les droits "
++"sur le document sous couvert de cette Licence ne voient pas leurs droits "
++"révoqués tant qu'elles en respectent les principes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:597
++msgid "Free Software Foundation"
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:603
++msgid "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++msgstr "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:595
++msgid ""
++"The <_:ulink-1/> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free "
++"Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar "
++"in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new "
++"problems or concerns. See <_:ulink-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"La <_:ulink-1/> peut publier de temps en temps de nouvelles versions "
++"révisées de cette Licence. Ces nouvelles versions seront semblables à la "
++"présente version dans l'esprit, mais pourront différer sur des points "
++"particuliers en fonction de nouvelles questions ou nouveaux problèmes. Voyez "
++"<_:ulink-2/> pour plus de détails."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:610
++msgid "or any later version"
++msgstr "ou toute autre version ultérieure"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<_:link-1/> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <_:"
++"quote-2/> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and "
++"conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has "
++"been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the "
++"Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose "
++"any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"Chaque version de cette Licence est dotée d'un numéro de version distinct. "
++"Si un <_:link-1/> spécifie un numéro de version particulier de cette "
++"Licence, et porte la mention <_:quote-2/>, vous pouvez choisir de suivre les "
++"termes de la version spécifiée ou ceux de n'importe quelle version "
++"ultérieure publiée par la Free Software Foundation. Si aucun numéro de "
++"version n'est spécifié, vous pouvez choisir n'importe quelle version "
++"officielle publiée par la Free Software Foundation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:639 C/fdl-appendix.xml:651
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "texte de première page de couverture"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:640 C/fdl-appendix.xml:654
++msgid "Back-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "texte de dernière page de couverture"
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <_:link-1/> "
++"being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <_:link-2/> being LIST, and with the <_:"
++"link-3/> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Permission vous est donnée de copier, distribuer et/ou modifier ce document "
++"selon les termes de la Licence GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 "
++"ou ultérieure publiée par la Free Software Foundation ; avec <_:link-1/> "
++"suivantes LISTE DES TITRES DES SECTIONS INALTÉRABLES, avec le <_:link-2/> "
++"suivant TEXTE DE PREMIÈRE PAGE DE COUVERTURE et avec le <_:link-3/> suivant "
++"TEXTE DE DERNIÈRE PAGE DE COUVERTURE. Une copie de cette Licence est incluse "
++"dans la section appelée <_:quote-4/> de ce document."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:649
++msgid "with no Invariant Sections"
++msgstr "pas de section inaltérable"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:652
++msgid "no Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "pas de texte de première page de couverture"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:653
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"
++msgstr ""
++"texte de première page de couverture suivant TEXTE DE PREMIÈRE PAGE DE "
++"COUVERTURE"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <_:link-1/>, write <_:quote-2/> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <_:link-3/>, write <_:quote-4/> instead of <_:"
++"quote-5/>; likewise for <_:link-6/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Si votre Document ne comporte pas de <_:link-1/> écrivez <_:quote-2/> au "
++"lieu de la liste des sections inaltérables. Si votre Document ne comporte "
++"pas de <_:link-3/>, écrivez <_:quote-4/> au lieu de <_:quote-5/>; de même "
++"pour le <_:link-6/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:661
++msgid "GNU General Public License"
++msgstr "Licence Publique Générale GNU"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <_:ulink-1/>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
++"Si votre Document contient des exemples non triviaux de code programme, nous "
++"recommandons de distribuer ces exemples en parallèle sous <_:ulink-1/>, qui "
++"permet leur usage dans les logiciels libres."
++
++#~ msgid "1.18.1"
++#~ msgstr "1.18.1"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel> "
++#~ "<application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the "
++#~ "<filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the "
++#~ "information gathered in the first step. (Note that this can be run "
++#~ "repeatedly. It will try to ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Génération des fichiers « prototypes ».</guilabel> "
++#~ "<application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> crée un certain nombre de "
++#~ "fichiers dans le sous-répertoire <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</"
++#~ "filename>, en utilisant les informations récoltées lors de la première "
++#~ "étape (notez que le script peut être exécuté plusieurs fois, il est fait "
++#~ "en sorte qu'aucune donnée ne soit jamais perdue)."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to "
++#~ "keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> "
++#~ "supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a "
++#~ "makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in "
++#~ "tmpl by hand, please remove the directory (e.g. from version control "
++#~ "system)."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Depuis GTK-Doc 1.9, les prototypes peuvent être évités. Nous encourageons "
++#~ "tout le monde à conserver la documentation dans le code. "
++#~ "<application>gtkdocize</application> prend maintenant en charge l'option "
++#~ "<option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> qui choisit un makefile qui évite "
++#~ "complètement l'utilisation de tmpl. Si vous n'avez jamais modifié de "
++#~ "fichiers à la main dans tmpl, effacez le répertoire (par ex. à partir "
++#~ "d'un système de gestion de versions)."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - This is the DocBook SGML DTD. "
++#~ "<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora."
++#~ "com/davenport</ulink>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - ce sont les DTD DocBook SGML. "
++#~ "<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora."
++#~ "com/davenport</ulink>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - This is a DSSSL processor for converting "
++#~ "SGML to various formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type="
++#~ "\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - c'est un moteur DSSSL pour convertir le "
++#~ "SGML en divers formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type="
++#~ "\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> This is the DSSSL code "
++#~ "to convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together "
++#~ "with jade. I've customized the DSSSL code slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to "
++#~ "colour the program code listings/declarations, and to support global "
++#~ "cross-reference indices in the generated HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh."
++#~ "com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> - c'est le code DSSSL "
++#~ "utilisé pour convertir de DocBook vers HTML (ainsi que quelques autres "
++#~ "formats). Il est utilisé conjointement avec Jade. J'ai légèrement "
++#~ "personnalisé le code DSSSL, dans gtk-doc.dsl, pour coloriser les listings "
++#~ "de code du programme et les déclarations ainsi que pour prendre en charge "
++#~ "les indices globaux des références croisées dans le HTML généré. <ulink "
++#~ "url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/"
++#~ "docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - if you want to create man pages "
++#~ "from the DocBook. I've customized the 'translation spec' slightly, to "
++#~ "capitalise section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of "
++#~ "the pages and the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on "
++#~ "<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora."
++#~ "com/davenport</ulink> NOTE: This does not work yet."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - si vous souhaitez créer des pages "
++#~ "de manuel depuis DocBook. J'ai légèrement adapté les « spécifications de "
++#~ "traduction » pour mettre en majuscule les en-têtes de section et pour "
++#~ "ajouter le titre « GTK Library » en haut des pages et la date de révision "
++#~ "en bas. Il y a un lien sur cela ici <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/"
++#~ "davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>. Note : "
++#~ "cela ne fonctionne pas encore."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are "
++#~ "installed."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Il n'y a pas d'emplacement standard pour l'installation des feuilles de "
++#~ "styles modulaires de DocBook."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "GTK-Doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically:"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Les scripts d'installation de GTK-Doc cherchent dans ces trois "
++#~ "répertoires automatiquement :"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (used by "
++#~ "RedHat)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (utilisé "
++#~ "par Red Hat)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (used by Debian)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (utilisé par "
++#~ "Debian)"
++
++#~ msgid "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (used by SuSE)"
++#~ msgstr "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (utilisé par SuSE)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to "
++#~ "configure GTK-Doc using the option: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<"
++#~ "PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Si les feuilles de styles sont installées autre part, vous devez "
++#~ "configurer GTK-Doc en utilisant l'option : <command>--with-dsssl-dir=<"
++#~ "CHEMIN_VERS_REPERTOIRE_RACINE_FEUILLES2STYLEs></command>."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "You may also want to enable GTK-Doc for the distcheck make target. Just "
++#~ "add the one line shown in the next example to your top-level "
++#~ "<filename>Makefile.am</filename>:"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Il est aussi possible d'activer GTK-Doc pour la cible distcheck de make. "
++#~ "Il faut juste ajouter la ligne suivante au fichier <filename>Makefile.am</"
++#~ "filename> du répertoire racine :"
++
++#~ msgid "Enable GTK-Doc during make distcheck"
++#~ msgstr "Activation de GTK-Doc pendant le « make distcheck »"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "DISTCHECK_CONFIGURE_FLAGS=--enable-gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "DISTCHECK_CONFIGURE_FLAGS=--enable-gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "/**\n"
++#~ " * identifier:\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * documentation ...\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * # Sub heading #\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * more documentation:\n"
++#~ " * - list item 1\n"
++#~ " * - list item 2\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * Even more docs.\n"
++#~ " */\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "/**\n"
++#~ " * identifier:\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * documentation ...\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * # Sub heading #\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * more documentation:\n"
++#~ " * - list item 1\n"
++#~ " * - list item 2\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * Even more docs.\n"
++#~ " */\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Since GTK-Doc-1.18 the tool supports a subset or the <ulink url=\"http://"
++#~ "daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">markdown language</ulink>. One "
++#~ "can use it for sub-headings and simple itemized lists. On older GTK-Doc "
++#~ "versions the content will be rendered as it (the list items will appear "
++#~ "in one line separated by dashes). <_:example-1/>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "À partir de GTK-Doc 1.18, il est possible d'utiliser un sous-ensemble de "
++#~ "la <ulink url=\"http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">syntaxe "
++#~ "markdown</ulink>. On peut l'utiliser pour les sous-titres et les listes à "
++#~ "puces simples. Dans des versions plus anciennes de GTK-Doc, le contenu "
++#~ "est affiché tel quel (les éléments d'une liste sont affichés sur une "
++#~ "seule ligne, séparés par des tirets). <_:example-1/>"
++
++#~ msgid "(FIXME : Stability information)"
++#~ msgstr "(FIXME : informations de stabilité)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Also, take a look at gobject introspection annotation tags: http://live."
++#~ "gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Jetez un coup d'œil aux étiquettes d'annotation de l'introspection "
++#~ "gobject : http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++
++#~ msgid "Chris"
++#~ msgstr "Chris"
++
++#~ msgid "Lyttle"
++#~ msgstr "Lyttle"
++
++#~ msgid "chris@wilddev.net"
++#~ msgstr "chris@wilddev.net"
++
++#~ msgid "Dan"
++#~ msgstr "Dan"
++
++#~ msgid "Mueth"
++#~ msgstr "Mueth"
++
++#~ msgid "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++#~ msgstr "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++
++#~ msgid "Stefan"
++#~ msgstr "Stefan"
++
++#~ msgid "Kost"
++#~ msgstr "Kost"
++
++#~ msgid "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++#~ msgstr "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++
++#~ msgid "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++#~ msgstr "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++
++#~ msgid "2000, 2005"
++#~ msgstr "2000, 2005"
++
++#~ msgid "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle"
++#~ msgstr "Dan Mueth et Chris Lyttle"
++
++#~ msgid "2007-2011"
++#~ msgstr "2007-2011"
++
++#~ msgid "Stefan Sauer (Kost)"
++#~ msgstr "Stefan Sauer (Kost)"
++
++#~ msgid "20 Sep 2011"
++#~ msgstr "20 septembre 2011"
++
++#~ msgid "ss"
++#~ msgstr "ss"
++
++#~ msgid "development version"
++#~ msgstr "version de développement"
++
++#~ msgid "1.18"
++#~ msgstr "1.18"
++
++#~ msgid "14 sep 2011"
++#~ msgstr "14 septembre 2011"
++
++#~ msgid "bug fixes, speedups, markdown support"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "correction de bogues, amélioration de la vitesse de traitement, prise en "
++#~ "charge de markdown"
++
++#~ msgid "1.17"
++#~ msgstr "1.17"
++
++#~ msgid "26 Feb 2011"
++#~ msgstr "26 février 2011"
++
++#~ msgid "sk"
++#~ msgstr "sk"
++
++#~ msgid "urgent bug fix update"
++#~ msgstr "mise à jour pour une correction de bogue urgente"
++
++#~ msgid "1.16"
++#~ msgstr "1.16"
++
++#~ msgid "14 Jan 2011"
++#~ msgstr "14 janvier 2011"
++
++#~ msgid "bugfixes, layout improvements"
++#~ msgstr "correctifs et améliorations de mise en page"
++
++#~ msgid "1.15"
++#~ msgstr "1.15"
++
++#~ msgid "21 May 2010"
++#~ msgstr "21 mai 2010"
++
++#~ msgid "bug and regression fixes"
++#~ msgstr "corrections d'anomalies et de régressions"
++
++#~ msgid "1.14"
++#~ msgstr "1.14"
++
++#~ msgid "28 March 2010"
++#~ msgstr "28 mars 2010"
++
++#~ msgid "bugfixes and performance improvements"
++#~ msgstr "correctifs et amélioration de performances"
++
++#~ msgid "1.13"
++#~ msgstr "1.13"
++
++#~ msgid "18 December 2009"
++#~ msgstr "18 décembre 2009"
++
++#~ msgid "broken tarball update"
++#~ msgstr "mise à jour du tarball brisé"
++
++#~ msgid "1.12"
++#~ msgstr "1.12"
++
++#~ msgid "new tool features and bugfixes"
++#~ msgstr "comportements de nouveaux outils et résolution de bogues"
++
++#~ msgid "1.11"
++#~ msgstr "1.11"
++
++#~ msgid "16 Novemebr 2008"
++#~ msgstr "16 novembre 2008"
++
++#~ msgid "mal"
++#~ msgstr "mal"
++
++#~ msgid "GNOME doc-utils migration"
++#~ msgstr "Migration à GNOME doc-utils"
++
++#~ msgid "xxx_get_type()"
++#~ msgstr "xxx_get_type()"
++
++#~ msgid "<package>.types"
++#~ msgstr "<package>.types"
++
++#~ msgid "<package>-sections.txt"
++#~ msgstr "<package>-sections.txt"
++
++#~ msgid "explanation"
++#~ msgstr "explication"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Missing or wrong naming in <placeholder-1/> file (see <placeholder-2/>)."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Mauvais nom ou nom absent dans le fichier <placeholder-1/> (consultez "
++#~ "<placeholder-2/>)."
++
++#~ msgid "GtkWidget"
++#~ msgstr "GtkWidget"
++
++#~ msgid "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++#~ msgstr "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++
++#~ msgid "<package>.hierarchy"
++#~ msgstr "<package>.hierarchy"
++
++#~ msgid "xml/tree_index.sgml"
++#~ msgstr "xml/tree_index.sgml"
++
++#~ msgid "xml/annotation-glossary.xml"
++#~ msgstr "xml/annotation-glossary.xml"
++
++#~ msgid "Check that <placeholder-1/> is xi:included from <placeholder-2/>."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Vérifiez que <placeholder-1/> est xi:included à partir de <placeholder-2/"
++#~ ">."
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# Galician translation for gtk-doc.
++# Copyright (C) 2014 gtk-doc's COPYRIGHT HOLDER
++# This file is distributed under the same license as the gtk-doc package.
++# Fran Dieguez <frandieguez@gnome.org>, 2014.
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc master\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-09-22 21:18+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-09-23 02:11+0200\n"
++"Last-Translator: Fran Dieguez <frandieguez@gnome.org>\n"
++"Language-Team: gnome-l10n-gl@gnome.org\n"
++"Language: gl\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n"
++"X-Generator: Virtaal 0.7.1\n"
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++msgctxt "_"
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr "Fran Diéguez <frandieguez@gnome.org>, 2014."
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/title
++#: C/index.docbook:12
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "Manual de GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/edition
++#: C/index.docbook:13
++msgid "1.20"
++msgstr "1.20"
++
++#. (itstool) path: abstract/para
++#: C/index.docbook:14
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr ""
++"Manual de usuarios para desenvolvedores con instrucións do uso de GTK-Doc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:16
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:25
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:34
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: publisher/publishername
++#: C/index.docbook:45
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "Proxecto GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/publisher
++#: C/index.docbook:44
++msgid ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++msgstr ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:48
++msgid "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:52
++msgid "<year>2007-2014</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2007-2014</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:65
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, "
++"Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation "
++"with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A "
++"copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Pode copiar, distribuír e modificar este documento baixo os termos da "
++"<citetitle>Licenza de Documentación Libre GNU</citetitle>, na súa versión "
++"1.1 ou posterior, publicada pola Free Software Foundation, sen seccións "
++"invariantes e sen textos de portada ou de contraportada. <link linkend=\""
++"fdl\">Inclúese</link> unha cópida da licenza."
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:73
++msgid ""
++"Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and "
++"services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME "
++"documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the "
++"GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial "
++"caps."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:83
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.21.1</revnumber> <date>18 Jul 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>development version</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.21.1</revnumber> <date>18 de Xullo de 2014</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>versión de "
++"desenvolvemento</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:89
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 Jul 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 de Xullo de 2014</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>arranxos de erros, retirado "
++"de características obsoletas</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:95
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16 Feb 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, markdown support, style improvements</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16 de Febreiro de 2014</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>arranxos de erros, "
++"compatibilidade de markdown, melloras de estilo</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:101
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 Jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 de Xuño de 2013</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>arranxos de erros</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:107
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 Sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, speedups, markdown support</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 de Setembro de 2011</date> "
++"<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>arranxos de erros, melloras "
++"de velocidade, compatibilidade de markdown</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:113
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 Feb 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>urgent bug fix update</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:119
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:125
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 May 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:131
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 March 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes and performance improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:137
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>broken tarball update</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:143
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>new tool features and "
++"bugfixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:149
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 November 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>GNOME doc-utils migration</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:162
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:164
++msgid ""
++"This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how "
++"it is used."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:170
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:172
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the "
++"public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can "
++"also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:180
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:182
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source "
++"files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the "
++"template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only "
++"document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce "
++"output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:189
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc consists of a number of perl scripts, each performing a different "
++"step in the process."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:194
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:201
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the "
++"source files with the documentation for each function, macro, union etc. (In "
++"the past information was entered in generated template files, which is not "
++"recommended anymore)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:211
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code "
++"looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. "
++"It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> "
++"containing a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according "
++"to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to "
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. The author can rearrange "
++"the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the "
++"final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><"
++"module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations "
++"found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some symbols to show "
++"up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or "
++"the declaration should appear differently, one can place entities similar to "
++"the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><"
++"module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:228
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> can also be used to dynamically "
++"query a library about any GObject subclasses it exports. It saves "
++"information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about "
++"any GObject properties and signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:234
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> should not be used anymore. It was "
++"needed in the past when GObject was still GtkObject inside gtk+."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:241
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the information gathered "
++"in the first step. (Note that this can be run repeatedly. It will try to "
++"ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:250
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep "
++"documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now "
++"a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that "
++"skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand, "
++"please remove the directory (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:262
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the SGML/XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> turns the template files into SGML or "
++"XML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code "
++"contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it "
++"gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads docs from "
++"sources and introspection data. We recommend to use Docbook XML."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:273
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the SGML/XML files into HTML "
++"files in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. "
++"Likewise <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the SGML/XML files "
++"into a PDF document called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:279
++msgid ""
++"Files in <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class="
++"\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class=\"directory\">html/</"
++"filename> directories are always overwritten. One should never edit them "
++"directly."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:287
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After "
++"installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be "
++"run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, "
++"the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in "
++"the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, "
++"<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-"
++"links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application "
++"will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:305
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:308
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:309
++msgid "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - the main scripts are in Perl."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:312
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> - the xslt processor from libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:316
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> - the docbook xsl stylesheets <ulink url="
++"\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type=\"http"
++"\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:320
++msgid "<guilabel>Python</guilabel> - optional - for gtkdoc-depscan"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:323
++msgid ""
++"One of <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</guilabel> "
++"or <guilabel>vim</guilabel> - optional - used for syntax highlighting of "
++"examples"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:331
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:333 C/index.docbook:347
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:337
++msgid ""
++"(History, authors, web pages, mailing list, license, future plans, "
++"comparison with other similar systems.)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:345
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:351
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:360
++msgid "Setting up your project"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:362
++msgid ""
++"The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc into "
++"your project. Theses sections assume we work on a project called 'meep'. "
++"This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user app called "
++"'meeper'. We also assume you will be using autoconf and automake. In "
++"addition section <link linkend=\"plain_makefiles\">plain makefiles or other "
++"build systems</link> will describe the basics needed to work in a different "
++"build setup."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:373
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:375
++msgid ""
++"Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/reference "
++"(this way you can also have docs/help for end-user documentation). It is "
++"recommended to create another subdirectory with the name of the doc-package. "
++"For packages with just one library this step is not necessary."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:384
++msgid "Example directory structure"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:385
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:382
++msgid "This can then look as shown below: <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:400 C/index.docbook:407
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:402
++msgid ""
++"Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> "
++"script."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:408
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"# check for gtk-doc\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:420
++msgid "Keep gtk-doc optional"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:421
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"# check for gtk-doc\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:415
++msgid ""
++"This will require all developers to have gtk-doc installed. If it is okay "
++"for your project to have optional api-doc build setup, you can solve this as "
++"below. Keep it as is, as gtkdocize is looking for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</"
++"function> at the start of a line. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:432
++msgid ""
++"The first argument is used to check for the gtkdocversion at configure time. "
++"The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</application>. "
++"The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several configure "
++"switches:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:438
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:439
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:440
++msgid ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:441
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: important/para
++#: C/index.docbook:445
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--"
++"enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. "
++"Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for "
++"users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:453
++msgid ""
++"Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside you "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++"definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:461
++msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:462
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:467
++msgid ""
++"After all changes to <filename>configure.ac</filename> are made, update the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> file. This can be done by re-running "
++"<code>autoreconf -i</code> or <code>autogen.sh</code>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:475
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:477
++msgid ""
++"First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">examples</filename> sub directory of the <ulink url=\"https://"
++"git.gnome.org/browse/gtk-doc/tree/examples/Makefile.am\">gtkdoc-sources</"
++"ulink> to your project's API documentation directory ( <filename class="
++"\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></filename>). A local copy "
++"should be available under e.g. <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-tools/"
++"examples/Makefile.am</filename>. If you have multiple doc-packages repeat "
++"this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:488
++msgid ""
++"The next step is to edit the settings inside the <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>. All the settings have a comment above that describes their "
++"purpose. Most settings are extra flags passed to the respective tools. Every "
++"tool has a variable of the form <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>. "
++"All the tools support <option>--help</option> to list the supported "
++"parameters."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:502
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:504
++msgid ""
++"Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup "
++"the build infrastructure after a checkout from version control system (such "
++"as cvs/svn/git). GTK-Doc comes with a tool called <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application> which can be used in such a script. It should be run before "
++"autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:513
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:514
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:520
++msgid ""
++"When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.make</filename> to your project root (or any directory specified by the "
++"<option>--docdir</option> option). It also checks you configure script for "
++"the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> invocation. This macro can be used to "
++"pass extra parameters to <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:529
++msgid ""
++"Historically GTK-Doc was generating template files where developers entered "
++"the docs. This turned out to be not so good (e.g. the need for having "
++"generated files under version control). Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the tools can get "
++"all the information from source comments and thus the templates can be "
++"avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-"
++"tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. "
++"Besides adding the option directly to the command invocation, they can be "
++"added also to an environment variable called <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</"
++"symbol> or set as a 2nd parameter in <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro in "
++"the configure script. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand and "
++"migrating from older gtkdoc versions, please remove the directory (e.g. from "
++"version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:546 C/index.docbook:563
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:548
++msgid ""
++"After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then "
++"give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run "
++"<filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:555
++msgid ""
++"The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-"
++"directories. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past ."
++"sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:564
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:570
++msgid ""
++"Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. But hang-on, "
++"during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages with life."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:578
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:580
++msgid ""
++"As a rule of the thumb, it's those files you edit, that should go under "
++"version control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> "
++"(in the past .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:591
++msgid "Integration with plain makefiles or other build systems"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:593
++msgid ""
++"In the case one does not want to use automake and therefore <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.mak</filename> one will need to call the gtkdoc tools in the right order "
++"in own makefiles (or other build tools)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:600
++msgid "Documentation build steps"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:601
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --source-dir=...\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:615
++msgid ""
++"One will need to look at the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> and "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> to pick the extra options needed."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:624
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:626
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code "
++"documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure "
++"from other sources. During the next section you will find all information "
++"about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/title
++#: C/index.docbook:634
++msgid "Documentation placement"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:635
++msgid ""
++"In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing inside "
++"the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the disadvantages that the "
++"information is often not updated and also that the file tend to cause "
++"conflicts with version control systems."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:641
++msgid ""
++"The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the documentation "
++"inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way of documenting "
++"code."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:652 C/index.docbook:669
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:653
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:648
++msgid ""
++"The scanner can handle the majority of C headers fine. In the case of "
++"receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special case, one can "
++"hint GTK-Doc to skip over them. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:664
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:670
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:666
++msgid ""
++"A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation "
++"block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:679
++msgid ""
++"The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is "
++"related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add "
++"table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:685
++msgid ""
++"The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol "
++"types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter "
++"description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows "
++"the detailed description. All lines (outside program listings and CDATA "
++"sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph "
++"breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-"
++"asterisk-blank-blank). This is useful in preformatted text (code listings)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:702
++msgid ""
++"What it is: The name for a class or function can sometimes be misleading for "
++"people coming from a different background."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:708
++msgid ""
++"What it does: Tell about common uses. Put it in relation with the other API."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:698
++msgid "When documenting code, describe two aspects: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:723
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:728
++msgid ""
++"Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to "
++"parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:734
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:739
++msgid ""
++"Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and "
++"macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:745
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:750
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:755
++msgid ""
++"Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure and #GObjectClass."
++"foo_bar() to refer to a vmethod."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:717
++msgid ""
++"One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in "
++"the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. "
++"GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:764
++msgid ""
++"If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or "
++"'#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML "
++"entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&"
++"commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them "
++"with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:773
++msgid ""
++"DocBook can do more than just links. One can also have lists, examples, "
++"headings, and images. As of version 1.20, the preferred way is to use a "
++"subset of the basic text formatting syntax called <ulink url=\"http://"
++"daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink>. On older GTK-Doc "
++"versions any documentation that includes Markdown will be rendered as is. "
++"For example, list items will appear as lines starting with a dash."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:784
++msgid ""
++"In older GTK-Doc releases, if you need support for additional formatting, "
++"you would need to enable the usage of docbook SGML/XML tags inside doc-"
++"comments by putting <option>--xml-mode</option> or <option>--sgml-mode</"
++"option> in the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:794
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block using Markdown"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:795
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * documentation paragraph ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Second Sub Heading\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading With a Link Anchor # {#heading-two}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * more documentation:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 1\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Paragraph inside a list item.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. another numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Another paragraph. [A Link to the GNOME Website](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [A link to the heading anchor above][heading-two]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * A C-language example:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Gorgeous!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:834
++msgid ""
++"More examples of what markdown tags are supported can be found in the <ulink "
++"url=\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/Markdown"
++"\">GTK+ Documentation Markdown Syntax Reference</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:840
++msgid ""
++"As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one "
++"cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to "
++"comment those symbols too. This helps other to understand you code. "
++"Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the "
++"2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made public, "
++"all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and insert "
++"the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:854
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:856
++msgid ""
++"Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or "
++"module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short "
++"description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:864
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:865
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:884
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:886
++msgid ""
++"The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name give here "
++"should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:895
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:897
++msgid ""
++"A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the "
++"links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:904
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:906
++msgid ""
++"The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It "
++"can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:913
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:915
++msgid ""
++"Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <"
++"title> is used as a section_id and for other sections it is <"
++"MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:923
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:925
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:931
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:938
++msgid ""
++"Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third "
++"parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have "
++"confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after "
++"the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major "
++"release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be "
++"rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:950
++msgid ""
++"Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are "
++"typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly "
++"changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a "
++"more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source "
++"or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:962
++msgid ""
++"Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but "
++"that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in "
++"specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:971
++msgid ""
++"Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require "
++"end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be "
++"Internal."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:933
++msgid ""
++"An informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend "
++"the use of one of these terms: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:983
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:985
++msgid ""
++"The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a "
++"comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:994
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:996
++msgid ""
++"The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This "
++"will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of "
++"a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1007
++msgid ""
++"To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs "
++"into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1016
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1018
++msgid ""
++"Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is "
++"documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the "
++"definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus "
++"functions are usually documented in the c-source and macros, structs and "
++"enums in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1026 C/index.docbook:1055
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1028
++msgid ""
++"You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell "
++"when an API was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1033
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1034
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1036
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1041
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1043
++msgid ""
++"Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The "
++"description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1051
++msgid "(FIXME : Stability information)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1056
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1076 C/index.docbook:1112
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1082
++msgid ""
++"Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/"
++"unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1088
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1093
++msgid ""
++"Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1078 C/index.docbook:1171
++msgid "Please remember to: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1100
++msgid ""
++"Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are "
++"private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1105
++msgid ""
++"Also, take a look at GObject Introspection annotation tags: http://live."
++"gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1113
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1134
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1135
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1137
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1142
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1144
++msgid ""
++"In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag "
++"(@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1154 C/index.docbook:1156
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1157
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1169 C/index.docbook:1188
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1175
++msgid ""
++"Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or "
++"after other signals."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1181
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1189
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZE] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarize\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1206 C/index.docbook:1207
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1208
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" GtkWidget parent;\n"
++"\n"
++" /*< public >*/\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1225
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1231
++msgid ""
++"Struct comment blocks can also be used for GObjects and GObjectClasses. It "
++"is usually a good idea to add a comment block for a class, if it has "
++"vmethods (as this is how they can be documented). For the GObject itself one "
++"can use the related section docs, having a separate block for the instance "
++"struct would be useful if the instance has public fields. One disadvantage "
++"here is that this creates two index entries of the same name (the structure "
++"and the section)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1243 C/index.docbook:1244
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1245
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1262
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1272
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1274
++msgid ""
++"Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1283
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1279
++msgid ""
++"To link to another section in the GTK docs: <_:informalexample-1/> The "
++"linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. "
++"For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and "
++"then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class "
++"name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1296
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1293
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1305
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1316
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1302
++msgid ""
++"To include example code: <_:informalexample-1/> or possibly this, for very "
++"short code fragments which don't need a title: <_:informalexample-2/> For "
++"the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation: |[ ... ]|"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1335
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1332
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1355
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1352
++msgid ""
++"To include a note which stands out from the text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1368
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1365
++msgid "To refer to a type: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1377
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1374
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1386
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1383
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1395
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1392
++msgid ""
++"To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <_:informalexample-1/> but "
++"you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link "
++"to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the "
++"abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1406
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1403
++msgid "To emphasize text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1415
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1412
++msgid "For filenames use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1424
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1421
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1434
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1436
++msgid ""
++"There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the "
++"inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past .sgml), "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1445
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1447
++msgid ""
++"If your library or application includes GObjects, you want their signals, "
++"arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the "
++"documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</"
++"function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1456
++msgid "Example types file snippet"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1457
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1468
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this "
++"list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not "
++"dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1477
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1479
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the "
++"inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page "
++"per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them "
++"and place them in an order."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1486
++msgid ""
++"While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later run will not "
++"touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the documentation. "
++"That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc has now a test "
++"suite, where also the master-document is recreated from scratch. Its a good "
++"idea to look at this from time to time to see if there are some new goodies "
++"introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1496
++msgid ""
++"Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The "
++"benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API "
++"documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol "
++"documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along "
++"with the library."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1505
++msgid ""
++"So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is "
++"only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there "
++"which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1512
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1513
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1532
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1534
++msgid ""
++"The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. "
++"Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control "
++"the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1540
++msgid ""
++"The section file is a plain text file with XML-like syntax (using tags). "
++"Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment "
++"lines."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1546
++msgid ""
++"The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, "
++"without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++"FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++"template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++"converted into the DocBook SGML/XML file <filename>sgml/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename> or the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. "
++"(The name of the HTML file is based on the module name and the section "
++"title, or for GObjects it is based on the GObjects class name converted to "
++"lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1558
++msgid ""
++"The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the "
++"section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially "
++"created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if "
++"one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1565
++msgid ""
++"You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. "
++"Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis "
++"section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject "
++"declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the "
++"documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private "
++"declarations which will not be output (it is a handy way to avoid warning "
++"messages about unused declarations). If your library contains private types "
++"which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of "
++"implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection. "
++"Whether you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs in public or "
++"Standard section depends if they have public entries (variables, vmethods)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1584
++msgid ""
++"You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the "
++"#include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-"
++"separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it "
++"outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. "
++"If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1598
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1600
++msgid ""
++"A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The "
++"generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and "
++"<filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text "
++"files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1609
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with "
++"the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank "
++"lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The "
++"second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, "
++"which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1618
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols "
++"given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found "
++"in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1625
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, "
++"where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where "
++"to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1633
++msgid ""
++"Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile."
++"am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during "
++"<command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1640
++msgid ""
++"One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: "
++"<filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><"
++"package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first one can be compared with the "
++"section file if that is manually maintained. The second lists all "
++"declarations from the headers. If a symbol is missing one could check if "
++"this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1649
++msgid ""
++"If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced "
++"by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>."
++"prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</"
++"filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask GTK-Doc "
++"to keep the intermediate scanner file for further analysis, by running it as "
++"<command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1664
++msgid "Modernizing the documentation"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1666
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc has been around for quite some time. In this section we list new "
++"features together with the version since when it is available."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1672
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1674
++msgid ""
++"When using xml instead of sgml, one can actually name the master document "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1679
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from "
++"the vcs. This only works nicely for projects that have a very regular "
++"structure (e.g. each .{c,h} pair will create new section). If one organize a "
++"project close to that updating a manually maintained section file can be as "
++"simple as running <code>meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-"
++"sections.txt</code>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1690
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.8 already introduced the syntax for documenting sections in the "
++"sources instead of the separate files under <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">tmpl</filename>. This version adds options to switch the whole doc module "
++"to not use the extra tmpl build step at all, by using <option>--flavour no-"
++"tmpl</option> in <filename>configure.ac</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1700
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1702
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from the "
++"vcs. When using this feature it is important to also setup the "
++"<varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> in <filename>Makefile.am</filename> for "
++"code that is build conditionally."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1713
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1719
++msgid "Enable gtkdoc-check"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1720
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1715
++msgid ""
++"This version includes a new tool called gtkdoc-check. This tool can run a "
++"set of sanity checks on your documentation. It is enabled by adding these "
++"lines to the end of <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1733
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1735
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.18 brought some initial markdown support. Using markdown in doc "
++"comments is less intrusive than writing docbook xml. This version improves a "
++"lot on this and add a lot more styles. The section that explains the <link "
++"linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">comment syntax</link> has all the details."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1746
++msgid "Documenting other interfaces"
++msgstr "Documentando outras interfaces"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1748
++msgid ""
++"So far we have been using GTK-Doc to document the API of code. The next "
++"sections contain suggestions how the tools can be used to document other "
++"interfaces too."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1755
++msgid "Command line options and man pages"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1757
++msgid ""
++"As one can generate man pages for a docbook refentry as well, it sounds like "
++"a good idea to use it for that purpose. This way the interface is part of "
++"the reference and one gets the man-page for free."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1764
++msgid "Document the tool"
++msgstr "Documente a ferramenta"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1766
++msgid ""
++"Create one refentry file per tool. Following <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">our example</link> we would call it <filename>meep/"
++"docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. For the xml tags that should be "
++"used and can look at generated file in the xml subdirectory as well as "
++"examples e.g. in glib."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1776
++msgid "Adding the extra configure check"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1779 C/index.docbook:1797
++msgid "Extra configure checks"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1780
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1794
++msgid "Adding the extra makefile rules"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1798
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1820
++msgid "DBus interfaces"
++msgstr "Intefaces de DBus"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1822
++msgid ""
++"(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1831
++msgid "Frequently asked questions"
++msgstr "Preguntas frecuentes"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:1835
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "Pregunta"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:1836
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "Resposta"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1838
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Non hai herdanza de clases."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1839
++msgid ""
++"The objects <function>xxx_get_type()</function> function has not been "
++"entered into the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1845
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Aínda non hai herdanza de clases."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1846
++msgid ""
++"Missing or wrong naming in <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> "
++"file (see <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-doc-list/2003-"
++"October/msg00006.html\">explanation</ulink>)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1852
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Redemo, aínda non hai herdanza de clase."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1853
++msgid ""
++"Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <type>GtkWidget</"
++"type>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private "
++"subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1860
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1861
++msgid ""
++"Does the <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contain a "
++"index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1867
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1868
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the "
++"gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1874
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1875
++msgid ""
++"Is the new page xi:included from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1881
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1882
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the "
++"begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable "
++"xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1890
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1891
++msgid ""
++"If the type is listed in <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> but "
++"not in <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> then double check that the "
++"type is correctly placed in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>. If the type instance (e.g. <type>GtkWidget</type>) is not listed "
++"or incidentialy makred private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1900
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1901
++msgid ""
++"Check that <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> is xi:included "
++"from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1909
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1910
++msgid ""
++"Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the "
++"source."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1915
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1916
++msgid ""
++"Symbol XYZ appears twice in <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:1919
++msgid ""
++"Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template "
++"matches."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1926
++msgid "Tools related to gtk-doc"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1928
++msgid ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - a <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac "
++"GTK-Doc</ulink> integration plugin, that adds API docs to a trac site and "
++"integrates with the trac search."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1933
++msgid ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - a tool (part of gtk-doc) to check used API against since "
++"tags in the API to determine the minimum required version."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/releaseinfo
++#: C/index.docbook:12 C/fdl-appendix.xml:12
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:15
++msgid "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/index.docbook:20
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:19 C/fdl-appendix.xml:19
++msgid ""
++"<_:address-1/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies "
++"of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendix/title
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/index.docbook:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:642
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:31 C/fdl-appendix.xml:31
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that "
++"derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. "
++"It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license "
++"designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:50 C/fdl-appendix.xml:50
++msgid ""
++"We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free "
++"software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program "
++"should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. "
++"But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any "
++"textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a "
++"printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose "
++"is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:62 C/fdl-appendix.xml:62
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such "
++"manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "
++"<quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:72
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing "
++"the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with "
++"modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:79
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter "
++"section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals "
++"exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the "
++"Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and "
++"contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For "
++"example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary "
++"Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter "
++"of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of "
++"legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding "
++"them."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:94
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being "
++"those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:103
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are "
++"listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says "
++"that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under "
++"this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:111
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> "
++"Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose "
++"specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be "
++"viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors "
++"or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) "
++"some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text "
++"formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for "
++"input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file "
++"format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent "
++"modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "
++"<quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:128 C/fdl-appendix.xml:128
++msgid ""
++"Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII "
++"without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using "
++"a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for "
++"human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary "
++"formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, "
++"SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally "
++"available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors "
++"for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:141
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page "
++"itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the "
++"material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in "
++"formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> "
++"means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, "
++"preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:153 C/fdl-appendix.xml:153
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that "
++"this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this "
++"License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you "
++"add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use "
++"technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of "
++"the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in "
++"exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you "
++"must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:169 C/fdl-appendix.xml:169
++msgid ""
++"You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you "
++"may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:176 C/fdl-appendix.xml:176
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr "3. COPIANDO EN CANTIDADE"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license "
++"notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you "
++"must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these "
++"Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on "
++"the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as "
++"the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title "
++"with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as "
++"verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:195 C/fdl-appendix.xml:195
++msgid ""
++"If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, "
++"you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the "
++"actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> "
++"copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more "
++"than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state "
++"in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location "
++"containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added "
++"material, which the general network-using public has access to download "
++"anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use "
++"the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin "
++"distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent "
++"copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one "
++"year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through "
++"your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any "
++"large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated "
++"version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:231 C/fdl-appendix.xml:231
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr "4. MODIFICACIÓNS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under "
++"the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the "
++"Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version "
++"filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:248 C/fdl-appendix.xml:248
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "A"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the "
++"covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which "
++"should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the "
++"Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original "
++"publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:264 C/fdl-appendix.xml:264
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "B"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, "
++"one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the "
++"modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has "
++"less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:279 C/fdl-appendix.xml:279
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "C"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of "
++"the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:291 C/fdl-appendix.xml:291
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "D"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:292
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:301 C/fdl-appendix.xml:301
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "E"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:302 C/fdl-appendix.xml:302
++msgid ""
++"Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the "
++"other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:311 C/fdl-appendix.xml:311
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "F"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the "
++"Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:324 C/fdl-appendix.xml:324
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "G"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:337 C/fdl-appendix.xml:337
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "H"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:338 C/fdl-appendix.xml:338
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:346 C/fdl-appendix.xml:346
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "I"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add "
++"to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> as given on "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no "
++"section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and "
++"publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:365 C/fdl-appendix.xml:365
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "J"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the "
++"network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based "
++"on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit "
++"a network location for a work that was published at least four years before "
++"the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers "
++"to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:383 C/fdl-appendix.xml:383
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "K"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in "
++"the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor "
++"acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:396 C/fdl-appendix.xml:396
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "L"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their "
++"text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not "
++"considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:409 C/fdl-appendix.xml:409
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "M"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may "
++"not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:421 C/fdl-appendix.xml:421
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "N"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to "
++"conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant "
++"Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new "
++"front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from "
++"the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections "
++"as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's "
++"license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it "
++"contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of "
++"peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the "
++"authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list "
++"of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover "
++"Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements "
++"made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by "
++"you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, "
++"you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit "
++"permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names "
++"for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:480 C/fdl-appendix.xml:480
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with "
++"other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, "
++"unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in "
++"its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be "
++"replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with "
++"the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section "
++"unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original "
++"author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make "
++"the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections "
++"in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</"
++"quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled "
++"<quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled "
++"<quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:516 C/fdl-appendix.xml:516
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and "
++"replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with "
++"a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow "
++"the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in "
++"all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:527 C/fdl-appendix.xml:527
++msgid ""
++"You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it "
++"individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License "
++"into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects "
++"regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:537 C/fdl-appendix.xml:537
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its "
++"derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on "
++"a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, "
++"provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a "
++"compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</"
++"link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:561 C/fdl-appendix.xml:561
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the "
++"terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations "
++"requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may "
++"include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the "
++"original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation "
++"of this License provided that you also include the original English version "
++"of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the "
++"original English version of this License, the original English version will "
++"prevail."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:580 C/fdl-appendix.xml:580
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this "
++"License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the "
++"Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this "
++"License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you "
++"under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such "
++"parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:594 C/fdl-appendix.xml:594
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:595
++msgid ""
++"The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU "
++"Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be "
++"similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to "
++"address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www."
++"gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular "
++"numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies "
++"to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of "
++"that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not "
++"as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not "
++"specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever "
++"published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:621 C/fdl-appendix.xml:621
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:622 C/fdl-appendix.xml:622
++msgid ""
++"To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the "
++"License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices "
++"just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:629 C/fdl-appendix.xml:629
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, "
++"and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being "
++"LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU "
++"Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, "
++"write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover "
++"Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of "
++"<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++"gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/year
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/holder
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/street
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++msgstr "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/city
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "Boston"
++msgstr "Boston"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/state
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "MA"
++msgstr "MA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/postcode
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "02110-1301"
++msgstr "02110-1301"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/country
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "USA"
++msgstr "USA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> "
++"<_:postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:34
++msgid "free"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <_:quote-1/> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:44
++msgid "copyleft"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <_:quote-1/>, which means that derivative works of "
++"the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the "
++"GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:67 C/fdl-appendix.xml:82 C/fdl-appendix.xml:99
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:107 C/fdl-appendix.xml:113 C/fdl-appendix.xml:156
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:179 C/fdl-appendix.xml:190 C/fdl-appendix.xml:205
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:224 C/fdl-appendix.xml:235 C/fdl-appendix.xml:253
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:271 C/fdl-appendix.xml:294 C/fdl-appendix.xml:354
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:368 C/fdl-appendix.xml:400 C/fdl-appendix.xml:462
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:472 C/fdl-appendix.xml:482 C/fdl-appendix.xml:519
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:540 C/fdl-appendix.xml:565 C/fdl-appendix.xml:583
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:608
++msgid "Document"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:69
++msgid "you"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <_:quote-1/>, below, refers to any such manual or work. "
++"Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <_:quote-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:73 C/fdl-appendix.xml:234 C/fdl-appendix.xml:269
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:283 C/fdl-appendix.xml:315 C/fdl-appendix.xml:351
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:413 C/fdl-appendix.xml:433 C/fdl-appendix.xml:447
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:459 C/fdl-appendix.xml:475 C/fdl-appendix.xml:543
++msgid "Modified Version"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:72
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a "
++"portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or "
++"translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:80
++msgid "Secondary Section"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:79
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <_:"
++"link-2/> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or "
++"authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related "
++"matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall "
++"subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, "
++"a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could "
++"be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related "
++"matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political "
++"position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:95 C/fdl-appendix.xml:327 C/fdl-appendix.xml:398
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:439 C/fdl-appendix.xml:486 C/fdl-appendix.xml:494
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:567 C/fdl-appendix.xml:637 C/fdl-appendix.xml:648
++msgid "Invariant Sections"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:96 C/fdl-appendix.xml:435
++msgid "Secondary Sections"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:94
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain <_:link-2/> whose titles are designated, as "
++"being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-3/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:104 C/fdl-appendix.xml:181 C/fdl-appendix.xml:328
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:458
++msgid "Cover Texts"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:103
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as "
++"Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-2/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:112 C/fdl-appendix.xml:124 C/fdl-appendix.xml:207
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:369
++msgid "Transparent"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:125 C/fdl-appendix.xml:204
++msgid "Opaque"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:111
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> copy of the <_:link-2/> means a machine-readable copy, "
++"represented in a format whose specification is available to the general "
++"public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and "
++"straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of "
++"pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available "
++"drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for "
++"automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text "
++"formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup "
++"has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers "
++"is not Transparent. A copy that is not <_:quote-3/> is called <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:142 C/fdl-appendix.xml:146 C/fdl-appendix.xml:250
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:266 C/fdl-appendix.xml:281 C/fdl-appendix.xml:352
++msgid "Title Page"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:141
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such "
++"following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License "
++"requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have "
++"any title page as such, <_:quote-2/> means the text near the most prominent "
++"appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the "
++"text."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:166 C/fdl-appendix.xml:551
++msgid "section 3"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <_:link-1/> in any medium, either "
++"commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright "
++"notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document "
++"are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions "
++"whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to "
++"obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or "
++"distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If "
++"you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the "
++"conditions in <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <_:link-1/> numbering more than 100, "
++"and the Document's license notice requires <_:link-2/>, you must enclose the "
++"copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: "
++"Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back "
++"cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the "
++"publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with "
++"all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <_:link-3/> and satisfy "
++"these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <_:link-1/> copies of the <_:link-2/> numbering "
++"more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <_:link-3/> copy "
++"along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-"
++"accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy "
++"of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using "
++"public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard "
++"network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably "
++"prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to "
++"ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated "
++"location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an "
++"Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition "
++"to the public."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <_:"
++"link-1/> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them "
++"a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:236
++msgid "2"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:237
++msgid "3"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/> under the "
++"conditions of sections <_:link-3/> and <_:link-4/> above, provided that you "
++"release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified "
++"Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <_:link-1/> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from "
++"that of the <_:link-2/>, and from those of previous versions (which should, "
++"if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You "
++"may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of "
++"that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <_:link-1/>, as authors, one or more persons or entities "
++"responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <_:link-2/>, together "
++"with at least five of the principal authors of the <_:link-3/> (all of its "
++"principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <_:link-1/> the name of the publisher of the <_:link-2/>, as "
++"the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:292
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <_:link-1/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <_:link-1/> under the terms of this "
++"License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:330
++msgid "Document's"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <_:link-1/> and required "
++"<_:link-2/> given in the <_:link-3/> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:348 C/fdl-appendix.xml:353 C/fdl-appendix.xml:372
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:507 C/fdl-appendix.xml:508
++msgid "History"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <_:quote-1/>, and its title, and add to it an "
++"item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <_:"
++"link-2/> as given on the <_:link-3/>. If there is no section entitled <_:"
++"quote-4/> in the <_:link-5/>, create one stating the title, year, authors, "
++"and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <_:link-1/> for public "
++"access to a <_:link-2/> copy of the Document, and likewise the network "
++"locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These "
++"may be placed in the <_:quote-3/> section. You may omit a network location "
++"for a work that was published at least four years before the Document "
++"itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives "
++"permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:385 C/fdl-appendix.xml:509
++msgid "Acknowledgements"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:386 C/fdl-appendix.xml:510
++msgid "Dedications"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <_:quote-1/> or <_:quote-2/>, preserve the section's "
++"title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the "
++"contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/>, unaltered in their text and "
++"in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part "
++"of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:412 C/fdl-appendix.xml:424 C/fdl-appendix.xml:445
++msgid "Endorsements"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <_:quote-1/>. Such a section may not be included "
++"in the <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:425
++msgid "Invariant Section"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <_:quote-1/> or to conflict in title "
++"with any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <_:link-1/> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that "
++"qualify as <_:link-2/> and contain no material copied from the Document, you "
++"may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To "
++"do this, add their titles to the list of <_:link-3/> in the Modified "
++"Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other "
++"section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <_:quote-1/>, provided it contains nothing "
++"but endorsements of your <_:link-2/> by various parties--for example, "
++"statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an "
++"organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:455
++msgid "Front-Cover Text"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:457
++msgid "Back-Cover Text"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <_:link-1/>, and a passage of "
++"up to 25 words as a <_:link-2/>, to the end of the list of <_:link-3/> in "
++"the <_:link-4/>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover "
++"Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If "
++"the <_:link-5/> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously "
++"added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on "
++"behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on "
++"explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <_:link-1/> do not by this License "
++"give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply "
++"endorsement of any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:484 C/fdl-appendix.xml:566
++msgid "section 4"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <_:link-1/> with other documents released under this "
++"License, under the terms defined in <_:link-2/> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <_:link-3/> of all "
++"of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant "
++"Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <_:link-1/> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are "
++"multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make "
++"the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in "
++"parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if "
++"known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section "
++"titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the "
++"combined work."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:511
++msgid "Endorsements."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <_:quote-1/> in "
++"the various original documents, forming one section entitled <_:quote-2/>; "
++"likewise combine any sections entitled <_:quote-3/>, and any sections "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>. You must delete all sections entitled <_:quote-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <_:link-1/> and other documents "
++"released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this "
++"License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the "
++"collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim "
++"copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:546
++msgid "aggregate"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:550
++msgid "Cover Text"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <_:link-1/> or its derivatives with other separate and "
++"independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or "
++"distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <_:link-2/> of the "
++"Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. "
++"Such a compilation is called an <_:quote-3/>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <_:link-4/> requirement of <_:link-5/> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <_:link-1/> under the terms of <_:link-2/>. Replacing <_:"
++"link-3/> with translations requires special permission from their copyright "
++"holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections "
++"in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may "
++"include a translation of this License provided that you also include the "
++"original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between "
++"the translation and the original English version of this License, the "
++"original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <_:link-1/> except "
++"as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, "
++"modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will "
++"automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who "
++"have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have "
++"their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:597
++msgid "Free Software Foundation"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:603
++msgid "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:595
++msgid ""
++"The <_:ulink-1/> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free "
++"Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar "
++"in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new "
++"problems or concerns. See <_:ulink-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:610
++msgid "or any later version"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<_:link-1/> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <_:"
++"quote-2/> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and "
++"conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has "
++"been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the "
++"Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose "
++"any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:639 C/fdl-appendix.xml:651
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:640 C/fdl-appendix.xml:654
++msgid "Back-Cover Texts"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <_:link-1/> "
++"being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <_:link-2/> being LIST, and with the <_:"
++"link-3/> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:649
++msgid "with no Invariant Sections"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:652
++msgid "no Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:653
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <_:link-1/>, write <_:quote-2/> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <_:link-3/>, write <_:quote-4/> instead of <_:"
++"quote-5/>; likewise for <_:link-6/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:661
++msgid "GNU General Public License"
++msgstr ""
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <_:ulink-1/>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# translation of gtk-doc-help.master.po to Gujarati
++# Sweta Kothari <swkothar@redhat.com>, 2010.
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc-help.master\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-01-25 08:26+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-02-03 11:20+0530\n"
++"Last-Translator: Sweta Kothari <swkothar@redhat.com>\n"
++"Language-Team: Gujarati\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"X-Generator: KBabel 1.11.4\n"
++"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n!=1);\n"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:12(title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc પુસ્તિકા"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:13(edition) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:92(revnumber)
++msgid "1.12"
++msgstr "1.12"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:14(para)
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr "GTK-Doc વપરાશની સૂચનાઓ સાથે ડેવલપરો માટે વપરાશકર્તા પુસ્તિકા."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:17(firstname)
++msgid "Chris"
++msgstr "ક્રીસ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:18(surname)
++msgid "Lyttle"
++msgstr "લિટ્લે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:21(email)
++msgid "chris@wilddev.net"
++msgstr "chris@wilddev.net"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:26(firstname)
++msgid "Dan"
++msgstr "Dan"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:27(surname)
++msgid "Mueth"
++msgstr "મૂએથ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:30(email)
++msgid "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++msgstr "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:35(firstname)
++msgid "Stefan"
++msgstr "સ્ટેફાન"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:36(surname)
++msgid "Kost"
++msgstr "કોસ્ટ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:39(email)
++msgid "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++msgstr "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:45(publishername)
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc પ્રોજેક્ટ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:46(email)
++msgid "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++msgstr "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:49(year)
++msgid "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++msgstr "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:50(holder)
++msgid "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle and Stefan Kost"
++msgstr "ડૅમ મૂએથ અને ક્રીસ લિટ્લે અને સ્ટેફાન કોસ્ટ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:61(para)
++msgid "Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr "Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:69(para)
++msgid "Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial caps."
++msgstr "Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial caps."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:80(revnumber)
++msgid "1.14"
++msgstr "1.14"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:81(date)
++msgid "19 December 2009"
++msgstr "19 ડિસેમ્બર 2009"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:82(authorinitials) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:88(authorinitials) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:94(authorinitials)
++msgid "sk"
++msgstr "sk"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:83(revremark)
++msgid "development version"
++msgstr "ડેવલ્પમેન્ટ આવૃત્તિ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:86(revnumber)
++msgid "1.13"
++msgstr "1.13"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:87(date) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:93(date)
++msgid "18 December 2009"
++msgstr "18 ડિસેમ્બર 2009"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:89(revremark)
++msgid "broken tarball update"
++msgstr "તૂટેલ ટારબોલ સુધારા"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:95(revremark)
++msgid "new tool features and bugfixes"
++msgstr "નવા સાધન લક્ષણો અને ભૂલ સુધારાઓ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:98(revnumber)
++msgid "1.11"
++msgstr "1.11"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:99(date)
++msgid "16 Novemebr 2008"
++msgstr "16 નવેમ્બર 2008"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:100(authorinitials)
++msgid "mal"
++msgstr "mal"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:101(revremark)
++msgid "GNOME doc-utils migration"
++msgstr "GNOME doc-utils સ્થળાંતર"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:110(title)
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "પરિચય"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:112(para)
++msgid "This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how it is used."
++msgstr "આ પ્રકરણ GTK-Doc ને રજૂ કરે છે અને તે શું છે અને તેને કેવી રીતે વપરાયેલ છે તેની ઝાંખી આપે છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:118(title)
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc શું છે?"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:120(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc એ દસ્તાવેજ C કોડ માટે વપરાયેલ છે. તે લાઇબ્રેરીઓનાં સાર્વજનિક API નાં દસ્તાવેજ માટે વપરાયેલ છે, "
++"જેવું કે GTK+ અને GNOME લાઇબ્રેરીઓ. પરંતુ તે પણ દસ્તાવેજ કાર્યક્રમ કોડ માટે વપરાયેલ છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:128(title)
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc કામ કેવી રીતે કરે છે?"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:130(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc એ વિશિષ્ટ રીતે માળખુ થયેલ ટિપ્પણી બ્લોકોમાં સ્ત્રોત ફાઇલોની અંદર સ્થિત થયેલ વિધેયોનાં દસ્તાવેજીકરણની "
++"મદદથી કામ કરે છે, અથવા દસ્તાવેજીકરણ ટેમ્પલેટ ફાઇલોમાં ઉમેરાયેલ છે કે જે GTK-Doc વાપરે છે (છતાંપણ નોંધો કે GTK-Doc "
++"એ પણ દસ્તાવેજ વિધેયો હશે કે જે શીર્ષક ફાઇલોમાં જાહેર થયેલ છે; તે સ્થિર વિધેયો માટે આઉટપુટ ઉત્પન્ન કરતુ નથી)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:137(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc consists of a number of perl scripts, each performing a different step in the process."
++msgstr "GTK-Doc એ perl સ્ક્રિપ્ટોની સંખ્યાને સમાવે છે, પ્રક્રિયામાં દરેક વિવિધ પગલું કરે છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:142(para)
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "ત્યાં પ્રક્રિયામાં મુખ્ય ૫ પગલાંઓ છે:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:149(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the source files with the documentation for each function, macro, union etc. (In the past information was entered in generated template files, which is not recommended anymore)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>દસ્તાવેજીકરણને લખી રહ્યા છે.</guilabel> લેખક એ દરેક વિધેયને, મેક્રો, યુનિયન વગેરે માટે "
++"દસ્તાવેજીકરણ સાથે સ્ત્રોત ફાઇલોમાં ભરે છે. (ઉત્પન્ન થયેલ ટેમ્પલેટ ફાઇલમાં ભૂતકાળની જાણકારી દાખલ થયેલ હતી, "
++"કે જે કોઇપણ રીતે અગ્રહણીય થયેલ નથી)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:159(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> containg a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to <filename><module>-sections.txt</filename> The author can rearrange the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some sybols to show up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by th scanner or the declaration should appear differently, one can place enties similar to the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>. <application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> can also be used to dynamically query a library about any GtkObject subclasses it exports. It saves information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about any GTK Args and Signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>કોડ વિશે જાણકારીને ભેગી કરી રહ્યા છે.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-scan</application> "
++"functions, macros, enums, structs, અને unions ની જાહેરાતો માટે જોઇ રહ્યા હોય તે કોડ ની હેડર ફાઇલોને સ્કેન કરે છે. "
++"તે જાહેરાતોની યાદીને સમાવતી ફાઇલ <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> ને બનાવે છે, "
++"કઇ હેડર ફાઇલમાં તેઓ અંદર છે તેને અનુસાર વિભાગો માં તેઓને સ્થિત કરી રહ્યા છે. આ ફાઇલને પહેલું ચલાવવા પર "
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename> માં નકલ થયેલ છે લેખક એ વિભાગોને પુન:ગોઠવી શકે છે, "
++"અને છેલ્લુ ઇચ્છિત ક્રમને ઉત્પન્ન કરવા માટે તેઓમાં જાહેરાતોનો ક્રમ. બીજી ફાઇલ તે <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> "
++"ને ઉત્પન્ન કરે છે. આ ફાઇલ સ્કેનર દ્દારા શોધેલ સંપૂર્ણ જાહેરાતોને સમાવે છે. જો અમુક કારણ માટે દસ્તાવેજોમાં દેખાવા માટે અમુક સંકેતોને પસંદ કરે છે, "
++"જ્યાં સંપૂર્ણ જાહેરાત સ્કેનર દ્દારા શોધી શકાતી નથી અથવા જાહેરાત એ અલગ રીતે દેખાવી જોઇએ, "
++"<filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename> ની અંદર <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> માં "
++"એકનાં જેવી જ સ્થિત કરી શકે છે. <application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> એ કોઇપણ GtkObject ઉપવર્ગો કે જે નિકાસ કરે છે "
++"તે વિશે ગતિશીલ રીતે લાઇબ્રેરી ક્વેરી માટે પણ વાપરી શકાય છે. તે વર્ગ શ્રેણીમાં દરેક ઑબ્જેક્ટનાં સ્થાન વિશે જાણકારીનો સંગ્રહ કરે છે અને "
++"કોઇપણ GTK દલીલો વિશે પણ અને તે પૂરુ પાડે છે તેનો સંકેત કરે છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:184(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the information gathered in the first step. (Note that this can be run repeatedly. It will try to ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>\"template\" ફાઇલોને ઉત્પન્ન કરી રહ્યા છે.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> "
++"એ પહેલાં પગલામાં ભેગી થયેલ જાણકારીની મદદથી <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> ઉપડિરેક્ટરીમાં "
++"ફાઇલોની સંખ્યાને બનાવે છે. (નોંધો કે જે આ વારંવાર ચલાવી શકાય છે. તે ખાતરી કરવા માટે પ્રયત્ન કરશે કે જે દસ્તાવેજીકરણ "
++"હંમેશ માટે ગુમ થઇ જતો નથી.)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:193(para)
++msgid "Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand, please remove the dir (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++"જ્યાં સુધી GTK-Doc 1.9 નાં ટેમ્પલેટને અવગણી શકાય છે ત્યાં સુધી. આપણે કોડમાં દસ્તાવેજીકરણ ને રાખવા માટે લોકોને "
++"પ્રોત્સાહિત કરો. <application>gtkdocize</application> એ હવે <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> "
++"વિકલ્પને આધાર આપે છે કે જે makefile ને પસંદ કરે છે કે જે સંપૂર્ણપણે tmpl વપરાશને છોડી દે છે. જો તમે પોતાની જાતે "
++"tmpl માં ફાઇલને કદી બદલો નહિં તો, મહેરબાની કરીને dir ને દૂર કરો (દા.ત. આવૃત્તિ નિયંત્રણ સિસ્ટમ માંથી)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:205(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Generating the SGML/XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> turns the template files into SGML or XML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads takes docs from sources and introspection data."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>SGML/XML અને HTML/PDF ઉત્પન્ન કરી રહ્યા છે.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> એ "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> અથવા <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> "
++"ઉપડિરેક્ટરી માં SGML અથવા XML ફાઇલોમાં ટેમ્પલેટ ફાઇલોને ફેરવે છે. જો સ્ત્રોત કોડ એ વિશિષ્ટ ટિપ્પણી બ્લોકોની મદદથી વિધેયો પર દસ્તાવેજીકરણ "
++"ને સમાવે છે, તે અહિંયા ભેગી થઇ જાય છે. જો તેને વાપરેલ tmpl ફાઇલો ન હોય તો ફક્ત સ્ત્રોતો અને આત્મનિરીક્ષણ માહિતી માંથી દસ્તાવેજોને લઇને વાંચે છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:215(para)
++msgid "<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the SGML/XML files into HTML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. Likewise <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the SGML/XML files into a PDF docuemnt called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> એ <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> "
++"ઉપડિરેક્ટરીમાં HTML ફાઇલોની અંદર SGML/XML ફાઇલોને ફેરવે છે. જેવી રીતે <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> "
++"કહેવાતા <filename><package>.pdf</filename> PDF દસ્તાવેજમાં SGML/XML ફાઇલોને ફેરવે છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:221(para)
++msgid "Files in <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One should never edit them directly."
++msgstr ""
++"<filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> અથવા <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> "
++"માં ફાઇલો અને <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> ડિરેક્ટરીઓ એ હંમેશા ઉપલ લખાયેલ છે. એક એ સીધુ જ "
++"તેઓને કદી સુધારતુ હોવુ જોઇએ નહિં."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:229(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:247(title)
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc ને મેળવી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:250(title)
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "જરૂરિયાતો"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:251(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - the main scripts are in Perl."
++msgstr "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - મુખ્ય સ્ક્રિપ્ટો એ Perl માં છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:254(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - This is the DocBook SGML DTD. <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>"
++msgstr "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - આ DocBook SGML DTD છે. <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:258(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - This is a DSSSL processor for converting SGML to various formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type=\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++msgstr "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - આ વિવિધ માળખાઓમાં SGML ને રૂપાંતર કરવા માટે DSSSL પ્રોસેસર છે. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type=\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:262(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> This is the DSSSL code to convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together with jade. I've customized the DSSSL code slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to colour the program code listings/declarations, and to support global cross-reference indices in the generated HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> આ DocBook ને HTML માં રૂપાંતરિત કરવા માટે "
++"DSSSL કોડ છે (અને થોડા બીજા બંધારણો). તે jade સાથે ભેગા વાપરેલ છે. મેં DSSSL કોડને કાર્યક્રમ કોડની યાદીઓ/ "
++"જાહેરાતોને રંગ આપવા માટે, અને ઉત્પન્ન થયેલ HTML માં વૈશ્ર્વિક પ્રતિનિર્દેશ સૂચિને આધાર આપવા માટે "
++"gtk-doc.dsl માં જરાક DSSSL કોડને વૈવિધ્યપૂર્ણ બનાવેલ છે. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:271(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - if you want to create man pages from the DocBook. I've customized the 'translation spec' slightly, to capitalise section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of the pages and the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink> NOTE: This does not work yet."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - જો તમે DocBook માંથી મુખ્ય પાનાંઓને બનાવવાનું ઇચ્છતા હોય તો, "
++"મેં થોડુ 'translation spec' ને વૈવિધ્યપૂર્ણ બનાવેલ છે, વિભાગનાં શીર્ષકનાં મોટા અક્ષર કરવા માટે અને પાનાંઓના ઊંચે "
++"'GTK Library' શીર્ષકને ઉમેરો અને નીચે પૂનરાવર્તિત તારીખને ઉમેરો. ત્યાં "
++"<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink> "
++"પર આની કડી છે નોંધો: આ હજુ કામ કરતુ નથી."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:282(title)
++msgid "Installation"
++msgstr "સ્થાપન"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:283(para)
++msgid "There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are installed."
++msgstr "ત્યાં મૂળભૂત સ્થાન નથી કે જ્યાં DocBook Modular Stylesheets એ સ્થાપિત થયેલ હોય."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:286(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically:"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc ની રૂપરેખાંકિત સ્ક્રિપ્ટ એ આ 3 ડિરેક્ટરીઓને આપમેળે શોધે છે:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:289(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (used by RedHat)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (RedHat દ્દારા વપરાયેલ છે)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:292(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (used by Debian)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (Debian દ્દારા વપરાયેલ છે)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:295(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (used by SuSE)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (SuSE દ્દારા વપરાયેલ છે)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:298(para)
++msgid "If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to configure GTK-Doc using the option: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++msgstr ""
++"જો તમે ગમે ત્યાં સ્ટાઇલશીટો સ્થાપિત કરેલ હોય તો, તમે વિકલ્પની મદદથી GTK-Doc ને રૂપરેખાંકિત કરવા માટે "
++"જરૂ છે, <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:322(title)
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc વિશે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:324(para) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:338(para)
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(FIXME)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:328(para)
++msgid "(History, authors, web pages, license, future plans, comparison with other similar systems.)"
++msgstr "(ઇતિહાસ, લેખકો, વેબ પાનાંઓ, લાઇસન્સ, ભવિષ્યનાં પ્લાનો, સરખી સિસ્ટમો સાથે સરખામણી.)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:336(title)
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "આ પુસ્તિકા વિશે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:342(para)
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:351(title)
++msgid "Setting up your project"
++msgstr "તમારા પ્રોજેક્ટને સુયોજિત કરી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:353(para)
++msgid "The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc into your project. Theses section assume we work on a project called 'meep'. This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user app called 'meeper'."
++msgstr ""
++"આગળનાં વિભાગો એ તમારાં પ્રોજેક્ટમાં GTK-Doc ને એકત્રિત કરવા ક્યાં પગલાઓ ચલાવવાનાં છે તેનું વર્ણન કરે છે. આ વિભાગ ધારે છે કે આપણ 'meep' તરીકે "
++"કહેવાતા પ્રોજેક્ટ પર કામ કરે છે. આ પ્રોજેક્ટ એ 'libmeep' તરીકે કહેવાતી લાઇબ્રેરી અને 'meeper' તરીકે કહેવાતી અંતિમ વપરાશકર્તાનાં કાર્યક્રમને સમાવે છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:361(title)
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "સ્કેલેટન દસ્તાવેજીકરણને સુયોજિત કરી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:363(para)
++msgid "Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/reference (this way you can also have docs/help for end-user documentation). It is recommended to create another subdirectory with the name of the doc-package. For packages with just one library this step is not necessary."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:372(title)
++msgid "Example directory structure"
++msgstr "ઉદાહરણ ડિરેક્ટરી બંધારણ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:370(para)
++msgid "This can then look as show below: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "નીચે બતાવ્યા પ્રમાણે પછી આ જોઇ શકો છો: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:390(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:397(title)
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "autoconf સાથે એકત્રિકરણ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:392(para)
++msgid "Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script."
++msgstr "ઘણું સરળ છે! ફક્ત તમારી <filename>configure.ac</filename> સ્ક્રિપ્ટમાં એક વાક્ય ને ઉમેરો."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:407(para)
++msgid "The first argument is used to check for the gtkdocversion at configure time. The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</application>. The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several configure switches:"
++msgstr ""
++"પહેલી દલીલ રૂપરેખાંકિત સમયે gtkdocversion માટે ચકાસવા વપરાયેલ છે. બીજી, વૈકલ્પિક દલીલ એ "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> દ્દારા વપરાયેલ છે. <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> "
++"મેક્રો પણ ઘણીબધા રૂપરેખાંકિત ફેરબદલોને ઉમેરે છે:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:413(para)
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr "--with-html-dir=PATH : સ્થાપિત થયેલ દસ્તાવેજોનો પાથ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:414(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc : દસ્તાવેજીકરણ ને બિલ્ડ કરવા માટે gtk-doc ને વાપરો [default=no]"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:415(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc-html : html બંધારણમાં દસ્તાવેજીકરણ બિલ્ડ કરો [default=yes]"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:416(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : pdf બંધારણમાં દસ્તાવેજીકરણને બિલ્ડ કરો [default=no]"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:420(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc એ મૂળભૂત રીતે નિષ્ક્રિય થયેલ છે! આગળનાં <filename>configure</filename> ને ચલાવવા માટે "
++"<option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option> ને પસાર કરવાનું યાદ રાખો. નહિં તો પહેલીથી ઉત્પન્ન થયેલ દસ્તાવેજીકરણ "
++"સ્થાપિત થયેલ છે (કે જે વપરાશકર્તાઓ માટેનો અર્થ બને છે પરંતુ ડેવલપરો માટે નહિં)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:428(para)
++msgid "Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside you <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows <application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++msgstr ""
++"આગળ વધારે તે અગ્રહણીય થયેલ છે કે જે તમારી પાસે તમારી <filename>configure.ac</filename> સ્ક્રિપ્ટની અંદર "
++"નીચેનું વાક્ય છે. આ તમારા પ્રોજેક્ટમાં <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> માટે મેક્રો વ્યાખ્યાને આપમેળે નકલ કરવા "
++"માટે પરવાનગી આપે છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:436(title)
++msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++msgstr "gtkdocize માટે તૈયારી"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:447(title)
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "automake સાથે એકત્રિકરણ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:449(para)
++msgid "First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the examples subdirectory of the gtkdoc-sources to your project's API documentation directory ( <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></filename>). If you have multiple doc-packages repeat this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++"તમારા પ્રોજેક્ટની API દસ્તાવેજીકરણ ડિરેક્ટરી ( <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></filename>) "
++"માં gtkdoc-સ્ત્રોતોની ઉપડિરેક્ટરીઓનાં ઉદાહરણો માંથી <filename>Makefile.am</filename> ની પહેલી નકલ કરો. જો તમારી પાસે "
++"દરેક એક માટે ઘણાબધા ફરી આવતા દસ્તાવેજ-પેકેજો છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:456(para)
++msgid "The next step is to edit the setting inside the <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. All the settings have a comment above that describes their purpose. Most settings are extra flags passed to the respective tools. Every tool has a variable of the form <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>. All the tools support <option>--help</option> to list the supported parameters."
++msgstr ""
++"આગળનું પગલુ એ <filename>Makefile.am</filename> ની અંગર સુયોજનોને સુધારવા માટે છે. બધા "
++"સુયોજનો પાસે ટિપ્પણીઓ છે કે જે તેનાં હેતુને વર્ણવે છે. મોટાભાગનાં સુયોજનો સાધનોને સંબંધી પસાર થયેલ વધારાનાં "
++"ફ્લેગો છે. દરેક સાધન પાસે ફાર્મ <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option> નો ચલ છે. બધા "
++"સાધનો આધારભૂત પરિમાણોની યાદી માટે <option>--help</option> ને આધાર આપે છે."
++
++#. FIXME: explain options ?
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:467(para)
++msgid "You may also want to enable GTK-Doc for the distcheckmake target. Just add then one-liner show in the next example to you top-level <filename>Makefile.am</filename>:"
++msgstr ""
++"તમે distcheckmake લક્ષ્ય માટે GTK-Doc ને સક્રિય કરવા માટે પણ ઇચ્છા રાખી શકો છો. ફક્ત ઉમેરો પછી એક-લાઇનર "
++"એ તમને ટોચનાં સ્તર <filename>Makefile.am</filename> માટે આગળનાં ઉદાહરણમાં બતાવે છે:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:474(title)
++msgid "Enable GTK-Doc during make distcheck"
++msgstr "distcheck ને બનાવવા દરમ્યાન GTK-Doc ને સક્રિય કરો"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:486(title)
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "autogen સાથે એકત્રિકરણ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:488(para)
++msgid "Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup the build infrastructure after a checkout from version control system (such as cvs/svn/git). GTK-Doc comes with a tool called <application>gtkdocize</application> which can be used in such a script. It should be run before autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr ""
++"મોટાભાગનાં પ્રોજેક્ટો પાસે આવૃત્તિ નિયંત્રણ સિસ્ટમ (જેવી કે cvs/svn/git) માંથી ચેકઆઉટ પછી ઇન્ફ્રાસ્ટ્રક્ચરને બિલ્ડ કરવાનું સુયોજિત "
++"કરવા માટે <filename>autogen.sh</filename> સ્ક્રિપ્ટ હશે. GTK-Doc એ સાધન <application>gtkdocize</application> "
++"તરીકે કહેવાતા સાધન સાથે આવે છે કે જે આવી સ્ક્રિપ્ટમાં વાપરી શકાય છે. તે autoheader, automake અથવા autoconf પહેલાં "
++"ચાલવુ જોઇએ."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:497(title)
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "autogen.sh માંથી gtkdocize ને ચલાવી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:506(para)
++msgid "When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> to you project root (or any directory specified by the <option>--docdir</option> option). If also check you configure script for the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> invocation."
++msgstr ""
++"જ્યારે <application>gtkdocize</application> ચલાવી રહ્યા હોય ત્યારે તે તમારા પ્રોજેક્ટ રુટ માટે "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> ની નકલ કરે છે (અથવા <option>--docdir</option> વિકલ્પ "
++"દ્દારા સ્પષ્ટ થયેલ કોઇપણ ડિરેક્ટરી). જો <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> વિનંતી માટે "
++"તમે સ્ક્રિપ્ટને રૂપરેખાંકિત કરવાનું પણ ચકાસો."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:514(para)
++msgid "Historically GTK-Doc was gerating template files where developers entered the docs. this turned out to be not so good. Since a few version GTK-Doc could also get all the information from source comments. Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. Besides adding the option directly to the command invocation, they can be added also to a environment variable called <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> or set as a 2nd parameter in <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro in the configure script. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand and migrating from older gtkdoc versions, please remove the dir (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:530(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:547(title)
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "દસ્તાવેજ બિલ્ડને ચલાવી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:532(para)
++msgid "After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run <filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++"પહેલાનાં પગલાઓ પછી બિલ્ડ ને ચલાવવા માટે સમય થઇ ગયો છે. પહેલાં આપણે <filename>autogen.sh</filename> "
++"પુન:ચલાવવાની જરૂર છે. નહિં તો પછીથી આ વિકલ્પ સાથે <filename>configure</filename> ને જાતે જ "
++"ચલાવો."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:539(para)
++msgid "The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-dirs. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr "પહેલું ચલાવવાનું બનાવવા doc-dirs માં ઘણીબધી વધારાની ફાઇલોને ઉત્પન્ન કરે છે. મહત્વનાં છે: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:556(para)
++msgid "Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. But hang-on, during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages with life."
++msgstr ""
++"હવે તમે <filename>docs/reference/<package>/index.html</filename> માટે તમારા બ્રાઉઝર પર આંગળી ચીંધી શકો છો. "
++"હાં, તે થોડુ હજુ નિરાશ કરે તેવુ છે. પરંતુ આગળનામ વિષય માટે આપણે તને કહીએ છે કે જીદંગી સાથે પાનાંઓને કેવી રીતે ભરવા તે દરમ્યાન "
++"થોડા સમય માટે અટકી જાય છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:564(title)
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "આવૃત્તિ નિયંત્રણ સિસ્ટમો સાથે એકત્રિકરણ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:566(para)
++msgid "As a rule of the thumb, it's those files you edit, that should go under version control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><package>.types</filename><filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename><filename><package>-sections.txt</filename><filename>Makefile.am</filename>"
++msgstr "અંગૂઠાનાં નિયમ પ્રમાણે, તે તે ફાઇલો છે જે તમારે સુધારવાની છે, કે જે આવૃત્તિ નિયંત્રણ હેઠળ જવી જોઇએ. વિશિષ્ટ પ્રોજેક્ટો માટે તે આ ફાઇલો છે: <filename><package>.types</filename><filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename><filename><package>-sections.txt</filename><filename>Makefile.am</filename>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:579(title)
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "કોડને દસ્તાવેજ કરી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:581(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure from other sources. During the next section you find all information about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc એ કોડ દસ્તાવેજીકરણ માટે ચોક્કસ સિન્ટેક્ષ સાથે સ્ત્રોત કોડ ટિપ્પણીને વાપરે છે. આગળ તે બીજા સ્ત્રોતમાંથી "
++"તમારા પ્રોજેક્ટ બંધારણ વિશે જાણકારીને મેળવે છે. આગળનાં વિભાગ દરમ્યાન તમે ટિપ્પણીઓનાં સિન્ટેક્ષ વિશે બધી જાણકારી "
++"ને શોધે છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:589(title)
++msgid "Documentation placement"
++msgstr "દસ્તાવેજીકરણ નિયુક્તિ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:590(para)
++msgid "In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing inside the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the disadvantages that the information is often not updated and also that the file tend to cause conflicts with version control systems."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:596(para)
++msgid "The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the documentation inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way of documenting code."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:606(title)
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "દસ્તાવેજીકરણ ટિપ્પણીઓ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:611(title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc ટિપ્પણી બ્લોક"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:608(para)
++msgid "A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"ઘણીબધા વાક્યની ટિપ્પણીઓ કે જે વધારાનાં '*' ચિહ્ન દસ્તાવેજીકરણ બ્લોક સાથે શરૂ થાય છે કે જે "
++"GTK-Doc સાધનો દ્દારા પ્રક્રિયા થયેલ હશે. <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:623(para)
++msgid "The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:629(para)
++msgid "The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows the detailed description. All lines (outside program- listings and CDATA sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-asterisk-blank-blank)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:646(para)
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr "વિધેયો અથવા મેક્રોનો સંદર્ભ લેવા માટે function() ને વાપરો કે જે દલીલોને લે છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:651(para)
++msgid "Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr ""
++"પરિમાણોનો સંદર્ભ લેવા માટે @param ને વાપરો. બીજા વિધેયોનાં પરિમાણો માટે જ્યારે સંદર્ભ કરી રહ્યા હોય ત્યારે આને પણ વાપરો, વર્ણવવા માટે એકને "
++"સંબંધિત છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:657(para)
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr "કૉન્સ્ટન્ટ નો સંદર્ભ લેવા માટે %constant ને વાપરો, દા.ત. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:662(para)
++msgid "Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr "સંકેતનાં બીજા પ્રકારોનો સંદર્ભ લેવા માટે #symbol ને વાપરો, દા.ત. structs અને enums અને macros કે જે દલીલો લેતુ નથી."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:668(para)
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal"
++msgstr "#Object ને વાપરો::GObject સંકેતનો સંદર્ભ લેવા માટે સંકેત"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:673(para)
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property"
++msgstr "#Object ને વાપરો:GObject ગુણધર્મનો સંદર્ભ લેવા માટે ગુણધર્મ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:678(para)
++msgid "Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure."
++msgstr "બંધારણની અંદર ક્ષેત્રનો સંદર્ભ લેવા માટે #Struct.field ને વાપરો."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:640(para)
++msgid "One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:686(para)
++msgid "If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or '#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++"જો તમારે તેઓને બદલ્યા વગર GTK-Doc વગર તમારાં દસ્તાવેજીકરણમાં વિશિષ્ટ અક્ષરો '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or '#' ને વાપરવાનું ઇચ્છતા હોય તો "
++"તમે XML વસ્તુઓ \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&commat;\", \"&percnt;\" અને \"&num;\" "
++"ને વાપરી શકો છો અથવા બેકસ્લેશ '\\' સાથે તેઓમાંથી બહાર નીકળી જાઓ."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:695(para)
++msgid "DocBook can do more that just links. One can also have lists, tables and examples. To enable the usage of SGML/XML tags inside doc-comments you need to have <option>--sgml-mode</option> in the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"DocBook એ ફક્ત વધારે કડીઓને કરી શકે છે. એક પાસે પણ યાદીઓ, કોષ્ટકો અને ઉદાહરણો હોઇ શકે છે. "
++"દસ્તાવેજ-ટિપ્પણીઓની અંદર SGML/XML ટેગનાં વપરાશને સક્રિય કરવા માટે તમારી પાસે <filename>Makefile.am</filename> "
++"માં ચલ <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> માં હોવુ જરૂરી છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:703(para)
++msgid "As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to comment those symbols too. This helps other to understand you code. Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the 2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made public, all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and insert the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++"પહેલાનાં GTK-Doc માં પહેલેથી જણાવેલ પ્રમાણે સાર્વજનિક API દસ્તાવેજીકરણ માટે છે. છતાં એક એ સ્થિર સંકેતો માટે દસ્તાવેજીકરણ ને લખી "
++"શકતુ નથી. તેમ છતાં તે પેલાં સંકેતો પર ટિપ્પણી કરવા માટે સારુ છે. આ તમારાં કોડને સમજવા માટે બીજાને મદદ કરે છે. માટે આપણે સામાન્ય ટિપ્પણીઓની મદદથી "
++"આ ટિપ્પણી એ અગ્રહણીય કરેલ છે (પહેલાં વાક્યમાં બીજા '*' વગર). જો પછી વિધેયને સાર્વજનિક બનાવવાની જરૂર છે, ટિપ્પણી બ્લોકમાં બીજા '*' ઉમેરવા માટે બધાને "
++"કરવાની જરૂર છે અને ફાઇલ વિભાગોની અંદર જમણી જગ્યા પર સંકેત નામને દાખલ કરો."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:717(title)
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "વિભાગોનું દસ્તાવેજ કરી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:719(para)
++msgid "Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are optional."
++msgstr ""
++"દસ્તાવેજીકરણનો દરેક વિભાગ એ એર વર્ગ અથવા મોડ્યુલ વિશે જાણકારીને સમાવે છે. એક ઘટક એ વિભાગ બ્લોક લખી શકે છે તે "
++"રજૂ કરવા માટે. ટૂંકુ વર્ણન એ સમાવિષ્ટોનાં કોષ્ટકની અંદર પણ વપરાયેલ છે. બધી @fields વૈકલ્પિક છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:727(title)
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "વિભાગ ટિપ્પણી બ્લોક"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:749(term)
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr "SECTION:<name>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:751(para)
++msgid "The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name give here should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:760(term)
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@shortdescription (_d)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:762(para)
++msgid "A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr "વિભાગનું એક વાક્યનું વર્ણન, કે જે પછી TOC માં અને વિભાગ પાનાંની ટોચે કડીઓ પછી દેખાશે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:769(term)
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr "@title"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:771(para)
++msgid "The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr "વિભાગનું શીર્ષક એ SECTION રજૂઆતમાંથી <name> માટે મૂળભૂત કરેલ છે. તે @title ક્ષેત્ર સાથે અવગણી શકાય છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:778(term)
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr "@sectionid (_i)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:780(para)
++msgid "Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <title> is used as a section_id and for other section it is <MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:788(term)
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@seealso (_a)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:790(para)
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section.."
++msgstr "સંકેતોની યાદી કે જે આ વિભાગને સંબંધિત છે.."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:796(term)
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:803(para)
++msgid "Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:815(para)
++msgid "Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:827(para)
++msgid "Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in specified and documented ways."
++msgstr "ખાનગી - ઇન્ટપફેસ કે જે GNOME સ્ટેક પોતામાં વાપરી શકાય છે, પરંતુ અંતિમ વપરાશકર્તાઓ માટે દસ્તાવેજ થયેલ નથી. જેવા કે વિધેયો એ સ્પષ્ટ થયેલ અને દસ્તાવેજ પ્રમાણે પમ વાપરવુ જોઇએ."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:836(para)
++msgid "Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be Internal."
++msgstr "આંતરિક - ઇન્ટરફેસ કે જે મોડ્યુલ માટે આંતરિક છે અને અંતિમ-વપરાશકર્તાનાં દસ્તાવેજીકરણની જરૂર નથી. વિધેયો કે જે દસ્તાવેજ થયેલ નથી તે આંતરિક કરવા માટે ધારેલ છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:798(para)
++msgid "A informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend the use of one of these terms: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:848(term)
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:850(para)
++msgid "The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is optional."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:859(term)
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr "@image"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:861(para)
++msgid "The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is optional."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:872(para)
++msgid "To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:881(title)
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "સંકેતોનું દસ્તાવેજ કરી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:883(para)
++msgid "Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus function are usually documented in the c-source and macros, struct and enum in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:891(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:920(title)
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr "સામાન્ય ટેગ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:893(para)
++msgid "You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell when an api was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:898(title)
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:899(term)
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "જ્યાં સુધી:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:901(para)
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr "વર્ણન જ્યાં સુધી API કોડનું કઇ આવૃત્તિ ઉપલ્બધ છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:906(term)
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "અપ્રચલિત થયેલ:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:908(para)
++msgid "Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr "ફકરાને સૂચિત કરી રહ્યા છે કે જે આ વિધેયને વધારે વાપરવુ જોઇએ નહિં. વર્ણનએ નવા API માટે વાંચનારને ધ્યાન લેવુ જોઇએ."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:916(para)
++msgid "(FIXME : Stability information)"
++msgstr "(FIXME : સ્થિરતા જાણકારી)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:943(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:979(title)
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "વિધેય ટિપ્પણી બ્લોક"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:949(para)
++msgid "Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:955(para)
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr "દસ્તાવેજ ક્યાંતો પરિમાણો એ NULL હોઇ શકે છે, અને શું થશે જો તેઓ છે તો."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:960(para)
++msgid "Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:945(para) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1042(para)
++msgid "Please remember to: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "મહેરબાની કરીને યાદ રાખો: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:967(para)
++msgid "Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr "Gtk-doc એ '_' સાથે શરૂ થતા બધા સંકેતો (મેક્રો, વિધેયો) ને ખાનગી ધારે છે. તેઓ સ્થિર વિધેયો જેવું વર્ણતૂક કરે છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:972(para)
++msgid "Also, take a look at gobject introspection annotation tags: http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1003(title)
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr "વિધેય ટૅગો"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1004(term)
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "પાછુ આવે છે:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1006(para)
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr "ફકરો પાછુ મળેલ પરિણામને વર્ણવી રહ્યા છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1011(term)
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr "@...:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1013(para)
++msgid "In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag (@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1023(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1025(title)
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "ગુણધર્મ ટિપ્પણી બ્લોક"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1040(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1059(title)
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "સંકેત ટિપ્પણા બ્લોક"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1046(para)
++msgid "Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or after other signals."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1052(para)
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1079(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1080(title)
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "Struct ટિપ્પણી બ્લોક"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1100(para)
++msgid "Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse behavirour."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1108(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1109(title)
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr "Enum ટિપ્પણી બ્લોક"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1130(para)
++msgid "Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse behavirour."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1140(title)
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr "ઉપયોગી DocBook ટૅગ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1142(para)
++msgid "Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr "અહિંયા અમુક DocBook ટૅગ છે કે જે મોટાભાગનાં ઉપયોગી છે જ્યારે કોડનું દસ્તાવેજ કરી રહ્યા છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1147(para)
++msgid "To link to another section in the GTK docs: <placeholder-1/> The linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1163(para)
++msgid "To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "બહારનાં વિધેયનો સંદર્ભ લેવા માટે, દા.ત. મૂળભૂત C વિધેય: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1174(para)
++msgid "To include example code: <placeholder-1/> or possibly this, for very short code fragments which don't need a title: <placeholder-2/> For the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation: <![CDATA[\n|[\n ...\n]|\n]]>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1208(para)
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "બુલેટ થયેલ યાદીઓને સમાવવા માટે: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1230(para)
++msgid "To include a note which stands out from the text: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1245(para)
++msgid "To refer to a type: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "પ્રકારનો સંદર્ભ લેવા માટે: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1256(para)
++msgid "To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "બહારનાં બંધારણનો સંદર્ભ લેવા માટે (GTK દસ્તાવેજોમાં વર્ણવેલ નથી): <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1267(para)
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "બંધારણનાં ક્ષેત્રનો સંદર્ભ લેવા માટે: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1278(para)
++msgid "To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <placeholder-1/> but you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1291(para)
++msgid "To emphasize text: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "લખાણ પર ભાર મૂકવા માટે: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1302(para)
++msgid "For filenames use: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "ફાઇલનામો વાપરવા માટે: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1313(para)
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "કીઓ વાપરવાનું સંદર્ભ લેવા માટે: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1328(title)
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr "વધારાની ફાઇલોને ભરી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1330(para)
++msgid "There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"ત્યાં વધારાની ફાઇલોની જોડી છે, કે જે ઇનલાઇન સ્ત્રોત કોડ ટિપ્પણીઓની સાથે સાથે વ્યવસ્થિત રાખવા માટેની જરૂર "
++"છે: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1339(title)
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr "ફાઇલોનાં પ્રકારોને સુધારી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1341(para)
++msgid "If your library or application includes GtkObjects/GObjects, you want their signals, arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"જો તમે લાઇબ્રેરી અથવા કાર્યક્રમ એ GtkObjects/GObjects ને સમાવે તો, તમે દસ્તાવેજીકરણમાં બતાવેલ શ્રેણીમાં "
++"તેનાં સંકેતો, દલીલો/પરિમાણો અને સ્થાનને ઇચ્છો તો. <filename><package>.types</filename> ફાઇલ "
++"ની અંદર તેનાં સમાવેશ સાથે <function>xxx_get_type</function> વિધેયોની ભેગી યાદીમાં તમારે બધાને કરવાની "
++"જરૂર છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1350(title)
++msgid "Example types file snippet"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1364(para)
++msgid "Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++"જ્યાં સુધી GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> એ તમારા માટે આ યાદી ઉત્પન્ન કરી શકે, "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename> માં SCAN_OPTIONS માટે \"--rebuild-types\" ને ખાલી ઉમેરો. જો "
++"તમે આ હેતુ થી વાપરો તો તમારે ફાઇલનાં પ્રકારોની યાદી કરવી જોઇએ નહિ અથવા આવૃત્તિ નિયંત્રણ હેઠળ તે હોવુ જોઇએ "
++"નહિં."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1373(title)
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr "મુખ્ય દસ્તાવેજને સુધારી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1375(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them and place them in a order."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc એ DocBook SGML/XML માં દસ્તાવેજીકરણને ઉત્પન્ન કરે છે. જ્યારે ઇનલાઇન સ્ત્રોત ટિપ્પણીઓની પ્રક્રિયા કરી રહ્યુ હોય, "
++"GTK-Doc સાધનો વર્ગ પ્રતિ એક દસ્તાવેજીકરણ અથવા અલગ ફાઇલ પ્રતિ મોડ્યુવ પાનાંને ઉત્પન્ન કરે છે. મુખ્ય દસ્તાવેજ તેઓને સમાવે છે અને "
++"ક્રમમાં તેમને સ્થિત કરે છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1382(para)
++msgid "While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later run will not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1392(para)
++msgid "Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along with the library."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1401(para)
++msgid "So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1408(title)
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr "મુખ્ય દસ્તાવેજ મથાળુ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1430(title)
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr "વિભાગ ફાઇલને સુધારી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1432(para)
++msgid "The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1438(para)
++msgid "The section file is a plain test file with xml like syntax (using tags). Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1444(para)
++msgid "The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be converted into the DocBook SGML/XML file <filename>sgml/gnome-config.sgml</filename> or .DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. (The name of the html file is based on the module name and the section title, or for gobjects it is based on the gobjects class name converted to lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1456(para)
++msgid "The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1463(para)
++msgid "You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private declarations which will not be output (It is a handy way to avoid warning messages about unused declarations.). If your library contains private types which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1479(para)
++msgid "You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the #include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1493(title)
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr "પરિણામને નિયંત્રણ કરી રહ્યા છે"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1495(para)
++msgid "A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1504(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1513(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> માં આપેલ સંકેતોને "
++"<filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> એ યાદી કરે છે પરંતુ સ્ત્રોતોમાં મળ્યુ નથી. "
++"ચકાસો જો તેઓને દૂર કરી દેવામાં આવી રહ્યુ છે અથવા જો તેઓની જોડણી થયેલ નથી."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1520(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"<filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> ફાઇલ એ સંકેત નામોની યાદી કરે છે, જ્યાં GTK-Doc "
++"સ્કેનર એ દસ્તાવેજીકરણને શોધ્યુ હતુ, પરંતુ જાણતા નથી ક્યાં તેને મૂકવાનું. આનો મતલબ એ કે સંકેતને હજુ "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> ફાઇલ માં ઉમેરી દેવામાં આવ્યા નથી."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1528(para)
++msgid "Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile.am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during <command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++"સક્રિય કરો અથવા Makefile.am માં <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> વાક્ય ને ઉમેરો. જો "
++"ઓછામાં ઓછુ GTK-Doc 1.9 સ્થાપિત થયેલ હોય તો, આ <command>make check</command> ને ચલાવવા "
++"દરમ્યાન સેનિટિ ચકાસણીને ચલાવશે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1535(para)
++msgid "One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: <filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first and can be compared with the section file if that is manualy maintained. The second lists all declarations fromt he headers If a symbol is missing one could check if this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1544(para)
++msgid "If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask gtkdoc to keep the intermedia scanner file for further analysis, but running it as <command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++"જો પ્રોજેક્ટ એ GObject આધારિત હોય તો, એક ઓબ્જેક્ટ સ્કેનર દ્દારા ઉત્પન્ન થયેલ ફાઇલોમાં પણ જોઇ શકો છો: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.prerequisites.txt</filename> અને <filename><package>.signals.txt</filename>. જો ત્યાં પેલાનાં કોઇપણમાં ગુમ થયેલ સંકેતો છે તો, આગળ પૃથ્થકરણ માટે અંતર્માધ્યમ "
++"સ્કેનર ફાઇલને રાખવા માટે એકજણ gtkdoc ને પૂછી શકે છે, પરંતુ <command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command> "
++"તરીકે તેને ચલાવી રહ્યા છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1559(title)
++msgid "Frequently asked question"
++msgstr "વારંવાર પૂછાતા પ્રશ્ર્ન"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1563(segtitle)
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "પ્રશ્ર્ન"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1564(segtitle)
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "જવાબ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1566(seg)
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "વર્ગની શ્રેણી નથી."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1568(function)
++msgid "xxx_get_type()"
++msgstr "xxx_get_type()"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1569(filename)
++msgid "<package>.types"
++msgstr "<package>.types"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1567(seg)
++msgid "The objects <placeholder-1/> function has not been entered into the <placeholder-2/> file."
++msgstr "ઓબ્જેક્ટો એ ફાઇલ <placeholder-1/> માં દાખલ કરી દેવામાં આવ્યુ નથી <placeholder-2/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1573(seg)
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "હજુ વર્ગ શ્રેણી નથી."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1575(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1614(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1622(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1644(filename)
++msgid "<package>-sections.txt"
++msgstr "<package>-sections.txt"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1576(ulink)
++msgid "explanation"
++msgstr "વિગતવાર"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1574(seg)
++msgid "Missing or wrong naming in <placeholder-1/> file (see <placeholder-2/>)."
++msgstr "<placeholder-1/> ફાઇલમાં ગુમ થયેલ અથવા ખોટુ નામ (જુઓ <placeholder-2/>)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1580(seg)
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1582(type) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1623(type)
++msgid "GtkWidget"
++msgstr "GtkWidget"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1581(seg)
++msgid "Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <placeholder-1/>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1588(seg)
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr "સંકેત અનુક્રમણિકા નથી."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1590(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1605(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1631(filename)
++msgid "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++msgstr "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1589(seg)
++msgid "Does the <placeholder-1/> contain a index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1595(seg)
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr "સંકેતો એ તેનાં દસ્તાવેજ-વિભાગમાં કડી થયેલ નથી."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1596(seg)
++msgid "Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1602(seg)
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "નવો વર્ગ એ દસ્તાવેજોમાં દેખાતો નથી."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1603(seg)
++msgid "Is the new page xi:included from <placeholder-1/>."
++msgstr "શું તે નવુ પાનું xi છે: <placeholder-1/> માંથી સમાવેલ છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1609(seg)
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "નવો સંકેત એ દસ્તાવેજોમાં દેખાતુ નથી."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1610(seg)
++msgid "Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <placeholder-1/> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1618(seg)
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr "પ્રકાર એ વર્ગ શ્રેણામાંથી ગુમ થયેલ છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1620(filename)
++msgid "<package>.hierarchy"
++msgstr "<package>.hierarchy"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1621(filename)
++msgid "xml/tree_index.sgml"
++msgstr "xml/tree_index.sgml"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1619(seg)
++msgid "If the type is listed in <placeholder-1/> but not in <placeholder-2/> then double check that the type is correctly placed in the <placeholder-3/>. If the type instance (e.g. <placeholder-4/>) is not listed or incidentialy makred private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1628(seg)
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr "બધા gobject ઍનોટેશન માટે foldoc કડીઓ મને મળે છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1630(filename)
++msgid "xml/annotation-glossary.xml"
++msgstr "xml/annotation-glossary.xml"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1629(seg)
++msgid "Check that <placeholder-1/> is xi:included from <placeholder-2/>."
++msgstr "ચકાસો કે જે <placeholder-1/> એ xi છે: <placeholder-2/> માંથી સમાવેલ છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1637(seg)
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr "સ્ત્રોત કોડ ટિપ્પણી બ્લોકમાં પરિમાણ વર્ણવેલ છે પરંતુ અસ્તિત્વ ધરાવતુ નથી"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1638(seg)
++msgid "Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the source."
++msgstr "ચકાસો જો મથાળામાં પ્રોટોટાઇપ પાસે સ્ત્રોતમાં વિવિધ પરિમાણ નામો છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1643(seg)
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1644(seg)
++msgid "Symbol XYZ appears twice in <placeholder-1/> file."
++msgstr "સંકેત XYZ એ <placeholder-1/> ફાઇલમાં બે વાર દેખાય છે."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1647(seg)
++msgid "Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template matches."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:12(releaseinfo)
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:16(year)
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:16(holder)
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:19(para)
++msgid "<address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state><postcode>02110-1301</postcode><country>USA</country></address> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr "<address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state><postcode>02110-1301</postcode><country>USA</country></address> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:28(title)
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr "GNU Free Documentation License"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:31(title)
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr "0. PREAMBLE"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:32(para)
++msgid "The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:43(para)
++msgid "This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:50(para)
++msgid "We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:62(title)
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:63(para)
++msgid "This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:72(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:79(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:94(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:103(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:111(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not <quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:128(para)
++msgid "Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:141(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:153(title)
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:154(para)
++msgid "You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:169(para)
++msgid "You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:176(title)
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:177(para)
++msgid "If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:195(para)
++msgid "If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:202(para)
++msgid "If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:222(para)
++msgid "It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:231(title)
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:232(para)
++msgid "You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:248(title)
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "A"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:249(para)
++msgid "Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:264(title)
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "B"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:265(para)
++msgid "List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:279(title)
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "C"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:280(para)
++msgid "State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:291(title)
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "D"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:292(para)
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>."
++msgstr "<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">દસ્તાવેજ</link> ની કોપીરાઇટ બધી સૂચનાઓને સાચવો."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:301(title)
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "E"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:302(para)
++msgid "Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:311(title)
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "F"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:312(para)
++msgid "Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:324(title)
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "G"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:325(para)
++msgid "Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:337(title)
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "H"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:338(para)
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr "આ લાઇસન્સની ચેતવણી ન થયેલ નકલને સમાવો."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:346(title)
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "I"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:347(para)
++msgid "Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>as given on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:365(title)
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "J"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:366(para)
++msgid "Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:383(title)
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "K"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:384(para)
++msgid "In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or <quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:396(title)
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "L"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:397(para)
++msgid "Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:409(title)
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "M"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:410(para)
++msgid "Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:421(title)
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "N"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:422(para)
++msgid "Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:432(para)
++msgid "If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:444(para)
++msgid "You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:453(para)
++msgid "You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:470(para)
++msgid "The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:480(title)
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:481(para)
++msgid "You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:492(para)
++msgid "The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:505(para)
++msgid "In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled <quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled <quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled <quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:516(title)
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:517(para)
++msgid "You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:527(para)
++msgid "You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:537(title)
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:538(para)
++msgid "A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:561(title)
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr "8. TRANSLATION"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:562(para)
++msgid "Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License provided that you also include the original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original English version of this License, the original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:580(title)
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr "9. TERMINATION"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:581(para)
++msgid "You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:594(title)
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:595(para)
++msgid "The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr "The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:606(para)
++msgid "Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:621(title)
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr "Addendum"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:622(para)
++msgid "To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++"તમે લખેલ છે તે દસ્તાવેજમાં આ લાઇસન્સને વાપરવા માટે, દસ્તાવેજમાં લાઇસન્સની નકલને સમાવો અને નીચેનાં કોપીરાઇટ અને "
++"લાઇસન્સ સૂચનાઓને શીર્ષક પાનાં પછી મૂકો:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:629(para)
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:632(para)
++msgid "Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:647(para)
++msgid "If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of <quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:657(para)
++msgid "If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:0(None)
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr "શ્ર્વેતા કોઠારી <swkothar@redhat.com>"
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++gtkdoc_help_sources = [
++ 'index.docbook',
++ 'fdl-appendix.xml',
++]
++
++gnome.yelp(
++ package_name,
++ sources: gtkdoc_help_sources,
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# Brazilian Portuguese translation for gtk-doc help.
++# Copyright (C) 2019 gtk-doc's COPYRIGHT HOLDER
++# This file is distributed under the same license as the gtk-doc package.
++# Marcelo Rodrigues <marcelopires@mmsantos.com.br>, 2010.
++# Rafael Fontenelle <rafaelff@gnome.org>, 2013-2019.
++#
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc help\n"
++"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=gtk-"
++"doc&keywords=I18N+L10N&component=general\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-08-15 19:15+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-09-08 20:25-0300\n"
++"Last-Translator: Rafael Fontenelle <rafaelff@gnome.org>\n"
++"Language-Team: Brazilian Portuguese <gnome-pt_br-list@gnome.org>\n"
++"Language: pt_BR\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n > 1)\n"
++"X-Generator: Gtranslator 3.32.0\n"
++"X-Project-Style: gnome\n"
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++msgctxt "_"
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr ""
++"Marcelo Rodrigues <marcelopires@mmsantos.com.br>, 2010\n"
++"Rafael Fontenelle <rafaelff@gnome.org>, 2013-2019"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/title
++#: C/index.docbook:12
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "Manual do GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/edition
++#: C/index.docbook:13
++msgid "1.24.1"
++msgstr "1.24.1"
++
++#. (itstool) path: abstract/para
++#: C/index.docbook:14
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr ""
++"Manual de usuário para desenvolvedores com instruções do uso do GTK-Doc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:16
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:25
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:34
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: publisher/publishername
++#: C/index.docbook:45
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "Projeto GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/publisher
++#: C/index.docbook:44
++msgid ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++msgstr ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:48
++msgid "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth e Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:52
++#| msgid "<year>2007-2015</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++msgid "<year>2007-2019</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2007-2019</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:65
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, "
++"Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation "
++"with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A "
++"copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Permissão concedida para copiar, distribuir e/ou modificar este documento "
++"sob os termos da <citetitle>Licença de Documentação Livre GNU</citetitle> "
++"(GNU Free Documentation License), Versão 1.1 ou qualquer versão mais recente "
++"publicada pela Free Software Foundation; sem Seções Invariantes, Textos de "
++"Capa Frontal, e sem Textos de Contracapa. Você pode encontrar uma cópia da "
++"licença está <link linkend=\"fdl\">inclusa</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:73
++msgid ""
++"Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and "
++"services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME "
++"documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the "
++"GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial "
++"caps."
++msgstr ""
++"Muitos dos nomes usados por empresas para distinguir seus produtos e "
++"serviços são reivindicados como marcas registradas. Onde esses nomes "
++"aparecem em qualquer documentação do GNOME e os membros do Projeto de "
++"Documentação do GNOME estiverem cientes dessas marcas registradas, os nomes "
++"aparecerão impressos em letras maiúsculas ou com iniciais em maiúsculas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:83
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.29.1</revnumber> <date>28 Aug 2018</date> "
++#| "<authorinitials>ss</authorinitials> <revremark>development</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.32.1</revnumber> <date>15 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>dev version</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.32.1</revnumber> <date>15 ago 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>versão de desenvolvimento</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:89
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 Jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.32</revnumber> <date>15 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>hotfix release</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.32</revnumber> <date>15 ago 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>lançamento de correção de erros</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:95
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 Jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.31</revnumber> <date>05 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>refactorings and more test coverage</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.31</revnumber> <date>05 ago 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>refatoramentos e mais cobertura de testes</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:101
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.30</revnumber> <date>08 May 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>more test coverage</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.30</revnumber> <date>08 maio 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>mais cobertura de testes</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:107
++#| msgid ""
++#| "<revnumber>1.28</revnumber> <date>24 Mar 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++#| "authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28 Aug 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28 ago 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correções de erros</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:113
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.28</revnumber> <date>24 Mar 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.28</revnumber> <date>24 mar 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correções de erros</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:119
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.27</revnumber> <date>07 Dec 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>fine tuning of the python port</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.27</revnumber> <date>07 dez 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>ajustes do porte para Python</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:125
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.26</revnumber> <date>11 Aug 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>port all tools from perl/bash to python</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.26</revnumber> <date>11 ago 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>portadas todas ferramentas de perl/bash para "
++"Python</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:131
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21 March 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, test cleanups</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21 mar 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correção de erros, limpezas de testes</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:137
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 maio 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correção de erros</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:143
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 maio 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correção de erros</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:149
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>07 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>07 maio 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correção de erros, desativadas funcionalidades "
++"obsoletas</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:155
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 Jul 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 jul 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correção de erros, desativadas funcionalidades "
++"obsoletas</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:161
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16 Feb 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, markdown support, style improvements</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>14 fev 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correção de erros, suporte a markdown, melhorias "
++"no estilo</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:167
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 Jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correção de erros</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:173
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 Sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, speedups, markdown support</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 set 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correção de erros, aceleração, suporte a "
++"markdown</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:179
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 Feb 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>urgent bug fix update</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 Fev 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>atualização de correção de erro urgente</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:185
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correção de erros, melhorias no layout</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:191
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 May 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 maio 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>correção de erros e regressões</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:197
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 March 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes and performance improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 mar 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>Correção de erro e melhorias na performance</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:203
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>broken tarball update</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 dez 2009</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>atualização de tarball defeituoso</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:209
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>new tool features and "
++"bugfixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 dez 2009</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>novas funcionalidades da ferramenta e correção de "
++"erros</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:215
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 November 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>GNOME doc-utils migration</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 nov 2008</date> <authorinitials>mal</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>migração do GNOME doc-utils</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:228
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "Introdução"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:230
++msgid ""
++"This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how "
++"it is used."
++msgstr ""
++"Este capítulo introduz GTK-Doc e dá um visão geral do que ele é e como ele é "
++"usado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:236
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "O que é GTK-Doc?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:238
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the "
++"public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can "
++"also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc é usado para documentar código C. Ele é tipicamente usado para "
++"documentar a API pública das bibliotecas, como as bibliotecas do GTK+ e do "
++"GNOME. Mas ele também pode ser usado para documentar código de aplicativos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:246
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "Como o GTK-Doc funciona?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:248
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source "
++"files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the "
++"template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only "
++"document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce "
++"output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++"O GTK-Doc funciona usando a documentação de funções colocadas dentro dos "
++"arquivos fonte em blocos de comentários especialmente formatados ou "
++"documentação adicionada aos arquivos modelo que o GTK-Doc usa (apesar disso, "
++"note que o GTK-Doc vai documentar apenas funções que são declaradas em "
++"arquivos de cabeçalho; ele não irá produzir saída para funções estáticas)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:255
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc consists of a number of python scripts, each performing a different "
++"step in the process."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc consiste em um número de scripts em Python, cada um executando uma "
++"etapa diferente no processo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:260
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "Há 5 etapas principais no processo:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:267
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the "
++"source files with the documentation for each function, macro, structs or "
++"unions, etc."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Escrita da documentação.</guilabel> O autor preenche os arquivos "
++"fonte com a documentação para cada função, macro, structs ou unions, etc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:276
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code "
++"looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. "
++"It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> "
++"containing a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according "
++"to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to "
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. The author can rearrange "
++"the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the "
++"final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><"
++"module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations "
++"found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some symbols to show "
++"up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or "
++"the declaration should appear differently, one can place entities similar to "
++"the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><"
++"module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Coleta de informação sobre o código.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> varre os arquivos de cabeçalho do "
++"código buscando por declarações de funções, macros, enums, structs e unions. "
++"Ele cria o arquivo <filename><módulo>-decl-list.txt</filename> "
++"contendo uma lista de declarações, inserindo-as em seções da acordo com o "
++"arquivo de cabeçalho no qual se encontram. Na primeira execução, este "
++"arquivo é copiado para <filename><módulo>-sections.txt</filename>. O "
++"autor pode reorganizar as seções, e a ordem das declarações dentro delas, "
++"para produzir a ordem final desejada. O segundo arquivo que ele gera é "
++"<filename><módulo>-decl.txt</filename>. Este arquivo contém as "
++"declarações completas encontradas pela varredura. Se por algum motivo se "
++"quiser que alguns símbolos apareçam nos documentos, nos quais declarações "
++"completas não puderam ser encontradas pela varredura ou a declaração deveria "
++"aparecer de outra forma, pode-se colocar entidades similares aos do "
++"<filename><módulo>-decl.txt</filename> no <filename><módulo>-"
++"overrides.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:293
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> can also be used to dynamically "
++"query a library about any GObject subclasses it exports. It saves "
++"information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about "
++"any GObject properties and signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> também pode ser usado para "
++"consultar dinamicamente uma biblioteca sobre qualquer subclasse GObject que "
++"ele exporta. Ele salva informações sobre cada posição do objeto na "
++"hierarquia de classe e sobre quaisquer propriedades GObject e sinais que ela "
++"fornece."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:299
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> should not be used anymore. It was "
++"needed in the past when GObject was still GtkObject inside gtk+."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> não deve mais ser usado. Ele era "
++"necessário no passado, quando GObject ainda era GtkObject dentro do gtk+."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:306
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mkdb</application> turns the template files into XML files in the <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code "
++"contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it "
++"gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads docs from "
++"sources and introspection data."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Geração do XML e do HTML/PDF.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-mkdb</"
++"application> transforma os arquivos modelos em arquivos XML no subdiretório "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename>. Se o código-fonte contém "
++"documentação nas funções, usando os blocos de comentários especiais, ela é "
++"mesclada aqui. Se não há arquivos tmpl sendo usados, ele apenas lê "
++"documentos dos dados de introspecção e dos fontes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:315
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the XML files into HTML files "
++"in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. Likewise "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the XML files into a PDF "
++"document called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> transforma os arquivos XML em "
++"arquivos HTML no subdiretório <filename class=\"directory\">html/</"
++"filename>. Da mesma forma, <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> "
++"transforma os arquivos XML em um documento PDF chamado <filename><"
++"pacote>.pdf</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:321
++msgid ""
++"Files in <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class="
++"\"directory\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One "
++"should never edit them directly."
++msgstr ""
++"Arquivos nos diretórios <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> e "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> são sempre sobrescritos. Não "
++"devem ser editados manualmente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:329
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After "
++"installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be "
++"run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, "
++"the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in "
++"the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, "
++"<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-"
++"links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application "
++"will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Correção de referências cruzadas entre documentos.</guilabel> Após "
++"a instalação dos arquivos HTML, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> "
++"pode ser executado para consertar referências cruzadas entre documentos "
++"separados. Por exemplo, a documentação do GTK+ contém muitas referências "
++"cruzadas a tipos documentados no manual do GLib. Ao criar um tarball fonte "
++"para distribuição, <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> transforma todos "
++"os links externos em web-links. Ao instalar documentações distribuídas "
++"(geradas previamente), o mesmo aplicativo vai tentar transformar links de "
++"volta para links locais (onde aquelas documentações estão instaladas)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:347
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "Obtendo GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:350
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "Requisitos"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:351
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>python 2/3</guilabel> - the main scripts are written in python."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>python 2/3</guilabel> – os scripts principais são escritos em "
++"Python."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:354
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> - the xslt processor from libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> – o processador de xslt do libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:358
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> - the docbook xsl stylesheets <ulink url="
++"\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type=\"http"
++"\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> – as folhas de estilo xsl de docbook <ulink "
++"url=\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type="
++"\"http\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:362
++msgid ""
++"One of <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</guilabel> "
++"or <guilabel>vim</guilabel> - optional - used for syntax highlighting of "
++"examples"
++msgstr ""
++"Um dentre <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</"
++"guilabel> ou <guilabel>vim</guilabel> – opcional - usado para destaque de "
++"sintaxe de exemplos"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:370
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "Sobre GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:372
++msgid ""
++"Historically GTK-Doc was used to generate template files from the sources "
++"code. These template files could be used by developers to enter the API "
++"documentation. This approach was rather inconvenient because it required to "
++"keep the generated files under version control. Since GTK-Doc 1.9 it became "
++"possible to place all API information into source comments, which made the "
++"template support obsolete. In version 1.26 template support has been removed."
++msgstr ""
++"Historicamente, o GTK-Doc foi usado para gerar arquivos de modelo a partir "
++"do código-fonte. Esses arquivos de modelo poderiam ser usados pelos "
++"desenvolvedores para inserir a documentação da API. Essa abordagem era "
++"bastante inconveniente porque exigia manter os arquivos gerados sob controle "
++"de versão. Desde o GTK-Doc 1.9, tornou-se possível colocar todas as "
++"informações da API em comentários no fonte, o que tornou o suporte ao modelo "
++"obsoleto. Na versão 1.26 suporte ao modelo foi removido."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:382 C/index.docbook:396
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(CORRIJA-ME)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:386
++msgid ""
++"(authors, web pages, mailing list, license, future plans, comparison with "
++"other similar systems.)"
++msgstr ""
++"(autores, páginas web, lista de discussão, licença, planos futuros, "
++"comparação com outros sistemas similares.)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:394
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "Sobre este manual"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:400
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr "(pra quem ele serve, onde você pode obtê-lo, licença)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:409
++msgid "Project Setup"
++msgstr "Configurando o projeto"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:411
++msgid ""
++"This Chapter describes the steps that are necessary to integrate GTK-Doc "
++"into your project. The integration of GTK-Doc into a project includes the "
++"following steps:"
++msgstr ""
++"Este capítulo descreve os passos necessários para integrar o GTK-Doc ao seu "
++"projeto. A integração do GTK-Doc em um projeto inclui as seguintes etapas:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:419
++msgid ""
++"Preparation of the directory structure and creating required configuration "
++"files for your GTK-Doc documentation (see <link linkend=\"settingup_docfiles"
++"\"> Setting up a skeleton documentation</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Preparação da estrutura de diretórios e criação dos arquivos de configuração "
++"necessários para sua documentação do GTK-Doc (consulte <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">Preparando o esqueleto de uma documentação</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:427
++msgid ""
++"Adjusting the build system to build your documentation using the GTK-Doc "
++"tools. Multiple build systems are supported, in this manual we describe how "
++"to integrate GTK-Doc with <link linkend=\"settingup_autotools\">Autotools</"
++"link>, <link linkend=\"settingup_cmake\">CMake</link>, and <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_plain_makefiles\">plain Makefiles</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Ajuste do sistema de compilação para compilar sua documentação usando as "
++"ferramentas do GTK-Doc. Há suporte a vários sistemas de compilação, neste "
++"manual descrevemos como integrar o GTK-Doc com <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_autotools\">Autotools</link>, <link linkend=\"settingup_cmake"
++"\">CMake</link> e <link linkend=\"settingup_plain_makefiles\">Makefiles "
++"simples</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:437
++msgid ""
++"Adding GTK-Doc specific files to version control and deciding which files to "
++"ignore (see <link linkend=\"settingup_vcs\"> Integration with version "
++"control systems</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Adição de arquivos específicos do GTK-Doc para o controle de versão e "
++"decisão de quais arquivos ignorar (veja <link linkend=\"settingup_vcs\"> "
++"Integração com sistemas de controle de versão</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:445
++msgid ""
++"The following sections assume we work on a project called <code>meep</code>. "
++"This project contains two packages (or modules), a library called "
++"<code>libmeep</code> and an end-user app called <code>meeper</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"As seções a seguir presumem que trabalhamos em um projeto chamado "
++"<code>meep</code>. Este projeto contém dois pacotes (ou módulos), uma "
++"biblioteca chamada <code>libmeep</code> e um aplicativo de usuário final "
++"chamado <code>meeper</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:454
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "Preparando o esqueleto de uma documentação"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:456
++msgid ""
++"A common convention is to place documentation into a folder called "
++"<code>docs</code> inside your top-level project directory. We usually "
++"distinguish between <emphasis>reference documentation</emphasis> intended "
++"for developers and an <emphasis>user manual</emphasis> intended for end-"
++"users. Again the convention is to have separate folders for both. We usually "
++"place the reference documentation in a folder named <code>reference</code> "
++"and the end-user manual in a folder named <code>help</code> as. According to "
++"the above convention the documentation for our <code>libmeep</code> package "
++"would be placed into: <code>docs/reference/libmeep</code>. For packages with "
++"just one library or application the documentation could also be placed "
++"directly into <code>docs/reference</code>. It is not mandatory to use the "
++"above convention, but if you choose to use a different directory structure "
++"you must adjust your build system configuration to match your directory "
++"structure."
++msgstr ""
++"Uma convenção comum é colocar a documentação em uma pasta chamada "
++"<code>docs</code> dentro do seu diretório de projeto de nível superior. "
++"Costumamos distinguir entre a <emphasis>documentação de referência</"
++"emphasis> destinada aos programadores e um <emphasis>manual do usuário</"
++"emphasis> destinado aos usuários-finais. Novamente a convenção é ter pastas "
++"separadas para ambos. Geralmente, colocamos a documentação de referência em "
++"uma pasta chamada <code>reference</code> e o manual do usuário final em uma "
++"pasta chamada <code>help</code>. De acordo com a convenção acima, a "
++"documentação do nosso pacote <code>libmeep</code> seria colocada em: "
++"<code>docs/reference/libmeep</code>. Para pacotes com apenas uma biblioteca "
++"ou aplicativo, a documentação também pode ser colocada diretamente em "
++"<code>docs/reference</code>. Não é obrigatório usar a convenção acima, mas "
++"se você optar por usar uma estrutura de diretórios diferente, deverá ajustar "
++"a configuração do sistema de compilação para que corresponda à estrutura do "
++"diretório."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:487
++msgid "Example directory structure of <emphasis>meep</emphasis> project"
++msgstr ""
++"Exemplo de estrutura de diretórios de projeto <emphasis>meep</emphasis>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:489
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # documentação de referência\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" help/ # opcional: manual de usuário\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++msgid ""
++"In the following sections we will assume a directory structure for our "
++"<emphasis>meep</emphasis> project that uses the above conventions. <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Nas seções a seguir, vamos presumir uma estrutura de diretórios para o nosso "
++"projeto <emphasis>meep</emphasis> que usa as convenções acima. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:506
++msgid "Integration with Autotools"
++msgstr "Integração com Autotools"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:507
++msgid ""
++"Integration of GTK-Doc into an autotools-based build system requires the "
++"following steps:"
++msgstr ""
++"A integração do GTK-Doc em um sistema de compilação baseado em autotools "
++"requer as seguintes etapas:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:513
++msgid ""
++"Ensure that <application>gtkdocize</application> is run once before the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> script. If an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> "
++"script is present, adjust it to check for GTK-Doc and add a call to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"Certificar-se de que <application>gtkdocize</application> seja executado uma "
++"vez antes do script <filename>configure</filename>. Se um script "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename> estiver presente, ajuste-o para verificar o "
++"GTK-Doc e adicione uma chamada ao <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:521
++msgid ""
++"The main purpose of <application>gtkdocize</application> is to make the "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> Makefile and the <filename>gtk-doc.m4</"
++"filename> macro definition file available to the build system, either by "
++"copying or linking it into the project."
++msgstr ""
++"O principal objetivo do <application>gtkdocize</application> é fazer com que "
++"o arquivo Makefile <filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> e o arquivo de "
++"definição de macro <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename> estejam disponíveis para "
++"a compilação sistema, seja copiando ou vinculando-o ao projeto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:530
++msgid ""
++"Add the necessary <application>autoconf</application> macros to "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> to enable GTK-Doc in your build system to "
++"allow configuration of GTK-Doc via the generated <filename>configure</"
++"filename> script."
++msgstr ""
++"Adicionar as macros <application>autoconf</application> necessárias ao "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> para ativar o GTK-Doc em seu sistema de "
++"compilação para permitir a configuração do GTK-Doc através do script "
++"<filename>configure</filename> gerado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:536
++msgid ""
++"Among others with registers the <code>--enable-gtk-doc</code> option with "
++"the <filename>configure</filename> script."
++msgstr ""
++"Entre outros, registra a opção <code>--enable-gtk-doc</code> com o script "
++"<filename>configure</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:542
++msgid ""
++"Create an <application>automake</application> script for each application or "
++"library in your project. In the example used in this documentation this step "
++"applies to both <code>meeper</code> and <code>libmeep</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Criar um script <application>automake</application> para cada aplicativo ou "
++"biblioteca em seu projeto. No exemplo usado nesta documentação, esta etapa "
++"se aplica tanto a <code>meeper</code> quanto a <code>libmeep</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:551
++msgid ""
++"In the following sections, we will perform the above steps in reverse order. "
++"We start with the <application>automake</application> scripts and work our "
++"way up to <filename>configure.ac</filename> and <filename>autogen.sh</"
++"filename>. Then we show how enable Gtk-Doc in the build system and how to "
++"build the documentation."
++msgstr ""
++"Nas seções a seguir, executaremos as etapas acima na ordem inversa. "
++"Começamos com os scripts <application>automake</application> e vamos "
++"trabalhando até o <filename>configure.ac</filename> e <filename>autogen.sh</"
++"filename>. Então, mostramos como habilitar o Gtk-Doc no sistema de "
++"compilação e como compilar a documentação."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:561
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "Integração com automake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:563
++msgid ""
++"First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">examples</filename> sub-directory of the <ulink url=\"https://"
++"gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/raw/master/examples/Makefile.am\"> gtkdoc-"
++"sources</ulink> to your project's reference documentation directory (e.g. "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">docs/reference/<package></filename>). A "
++"local copy should be available under e.g. <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-"
++"tools/examples/Makefile.am</filename>. If you have multiple packages repeat "
++"this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++"Primeiro copie o <filename>Makefile.am</filename> do subdiretório do "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">exemplo</filename> do <ulink url=\"https://"
++"gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/raw/master/examples/Makefile.am\"> gtkdoc-"
++"sources</ulink> para o diretório da documentação de referência do seu "
++"projeto (por exemplo, <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<"
++"pacote></filename>). Uma cópia local deveria estar disponível sob, por "
++"exemplo, <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-tools/examples/Makefile.am</"
++"filename>. Se você tiver múltiplos pacotes de documentação, repita isso para "
++"cada um."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/simpara
++#: C/index.docbook:576
++msgid ""
++"Do not forget to add each <filename>Makefile.am</filename> to the "
++"<function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function> macro in <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename>. For <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile.am</filename> you "
++"will need to add the entry <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile</"
++"filename> to <function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function>."
++msgstr ""
++"Não se esqueça de adicionar cada <filename>Makefile.am</filename> à macro "
++"<function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function> em <filename>configure.ac</filename>. "
++"Para <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile.am</filename> você precisará "
++"adicionar a entrada <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile</filename> "
++"para <function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:588
++msgid "Example directory structure with <filename>Makefiles.am</filename>"
++msgstr ""
++"Exemplo de estrutura de diretório com <filename>Makefiles.am</filename>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:591
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # documentação de referência\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" help/ # opcional: manual de usuário\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:607
++msgid ""
++"Next, you need to customize the copied Makefiles and provide values for the "
++"various parameters in each <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. All settings "
++"have a comment above them that describes their purpose and how to customize "
++"the setting. Most settings are used to supply extra flags to the respective "
++"tools to which they apply. Every tool has a variable of the form <option><"
++"TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option> (e.g. the tool <application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</"
++"application> has an option named <code>MKHTML_OPTIONS</code>). All the tools "
++"support <option>--help</option> to list the supported options."
++msgstr ""
++"Em seguida, você precisa personalizar os Makefiles copiados e fornecer "
++"valores para os vários parâmetros em cada <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. "
++"Todas as configurações têm um comentário sobre elas que descreve seu "
++"propósito e como personalizar a configuração. A maioria das configurações "
++"são usadas para fornecer opções extras para as respectivas ferramentas às "
++"quais elas se aplicam. Cada ferramenta tem uma variável na forma <option><"
++"NOME-FERRAMENTA>_OPTIONS</option> (por exemplo, a ferramenta "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> tem uma opção chamada "
++"<code>MKHTML_OPTIONS</code>). Todas as ferramentas têm suporte a <option>--"
++"help</option> pra listar os parâmetros disponíveis."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:631
++msgid ""
++"<option>DOC_MODULE</option> is used to provide the name of the package that "
++"is being documentated (e.g. <code>meeper</code>, or <code>libmeep</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>DOC_MODULE</option> é usado para fornecer o nome do pacote que está "
++"sendo documentado (por exemplo, <code>meeper</code> ou <code>libmeep</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:638
++msgid ""
++"<option>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</option> is used to specify the location of source "
++"directory which GTK-Doc searches for your API documentation. This will "
++"usually be <code> DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/src </code> or a sub-"
++"directory of that directory."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</option> é usado para especificar a localização do "
++"diretório fonte que o GTK-Doc pesquisa na documentação da API. Isso "
++"geralmente será <code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/src </code> ou um "
++"subdiretório desse diretório."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:651
++msgid ""
++"<option>HFILE_GLOB</option> and <option>CFILE_GLOB</option> are used for "
++"dependencies. Each option take a file-glob (e.g. <code>HFILE_GLOB="
++"$(top_srcdir)/src/*.c</code>). The documentation will be rebuilt if any of "
++"the matched files change."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>HFILE_GLOB</option> e <option>CFILE_GLOB</option> são usados para "
++"dependências. Cada opção pega um arquivo glob (por exemplo, <code>HFILE_GLOB="
++"$(top_srcdir)/src/*.c</code>). A documentação será recompilada se qualquer "
++"um dos arquivos correspondentes for alterado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:663
++msgid ""
++"<option>EXTRA_HFILES</option> allows to specify extra header files to "
++"include when scanning for API documentation, which are not found under "
++"<code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</code> (e.g. <code> EXTRA_HFILES=$(top_srcdir}/contrib/"
++"extra.h</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>EXTRA_HFILES</option> permite especificar arquivos de cabeçalho "
++"extras para incluir ao verificar a documentação da API, que não são "
++"encontrados em <code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</code> (por exemplo, <code>EXTRA_HFILES="
++"$(top_srcdir}/contrib/extra.h</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:673
++msgid ""
++"<option>IGNORE_HFILES</option> allows to specify header files or directories "
++"to ignore when scanning for API documentation. Use the basename of the file "
++"or directory (e.g. <code> IGNORE_HFILES=gtkdebug.h gtkintl.h "
++"private_code_folder</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>IGNORE_HFILES</option> permite especificar arquivos ou diretórios de "
++"cabeçalho a serem ignorados ao verificar a documentação da API. Use o nome "
++"de base do arquivo ou diretório (por exemplo, <code>IGNORE_HFILES=gtkdebug.h "
++"gtkintl.h private_code_folder</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:683
++msgid ""
++"<option>HTML_IMAGES</option> allows to specify images files which will be "
++"copied into the <filename>html/</filename> directory of the generated "
++"documentation. If your API documentation includes any images they need to be "
++"added to this option (e.g. <code> HTML_IMAGES=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/stock-icons/"
++"stock_about_24.png</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>HTML_IMAGES</option> permite especificar arquivos de imagens que "
++"serão copiados para o diretório <filename>html/</filename> da documentação "
++"gerada. Se a documentação da API incluir imagens, elas precisam ser "
++"adicionadas a essa opção (por exemplo, <code>HTML_IMAGES=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/"
++"stock-icons/stock_about_24.png</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:696
++msgid ""
++"<option>content_files</option> allows to specify extra files that are "
++"included by <code>$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)</code> (e.g. <code> "
++"content_files=running.xml building.xml changes-2.0.xml</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>content_files</option> permite especificar arquivos extras incluídos "
++"por <code>$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)</code> (por exemplo, "
++"<code>content_files=running.xml building.xml changes-2.0.xml</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:707
++msgid ""
++"<option>expand_content_files</option> allows to specify files where "
++"<emphasis>gtk-doc abbreviations</emphasis> such as <code>#GtkWidget</code> "
++"are expanded (e.g. <code> expand_content_files=running.xml</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>expand_content_files</option> permite especificar arquivos onde as "
++"<emphasis>abreviaturas gtk-doc</emphasis> como <code>#GtkWidget</code> são "
++"expandidas (por exemplo, <code>expand_content_files=running.xml</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:625
++msgid ""
++"The following list explains the most relevant options. Check the example "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename> for additional options. <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"A lista a seguir explica as opções mais relevantes. Verifique o exemplo "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename> para opções adicionais. <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:722
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Integração com autoconf"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:724
++msgid ""
++"Integration with <application>autoconf</application> is very simple and "
++"includes one required step and an additional optional (but recommended) "
++"step. The first step is to add the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro "
++"to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This registers several "
++"configure options to enable GTK-Doc and allows you to set default arguments "
++"for <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"A integração com <application>autoconf</application> é muito simples e "
++"inclui uma etapa obrigatória e uma etapa adicional opcional (mas "
++"recomendada). O primeiro passo é adicionar a macro <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</"
++"function> ao seu script <filename>configure.ac</filename>. Isso registra "
++"várias opções de configuração para habilitar o GTK-Doc e permite definir "
++"argumentos padrão para <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: warning/simpara
++#: C/index.docbook:736
++msgid ""
++"Make sure that the <code>GTK_DOC_CHECK</code> macro is not indented. The "
++"macro must start at the beginning of the line and should not start with "
++"whitespace."
++msgstr ""
++"Certifique-se de que a macro <code>GTK_DOC_CHECK</code> não esteja recuada. "
++"A macro deve começar no início da linha e não deve começar com espaço em "
++"branco."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:743
++msgid ""
++"The second step is to add the <code>AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)</code> to your "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. This is not required but helps "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++"definition (e.g <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename>) which contains the "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro to your project's macro directory. "
++"Without this, the GTK_DOC_CHECK macro might not be found and you would need "
++"to explicitly tell the <application>aclocal</application> tool where to find "
++"the macro definition file."
++msgstr ""
++"O segundo passo é adicionar o <code>AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)</code> ao seu "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. Isso não é necessário, mas ajuda o "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> a copiar automaticamente a definição da "
++"macro (por exemplo, <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename>) que contém a macro "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> para o diretório de macro do seu projeto. "
++"Sem isso, a macro GTK_DOC_CHECK pode não ser encontrada e você precisaria "
++"informar explicitamente à ferramenta <application>aclocal</application> onde "
++"encontrar o arquivo de definição de macro."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:756
++msgid "Minimal integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Integração mínima com autoconf"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:757
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"# recomendado: defina o diretório m4\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# opcional: registre gtk-doc no configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:772
++msgid "Integration with optional gtk-doc dependency"
++msgstr "Integração com dependência opcional do gtk-doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:773
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"# recomendado: defina diretório m4\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# opcional: registre gtk-doc no configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:766
++msgid ""
++"The above example works, but will require all developers to have gtk-doc "
++"installed. A better way is to make building the documentation optional as "
++"shown in the next example: <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"O exemplo acima funciona, mas exigirá que todos os desenvolvedores tenham o "
++"gtk-doc instalado. Uma maneira melhor é tornar a documentação opcional, "
++"conforme mostrado no próximo exemplo: <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:786
++msgid ""
++"The first argument is used to check for the Gtk-Doc version at configure "
++"time. The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application>. The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several "
++"configure switches:"
++msgstr ""
++"O primeiro argumento é usado para verificar a versão do Gtk-Doc em tempo de "
++"compilação. O segundo argumento é opcional, sendo usado por "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>. A macro <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> "
++"também adiciona várias opções de configuração:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:795
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr "--with-html-dir=CAMINHO : caminho para as documentações instaladas"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:796
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc : usa gtk-doc para compilar documentação [padrão=não]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:797
++msgid ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : compila documentação em formato html [padrão=sim]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:798
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : compila documentação em formato pdf [padrão=não]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: important/para
++#: C/index.docbook:802
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--"
++"enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. "
++"Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for "
++"users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc está desabilitado por padrão! Lembre-se de passar a opção <option>"
++"\"--enable-gtk-doc\"</option> à próxima execução do <filename>configure</"
++"filename>. Do contrário, uma documentação gerada previamente é instalada (o "
++"que faz sentido para usuários, mas não para desenvolvedores)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:810
++msgid ""
++"After all changes to <filename>configure.ac</filename> are made, update the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> file. This can be done by re-running "
++"<code>autogen.sh</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Após todas as alterações do <filename>configure.ac</filename> serem feitas, "
++"atualize o arquivo <filename>configure</filename>. Isso pode ser feito "
++"executando novamente <code>autogen.sh</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:818
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "Integração com autogen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:820
++msgid ""
++"Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup "
++"the build infrastructure after the project was checked out from a version "
++"control system (such as git or svn). GTK-Doc comes with a script called "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> which can be used to copy the necessary "
++"files needed by Gtk-Doc to the source directory."
++msgstr ""
++"A maioria dos projetos tem um script <filename>autogen.sh</filename> para "
++"configurar a infraestrutura de compilação após o checkout do projeto sistema "
++"de um controle de versão (como git ou svn). GTK-Doc vêm com um script "
++"chamado <application>gtkdocize</application> que pode ser usado para copiar "
++"os arquivos necessários pelo Gtk-Doc para o diretório fonte."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:828
++msgid "It should be run before autoreconf, autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr ""
++"Ele deve ser executado antes de autoreconf, autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:833
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Executando gtkdocize no autogen.sh"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:834
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:842
++msgid "Conditionally run gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Executa condicionalmente gtkdocize no autogen.sh"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:843
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"GTKDOCIZE=$(which gtkdocize 2>/dev/null)\n"
++"if test $? -ne 0; then\n"
++" echo \"No gtk-doc support found. You can't build the docs.\"\n"
++"else\n"
++" $GTKDOCIZE || exit 1\n"
++"fi\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"GTKDOCIZE=$(which gtkdocize 2>/dev/null)\n"
++"if test $? -ne 0; then\n"
++" echo \"No gtk-doc support found. You can't build the docs.\"\n"
++"else\n"
++" $GTKDOCIZE || exit 1\n"
++"fi\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:854
++msgid ""
++"When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.make</filename> to your project root (or any directory specified by the "
++"<option>--docdir</option> option)."
++msgstr ""
++"Ao executar <application>gtkdocize</application>, ele copia <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.make</filename> para a raiz do seu projeto (ou qualquer diretório "
++"especificado pela opção <option>--docdir</option>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:860
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> checks your <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename> script for the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro. The "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro can be used to pass extra arguments "
++"to the <application>gtkdocize</application> script. the 2nd parameter in the "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> verifica seu script <filename>configure."
++"ac</filename> para <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>. A macro "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> pode ser usada para passar parâmetros "
++"extras para o script <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:869
++msgid ""
++"Alternatively, additional arguments can also be passed to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> via the <function>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</"
++"function> environment variable, or by directly specifying them to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> in <filename>autogen.sh</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Alternativamente, argumentos adicionais também podem ser passados para "
++"<application>gtkdocsize</application> por meio da variável de ambiente "
++"<function>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</function> ou especificando-os diretamente ao "
++"<application>gtkdocsize</application> no <filename>autogen.sh</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:880
++msgid "Executing GTK-Doc from the Build System"
++msgstr "Executando GTK-Doc a partir do sistema de compilação"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:882
++msgid ""
++"After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then "
++"give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run "
++"<filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++"Após as etapas anteriores, é hora de executar a compilação. Primeiro, nós "
++"queremos executar novamente o <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. Se este "
++"script executa o configure para você, então forneça a este a opção <option>--"
++"enable-gtk-doc</option>. Do contrário, execute manualmente "
++"<filename>configure</filename> com esta opção em seguida."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:889
++msgid ""
++"The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-"
++"directories. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past ."
++"sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"A primeira execução do make cria vários arquivos adicionais nos diretórios "
++"de documentação. Os importantes são: <filename><pacote>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><pacote>-docs.xml</filename> (no passado, .sgml), "
++"<filename><pacote>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:897
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "Executando a compilação da documentação"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:898
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:905
++msgid ""
++"Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename>. With this initial setup you will only see a very "
++"simple document. The next chapter will teach you how to add API "
++"documentation to your code via special comment blocks. The Chapter "
++"afterwards introduces <link linkend=\"metafiles\">additional files</link> "
++"and shows how to edit the <link linkend=\"metafiles_master\">master "
++"template</link> to add additional chapters and sections to your "
++"documentation files."
++msgstr ""
++"Agora você pode apontar seu navegador para <filename>docs/reference/<"
++"pacote>/index.html </filename>. Com esta configuração inicial, você verá "
++"apenas um documento muito simples. O próximo capítulo ensinará como "
++"adicionar documentação da API ao seu código por meio de blocos de "
++"comentários especiais. O capítulo seguinte depois introduz <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles\">arquivos adicionais</link> e mostra como editar o <link "
++"linkend=\"metafiles_master\">modelo mestre</link> para adicionar capítulos e "
++"seções adicionais aos seus arquivos de documentação."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:921
++msgid "Integration with CMake build systems"
++msgstr "Integração com sistemas de compilação CMake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:923
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc now provides a <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename> module (and "
++"the corresponding <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename> module). "
++"This provides a <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal> command that you can "
++"set in your <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc agora fornece um módulo <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename> (e o "
++"module <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename> correspondente). Ele "
++"fornece um comando <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal> que você pode usar "
++"em seu arquivo <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:933
++msgid "Example of using GTK-Doc from CMake"
++msgstr "Exemplo de uso do GTK-Doc no CMake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:934
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Create the doc-libmeep target.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Build doc-libmeep as part of the default target. Without this, you would\n"
++"# have to explicitly run something like `make doc-libmeep` to build the docs.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Install the docs. (This assumes you're using the GNUInstallDirs CMake module\n"
++"# to set the CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR variable correctly).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Cria o alvo doc-libmeep.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Compila doc-libmeep como parte do alvo padrão. Sem isso, você precisaria\n"
++"# executar explicitamente algo como `make doc-libmeep` para compilar os\n"
++"# documentos.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Instala os documentos. (Isso presume que você está usando o módulo\n"
++"# GNUInstallDirs do CMake para definir a variável CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR\n"
++"# corretamente).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:931
++msgid "The following example shows how to use this command. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr "O exemplo a seguir mostra como usar este comando. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:958
++msgid "Integration with plain makefiles or other build systems"
++msgstr "Integração com makefiles simples ou outros sistemas de compilação"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:960
++msgid ""
++"In the case one does not want to use automake and therefore <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.mak</filename> one will need to call the gtkdoc tools in the right order "
++"in own makefiles (or other build tools)."
++msgstr ""
++"Neste caso, não se deseja usar o automake e, portanto, <filename>gtk-doc."
++"mak</filename>. Será necessário chamar as ferramentas do gtkdoc na ordem "
++"correta nos makefiles devidos (ou outras ferramentas de compilação)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:967
++msgid "Documentation build steps"
++msgstr "Etapas de compilação da documentação"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:968
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <source-dir>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<source-dir>\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// fontes foram alterados\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <source-dir=>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<source-dir>\n"
++"// arquivos xml foram alterados \n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:982
++msgid ""
++"One will need to look at the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> and "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> to pick the extra options needed."
++msgstr ""
++"Será necessário olhar no <filename>Makefile.am</filename> e no <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.mak</filename> para obter as opções extras necessárias."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:989
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "Integração com sistemas de controle de versão"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:991
++msgid ""
++"As a rule of thumb, it's the files you edit which should go under version "
++"control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><package>."
++"types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the "
++"past .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Como uma regra de ouro, são aqueles arquivos que você edita que devem entrar "
++"no controle de versão. Para projetos normais, esses são os arquivos: "
++"<filename><pacote>.types</filename>, <filename><pacote>-docs."
++"xml</filename> (no passado, .sgml), <filename><pacote>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:999
++msgid ""
++"Files in the <filename>xml/</filename> and <filename>html/</filename> "
++"directories should not go under version control. Neither should any of the "
++"<filename>.stamp</filename> files."
++msgstr ""
++"Arquivos nos diretórios <filename>xml/</filename> e <filename>html/</"
++"filename> não devem entrar no controle de versão. Da mesma forma, não devem "
++"entrar arquivos <filename>.stamp</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1009
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "Documentando o código"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1011
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code "
++"documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure "
++"from other sources. During the next section you will find all information "
++"about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc usa comentários do código-fonte com uma sintaxe especial para "
++"documentação do código. Além disso, ele obtém informações sobre a estrutura "
++"do seu projeto a partir de outros fontes. Na próxima seção, você vai "
++"descobrir todas as informações sobre a sintaxe dos comentários."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1022 C/index.docbook:1048
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "Bloco de comentário do GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1023
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* código não analisável aqui */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1018
++msgid ""
++"The GTK-Doc scanner can handle the majority of C headers fine. In the case "
++"of receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special case, one "
++"can hint GTK-Doc to skip over them. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"O verificador do GTK-Doc sabe lidar com a maioria dos cabeçalhos de C sem "
++"problemas. Caso se receba avisos (warnings) na varredura que pareça ser um "
++"caso especial, pode-se informar ao GTK-Doc para ignorá-los. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1032
++msgid "Limitations"
++msgstr "Limitações"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1033
++msgid ""
++"Note, that GTK-Doc's supports <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> but "
++"not <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> or other combinations."
++msgstr ""
++"Note que o GTK-Doc oferece suporte a <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</"
++"code>, mas não a <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> ou outras "
++"combinações."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1043
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "Comentários de documentação"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1049
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identificador:\n"
++" * documentação ...\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1045
++msgid ""
++"A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation "
++"block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Um comentário multilinha que comece com um “*” adicional marca um bloco de "
++"documentação que será processado pelas ferramentas do GTK-Doc. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1058
++msgid ""
++"The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is "
++"related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add "
++"table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++"O “identificador” é uma linha com o nome do item ao qual o comentário está "
++"relacionado. A sintaxe difere um pouco dependendo do item."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1064
++msgid ""
++"The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol "
++"types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter "
++"description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows "
++"the detailed description. All lines (outside program listings and CDATA "
++"sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph "
++"breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-"
++"asterisk-blank-blank). This is useful in preformatted text (code listings)."
++msgstr ""
++"O bloco “documentação” também é diferente para cada tipo de símbolo. Tipos "
++"de símbolos que levam parâmetros, como funções e macros, têm a descrição de "
++"parâmetro começando com uma linha vazia (apenas com um “*”). Posteriormente, "
++"segue com a descrição detalhada. Todas as linhas (fora das listagens do "
++"programa e seções CDATA) contendo apenas um “ *” (espaço em branco e "
++"asterisco) são convertidas para quebras de parágrafos. Se você não quiser "
++"uma quebra de parágrafo, altere isso para “ * “ (espaço, asterisco, espaço e "
++"espaço). Isso é útil em textos pré-formatados (listagens de código)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1081
++msgid ""
++"What it is: The name for a class or function can sometimes be misleading for "
++"people coming from a different background."
++msgstr ""
++"O que é: O nome de uma classe ou função pode, em alguns casos, levar a um "
++"entendimento equivocado pessoas com experiências diferentes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1087
++msgid ""
++"What it does: Tell about common uses. Put it in relation with the other API."
++msgstr ""
++"O que ele faz: Fale sobre usos comuns. Coloque em relação com a outra API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1077
++msgid "When documenting code, describe two aspects: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "Ao documentar um código, descreva dois aspectos: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1102
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Use function() para se referir às funções ou macros que levam argumentos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1107
++msgid ""
++"Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to "
++"parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr ""
++"Use @param para se referir a parâmetros. Também, use isso ao se referir a "
++"parâmetros de outras funções, relacionadas àquele sendo descrito."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1113
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr "Use %constant para se referir a uma constante, ex.: %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1118
++msgid ""
++"Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and "
++"macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Use #symbol para se referir a outros tipos de símbolos, ex.: structs, enums "
++"e macros que não levam argumentos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1124
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal."
++msgstr "Use #Object::signal para se referir a um sinal de GObject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1129
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property."
++msgstr "Use #Object:property para se referir a uma propriedade de GObject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1134
++msgid ""
++"Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure and #GObjectClass."
++"foo_bar() to refer to a vmethod."
++msgstr ""
++"Use #Struct.field para se referir a um campo dentro de uma estrutura e "
++"#GObjectClass.foo_bar() para se referir a um vmethod."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1096
++msgid ""
++"One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in "
++"the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. "
++"GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Uma vantagem do hipertexto de texto simples é a habilidade de ter links no "
++"documento. Porém, escrever a marcação correta para cada link pode ser "
++"entediante. GTK-Doc vem para ajudar fornecendo abreviações úteis. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1143
++msgid ""
++"If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or "
++"'#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML "
++"entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&"
++"commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them "
++"with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++"Se você precisar usar os caracteres especiais “<”, “>”, “()”, “@”, “%” "
++"ou “#” em sua documentação sem GTK-Doc alterando-os, você pode usar as "
++"entidades XML “&lt;”, “&gt;”, “&lpar;”, “&rpar;”, “&"
++"commat;”, “&percnt;” e “&num;”, respectivamente, ou escapá-los com "
++"uma contrabarra “\\”."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1152
++msgid ""
++"DocBook can do more than just links. One can also have lists, examples, "
++"headings, and images. As of version 1.20, the preferred way is to use a "
++"subset of the basic text formatting syntax called <ulink url=\"http://"
++"daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink>. On older GTK-Doc "
++"versions any documentation that includes Markdown will be rendered as is. "
++"For example, list items will appear as lines starting with a dash."
++msgstr ""
++"DocBook pode fazer mais do que apenas links. Ele também pode ter listas, "
++"exemplos, títulos e imagens. A partir da versão 1.20, a forma preferível é "
++"usar um subconjunto de sintaxe de formatação de texto básica chamada <ulink "
++"url=\"http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink>. Em "
++"versões mais antigas do GTK-Doc, qualquer documentação que inclui Markdown "
++"será renderizada como está. Por exemplo, itens de lista aparecerão como "
++"linhas começando com um traço."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1163
++msgid ""
++"While markdown is now preferred one can mix both. One limitation here is "
++"that one can use docbook xml within markdown, but markdown within docbook "
++"xml is not supported."
++msgstr ""
++"Enquanto markdown é agora preferível, é possível misturar ambos. Uma "
++"limitação aqui é que é possível usar docbook xml no markdown, mas não há "
++"suporte a markdown no docbook xml."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1169
++msgid ""
++"In older GTK-Doc releases, if you need support for additional formatting, "
++"you would need to enable the usage of docbook XML tags inside doc-comments "
++"by putting <option>--xml-mode</option> (or <option>--sgml-mode</option>) in "
++"the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Em versões mais antigas do GTK-Doc, se você precisasse de suporte para "
++"formatação adicional, você precisaria de habilitar o uso de tags de XML de "
++"docbook dentro de comentários de documentação colocando <option>--xml-mode</"
++"option> (ou <option>--sgml-mode</option>) na variável <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</"
++"symbol> dentro de <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1178
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block using Markdown"
++msgstr "Bloco de comentário do GTK-Doc usando Markdown"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1179
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * documentation paragraph ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Second Sub Heading\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading With a Link Anchor # {#heading-two}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * more documentation:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 1\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Paragraph inside a list item.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. another numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Another paragraph. [A Link to the GNOME Website](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [A link to the heading anchor above][heading-two]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * A C-language example:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Gorgeous!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identificador:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * parágrafo de documentação ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Subtítulo #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Segundo subtítulo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Subtítulo com um link âncora # {#titulo-dois}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * mais documentação:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - item 1 da lista\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Parágrafo dentro de um item de lista.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - item 2 da lista\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. item numerado da lista\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. outro item numerado da lista\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Outro parágrafo. [Um link para o site do GNOME](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [Um link para um título acima][titulo-dois]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Um exemplo em linguagem C:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Esplêndido!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1218
++msgid ""
++"More examples of what markdown tags are supported can be found in the <ulink "
++"url=\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/Markdown"
++"\">GTK+ Documentation Markdown Syntax Reference</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Mais exemplos de quais tags de markdown tags possui suporte podem ser "
++"encontrados na <ulink url=\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/"
++"DocumentationSyntax/Markdown\">Referência de sintaxe de markdown de "
++"documentação</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1224
++msgid ""
++"As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one "
++"cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to "
++"comment those symbols too. This helps other developers to understand your "
++"code. Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without "
++"the 2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made "
++"public, all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and "
++"insert the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++"Como já mencionado anteriormente, GTK-Doc serve para documentar API pública. "
++"Portanto, não é possível escrever documentação para símbolos estáticos. Não "
++"obstante, é bom comentar estes símbolos também. Isso ajuda outros "
++"desenvolvedores a entender seu código. Portanto, é recomendado comentá-los "
++"usando comentários normais (sem o segundo “*” na primeira linha). Se, "
++"posteriormente, a função precisar ser publicada, tudo que precisa ser feito "
++"é adicionar outro “*” no bloco de comentário e inserir o nome do símbolo no "
++"lugar correto do arquivo e seções."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1239
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "Documentando seções"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1241
++msgid ""
++"Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or "
++"module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short "
++"description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Cada seção da documentação contém informações sobre uma classe ou um módulo. "
++"Para introduzir o componente, pode-se escrever um bloco de seção. A "
++"descrição curta também é usada dentro da tabela de conteúdo (sumário). Todos "
++"os @fields são opcionais."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1249
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "Bloco de comentário de sessão"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1250
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: A classe do aplicativo\n"
++" * @title: Aplicativo Meep\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Estável\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: aplicativo.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * A classe do aplicativo cuida de ...\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1269
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr "SECTION:<nome>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1271
++msgid ""
++"The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name given here "
++"should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"O nome vincula a documentação da seção à respectiva parte do arquivo "
++"<filename><pacote>-sections.txt</filename>. O nome informado aqui deve "
++"corresponder à tag <FILE> no arquivo <filename><pacote>-sections."
++"txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1280
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@short_description"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1282
++msgid ""
++"A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the "
++"links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr ""
++"Uma descrição de uma linha da sessão,que mais tarde aparecerá após os links "
++"no TOC (sumário) no topo da página da sessão."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1289
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr "@title"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1291
++msgid ""
++"The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It "
++"can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr ""
++"O padrão para título de seção é <nome> da declaração da SECTION. Ele "
++"pode ser sobrescrito com o campo @title."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1298
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr "@section_id"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1300
++msgid ""
++"Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <"
++"title> is used as a section_id and for other sections it is <"
++"MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++"Sobrescreve o uso do título como um identificador de seção. Para GObjects, o "
++"<title> é usado como um section_id e para outras seções ele é <"
++"MÓDULO>-<title>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1308
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@see_also"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1310
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section."
++msgstr "Uma lista de símbolos que estão relacionados a esta sessão."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1316
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1323
++msgid ""
++"Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third "
++"parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have "
++"confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after "
++"the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major "
++"release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be "
++"rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++"Estável – A intenção de uma interface estável é permitir terceiros "
++"arbitrários desenvolverem aplicativos para essas interfaces, lançá-los e ter "
++"a confiança de que eles vão funcionar em todos os lançamentos menores do "
++"produto (após aquele no qual a interface foi introduzida e naquele mesmo "
++"lançamento maior). Atém mesmo em um lançamento maior, espera-se que "
++"alterações incompatíveis sejam raras e que tenham fortes justificativas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1335
++msgid ""
++"Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are "
++"typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly "
++"changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a "
++"more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source "
++"or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++"Instável – Interfaces instáveis são experimentais ou transicionais. Elas são "
++"normalmente usadas para dar a desenvolvedores externos um acesso prévio a "
++"nova tecnologia ou em rápida alteração, ou para fornecer uma solução "
++"interina para um problema que uma solução mais genérica foi antecipada. "
++"Nenhuma responsabilidade é assumida pela compatbilidade dos binários ou dos "
++"fontes de uma versão menor para a próxima."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1347
++msgid ""
++"Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but "
++"that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in "
++"specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++"Privado – Uma interface que pode ser usada dentro da própria pilha do GNOME, "
++"mas que não está documentada para usuários finais. Tais funções deveriam ser "
++"usadas nas formas especificadas e documentadas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1356
++msgid ""
++"Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require "
++"end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be "
++"Internal."
++msgstr ""
++"Interna – Uma interface que é interna a um módulo e não requer documentação "
++"para o usuário final. Funções que não estão documentadas são presumidas como "
++"sendo “Interna”."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1318
++msgid ""
++"An informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend "
++"the use of one of these terms: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Uma descrição informal do nível de estabilidade que esta API tem. Nós "
++"recomendamos o uso de um desses termos: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1368
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1370
++msgid ""
++"The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a "
++"comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Os arquivos <literal>#include</literal> a ser mostrado na sinopse da seção "
++"(uma lista separada por vírgulas), sobrescrevendo o valor global do <link "
++"linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">arquivo de seção</link> ou linha de comando. "
++"Este item é opcional."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1379
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr "@image"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1381
++msgid ""
++"The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This "
++"will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of "
++"a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"A imagem a ser exibida no topo da página de referência desta seção. Isso "
++"frequentemente será um tipo de diagrama para ilustrar a aparência visual de "
++"uma classe ou uma diagrama de suas relações a outras classes. Este item é "
++"opcional."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1392
++msgid ""
++"To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs "
++"into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++"Para evitar recompilação desnecessária após alterações de documentação "
++"inseridas nas documentações de seção no fonte em C onde possível."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1401
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "Documentando símbolos"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1403
++msgid ""
++"Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is "
++"documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the "
++"definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus "
++"functions are usually documented in the c-source and macros, structs and "
++"enums in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++"Cada símbolo (função, macro, struct, enum, signal e property) é documentado "
++"em uma bloco separado. O bloco é melhor localizado perto da definição dos "
++"símbolos, de forma que seja fácil de mantê-los em sincronia. Portanto, as "
++"funções são normalmente documentadas no fonte em C e macros, scructs e enums "
++"no arquivo de header."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1411 C/index.docbook:1477
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr "Tags gerais"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1413
++msgid ""
++"You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell "
++"when an API was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode adicionar informação sobre versionamento em todos os elementos de "
++"documentação para informar quando uma API foi introduzida ou quando ela se "
++"tornou obsoleta."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1418
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr "Tags de versionamento"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1419
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "Since:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1421
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr "Descrição de desde qual versão do código a API está disponível."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1426
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "Deprecated:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1428
++msgid ""
++"Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The "
++"description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr ""
++"Parágrafo denotando que esta função deveria não mais ser usada. A descrição "
++"deveria apontar o leitor para a nova API."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1436
++msgid ""
++"You can also add stability information to all documentation elements to "
++"indicate whether API stability is guaranteed for them for all future minor "
++"releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Você também pode adicionar informação sobre estabilidade em todos os "
++"elementos de documentação para indicar se a estabilidade de uma API é "
++"garantida para eles para futuros lançamentos menores do projeto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1442
++msgid ""
++"The default stability level for all documentation elements can be set by "
++"passing the <option>--default-stability</option> argument to "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> with one of the values below."
++msgstr ""
++"O nível de estabilidade padrão para todos os elementos de documentação pode "
++"ser definido passando o argumento <option>--default-stability</option> para "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> com um dos valores abaixo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1448
++msgid "Stability Tags"
++msgstr "Tags de estabilidade"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1449
++msgid "Stability: Stable"
++msgstr "Stability: Stable"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1451
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as stable. This is for public APIs which are guaranteed to "
++"remain stable for all future minor releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Marca o elemento como estável. Isto é para APIs públicas cuja estabilidade é "
++"garantida para todos os próximos lançamentos menores do projeto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1458
++msgid "Stability: Unstable"
++msgstr "Stability: Unstable"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1460
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as unstable. This is for public APIs which are released as "
++"a preview before being stabilised."
++msgstr ""
++"Marca o elemento como instável. Isto é para APIs públicas que são publicados "
++"como versão de desenvolvimento antes de se tornar estável."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1466
++msgid "Stability: Private"
++msgstr "Stability: Private"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1468
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as private. This is for interfaces which can be used by "
++"tightly coupled modules, but not by arbitrary third parties."
++msgstr ""
++"Marca o elemento como privado. Isto é para interfaces que podem ser usadas "
++"por um conjunto pequeno de módulos, mas não por terceiros."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1478
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: Um foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Obtém o bar do @foo.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: bar do @foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() no seu lugar.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1498 C/index.docbook:1508
++msgid "Annotations"
++msgstr "Anotações"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1500
++msgid ""
++"Documentation blocks can contain annotation-tags. These tags will be "
++"rendered with tooltips describing their meaning. The tags are used by "
++"gobject-introspection to generate language bindings. A detailed list of the "
++"supported tags can be found on <ulink url=\"http://live.gnome.org/"
++"GObjectIntrospection/Annotations\" type=\"http\">the wiki</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Blocos de documentação podem conter tags de anotação. Essas tags serão "
++"renderizadas com dicas de ferramentas descrevendo seu significados. As tags "
++"são usadas pelo gobject-introspection para garantir associações (bindings) "
++"de linguagens. Uma lista detalhada tags aceitas podem ser encontrada <ulink "
++"url=\"http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations\" type=\"http"
++"\">no wiki</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1509
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: (annotation): @foo's bar\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (annotation) (another annotation)\n"
++" * (and another annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation) (another annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Sets bar on @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (anotação)\n"
++" * @foo: (anotação): algum foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Obtém bar do @foo.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: (anotação): bar do @foo\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (anotação) (outra anotação)\n"
++" * (e uma outra anotação)\n"
++" * @foo: (anotação) (uma outra anotação): algum foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Define bar no @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1530 C/index.docbook:1559
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "Bloco de comentário de função"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1536
++msgid ""
++"Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/"
++"unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++"Documente se objetos, listas, strings, etc. retornados devem ser não usados/"
++"não referenciados/liberada."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1542
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr ""
++"Documente se parâmetros pode ser NULL e o que acontece se eles o forem."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1547
++msgid ""
++"Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr ""
++"Mencione pré-condições e pós-condições interessantes onde for apropriado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1532 C/index.docbook:1618
++msgid "Please remember to: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "Por favor, lembre-se de: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1554
++msgid ""
++"Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are "
++"private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++"Gtk-doc presume que todos os símbolos (macros, funções) começando com “_” "
++"são privados. Eles são tratados como funções estáticas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1560
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * nome_da_função:\n"
++" * @par1: descrição do parâmetro 1. Esta pode se estender por mais de\n"
++" * uma linha.\n"
++" * @par2: descrição do parâmetro 2\n"
++" * @...: uma lista de bars terminada em %NULL\n"
++" *\n"
++" * A descrição da função vai aqui. Você pode usar @par1 para se referir a parâmetros\n"
++" * de forma que eles ficam em destaque na saída. Você também pode usar %constant\n"
++" * para constantes, nome_da_função2() para funções e #GtkWidget para links para\n"
++" * outras declarações (que pode ser documentada em outro lugar).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: um inteiro.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use outra_função() em seu lugar.\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1581
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr "Tags de função"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1582 C/index.docbook:1789
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "Returns:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1584
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr "Parágrafo descrevendo o resultado retornado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1589
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr "@...:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1591
++msgid ""
++"In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag "
++"(@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++"No caso da função possuir argumentos variados, você deveria usar esta tag "
++"(@Varargs: também funciona por motivos de histórico)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1601 C/index.docbook:1603
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "Bloco de comentário de propriedade"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1604
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * AlgumWidget:alguma-propriedade:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Aqui você pode documentar uma propriedade.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_propriedade_install_classe (object_classe, PROP_ALGUMA_PROPRIEDADE, ...);\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1616 C/index.docbook:1635
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "Bloco de comentário de sinal"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1622
++msgid ""
++"Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or "
++"after other signals."
++msgstr ""
++"Documente quando o sinal é emitido e se ele é emitido antes ou após outros "
++"sinais."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1628
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr "Documente o que um aplicativo pode fazer no manipulador do sinal."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1636
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZED] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarized\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarizado:\n"
++" * @widget: o widget que recebeu o sinal\n"
++" * @foo: algum foo\n"
++" * @bar: algum bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * O sinal ::foobarized é emitido cada vez que alguém tenta foobarizar @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_sinais[FOOBARIZADO] =\n"
++" g_signal_novo (\"foobarizado\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1653 C/index.docbook:1654
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "Bloco de comentário de struct"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1655
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: algum #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Este é o melhor widget, já mais visto.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_intance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1670
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> antes dos campos da struct privada "
++"que você deseja esconder. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> para o "
++"comportamento inverso."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1676
++msgid ""
++"If the first field is \"g_iface\", \"parent_instance\" or \"parent_class\" "
++"it will be considered private automatically and doesn't need to be mentioned "
++"in the comment block."
++msgstr ""
++"Se o primeiro campo for “g_iface”, “parent_instance” ou “parent_class”, ele "
++"será automaticamente considerado como privado e não precisará ser mencionado "
++"no bloco de comentário."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1682
++msgid ""
++"Struct comment blocks can also be used for GObjects and GObjectClasses. It "
++"is usually a good idea to add a comment block for a class, if it has "
++"vmethods (as this is how they can be documented). For the GObject itself one "
++"can use the related section docs, having a separate block for the instance "
++"struct would be useful if the instance has public fields. One disadvantage "
++"here is that this creates two index entries of the same name (the structure "
++"and the section)."
++msgstr ""
++"Blocos de comentário de struct também podem ser usados para GObjects e "
++"GObjectClasses. É normalmente uma boa ideia adicionar um bloco de comentário "
++"para uma classe, se ela possui vmethods (pois assim é como elas podem ser "
++"documentadas). Para o próprio GOBject pode-se usar os documentos de seção "
++"relacionados, tendo um bloco separado para a instância do struct seria útil "
++"se a instância possui campos públicos. Uma desvantagem aqui é que isso cria "
++"duas entradas no índice do mesmo nome (a estrutura e a seção)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1694 C/index.docbook:1695
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr "Bloco de comentário de enum"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1696
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Alguma coisa:\n"
++" * @ALGUMACOISA_FOO: alguma coisa foo\n"
++" * @ALGUMCAOISA_BAR: alguma coisa bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Valores de enum usados para a coisa, para especificar a coisa.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" ALGUMACOISA_FOO,\n"
++" ALGUMACOISA_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" ALGUMACOISA_CONTAGEM\n"
++"} Alguma coisa;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1713
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> antes de valores privados de enum que "
++"você deseja ocultar. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> para o "
++"comportamento inverso."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1724
++msgid "Inline program documentation"
++msgstr "Documentação de programa em-linha"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1725
++msgid ""
++"You can document programs and their commandline interface using inline "
++"documentation."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode documentar programas e sua interface de linha de comando usando "
++"documentação em-linha."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1731
++msgid "Tags"
++msgstr "Tags"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1733
++msgid "PROGRAM"
++msgstr "PROGRAM"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1736
++msgid "Defines the start of a program documentation."
++msgstr "Define o início da documentação de um programa."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1743
++msgid "@short_description:"
++msgstr "@short_description:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1745
++msgid "Defines a short description of the program. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Define uma descrição breve do programa. (Opcional)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1752
++msgid "@synopsis:"
++msgstr "@synopsis:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1754
++msgid ""
++"Defines the arguments, or list of arguments that the program can take. "
++"(Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++"Define os argumentos, ou lista de argumentos, que o programa pode receber. "
++"(Opcional)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1762
++msgid "@see_also:"
++msgstr "@see_also:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1764
++msgid "See Also manual page section. (Optional)"
++msgstr "A seção “See Also” (Veja Também) de páginas de manual. (Opcional)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1771
++msgid "@arg:"
++msgstr "@arg:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1773
++msgid "Argument(s) passed to the program and their description. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Argumento(s) passado(s) para o programa e sua descrição. (Opcional)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1780
++msgid "Description:"
++msgstr "Description:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1782
++msgid "A longer description of the program."
++msgstr "Um descrição mais longa do programa."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1791
++msgid "Specify what value(s) the program returns. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Especifique qual(is) valor(es) o programa retorna. (Opcional)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1800
++msgid "Example of program documentation."
++msgstr "Exemplo de documentação de programa."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1801
++msgid "Program documentation block"
++msgstr "Bloco de documentação de programa"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1802
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * PROGRAM:test-program\n"
++" * @short_description: A test program\n"
++" * @synopsis: test-program [*OPTIONS*...] --arg1 *arg* *FILE*\n"
++" * @see_also: test(1)\n"
++" * @--arg1 *arg*: set arg1 to *arg*\n"
++" * @--arg2 *arg*: set arg2 to *arg*\n"
++" * @-v, --version: Print the version number\n"
++" * @-h, --help: Print the help message\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Long description of program.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: Zero on success, non-zero on failure\n"
++" */\n"
++"int main(int argc, char *argv[])\n"
++"{\n"
++"\treturn 0;\n"
++"}\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * PROGRAM:programa-teste\n"
++" * @short_description: Um programa teste\n"
++" * @synopsis: programa-teste [*OPÇÕES*...] --arg1 *arg* *ARQUIVO*\n"
++" * @see_also: teste(1)\n"
++" * @--arg1 *arg*: define arg1 para *arg*\n"
++" * @--arg2 *arg*: define arg2 para *arg*\n"
++" * @-v, --version: Exibe o número da versão\n"
++" * @-h, --help: Exibe a mensagem de ajuda\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Descrição longa do programa.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: Zero no caso de sucesso, não-zero no caso de falha\n"
++" */\n"
++"int main(int argc, char *argv[])\n"
++"{\n"
++"\treturn 0;\n"
++"}\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1828
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr "Tags úteis do DocBook"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1830
++msgid ""
++"Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr ""
++"Aqui estão algumas tags de DocBook que são muito úteis quando se está "
++"documentado o código."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1839
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Tabela de hashes</link>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1835
++msgid ""
++"To link to another section in the GTK docs: <_:informalexample-1/> The "
++"linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. "
++"For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and "
++"then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class "
++"name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++"Para vincular a outra seção nas documentações do GTK: <_:informalexample-1/> "
++"O \"linked\" é a identificação SGML/XML no item superior da página a qual "
++"você deseja vincular. Para a maioria das páginas isto é atualmente a parte "
++"(“gtk”, “gdk”, “glib”) e, então, o título da página (“Hash Tables”). Para os "
++"widgets isso é apenas o nome da classe. Espaços e sublinhados são "
++"convertidos em '-' para estar em conformidade com SGML/XML."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1852
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1849
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Para se referir a uma função externa, como, por exemplo, uma função padrão "
++"do C: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1861
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "<example>\n"
++#| " <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++#| " <programlisting>\n"
++#| " ...\n"
++#| " </programlisting>\n"
++#| "</example>\n"
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Usando uma GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1872
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "<informalexample>\n"
++#| " <programlisting>\n"
++#| " ...\n"
++#| " </programlisting>\n"
++#| "</informalexample>\n"
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1884
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"|[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" ...\n"
++"]|\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"|[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" ...\n"
++"]|\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1858
++#| msgid ""
++#| "To include example code: <_:informalexample-1/> or possibly this, for "
++#| "very short code fragments which don't need a title: <_:informalexample-2/"
++#| "> For the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation: |[ ... ]|"
++msgid ""
++"To include example code: <_:informalexample-1/> or possibly this, for very "
++"short code fragments which don't need a title: <_:informalexample-2/> In "
++"both cases, the language attribute is optional and is used as a hint to the "
++"syntax highlighting engine (pygments for html output). For the latter GTK-"
++"Doc also supports an abbreviation: <_:informalexample-3/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Para incluir um código de exemplo: <_:informalexample-1/> ou possivelmente "
++"este, para fragmentos de código bem curtos que não precisam de um título: <_:"
++"informalexample-2/>. Nos dois casos, o atributo language é opcional e é "
++"usado como uma dica para o mecanismo de destaque de sintaxe (pigmentos para "
++"saída html). Para este último, GTK-Doc também possui suporte a uma "
++"abreviação: |[ ... ]|"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1895
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1892
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para incluir listas com marcadores: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1915
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Certifique-se de que você liberou os dados após usá-los.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1912
++msgid ""
++"To include a note which stands out from the text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para incluir uma nota que fique fora do texto: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1928
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1925
++msgid "To refer to a type: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para se referir a um tipo: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1937
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1934
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Para se referir a uma estrutura externa (não uma descrita nos documentos do "
++"GTK): <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1946
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1943
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para se referir a um campo de uma estrutura: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1955
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1952
++msgid ""
++"To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <_:informalexample-1/> but "
++"you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link "
++"to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the "
++"abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Para se referir a um nome de classe, nós possivelmente poderíamos usar: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/> mas você provavelmente vai estar usando #GtkWidget em "
++"vez disso (para criar automaticamente um link para a página do GtkWidget – "
++"veja <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">as abreviações</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1966
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>Isso é importante</emphasis>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1963
++msgid "To emphasize text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para enfatizar um texto: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1975
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/usuario/documentos</filename>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1972
++msgid "For filenames use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para nome de arquivos use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1984
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1981
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "Para se referir a chaves use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1994
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr "Preenchendo os arquivos extras"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1996
++msgid ""
++"There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the "
++"inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past .sgml), "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Há alguns poucos arquivos extras, que precisam ser mantidos junto com os "
++"comentários inseridos no código-fonte: <filename><pacote>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><pacote>-docs.xml</filename> (no passado, .sgml), "
++"<filename><pacote>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2005
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr "Editando o arquivo de tipos"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2007
++msgid ""
++"If your library or application includes GObjects, you want their signals, "
++"arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the "
++"documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</"
++"function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Se sua biblioteca ou aplicativo inclui GObjects, você deseja que seus "
++"sinais, argumentos/parâmetros e posição na hierarquia sejam mostrados na "
++"documentação. Tudo que você precisa fazer é listar as funções "
++"<function>xxx_get_type</function> junto com seus include dentro do arquivo "
++"<filename><pacote>.types</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2016
++msgid "Example <package>.types file"
++msgstr "Exemplo de arquivo <pacote>.types"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2017
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2028
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this "
++"list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not "
++"dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++"Desde o GTK-Doc 1.8, o <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> pode gerar "
++"esta lista para você. Basta adicionar “--rebuild-types” a SCAN_OPTIONS no "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Se você usar esta abordagem, você não "
++"deveria distribuir o arquivo de tipos nem tê-lo sob um controle de versão."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2037
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr "Editando o documento mestre"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2039
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the "
++"inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page "
++"per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them "
++"and place them in an order."
++msgstr ""
++"O Gtk-Doc produz documentação em DocBook SGML/XML. Ao processar os "
++"comentários inseridos nos fontes, as ferramentas do GTK-Doc geram uma página "
++"de documentação por classe ou módulo como um arquivo separado. O documento "
++"mestre os inclui e os coloca em uma ordem."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2046
++msgid ""
++"While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later runs will "
++"not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the "
++"documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc "
++"has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from "
++"scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there "
++"are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++"Enquanto o Gtk-Doc cria um modelo de documento mestre para você, execuções "
++"posteriores não vão tocá-lo novamente. Isso significa que se pode estruturar "
++"a documentação livremente. Isso inclui agrupamento de páginas e adição de "
++"páginas extras. O Gtk-Doc agora possui uma suíte de teste, na qual também o "
++"documento mestre é recriado do zero. É uma boa ideia verificar isso de tempo "
++"em tempo para ver se há itens a serem introduzidos lá."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2056
++msgid ""
++"Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The "
++"benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API "
++"documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol "
++"documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along "
++"with the library."
++msgstr ""
++"Não crie tutoriais como documentos extras. Apenas escreva capítulos extras. "
++"O benefício de embutir diretamente o tutorial para sua biblioteca na "
++"documentação da API é que é mais fácil vincular o tutorial a um símbolo da "
++"documentação. Além disso, as chances são mais altas que o tutorial obtenha "
++"atualizações junto com a biblioteca."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2065
++msgid ""
++"So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is "
++"only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there "
++"which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++"Então, quais são as coisas para se alterar dentro do documento mestre? Para "
++"começar é apenas um pouco. Existem alguns mantedores de espaço (texto em "
++"colchetes) que você deve cuidar."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2072
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr "Cabeçalho do documento mestre"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2073
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>Manual de referência do NOMEDOMÓDULO</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for NOMEDOMÓDULO [VERSÃO]\n"
++" A última versão desta documentação também pode ser encontrada on-line em\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVIDOR]/NOMEDOMÓDULO/index.html\">http://[SERVIDOR]/NOMEDOMÓDULO/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insira o título aqui]</title>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2089
++msgid ""
++"In addition a few option elements are created in commented form. You can "
++"review these and enable them as you like."
++msgstr ""
++"Além disso, alguns elementos de opção são criados na forma comentada. Você "
++"pode revisá-los e habilitá-los como preferir."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2095
++msgid "Optional part in the master document"
++msgstr "Parte opcional do documento mestre"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2096
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- enable this when you use gobject introspection annotations\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" -->\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- habilite isso se você usa anotações do gobject introspection\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" -->\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2104
++msgid ""
++"Finally you need to add new section whenever you introduce one. The <link "
++"linkend=\"modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</link> tool will remind "
++"you of newly generated xml files that are not yet included into the doc."
++msgstr ""
++"Finalmente você precisa adicionar nova seção sempre que você a introduzir. A "
++"ferramenta <link linkend=\"modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</link> "
++"vai lembrar você de arquivos xml recentemente gerados que ainda não foram "
++"incluídos na documentação."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2112 C/index.docbook:2147
++msgid "Including generated sections"
++msgstr "Incluindo seções geradas"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2113
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>my library</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>minha biblioteca</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2125
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr "Editando o arquivo de seção"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2127
++msgid ""
++"The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. "
++"Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control "
++"the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++"O arquivo de seção é usado para organizar a saída da documentação pelo GTK-"
++"Doc. Aqui pode-se especificar qual símbolo pertence a qual módulo ou classe "
++"e controla a visibilidade (pública ou privada)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2133
++msgid ""
++"The section file is a plain text file with tags delimiting sections. Blank "
++"lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines."
++msgstr ""
++"O arquivo de seção é uma arquivo texto simples com seções delimitadas por "
++"tags. Linhas em branco são ignoradas e linhas começando com um “#” são "
++"tratadas como linhas de comentários."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2140
++msgid ""
++"While the tags make the file look like xml, it is not. Please do not close "
++"tags like <SUBSECTION>."
++msgstr ""
++"Enquanto as tags fazem o arquivo se parecer xml, ele não é. Por favor, não "
++"feche tags como <SUBSECTION>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2148
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2165
++msgid ""
++"The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, "
++"without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++"FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++"template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++"converted into the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename> or the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. "
++"(The name of the HTML file is based on the module name and the section "
++"title, or for GObjects it is based on the GObjects class name converted to "
++"lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++"A tag <FILE> ... </FILE> é usada para especificar o nome de "
++"arquivo, sem qualquer sufixo. Por exemplo, ao usar “<FILE>gnome-"
++"config</FILE>” resultará nas declarações da seção serem retornadas no "
++"arquivo modelo <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, o qual será "
++"convertido no arquivo DocBook XML <filename>xml/gnome-config.sgml</filename> "
++"ou no arquivo DocBook XML <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. (O nome "
++"do arquivo HTML é baseado no nome do módulo e no título da seção ou, para "
++"GObjects, é baseado no nome da classe GObjects convertidos os caracteres "
++"para minúsculos)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2177
++msgid ""
++"The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the "
++"section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially "
++"created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if "
++"one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++"A tag <TITLE> ... </TITLE> é usada para especificar o título da "
++"seção. Ela é usada apenas antes do modelo (se usado) ser criado "
++"inicialmente, já que o título definido no arquivo de modelo sobrescreve "
++"este. Também, se for usado o comentário SECTION nos fontes, isso está "
++"obsoleto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2184
++msgid ""
++"You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. "
++"Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis "
++"section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject "
++"declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the "
++"documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private "
++"declarations which will not be output (it is a handy way to avoid warning "
++"messages about unused declarations). If your library contains private types "
++"which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of "
++"implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection. "
++"Whether you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs in public or "
++"Standard section depends if they have public entries (variables, vmethods)."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode agrupar itens na seção usando a tag <SUBSECTION>. "
++"Atualmente, ela retorna uma linha em branco entre as subseções na seção de "
++"sinopse. Você também pode usar <SUBSECTION Standard> para declarações "
++"padrão do GObject (ex.: as funções como g_object_get_type e macros como "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Atualmente, estas são deixadas fora da "
++"documentação. Você também pode usar <SUBSECTION Private> para "
++"declarações privadas que não serão retornadas (é uma forma prática de evitar "
++"mensagens de aviso sobre declarações não usadas). Se sua biblioteca contém "
++"tipos privados que você não deseja que apareçam na hierarquia do objeto e a "
++"linha de classes implementadas ou exigidas, adicione-as a uma subseção "
++"privada. Se você colocaria o GObject e GObjectClass como structs numa seção "
++"padrão ou pública depende se há entradas públicas (variáveis, vmethods)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2203
++msgid ""
++"You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the "
++"#include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-"
++"separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it "
++"outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. "
++"If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++"Você também pode usar <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> para especificar "
++"os arquivos #include que são mostrados nas seções de sinopse. Ela contém uma "
++"lista separada por vírgula de arquivos #include, sem os sinais de maior que "
++"e menor que. Se você define-a fora de quaisquer seções, ela age para todas "
++"as seções até o fim do arquivo. Se você define-a em uma seção, ela só vai se "
++"aplicar àquela seção."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2217
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr "Controlando o resultado"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2219
++msgid ""
++"A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The "
++"generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and "
++"<filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text "
++"files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++"Uma execução do GTK-Doc gera arquivos de relatórios dentro do diretório de "
++"documentação. Os arquivos gerados são chamados: <filename><pacote>-"
++"undocumented.txt</filename>, <filename><pacote>-undeclared.txt</"
++"filename> e <filename><pacote>-unused.txt</filename>. Todos eles são "
++"arquivos texto simples que podem ser facilmente visualizados e pós-"
++"processados."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2228
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with "
++"the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank "
++"lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The "
++"second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, "
++"which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++"O arquivo <filename><pacote>-undocumented.txt</filename> começa com um "
++"sumário de cobertura da documentação. Abaixo estão duas seções divididas por "
++"linhas brancas. A primeira seção lista símbolos não documentados e "
++"incompletos. A segunda seção faz o mesmo para os documentos de seção. "
++"Entradas incompletas são aquelas que foram documentadas, mas nas quais, por "
++"exemplo, um novo parâmetro foi adicionado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2237
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols "
++"given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found "
++"in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++"O arquivo <filename><pacote>-undeclared.txt</filename> lista símbolos "
++"dados no <filename><pacote>-sections.txt</filename>, mas não "
++"encontrados nos fontes. Verifique se eles foram removidos ou se eles foram "
++"escritos incorretamente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2244
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, "
++"where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where "
++"to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"O arquivo <filename><pacote>-unused.txt</filename> lista nomes de "
++"símbolo cuja documentação foi localizada na varredura do GTK-Doc, mas que "
++"não sabe onde colocá-los. Isso significa que o símbolo não foi adicionado "
++"ainda ao arquivo <filename><pacote>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2252
++msgid ""
++"Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile."
++"am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during "
++"<command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++"Habilite ou adicione a linha <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> no "
++"Makefile.am. Se pelo menos GTK-Doc 1.9 estiver instalado, isso vai executar "
++"verificações de sanidade durante a execução de <command>make check</command>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2259
++msgid ""
++"One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: "
++"<filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><"
++"package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first one can be compared with the "
++"section file if that is manually maintained. The second lists all "
++"declarations from the headers. If a symbol is missing one could check if "
++"this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++"Também pode-se buscar nos arquivos produzidos pela varredura do código-"
++"fonte: <filename><pacote>-decl-list.txt</filename> e <filename><"
++"pacote>-decl.txt</filename>. O primeiro pode ser comparado com o arquivo "
++"de seção, se ele for mantido manualmente. O segundo lista todas as "
++"declarações de cabeçalhos. Se um símbolo está faltando, pode-se verificar se "
++"este arquivo o contém."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2268
++msgid ""
++"If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced "
++"by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>."
++"prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</"
++"filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask GTK-Doc "
++"to keep the intermediate scanner file for further analysis, by running it as "
++"<command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++"Se o projeto é baseado em GObject, pode-se também procurar nos arquivos "
++"produzidos pela varredura de objetos: <filename><pacote>.args.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><pacote>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"pacote>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><pacote>.prerequisites."
++"txt</filename> e <filename><pacote>.signals.txt</filename>. Se há "
++"símbolos faltando em qualquer um deles, pode-se exigir que o GTK-Doc "
++"mantenha o arquivo intermediário de varredura para análise posterior, "
++"executando <command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2283
++msgid "Modernizing the documentation"
++msgstr "Modernizando a documentação"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2285
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc has been around for quite some time. In this section we list new "
++"features together with the version since when it is available."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc está por aí já faz um tempo. Nesta seção, nós listamos novas "
++"funcionalidades juntamente da versão desde a qual está disponível."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2291
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2293
++msgid ""
++"When using xml instead of sgml, one can actually name the master document "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Ao usar xml em vez de sgml, na verdade, é possível nomear o documento mestre "
++"<filename><pacote>-docs.xml</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2298
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from "
++"the vcs. This only works nicely for projects that have a very regular "
++"structure (e.g. each .{c,h} pair will create new section). If one organize a "
++"project close to that updating a manually maintained section file can be as "
++"simple as running <code>meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-"
++"sections.txt</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Essa versão provê suporte <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> "
++"em <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Quando esta opção está habilitada, o "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> é auto-gerado e pode ser "
++"removido a partir do VCS. Isso só funciona corretamente para projetos que "
++"têm uma estrutura muito regular (ex.: cada par .{c,h} vai criar uma nova "
++"seção). Se uma pessoa organiza um projeto próximo a isso atualizando um "
++"arquivo de seção mantido manualmente pode ser tão simples quanto executando "
++"<code>meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-sections.txt</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2309
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.8 already introduced the syntax for documenting sections in the "
++"sources instead of the separate files under <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">tmpl</filename>. This version adds options to switch the whole doc module "
++"to not use the extra tmpl build step at all, by using <option>--flavour no-"
++"tmpl</option> in <filename>configure.ac</filename>. If you don't have a "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> checked into your source "
++"control system and haven't yet switched, just add the flag to "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> and you are done."
++msgstr ""
++"A versão 1.8 já introduziu a sintaxe para documentação seções nos fontes em "
++"vez dos arquivos separados sob <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</"
++"filename>. Essa versão adiciona opções para alternar todo o módulo de "
++"documentação para não usar a etapa de compilação extra do tmpl, usando "
++"<option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> no <filename>configure.ac</filename>. Se "
++"você não possui um <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> no seu "
++"sistema de controle de versão e ainda não trocou, basta adicionar uma opção "
++"ao <filename>configure.ac</filename> e está resolvido."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2321
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2323
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from the "
++"vcs. When using this feature it is important to also setup the "
++"<varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> in <filename>Makefile.am</filename> for "
++"code that is build conditionally."
++msgstr ""
++"Essa versão provê suporte <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> no "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Quando isso está habilitado, o "
++"<filename><package>.types</filename> é auto-gerado e pode ser removido "
++"do VCS. Quando usando essa funcionalidade é importante também configurar o "
++"<varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> no <filename>Makefile.am</filename> para "
++"código que é compilado condicionalmente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2334
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2340
++msgid "Enable gtkdoc-check"
++msgstr "Habilitar gtkdoc-check"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2341
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2336
++msgid ""
++"This version includes a new tool called gtkdoc-check. This tool can run a "
++"set of sanity checks on your documentation. It is enabled by adding these "
++"lines to the end of <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Essa versão inclui uma nova ferramenta chamada gtkdoc-check. Essa ferramenta "
++"pode executar um conjunto de verificações de sanidade na sua documentação. "
++"Ela é habilitada adicionando essas linhas ao final do <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2354
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2356
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.18 brought some initial markdown support. Using markdown in doc "
++"comments is less intrusive than writing docbook xml. This version improves a "
++"lot on this and add a lot more styles. The section that explains the <link "
++"linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">comment syntax</link> has all the details."
++msgstr ""
++"A versão 1.18 trouxe algum suporte inicial a markdown. O uso de markdown em "
++"comentários de documentação é menos intrusiva do que escrever xml de "
++"docbook. Essa versão melhora em muito nisso e adiciona muito mais estilos. A "
++"seção que explica a <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">sintaxe de "
++"comentário</link> tem todos os detalhes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2366
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2377
++msgid "Use pre-generated entities"
++msgstr "Usando entradas geradas previamente"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2378
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for &package_string;.\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>Manual de referência do &nome-pacote;</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" para &versão-pacote;.\n"
++" A última versão desta documentação pode ser encontra on-line em\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVIDOR]/&nome-pacote;/index.html\">http://[SERVIDOR]/&nome-pacote;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2368
++msgid ""
++"The makefiles shipped with this version generate an entity file at "
++"<filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename>, containing entities for e.g. "
++"package_name and package_version. You can use this e.g. in the main xml file "
++"to avoid hardcoding the version number. Below is an example that shows how "
++"the entity file is included in the master template and how the entities are "
++"used. The entities can also be used in all generated files, GTK-Doc will use "
++"the same xml header in generated xml files. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Os makefiles fornecidos com esta versão geram um arquivo de entidade em "
++"<filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename>, contendo entidades para, por "
++"exemplo, nome-pacote e versão-pacote. Você pode usar isto, por exemplo, no "
++"arquivo xml principal para evitar ter que inserir diretamente o número de "
++"versão. Logo abaixo encontra-se um exemplo que mostra como o arquivo de "
++"entidade é incluído no modelo mestre e como as entidades são usadas. As "
++"entidades também podem ser usadas em todos arquivos gerados, GTK-Doc usará o "
++"mesmo cabeçalho xml nos arquivos xml gerados. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2403
++msgid "Documenting other interfaces"
++msgstr "Documentando outras interfaces"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2405
++msgid ""
++"So far we have been using GTK-Doc to document the API of code. The next "
++"sections contain suggestions how the tools can be used to document other "
++"interfaces too."
++msgstr ""
++"Até agora nós temos usado o GTK-Doc para documentar a API de um código. As "
++"próximas sessões contêm sugestões de como as ferramentas podem ser usadas "
++"para documentar outras interfaces, também."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2412
++msgid "Command line options and man pages"
++msgstr "Opções de linha de comando e de páginas man"
++
++# RefEntry é uma página de referência do DocBook (http://www.docbook.org/tdg/en/html/refentry.html)
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2414
++msgid ""
++"As one can generate man pages for a docbook refentry as well, it sounds like "
++"a good idea to use it for that purpose. This way the interface is part of "
++"the reference and one gets the man-page for free."
++msgstr ""
++"Já que também é possível gerar páginas man para um refentry do docbook, soa "
++"como uma boa ideia usá-lo para este propósito. Desta forma, a interface é "
++"parte da referência e é possível obter a página man livremente."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2421
++msgid "Document the tool"
++msgstr "Documentar a ferramenta"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2423
++msgid ""
++"Create one refentry file per tool. Following <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">our example</link> we would call it <filename>meep/"
++"docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. For the xml tags that should be "
++"used and can look at generated file in the xml subdirectory as well as "
++"examples e.g. in glib."
++msgstr ""
++"Crie um arquivo refentry por ferramenta. Segundo <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">nosso exemplo</link> nós chamaríamos ele de "
++"<filename>meep/docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. Para as tags xml "
++"que devem ser usadas e podem parecer no arquivo gerado no subdiretório xml "
++"assim como exemplos, por exemplo, em glib."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2433
++msgid "Adding the extra configure check"
++msgstr "Adicionando a verificação extra ao configure"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2436 C/index.docbook:2454
++msgid "Extra configure checks"
++msgstr "Verificações extra no configure"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2437
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2451
++msgid "Adding the extra makefile rules"
++msgstr "Adicionando as regras extras ao makefile"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2455
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2477
++msgid "DBus interfaces"
++msgstr "Interfaces DBus"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2479
++msgid ""
++"(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++msgstr ""
++"(CORRIJA-ME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, "
++"http://cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2488
++msgid "Frequently asked questions"
++msgstr "Perguntas frequentes"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2492
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "Questão"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2493
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "Resposta"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2495
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Sem hierarquia de classe."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2496
++msgid ""
++"The objects <function>xxx_get_type()</function> function has not been "
++"entered into the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"A função de objetos <function>xxx_get_type()</function> não foi inserida no "
++"arquivo <filename><pacote>.types</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2502
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Ainda sem hierarquia."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2503
++msgid ""
++"Missing or wrong naming in <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> "
++"file (see <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-doc-list/2003-"
++"October/msg00006.html\">explanation</ulink>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Nomenclatura faltando ou incorreta no arquivo <filename><pacote>-"
++"sections.txt</filename> (veja a <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/"
++"gtk-doc-list/2003-October/msg00006.html\">explicação</ulink>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2509
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Droga. Eu ainda não tenho hierarquia de classes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2510
++msgid ""
++"Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <type>GtkWidget</"
++"type>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private "
++"subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++"Por acaso o nome do objeto (nome da struct da instância, ex. "
++"<type>GtkWidget</type>) faz parte da seção normal (não coloque isso em "
++"subseções Standard ou Private)?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2517
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr "Nenhum símbolo de índice."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2518
++msgid ""
++"Does the <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contain a "
++"index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++"O <filename><pacote>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contém um índice que "
++"“xi:inclui” o índice gerado?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2524
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr "Símbolos não estão vinculados ao seus doc-section."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2525
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the "
++"gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++"O doc-comment está usando a marcação correta (adicionado #,% or ())? "
++"Verifique se o gtkdoc-fixxref avisa sobre xrefs não resolvidos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2531
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "Uma nova classe não aparece nos documentos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2532
++msgid ""
++"Is the new page xi:included from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"A nova página foi “xi:incluída” do <filename><pacote>-docs.{xml,sgml}</"
++"filename>?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2538
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "Um novo símbolo não aparece nos documentos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2539
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the "
++"begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable "
++"xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++"O doc-comment está formatado adequadamente? Verifique erros de escrita no "
++"começo do comentário. Verifique se o gtkdoc-fixxref avisa sobre xrefs não "
++"resolvíveis. Verifique se o símbolo está listado corretamente no "
++"<filename><pacote>-sections.txt</filename> em uma subseção pública."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2547
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Um tipo está faltando da hierarquia de classe."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2548
++msgid ""
++"If the type is listed in <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> but "
++"not in <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> then double check that the "
++"type is correctly placed in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>. If the type instance (e.g. <type>GtkWidget</type>) is not listed "
++"or incidentally marked private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++"Se o tipo está listado no <filename><pacote>.hierarchy</filename>, mas "
++"não em <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename>, então certifique-se de que "
++"o tipo está colocado corretamente no <filename><pacote>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>. Se a instância do tipo (ex.: <type>GtkWidget</type>) não está "
++"listada ou incidentalmente marcada como privada, ela não será mostrada."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2557
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr ""
++"Obtenho links de seguimento de documentos para todas as anotações gobject."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2558
++msgid ""
++"Check that <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> is xi:included "
++"from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Verifique se <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> está “xi:"
++"incluído” de <filename><pacote>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2566
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr "Parâmetro descrito no bloco de comentário do código-fonte não existe"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2567
++msgid ""
++"Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the "
++"source."
++msgstr ""
++"Verifique se o protótipo no cabeçalho tem nomes de parâmetros diferentes da "
++"fonte."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2572
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr "múltiplos “IDs” para restrições do fim do link XYZ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2573
++msgid ""
++"Symbol XYZ appears twice in <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"O símbolo XYZ aparece duas vezes no arquivo <filename><pacote>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2576
++msgid ""
++"Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template "
++"matches."
++msgstr ""
++"Elemento typename no espaço de nome '' encontrado em para, mas nenhum modelo "
++"correspondeu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2583
++msgid "Tools related to gtk-doc"
++msgstr "Ferramentas relacionadas ao gtk-doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2585
++msgid ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - a <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac "
++"GTK-Doc</ulink> integration plugin, that adds API docs to a trac site and "
++"integrates with the trac search."
++msgstr ""
++"GtkDocPlugin – um plug-in de integração com <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks."
++"org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac GTK-Doc</ulink>, que adiciona documentos de API "
++"a um site trac e integra com a pesquisa do trac."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2590
++msgid ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - a tool (part of gtk-doc) to check used API against since "
++"tags in the API to determine the minimum required version."
++msgstr ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan – uma ferramenta (parte do gtk-doc) para verificar APIs "
++"usadas, a partir de suas tags, para determinar a versão mínima necessária."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/releaseinfo
++#: C/index.docbook:12 C/fdl-appendix.xml:12
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr "Versão 1.1, Março de 2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:15
++msgid "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/index.docbook:20
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:19 C/fdl-appendix.xml:19
++msgid ""
++"<_:address-1/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies "
++"of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr ""
++"<_:address-1/> É permitido a qualquer um copiar e distribuir cópias exatas "
++"deste documento de licença, embora não seja permitido alterá-lo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendix/title
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/index.docbook:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:642
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr "Licença de Documentação Livre GNU"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:31 C/fdl-appendix.xml:31
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr "0. PREÂMBULO"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"O objetivo desta Licença é tornar um manual, livro didático ou outro "
++"documento funcional e útil “livre” no sentido de liberdade: assegurar a "
++"todos a liberdade efetiva de copiá-lo e redistribuí-lo, com ou sem "
++"modificação do mesmo, comercialmente ou não. Em segundo lugar, esta Licença "
++"preserva para o autor e o editor uma maneira de obter crédito por seu "
++"trabalho, sem ser considerado responsável por modificações feitas por outros."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that "
++"derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. "
++"It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license "
++"designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++"Esta licença é um tipo de “copyleft”, o que significa que trabalhos "
++"derivados do documento devem ser livres no mesmo sentido. Ela complementa a "
++"Licença Pública Geral GNU (GNU General Public License), que é uma licença "
++"com copyleft projetada para software livre."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:50 C/fdl-appendix.xml:50
++msgid ""
++"We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free "
++"software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program "
++"should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. "
++"But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any "
++"textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a "
++"printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose "
++"is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++"Criamos esta Licença para usá-la para manuais para software livre, porque "
++"software livre precisa de documentação livre: um programa livre deve ser "
++"fornecido com manuais que proporcionam as mesmas liberdades que o software. "
++"Mas esta Licença não está limitada aos manuais de software; pode ser usada "
++"para qualquer trabalho textual, independentemente do assunto ou dele ser "
++"publicado como um livro impresso. Recomendamos esta Licença principalmente "
++"para trabalhos cujo propósito seja instrução ou referência."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:62 C/fdl-appendix.xml:62
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr "1. APLICABILIDADE E DEFINIÇÕES"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such "
++"manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "
++"<quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Esta Licença aplica-se a qualquer manual ou outro trabalho, em qualquer "
++"meio, que contenha um aviso colocado pelo detentor dos direitos autorais "
++"dizendo que pode ser distribuído nos termos desta Licença. Tal aviso concede "
++"uma licença mundial, sem royalties, de duração ilimitada, para usar esse "
++"trabalho nas condições aqui estabelecidas. O “Documento”, a seguir, refere-"
++"se a qualquer manual ou trabalho. Qualquer membro do público é um licenciado "
++"e é referido como “você”. Você aceita a licença se você copiar, modificar ou "
++"distribuir o trabalho de forma a exigir permissão de acordo com a lei de "
++"direitos autorais."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:72
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing "
++"the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with "
++"modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"Uma “Versão Modificada” do Documento significa qualquer trabalho contendo o "
++"Documento ou uma porção deste, seja uma cópia literal ou com modificações e/"
++"ou traduzido em outro idioma."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:79
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter "
++"section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals "
++"exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the "
++"Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and "
++"contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For "
++"example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary "
++"Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter "
++"of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of "
++"legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding "
++"them."
++msgstr ""
++"A “Seção Secundária” é um apêndice nomeado ou uma seção anterior do "
++"Documento que trata exclusivamente do relacionamento dos editores ou autores "
++"do <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> com o assunto geral do "
++"documento (ou assuntos relacionados) e não contém nada que possa estar "
++"diretamente dentro desse assunto geral. (Assim, se o Documento for, em "
++"parte, um livro de texto de matemática, uma Seção Secundária pode não "
++"explicar qualquer matemática.) O relacionamento poderia ser uma questão de "
++"conexão histórica com o assunto ou com assuntos relacionados, ou de posição "
++"legal, comercial, filosófica, ética ou política em relação a eles."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:94
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being "
++"those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"As “Seções Invariantes” são certas <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\">Seções "
++"Secundárias</link> cujos títulos são designados, como sendo daquelas de "
++"Seções Invariantes, no aviso que diz que o <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Documento</link> é liberado sob esta Licença."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:103
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are "
++"listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says "
++"that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under "
++"this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Os “Textos de Capa” são certas passagens de texto que são listadas como "
++"Textos de Capa Frontal ou Textos de Contracapa, no aviso que afirma que o "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> foi publicado sob esta "
++"Licença."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:111
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> "
++"Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose "
++"specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be "
++"viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors "
++"or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) "
++"some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text "
++"formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for "
++"input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file "
++"format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent "
++"modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "
++"<quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Uma cópia “Transparente” do <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> Documento</link> "
++"significa uma cópia legível por máquina, representada em um formato cuja "
++"especificação está disponível para o público em geral, cujo conteúdo possa "
++"ser visto e editado diretamente com editores de texto genéricos ou (para "
++"imagens compostas de pixels) programas gráficos genéricos ou (para desenhos) "
++"algum editor de desenho amplamente disponível, e isso seja adequado para "
++"entrada para formatadores de texto ou para tradução automática para uma "
++"variedade de formatos adequados para entrada de formatadores de texto. Uma "
++"cópia feita em um formato de arquivo Transparente cuja marcação tenha sido "
++"projetada para frustrar ou desencorajar a modificação subsequente pelos "
++"leitores não é Transparente. Uma cópia que não é “Transparente” é chamada de "
++"“Opaca”."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:128 C/fdl-appendix.xml:128
++msgid ""
++"Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII "
++"without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using "
++"a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for "
++"human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary "
++"formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, "
++"SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally "
++"available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors "
++"for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++"Exemplos de formatos adequados para cópias Transparentes incluem ASCII "
++"simples sem marcação, formato de entrada Texinfo, formato de entrada LaTeX, "
++"SGML ou XML usando DTD publicamente disponível e HTML simples, conforme "
++"padrão, projetados para modificação humana. Os formatos Opacos incluem "
++"PostScript, PDF, formatos proprietários que podem ser lidos e editados "
++"apenas por processadores de texto proprietários, SGML ou XML para os quais o "
++"DTD e/ou ferramentas de processamento não estão geralmente disponíveis e o "
++"HTML gerado por máquina produzido por alguns processadores de texto para "
++"apenas para fins de saída."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:141
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page "
++"itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the "
++"material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in "
++"formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> "
++"means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, "
++"preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++"A “Página de Título” significa, para um livro impresso, a própria página do "
++"título, além das páginas subsequentes necessárias para conter, de forma "
++"legível, o material que esta Licença requer que apareça na página do título. "
++"Para trabalhos em formatos que não possuem qualquer página de título "
++"semelhante, “Página de Título” significa o texto próximo à ocorrência mais "
++"proeminente do título do trabalho, precedendo o início do corpo do texto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:153 C/fdl-appendix.xml:153
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr "2. CÓPIA LITERAL"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that "
++"this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this "
++"License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you "
++"add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use "
++"technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of "
++"the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in "
++"exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you "
++"must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode copiar e distribuir o <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</"
++"link> em qualquer meio, seja este de forma comercial ou não, desde que esta "
++"Licença, os avisos de direitos autorais e o aviso de licença afirmando que "
++"esta Licença se aplica ao Documento sejam reproduzidos em todas as cópias, e "
++"que você adicione nenhuma outra condição, qualquer que seja, às condições "
++"desta Licença. Você não pode usar de medidas técnicas para obstruir ou "
++"controlar a leitura ou cópia futura das cópias que você fizer ou distribuir. "
++"Contudo, você pode aceitar compensação em troca das cópias. Se você "
++"distribuir um número suficientemente grande de cópias, você deve também "
++"respeitar as condições descritas na <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">seção 3</"
++"link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:169 C/fdl-appendix.xml:169
++msgid ""
++"You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you "
++"may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++"Você também pode emprestar cópias, nas mesmas condições acima mencionadas, e "
++"você pode publicar cópias."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:176 C/fdl-appendix.xml:176
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr "3. COPIANDO EM QUANTIDADE"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license "
++"notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you "
++"must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these "
++"Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on "
++"the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as "
++"the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title "
++"with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as "
++"verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Se você publicar cópias impressas do <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Documento</link> em número maior que 100, e o aviso de licença do "
++"Documento exigir os <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textos de Capa</link>, "
++"você deve incluir as cópias nas capas que carregam, de forma clara e "
++"legível, todas essas Textos de Capa: Textos de Capa Frontal na capa frontal "
++"e Textos de Contracapa na contracapa. Ambas as capas também devem identificá-"
++"lo claramente e legivelmente como o editor dessas cópias. A capa frontal "
++"deve apresentar o título completo com todas as palavras do título igualmente "
++"proeminentes e visíveis. Você também pode adicionar outros materiais nas "
++"capas. Copiar com as alterações limitadas às capas, desde que preservem o "
++"título do <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> e satisfaçam estas "
++"condições, podem ser tratadas como cópias literais em outros aspectos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:195 C/fdl-appendix.xml:195
++msgid ""
++"If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, "
++"you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the "
++"actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++"Se os textos necessários para qualquer uma das coberturas forem demasiado "
++"volumosos para se ajustar de forma legível, você deve colocar os primeiros "
++"listados (tanto quanto encaixar razoavelmente) na capa real e continuar o "
++"resto em páginas adjacentes."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> "
++"copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more "
++"than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state "
++"in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location "
++"containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added "
++"material, which the general network-using public has access to download "
++"anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use "
++"the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin "
++"distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent "
++"copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one "
++"year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through "
++"your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"Se você publicar ou distribuir cópias <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent"
++"\">Opacas</link> do <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> em "
++"número superior a 100, você deve incluir uma cópia <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparente</link> legível por máquina junto com cada cópia "
++"Opaca ou estabelecer em ou com cada cópia Opaca uma localização de rede de "
++"computador publicamente acessível contendo uma cópia transparente completa "
++"do documento, sem material adicional, a partir da qual o público geral "
++"usuário de rede tem acesso para baixar anonimamente sem custo, usando "
++"protocolos de rede padrão público. Se você usar a última opção, você deve "
++"tomar medidas razoavelmente prudentes, quando você começar a distribuir "
++"cópias Opacas em quantidade, para garantir que esta cópia Transparente "
++"permanecerá acessível no local indicado até pelo menos um ano após a última "
++"vez que você distribuir uma cópia Opaca (diretamente ou através de seus "
++"agentes ou varejistas) dessa edição para o público."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any "
++"large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated "
++"version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"É solicitado, mas não é necessário, que você contate os autores do <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> muito antes de redistribuir "
++"qualquer grande número de cópias, para dar a eles uma chance de lhe fornecer "
++"uma versão atualizada do Documento."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:231 C/fdl-appendix.xml:231
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr "4. MODIFICAÇÕES"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under "
++"the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the "
++"Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version "
++"filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode copiar e distribuir uma <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versão "
++"Modificada</link> do <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> sob as "
++"condições das seções <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> e <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-section3\">3</link> acima, desde que você forneça a Versão Modificada "
++"estritamente sob esta Licença, com a Versão Modificada preenchendo a função "
++"de Documento, permitindo assim a distribuição e modificação da Versão "
++"Modificada a quem quer que possua uma cópia desta. Além disso, você deve "
++"executar os seguintes procedimentos na Versão Modificada:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:248 C/fdl-appendix.xml:248
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "A"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the "
++"covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which "
++"should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the "
++"Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original "
++"publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Usar na <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Página de Título</link> (e nas "
++"capas, se existirem) um título distinto em relação ao do <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Documento</link>, e daqueles de versões anteriores (os quais "
++"devem, havendo algum, ser listados na seção “Histórico” do Documento). Você "
++"pode usar o mesmo título de uma versão anterior se o editor original daquela "
++"versão lhe conceder permissão."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:264 C/fdl-appendix.xml:264
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "B"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, "
++"one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the "
++"modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has "
++"less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"Listar na <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Página de Título</link>, como "
++"autores, uma ou mais pessoas ou entidades responsáveis pela autoria das "
++"modificações na <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versão Modificada</link>, "
++"juntamente com pelo menos cinco dos autores principais do <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> (todos os seus principais autores, se "
++"tiverem menos de cinco)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:279 C/fdl-appendix.xml:279
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "C"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of "
++"the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++"Indicar na <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Página de Título</link> o nome "
++"do editor da <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versão Modificada</link>, como "
++"editor."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:291 C/fdl-appendix.xml:291
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "D"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:292
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Preservar todas as avisos de direitos autorais do <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Documento</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:301 C/fdl-appendix.xml:301
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "E"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:302 C/fdl-appendix.xml:302
++msgid ""
++"Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the "
++"other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++"Adicionar um aviso de direitos autorais apropriado para suas modificações "
++"adjacentes aos outros avisos de direitos autorais."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:311 C/fdl-appendix.xml:311
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "F"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the "
++"Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Incluir, imediatamente após os avisos de direitos autorais, um aviso de "
++"licença que dê permissão ao público para usar a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Versão Modificada</link> sob os termos desta Licença, na forma mostrada "
++"no Adendo abaixo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:324 C/fdl-appendix.xml:324
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "G"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Preservar nesse aviso de licença as listas completas de <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Seções Invariantes</link> e os <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts"
++"\">Textos de Capa</link> necessários fornecidos no aviso de licença do <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:337 C/fdl-appendix.xml:337
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "H"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:338 C/fdl-appendix.xml:338
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr "Incluir uma cópia inalterada desta Licença."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:346 C/fdl-appendix.xml:346
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "I"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add "
++"to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> as given on "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no "
++"section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and "
++"publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Preservar a seção intitulada “Histórico”, e seu título, e adicionar a ele um "
++"item que indique pelo menos o título, o ano, os novos autores e o editor da "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versão Modificada</link> conforme indicado na "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Página de Título</link>. Se não houver uma "
++"seção intitulada “Histórico” no <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</"
++"link>, crie um que declare o título, o ano, os autores e o editor do "
++"Documento conforme indicado em sua Página de Título e, em seguida, adicione "
++"um item descrevendo a Versão Modificada, como indicado na frase anterior."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:365 C/fdl-appendix.xml:365
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "J"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the "
++"network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based "
++"on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit "
++"a network location for a work that was published at least four years before "
++"the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers "
++"to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Preservar a localização de rede, se for o caso, fornecida no <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> para acesso público a uma cópia <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparente</link> do Documento, e também as "
++"localizações de rede fornecidas no Documento para versões anteriores nas "
++"quais ele foi baseado. Estas podem ser colocadas na seção “Histórico”. Você "
++"pode omitir uma localização de rede para um trabalho que foi publicado pelo "
++"menos quatro anos antes do Documento em si, ou se o editor original da "
++"versão a que se refere der permissão."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:383 C/fdl-appendix.xml:383
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "K"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in "
++"the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor "
++"acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"Em qualquer seção intitulada “Agradecimentos” ou “Dedicatórias”, preservar o "
++"título da seção, e preservar na seção toda a substância e tom de cada um dos "
++"agradecimentos e/ou das dedicatórias dados nela."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:396 C/fdl-appendix.xml:396
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "L"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their "
++"text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not "
++"considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Preservar todas as <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Seções Invariantes</link> "
++"do <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link>, inalteradas em seus "
++"textos e em seus títulos. Os números de seção ou o equivalente não são "
++"considerados parte dos títulos das seções."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:409 C/fdl-appendix.xml:409
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "M"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may "
++"not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Excluir qualquer seção intitulada “Endossos”. Essa seção pode não estar "
++"incluída na <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versão Modificada</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:421 C/fdl-appendix.xml:421
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "N"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to "
++"conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant "
++"Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Não mudar o título de qualquer seção existente para “Endossos” ou para "
++"conflitar em título com qualquer <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Seção "
++"Invariante</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new "
++"front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from "
++"the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections "
++"as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's "
++"license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Se a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versão Modificada</link> incluir novas "
++"seções ou apêndices de primeira linha que se qualifiquem como <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-secondary\">Seções Secundárias</link> e não contenham material copiado "
++"do Documento, você pode, a sua escolha, designar algumas ou todas essas "
++"seções como invariantes. Para fazer isso, adicione seus títulos à lista de "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Seções Invariantes</link> no aviso de "
++"licença da Versão Modificada. Esses títulos devem ser distintos de qualquer "
++"outro título de seção."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it "
++"contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of "
++"peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the "
++"authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode incluir uma seção intitulada “Endossos”, desde que contenha nada "
++"além do endosso da sua <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versão Modificada</"
++"link> por várias terceiros – por exemplo, declarações de revisão por pares "
++"ou de que o texto foi aprovado por uma organização como a definição oficial "
++"de um padrão."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list "
++"of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover "
++"Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements "
++"made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by "
++"you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, "
++"you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit "
++"permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode adicionar uma passagem de até cinco palavras como um <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Texto de Capa Frontal</link> e uma passagem de até 25 "
++"palavras como um <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Texto de Contracapa</"
++"link>, até o final da lista de <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textos de "
++"Capa</link> na <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versão Modificada</link>. "
++"Apenas uma passagem de Texto de Capa Frontal e um de Texto de Contracapa "
++"pode ser adicionada por (ou por meio de acordos feitos por) qualquer "
++"entidade. Se o <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> já incluir um "
++"texto de capa para a mesma capa, previamente adicionado por você ou por "
++"acordo feito pela mesma entidade em que você está agindo em nome de, você "
++"não pode adicionar outro; mas você pode substituir o antigo, mediante "
++"permissão explícita do editor anterior que adicionou o antigo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names "
++"for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++"O(s) autor(es) e editor(es) do <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</"
++"link> não concedem por esta Licença permissão para usar seus nomes para "
++"publicidade ou afirmar ou implicar o endosso de qualquer <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"modified\">Versão Modificada</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:480 C/fdl-appendix.xml:480
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "5. COMBINANDO DOCUMENTOS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with "
++"other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, "
++"unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in "
++"its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode combinar o <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> com "
++"outros documentos publicados sob esta Licença, nos termos definidos na <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section4\">seção 4</link> acima para versões modificadas, "
++"desde que você inclua na combinação de todas as <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant"
++"\">Seções Invariantes</link> de todos os documentos originais, não "
++"modificados, e liste todos eles como Seções Invariantes do seu trabalho "
++"combinado em seu aviso de licença."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be "
++"replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with "
++"the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section "
++"unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original "
++"author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make "
++"the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections "
++"in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"O trabalho combinado precisa conter somente uma cópia desta Licença, e "
++"várias <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Seções Invariantes</link> idênticas "
++"podem ser substituídas por uma única cópia. Se existirem várias Seções "
++"Invariantes de mesmo nome, porém com conteúdos diferentes, você deve tornar "
++"o título de cada uma destas seções único, adicionando ao fim deste, entre "
++"parênteses, o nome do autor ou, se conhecido, o editor original desta seção, "
++"ou ainda um número único. Faça o mesmo ajuste nos títulos de seção na lista "
++"de Seções Invariantes no aviso de licença do trabalho combinado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</"
++"quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled "
++"<quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled "
++"<quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++"Na combinação, você deve combinar todas as seções intituladas “Histórico” "
++"nos vários documentos originais, formando uma seção intitulada “Histórico”; "
++"da mesma forma, combinar todas as seções intituladas “Agradecimentos” e "
++"quaisquer seções intituladas “Dedicatórias”. Você deve excluir todas as "
++"seções intituladas “Endossos”."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:516 C/fdl-appendix.xml:516
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "6. COLEÇÕES DE DOCUMENTOS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and "
++"replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with "
++"a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow "
++"the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in "
++"all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode fazer uma coleção que consiste do <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Documento</link> e outros documentos publicados sob esta Licença, e "
++"substituir as cópias individuais desta Licença, nos vários documentos, por "
++"uma única cópia a ser incluída na coleção, desde que você siga as regras "
++"desta Licença para cópias literais de cada documento em todos os outros "
++"aspectos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:527 C/fdl-appendix.xml:527
++msgid ""
++"You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it "
++"individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License "
++"into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects "
++"regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode extrair um único documento de tal coleção e distribuí-lo "
++"individualmente sob esta Licença, desde que você insira uma cópia desta "
++"Licença no documento extraído e siga esta Licença em todos os outros "
++"aspectos referentes à cópia literal desse documento."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:537 C/fdl-appendix.xml:537
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr "7. AGREGAÇÃO COM TRABALHOS INDEPENDENTES"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its "
++"derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on "
++"a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, "
++"provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a "
++"compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</"
++"link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"Uma compilação do <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> ou seus "
++"derivados com outros documentos ou trabalhos separados e independentes, em "
++"ou sobre um volume de um meio de armazenamento ou distribuição, não como um "
++"todo conta como uma <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Versão Modificada</link> "
++"do Documento, desde que nenhuma compilação de direitos autorais seja "
++"reivindicada para a compilação. Tal compilação é chamada de "
++"“agregado” (aggregate), e esta Licença não se aplica aos outros trabalhos "
++"autônomos assim compilados com o Documento, por conta de serem assim "
++"compilados, se eles não forem eles próprios trabalhos derivados do "
++"Documento. Se o requisito do <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Texto da "
++"Capa</link> da <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">seção 3</link> for aplicável a "
++"essas cópias do Documento, então, se o Documento for inferior a um quarto do "
++"agregado inteiro, os Textos de Capa do Documento poderão ser colocados em "
++"capas que envolvam apenas o Documento no agregado. Caso contrário, eles "
++"devem aparecer nas capas envolvem todo o agregado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:561 C/fdl-appendix.xml:561
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr "8. TRADUÇÃO"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the "
++"terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations "
++"requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may "
++"include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the "
++"original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation "
++"of this License provided that you also include the original English version "
++"of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the "
++"original English version of this License, the original English version will "
++"prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"A tradução é considerada um tipo de modificação, então você pode distribuir "
++"as traduções do <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> nos termos "
++"da <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">seção 4</link>. A substituição das <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Seções Invariantes</link> com traduções requer "
++"permissão especial de seus detentores de direitos autorais, mas você pode "
++"incluir traduções de algumas ou todas as Seções Invariantes além das versões "
++"originais destas Seções Invariantes. Você pode incluir uma tradução desta "
++"Licença, desde que você também inclua a versão original em inglês desta "
++"Licença. Em caso de desacordo entre a tradução e a versão original desta "
++"Licença, a versão original prevalecerá."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:580 C/fdl-appendix.xml:580
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr "9. TERMINAÇÃO"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this "
++"License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the "
++"Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this "
++"License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you "
++"under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such "
++"parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++"Você não pode copiar, modificar, sublicenciar ou distribuir o <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Documento</link>, exceto conforme expressamente previsto "
++"nesta Licença. Qualquer tentativa de copiar, modificar, sublicenciar ou "
++"distribuir o Documento é anulada e terminará automaticamente seus direitos "
++"sob esta Licença. No entanto, as partes que receberam cópias ou direitos de "
++"você sob esta Licença não terão suas licenças terminadas, desde que tais "
++"partes permaneçam em plena conformidade."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:594 C/fdl-appendix.xml:594
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr "10. FUTURAS REVISÕES DESTA LICENÇA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:595
++msgid ""
++"The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU "
++"Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be "
++"similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to "
++"address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www."
++"gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"A <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free Software "
++"Foundation</ulink> pode publicar novas e revisadas versões da Licença de "
++"Documentação Livre GNU de vez em quando. Essas novas versões serão "
++"semelhantes em espírito à versão atual, mas podem diferir em detalhes para "
++"resolver novos problemas ou preocupações. Veja <ulink type=\"http\" url="
++"\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>.A "
++"<ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free Software "
++"Foundation</ulink> pode publicar novas versões, revisadas, da Licença de "
++"Documentação Livre GNU de tempos em tempos. Tais versões posteriores terão "
++"ideologia similar à presente versão, embora possam diferir em detalhes a fim "
++"de abordar novos problemas ou preocupações. Consulte: <ulink type=\"http\" "
++"url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular "
++"numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies "
++"to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of "
++"that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not "
++"as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not "
++"specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever "
++"published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"Cada versão da Licença recebe um número de versão distinto. Se o <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Documento</link> especifica que uma versão numerada "
++"específica desta Licença “ou qualquer versão posterior” aplica-se a ele, "
++"você tem a opção de seguir os termos e condições daquela versão especificada "
++"ou de qualquer versão posterior que tenha sido publicada (não como um "
++"rascunho) pela Free Software Foundation. Se o Documento não especificar um "
++"número de versão desta Licença, você pode escolher qualquer versão publicada "
++"(não como um rascunho) pela Free Software Foundation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:621 C/fdl-appendix.xml:621
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr "Adendo"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:622 C/fdl-appendix.xml:622
++msgid ""
++"To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the "
++"License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices "
++"just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++"Para usar esta Licença em um documento que você escreveu, inclua uma cópia "
++"da Licença no documento e coloque os seguintes avisos de direitos autorais e "
++"de licenças logo após a página de título:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:629 C/fdl-appendix.xml:629
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr "Copyright ANO SEU NOME."
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, "
++"and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being "
++"LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU "
++"Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Permissão concedida para copiar, distribuir e/ou modificar este documento "
++"sob os termos da Licença de Documentação Livre GNU, Versão 1.1 ou qualquer "
++"versão mais recente publicada pela Free Software Foundation; com as <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Seções Invariantes</link> sendo LISTE SEUS "
++"TÍTULOS, com os <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textos de Capa Frontal</"
++"link> sendo LISTA e os <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textos de "
++"Contracapa</link> sendo LISTA. Uma cópia da licença está incluída na seção "
++"intitulada \"Licença de Documentação Livre GNU\" (GNU Free Documentation "
++"License)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, "
++"write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover "
++"Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of "
++"<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Se você não tiver <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Seção Invariante</link>, "
++"escreva “sem Seções Invariantes” em vez de dizer quais são invariantes. Se "
++"você não tiver <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Textos de Capa Frontal</"
++"link>, escreva “sem Textos da Capa Frontal” em vez de “Textos de Capa "
++"Frontal sendo LIST”; Da mesma forma para <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts"
++"\">Textos de Contracapa</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++"gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"Se o seu documento contiver exemplos não triviais do código do programa, "
++"recomendamos que apresente esses exemplos em paralelo, sob sua escolha de "
++"licença de software livre, como a <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu."
++"org/copyleft/gpl.html\">Licença Pública Geral GNU</ulink> (GNU General "
++"Public License), para permitir sua utilização em software livre."
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/year
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/holder
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/street
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++msgstr "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/city
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "Boston"
++msgstr "Boston"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/state
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "MA"
++msgstr "MA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/postcode
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "02110-1301"
++msgstr "02110-1301"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/country
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "USA"
++msgstr "USA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:34
++msgid "free"
++msgstr "livre"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <_:quote-1/> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"O propósito desta Licença é fazer um manual, livro-texto, ou outro documento "
++"escrito <_:quote-1/> em seu sentido de liberdade: para garantir a todos a "
++"liberdade efetiva de copiá-lo e redistribui-lo, com ou sem modificações, "
++"tanto comercialmente como não comercialmente. Em segundo lugar, esta Licença "
++"preserva ao autor e ao editor uma forma de obter crédito pelo seu trabalho, "
++"enquanto não é considerado responsável por modificações feitas por outros."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:44
++msgid "copyleft"
++msgstr "copyleft"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <_:quote-1/>, which means that derivative works of "
++"the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the "
++"GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"Esta licença é um tipo de <_:quote-1/>, que significa que trabalhos "
++"derivados do documento precisam ser, por sua vez, livres no mesmo sentido. "
++"Ela complementa a Licença Pública Geral GNU (GNU General Public License), "
++"que é uma licença copyleft projetada para softwares livres."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:67 C/fdl-appendix.xml:82 C/fdl-appendix.xml:99
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:107 C/fdl-appendix.xml:113 C/fdl-appendix.xml:156
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:179 C/fdl-appendix.xml:190 C/fdl-appendix.xml:205
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:224 C/fdl-appendix.xml:235 C/fdl-appendix.xml:253
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:271 C/fdl-appendix.xml:294 C/fdl-appendix.xml:354
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:368 C/fdl-appendix.xml:400 C/fdl-appendix.xml:462
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:472 C/fdl-appendix.xml:482 C/fdl-appendix.xml:519
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:540 C/fdl-appendix.xml:565 C/fdl-appendix.xml:583
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:608
++msgid "Document"
++msgstr "Documento"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:69
++msgid "you"
++msgstr "você"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <_:quote-1/>, below, refers to any such manual or work. "
++"Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <_:quote-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Esta Licença se aplica a qualquer manual ou outro trabalho que contenha um "
++"aviso colocado pelo detentor dos direitos autorais dizendo que o documento "
++"pode ser distribuído sob os termos desta. O <_:quote-1/>, abaixo, refere-se "
++"a qualquer manual ou trabalho. Qualquer membro do público é um licenciado, e "
++"será referenciado como <_:quote-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:73 C/fdl-appendix.xml:234 C/fdl-appendix.xml:269
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:283 C/fdl-appendix.xml:315 C/fdl-appendix.xml:351
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:413 C/fdl-appendix.xml:433 C/fdl-appendix.xml:447
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:459 C/fdl-appendix.xml:475 C/fdl-appendix.xml:543
++msgid "Modified Version"
++msgstr "Versão modificada"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:72
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a "
++"portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or "
++"translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"Uma <_:quote-1/> do Documento significa qualquer trabalho contendo o "
++"Documento ou uma porção deste, seja uma cópia literal ou com modificações e/"
++"ou traduzido em outro idioma."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:80
++msgid "Secondary Section"
++msgstr "Seção da secundária"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:79
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <_:"
++"link-2/> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or "
++"authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related "
++"matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall "
++"subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, "
++"a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could "
++"be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related "
++"matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political "
++"position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++"Uma <_:quote-1/> é um apêndice com nome ou uma seção inicial do <_:link-2/> "
++"que trata exclusivamente da relação dos editores ou autores do Documento com "
++"seu assunto geral (ou temas relacionados) e não contém nada que possa estar "
++"diretamente dentro do assunto geral. (Por exemplo, se o Documento é em parte "
++"um livro-texto de matemática, uma Seção Secundária não pode explicar nada de "
++"matemática). Tal relação pode ser uma questão de conexão histórica com o "
++"assunto ou com temas relacionados, ou tratar de questões legais, comerciais, "
++"filosóficas, éticas ou políticas com relação a eles."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:95 C/fdl-appendix.xml:327 C/fdl-appendix.xml:398
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:439 C/fdl-appendix.xml:486 C/fdl-appendix.xml:494
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:567 C/fdl-appendix.xml:637 C/fdl-appendix.xml:648
++msgid "Invariant Sections"
++msgstr "Sessões invariantes"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:96 C/fdl-appendix.xml:435
++msgid "Secondary Sections"
++msgstr "Sessões secundárias"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:94
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain <_:link-2/> whose titles are designated, as "
++"being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-3/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"As <_:quote-1/> são certas <_:link-2/> cujos títulos são designados como "
++"sendo de Seções Invariantes na nota que afirma que o <_:link-3/> é publicado "
++"sob esta Licença."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:104 C/fdl-appendix.xml:181 C/fdl-appendix.xml:328
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:458
++msgid "Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Textos de Capa"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:103
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as "
++"Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-2/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Os <_:quote-1/> são certas passagens de texto curtas que são listadas, como "
++"Textos de Capa Frontal ou Texto de Contra Capa, na nota que afirma que o <_:"
++"link-2/> é publicado sob esta Licença."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:112 C/fdl-appendix.xml:124 C/fdl-appendix.xml:207
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:369
++msgid "Transparent"
++msgstr "Transparente"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:125 C/fdl-appendix.xml:204
++msgid "Opaque"
++msgstr "Opaco"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:111
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> copy of the <_:link-2/> means a machine-readable copy, "
++"represented in a format whose specification is available to the general "
++"public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and "
++"straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of "
++"pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available "
++"drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for "
++"automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text "
++"formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup "
++"has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers "
++"is not Transparent. A copy that is not <_:quote-3/> is called <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Uma cópia <_:quote-1/> do <_:link-2/> significa uma cópia legível por "
++"máquina, representada em um formato cuja especificação esteja disponível ao "
++"público geral e que cujo conteúdo possa ser visualizado e editado de forma "
++"clara e direta por editores de texto genéricos ou programas genéricos de "
++"desenho (para imagens compostas de pixels) ou para alguns dos editores de "
++"desenho amplamente disponíveis (para desenhos) e que seja apropriado para "
++"inclusão em formatadores de texto ou para a tradução automática em uma "
++"variedade de formatos apropriados de entrada em formatadores de texto. Uma "
++"cópia feita em outro formato de arquivo Transparente cuja marcação, ou "
++"ausência desta, tenha sido manipulada para impedir ou desencorajar "
++"modificação subsequente pelos leitores não é Transparente. Uma cópia que não "
++"é <_:quote-3/> é chamada <_:quote-4/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:142 C/fdl-appendix.xml:146 C/fdl-appendix.xml:250
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:266 C/fdl-appendix.xml:281 C/fdl-appendix.xml:352
++msgid "Title Page"
++msgstr "Título da página"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:141
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such "
++"following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License "
++"requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have "
++"any title page as such, <_:quote-2/> means the text near the most prominent "
++"appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the "
++"text."
++msgstr ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> significa, para um livro impresso, a própria página do "
++"título, além das páginas subsequentes necessárias para conter, de forma "
++"legível, o material que esta Licença requer que apareça na página do título. "
++"Para trabalhos em formatos que não possuem qualquer página de título "
++"semelhante, <_:quote-2/> significa o texto próximo à ocorrência mais "
++"proeminente do título do trabalho, precedendo o início do corpo do texto."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:166 C/fdl-appendix.xml:551
++msgid "section 3"
++msgstr "seção 3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <_:link-1/> in any medium, either "
++"commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright "
++"notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document "
++"are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions "
++"whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to "
++"obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or "
++"distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If "
++"you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the "
++"conditions in <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode copiar e distribuir o <_:link-1/> em qualquer meio, seja este de "
++"forma comercial ou não, desde que esta licença, as notas de direitos "
++"autorais (copyright), e a nota de licença afirmando que esta Licença se "
++"aplica ao Documento sejam reproduzidas em todas as cópias, e que você não "
++"inclua outras condições, quaisquer que sejam, às condições desta Licença. "
++"Você não pode usar de medidas técnicas para obstruir ou controlar a leitura "
++"ou cópia futura das cópias que você fizer ou distribuir. Contudo, você pode "
++"aceitar compensação em troca das cópias. Se você distribuir um número "
++"suficientemente grande de cópias, você deve também respeitar as condições "
++"descritas na <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <_:link-1/> numbering more than 100, "
++"and the Document's license notice requires <_:link-2/>, you must enclose the "
++"copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: "
++"Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back "
++"cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the "
++"publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with "
++"all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <_:link-3/> and satisfy "
++"these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Se você publicar cópias impressas do <_:link-1/>, em número maior que 100, e "
++"a nota de licença do Documento exigir <_:link-2/>, você deve encadernar as "
++"cópias em capas que carreguem, de forma clara e legível, todos estes Textos "
++"de Capa: Textos de Capa Frontal na capa frontal e Textos de Contracapa na "
++"contracapa. Ambas as capas devem também identificar, de forma clara e "
++"legível, você como o editor das cópias. A capa frontal deve apresentar o "
++"título completo com todas as palavras deste igualmente proeminentes e "
++"visíveis. Além disso, você pode adicionar outro material nas capas. As "
++"cópias com mudanças limitadas às capas, desde que preservem o título do <_:"
++"link-3/> e satisfaçam estas condições podem ser tratadas como cópias "
++"literais em outros aspectos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <_:link-1/> copies of the <_:link-2/> numbering "
++"more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <_:link-3/> copy "
++"along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-"
++"accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy "
++"of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using "
++"public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard "
++"network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably "
++"prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to "
++"ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated "
++"location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an "
++"Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition "
++"to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"Se você publicar ou distribuir cópias <_:link-1/> do <_:link-2/> em número "
++"maior que 100, você deve incluir uma cópia <_:link-3/> legível por máquina "
++"juntamente com cada cópia Opaca, ou dizer em (ou juntamente com) cada cópia "
++"Opaca, um endereço de rede a partir do qual o público geral de usuários "
++"possam acessar e obter de forma anônima e sob nenhum custo, usando "
++"protocolos de rede públicos padrão, uma cópia Transparente completa do "
++"Documento, livre de materiais adicionados. Se você decidir pela segunda "
++"opção, você deve seguir passos com certa prudência ao começar a distribuir "
++"as cópias Opacas em quantidade, a fim de garantir que esta cópia "
++"transparente permanecerá acessível no local indicado por pelo menos um ano "
++"após a última vez que você distribuir uma cópia Opaca (diretamente ou "
++"através de seus agentes ou distribuidores) desta edição ao público."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <_:"
++"link-1/> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them "
++"a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"É solicitado, mas não exigido, que você contate os autores do <_:link-1/> "
++"muito antes de redistribuir qualquer grande número de cópias, para dar a "
++"eles uma chance de lhe fornecer uma versão atualizada do Documento."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:236
++msgid "2"
++msgstr "2"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:237
++msgid "3"
++msgstr "3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/> under the "
++"conditions of sections <_:link-3/> and <_:link-4/> above, provided that you "
++"release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified "
++"Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode copiar e distribuir uma <_:link-1/> do <_:link-2/> sob as "
++"condições das seções <_:link-3/> e <_:link-4/> acima, desde que você forneça "
++"a Versão Modificada estritamente sob esta Licença, com a Versão Modificada "
++"preenchendo a função de Documento, permitindo assim a distribuição e "
++"modificação da Versão Modificada a quem quer que possua uma cópia desta. "
++"Além disso, você deve executar os seguintes procedimentos na Versão "
++"Modificada:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <_:link-1/> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from "
++"that of the <_:link-2/>, and from those of previous versions (which should, "
++"if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You "
++"may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of "
++"that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Usar na <_:link-1/> (e nas capas, se existirem) um título distinto em "
++"relação ao do <_:link-2/>, e daqueles de versões anteriores (os quais devem, "
++"na existência de algum, ser listados na seção “Histórico” do Documento). "
++"Você pode usar o mesmo título de uma versão anterior se o editor original "
++"daquela versão conceder-lhe permissão."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <_:link-1/>, as authors, one or more persons or entities "
++"responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <_:link-2/>, together "
++"with at least five of the principal authors of the <_:link-3/> (all of its "
++"principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"Listar na <_:link-1/> como autores, uma ou mais pessoas ou entidades "
++"responsáveis pela autoria das modificações na <_:link-2/>, juntamente com "
++"pelo menos cinco autores principais do <_:link-3/> (todos seus autores "
++"principais, se houver menos que cinco)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <_:link-1/> the name of the publisher of the <_:link-2/>, as "
++"the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++"Declarar na <_:link-1/> o nome do editor da <_:link-2/>, como seu editor."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:292
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <_:link-1/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Preservar todas as notas de direitos autorais (copyright) do <_:link-1/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <_:link-1/> under the terms of this "
++"License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Incluir, imediatamente após as notas de direitos autorais, uma nota de "
++"licença concedendo permissão pública para o uso da <_:link-1/> sob os termos "
++"desta Licença, na forma mostrada no Adendo abaixo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:330
++msgid "Document's"
++msgstr "do Documento"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <_:link-1/> and required "
++"<_:link-2/> given in the <_:link-3/> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Preservar na referida nota de licença a lista completa de <_:link-1/> e <_:"
++"link-2/> obrigatórios, dados na nota de licença do <_:link-3/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:348 C/fdl-appendix.xml:353 C/fdl-appendix.xml:372
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:507 C/fdl-appendix.xml:508
++msgid "History"
++msgstr "Histórico"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <_:quote-1/>, and its title, and add to it an "
++"item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <_:"
++"link-2/> as given on the <_:link-3/>. If there is no section entitled <_:"
++"quote-4/> in the <_:link-5/>, create one stating the title, year, authors, "
++"and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Preservar a seção intitulada <_:quote-1/>, preservar seu título, e adicionar "
++"a esta um item declarando ao menos o título, o ano, novos autores, e o "
++"editor da <_:link-2/> conforme incluído na <_:link-3/>. Se nenhuma seção "
++"intitulada <_:quote-4/> estiver presente no <_:link-5/>, crie uma informando "
++"o título, o ano, os autores e o editor do Documento como evidenciado na "
++"Página de Título, em seguida adicione um item descrevendo a Versão "
++"Modificada como mencionado na sentença anterior."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <_:link-1/> for public "
++"access to a <_:link-2/> copy of the Document, and likewise the network "
++"locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These "
++"may be placed in the <_:quote-3/> section. You may omit a network location "
++"for a work that was published at least four years before the Document "
++"itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives "
++"permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Preservar o endereço de rede, se existir algum, informado pelo <_:link-1/> "
++"para acesso público a uma cópia <_:link-2/> deste e, da mesma maneira, os "
++"endereços de rede dados no Documento para versões anteriores nas quais este "
++"se baseia. Estes podem ser colocados na seção <_:quote-3/>. Você pode omitir "
++"um endereço de rede para um trabalho que foi publicado pelo menos quatro "
++"anos antes do Documento em si, ou se o editor original da versão à qual o "
++"endereço se refere der permissão."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:385 C/fdl-appendix.xml:509
++msgid "Acknowledgements"
++msgstr "Agradecimentos"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:386 C/fdl-appendix.xml:510
++msgid "Dedications"
++msgstr "Dedicatórias"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <_:quote-1/> or <_:quote-2/>, preserve the section's "
++"title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the "
++"contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"Preservar o título da seção para qualquer seção intitulada <_:quote-1/> ou "
++"<_:quote-2/> e preservar dentro da seção toda a substância e tom de cada um "
++"dos agradecimentos e/ou dedicatórias lá mencionados."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/>, unaltered in their text and "
++"in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part "
++"of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Preservar todas as <_:link-1/> do <_:link-2/>, sem alterações em seus textos "
++"e títulos. Números de seção ou o equivalente não são considerados parte dos "
++"títulos das seções."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:412 C/fdl-appendix.xml:424 C/fdl-appendix.xml:445
++msgid "Endorsements"
++msgstr "Apoio"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <_:quote-1/>. Such a section may not be included "
++"in the <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Apagar qualquer seção intitulada <_:quote-1/>. Tal seção não deve ser "
++"incluída na <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:425
++msgid "Invariant Section"
++msgstr "Seção invariante"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <_:quote-1/> or to conflict in title "
++"with any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Não renomear o título de qualquer seção existente como <_:quote-1/> ou que "
++"resulte em conflito com o título de qualquer <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <_:link-1/> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that "
++"qualify as <_:link-2/> and contain no material copied from the Document, you "
++"may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To "
++"do this, add their titles to the list of <_:link-3/> in the Modified "
++"Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other "
++"section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Se a <_:link-1/> incluir novas seções iniciais ou apêndices que sejam "
++"qualificados como <_:link-2/>, e não contiver material copiado do Documento, "
++"você pode, a seu critério, tornar algumas dessas ou todas essas seções em "
++"invariantes. Para fazer isso, adicione seus títulos à lista de <_:link-3/> "
++"na nota de licença da Versão Modificada. Estes títulos devem ser distintos "
++"de quaisquer outros títulos de seções."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <_:quote-1/>, provided it contains nothing "
++"but endorsements of your <_:link-2/> by various parties--for example, "
++"statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an "
++"organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode incluir uma seção intitulada <_:quote-1/>, desde que esta contenha "
++"apenas apoios recebidos limitados a sua <_:link-2/> por várias fontes -- por "
++"exemplo, notas do revisor ou de que o texto foi aprovado por uma organização "
++"como a definição oficial de um padrão."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:455
++msgid "Front-Cover Text"
++msgstr "Texto de Capa Frontal"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:457
++msgid "Back-Cover Text"
++msgstr "Texto de Contracapa"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <_:link-1/>, and a passage of "
++"up to 25 words as a <_:link-2/>, to the end of the list of <_:link-3/> in "
++"the <_:link-4/>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover "
++"Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If "
++"the <_:link-5/> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously "
++"added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on "
++"behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on "
++"explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode adicionar uma passagem de até cinco palavras como <_:link-1/>, e "
++"uma passagem de até 25 palavras como <_:link-2/>, ao fim da lista de <_:"
++"link-3/> na <_:link-4/>. Somente uma passagem de Texto de Capa Frontal e uma "
++"de Texto de Contracapa podem ser adicionados por (ou através de arranjos "
++"feitos por) uma entidade qualquer. Caso o <_:link-5/> já incluir um texto de "
++"capa para a mesma capa, previamente incluído por você ou pelo arranjo feito "
++"pela mesma entidade em cujo nome você está agindo, você não poderá adicionar "
++"outro; mas você poderá substituir o antigo, com a permissão explícita do "
++"editor anterior, que o incluiu."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <_:link-1/> do not by this License "
++"give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply "
++"endorsement of any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"O(s) autor(es) e editor(es) do <_:link-1/>, por esta Licença, não concedem "
++"permissão para que seus nomes sejam usados a fins de publicidade, para "
++"defesa ou para apoio implícito de qualquer <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:484 C/fdl-appendix.xml:566
++msgid "section 4"
++msgstr "seção 4"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <_:link-1/> with other documents released under this "
++"License, under the terms defined in <_:link-2/> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <_:link-3/> of all "
++"of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant "
++"Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode combinar o <_:link-1/> com outros documentos publicados sob esta "
++"Licença, sob os termos definidos na <_:link-2/> acima para versões "
++"modificadas, desde que você inclua na combinação todas as <_:link-3/> de "
++"todos os documentos originais, sem modificações, e as liste como Seções "
++"Invariantes de seu trabalho combinado, na sua nota de licença."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <_:link-1/> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are "
++"multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make "
++"the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in "
++"parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if "
++"known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section "
++"titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the "
++"combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"O trabalho combinado precisa conter somente uma cópia desta Licença, e "
++"várias <_:link-1/> idênticas podem ser substituídas por uma única cópia. Se "
++"existirem várias Seções Invariantes de mesmo nome, porém com conteúdos "
++"diferentes, você deve tornar o título de cada uma destas seções único, "
++"adicionando ao fim destes, entre parênteses, o nome do autor ou, se "
++"conhecido, o editor original desta seção, ou ainda um número único. Faça o "
++"mesmo ajuste nos títulos de seção na lista de Seções Invariantes na nota de "
++"licença do trabalho combinado."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:511
++msgid "Endorsements."
++msgstr "Apoios."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <_:quote-1/> in "
++"the various original documents, forming one section entitled <_:quote-2/>; "
++"likewise combine any sections entitled <_:quote-3/>, and any sections "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>. You must delete all sections entitled <_:quote-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Na combinação, você deve combinar quaisquer seções intituladas <_:quote-1/> "
++"nos vários documentos originais, formando uma seção intitulada <_:quote-2/>; "
++"do mesmo modo, combine quaisquer seções intituladas <_:quote-3/>, e "
++"quaisquer seções intituladas <_:quote-4/>. Você deve apagar todas as seções "
++"intituladas <_:quote-5/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <_:link-1/> and other documents "
++"released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this "
++"License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the "
++"collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim "
++"copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Você pode fazer uma coleção que consiste do <_:link-1/> e outros documentos "
++"publicados sob esta Licença, e substituir as cópias individuais desta "
++"Licença, nos vários documentos, por uma única cópia a ser incluída na "
++"coleção, desde que você siga as regras desta Licença para cópias literais de "
++"cada documento em todos os outros aspectos."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:546
++msgid "aggregate"
++msgstr "agregação"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:550
++msgid "Cover Text"
++msgstr "Texto de Capa"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <_:link-1/> or its derivatives with other separate and "
++"independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or "
++"distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <_:link-2/> of the "
++"Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. "
++"Such a compilation is called an <_:quote-3/>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <_:link-4/> requirement of <_:link-5/> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"Uma compilação do <_:link-1/> ou seus derivados com outros documentos ou "
++"trabalhos separados e independentes, dentro de ou sob um volume de um meio "
++"de armazenamento ou distribuição, não conta como um todo para uma <_:link-2/"
++"> do Documento, contanto que nenhum direito autoral de compilação seja "
++"reivindicado para esta compilação. Tal compilação configura um <_:quote-3/> "
++"e esta Licença não se aplica aos outros trabalhos contidos na compilação do "
++"Documento, levando em conta serem compilados, caso eles mesmos não forem "
++"trabalhos derivados do Documento. Se o requisito de <_:link-4/> da <_:link-5/"
++"> é aplicável a estas cópias do Documento, e ainda se o Documento é menor do "
++"que um quarto do agregado inteiro, os Textos de Capa do Documento podem ser "
++"inseridos nas capas que envolvem somente o Documento no agregado. Caso "
++"contrário, eles devem aparecer em capas em volta do agregado como um todo."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <_:link-1/> under the terms of <_:link-2/>. Replacing <_:"
++"link-3/> with translations requires special permission from their copyright "
++"holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections "
++"in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may "
++"include a translation of this License provided that you also include the "
++"original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between "
++"the translation and the original English version of this License, the "
++"original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"Uma tradução é considerada como sendo um tipo de modificação, desta forma "
++"você pode distribuir traduções do <_:link-1/> sob os termos da <_:link-2/>. "
++"A substituição das <_:link-3/> por traduções requer permissão especial dos "
++"detentores dos direitos autorais, embora você possa incluir traduções de "
++"algumas ou todas as Seções Invariantes juntamente às versões originais "
++"destas. Você pode incluir uma tradução desta Licença, desde que você também "
++"inclua a versão original em Inglês desta Licença. Em caso de discordância "
++"entre a tradução e a versão original desta Licença ou nota de licença, a "
++"versão original em inglês prevalecerá."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <_:link-1/> except "
++"as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, "
++"modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will "
++"automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who "
++"have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have "
++"their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++"Você não pode copiar, modificar, sublicenciar, ou distribuir o <_:link-1/> "
++"com exceção do que foi expressamente previsto sob esta Licença. Qualquer "
++"outra tentativa de cópia, modificação, sublicenciamento ou distribuição do "
++"Documento é nula, e implicará na rescisão automática de seus direitos sob "
++"esta Licença. Contudo, as partes que receberam as cópias, ou direitos, de "
++"você sob esta Licença não terão suas licenças rescindidas enquanto tais "
++"partes permanecerem em total acordo com a Licença."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:597
++msgid "Free Software Foundation"
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:603
++msgid "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++msgstr "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:595
++msgid ""
++"The <_:ulink-1/> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free "
++"Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar "
++"in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new "
++"problems or concerns. See <_:ulink-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"A <_:ulink-1/> pode publicar novas versões, revisadas, da Licença de "
++"Documentação Livre GNU de tempos em tempos. Tais versões posteriores terão "
++"ideologia similar à presente versão, embora possam diferir em detalhes a fim "
++"de abordar novos problemas ou preocupações. Consulte: <_:ulink-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:610
++msgid "or any later version"
++msgstr "ou qualquer versão posterior"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<_:link-1/> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <_:"
++"quote-2/> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and "
++"conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has "
++"been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the "
++"Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose "
++"any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"É dado, a cada versão da Licença, um número de versão distinto. Se o <_:"
++"link-1/> especificar que um número de versão em específico desta Licença <_:"
++"quote-2/> se aplica a ele, você tem a opção de seguir os termos e condições "
++"tanto da versão especificada quanto de qualquer versão posterior que tenha "
++"sido publicada (não como rascunho) pela Free Software Foundation. Se o "
++"documento não especificar um número de versão desta Licença, você pode "
++"escolher qualquer versão já publicada (não como rascunho) pela Free Software "
++"Foundation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:639 C/fdl-appendix.xml:651
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Textos de Capa Frontal"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:640 C/fdl-appendix.xml:654
++msgid "Back-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Textos de Contracapa"
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <_:link-1/> "
++"being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <_:link-2/> being LIST, and with the <_:"
++"link-3/> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Permissão concedida para copiar, distribuir e/ou modificar este documento "
++"sob os termos da Licença de Documentação Livre GNU (GNU Free Documentation "
++"License), Versão 1.1 ou qualquer versão mais recente publicada pela Free "
++"Software Foundation; com as <_:link-1/>, sendo LISTE SEUS TÍTULOS, com os <_:"
++"link-2/> sendo LISTA, e com os <_:link-3/> sendo LISTA. Uma cópia da licença "
++"está inclusa na seção intitulada <_:quote-4/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:649
++msgid "with no Invariant Sections"
++msgstr "sem Seções Invariantes"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:652
++msgid "no Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "sem Textos de Capa Frontal"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:653
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"
++msgstr "Textos de Capa Frontal sendo LISTADOS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <_:link-1/>, write <_:quote-2/> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <_:link-3/>, write <_:quote-4/> instead of <_:"
++"quote-5/>; likewise for <_:link-6/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Se você não tiver qualquer <_:link-1/>, escreva <_:quote-2/> ao invés de "
++"afirmar quais são invariantes. Se você não tem <_:link-3/>, escreva <_:"
++"quote-4/> ao invés de <_:quote-5/>; O mesmo se aplica a <_:link-6/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:661
++msgid "GNU General Public License"
++msgstr "Licença Pública Geral GNU (GPL)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <_:ulink-1/>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
++"Se seu documento contiver exemplos não-triviais de código de programação, "
++"recomendamos publicar estes exemplos paralelamente, sob a licença de "
++"software livre que você escolher, como, por exemplo, a <_:ulink-1/>, para "
++"permitir seu uso em software livre."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28 Aug 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++#~ "authorinitials> <revremark>development</revremark>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28 Ago 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++#~ "authorinitials> <revremark>desenvolvimento</revremark>"
++
++#~ msgid "Setting up your project"
++#~ msgstr "Preparando seu projeto"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc "
++#~ "into your project. Theses sections assume we work on a project called "
++#~ "'meep'. This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user "
++#~ "app called 'meeper'. We also assume you will be using autoconf and "
++#~ "automake. In addition section <link linkend=\"plain_makefiles\">plain "
++#~ "makefiles or other build systems</link> will describe the basics needed "
++#~ "to work in a different build setup."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "As próximas seções descrevem quais as etapas para realizar a integração "
++#~ "do GTK-Doc em seu projeto. Estas seções consideram que nós trabalhamos em "
++#~ "um projeto chamado “meep”. Este projeto contém uma biblioteca chamada "
++#~ "“libmeep” e um aplicativo para usuário final chamado “meeper”. Nós também "
++#~ "consideramos que você estará usando autoconf e automake. Além disso, a "
++#~ "seção sobre <link linkend=\"plain_makefiles\">makefiles simples ou outros "
++#~ "sistemas de compilação</link> vai descrever as necessidades básicas para "
++#~ "trabalhar em uma configuração de compilação diferente."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/"
++#~ "reference (this way you can also have docs/help for end-user "
++#~ "documentation). It is recommended to create another subdirectory with the "
++#~ "name of the doc-package. For packages with just one library this step is "
++#~ "not necessary."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "No diretório raiz do seu projeto, crie pastas chamadas docs/reference "
++#~ "(desta forma, você também pode ter docs/help para documentação para "
++#~ "usuário final). É recomendado criar um outro subdiretório com o nome do "
++#~ "pacote de documentação. Para pacotes com apenas uma biblioteca, esta "
++#~ "etapa não é obrigatória."
++
++#~ msgid "Example directory structure"
++#~ msgstr "Exemplo de estrutura de diretórios"
++
++#~ msgid "This can then look as shown below: <_:example-1/>"
++#~ msgstr "Isto pode, então, parecer como exibido abaixo: <_:example-1/>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> "
++#~ "script."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Muito fácil! Basta adicionar uma linha ao seu script <filename>configure."
++#~ "ac</filename>."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "# check for gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "# verifica por gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++
++#~ msgid "Keep gtk-doc optional"
++#~ msgstr "Mantenha o gtk-doc como opcional"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "# check for gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++#~ "GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++#~ "],[\n"
++#~ "AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++#~ "])\n"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "# verifica por gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++#~ "GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++#~ "],[\n"
++#~ "AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++#~ "])\n"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "This will require all developers to have gtk-doc installed. If it is okay "
++#~ "for your project to have optional api-doc build setup, you can solve this "
++#~ "as below. Keep it as is, as gtkdocize is looking for "
++#~ "<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> at the start of a line. <_:example-1/>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Isso vai exigir que todos os desenvolvedores tenham o gtk-doc instalado. "
++#~ "Se não houver problema para seu projeto ter uma configuração opcional de "
++#~ "compilação de documentação de API, você pode resolver isso como mostrado "
++#~ "abaixo. Mantenha assim, pois o gtkdocize está procurando por "
++#~ "<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> no começo de uma linha. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside "
++#~ "your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows "
++#~ "<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++#~ "definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Além disso, é recomendado que você tenha a seguinte linha dentro do seu "
++#~ "script <filename>configure.ac</filename>. Ela permite que "
++#~ "<application>gtkdocize</application> copie automaticamente a definição de "
++#~ "macro para <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> para o seu projeto."
++
++#~ msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++#~ msgstr "Preparação para gtkdocize"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Historically GTK-Doc was generating template files where developers "
++#~ "entered the docs. This turned out to be not so good (e.g. the need for "
++#~ "having generated files under version control). Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the "
++#~ "tools can get all the information from source comments and thus the "
++#~ "templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in "
++#~ "the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--"
++#~ "flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl "
++#~ "usage totally. Besides adding the option directly to the command "
++#~ "invocation, they can be added also to an environment variable called "
++#~ "<symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> or set as a 2nd parameter in "
++#~ "<symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro in the configure script. If you have "
++#~ "never changed file in tmpl by hand and migrating from older gtkdoc "
++#~ "versions, please remove the directory (e.g. from version control system)."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Historicamente, GTK-Doc estava gerando arquivos modelo (template) nos "
++#~ "quais os desenvolvedores inseriam as documentações. Isso acabou sendo não "
++#~ "tão bom (ex.: a necessidade de serem gerados arquivos sob controle de "
++#~ "versão). Desde o GTK-Doc 1.9 as ferramentas podem obter todas as "
++#~ "informações dos comentários no fonte e, portanto, os arquivos modelo "
++#~ "podem ser evitados. Nós encorajamos as pessoas a manter a documentação no "
++#~ "código. O <application>gtkdocize</application> possui agora suporte à "
++#~ "opção <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> que escolhe um makefile que "
++#~ "ignora totalmente o uso de tmpl. Além de adicionar a opção diretamente à "
++#~ "chamada do comando, elas também podem ser adicionadas a uma variável de "
++#~ "ambiente chamada <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> ou definidas como um "
++#~ "segundo parâmetro na macro <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> no script "
++#~ "configure. Se você nunca alterou um arquivo tmpl a mão e está migrando de "
++#~ "versões antigas do gtkdoc, por favor remova o diretório (ex.: do sistema "
++#~ "de controle de versão)."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<"
++#~ "package>/index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. "
++#~ "But hang-on, during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages "
++#~ "with life."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Agora você pode apontar seu navegador para <filename>docs/reference/<"
++#~ "pacote>/index.html</filename>. Sim, é um pouco desapontador. Mas "
++#~ "aguente aí, durante o próximo capítulo nós vamos dizer como você pode "
++#~ "preencher as páginas com vida."
++
++#~ msgid "Documentation placement"
++#~ msgstr "Localização da documentação"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing "
++#~ "inside the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the "
++#~ "disadvantages that the information is often not updated and also that the "
++#~ "file tend to cause conflicts with version control systems."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Antigamente, a maioria das documentações tinha que ser preenchida em "
++#~ "arquivos residentes dentro do diretório <filename>tmpl</filename>. Isso "
++#~ "tem as desvantagens das informações frequentemente não serem atualizadas "
++#~ "e também que o arquivo tende a causar conflitos com sistemas de controle "
++#~ "de versão."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the "
++#~ "documentation inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way "
++#~ "of documenting code."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Para evitar os problemas mencionados a seguir nós sugerimos que a "
++#~ "documentação seja colocada dentro das fontes. Este manual vai apenas "
++#~ "descrever esta forma de documentar código."
++
++#~ msgid "<guilabel>Python</guilabel> - optional - for gtkdoc-depscan"
++#~ msgstr "<guilabel>Python</guilabel> - opcional - para gtkdoc-depscan"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel> "
++#~ "<application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the "
++#~ "<filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the "
++#~ "information gathered in the first step. (Note that this can be run "
++#~ "repeatedly. It will try to ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Gerando os arquivos \"template\".</guilabel> "
++#~ "<application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> cria uma quantidade de arquivos "
++#~ "no subdiretório <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename>, usando a "
++#~ "informação coletada na primeira etapa. (Note que ele pode ser executado "
++#~ "repetidas vezes e vai tentar garantir que nenhuma documentação será "
++#~ "perdida, jamais.)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to "
++#~ "keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> "
++#~ "supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a "
++#~ "makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in "
++#~ "tmpl by hand, please remove the directory (e.g. from version control "
++#~ "system)."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Desde o GTK-Doc 1.9, os modelos (\"templates\") podem ser evitados. Nós "
++#~ "encorajamos as pessoas a manter a documentação no código. "
++#~ "<application>gtkdocize</application> possui suporte a uma opção <option>--"
++#~ "flavour no-tmpl</option> que escolhe um makefile que ignora totalmente o "
++#~ "uso de tmpl. Se você nunca alterou o arquivo em tmpl manualmente, por "
++#~ "favor remova o diretório (ex.: do sistema de controle de versão)."
++
++#~ msgid "1.20"
++#~ msgstr "1.20"
++
++#~ msgid "(FIXME : Stability information)"
++#~ msgstr "(CORRIJA-ME : Informação sobre estabilidade)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Also, take a look at GObject Introspection annotation tags: http://live."
++#~ "gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Também, dê uma olhada nas tags de anotação do GObject Introspection: "
++#~ "http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++
++#~ msgid "1.18.1"
++#~ msgstr "1.18.1"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - This is the DocBook SGML DTD. "
++#~ "<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora."
++#~ "com/davenport</ulink>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - Este é o DocBook SGML DTD. <ulink "
++#~ "url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/"
++#~ "davenport</ulink>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - This is a DSSSL processor for converting "
++#~ "SGML to various formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type="
++#~ "\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - Este é um processador de DSSSL para "
++#~ "conversão de SGML para vários formatos. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark."
++#~ "com/jade\" type=\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> This is the DSSSL code "
++#~ "to convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together "
++#~ "with jade. I've customized the DSSSL code slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to "
++#~ "colour the program code listings/declarations, and to support global "
++#~ "cross-reference indices in the generated HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh."
++#~ "com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Folhas de estilo modulares do DocBook</guilabel> Este é o "
++#~ "código DSSSL para converter DocBook para HTML (e alguns outros formatos). "
++#~ "É usado junto com jade. Eu personalizei um pouco o código DSSSL, em gtk-"
++#~ "doc.dsl, para colorir as listagens/declarações do código do programa e "
++#~ "para dar suporte a índices de referências cruzadas globais nos HTML "
++#~ "gerados. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http"
++#~ "\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - if you want to create man pages "
++#~ "from the DocBook. I've customized the 'translation spec' slightly, to "
++#~ "capitalise section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of "
++#~ "the pages and the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on "
++#~ "<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora."
++#~ "com/davenport</ulink> NOTE: This does not work yet."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - se você deseja criar páginas man a "
++#~ "partir do DocBook. Eu personalizei um pouco a \"especificação de tradução"
++#~ "\", para deixar o título em caixa alta e adicionar o título \"GTK Library"
++#~ "\" no topo das páginas e a data de revisão no canto inferior. Há também "
++#~ "um link para isso em <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type="
++#~ "\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>. NOTA: isso não funciona "
++#~ "ainda."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are "
++#~ "installed."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Não há um lugar padrão onde as folhas de estilos modulares de DocBook são "
++#~ "instaladas."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "GTK-Doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically:"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "O script de configuração do GTK-DOC pesquisa por esses três diretórios "
++#~ "automaticamente:"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (used by "
++#~ "RedHat)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (usado "
++#~ "pelo RedHat)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (used by Debian)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (usado pelo "
++#~ "Debian)"
++
++#~ msgid "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (used by SuSE)"
++#~ msgstr "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (usado pelo SuSE)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to "
++#~ "configure GTK-Doc using the option: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<"
++#~ "PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Se você tiver as folhas de estilos instaladas em algum lugar, você "
++#~ "precisa configurar o Gtk-Doc usando a opção: <command> --with-dsssl-"
++#~ "dir=<CAMINHO_PARA_DIRETÓRIO_RAIZ_DAS_FOLHAS_DE_ESTILO> </command>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "You may also want to enable GTK-Doc for the distcheck make target. Just "
++#~ "add the one line shown in the next example to your top-level "
++#~ "<filename>Makefile.am</filename>:"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Você pode querer habilitar o GTK-Doc para o distcheck make target. Basta "
++#~ "adicionar a linha mostrada no exemplo abaixo ao <filename>Makefile.am</"
++#~ "filename> do seu diretório raiz:"
++
++#~ msgid "Enable GTK-Doc during make distcheck"
++#~ msgstr "Habilita GTK-Doc durante make distcheck"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "DISTCHECK_CONFIGURE_FLAGS=--enable-gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "DISTCHECK_CONFIGURE_FLAGS=--enable-gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "/**\n"
++#~ " * identifier:\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * documentation ...\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * # Sub heading #\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * more documentation:\n"
++#~ " * - list item 1\n"
++#~ " * - list item 2\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * Even more docs.\n"
++#~ " */\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "/**\n"
++#~ " * identificador:\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * documentação ...\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * # Subtítulo #\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * mais documentação:\n"
++#~ " * - item de lista 1\n"
++#~ " * - item de lista 2\n"
++#~ " *\n"
++#~ " * Mais documentação.\n"
++#~ " */\n"
++#~ "\n"
++#~ " "
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Since GTK-Doc-1.18 the tool supports a subset or the <ulink url=\"http://"
++#~ "daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">markdown language</ulink>. One "
++#~ "can use it for sub-headings and simple itemized lists. On older GTK-Doc "
++#~ "versions the content will be rendered as it (the list items will appear "
++#~ "in one line separated by dashes). <_:example-1/>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Desde o GTK-Doc-1.18, a ferramenta tem suporte a um subconjunto ou a "
++#~ "<ulink url=\"http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">linguagem "
++#~ "markdown</ulink>. É possível usá-la em subtítulos e listas simples "
++#~ "itemizadas. Em versões mais antigas GTK-Doc, o conteúdo será processado "
++#~ "com está (os itens da lista vai aparecer em uma linha separada por "
++#~ "traços). <_:example-1/>"
++
++#~ msgid "1.15"
++#~ msgstr "1.15"
++
++#~ msgid "Chris"
++#~ msgstr "Chris"
++
++#~ msgid "Lyttle"
++#~ msgstr "Lyttle"
++
++#~ msgid "chris@wilddev.net"
++#~ msgstr "chris@wilddev.net"
++
++#~ msgid "Dan"
++#~ msgstr "Dan"
++
++#~ msgid "Mueth"
++#~ msgstr "Mueth"
++
++#~ msgid "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++#~ msgstr "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++
++#~ msgid "Stefan"
++#~ msgstr "Stefan"
++
++#~ msgid "Kost"
++#~ msgstr "Kost"
++
++#~ msgid "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++#~ msgstr "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++
++#~ msgid "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++#~ msgstr "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++
++#~ msgid "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++#~ msgstr "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++
++#~ msgid "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle and Stefan Kost"
++#~ msgstr "Dan Mueth e Chris Lyttle e Stefan Kost"
++
++#~ msgid "development version"
++#~ msgstr "versão de desenvolvimento"
++
++#~ msgid "bug and regression fixes"
++#~ msgstr "correções de falhas e regressão"
++
++#~ msgid "bugfixes and performance improvements"
++#~ msgstr "correção de falhas e melhoramento de performance"
++
++#~ msgid "broken tarball update"
++#~ msgstr "atualização de arquivo tarball quebrado"
++
++#~ msgid "new tool features and bugfixes"
++#~ msgstr "novas funcionalidades da ferramenta e correções de falhas"
++
++#~ msgid "GNOME doc-utils migration"
++#~ msgstr "migração do GNOME doc-utils"
++
++#~ msgid "explanation"
++#~ msgstr "explicação"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Missing or wrong naming in <placeholder-1/> file (see <placeholder-2/>)."
++#~ msgstr " "
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# Slovenian translation for gtk-doc.
++# Copyright (C) 2010 gtk-doc's COPYRIGHT HOLDER
++# This file is distributed under the same license as the gtk-doc package.
++#
++# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
++#
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc help master\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-10-16 21:38+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-10-17 21:03+0100\n"
++"Last-Translator: Matej Urbančič <mateju@svn.gnome.org>\n"
++"Language-Team: Slovenian GNOME Translation Team <gnome-si@googlegroups.com>\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n%100==1 ? 1 : n%100==2 ? 2 : n%100==3 || n%100==4 ? 3 : 0);\n"
++"X-Poedit-Language: Slovenian\n"
++"X-Poedit-Country: SLOVENIA\n"
++"X-Poedit-SourceCharset: utf-8\n"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:12(title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:13(edition)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:86(revnumber)
++msgid "1.15"
++msgstr "1.15"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:14(para)
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:17(firstname)
++msgid "Chris"
++msgstr "Chris"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:18(surname)
++msgid "Lyttle"
++msgstr "Lyttle"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:21(email)
++msgid "chris@wilddev.net"
++msgstr "chris@wilddev.net"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:26(firstname)
++msgid "Dan"
++msgstr "Dan"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:27(surname)
++msgid "Mueth"
++msgstr "Mueth"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:30(email)
++msgid "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++msgstr "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:35(firstname)
++msgid "Stefan"
++msgstr "Stefan"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:36(surname)
++msgid "Kost"
++msgstr "Kost"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:39(email)
++msgid "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++msgstr "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:45(publishername)
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:46(email)
++msgid "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:49(year)
++msgid "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:50(holder)
++msgid "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle and Stefan Kost"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:61(para)
++msgid "Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:69(para)
++msgid "Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial caps."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:80(revnumber)
++msgid "1.15.1"
++msgstr "1.15.1"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:81(date)
++msgid "24 May 2010"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:82(authorinitials)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:88(authorinitials)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:94(authorinitials)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:100(authorinitials)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:106(authorinitials)
++msgid "sk"
++msgstr "sk"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:83(revremark)
++msgid "development version"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:87(date)
++msgid "21 May 2010"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:89(revremark)
++msgid "bug and regression fixes"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:92(revnumber)
++msgid "1.14"
++msgstr "1.14"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:93(date)
++msgid "28 March 2010"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:95(revremark)
++msgid "bugfixes and performance improvements"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:98(revnumber)
++msgid "1.13"
++msgstr "1.13"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:99(date)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:105(date)
++msgid "18 December 2009"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:101(revremark)
++msgid "broken tarball update"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:104(revnumber)
++msgid "1.12"
++msgstr "1.12"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:107(revremark)
++msgid "new tool features and bugfixes"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:110(revnumber)
++msgid "1.11"
++msgstr "1.11"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:111(date)
++msgid "16 Novemebr 2008"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:112(authorinitials)
++msgid "mal"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:113(revremark)
++msgid "GNOME doc-utils migration"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:122(title)
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "Uvod"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:124(para)
++msgid "This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how it is used."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:130(title)
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:132(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:140(title)
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:142(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:149(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc consists of a number of perl scripts, each performing a different step in the process."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:154(para)
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:161(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the source files with the documentation for each function, macro, union etc. (In the past information was entered in generated template files, which is not recommended anymore)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:171(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> containg a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to <filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. The author can rearrange the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some symbols to show up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or the declaration should appear differently, one can place enties similar to the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>. <application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> can also be used to dynamically query a library about any GtkObject subclasses it exports. It saves information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about any GTK Args and Signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:196(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the information gathered in the first step. (Note that this can be run repeatedly. It will try to ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:205(para)
++msgid "Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand, please remove the dir (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:217(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Generating the SGML/XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> turns the template files into SGML or XML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads docs from sources and introspection data. We recommend to use Docbook XML."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:228(para)
++msgid "<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the SGML/XML files into HTML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. Likewise <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the SGML/XML files into a PDF document called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:234(para)
++msgid "Files in <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One should never edit them directly."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:242(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:260(title)
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:263(title)
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:264(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - the main scripts are in Perl."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:267(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - This is the DocBook SGML DTD. <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:271(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - This is a DSSSL processor for converting SGML to various formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type=\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:275(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> This is the DSSSL code to convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together with jade. I've customized the DSSSL code slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to colour the program code listings/declarations, and to support global cross-reference indices in the generated HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:284(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - if you want to create man pages from the DocBook. I've customized the 'translation spec' slightly, to capitalise section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of the pages and the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink> NOTE: This does not work yet."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:295(title)
++msgid "Installation"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:296(para)
++msgid "There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are installed."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:299(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:302(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (used by RedHat)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:305(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (used by Debian)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:308(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (used by SuSE)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:311(para)
++msgid "If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to configure GTK-Doc using the option: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:335(title)
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:337(para)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:351(para)
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:341(para)
++msgid "(History, authors, web pages, license, future plans, comparison with other similar systems.)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:349(title)
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:355(para)
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:364(title)
++msgid "Setting up your project"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:366(para)
++msgid "The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc into your project. Theses sections assume we work on a project called 'meep'. This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user app called 'meeper'."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:374(title)
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:376(para)
++msgid "Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/reference (this way you can also have docs/help for end-user documentation). It is recommended to create another subdirectory with the name of the doc-package. For packages with just one library this step is not necessary."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:385(title)
++msgid "Example directory structure"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:383(para)
++msgid "This can then look as shown below: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:403(title)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:410(title)
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:405(para)
++msgid "Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:425(title)
++msgid "Keep gtk-doc optional"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:420(para)
++msgid "This will require all developers to have gtk-doc installed. If it is okay for your project to have optional api-doc build setup, you can solve this as below. Keep it as is, as gtkdocize is looking for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> at the start of a line. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:437(para)
++msgid "The first argument is used to check for the gtkdocversion at configure time. The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</application>. The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several configure switches:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:443(para)
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:444(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:445(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:446(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:450(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:458(para)
++msgid "Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside you <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows <application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:466(title)
++msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:477(title)
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:479(para)
++msgid "First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the examples subdirectory of the gtkdoc-sources to your project's API documentation directory ( <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></filename>). If you have multiple doc-packages repeat this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:486(para)
++msgid "The next step is to edit the settings inside the <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. All the settings have a comment above that describes their purpose. Most settings are extra flags passed to the respective tools. Every tool has a variable of the form <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>. All the tools support <option>--help</option> to list the supported parameters."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. FIXME: explain options ?
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:497(para)
++msgid "You may also want to enable GTK-Doc for the distcheck make target. Just add the one line shown in the next example to your top-level <filename>Makefile.am</filename>:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:504(title)
++msgid "Enable GTK-Doc during make distcheck"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:516(title)
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:518(para)
++msgid "Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup the build infrastructure after a checkout from version control system (such as cvs/svn/git). GTK-Doc comes with a tool called <application>gtkdocize</application> which can be used in such a script. It should be run before autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:527(title)
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:536(para)
++msgid "When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> to your project root (or any directory specified by the <option>--docdir</option> option). It also checks you configure script for the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> invocation. This macro can be used to pass extra parameters to <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:545(para)
++msgid "Historically GTK-Doc was generating template files where developers entered the docs. This turned out to be not so good (e.g. the need for having generated files under version control). Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the tools can get all the information from source comments and thus the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. Besides adding the option directly to the command invocation, they can be added also to an environment variable called <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> or set as a 2nd parameter in <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro in the configure script. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand and migrating from older gtkdoc versions, please remove the dir (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:562(title)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:579(title)
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:564(para)
++msgid "After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run <filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:571(para)
++msgid "The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-dirs. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:588(para)
++msgid "Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. But hang-on, during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages with life."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:596(title)
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:598(para)
++msgid "As a rule of the thumb, it's those files you edit, that should go under version control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><package>.types</filename><filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename><filename><package>-sections.txt</filename><filename>Makefile.am</filename>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:611(title)
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:613(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure from other sources. During the next section you will find all information about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:621(title)
++msgid "Documentation placement"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:622(para)
++msgid "In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing inside the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the disadvantages that the information is often not updated and also that the file tend to cause conflicts with version control systems."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:628(para)
++msgid "The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the documentation inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way of documenting code."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:639(title)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:658(title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:635(para)
++msgid "The scanner can handle the majority of c headers fine. In the case of receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special case, one can hint GTK-Doc to skip over them. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:653(title)
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:655(para)
++msgid "A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:670(para)
++msgid "The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:676(para)
++msgid "The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows the detailed description. All lines (outside program- listings and CDATA sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-asterisk-blank-blank)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:693(para)
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:698(para)
++msgid "Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:704(para)
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:709(para)
++msgid "Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:715(para)
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:720(para)
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:725(para)
++msgid "Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:687(para)
++msgid "One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:733(para)
++msgid "If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or '#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:742(para)
++msgid "DocBook can do more that just links. One can also have lists, tables and examples. To enable the usage of SGML/XML tags inside doc-comments you need to have <option>--xml-mode</option> or <option>--sgml-mode</option> in the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:751(para)
++msgid "As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to comment those symbols too. This helps other to understand you code. Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the 2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made public, all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and insert the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:765(title)
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:767(para)
++msgid "Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are optional."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:775(title)
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:797(term)
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:799(para)
++msgid "The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name give here should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:808(term)
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:810(para)
++msgid "A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:817(term)
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:819(para)
++msgid "The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:826(term)
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:828(para)
++msgid "Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <title> is used as a section_id and for other sections it is <MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:836(term)
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:838(para)
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:844(term)
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:851(para)
++msgid "Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:863(para)
++msgid "Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:875(para)
++msgid "Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:884(para)
++msgid "Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be Internal."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:846(para)
++msgid "A informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend the use of one of these terms: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:896(term)
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:898(para)
++msgid "The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is optional."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:907(term)
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:909(para)
++msgid "The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is optional."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:920(para)
++msgid "To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:929(title)
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:931(para)
++msgid "Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus functions are usually documented in the c-source and macros, structs and enums in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:939(title)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:968(title)
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:941(para)
++msgid "You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell when an api was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:946(title)
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:947(term)
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:949(para)
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:954(term)
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:956(para)
++msgid "Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:964(para)
++msgid "(FIXME : Stability information)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:991(title)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1027(title)
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:997(para)
++msgid "Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1003(para)
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1008(para)
++msgid "Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:993(para)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1090(para)
++msgid "Please remember to: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1015(para)
++msgid "Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1020(para)
++msgid "Also, take a look at gobject introspection annotation tags: http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1051(title)
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1052(term)
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1054(para)
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1059(term)
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1061(para)
++msgid "In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag (@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1071(title)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1073(title)
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1088(title)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1107(title)
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1094(para)
++msgid "Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or after other signals."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1100(para)
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1127(title)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1128(title)
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1148(para)
++msgid "Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1154(para)
++msgid "Struct comment blocks can also be used for GObjects and GObjectClasses. It is usualy a good idea to add a comment blco for a class, if it has vmethods (as this is how they can be documented). For the GObject itself one can use the related section docs, having a separate block for the instance struct would be useful if the instance has public fields. One disadvantage here is that this creates two index entries of the same name (the structure and the section)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1166(title)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1167(title)
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1188(para)
++msgid "Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1198(title)
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1200(para)
++msgid "Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1205(para)
++msgid "To link to another section in the GTK docs: <placeholder-1/> The linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1221(para)
++msgid "To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1232(para)
++msgid ""
++"To include example code: <placeholder-1/> or possibly this, for very short code fragments which don't need a title: <placeholder-2/> For the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation: <![CDATA[\n"
++"|[\n"
++" ...\n"
++"]|\n"
++"]]>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1266(para)
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1288(para)
++msgid "To include a note which stands out from the text: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1303(para)
++msgid "To refer to a type: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1314(para)
++msgid "To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1325(para)
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1336(para)
++msgid "To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <placeholder-1/> but you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1349(para)
++msgid "To emphasize text: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1360(para)
++msgid "For filenames use: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1371(para)
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1386(title)
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1388(para)
++msgid "There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1397(title)
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1399(para)
++msgid "If your library or application includes GtkObjects/GObjects, you want their signals, arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1408(title)
++msgid "Example types file snippet"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1422(para)
++msgid "Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1431(title)
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1433(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them and place them in an order."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1440(para)
++msgid "While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later run will not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1450(para)
++msgid "Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along with the library."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1459(para)
++msgid "So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1466(title)
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1488(title)
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1490(para)
++msgid "The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1496(para)
++msgid "The section file is a plain test file with xml like syntax (using tags). Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1502(para)
++msgid "The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be converted into the DocBook SGML/XML file <filename>sgml/gnome-config.sgml</filename> or .DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. (The name of the html file is based on the module name and the section title, or for gobjects it is based on the gobjects class name converted to lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1514(para)
++msgid "The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1521(para)
++msgid "You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private declarations which will not be output (It is a handy way to avoid warning messages about unused declarations.). If your library contains private types which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection. Wheter you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs in public or Standard section depends if they have public entries (variables, vmethods)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1540(para)
++msgid "You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the #include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1554(title)
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1556(para)
++msgid "A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1565(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1574(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1581(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1589(para)
++msgid "Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile.am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during <command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1596(para)
++msgid "One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: <filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first one can be compared with the section file if that is manualy maintained. The second lists all declarations fromt he headers If a symbol is missing one could check if this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1605(para)
++msgid "If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask gtkdoc to keep the intermedia scanner file for further analysis, but running it as <command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1620(title)
++msgid "Documenting other interfaces"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1622(para)
++msgid "So far we have been using GTK-Doc to document the API of code. The next sections contain suggestions how the tools can be used to document other interfaces too."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1629(title)
++msgid "Commandline options and man pages"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1631(para)
++msgid "As one can generate man pages for a docbook refentry as well, it sounds like a good idea to use it for that purpose. This way the interface is part of the reference and one gets the man-page for free."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1638(title)
++msgid "Document the tool"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1640(para)
++msgid "Create one refentry file per tool. Following <link linkend=\"settingup_docfiles\">our example</link> we would call it <filename>meep/docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. For the xml tags that should be used and can look at generated file in the xml subdirectory as well as examples e.g. in glib."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1650(title)
++msgid "Adding the extra configure check"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1653(title)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1673(title)
++msgid "Extra configure checks"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1670(title)
++msgid "Adding the extra makefile rules"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1698(title)
++msgid "DBus interfaces"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1700(para)
++msgid "(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1709(title)
++msgid "Frequently asked questions"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1713(segtitle)
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "Vprašanje"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1714(segtitle)
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "Odgovor"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1716(seg)
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1718(function)
++msgid "xxx_get_type()"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1719(filename)
++msgid "<package>.types"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1717(seg)
++msgid "The objects <placeholder-1/> function has not been entered into the <placeholder-2/> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1723(seg)
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1725(filename)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1764(filename)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1772(filename)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1794(filename)
++msgid "<package>-sections.txt"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1726(ulink)
++msgid "explanation"
++msgstr "pojasnilo"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1724(seg)
++msgid "Missing or wrong naming in <placeholder-1/> file (see <placeholder-2/>)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1730(seg)
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1732(type)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1773(type)
++msgid "GtkWidget"
++msgstr "Gradnik Gtk"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1731(seg)
++msgid "Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <placeholder-1/>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1738(seg)
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1740(filename)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1755(filename)
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1781(filename)
++msgid "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1739(seg)
++msgid "Does the <placeholder-1/> contain a index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1745(seg)
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1746(seg)
++msgid "Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1752(seg)
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1753(seg)
++msgid "Is the new page xi:included from <placeholder-1/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1759(seg)
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1760(seg)
++msgid "Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <placeholder-1/> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1768(seg)
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1770(filename)
++msgid "<package>.hierarchy"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1771(filename)
++msgid "xml/tree_index.sgml"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1769(seg)
++msgid "If the type is listed in <placeholder-1/> but not in <placeholder-2/> then double check that the type is correctly placed in the <placeholder-3/>. If the type instance (e.g. <placeholder-4/>) is not listed or incidentialy makred private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1778(seg)
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1780(filename)
++msgid "xml/annotation-glossary.xml"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1779(seg)
++msgid "Check that <placeholder-1/> is xi:included from <placeholder-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1787(seg)
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1788(seg)
++msgid "Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the source."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1793(seg)
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1794(seg)
++msgid "Symbol XYZ appears twice in <placeholder-1/> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1797(seg)
++msgid "Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template matches."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:12(releaseinfo)
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:16(year)
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:16(holder)
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:19(para)
++msgid "<address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state><postcode>02110-1301</postcode><country>USA</country></address> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:28(title)
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:31(title)
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:32(para)
++msgid "The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:43(para)
++msgid "This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:50(para)
++msgid "We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:62(title)
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:63(para)
++msgid "This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:72(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:79(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:94(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:103(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:111(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not <quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:128(para)
++msgid "Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:141(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:153(title)
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:154(para)
++msgid "You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:169(para)
++msgid "You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:176(title)
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:177(para)
++msgid "If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:195(para)
++msgid "If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:202(para)
++msgid "If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:222(para)
++msgid "It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:231(title)
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:232(para)
++msgid "You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:248(title)
++msgid "A"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:249(para)
++msgid "Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:264(title)
++msgid "B"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:265(para)
++msgid "List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:279(title)
++msgid "C"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:280(para)
++msgid "State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:291(title)
++msgid "D"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:292(para)
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:301(title)
++msgid "E"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:302(para)
++msgid "Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:311(title)
++msgid "F"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:312(para)
++msgid "Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:324(title)
++msgid "G"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:325(para)
++msgid "Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:337(title)
++msgid "H"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:338(para)
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:346(title)
++msgid "I"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:347(para)
++msgid "Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>as given on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:365(title)
++msgid "J"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:366(para)
++msgid "Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:383(title)
++msgid "K"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:384(para)
++msgid "In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or <quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:396(title)
++msgid "L"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:397(para)
++msgid "Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:409(title)
++msgid "M"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:410(para)
++msgid "Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:421(title)
++msgid "N"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:422(para)
++msgid "Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:432(para)
++msgid "If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:444(para)
++msgid "You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:453(para)
++msgid "You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:470(para)
++msgid "The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:480(title)
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:481(para)
++msgid "You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:492(para)
++msgid "The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:505(para)
++msgid "In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled <quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled <quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled <quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:516(title)
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:517(para)
++msgid "You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:527(para)
++msgid "You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:537(title)
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:538(para)
++msgid "A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:561(title)
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:562(para)
++msgid "Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License provided that you also include the original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original English version of this License, the original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:580(title)
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:581(para)
++msgid "You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:594(title)
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:595(para)
++msgid "The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:606(para)
++msgid "Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:621(title)
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:622(para)
++msgid "To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:629(para)
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:632(para)
++msgid "Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:647(para)
++msgid "If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of <quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:657(para)
++msgid "If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:0(None)
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr ""
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# Swedish translation of gtk-doc.
++# Copyright © 2009-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
++# This file is distributed under the same license as the gtk-doc package.
++# Daniel Nylander <po@danielnylander.se>, 2009.
++# Sebastian Rasmussen <sebras@gmail.com>, 2016.
++# Anders Jonsson <anders.jonsson@norsjovallen.se>, 2017, 2018, 2019.
++#
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc master\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-08-15 19:15+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-08-18 22:15+0200\n"
++"Last-Translator: Anders Jonsson <anders.jonsson@norsjovallen.se>\n"
++"Language-Team: Swedish <tp-sv@listor.tp-sv.se>\n"
++"Language: sv\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"X-Generator: Poedit 2.2.3\n"
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++msgctxt "_"
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr ""
++"Sebastian Rasmussen <sebras@gmail.com>, 2016\n"
++"Daniel Nylander <po@danielnylander.se>, 2009\n"
++"Marcus Rejås och Alexander Nordström <info@se.linux.org>, 2004\n"
++"\n"
++"Skicka kommentarer om översättningen\n"
++"till svenska till <tp-sv@listor.tp-sv.se>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/title
++#: C/index.docbook:12
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "Handbok för GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/edition
++#: C/index.docbook:13
++msgid "1.24.1"
++msgstr "1.24.1"
++
++#. (itstool) path: abstract/para
++#: C/index.docbook:14
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr ""
++"Användarhandbok för utvecklare med användningsinstruktioner för GTK-Doc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:16
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:25
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: authorgroup/author
++#: C/index.docbook:34
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Sauer (Kost)</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: publisher/publishername
++#: C/index.docbook:45
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc-projektet"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/publisher
++#: C/index.docbook:44
++msgid ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++msgstr ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:48
++msgid "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: bookinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:52
++#| msgid "<year>2007-2015</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++msgid "<year>2007-2019</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2007-2019</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:65
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, "
++"Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation "
++"with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A "
++"copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Tillstånd att kopiera, distribuera och/eller modifiera detta dokument ges "
++"under villkoren i <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, "
++"version 1.1 eller senare, utgivet av Free Software Foundation utan "
++"standardavsnitt och omslagstexter. En kopia av licensen finns <link linkend="
++"\"fdl\">inkluderad</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:73
++msgid ""
++"Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and "
++"services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME "
++"documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the "
++"GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial "
++"caps."
++msgstr ""
++"Flera namn på produkter och tjänster är registrerade varumärken. I de fall "
++"dessa namn förekommer i GNOME-dokumentation - och medlemmarna i GNOME-"
++"dokumentationsprojektet är medvetna om dessa varumärken - är de skrivna med "
++"versaler eller med inledande versal."
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:83
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.32.1</revnumber> <date>15 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>dev version</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.32.1</revnumber> <date>15 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>utveckling</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:89
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.32</revnumber> <date>15 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>hotfix release</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.32</revnumber> <date>15 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>snabb fixutgåva</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:95
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.31</revnumber> <date>05 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>refactorings and more test coverage</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.31</revnumber> <date>05 Aug 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>omstrukturering och större testtäckning</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:101
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.30</revnumber> <date>08 May 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>more test coverage</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.30</revnumber> <date>08 maj 2019</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>större testtäckning</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:107
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28 Aug 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28 Aug 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>programfixar</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:113
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.28</revnumber> <date>24 Mar 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.28</revnumber> <date>24 mar 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>programfixar</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:119
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.27</revnumber> <date>07 Dec 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>fine tuning of the python port</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.27</revnumber> <date>07 dec 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>finjustering av python-porteringen</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:125
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.26</revnumber> <date>11 Aug 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>port all tools from perl/bash to python</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.26</revnumber> <date>11 aug 2017</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>portera alla verktyg från perl/bash till python</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:131
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21 March 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, test cleanups</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.25</revnumber> <date>21 mars 2016</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>programfixar, uppstädning av tester</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:137
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.24</revnumber> <date>29 maj 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>programfix</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:143
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fix</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.23</revnumber> <date>17 maj 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>programfix</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:149
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>07 May 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.22</revnumber> <date>07 maj 2015</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>programfixar, borttagning av föråldrade "
++"funktioner</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:155
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 Jul 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, dropping deprecated features</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.21</revnumber> <date>17 jul 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>programfixar, borttagning av föråldrade "
++"funktioner</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:161
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16 Feb 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, markdown support, style improvements</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.20</revnumber> <date>16 feb 2014</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>programfixar, stöd för markdown, "
++"stilförbättringar</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:167
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 Jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.19</revnumber> <date>05 jun 2013</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>programfixar</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:173
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 Sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, speedups, markdown support</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>programfixar, uppsnabbningar, stöd för markdown</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:179
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 Feb 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>urgent bug fix update</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 feb 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>brådskande programfixuppdatering</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:185
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>programfixar, layoutförbättringar</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:191
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 May 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 maj 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>program- och regressionsfixar</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:197
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 March 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes and performance improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 mars 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>programfixar och prestandaförbättringar</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:203
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>broken tarball update</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 december 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>uppdatering på grund av "
++"trasigt tar-arkiv</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:209
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>new tool features and "
++"bugfixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 december 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>nya verktygsfunktioner och "
++"programfixar</revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: revhistory/revision
++#: C/index.docbook:215
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 November 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>GNOME doc-utils migration</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 november 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>GNOME doc-utils migration</"
++"revremark>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:228
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "Introduktion"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:230
++msgid ""
++"This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how "
++"it is used."
++msgstr ""
++"Detta kapitel introducerar GTK-Doc och ger en överblick över vad det är och "
++"hur det används."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:236
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "Vad är GTK-Doc?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:238
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the "
++"public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can "
++"also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc används för att dokumentera C-kod. Det används vanligen för att "
++"dokumentera det publika API:t för bibliotek, så som GTK+- och GNOME-"
++"biblioteken. Men det kan också användas för att dokumentera programkod."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:246
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "Hur fungerar GTK-Doc?"
++
++# sebras: how do I translate header files?
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:248
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source "
++"files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the "
++"template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only "
++"document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce "
++"output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc fungerar så att det använder dokumentation för funktioner placerad "
++"inuti källkodsfilerna i speciellt formaterade kommentarsblock, eller "
++"dokumentation som lagts till i mallfilerna som GTK-Doc använder (notera dock "
++"att GTK-Doc endast kommer att dokumentera funktioner som deklarerats i "
++"huvudfiler; det kommer inte att producera utdata för statiska funktioner)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:255
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc consists of a number of python scripts, each performing a different "
++"step in the process."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc består av ett antal python-skript som vart och ett utför olika steg "
++"i processen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:260
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "Det finns 5 huvudsteg i processen:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:267
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the "
++"source files with the documentation for each function, macro, structs or "
++"unions, etc."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Skriva dokumentationen.</guilabel> Författaren fyller i "
++"källkodsfilerna med dokumentation för varje funktion, makro, struct eller "
++"union, o.s.v."
++
++# sebras: more header files...
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:276
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code "
++"looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. "
++"It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> "
++"containing a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according "
++"to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to "
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. The author can rearrange "
++"the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the "
++"final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><"
++"module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations "
++"found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some symbols to show "
++"up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or "
++"the declaration should appear differently, one can place entities similar to "
++"the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><"
++"module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Samla ihop information om koden.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"scan</application> söker genom huvudfilerna för koden och letar efter "
++"deklarationer av funktioner, makron, uppräkningar, strukturer och unioner. "
++"Det skapar sedan filen <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> som "
++"innehåller en lista över deklarationerna, och placerar dem i avsnitt efter "
++"vilken huvudfil de finns i. Vid första körningen kommer denna fil att "
++"kopieras till <filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. Författaren "
++"kan, genom att omarrangera avsnitten och ändra ordningen för deklarationerna "
++"inom dem, framställa den önskade, slutgiltiga ordningen. Den andra filen det "
++"genererar är <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>. Denna fil "
++"innehåller de fullständiga deklarationerna som hittats av detektorn. Om man "
++"av något skäl vill att vissa symboler ska visas i dokumentation då den "
++"fullständiga deklarationen inte kan hittas av detektorn, eller om "
++"deklarationen ska visas annorlunda, kan man placera rader liknande de som "
++"finns i <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> i <filename><"
++"module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:293
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> can also be used to dynamically "
++"query a library about any GObject subclasses it exports. It saves "
++"information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about "
++"any GObject properties and signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> kan också användas för att "
++"dynamiskt fråga ett bibliotek om vilka GObject-underklasser det exporterar. "
++"Det sparar information om varje objekts position i klasshierarkin och om "
++"vilka GObject-egenskaper och signaler det tillhandahåller."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:299
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> should not be used anymore. It was "
++"needed in the past when GObject was still GtkObject inside gtk+."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> bör inte användas längre. Det "
++"behövdes tidigare när GObject fortfarande var GtkObject inuti gtk+."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:306
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mkdb</application> turns the template files into XML files in the <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code "
++"contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it "
++"gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads docs from "
++"sources and introspection data."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Generera XML och HTML/PDF.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-mkdb</"
++"application> förvandlar mallfilerna till XML-filer i underkatalogen "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename>. Om källkoden innehåller "
++"dokumentation över funktioner i speciella kommentarsblock, så kommer denna "
++"att sammanfogas här. Om det inte finns några tmpl-filer som används så "
++"kommer det endast att läsa dokumentation från källkoden och "
++"introspektionsdata."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:315
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the XML files into HTML files "
++"in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. Likewise "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the XML files into a PDF "
++"document called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> förvandlar XML-filer till HTML-"
++"filer i underkatalogen <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename>. På "
++"samma sätt förvandlar <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> XML-filerna "
++"till ett PDF-dokument kallat <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:321
++msgid ""
++"Files in <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class="
++"\"directory\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One "
++"should never edit them directly."
++msgstr ""
++"Filer i <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename>- och <filename class="
++"\"directory\">html/</filename>-katalogerna skrivs alltid över. Man bör "
++"aldrig redigera dem direkt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:329
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After "
++"installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be "
++"run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, "
++"the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in "
++"the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, "
++"<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-"
++"links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application "
++"will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Fixa korsreferenser mellan dokument.</guilabel> Efter att ha "
++"installerat HTML-filerna kan <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> köras "
++"för att fixa korsreferenser mellan separata dokument. Till exempel GTK+-"
++"dokumentationen innehåller många korsreferenser till typer som dokumenterats "
++"i GLib-manualen. När tar-arkivet med källkod skapas för distribution, "
++"förvandlar <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> alla externa länkar till "
++"webblänkar. När (förgenererad) distribuerad dokumentation installeras kommer "
++"samma program att försöka att förvandla länkarna tillbaka till lokala länkar "
++"(i de fall där dokumentationen finns installerad)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:347
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "Hämta GTK-Doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:350
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "Krav"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:351
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>python 2/3</guilabel> - the main scripts are written in python."
++msgstr "<guilabel>python 2/3</guilabel> - huvudskripten är skrivna i python."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:354
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> - the xslt processor from libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>xsltproc</guilabel> - xslt-processorn från libxslt <ulink url="
++"\"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/\" type=\"http\">xmlsoft.org/XSLT/</ulink>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:358
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> - the docbook xsl stylesheets <ulink url="
++"\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type=\"http"
++"\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-xsl</guilabel> - docbook xsl-stilmallar <ulink url="
++"\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/\" type=\"http"
++"\">sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl</ulink>"
++
++# sebras: remind me how was highlighting translated..?
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:362
++msgid ""
++"One of <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</guilabel> "
++"or <guilabel>vim</guilabel> - optional - used for syntax highlighting of "
++"examples"
++msgstr ""
++"Endera av <guilabel>source-highlight</guilabel>, <guilabel>highlight</"
++"guilabel> eller <guilabel>vim</guilabel> - valfritt - används för "
++"syntaxfärgning av exempel"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:370
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "Om GTK-Doc"
++
++# TODO: https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/issues/52
++# +sources code
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:372
++msgid ""
++"Historically GTK-Doc was used to generate template files from the sources "
++"code. These template files could be used by developers to enter the API "
++"documentation. This approach was rather inconvenient because it required to "
++"keep the generated files under version control. Since GTK-Doc 1.9 it became "
++"possible to place all API information into source comments, which made the "
++"template support obsolete. In version 1.26 template support has been removed."
++msgstr ""
++"Historiskt användes GTK-Doc för att generera mallfiler från källkoden. Dessa "
++"mallfiler kunde användas av utvecklare för att ange API-dokumentationen. "
++"Detta tillvägagångssätt var ganska obekvämt då det krävde att genererade "
++"filer hölls under versionshantering. Sedan GTK-Doc 1.9 är det möjligt att "
++"placera all API-information i källkodskommentarer, vilket gör mallstödet "
++"föråldrat. I version 1.26 har mallstödet tagits bort."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:382 C/index.docbook:396
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(FIXME)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:386
++msgid ""
++"(authors, web pages, mailing list, license, future plans, comparison with "
++"other similar systems.)"
++msgstr ""
++"(författare, webbsidor, sändlistor, licens, framtida planer, jämförelse med "
++"andra liknande system.)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:394
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "Om denna handbok"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:400
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr "(vem är den avsett för, var kan du få tag i den, licens)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:409
++msgid "Project Setup"
++msgstr "Projektkonfiguration"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:411
++msgid ""
++"This Chapter describes the steps that are necessary to integrate GTK-Doc "
++"into your project. The integration of GTK-Doc into a project includes the "
++"following steps:"
++msgstr ""
++"Detta kapitel beskriver stegen som är nödvändiga för att integrera GTK-Doc i "
++"ditt projekt. Integreringen av GTK-Doc till ett projekt inkluderar följande "
++"steg:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:419
++msgid ""
++"Preparation of the directory structure and creating required configuration "
++"files for your GTK-Doc documentation (see <link linkend=\"settingup_docfiles"
++"\"> Setting up a skeleton documentation</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Förberedelse av katalogstrukturen och skapande av konfigurationsfiler som "
++"krävs för din GTK-Doc-dokumentation (se <link linkend=\"settingup_docfiles"
++"\"> Att ställa in en skelettstruktur för dokumentation</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:427
++msgid ""
++"Adjusting the build system to build your documentation using the GTK-Doc "
++"tools. Multiple build systems are supported, in this manual we describe how "
++"to integrate GTK-Doc with <link linkend=\"settingup_autotools\">Autotools</"
++"link>, <link linkend=\"settingup_cmake\">CMake</link>, and <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_plain_makefiles\">plain Makefiles</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Justering av byggsystemet för att bygga din dokumentation med GTK-Doc-"
++"verktygen. Flera byggsystem stöds, i denna handbok beskriver vi hur GTK-Doc "
++"kan integreras med <link linkend=\"settingup_autotools\">Autotools</link>, "
++"<link linkend=\"settingup_cmake\">CMake</link> och <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_plain_makefiles\">vanliga Makefiler</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:437
++msgid ""
++"Adding GTK-Doc specific files to version control and deciding which files to "
++"ignore (see <link linkend=\"settingup_vcs\"> Integration with version "
++"control systems</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Tillägg av GTK-Doc-specifika filer till versionshantering och att bestämma "
++"vilka filer som ska ignoreras (se <link linkend=\"settingup_vcs\"> "
++"Integrering med versionshanteringssystem</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:445
++msgid ""
++"The following sections assume we work on a project called <code>meep</code>. "
++"This project contains two packages (or modules), a library called "
++"<code>libmeep</code> and an end-user app called <code>meeper</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"De följande avsnitten utgår från att vi arbetar på ett projekt som kallas "
++"<code>meep</code>. Detta projekt innehåller två paket (eller moduler), ett "
++"bibliotek som kallas <code>libmeep</code> och ett program för slutanvändare "
++"som kallas <code>meeper</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:454
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "Att ställa in en skelettstruktur för dokumentation"
++
++# https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/issues/52
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:456
++msgid ""
++"A common convention is to place documentation into a folder called "
++"<code>docs</code> inside your top-level project directory. We usually "
++"distinguish between <emphasis>reference documentation</emphasis> intended "
++"for developers and an <emphasis>user manual</emphasis> intended for end-"
++"users. Again the convention is to have separate folders for both. We usually "
++"place the reference documentation in a folder named <code>reference</code> "
++"and the end-user manual in a folder named <code>help</code> as. According to "
++"the above convention the documentation for our <code>libmeep</code> package "
++"would be placed into: <code>docs/reference/libmeep</code>. For packages with "
++"just one library or application the documentation could also be placed "
++"directly into <code>docs/reference</code>. It is not mandatory to use the "
++"above convention, but if you choose to use a different directory structure "
++"you must adjust your build system configuration to match your directory "
++"structure."
++msgstr ""
++"En vanlig konvention är att placera dokumentation i en mapp kallad "
++"<code>docs</code> i toppnivåkatalogen för ditt projekt. Vi skiljer vanligen "
++"mellan <emphasis>referensdokumentation</emphasis> som är avsedd för "
++"utvecklare och en <emphasis>användarhandbok</emphasis> som är avsedd för "
++"slutanvändare. Konventionen är återigen att ha olika mappar för båda. Vi "
++"placerar vanligen referensdokumentationen i en mapp med namnet "
++"<code>reference</code> handboken för slutanvändare i en mapp med namnet "
++"<code>help</code>. Enligt konventionen ovan skulle dokumentationen för vårt "
++"paket <code>libmeep</code> placeras i: <code>docs/reference/libmeep</code>. "
++"För paket med bara ett bibliotek eller program kan dokumentationen också "
++"placeras direkt i <code>docs/reference</code>. Det är inte obligatoriskt att "
++"använda konventionen ovan, men om du väljer att använda en annan "
++"katalogstruktur måste du anpassa din konfiguration för byggsystemet så att "
++"den matchar din katalogstruktur."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:487
++msgid "Example directory structure of <emphasis>meep</emphasis> project"
++msgstr "Exempel på katalogstruktur för projektet <emphasis>meep</emphasis>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:489
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # referensdokumentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" help/ # valfritt: användarhandbok\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++msgid ""
++"In the following sections we will assume a directory structure for our "
++"<emphasis>meep</emphasis> project that uses the above conventions. <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"I avsnitten som följer kommer vi anta en katalogstruktur för vårt projekt "
++"<emphasis>meep</emphasis> som följer konventionerna ovan. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:506
++msgid "Integration with Autotools"
++msgstr "Integrering med Autotools"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:507
++msgid ""
++"Integration of GTK-Doc into an autotools-based build system requires the "
++"following steps:"
++msgstr ""
++"Integrering av GTK-Doc i ett autotools-baserat byggsystem kräver följande "
++"steg:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:513
++msgid ""
++"Ensure that <application>gtkdocize</application> is run once before the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> script. If an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> "
++"script is present, adjust it to check for GTK-Doc and add a call to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"Säkerställ att <application>gtkdocize</application> körs en gång innan "
++"skriptet <filename>configure</filename>. Om skriptet <filename>autogen.sh</"
++"filename> finns tillgängligt, justera det så att det söker efter GTK-Doc och "
++"lägg till ett anrop till <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:521
++msgid ""
++"The main purpose of <application>gtkdocize</application> is to make the "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> Makefile and the <filename>gtk-doc.m4</"
++"filename> macro definition file available to the build system, either by "
++"copying or linking it into the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Huvudsyftet med <application>gtkdocize</application> är att göra Makefilen "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> och makrodefinitionsfilen <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.m4</filename> tillgängliga för byggsystemet, antingen genom att kopiera "
++"eller länka in dem i projektet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:530
++msgid ""
++"Add the necessary <application>autoconf</application> macros to "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> to enable GTK-Doc in your build system to "
++"allow configuration of GTK-Doc via the generated <filename>configure</"
++"filename> script."
++msgstr ""
++"Lägg till de nödvändiga <application>autoconf</application>-makrona till "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> för att aktivera GTK-Doc i ditt byggsystem "
++"för att tillåta konfiguration av GTK-Doc via det genererade "
++"<filename>configure</filename>-skriptet."
++
++# TODO: What? Can't parse this one.
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:536
++msgid ""
++"Among others with registers the <code>--enable-gtk-doc</code> option with "
++"the <filename>configure</filename> script."
++msgstr ""
++"Bland andra med register flaggan <code>--enable-gtk-doc</code> med "
++"<filename>configure</filename>-skriptet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:542
++msgid ""
++"Create an <application>automake</application> script for each application or "
++"library in your project. In the example used in this documentation this step "
++"applies to both <code>meeper</code> and <code>libmeep</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Skapa ett <application>automake</application>-skript för varje program eller "
++"bibliotek i ditt projekt. I exemplet som används i denna dokumentation "
++"tillämpas detta steg för både <code>meeper</code> och <code>libmeep</code>."
++
++# TODO: how *TO* enable
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:551
++msgid ""
++"In the following sections, we will perform the above steps in reverse order. "
++"We start with the <application>automake</application> scripts and work our "
++"way up to <filename>configure.ac</filename> and <filename>autogen.sh</"
++"filename>. Then we show how enable Gtk-Doc in the build system and how to "
++"build the documentation."
++msgstr ""
++"I de följande avsnitten utför vi stegen ovan i omvänd ordning. Vi börjar med "
++"<application>automake</application>-skripten och arbetar vår väg upp till "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> och <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. Sedan "
++"visar vi hur Gtk-Doc aktiveras i byggsystemet och hur dokumentationen byggs."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:561
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "Integrering med automake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:563
++msgid ""
++"First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">examples</filename> sub-directory of the <ulink url=\"https://"
++"gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/raw/master/examples/Makefile.am\"> gtkdoc-"
++"sources</ulink> to your project's reference documentation directory (e.g. "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">docs/reference/<package></filename>). A "
++"local copy should be available under e.g. <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-"
++"tools/examples/Makefile.am</filename>. If you have multiple packages repeat "
++"this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++"Kopiera först <filename>Makefile.am</filename> från underkatalogen <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">examples</filename> från <ulink url=\"https://gitlab."
++"gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/raw/master/examples/Makefile.am\">gtkdoc-sources</"
++"ulink> till ditt projekts referensdokumentationskatalog (t.ex. <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">docs/reference/<paket></filename>). En lokal kopia "
++"bör finnas tillgänglig under t.ex. <filename>/usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-tools/"
++"examples/Makefile.am</filename>. Om du har flera paket, repetera detta för "
++"vart och ett."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/simpara
++#: C/index.docbook:576
++msgid ""
++"Do not forget to add each <filename>Makefile.am</filename> to the "
++"<function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function> macro in <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename>. For <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile.am</filename> you "
++"will need to add the entry <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile</"
++"filename> to <function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function>."
++msgstr ""
++"Glöm inte att lägga till varje <filename>Makefile.am</filename> till makrot "
++"<function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function> i <filename>configure.ac</filename>. "
++"För <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile.am</filename> kommer du behöva "
++"lägga till posten <filename>docs/reference/libmeep/Makefile</filename> till "
++"<function>AC_CONFIG_FILES</function>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:588
++msgid "Example directory structure with <filename>Makefiles.am</filename>"
++msgstr "Exempelkatalogstruktur med <filename>Makefiles.am</filename>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:591
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # reference documentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" help/ # optional: user manual\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/ # referensdokumentation\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" Makefile.am\n"
++" help/ # valfritt: användarhandbok\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:607
++msgid ""
++"Next, you need to customize the copied Makefiles and provide values for the "
++"various parameters in each <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. All settings "
++"have a comment above them that describes their purpose and how to customize "
++"the setting. Most settings are used to supply extra flags to the respective "
++"tools to which they apply. Every tool has a variable of the form <option><"
++"TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option> (e.g. the tool <application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</"
++"application> has an option named <code>MKHTML_OPTIONS</code>). All the tools "
++"support <option>--help</option> to list the supported options."
++msgstr ""
++"Härnäst behöver du anpassa de kopierade Makefilerna och tillhandahålla "
++"värden för de olika parametrarna i varje <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. "
++"Alla inställningarna har en kommentar ovanför som beskriver deras syfte och "
++"hur inställningen kan anpassas. De flesta inställningarna används för att "
++"tillhandahålla extraflaggor till respektive verktyg för vilket de är "
++"aktuella. Varje verktyg har en variabel på formen <option><"
++"VERKTYGSNAMN>_OPTIONS</option> (t.ex. har verktyget <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mkhtml</application> en flagga med namnet <code>MKHTML_OPTIONS</code>). Alla "
++"verktygen har stöd för <option>--help</option> för att lista de flaggor som "
++"stöds."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:631
++msgid ""
++"<option>DOC_MODULE</option> is used to provide the name of the package that "
++"is being documentated (e.g. <code>meeper</code>, or <code>libmeep</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>DOC_MODULE</option> används för att tillhandahålla namnet på paketet "
++"som dokumenteras (t.ex. <code>meeper</code> eller <code>libmeep</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:638
++msgid ""
++"<option>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</option> is used to specify the location of source "
++"directory which GTK-Doc searches for your API documentation. This will "
++"usually be <code> DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/src </code> or a sub-"
++"directory of that directory."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</option> används för att ange platsen för "
++"källkatalogen där GTK-Doc söker efter din API-dokumentation. Detta kommer "
++"vanligen vara <code> DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/src </code> eller en "
++"underkatalog till den katalogen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:651
++msgid ""
++"<option>HFILE_GLOB</option> and <option>CFILE_GLOB</option> are used for "
++"dependencies. Each option take a file-glob (e.g. <code>HFILE_GLOB="
++"$(top_srcdir)/src/*.c</code>). The documentation will be rebuilt if any of "
++"the matched files change."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>HFILE_GLOB</option> och <option>CFILE_GLOB</option> används för "
++"beroenden. Varje flagga tar en file-glob (t.ex. <code>HFILE_GLOB="
++"$(top_srcdir)/src/*.c</code>). Dokumentationen kommer att byggas om ifall "
++"någon av de matchande filerna ändras."
++
++# TODO: (top_srcdir)
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:663
++msgid ""
++"<option>EXTRA_HFILES</option> allows to specify extra header files to "
++"include when scanning for API documentation, which are not found under "
++"<code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</code> (e.g. <code> EXTRA_HFILES=$(top_srcdir}/contrib/"
++"extra.h</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>EXTRA_HFILES</option> låter dig ange extra huvudfiler som ska "
++"inkluderas då API-dokumentation eftersöks, vilka inte hittas under "
++"<code>DOC_SOURCE_DIR</code> (t.ex. <code> EXTRA_HFILES=$(top_srcdir}/contrib/"
++"extra.h</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:673
++msgid ""
++"<option>IGNORE_HFILES</option> allows to specify header files or directories "
++"to ignore when scanning for API documentation. Use the basename of the file "
++"or directory (e.g. <code> IGNORE_HFILES=gtkdebug.h gtkintl.h "
++"private_code_folder</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>IGNORE_HFILES</option> låter dig ange huvudfiler eller kataloger som "
++"ska ignoreras då API-dokumentation eftersöks. Använd basnamnet på filen "
++"eller katalogen (t.ex. <code> IGNORE_HFILES=gtkdebug.h gtkintl.h "
++"private_code_folder</code>)."
++
++# TODO: *image files*
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:683
++msgid ""
++"<option>HTML_IMAGES</option> allows to specify images files which will be "
++"copied into the <filename>html/</filename> directory of the generated "
++"documentation. If your API documentation includes any images they need to be "
++"added to this option (e.g. <code> HTML_IMAGES=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/stock-icons/"
++"stock_about_24.png</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>HTML_IMAGES</option> låter dig ange bildfiler som kommer att "
++"kopieras till katalogen <filename>html/</filename> av den genererade "
++"dokumentationen. Om din API-dokumentation inkluderar några bilder behöver de "
++"läggas till i denna flagga (t.ex. <code> HTML_IMAGES=$(top_srcdir)/gtk/stock-"
++"icons/stock_about_24.png</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:696
++msgid ""
++"<option>content_files</option> allows to specify extra files that are "
++"included by <code>$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)</code> (e.g. <code> "
++"content_files=running.xml building.xml changes-2.0.xml</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>content_files</option> låter dig ange extrafiler som inkluderas av "
++"<code>$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)</code> (t.ex. <code> content_files=running.xml "
++"building.xml changes-2.0.xml</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:707
++msgid ""
++"<option>expand_content_files</option> allows to specify files where "
++"<emphasis>gtk-doc abbreviations</emphasis> such as <code>#GtkWidget</code> "
++"are expanded (e.g. <code> expand_content_files=running.xml</code>)."
++msgstr ""
++"<option>expand_content_files</option> låter dig ange filer där <emphasis>gtk-"
++"doc-förkortningar</emphasis> så som <code>#GtkWidget</code> expanderas (t."
++"ex. <code> expand_content_files=running.xml</code>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:625
++msgid ""
++"The following list explains the most relevant options. Check the example "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename> for additional options. <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Följande lista förklarar de mest relevanta flaggorna. Se <filename>Makefile."
++"am</filename>-exemplet för ytterligare flaggor. <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:722
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Integrering med autoconf"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:724
++msgid ""
++"Integration with <application>autoconf</application> is very simple and "
++"includes one required step and an additional optional (but recommended) "
++"step. The first step is to add the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro "
++"to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This registers several "
++"configure options to enable GTK-Doc and allows you to set default arguments "
++"for <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"Integrering med <application>autoconf</application> är väldigt enkel och "
++"inkluderar ett obligatoriskt steg och ett ytterligare valfritt (men "
++"rekommenderat) steg. Det första steget är att lägga till "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>-makrot till ditt <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename>-skript. Detta registrerar flera konfigurationsflaggor för att "
++"aktivera GTK-Doc och låter dig ställa in standardargument för "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: warning/simpara
++#: C/index.docbook:736
++msgid ""
++"Make sure that the <code>GTK_DOC_CHECK</code> macro is not indented. The "
++"macro must start at the beginning of the line and should not start with "
++"whitespace."
++msgstr ""
++"Säkerställ att makrot <code>GTK_DOC_CHECK</code> inte är indenterat. Makrot "
++"måste inledas på början av raden och får inte börja med blanktecken."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:743
++msgid ""
++"The second step is to add the <code>AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)</code> to your "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. This is not required but helps "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++"definition (e.g <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename>) which contains the "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro to your project's macro directory. "
++"Without this, the GTK_DOC_CHECK macro might not be found and you would need "
++"to explicitly tell the <application>aclocal</application> tool where to find "
++"the macro definition file."
++msgstr ""
++"Det andra steget är att lägga till <code>AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)</code> till "
++"din <filename>configure.ac</filename>. Detta krävs inte men hjälper "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> att automatiskt kopiera "
++"makrodefinitionen (t.ex. <filename>gtk-doc.m4</filename>) som innehåller "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>-makrot till ditt projekts makrokatalog. "
++"Utan detta kanske GTK_DOC_CHECK-makrot inte hittas och du skulle behöva "
++"explicit berätta för <application>aclocal</application>-verktyget var "
++"makrodefinitionsfilen kan hittas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:756
++msgid "Minimal integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "Minimal integrering med autoconf"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:757
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"# rekommenderat: ställ in m4-katalog\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# valfritt: registrera gtk-doc i configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:772
++msgid "Integration with optional gtk-doc dependency"
++msgstr "Integrering med valfritt gtk-doc-beroende"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:773
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"# recommended: set m4 directory\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# optional: register gtk-doc in configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"# rekommenderat: ställ in m4-katalog\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"# valfritt: registrera gtk-doc i configure\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.28])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:766
++msgid ""
++"The above example works, but will require all developers to have gtk-doc "
++"installed. A better way is to make building the documentation optional as "
++"shown in the next example: <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Exemplet ovan fungerar, men skulle kräva att alla utvecklare har gtk-doc "
++"installerat. Ett bättre sätt är att göra byggande av dokumentationen "
++"valfritt på det sätt som visas i nästa exempel: <_:example-1/>"
++
++# sebras: <function> or <symbol>?
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:786
++msgid ""
++"The first argument is used to check for the Gtk-Doc version at configure "
++"time. The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application>. The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several "
++"configure switches:"
++msgstr ""
++"Det första argumentet används för att leta efter Gtk-Doc-versionen under "
++"konfigurationen. Det andra, valfria, argumentet används av "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>. Makrot <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> "
++"lägger också till flera configure-flaggor:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:795
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr "--with-html-dir=SÖKVÄG : sökväg till installerad dokumentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:796
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc : använd gtk-doc för att bygga dokumentation "
++"[standardvärde=no]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:797
++msgid ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : bygg dokumentation i html-format [standardvärde=yes]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:798
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : bygg dokumentation i pdf-format [standardvärde=no]"
++
++#. (itstool) path: important/para
++#: C/index.docbook:802
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--"
++"enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. "
++"Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for "
++"users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc är inaktiverat som standard! Kom ihåg att skicka flaggan <option>”--"
++"enable-gtk-doc”</option> vid nästa körning av <filename>configure</"
++"filename>. Annars kommer förgenererad dokumentation att installeras (vilket "
++"är rimligt för användare men inte för utvecklare)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:810
++msgid ""
++"After all changes to <filename>configure.ac</filename> are made, update the "
++"<filename>configure</filename> file. This can be done by re-running "
++"<code>autogen.sh</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Efter att alla ändringar i <filename>configure.ac</filename> är gjorda, "
++"uppdatera filen <filename>configure</filename>. Detta kan göras genom att "
++"köra om <code>autogen.sh</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:818
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "Integrering med autogen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:820
++msgid ""
++"Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup "
++"the build infrastructure after the project was checked out from a version "
++"control system (such as git or svn). GTK-Doc comes with a script called "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> which can be used to copy the necessary "
++"files needed by Gtk-Doc to the source directory."
++msgstr ""
++"De flesta projekt kommer att ha ett <filename>autogen.sh</filename>-skript "
++"för att ställa in infrastrukturen för bygget efter utcheckning från ett "
++"versionshanteringssystem (så som git eller svn). GTK-Doc kommer med ett "
++"skript som heter <application>gtkdocize</application> som kan användas för "
++"att kopiera nödvändiga filer som behövs av Gtk-Doc till källkatalogen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:828
++msgid "It should be run before autoreconf, autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr "Det bör köras före autoreconf, autoheader, automake eller autoconf."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:833
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Köra gtkdocize från autogen.sh"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:834
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:842
++msgid "Conditionally run gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "Köra gtkdocize villkorligt från autogen.sh"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:843
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"GTKDOCIZE=$(which gtkdocize 2>/dev/null)\n"
++"if test $? -ne 0; then\n"
++" echo \"No gtk-doc support found. You can't build the docs.\"\n"
++"else\n"
++" $GTKDOCIZE || exit 1\n"
++"fi\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"GTKDOCIZE=$(which gtkdocize 2>/dev/null)\n"
++"if test $? -ne 0; then\n"
++" echo \"Inget gtk-doc-stöd funnet. Du kan inte bygga dokumentationen.\"\n"
++"else\n"
++" $GTKDOCIZE || exit 1\n"
++"fi\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:854
++msgid ""
++"When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.make</filename> to your project root (or any directory specified by the "
++"<option>--docdir</option> option)."
++msgstr ""
++"När <application>gtkdocize</application> kör kopierar det <filename>gtk-doc."
++"make</filename> till din projektrot (eller den katalog som anges med flaggan "
++"<option>--docdir</option>)."
++
++# TODO: Strange last sentence
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:860
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> checks your <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename> script for the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro. The "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro can be used to pass extra arguments "
++"to the <application>gtkdocize</application> script. the 2nd parameter in the "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> macro."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> söker i ditt <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename>-skript efter makrot <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>. Makrot "
++"<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> kan användas för att skicka extra "
++"argument till skriptet <application>gtkdocize</application>. den andra "
++"parametern i <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>-makrot."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:869
++msgid ""
++"Alternatively, additional arguments can also be passed to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> via the <function>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</"
++"function> environment variable, or by directly specifying them to "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> in <filename>autogen.sh</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Alternativt kan ytterligare argument också skickas till "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> via miljövariabeln "
++"<function>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</function>, eller genom att ange dem direkt till "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> i <filename>autogen.sh</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:880
++msgid "Executing GTK-Doc from the Build System"
++msgstr "Köra GTK-Doc från byggsystemet"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:882
++msgid ""
++"After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then "
++"give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run "
++"<filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++"Efter de tidigare stegen är det dags att köra bygget. Först måste vi köra om "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>. Om detta skript kör configure åt dig, kan "
++"du ge det flaggan <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option>. Annars kör manuellt "
++"<filename>configure</filename> med denna flagga efteråt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:889
++msgid ""
++"The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-"
++"directories. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past ."
++"sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Den första körningen av make genererar flera extra filer i doc-katalogerna. "
++"De viktiga är <filename><paket>.types</filename>, <filename><"
++"paket>-docs.xml</filename> (tidigare .sgml), <filename><paket>-"
++"sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:897
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "Att köra dokumentationsbygget"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:898
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:905
++msgid ""
++"Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename>. With this initial setup you will only see a very "
++"simple document. The next chapter will teach you how to add API "
++"documentation to your code via special comment blocks. The Chapter "
++"afterwards introduces <link linkend=\"metafiles\">additional files</link> "
++"and shows how to edit the <link linkend=\"metafiles_master\">master "
++"template</link> to add additional chapters and sections to your "
++"documentation files."
++msgstr ""
++"Nu kan du peka din webbläsare till <filename>docs/reference/<paket>/"
++"index.html</filename>. Med denna ursprungliga konfiguration kommer du bara "
++"se ett väldigt enkelt dokument. Nästa kapitel kommer att lära dig hur du "
++"lägger till API-dokumentation till din kod via speciella kommentarsblock. "
++"Kapitlet efteråt introducerar <link linkend=\"metafiles\">ytterligare filer</"
++"link> och visar hur <link linkend=\"metafiles_master\">huvudmallen</link> "
++"redigeras för att lägga till ytterligare kapitel och avsnitt till dina "
++"dokumentationsfiler."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:921
++msgid "Integration with CMake build systems"
++msgstr "Integrering med CMake-byggsystem"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:923
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc now provides a <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename> module (and "
++"the corresponding <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename> module). "
++"This provides a <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal> command that you can "
++"set in your <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc kommer nu att producera en <filename>GtkDocConfig.cmake</filename>-"
++"modul (och motsvarande <filename>GtkDocConfigVersion.cmake</filename>-"
++"modul). Detta tillhandahåller ett <literal>gtk_doc_add_module</literal>-"
++"kommando som du kan ställa in i din <filename>CMakeLists.txt</filename>-fil."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:933
++msgid "Example of using GTK-Doc from CMake"
++msgstr "Exempel på användning av GTK-Doc från CMake"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:934
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Create the doc-libmeep target.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Build doc-libmeep as part of the default target. Without this, you would\n"
++"# have to explicitly run something like `make doc-libmeep` to build the docs.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Install the docs. (This assumes you're using the GNUInstallDirs CMake module\n"
++"# to set the CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR variable correctly).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"find_package(GtkDoc 1.25 REQUIRED)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Skapa målet doc-libmeep.\n"
++"gtk_doc_add_module(\n"
++" libmeep ${CMAKE_SOURCE_DIR}/libmeep\n"
++" XML meep-docs.xml\n"
++" LIBRARIES libmeep\n"
++")\n"
++"\n"
++"# Bygg doc-libmeep som standardmålet. Utan detta måste du uttryckligen\n"
++"# köra något i stil med `make doc-libmeep` för att bygga dokumentationen.\n"
++"add_custom_target(documentation ALL DEPENDS doc-libmeep)\n"
++"\n"
++"# Installera dokumentationen. (Detta förutsätter att du använder CMake-modulen\n"
++"# GNUInstallDirs för att ställa in variabeln CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR korrekt).\n"
++"install(DIRECTORY ${CMAKE_CURRENT_BINARY_DIR}/libmeep/html\n"
++" DESTINATION ${CMAKE_INSTALL_DOCDIR})\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:931
++msgid "The following example shows how to use this command. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Det följande exemplet visar hur du använder detta kommando. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:958
++msgid "Integration with plain makefiles or other build systems"
++msgstr "Integrering med vanliga makefiler eller andra byggsystem"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:960
++msgid ""
++"In the case one does not want to use automake and therefore <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.mak</filename> one will need to call the gtkdoc tools in the right order "
++"in own makefiles (or other build tools)."
++msgstr ""
++"I det fall man inte vill använda automake och därför inte heller "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> kommer man att behöva anropa gtkdoc-"
++"verktygen i rätt ordning i sina egna makefiler (eller andra byggverktyg)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:967
++msgid "Documentation build steps"
++msgstr "Byggsteg för dokumentation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:968
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <source-dir>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<source-dir>\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// källkod har ändrats\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) <källkodskatalog>\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --source-dir=<källkodskatalog>\n"
++"// xml-filer har ändrats\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:982
++msgid ""
++"One will need to look at the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> and "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> to pick the extra options needed."
++msgstr ""
++"Man kommer att behöva titta i <filename>Makefile.am</filename> och "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> för att plocka ut de extra flaggor som "
++"behövs."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:989
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "Integrering med versionshanteringssystem"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:991
++msgid ""
++"As a rule of thumb, it's the files you edit which should go under version "
++"control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><package>."
++"types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the "
++"past .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Som en tumregel är det filerna du redigerar som bör versionshanteras. För "
++"typiska projekt är det följande filer: <filename><paket>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><paket>-docs.xml</filename> (tidigare .sgml), "
++"<filename><paket>-sections.txt</filename>, <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:999
++msgid ""
++"Files in the <filename>xml/</filename> and <filename>html/</filename> "
++"directories should not go under version control. Neither should any of the "
++"<filename>.stamp</filename> files."
++msgstr ""
++"Filer i katalogerna <filename>xml/</filename> och <filename>html/</filename> "
++"bör inte versionshanteras. Detsamma gäller <filename>.stamp</filename>-"
++"filerna."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1009
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "Att dokumentera koden"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1011
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code "
++"documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure "
++"from other sources. During the next section you will find all information "
++"about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc använder källkodskommentarer med en speciell syntax för "
++"koddokumentation. Vidare så hämtar det information om din projektstruktur "
++"från olika källor. Under nästa avsnitt kommer du att hitta information om "
++"syntaxen i kommentarerna."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1022 C/index.docbook:1048
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc-kommentarsblock"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1023
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1018
++msgid ""
++"The GTK-Doc scanner can handle the majority of C headers fine. In the case "
++"of receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special case, one "
++"can hint GTK-Doc to skip over them. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc-detektorn kan hantera majoriteten av C-huvuden bra. I det fall när "
++"du får varningar från detektorn som ser ut som ett specialfall, kan du tipsa "
++"GTK-Doc att hoppa över dem. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1032
++msgid "Limitations"
++msgstr "Begränsningar"
++
++# sebras: no 's in the original
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1033
++msgid ""
++"Note, that GTK-Doc's supports <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> but "
++"not <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> or other combinations."
++msgstr ""
++"Notera att GTK-Doc har stöd för <code>#ifndef(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> men "
++"inte <code>#if !defined(__GTK_DOC_IGNORE__)</code> eller andra kombinationer."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1043
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "Dokumentationskommentarer"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1049
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifierare:\n"
++" * dokumentation …\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1045
++msgid ""
++"A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation "
++"block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"En flerradskommentar som börjar med en extra ”*” markerar ett "
++"dokumentationsblock som kommer att hanteras av GTK-Doc-verktygen. <_:"
++"example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1058
++msgid ""
++"The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is "
++"related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add "
++"table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++"'Identifierare' är en rad med namnet på det objekt som kommentaren är "
++"relaterad till. Syntaxen skiljer sig lite beroende på objekt. (TODO lägg "
++"till tabell som visar identifierare)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1064
++msgid ""
++"The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol "
++"types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter "
++"description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows "
++"the detailed description. All lines (outside program listings and CDATA "
++"sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph "
++"breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-"
++"asterisk-blank-blank). This is useful in preformatted text (code listings)."
++msgstr ""
++"Blocket 'dokumentation' skiljer sig också för varje symboltyp. Symboltyper "
++"som får parametrar så som funktioner eller makron har en "
++"parameterbeskrivning först, åtföljd av en blankrad (bara en ”*”). Efteråt "
++"följer den detaljerade beskrivningen. Alla rader (utanför programlistningar "
++"och CDATA-avsnitt) som endast innehåller ” *” (blanksteg-asterisk) "
++"konverteras till styckeavgränsare. Om du inte vill ha en styckeavgränsare, "
++"ändra till ” * ” (blanksteg-asterisk-blanksteg-blanksteg). Detta är "
++"användbart i förformaterad text (kodlistningar)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1081
++msgid ""
++"What it is: The name for a class or function can sometimes be misleading for "
++"people coming from a different background."
++msgstr ""
++"Vad är detta: Namnet på en klass eller en funktion kan ibland vara "
++"vilseledande för personer med annan bakgrund."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1087
++msgid ""
++"What it does: Tell about common uses. Put it in relation with the other API."
++msgstr ""
++"Vad gör det: Berättar om vanliga användningsfall. Sätter det i relation med "
++"det andra API:t."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1077
++msgid "When documenting code, describe two aspects: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "När du dokumenterar kod, beskriv två aspekter: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1102
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Använd funktion() för att referera till funktioner eller makron som tar "
++"argument."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1107
++msgid ""
++"Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to "
++"parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr ""
++"Använd @param för att referera till parametrar. Använd också detta när du "
++"refererar till parametrar för andra funktioner, relaterade till den som "
++"beskrivs."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1113
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr ""
++"Använd %konstant för att referera till en konstant, t.ex. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1118
++msgid ""
++"Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and "
++"macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr ""
++"Använd #symbol för att referera till andra typer av symboler, t.ex. "
++"strukturer eller uppräkningar och makron som inte tar argument."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1124
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal."
++msgstr "Använd #Objekt::signal för att referera till en GObject-signal."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1129
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property."
++msgstr "Använd #Objekt:egenskap för att referera till en GObject-egenskap."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1134
++msgid ""
++"Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure and #GObjectClass."
++"foo_bar() to refer to a vmethod."
++msgstr ""
++"Använd #Struktur.fält för att referera till ett fält inuti en struktur och "
++"#GObjectKlass.foo_bar() för att referera till en virtuell metod."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1096
++msgid ""
++"One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in "
++"the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. "
++"GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"En fördel med hypertext framför vanlig text är möjligheten att ha länkar i "
++"dokumentet. Att skriva korrekta taggar för en länk kan dock vara tröttsamt. "
++"GTK-Doc hjälper då till med att tillhandahålla flera användbara "
++"förkortningar. <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1143
++msgid ""
++"If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or "
++"'#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML "
++"entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&"
++"commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them "
++"with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++"Om du behöver använda specialtecken ”<”, ”>”, ”()”, ”@”, ”%” eller ”#” "
++"i din dokumentation utan att GTK-Doc ändrar dem kan du använda XML-"
++"entiteterna ”&lt;”, ”&gt;”, ”&lpar;”, ”&rpar;”, ”&"
++"commat;”, ”&percnt;” respektive ”&num;” eller använda "
++"kontrollsekvensen ”\\”."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1152
++msgid ""
++"DocBook can do more than just links. One can also have lists, examples, "
++"headings, and images. As of version 1.20, the preferred way is to use a "
++"subset of the basic text formatting syntax called <ulink url=\"http://"
++"daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink>. On older GTK-Doc "
++"versions any documentation that includes Markdown will be rendered as is. "
++"For example, list items will appear as lines starting with a dash."
++msgstr ""
++"DocBook kan mer än bara länkar. Du kan också ha listor, exempel, rubriker "
++"och bilder. Från och med version 1.20, är det föredragna sättet att använda "
++"en delmängd av den grundläggande textformateringssyntaxen som kallas <ulink "
++"url=\"http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">Markdown</ulink>. Äldre "
++"GTK-Doc-versioner kommer dokumentation som inkluderar markdown att renderas "
++"som den är. Till exempel kommer listobjekt att visas som att de börjar med "
++"ett bindestreck."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1163
++msgid ""
++"While markdown is now preferred one can mix both. One limitation here is "
++"that one can use docbook xml within markdown, but markdown within docbook "
++"xml is not supported."
++msgstr ""
++"Då markdown numera föredras kan du blanda båda. En begränsning här är att du "
++"kan använda docbook-xml inuti markdown, men markdown inuti docbook-xml stöds "
++"inte."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1169
++msgid ""
++"In older GTK-Doc releases, if you need support for additional formatting, "
++"you would need to enable the usage of docbook XML tags inside doc-comments "
++"by putting <option>--xml-mode</option> (or <option>--sgml-mode</option>) in "
++"the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"I äldre GTK-Doc-versioner var du tvungen, om du ville ha stöd för "
++"ytterligare formatering, att aktivera användningen av docbook-XML-taggar "
++"inuti dok-kommentarer genom att lägga till <option>--xml-mode</option> "
++"(eller <option>--sgml-mode</option>) i variabeln <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</"
++"symbol> inuti <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++
++# sebras: markdown or Markdown?
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1178
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block using Markdown"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc-kommentarsblock som använder Markdown"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1179
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * documentation paragraph ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Second Sub Heading\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub Heading With a Link Anchor # {#heading-two}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * more documentation:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 1\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Paragraph inside a list item.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - list item 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. another numbered list item\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Another paragraph. [A Link to the GNOME Website](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [A link to the heading anchor above][heading-two]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * A C-language example:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Gorgeous!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Identifierare:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * stycke med dokumentation …\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Underrubrik #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ## Underunderrubrik\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Underrubrik med länkankare # {#andra-rubriken}\n"
++" *\n"
++" * mer dokumentation:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - listobjekt 1\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Stycke inuti listobjekt.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * - listobjekt 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 1. numrerat listobjekt\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 2. ytterligare ett numrerat listobjekt\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Ett annat stycke. [En länk till GNOME:s webbplats](http://www.gnome.org/)\n"
++" *\n"
++" * \n"
++" *\n"
++" * [En länk till rubrikankaret ovan][andra-rubriken]\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Ett C-exempel:\n"
++" * |[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (\"Vackert!\");\n"
++" * ]|\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1218
++msgid ""
++"More examples of what markdown tags are supported can be found in the <ulink "
++"url=\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/Markdown"
++"\">GTK+ Documentation Markdown Syntax Reference</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Fler exempel på vilka markdown-taggar som stöds hittas i <ulink url="
++"\"https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GTK%2B/DocumentationSyntax/Markdown"
++"\">Referensen för GTK+-dokumentationens markdown-syntax</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1224
++msgid ""
++"As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one "
++"cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to "
++"comment those symbols too. This helps other developers to understand your "
++"code. Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without "
++"the 2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made "
++"public, all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and "
++"insert the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++"Som redan nämnts är GTK-Doc avsett för att dokumentera publika API:er. Du "
++"kan därför inte skriva dokumentation för statiska symboler. Likväl är det "
++"bra att kommentera även dessa symboler. Det hjälper andra utvecklare att "
++"förstå din kod. Därför rekommenderar vi att du kommenterar dessa med normala "
++"kommentarer (utan den andra ”*” på den första raden). Om funktionen vid ett "
++"senare tillfälle måste göras publik är allt du behöver göra att lägga till "
++"ytterligare en ”*” i kommentarsblocket och infoga symbolnamnet på rätt "
++"ställe i avsnittsfilen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1239
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "Dokumentationsavsnitt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1241
++msgid ""
++"Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or "
++"module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short "
++"description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Varje avsnitt av dokumentation innehåller information om en klass eller en "
++"modul. För att introducera komponenten kan man skriva ett avsnittsblock. Den "
++"korta beskrivningen används också i innehållsförteckningen. Alla @fälten är "
++"valfria."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1249
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "Kommentarsblock för avsnitt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1250
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: programklassen\n"
++" * @title: Meep-programmet\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Programklassen hanterar …\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1269
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr "SECTION:<namn>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1271
++msgid ""
++"The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name given here "
++"should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Namnet länkar till avsnittsdokumentationen för respektive del i filen "
++"<filename><paket>-sections.txt</filename>. Namnet som anges här bör "
++"matcha taggen <FILE> i filen <filename><paket>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1280
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@short_description"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1282
++msgid ""
++"A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the "
++"links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr ""
++"En enradsbeskrivning av avsnittet som senare kommer att visas efter länkar i "
++"innehållsförteckningen och lägst upp på avsnittssidan."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1289
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr "@title"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1291
++msgid ""
++"The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It "
++"can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr ""
++"Avsnittstiteln är som standard <namn> från SECTION-deklarationen. Den "
++"kan åsidosättas med fältet @title."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1298
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr "@section_id"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1300
++msgid ""
++"Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <"
++"title> is used as a section_id and for other sections it is <"
++"MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++"Åsidosätter användningen av titeln som avsnittsidentifierare. För GObjects "
++"används <title> som ett section_id och för andra avsnitt är det <"
++"MODULE>-<title>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1308
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@see_also"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1310
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section."
++msgstr "En lista över symboler som är relaterade till detta avsnitt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1316
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1323
++msgid ""
++"Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third "
++"parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have "
++"confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after "
++"the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major "
++"release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be "
++"rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++"Stable - Avsikten med ett stabilt gränssnitt är att möjliggöra för tredje "
++"parter att utveckla program mot dessa gränssnitt, släppa dem och vara säkra "
++"på att de kommer att köra på alla programfixversioner av produkten (efter "
++"den i vilken gränssnittet introducerats, och inom samma huvudversion). Även "
++"vid en ny huvudversion förväntas inkompatibla ändringar vara få och vara väl "
++"motiverade."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1335
++msgid ""
++"Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are "
++"typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly "
++"changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a "
++"more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source "
++"or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++"Unstable - Instabila gränssnitt är experimentella eller i en övergångsfas. "
++"De används typiskt för att ge utomstående utvecklare tidig tillgång till ny "
++"eller snabbt föränderlig teknologi, eller för att tillhandahålla "
++"provisoriska lösningar för ett problem där en mer generell lösning förutses. "
++"Inga påståenden görs om endera källkods- eller binärkompatibilitet från en "
++"programfixversion till nästa."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1347
++msgid ""
++"Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but "
++"that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in "
++"specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++"Private - Ett gränssnitt som kan användas inom GNOME-stacken i sig, men som "
++"inte dokumenterats för slutanvändare. Sådana funktioner bör endast användas "
++"på angivna och dokumenterade sätt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1356
++msgid ""
++"Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require "
++"end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be "
++"Internal."
++msgstr ""
++"Internal - ett gränssnitt som är internt för en modul och inte behöver "
++"slutanvändardokumentation. Funktioner som är odokumenterade förutsätts vara "
++"interna."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1318
++msgid ""
++"An informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend "
++"the use of one of these terms: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"En informell beskrivning över stabiliteten för detta API. Vi rekommenderar "
++"att använda en av dessa termer: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1368
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1370
++msgid ""
++"The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a "
++"comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"<literal>#include</literal>-filerna som ska visas i avsnittssammanfattningen "
++"(en kommaavgränsad lista), vilket åsidosätter det globala värdet från <link "
++"linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">avsnittsfilen</link> eller kommandoraden. "
++"Detta objekt är valfritt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1379
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr "@image"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1381
++msgid ""
++"The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This "
++"will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of "
++"a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"Bilden som ska visas längst upp på referenssidan för detta avsnitt. Detta "
++"kommer ofta att vara någon form av diagram för att illustrera det visuella "
++"utseendet för en klass eller ett diagram över dess relationer med andra "
++"klasser. Detta objekt är valfritt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1392
++msgid ""
++"To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs "
++"into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++"För att undvika onödig omkompilering efter dokumentationsändringar, placera "
++"avsnittsdokumentationen i c-källkoden där möjligt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1401
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "Dokumentationssymboler"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1403
++msgid ""
++"Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is "
++"documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the "
++"definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus "
++"functions are usually documented in the c-source and macros, structs and "
++"enums in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++"Varje symbol (funktion, makro, struktur, uppräkning, signal och egenskap) är "
++"dokumenterad i ett separat block. Blocket placeras bäst intill definitionen "
++"av symbolerna så att det är enkelt att hålla dem synkroniserade. Därför "
++"dokumenteras funktioner vanligtvis i c-källkoden och makron, strukturer och "
++"uppräkningar i huvudfilen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1411 C/index.docbook:1477
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr "Generella taggar"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1413
++msgid ""
++"You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell "
++"when an API was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++"Du kan lägga till versioneringsinformation i alla dokumentationselement för "
++"att berätta när ett API introducerats eller blev föråldrat."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1418
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr "Versioneringstaggar"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1419
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "Since:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1421
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr ""
++"Beskrivning över från och med vilken version av koden som API:t är "
++"tillgängligt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1426
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "Deprecated:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1428
++msgid ""
++"Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The "
++"description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr ""
++"Stycke som betecknar att denna funktion inte bör användas längre. "
++"Beskrivningen bör peka läsaren vidare till det nya API:t."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1436
++msgid ""
++"You can also add stability information to all documentation elements to "
++"indicate whether API stability is guaranteed for them for all future minor "
++"releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Du kan också lägga till stabilitetsinformation för alla "
++"dokumentationselement för att indikera huruvida API-stabilitet är garanterad "
++"för dem för alla framtida programfix-versioner av projektet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1442
++msgid ""
++"The default stability level for all documentation elements can be set by "
++"passing the <option>--default-stability</option> argument to "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> with one of the values below."
++msgstr ""
++"Standardvärdet för stabilitetsnivån för alla dokumentations element kan "
++"ställas in genom att ange argumentet <option>--default-stability</option> "
++"till <application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> med endera av värdena nedan."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1448
++msgid "Stability Tags"
++msgstr "Stabilitetstaggar"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1449
++msgid "Stability: Stable"
++msgstr "Stability: Stable"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1451
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as stable. This is for public APIs which are guaranteed to "
++"remain stable for all future minor releases of the project."
++msgstr ""
++"Markera elementet som stabilt. Detta är för publika API:er som är "
++"garanterade att hållas stabila i alla framtida programfix-versioner av "
++"projektet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1458
++msgid "Stability: Unstable"
++msgstr "Stability: Unstable"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1460
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as unstable. This is for public APIs which are released as "
++"a preview before being stabilised."
++msgstr ""
++"Markera elementet som instabilt. Detta är för publika API:er som är släppta "
++"på förhand innan de blivit stabiliserade."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1466
++msgid "Stability: Private"
++msgstr "Stability: Private"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1468
++msgid ""
++"Mark the element as private. This is for interfaces which can be used by "
++"tightly coupled modules, but not by arbitrary third parties."
++msgstr ""
++"Markera element som privat. Detta är avsett för gränssnitt som kan användas "
++"av tätt sammankopplade moduler, men inte av godtyckliga tredje parter."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1478
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: någon foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Hämtar bar från @foo.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: bar från @foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Använd foo_baz_get_bar() istället.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"…\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1498 C/index.docbook:1508
++msgid "Annotations"
++msgstr "Noteringar"
++
++# sebras: was it called verkygstips? verktygshjälp? I forget...
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1500
++msgid ""
++"Documentation blocks can contain annotation-tags. These tags will be "
++"rendered with tooltips describing their meaning. The tags are used by "
++"gobject-introspection to generate language bindings. A detailed list of the "
++"supported tags can be found on <ulink url=\"http://live.gnome.org/"
++"GObjectIntrospection/Annotations\" type=\"http\">the wiki</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"Dokumentationsblock kan innehålla noteringstaggar. Dessa taggar kommer att "
++"renderas som verktygstips som beskriver deras syfte. Taggarna används av "
++"gobject-introspection för att generera språkbindningar. En detaljerad lista "
++"över vilka taggar som stöds hittas på <ulink url=\"http://live.gnome.org/"
++"GObjectIntrospection/Annotations\" type=\"http\">wikisidan</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1509
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: (annotation): @foo's bar\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (annotation) (another annotation)\n"
++" * (and another annotation)\n"
++" * @foo: (annotation) (another annotation): some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Sets bar on @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar: (notering)\n"
++" * @foo: (notering): någon foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Hämtar bar från @foo.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: (notering): bar från @foo\n"
++" */\n"
++"...\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_set_bar_using_the_frobnicator: (notering) (an annan notering)\n"
++" * (ytterligare en annan notering)\n"
++" * @foo: (notering) (en annan notering): någon foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Ställer in bar i @foo.\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1530 C/index.docbook:1559
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "Kommentarsblock för funktioner"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1536
++msgid ""
++"Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/"
++"unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++"Dokumentera huruvida returnerade objekt, listor, strängar, etc. bör frigöras/"
++"avrefereras/släppas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1542
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr ""
++"Dokumentera huruvida parametrar tillåts vara NULL och vad som händer om de "
++"är NULL."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1547
++msgid ""
++"Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr "Nämn intressanta förvillkor och eftervillkor där lämpligt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1532 C/index.docbook:1618
++msgid "Please remember to: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "Kom ihåg att: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++# sebras: Gtk-doc? GTK-Doc? gtk-doc? macros and functions?
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1554
++msgid ""
++"Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are "
++"private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++"Gtk-doc förutsätter att alla symboler (makron, funktioner) som börjar med "
++"”_” är privata. De behandlas på samma sätt som statiska funktioner."
++
++# sebras: how to translate highlight?
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1560
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * funktionsnamn:\n"
++" * @par1: beskrivning av parameter 1. Dessa kan sträcka sig\n"
++" * över mer än en rad.\n"
++" * @par2: beskrivning av parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: en %NULL-terminerad lista av flera bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Funktionsbeskrivningen ska vara här. Du kan använda @par1 för att\n"
++" * referera till parametrar så att de färgmarkeras i utdata. Du kan också\n"
++" * använda %konstant för konstanter, funktionsnamn2() för funktioner och\n"
++" * #GtkWidget för länkar till andra deklarationer (vilka kan vara dokumenterade\n"
++" * på annat håll).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: ett heltal.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Använd annan_funktion() istället.\n"
++" */\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1581
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr "Funktions-taggar"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1582 C/index.docbook:1789
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "Returns:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1584
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr "Stycke som beskriver det returnerade resultatet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1589
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr "@...:"
++
++# sebras: variadic?
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1591
++msgid ""
++"In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag "
++"(@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++"Om funktionen har variadiska argument bör du använda denna tagg (@Varargs: "
++"fungerar också på grund av historiska skäl)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1601 C/index.docbook:1603
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "Kommentarsblock för egenskaper"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1604
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * EnKomponent:en-egenskap:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Här kan du dokumentera en egenskap.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_EN_EGENSKAP, …);\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1616 C/index.docbook:1635
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "Kommentarsblock för signaler"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1622
++msgid ""
++"Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or "
++"after other signals."
++msgstr ""
++"Dokumentera när en signal sänds ut och huruvida den sänds ut före eller "
++"efter andra signaler."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1628
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr "Dokumentera vad ett program kan göra i signalhanteraren."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1636
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZED] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarized\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobariserad:\n"
++" * @widget: komponenten som erhåller signalen\n"
++" * @foo: någon foo\n"
++" * @bar: någon bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Signalen ::foobariserad sänds ut varje gång någon försöker att foobarisera @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZE] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobariserad\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1653 C/index.docbook:1654
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "Kommentarsblock för strukturer"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1655
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: någon #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Detta är den bästa komponenten någonsin.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" GtkWidget parent_instance;\n"
++"\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1670
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Använd<code>/*< private >*/</code> före privata strukturfält som du "
++"vill gömma. Använd <code>/*< public >*/</code> för det omvända "
++"beteendet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1676
++msgid ""
++"If the first field is \"g_iface\", \"parent_instance\" or \"parent_class\" "
++"it will be considered private automatically and doesn't need to be mentioned "
++"in the comment block."
++msgstr ""
++"Om det första fältet är ”g_iface”, ”parent_instance” eller ”parent_class” "
++"kommer det att anses vara privat automatiskt och behöver inte nämnas i "
++"kommentarsblocket."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1682
++msgid ""
++"Struct comment blocks can also be used for GObjects and GObjectClasses. It "
++"is usually a good idea to add a comment block for a class, if it has "
++"vmethods (as this is how they can be documented). For the GObject itself one "
++"can use the related section docs, having a separate block for the instance "
++"struct would be useful if the instance has public fields. One disadvantage "
++"here is that this creates two index entries of the same name (the structure "
++"and the section)."
++msgstr ""
++"Kommentarsblock för strukturer kan också användas för GObject och "
++"GObjectClass. Det är vanligtvis en bra idé att lägga till ett "
++"kommentarsblock för en klass om den har virtuella metoder (då detta är "
++"sättet på vilket de kan dokumenteras). För GObject i sig kan man använda den "
++"relaterade avsnittsdokumentationen, och ha ett separat block för varje "
++"instansstruktur vore användbart om instansen har publika fält. En nackdel "
++"här är att det skapar två indexposter med samma namn (strukturen och "
++"avsnittet)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1694 C/index.docbook:1695
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr "Kommentarsblock för uppräkningar"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1696
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: någonting foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: någonting bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Uppräkningsvärden som används för saken, för att specificera saken.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1713
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"Använd <code>/*< private >*/</code> före privata uppräkningsvärden som "
++"du vill gömma. Använd <code>/*< public >*/</code> för det omvända "
++"beteendet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1724
++msgid "Inline program documentation"
++msgstr "Infogad programdokumentation"
++
++# sebras: how to translate inline?
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1725
++msgid ""
++"You can document programs and their commandline interface using inline "
++"documentation."
++msgstr ""
++"Du kan dokumentera program och deras kommandoradsgränssnitt med infogad "
++"dokumentation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: variablelist/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1731
++msgid "Tags"
++msgstr "Taggar"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1733
++msgid "PROGRAM"
++msgstr "PROGRAM"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1736
++msgid "Defines the start of a program documentation."
++msgstr "Definierar början av programdokumentationen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1743
++msgid "@short_description:"
++msgstr "@short_description:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1745
++msgid "Defines a short description of the program. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Definierar en kort beskrivning av programmet. (Valfritt)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1752
++msgid "@synopsis:"
++msgstr "@synopsis:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1754
++msgid ""
++"Defines the arguments, or list of arguments that the program can take. "
++"(Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++"Definierar argumenten, eller en lista av argument som programmet kan ta. "
++"(Valfritt)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1762
++msgid "@see_also:"
++msgstr "@see_also:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1764
++msgid "See Also manual page section. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Se vidare i manualavsnitt. (Valfritt)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1771
++msgid "@arg:"
++msgstr "@arg:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1773
++msgid "Argument(s) passed to the program and their description. (Optional)"
++msgstr ""
++"Argument som skickas vidare till programmet och deras beskrivningar. "
++"(Valfritt)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: varlistentry/term
++#: C/index.docbook:1780
++msgid "Description:"
++msgstr "Beskrivning:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1782
++msgid "A longer description of the program."
++msgstr "En längre beskrivning av programmet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: listitem/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1791
++msgid "Specify what value(s) the program returns. (Optional)"
++msgstr "Ange vilka värden programmet returnerar. (Valfritt)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1800
++msgid "Example of program documentation."
++msgstr "Exempel på programdokumentation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1801
++msgid "Program documentation block"
++msgstr "Dokumentationsblock för program"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1802
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * PROGRAM:test-program\n"
++" * @short_description: A test program\n"
++" * @synopsis: test-program [*OPTIONS*...] --arg1 *arg* *FILE*\n"
++" * @see_also: test(1)\n"
++" * @--arg1 *arg*: set arg1 to *arg*\n"
++" * @--arg2 *arg*: set arg2 to *arg*\n"
++" * @-v, --version: Print the version number\n"
++" * @-h, --help: Print the help message\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Long description of program.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: Zero on success, non-zero on failure\n"
++" */\n"
++"int main(int argc, char *argv[])\n"
++"{\n"
++"\treturn 0;\n"
++"}\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * PROGRAM:test-program\n"
++" * @short_description: Ett testprogram\n"
++" * @synopsis: test-program [*FLAGGOR*...] --arg1 *arg* *FIL*\n"
++" * @see_also: test(1)\n"
++" * @--arg1 *arg*: ställ in arg1 på *arg*\n"
++" * @--arg2 *arg*: ställ in arg2 på *arg*\n"
++" * @-v, --version: Skriv ut versionsinformation\n"
++" * @-h, --help: Skriv ut hjälpmeddelandet\n"
++" *\n"
++" * En längre beskrivning av programmet.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: Noll vid framgång, icke-noll vid fel\n"
++" */\n"
++"int main(int argc, char *argv[])\n"
++"{\n"
++"\treturn 0;\n"
++"}\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1828
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr "Användbara DocBook-taggar"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1830
++msgid ""
++"Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr ""
++"Här är några DocBook-taggar som är användbara när man dokumenterar koden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1839
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hashtabeller</link>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1835
++msgid ""
++"To link to another section in the GTK docs: <_:informalexample-1/> The "
++"linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. "
++"For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and "
++"then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class "
++"name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++"För att länka till ett annat avsnitt i GTK-dokumentationen: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/> Länkslutet är XGML/XML-id:t för toppnivåobjektet på "
++"sidan du vill länka till. För de flesta sidorna är detta för närvarande "
++"delen (”gtk”, ”gdk”, ”glib”) och sedan sidans titel (”Hashtabeller”). För "
++"komponenter är detta helt enkelt klassnamnet. Blanksteg och understreck "
++"konverteras till ”-” för att överensstämma med SGML/XML."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1852
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<function>…</function>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1849
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"För att referera till en extern funktion, t.ex. en standardfunktion i C: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1861
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "<example>\n"
++#| " <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++#| " <programlisting>\n"
++#| " ...\n"
++#| " </programlisting>\n"
++#| "</example>\n"
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Att använda en GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1872
++#, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "<informalexample>\n"
++#| " <programlisting>\n"
++#| " ...\n"
++#| " </programlisting>\n"
++#| "</informalexample>\n"
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting language=\"C\">\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1884
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"|[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" ...\n"
++"]|\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"|[<!-- language=\"C\" -->\n"
++" ...\n"
++"]|\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1858
++msgid ""
++"To include example code: <_:informalexample-1/> or possibly this, for very "
++"short code fragments which don't need a title: <_:informalexample-2/> In "
++"both cases, the language attribute is optional and is used as a hint to the "
++"syntax highlighting engine (pygments for html output). For the latter GTK-"
++"Doc also supports an abbreviation: <_:informalexample-3/>"
++msgstr ""
++"För att inkludera exempelkod: <_:informalexample-1/> eller möjligen "
++"följande, för väldigt korta kodfragment som inte behöver en titel: <_:"
++"informalexample-2/> I båda fallen är språkattributet valfritt och används "
++"som ett tips för syntaxmarkeringsmotorn (pygments för html-utmatning). För "
++"det senare fallet har GTK-Doc också stöd för en förkortning: <_:"
++"informalexample-3/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1895
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" …\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" …\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1892
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "För att inkludera punktlistor: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1915
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Säkerställ att du frigjort data efter användning.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1912
++msgid ""
++"To include a note which stands out from the text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"För att inkludera en not som skiljer sig från texten: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1928
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1925
++msgid "To refer to a type: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "För att refera till en typ: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1937
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1934
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"För att referera till en extern struktur (som inte beskrivs i GTK-"
++"dokumentationen): <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1946
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1943
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "För att referera till ett fält för en struktur: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1955
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1952
++msgid ""
++"To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <_:informalexample-1/> but "
++"you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link "
++"to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the "
++"abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"För att referera till ett klassnamn kan vi möjligen använda: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/> men du kommer troligt att använda #GtkWidget istället "
++"(för att automatiskt skapa en länk till GtkWidget-sidan - se <link linkend="
++"\"documenting_syntax\">förkortningarna</link>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1966
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>Detta är viktigt</emphasis>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1963
++msgid "To emphasize text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "För att betona text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1975
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/användare/dokument</filename>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1972
++msgid "For filenames use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "För filnamn använd: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: informalexample/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:1984
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1981
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "För att referera till tangenter använd: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:1994
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr "Fylla i de extra filerna"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:1996
++msgid ""
++"There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the "
++"inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past .sgml), "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Det finns ett antal extra filer som behöver underhållas tillsammans med de "
++"infogade källkodskommentarerna: <filename><paket>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><paket>-docs.xml</filename> (tidigare .sgml), <filename><"
++"paket>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2005
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr "Redigera typfilen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2007
++msgid ""
++"If your library or application includes GObjects, you want their signals, "
++"arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the "
++"documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</"
++"function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Om ditt bibliotek eller program inkluderar GObject så kommer du att vilja "
++"att deras signaler, argument/parametrar och position i hierarkin visas i "
++"dokumentationen. Allt du behöver göra är att lista <function>xxx_get_type</"
++"function>-funktionerna tillsammans med deras huvudfil i filen <filename><"
++"paket>.types</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2016
++msgid "Example <package>.types file"
++msgstr "Exempel på filen <paket>.types"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2017
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2028
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this "
++"list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not "
++"dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++"Sedan GTK-Doc 1.8 kan <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> generera denna "
++"lista åt dig. Lägg bara till ”--rebuild-types” i SCAN_OPTIONS i "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. Om du använder detta tillvägagångssätt bör "
++"du inte distribuera typfilen eller versionshantera den."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2037
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr "Redigera huvuddokumentet"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2039
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the "
++"inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page "
++"per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them "
++"and place them in an order."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc producerar dokumentation i DocBook SGML/XML. När infogade "
++"källkodskommentarer behandlas genererar GTK-Doc en dokumentationssida per "
++"klass eller modul som en separat fil. Huvuddokumentet inkluderar dem och "
++"placerar dem i en ordning."
++
++# sebras: Its -> it's
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2046
++msgid ""
++"While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later runs will "
++"not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the "
++"documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc "
++"has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from "
++"scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there "
++"are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++"Även om GTK-Doc skapar en mall för huvuddokumentet åt dig kommer senare "
++"körningar inte att röra det igen. Detta innebär att man är fri att "
++"strukturera om dokumentationen. Detta inkluderar att gruppera sidor och "
++"lägga till extra sidor. GTK-Doc har numera en testsvit där också "
++"huvuddokumentet återskapas från grunden. Det är en bra idé att titta på "
++"detta då och då för att se om några nya godsaker införts där."
++
++# sebras: for -> from Apart -> together/embedded...
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2056
++msgid ""
++"Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The "
++"benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API "
++"documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol "
++"documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along "
++"with the library."
++msgstr ""
++"Skapa inte handledningar som extra dokument. Skriv bara extra kapitel. "
++"Fördelen med att bädda in handledningen direkt i ditt biblioteks "
++"gränssnittsdokumentation är att det är enkelt att länka från handledningen "
++"till symboldokumentationen. Inbäddad är det större chans att handledningen "
++"blir uppdaterad tillsammans med biblioteket."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2065
++msgid ""
++"So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is "
++"only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there "
++"which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++"Så vilka saker ska ändras i huvuddokumentet? I början är det väldigt lite. "
++"Det finns en del platshållare (text i hakparenteser) som du bör ta hand om."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2072
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr "Huvuddokumentets huvud"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2073
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULNAMN handbok</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" för MODULNAMN [VERSION]\n"
++" Den senaste versionen av detta dokument kan hittas på nätet på\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULNAMN/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULNAMN/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Infoga titel här]</title>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2089
++msgid ""
++"In addition a few option elements are created in commented form. You can "
++"review these and enable them as you like."
++msgstr ""
++"Dessutom finns det ett antal valfria element som skapas i kommenterad form. "
++"Du kan granska dessa och aktivera dem enligt dina egna önskemål."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2095
++msgid "Optional part in the master document"
++msgstr "Valfri del i huvuddokumentet"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2096
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- enable this when you use gobject introspection annotations\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" -->\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <!-- aktivera detta om du vill använda gobject introspection-noteringar\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/annotation-glossary.xml\"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>\n"
++" -->\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2104
++msgid ""
++"Finally you need to add new section whenever you introduce one. The <link "
++"linkend=\"modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</link> tool will remind "
++"you of newly generated xml files that are not yet included into the doc."
++msgstr ""
++"Slutligen behöver du lägga till ett nytt avsnitt när du infogar det. "
++"Verktyget <link linkend=\"modernizing-gtk-doc-1-16\">gtkdoc-check</link> "
++"kommer att påminna dig om nyligen genererade xml-filer som ännu inte "
++"infogats i dokumentationen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2112 C/index.docbook:2147
++msgid "Including generated sections"
++msgstr "Inkludera genererade avsnitt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2113
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>my library</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++" <chapter>\n"
++" <title>mitt bibliotek</title>\n"
++" <xi:include href=\"xml/object.xml\"/>\n"
++" ...\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2125
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr "Redigera avsnittsfilen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2127
++msgid ""
++"The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. "
++"Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control "
++"the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++"Avsnittsfilen används för att organisera dokumentationsutdata från GTK-Doc. "
++"Här kan man ange vilken symbol som hör till vilken modul eller klass och "
++"styra synligheten (publik eller privat)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2133
++msgid ""
++"The section file is a plain text file with tags delimiting sections. Blank "
++"lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines."
++msgstr ""
++"Avsnittsfilen är en vanlig textfil med taggar som avgränsar avsnitt. "
++"Blankrader ignoreras och rader som börjar med ett ”#” behandlas som "
++"kommentarsrader."
++
++#. (itstool) path: note/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2140
++msgid ""
++"While the tags make the file look like xml, it is not. Please do not close "
++"tags like <SUBSECTION>."
++msgstr ""
++"Även om taggarna får filen att se ut som xml, är det inte det. Avsluta inte "
++"taggar så som <SUBSECTION>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2148
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<INCLUDE>libmeep/meep.h</INCLUDE>\n"
++"\n"
++"<SECTION>\n"
++"<FILE>meepapp</FILE>\n"
++"<TITLE>MeepApp</TITLE>\n"
++"MeepApp\n"
++"<SUBSECTION Standard>\n"
++"MEEP_APP\n"
++"...\n"
++"MeepAppClass\n"
++"meep_app_get_type\n"
++"</SECTION>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2165
++msgid ""
++"The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, "
++"without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++"FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++"template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++"converted into the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename> or the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. "
++"(The name of the HTML file is based on the module name and the section "
++"title, or for GObjects it is based on the GObjects class name converted to "
++"lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++"Taggen <FILE> … </FILE> används för att ange filnamnet, utan "
++"något suffix. Om man t.ex. använder ”<FILE>gnome-config</FILE>” "
++"blir resultatet att avsnittsdeklarationerna matas ut i mallfilen "
++"<filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, som kommer att konverteras till "
++"DocBook XML-filen <filename>xml/gnome-config.sgml</filename> eller DocBook "
++"XML-filen <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. (Namnet på HTML-filen "
++"baseras på modulnamnet och avsnittstiteln, för GObject baseras det på "
++"klassnamnet för GObjectet konverterat till gemener)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2177
++msgid ""
++"The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the "
++"section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially "
++"created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if "
++"one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++"Taggen <TITLE> … </TITLE> används för att ange titeln på "
++"avsnittet. Det är bara användbart före mallar skapas initialt (om de "
++"används), eftersom titeln som ställs in i avsnittsfilen åsidosätter denna. "
++"Vidare är detta föråldrat om man använder SECTIONS-kommentarer i källkoden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2184
++msgid ""
++"You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. "
++"Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis "
++"section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject "
++"declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the "
++"documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private "
++"declarations which will not be output (it is a handy way to avoid warning "
++"messages about unused declarations). If your library contains private types "
++"which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of "
++"implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection. "
++"Whether you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs in public or "
++"Standard section depends if they have public entries (variables, vmethods)."
++msgstr ""
++"Du kan gruppera objekt i avsnittet genom att använda taggen <"
++"SUBSECTION>. För närvarande matas en blankrad ut mellan underavsnitt i "
++"sammanfattningsavsnittet. Du kan också använda <SUBSECTION Standard> "
++"för standard GObject-deklarationer (t.ex. funktioner så som "
++"g_object_get_type och makron som G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT(), etc.). För "
++"närvarande utelämnas dessa ur dokumentationen. Du kan också använda <"
++"SUBSECTION Private> för privata deklarationer som inte kommer att matas "
++"ut (det är ett bekvämt sätt att undvika varningsmeddelanden om oanvända "
++"deklarationer). Om ditt bibliotek innehåller privata typer som du inte vill "
++"ska dyka upp i objekthierarkin och i listan över implementerade eller krävda "
++"gränssnitt, lägg till dem i ett privat avsnitt. Huruvida du vill placera "
++"GObject och GObjectClass-liknande strukturer i publika eller standardavsnitt "
++"beror på om de har publika poster (variabler, virtuella metoder)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2203
++msgid ""
++"You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the "
++"#include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-"
++"separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it "
++"outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. "
++"If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++"Du kan också använda <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> för att ange "
++"#include-filerna som ska visas i sammanfattningsavsnitten. Den innehåller en "
++"kommaavgränsad lista av #include-filer, utan vinkelparenteser. Om du ställer "
++"in det utanför några avsnitt kommer det att påverka alla avsnitt tills "
++"slutet på filen. Om du ställer in det inom ett avsnitt kommer det bara att "
++"påverka det avsnittet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2217
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr "Kontrollera resultatet"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2219
++msgid ""
++"A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The "
++"generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and "
++"<filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text "
++"files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++"En GTK-Doc-körning genererar rapportfiler inuti dokumentationskatalogen. De "
++"genererade filerna heter: <filename><paket>-undocumented.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><paket>-undeclared.txt</filename> och "
++"<filename><paket>-unused.txt</filename>. Alla är vanliga textfiler och "
++"kan visas eller efterbehandlas enkelt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2228
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with "
++"the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank "
++"lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The "
++"second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, "
++"which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++"Filen <filename><paket>-undocumented.txt</filename> inleds med en "
++"sammanfattning över hur mycket dokumentation som skrivits. Under det finns "
++"två avsnitt avgränsade av blankrader. Det första avsnittet listar "
++"odokumenterade eller ofullständiga symboler. Det andra avsnittet gör "
++"detsamma för avsnittsdokumentation. Ofullständiga poster är de som har "
++"dokumentation, men där en ny parameter har lagts till."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2237
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols "
++"given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found "
++"in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++"Filen <filename><paket>-undeclared.txt</filename> listar symboler som "
++"anges i <filename><paket>-sections.txt</filename> men inte hittas i "
++"källkoden. Kontrollera om de har tagits bort eller om de är felstavade."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2244
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, "
++"where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where "
++"to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Filen <filename><paket>-unused.txt</filename> listar symbolnamn där "
++"GTK-Doc-detektorn har hittat dokumentation men inte vet var den ska "
++"placeras. Detta innebär att symbolen ännu inte har lagts till i filen "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++# sebras: <filename>?
++#. (itstool) path: tip/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2252
++msgid ""
++"Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile."
++"am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during "
++"<command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++"Aktivera eller lägg till raden <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> i "
++"Makefile.am. Om åtminstone GTK-Doc 1.9 finns installerat kommer detta att "
++"köra rimlighetskontroller under körning av <command>make check</command>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2259
++msgid ""
++"One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: "
++"<filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><"
++"package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first one can be compared with the "
++"section file if that is manually maintained. The second lists all "
++"declarations from the headers. If a symbol is missing one could check if "
++"this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++"Man kan också titta på filerna som producerats av källkodsdetektorn: "
++"<filename><paket>-decl-list.txt</filename> och <filename><paket>-"
++"decl.txt</filename>. Den första kan jämföras med avsnittsfilen om den "
++"underhålls manuellt. Den andra listar alla deklarationer från huvudena. Om "
++"en symbol saknas bör man kontrollera om denna filen innehåller den."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2268
++msgid ""
++"If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced "
++"by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>."
++"prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</"
++"filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask GTK-Doc "
++"to keep the intermediate scanner file for further analysis, by running it as "
++"<command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++"Om projektet är GObject-baserat kan man också titta på filerna som "
++"producerats av objekt-detektorn: <filename><paket>.args.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><paket>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"paket>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><paket>.prerequisites."
++"txt</filename> och <filename><paket>.signals.txt</filename>. Om det "
++"saknas symboler i någon av dem kan man be GTK-Doc att bibehålla de temporära "
++"detektorfilerna för vidare analys, genom att köra det som "
++"<command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2283
++msgid "Modernizing the documentation"
++msgstr "Modernisera dokumentationen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2285
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc has been around for quite some time. In this section we list new "
++"features together with the version since when it is available."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc har funnits ett tag. I detta avsnitt listar vi nya funktioner "
++"tillsammans med vilken version de gjordes tillgängliga."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2291
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.9"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2293
++msgid ""
++"When using xml instead of sgml, one can actually name the master document "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"När man använder xml istället för sgml, kan man faktiskt kalla "
++"huvuddokumentet <filename><paket>-docs.xml</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2298
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from "
++"the vcs. This only works nicely for projects that have a very regular "
++"structure (e.g. each .{c,h} pair will create new section). If one organize a "
++"project close to that updating a manually maintained section file can be as "
++"simple as running <code>meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-"
++"sections.txt</code>."
++msgstr ""
++"Denna version har stöd för <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections</option> "
++"i <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. När detta är aktiverat kommer "
++"<filename><paket>-sections.txt</filename> att autogenereras och kan "
++"tas bort från versionshanteringssystemet. Detta fungerar bra för projekt som "
++"har en väldigt standardiserad struktur (t.ex. kommer varje .{c,h}-par att "
++"skapa ett nytt avsnitt). Om man organiserar ett projekt likt detta kommer "
++"den manuella uppdateringen av en avsnittsfil att vara så enkelt som att köra "
++"<code>meld <paket>-decl-list.txt <paket>-sections.txt</code>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2309
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.8 already introduced the syntax for documenting sections in the "
++"sources instead of the separate files under <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">tmpl</filename>. This version adds options to switch the whole doc module "
++"to not use the extra tmpl build step at all, by using <option>--flavour no-"
++"tmpl</option> in <filename>configure.ac</filename>. If you don't have a "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">tmpl</filename> checked into your source "
++"control system and haven't yet switched, just add the flag to "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> and you are done."
++msgstr ""
++"Redan version 1.8 introducerade syntaxen för avsnittsdokumentation i "
++"källkoden istället för separata filer under <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">tmpl</filename>. Denna version lägger till flaggor för att kunna ställa "
++"om hela dokumentationsmodulen till att inte använda det extra tmpl-"
++"byggsteget alls, genom att använda <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> i "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename>. Om du inte har <filename class=\"directory"
++"\">tmpl</filename> incheckat i ditt versionshanteringssystem just nu och "
++"inte har gått över än bara lägg till flaggan i <filename>configure.ac</"
++"filename> så är du klar."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2321
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.10"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2323
++msgid ""
++"This version supports <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. When this is enabled, the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> is autogenerated and can be removed from the "
++"vcs. When using this feature it is important to also setup the "
++"<varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> in <filename>Makefile.am</filename> for "
++"code that is build conditionally."
++msgstr ""
++"Denna version har stöd för <option>SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-types</option> i "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. När det är aktiverat kommer <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> att autogenereras och kan tas bort från "
++"versionshanteringssystemet. När denna funktion används är det viktigt att "
++"också ställa in <varname>IGNORE_HFILES</varname> i <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename> för kod som bara byggs ibland."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2334
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.16"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2340
++msgid "Enable gtkdoc-check"
++msgstr "Aktivera gtkdoc-check"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2341
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \\\n"
++" DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \\\n"
++" SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir)\n"
++"TESTS = $(GTKDOC_CHECK)\n"
++"endif\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2336
++msgid ""
++"This version includes a new tool called gtkdoc-check. This tool can run a "
++"set of sanity checks on your documentation. It is enabled by adding these "
++"lines to the end of <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Denna version har stöd för ett nytt verktyg som heter gtkdoc-check. Detta "
++"verktyg kan köra en uppsättning kontroller på din dokumentation. Det "
++"aktiveras genom att lägga till dessa raderna i slutet av <filename>Makefile."
++"am</filename>. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2354
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.20"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2356
++msgid ""
++"Version 1.18 brought some initial markdown support. Using markdown in doc "
++"comments is less intrusive than writing docbook xml. This version improves a "
++"lot on this and add a lot more styles. The section that explains the <link "
++"linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">comment syntax</link> has all the details."
++msgstr ""
++"Version 1.18 införde inledande stöd för markdown. Att använda markdown i "
++"dokumentationskommentarer är mindre påträngande än att skriva docbook xml. "
++"Denna version förbättrar detta väsentligt och lägger till många fler stilar. "
++"Avsnittet som beskriver <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax"
++"\">kommentarsyntax</link> finnas alla detaljer."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2366
++msgid "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 1.25"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2377
++msgid "Use pre-generated entities"
++msgstr "Att använda förgenererade entiteter"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2378
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for &package_string;.\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>\n"
++"<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC \"-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN\"\n"
++" \"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd\"\n"
++"[\n"
++" <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib \"xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'\">\n"
++" <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM \"xml/gtkdocentities.ent\">\n"
++" %gtkdocentities;\n"
++"]>\n"
++"<book id=\"index\" xmlns:xi=\"http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude\">\n"
++" <bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>&package_name; handbok</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" för &package_string;.\n"
++" Den senaste versionen av detta dokument kan hittas på nätet på\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++" </bookinfo>\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2368
++msgid ""
++"The makefiles shipped with this version generate an entity file at "
++"<filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename>, containing entities for e.g. "
++"package_name and package_version. You can use this e.g. in the main xml file "
++"to avoid hardcoding the version number. Below is an example that shows how "
++"the entity file is included in the master template and how the entities are "
++"used. The entities can also be used in all generated files, GTK-Doc will use "
++"the same xml header in generated xml files. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Makefilerna som skeppas med denna version genererar en entitetsfil vid namn "
++"<filename>xml/gtkdocentities.ent</filename> som innehåller entiteter för t."
++"ex. package_name och package_version. Du kan använda detta för att t.ex. i "
++"filen main xml undvika att hårdkoda versionsnumret. Nedan finns ett exempel "
++"som visar hur entitetsfilen inkluderas i huvudmallen och hur entiteterna "
++"används. Entiteterna kan också användas i alla genererade filer, GTK-Doc "
++"kommer att använda samma xml-huvud i genererade xml-filer. <_:example-1/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2403
++msgid "Documenting other interfaces"
++msgstr "Dokumentera andra gränssnitt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2405
++msgid ""
++"So far we have been using GTK-Doc to document the API of code. The next "
++"sections contain suggestions how the tools can be used to document other "
++"interfaces too."
++msgstr ""
++"Så här långt har vi använt GTK-Doc för att dokumentera API:t för koden. "
++"Följande avsnitt innehåller förslag om hur verktyget kan användas för att "
++"också dokumentera andra gränssnitt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2412
++msgid "Command line options and man pages"
++msgstr "Kommandoradsflaggor och mansidor"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2414
++msgid ""
++"As one can generate man pages for a docbook refentry as well, it sounds like "
++"a good idea to use it for that purpose. This way the interface is part of "
++"the reference and one gets the man-page for free."
++msgstr ""
++"Då man också kan generera mansidor för ett docbook-refentry, låter det som "
++"en bra idé att använda det för detta ändamål. På detta sättet kommer "
++"gränssnittet att vara en del av referensen och man får mansidan gratis."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2421
++msgid "Document the tool"
++msgstr "Dokumentera verktyget"
++
++# sebras: strange English
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2423
++msgid ""
++"Create one refentry file per tool. Following <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">our example</link> we would call it <filename>meep/"
++"docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. For the xml tags that should be "
++"used and can look at generated file in the xml subdirectory as well as "
++"examples e.g. in glib."
++msgstr ""
++"Skapa en refentry-fil per verktyg. Om du följer <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">vårt exempel</link> borde vi kalla det <filename>meep/"
++"docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. För xml-taggarna bör detta "
++"användas och man kan studera den genererade filen i xml-underkatalogen så "
++"väl som exempel i glib."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2433
++msgid "Adding the extra configure check"
++msgstr "Lägga till den extra configure-kontrollen"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2436 C/index.docbook:2454
++msgid "Extra configure checks"
++msgstr "Lägga till extra configure-kontroller"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2437
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [omgenerera mansidor från Docbook [standardvärde=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect2/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2451
++msgid "Adding the extra makefile rules"
++msgstr "Lägga till de extra makefilsreglerna"
++
++#. (itstool) path: example/programlisting
++#: C/index.docbook:2455
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2477
++msgid "DBus interfaces"
++msgstr "DBus-gränssnitt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2479
++msgid ""
++"(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++msgstr ""
++"(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2488
++msgid "Frequently asked questions"
++msgstr "Frågor och svar"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2492
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "Fråga"
++
++#. (itstool) path: segmentedlist/segtitle
++#: C/index.docbook:2493
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "Svar"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2495
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Ingen klasshierarki."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2496
++msgid ""
++"The objects <function>xxx_get_type()</function> function has not been "
++"entered into the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Objektens <function>xxx_get_type()</function>-funktion har inte matats in i "
++"filen <filename><paket>.types</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2502
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Fortfarande ingen klasshierarki."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2503
++msgid ""
++"Missing or wrong naming in <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> "
++"file (see <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-doc-list/2003-"
++"October/msg00006.html\">explanation</ulink>)."
++msgstr ""
++"Saknat eller fel namn i filen <filename><paket>-sections.txt</"
++"filename> (se <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-doc-list/2003-"
++"October/msg00006.html\">förklaring</ulink>)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2509
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "Förbannat, jag har fortfarande ingen klasshierarki."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2510
++msgid ""
++"Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <type>GtkWidget</"
++"type>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private "
++"subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++"Är objektnamnet (namnet på instansstrukturen, t.ex. <type>GtkWidget</type>) "
++"del av det normala avsnittet (stoppa inte detta i underavsnitt så som "
++"Standard eller Private)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2517
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr "Inget symbolindex."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2518
++msgid ""
++"Does the <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contain a "
++"index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++"Innehåller <filename><paket>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> ett index som "
++"inkluderar det genererade indexet med xi:include?"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2524
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr "Symboler är inte länkade till deras dokumentationsavsnitt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2525
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the "
++"gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++"Använder dokumentationskommentaren korrekta taggar (har du lagt till #, % "
++"eller ())? Kontrollera om gtkdoc-fixxref varnar om oupplösbara "
++"korsreferenser."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2531
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "En ny klass dyker inte upp i dokumentationen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2532
++msgid ""
++"Is the new page xi:included from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Är den nya sidan inkluderad med xi:include från <filename><package>-"
++"docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2538
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr "En ny symbol dyker inte upp i dokumentationen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2539
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the "
++"begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable "
++"xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++"Är dokumentationskommentaren korrekt formaterad. Leta efter stavfel i början "
++"av kommentaren. Kontrollera om gtkdoc-fixxref varnar om oupplösbara "
++"korsreferenser. Kontrollera om symbolen finns korrekt listad i <filename><"
++"paket>-sections.txt</filename> i ett publikt avsnitt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2547
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr "En typ saknas från klasshierarkin."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2548
++msgid ""
++"If the type is listed in <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> but "
++"not in <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> then double check that the "
++"type is correctly placed in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>. If the type instance (e.g. <type>GtkWidget</type>) is not listed "
++"or incidentally marked private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++"Om typen finns listad i <filename><paket>.hierarchy</filename> men "
++"inte i <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename>, dubbelkolla då att typen "
++"finns korrekt placerad i <filename><paket>-sections.txt</filename>. Om "
++"typinstansen (t.ex. <type>GtkWidget</type>) inte visas eller är markerad "
++"privat kommer den inte att visas."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2557
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr "Jag får foldoc-länkar för alla gobject-noteringar."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2558
++msgid ""
++"Check that <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> is xi:included "
++"from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"Kontrollera att <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> är "
++"inkluderad med xi:include från <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</"
++"filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2566
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr "Parameter beskriven i kommentarsblock i källkoden men existerar inte"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2567
++msgid ""
++"Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the "
++"source."
++msgstr ""
++"Kontrollera om prototypen i huvudet har andra parameternamn än i källkoden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2572
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr "multipla ”ID:n” för begränsat länkslut: XYZ"
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2573
++msgid ""
++"Symbol XYZ appears twice in <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"Symbolen XYZ förekommer två gånger i filen <filename><paket>-sections."
++"txt</filename>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: seglistitem/seg
++#: C/index.docbook:2576
++msgid ""
++"Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template "
++"matches."
++msgstr "Elementtypnamn i namnrymd ”” påträffat i para, men ingen mall matchar."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/title
++#: C/index.docbook:2583
++msgid "Tools related to gtk-doc"
++msgstr "Verktyg relaterade till gtk-doc"
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2585
++msgid ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - a <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac "
++"GTK-Doc</ulink> integration plugin, that adds API docs to a trac site and "
++"integrates with the trac search."
++msgstr ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - en insticksmodul för <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/wiki/"
++"GtkDocPlugin\">Trac GTK-Doc</ulink>-integrering som lägger till API-"
++"dokumentation till en trac-webbplats och integrerar med trac-sökningen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: chapter/para
++#: C/index.docbook:2590
++msgid ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - a tool (part of gtk-doc) to check used API against since "
++"tags in the API to determine the minimum required version."
++msgstr ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - ett verktyg (del av gtk-doc) för att kontrollera använda "
++"API mot since-taggar i API:t för att avgöra minsta version som krävs."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/releaseinfo
++#: C/index.docbook:12 C/fdl-appendix.xml:12
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr "Version 1.1, mars 2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendixinfo/copyright
++#: C/index.docbook:15
++msgid "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/index.docbook:20
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: legalnotice/para
++#: C/index.docbook:19 C/fdl-appendix.xml:19
++msgid ""
++"<_:address-1/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies "
++"of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr ""
++"<_:address-1/>. Alla är tillåtna kopiera och distribuera ordagranna kopior "
++"av detta licensdokument, men att ändra det är ej tillåtet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: appendix/title
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/index.docbook:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:28 C/fdl-appendix.xml:642
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr "GNU Free Documentation License"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:31 C/fdl-appendix.xml:31
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr "0. BAKGRUND"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"Syftet med denna licens är att göra en handbok, bok, eller annat praktiskt "
++"och användbart dokument <quote>fritt</quote> som i frihet: att försäkra var "
++"och en den faktiska friheten att kopiera och sprida det vidare, med eller "
++"utan förändringar, antingen kommersiellt eller ideellt. Sekundärt bevarar "
++"denna licens ett sätt för författaren och förläggaren att få ära för deras "
++"arbete utan att de anses vara ansvariga för förändringar gjorda av andra."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that "
++"derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. "
++"It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license "
++"designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++"Denna Licens är en sorts <quote>copyleft</quote>, vilket betyder att "
++"derivativa verk av detta dokument själva måste vara fria på samma sätt. Den "
++"kompletterar GNU General Public License, som är en copyleft-licens utformad "
++"för fri programvara."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:50 C/fdl-appendix.xml:50
++msgid ""
++"We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free "
++"software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program "
++"should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. "
++"But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any "
++"textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a "
++"printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose "
++"is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++"Vi har utformat denna licens för att den skall användas för handböcker till "
++"fri programvara, eftersom fri programvara behöver fri dokumentation: ett "
++"fritt program bör ha en handbok som erbjuder samma friheter som programmet "
++"gör. Men denna licens är inte begränsad till programvaruhandböcker; den kan "
++"användas för vilket textverk som helst oavsett ämne eller huruvida det är en "
++"utgiven, tryckt bok. Vi rekommenderar denna licens huvudsakligen för alla "
++"verk vars syfte är instruktion eller referens."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:62 C/fdl-appendix.xml:62
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr "1. TILLÄMPNINGSOMRÅDE OCH DEFINITIONER"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such "
++"manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "
++"<quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Denna licens [det engelska originalet] gäller för varje handbok eller annat "
++"verk, oavsett uttrycksform, som innehåller ett meddelande där "
++"upphovsrättsinnehavaren stadgat att verket kan spridas enligt villkoren i "
++"GNU Free Documentation License. Ett sådant meddelande ger en internationell "
++"frihet utan krav på ersättning och utan tidsbegränsning att använda verket "
++"under villkoren i denna licens [det engelska originalet]. <quote>Dokument</"
++"quote> nedan syftar på godtycklig handbok eller verk. Var och en är "
++"licenstagare och benämns som <quote>du</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:72
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing "
++"the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with "
++"modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"En <quote>förändrad version</quote> av dokumentet avser varje verk som "
++"innehåller dokumentet eller en del av det, antingen ordagranna kopior, eller "
++"med ändringar och/eller översatt till ett annat språk."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:79
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter "
++"section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals "
++"exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the "
++"Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and "
++"contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For "
++"example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary "
++"Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter "
++"of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of "
++"legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding "
++"them."
++msgstr ""
++"Ett <quote>sekundärt avsnitt</quote> är en märkt bilaga eller förord till "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> som exklusivt behandlar "
++"förhållandet mellan dokumentets förläggare eller författare och dokumentets "
++"huvudsakliga ämne (eller till relaterade ämnen) och som inte innehåller "
++"något som direkt faller under det huvudsakliga ämnet. (Således, om "
++"dokumentet delvis är en lärobok i matematik så får ett sekundärt avsnitt "
++"inte förklara någon matematik.) Förhållandet kan vara en historisk koppling "
++"till ämnet eller något relaterat, eller en juridisk, kommersiell, "
++"filosofisk, etisk eller politisk ställning till det."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:94
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being "
++"those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"De <quote>oföränderliga avsnitten</quote> är <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary"
++"\">sekundära avsnitt</link> vars titlar är angivna som oföränderliga avsnitt "
++"i meddelandet som stadgar att <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</"
++"link> är utgivet under denna licens [det engelska originalet]."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:103
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are "
++"listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says "
++"that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under "
++"this License."
++msgstr ""
++"<quote>Omslagstexterna</quote> är speciella korta ordföljder som är listade "
++"som framsidestexter eller baksidestexter i meddelandet som stadgar att <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> är utgivet under denna licens "
++"[det engelska originalet]."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:111
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> "
++"Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose "
++"specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be "
++"viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors "
++"or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) "
++"some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text "
++"formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for "
++"input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file "
++"format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent "
++"modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "
++"<quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"En <quote>transparent</quote> kopia av <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">dokumentet</link> är en maskinläsbar kopia, representerad i ett format "
++"vars specifikation finns tillgänglig för allmänheten, som lämpar sig för att "
++"revidera dokumentet på ett enkelt sätt med generella textredigeringsprogram "
++"eller (för pixelbaserade bilder) generella grafikprogram eller (för "
++"ritningar) något väl tillgängligt ritprogram, och som är passande som indata "
++"till textformaterare eller för automatisk konvertering till en mängd format "
++"som passar som indata till textformaterare. En kopia i ett för övrigt "
++"transparent filformat vars markeringar, eller avsaknad av markeringar, har "
++"ordnats för att hindra eller motverka att vidare förändring vidtas av läsare "
++"är inte transparent. En kopia som inte är <quote>transparent</quote> kallas "
++"<quote>opak</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:128 C/fdl-appendix.xml:128
++msgid ""
++"Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII "
++"without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using "
++"a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for "
++"human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary "
++"formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, "
++"SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally "
++"available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors "
++"for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++"Exempel på passande format för transparenta kopior innefattar ren ASCII utan "
++"markeringar, Texinfo indataformat, LaTeX indataformat, SGML eller XML som "
++"använder en publikt tillgänglig DTD, och standardenlig HTML, PostScript "
++"eller PDF utformat för mänsklig förändring. Opaka format innefattar "
++"Postscript, PDF, leverantörsspecifika format som bara kan läsas och editeras "
++"med leverantörsspecifika ordbehandlare, SGML eller XML för vilket DTD och/"
++"eller verktyg för behandling inte finns allmänt tillgängliga, och den "
++"maskingenererade HTML som produceras av vissa ordbehandlare enbart avsett "
++"som utdata."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:141
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page "
++"itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the "
++"material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in "
++"formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> "
++"means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, "
++"preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++"<quote>Titelsidan</quote> innebär, för en tryckt bok, titelsidan själv, och "
++"sådana därpå följande sidor som krävs för att göra det material som enligt "
++"denna licens skall synas på titelsidan läsbart. För verk i sådana format som "
++"inte har någon egentlig titelsida, avses med <quote>titelsida</quote> den "
++"text som är närmast den mest framstående förekomsten av verkets titel, "
++"föregående den huvudsakliga textmassan."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:153 C/fdl-appendix.xml:153
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr "2. ORDAGRANN KOPIERING"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that "
++"this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this "
++"License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you "
++"add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use "
++"technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of "
++"the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in "
++"exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you "
++"must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger kopiera och sprida <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> "
++"på valfritt medium, antingen kommersiellt eller ideellt, förutsatt att denna "
++"licens [det engelska originalet], upphovsrättsklausul, och meddelandet som "
++"stadgar att GNU Free Documentation License gäller för dokumentet finns med "
++"på alla kopior, och att du inte lägger till några som helst andra villkor än "
++"de som ingår i denna licens. Du äger inte vidta tekniska åtgärder för att "
++"begränsa eller kontrollera läsande eller vidare kopiering av de kopior du "
++"skapar eller sprider. Dock äger du ta emot kompensation i utbyte mot kopior. "
++"Om du sprider tillräckligt många kopior måste du också följa villkoren i "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">paragraf 3</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:169 C/fdl-appendix.xml:169
++msgid ""
++"You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you "
++"may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger också låna ut kopior, under samma villkor som ovan, och du äger visa "
++"kopior offentligt."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:176 C/fdl-appendix.xml:176
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr "3. OMFATTANDE KOPIERING"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license "
++"notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you "
++"must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these "
++"Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on "
++"the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as "
++"the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title "
++"with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as "
++"verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Om du publicerar tryckta kopior (eller kopior i medier som normalt har "
++"tryckta omslag) av <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link>, i en "
++"upplaga överstigande 100 exemplar, och dokumentets licensmeddelande kräver "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">omslagstexter</link>, så måste du förse "
++"kopiorna med omslag som, klart och tydligt, visar alla omslagstexter: "
++"framsidestexter på framsidan och baksidestexter på baksidan. Båda omslagen "
++"måste klart och tydligt identifiera dig som utgivare av dessa kopior. "
++"Framsidan måste presentera dokumentets hela titel, med alla ord i titeln "
++"lika framträdande och synliga. Du äger lägga till ytterligare stoff på "
++"omslagen. Kopiering med förändringar gjorda bara på omslaget, så länge som "
++"de bevarar <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentets</link> titel och i "
++"övrigt uppfyller dessa krav kan anses vara ordagrann kopiering i andra "
++"avseenden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:195 C/fdl-appendix.xml:195
++msgid ""
++"If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, "
++"you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the "
++"actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++"Om de obligatoriska texterna för något omslag är för omfattande för att "
++"rymmas i läsbart skick skall du placera de första (så många som får plats) "
++"på det egentliga omslaget, och fortsätta med resten på de direkt "
++"intilliggande sidorna."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> "
++"copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more "
++"than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state "
++"in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location "
++"containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added "
++"material, which the general network-using public has access to download "
++"anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use "
++"the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin "
++"distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent "
++"copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one "
++"year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through "
++"your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"Om du publicerar <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">opaka</link> kopior av "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> i upplagor om mer än 100, "
++"måste du antingen bifoga en maskinläsbar <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent"
++"\">transparent</link> kopia med varje opak kopia, eller ange i eller med "
++"varje opak kopia en nätverksadress som är tillgänglig för den allmänna "
++"nätverksanvändande massan där man, med öppet standardiserade protokoll, "
++"anonymt och utan kostnad kan ladda ner en komplett transparent kopia av "
++"dokumentet, utan extra material. Om du väljer det senare alternativet, måste "
++"du vidta skäliga åtgärder, när du börjar sprida opaka kopior i kvantitet, "
++"för att denna transparenta kopia skall förbli tillgänglig på angivna platsen "
++"till åtminstone ett år efter den sista gången du spred en opak kopia (direkt "
++"eller via ombud eller återförsäljare) av den utgåvan till allmänheten."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any "
++"large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated "
++"version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"Det är önskvärt, men inte ett krav, att du kontaktar författarna till <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> i god tid innan du sprider något "
++"större antal kopior, för att ge dem en chans att förse dig med en uppdaterad "
++"version av dokumentet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:231 C/fdl-appendix.xml:231
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr "4. FÖRÄNDRINGAR"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under "
++"the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the "
++"Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version "
++"filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger kopiera och sprida en <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">förändrad "
++"version</link> av <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> under de "
++"villkor som beskrivs i paragraf <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> och "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> av GNU Free Documentation License, "
++"förutsatt att du släpper den förändrade versionen under exakt denna licens, "
++"och att den förändrade versionen antar dokumentets roll, och således medger "
++"spridning och förändring av den förändrade versionen till envar som erhåller "
++"en kopia av den. Utöver detta måste du göra följande med den ändrade "
++"versionen:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:248 C/fdl-appendix.xml:248
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "A"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the "
++"covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which "
++"should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the "
++"Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original "
++"publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"På <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">titelsidan</link> (och omslagen om det "
++"finns några) använda en titel skild från den som [original]<link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> har, och skild från tidigare versioners "
++"titel (som skall, om det finns några, finnas listade i historikavsnittet i "
++"dokumentet). Du äger använda samma titel som det föregående dokumentet om "
++"den ursprungliga utgivaren ger sitt tillstånd."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:264 C/fdl-appendix.xml:264
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "B"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, "
++"one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the "
++"modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has "
++"less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"Lista på <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">titelsidan</link>, som författare, "
++"en eller flera personer eller juridiska personer som ansvarat för "
++"förändringarna i den <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">förändrade versionen</"
++"link>, tillsammans med minst fem av de huvudsakliga författarna av <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> (alla dess huvudsakliga "
++"författare, om det har mindre än fem)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:279 C/fdl-appendix.xml:279
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "C"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of "
++"the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++"Ange namnet på utgivaren av den <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">förändrade "
++"versionen</link>, som utgivare, på <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page"
++"\">titelsidan</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:291 C/fdl-appendix.xml:291
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "D"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:292
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Bibehålla <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentets</link> alla "
++"upphovsrättsklausuler."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:301 C/fdl-appendix.xml:301
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "E"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:302 C/fdl-appendix.xml:302
++msgid ""
++"Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the "
++"other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++"Lägga till en upphovsrättsklausul för dina förändringar angränsande till de "
++"andra upphovsrättsklausulerna."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:311 C/fdl-appendix.xml:311
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "F"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the "
++"Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Direkt efter upphovsrättsklausulerna innefatta ett meddelande som ger "
++"allmänheten tillstånd att använda den <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">förändrade versionen</link> under villkoren i denna licens [det engelska "
++"originalet] i den form som visas i Tillägg nedan."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:324 C/fdl-appendix.xml:324
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "G"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"I meddelandet om licensen bevara den fullständiga listan över <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">oföränderliga avsnitt</link> och obligatoriska <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">omslagstexter</link> som finns i <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">dokumentets</link> meddelande om licensen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:337 C/fdl-appendix.xml:337
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "H"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:338 C/fdl-appendix.xml:338
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr ""
++"Inkludera en oförändrad kopia av denna licens [Det är den engelska "
++"originalversionen som avses]."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:346 C/fdl-appendix.xml:346
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "I"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add "
++"to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> as given on "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no "
++"section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and "
++"publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Bevara avsnittet med titeln <quote>historik</quote> (History), bevara dess "
++"titel och lägg i avsnittet till en post med åtminstone titeln, året, nya "
++"författare och utgivaren av den <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">förändrade "
++"versionen</link> så som angivet på <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page"
++"\">titelsidan</link>. Om det inte finns något avsnitt med titeln "
++"<quote>historik</quote> (History) i <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">dokumentet</link> så skapa en med titeln, året, författare och utgivaren "
++"av dokumentet så som det står på [original]dokumentets titelsida. Lägg sedan "
++"till en post som beskriver den förändrade versionen så som beskrivits ovan."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:365 C/fdl-appendix.xml:365
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "J"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the "
++"network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based "
++"on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit "
++"a network location for a work that was published at least four years before "
++"the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers "
++"to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Bevara den nätverksadress, om det finns någon, angiven i <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">dokumentet</link> till den allmänt tillgängliga <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-transparent\">transparenta</link> kopian av dokumentet, och likaså "
++"nätverksadresserna till de föregående versioner som dokumentet baseras på. "
++"Dessa får placeras i avsnittet <quote>historik</quote> (History). Du äger "
++"utelämna en nätverksadress för ett verk som är publicerat mer än fyra år "
++"före dokumentet självt, eller om den ursprunglige utgivaren vars verk "
++"nätverksadressen hänvisar till ger sitt tillstånd."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:383 C/fdl-appendix.xml:383
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "K"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in "
++"the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor "
++"acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"För alla avsnitt med titlarna <quote>tillkännagivanden</quote> "
++"(Acknowledgements) eller <quote>dedikationer</quote> (Dedications), bevara "
++"titeln på avsnittet, och bevara allt innehåll och prägel på alla "
++"tillkännagivanden och/eller dedikationer gjorda av varje bidragsgivare."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:396 C/fdl-appendix.xml:396
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "L"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their "
++"text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not "
++"considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Bevara alla <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">oföränderliga avsnitt</link> i "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> oförändrade till text och "
++"titel. Avsnittsnummer eller motsvarande anses inte tillhöra avsnittets titel."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:409 C/fdl-appendix.xml:409
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "M"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may "
++"not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Radera varje avsnitt med titeln <quote>endossering</quote> (Endorsements). "
++"Ett sådant avsnitt får inte inkluderas i en <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">förändrad version</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/title
++#: C/index.docbook:421 C/fdl-appendix.xml:421
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "N"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/index.docbook:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to "
++"conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant "
++"Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Inte byta titel på något existerande avsnitt så att det blir "
++"<quote>endossering</quote> (Endorsements) eller så att titeln kan förväxlas "
++"med något <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">oföränderligt avsnitt</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new "
++"front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from "
++"the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections "
++"as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's "
++"license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Om den <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">förändrade versionen</link> innehåller "
++"nya framsidestexter eller bilagor som är att anses som <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">sekundära avsnitt</link> och inte innehåller något material "
++"kopierat från dokumentet, så äger du, om du vill, benämna några eller "
++"samtliga av dessa som oföränderliga. För att göra detta, lägg deras titlar "
++"till listan över <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">oföränderliga avsnitt</"
++"link> i den förändrade versionens licensmeddelande. Dessa titlar måste vara "
++"skilda från alla andra avsnitts titlar."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it "
++"contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of "
++"peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the "
++"authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger lägga till ett avsnitt med titeln <quote>endossering</quote> "
++"(Endorsements), förutsatt att det inte innehåller något annat än "
++"endosseringar för din <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">förändrade version</"
++"link> från olika aktörer -- till exempel, meddelanden om utförd "
++"korrekturläsning eller att texten har godkänts av en organisation som en "
++"officiell definition av en standard."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list "
++"of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover "
++"Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements "
++"made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by "
++"you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, "
++"you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit "
++"permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger lägga till ett textavsnitt på upp till fem ord som <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">framsidestext</link>, och ett textavsnitt på upp till 25 "
++"ord som <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">baksidestext</link> i listan över "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">omslagstexter</link> i den <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">förändrade versionen</link>. Bara ett textavsnitt med "
++"framsidestexter och ett med baksidestexter får läggas till av (eller genom "
++"försorg av) en enda juridisk person. Om <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">dokumentet</link> redan innehåller en omslagstext för något av omslagen, "
++"tidigare tillagd av dig eller genom försorg av samma juridiska person som du "
++"företräder, äger du inte lägga till en till, men du äger ändra den gamla med "
++"tillstånd från den tidigare utgivaren som lade till den förra."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names "
++"for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Författaren (författarna) och utgivaren (utgivarna) av <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">dokumentet</link> ger inte via denna licens sitt tillstånd att "
++"använda sina namn för publicitet eller för att lägga till eller antyda "
++"endossering av någon <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">förändrad version</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:480 C/fdl-appendix.xml:480
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "5. KOMBINERA DOKUMENT"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with "
++"other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, "
++"unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in "
++"its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger kombinera <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> med andra "
++"dokument som är utgivna under denna licens, under de villkor som definieras "
++"i <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">paragraf 4</link> av GNU Free Documentation "
++"License för förändrade versioner, förutsatt att du, i det kombinerade "
++"dokumentet, innefattar alla <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">oföränderliga "
++"avsnitt</link> från originaldokumenten, omodifierade, och listar dem som "
++"oföränderliga avsnitt i ditt kombinerade verk i dess licensklausul, och att "
++"du bevarar alla deras garantiavsägelseklausuler."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be "
++"replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with "
++"the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section "
++"unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original "
++"author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make "
++"the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections "
++"in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"Det kombinerade verket behöver bara innehålla en enstaka kopia av denna "
++"licens [engelska originalversionen], och flera identiska <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">oföränderliga stycken</link> kan ersättas med en kopia. Om det "
++"finns flera oföränderliga stycken med samma namn men olika innehåll, se till "
++"att titeln på varje sådant avsnitt är unik genom att i slutet på den, inom "
++"parentes, lägga till namnet på den ursprunglige författaren eller utgivaren "
++"av det avsnittet om dessa är kända, annars ett unikt nummer. Gör samma "
++"justeringar av titlarna i listan över oföränderliga avsnitt i "
++"licensklausulen i det kombinerade verket."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</"
++"quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled "
++"<quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled "
++"<quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++"I det kombinerade verket måste du kombinera alla avsnitt med titlarna "
++"<quote>historik</quote> (History) i de ursprungliga dokumenten, till ett "
++"avsnitt med titeln <quote>historik</quote> (History); på samma sätt skall "
++"alla avsnitt med titlarna <quote>tillkännagivanden</quote> "
++"(Acknowledgements), alla avsnitt med titlarna <quote>dedikationer</quote> "
++"(Dedications) kombineras. Du måste ta bort alla avsnitt med titlarna "
++"<quote>endossering</quote> (Endorsements)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:516 C/fdl-appendix.xml:516
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr "6. SAMLINGAR AV DOKUMENT"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and "
++"replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with "
++"a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow "
++"the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in "
++"all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger skapa en samling bestående av <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">dokumentet</link> och andra dokument som är släppta under GNU Free "
++"Documentation License, och ersätta individuella kopior i dokumenten av denna "
++"licens med en enda kopia [av den engelska originalversionen] som inkluderas "
++"i samlingen, förutsatt att du följer villkoren för ordagrann kopiering i "
++"denna licens för varje inkluderat dokument i alla andra avseenden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:527 C/fdl-appendix.xml:527
++msgid ""
++"You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it "
++"individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License "
++"into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects "
++"regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger lyfta ut ett dokument från en sådan samling, och sprida det enskilt "
++"under GNU Free Documentation License, förutsatt att du lägger till en kopia "
++"av denna licens [den engelska originalversionen] i det utlyfta dokumentet, "
++"och följer villkoren för ordagrann kopiering i denna licens för det utlyfta "
++"dokumentet i alla andra avseenden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:537 C/fdl-appendix.xml:537
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr "7. SAMMANSLAGNING MED OBEROENDE VERK"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its "
++"derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on "
++"a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, "
++"provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a "
++"compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</"
++"link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"En samling av <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> eller av dess "
++"derivat med andra separata och oberoende dokument eller verk, på eller i en "
++"lagringsvolym eller ett spridningsmedium, kallas för en "
++"<quote>sammanslagning</quote> om den sammanslagna upphovsrätten inte används "
++"för att begränsa samlingens användares rättigheter som de enskilda "
++"dokumenten medger. När dokumentet ingår i en sådan sammanslagning, gäller "
++"inte denna licens de andra verken i samlingen som inte själva är deriverat "
++"av dokumentet. Om kravet på <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">omslagstexter</"
++"link> enligt <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">paragraf 3</link> är tillämpligt "
++"på dessa kopior av dokumentet, så kan dokumentets omslagstexter, om "
++"dokumentet utgör mindre än en fjärdedel av hela samlingen, placeras på det "
++"omslag som omger dokumentet inuti samlingen, eller den elektroniska "
++"motsvarigheten till omslag om dokumentet är i elektronisk form. Annars måste "
++"de synas på det omslag som omger hela samlingen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:561 C/fdl-appendix.xml:561
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr "8. ÖVERSÄTTNING"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the "
++"terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations "
++"requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may "
++"include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the "
++"original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation "
++"of this License provided that you also include the original English version "
++"of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the "
++"original English version of this License, the original English version will "
++"prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"Översättning anses vara en sorts förändring, så du äger sprida "
++"översättningar av <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> enligt de "
++"villkor som sätts i <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">paragraf 4</link>. <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Oföränderliga avsnitt</link> som ersätts med "
++"översättningar kräver tillstånd från deras upphovsrättsinnehavare, men du "
++"äger inkludera översättningar av alla eller vissa av dessa oföränderliga "
++"avsnitt tillsammans med originalversionerna av dessa oföränderliga avsnitt. "
++"Du äger inkludera en översättning av denna licens, och alla licensklausuler "
++"i dokumentet, och alla garantiavsägelser, förutsatt att du också innefattar "
++"den engelska originalversionen av denna licens och originalversionerna av "
++"dessa klausuler. Skulle det finnas skillnader mellan översättningen och "
++"originalversionen av denna licens eller någon klausul så gäller "
++"originalversionen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:580 C/fdl-appendix.xml:580
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr "9. UPPHÖRANDE"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this "
++"License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the "
++"Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this "
++"License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you "
++"under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such "
++"parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger inte kopiera, förändra, omlicensiera eller sprida <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> annat än enligt villkoren i GNU Free "
++"Documentation License. Alla övriga försök att kopiera, modifiera, "
++"omlicensiera, eller sprida dokumentet är ogiltiga och kommer automatiskt "
++"medföra att du förlorar dina rättigheter enligt denna licens. Tredje man som "
++"har mottagit kopior eller rättigheter från dig enligt dessa licensvillkor "
++"kommer dock inte att förlora sina rättigheter så länge de följer "
++"licensvillkoren."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:594 C/fdl-appendix.xml:594
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr "10. FRAMTIDA VERSIONER AV DENNA LICENS"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:595
++msgid ""
++"The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU "
++"Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be "
++"similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to "
++"address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www."
++"gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++"<ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free Software "
++"Foundation</ulink> kan publicera nya, reviderade versioner av GNU Free "
++"Documentation License då och då. Sådana nya versioner kommer att vara "
++"likadana i andemening som den nuvarande versionen, men kan skilja i detalj "
++"för att behandla nya problem eller angelägenheter. Se <ulink type=\"http\" "
++"url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular "
++"numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies "
++"to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of "
++"that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not "
++"as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not "
++"specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever "
++"published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"Varje version av licensen ges ett unikt versionsnummer. Om <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">dokumentet</link> stadgar att en specifik numrerad version "
++"av denna licens <quote>eller valfri senare version</quote> gäller för det, "
++"så äger du rätten att följa villkoren enligt antingen den angivna versionen "
++"eller vilken senare version som helst som publicerats (inte som utkast) av "
++"Free Software Foundation. Om dokumentet inte anger en version av denna "
++"licens, äger du välja vilken version som helst som publicerats (inte som "
++"utkast) av Free Software Foundation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/title
++#: C/index.docbook:621 C/fdl-appendix.xml:621
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr "TILLÄGG"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:622 C/fdl-appendix.xml:622
++msgid ""
++"To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the "
++"License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices "
++"just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++"För att använda GNU Free Documentation License för ett dokument du har "
++"skrivit, inkludera en kopia av licensen [det engelska originalet] i "
++"dokumentet och placera följande copyrightklausul omedelbart efter titelsidan:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:629 C/fdl-appendix.xml:629
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr "Copyright © YEAR YOUR NAME."
++
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/index.docbook:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, "
++"and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being "
++"LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU "
++"Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, "
++"and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being "
++"LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU "
++"Free Documentation License</quote>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, "
++"write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover "
++"Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of "
++"<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"Om du inte har några <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">oföränderliga avsnitt</"
++"link>, skriv <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> istället för att ange "
++"vilka som är oföränderliga. Om du inte har några <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">framsidestexter</link>, skriv <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> "
++"istället för <quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; såväl som för "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">baksidestexter</link>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/index.docbook:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++"gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"Om ditt dokument innehåller icke-triviala exempel med programkod, så "
++"rekommenderar vi att du släpper dessa exempel parallellt under en, av dig "
++"vald, fri programvarulicens, som till exempel <ulink type=\"http\" url="
++"\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html\">GNU General Public License</ulink>, "
++"för att möjliggöra deras användning i fri programvara."
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/year
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#. (itstool) path: copyright/holder
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/street
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++msgstr "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/city
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "Boston"
++msgstr "Boston"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/state
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21
++msgid "MA"
++msgstr "MA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/postcode
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "02110-1301"
++msgstr "02110-1301"
++
++#. (itstool) path: address/country
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22
++msgid "USA"
++msgstr "USA"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/address
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:34
++msgid "free"
++msgstr "fritt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:32
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <_:quote-1/> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++"Syftet med denna licens är att göra en handbok, bok, eller annat praktiskt "
++"och användbart dokument <_:quote-1/> som i frihet: att försäkra var och en "
++"den faktiska friheten att kopiera och sprida det vidare, med eller utan "
++"förändringar, antingen kommersiellt eller ideellt. Sekundärt bevarar denna "
++"licens ett sätt för författaren och förläggaren att få ära för deras arbete "
++"utan att de anses vara ansvariga för förändringar gjorda av andra."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:44
++msgid "copyleft"
++msgstr "copyleft"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:43
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <_:quote-1/>, which means that derivative works of "
++"the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the "
++"GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++"Denna Licens är en sorts <_:quote-1/>, vilket betyder att derivativa verk av "
++"detta dokument själva måste vara fria på samma sätt. Den kompletterar GNU "
++"General Public License, som är en copyleft-licens utformad för fri "
++"programvara."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:67 C/fdl-appendix.xml:82 C/fdl-appendix.xml:99
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:107 C/fdl-appendix.xml:113 C/fdl-appendix.xml:156
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:179 C/fdl-appendix.xml:190 C/fdl-appendix.xml:205
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:224 C/fdl-appendix.xml:235 C/fdl-appendix.xml:253
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:271 C/fdl-appendix.xml:294 C/fdl-appendix.xml:354
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:368 C/fdl-appendix.xml:400 C/fdl-appendix.xml:462
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:472 C/fdl-appendix.xml:482 C/fdl-appendix.xml:519
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:540 C/fdl-appendix.xml:565 C/fdl-appendix.xml:583
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:608
++msgid "Document"
++msgstr "Dokument"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:69
++msgid "you"
++msgstr "du"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:63
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <_:quote-1/>, below, refers to any such manual or work. "
++"Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <_:quote-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Denna licens [det engelska originalet] gäller för varje handbok eller annat "
++"verk, oavsett uttrycksform, som innehåller ett meddelande där "
++"upphovsrättsinnehavaren stadgat att verket kan spridas enligt villkoren i "
++"GNU Free Documentation License. Ett sådant meddelande ger en internationell "
++"frihet utan krav på ersättning och utan tidsbegränsning att använda verket "
++"under villkoren i denna licens [det engelska originalet]. <_:quote-1/> nedan "
++"syftar på godtycklig handbok eller verk. Var och en är licenstagare och "
++"benämns som <_:quote-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:73 C/fdl-appendix.xml:234 C/fdl-appendix.xml:269
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:283 C/fdl-appendix.xml:315 C/fdl-appendix.xml:351
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:413 C/fdl-appendix.xml:433 C/fdl-appendix.xml:447
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:459 C/fdl-appendix.xml:475 C/fdl-appendix.xml:543
++msgid "Modified Version"
++msgstr "förändrad version"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:72
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a "
++"portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or "
++"translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++"En <_:quote-1/> av dokumentet avser varje verk som innehåller dokumentet "
++"eller en del av det, antingen ordagranna kopior, eller med ändringar och/"
++"eller översatt till ett annat språk."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:80
++msgid "Secondary Section"
++msgstr "sekundärt avsnitt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:79
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <_:"
++"link-2/> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or "
++"authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related "
++"matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall "
++"subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, "
++"a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could "
++"be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related "
++"matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political "
++"position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++"Ett <_:quote-1/> är en märkt bilaga eller förord till <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">dokumentet</link> som exklusivt behandlar förhållandet mellan "
++"dokumentets förläggare eller författare och dokumentets huvudsakliga ämne "
++"(eller till relaterade ämnen) och som inte innehåller något som direkt "
++"faller under det huvudsakliga ämnet. (Således, om dokumentet delvis är en "
++"lärobok i matematik så får ett sekundärt avsnitt inte förklara någon "
++"matematik.) Förhållandet kan vara en historisk koppling till ämnet eller "
++"något relaterat, eller en juridisk, kommersiell, filosofisk, etisk eller "
++"politisk ställning till det."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:95 C/fdl-appendix.xml:327 C/fdl-appendix.xml:398
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:439 C/fdl-appendix.xml:486 C/fdl-appendix.xml:494
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:567 C/fdl-appendix.xml:637 C/fdl-appendix.xml:648
++msgid "Invariant Sections"
++msgstr "oföränderliga avsnitten"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:96 C/fdl-appendix.xml:435
++msgid "Secondary Sections"
++msgstr "sekundära avsnitt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:94
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain <_:link-2/> whose titles are designated, as "
++"being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-3/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"De <_:quote-1/> är <_:link-2/> vars titlar är angivna som oföränderliga "
++"avsnitt i meddelandet som stadgar att <_:link-3/> är utgivet under denna "
++"licens [det engelska originalet]."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:104 C/fdl-appendix.xml:181 C/fdl-appendix.xml:328
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:458
++msgid "Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Omslagstexterna"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:103
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as "
++"Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-2/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++"<_:quote-1/> är speciella korta ordföljder som är listade som "
++"framsidestexter eller baksidestexter i meddelandet som stadgar att <_:link-2/"
++"> är utgivet under denna licens [det engelska originalet]."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:112 C/fdl-appendix.xml:124 C/fdl-appendix.xml:207
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:369
++msgid "Transparent"
++msgstr "transparent"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:125 C/fdl-appendix.xml:204
++msgid "Opaque"
++msgstr "opak"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:111
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> copy of the <_:link-2/> means a machine-readable copy, "
++"represented in a format whose specification is available to the general "
++"public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and "
++"straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of "
++"pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available "
++"drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for "
++"automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text "
++"formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup "
++"has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers "
++"is not Transparent. A copy that is not <_:quote-3/> is called <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++"En <_:quote-1/> kopia av <_:link-2/> är en maskinläsbar kopia, representerad "
++"i ett format vars specifikation finns tillgänglig för allmänheten, som "
++"lämpar sig för att revidera dokumentet på ett enkelt sätt med generella "
++"textredigeringsprogram eller (för pixelbaserade bilder) generella "
++"grafikprogram eller (för ritningar) något väl tillgängligt ritprogram, och "
++"som är passande som indata till textformaterare eller för automatisk "
++"konvertering till en mängd format som passar som indata till "
++"textformaterare. En kopia i ett för övrigt transparent filformat vars "
++"markeringar, eller avsaknad av markeringar, har ordnats för att hindra eller "
++"motverka att vidare förändring vidtas av läsare är inte transparent. En "
++"kopia som inte är <_:quote-3/> kallas <_:quote-4/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:142 C/fdl-appendix.xml:146 C/fdl-appendix.xml:250
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:266 C/fdl-appendix.xml:281 C/fdl-appendix.xml:352
++msgid "Title Page"
++msgstr "Titelsidan"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:141
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such "
++"following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License "
++"requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have "
++"any title page as such, <_:quote-2/> means the text near the most prominent "
++"appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the "
++"text."
++msgstr ""
++"<_:quote-1/> innebär, för en tryckt bok, titelsidan själv, och sådana därpå "
++"följande sidor som krävs för att göra det material som enligt denna licens "
++"skall synas på titelsidan läsbart. För verk i sådana format som inte har "
++"någon egentlig titelsida, avses med <_:quote-2/> den text som är närmast den "
++"mest framstående förekomsten av verkets titel, föregående den huvudsakliga "
++"textmassan."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:166 C/fdl-appendix.xml:551
++msgid "section 3"
++msgstr "paragraf 3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:154
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <_:link-1/> in any medium, either "
++"commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright "
++"notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document "
++"are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions "
++"whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to "
++"obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or "
++"distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If "
++"you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the "
++"conditions in <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger kopiera och sprida <_:link-1/> på valfritt medium, antingen "
++"kommersiellt eller ideellt, förutsatt att denna licens [det engelska "
++"originalet], upphovsrättsklausul, och meddelandet som stadgar att GNU Free "
++"Documentation License gäller för dokumentet finns med på alla kopior, och "
++"att du inte lägger till några som helst andra villkor än de som ingår i "
++"denna licens. Du äger inte vidta tekniska åtgärder för att begränsa eller "
++"kontrollera läsande eller vidare kopiering av de kopior du skapar eller "
++"sprider. Dock äger du ta emot kompensation i utbyte mot kopior. Om du "
++"sprider tillräckligt många kopior måste du också följa villkoren i <_:link-2/"
++">."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:177
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <_:link-1/> numbering more than 100, "
++"and the Document's license notice requires <_:link-2/>, you must enclose the "
++"copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: "
++"Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back "
++"cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the "
++"publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with "
++"all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <_:link-3/> and satisfy "
++"these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Om du publicerar tryckta kopior (eller kopior i medier som normalt har "
++"tryckta omslag) av <_:link-1/>, i en upplaga överstigande 100 exemplar, och "
++"dokumentets licensmeddelande kräver <_:link-2/>, så måste du förse kopiorna "
++"med omslag som, klart och tydligt, visar alla omslagstexter: framsidestexter "
++"på framsidan och baksidestexter på baksidan. Båda omslagen måste klart och "
++"tydligt identifiera dig som utgivare av dessa kopior. Framsidan måste "
++"presentera dokumentets hela titel, med alla ord i titeln lika framträdande "
++"och synliga. Du äger lägga till ytterligare stoff på omslagen. Kopiering med "
++"förändringar gjorda bara på omslaget, så länge som de bevarar titeln för <_:"
++"link-3/> och i övrigt uppfyller dessa krav kan anses vara ordagrann "
++"kopiering i andra avseenden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:202
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <_:link-1/> copies of the <_:link-2/> numbering "
++"more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <_:link-3/> copy "
++"along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-"
++"accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy "
++"of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using "
++"public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard "
++"network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably "
++"prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to "
++"ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated "
++"location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an "
++"Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition "
++"to the public."
++msgstr ""
++"Om du publicerar <_:link-1/>a kopior av <_:link-2/> i upplagor om mer än "
++"100, måste du antingen bifoga en maskinläsbar <_:link-3/> kopia med varje "
++"opak kopia, eller ange i eller med varje opak kopia en nätverksadress som är "
++"tillgänglig för den allmänna nätverksanvändande massan där man, med öppet "
++"standardiserade protokoll, anonymt och utan kostnad kan ladda ner en "
++"komplett transparent kopia av dokumentet, utan extra material. Om du väljer "
++"det senare alternativet, måste du vidta skäliga åtgärder, när du börjar "
++"sprida opaka kopior i kvantitet, för att denna transparenta kopia skall "
++"förbli tillgänglig på angivna platsen till åtminstone ett år efter den sista "
++"gången du spred en opak kopia (direkt eller via ombud eller återförsäljare) "
++"av den utgåvan till allmänheten."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:222
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <_:"
++"link-1/> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them "
++"a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++"Det är önskvärt, men inte ett krav, att du kontaktar författarna till <_:"
++"link-1/> i god tid innan du sprider något större antal kopior, för att ge "
++"dem en chans att förse dig med en uppdaterad version av dokumentet."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:236
++msgid "2"
++msgstr "2"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:237
++msgid "3"
++msgstr "3"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:232
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/> under the "
++"conditions of sections <_:link-3/> and <_:link-4/> above, provided that you "
++"release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified "
++"Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger kopiera och sprida en <_:link-1/> av <_:link-2/> under de villkor "
++"som beskrivs i paragraf <_:link-3/> och <_:link-4/> av GNU Free "
++"Documentation License, förutsatt att du släpper den förändrade versionen "
++"under exakt denna licens, och att den förändrade versionen antar dokumentets "
++"roll, och således medger spridning och förändring av den förändrade "
++"versionen till envar som erhåller en kopia av den. Utöver detta måste du "
++"göra följande med den ändrade versionen:"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:249
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <_:link-1/> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from "
++"that of the <_:link-2/>, and from those of previous versions (which should, "
++"if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You "
++"may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of "
++"that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"På <_:link-1/> (och omslagen om det finns några) använda en titel skild från "
++"den som [original]<_:link-2/> har, och skild från tidigare versioners titel "
++"(som skall, om det finns några, finnas listade i historikavsnittet i "
++"dokumentet). Du äger använda samma titel som det föregående dokumentet om "
++"den ursprungliga utgivaren ger sitt tillstånd."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:265
++msgid ""
++"List on the <_:link-1/>, as authors, one or more persons or entities "
++"responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <_:link-2/>, together "
++"with at least five of the principal authors of the <_:link-3/> (all of its "
++"principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++"Lista på <_:link-1/>, som författare, en eller flera personer eller "
++"juridiska personer som ansvarat för förändringarna i <_:link-2/>, "
++"tillsammans med minst fem av de huvudsakliga författarna av <_:link-3/> "
++"(alla dess huvudsakliga författare, om det har mindre än fem)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:280
++msgid ""
++"State on the <_:link-1/> the name of the publisher of the <_:link-2/>, as "
++"the publisher."
++msgstr "Ange namnet på utgivaren av <_:link-1/>, som utgivare, på <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:292
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <_:link-1/>."
++msgstr "Bibehålla alla upphovsrättsklausuler för <_:link-1/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:312
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <_:link-1/> under the terms of this "
++"License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++"Direkt efter upphovsrättsklausulerna innefatta ett meddelande som ger "
++"allmänheten tillstånd att använda <_:link-1/> under villkoren i denna licens "
++"[det engelska originalet] i den form som visas i Tillägg nedan."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:330
++msgid "Document's"
++msgstr "dokumentets"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:325
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <_:link-1/> and required "
++"<_:link-2/> given in the <_:link-3/> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"I meddelandet om licensen bevara den fullständiga listan över <_:link-1/> "
++"och obligatoriska <_:link-2/> som finns i <_:link-3/> meddelande om licensen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:348 C/fdl-appendix.xml:353 C/fdl-appendix.xml:372
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:507 C/fdl-appendix.xml:508
++msgid "History"
++msgstr "historik"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:347
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <_:quote-1/>, and its title, and add to it an "
++"item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <_:"
++"link-2/> as given on the <_:link-3/>. If there is no section entitled <_:"
++"quote-4/> in the <_:link-5/>, create one stating the title, year, authors, "
++"and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++"Bevara avsnittet med titeln <_:quote-1/> (History), bevara dess titel och "
++"lägg i avsnittet till en post med åtminstone titeln, året, nya författare "
++"och utgivaren av <_:link-2/> så som angivet på <_:link-3/>. Om det inte "
++"finns något avsnitt med titeln <_:quote-4/> (History) i <_:link-5/> så skapa "
++"en med titeln, året, författare och utgivaren av dokumentet så som det står "
++"på [original]dokumentets titelsida. Lägg sedan till en post som beskriver "
++"den förändrade versionen så som beskrivits ovan."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:366
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <_:link-1/> for public "
++"access to a <_:link-2/> copy of the Document, and likewise the network "
++"locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These "
++"may be placed in the <_:quote-3/> section. You may omit a network location "
++"for a work that was published at least four years before the Document "
++"itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives "
++"permission."
++msgstr ""
++"Bevara den nätverksadress, om det finns någon, angiven i <_:link-1/> till "
++"den allmänt tillgängliga <_:link-2/>a kopian av dokumentet, och likaså "
++"nätverksadresserna till de föregående versioner som dokumentet baseras på. "
++"Dessa får placeras i avsnittet <_:quote-3/> (History). Du äger utelämna en "
++"nätverksadress för ett verk som är publicerat mer än fyra år före dokumentet "
++"självt, eller om den ursprunglige utgivaren vars verk nätverksadressen "
++"hänvisar till ger sitt tillstånd."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:385 C/fdl-appendix.xml:509
++msgid "Acknowledgements"
++msgstr "tillkännagivanden"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:386 C/fdl-appendix.xml:510
++msgid "Dedications"
++msgstr "dedikationer"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:384
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <_:quote-1/> or <_:quote-2/>, preserve the section's "
++"title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the "
++"contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++"För alla avsnitt med titlarna <_:quote-1/> (Acknowledgements) eller <_:"
++"quote-2/> (Dedications), bevara titeln på avsnittet, och bevara allt "
++"innehåll och prägel på alla tillkännagivanden och/eller dedikationer gjorda "
++"av varje bidragsgivare."
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:397
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/>, unaltered in their text and "
++"in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part "
++"of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Bevara alla <_:link-1/> i <_:link-2/> oförändrade till text och titel. "
++"Avsnittsnummer eller motsvarande anses inte tillhöra avsnittets titel."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:412 C/fdl-appendix.xml:424 C/fdl-appendix.xml:445
++msgid "Endorsements"
++msgstr "endossering"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:410
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <_:quote-1/>. Such a section may not be included "
++"in the <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Radera varje avsnitt med titeln <_:quote-1/> (Endorsements). Ett sådant "
++"avsnitt får inte inkluderas i en <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:425
++msgid "Invariant Section"
++msgstr "oföränderligt avsnitt"
++
++#. (itstool) path: formalpara/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:422
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <_:quote-1/> or to conflict in title "
++"with any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Inte byta titel på något existerande avsnitt så att det blir <_:quote-1/> "
++"(Endorsements) eller så att titeln kan förväxlas med något <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:432
++msgid ""
++"If the <_:link-1/> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that "
++"qualify as <_:link-2/> and contain no material copied from the Document, you "
++"may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To "
++"do this, add their titles to the list of <_:link-3/> in the Modified "
++"Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other "
++"section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"Om <_:link-1/> innehåller nya framsidestexter eller bilagor som är att anses "
++"som <_:link-2/> och inte innehåller något material kopierat från dokumentet, "
++"så äger du, om du vill, benämna några eller samtliga av dessa som "
++"oföränderliga. För att göra detta, lägg deras titlar till listan över <_:"
++"link-3/> i den förändrade versionens licensmeddelande. Dessa titlar måste "
++"vara skilda från alla andra avsnitts titlar."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:444
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <_:quote-1/>, provided it contains nothing "
++"but endorsements of your <_:link-2/> by various parties--for example, "
++"statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an "
++"organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger lägga till ett avsnitt med titeln <_:quote-1/> (Endorsements), "
++"förutsatt att det inte innehåller något annat än endosseringar för din <_:"
++"link-2/> från olika aktörer -- till exempel, meddelanden om utförd "
++"korrekturläsning eller att texten har godkänts av en organisation som en "
++"officiell definition av en standard."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:455
++msgid "Front-Cover Text"
++msgstr "framsidestext"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:457
++msgid "Back-Cover Text"
++msgstr "baksidestext"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:453
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <_:link-1/>, and a passage of "
++"up to 25 words as a <_:link-2/>, to the end of the list of <_:link-3/> in "
++"the <_:link-4/>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover "
++"Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If "
++"the <_:link-5/> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously "
++"added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on "
++"behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on "
++"explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger lägga till ett textavsnitt på upp till fem ord som <_:link-1/>, och "
++"ett textavsnitt på upp till 25 ord som <_:link-2/> i listan över <_:link-3/> "
++"i <_:link-4/>. Bara ett textavsnitt med framsidestexter och ett med "
++"baksidestexter får läggas till av (eller genom försorg av) en enda juridisk "
++"person. Om <_:link-5/> redan innehåller en omslagstext för något av "
++"omslagen, tidigare tillagd av dig eller genom försorg av samma juridiska "
++"person som du företräder, äger du inte lägga till en till, men du äger ändra "
++"den gamla med tillstånd från den tidigare utgivaren som lade till den förra."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:470
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <_:link-1/> do not by this License "
++"give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply "
++"endorsement of any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Författaren (författarna) och utgivaren (utgivarna) av <_:link-1/> ger inte "
++"via denna licens sitt tillstånd att använda sina namn för publicitet eller "
++"för att lägga till eller antyda endossering av någon <_:link-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:484 C/fdl-appendix.xml:566
++msgid "section 4"
++msgstr "paragraf 4"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:481
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <_:link-1/> with other documents released under this "
++"License, under the terms defined in <_:link-2/> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <_:link-3/> of all "
++"of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant "
++"Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger kombinera <_:link-1/> med andra dokument som är utgivna under denna "
++"licens, under de villkor som definieras i <_:link-2/> av GNU Free "
++"Documentation License för förändrade versioner, förutsatt att du, i det "
++"kombinerade dokumentet, innefattar alla <_:link-3/> från originaldokumenten, "
++"omodifierade, och listar dem som oföränderliga avsnitt i ditt kombinerade "
++"verk i dess licensklausul, och att du bevarar alla deras "
++"garantiavsägelseklausuler."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:492
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <_:link-1/> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are "
++"multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make "
++"the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in "
++"parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if "
++"known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section "
++"titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the "
++"combined work."
++msgstr ""
++"Det kombinerade verket behöver bara innehålla en enstaka kopia av denna "
++"licens [engelska originalversionen], och flera identiska <_:link-1/> kan "
++"ersättas med en kopia. Om det finns flera oföränderliga stycken med samma "
++"namn men olika innehåll, se till att titeln på varje sådant avsnitt är unik "
++"genom att i slutet på den, inom parentes, lägga till namnet på den "
++"ursprunglige författaren eller utgivaren av det avsnittet om dessa är kända, "
++"annars ett unikt nummer. Gör samma justeringar av titlarna i listan över "
++"oföränderliga avsnitt i licensklausulen i det kombinerade verket."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:511
++msgid "Endorsements."
++msgstr "endossering"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:505
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <_:quote-1/> in "
++"the various original documents, forming one section entitled <_:quote-2/>; "
++"likewise combine any sections entitled <_:quote-3/>, and any sections "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>. You must delete all sections entitled <_:quote-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++"I det kombinerade verket måste du kombinera alla avsnitt med titlarna <_:"
++"quote-1/> (History) i de ursprungliga dokumenten, till ett avsnitt med "
++"titeln <_:quote-2/> (History); på samma sätt skall alla avsnitt med titlarna "
++"<_:quote-3/> (Acknowledgements), alla avsnitt med titlarna <_:quote-4/> "
++"(Dedications) kombineras. Du måste ta bort alla avsnitt med titlarna <_:"
++"quote-5/> (Endorsements)."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:517
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <_:link-1/> and other documents "
++"released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this "
++"License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the "
++"collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim "
++"copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger skapa en samling bestående av <_:link-1/> och andra dokument som är "
++"släppta under GNU Free Documentation License, och ersätta individuella "
++"kopior i dokumenten av denna licens med en enda kopia [av den engelska "
++"originalversionen] som inkluderas i samlingen, förutsatt att du följer "
++"villkoren för ordagrann kopiering i denna licens för varje inkluderat "
++"dokument i alla andra avseenden."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:546
++msgid "aggregate"
++msgstr "sammanslagning"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:550
++msgid "Cover Text"
++msgstr "Omslagstext"
++
++# sebras
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:538
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <_:link-1/> or its derivatives with other separate and "
++"independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or "
++"distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <_:link-2/> of the "
++"Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. "
++"Such a compilation is called an <_:quote-3/>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <_:link-4/> requirement of <_:link-5/> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++"En samling av <_:link-1/> eller av dess derivat med andra separata och "
++"oberoende dokument eller verk, på eller i en lagringsvolym eller ett "
++"spridningsmedium, kallas för en <quote>sammanslagning</quote> om den "
++"sammanslagna upphovsrätten inte används för att begränsa samlingens "
++"användares rättigheter som de enskilda dokumenten medger. När dokumentet "
++"ingår i en sådan sammanslagning, gäller inte denna licens de andra verken i "
++"samlingen som inte själva är deriverat av dokumentet. Om kravet på <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">omslagstexter</link> enligt <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"section3\">paragraf 3</link> är tillämpligt på dessa kopior av dokumentet, "
++"så kan dokumentets omslagstexter, om dokumentet utgör mindre än en fjärdedel "
++"av hela samlingen, placeras på det omslag som omger dokumentet inuti "
++"samlingen, eller den elektroniska motsvarigheten till omslag om dokumentet "
++"är i elektronisk form. Annars måste de synas på det omslag som omger hela "
++"samlingen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:562
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <_:link-1/> under the terms of <_:link-2/>. Replacing <_:"
++"link-3/> with translations requires special permission from their copyright "
++"holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections "
++"in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may "
++"include a translation of this License provided that you also include the "
++"original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between "
++"the translation and the original English version of this License, the "
++"original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++"Översättning anses vara en sorts förändring, så du äger sprida "
++"översättningar av <_:link-1/> enligt de villkor som sätts i <_:link-2/>. <_:"
++"link-3/> som ersätts med översättningar kräver tillstånd från deras "
++"upphovsrättsinnehavare, men du äger inkludera översättningar av alla eller "
++"vissa av dessa oföränderliga avsnitt tillsammans med originalversionerna av "
++"dessa oföränderliga avsnitt. Du äger inkludera en översättning av denna "
++"licens, och alla licensklausuler i dokumentet, och alla garantiavsägelser, "
++"förutsatt att du också innefattar den engelska originalversionen av denna "
++"licens och originalversionerna av dessa klausuler. Skulle det finnas "
++"skillnader mellan översättningen och originalversionen av denna licens eller "
++"någon klausul så gäller originalversionen."
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:581
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <_:link-1/> except "
++"as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, "
++"modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will "
++"automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who "
++"have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have "
++"their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++"Du äger inte kopiera, förändra, omlicensiera eller sprida <_:link-1/> annat "
++"än enligt villkoren i GNU Free Documentation License. Alla övriga försök att "
++"kopiera, modifiera, omlicensiera, eller sprida dokumentet är ogiltiga och "
++"kommer automatiskt medföra att du förlorar dina rättigheter enligt denna "
++"licens. Tredje man som har mottagit kopior eller rättigheter från dig enligt "
++"dessa licensvillkor kommer dock inte att förlora sina rättigheter så länge "
++"de följer licensvillkoren."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:597
++msgid "Free Software Foundation"
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:603
++msgid "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++msgstr "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:595
++msgid ""
++"The <_:ulink-1/> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free "
++"Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar "
++"in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new "
++"problems or concerns. See <_:ulink-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++"<_:ulink-1/> kan publicera nya, reviderade versioner av GNU Free "
++"Documentation License då och då. Sådana nya versioner kommer att vara "
++"likadana i andemening som den nuvarande versionen, men kan skilja i detalj "
++"för att behandla nya problem eller angelägenheter. Se <_:ulink-2/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:610
++msgid "or any later version"
++msgstr "eller valfri senare version"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:606
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<_:link-1/> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <_:"
++"quote-2/> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and "
++"conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has "
++"been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the "
++"Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose "
++"any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++"Varje version av licensen ges ett unikt versionsnummer. Om <_:link-1/> "
++"stadgar att en specifik numrerad version av denna licens <_:quote-2/> gäller "
++"för det, så äger du rätten att följa villkoren enligt antingen den angivna "
++"versionen eller vilken senare version som helst som publicerats (inte som "
++"utkast) av Free Software Foundation. Om dokumentet inte anger en version av "
++"denna licens, äger du välja vilken version som helst som publicerats (inte "
++"som utkast) av Free Software Foundation."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:639 C/fdl-appendix.xml:651
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Front-Cover Texts"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/link
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:640 C/fdl-appendix.xml:654
++msgid "Back-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "Back-Cover Texts"
++
++# <_:link-1/> blir "oföränderliga avsnitten"
++#. (itstool) path: blockquote/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:632
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <_:link-1/> "
++"being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <_:link-2/> being LIST, and with the <_:"
++"link-3/> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <_:link-1/> "
++"being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <_:link-2/> being LIST, and with the <_:"
++"link-3/> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:649
++msgid "with no Invariant Sections"
++msgstr "with no Invariant Sections"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:652
++msgid "no Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr "no Front-Cover Texts"
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/quote
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:653
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"
++msgstr "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:647
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <_:link-1/>, write <_:quote-2/> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <_:link-3/>, write <_:quote-4/> instead of <_:"
++"quote-5/>; likewise for <_:link-6/>."
++msgstr ""
++"Om du inte har några <_:link-1/>, skriv <_:quote-2/> istället för att ange "
++"vilka som är oföränderliga. Om du inte har några <_:link-3/>, skriv <_:"
++"quote-4/> istället för <_:quote-5/>; såväl som för <_:link-6/>."
++
++#. (itstool) path: para/ulink
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:661
++msgid "GNU General Public License"
++msgstr "GNU General Public License"
++
++#. (itstool) path: sect1/para
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:657
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <_:ulink-1/>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
++"Om ditt dokument innehåller icke-triviala exempel med programkod, så "
++"rekommenderar vi att du släpper dessa exempel parallellt under en, av dig "
++"vald, fri programvarulicens, som till exempel <_:ulink-1/>, för att "
++"möjliggöra deras användning i fri programvara."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28 Aug 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++#~ "authorinitials> <revremark>development</revremark>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<revnumber>1.29</revnumber> <date>28 aug 2018</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++#~ "authorinitials> <revremark>utveckling</revremark>"
++
++#~ msgid "Setting up your project"
++#~ msgstr "Att ställa in ditt projekt"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc "
++#~ "into your project. Theses sections assume we work on a project called "
++#~ "'meep'. This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user "
++#~ "app called 'meeper'. We also assume you will be using autoconf and "
++#~ "automake. In addition section <link linkend=\"plain_makefiles\">plain "
++#~ "makefiles or other build systems</link> will describe the basics needed "
++#~ "to work in a different build setup."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "De följande avsnitten beskriver vilka steg du måste utföra för att "
++#~ "integrera GTK-Doc i ditt projekt. Dessa avsnitt förutsätter att vi "
++#~ "arbetar på ett projekt kallat ”meep”. Detta projekt innehåller ett "
++#~ "bibliotek kallat ”libmeep” och ett slutanvändarprogram kallat ”meeper”. "
++#~ "Vi förutsätter också att du kommer att använda autoconf och automake. "
++#~ "Dessutom kommer avsnittet <link linkend=\"plain_makefiles\">vanliga "
++#~ "makefiler eller andra byggsystem</link> att beskriva de grundläggande "
++#~ "sakerna som behöver fungera i ett annat byggsystem."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/"
++#~ "reference (this way you can also have docs/help for end-user "
++#~ "documentation). It is recommended to create another subdirectory with the "
++#~ "name of the doc-package. For packages with just one library this step is "
++#~ "not necessary."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Under toppnivåkatalogen för ditt projekt, skapa mappar kallade docs/"
++#~ "reference (på detta sättet kan du också ha docs/help för "
++#~ "slutanvändardokumentation). Det rekommenderas att skapa en annan "
++#~ "underkatalog med namnet på dokumentations-paketet. För paket med bara ett "
++#~ "bibliotek är detta steg inte nödvändigt."
++
++#~ msgid "Example directory structure"
++#~ msgstr "Exempel på katalogstruktur"
++
++#~ msgid "This can then look as shown below: <_:example-1/>"
++#~ msgstr "Detta kan se ut enligt nedan: <_:example-1/>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> "
++#~ "script."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Väldigt enkelt! Bara lägg till en rad till ditt <filename>configure.ac</"
++#~ "filename>-skript."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "# check for gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "# check for gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++
++#~ msgid "Keep gtk-doc optional"
++#~ msgstr "Låt gtk-doc vara valfritt"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "# check for gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++#~ "GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++#~ "],[\n"
++#~ "AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++#~ "])\n"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "# check for gtk-doc\n"
++#~ "m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++#~ "GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++#~ "],[\n"
++#~ "AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++#~ "])\n"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "This will require all developers to have gtk-doc installed. If it is okay "
++#~ "for your project to have optional api-doc build setup, you can solve this "
++#~ "as below. Keep it as is, as gtkdocize is looking for "
++#~ "<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> at the start of a line. <_:example-1/>"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Detta kommer att kräva att alla utvecklare har gtk-doc installerat. Om "
++#~ "det är okej för ditt projekt att ha ett valfritt api-dokumentation bygge, "
++#~ "kan du lösa det enligt nedan. Behåll det som det är eftersom gtkdocize "
++#~ "letar efter <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> i början på en rad. <_:"
++#~ "example-1/>"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside "
++#~ "your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows "
++#~ "<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++#~ "definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Vidare rekommenderas det att du har följande rad i ditt "
++#~ "<filename>configure.ac</filename>-skript. Den låter "
++#~ "<application>gtkdocize</application> automatiskt kopiera "
++#~ "makrodefinitionen för <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> till ditt "
++#~ "projekt."
++
++#~ msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++#~ msgstr "Förberedelse för gtkdocize"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "\n"
++#~ "AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++
++# sebras: e.g. because of,... it can be...any files in tmpl...and is migrating...<symbol> or <function>? gtkdoc or GTK-Doc
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Historically GTK-Doc was generating template files where developers "
++#~ "entered the docs. This turned out to be not so good (e.g. the need for "
++#~ "having generated files under version control). Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the "
++#~ "tools can get all the information from source comments and thus the "
++#~ "templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in "
++#~ "the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--"
++#~ "flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl "
++#~ "usage totally. Besides adding the option directly to the command "
++#~ "invocation, they can be added also to an environment variable called "
++#~ "<symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> or set as a 2nd parameter in "
++#~ "<symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro in the configure script. If you have "
++#~ "never changed file in tmpl by hand and migrating from older gtkdoc "
++#~ "versions, please remove the directory (e.g. from version control system)."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Historiskt genererade GTK-Doc mallfiler i vilka utvecklare skrev in "
++#~ "dokumentationen. Detta visade sig inte vara så bra (t.ex. på grund av "
++#~ "behovet att ha genererade filer under versionskontroll). Sedan GTK-Doc "
++#~ "1.9 kan verktygen hämta all information från källkodskommentarer och "
++#~ "mallar kan därför undvikas. Vi rekommenderar att hålla dokumentationen i "
++#~ "koden. <application>gtkdocize</application> har nu stöd för flaggan "
++#~ "<option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> som väljer en makefil som hoppar över "
++#~ "tmpl-användning helt. Förutom att lägga till flaggan direkt vid körning "
++#~ "av kommandot, kan den också läggas till i en miljövariabel kallad "
++#~ "<symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> eller inställd som en andra parameter i "
++#~ "makrot <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> i configure-skriptet. Om du inte "
++#~ "har ändrat någon fil i tmpl för hand och migrerar från äldre gtkdoc-"
++#~ "versioner, ta bort katalogen (t.ex. från versionshanteringssystemet)."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<"
++#~ "package>/index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. "
++#~ "But hang-on, during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages "
++#~ "with life."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Du kan nu peka din webbläsare till <filename>docs/reference/<paket>/"
++#~ "index.html</filename>. Ja, den är fortfarande lite sorglig. Men häng "
++#~ "kvar, i nästa kapitel kommer vi att berätta för dig hur du fyller sidorna "
++#~ "med liv."
++
++#~ msgid "Documentation placement"
++#~ msgstr "Dokumentationsplacering"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing "
++#~ "inside the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the "
++#~ "disadvantages that the information is often not updated and also that the "
++#~ "file tend to cause conflicts with version control systems."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Tidigare var det tvunget att fylla i största delen av dokumentationen i "
++#~ "filer som fanns i katalogen <filename>tmpl</filename>. Detta hade "
++#~ "nackdelen att informationen ofta inte uppdaterades och att filen också "
++#~ "ofta orsakade konflikter med versionshanteringssystem."
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the "
++#~ "documentation inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way "
++#~ "of documenting code."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "För att undvika de nämnda problemen föreslår vi att placera "
++#~ "dokumentationen i källkoden. Denna manual kommer endast att beskriva "
++#~ "detta sättet att dokumentera kod."
++
++#~ msgid "<guilabel>Python</guilabel> - optional - for gtkdoc-depscan"
++#~ msgstr "<guilabel>Python</guilabel> - valfritt - för gtkdoc-depscan"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel> "
++#~ "<application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the "
++#~ "<filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the "
++#~ "information gathered in the first step. (Note that this can be run "
++#~ "repeatedly. It will try to ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "<guilabel>Generera ”mall”-filerna.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</"
++#~ "application> skapar ett antal filer i underkatalogen <filename class="
++#~ "\"directory\">tmpl/</filename>, från information som samlats ihop i det "
++#~ "första steget. (Notera att detta kan köras upprepade gånger. Det kommer "
++#~ "att försöka att säkerställa att ingen dokumentation någonsin går "
++#~ "förlorad.)"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to "
++#~ "keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> "
++#~ "supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a "
++#~ "makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in "
++#~ "tmpl by hand, please remove the directory (e.g. from version control "
++#~ "system)."
++#~ msgstr ""
++#~ "Sedan GTK-Doc 1.9 kan mallar undvikas. Vi rekommenderar att hålla "
++#~ "dokumentationen i koden. <application>gtkdocize</application> har nu stöd "
++#~ "för flaggan <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> som väljer en makefil som "
++#~ "helt hoppar över tmpl-användning. Om du inte ändrat i någon fil i tmpl "
++#~ "för hand, ta bort katalogen (t.ex. från versionshanteringssystemet)."
++
++#~ msgid "1.12"
++#~ msgstr "1.12"
++
++#~ msgid "Chris"
++#~ msgstr "Chris"
++
++#~ msgid "Lyttle"
++#~ msgstr "Lyttle"
++
++#~ msgid "chris@wilddev.net"
++#~ msgstr "chris@wilddev.net"
++
++#~ msgid "Dan"
++#~ msgstr "Dan"
++
++#~ msgid "Mueth"
++#~ msgstr "Mueth"
++
++#~ msgid "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++#~ msgstr "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++
++#~ msgid "Stefan"
++#~ msgstr "Stefan"
++
++#~ msgid "Kost"
++#~ msgstr "Kost"
++
++#~ msgid "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++#~ msgstr "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++
++#~ msgid "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++#~ msgstr "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++
++#~ msgid "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++#~ msgstr "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++
++#~ msgid "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle and Stefan Kost"
++#~ msgstr "Dan Mueth, Chris Lyttle och Stefan Kost"
++
++#~ msgid "1.11"
++#~ msgstr "1.11"
++
++#~ msgid "22 March 2008"
++#~ msgstr "22 mars 2008"
++
++#~ msgid "mal"
++#~ msgstr "mal"
++
++#~ msgid "explanation"
++#~ msgstr "förklaring"
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# I. Felix <ifelix@redhat.com>, 2010.
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc-help.master.ta\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-01-19 20:58+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-02-10 14:56+0530\n"
++"Last-Translator: I. Felix <ifelix@redhat.com>\n"
++"Language-Team: ta_IN <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.0\n"
++"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1;\n"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:12(title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் கையேடு"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:13(edition) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:92(revnumber)
++msgid "1.12"
++msgstr "1.12"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:14(para)
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr "உருவாக்குவோருக்கான ஜிடிகே டாக்(GTK-Doc) பயன்பாட்டு பயனர் கையேடு "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:17(firstname)
++msgid "Chris"
++msgstr "க்ரிஸ்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:18(surname)
++msgid "Lyttle"
++msgstr "லைட்டில்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:21(email)
++msgid "chris@wilddev.net"
++msgstr "chris@wilddev.net"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:26(firstname)
++msgid "Dan"
++msgstr "டேன்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:27(surname)
++msgid "Mueth"
++msgstr "மீயத்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:30(email)
++msgid "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++msgstr "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:35(firstname)
++msgid "Stefan"
++msgstr "ஸ்டீபன்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:36(surname)
++msgid "Kost"
++msgstr "கோஸ்ட்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:39(email)
++msgid "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++msgstr "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:45(publishername)
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே-டாக் திட்டம்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:46(email)
++msgid "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++msgstr "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:49(year)
++msgid "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++msgstr "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:50(holder)
++msgid "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle and Stefan Kost"
++msgstr "டேன் மீயத் க்ரிஸ் லைட்டில் மற்றும் ஸ்டீபன் கோஸ்ட்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:61(para)
++msgid "Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"நீங்கள் இலவச மென் பொருள் அமைப்பினால் வெளியிடப்பட்ட<citetitle> ஜிஎன்யு "
++"பொது ஆவண அனுமதிக்கான</citetitle> இந்த 1.1 ம் பதிப்பு அல்லது அடுத்த பதிப்புகள் விதிகளின் படி நீங்கள் "
++"(விருப்பப்படி) மாற்றமில்லா தொகுதிகள், முன் அட்டை உரைகள், பின் அட்டை உரைகள் ஆக்கியன நீங்கலாக இதை பிரதி எடுக்கலாம், வினியோகிக்கலாம், மாற்றலாம். அனுமதியின் பிரதி இங்குள்ளது:<link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:69(para)
++msgid "Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial caps."
++msgstr "நிறுவனங்களால் அவர்களது பொருட்கள், சேவைகளை குறிப்பிட பயனாகும் பல பெயர்களை அவர்களது வியாபார குறியாக சொல்கிறார்கள். அத்தகைய பெயர்கள் க்னோம் ஆவணங்களில் காணப்படுமானால், அவை க்னோம் ஆவண திட்ட உறுப்பினருக்கு தெரிவிக்கப்பட்டால், அவை தலை எழுத்துக்களாக அலல்து முதல் எழுத்து தலை எழுத்தாக காட்டப்படும். "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:80(revnumber)
++msgid "1.14"
++msgstr "1.14"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:81(date)
++msgid "19 December 2009"
++msgstr "19டிசம்பர் 2009"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:82(authorinitials) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:88(authorinitials) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:94(authorinitials)
++msgid "sk"
++msgstr "sk"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:83(revremark)
++msgid "development version"
++msgstr "உருவாக்க பதிப்பு"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:86(revnumber)
++msgid "1.13"
++msgstr "1.13"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:87(date) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:93(date)
++msgid "18 December 2009"
++msgstr "18டிசம்பர் 2009"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:89(revremark)
++msgid "broken tarball update"
++msgstr "சிதைந்த டார் பால் இற்றைப்படுத்தல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:95(revremark)
++msgid "new tool features and bugfixes"
++msgstr "புதிய அம்சங்கள் மற்றும் வழி நீக்கங்கள்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:98(revnumber)
++msgid "1.11"
++msgstr "1.11"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:99(date)
++msgid "16 Novemebr 2008"
++msgstr "16 நவம்பர் 2008"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:100(authorinitials)
++msgid "mal"
++msgstr "மால்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:101(revremark)
++msgid "GNOME doc-utils migration"
++msgstr "க்னோம் டாக்-யுடில்ஸ் இட மாற்றம்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:110(title)
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "அறிமுகம்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:112(para)
++msgid "This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how it is used."
++msgstr "இந்த அத்தியாயம் ஜிடிகே-டாக் குறித்த அறிமுகம் தருகிறது. மேலும் அது என்ன எப்படி பயன்படுத்துவது என மேலோட்டமாக சொல்லுகிறது."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:118(title)
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் என்பதென்ன?"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:120(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can also be used to document application code."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் சி குறியாக்கத்தை ஆவணப்படுத்துகிறது. இது எடுத்துக்காட்டாக ஜிடிகே+ மற்றும் க்னோம் நூலகங்கள் போன்ற நூலகங்களின் பொது ஏபிஐ களை ஆவணப்படுத்த பயன்படுகிறது. ஆனாலும் இது நிரல்களின் குறியாக்கத்தை ஆவணப்படுத்தக்கூட பயன்படுத்தலாம். "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:128(title)
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் எப்படி வேலை செய்கிறது?"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:130(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce output for static functions)."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் வேலை செய்வதெப்படி எனில் சிறப்பு ஒழுங்கில் விமர்சன தொகுதிகளாக செயல்களின் ஆவணங்கள் மூல கோப்புகளில் வைக்கப்படும். அல்லது ஜிடிகே டாக் பயன்படுத்தும் டெம்ப் கோப்புகளுக்கு சேர்க்கபடும். (ஆயினும் ஜிடிகே டாக் தலைப்பு கோப்புகளில் அறுதியிட்ட பங்ஷன்களை மட்டுமே ஆவணப்படுத்தும். நிலையான பங்க்ஷன்களுக்கு வெளியீடு தராது)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:137(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc consists of a number of perl scripts, each performing a different step in the process."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் இல் பல பெர்ல் குறுநிரல்கள் உள்ளன. "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:142(para)
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "இந்த நடப்பில் ஐந்து படிகள் உள்ளன"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:149(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the source files with the documentation for each function, macro, union etc. (In the past information was entered in generated template files, which is not recommended anymore)."
++msgstr "<guilabel>ஆவணம் எழுதும் முறை.</guilabel> ஆசிரியர் மூல கோப்பை ஒவ்வொரு செயல், மேக்ரோ, இணைப்புக்கும் ஆவணங்களால் நிரப்புவார். (முன்னே விவரங்கள் உருவாக்கப்பட்ட வார்ப்புரு கோப்புக்களால் உள்ளிடப்பட்டது. அப்படி இனி செய்ய பரிந்துரைக்கவில்லை.)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:159(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> containg a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to <filename><module>-sections.txt</filename> The author can rearrange the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some sybols to show up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or the declaration should appear differently, one can place entries similar to the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>. <application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> can also be used to dynamically query a library about any GtkObject subclasses it exports. It saves information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about any GTK Args and Signals it provides."
++msgstr "<guilabel>குறியாக்கம் குறித்த தகவல்களை சேர்த்தல்.</guilabel><application>ஜிடிகே டாக் ஸ்கேன்</application> இது மூல கோப்பின் தலைப்புகளில் ஒவ்வொரு செயல், மேக்ரோ, ஈநம், ஸ்டரக்ட். இணைப்புக்கும் வருடுகிறது. பின் அது இந்த கோப்பை உருவாக்குகிறது: <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> இதில் டெக்ளரெஷன்களின் பட்டியல் ஒன்று இருக்கும். அவை எந்த தலைப்பில் எந்த தொகுதியில் பொருந்துமோஅங்கே இருக்கும். முதல் சுற்றில் இது இந்த கோப்புக்கு நகலெடுக்கப்படும்: <filename><module>-sections.txt</filename> பின் ஆசிரியர் இவற்றின் உள் இருக்கும் டெக்ளரெஷன்களின் வரிசைப்படி தொகுதிகளை தேவையானபடி மறு அமைப்பு செய்யலாம். இரண்டாவதாக இது உருவாக்கும் கோப்பு: <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>. இந்த கோப்பு வருடி கண்டுபிடித்த அனைத்து முழு டெக்ளரெஷன்களும் உள்ளதாகும். ஏதேனும் காரணத்தால் ஒருவர் வருடியால் முழு டெக்ளரேஷன்களாக காணப்படாத அல்லது வேறு மாதிரி காட்டப்பட வேண்டியதான சைபோல்கள் ஆவணங்களில் காட்டப்பட வேண்டும் என விரும்பினால், இம்மாதிரியான உள்ளீடுகளை வைக்கலாம்: <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>. <application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> ஐயும் பயன்படுத்தி இயங்கு நிலையில் அது ஏற்றுமதி செய்யும் எந்த ஒரு ஜிஜிகே பொருள் துணைவகுப்பையும் நூலகத்தில் கேள்வி கேட்கலாம். வகுப்பு மட்டங்களில் இந்த வகுப்புகளின் இடத்தை குறித்த தகவலையும் ஜிடிகே ஆர்க்ஸ் மற்றும் அது தரும் சமிக்ஞைகள்குறித்த தகவல்களையும் அது சேமித்துக்கொள்ளும். "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:184(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the information gathered in the first step. (Note that this can be run repeatedly. It will try to ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++msgstr "<guilabel>\"வார்ப்புரு\" கோப்புகள் உருவாக்கம் .</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> இந்த துணை அடைவில் முதல் சுற்றில் சேகரித்த தகவல்களைக் கொண்டு பல கோப்புகளை உருவாக்குகிறது: <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> (இதை மீண்டும் மீண்டும் இயக்கலாம். எந்த கோப்பும் தொலைந்து போகாமல் இது பார்த்துக்கொள்ளும்.)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:193(para)
++msgid "Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand, please remove the dir (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் 1.9 முதல் வார்ப்புருக்களை தவிர்க்கலாம். மக்கள் ஆவணத்தை குறீயாக்கத்தில் வைத்து இருப்பதையே நாங்கள் விரும்புகிறோம். <application>gtkdocize</application> இப்போது இந்த <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> தேர்வை ஆதரிக்கிறது. இது (tmpl) வார்ப்புரு பயன்பாட்டை முற்றூம் தவிர்க்கும் ஒரு மேக் பைலை தேர்வுசெய்கிறது. நீங்கள் கைமுறையாக எந்த ஒரு tmpl கோப்பையும் மாற்றியது இல்லையானால் தயை செய்து இந்த அடைவை நீக்கவும்.(எ.கா. வெர்ஷன் கன்ட்ரோல் அமைப்பு)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:205(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Generating the SGML/XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> turns the template files into SGML or XML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads takes docs from sources and introspection data."
++msgstr "<guilabel>SGML/XML மற்றும் HTML/PDF ஆகியவற்றை உருவாக்குதல். </guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> வார்ப்புரு கோப்புகளை SGML அல்லது XML கோப்புகளாக மாற்றி இங்கு சேமிக்கிறது: <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> அல்லது <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> துணை அடைவு.மூலத்தில் விசேஷ விமர்சன தொகுதிகளுடன் பங்ஷன் ஆவணங்கள் இருப்பின் அவை இப்போது ஒன்றாக்கப்படும். வார்ப்புரு கோப்புகள் இல்லையானால் அது மூலத்தில் இருந்து ஆவணங்களையும் ஆய்வு தரவுகளையும் பயன்படுத்திக்கொள்ளும்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:215(para)
++msgid "<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the SGML/XML files into HTML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. Likewise <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the SGML/XML files into a PDF docuemnt called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr "<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> SGML/XML கோப்புக்களை HTML கோப்புக்களாக மாறுகிறது, இந்த துணை அடைவில் <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> . அதே போல்<application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> SGML/XML கோப்புக்களைPDF ஆவணமாக இப்பெயரிட்டு உருவாக்கும். <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:221(para)
++msgid "Files in <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One should never edit them directly."
++msgstr " <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> அல்லது <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> மற்றும் <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> இல் உள்ள அடைவுகள் எப்போதுமே மேலெழுதப்படும். அவற்றை யாரும் எப்போதும் நேரடியாக திருத்தக்கூடாது."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:229(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr "<guilabel>ஆவணங்கள் இடையில் குறுக்கு தொடுப்புகளை சரி செய்தல்</guilabel> HTML கோப்புக்களை நிறுவிய பின்னர், பின் வரும் நிரலை இயக்கி <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> ஆவணங்கள் இடையில் குறுக்கு தொடுப்புகளை சரி செய்யலாம். உதாரணமாக ஜிடிகே+ ஆவணத்தில் ஜிலிப் கையேட்டில் ஆவணப்படுத்திய பல வகைகளுக்கு குறுக்கு தொடுப்புகள் இருக்கும். வினியோகிக்க டார் பால் செய்யும் போது <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> எல்லா வெளி தொடுப்புக்களையும் வலை தொடுப்பாக மாற்றிவிடும். இதே நிரல் ஆவணங்கள் நிறுவப்படும்போது அவற்றை உள்ளமை தொடுப்புக்களாக மாற்றியமைக்கும். (மற்ற ஆவணங்கள் நிறுவப்பட்டு இருக்கும் பட்சத்தில்.)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:247(title)
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் ஐ பெறுதல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:250(title)
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "முன் தேவைகள்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:251(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>பெர்ல் v5</guilabel> - the main scripts are in Perl."
++msgstr "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - முதன்மை குறுநிரல்கள் பெர்ல் இல் உள்ளன."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:254(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>டாக்புக் DTD v3.0</guilabel> - This is the DocBook SGML DTD. <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>"
++msgstr "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - இது டாக் புத்தகத்தின் SGML DTD. <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:258(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>ஜேட் v1.1</guilabel> - This is a DSSSL processor for converting SGML to various formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type=\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++msgstr "“<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - இது ஒரு DSSSL செயலி SGML ஐ பல ஒழுங்குகளுக்கு மாற்றுகிறது. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type=\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:262(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> This is the DSSSL code to convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together with jade. I've customized the DSSSL code slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to colour the program code listings/declarations, and to support global cross-reference indices in the generated HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl\""
++msgstr "<guilabel>மாடுலர் டாக் புக் ஸ்டைய்ல்ஷீட்ஸ்</guilabel> இது DSSSL குறியாக்கம். டாக்புக் ஐ HTML (மேலும் சில ஒழுங்குகள்) ஆக ஆக்கும். இது ஜேட் உடன் பயன்படுத்தப்படும். நான் DSSSL code ஐ கொஞ்சம் தனிப்பயன் ஆக்கி இருக்கிறேன். இது நிரலின் பட்டியல்கள்/டெக்ளரேஷன்களை வண்ணத்தில் காண்பிக்கும், மேலும் HTML இல் குறுக்கு தொடுப்புக்களை உலகளாவியதாக்கும்.<ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:271(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - if you want to create man pages from the DocBook. I've customized the 'translation spec' slightly, to capitalise section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of the pages and the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink> NOTE: This does not work yet."
++msgstr " நீங்கள் டாக்புக் இலிருந்து மேன் பக்கங்களை தயாரிக்க விரும்பினால் ..மொழிபெயர்ப்பு குறிப்புக்களை சற்றே நான் மாற்றியுள்ளேன். தொகுப்பு தலைப்புகள் மேலெழுத்தில் காட்டப்படும். ஜிடிகே நூலகம் என்னும் தலைப்பு ('GTK Library') பக்கங்களின் மேலே காட்டப்படும். திருத்திய தேதி கீழே காட்டப்படும். இதற்கு இங்கு ஒரு தொடுப்பு உள்ளது: <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink> குறிப்பு: இது இன்னும் செயலில் இல்லை.."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:282(title)
++msgid "Installation"
++msgstr "நிறுவல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:283(para)
++msgid "There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are installed."
++msgstr "மாடுலர் டாக் புக் ஸ்டைய்ல்ஷீட்ஸ் நிறுவப்பட செந்தரமான இடமில்லை."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:286(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically:"
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் இன் வடிவமைக்கும் குறுநிரல் மூன்று அடைவுகளை தானியங்கியாக பார்க்கும்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:289(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (used by RedHat)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (ரெட் ஹாட் ஆல் பயன்படுத்தப்படுவது)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:292(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (used by Debian)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (டெபியன் ஆல் பயன்படுத்தப்படுவது)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:295(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (used by SuSE)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (சூசே ஆல் பயன்படுத்தப்படுவது)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:298(para)
++msgid "If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to configure GTK-Doc using the option: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++msgstr "ஸ்டைய்ல் ஷீட் கள் வேறெங்கும் நிறுவி இருப்பின் கை முறையாக ஜிடிகே டாக் ஐ வடிவமைக்க வேண்டும். கட்டளை தேர்ர்வு: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command> "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:322(title)
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் பற்றி"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:324(para) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:338(para)
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(FIXME)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:328(para)
++msgid "(History, authors, web pages, license, future plans, comparison with other similar systems.)"
++msgstr "(வரலாறு, ஆசிரியர்கள், வலைப்பக்கங்கள், உரிமை, எதிர்கால திட்டங்கள், மற்ற இதே போன்ற அமைப்புகளுடன் ஒப்பீடு)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:336(title)
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "இந்த கையேடு பற்றி"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:342(para)
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr "(இது யாருக்கு, உரிமம், எங்கு பெறுவது)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:351(title)
++msgid "Setting up your project"
++msgstr "உங்கள் திட்டத்தை அமைத்தல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:353(para)
++msgid "The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc into your project. Theses section assume we work on a project called 'meep'. This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user app called 'meeper'."
++msgstr " அடுத்த தொகுதிகள் ஜிடிகே-டாக் ஐ உங்கள் திட்டத்தில் ஒருங்கிணைகக் என்ன செய்யவேண்டும் என விவரிக்கிறது. இந்த தொகுதிகள் நாம் மீப் ('meep') என்ற திட்டத்துக்கு வேளை செய்வதாக கொள்வோம்.இதற்கு 'libmeep' என ஒரு நூலகமும் பயனர் நிரல் 'meeper' என்றூம் கொள்வோம்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:361(title)
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "தோராய ஆவணம் அமைத்தல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:363(para)
++msgid "Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/reference (this way you can also have docs/help for end-user documentation). It is recommended to create another subdirectory with the name of the doc-package. For packages with just one library this step is not necessary."
++msgstr "உங்கள் தலை மட்ட திட்ட அடைவில் இந்த மாதிரி அடைவுகளை உருவாக்குக.docs/reference (இதனால் உங்களுக்கு பயனர் ஆவணம் docs/help உம் கிடைக்கும்). இன்னொரு துணை அடைவு doc-package என் பெயரிட்டு உருவாக்கவும். ஒரே ஒரு நூலகம் உள்ள பொதிகளுக்கு இந்த படி தேவையில்லை"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:372(title)
++msgid "Example directory structure"
++msgstr "எடுத்துக்காட்டு அடைவு அமைப்பு"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:370(para)
++msgid "This can then look as show below: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "இது கீழ் கண்டவாறு அமையலாம்: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:390(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:397(title)
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "ஆட்டோ கான்ஃப் உடன் ஒருங்கிணைப்பு"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:392(para)
++msgid "Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script."
++msgstr "ரொம்ப சுலபம். <filename>configure.ac</filename> குறுநிரலுக்கு ஒரே ஒரு வரி மட்டும் சேருங்கள்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:407(para)
++msgid "The first argument is used to check for the gtkdocversion at configure time. The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</application>. The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several configure switches:"
++msgstr "முதல் தரு மதிப்பு வடிவமைப்பு நேரத்தில் ஜிடிகே டாக் இன் பதிப்பை சோதிக்கிறது. இரண்டாவது தெர்வு தருமதிப்பு. இது இந்த நிரலால் பயன்படுத்தப்படுகிறது. <application>gtkdocize</application>. <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> மேக்ரோ பல மாற்றிகளை வடிவமைத்து சேர்க்கிறது:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:413(para)
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr "--with-html-dir=PATH : நிறுவிய ஆவணங்களுக்கான பாதை"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:414(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr "\"\"--enable-gtk-doc :ஆவணமாக்கத்துக்கு ஜிடிகே டாக் ஐ பயன்படுத்துக. [முன்னிருப்பு=இல்லை]"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:415(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc-html : html ஒழுங்கில் ஆவணத்தை உருவாக்குக[முன்னிருப்பு=ஆம்]"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:416(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : pdf ஒழுங்கில் ஆவணத்தை உருவாக்குக [முன்னிருப்பு=இல்லை]"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:420(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for users but not for developers)."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் GTK-Doc முன்னிருப்பாக செயலிழந்து இருக்கும்! ஆகவே அடுத்த <filename>configure</filename> இயக்கத்துக்கு இந்த தேர்வை செய்க: <option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option> . இல்லையானால் முன் உருவாக்கிய ஆவணங்கள் நிறூவப்படும்.( இது பயனர்களுக்கு புரியும், நல்லது. ஆனால் உருவாக்குவோருக்கு அல்ல)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:428(para)
++msgid "Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside you <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows <application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++msgstr " மேலும் பின் வரும் வரியை உங்கள் <filename>configure.ac</filename> குறுநிரலில் அமைத்துக்கொள்க. இது <application>gtkdocize</application> நிரலை தானியங்கியாக <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> இன் மேக்ரோ அறிதியீட்டை உங்கள் திட்டத்துக்கு பிரதி எடுக்கிறது."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:436(title)
++msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++msgstr "gtkdocize க்கு முன்னேற்பாடு"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:447(title)
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "ஆட்டோமேக் உடன் ஒருங்கிணைப்பு"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:449(para)
++msgid "First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the examples subdirectory of the gtkdoc-sources to your project's API documentation directory ( <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></filename>). If you have multiple doc-packages repeat this for each one."
++msgstr "முதலில் gtkdoc-sources அடைவிலிருந்து உங்கள் திட்டத்தின் ஏபிஐ ஆவண அடைவு ( <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></filename>) க்கு <filename>Makefile.am</filename> ஐ பிரதி எடுக்கவும். உங்களுக்கு பல டாக் பொதிகள் இருப்பின் இதை ஒவ்வொன்றுக்கும் செய்யவும்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:456(para)
++msgid "The next step is to edit the setting inside the <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. All the settings have a comment above that describes their purpose. Most settings are extra flags passed to the respective tools. Every tool has a variable of the form <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>. All the tools support <option>--help</option> to list the supported parameters."
++msgstr "அடுத்த படி <filename>Makefile.am</filename> இல் உள்ளதை திருத்துவது. எல்லா அமைப்புகளின் மேலும் அதன் செயலை விவரிக்கும் விமர்சனம் இருக்கும். அனேகமான அமைப்புகள் அவற்றின் கருவிகளூக்கான கூடிதல் கொடிகளே. எல்லா கருவிகளுக்கும் ஒரு மாறி இது போல இருக்கும். <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>. எல்லா கருவிகளும் ஆதரவளிக்கும் பாராமீட்டர்களை குறிக்க இதை ஆதரிக்கும்: <option>--help</option> "
++
++#. FIXME: explain options ?
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:467(para)
++msgid "You may also want to enable GTK-Doc for the distcheckmake target. Just add then one-liner show in the next example to you top-level <filename>Makefile.am</filename>:"
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் (GTK-Doc) ஐdistcheckmake க்கு இலக்காக்க நீங்கள் விரும்பலாம். அடுத்த உதாரணத்தில் உள்ள ஒரு வரி காட்டலை உங்கள் மேல் மட்ட <filename>Makefile.am</filename> க்கு சேர்கவும்:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:474(title)
++msgid "Enable GTK-Doc during make distcheck"
++msgstr "distcheck போது ஜிடிகே- டாக் ஐ செயலாக்குக"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:486(title)
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "ஆட்டொஜென் உடன் ஒருங்கிணைத்தல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:488(para)
++msgid "Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup the build infrastructure after a checkout from version control system (such as cvs/svn/git). GTK-Doc comes with a tool called <application>gtkdocize</application> which can be used in such a script. It should be run before autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr "முக்கால்வாசி திட்டங்களில் (cvs/svn/git போன்ற) வெர்ஷன் கட்டுப்பாடு அமைப்பில் இருந்து பெறப்பட்டதும் அடிக்கட்டுமான பணியை செய்ய <filename>autogen.sh</filename> குறுநிரல் இருக்கும். ஜிடிகே டாக் (GTK-Doc) இல் <application>gtkdocize</application> என ஒரு கருவி உண்டு. இது அது போன்ற குறுநிரலுடன் வேலை செய்யும்.இது autoheader, automake அல்லது autoconf க்கு முன்னால் இயக்கப்பட வேண்டும்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:497(title)
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "autogen.sh இலிருந்து gtkdocize ஐ இயக்குதல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:506(para)
++msgid "When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> to you project root (or any directory specified by the <option>--docdir</option> option). If also check you configure script for the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> invocation."
++msgstr " <application>gtkdocize</application> நிரலை இயக்கும்போது <filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> ஐ உங்கள் திட்டத்தின் மூலத்திற்கு அல்லது <option>—docdir</option>தேர்வில் நீங்கள் குறிப்பிடும் அடைவுக்கு பிரதி எடுக்கிறது. அது <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> அழைப்புக்கும் உங்கள் அமைப்பு குறுநிரலை சோதிக்கிறது ."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:514(para)
++msgid "Historically GTK-Doc was gerating template files where developers entered the docs. this turned out to be not so good. Since a few version GTK-Doc could also get all the information from source comments. Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. Besides adding the option directly to the command invocation, they can be added also to a environment variable called <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> or set as a 2nd parameter in <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro in the configure script. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand and migrating from older gtkdoc versions, please remove the dir (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr "முன்னெல்லாம் ஜிடிகே டாக்(GTK-Doc) வார்ப்புரு கோப்புக்களை உருவாக்கிக்கொண்டு இருந்தது. இதில் உருவாக்குவோர் ஆவணங்களை உள்ளிட்டுக்கொண்டு இருந்தனர். இது அவ்வளவு சரியாக வேலை செய்யவில்லை. சில பதிப்புக்களாக ஜிடிகே டாக்(GTK-Doc) மூலத்தின் விமர்சனங்களிலிருந்து எல்லா தகவல்களையும் பெற் முடிகிறது. GTK-Doc 1.9 முதல் வார்புருக்களை தவிர்க்கலாம். ஆகவே நாங்கள் மூல குறியாக்கத்தில் ஆவணங்களுக்கு தேவையான எல்லா தகவல்களையும் வைக்க வேண்டுகிறோம். <application>gtkdocize</application>இப்போது ஒரு <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> தேர்ர்வை ஆதரிக்கிறது. இதனால் மேக்பைல் (makefile) வார்ப்புரு பயனை முற்றும் தவிர்த்துவிடுகிறது. நேரடியாக கட்டளை அழைப்புக்கு இந்த தேர்வை சேர்ப்பதுடன் <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> எனும் சூழ்நிலை மாறிகளுக்கும் சேர்க்கலாம். அலல்து இரண்டாம் பாராமிட்டராக <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> இல் அமைக்கலாம். நீங்கள் இதுவரை கைமுறையாக tmpl இல் கோப்பை மாற்றியது இல்லை; பழைய ஜிடாக் பதிப்பிலிருந்து இடம் மாறுகிறீர்கள் எனில் தயை செய்து அந்த அடைவை நீக்கி விடுங்கள் (எ.கா. வெர்ஷன் கன்ட்ரோல் அமைப்பு)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:530(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:547(title)
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "டாக் உருவாக்கியை (doc build) இயக்குதல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:532(para)
++msgid "After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run <filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr "இப்போது கட்டுமானத்திற்கு ஆயத்தமாகிவிட்டோம். முதலில் நாம் மீன்டும் <filename>autogen.sh</filename> ஐ இயக்கவேண்டும். இது உங்களுக்கு கட்டமைப்பை இயக்கினால் அதற்கு <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> தேர்வை தரவும். இல்லையானால் கைமுறையாக இதே தேர்வுடன் <filename>configure</filename> ஐ பிரிதொரு முறை இயக்கவும்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:539(para)
++msgid "The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-dirs. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr "ஆவண அடைவுகளில் (doc-dirs) பல கூடுதல் கோப்புகளை முதல் மேக் இயக்கம் உருவாக்கும்.அவற்றில்ய் முக்கியமானவை: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:556(para)
++msgid "Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. But hang-on, during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages with life."
++msgstr "இப்போது உங்கள் உலாவியை <filename>docs/reference/<package>/index.html</filename> க்கு சுட்டிக்காட்டலாம். ஆமாம், இது கொஞ்சம் ஏமாற்றமாகத்தான் இருக்கிறது. கவலை வேண்டாம். அடுத்த அத்தியாயத்தில் எப்படி இவற்றை உயிருக்கு கொண்டு வருவது என பார்க்கலாம்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:564(title)
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "வெர்ஷன் கன்ட்ரோல் அமைப்புகளுடன் ஒருங்கிணைத்தல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:566(para)
++msgid "As a rule of the thumb, it's those files you edit, that should go under version control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><package>.types</filename><filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename><filename><package>-sections.txt</filename><filename>Makefile.am</filename>"
++msgstr "குத்து மதிப்பாக சொல்லப்போனால் , நீங்கள் திருத்தும் கோப்புகள்தான் வெர்ஷன் கட்டுப்படுக்கு போக வேண்டும். வழக்கமாக இவைதான் அந்த கோப்புகள்: <filename><package>.types</filename><filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename><filename><package>-sections.txt</filename><filename>Makefile.am</filename>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:579(title)
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "குறியாக்கத்தை ஆவணப்படுத்துதல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:581(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure from other sources. During the next section you find all information about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக்(GTK-Doc) குறீயீட்டை ஆவணமாக்க மூல குறியீட்டின் விமர்சனத்தை சிறப்பு இலக்கணத்துடன் பயன்படுத்துகிறது. மற்ற மூலங்களிலிருந்தும் அது உங்கள் திட்டத்தின் கட்டுமானத்தை அறிகிறது. அடுத்த தொகுதியில் இந்த விமர்சனன்களின் சிறப்பு இலக்கணம் குறித்து முழுதும் அறியலாம்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:589(title)
++msgid "Documentation placement"
++msgstr "ஆவணம் இடுதல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:590(para)
++msgid "In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing inside the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the disadvantages that the information is often not updated and also that the file tend to cause conflicts with version control systems."
++msgstr "முன் காலத்தில் பெரும்பாலான ஆவணங்கள் <filename>tmpl</filename> அடைவில் இருக்கும் கோப்புகளில் நிரப்பப்பட வேண்டி இருந்தது. இதில் நஷ்டமாக தகவல்கள் அவ்வப்போது புதுப்பிக்கப்படவில்லை. மேலும் இவை வெர்ஷன் கட்டுப்பாடு அமைப்புகளுடன் பொருந்தவில்லை"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:596(para)
++msgid "The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the documentation inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way of documenting code."
++msgstr "மேற்கூறிய காரணங்களால் நாங்கள் ஆவணங்களை மூலத்துடன் வைக்கு மாறூ சொல்கிறோம். இந்த கையேடு இந்த முறையை மட்டுமே விவாதிக்கும்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:606(title)
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "ஆவணமாக்க விமரிசனங்கள்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:611(title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் விமரிசன தொகுப்பு"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:608(para)
++msgid "A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr " '*' இல் துவங்கும் பல்வரி விமர்சனம் ஜிடிகே டாக் கருவிகளால் ஒரு ஆவணமாக்கல் தொகுதியாக கையாளப்படும். <placeholder-1/> "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:623(para)
++msgid "The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr " 'identifier' எனப்படும் இனம் காட்டி விமர்சனம் பொருந்தும் உருப்படியின் பெயருடன் கூடிய ஒரு வரி. உருப்படியை பொருத்து இலக்கணம் சற்று மாறலாம். "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:629(para)
++msgid "The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows the detailed description. All lines (outside program- listings and CDATA sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-asterisk-blank-blank)."
++msgstr "ஆவண ( 'documentation') தொகுதி ஒவ்வொரு அடையாளத்துக்கும் கூட தனித் தனியாகும் .symbol type. Symbol types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows the detailed description. All lines (outside program- listings and CDATA sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-asterisk-blank-blank)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:646(para)
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr "தரு மதிப்புகளுக்கும் அவற்றை ஏற்கும் மேக்ரோக்களுக்கும் function() செயலை பயன்படுத்துக."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:651(para)
++msgid "Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr "@param ஐ எல்லா வரையீடுகளுக்கும் பயன்படுத்துக. விவரிக்கும் பங்ஷனுக்கு தொடர்பான எல்லா பங்ஷன்களின் வரையீடுகளுக்கும் கூட இதை பயன்படுத்துக."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:657(para)
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr "%constant ஐ ஒரு மாறிலியை காட்ட பயன்படுத்துக. எ-கா %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:662(para)
++msgid "Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr "#symbol ஐ மற்ற வகை சிம்பலுக்கு பயன்படுத்துக. எ-கா தருமதிப்பை ஏற்காத ஸ்ட்ரட்ஸ், ஈநம்ஸ் மற்றும் மேக்ரோக்கள்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:668(para)
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal"
++msgstr "#Object::signal ஐ GObject சமிக்ஞைக்கு பயன்படுத்துக"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:673(para)
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property"
++msgstr "#Object:property ஐGObject இன் பண்புகளை குறிக்க பயன்படுத்துக "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:678(para)
++msgid "Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure."
++msgstr "Struct.field ஐ ஒரு கட்டமைப்பின் புலத்தை குறிக்க பயன்படுத்துக "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:640(para)
++msgid "One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:686(para)
++msgid "If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or '#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr "சிறப்பு குறிகளான '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', அல்லது '#' ஐ ஜிடிகே டாக் மாற்றாமல் அப்படியே ஆவணத்தில் பயன்படுத்த அவற்றுக்கான ஹெச்எம்எல் ஐ பயன்படுத்துக: \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&commat;\", \"&percnt;\" மற்றும் \"&num;\" அல்லது பின் சாய்வு கோடால் அவற்றை தனியாக்கலாம்.'\\'. "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:695(para)
++msgid "DocBook can do more that just links. One can also have lists, tables and examples. To enable the usage of SGML/XML tags inside doc-comments you need to have <option>--sgml-mode</option> in the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:703(para)
++msgid "As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to comment those symbols too. This helps other to understand you code. Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the 2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made public, all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and insert the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:717(title)
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "ஆவணப்படுத்தும் தொகுதிகள்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:719(para)
++msgid "Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are optional."
++msgstr "ஆவணத்தில் ஒவ்வொரு பிரிவும் ஒரு வகுப்பு அல்லது கூறு குறித்து தகவலைப்பெற்றிருக்கும். ஒரு பாகத்தை அறிமுகம் செய்ய ஒரு தொகுதியை எழுதலாம். குறுகிய விவரணம் உள்ளடக்க பட்டியலில் கூட பயன்படுத்தப்படும். எல்லா @ புலங்களூம் தேர்வுக்குரியன."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:727(title)
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "பிரிவு விமரிசன தொகுதி"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:748(term)
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr "SECTION:<பெயர்>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:750(para)
++msgid "The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name give here should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr "பகுதி ஆவணத்தை பெயர் <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>கோப்புக்கு இணைக்கிறது. கொடுக்கப்பட்ட பெயர் <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> கோப்பில் <FILE> குறிப்புடன் பொருந்த வேண்டும்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:759(term)
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@short_description"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:761(para)
++msgid "A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr "பகுதி பக்கத்தின் மேலே உள்ளடக்க பட்டியலுக்கான தொடுப்புகளுக்குப்பின் காணும் ஒரு வரி விவரம்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:768(term)
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr "@title"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:770(para)
++msgid "The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr "இந்த தொகுதி SECTION சாற்றுரையிலிருந்து <name> க்கு முன்னிருப்பாக செல்லும். இதை உதாசீனப்படுத்த @title புலத்தை பயன்படுத்துக."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:777(term)
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr "@section_id"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:779(para)
++msgid "Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <title> is used as a section_id and for other section it is <MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr "தொகுதியை இனம் காண தலைப்பைஉதாசீனப்படுத்தும். GObjects ஆகிய <title> வற்றுக்கு section_id பயன்படும். ஏனைய தொகுதிகளுக்கு அது <MODULE>-<title>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:787(term)
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@see_also"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:789(para)
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section.."
++msgstr "இந்த தொகுதியுடன் சம்பந்தப்பட்ட சிம்பல் சின்னங்களின் பட்டியல். "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:795(term)
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:802(para)
++msgid "Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr "Stable - நிலையான- எனில் இடைமுகம் நிலையானது. மூன்றாம் நபர்கள் இவற்றை ஒட்டி நிரல்களை எழுதி வெளியிடலாம்; எந்த பெரிய வெளியீட்டுக்குள் அவை வெளியிடப்பட்டதோ அதன் சிறிய வெளியீட்டுகளுக்குள் அவை சரியாக வேலை செய்யும் என நம்பலாம். பெரிய வெளியீடில் கூட இசைவு இல்லாமல் போவது துர்லபம்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:814(para)
++msgid "Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr "Unstable - நிலையற்ற- எனில் இடைமுகம் பரீட்சார்த்தமானது. சிலகாலமே இருக்கும். இவை சாதாரணமாக புது வேகமாக மாறும் தொழில்நுட்பத்துக்கு ஆரம்ப கால அணுகலைத்தர பயன்படும். பின்னால் வர்வுள்ள நிரந்தர தீர்வுகளுக்கு இடைத்தீர்வாகவும் அமையும். அடுத்த வெளியீடுகளுக்கு பொருத்தம் இசைவு இருக்கும் என எதிரபாரலாகாது."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:826(para)
++msgid "Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in specified and documented ways."
++msgstr "Private - தனிப்பயன் எனில் க்னோம் இல் மட்டும் பயன்படும் இடைமுகம். ஆயின் இறுதி பயனருக்கு ஆவணப்படுத்தவில்லை. அப்படிப்பட்ட செயல்கள் குறீப்பிட்ட ஆவணப்படுத்தப்பட்ட வழியில் மட்டுமே பயன்படுத்தப்பட வேண்டும்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:835(para)
++msgid "Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be Internal."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:797(para)
++msgid "A informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend the use of one of these terms: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:847(term)
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:849(para)
++msgid "The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is optional."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:860(para)
++msgid "To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:869(title)
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "சிம்பல்களை ஆவணப் படுத்தல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:871(para)
++msgid "Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus function are usually documented in the c-source and macros, struct and enum in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:879(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:908(title)
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr "பொது டேக் ஒட்டுகள்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:881(para)
++msgid "You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell when an api was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:886(title)
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr "டேக் களை பதிப்பாக்கல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:887(term)
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "இதிலிருந்து:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:889(para)
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:894(term)
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "கைவிடப்பட்டது."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:896(para)
++msgid "Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:904(para)
++msgid "(FIXME : Stability information)"
++msgstr "FIXME : Stability information)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:931(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:967(title)
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "பங்ஷன் விமரிசன தொகுதி"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:937(para)
++msgid "Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:943(para)
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:948(para)
++msgid "Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:933(para) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1030(para)
++msgid "Please remember to: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "<placeholder-1/> க்கு நினைவிருத்துக"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:955(para)
++msgid "Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:960(para)
++msgid "Also, take a look at gobject introspection annotation tags: http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:991(title)
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr "பங்ஷன் டேக் ஒட்டுகள்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:992(term)
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "திருப்பிகிடைப்பவை:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:994(para)
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:999(term)
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr "@...:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1001(para)
++msgid "In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag (@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1011(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1013(title)
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "பண்புகள் விமரிசன தொகுதி"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1028(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1047(title)
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "சமிக்ஞை விமரிசன தொகுதி"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1034(para)
++msgid "Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or after other signals."
++msgstr "சமிக்ஞை எப்போது வெளியிடப்படும் மற்றும் மற்ற சமிக்ஞைகளுக்கு முன்னா பின்னா வெளியிடப்படும் என ஆவணப்படுத்தல்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1040(para)
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1067(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1068(title)
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "அமைப்பு விமரிசன தொகுதி"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1088(para)
++msgid "Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse behavirour."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1096(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1097(title)
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr "ஈநம் விமரிசன தொகுதி"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1118(para)
++msgid "Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse behavirour."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1128(title)
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1130(para)
++msgid "Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1135(para)
++msgid "To link to another section in the GTK docs: <placeholder-1/> The linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1151(para)
++msgid "To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1162(para)
++msgid "To include example code: <placeholder-1/> or possibly this, for very short code fragments which don't need a title: <placeholder-2/> For the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation: <![CDATA[\n|[\n ...\n]|\n]]>"
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1196(para)
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1218(para)
++msgid "To include a note which stands out from the text: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1233(para)
++msgid "To refer to a type: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1244(para)
++msgid "To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1255(para)
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1266(para)
++msgid "To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <placeholder-1/> but you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1279(para)
++msgid "To emphasize text: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1290(para)
++msgid "For filenames use: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1301(para)
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1316(title)
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr "கூடுதல் கோப்புகளை நிரப்புதல் "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1318(para)
++msgid "There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1327(title)
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr "கோப்பு வகையை திருத்துதல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1329(para)
++msgid "If your library or application includes GtkObjects/GObjects, you want their signals, arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1338(title)
++msgid "Example types file snippet"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1352(para)
++msgid "Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1361(title)
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr "முதன்மை ஆவணத்தை திருத்துதல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1363(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them and place them in a order."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் ஜிடிகே டாக் "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1370(para)
++msgid "While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later run will not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1380(para)
++msgid "Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along with the library."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1389(para)
++msgid "So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1396(title)
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr "முதன்மை ஆவணத்தின் தலைப்பு"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1418(title)
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr "தொகுதி கோப்பை திருத்துதல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1420(para)
++msgid "The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1426(para)
++msgid "The section file is a plain test file with xml like syntax (using tags). Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1432(para)
++msgid "The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be converted into the DocBook SGML/XML file <filename>sgml/gnome-config.sgml</filename> or .DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. (The name of the html file is based on the module name and the section title, or for gobjects it is based on the gobjects class name converted to lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1444(para)
++msgid "The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1451(para)
++msgid "You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private declarations which will not be output (It is a handy way to avoid warning messages about unused declarations.). If your library contains private types which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1467(para)
++msgid "You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the #include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1481(title)
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr "விடையை கட்டுப்படுத்தல்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1483(para)
++msgid "A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1492(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1501(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1508(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1516(para)
++msgid "Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile.am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during <command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr "ஜிடிகே டாக் "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1523(para)
++msgid "One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: <filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first and can be compared with the section file if that is manualy maintained. The second lists all declarations fromt he headers If a symbol is missing one could check if this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1532(para)
++msgid "If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask gtkdoc to keep the intermedia scanner file for further analysis, but running it as <command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1547(title)
++msgid "Frequently asked question"
++msgstr "அடிக்கடி கேட்கும் கேள்விகள்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1551(segtitle)
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "கேள்வி"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1552(segtitle)
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "பதில்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1554(seg)
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "வகுப்பு கட்டுமுறை இல்லை"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1556(function)
++msgid "xxx_get_type()"
++msgstr "\"\"xxx_get_type()"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1557(filename)
++msgid "<package>.types"
++msgstr "<package>.வகைகள்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1555(seg)
++msgid "The objects <placeholder-1/> function has not been entered into the <placeholder-2/> file."
++msgstr "<placeholder-1/> பொருட்கள் பங்ஷன் இன்னும் <placeholder-2/> கோப்பில் உள்ளிடப்படவில்லை"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1561(seg)
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "இன்னும் வகுப்பு கட்டுமுறை இல்லை"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1563(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1602(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1610(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1632(filename)
++msgid "<package>-sections.txt"
++msgstr "<package>-sections.txt"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1564(ulink)
++msgid "explanation"
++msgstr "விளக்கம்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1562(seg)
++msgid "Missing or wrong naming in <placeholder-1/> file (see <placeholder-2/>)."
++msgstr "<placeholder-1/> கோப்பில் தவறான பெயரிடுதல் அல்லது காணவில்லை (பார்க்க: <placeholder-2/>)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1568(seg)
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "அடடா, இன்னும் வகுப்பு கட்டுமுறை இல்லை "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1570(type) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1611(type)
++msgid "GtkWidget"
++msgstr "ஜிடிகேவிட்செட்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1569(seg)
++msgid "Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <placeholder-1/>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1576(seg)
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr "சிம்பல் குறி அட்டவணை இல்லை"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1578(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1593(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1619(filename)
++msgid "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++msgstr "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1577(seg)
++msgid "Does the <placeholder-1/> contain a index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1583(seg)
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1584(seg)
++msgid "Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1590(seg)
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1591(seg)
++msgid "Is the new page xi:included from <placeholder-1/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1597(seg)
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1598(seg)
++msgid "Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <placeholder-1/> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1606(seg)
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1608(filename)
++msgid "<package>.hierarchy"
++msgstr "<package>.hierarchy"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1609(filename)
++msgid "xml/tree_index.sgml"
++msgstr "xml/tree_index.sgml"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1607(seg)
++msgid "If the type is listed in <placeholder-1/> but not in <placeholder-2/> then double check that the type is correctly placed in the <placeholder-3/>. If the type instance (e.g. <placeholder-4/>) is not listed or incidentialy makred private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1616(seg)
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1618(filename)
++msgid "xml/annotation-glossary.xml"
++msgstr "xml/annotation-glossary.xml"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1617(seg)
++msgid "Check that <placeholder-1/> is xi:included from <placeholder-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1625(seg)
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1626(seg)
++msgid "Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the source."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1631(seg)
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1632(seg)
++msgid "Symbol XYZ appears twice in <placeholder-1/> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1635(seg)
++msgid "Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template matches."
++msgstr "குறி XYZ இல் இரு முறை காண்கிறது."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:12(releaseinfo)
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr "பதிப்பு 1.1, மார்ச் 2000"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:16(year)
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:16(holder)
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:19(para)
++msgid "<address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state><postcode>02110-1301</postcode><country>USA</country></address> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr "<address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state><postcode>02110-1301</postcode><country>USA</country></address> இந்த லைசென்ஸ் ஆவணத்தை அனவரும் பிரதி எடுத்து வினியோகிக்கலாம் ஆனால் மாற்றக்கூடாது."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:28(title)
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr "க்னூ இலவச ஆவண லைசென்ஸ்"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:31(title)
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr "0. முன்னுரை (PREAMBLE)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:32(para)
++msgid "The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:43(para)
++msgid "This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:50(para)
++msgid "We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:62(title)
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:63(para)
++msgid "This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:72(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:79(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:94(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:103(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:111(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not <quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:128(para)
++msgid "Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:141(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:153(title)
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:154(para)
++msgid "You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:169(para)
++msgid "You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:176(title)
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:177(para)
++msgid "If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:195(para)
++msgid "If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:202(para)
++msgid "If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:222(para)
++msgid "It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:231(title)
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr "4. மாற்றங்கள் (MODIFICATIONS)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:232(para)
++msgid "You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr "நீங்கள் ஒரு <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> ஆவணத்தின் <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">மாற்றப்பட்ட பதிப்பு(Modified Version)</link> ஐ கீழ் கண்ட தொகுதிகளின் விதிகளூக்கு இணங்க வினியோகிக்கலாம்: <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> கட்டுப்பாடு எது எனில் யாரிடம் எந்த பதிப்பு இருக்கிறதோ அதே லைசன்ஸ் கீழ் வெளியிட வேண்டும். மாற்றிய பதிப்பு ஆவணத்தின் பங்கை செய்ய வேண்டும். மேலும் பின் வருவனவற்றை மாற்றிய பதிப்பில் செய்ய வேண்டும்.:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:248(title)
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "A"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:249(para)
++msgid "Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr "முந்தைய பதிப்புகளின் வரலாற்றை ஆவணத்தின் வரலாற்றில் எழுதுக. இப்பதிப்புகளின் <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> இலும் (அட்டைகள் இருப்பின் அதிலும்) <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> இலும் முற்றிலும் மாறுபட்ட தலைப்பை பயன்படுத்தவும். "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:264(title)
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "B"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:265(para)
++msgid "List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr " <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, இல் ஆசிரியர்களாக பட்டியலிடப்பட்டதில் ஒருவரோ மேலுமோ யார் மாற்றங்களை செய்தனரோ அவரது பெயர்களையும் <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> இல் சேர்க்கவும். <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> இன் ஆசிரியர்கள் ஐந்துக்கு குறைவாக இருப்பின் அனைத்து பெயர்களூம் அதிகமாக இருப்பின் குறைந்தது ஐந்து முக்கிய ஆசிரியர்கள் பெயர்களும் சேர்க்கப்பட வேண்டும்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:279(title)
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "C"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:280(para)
++msgid "State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, as the publisher."
++msgstr "<link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> இல் வெளியிடுவோர் பெயராக <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> ஐ வெளியிடுவோர் பெயரை குறிப்பிடுக."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:291(title)
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "D"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:292(para)
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>."
++msgstr "<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> இன் காப்புரிமையை பாதுகாக்கவும்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:301(title)
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "E"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:302(para)
++msgid "Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices."
++msgstr "காப்புரிமை அறிவிப்புக்கு அருகில் உங்கள் மாற்றங்களுக்கான காப்புரிமையை வெளியிடுக."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:311(title)
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "F"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:312(para)
++msgid "Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr "உங்கள் காப்புரிமை அறிவிப்புக்கு பின்னாலேயே <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> ஐ பொது ஜனம் பயன்படுத்த பின் வரும் படிவத்தில் இந்த லைசென்ஸ் மூலம் அனுமதி வழங்குக."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:324(title)
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "G"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:325(para)
++msgid "Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr "<link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> களின் முழு பட்டியலை லைசென்ஸிலும் <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document's</link> மற்றும் லைசென்ஸ் நோட்டீசில் உள்ள தேவையான<link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> களிலும் வைத்திருங்கள். "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:337(title)
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "H"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:338(para)
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr "இந்த லைசென்ஸின் மாற்றப்படாத வடிவத்தையும் ஒரு பிரதி வைத்திருங்கள். "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:346(title)
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "I"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:347(para)
++msgid "Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>as given on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr "<quote>History</quote> எனக்குறித்த தொகுதி, அதன் தலைப்பு இவற்றை பாதுகாக்கவும். இதனுடன் <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. இல் தரப்பட்ட <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link> இன் தலைப்பு, வருடம், புதிய ஆசிரியர்கள், வெளியிடுவோர் , ஆகியவற்றை சேர்க்கவும். <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> இல் அப்படி <quote>History</quote> எனக்குறித்த தொகுதி இல்லாவிடில் வருடம், புதிய ஆசிரியர்கள், வெளியிடுவோர் , ஆகியவற்றை தலைப்பு பக்கத்தில் உள்ளபடி உருவாக்கி பின் புதிதாக முன் சொன்னவாறு மாற்றியதை சேர்க்கவும்.."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:365(title)
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "J"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:366(para)
++msgid "Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++"ஆவணத்தின் பிரதிக்கு பொதுஜன அணுகலுக்கு தரப்பட்ட <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> இல் காணும் <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparent</link> தொடுப்பை பாதுகாக்கவும்."
++"அதேபோல முதைய பதிப்புகளில் உள்ள தொடுப்புகளையும் பாதுகாக்கவும். இவற்றை <quote>History</quote> பகுதியில் வைக்கலாம். ஆவணத்துக்கு நான்கு வருடங்கள் முன் வெளியிட்டவற்றையும் ஆசிரியர் நீக்கலாம் என அனுமதி தந்தவற்றையும் நீக்கலாம்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:383(title)
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "K"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:384(para)
++msgid "In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or <quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr "<quote>Acknowledgements</quote> அல்லது <quote>Dedications</quote> எனக்குறித்த எந்த தொகுதியிலும் தொகுதியின் தலைப்பையும் அதில் உள்ளவற்றில் ஒவ்வொரு பங்கீடு அளித்தோரின் நன்றி அறிதல் /அர்ப்பணம் ஆகியவற்றின் சாரத்தையும் பாதுகாக்கவும் , "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:396(title)
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "L"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:397(para)
++msgid "Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr "<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, இன் <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> களை உரை தலைப்புகளை மாற்றாமல் பாதுகாக்கவும். தொகுதி எண்களும் அல்லது அதன் சமானமானவையும் இதில் சேராது."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:409(title)
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "M"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:410(para)
++msgid "Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>."
++msgstr " <quote>Endorsements</quote> இல் உள்ளதை நீக்கவும். அப்படிப்பட்ட எந்த தொகுதியும் <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> இல் இருத்தலாகாது.."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:421(title)
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "N"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:422(para)
++msgid "Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Section</link>."
++msgstr "இருப்பிலுள்ள எந்த தொகுதியையும் <quote>Endorsements</quote> என் மறு பெயரிடவோ அல்லது <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Section</link> உடன் மோதும் எதையும் செய்யலாகாது "
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:432(para)
++msgid "If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>"
++"இல் புதிய விஷயம் இருந்தாலோ அல்லது <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> என அனுபந்தம் இருந்து அதில் ஆவணத்திலிருந்து பிரதி எடுத்த ஏதும் இல்லாமல் இருந்தாலோ நீங்கள் தேர்ந்தெடுத்து அவற்றை முழுதுமோ பகுடியோ மாறாதவை என குறிப்பிடலாம். இதை செய்ய அவற்றின் தலைப்புகளை மாற்றிய பதிப்பு நோட்டீசில் <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> பட்டியலில் சேர்க்கவும். இந்த தலைப்புகள் மற்ற தலைப்புகளீன் பெயரிலிருந்து மாறுபட்டு இருத்தல் வேண்டும்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:444(para)
++msgid "You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr "சகாக்கள் எழுதிய விமர்சனங்கள், மதிப்புரைகள் அல்லது ஒரு நிறுவனம் உங்கள் <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> ஐ திறனாய்வு செய்து தகுதி சான்று கொடுத்து இருப்பின் அவை மட்டும் இருக்கும் பட்சத்தில் நீங்கள் <quote>Endorsements</quote> என தலைப்பிட்ட தொகுதி ஒன்றை சேர்க்கலாம்."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:453(para)
++msgid "You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr "<link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Text</link> ஆக நீங்கள் ஐந்து சொற்கள் வரை சேர்க்கலாம். <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. இல் பட்டியலின் கடைசியில் <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link> ஆக 25, சொற்கள் சேர்க்கலாம். முன் அட்டை உரைக்கு ஒரு பாராவும் பின் அட்டைக்கு ஒரு உரையும் மட்டுமே உங்களாலோ அல்லது உங்கள் முன் அனுமதி பெற்றவராலோ சேர்க்கப்படலாம். <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> இல் ஏற்கெனெவே அதே அட்டைக்கு உரை, உங்களாலோ அனுமதி பெற்றவராலோ முன்னேயே இடப்பட்டு இருப்பின், நீங்கள் மற்றொன்றை இடலாகாது. already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:470(para)
++msgid "The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:480(title)
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:481(para)
++msgid "You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:492(para)
++msgid "The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:505(para)
++msgid "In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled <quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled <quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled <quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:516(title)
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:517(para)
++msgid "You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:527(para)
++msgid "You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:537(title)
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:538(para)
++msgid "A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:561(title)
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr "8. மொழிபெயர்ப்பு"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:562(para)
++msgid "Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License provided that you also include the original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original English version of this License, the original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:580(title)
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:581(para)
++msgid "You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:594(title)
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:595(para)
++msgid "The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:606(para)
++msgid "Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:621(title)
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:622(para)
++msgid "To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:"
++msgstr "To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:629(para)
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr "Copyright 2010, I. Felix."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:632(para)
++msgid "Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr "Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU Free Documentation License</quote>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:647(para)
++msgid "If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of <quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr "If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of <quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:657(para)
++msgid "If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr "உங்கள் ஆவணத்தில் முக்கியமல்லாத நிரல் குறியீட்டு உதாரணங்கள் இருப்பின் , எங்கள் பரிந்துரை: இவற்றின் இலவச பயனுக்கு இந்த உதாரணங்களை இணையாக மென்பொருள் அனுமதிக்கான உங்கள் தேர்வில் வெளியிடுங்கள்.மாதிரிக்கு: <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>,"
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:0(None)
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr "Dr.T.Vasudevan agnihot3@gmail.com"
++
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# translation of gtk-doc-help.master.po to Telugu
++# Krishna Babu K <kkrothap@redhat.com>, 2010.
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc-help.master\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-01-25 11:38+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-02-03 18:39+0530\n"
++"Last-Translator: Krishna Babu K <kkrothap@redhat.com>\n"
++"Language-Team: Telugu <en@li.org>\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"X-Generator: KBabel 1.11.4\n"
++"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n!=1);\n\n"
++"\n"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:12(title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc మాన్యుయల్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:13(edition) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:92(revnumber)
++msgid "1.12"
++msgstr "1.12"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:14(para)
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr "GTK-Doc వినియోగపు సూచనలతో అభివృద్దికారుల కొరకు వినియోగదారి మాన్యుయల్."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:17(firstname)
++msgid "Chris"
++msgstr "క్రిస్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:18(surname)
++msgid "Lyttle"
++msgstr "లిట్టిల్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:21(email)
++msgid "chris@wilddev.net"
++msgstr "chris@wilddev.net"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:26(firstname)
++msgid "Dan"
++msgstr "డాన్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:27(surname)
++msgid "Mueth"
++msgstr "ముయెత్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:30(email)
++msgid "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++msgstr "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:35(firstname)
++msgid "Stefan"
++msgstr "స్టిఫెన్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:36(surname)
++msgid "Kost"
++msgstr "కోస్ట్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:39(email)
++msgid "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++msgstr "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:45(publishername)
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc ప్రోజెక్ట్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:46(email)
++msgid "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++msgstr "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:49(year)
++msgid "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++msgstr "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:50(holder)
++msgid "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle and Stefan Kost"
++msgstr "డాన్ ముయెత్ మరియు క్రిస్ లిట్టిల్ మరియు స్టిఫెన్ కోస్ట్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:61(para)
++msgid "Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"ఎటువంటి ఫ్రంట్-కవర్ పాఠ్యములు, మరియు బ్యాక్-కవర్ పాఠ్యములు లేకుండా, ఫ్రీ సాఫ్టువేరు ఫౌండేషన్ ద్వారా "
++"ప్రచురితమైన వర్షన్ 1.1 లేదా దాని తర్వాత వర్షన్ <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle> "
++"నియమాలకు లోబడి ఈ పత్రమును నకలు తీయుటకు, పంపిణీ చేయుటకు మరియు/లేదా సవరించుటకు అనుమతి యివ్వబడింది. "
++"లైసెన్సు యొక్క నకలు <link linkend=\"fdl\">చేర్చబడింది</link>.న్ ద్వారా ప్రచురితమై,"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:69(para)
++msgid "Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial caps."
++msgstr ""
++"కంపెనీలు వాటి వుత్పత్తులను మరియు సేవలను వర్గీకరించుటకు వుపయోగించు చాలా వరకు నామములు ట్రేడ్మార్కులుగా "
++"హక్కు కలిగివుంటాయి. అవి GNOME పత్రికీకరణనందు కనిపించునప్పుడు, మరియు GNOME Documentation "
++"Project సభ్యలు ఆ ట్రేడ్మార్కులను గుర్తించుటకు, ఆనామములు పెద్ద అక్షరములలో లేదా మొదటి అక్షరం పెద్ద అక్షరంగా "
++"ముద్రించబడతాయి."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:80(revnumber)
++msgid "1.14"
++msgstr "1.14"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:81(date)
++msgid "19 December 2009"
++msgstr "19 డిసెంబర్ 2009"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:82(authorinitials) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:88(authorinitials) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:94(authorinitials)
++msgid "sk"
++msgstr "sk"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:83(revremark)
++msgid "development version"
++msgstr "అభివృద్ది వర్షన్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:86(revnumber)
++msgid "1.13"
++msgstr "1.13"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:87(date) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:93(date)
++msgid "18 December 2009"
++msgstr "18 డిసెంబర్ 2009"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:89(revremark)
++msgid "broken tarball update"
++msgstr "బ్రోకెన్ టార్బాల్ నవీకరణ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:95(revremark)
++msgid "new tool features and bugfixes"
++msgstr "కొత్త సాధనము సౌలభ్యాలు మరియు బగ్పరిష్కారములు"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:98(revnumber)
++msgid "1.11"
++msgstr "1.11"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:99(date)
++msgid "16 Novemebr 2008"
++msgstr "16 నవంబర్ 2008"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:100(authorinitials)
++msgid "mal"
++msgstr "mal"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:101(revremark)
++msgid "GNOME doc-utils migration"
++msgstr "GNOME doc-utils మైగ్రేషన్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:110(title)
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "పరిచయం"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:112(para)
++msgid "This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how it is used."
++msgstr ""
++"ఈ అధ్యాయము GTK-Docను పరిచయం చేస్తుంది మరియు అది యేమిచేస్తుంది దానిని యెలా వుపయోగించాలి అనేదానిపై "
++"సంక్షిప్తంగా వివరిస్తుంది."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:118(title)
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc అంటే యేమిటి?"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:120(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc అనునది C కోడ్ను పత్రికీకరణ చేయుటకు వుపయోగించబడింది. ఇది ముఖ్యంగా GTK+ మరియు "
++"GNOME వంటి లైబ్రరీల పబ్లిక్ API పత్రికీకరణకు వుపయోగించబడింది. అయితే యిది అనువర్తనము కోడ్ను "
++"పత్రికీకరణ చేయుటకు కూడా వుపయోగించవచ్చును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:128(title)
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc యెలా పనిచేయును?"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:130(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc అనునది మూలపు(సోర్స్) ఫైళ్ళ యొక్క ఫంక్షన్స్ నందు ప్రత్యేకించి-రూపొందించిన కామెంట్ బ్లాక్స్ నందలి "
++"పత్రికీకరణను వుపయోగించి పనిచేయును, లేదా GTK-Doc వుపయోగించే మాదిరి(టెంప్లేట్) ఫైళ్ళకు జతచేసిన "
++"పత్రికీకరణను వుపయోగించును (GTK-Doc హెడర్ ఫైళ్ళ నందు డిక్లేర్ చేసివున్న ఫంక్షన్లకు మాత్రమే పత్రికీకరణ "
++"యిచ్చును; అది స్టాటిక్ ఫంక్షన్ల కొరకు అవుట్పుట్ అందించదు)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:137(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc consists of a number of perl scripts, each performing a different step in the process."
++msgstr "GTK-Doc చాలా పెర్ల్ స్క్రిప్టులను కలిగివుంది, ప్రతిది వేరువేరు స్టెప్పును కార్యక్రమమునందు జరుపును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:142(para)
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "అక్కడ కార్యక్రమమునందు 5 ముఖ్య స్టెప్పులు వున్నవి:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:149(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the source files with the documentation for each function, macro, union etc. (In the past information was entered in generated template files, which is not recommended anymore)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>పత్రికీకరణను వ్రాయుట.</guilabel> మూలకర్త(ఆథర్) సోర్స్ ఫైళ్ళనందు ప్రతి ఫంక్షన్కు, మాక్రోకు, "
++"యూనియన్కు పత్రకీకరణను యిస్తాడు. (గతంలో సమాచారమును మాదిరి ఫైళ్ళనందు ప్రవేశపెట్టేవారు, యిది యిప్పడు "
++"సమర్ధించబడదు)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:159(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> containg a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to <filename><module>-sections.txt</filename> The author can rearrange the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some sybols to show up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by th scanner or the declaration should appear differently, one can place enties similar to the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>. <application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> can also be used to dynamically query a library about any GtkObject subclasses it exports. It saves information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about any GTK Args and Signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>కోడ్ గురించిన సమాచారమును సేకరిస్తోంది.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-scan</application> ఫంక్షన్ల, మాక్రోల, ఈనమ్స్,"
++"స్ట్రక్ట్స్, మరియు యూనియన్స్ కొరకు కోడ్ లాకింగ్ యొక్క హెడర్ ఫైళ్ళను స్కాన్ చేస్తుంది. డిక్లరేషన్ల జాబితాను కలిగివున్న <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> ఫైలును యిది సృష్టిస్తుంది, అవి యే హెడర్ ఫైళ్ళనందు వున్నవో దానిని అనుసరించి వాటిని ఆయా విభాగములలో వుంచును. మొదటి సారి"
++"నడిపినప్పుడు ఈ పైలు <filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>కు నకలు తీయబడుతుంది. మూలకర్త విభాగములను తిరిగి"
++"అమర్చగలడు, మరియు వాటి నందలి డిక్లరేషన్ల క్రమమును కూడా, తద్వార చివరిగా కావలసిన క్రమమును పొందును. ఇది జనియింపచేయు రెండవ ఫైలు"
++"<filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>. ఈ ఫైలు స్కానర్ ద్వారా కనుగొనబడిన పూర్తి డిక్లరేషన్లను కలిగివుంటుంది. ఏదోవొక కారణం"
++"చేత యెవరైన పత్రములనందు చిహ్నములను చూపాలని అనుకొంటే, యెక్కడైతే పూర్తి డిక్లరేషన్ స్కానర్ నందు కనుబడదో లేదా డిక్లరేషన్ భిన్నంగా కనిపించాలో అక్కడ,"
++"యెవరైనా <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>నందు వున్న అంశములకు సమానంగా వున్న వాటిని <filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>కు వుంచవచ్చును. <application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> అనునది అది యెగుమతి చేసిన GtkObject"
++"సబ్క్లాసెస్ గురించిన లైబ్రరీను క్వరీ చేయుటకు కూడా వుపయోగించబడును. ఇది క్లాస్ హైరార్కీ నందలి ప్రతి ఆబ్జక్టు యొక్క స్థాన సమాచారాన్ని దాయును మరియు"
++"అది అందించు GTK ఆర్గ్స్ మరియు సంకేతముల సమాచారమును దాయును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:184(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the information gathered in the first step. (Note that this can be run repeatedly. It will try to ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>\"template\" ఫైళ్ళను జనియింపచేస్తోంది.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</application> అనునది ఫైళ్ళను <filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> వుపసంచయంనందు సృష్టించును, మొదటి స్టెప్పనందు "
++"సేకరించిన సమాచారమును వుపయోగించి. (ఇది పునరావృతంగా నడుపవచ్చునని గమనించండి. ఇది యే పత్రముకూడా "
++"యెప్పటికి పోకుండా వుంచుటకు చూస్తుంది.)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:193(para)
++msgid "Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand, please remove the dir (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc 1.9 నుండి మాదిరిలు వదిలివేయబడినవి. మేము అందరిని పత్రికీకరణను కోడ్నందు వుంచమని కోరుచున్నాము. "
++"tmpl వినియోగాన్ని పూర్తిగా వదిలివేసే <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> ఐచ్చికాన్ని యిప్పుడు "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> మద్దతించుచున్నది. tmpl నందలి ఫైలును మీరు మానవీయంగా "
++"యెప్పుడూ మార్చివుండకపోతే, దయచేసి డైరెక్టరీను తీసివేయుము(ఉ.దా. వర్షన్ కంట్రోల్ సిస్టమ్ నుండి)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:205(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Generating the SGML/XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> turns the template files into SGML or XML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads takes docs from sources and introspection data."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>SGML/XML మరియు HTML/PDF జనియింపచేయుట. </guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> అనునది <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> లేదా <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> నందలి మాదిరి ఫైళ్ళను SGML లేదా XMLకు మార్చును. "
++"ప్రత్యేక కామెంట్ బ్లాక్సు వుపయోగిస్తూ, సోర్సు కోడ్ ఫంక్షన్ల నందు పత్రకీకరణను కలిగివుంటే, అది యిక్కడ "
++"కలుపబడును. tmpl ఫైళ్ళు వుపయోగించకపోతే యిది పత్రములను మూలాలనుండి మరియు లోపలి డాటానుండి "
++"మాత్రమే చదివి తీసుకొనును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:215(para)
++msgid "<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the SGML/XML files into HTML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. Likewise <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the SGML/XML files into a PDF docuemnt called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> వుపసంచయం నందలి SGML/XML ఫైళ్ళను "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> అనునది HTML ఫైళ్ళకు మార్చును. అలాగే "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> అనునది SGML/XML ఫైళ్ళను <filename><package>.pdf</filename>గా పిలువబడే PDF పత్రమునకు మార్చును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:221(para)
++msgid "Files in <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> directories are always overwritten. One should never edit them directly."
++msgstr ""
++"<filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> లేదా <filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> మరియు <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> డైరెక్టరీల నందలి ఫైళ్ళు యెల్లప్పుడూ "
++"దిద్దివ్రాయబడును. ఎవరూ వాటిని యెప్పుడూ నేరుగా సరికూర్చకూడదు."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:229(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr "<guilabel>పత్రముల మధ్య క్రాస్-రిఫరెన్సెస్ను పరిష్కరించుచున్నది.</guilabel> HTML ఫైళ్ళను సంస్థాపించిన తర్వాత, వేరు వేరు పత్రముల మధ్య క్రాస్-రిఫరెన్సెస్ను అమర్చుటకు <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> నడుపవచ్చును. ఉదాహరణకు, GTK+ పత్రికీకరణ అనునది GLib మాన్యుయల్ నందు వుంచిన పత్రికీకరణకు చాలా క్రాస్-రిఫరెన్సెస్ కలిగివుంది. పంపిణీ కొరకు మూలపు టార్బాల్ను సృష్టించునప్పుడు, <application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> అనునది అన్ని బహిర్గత లింకులను వెబ్-లింకులకు మార్చును. పంపిణీచేసిన (ముందుగాజనియింపచేసిన) పత్రములను సంస్థాపించునప్పుడు అదే అనువర్తనము లింకులను స్థానిక లింకులకు (ఆ పత్రములు యెక్కడ సంస్థాపించబడినవో అక్కడికి) తిరిగివుంచుటకు ప్రయత్నించును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:247(title)
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc పొందుట"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:250(title)
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "అవసరములు"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:251(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - the main scripts are in Perl."
++msgstr "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - ముఖ్య స్క్రిప్టులు Perl1 నందు వున్నవి."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:254(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - This is the DocBook SGML DTD. <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>"
++msgstr "<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - ఇది DocBook SGML DTD. <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:258(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - This is a DSSSL processor for converting SGML to various formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type=\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - SGMLను వివిధ ఫార్మాట్ల లోనికి మార్చుటకు యిది DSSSL ప్రోసెసర్. "
++"<ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type=\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:262(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> This is the DSSSL code to convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together with jade. I've customized the DSSSL code slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to colour the program code listings/declarations, and to support global cross-reference indices in the generated HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++msgstr "<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> DocBookను HTMLకు (యింకా కొన్ని యితర ఫార్మాట్లకు) మార్చుటకు యిది DSSSL కోడ్. ఇది jadeతో కలిపి వుపయోగించబడును. నేను DSSSL కోడ్ను కొద్దిగా మలచుకొనినాను, gtk-doc.dsl నందు, ప్రోగ్రామ్ కోడ్ జాబితాలు/డిక్లరేషన్లను రంగులో వుంచుటకు, మరియు జనియింపచేసిన HTML నందు గ్లోబల్ క్రాస్-రిఫరెన్సెస్ యిండిసెస్ను మద్దతించుటకు. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:271(para)
++msgid "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - if you want to create man pages from the DocBook. I've customized the 'translation spec' slightly, to capitalise section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of the pages and the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink> NOTE: This does not work yet."
++msgstr "<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - DocBook నుండి man పేజీలను సృష్టించాలని అనుకొంటే. నేను 'translation spec' ను కొద్దిగా మలచుకొనినాను, విభగాపు హెడ్డింగులను పెద్దఅక్షరములలో వుంచుకొనుటకు మరియు పేజీల యొక్క పైభాగమున 'GTK Library' శీర్షికను జతచేయుటకు మరియు క్రిందన పునఃపరిశీలన తేదీను వుంచుటకు. దీనికి <ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink> పైన వొక లింకు వుంది. గమనిక: ఇంది యింకా పనిచేయుటలేదు."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:282(title)
++msgid "Installation"
++msgstr "సంస్థాపన"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:283(para)
++msgid "There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are installed."
++msgstr "DocBook మాడ్యులర్ స్టైల్షీట్లు యిక్కడ సంస్థాపించాలని వొక ప్రామాణిక స్థలము యేమీలేదు."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:286(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically:"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc యొక్క ఆకృతీకరణ స్క్రిప్టు ఈ 3 డైరెక్టరీలను స్వయంచాలకంగా శోధిస్తుంది:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:289(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (used by RedHat)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (RedHat ద్వారా వుపయోగించబడింది)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:292(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (used by Debian)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (Debian ద్వారా వుపయోగించబడింది)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:295(para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (used by SuSE)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (SuSE ద్వారా వుపయోగించబడింది)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:298(para)
++msgid "If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to configure GTK-Doc using the option: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++msgstr ""
++"మీరు యెక్కడోవొకచోట స్టైల్షీట్లను సంస్థాపించివుంటే, మీరు GTK-Docను ఈ ఐచ్చికము వుపయోగించి ఆకృతీకరించవలసి "
++"వుంటుంది: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:322(title)
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc గురించి"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:324(para) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:338(para)
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(FIXME)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:328(para)
++msgid "(History, authors, web pages, license, future plans, comparison with other similar systems.)"
++msgstr "(చరిత్ర, మూలకర్తలు, వెబ్ పుటలు, లైసెన్స్, భవిష్య ప్రణాళికలు, సమానమైన యితర సిస్టమ్సుతో పోలిక.)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:336(title)
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "ఈ మాన్యుయల్ గురించి"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:342(para)
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr "(ఇది యెవరి కొరకు, మీరు దీనిని యెచటనుండి పొందగలరు, లైసెన్స్)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:351(title)
++msgid "Setting up your project"
++msgstr "మీ ప్రోజెక్టును అమర్చుట"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:353(para)
++msgid "The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc into your project. Theses section assume we work on a project called 'meep'. This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user app called 'meeper'."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc మీ ప్రోజెక్టునకు చేర్చుటకు యే స్టెప్పులు జరుపవలెనో తరువాతి విభాగములు వివరిస్తాయి. "
++"మనము 'meep' అను ప్రోజెక్టుపై పనిచేస్తున్నట్టు ఈ విభాగములనందు వద్దేశించడమైనది. ఈ "
++"ప్రోజెక్టు 'libmeep' అను లైబ్రరీను మరియు 'meeper' అను అంత్య-వినియోగదారి అనువర్తనమును "
++"కలిగివుంది."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:361(title)
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "స్కెల్టెన్ పత్రికీకరణను అమర్చుచున్నది"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:363(para)
++msgid "Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/reference (this way you can also have docs/help for end-user documentation). It is recommended to create another subdirectory with the name of the doc-package. For packages with just one library this step is not necessary."
++msgstr ""
++"మీ పై-స్థాయి ప్రోజెక్టు డైరెక్టరీ క్రింద docs/reference అను ఫోల్డర్లను సృష్టించుము (ఈ విధంగా మీరు docs/helpను "
++"అంత్య-వినియోగదారి పత్రికీకరణ కొరకు కలిగివుండవచ్చును). doc-package నామముతో వేరొక వుపసంచయంను "
++"సృష్టించుకొనుట సిఫార్సు చేయబడింది. కేవలం వొక లైబ్రరీ మాత్రమే వున్న ప్యాకేజీలకు యిది అవసరములేదు."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:372(title)
++msgid "Example directory structure"
++msgstr "ఉదాహరణ డైరెక్టరీ ఆకృతి"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:370(para)
++msgid "This can then look as show below: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "ఇది అప్పుడు క్రింది చూపిన విధంగా కనబడుతుంది: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:390(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:397(title)
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "autoconf తో విలీనం"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:392(para)
++msgid "Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> script."
++msgstr "చాలా సులువు! మీ <filename>configure.ac</filename> స్క్రిప్టునకు వొక లైను మాత్రమే జతచేయుము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:407(para)
++msgid "The first argument is used to check for the gtkdocversion at configure time. The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</application>. The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several configure switches:"
++msgstr ""
++"ఆకృతీకరణ సమయము వద్ద gtkdocversion కొరకు పరిశీలించుటకు మొదటి ఆర్గుమెంటు వుపయోగించబడింది. "
++"2వది, <application>gtkdocize</application> చేత వుపయోగించబడిన ఐచ్చిక ఆర్గుమెంట్. "
++"<symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> మాక్రో చాలా ఆకృతీకరణ స్విచ్లను జతచేస్తుంది:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:413(para)
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr "--with-html-dir=PATH : సంస్థాపించిన పత్రములకు పాత్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:414(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc : పత్రికీకరణను నిర్మించుటకు gtk-doc వుపయోగించుము [default=no]"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:415(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc-html : పత్రికీకరణను html ఫార్మాట్నందు నిర్మించుము [default=yes]"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:416(para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : పత్రికీకరణను pdf ఫార్మాట్ నందు నిర్మించుము [default=no]"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:420(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc అప్రమేయంగా అచేతనము చేయబడింది! ఐచ్చికము <option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option>ను "
++"తరువాతి <filename>configure</filename>కు నడుపుట మర్చిపోవద్దు. లేకపోతే ముందుగా జనియింపచేసిన "
++"పత్రికీకరణ సంస్థాపించబడుతుంది (ఇది వినియోగదారులకు వుపయోగకరం అయితే అభివృద్దికారులకు కాదు)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:428(para)
++msgid "Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside you <filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows <application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++msgstr ""
++"మీ <filename>configure.ac</filename> స్క్రిప్టునందు ఈ క్రింది వరుసను కలిగివుండుట చాలామంచిది. "
++"ఇది మీ ప్రోజెక్టునందు <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> కొరకు స్వయంచాలకంగా మాక్రో నిర్వచనాన్ని "
++"నకలు తీయుటకు <application>gtkdocize</application>ను అనుమతిస్తుంది."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:436(title)
++msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++msgstr "gtkdocize కొరకు సన్నాహం"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:447(title)
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "automake తో విలీనం"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:449(para)
++msgid "First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the examples subdirectory of the gtkdoc-sources to your project's API documentation directory ( <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></filename>). If you have multiple doc-packages repeat this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++"ముందుగా <filename>Makefile.am</filename>ను gtkdoc-sources యొక్క వుదాహరణల వుపసంచయం "
++"నుండి మీ ప్రోజెక్టు యొక్క API పత్రికీకరణ డైరెక్టరీనకు నకలుతీయుము (<filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></filename>). మీరు బహుళ "
++"doc-packages కలిగివుంటే ప్రతిదానికి యిలా చేయండి."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:456(para)
++msgid "The next step is to edit the setting inside the <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. All the settings have a comment above that describes their purpose. Most settings are extra flags passed to the respective tools. Every tool has a variable of the form <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>. All the tools support <option>--help</option> to list the supported parameters."
++msgstr ""
++"తరువాతి స్టెప్పు <filename>Makefile.am</filename> నందలి అమరికను సరికూర్చుట. అన్ని అమరికలు "
++"వాటి ప్రయోజనాన్ని వివరించే వ్యాఖ్యను కలిగివున్నాయి. చాలా వరకు అమరికలు వాటి సంభందిత సాధనముల ద్వారా "
++"పంపబడే అదనపు ఫ్లాగ్స్. ప్రతి సాధనము <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option> "
++"రూపపు వేరియబుల్ను కలిగివుంది. మద్దతించు పారామితులను జాబితా చేయుటకు అన్ని సాధనములు "
++"<option>--help</option>ను మద్దతించును."
++
++#. FIXME: explain options ?
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:467(para)
++msgid "You may also want to enable GTK-Doc for the distcheckmake target. Just add then one-liner show in the next example to you top-level <filename>Makefile.am</filename>:"
++msgstr ""
++"మీరు GTK-Docను distcheckmake లక్ష్యము కొరకు చేతనము చేయవచ్చు. జతచేయి అప్పుడు తర్వాత వుదాహరణనందు "
++"one-liner మీకు పై-స్థాయి <filename>Makefile.am</filename>ను చూపును:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:474(title)
++msgid "Enable GTK-Doc during make distcheck"
++msgstr "distcheck చేయునప్పుడు GTK-Doc చేతనము చేయి"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:486(title)
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "autogen తో విలీనం"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:488(para)
++msgid "Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup the build infrastructure after a checkout from version control system (such as cvs/svn/git). GTK-Doc comes with a tool called <application>gtkdocize</application> which can be used in such a script. It should be run before autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr ""
++"వర్షన్ కంట్రోల్ సిస్టమ్ (cvs/svn/git వంటి) నుండి చెక్అవుట్ తర్వాత బుల్డ్ నిర్మాణం అమర్చుటకు చాలా ప్రోజెక్టులు "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename> స్క్రిప్టును కలిగివుంటాయి. GTK-Doc అనునది "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> అనబడు సాధనంతో వస్తుంది దీనిని అటువంటి స్క్రిప్టు నందు "
++"వుపయోగించవచ్చును. ఇది autoheader, automake లేదా autoconf ముందు నడుపవలెను."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:497(title)
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "autogen.sh నుండి gtkdocize నడుపుతోంది"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:506(para)
++msgid "When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-doc.make</filename> to you project root (or any directory specified by the <option>--docdir</option> option). If also check you configure script for the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> invocation."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> నడుపుచున్నప్పుడు అది "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.make</filename>ను మీ ప్రోజెక్టు root (లేదా <option>--docdir</option> "
++"ద్వారా తెలుపబడిన డైరెక్టరీ)కు నకలుతీయును. <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> ఆమంత్రణం కొరకు యిది మీ ఆకృతీకరణ స్క్రిప్టును పరిశీలించును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:514(para)
++msgid "Historically GTK-Doc was gerating template files where developers entered the docs. this turned out to be not so good. Since a few version GTK-Doc could also get all the information from source comments. Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. Besides adding the option directly to the command invocation, they can be added also to a environment variable called <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol> or set as a 2nd parameter in <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro in the configure script. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand and migrating from older gtkdoc versions, please remove the dir (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++"చారిత్రకంగా GTK-Doc అనునది మాదిరి ఫైళ్ళను అభివృద్దికారులు పత్రములు ప్రవేశపెట్టినచోట జనియింపచేయుచున్నది. ఇది అంత మంచిగా లేదు. కొద్ది GTK-Doc"
++"వర్షన్లు మాత్రమే సమాచారమునంతటిని మూలపు వ్యాఖ్యలనుండి పొందగలిగివున్నవి కావున. GTK-Doc 1.9 నుండి మాదిరిలు వదిలివేయబడినవి. పత్రికీకరణను"
++"కోడ్నందు కలిగివుంచుటకే మేము అందరిని ప్రోత్సహిస్తున్నాము. tmpl వినియోగాన్ని పూర్తిగా వదిలివేసే <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> ఐచ్చికాన్ని యిప్పుడు "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> మద్దతించుచున్నది. ఐచ్చికాన్ని నేరుగా ఆదేశ ఆమంత్రీకరణకు జతచేయుటకు బదులుగా, అవి యెన్విరాన్మెంట్ వేరియబుల్ <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol>కు జతచేయవచ్చును లేదా ఆకృతీకరణ స్క్రిప్టునందలి <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> మాక్రో నందు 2వ పారామితిగా అమర్చుము. మీరు యెప్పుడూ tmpl నందలి ఫైలు మార్చివుండకపోతే మరియు gtkdoc వర్షన్లనుండి మైగ్రేట్ అవుతుంటే, దయచేసి dirను తీసివేయుము (ఉ.దా. వర్షన్ కంట్రోల్ సిస్టమ్ నుండి)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:530(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:547(title)
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "doc బుల్డును నడుపుట"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:532(para)
++msgid "After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun <filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run <filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++"గతంలో జరిపిన స్టెప్పుల తర్వాత యిప్పుడు బుల్డును నడుపవలెను. ముందుగా మనము <filename>autogen.sh</filename>ను తిరిగి నడుపవలెను. ఈ స్క్రిప్టు మీ కొరకు ఆకృతీకరణను నడిపితే, "
++"దానికి <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> ఐచ్చికాన్ని యివ్వుము. లేదా తరువాత ఈ ఐచ్చికముతో "
++"మానవీయంగా <filename>configure</filename>ను నడుపుము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:539(para)
++msgid "The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-dirs. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"మొదటి make run అనునది doc-dirs నందు చాలా అదనపు ఫైళ్ళను జనియింపచేయును. ముఖ్యమైనవి: "
++"<filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:556(para)
++msgid "Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. But hang-on, during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages with life."
++msgstr ""
++"ఇప్పుడు మీ బ్రౌజర్కు మీరు <filename>docs/reference/<package>/index.html</filename>ను "
++"సూచించవచ్చును. అవును, యిప్పటికి యిది కొంత నిరుత్సాహపరుస్తోంది. అయితే ఆగండి, తరువాతి అధ్యాయమునందు పేజీలను "
++"యెలా నింపాలో చెబుతాము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:564(title)
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "వర్షన్ కంట్రోల్ సిస్టమ్తో విలీనం"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:566(para)
++msgid "As a rule of the thumb, it's those files you edit, that should go under version control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><package>.types</filename><filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename><filename><package>-sections.txt</filename><filename>Makefile.am</filename>"
++msgstr ""
++"thumb యొక్క నియమాన్ని అనుసరించి, యిది మీరు సరికూర్చిన ఫైళ్ళది, అది వర్షన్ కంట్రోల్ క్రిందకు వెళ్ళవలెను. "
++"ముఖ్యమైన ప్రోజెక్టులకు ఈ ఫైళ్ళు:<filename><package>.types</filename><filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename><filename><package>-sections.txt</filename><filename>Makefile.am</filename>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:579(title)
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "కోడ్ను పత్రికీకరణ చేయుట"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:581(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure from other sources. During the next section you find all information about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++"కోడ్ పత్రికీకరణ కొరకు GTK-Doc అనునది సోర్స్ కోడ్ కామెంట్ను ప్రత్యేక సిన్టాక్సుతో వుపయోగిస్తుంది. ఇంకా యిది యితర "
++"మూలములనుండి మీ ప్రోజెక్టు ఆకృతి గురించి సమాచారమును వెలికితీయును. తరువాతి విభాగమునందు మీరు మీ వ్యాఖ్యల "
++"యొక్క సిన్టాక్సు గురించి సమాచారమును అంతటిని కనుగొంటారు."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:589(title)
++msgid "Documentation placement"
++msgstr "పత్రికీకరణ స్థానము"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:590(para)
++msgid "In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing inside the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the disadvantages that the information is often not updated and also that the file tend to cause conflicts with version control systems."
++msgstr ""
++"గతంలో చాలా వరకు పత్రికీకరణ అనునది <filename>tmpl</filename> డైరెక్టరీ క్రిందని ఫైళ్ళలో నింపవలసివుండేది. "
++"సమాచారము సరిగా నవీకరించబడక పోవుట మరియు ఆ ఫైలు వర్షన్ కంట్రోల్ సిస్టమ్సుతో విభేదించుట వంటి లోపాలను యిది "
++"కలిగివుంది."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:596(para)
++msgid "The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the documentation inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way of documenting code."
++msgstr ""
++"ముందుగా తెలిపిన సమస్యలను తప్పించుటకు మేము పత్రికీకరణను మూలముల లోపలే వుంచమని సూచించుచున్నాము. "
++"ఈ మాన్యుయల్ ఈ విధంగా కోడ్ పత్రికీకరణను మాత్రమే వివరించును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:606(title)
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "పత్రికీకరణ వ్యాఖ్యలు"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:611(title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc వ్యాఖ్య బ్లాక్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:608(para)
++msgid "A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"బహుళ వరుసలు వుండి అదనపు '*' గుర్తులతో ప్రారంభించబడు వ్యాఖ్య పత్రికీకరణ బ్లాక్ను సూచించును అది GTK-Doc "
++"సాధనముల ద్వారా నిర్వర్తించబడును. <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:623(para)
++msgid "The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++"'identifier' అనునది వ్యాఖ్యకు సంభందించిన అంశము యొక్క నామముతో వుండు వొక వరుస. అంశము పై ఆధారపడి "
++"సిన్టాక్సు అనునది కొద్దిగా విభేదించును. (చేయవలసినది identifies చూపు పట్టికను జతచేయి)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:629(para)
++msgid "The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows the detailed description. All lines (outside program- listings and CDATA sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-asterisk-blank-blank)."
++msgstr ""
++"ప్రతి చిహ్నపు రకమునకు 'పత్రికీకరణ' బ్లాక్ భిన్నంగా వుంటుంది. ఫంక్షన్లు లేదా స్థూలములు పారామితి వివరణను కలిగివున్నవి ముందుగా "
++"ఖాళీ వరుస (a '*') అనుసరించాలి. తరువాత విశదీకృత వివరణను అనుసరించాలి. అన్ని వరుసలు (ప్రోగ్రామ్ బయటవి- జాబితాలు "
++"మరియు CDATA విభాగములు) ' *' (ఖాళీ-యాస్ట్రిక్) మాత్రమే కలిగివున్నవి పారాగ్రాఫ్ విరామాలుగా వుంచబడును. మీకు పారాగ్రాఫ్ "
++"విరామాలు అక్కరలేకపోతే, దానిని ' * ' (blank-asterisk-blank-blank)కు మార్చుము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:646(para)
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr "ఆర్గుమెంట్లను తీసుకొనే ఫంక్షన్లను లేదా మాక్రోలను సూచించుటకు function() వుపయోగించుము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:651(para)
++msgid "Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr "పారామితులను సూచించుటకు @param వుపయోగించుము. వివరించబడిన పారామితికి సంభందించిన యితర ఫంక్షన్ల పారామితులను సూచించుటకు కూడా దీనిని వుపయోగించుము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:657(para)
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr "స్థిరరాశిని సూచించుటకు %constant వుపయోగించుము, ఉ.దా. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:662(para)
++msgid "Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr "ఇతర రకముల చిహ్నమును సూచించుటకు #symbol వుపయోగించుము, ఉ.దా. ఆర్గుమెంట్లు తీసుకొని structs మరియు enums మరియు macros వంటివి."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:668(para)
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal"
++msgstr "GObject సంకేతమును సూచించుటకు #Object::signal వుపయోగించుము"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:673(para)
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property"
++msgstr "GObject లక్షణమును సూచించుటకు #Object:property వుపయోగించుము"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:678(para)
++msgid "Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure."
++msgstr "స్ట్రక్చర్ నందలి క్షేత్రమును సూచించుటకు #Struct.field వుపయోగించుము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:640(para)
++msgid "One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"సాదా-పాఠ్యమునందు హైపర్-పాఠ్యమును కలిగివుండువలన వొక సౌకర్యము పత్రమునందు లింకులను కలిగివుండవచ్చును. "
++"అయినను లింకు కొరకు సరైన మార్కప్ వ్రాయుట చికాకే. GTK-Doc నందు చాలా వుపయోగకర ఎబ్రివేషన్లు అందించబడుచున్నవి. "
++"<placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:686(para)
++msgid "If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or '#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++"మీరు ప్రత్యేక ఆక్షరములు '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or '#'ను మీ పత్రికీకరణనందు GTK-Doc వాటిని మార్చకుండా వుపయోగించాలి అంటే మీరు XML మూలకములు \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&commat;\", \"&percnt;\" మరియు \"&num;\" వుపయోగించవచ్చు లేదా వాటిని '\\' "
++"బాక్స్లాష్తో ఎస్కేప్ చేయుము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:695(para)
++msgid "DocBook can do more that just links. One can also have lists, tables and examples. To enable the usage of SGML/XML tags inside doc-comments you need to have <option>--sgml-mode</option> in the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"DocBook లింకుల వలె చాలా చేయగలదు. ఒకరు జాబితాలనుకూడా కలిగివుండగలరు, పట్టికలు మరియు వుదాహరణలు కూడా. "
++"doc-comments లోపల SGML/XML టాగ్స్ యొక్క వినియోగాన్ని చేతనము చేయుటకు మీరు <filename>Makefile.am</filename> నందలి <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> వేరియబుల్ "
++"నందు <option>--sgml-mode</option> కలిగివుండాలి."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:703(para)
++msgid "As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to comment those symbols too. This helps other to understand you code. Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the 2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made public, all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and insert the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++"ముందుగా చెప్పినట్లుగా GTK-Doc అనునది పబ్లిక్ API పత్రికీకరణ కొరకు. స్థిర చిహ్నములకు వొక్కరే పత్రికీకరణ వ్రాయలేరు. ఆ చిహ్నములను కూడా వ్యాఖ్యానించుట మంచిది. ఇది యితరులు కూడా మీ కోడ్ను అర్ధము చేసుకొనుటకు సహాయపడును. అందుకని వీటిని సాదారణ వ్యాఖ్యలు (మొదటి వరుసనందు 2వ '*' లేకుండా) వుపయోగించి వ్యాఖ్యానించమని సూచించడమైంది. తరువాత ఆ ఫంక్షన్ పబ్లిక్గా మార్చవలసివుంటే, చేయవలసినదల్లా వేరొక '*'ను వ్యాఖ్య బ్లాక్ నందు చేర్చి మరియు చిహ్నపు నామాన్ని"
++"విభగాముల ఫైలునందు సరైన స్థానములో వుంచడమే."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:717(title)
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "పత్రికీకరణ విభాగములు"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:719(para)
++msgid "Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are optional."
++msgstr ""
++"పత్రికీకరణ యొక్క ప్రతి విభాగము వొక క్లాస్ లేదా మాడ్యూల్ గురించిన సమాచారమును కలిగివుంటుంది. మూలకాన్ని "
++"పరిచయం చేయుటకు వొకరు విభాగపు బ్లాక్ను వ్రాయవచ్చును. పొట్టి వివరణ అనునది పట్టిక యొక్క సారముల లోపలకూడా "
++"వుపయోగించబడును. అన్ని @fields ఐచ్చికమైనవి."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:727(title)
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "విభాగపు వ్యాఖ్య బ్లాక్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:749(term)
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr "SECTION:<name>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:751(para)
++msgid "The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name give here should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"నామము అనునది విభాగపు పత్రికీకరణను <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> ఫైలునందలి "
++"సంభందిత భాగమునకు లింకుచేయును. ఇక్కడ యిచ్చిన నామము <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> ఫైలునందలి <FILE> టాగ్తో సరిపోలవలెను."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:760(term)
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@short_description"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:762(para)
++msgid "A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr "విభాగము యొక్క వివరణ వొక్క వరుసలో, తరువాత అది TOC నందు లింక్సు తరువాత మరియు విభాగపు పేజీ పైన కనిపించును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:769(term)
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr "@title"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:771(para)
++msgid "The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr ""
++"విభాగపు శీర్షిక అనునది SECTION డిక్లరేషన్ నుండి <name> అప్రమేయం కాబడును. ఇది @title క్షేత్రము "
++"ద్వారా దిద్దివ్రాయబడును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:778(term)
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr "@section_id"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:780(para)
++msgid "Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <title> is used as a section_id and for other section it is <MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++"శీర్షిక యొక్క వుపయోగాన్ని విభాగపు గుర్తింపుకారి వలె దిద్దివ్రాయును. GObjects కొరకు <title> అనునది "
++"section_id వలె మరియు యితర విభాగమునకు <MODULE>-<title> వలె వుపయోగించబడును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:788(term)
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@see_also"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:790(para)
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section.."
++msgstr "ఈ విభాగమునకు సంభందించిన చిహ్నముల యొక్క జాబితా..."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:796(term)
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:803(para)
++msgid "Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++"స్థిరమైన - స్థిరమైన యింటర్ఫేస్ ముఖ్యోద్దేశం మూడోవ్యక్తి అనువర్తనములను యీ యింటర్ఫేసులకు కొరకు అభివృద్దిపరచుట, విడుదల చేయుట, మరియు ఆ వుత్పాదన యొక్క"
++"అన్ని చిన్న విడుదలలనందు(పెద్ద విడుదల క్రిందన విడుదలగునవి) నడుచునట్లు చూచుకొనుటను చేతన పరచుట. ముఖ్య విడుదలనందు కూడా, సారూప్యతా మార్పులు అనునవి తగ్గించుటకు, ఖచ్చితమైన నిర్ధారణలను కలిగివుండుట."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:815(para)
++msgid "Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++"అస్థిరమైన - అస్థిరమైన యింటర్ఫేస్లు ప్రయోగాత్మకమైనవి లేదా బదలీకరణ పొందునవి. అవి ముఖ్యంగా బయటి అభివృద్దికారులకు "
++"కొత్తవి లేదా వేగంగా మారుతున్న సాంకేతికతపై యాక్సెస్ యిచ్చుటకు వుపయోగించబడును, లేదా వొక సమస్య కొరకు యెక్కువ సహజమైన పరిష్కారము కొరకు యెదురు చూడబడుతోందో అక్కడ మధ్యంతర పరిష్కారము యిచ్చుటకు. ఒక చిన్న విడుదలనుండి "
++"తర్వాత దానికి యెటువంటి క్లైమ్స్ సోర్స్ గురించికాని లేదా బైనరీ సారూప్యత గురించికాని చేయబడవు."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:827(para)
++msgid "Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++"వ్యక్తిగత - GNOME స్టాక్ లోపలే వుపయోగించగల యింటర్ఫేస్, అయితే అది అంత్య-వినియోగదారుల కొరకు పత్రికీకరణ "
++"చేయబడదు. అటువంటి ఫంక్షన్లు తెలుపబడిన మరియు పత్రికీకరణ మార్గములలోనే వుపయోగించాలి."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:836(para)
++msgid "Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be Internal."
++msgstr ""
++"అంతర్గత - మాడ్యూల్కు అంతర్గతమైన మాడ్యూల్ మరియు అంత్య-వినియోగదారి పత్రికీకరణ అవసరములేనిది. "
++"పత్రికీకరణ చేయని ఫంక్షన్లు అంతర్గతమైనవిగా పరిగణించాలి."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:798(para)
++msgid "A informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend the use of one of these terms: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"ఈ API కలిగివున్న స్థిరత్వపు స్థాయి యొక్క సాధారణ వివరణ. ఈ పదములలో వొక దానిని వుపయోగించుట మేము సిఫార్సు "
++"చేయుచున్నాము: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:848(term)
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:850(para)
++msgid "The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is optional."
++msgstr "విభాగపు సారాంశము నందు చూపుటకు <literal>#include</literal> ఫైళ్ళు (కామాతో వేరుచేయబడిన జాబితా), <link linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">విభాగపు ఫైలు</link> లేదా ఆదేశ వరుసనుండి గ్లోబల్ విలువను దిద్దివ్రాయుట. ఈ అంశము ఐచ్చికము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:859(term)
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr "@image"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:861(para)
++msgid "The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is optional."
++msgstr ""
++"ఈ విభాగము కొరకు సూచనపేజీ పైన ప్రదర్శించుటకు ప్రతిబింబము. ఇది తరుచుగా వొక క్లాస్ యొక్క విజువల్ అప్పియరెన్స్ "
++"వివరించుటకు డయాగ్రమ్ వంటిది లేదా యితర క్లాసులతో దాని సంభందాన్ని తెలిపే డయాగ్రమ్. ఈ అంశము ఐచ్చికము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:872(para)
++msgid "To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++"అనవసరపు రికంపైలేషన్ను విసర్జించుటకు doc-changes తర్వాత విభాగపు పత్రములను c-source నందు "
++"వీలైనచోట వుంచుము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:881(title)
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "చిహ్నముల పత్రికీకరణ"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:883(para)
++msgid "Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus function are usually documented in the c-source and macros, struct and enum in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++"ప్రతి చిహ్నము (function, macro, struct, enum, signal మరియు property) విడివిడి బ్లాక్ నందు పత్రికీకరణ "
++"చేయబడినవి. బ్లాక్ అనునది చిహ్నము యొక్క నిర్వచనముకు దగ్గరా వుంచబడినది అలా వాటిని సింక్లో వుంచుట సులువు. "
++"ఫంక్షన్ సాధారణంగా c-source నందు మరియు macros, stuct మరియు enumలు హెడర్ ఫైలునందు పత్రికీకరణ "
++"చేయబడతాయి."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:891(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:920(title)
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr "సాధారణ టాగ్లు"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:893(para)
++msgid "You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell when an api was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr ""
++"మీరు వర్షనింగ్ సమాచారమును అన్ని పత్రికీకరణ మూలకాలకు జతచేయవచ్చును, api యెప్పుడు పరిచయం చేయబడిందో "
++"చెప్పుటకు, లేదా యెప్పుడు తీసివేయబడిందో చెప్పుటకు."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:898(title)
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr "వర్షనింగ్ టాగ్స్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:899(term)
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "అప్పటినుంచి:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:901(para)
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr "కోడ్ యొక్క యే వర్షన్ నుండి API అందుబాటులోవుందో వివరణ."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:906(term)
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "తీసివేసిన:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:908(para)
++msgid "Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr "ఈ ఫంక్షన్ యికపై వుపయోగించుటలేదని పారాగ్రాఫ్ చెబుచున్నది. వివరణ చదువరిని కొత్త APIకు సూచించాలి."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:916(para)
++msgid "(FIXME : Stability information)"
++msgstr "(FIXME : స్థిరత్వ సమాచారము)"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:943(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:979(title)
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "ఫంక్షన్ వ్యాఖ్యానపు బ్లాక్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:949(para)
++msgid "Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/unrefed/released."
++msgstr "తిరిగివచ్చిన objects, lists, strings, మొదలగునవి, freed/unrefed/released చేయాలా వద్దా అనేదానిపై పత్రము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:955(para)
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr "పారామితులు NULL కావచ్చా, వొకవేళ అయితే యేమి జరుగును అనేదానిపై పత్రము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:960(para)
++msgid "Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr "తగుచోట్ల ఆసక్తికరమైన ప్రి-కండీషన్లు మరియు పోస్ట్-కండీషన్లను తెలుపుము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:945(para) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1042(para)
++msgid "Please remember to: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "దయచేసి దీనికి గుర్తువుంచండి: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:967(para)
++msgid "Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++"Gtk-doc అన్ని చిహ్నములు (macros, functions) '_'తో ప్రారంభమగునవి వ్యక్తిగతమైనవని పరిగణించును. "
++"అవి స్టాటిక్ ఫంక్షన్సు వలె పరిగణించబడును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:972(para)
++msgid "Also, take a look at gobject introspection annotation tags: http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++msgstr ""
++"gobject యింట్రోస్పెక్షన్ యెన్నోయేషన్ టాగ్స్ వద్ద కూడా చూడండి: "
++"http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1003(title)
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr "ఫంక్షన్ టాగ్లు"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1004(term)
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "తిరిగివచ్చినవి:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1006(para)
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr "పారాగ్రాఫ్ తిరిగివచ్చిన ఫలితాన్ని వివరిస్తుంది."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1011(term)
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr "@...:"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1013(para)
++msgid "In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag (@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++"ఒకవేళ ఫంక్షన్ వేరియాడిక్ ఆర్గుమెంట్లను కలిగివుంటే, మీరు ఈ టాగ్ను వుపయోగించాలి (@Varargs: చారిత్రక కారణాలకు "
++"కూడా పనిచేయును)."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1023(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1025(title)
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "లక్షణము వ్యాఖ్యాము బ్లాక్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1040(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1059(title)
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "సంకేతపు వ్యాఖ్యానము బ్లాక్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1046(para)
++msgid "Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or after other signals."
++msgstr "సంకేతము యెప్పుడు వెలువడింది మరియు అది సంకేతముల ముందు వెలువడిందా లేదా తర్వాత అనేది పత్రికీకరణ చేయును."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1052(para)
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr "సంకేత సంభాలిక నందు వొక అనువర్తనము యేమి చేయవచ్చును అనే పత్రము."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1079(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1080(title)
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "Struct వ్యాఖ్యానము బ్లాక్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1100(para)
++msgid "Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse behavirour."
++msgstr "మీరు మరుగున వుంచాలని అనుకొంటే private struct క్షేత్రముల ముందు <code>/*< private >*/</code> వుపయోగించు. విలోమ ప్రవర్తన కొరకు <code>/*< public >*/</code> వుపయోగించు."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1108(title) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1109(title)
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr "Enum వ్యాఖ్యానము బ్లాక్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1130(para)
++msgid "Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse behavirour."
++msgstr "మీరు మరుగున వుంచాలని అనుకొంటే private enum విలువుల ముందు <code>/*< private >*/</code> వుపయోగించు. విలోమ ప్రవర్తన కొరకు <code>/*< public >*/</code> వుపయోగించు."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1140(title)
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr "ఉపయోగకర DocBook టాగ్స్"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1142(para)
++msgid "Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr "కోడ్ను పత్రికీకరణ చేయునప్పుడు యెక్కువ వుపయోగకరంగా వుండే మరికొన్ని DocBook టాగ్స్ యిక్కడ వున్నాయి."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1147(para)
++msgid "To link to another section in the GTK docs: <placeholder-1/> The linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr "GTK docs నందు వేరొక విభాగమునకు లింకు చేయుటకు: <placeholder-1/> మీరు లింకు యేర్పరచాలని కొరుకొనుచున్న పేజీ యొక్క పై అంశముపై SGML/XML idయే linkend. చాలా పేజీలకు ప్రస్తుతం యిదే పార్ట్ (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") మరియు పేజీ శీర్షిక (\"Hash Tables\"). విడ్జట్లకు యిది క్లాస్ నామము మాత్రమే. SGML/XML నిర్ధారించుటకు ఖాళీలు మరియు అండర్స్కోర్లు '-'గా మార్చబడినవి."
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1163(para)
++msgid "To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr "బాహ్య ఫంక్షన్ను సూచించుటకు, ఉ.దా. ప్రామాణిక C ఫంక్షన్: <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1174(para)
++msgid "To include example code: <placeholder-1/> or possibly this, for very short code fragments which don't need a title: <placeholder-2/> For the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation: <![CDATA[\n|[\n ...\n]|\n]]>"
++msgstr "ఉదాహరణ కోడ్ను చేర్చుటకు: <placeholder-1/> లేదా, శీర్షిక అవసరములేని చాలా చిన్న కోడ్ ముక్కల కొరకు: <placeholder-2/> తరువాతి GTK-Doc కూడా అబ్రివేషన్ను మద్దతించును: <![CDATA[\n|[\n ...\n]|\n]]>"
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1208(para)
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1230(para)
++msgid "To include a note which stands out from the text: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1245(para)
++msgid "To refer to a type: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1256(para)
++msgid "To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1267(para)
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1278(para)
++msgid "To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <placeholder-1/> but you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1291(para)
++msgid "To emphasize text: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1302(para)
++msgid "For filenames use: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1313(para)
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <placeholder-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1328(title)
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1330(para)
++msgid "There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.sgml</filename>, <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1339(title)
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1341(para)
++msgid "If your library or application includes GtkObjects/GObjects, you want their signals, arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1350(title)
++msgid "Example types file snippet"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1364(para)
++msgid "Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in <filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1373(title)
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1375(para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them and place them in a order."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1382(para)
++msgid "While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later run will not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there are some new goodies introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1392(para)
++msgid "Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along with the library."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1401(para)
++msgid "So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1408(title)
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1430(title)
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1432(para)
++msgid "The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1438(para)
++msgid "The section file is a plain test file with xml like syntax (using tags). Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1444(para)
++msgid "The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be converted into the DocBook SGML/XML file <filename>sgml/gnome-config.sgml</filename> or .DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. (The name of the html file is based on the module name and the section title, or for gobjects it is based on the gobjects class name converted to lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1456(para)
++msgid "The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1463(para)
++msgid "You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private declarations which will not be output (It is a handy way to avoid warning messages about unused declarations.). If your library contains private types which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1479(para)
++msgid "You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the #include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1493(title)
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1495(para)
++msgid "A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1504(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1513(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1520(para)
++msgid "The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1528(para)
++msgid "Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile.am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during <command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1535(para)
++msgid "One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: <filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first and can be compared with the section file if that is manualy maintained. The second lists all declarations fromt he headers If a symbol is missing one could check if this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1544(para)
++msgid "If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>.prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask gtkdoc to keep the intermedia scanner file for further analysis, but running it as <command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1559(title)
++msgid "Frequently asked question"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1563(segtitle)
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1564(segtitle)
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1566(seg)
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1568(function)
++msgid "xxx_get_type()"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1569(filename)
++msgid "<package>.types"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1567(seg)
++msgid "The objects <placeholder-1/> function has not been entered into the <placeholder-2/> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1573(seg)
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1575(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1614(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1622(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1644(filename)
++msgid "<package>-sections.txt"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1576(ulink)
++msgid "explanation"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1574(seg)
++msgid "Missing or wrong naming in <placeholder-1/> file (see <placeholder-2/>)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1580(seg)
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1582(type) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1623(type)
++msgid "GtkWidget"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1581(seg)
++msgid "Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <placeholder-1/>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1588(seg)
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1590(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1605(filename) C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1631(filename)
++msgid "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1589(seg)
++msgid "Does the <placeholder-1/> contain a index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1595(seg)
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1596(seg)
++msgid "Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1602(seg)
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1603(seg)
++msgid "Is the new page xi:included from <placeholder-1/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1609(seg)
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1610(seg)
++msgid "Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <placeholder-1/> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1618(seg)
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1620(filename)
++msgid "<package>.hierarchy"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1621(filename)
++msgid "xml/tree_index.sgml"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1619(seg)
++msgid "If the type is listed in <placeholder-1/> but not in <placeholder-2/> then double check that the type is correctly placed in the <placeholder-3/>. If the type instance (e.g. <placeholder-4/>) is not listed or incidentialy makred private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1628(seg)
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1630(filename)
++msgid "xml/annotation-glossary.xml"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1629(seg)
++msgid "Check that <placeholder-1/> is xi:included from <placeholder-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1637(seg)
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1638(seg)
++msgid "Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the source."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1643(seg)
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1644(seg)
++msgid "Symbol XYZ appears twice in <placeholder-1/> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:1647(seg)
++msgid "Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template matches."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:12(releaseinfo)
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:16(year)
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:16(holder)
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:19(para)
++msgid "<address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state><postcode>02110-1301</postcode><country>USA</country></address> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:28(title)
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:31(title)
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:32(para)
++msgid "The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:43(para)
++msgid "This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:50(para)
++msgid "We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:62(title)
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:63(para)
++msgid "This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:72(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:79(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:94(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:103(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:111(para)
++msgid "A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not <quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:128(para)
++msgid "Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:141(para)
++msgid "The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:153(title)
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:154(para)
++msgid "You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:169(para)
++msgid "You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:176(title)
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:177(para)
++msgid "If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:195(para)
++msgid "If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:202(para)
++msgid "If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:222(para)
++msgid "It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:231(title)
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:232(para)
++msgid "You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:248(title)
++msgid "A"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:249(para)
++msgid "Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:264(title)
++msgid "B"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:265(para)
++msgid "List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:279(title)
++msgid "C"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:280(para)
++msgid "State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:291(title)
++msgid "D"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:292(para)
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:301(title)
++msgid "E"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:302(para)
++msgid "Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:311(title)
++msgid "F"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:312(para)
++msgid "Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:324(title)
++msgid "G"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:325(para)
++msgid "Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:337(title)
++msgid "H"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:338(para)
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:346(title)
++msgid "I"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:347(para)
++msgid "Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>as given on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:365(title)
++msgid "J"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:366(para)
++msgid "Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:383(title)
++msgid "K"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:384(para)
++msgid "In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or <quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:396(title)
++msgid "L"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:397(para)
++msgid "Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:409(title)
++msgid "M"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:410(para)
++msgid "Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:421(title)
++msgid "N"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:422(para)
++msgid "Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:432(para)
++msgid "If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:444(para)
++msgid "You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:453(para)
++msgid "You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:470(para)
++msgid "The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:480(title)
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:481(para)
++msgid "You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:492(para)
++msgid "The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:505(para)
++msgid "In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled <quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled <quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled <quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:516(title)
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:517(para)
++msgid "You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:527(para)
++msgid "You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:537(title)
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:538(para)
++msgid "A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:561(title)
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:562(para)
++msgid "Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License provided that you also include the original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original English version of this License, the original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:580(title)
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:581(para)
++msgid "You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:594(title)
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:595(para)
++msgid "The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:606(para)
++msgid "Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:621(title)
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:622(para)
++msgid "To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:629(para)
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:632(para)
++msgid "Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:647(para)
++msgid "If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of <quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:657(para)
++msgid "If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++#: C/gtk-doc-manual.xml:0(None)
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr ""
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# Chinese (China) translation for gtk-doc.
++# Copyright (C) 2011 gtk-doc's COPYRIGHT HOLDER
++# This file is distributed under the same license as the gtk-doc package.
++# LuYanbo <767344148@qq.com>, 2011.
++# 黄世海 <rochester_h@163.com>, 2012.
++# Wylmer Wang <wantinghard@gmail.com>, 2012.
++#
++msgid ""
++msgstr ""
++"Project-Id-Version: gtk-doc master\n"
++"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-04-16 14:58+0000\n"
++"PO-Revision-Date: 2012-11-02 12:12+0800\n"
++"Last-Translator: Wylmer Wang <wantinghard@gmail.com>\n"
++"Language-Team: Chinese (China) <i18n-zh@googlegroups.com>\n"
++"Language: zh_CN\n"
++"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
++"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
++"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
++"X-Poedit-Bookmarks: 236,211,220,228,94,235,-1,-1,-1,-1\n"
++"X-Generator: Poedit 1.5.4\n"
++"X-Poedit-Language: Chinese\n"
++"X-Poedit-Country: CHINA\n"
++"X-Poedit-SourceCharset: utf-8\n"
++
++#. Put one translator per line, in the form NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
++msgctxt "_"
++msgid "translator-credits"
++msgstr ""
++"LuYanbo <767344148@qq.com>, 2011\n"
++"黄世海 <rochester_h@163.com>, 2012\n"
++"Wylmer Wang <wantinghard@gmail.com>, 2012"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:12(bookinfo/title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc Manual"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 手册"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:13(bookinfo/edition)
++msgid "1.18.1"
++msgstr "1.18.1"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:14(abstract/para)
++msgid "User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage."
++msgstr "为开发人员提供 GTK-Doc 用法说明的用户手册。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:16(authorgroup/author)
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Chris</firstname> <surname>Lyttle</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>chris@wilddev.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:25(authorgroup/author)
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Dan</firstname> <surname>Mueth</surname> <affiliation> <address> "
++"<email>d-mueth@uchicago.edu</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:34(authorgroup/author)
++msgid ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Kost</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++msgstr ""
++"<firstname>Stefan</firstname> <surname>Kost</surname> <affiliation> "
++"<address> <email>ensonic@users.sf.net</email> </address> </affiliation>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:45(publisher/publishername)
++msgid "GTK-Doc project"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 项目"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:44(bookinfo/publisher)
++msgid ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++msgstr ""
++"<_:publishername-1/> <address><email>gtk-doc-list@gnome.org</email></address>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:48(bookinfo/copyright)
++msgid "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000, 2005</year> <holder>Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle</holder>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:52(bookinfo/copyright)
++msgid "<year>2007-2011</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2007-2011</year> <holder>Stefan Sauer (Kost)</holder>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:65(legalnotice/para)
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle>, "
++"Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation "
++"with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A "
++"copy of the license is <link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++msgstr ""
++"允许在<citetitle>GNU 自由文档认证书</citetitle>的规范下复制，发布或者／并且修"
++"改本文档，由自由软件基金会出版的1.1版或更新版本的无变更的部分，无封面文本，以"
++"及无背面文本。取得证书的制件<link linkend=\"fdl\">included</link>."
++
++#: C/index.docbook:73(legalnotice/para)
++msgid ""
++"Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and "
++"services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME "
++"documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the "
++"GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial "
++"caps."
++msgstr ""
++"公司使用的区别于它们的许多产品及服务的名字就称为商标. 这些名字出现在任何GNOME"
++"文档中, 而且那些商标会提示GNOME文档项目成员, 那些名字会打印在封面或初始页面"
++"中."
++
++#: C/index.docbook:83(revhistory/revision)
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.18.1</revnumber> <date>20 Sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>development version</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.18.1</revnumber> <date>2011年9月20</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>开发版本</revremark>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:89(revhistory/revision)
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>14 sep 2011</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug fixes, speedups, markdown support</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.18</revnumber> <date>2011年9月14</date> <authorinitials>ss</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>修复问题，速度优化、markdown 支持</revremark>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:95(revhistory/revision)
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>26 Feb 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>urgent bug fix update</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.17</revnumber> <date>2011年2月26</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>紧急问题修复更新</revremark>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:101(revhistory/revision)
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>14 Jan 2011</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes, layout improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.16</revnumber> <date>2011年1月14</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>修复问题，布局改进</revremark>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:107(revhistory/revision)
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>21 May 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bug and regression fixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.15</revnumber> <date>2010年5月21</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>问题和退化修复</revremark>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:113(revhistory/revision)
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>28 March 2010</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>bugfixes and performance improvements</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.14</revnumber> <date>2010年3月28</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>问题修复和性能提高</revremark>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:119(revhistory/revision)
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>broken tarball update</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.13</revnumber> <date>2009年10月18</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>损坏的档案包更新</revremark>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:125(revhistory/revision)
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>18 December 2009</date> "
++"<authorinitials>sk</authorinitials> <revremark>new tool features and "
++"bugfixes</revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.12</revnumber> <date>2009年10月18</date> <authorinitials>sk</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>新工具功能和问题修复</revremark>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:131(revhistory/revision)
++msgid ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>16 November 2008</date> "
++"<authorinitials>mal</authorinitials> <revremark>GNOME doc-utils migration</"
++"revremark>"
++msgstr ""
++"<revnumber>1.11</revnumber> <date>2008年10月16</date> <authorinitials>mal</"
++"authorinitials> <revremark>GNOME doc-utils 迁移</revremark>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:144(chapter/title)
++msgid "Introduction"
++msgstr "介绍"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:146(chapter/para)
++msgid ""
++"This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how "
++"it is used."
++msgstr "本章介绍 GTK-Doc，并概述了它是什么以及如何使用它。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:152(sect1/title)
++msgid "What is GTK-Doc?"
++msgstr "什么是 GTK-Doc？"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:154(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the "
++"public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can "
++"also be used to document application code."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc 用于为C代码编写文档。典型地用于编写库的公共API，如GTK+与GNOME库。不过"
++"它也可以用于书写应用程序代码文档。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:162(sect1/title)
++msgid "How Does GTK-Doc Work?"
++msgstr "GTK Doc 是怎样工作的？"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:164(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source "
++"files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the "
++"template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only "
++"document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce "
++"output for static functions)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc通过使用放置于源文件内特殊格式的注释块的函数文档工作，或者添加在GTK-"
++"Doc使用的模板文件中。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:171(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc consists of a number of perl scripts, each performing a different "
++"step in the process."
++msgstr "GTK-Doc由一些perl脚本组成，每个脚本完成这一过程中不同的步骤。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:176(sect1/para)
++msgid "There are 5 main steps in the process:"
++msgstr "这个进程有五个主要步骤："
++
++#: C/index.docbook:183(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Writing the documentation.</guilabel> The author fills in the "
++"source files with the documentation for each function, macro, union etc. (In "
++"the past information was entered in generated template files, which is not "
++"recommended anymore)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>书写文档。</guilabel>作者在源文件中为每个函数，宏，联合体等对象书写"
++"了文档（在以往的消息里它进入到已完成的模板文件中，现已经不再介绍了）。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:193(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Gathering information about the code.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-scan</application> scans the header files of the code "
++"looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. "
++"It creates the file <filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename> "
++"containing a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according "
++"to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to "
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>. The author can rearrange "
++"the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the "
++"final desired order. The second file it generates is <filename><"
++"module>-decl.txt</filename>. This file contains the full declarations "
++"found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some symbols to show "
++"up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or "
++"the declaration should appear differently, one can place entities similar to "
++"the ones in <filename><module>-decl.txt</filename> into <filename><"
++"module>-overrides.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>收集关于源代码的信息.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-扫描</"
++"application>扫描代码的头文件寻找函数，宏，枚举，结构与联合体的声明。它创建包"
++"含一系列声明的文件：<filename><module>-decl-list.txt</filename>，并按照"
++"它们所在的头文件把它们放入特定的部分中。在第一次运行时这个文件会复制到"
++"<filename><module>-sections.txt</filename>中。作者可以重新安排这些部分"
++"及在它们当中的声明顺序，以便产生最后所需的顺序。它产生的第二个文件是："
++"<filename><module>-decl.txt</filename>。这个文件包含了扫描器找到的全声"
++"明。如果基于某种原因你需要在文档中显示出一些符号，扫描器无法在全声明中找到或"
++"者声明会呈现出不同的形态，你可以把相似的实体<filename><:module>-decl."
++"txt</filename>放入<filename><module>-overrides.txt</filename>中去。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:210(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application> can also be used to dynamically "
++"query a library about any GObject subclasses it exports. It saves "
++"information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about "
++"any GObject properties and signals it provides."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scangobj</application>也可以用于动态查询关于任何它导出的"
++"GObject子类的一个库。它保存在关于每个对象在继承关系以及它所提供关于任何"
++"GObject属性与信号的位置。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:216(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application> should not be used anymore. It was "
++"needed in the past when GObject was still GtkObject inside gtk+."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-scanobj</application>可能不再使用了。它在过去GObject仍就"
++"是gtk+中的GtkObject的时候是需要的。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:223(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the \"template\" files.</guilabel> <application>gtkdoc-"
++"mktmpl</application> creates a number of files in the <filename class="
++"\"directory\">tmpl/</filename> subdirectory, using the information gathered "
++"in the first step. (Note that this can be run repeatedly. It will try to "
++"ensure that no documentation is ever lost.)"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>生成文件 \"模板\" .</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-mktmpl</"
++"application>用在第一步收集的信息，在filename class=\"directory\">tmpl/</"
++"filename>子目录中创建一定数量的文件。（注意：它能够良好地运行，它将保障没有任"
++"何文档丢失。）"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:232(note/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep "
++"documentation in the code. <application>gtkdocize</application> supports now "
++"a <option>--flavour no-tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that "
++"skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand, "
++"please remove the directory (e.g. from version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++"由于GTK-Doc 1.9模板可以避免使用，我们鼓励人们在代码中保留文档。"
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>支持<option>--flavour no-tmpl</option>这"
++"个选项，以跳过tpml目录的使用来选择一个makefile文件。如果你从未手动修改过tpml"
++"里的文件，请删除这个目录（比如：在版本控制系统中做这件事）。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:244(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Generating the SGML/XML and HTML/PDF.</guilabel> "
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkdb</application> turns the template files into SGML or "
++"XML files in the <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename "
++"class=\"directory\">xml/</filename> subdirectory. If the source code "
++"contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it "
++"gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads docs from "
++"sources and introspection data. We recommend to use Docbook XML."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>生成 SGML/XML and HTML/PDF文件.</guilabel><application>gtkdoc-"
++"mkdb</application>把<filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or "
++"<filename class=\"directory\">xml/</filename>子目录中的模板文件转换为 SGML "
++"或 XML格式的文件。如果源代码中包含了用特殊的注释块书写的函数文档，它会在此合"
++"并。如果没有使用tmpl文件，它只从数据源与自检数据中读出文档。我们建议您使用"
++"Docbook XML。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:255(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> turns the SGML/XML files into HTML "
++"files in the <filename class=\"directory\">html/</filename> subdirectory. "
++"Likewise <application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application> turns the SGML/XML files "
++"into a PDF document called <filename><package>.pdf</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"<application>gtkdoc-mkhtml</application> 把<filename class=\"directory"
++"\">html/</filename> 子目录中的SGML/XML文件转换为HTML文件。就如同"
++"application>gtkdoc-mkpdf</application>把SGML/XML文件转换为称为<filename><"
++"package>.pdf</filename>的PDF文档一样。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:261(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"Files in <filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename> or <filename class="
++"\"directory\">xml/</filename> and <filename class=\"directory\">html/</"
++"filename> directories are always overwritten. One should never edit them "
++"directly."
++msgstr ""
++"在<filename class=\"directory\">sgml/</filename>或者 <filename class="
++"\"directory\">xml/</filename> 与 <filename class=\"directory\">html/</"
++"filename>目录中的文件常常被覆盖。任何人都不能直接编辑它们。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:269(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> After "
++"installing the HTML files, <application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application> can be "
++"run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, "
++"the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in "
++"the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, "
++"<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application> turns all external links into web-"
++"links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application "
++"will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed)."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Fixing up cross-references between documents.</guilabel> ，在安装"
++"HTML文件时，<application>gtkdoc-fixxref</application>能够用于修复任何独立文档"
++"之间的交叉链接。例如：GTK+文档包含了许多交叉链接来显示GLib手册中的文档。在为"
++"发行软件创建tarball源时，<application>gtkdoc-rebase</application>会把所有的外"
++"部链接转换为网页链接。在安装发行文档（事先生成的）时，应用程序会试着把这些链"
++"接换回到本地链接（在那些文档安装的地方）。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:287(sect1/title)
++msgid "Getting GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "获取 GTK-Doc"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:290(sect2/title)
++msgid "Requirements"
++msgstr "要求"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:291(sect2/para)
++msgid "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel> - the main scripts are in Perl."
++msgstr "<guilabel>Perl v5</guilabel>- 主脚本是Perl格式。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:294(sect2/para)
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - This is the DocBook SGML DTD. <ulink "
++"url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/"
++"davenport</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>DocBook DTD v3.0</guilabel> - 这是DocBook SGML DTD的链接. <ulink "
++"url=\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/"
++"davenport</ulink>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:298(sect2/para)
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> - This is a DSSSL processor for converting "
++"SGML to various formats. <ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type="
++"\"http\">http://www.jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Jade v1.1</guilabel> -这是一个DSSSL处理器，用来把SGML转换为各种格"
++"式。<ulink url=\"http://www.jclark.com/jade\" type=\"http\">http://www."
++"jclark.com/jade</ulink>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:302(sect2/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> This is the DSSSL code to "
++"convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together with "
++"jade. I've customized the DSSSL code slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to colour the "
++"program code listings/declarations, and to support global cross-reference "
++"indices in the generated HTML. <ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl"
++"\" type=\"http\">http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>"
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>Modular DocBook Stylesheets</guilabel> 这是把DocBook转换为HTML（和"
++"一些其它格式）格式的DSSSL代码。它与jade共同使用。我稍微地修改了DSSSL代码，在 "
++"gtk-doc.dsl中，用于给程序代码的列表／声明，并且支持在已生成的HTML文档中的全局"
++"链接。<ulink url=\"http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl\" type=\"http\">http://"
++"nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl</ulink>。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:311(sect2/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel> - if you want to create man pages from "
++"the DocBook. I've customized the 'translation spec' slightly, to capitalise "
++"section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of the pages and "
++"the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on <ulink url="
++"\"http://www.ora.com/davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</"
++"ulink> NOTE: This does not work yet."
++msgstr ""
++"<guilabel>docbook-to-man</guilabel>－如果你想用DocBook创建用户手册。我已经稍"
++"微地修改了'translation spec'，以便描述文件头部和第页顶部的 'GTK Library'标题"
++"与底部的修订时间。这里有一个到它的链接:<ulink url=\"http://www.ora.com/"
++"davenport\" type=\"http\">http://www.ora.com/davenport</ulink>注意：它可能已"
++"经无效了。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:322(sect2/title)
++msgid "Installation"
++msgstr "安装"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:323(sect2/para)
++msgid ""
++"There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are "
++"installed."
++msgstr "DocBook Modular Stylesheets没有标准的安装位置。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:326(sect2/para)
++msgid "GTK-Doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically:"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 的配置脚本会自动地查找这三个目录："
++
++#: C/index.docbook:329(sect2/para)
++msgid ""
++"<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (used by "
++"RedHat)"
++msgstr ""
++"<filename> /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular </filename> (在 RedHat 中"
++"使用)"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:332(sect2/para)
++msgid ""
++"<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (used by Debian)"
++msgstr ""
++"<filename> /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook </filename> (在 Debian 中使用)"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:335(sect2/para)
++msgid "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (used by SuSE)"
++msgstr "<filename> /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl </filename> (在 SuSE 中使用)"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:338(sect2/para)
++msgid ""
++"If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to configure "
++"GTK-Doc using the option: <command> --with-dsssl-dir=<"
++"PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>"
++msgstr ""
++"如果把样式表安装在其它地方，您必须用这个选项来配置GTK-Doc：<command> --with-"
++"dsssl-dir=<PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> </command>。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:362(sect1/title)
++msgid "About GTK-Doc"
++msgstr "关于 GTK-Doc"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:364(sect1/para) C/index.docbook:378(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid "(FIXME)"
++msgstr "(FIXME)"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:368(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"(History, authors, web pages, license, future plans, comparison with other "
++"similar systems.)"
++msgstr "(历史, 作者, 网页, 认证, 未来计划, 与其它相似系统的比较.)"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:376(sect1/title)
++msgid "About this Manual"
++msgstr "关于此手册"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:382(sect1/para)
++msgid "(who it is meant for, where you can get it, license)"
++msgstr "(它意味着什么，你可以从哪里获得它, 许可证)"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:391(chapter/title)
++msgid "Setting up your project"
++msgstr "设置您的项目"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:393(chapter/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc into "
++"your project. Theses sections assume we work on a project called 'meep'. "
++"This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user app called "
++"'meeper'. We also assume you will be using autoconf and automake. In "
++"addition section <link linkend=\"plain_makefiles\">plain makefiles or other "
++"build systems</link> will describe the basics needed to work in a different "
++"build setup."
++msgstr ""
++"下面这些部分描述了要在你的项目中实现完整的GTK-Doc应当经历哪些步骤。这些部分假"
++"定我们在做一个名为'meep'的项目。该项目包含了一个叫做 'libmeep' 的库和一个称"
++"为'meeper'的终端用户应用程序。我们同样也假定你使用autoconf与automake。在附加"
++"的部分<link linkend=\"plain_makefiles\">plain makefiles or other build "
++"systems</link> 将描述构建一个不同的项目所需的基本的工作."
++
++#: C/index.docbook:404(sect1/title)
++msgid "Setting up a skeleton documentation"
++msgstr "设置一个框架文档"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:406(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/reference "
++"(this way you can also have docs/help for end-user documentation). It is "
++"recommended to create another subdirectory with the name of the doc-package. "
++"For packages with just one library this step is not necessary."
++msgstr ""
++"在你的项目的顶级目录里创建一些名字叫做docs/reference的文件夹（用这种方法也可"
++"以为终端用户建立docs/help文件夹）。建议你以文件包的名字创建另一个子目录。仅一"
++"个库对应多个包，这一步骤是没有必要的。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:415(example/title)
++msgid "Example directory structure"
++msgstr "范例目录结构"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:416(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"meep/\n"
++" docs/\n"
++" reference/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++" src/\n"
++" libmeep/\n"
++" meeper/\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:413(sect1/para)
++msgid "This can then look as shown below: <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr "目录结构将会如下所示：<_:example-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:433(sect1/title) C/index.docbook:440(example/title)
++msgid "Integration with autoconf"
++msgstr "与autoconf集成"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:435(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"Very easy! Just add one line to your <filename>configure.ac</filename> "
++"script."
++msgstr ""
++"非常容易！只需在您的 <filename>configure.ac</filename> 脚本中添加一行。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:441(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"# check for gtk-doc\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"# 检查 gtk-doc\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:455(example/title)
++msgid "Keep gtk-doc optional"
++msgstr "让gtk-doc为可选"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:456(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"# check for gtk-doc\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"# 检查 gtk-doc\n"
++"m4_ifdef([GTK_DOC_CHECK], [\n"
++"GTK_DOC_CHECK([1.14],[--flavour no-tmpl])\n"
++"],[\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL([ENABLE_GTK_DOC], false)\n"
++"])\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:450(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"This will require all developers to have gtk-doc installed. If it is okay "
++"for your project to have optional api-doc build setup, you can solve this as "
++"below. Keep it as is, as gtkdocize is looking for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</"
++"function> at the start of a line. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"这将要求所有的开发人员都安装了gtk-doc。如果对于你的项目拥有可选的api-doc构建"
++"是可行的，你可以像下面一样解决问题。让它保持正确，就像gtkdocize在一个行的起始"
++"寻找<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>一样。 <placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:469(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"The first argument is used to check for the gtkdocversion at configure time. "
++"The 2nd, optional argument is used by <application>gtkdocize</application>. "
++"The <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro also adds several configure "
++"switches:"
++msgstr ""
++"第一个参数用来在配置时检查gtkdoc的版本。第二个可选参数由"
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>使用。<symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol>宏也"
++"会加入几个配置开关。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:475(listitem/para)
++msgid "--with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs"
++msgstr "--with-html-dir=PATH : 安装文档的路径"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:476(listitem/para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc : 用gtk-doc构建文档［默认值：no］"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:477(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"--enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc-html :用html格式构建文档［默认值：yes］"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:478(listitem/para)
++msgid "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no]"
++msgstr "--enable-gtk-doc-pdf : 以PDF格式构建文档［默认值：no］"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:482(important/para)
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option <option>'--"
++"enable-gtk-doc'</option> to the next <filename>configure</filename> run. "
++"Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for "
++"users but not for developers)."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc在默认情况下是关闭的！请记得给文本<filename>configure</filename>运作时"
++"传递<option>'--enable-gtk-doc'</option>选项。否则，将会安装预先生成的文档（对"
++"用户有意义但对开发人员没用处）。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:490(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside you "
++"<filename>configure.ac</filename> script. This allows "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> to automatically copy the macro "
++"definition for <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> to your project."
++msgstr ""
++"而且建议你在<filename>configure.ac</filename>脚本里拥有这样一行。它允许"
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>将<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function>的宏"
++"定义复制到您的项目中去。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:498(example/title)
++msgid "Preparation for gtkdocize"
++msgstr "准备gtkdocize"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:499(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIR(m4)\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:509(sect1/title)
++msgid "Integration with automake"
++msgstr "与automake集成"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:511(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"First copy the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> from the examples "
++"subdirectory of the gtkdoc-sources to your project's API documentation "
++"directory ( <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/reference/<package></"
++"filename>). If you have multiple doc-packages repeat this for each one."
++msgstr ""
++"首先从gtkdoc-sources的示例子目录及你项目的 API文档目录中复制"
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename> ( <filename class=\"directory\">./docs/"
++"reference/<package></filename>).如果你的每个目录都有多份doc-packages复"
++"件的话。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:518(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"The next step is to edit the settings inside the <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>. All the settings have a comment above that describes their "
++"purpose. Most settings are extra flags passed to the respective tools. Every "
++"tool has a variable of the form <option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>. "
++"All the tools support <option>--help</option> to list the supported "
++"parameters."
++msgstr ""
++"下一步是编辑<filename>Makefile.am</filename>内部的设置了。所有的设置上面都有"
++"用于描述其目的的注释。多数设置是传递给各个工具的额外标志。第各工具有各种各样"
++"的表格<option><TOOLNAME>_OPTIONS</option>.所有的工具都支持<option>--"
++"help</option>选项以列出它支持的参数。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:529(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"You may also want to enable GTK-Doc for the distcheck make target. Just add "
++"the one line shown in the next example to your top-level <filename>Makefile."
++"am</filename>:"
++msgstr ""
++"你可能也需要打开GTK-Doc为distcheck制造目标。只要加入一行像下个例子展示的，你"
++"的顶级<filename>Makefile.am</filename>:"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:536(example/title)
++msgid "Enable GTK-Doc during make distcheck"
++msgstr "在make distcheck过程中启用GTK-Doc"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:537(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"DISTCHECK_CONFIGURE_FLAGS=--enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"DISTCHECK_CONFIGURE_FLAGS=--enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:548(sect1/title)
++msgid "Integration with autogen"
++msgstr "与autogen集成"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:550(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"Most projects will have an <filename>autogen.sh</filename> script to setup "
++"the build infrastructure after a checkout from version control system (such "
++"as cvs/svn/git). GTK-Doc comes with a tool called <application>gtkdocize</"
++"application> which can be used in such a script. It should be run before "
++"autoheader, automake or autoconf."
++msgstr ""
++"在经过版本控制系统(比如 cvs/svn/git)的检查之后，多数项目会有一个"
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>脚本来设置构建基础结构。GTK-Doc便带着一个名叫"
++"<application>gtkdocize</application>的可以用在这样一个脚本中的工具出炉了。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:559(example/title)
++msgid "Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh"
++msgstr "从autogen.sh中运行gtkdocize"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:560(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"gtkdocize || exit 1\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:568(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"When running <application>gtkdocize</application> it copies <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.make</filename> to your project root (or any directory specified by the "
++"<option>--docdir</option> option). It also checks you configure script for "
++"the <function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> invocation. This macro can be used to "
++"pass extra parameters to <application>gtkdocize</application>."
++msgstr ""
++"当<application>gtkdocize</application> 运行时它复制文件<filename>gtk-doc."
++"make</filename>到你的项目的根目录(或者由选项<option>--docdir</option>指定的任"
++"何目录)。它也为<function>GTK_DOC_CHECK</function> 调用器检查你的配置脚本。这"
++"个宏可以用于向<application>gtkdocize</application>传递参数。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:577(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"Historically GTK-Doc was generating template files where developers entered "
++"the docs. This turned out to be not so good (e.g. the need for having "
++"generated files under version control). Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the tools can get "
++"all the information from source comments and thus the templates can be "
++"avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. "
++"<application>gtkdocize</application> supports now a <option>--flavour no-"
++"tmpl</option> option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. "
++"Besides adding the option directly to the command invocation, they can be "
++"added also to an environment variable called <symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</"
++"symbol> or set as a 2nd parameter in <symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol> macro in "
++"the configure script. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand and "
++"migrating from older gtkdoc versions, please remove the directory (e.g. from "
++"version control system)."
++msgstr ""
++"历史上，GTK-Doc在开发人员进入文档时生成模板文件。这样的结果是不是那么好的（比"
++"如：在版本控制下生成文件的需求）。由于GTK-Doc 1.9 工具能从源代码中获得所有的"
++"信息从而可以获得模板。我们鼓励人们在代码中保留文档。<application>gtkdocize</"
++"application> 支持现在的一个<option>--flavour no-tmpl</option>选项用以选择一个"
++"makefile来完整地跳过tmpl的使用。除了给命令调用直接加入此选项之外，它们也能添"
++"加到一个名为<symbol>GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS</symbol>的环境变量中。或者在配置脚本中作"
++"为<symbol>GTK_DOC_CHECK</symbol>宏的第二个参数。如果你从未手工修改过tmpl目录"
++"里的文件以及从旧版本的gtkdoc中迁移过文件，请删除这个目录（比如从版本控制系"
++"统）。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:594(sect1/title) C/index.docbook:611(example/title)
++msgid "Running the doc build"
++msgstr "运行文档构建"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:596(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun "
++"<filename>autogen.sh</filename>. If this script runs configure for you, then "
++"give it the <option>--enable-gtk-doc</option> option. Otherwise manually run "
++"<filename>configure</filename> with this option afterwards."
++msgstr ""
++"在完成前面的几步之后是运行构建的时间了。首先我们得重新运行<filename>autogen."
++"sh</filename>.如果这个脚本为你运行了configure，那么给它一个<option>--enable-"
++"gtk-doc</option>选项。不然用这个选项手动运行<filename>configure</filename>紧"
++"随其后。 "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:603(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-"
++"directories. The important ones are: <filename><package>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past ."
++"sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"第一次运行make时在文档目录里生成几个额外的文件。其中几个重要的文件是："
++"<filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs."
++"xml</filename> (in the past .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>."
++
++#: C/index.docbook:612(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"./autogen.sh --enable-gtk-doc\n"
++"make\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:620(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"Now you can point your browser to <filename>docs/reference/<package>/"
++"index.html</filename>. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. But hang-on, "
++"during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages with life."
++msgstr ""
++"现在你可以用你的浏览器指向<filename>docs/reference/<package>/index."
++"html</filename>了.是的，它仍有一点小小遗憾。不过请你坚持住，在下一章里我们会"
++"告诉你怎样用文件来填充页面。 "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:628(sect1/title)
++msgid "Integration with version control systems"
++msgstr "与版本控制系统集成"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:630(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"As a rule of the thumb, it's those files you edit, that should go under "
++"version control. For typical projects it's these files: <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> "
++"(in the past .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>"
++msgstr ""
++"作为首要的规则，你编辑的文件都必须进行版本控制。对于典型的项目它是这些文件："
++"<filename><package>.types</filename>, <filename><package>-docs.."
++"xml</filename> (in the past .sgml), <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename>Makefile.am</filename>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:641(sect1/title)
++msgid "Integration with plain makefiles or other build systems"
++msgstr "与普通makefile或其它构建系统整合"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:643(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"In the case one does not want to use automake and therefore <filename>gtk-"
++"doc.mak</filename> one will need to call the gtkdoc tools in the right order "
++"in own makefiles (or other build tools)."
++msgstr ""
++"在本例中某人不想用automake，因此<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename>就必须在自己"
++"的makefiles（或其它构建工具）里用正确的顺序调用gtkdoc工具里面。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:650(example/title)
++msgid "Documentation build steps"
++msgstr "文档构建步骤"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:651(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"DOC_MODULE=meep\n"
++"// sources have changed\n"
++"gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --source-dir=...\n"
++"gtkdoc-scangobj --module=$(DOC_MODULE)\n"
++"gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml\n"
++"// xml files have changed\n"
++"mkdir html\n"
++"cd html && gtkdoc-mkhtml $(DOC_MODULE) ../meep-docs.xml\n"
++"gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:667(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"One will need to look at the <filename>Makefile.am</filename> and "
++"<filename>gtk-doc.mak</filename> to pick the extra options needed."
++msgstr ""
++"您必须查阅<filename>Makefile.am</filename> 和 <filename>gtk-doc.mak</"
++"filename>以获取所须的额外选项。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:676(chapter/title)
++msgid "Documenting the code"
++msgstr "编写代码文档"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:678(chapter/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code "
++"documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure "
++"from other sources. During the next section you will find all information "
++"about the syntax of the comments."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK－Doc用一种带有特殊语法的源代码注释来编写代码文档。而且它会从其它代码中收"
++"集有关你的项目结构的信息。在下一章节里你将找到有关其注释语法的全部信息。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:686(note/title)
++msgid "Documentation placement"
++msgstr "文档位置"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:687(note/para)
++msgid ""
++"In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing inside "
++"the <filename>tmpl</filename> directory. This has the disadvantages that the "
++"information is often not updated and also that the file tend to cause "
++"conflicts with version control systems."
++msgstr ""
++"在过去，多数文档不得不写入驻留在<filename>tmpl</filename>目录的文件中。这样会"
++"出现一些糟糕的情况：其信息常常没有更新，而且文件也倾向于与版本控制系统发生冲"
++"突。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:693(note/para)
++msgid ""
++"The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the documentation "
++"inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way of documenting "
++"code."
++msgstr ""
++"为避免上述的问题，我们建议把注释文档放入源代码中去。本手册仅描述此种编写代码"
++"文档的方法。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:704(example/title) C/index.docbook:723(example/title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block"
++msgstr "GTK-Doc 注释块"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:705(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* unparseable code here */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"#ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__\n"
++"/* 这里放置无法解析的代码 */\n"
++"#endif\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:700(chapter/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"The scanner can handle the majority of C headers fine. In the case of "
++"receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special case, one can "
++"hint GTK-Doc to skip over them. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"代码扫描程序能够很好地处理主要的C语言头文件。接收扫描程序发出的警告的过程看起"
++"来像个特殊案例，你可以示意GTK-Doc忽略它们。<placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:718(sect1/title)
++msgid "Documentation comments"
++msgstr "文档注释"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:724(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" */\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:720(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation "
++"block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"一个以'*'号起始的多行注释标注了一个将由GTK-Doc工具处理的文档块。"
++"<placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:735(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is "
++"related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add "
++"table showing identifiers)"
++msgstr ""
++"'identifier'是指示注释相关项的名字的行。其语法因其项的不同而而有一点差异。"
++"(TODO add table showing identifiers)"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:741(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol "
++"types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter "
++"description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows "
++"the detailed description. All lines (outside program listings and CDATA "
++"sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph "
++"breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-"
++"asterisk-blank-blank). This is useful in preformatted text (code listings)."
++msgstr ""
++"'documentation'块也会因标识符类型而不同。标识符类型取得参数如函数与宏一个空行"
++"之后有其参数的描述（只是一个'*'号）。然后紧跟着它的细节描述。所有的行"
++"( program- 列 与 CDATA 段除外)只包括一个 ' *' (空格-星号)会转化为段落分割符。"
++"如果你不想要段落分割符，可以把它改为' * '（空格－星号－空格－空格）。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:758(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"What it is: The name for a class or function can sometimes be misleading for "
++"people coming from a different background."
++msgstr "这就是：有时候来自不同文明的人会误解类或函数。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:764(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"What it does: Tell about common uses. Put it in relation with the other API."
++msgstr "它做的是：告知普通的用法。把它与其它的API发生联系。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:754(tip/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid "When documenting code, describe two aspects: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "在编写代码文档时，描述两种方向：<placeholder-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:779(listitem/para)
++msgid "Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments."
++msgstr "用function()来指示带有参数的函数或宏。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:784(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to "
++"parameters of other functions, related to the one being described."
++msgstr "用@param指示参数。同样也可以指示其它函数的参数，与所描述的对象有关。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:790(listitem/para)
++msgid "Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS."
++msgstr "用%constant指示常量，比如：%G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:795(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and "
++"macros which don't take arguments."
++msgstr "用#symbol指示其它符号类型，比如：结构，枚举与不带参数的宏。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:801(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal"
++msgid "Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal."
++msgstr "用#Object::signal指示一个GObject信号"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:806(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property"
++msgid "Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property."
++msgstr "用#Object::property指示一个#Object属性"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:811(listitem/para)
++msgid "Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure."
++msgstr "用#Struct.field指示结构体的字段。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:773(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in "
++"the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. "
++"GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. <_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"与纯文本相比，超文本的优势在于可以在文档内部有链接。但为一个链接编写正确的标"
++"记可能是件枯燥的差事。GTK-Doc提供了几个有用的简化方法帮你解决这个麻烦。<_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:819(tip/para)
++msgid ""
++"If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or "
++"'#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML "
++"entities \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", \"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&"
++"commat;\", \"&percnt;\" and \"&num;\" respectively or escape them "
++"with a backslash '\\'."
++msgstr ""
++"如果你要在文档里面使用一些特殊的字符'<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or '#' 且"
++"不用GTK-Doc来修改它们，你可以相应地用XML 实体 \"&lt;\", \"&gt;\", "
++"\"&lpar;\", \"&rpar;\", \"&commat;\", \"&percnt;\" 以及 "
++"\"&num;\"或者用一个反斜线'\\'来转义它们。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:828(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"DocBook can do more than just links. One can also have lists, tables and "
++"examples. To enable the usage of docbook SGML/XML tags inside doc-comments "
++"you need to have <option>--xml-mode</option> or <option>--sgml-mode</option> "
++"in the variable <symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol> inside <filename>Makefile.am</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"DocBook可以做比链接多得多的事情。你可以有列表，表格和示例。要在doc-comments中"
++"激活docbook SGML/XML标识的使用，你得往<filename>Makefile.am</filename>文件中"
++"的变量<symbol>MKDB_OPTIONS</symbol>上加入<option>--xml-mode</option> 或 "
++"<option>--sgml-mode</option>选项。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:842(example/title)
++msgid "GTK-Doc comment block using markdown"
++msgstr "使用markdown进行GTK-Doc块注释"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:843(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * identifier:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * documentation ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # Sub heading #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * more documentation:\n"
++" * - list item 1\n"
++" * - list item 2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Even more docs.\n"
++" */\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * 标识符:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 文档内容 ...\n"
++" *\n"
++" * # 小标题 #\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 更多文档：\n"
++" * - 列表项1\n"
++" * - 列表项2\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 其余更多文档。\n"
++" */\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:836(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc-1.18 the tool supports a subset or the <ulink url=\"http://"
++"daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/\">markdown language</ulink>. One can "
++"use it for sub-headings and simple itemized lists. On older GTK-Doc versions "
++"the content will be rendered as it (the list items will appear in one line "
++"separated by dashes). <_:example-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"从 GTK-Doc-1.18 版本开始，该工具支持 <ulink url=\"http://daringfireball.net/"
++"projects/markdown/\">markdown 标记语言</ulink> 的一个子集。可以用它定义小标题"
++"和简单的项目列表。在较早的 GTK-Doc 版本中，内容会原样渲染(列表项会显示在一"
++"行，以短划线隔开)。<_:example-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:864(tip/para)
++msgid ""
++"As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one "
++"cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to "
++"comment those symbols too. This helps other to understand you code. "
++"Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the "
++"2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made public, "
++"all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and insert "
++"the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file."
++msgstr ""
++"如早先所述，GTK-Doc是为编写公共的API而作的。所以你不能够为静态符号编写文档。"
++"尽管如此，它也可以很好地为那些符号作注释。这有助于他人理解你的代码。因此我们"
++"建议你用普通的注释来注释它们（不使用第一行的第二个'*'号）。如果以后函数须要作"
++"为public，你须做的只是在注释块中加入另一个 '*'号并且在区段文件里插入正确的标"
++"识符名称。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:878(sect1/title)
++msgid "Documenting sections"
++msgstr "文档章节"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:880(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or "
++"module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short "
++"description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"文档的每个章节都包含着关于一个类或模块的信息。要介绍它的组件，你可以编写一节"
++"注释块。在内容表格中也可以使用简短的描述。所有的@fields都是可选的。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:888(example/title)
++msgid "Section comment block"
++msgstr "节注释块"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:889(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SECTION:meepapp\n"
++" * @short_description: the application class\n"
++" * @title: Meep application\n"
++" * @section_id:\n"
++" * @see_also: #MeepSettings\n"
++" * @stability: Stable\n"
++" * @include: meep/app.h\n"
++" * @image: application.png\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The application class handles ...\n"
++" */\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:910(varlistentry/term)
++msgid "SECTION:<name>"
++msgstr "SECTION:<name>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:912(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file. The name give here "
++"should match the <FILE> tag in the <filename><package>-sections."
++"txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"名字链接这节文档到文件<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>中对应"
++"的部分。这里的名字应匹配<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>文件"
++"中的<FILE>标识。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:921(varlistentry/term)
++msgid "@short_description"
++msgstr "@short_description"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:923(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the "
++"links in the TOC and at the top of the section page."
++msgstr "该节的单行描述，不久将出现在TOC里的链接后和该节页面的顶部。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:930(varlistentry/term)
++msgid "@title"
++msgstr "@title"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:932(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It "
++"can be overridden with the @title field."
++msgstr ""
++"段落的标题在SECTION声明里默认是 <name> 。它可以由@title字段替换。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:939(varlistentry/term)
++msgid "@section_id"
++msgstr "@section_id"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:941(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <"
++"title> is used as a section_id and for other sections it is <"
++"MODULE>-<title>."
++msgstr ""
++"替换标题的用途作为一个段落指示器。对于GObjects，<title>用作section_id且"
++"对于其它的段落它是<MODULE>-<title>。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:949(varlistentry/term)
++msgid "@see_also"
++msgstr "@see_also"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:951(listitem/para)
++msgid "A list of symbols that are related to this section."
++msgstr "与本节相关的标识符。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:957(varlistentry/term)
++msgid "@stability"
++msgstr "@stability"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:964(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third "
++"parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have "
++"confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after "
++"the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major "
++"release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be "
++"rare, and to have strong justifications."
++msgstr ""
++"稳定版－一个稳定版本软件界面的目的是让任意第三方开发者为这些界面开发应用程"
++"序，发行它们，并且确信它们的产品可以在所有的小版本号发布版上运行（after the "
++"one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major "
++"release）。即使在一个主发行版，兼容的修改也是非常稀少的，并且要有大量的修正。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:976(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are "
++"typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly "
++"changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a "
++"more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source "
++"or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next."
++msgstr ""
++"不稳定版－不稳定版本的界面是用于体验或者过渡的软件版本。它们通常是给外部开发"
++"人员早期访问新的或快速改变的技术，或者为已获得预期的更普遍的方案提供一个内部"
++"解决方案。以保证从一个镜像发行版到另一个之间没有源代码与二进制代码兼容性的问"
++"题。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:988(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but "
++"that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in "
++"specified and documented ways."
++msgstr ""
++"个人版－一种可以离开GNOME堆栈而自己运行的界面，但是并没有正式声明给终端用户使"
++"用。这样的函数只能以指定的且正式声明的方法来使用它。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:997(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require "
++"end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be "
++"Internal."
++msgstr ""
++"内部版－一种为一个模块而设计的内部界面，并且不需要终端用户文档。未正式声明的"
++"函数假定是属于内部的。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:959(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "A informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend "
++#| "the use of one of these terms: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgid ""
++"An informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend "
++"the use of one of these terms: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr ""
++"对这个API对稳定级别的一个非正式的描述。我们建议你使用以下术语：<_:"
++"itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1009(varlistentry/term)
++msgid "@include"
++msgstr "@include"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1011(listitem/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"The <literal>#include</literal> files to show in the section synopsis (a "
++"comma separated list), overriding the global value from the <link linkend="
++"\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link> or command line. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"<literal>#include</literal> 文件在段落提纲内部显现（一个由分号‘；’分隔的列"
++"表），从<link linkend=\"metafiles_sections\">section file</link>或者命令行中"
++"取代全局数值。这是个可选项。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1020(varlistentry/term)
++msgid "@image"
++msgstr "@image"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1022(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This "
++"will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of "
++"a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is "
++"optional."
++msgstr ""
++"本章节的参考页顶部显示的图像。这常常是某些用于阐释一个类或者图表与其它类之间"
++"关系的可视化图示。这个项是可选的。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1033(tip/para)
++msgid ""
++"To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs "
++"into the c-source where possible."
++msgstr ""
++"为避免不必要的重编译，在文档改动后尽可能把段落文档放入C代码中合适的位置。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1042(sect1/title)
++msgid "Documenting symbols"
++msgstr "编写符号文档"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1044(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is "
++"documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the "
++"definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus "
++"functions are usually documented in the c-source and macros, structs and "
++"enums in the header file."
++msgstr ""
++"每个符号（函数，宏，结构，枚举，信号及属性）都在各自独立的块中描述。这些块最"
++"好放置于接近标识符定义的地方，这样可以容易地让它们保持同步。因此函数通常在C代"
++"码中定义，宏和结构及枚举在头文件里定义。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1052(sect2/title) C/index.docbook:1081(example/title)
++msgid "General tags"
++msgstr "一般标记"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1054(sect2/para)
++msgid ""
++"You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell "
++"when an API was introduced, or when it was deprecated."
++msgstr "你可以为所有的文档元素加入版本信息，表明何时引入或废弃了某个API。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1059(variablelist/title)
++msgid "Versioning Tags"
++msgstr "版本标记"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1060(varlistentry/term)
++msgid "Since:"
++msgstr "始于："
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1062(listitem/para)
++msgid "Description since which version of the code the API is available."
++msgstr "描述从哪个版本的代码开始加入了该API。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1067(varlistentry/term)
++msgid "Deprecated:"
++msgstr "废弃："
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1069(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The "
++"description should point the reader to the new API."
++msgstr "表明这个函数不应再使用的一段文档。描述文字应向读者介绍新的API。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1077(sect2/para)
++msgid "(FIXME : Stability information)"
++msgstr "(FIXME : 稳定性信息)"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1082(example/programlisting)
++#, fuzzy, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "/**\n"
++#| " * foo_get_bar:\n"
++#| " * @foo: some foo\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * Since: 2.6\n"
++#| " * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++#| " **/\n"
++#| "Bar *\n"
++#| "foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++#| "{\n"
++#| "...\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.6\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.12: Use foo_baz_get_bar() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * foo_get_bar:\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Retrieves @foo's bar.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 返回值: @foo's bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 始于: 2.6\n"
++" * 废弃: 2.12: 请转用 foo_baz_get_bar()。\n"
++" **/\n"
++"Bar *\n"
++"foo_get_bar(Foo *foo)\n"
++"{\n"
++"...\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1104(sect2/title) C/index.docbook:1140(example/title)
++msgid "Function comment block"
++msgstr "函数注释块"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1110(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/"
++"unrefed/released."
++msgstr ""
++"描述返回的对象、列表、字符串等是否应释放内存(freed)/解除引用/释放(released)。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1116(listitem/para)
++msgid "Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are."
++msgstr "描述参数可否为NULL，如果是的话会发生什么。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1121(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate."
++msgstr "在适当时提及相关的前提条件与后续条件。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1106(sect2/para) C/index.docbook:1203(sect2/para)
++msgid "Please remember to: <_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++msgstr "请记得：<_:itemizedlist-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1128(sect2/para)
++msgid ""
++"Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are "
++"private. They are treated like static functions."
++msgstr ""
++"Gtk-doc 假定所有以'_'符开头的符号（宏，函数）是私有的并视它们为静态函数。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1133(sect2/para)
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "Also, take a look at gobject introspection annotation tags: http://live."
++#| "gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++msgid ""
++"Also, take a look at GObject Introspection annotation tags: http://live."
++"gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++msgstr ""
++"另请参阅gobject内省(introspection)标记的介绍：http://live.gnome.org/"
++"GObjectIntrospection/Annotations"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1141(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: description of parameter 1. These can extend over more than\n"
++" * one line.\n"
++" * @par2: description of parameter 2\n"
++" * @...: a %NULL-terminated list of bars\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The function description goes here. You can use @par1 to refer to parameters\n"
++" * so that they are highlighted in the output. You can also use %constant\n"
++" * for constants, function_name2() for functions and #GtkWidget for links to\n"
++" * other declarations (which may be documented elsewhere).\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Returns: an integer.\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Since: 2.2\n"
++" * Deprecated: 2.18: Use other_function() instead.\n"
++" */\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * function_name:\n"
++" * @par1: 对参数 1 的描述。\n"
++" * 可超过一行。\n"
++" * @par2: 对参数 2 的描述\n"
++" * @...: 一个以 %NULL 终止的 bars 列表\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 这里是函数描述。您可以用 @par1 引用参数，这样在输出中它们会突出显示。\n"
++" * 您也可以使用 %constant 代表常量，function_name2() 代表函数，#GtkWidget \n"
++" * 代表指向指向其他声明的链接(可能在其他位置描述)。\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 返回值: 一个整型值。\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 始于: 2.2\n"
++" * 废弃: 2.18: 请转用 other_function()。\n"
++" */\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1164(variablelist/title)
++msgid "Function tags"
++msgstr "函数标记"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1165(varlistentry/term)
++msgid "Returns:"
++msgstr "返回值："
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1167(listitem/para)
++msgid "Paragraph describing the returned result."
++msgstr "描述返回结果的段落。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1172(varlistentry/term)
++msgid "@...:"
++msgstr "@...:"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1174(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag "
++"(@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons)."
++msgstr ""
++"如果函数有变长参数列表，你应当使用这个标记（@Varargs: 由于历史原因确实也管"
++"用）。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1184(sect2/title) C/index.docbook:1186(example/title)
++msgid "Property comment block"
++msgstr "属性注释块"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1187(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Here you can document a property.\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * SomeWidget:some-property:\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 这里您可以描述一个属性。\n"
++" */\n"
++"g_object_class_install_property (object_class, PROP_SOME_PROPERTY, ...);\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1201(sect2/title) C/index.docbook:1220(example/title)
++msgid "Signal comment block"
++msgstr "信号注释块"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1207(listitem/para)
++msgid ""
++"Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or "
++"after other signals."
++msgstr "描述信号何时发射(emitted)及在其它信号之前还是之后发射。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1213(listitem/para)
++msgid "Document what an application might do in the signal handler."
++msgstr "描述应用程序在信号处理函数中能做些什么。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1221(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: the widget that received the signal\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * The ::foobarized signal is emitted each time someone tries to foobarize @widget.\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZE] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarize\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget::foobarized:\n"
++" * @widget: 接受信号的窗口部件\n"
++" * @foo: some foo\n"
++" * @bar: some bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * ::foobarized 信号在每次有人尝试 foobarize @widget 时发射。\n"
++" */\n"
++"foo_signals[FOOBARIZE] =\n"
++" g_signal_new (\"foobarize\",\n"
++" ...\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1240(sect2/title) C/index.docbook:1241(example/title)
++msgid "Struct comment block"
++msgstr "结构注释块"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1242(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * This is the best widget, ever.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" GtkWidget parent;\n"
++"\n"
++" /*< public >*/\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * FooWidget:\n"
++" * @bar: some #gboolean\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 这是史上最好的窗口部件。\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef struct _FooWidget {\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" GtkWidget parent;\n"
++"\n"
++" /*< public >*/\n"
++" gboolean bar;\n"
++"} FooWidget;\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1261(sect2/para)
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private struct fields you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"在你需要隐藏的私有结构字段之前使用<code>/*< private >*/</code> 。反之使"
++"用<code>/*< public >*/</code>."
++
++# 什么是vmethod？难以理解。
++#: C/index.docbook:1267(sect2/para)
++msgid ""
++"Struct comment blocks can also be used for GObjects and GObjectClasses. It "
++"is usually a good idea to add a comment block for a class, if it has "
++"vmethods (as this is how they can be documented). For the GObject itself one "
++"can use the related section docs, having a separate block for the instance "
++"struct would be useful if the instance has public fields. One disadvantage "
++"here is that this creates two index entries of the same name (the structure "
++"and the section)."
++msgstr ""
++"结构注释块也可以用于GObjects与GObjectClasses。为一个类添加注释块通常是个极好"
++"的主意，如果它有vmethod（因为这是怎样制作它的文档的方法）。对于GObject自身而"
++"言，你可以使用相关的章节文档，如果对象实例有公共字段，为每个实例结构体单独块"
++"注释是非常有用的。缺点是这会为同一名字创建两个索引记录（结构与章节）。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1279(sect2/title) C/index.docbook:1280(example/title)
++msgid "Enum comment block"
++msgstr "枚举注释块"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1281(example/programlisting)
++#, fuzzy, no-wrap
++#| msgid ""
++#| "\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| "/**\n"
++#| " * Something:\n"
++#| " * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++#| " * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++#| " *\n"
++#| " **/\n"
++#| "typedef enum {\n"
++#| " SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++#| " SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++#| " /*< private >*/\n"
++#| " SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++#| "} Something;\n"
++#| "\n"
++#| " "
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * Enum values used for the thing, to specify the thing.\n"
++" */\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"/**\n"
++" * Something:\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_FOO: something foo\n"
++" * @SOMETHING_BAR: something bar\n"
++" *\n"
++" * 用来解决问题和指定事物的枚举值。\n"
++" *\n"
++" **/\n"
++"typedef enum {\n"
++" SOMETHING_FOO,\n"
++" SOMETHING_BAR,\n"
++" /*< private >*/\n"
++" SOMETHING_COUNT\n"
++"} Something;\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1300(sect2/para)
++msgid ""
++"Use <code>/*< private >*/</code> before the private enum values you "
++"want to hide. Use <code>/*< public >*/</code> for the reverse "
++"behaviour."
++msgstr ""
++"在你要隐藏的枚举数值前使用<code>/*< private >*/</code>。反之使用<code>/"
++"*< public >*/</code> 。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1310(sect1/title)
++msgid "Useful DocBook tags"
++msgstr "有用的DocBook标记"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1312(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code."
++msgstr "这些是在编写代码文档时非常有用处的DocBook标记。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1321(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<link linkend=\"glib-Hash-Tables\">Hash Tables</link>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1317(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"To link to another section in the GTK docs: <_:informalexample-1/> The "
++"linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. "
++"For most pages this is currently the part (\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") and "
++"then the page title (\"Hash Tables\"). For widgets it is just the class "
++"name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML."
++msgstr ""
++"在GTK文档中链接到另一章节：<_:informalexample-1/> 链接尾部是你要链接的页面顶"
++"部选项上的SGML/XML id。目前对于大多页面，它是(\"gtk\", \"gdk\", \"glib\") 部"
++"分与页面标题(\"Hash Tables\")。对于widgets它只是类和名称而已。空格字符和下划"
++"线都转换成 '-' 以适应SGML/XML.。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1336(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<function>...</function>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1333(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "引用一个外部函数，比如一个标准 C 函数：<_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1347(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<example>\n"
++" <title>Using a GHashTable.</title>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</example>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1360(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<informalexample>\n"
++" <programlisting>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </programlisting>\n"
++"</informalexample>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1344(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"To include example code: <_:informalexample-1/> or possibly this, for very "
++"short code fragments which don't need a title: <_:informalexample-2/> For "
++"the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation: |[ ... ]|"
++msgstr ""
++"要包含示例代码：<_:informalexample-1/> 或类似的，很短的不需要标题的代码段："
++"<_:informalexample-2/> 对后者，GTK-Doc 还支持一种缩写方式：|[ ... ]|"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1381(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<itemizedlist>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++" <listitem>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" ...\n"
++" </para>\n"
++" </listitem>\n"
++"</itemizedlist>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1378(sect1/para)
++msgid "To include bulleted lists: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "要包含符号列表：<_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1403(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<note>\n"
++" <para>\n"
++" Make sure you free the data after use.\n"
++" </para>\n"
++"</note>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1400(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"To include a note which stands out from the text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "要包含一条文字中突出显示的注解：<_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1418(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<type>unsigned char</type>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1415(sect1/para)
++msgid "To refer to a type: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "要引用一个类型：<_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1429(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<structname>XFontStruct</structname>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1426(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): <_:"
++"informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "引用一个外部结构（不是在GTK 文档中描述的）：<_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1440(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<structfield>len</structfield>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1437(sect1/para)
++msgid "To refer to a field of a structure: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "要引用一个结构字段：<_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1451(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<classname>GtkWidget</classname>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1448(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: <_:informalexample-1/> but "
++"you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link "
++"to the GtkWidget page - see <link linkend=\"documenting_syntax\">the "
++"abbreviations</link>)."
++msgstr ""
++"要引用一个类的名字，你可能会使用：<_:informalexample-1/> 但是你可能正在使用"
++"#GtkWidget（要自动创建一个到GtkWidget 页面的链接－请参阅<link linkend="
++"\"documenting_syntax\">缩写</link>）。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1464(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<emphasis>This is important</emphasis>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1461(sect1/para)
++msgid "To emphasize text: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "要强调文本：<_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1475(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<filename>/home/user/documents</filename>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1472(sect1/para)
++msgid "For filenames use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "对于文件名，使用：<_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1486(informalexample/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1483(sect1/para)
++msgid "To refer to keys use: <_:informalexample-1/>"
++msgstr "要引用键值，使用：<_:informalexample-1/>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1498(chapter/title)
++msgid "Filling the extra files"
++msgstr "填充额外的文件"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1500(chapter/para)
++msgid ""
++"There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the "
++"inline source code comments: <filename><package>.types</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (in the past .sgml), "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++"另有几个文件要和内嵌源代码注释一起维护：<filename><package>.types</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-docs.xml</filename> (原为 .sgml), "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename>。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1509(sect1/title)
++msgid "Editing the types file"
++msgstr "编辑类型文件"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1511(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++msgid ""
++"If your library or application includes GObjects, you want their signals, "
++"arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the "
++"documentation. All you need to do, is to list the <function>xxx_get_type</"
++"function> functions together with their include inside the <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"如果你的厍或应用程序包含了GtkObjects/GObjects，想把它们的信号，形式参数／实际"
++"参数以及在继承关系中所在位置都写入文档，只需将<function>xxx_get_type</"
++"function>及其引用在<filename><package>.types</filename> 文件中列出。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1520(example/title)
++msgid "Example types file snippet"
++msgstr "示例类型文件代码段"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1521(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"#include <gtk/gtk.h>\n"
++"\n"
++"gtk_accel_label_get_type\n"
++"gtk_adjustment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_alignment_get_type\n"
++"gtk_arrow_get_type\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1534(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"Since GTK-Doc 1.8 <application>gtkdoc-scan</application> can generate this "
++"list for you. Just add \"--rebuild-types\" to SCAN_OPTIONS in "
++"<filename>Makefile.am</filename>. If you use this approach you should not "
++"dist the types file nor have it under version control."
++msgstr ""
++"从GTK-Doc 1.8开始<application>gtkdoc-scan</application>能够自动生成这个列表。"
++"只要往<filename>Makefile.am</filename>文件中的SCAN_OPTIONS项加入“--rebuild-"
++"types”即可。如果你要使用它请保证不发行类型文件也不将它置于版本控制系统的管理"
++"之下。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1543(sect1/title)
++msgid "Editing the master document"
++msgstr "编辑主文档"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1545(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the "
++"inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page "
++"per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them "
++"and place them in an order."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc 以 DocBook SGML/XML 格式生成文档。当处理源代码内嵌注释时， GTK-Doc 工"
++"具以独立文件为每个类或模块生成一个文档页。主文档包含了它们并且将它们按顺序排"
++"列。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1552(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later run will not "
++"touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the documentation. "
++"That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc has now a test "
++"suite, where also the master-document is recreated from scratch. Its a good "
++"idea to look at this from time to time to see if there are some new goodies "
++"introduced there."
++msgstr ""
++"GTK-Doc为你创建一个模板主文档，之后的运行就不会再动它了。这意味着你可以自由地"
++"组织这个文档，包括分组页和加入的额外页面。GTK-Doc现在有一个测试套件，它的主文"
++"档也重新生成。建议您经常关注它，又了解是否引入了新的功能特性。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1562(tip/para)
++msgid ""
++"Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The "
++"benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API "
++"documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol "
++"documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along "
++"with the library."
++msgstr ""
++"不要把教程(tutorial)当作额外的文档来编写。写成额外的章节即可。把你的库教程直"
++"接放入API文档的好处就是教程与符号文档之间的链接很容易。另外教程与库一同升级时"
++"分离的机会也更高。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1571(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is "
++"only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there "
++"which you should take care of."
++msgstr ""
++"那么什么是主文档内部要修改的东西呢？开始只是一点点东西。有一些占位标识（在方"
++"括号内部的文本）你应当多留意。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1578(example/title)
++msgid "Master document header"
++msgstr "主文档头部"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1579(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"<bookinfo>\n"
++" <title>MODULENAME Reference Manual</title>\n"
++" <releaseinfo>\n"
++" for MODULENAME [VERSION]\n"
++" The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at\n"
++" <ulink role=\"online-location\" url=\"http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/index.html\">http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/</ulink>.\n"
++" </releaseinfo>\n"
++"</bookinfo>\n"
++"\n"
++"<chapter>\n"
++" <title>[Insert title here]</title>\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1600(sect1/title)
++msgid "Editing the section file"
++msgstr "编辑节文件(section file)"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1602(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. "
++"Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control "
++"the visibility (public or private)."
++msgstr ""
++"节文件用于组织由GTK-Doc输出的文档。在此你指定哪个符号属于哪个类或模块，并控制"
++"它是否可见(公共的或私有的)。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1608(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "The section file is a plain test file with xml like syntax (using tags). "
++#| "Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as "
++#| "comment lines."
++msgid ""
++"The section file is a plain text file with XML-like syntax (using tags). "
++"Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment "
++"lines."
++msgstr ""
++"节文件是一个类xml语法的纯文本文件（使用标记）。忽略空白行且以'#' 起始的行视为"
++"注释行。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1614(sect1/para)
++#, fuzzy
++#| msgid ""
++#| "The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, "
++#| "without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++#| "FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++#| "template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++#| "converted into the DocBook SGML/XML file <filename>sgml/gnome-config."
++#| "sgml</filename> or .DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</"
++#| "filename>. (The name of the html file is based on the module name and the "
++#| "section title, or for gobjects it is based on the gobjects class name "
++#| "converted to lower case)."
++msgid ""
++"The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, "
++"without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</"
++"FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the "
++"template file <filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>, which will be "
++"converted into the DocBook SGML/XML file <filename>sgml/gnome-config.sgml</"
++"filename> or the DocBook XML file <filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>. "
++"(The name of the HTML file is based on the module name and the section "
++"title, or for GObjects it is based on the GObjects class name converted to "
++"lower case)."
++msgstr ""
++"<FILE> ... </FILE>标记用于指定文件名，不加任何后缀。例如：用'<"
++"FILE>gnome-config</FILE>' 会导致段落声明输出到模板文件"
++"<filename>tmpl/gnome-config.sgml</filename>中去，它将会转换为DocBook SGML/XML"
++"文件<filename>sgml/gnome-config.sgml</filename>或者 .DocBook XML文件"
++"<filename>xml/gnome-config.xml</filename>。（html文件的名字是基于模块名字与节"
++"标题形成的，或者对gobjects是基于转换为小写的gobjects类名字形成的。）"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1626(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the "
++"section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially "
++"created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if "
++"one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete."
++msgstr ""
++"<TITLE> ... </TITLE>标记用于节的标题。它只在模板（如果使用的话）"
++"最初创建之前有用，因为设置在模板文件内的标题覆盖了它。或者如果你在源代码中使"
++"用了SECTION注释（此功能已过时）。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1633(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. "
++"Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis "
++"section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject "
++"declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like "
++"G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the "
++"documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private "
++"declarations which will not be output (it is a handy way to avoid warning "
++"messages about unused declarations). If your library contains private types "
++"which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of "
++"implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection. "
++"Whether you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs in public or "
++"Standard section depends if they have public entries (variables, vmethods)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1652(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the "
++"#include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-"
++"separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it "
++"outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. "
++"If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1666(chapter/title)
++msgid "Controlling the result"
++msgstr "控制结果"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1668(chapter/para)
++msgid ""
++"A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The "
++"generated files are named: <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</"
++"filename>, <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> and "
++"<filename><package>-unused.txt</filename>. All those are plain text "
++"files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1677(chapter/para)
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undocumented.txt</filename> file starts with "
++"the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank "
++"lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The "
++"second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, "
++"which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1686(chapter/para)
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-undeclared.txt</filename> file lists symbols "
++"given in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> but not found "
++"in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1693(chapter/para)
++msgid ""
++"The <filename><package>-unused.txt</filename> file lists symbol names, "
++"where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where "
++"to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the "
++"<filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1701(tip/para)
++msgid ""
++"Enable or add the <option>TESTS=$(GTKDOC_CHECK)</option> line in Makefile."
++"am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during "
++"<command>make check</command> run."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1708(chapter/para)
++msgid ""
++"One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: "
++"<filename><package>-decl-list.txt</filename> and <filename><"
++"package>-decl.txt</filename>. The first one can be compared with the "
++"section file if that is manually maintained. The second lists all "
++"declarations from the headers. If a symbol is missing one could check if "
++"this file contains it."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1717(chapter/para)
++msgid ""
++"If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced "
++"by the object scanner: <filename><package>.args.txt</filename>, "
++"<filename><package>.hierarchy.txt</filename>, <filename><"
++"package>.interfaces.txt</filename>, <filename><package>."
++"prerequisites.txt</filename> and <filename><package>.signals.txt</"
++"filename>. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask gtkdoc "
++"to keep the intermediate scanner file for further analysis, by running it as "
++"<command>GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make</command>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1732(chapter/title)
++msgid "Documenting other interfaces"
++msgstr "为其它接口书写文档"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1734(chapter/para)
++msgid ""
++"So far we have been using GTK-Doc to document the API of code. The next "
++"sections contain suggestions how the tools can be used to document other "
++"interfaces too."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1741(sect1/title)
++msgid "Command line options and man pages"
++msgstr "命令行选项与 man 页面"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1743(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"As one can generate man pages for a docbook refentry as well, it sounds like "
++"a good idea to use it for that purpose. This way the interface is part of "
++"the reference and one gets the man-page for free."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1750(sect2/title)
++msgid "Document the tool"
++msgstr "为工具书写文档"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1752(sect2/para)
++msgid ""
++"Create one refentry file per tool. Following <link linkend="
++"\"settingup_docfiles\">our example</link> we would call it <filename>meep/"
++"docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml</filename>. For the xml tags that should be "
++"used and can look at generated file in the xml subdirectory as well as "
++"examples e.g. in glib."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1762(sect2/title)
++msgid "Adding the extra configure check"
++msgstr "添加额外的配置检查"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1765(example/title) C/index.docbook:1785(example/title)
++msgid "Extra configure checks"
++msgstr "额外的配置检查"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1766(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_ARG_ENABLE(man,\n"
++" [AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-man],\n"
++" [regenerate man pages from Docbook [default=no]])],enable_man=yes,\n"
++" enable_man=no)\n"
++"\n"
++"AC_PATH_PROG([XSLTPROC], [xsltproc])\n"
++"AM_CONDITIONAL(ENABLE_MAN, test x$enable_man != xno)\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1782(sect2/title)
++msgid "Adding the extra makefile rules"
++msgstr "添加额外的makefile规则"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1786(example/programlisting)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"\n"
++"\n"
++"man_MANS = \\\n"
++" meeper.1\n"
++"\n"
++"if ENABLE_GTK_DOC\n"
++"if ENABLE_MAN\n"
++"\n"
++"%.1 : %.xml\n"
++" @XSLTPROC@ -nonet http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl $<\n"
++"\n"
++"endif\n"
++"endif\n"
++"\n"
++"BUILT_EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)\n"
++"EXTRA_DIST += meep.xml\n"
++"\n"
++" "
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1810(sect1/title)
++msgid "DBus interfaces"
++msgstr "DBus接口"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1812(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"(FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://"
++"cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus)"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1821(chapter/title)
++msgid "Frequently asked questions"
++msgstr "常见问题"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1825(segmentedlist/segtitle)
++msgid "Question"
++msgstr "问题"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1826(segmentedlist/segtitle)
++msgid "Answer"
++msgstr "答案"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1828(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid "No class hierarchy."
++msgstr "无类继承关系。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1829(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid ""
++"The objects <function>xxx_get_type()</function> function has not been "
++"entered into the <filename><package>.types</filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++"对象的 <function>xxx_get_type()</function> 函数未进入 <filename><"
++"package>.types</filename> 文件。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1835(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid "Still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "仍无类继承关系。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1836(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid ""
++"Missing or wrong naming in <filename><package>-sections.txt</filename> "
++"file (see <ulink url=\"http://mail.gnome.org/archives/gtk-doc-list/2003-"
++"October/msg00006.html\">explanation</ulink>)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1842(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid "Damn, I have still no class hierarchy."
++msgstr "该死，我仍然没有类继承关系。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1843(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid ""
++"Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. <type>GtkWidget</"
++"type>) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private "
++"subsections)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1850(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid "No symbol index."
++msgstr "无标识符索引。"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1851(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid ""
++"Does the <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename> contain a "
++"index that xi:includes the generated index?"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1857(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid "Symbols are not linked to their doc-section."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1858(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the "
++"gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1864(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid "A new class does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1865(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid ""
++"Is the new page xi:included from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</"
++"filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1871(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid "A new symbol does not appear in the docs."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1872(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid ""
++"Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the "
++"begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable "
++"xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <filename><"
++"package>-sections.txt</filename> in a public subsection."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1880(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid "A type is missing from the class hierarchy."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1881(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid ""
++"If the type is listed in <filename><package>.hierarchy</filename> but "
++"not in <filename>xml/tree_index.sgml</filename> then double check that the "
++"type is correctly placed in the <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename>. If the type instance (e.g. <type>GtkWidget</type>) is not listed "
++"or incidentialy makred private it will not be shown."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1890(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid "I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1891(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid ""
++"Check that <filename>xml/annotation-glossary.xml</filename> is xi:included "
++"from <filename><package>-docs.{xml,sgml}</filename>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1899(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid "Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1900(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid ""
++"Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the "
++"source."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1905(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid "multiple \"IDs\" for constraint linkend: XYZ"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1906(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid ""
++"Symbol XYZ appears twice in <filename><package>-sections.txt</"
++"filename> file."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1909(seglistitem/seg)
++msgid ""
++"Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template "
++"matches."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1916(chapter/title)
++msgid "Tools related to gtk-doc"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1918(chapter/para)
++msgid ""
++"GtkDocPlugin - a <ulink url=\"http://trac-hacks.org/wiki/GtkDocPlugin\">Trac "
++"GTK-Doc</ulink> integration plugin, that adds API docs to a trac site and "
++"integrates with the trac search."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:1923(chapter/para)
++msgid ""
++"Gtkdoc-depscan - a tool (part of gtk-doc) to check used API against since "
++"tags in the API to determine the minimum required version."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:12(appendixinfo/releaseinfo)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:12(appendixinfo/releaseinfo)
++msgid "Version 1.1, March 2000"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:15(appendixinfo/copyright)
++msgid "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++msgstr "<year>2000</year><holder>Free Software Foundation, Inc.</holder>"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:20(para/address)
++#, no-wrap
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>51 Franklin Street, \n"
++" Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state> \n"
++" <postcode>02110-1301</postcode> <country>USA</country>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:19(legalnotice/para)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:19(legalnotice/para)
++msgid ""
++"<_:address-1/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies "
++"of this license document, but changing it is not allowed."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:28(appendix/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:28(appendix/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:642(para/quote)
++msgid "GNU Free Documentation License"
++msgstr "GNU 自由文档许可证"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:31(sect1/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:31(sect1/title)
++msgid "0. PREAMBLE"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:32(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <quote>free</quote> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:43(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means that "
++"derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. "
++"It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license "
++"designed for free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:50(sect1/para) C/fdl-appendix.xml:50(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free "
++"software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program "
++"should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. "
++"But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any "
++"textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a "
++"printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose "
++"is instruction or reference."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:62(sect1/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:62(sect1/title)
++msgid "1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:63(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <quote>Document</quote>, below, refers to any such "
++"manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "
++"<quote>you</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:72(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work containing "
++"the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with "
++"modifications and/or translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:79(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a front-matter "
++"section of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> that deals "
++"exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the "
++"Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and "
++"contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For "
++"example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary "
++"Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter "
++"of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of "
++"legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding "
++"them."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:94(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Invariant Sections</quote> are certain <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\"> Secondary Sections</link> whose titles are designated, as being "
++"those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:103(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of text that are "
++"listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says "
++"that the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> is released under "
++"this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:111(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\"> "
++"Document</link> means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose "
++"specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be "
++"viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors "
++"or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) "
++"some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text "
++"formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for "
++"input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file "
++"format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent "
++"modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "
++"<quote>Transparent</quote> is called <quote>Opaque</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:128(sect1/para) C/fdl-appendix.xml:128(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII "
++"without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using "
++"a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for "
++"human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary "
++"formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, "
++"SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally "
++"available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors "
++"for output purposes only."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:141(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the title page "
++"itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the "
++"material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in "
++"formats which do not have any title page as such, <quote>Title Page</quote> "
++"means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, "
++"preceding the beginning of the body of the text."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:153(sect1/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:153(sect1/title)
++msgid "2. VERBATIM COPYING"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:154(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that "
++"this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this "
++"License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you "
++"add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use "
++"technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of "
++"the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in "
++"exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you "
++"must also follow the conditions in <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:169(sect1/para) C/fdl-appendix.xml:169(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you "
++"may publicly display copies."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:176(sect1/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:176(sect1/title)
++msgid "3. COPYING IN QUANTITY"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:177(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> numbering more than 100, and the Document's license "
++"notice requires <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link>, you "
++"must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these "
++"Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on "
++"the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as "
++"the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title "
++"with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as "
++"verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:195(sect1/para) C/fdl-appendix.xml:195(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, "
++"you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the "
++"actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:202(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <link linkend=\"fdl-transparent\">Opaque</link> "
++"copies of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> numbering more "
++"than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy along with each Opaque copy, or state "
++"in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location "
++"containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added "
++"material, which the general network-using public has access to download "
++"anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use "
++"the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin "
++"distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent "
++"copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one "
++"year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through "
++"your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:222(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> well before redistributing any "
++"large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated "
++"version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:231(sect1/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:231(sect1/title)
++msgid "4. MODIFICATIONS"
++msgstr "4. 修改"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:232(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under "
++"the conditions of sections <link linkend=\"fdl-section2\">2</link> and <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-section3\">3</link> above, provided that you release the "
++"Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version "
++"filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:248(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:248(formalpara/title)
++msgid "A"
++msgstr "A"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:249(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> (and on the "
++"covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link>, and from those of previous versions (which "
++"should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the "
++"Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original "
++"publisher of that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:264(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:264(formalpara/title)
++msgid "B"
++msgstr "B"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:265(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"List on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>, as authors, "
++"one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the "
++"modifications in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"together with at least five of the principal authors of the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-document\">Document</link> (all of its principal authors, if it has "
++"less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:279(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:279(formalpara/title)
++msgid "C"
++msgstr "C"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:280(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"State on the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link> the name of "
++"the publisher of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>, "
++"as the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:291(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:291(formalpara/title)
++msgid "D"
++msgstr "D"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:292(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the copyright notices of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:301(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:301(formalpara/title)
++msgid "E"
++msgstr "E"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:302(formalpara/para)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:302(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the "
++"other copyright notices."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:311(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:311(formalpara/title)
++msgid "F"
++msgstr "F"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:312(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified "
++"Version</link> under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the "
++"Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:324(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:324(formalpara/title)
++msgid "G"
++msgstr "G"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:325(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> and required <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document's</link> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:337(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:337(formalpara/title)
++msgid "H"
++msgstr "H"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:338(formalpara/para)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:338(formalpara/para)
++msgid "Include an unaltered copy of this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:346(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:346(formalpara/title)
++msgid "I"
++msgstr "I"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:347(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <quote>History</quote>, and its title, and add "
++"to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> as given on "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-title-page\">Title Page</link>. If there is no "
++"section entitled <quote>History</quote> in the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link>, create one stating the title, year, authors, and "
++"publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:365(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:365(formalpara/title)
++msgid "J"
++msgstr "J"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:366(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> for public access to a <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"transparent\">Transparent</link> copy of the Document, and likewise the "
++"network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based "
++"on. These may be placed in the <quote>History</quote> section. You may omit "
++"a network location for a work that was published at least four years before "
++"the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers "
++"to gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:383(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:383(formalpara/title)
++msgid "K"
++msgstr "K"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:384(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <quote>Acknowledgements</quote> or "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>, preserve the section's title, and preserve in "
++"the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor "
++"acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:396(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:396(formalpara/title)
++msgid "L"
++msgstr "L"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:397(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> "
++"of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link>, unaltered in their "
++"text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not "
++"considered part of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:409(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:409(formalpara/title)
++msgid "M"
++msgstr "M"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:410(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>. Such a section may "
++"not be included in the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</"
++"link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:421(formalpara/title)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:421(formalpara/title)
++msgid "N"
++msgstr "N"
++
++#: C/index.docbook:422(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <quote>Endorsements</quote> or to "
++"conflict in title with any <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant "
++"Section</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:432(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"If the <link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> includes new "
++"front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"secondary\">Secondary Sections</link> and contain no material copied from "
++"the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections "
++"as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> in the Modified Version's "
++"license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:444(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>, provided it "
++"contains nothing but endorsements of your <link linkend=\"fdl-modified"
++"\">Modified Version</link> by various parties--for example, statements of "
++"peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the "
++"authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:453(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-"
++"texts\">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage of up to 25 words as a <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Text</link>, to the end of the list "
++"of <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Texts</link> in the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link>. Only one passage of Front-Cover "
++"Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements "
++"made by) any one entity. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</"
++"link> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by "
++"you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, "
++"you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit "
++"permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:470(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> do not by this License give permission to use their names "
++"for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version </link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:480(sect1/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:480(sect1/title)
++msgid "5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:481(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> with "
++"other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> of all of the original documents, "
++"unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in "
++"its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:492(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> may be "
++"replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with "
++"the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section "
++"unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original "
++"author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make "
++"the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections "
++"in the license notice of the combined work."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:505(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <quote>History</"
++"quote> in the various original documents, forming one section entitled "
++"<quote>History</quote>; likewise combine any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Acknowledgements</quote>, and any sections entitled "
++"<quote>Dedications</quote>. You must delete all sections entitled "
++"<quote>Endorsements.</quote>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:516(sect1/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:516(sect1/title)
++msgid "6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:517(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document"
++"\">Document</link> and other documents released under this License, and "
++"replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with "
++"a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow "
++"the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in "
++"all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:527(sect1/para) C/fdl-appendix.xml:527(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it "
++"individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License "
++"into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects "
++"regarding verbatim copying of that document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:537(sect1/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:537(sect1/title)
++msgid "7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:538(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> or its "
++"derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on "
++"a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-modified\">Modified Version</link> of the Document, "
++"provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a "
++"compilation is called an <quote>aggregate</quote>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Cover Text</"
++"link> requirement of <link linkend=\"fdl-section3\">section 3</link> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:561(sect1/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:561(sect1/title)
++msgid "8. TRANSLATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:562(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> under the "
++"terms of <link linkend=\"fdl-section4\">section 4</link>. Replacing <link "
++"linkend=\"fdl-invariant\"> Invariant Sections</link> with translations "
++"requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may "
++"include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the "
++"original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation "
++"of this License provided that you also include the original English version "
++"of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the "
++"original English version of this License, the original English version will "
++"prevail."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:580(sect1/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:580(sect1/title)
++msgid "9. TERMINATION"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:581(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <link linkend=\"fdl-"
++"document\">Document</link> except as expressly provided for under this "
++"License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the "
++"Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this "
++"License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you "
++"under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such "
++"parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:594(sect1/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:594(sect1/title)
++msgid "10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:595(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/fsf/fsf.html\">Free "
++"Software Foundation</ulink> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU "
++"Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be "
++"similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to "
++"address new problems or concerns. See <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www."
++"gnu.org/copyleft\">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:606(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<link linkend=\"fdl-document\">Document</link> specifies that a particular "
++"numbered version of this License <quote>or any later version</quote> applies "
++"to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of "
++"that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not "
++"as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not "
++"specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever "
++"published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:621(sect1/title) C/fdl-appendix.xml:621(sect1/title)
++msgid "Addendum"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:622(sect1/para) C/fdl-appendix.xml:622(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the "
++"License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices "
++"just after the title page:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:629(blockquote/para)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:629(blockquote/para)
++msgid "Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:632(blockquote/para)
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link> being LIST THEIR TITLES, with "
++"the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover Texts</link> being LIST, "
++"and with the <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link> being "
++"LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled <quote>GNU "
++"Free Documentation License</quote>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:647(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-invariant\">Invariant Sections</link>, "
++"write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <link linkend=\"fdl-cover-texts\">Front-Cover "
++"Texts</link>, write <quote>no Front-Cover Texts</quote> instead of "
++"<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link linkend="
++"\"fdl-cover-texts\">Back-Cover Texts</link>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/index.docbook:657(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++"gpl.html\"> GNU General Public License</ulink>, to permit their use in free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16(copyright/year)
++msgid "2000"
++msgstr "2000"
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:16(copyright/holder)
++msgid "Free Software Foundation, Inc."
++msgstr "自由软件基金会, Inc."
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20(address/street)
++msgid "51 Franklin Street, Suite 330"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21(address/city)
++msgid "Boston"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:21(address/state)
++msgid "MA"
++msgstr "MA"
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22(address/postcode)
++msgid "02110-1301"
++msgstr "02110-1301"
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:22(address/country)
++msgid "USA"
++msgstr "USA"
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:20(para/address)
++msgid ""
++"Free Software Foundation, Inc. <_:street-1/>, <_:city-2/>, <_:state-3/> <_:"
++"postcode-4/> <_:country-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:34(para/quote)
++msgid "free"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:32(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written "
++"document <_:quote-1/> in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the "
++"effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, "
++"either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves "
++"for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not "
++"being considered responsible for modifications made by others."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:44(para/quote)
++msgid "copyleft"
++msgstr "copyleft"
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:43(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"This License is a kind of <_:quote-1/>, which means that derivative works of "
++"the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the "
++"GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free "
++"software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:67(para/quote) C/fdl-appendix.xml:82(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:99(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:107(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:113(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:156(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:179(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:190(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:205(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:224(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:235(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:253(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:271(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:294(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:354(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:368(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:400(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:462(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:472(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:482(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:519(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:540(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:565(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:583(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:608(para/link)
++msgid "Document"
++msgstr "文档"
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:69(para/quote)
++msgid "you"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:63(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice "
++"placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms "
++"of this License. The <_:quote-1/>, below, refers to any such manual or work. "
++"Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as <_:quote-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:73(para/quote) C/fdl-appendix.xml:234(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:269(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:283(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:315(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:351(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:413(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:433(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:447(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:459(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:475(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:543(para/link)
++msgid "Modified Version"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:72(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> of the Document means any work containing the Document or a "
++"portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or "
++"translated into another language."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:80(para/quote)
++msgid "Secondary Section"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:79(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the <_:"
++"link-2/> that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or "
++"authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related "
++"matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall "
++"subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, "
++"a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could "
++"be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related "
++"matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political "
++"position regarding them."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:95(para/quote) C/fdl-appendix.xml:327(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:398(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:439(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:486(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:494(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:567(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:637(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:648(para/link)
++msgid "Invariant Sections"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:96(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:435(para/link)
++msgid "Secondary Sections"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:94(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain <_:link-2/> whose titles are designated, as "
++"being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-3/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:104(para/quote) C/fdl-appendix.xml:181(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:328(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:458(para/link)
++msgid "Cover Texts"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:103(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> are certain short passages of text that are listed, as "
++"Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the <_:"
++"link-2/> is released under this License."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:112(para/quote) C/fdl-appendix.xml:124(para/quote)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:207(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:369(para/link)
++msgid "Transparent"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:125(para/quote) C/fdl-appendix.xml:204(para/link)
++msgid "Opaque"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:111(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"A <_:quote-1/> copy of the <_:link-2/> means a machine-readable copy, "
++"represented in a format whose specification is available to the general "
++"public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and "
++"straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of "
++"pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available "
++"drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for "
++"automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text "
++"formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup "
++"has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers "
++"is not Transparent. A copy that is not <_:quote-3/> is called <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:142(para/quote) C/fdl-appendix.xml:146(para/quote)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:250(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:266(para/link)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:281(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:352(para/link)
++msgid "Title Page"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:141(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The <_:quote-1/> means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such "
++"following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License "
++"requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have "
++"any title page as such, <_:quote-2/> means the text near the most prominent "
++"appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the "
++"text."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:166(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:551(para/link)
++msgid "section 3"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:154(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute the <_:link-1/> in any medium, either "
++"commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright "
++"notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document "
++"are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions "
++"whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to "
++"obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or "
++"distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If "
++"you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the "
++"conditions in <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:177(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"If you publish printed copies of the <_:link-1/> numbering more than 100, "
++"and the Document's license notice requires <_:link-2/>, you must enclose the "
++"copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: "
++"Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back "
++"cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the "
++"publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with "
++"all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other "
++"material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the "
++"covers, as long as they preserve the title of the <_:link-3/> and satisfy "
++"these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:202(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"If you publish or distribute <_:link-1/> copies of the <_:link-2/> numbering "
++"more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable <_:link-3/> copy "
++"along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-"
++"accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy "
++"of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using "
++"public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard "
++"network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably "
++"prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to "
++"ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated "
++"location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an "
++"Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition "
++"to the public."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:222(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the <_:"
++"link-1/> well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them "
++"a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:236(para/link)
++msgid "2"
++msgstr "2"
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:237(para/link)
++msgid "3"
++msgstr "3"
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:232(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may copy and distribute a <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/> under the "
++"conditions of sections <_:link-3/> and <_:link-4/> above, provided that you "
++"release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified "
++"Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and "
++"modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In "
++"addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:249(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Use in the <_:link-1/> (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from "
++"that of the <_:link-2/>, and from those of previous versions (which should, "
++"if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You "
++"may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of "
++"that version gives permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:265(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"List on the <_:link-1/>, as authors, one or more persons or entities "
++"responsible for authorship of the modifications in the <_:link-2/>, together "
++"with at least five of the principal authors of the <_:link-3/> (all of its "
++"principal authors, if it has less than five)."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:280(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"State on the <_:link-1/> the name of the publisher of the <_:link-2/>, as "
++"the publisher."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:292(formalpara/para)
++msgid "Preserve all the copyright notices of the <_:link-1/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:312(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving "
++"the public permission to use the <_:link-1/> under the terms of this "
++"License, in the form shown in the Addendum below."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:330(para/link)
++msgid "Document's"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:325(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve in that license notice the full lists of <_:link-1/> and required "
++"<_:link-2/> given in the <_:link-3/> license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:348(para/quote) C/fdl-appendix.xml:353(para/quote)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:372(para/quote) C/fdl-appendix.xml:507(para/quote)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:508(para/quote)
++msgid "History"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:347(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the section entitled <_:quote-1/>, and its title, and add to it an "
++"item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the <_:"
++"link-2/> as given on the <_:link-3/>. If there is no section entitled <_:"
++"quote-4/> in the <_:link-5/>, create one stating the title, year, authors, "
++"and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item "
++"describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:366(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve the network location, if any, given in the <_:link-1/> for public "
++"access to a <_:link-2/> copy of the Document, and likewise the network "
++"locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These "
++"may be placed in the <_:quote-3/> section. You may omit a network location "
++"for a work that was published at least four years before the Document "
++"itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives "
++"permission."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:385(para/quote) C/fdl-appendix.xml:509(para/quote)
++msgid "Acknowledgements"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:386(para/quote) C/fdl-appendix.xml:510(para/quote)
++msgid "Dedications"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:384(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"In any section entitled <_:quote-1/> or <_:quote-2/>, preserve the section's "
++"title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the "
++"contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:397(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Preserve all the <_:link-1/> of the <_:link-2/>, unaltered in their text and "
++"in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part "
++"of the section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:412(para/quote) C/fdl-appendix.xml:424(para/quote)
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:445(para/quote)
++msgid "Endorsements"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:410(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Delete any section entitled <_:quote-1/>. Such a section may not be included "
++"in the <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:425(para/link)
++msgid "Invariant Section"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:422(formalpara/para)
++msgid ""
++"Do not retitle any existing section as <_:quote-1/> or to conflict in title "
++"with any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:432(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"If the <_:link-1/> includes new front-matter sections or appendices that "
++"qualify as <_:link-2/> and contain no material copied from the Document, you "
++"may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To "
++"do this, add their titles to the list of <_:link-3/> in the Modified "
++"Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other "
++"section titles."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:444(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may add a section entitled <_:quote-1/>, provided it contains nothing "
++"but endorsements of your <_:link-2/> by various parties--for example, "
++"statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an "
++"organization as the authoritative definition of a standard."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:455(para/link)
++msgid "Front-Cover Text"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:457(para/link)
++msgid "Back-Cover Text"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:453(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may add a passage of up to five words as a <_:link-1/>, and a passage of "
++"up to 25 words as a <_:link-2/>, to the end of the list of <_:link-3/> in "
++"the <_:link-4/>. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover "
++"Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If "
++"the <_:link-5/> already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously "
++"added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on "
++"behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on "
++"explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:470(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <_:link-1/> do not by this License "
++"give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply "
++"endorsement of any <_:link-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:484(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:566(para/link)
++msgid "section 4"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:481(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may combine the <_:link-1/> with other documents released under this "
++"License, under the terms defined in <_:link-2/> above for modified versions, "
++"provided that you include in the combination all of the <_:link-3/> of all "
++"of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant "
++"Sections of your combined work in its license notice."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:492(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple "
++"identical <_:link-1/> may be replaced with a single copy. If there are "
++"multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make "
++"the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in "
++"parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if "
++"known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section "
++"titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the "
++"combined work."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:511(para/quote)
++msgid "Endorsements."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:505(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled <_:quote-1/> in "
++"the various original documents, forming one section entitled <_:quote-2/>; "
++"likewise combine any sections entitled <_:quote-3/>, and any sections "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>. You must delete all sections entitled <_:quote-5/>"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:517(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may make a collection consisting of the <_:link-1/> and other documents "
++"released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this "
++"License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the "
++"collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim "
++"copying of each of the documents in all other respects."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:546(para/quote)
++msgid "aggregate"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:550(para/link)
++msgid "Cover Text"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:538(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"A compilation of the <_:link-1/> or its derivatives with other separate and "
++"independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or "
++"distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a <_:link-2/> of the "
++"Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. "
++"Such a compilation is called an <_:quote-3/>, and this License does not "
++"apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on "
++"account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative "
++"works of the Document. If the <_:link-4/> requirement of <_:link-5/> is "
++"applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less "
++"than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be "
++"placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. "
++"Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:562(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute "
++"translations of the <_:link-1/> under the terms of <_:link-2/>. Replacing <_:"
++"link-3/> with translations requires special permission from their copyright "
++"holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections "
++"in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may "
++"include a translation of this License provided that you also include the "
++"original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between "
++"the translation and the original English version of this License, the "
++"original English version will prevail."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:581(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the <_:link-1/> except "
++"as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, "
++"modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will "
++"automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who "
++"have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have "
++"their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:597(para/ulink)
++msgid "Free Software Foundation"
++msgstr "Free Software Foundation"
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:603(para/ulink)
++msgid "http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:595(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"The <_:ulink-1/> may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free "
++"Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar "
++"in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new "
++"problems or concerns. See <_:ulink-2/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:610(para/quote)
++msgid "or any later version"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:606(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the "
++"<_:link-1/> specifies that a particular numbered version of this License <_:"
++"quote-2/> applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and "
++"conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has "
++"been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the "
++"Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose "
++"any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:639(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:651(para/link)
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:640(para/link) C/fdl-appendix.xml:654(para/link)
++msgid "Back-Cover Texts"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:632(blockquote/para)
++msgid ""
++"Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under "
++"the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later "
++"version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the <_:link-1/> "
++"being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the <_:link-2/> being LIST, and with the <_:"
++"link-3/> being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section "
++"entitled <_:quote-4/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:649(para/quote)
++msgid "with no Invariant Sections"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:652(para/quote)
++msgid "no Front-Cover Texts"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:653(para/quote)
++msgid "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:647(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"If you have no <_:link-1/>, write <_:quote-2/> instead of saying which ones "
++"are invariant. If you have no <_:link-3/>, write <_:quote-4/> instead of <_:"
++"quote-5/>; likewise for <_:link-6/>."
++msgstr ""
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:661(para/ulink)
++msgid "GNU General Public License"
++msgstr "GNU 自由文档许可证"
++
++#: C/fdl-appendix.xml:657(sect1/para)
++msgid ""
++"If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend "
++"releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software "
++"license, such as the <_:ulink-1/>, to permit their use in free software."
++msgstr ""
++
++#~ msgid "Chris"
++#~ msgstr "Chris"
++
++#~ msgid "Lyttle"
++#~ msgstr "Lyttle"
++
++#~ msgid "chris@wilddev.net"
++#~ msgstr "chris@wilddev.net"
++
++#~ msgid "Dan"
++#~ msgstr "Dan"
++
++#~ msgid "Mueth"
++#~ msgstr "Mueth"
++
++#~ msgid "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++#~ msgstr "d-mueth@uchicago.edu"
++
++#~ msgid "Stefan"
++#~ msgstr "Stefan"
++
++#~ msgid "Kost"
++#~ msgstr "Kost"
++
++#~ msgid "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++#~ msgstr "ensonic@users.sf.net"
++
++#~ msgid "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++#~ msgstr "gtk-doc-list@gnome.org"
++
++#~| msgid "2000, 2005, 2007-2009"
++#~ msgid "2000, 2005"
++#~ msgstr "2000, 2005"
++
++#~| msgid "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle and Stefan Kost"
++#~ msgid "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle"
++#~ msgstr "Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle"
++
++#~| msgid "2000"
++#~ msgid "2007-2011"
++#~ msgstr "2007-2011"
++
++#~ msgid "Stefan Sauer (Kost)"
++#~ msgstr "Stefan Sauer (Kost)"
++
++#~| msgid "26 Feb 2011"
++#~ msgid "20 Sep 2011"
++#~ msgstr "2011年二月二十日"
++
++#~ msgid "ss"
++#~ msgstr "ss"
++
++#~ msgid "development version"
++#~ msgstr "开发版本"
++
++#~| msgid "1.15"
++#~ msgid "1.18"
++#~ msgstr "1.18"
++
++#~| msgid "14 Jan 2011"
++#~ msgid "14 sep 2011"
++#~ msgstr "2011年一月十四日"
++
++#~ msgid "bug fixes, speedups, markdown support"
++#~ msgstr "补漏, speedups, markdown support"
++
++#~ msgid "1.17"
++#~ msgstr "1.17"
++
++#~ msgid "26 Feb 2011"
++#~ msgstr "2011年二月二十六日"
++
++#~ msgid "sk"
++#~ msgstr "sk"
++
++#~ msgid "urgent bug fix update"
++#~ msgstr "紧急的bug修复更新"
++
++#~ msgid "1.16"
++#~ msgstr "1.16"
++
++#~ msgid "14 Jan 2011"
++#~ msgstr "2011年一月十四日"
++
++#~ msgid "bugfixes, layout improvements"
++#~ msgstr "错误修正,布局的改进"
++
++#~ msgid "1.15"
++#~ msgstr "1.15"
++
++#~ msgid "21 May 2010"
++#~ msgstr "2010年五月二十一日"
++
++#~ msgid "bug and regression fixes"
++#~ msgstr "错误与复原修补"
++
++#~ msgid "1.14"
++#~ msgstr "1.14"
++
++#~ msgid "28 March 2010"
++#~ msgstr "2010三月二十八日"
++
++#~ msgid "bugfixes and performance improvements"
++#~ msgstr "补漏与性能提高"
++
++#~ msgid "1.13"
++#~ msgstr "1.13"
++
++#~ msgid "18 December 2009"
++#~ msgstr "2009年十二月十八日"
++
++#~ msgid "broken tarball update"
++#~ msgstr "不完整的tarball升级"
++
++#~ msgid "1.12"
++#~ msgstr "1.12"
++
++#~ msgid "new tool features and bugfixes"
++#~ msgstr "工具的新功能和错误修正"
++
++#~ msgid "1.11"
++#~ msgstr "1.11"
++
++#~ msgid "16 Novemebr 2008"
++#~ msgstr "2008年十一月十六日"
++
++#~ msgid "mal"
++#~ msgstr "不良品"
++
++#~ msgid "GNOME doc-utils migration"
++#~ msgstr "GNOME文档组件迁移"
++
++#~ msgid "xxx_get_type()"
++#~ msgstr "xxx_get_type()"
++
++#~ msgid "<package>.types"
++#~ msgstr "<package>.types"
++
++#~ msgid "<package>-sections.txt"
++#~ msgstr "<package>-sections.txt"
++
++#~ msgid "explanation"
++#~ msgstr "解释"
++
++#~ msgid ""
++#~ "Missing or wrong naming in <placeholder-1/> file (see <placeholder-2/>)."
++#~ msgstr "在<placeholder-1/>文件中缺失或错误的命名（参看<placeholder-2/>）."
++
++#~ msgid "GtkWidget"
++#~ msgstr "GtkWidget"
++
++#~ msgid "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
++#~ msgstr "<package>-docs.{xml,sgml}"
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++if get_option('yelp_manual') == true
++ subdir('manual')
++endif
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# ===========================================================================
++# https://www.gnu.org/software/autoconf-archive/ax_python_module.html
++# ===========================================================================
++#
++# SYNOPSIS
++#
++# AX_PYTHON_MODULE(modname[, fatal, python])
++#
++# DESCRIPTION
++#
++# Checks for Python module.
++#
++# If fatal is non-empty then absence of a module will trigger an error.
++# The third parameter can either be "python" for Python 2 or "python3" for
++# Python 3; defaults to Python 3.
++#
++# LICENSE
++#
++# Copyright (c) 2008 Andrew Collier
++#
++# Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are
++# permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright notice
++# and this notice are preserved. This file is offered as-is, without any
++# warranty.
++
++#serial 9
++
++AU_ALIAS([AC_PYTHON_MODULE], [AX_PYTHON_MODULE])
++AC_DEFUN([AX_PYTHON_MODULE],[
++ if test -z $PYTHON;
++ then
++ if test -z "$3";
++ then
++ PYTHON="python3"
++ else
++ PYTHON="$3"
++ fi
++ fi
++ PYTHON_NAME=`basename $PYTHON`
++ AC_MSG_CHECKING($PYTHON_NAME module: $1)
++ $PYTHON -c "import $1" 2>/dev/null
++ if test $? -eq 0;
++ then
++ AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
++ eval AS_TR_CPP(HAVE_PYMOD_$1)=yes
++ else
++ AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
++ eval AS_TR_CPP(HAVE_PYMOD_$1)=no
++ #
++ if test -n "$2"
++ then
++ AC_MSG_ERROR(failed to find required module $1)
++ exit 1
++ fi
++ fi
++])
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++dnl Checks if a particular URI appears in the XML catalog
++dnl Usage:
++dnl JH_CHECK_XML_CATALOG(URI, [FRIENDLY-NAME], [ACTION-IF-FOUND], [ACTION-IF-NOT-FOUND])
++AC_DEFUN([JH_CHECK_XML_CATALOG],
++[
++ AC_REQUIRE([JH_PATH_XML_CATALOG],[JH_PATH_XML_CATALOG(,[:])])dnl
++ AC_MSG_CHECKING([for ifelse([$2],,[$1],[$2]) in XML catalog])
++ if $jh_found_xmlcatalog && \
++ AC_RUN_LOG([$XMLCATALOG --noout "$XML_CATALOG_FILE" "$1" >&2]); then
++ AC_MSG_RESULT([found])
++ ifelse([$3],,,[$3])
++ else
++ AC_MSG_RESULT([not found])
++ ifelse([$4],,[AC_MSG_ERROR([could not find ifelse([$2],,[$1],[$2]) in XML catalog])],[$4])
++ fi
++])
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++dnl Checks the location of the XML Catalog
++dnl Usage:
++dnl JH_PATH_XML_CATALOG([ACTION-IF-FOUND], [ACTION-IF-NOT-FOUND])
++dnl Defines XMLCATALOG and XML_CATALOG_FILE substitutions
++AC_DEFUN([JH_PATH_XML_CATALOG],
++[
++ dnl check for the presence of the XML catalog
++ AC_ARG_WITH([xml-catalog],
++ AS_HELP_STRING([--with-xml-catalog=CATALOG],
++ [path to xml catalog to use]),,
++ [with_xml_catalog=''])
++ AC_MSG_CHECKING([for XML catalog])
++ if test -n "$with_xml_catalog"; then
++ dnl path was explicitly given. check that it exists.
++ if test -f "$with_xml_catalog"; then
++ jh_found_xmlcatalog=true
++ else
++ jh_found_xmlcatalog=false
++ fi
++ else
++ dnl if one was not explicitly specified, try some guesses
++ dnl we look first in /etc/xml/catalog, then XDG_DATA_DIRS/xml/catalog
++ if test -z "$XDG_DATA_DIRS"; then
++ dnl if we have no XDG_DATA_DIRS, use the default
++ jh_xml_catalog_searchdirs="/etc:/usr/local/share:/usr/share"
++ else
++ jh_xml_catalog_searchdirs="/etc:$XDG_DATA_DIRS"
++ fi
++ jh_found_xmlcatalog=false
++ dnl take care to iterate based on ':', allowing whitespace to appear in paths
++ jh_xml_catalog_saved_ifs="$IFS"
++ IFS=':'
++ for d in $jh_xml_catalog_searchdirs; do
++ if test -f "$d/xml/catalog"; then
++ with_xml_catalog="$d/xml/catalog"
++ jh_found_xmlcatalog=true
++ break
++ fi
++ done
++ IFS="$jh_xml_catalog_saved_ifs"
++ fi
++ if $jh_found_xmlcatalog; then
++ AC_MSG_RESULT([$with_xml_catalog])
++ else
++ AC_MSG_RESULT([not found])
++ fi
++ XML_CATALOG_FILE="$with_xml_catalog"
++ AC_SUBST([XML_CATALOG_FILE])
++
++ dnl check for the xmlcatalog program
++ AC_PATH_PROG(XMLCATALOG, xmlcatalog, no)
++ if test "x$XMLCATALOG" = xno; then
++ jh_found_xmlcatalog=false
++ fi
++
++ if $jh_found_xmlcatalog; then
++ ifelse([$1],,[:],[$1])
++ else
++ ifelse([$2],,[AC_MSG_ERROR([could not find XML catalog])],[$2])
++ fi
++])
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++project('gtk-doc', 'c',
++ version: '1.99', # so we can depend on this branch in gtk
++ license: 'GPL2+',
++ meson_version: '>= 0.50.0', # needed for https://mesonbuild.com/Python-module.html#path
++)
++
++gnome = import('gnome')
++python = import('python') # Meson new Python module https://mesonbuild.com/Python-module.html
++
++python3 = python.find_installation('python3')
++
++version = meson.project_version()
++package_name = meson.project_name()
++
++# Paths
++srcdir = meson.current_source_dir()
++builddir = meson.current_build_dir()
++
++prefix = get_option('prefix')
++
++bindir = join_paths(prefix, get_option('bindir'))
++libdir = join_paths(prefix, get_option('libdir'))
++datadir = join_paths(prefix, get_option('datadir'))
++
++cmakedatadir = join_paths(datadir, 'cmake')
++
++autoconfdatadir = join_paths(datadir, 'aclocal')
++pkgdir = join_paths(datadir, package_name)
++pkgdatadir = join_paths(pkgdir, 'data')
++pkgpythondir = join_paths(pkgdir, 'python')
++pkgconfigdir = join_paths(datadir, 'pkgconfig')
++
++# Dependencies
++glib_req = '>= 2.38.0'
++
++python_prg = python3
++
++# Python 3 required modules
++python3_required_modules = ['pygments']
++
++foreach p : python3_required_modules
++ # Source: https://docs.python.org/3/library/importlib.html#checking-if-a-module-can-be-imported
++ script = 'import importlib.util; import sys; exit(1) if importlib.util.find_spec(\''+ p +'\') is None else exit(0)'
++ if run_command(python3, '-c', script).returncode() != 0
++ error('Required Python3 module \'' + p + '\' not found')
++ endif
++endforeach
++
++pkgconfig_prg = find_program('pkg-config', required: true)
++xsltproc_prg = find_program('xsltproc', required: true)
++dblatex_prg = find_program('dblatex', required: false)
++fop_prg = find_program('fop', required: false)
++
++python_prg_path = join_paths(python_prg.path())
++pkgconfig_prg_path = join_paths(pkgconfig_prg.path())
++xsltproc_prg_path = join_paths(xsltproc_prg.path())
++
++dblatex_prg_path = ''
++if dblatex_prg.found()
++ dblatex_prg_path = join_paths(dblatex_prg.path())
++endif
++
++fop_prg_path = ''
++if fop_prg.found()
++ fop_prg_path = join_paths(fop_prg.path())
++endif
++
++# Options
++generate_pdf_output = true
++if not dblatex_prg.found() and not fop_prg.found()
++ generate_pdf_output = false
++endif
++
++# Code
++subdir('gtkdoc')
++
++gtkdoc_binaires = [
++ 'gtkdoc-check',
++ 'gtkdoc-depscan',
++ 'gtkdoc-fixxref',
++ 'gtkdoc-mkdb',
++ 'gtkdoc-mkhtml',
++ 'gtkdoc-mkhtml2',
++ 'gtkdoc-mkman',
++ 'gtkdoc-mkpdf',
++ 'gtkdoc-rebase',
++ 'gtkdoc-scan',
++ 'gtkdoc-scangobj',
++]
++
++binary_in = configuration_data()
++binary_in.set('PYTHON', python_prg_path)
++binary_in.set('PKG_CONFIG', pkgconfig_prg_path)
++
++binary_in.set('PYTHON_PACKAGE_DIR', pkgpythondir)
++
++binary_in.set('prefix', get_option('prefix'))
++binary_in.set('datarootdir', join_paths('${prefix}', get_option('datadir')))
++binary_in.set('datadir', '${datarootdir}')
++
++binary_in.set('PACKAGE', package_name)
++
++binary_in.set('VERSION', version)
++
++foreach binary: gtkdoc_binaires
++ prog = configure_file(
++ input: '@0@.in'.format(binary),
++ output: binary,
++ configuration: binary_in,
++ install: true,
++ install_dir: bindir,
++ )
++ meson.override_find_program(binary, prog)
++endforeach
++
++configure_file(
++ input: 'gtkdoc_uninstalled.py.in',
++ output: 'gtkdoc_uninstalled.py',
++ configuration: {
++ 'sourcedir': meson.current_source_dir(),
++ 'builddir': meson.current_build_dir(),
++ },
++)
++
++# Data
++gtkdoc_data = [
++ 'devhelp2.xsd',
++ 'devhelp2.xsl',
++ 'gtk-doc.xsl',
++ 'version-greater-or-equal.xsl',
++]
++
++install_data(
++ gtkdoc_data,
++ install_dir: pkgdatadir,
++)
++
++subdir('style')
++
++if get_option('autotools_support') == true
++ subdir('buildsystems/autotools')
++endif
++
++if get_option('cmake_support') == true
++ subdir('buildsystems/cmake')
++endif
++
++gtkdoc_pc = configuration_data()
++gtkdoc_pc.set('prefix', prefix)
++gtkdoc_pc.set('exec_prefix', '${prefix}')
++gtkdoc_pc.set('datadir', join_paths('${prefix}', get_option('datadir')))
++
++gtkdoc_pc.set('PACKAGE', package_name)
++gtkdoc_pc.set('VERSION', version)
++
++configure_file(
++ input: 'gtk-doc.pc.in',
++ output: 'gtk-doc.pc',
++ configuration: gtkdoc_pc,
++ install: true,
++ install_dir: pkgconfigdir,
++)
++
++subdir('help')
++if get_option('tests')
++ subdir('tests')
++endif
++
++# A dummy dependency object that to use gtkdoc as subproject fallback
++# To be used as: dependency('gtk-doc', fallback : ['gtk-doc', 'dummy_dep'])
++dummy_dep = declare_dependency()
++
++summary = [
++ '',
++ '------',
++ 'gtk-doc @0@'.format(version),
++ '',
++ 'Directories:',
++ ' prefix: @0@'.format(prefix),
++ ' bindir: @0@'.format(bindir),
++ ' libdir: @0@'.format(libdir),
++ ' datadir: @0@'.format(datadir),
++ '',
++ 'Configuration:',
++ ' Autotools support: @0@'.format(get_option('autotools_support')),
++ ' CMake support: @0@'.format(get_option('cmake_support')),
++ ' PDF output: @0@'.format(generate_pdf_output),
++ ' User manual: @0@'.format(get_option('yelp_manual')),
++ ' Test suite: @0@'.format(get_option('tests')),
++ '------',
++]
++
++message('\n'.join(summary))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++option('autotools_support',
++ type: 'boolean', value: true,
++ description: 'Install autotools macros')
++option('cmake_support',
++ type: 'boolean', value: true,
++ description: 'Install CMake macros')
++option('yelp_manual',
++ type: 'boolean', value: true,
++ description: 'Build the user manual (requires yelp-tools)')
++option('tests',
++ type: 'boolean', value: false,
++ description: 'Build the test suite (requires glib)')
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++pygments
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++This style subdirectory of this package contains a number of images and a css
++stylesheet used in the formatted output.
++
++The images were created primarily by William Jon McCann in these commits
++* 939576cd24da19e15eed97c937480514eb373669
++* 0fab530ad580011d8fee87755a37d180392e9970
++
++The stylesheet was added by Matthias Clasen in commit
++* 07971801371971f69b03c190d91aab4e5177e5c5
++
++These images and the stylesheet are licensed under the terms of the GNU GPL.
++
++As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you distribute
++copies of your document formatted by the tools in this package, you may
++redistribute unmodified copies of any images and style sheets used or
++referenced in that formatted copy without restriction.
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++gtkdoc_style_data = [
++ 'home.png',
++ 'left.png',
++ 'left-insensitive.png',
++ 'right.png',
++ 'right-insensitive.png',
++ 'style.css',
++ 'up.png',
++ 'up-insensitive.png',
++]
++
++install_data(
++ gtkdoc_style_data,
++ install_dir: pkgdatadir,
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++body
++{
++ font-family: cantarell, sans-serif;
++}
++.synopsis, .classsynopsis
++{
++ /* tango:aluminium 1/2 */
++ background: #eeeeec;
++ background: rgba(238, 238, 236, 0.5);
++ border: solid 1px rgb(238, 238, 236);
++ padding: 0.5em;
++}
++.programlisting
++{
++ /* tango:sky blue 0/1 */
++ /* fallback for no rgba support */
++ background: #e6f3ff;
++ border: solid 1px #729fcf;
++ background: rgba(114, 159, 207, 0.1);
++ border: solid 1px rgba(114, 159, 207, 0.2);
++ padding: 0.5em;
++}
++.variablelist
++{
++ padding: 4px;
++ margin-left: 3em;
++}
++.variablelist td:first-child
++{
++ vertical-align: top;
++}
++
++span.nowrap {
++ white-space: nowrap;
++}
++
++div.gallery-float
++{
++ float: left;
++ padding: 10px;
++}
++div.gallery-float img
++{
++ border-style: none;
++}
++div.gallery-spacer
++{
++ clear: both;
++}
++
++a, a:visited
++{
++ text-decoration: none;
++ /* tango:sky blue 2 */
++ color: #3465a4;
++}
++a:hover
++{
++ text-decoration: underline;
++ /* tango:sky blue 1 */
++ color: #729fcf;
++}
++
++.function_type,
++.variable_type,
++.property_type,
++.signal_type,
++.parameter_name,
++.struct_member_name,
++.union_member_name,
++.define_keyword,
++.datatype_keyword,
++.typedef_keyword
++{
++ text-align: right;
++}
++
++/* dim non-primary columns */
++.c_punctuation,
++.function_type,
++.variable_type,
++.property_type,
++.signal_type,
++.define_keyword,
++.datatype_keyword,
++.typedef_keyword,
++.property_flags,
++.signal_flags,
++.parameter_annotations,
++.enum_member_annotations,
++.struct_member_annotations,
++.union_member_annotations
++{
++ color: #888a85;
++}
++
++.function_type a,
++.function_type a:visited,
++.function_type a:hover,
++.property_type a,
++.property_type a:visited,
++.property_type a:hover,
++.signal_type a,
++.signal_type a:visited,
++.signal_type a:hover,
++.signal_flags a,
++.signal_flags a:visited,
++.signal_flags a:hover
++{
++ color: #729fcf;
++}
++
++td p
++{
++ margin: 0.25em;
++}
++
++div.informaltable table[border="1"],
++div.table table
++{
++ border-collapse: collapse;
++ border-spacing: 0px;
++ /* tango:aluminium 3 */
++ border: solid 1px #babdb6;
++}
++
++div.informaltable table[border="1"] td, div.informaltable table th,
++div.table table td, div.table table th
++{
++ /* tango:aluminium 3 */
++ border: solid 1px #babdb6;
++ padding: 3px;
++ vertical-align: top;
++}
++
++div.informaltable table[border="1"] th,
++div.table table th
++{
++ /* tango:aluminium 2 */
++ background-color: #d3d7cf;
++}
++
++h4
++{
++ color: #555753;
++ margin-top: 1em;
++ margin-bottom: 1em;
++}
++
++hr
++{
++ /* tango:aluminium 1 */
++ color: #d3d7cf;
++ background: #d3d7cf;
++ border: none 0px;
++ height: 1px;
++ clear: both;
++ margin: 2.0em 0em 2.0em 0em;
++}
++
++dl.toc dt
++{
++ padding-bottom: 0.25em;
++}
++
++dl.toc > dt
++{
++ padding-top: 0.25em;
++ padding-bottom: 0.25em;
++ font-weight: bold;
++}
++
++dl.toc > dl
++{
++ padding-bottom: 0.5em;
++}
++
++.parameter
++{
++ font-style: normal;
++}
++
++.footer
++{
++ padding-top: 3.5em;
++ /* tango:aluminium 3 */
++ color: #babdb6;
++ text-align: center;
++ font-size: 80%;
++}
++
++.informalfigure,
++.figure
++{
++ margin: 1em;
++}
++
++.informalexample,
++.example
++{
++ margin-top: 1em;
++ margin-bottom: 1em;
++}
++
++.warning
++{
++ /* tango:orange 0/1 */
++ background: #ffeed9;
++ background: rgba(252, 175, 62, 0.1);
++ border-color: #ffb04f;
++ border-color: rgba(252, 175, 62, 0.2);
++}
++.note
++{
++ /* tango:chameleon 0/0.5 */
++ background: #d8ffb2;
++ background: rgba(138, 226, 52, 0.1);
++ border-color: #abf562;
++ border-color: rgba(138, 226, 52, 0.2);
++}
++div.blockquote
++{
++ border-color: #eeeeec;
++}
++.note, .warning, div.blockquote
++{
++ padding: 0.5em;
++ border-width: 1px;
++ border-style: solid;
++ margin: 2em;
++}
++.note p, .warning p
++{
++ margin: 0;
++}
++
++div.warning h3.title,
++div.note h3.title
++{
++ display: none;
++}
++
++p + div.section
++{
++ margin-top: 1em;
++}
++
++div.refnamediv,
++div.refsynopsisdiv,
++div.refsect1,
++div.refsect2,
++div.toc,
++div.section
++{
++ margin-bottom: 1em;
++}
++
++/* blob links */
++h2 .extralinks, h3 .extralinks
++{
++ float: right;
++ /* tango:aluminium 3 */
++ color: #babdb6;
++ font-size: 80%;
++ font-weight: normal;
++}
++
++.lineart
++{
++ color: #d3d7cf;
++ font-weight: normal;
++}
++
++.annotation
++{
++ /* tango:aluminium 5 */
++ color: #555753;
++ font-weight: normal;
++}
++
++.structfield
++{
++ font-style: normal;
++ font-weight: normal;
++}
++
++acronym,abbr
++{
++ border-bottom: 1px dotted gray;
++}
++
++.listing_frame {
++ /* tango:sky blue 1 */
++ border: solid 1px #729fcf;
++ border: solid 1px rgba(114, 159, 207, 0.2);
++ padding: 0px;
++}
++
++.listing_lines, .listing_code {
++ margin-top: 0px;
++ margin-bottom: 0px;
++ padding: 0.5em;
++}
++.listing_lines {
++ /* tango:sky blue 0.5 */
++ background: #a6c5e3;
++ background: rgba(114, 159, 207, 0.2);
++ /* tango:aluminium 6 */
++ color: #2e3436;
++}
++.listing_code {
++ /* tango:sky blue 0 */
++ background: #e6f3ff;
++ background: rgba(114, 159, 207, 0.1);
++}
++.listing_code .programlisting {
++ /* override from previous */
++ border: none 0px;
++ padding: 0px;
++ background: none;
++}
++.listing_lines pre, .listing_code pre {
++ margin: 0px;
++}
++
++@media screen {
++ /* these have a <sup> as a first child, but since there are no parent selectors
++ * we can't use that. */
++ a.footnote
++ {
++ position: relative;
++ top: 0em ! important;
++ }
++ /* this is needed so that the local anchors are displayed below the naviagtion */
++ div.footnote a[name], div.refnamediv a[name], div.refsect1 a[name], div.refsect2 a[name], div.index a[name], div.glossary a[name], div.sect1 a[name]
++ {
++ display: inline-block;
++ position: relative;
++ top:-5em;
++ }
++ /* this seems to be a bug in the xsl style sheets when generating indexes */
++ div.index div.index
++ {
++ top: 0em;
++ }
++ /* make space for the fixed navigation bar and add space at the bottom so that
++ * link targets appear somewhat close to top
++ */
++ body
++ {
++ padding-top: 2.5em;
++ padding-bottom: 500px;
++ max-width: 60em;
++ }
++ p
++ {
++ max-width: 60em;
++ }
++ /* style and size the navigation bar */
++ table.navigation#top
++ {
++ position: fixed;
++ background: #e2e2e2;
++ border-bottom: solid 1px #babdb6;
++ border-spacing: 5px;
++ margin-top: 0;
++ margin-bottom: 0;
++ top: 0;
++ left: 0;
++ z-index: 10;
++ }
++ table.navigation#top td
++ {
++ padding-left: 6px;
++ padding-right: 6px;
++ }
++ .navigation a, .navigation a:visited
++ {
++ /* tango:sky blue 3 */
++ color: #204a87;
++ }
++ .navigation a:hover
++ {
++ /* tango:sky blue 2 */
++ color: #3465a4;
++ }
++ td.shortcuts
++ {
++ /* tango:sky blue 2 */
++ color: #3465a4;
++ font-size: 80%;
++ white-space: nowrap;
++ }
++ td.shortcuts .dim
++ {
++ color: #babdb6;
++ }
++ .navigation .title
++ {
++ font-size: 80%;
++ max-width: none;
++ margin: 0px;
++ font-weight: normal;
++ }
++}
++@media screen and (min-width: 60em) {
++ /* screen larger than 60em */
++ body { margin: auto; }
++}
++@media screen and (max-width: 60em) {
++ /* screen less than 60em */
++ #nav_hierarchy { display: none; }
++ #nav_interfaces { display: none; }
++ #nav_prerequisites { display: none; }
++ #nav_derived_interfaces { display: none; }
++ #nav_implementations { display: none; }
++ #nav_child_properties { display: none; }
++ #nav_style_properties { display: none; }
++ #nav_index { display: none; }
++ #nav_glossary { display: none; }
++ .gallery_image { display: none; }
++ .property_flags { display: none; }
++ .signal_flags { display: none; }
++ .parameter_annotations { display: none; }
++ .enum_member_annotations { display: none; }
++ .struct_member_annotations { display: none; }
++ .union_member_annotations { display: none; }
++ /* now that a column is hidden, optimize space */
++ col.parameters_name { width: auto; }
++ col.parameters_description { width: auto; }
++ col.struct_members_name { width: auto; }
++ col.struct_members_description { width: auto; }
++ col.enum_members_name { width: auto; }
++ col.enum_members_description { width: auto; }
++ col.union_members_name { width: auto; }
++ col.union_members_description { width: auto; }
++ .listing_lines { display: none; }
++}
++@media print {
++ table.navigation {
++ visibility: collapse;
++ display: none;
++ }
++ div.titlepage table.navigation {
++ visibility: visible;
++ display: table;
++ background: #e2e2e2;
++ border: solid 1px #babdb6;
++ margin-top: 0;
++ margin-bottom: 0;
++ top: 0;
++ left: 0;
++ height: 3em;
++ }
++}
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++SUBDIRS =
++TESTS = \
++ tools.sh check.py common.py highlight.py mkdb.py mk_to_db.py mkhtml2.py \
++ scan.py
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++# we need to run '.' last so that sanity processes the generated docs
++# maybe move it to a subdir?
++SUBDIRS += annotations bugs empty fail gobject program repro .
++TESTS += annotations.sh bugs.sh empty.sh fail.sh gobject.sh program.sh
++endif
++
++TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \
++ BUILDDIR=$(abs_builddir) \
++ SRCDIR=$(abs_srcdir) \
++ ABS_TOP_BUILDDIR=$(abs_top_builddir) \
++ ABS_TOP_SRCDIR=$(abs_top_srcdir) \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(srcdir):$(PATH) \
++ PYTHONPATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(abs_top_srcdir):$(PYTHONPATH) \
++ GLIB_PREFIX="$(glib_prefix)"
++
++TEST_EXTENSIONS = .py
++PY_LOG_COMPILER = $(PYTHON)
++
++EXTRA_DIST = gtkdoctest.sh sanity.sh $(TESTS)
++
++# run any given test by running make <test>.check
++%.check: %
++ @$(TESTS_ENVIRONMENT) \
++ ./$*
++
++snapshot:
++ @for dir in $(SUBDIRS); do \
++ rm -rf $$dir/docs/html.ref; \
++ if test -d $$dir/docs/html; then \
++ cp -r $$dir/docs/html $$dir/docs/html.ref; \
++ fi; \
++ rm -rf $$dir/docs/xml.ref; \
++ if test -d $$dir/docs/xml; then \
++ cp -r $$dir/docs/xml $$dir/docs/xml.ref; \
++ fi; \
++ done
++
++coverage:
++ @python3-coverage erase; \
++ for f in *.py; do \
++ $(TESTS_ENVIRONMENT) python3-coverage run -a $$f; \
++ done; \
++ python3-coverage html --include="*/gtkdoc/*.py"; \
++ python3-coverage report --include="*/gtkdoc/*.py"
++
++
++.PHONY: snapshot
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/bin/sh
++
++set -e
++
++gtkdoctest.sh annotations
++sanity.sh annotations
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++SUBDIRS = . src docs
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++check-local: clean
++
++endif
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++# We require automake 1.6 at least.
++AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = 1.6
++
++# The name of the module, e.g. 'glib'.
++DOC_MODULE=tester
++
++# The top-level SGML file. You can change this if you want to.
++DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MODULE)-docs.xml
++
++# The directory containing the source code. Relative to $(srcdir).
++# gtk-doc will search all .c & .h files beneath here for inline comments
++# documenting the functions and macros.
++DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/tests/annotations/src
++
++# Extra options to pass to gtkdoc-scangobj. Not normally needed.
++SCANGOBJ_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-scan.
++SCAN_OPTIONS=--deprecated-guards="GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED" \
++ --ignore-decorators="GLIB_VAR"
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkdb.
++MKDB_OPTIONS=--xml-mode
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkhtml
++MKHTML_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-fixref. Not normally needed.
++# --html-dir=$(HTML_DIR)
++FIXXREF_OPTIONS=--extra-dir=$(glib_prefix)/share/gtk-doc/html
++
++# Used for dependencies. The docs will be rebuilt if any of these change.
++HFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/annotations/src/*.h
++CFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/annotations/src/*.c
++
++# Header files to ignore when scanning.
++IGNORE_HFILES=config.h
++
++# Images to copy into HTML directory.
++HTML_IMAGES =
++
++# Extra SGML files that are included by $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE).
++# e.g. content_files=running.sgml building.sgml changes-2.0.sgml
++content_files =
++
++# SGML files where gtk-doc abbreviations (#GtkWidget) are expanded
++# These files must be listed here *and* in content_files
++# e.g. expand_content_files=running.sgml
++expand_content_files=
++
++# CFLAGS and LDFLAGS for compiling gtkdoc-scangobj with your library.
++# Only needed if you are using gtkdoc-scangobj to dynamically query widget
++# signals and properties.
++GTKDOC_CFLAGS = -I$(top_srcdir)/tests/annotations/src $(TEST_DEPS_CFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_LIBS = $(TEST_DEPS_LIBS) $(top_builddir)/tests/annotations/src/libtester.la
++
++# include generic part
++include $(top_srcdir)/tests/gtk-doc.make
++
++# Other files to distribute
++# e.g. EXTRA_DIST += version.xml.in
++EXTRA_DIST +=
++
++CLEANFILES += \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \
++ DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(srcdir):$(PATH)
++endif
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++annotations_test_source_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'annotations',
++ 'src'
++)
++
++annotations_test_docs_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'annotations',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++annotations_test_output_dir = join_paths(
++ builddir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'annotations',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++annotations_test_html_data = []
++
++test(
++ 'test-annotations-scan',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: annotations_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_scan_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(annotations_test_output_dir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(annotations_test_source_dir),
++ '--ignore-headers=config.h',
++ '--deprecated-guards=GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED',
++ '--ignore-decorators=GLIB_VAR',
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-annotations-mkdb',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: annotations_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkdb_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(annotations_test_source_dir),
++ '--main-sgml-file=@0@'.format('tester-docs.xml'),
++ '--output-format=xml',
++ '--xml-mode',
++ ],
++)
++
++foreach style_data: gtkdoc_style_data
++ annotations_test_html_data += join_paths(srcdir, 'style', style_data)
++endforeach
++
++test(
++ 'test-annotations-mkhtml',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: annotations_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkhtml_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(join_paths(annotations_test_output_dir, 'html')),
++ '--html-assets=@0@'.format('@@'.join(annotations_test_html_data)),
++ '@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '@0@'.format(join_paths('..', 'tester-docs.xml')),
++ '--uninstalled',
++ '--path=@0@'.format(':'.join([
++ annotations_test_docs_dir,
++ srcdir])
++ ),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-annotations-fixxref',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: annotations_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_fixxref_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--module-dir=@0@'.format('html'),
++ '--extra-dir=@0@'.format(glib_docpath),
++ '--extra-dir=@0@'.format(gobject_docpath),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-annotations-check',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: annotations_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_check_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--input-dir=@0@'.format(annotations_test_docs_dir),
++ '--output-dir=@0@'.format(annotations_test_output_dir),
++ ],
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<?xml version="1.0"?>
++<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
++ "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd"
++[
++ <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib "xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'">
++ <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM "xml/gtkdocentities.ent">
++ %gtkdocentities;
++]>
++<book id="index" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude">
++ <bookinfo>
++ <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>
++ <releaseinfo>
++ for &package_string;.
++ The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at
++ <ulink role="online-location" url="http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.
++ </releaseinfo>
++ </bookinfo>
++
++ <reference label="2">
++ <title>API Reference</title>
++ <chapter id="main-api">
++ <title>Tests</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/tester.xml"/>
++ </chapter>
++ </reference>
++
++ <part label="3">
++ <title>Appendix</title>
++
++ <index id="api-index">
++ <title>API Index</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-full.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++ <index id="deprecated-api-index" role="deprecated">
++ <title>Index of deprecated API</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-deprecated.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++
++ <glossary id="glossary">
++ <title>Glossary</title>
++ <glossdiv><title>X</title>
++ <glossentry>
++ <glossterm><anchor id="glossterm-XML"/>XML</glossterm>
++ <glossdef>
++ <para>Extensible Markup Language</para>
++ </glossdef>
++ </glossentry>
++ <glossentry>
++ <glossterm><anchor id="glossterm-XSL"/>XSL</glossterm>
++ <glossdef>
++ <para>XML Stylesheet Language</para>
++ </glossdef>
++ </glossentry>
++ </glossdiv>
++ </glossary>
++
++ <xi:include href="xml/annotation-glossary.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </part>
++</book>
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>tester</FILE>
++<TITLE>GtkdocTester</TITLE>
++GtkdocAnnotation
++annotation_array_length
++annotation_allow_none
++annotation_nullable
++annotation_not_nullable
++annotation_elementtype
++annotation_elementtype_transfer
++annotation_elementtype_returns
++annotation_outparams
++annotation_outparams_nullable
++annotation_outparams_not_nullable
++annotation_outparams_optional
++annotation_outparams_not_optional
++annotation_outparams_optional_nullable
++annotation_outparams_not_optional_nullable
++annotation_outparams_optional_not_nullable
++annotation_outparams_not_optional_not_nullable
++annotation_skip
++annotation_skip_return
++annotation_scope
++annotation_rename_to
++annotation_attributes_single
++annotation_attributes_single_eq
++stability_unstable
++annotation_multiline_on_function
++annotation_multiline_on_function2
++<SUBSECTION Standard>
++<SUBSECTION Private>
++</SECTION>
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++subdir('docs')
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++noinst_LTLIBRARIES = libtester.la
++
++libtester_la_SOURCES = tester.c tester.h
++#libtester_la_LIBADD = $(TEST_DEPS_LIBS)
++
++AM_CPPFLAGS = $(TEST_DEPS_CFLAGS)
++
++endif
++
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++/**
++ * SECTION:tester
++ * @short_description: module for gtk-doc unit test
++ * @stability: stable
++ *
++ * This file contains non-sense code for the sole purpose of testing the docs.
++ */
++
++#include <glib.h>
++#include <glib-object.h>
++
++#include "tester.h"
++
++/**
++ * annotation_array_length:
++ * @list: a #GtkListStore
++ * @n_columns: number of columns
++ * @types: (array length=n_columns): list of types
++ *
++ * Document parameter relation for array length.
++ */
++void
++annotation_array_length (GObject *list,
++ gint n_columns,
++ GType *types)
++{
++}
++
++
++/**
++ * annotation_allow_none:
++ * @uri: a uri
++ * @label: (allow-none): an optional string, which is used in ways too
++ * complicated to describe in a single line, making it necessary to wrap it
++ *
++ * Document optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: (transfer full) (allow-none): Returns stuff which you have to
++ * free after use, whose description is also rather long
++ */
++gchar *
++annotation_allow_none (const gchar *uri,
++ const gchar *label)
++{
++ return NULL;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_nullable:
++ * @uri: a uri
++ * @label: (nullable): an optional string, which is used in ways too
++ * complicated to describe in a single line, making it necessary to wrap it
++ *
++ * Document optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: (transfer full) (nullable): Returns stuff which you have to
++ * free after use, whose description is also rather long
++ */
++gchar *
++annotation_nullable (const gchar *uri,
++ const gchar *label)
++{
++ return NULL;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_not_nullable:
++ * @uri: a uri
++ * @label: (not nullable): a non-optional string, which is used in ways too
++ * complicated to describe in a single line, making it necessary to wrap it
++ *
++ * Document non-nullable parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: (transfer full) (not nullable): Returns stuff which you have to
++ * free after use, whose description is also rather long
++ */
++gchar *
++annotation_not_nullable (const gchar *uri,
++ const gchar *label)
++{
++ return NULL;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_elementtype:
++ * @list: (element-type GObject): list of #GObject instances to search
++ *
++ * Document optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean
++annotation_elementtype (const GList *list)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_elementtype_transfer:
++ * @list: (element-type utf8) (transfer full): list of #GObject instances to search
++ *
++ * Document optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean
++annotation_elementtype_transfer (const GList *list)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_elementtype_returns:
++ *
++ * Document optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: (element-type GObject): A list of #GObject instances.
++ */
++GList *
++annotation_elementtype_returns (void)
++{
++ return NULL;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_outparams:
++ * @list: (out) (transfer none): a pointer to take a list
++ *
++ * Document optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean
++annotation_outparams (GList **list)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_outparams_optional:
++ * @list: (out) (transfer none) (optional): a pointer to take a list, or %NULL
++ *
++ * Document optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean
++annotation_outparams_optional (GList **list)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_outparams_not_optional:
++ * @list: (out) (transfer none) (not optional): a pointer to take a list
++ *
++ * Document optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean
++annotation_outparams_not_optional (GList **list)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_outparams_nullable:
++ * @list: (out) (transfer none) (nullable): a pointer to take a list; but %NULL
++ * may also be returned
++ *
++ * Document optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean
++annotation_outparams_nullable (GList **list)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_outparams_not_nullable:
++ * @list: (out) (transfer none) (not nullable): a pointer to take a list; %NULL
++ * must not be returned
++ *
++ * Document optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean
++annotation_outparams_not_nullable (GList **list)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_outparams_optional_nullable:
++ * @list: (out) (transfer none) (optional) (nullable): a pointer to take a
++ * list, or %NULL; but %NULL may also be returned in @list — isn’t that cool?
++ *
++ * Document non-optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean
++annotation_outparams_optional_nullable (GList **list)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_outparams_not_optional_nullable:
++ * @list: (out) (transfer none) (not optional) (nullable): a pointer to take a
++ * list, not %NULL; but %NULL may also be returned in @list — isn’t that cool?
++ *
++ * Document non-optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean
++annotation_outparams_not_optional_nullable (GList **list)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_outparams_optional_not_nullable:
++ * @list: (out) (transfer none) (optional) (not nullable): a pointer to take a
++ * list, not %NULL; and %NULL must not be returned in @list — isn’t that cool?
++ *
++ * Document non-optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean
++annotation_outparams_optional_not_nullable (GList **list)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_outparams_not_optional_not_nullable:
++ * @list: (out) (transfer none) (not optional) (not nullable): a pointer to take a
++ * list, not %NULL; and %NULL must not be returned in @list — isn’t that cool?
++ *
++ * Document non-optional parameters.
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean
++annotation_outparams_not_optional_not_nullable (GList **list)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_skip: (skip)
++ * @list: a pointer to take a list
++ *
++ * Documentation for this function.
++ */
++void
++annotation_skip (GList *list)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_skip_return: (skip)
++ * @list: a pointer to take a list
++ *
++ * Documentation for this function.
++ *
++ * Returns: (skip): %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean
++annotation_skip_return (GList *list)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_scope:
++ * @callback: (scope async): a callback
++ * @user_data: data to pass to callback
++ *
++ * Documentation for this function.
++ */
++void
++annotation_scope (GCallback *callback, gpointer user_data)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_rename_to: (rename-to annotation_scope)
++ *
++ * Documentation for this function.
++ */
++void
++annotation_rename_to (void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_attributes_single: (attributes key value)
++ *
++ * Documentation for this function.
++ */
++void
++annotation_attributes_single (void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_attributes_single_eq: (attributes key=value)
++ *
++ * Documentation for this function.
++ */
++void
++annotation_attributes_single_eq (void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * stability_unstable:
++ *
++ * An experimental function.
++ *
++ * Stability: unstable
++ */
++void
++stability_unstable(void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_multiline_on_function: (rename-to annotation_scope)
++ * (skip)
++ *
++ * Documentation for this function.
++ */
++void annotation_multiline_on_function (void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * annotation_multiline_on_function2:
++ * (rename-to annotation_scope)(skip)
++ *
++ * Documentation for this function.
++ */
++void annotation_multiline_on_function2 (void)
++{
++}
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#ifndef GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++#define GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++
++#include <glib.h>
++#include <glib-object.h>
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocAnnotation:
++ * @that: (allow-none): eventually points to something
++ *
++ * small struct
++ */
++struct _GtkdocAnnotation {
++ gpointer that;
++};
++
++void annotation_array_length (GObject *list, gint n_columns, GType *types);
++
++gchar * annotation_allow_none (const gchar *uri, const gchar *label);
++gchar * annotation_nullable (const gchar *uri, const gchar *label);
++gchar * annotation_not_nullable (const gchar *uri, const gchar *label);
++
++gboolean annotation_elementtype (const GList *list);
++gboolean annotation_elementtype_transfer (const GList *list);
++GList *annotation_elementtype_returns (void);
++
++gboolean annotation_outparams (GList **list);
++gboolean annotation_outparams_optional (GList **list);
++gboolean annotation_outparams_not_optional (GList **list);
++gboolean annotation_outparams_nullable (GList **list);
++gboolean annotation_outparams_not_nullable (GList **list);
++gboolean annotation_outparams_optional_nullable (GList **list);
++gboolean annotation_outparams_not_optional_nullable (GList **list);
++gboolean annotation_outparams_optional_not_nullable (GList **list);
++gboolean annotation_outparams_not_optional_not_nullable (GList **list);
++
++void annotation_skip (GList *list);
++gboolean annotation_skip_return (GList *list);
++
++void annotation_scope (GCallback *callback, gpointer user_data);
++
++void annotation_rename_to (void);
++
++void annotation_attributes_single (void);
++void annotation_attributes_single_eq (void);
++
++void stability_unstable(void);
++
++void annotation_multiline_on_function (void);
++void annotation_multiline_on_function2 (void);
++
++#endif // GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/bin/sh
++
++set -e
++
++gtkdoctest.sh bugs
++sanity.sh bugs
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++SUBDIRS = . src docs
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++check-local: clean
++
++endif
++
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++# We require automake 1.6 at least.
++AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = 1.6
++
++# The name of the module, e.g. 'glib'.
++DOC_MODULE=tester
++
++# The top-level SGML file. You can change this if you want to.
++DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MODULE)-docs.xml
++
++# The directory containing the source code. Relative to $(srcdir).
++# gtk-doc will search all .c & .h files beneath here for inline comments
++# documenting the functions and macros.
++DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/tests/bugs/src
++
++# Extra options to pass to gtkdoc-scangobj. Not normally needed.
++SCANGOBJ_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-scan.
++SCAN_OPTIONS=--deprecated-guards="GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED" \
++ --ignore-decorators='GLIB_VAR|GTKDOC_GNUC_CONST|BUG_711598_DEPRECATED_FOR()|MY_DEPRECATED_FOR()' \
++ --rebuild-types
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkdb.
++MKDB_OPTIONS=--xml-mode
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkhtml
++MKHTML_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-fixref. Not normally needed.
++# --html-dir=$(HTML_DIR)
++FIXXREF_OPTIONS=--extra-dir=$(glib_prefix)/share/gtk-doc/html
++
++# Used for dependencies. The docs will be rebuilt if any of these change.
++HFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/bugs/src/*.h
++CFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/bugs/src/*.c
++
++# Header files to ignore when scanning.
++IGNORE_HFILES=config.h
++
++# Images to copy into HTML directory.
++HTML_IMAGES =
++
++# Extra SGML files that are included by $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE).
++# e.g. content_files=running.sgml building.sgml changes-2.0.sgml
++content_files =
++
++# SGML files where gtk-doc abbreviations (#GtkWidget) are expanded
++# These files must be listed here *and* in content_files
++# e.g. expand_content_files=running.sgml
++expand_content_files=
++
++# CFLAGS and LDFLAGS for compiling gtkdoc-scangobj with your library.
++# Only needed if you are using gtkdoc-scangobj to dynamically query widget
++# signals and properties.
++GTKDOC_CFLAGS = -I$(top_srcdir)/tests/bugs/src $(TEST_DEPS_CFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_LIBS = $(TEST_DEPS_LIBS) $(top_builddir)/tests/bugs/src/libtester.la
++
++# include generic part
++include $(top_srcdir)/tests/gtk-doc.make
++
++# Other files to distribute
++# e.g. EXTRA_DIST += version.xml.in
++EXTRA_DIST +=
++
++CLEANFILES += \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).types
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \
++ DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(srcdir):$(PATH)
++endif
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++bugs_test_source_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'bugs',
++ 'src'
++)
++
++bugs_test_docs_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'bugs',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++bugs_test_output_dir = join_paths(
++ builddir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'bugs',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++bugs_test_html_data = []
++
++test(
++ 'test-bugs-scan',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: bugs_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_scan_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(bugs_test_output_dir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(bugs_test_source_dir),
++ '--ignore-headers=config.h',
++ '--deprecated-guards=GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED',
++ '--ignore-decorators=GLIB_VAR|GTKDOC_GNUC_CONST|BUG_711598_DEPRECATED_FOR()|MY_DEPRECATED_FOR()',
++ '--rebuild-types',
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-bugs-mkdb',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: bugs_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkdb_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(bugs_test_source_dir),
++ '--main-sgml-file=@0@'.format('tester-docs.xml'),
++ '--output-format=xml',
++ '--xml-mode',
++ ],
++)
++
++foreach style_data: gtkdoc_style_data
++ bugs_test_html_data += join_paths(srcdir, 'style', style_data)
++endforeach
++
++test(
++ 'test-bugs-mkhtml',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: bugs_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkhtml_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(join_paths(bugs_test_output_dir, 'html')),
++ '--html-assets=@0@'.format('@@'.join(bugs_test_html_data)),
++ '@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '@0@'.format(join_paths('..', 'tester-docs.xml')),
++ '--uninstalled',
++ '--path=@0@'.format(':'.join([
++ bugs_test_docs_dir,
++ srcdir])
++ ),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-bugs-fixxref',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: bugs_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_fixxref_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--module-dir=@0@'.format('html'),
++ '--extra-dir=@0@'.format(glib_docpath),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-bugs-check',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: bugs_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_check_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--input-dir=@0@'.format(bugs_test_docs_dir),
++ '--output-dir=@0@'.format(bugs_test_output_dir),
++ ],
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<?xml version="1.0"?>
++<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
++ "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd"
++[
++ <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib "xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'">
++ <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM "xml/gtkdocentities.ent">
++ %gtkdocentities;
++]>
++<book id="index" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude">
++ <bookinfo>
++ <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>
++ <releaseinfo>
++ for &package_string;.
++ The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at
++ <ulink role="online-location" url="http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.
++ </releaseinfo>
++ </bookinfo>
++
++ <chapter>
++ <title>Tests</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/tester.xml"/>
++ </chapter>
++
++ <index id="api-index">
++ <title>API Index</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-full.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++ <index id="deprecated-api-index" role="deprecated">
++ <title>Index of deprecated API</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-deprecated.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++ <index id="api-index-0-1" role="0.1">
++ <title>Index of new API in 0.1</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-0.1.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++</book>
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>tester</FILE>
++<TITLE>GtkdocTester</TITLE>
++BUG_530758
++MACRO_FUNCTION
++MACRO_VALUE
++<SUBSECTION Compounds>
++Bug165425a
++Bug165425b
++Bug446648
++Bug512154
++Bug644291
++Bug000000Scope
++Bug76
++MyDeprecatedEnum
++MyNotDeprecatedEnum
++MyDeprecatedStruct
++MyNotDeprecatedStruct
++<SUBSECTION Functions>
++bug_000000_va1
++BUG_000000_VA2
++BUG_000000_VA3
++bug_380824
++bug_419997
++bug_445693
++bug_460127
++bug_471014
++bug_477532
++bug_501038
++bug_512155a_function_pointer_t
++bug_512155b_function_pointer_t
++bug_512155c_function_pointer_t
++bug_554833
++bug_574654a
++bug_574654b
++bug_580300a_get_type
++bug_580300b_get_type
++bug_580300c_get_type
++bug_580300d_get_type
++bug_597937
++bug_602518a
++bug_602518b
++bug_602518c
++bug_607445
++bug_610257
++bug_623968a
++bug_623968b
++bug_623968c
++bug_624200a
++bug_624200b
++bug_638330
++bug_624001a
++bug_624001b
++bug_624001c
++bug_624001d
++bug_624001e
++bug_711598
++bug_749142
++deprecation_notice
++bug_741941
++bug_732689
++bug_783420
++gst_play_marshal_BUFFER__BOXED
++BUG_791928
++_
++inline_func_with_macro
++<SUBSECTION Standard>
++<SUBSECTION Private>
++GTKDOC_GNUC_CONST
++G_GNUC_DEPRECATED
++G_GNUC_DEPRECATED_FOR
++GLIB_DEPRECATED
++BUG_711598_DEPRECATED_FOR
++bug_554833_new
++G_GNUC_NONNULL
++MY_DEPRECATED_FOR
++</SECTION>
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++subdir('docs')
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++noinst_LTLIBRARIES = libtester.la
++
++libtester_la_SOURCES = tester.c tester.h
++#libtester_la_LIBADD = $(TEST_DEPS_LIBS)
++
++AM_CPPFLAGS = $(TEST_DEPS_CFLAGS)
++
++endif
++
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++/**
++ * SECTION:tester
++ * @short_description: module for gtk-doc unit test
++ *
++ * This file contains non-sense code for the sole purpose of testing the docs.
++ *
++ * As described in http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=457077 it
++ * returns nothing.
++ *
++ * Some special characters need escaping. The tests should pass 100\%.
++ * Try a <ulink url="http://www.gtk.org/gtk-doc/#Top">link containing a # char</ulink>.
++ *
++ * <refsect2 id="dummy-id">
++ * <title>more details</title>
++ * <para>
++ * Second paragraph inside subsection.
++ * </para>
++ * </refsect2>
++ */
++
++#include "tester.h"
++
++/**
++ * bug_380824:
++ * @arg: arg
++ *
++ * Returns a value.
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=380824
++ *
++ * Since: 0.1
++ *
++ * Returns: result
++ */
++int bug_380824 (int arg) {
++ return 0;
++}
++
++
++/**
++ * bug_419997:
++ * @const_values: arg
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=419997
++ */
++void bug_419997 (int const_values) {
++}
++
++
++/**
++ * bug_445693:
++ * @pid: arg
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=445693
++ */
++void bug_445693 (unsigned long pid) {
++}
++
++
++/**
++ * bug_471014:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=471014
++ *
++ * Returns: result
++ */
++G_CONST_RETURN gchar* G_CONST_RETURN * bug_471014 (void) {
++ return NULL;
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_574654a:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=574654
++ *
++ * Returns: result
++ */
++/**
++ * bug_574654b:
++ * @offset: skip this many items
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=574654
++ */
++int bug_574654a(void) {
++ return 0;
++}
++
++void bug_574654b(double offset) { }
++
++
++/**
++ * bug_580300a_get_type:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=580300
++ */
++void bug_580300a_get_type(void) { }
++
++/**
++ * bug_580300b_get_type:
++ * @a: value
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=580300
++ */
++void bug_580300b_get_type(gint a) { }
++
++/**
++ * bug_580300c_get_type:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=580300
++ */
++void bug_580300c_get_type() { }
++
++/**
++ * bug_580300d_get_type:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=580300
++ *
++ * Returns: result
++ */
++int bug_580300d_get_type() { return 0; }
++
++/**
++ * bug_597937:
++ * @function_arg: value
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=597937
++ */
++void bug_597937(void (*function_arg)(int arg1, char arg2, void *)) { }
++
++/**
++ * bug_602518a:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=602518
++ *
++ * Returns: result
++ */
++long int bug_602518a(void) {
++ return (long int)0;
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_602518b:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=602518
++ *
++ * Returns: result
++ */
++unsigned long int bug_602518b(void) {
++ return (unsigned long int)0;
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_602518c:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=602518
++ *
++ * Returns: result
++ */
++unsigned int bug_602518c(void) {
++ return (unsigned int)0;
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_607445:
++ * @a: parameter
++ * @n: parameter
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=607445
++ */
++long double bug_607445(long double **a, int n) {
++ return 2.0*n;
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_610257:
++ * @der: parameter
++ * @len: parameter
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=610257
++ */
++signed long
++bug_610257(const unsigned char *der, int *len)
++{
++ return 1L;
++}
++
++
++/**
++ * bug_623968a:
++ *
++ * <para>test</para>
++ * <refsect3>
++ * <title>subsect</title>
++ * <para>test</para>
++ * </refsect3>
++ **/
++void
++bug_623968a(void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_623968b:
++ *
++ * test
++ *
++ * <refsect3>
++ * <title>subsect</title>
++ * <para>test</para>
++ * </refsect3>
++ **/
++void
++bug_623968b(void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_623968c:
++ *
++ * <para>test</para>
++ **/
++void
++bug_623968c(void)
++{
++}
++
++
++/**
++ * bug_624200a:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=624200
++ *
++ * Returns: result
++ */
++const char * const *
++bug_624200a(void)
++{
++ return NULL;
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_624200b:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=624200
++ *
++ * Returns: result
++ */
++const char ** const
++bug_624200b(void)
++{
++ return NULL;
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_638330:
++ * @arg1: arg1
++ * @data: data
++ * @length: length
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=638330
++ */
++void (*bug_638330) (void *arg1,
++ const unsigned char *data,
++ unsigned int length) = NULL;
++
++
++/* internal function */
++gchar *
++_bug_000000a (const gchar *name)
++{
++ return NULL;
++}
++
++/* varargs */
++
++/**
++ * bug_000000_va1:
++ * @name: a name
++ * @...: A printf-style message to output
++ *
++ * Outputs a message.
++ */
++void bug_000000_va1 (gchar name, ...)
++{
++}
++
++
++/**
++ * bug_624001a:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=624001
++ *
++ * Deprecated: Use main() instead.
++ */
++void bug_624001a(void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_624001b:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=624001
++ *
++ * Deprecated: Use main() instead.
++ */
++void bug_624001b(void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_624001c:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=624001
++ *
++ * Deprecated: Use main() instead.
++ */
++void bug_624001c(void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_624001d:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=624001
++ *
++ * Deprecated: Use main() instead.
++ */
++void bug_624001d(void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_624001e:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=624001
++ *
++ * Deprecated: Use main() instead.
++ */
++void bug_624001e(void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_711598:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=711598
++ */
++void bug_711598(void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * deprecation_notice:
++ *
++ * Foo.
++ *
++ * Deprecated: 3.10: Use named icon "bar" instead.
++ */
++void deprecation_notice(void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_741941:
++ * @object: the object
++ * @par: parameter
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=741941
++ */
++void bug_741941(void *object, void *par)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_732689:
++ * @spec: the string specifying the color.
++ *
++ * Parses a textual specification of a color and fill in the
++ * <structfield>red</structfield>, <structfield>green</structfield>,
++ * and <structfield>blue</structfield> fields of a color.
++ **/
++void
++bug_732689 (const gchar *spec)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_749142:
++ *
++ * The message's structure contains one field:
++ * <itemizedlist>
++ * <listitem><para>int timeout: the timeout.</para></listitem>
++ * </itemizedlist>
++ *
++ * <refsect3>
++ * <title>Example usage</title>
++ * |[
++ * echo "Hello" | foo
++ * ]|
++ * </refsect3>
++ **/
++void
++bug_749142 (void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * bug_783420:
++ * @in: input
++ * @out: output
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=783420
++ *
++ * |[
++ * #include <tester.h>
++ *
++ * int res;
++ * bug_783420(42, &res);
++ * ]|
++ *
++ * <refsect2 id="subsect">
++ * <title>Subsection</title>
++ * <para>
++ * Lorem ipsum ...
++ * |[
++ * #include <tester.h>
++ *
++ * int res;
++ * bug_783420(42, &res);
++ * ]|
++ * </para>
++ * </refsect2>
++ */
++void
++bug_783420 (int in, int *out)
++{
++}
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#ifndef GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++#define GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++
++#include <glib.h>
++
++
++/**
++ * bug_501038:
++ * @a: value
++ * @b: deprecated value
++ * @_b: scrambled deprecated value
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=501038
++ */
++struct _bug_501038 {
++ gint a;
++#ifndef GTK_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
++ gint b;
++#else
++ gint _b;
++#endif
++};
++
++
++#define _PADDDING 4
++/**
++ * bug_460127:
++ * @a: field
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=460127
++ */
++struct _bug_460127 {
++ /*< public >*/
++ gint a;
++
++ /*< private >*/
++ union {
++ struct {
++ gint b;
++ } ABI;
++ gpointer _reserved[_PADDDING + 0];
++ } abidata;
++};
++
++
++/**
++ * bug_477532:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=477532
++ */
++GLIB_VAR guint64 (*bug_477532) (void);
++
++int bug_380824 (int arg);
++
++void bug_419997 (int const_values);
++
++void bug_445693 (unsigned long pid);
++
++G_CONST_RETURN gchar* G_CONST_RETURN *
++bug_471014 (void);
++
++/**
++ * Bug446648:
++ * @BUG_446648_FOO: foo
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=446648
++ */
++typedef enum _Bug446648 Bug446648;
++enum _Bug446648 {
++ BUG_446648_FOO
++};
++
++/**
++ * Bug512154:
++ * @index: field
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=512154
++ */
++typedef struct {
++ unsigned long index;
++} Bug512154;
++
++
++/**
++ * bug_512155a_function_pointer_t:
++ * @arg1: param 1
++ * @arg2: param 1
++ * @arg3: param 1
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=512155
++ */
++typedef int
++(*bug_512155a_function_pointer_t) (unsigned int arg1, unsigned int arg2,
++ unsigned int arg3);
++
++/**
++ * bug_512155b_function_pointer_t:
++ * @arg1: param 1
++ * @arg2: param 1
++ * @arg3: param 1
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=512155
++ */
++typedef
++int (*bug_512155b_function_pointer_t) (unsigned int arg1, unsigned int arg2,
++ unsigned int arg3);
++
++/**
++ * bug_512155c_function_pointer_t:
++ * @arg1: param 1
++ * @arg2: param 1
++ * @arg3: param 1
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=512155
++ */
++typedef int (*bug_512155c_function_pointer_t) (unsigned int arg1,
++ unsigned int arg2,
++ unsigned int arg3);
++
++
++/**
++ * BUG_530758:
++ *
++ * <![CDATA[http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=530758#c1]]>
++ *
++ * <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=530758#c1">Test</ulink>
++ */
++#define BUG_530758 "dummy"
++
++
++/**
++ * bug_554833:
++ * @i: value;
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=554833
++ */
++struct _bug_554833 {
++ int i;
++};
++
++
++/**
++ * bug_554833_new:
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=554833
++ *
++ * Returns: result
++ */
++struct _bug_554833 *
++ bug_554833_new (void);
++
++
++#define GTKDOC_GNUC_CONST
++int bug_574654a(void) GTKDOC_GNUC_CONST;
++void bug_574654b(double offset);
++
++
++void bug_580300a_get_type(void);
++void bug_580300b_get_type(gint a);
++void bug_580300c_get_type();
++extern int bug_580300d_get_type();
++
++void bug_597937(void (*function_arg)(int arg1, char arg2, void *));
++
++long int bug_602518a(void);
++unsigned long int bug_602518b(void);
++unsigned int bug_602518c(void);
++
++/**
++ * Bug165425a:
++ * @i: data as int
++ * @f: data as float
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=165425
++ */
++union _Bug165425a {
++ int i;
++ float f;
++};
++typedef union _Bug165425a Bug165425a;
++
++/**
++ * Bug165425b:
++ * @i: data as int
++ * @f: data as float
++ *
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=165425
++ */
++typedef union _Bug165425b {
++ int i;
++ float f;
++} Bug165425b;
++
++
++/*
++ * BugXXX1b:
++ * @a: field
++ *
++ * No bug report
++ *
++typedef struct _BugXXX1b BugXXX1b;
++struct _BugXXX1b {
++ *//*< protected >*//*
++ gint a;
++
++ *//*< private >*//*
++ gint b;
++};
++*/
++
++long double bug_607445(long double **a, int n);
++
++
++signed long bug_610257(const unsigned char *der, int *len);
++
++
++void bug_623968a(void);
++void bug_623968b(void);
++void bug_623968c(void);
++
++
++#define _BUG_624199(struct_type, n_structs, func) \
++ (struct_type *) (__extension__ ({ \
++ gsize __n = (gsize) (n_structs); \
++ gsize __s = sizeof (struct_type); \
++ gpointer __p; \
++ if (__s == 1) \
++ __p = g_##func (__n); \
++ else if (__builtin_constant_p (__n) && \
++ (__s == 0 || __n <= G_MAXSIZE / __s)) \
++ __p = g_##func (__n * __s); \
++ else \
++ __p = g_##func##_n (__n, __s); \
++ __p; \
++ }))
++
++
++const char * const * bug_624200a(void);
++const char ** const bug_624200b(void);
++
++
++/* internal function */
++gchar *_bug_000000a (const gchar *name);
++
++void (*bug_638330) (void *arg1,
++ const unsigned char *data,
++ unsigned int length);
++
++
++/**
++ * Bug644291:
++ * @BUG_644291_START: foo
++ * @BUG_644291_TEXT: bar
++ * @BUG_644291_END: milk
++ * @BUG_644291_ATTRIBUTE: comes
++ * @BUG_644291_XMLNS: from
++ * @BUG_644291_ASSIGN_TO: cows
++ *
++ * https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=644291
++ */
++typedef enum
++{
++ BUG_644291_START = '(',
++ BUG_644291_TEXT = '$',
++ BUG_644291_END = ')',
++ BUG_644291_ATTRIBUTE = '@',
++ BUG_644291_XMLNS = ':',
++ BUG_644291_ASSIGN_TO = '*'
++} Bug644291;
++
++/* varargs */
++
++extern void bug_000000_va1 (gchar name, ...);
++
++/**
++ * BUG_000000_VA2:
++ * @name: a name
++ * @...: A printf-style message to output
++ *
++ * Outputs a message.
++ */
++#define BUG_000000_VA2(name,...)
++
++/**
++ * BUG_000000_VA3:
++ * @name: a name
++ * @...: A printf-style message to output
++ *
++ * Outputs a message.
++ */
++#define BUG_000000_VA3(name,args...)
++
++/**
++ * Bug000000Scope:
++ *
++ * Opaque structure.
++ * "warning: Field descriptions for Bug000000Scope are missing in source code comment block."
++ * but not if we remove the blank line before "int b";
++ */
++typedef struct _Bug000000Scope Bug000000Scope;
++struct _Bug000000Scope {
++ /*< private >*/
++ union {
++ struct {
++ /* comment */
++ int a;
++ } ABI;
++ gpointer _reserved[4 - 1];
++ } abidata;
++
++ int b;
++};
++
++/**
++ * gst_play_marshal_BUFFER__BOXED:
++ * @closure: test
++ * @return_value: test
++ * @marshal_data: test
++ *
++ * test.
++ */
++void
++gst_play_marshal_BUFFER__BOXED (gint * closure,
++ gint * return_value G_GNUC_UNUSED,
++ gpointer marshal_data);
++
++
++#ifndef G_GNUC_DEPRECATED
++#define G_GNUC_DEPRECATED
++#endif
++#ifndef G_GNUC_DEPRECATED_FOR
++#define G_GNUC_DEPRECATED_FOR(a)
++#endif
++
++void bug_624001a(void) G_GNUC_DEPRECATED;
++void bug_624001b(void) G_GNUC_DEPRECATED_FOR(bug_624001a);
++
++G_GNUC_DEPRECATED
++void bug_624001c(void);
++
++G_GNUC_DEPRECATED_FOR(bug_624001c)
++void bug_624001d(void);
++
++#ifndef GLIB_DEPRECATED
++#define GLIB_DEPRECATED
++#endif
++
++GLIB_DEPRECATED
++void bug_624001e (void);
++
++#define BUG_711598_DEPRECATED_FOR(f) G_GNUC_DEPRECATED_FOR(f)
++BUG_711598_DEPRECATED_FOR(bug_711598b)
++void bug_711598(void);
++
++#ifdef GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
++void deprecation_notice(void);
++#endif
++
++#ifndef G_GNUC_NONNULL
++#define G_GNUC_NONNULL(a)
++#endif
++void bug_741941(void *object, void *par) G_GNUC_NONNULL(1) G_GNUC_NONNULL(2);
++
++void bug_732689 (const gchar *spec);
++void bug_749142 (void);
++
++void bug_783420 (int in, int *out);
++
++/**
++ * MACRO_VALUE:
++ *
++ * This should be listed in the types and values section.
++ */
++#define MACRO_VALUE (1 << 1)
++
++/**
++ * MACRO_FUNCTION:
++ * @x: a value
++ *
++ * This should be listed in the functions section.
++ */
++#define MACRO_FUNCTION(x) (x << 1)
++
++/**
++ * _:
++ * @str: a string
++ *
++ * https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=753052
++ */
++#define _(str) str
++
++/**
++ * BUG_791928:
++ *
++ * https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=791928
++ *
++ * Stability: UndefinedTestValue
++ */
++#define BUG_791928 1
++
++/**
++ * Bug76:
++ * @arg: The type of the option, as a #GOptionArg
++ * @arg_data: If the @arg type is %G_OPTION_ARG_CALLBACK, then @arg_data
++ * must point to a #GOptionArgFunc callback function, which will be
++ * called to handle the extra argument. Otherwise, @arg_data is a
++ * pointer to a location to store the value, the required type of
++ * the location depends on the @arg type:
++ * - %G_OPTION_ARG_NONE: %gboolean
++ * - %G_OPTION_ARG_STRING: %gchar*
++ * - %G_OPTION_ARG_INT: %gint
++ * - %G_OPTION_ARG_FILENAME: %gchar*
++ * - %G_OPTION_ARG_STRING_ARRAY: %gchar**
++ * - %G_OPTION_ARG_FILENAME_ARRAY: %gchar**
++ * - %G_OPTION_ARG_DOUBLE: %gdouble
++ * If @arg type is %G_OPTION_ARG_STRING or %G_OPTION_ARG_FILENAME,
++ * the location will contain a newly allocated string if the option
++ * was given. That string needs to be freed by the callee using g_free().
++ * Likewise if @arg type is %G_OPTION_ARG_STRING_ARRAY or
++ * %G_OPTION_ARG_FILENAME_ARRAY, the data should be freed using g_strfreev().
++ * @description: the description for the option in `--help`
++ * output. The @description is translated using the @translate_func
++ * of the group, see g_option_group_set_translation_domain().
++ *
++ * https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk-doc/issues/76
++ */
++struct _Bug76
++{
++ int arg;
++ void * arg_data;
++ char * description;
++};
++typedef struct _Bug76 Bug76;
++
++#define MY_DEPRECATED_FOR(val)
++
++/**
++ * MyNotDeprecatedEnum:
++ * @MY_NOT_DEPRECATED_ENUM_VAL1: new value
++ *
++ * some description
++ */
++typedef enum {
++ MY_NOT_DEPRECATED_ENUM_VAL1,
++} MyNotDeprecatedEnum;
++
++/**
++ * MyDeprecatedEnum:
++ * @MY_DEPRECATED_ENUM_VAL1: deprecated, use instead %MY_DEPRECATED_ENUM_VAL2
++ * @MY_DEPRECATED_ENUM_VAL2: val2
++ *
++ * some description
++ * Deprecated: Use #MyNotDeprecatedEnum instead
++ */
++typedef enum {
++ MY_DEPRECATED_ENUM_VAL1 MY_DEPRECATED_FOR(MY_DEPRECATED_ENUM_VAL2),
++ MY_DEPRECATED_ENUM_VAL2,
++} MyDeprecatedEnum MY_DEPRECATED_FOR(MyNotDeprecatedEnum);
++
++/**
++ * MyDeprecatedStruct:
++ *
++ * some description
++ * Deprecated: Use #MyNotDeprecatedStruct instead
++ */
++typedef struct _MyDeprecatedStruct MyDeprecatedStruct MY_DEPRECATED_FOR(MyNotDeprecatedStruct);
++struct _MyDeprecatedStruct {
++ /*< private >*/
++ guint index;
++} MY_DEPRECATED_FOR(MyNotDeprecatedStruct);
++
++/**
++ * MyNotDeprecatedStruct:
++ *
++ * some description
++ */
++typedef struct {
++ /*< private >*/
++ guint index_plop;
++} MyNotDeprecatedStruct;
++
++/**
++ * inline_func_with_macro:
++ * @obj: arg
++ *
++ * GLib has a few inline functions with a macro that has the same name. It puts
++ * the inline function name into parenthesis to avoid macro expansion.
++ * See g_set_object().
++ */
++static inline gboolean
++(inline_func_with_macro) (void *obj)
++{
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++#define inline_func_with_macro(obj)
++
++#endif // GTKDOC_TESTER_H
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2017 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import unittest
++
++from gtkdoc import check
++
++
++class TestCheck(unittest.TestCase):
++
++ def test_grep_finds_token_in_one_line(self):
++ result = check.grep(r'^(foo)', ['foo'], 'foo')
++ self.assertEqual('foo', result)
++
++ def test_grep_does_not_find_token(self):
++ with self.assertRaises(check.FileFormatError) as ctx:
++ check.grep(r'^(foo)', ['bar'], 'foo')
++ self.assertEqual(str(ctx.exception), 'foo')
++
++ def test_get_variable_prefers_env(self):
++ result = check.get_variable({'foo': 'bar'}, ['foo=baz'], 'foo')
++ self.assertEqual('bar', result)
++
++ def test_get_variable_finds_in_file(self):
++ result = check.get_variable({}, ['foo=bar'], 'foo')
++ self.assertEqual('bar', result)
++
++ def test_get_variable_finds_in_file_with_whitespce(self):
++ result = check.get_variable({}, ['foo = bar'], 'foo')
++ self.assertEqual('bar', result)
++
++ def test_get_variable_empty_file(self):
++ with self.assertRaises(check.FileFormatError) as ctx:
++ check.get_variable({}, [], 'foo')
++ self.assertEqual(str(ctx.exception), 'foo')
++
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ unittest.main()
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2017 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++from unittest import mock
++import unittest
++
++from gtkdoc import common
++
++
++class TestUpdateFileIfChanged(unittest.TestCase):
++
++ @mock.patch('os.path.exists')
++ @mock.patch('os.rename')
++ def test_NoOldFile(self, os_rename, os_path_exists):
++ os_path_exists.return_value = False
++ res = common.UpdateFileIfChanged('/old', '/new', False)
++ os_rename.assert_called_with('/new', '/old')
++ self.assertTrue(res)
++
++ @mock.patch('os.path.exists')
++ @mock.patch('builtins.open', mock.mock_open(read_data='bar'))
++ @mock.patch('os.unlink')
++ def test_FilesAreTheSame(self, os_unlink, os_path_exists):
++ os_path_exists.return_value = True
++ res = common.UpdateFileIfChanged('/old', '/new', False)
++ os_unlink.assert_called_with('/new')
++ self.assertFalse(res)
++
++
++class TestGetModuleDocDir(unittest.TestCase):
++
++ @mock.patch('subprocess.check_output')
++ def test_ReturnsPath(self, subprocess_check_output):
++ subprocess_check_output.return_value = '/usr'
++ self.assertEqual(common.GetModuleDocDir('glib-2.0'), '/usr/share/gtk-doc/html')
++
++
++class TestCreateValidSGMLID(unittest.TestCase):
++
++ def test_AlreadyValid(self):
++ self.assertEqual(common.CreateValidSGMLID('x'), 'x')
++
++ def test_SpecialCharsBecomeDash(self):
++ self.assertEqual(common.CreateValidSGMLID('x_ y'), 'x--y')
++
++ def test_SpecialCharsGetRemoved(self):
++ self.assertEqual(common.CreateValidSGMLID('x,;y'), 'xy')
++
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ unittest.main()
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/bin/sh
++
++set -e
++
++if ! grep -q ^GtkDocTestIf$ empty/docs/tester-sections.txt; then
++ echo "Test for bug https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=705633 has failed."
++ exit 1
++fi
++
++gtkdoctest.sh empty
++sanity.sh empty
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++SUBDIRS = . src docs
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++check-local: clean
++ @rm -f docs/tester-docs.xml
++
++endif
++
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++# this tests bootstraps gtk-doc, that includes generating a default
++# DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE
++# right now that fails with parallel make, as make cannot see that what is a
++# dependency for another target is generated as needed
++MAKEFLAGS = -j1
++
++# We require automake 1.6 at least.
++AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = 1.6
++
++# The name of the module, e.g. 'glib'.
++DOC_MODULE=tester
++
++# The top-level SGML file. You can change this if you want to.
++DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MODULE)-docs.xml
++
++# The directory containing the source code. Relative to $(srcdir).
++# gtk-doc will search all .c & .h files beneath here for inline comments
++# documenting the functions and macros.
++DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/tests/empty/src
++
++# Extra options to pass to gtkdoc-scangobj. Not normally needed.
++SCANGOBJ_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-scan.
++SCAN_OPTIONS=--deprecated-guards="GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED" \
++ --rebuild-sections
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkdb.
++MKDB_OPTIONS=--xml-mode
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkhtml
++MKHTML_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-fixref. Not normally needed.
++# --html-dir=$(HTML_DIR)
++FIXXREF_OPTIONS=--extra-dir=$(glib_prefix)/share/gtk-doc/html
++
++# Used for dependencies. The docs will be rebuilt if any of these change.
++HFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/empty/src/*.h
++CFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/empty/src/*.c
++
++# Header files to ignore when scanning.
++IGNORE_HFILES=config.h
++
++# Images to copy into HTML directory.
++HTML_IMAGES =
++
++# Extra SGML files that are included by $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE).
++# e.g. content_files=running.sgml building.sgml changes-2.0.sgml
++content_files =
++
++# SGML files where gtk-doc abbreviations (#GtkWidget) are expanded
++# These files must be listed here *and* in content_files
++# e.g. expand_content_files=running.sgml
++expand_content_files=
++
++# CFLAGS and LDFLAGS for compiling gtkdoc-scangobj with your library.
++# Only needed if you are using gtkdoc-scangobj to dynamically query widget
++# signals and properties.
++GTKDOC_CFLAGS = -I$(top_srcdir)/tests/empty/src $(TEST_DEPS_CFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_LIBS = $(TEST_DEPS_LIBS) $(top_builddir)/tests/empty/src/libtester.la
++
++# include generic part
++include $(top_srcdir)/tests/gtk-doc.make
++
++# Other files to distribute
++# e.g. EXTRA_DIST += version.xml.in
++EXTRA_DIST +=
++
++CLEANFILES += \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).types
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \
++ DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(srcdir):$(PATH)
++endif
++
++CLEANFILES += \
++ tester-docs.xml \
++ tester-sections.txt
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++empty_test_source_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'empty',
++ 'src'
++)
++
++empty_test_docs_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'empty',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++empty_test_output_dir = join_paths(
++ builddir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'empty',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++empty_test_html_data = []
++
++test(
++ 'test-empty-scan',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: empty_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_scan_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(empty_test_output_dir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(empty_test_source_dir),
++ '--ignore-headers=config.h',
++ '--deprecated-guards=GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED',
++ '--rebuild-sections',
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-empty-mkdb',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: empty_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkdb_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(empty_test_source_dir),
++ '--main-sgml-file=@0@'.format('tester-docs.xml'),
++ '--output-format=xml',
++ '--xml-mode',
++ ],
++)
++
++foreach style_data: gtkdoc_style_data
++ empty_test_html_data += join_paths(srcdir, 'style', style_data)
++endforeach
++
++test(
++ 'test-empty-mkhtml',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: empty_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkhtml_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(join_paths(empty_test_output_dir, 'html')),
++ '--html-assets=@0@'.format('@@'.join(empty_test_html_data)),
++ '@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '@0@'.format(join_paths('..', 'tester-docs.xml')),
++ '--uninstalled',
++ '--path=@0@'.format(':'.join([
++ empty_test_docs_dir,
++ srcdir])
++ ),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-empty-fixxref',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: empty_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_fixxref_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--module-dir=@0@'.format('html'),
++ '--extra-dir=@0@'.format(glib_docpath),
++ '--extra-dir=@0@'.format(gobject_docpath),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-empty-check',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: empty_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_check_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--input-dir=@0@'.format(empty_test_docs_dir),
++ '--output-dir=@0@'.format(empty_test_output_dir),
++ ],
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++subdir('docs')
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++noinst_LTLIBRARIES = libtester.la
++
++libtester_la_SOURCES = tester.c tester.h
++#libtester_la_LIBADD = $(TEST_DEPS_LIBS)
++
++AM_CPPFLAGS = $(TEST_DEPS_CFLAGS)
++
++endif
++
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++/**
++ * SECTION:tester
++ * @short_description: module for gtk-doc unit test
++ *
++ * This file contains non-sense code for the sole purpose of testing the docs.
++ *
++ * As described in http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=457077 it
++ * returns nothing.
++ */
++
++#include "tester.h"
++
++/**
++ * test:
++ * @a: arg
++ *
++ * lonely function
++ */
++void test (gint a) {
++}
++
++/**
++ * GtkDocTestIf:
++ *
++ * test object
++ */
++/**
++ * GtkDocTestIfInterface:
++ * @parent: parent interface type.
++ *
++ * test interface
++ */
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#ifndef GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++#define GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++
++#include <glib.h>
++#include <glib-object.h>
++
++/**
++ * FOO:
++ *
++ * The FOO.
++ *
++ * Since: 0.1
++ */
++#define FOO "bar"
++
++void test (gint a);
++
++// test for https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=705633
++typedef struct _GtkDocTestIf GtkDocTestIf;
++typedef struct _GtkDocTestIfInterface GtkDocTestIfInterface;
++
++struct _GtkDocTestIfInterface {
++ GTypeInterface parent;
++
++};
++
++#endif // GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/bin/sh
++
++dir=`dirname $0`
++suite="fail"
++DOC_MODULE="tester"
++failed=0
++tested=0
++
++cd $dir/$suite/docs
++
++echo "Running suite(s): gtk-doc-$suite";
++
++# tests
++# check missing section description
++# we can't just check for a missing "tester_nodocs" entry
++grep >/dev/null "tester_nodocs:long_description" $DOC_MODULE-undocumented.txt
++if test $? = 1 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++
++# check missing section long description
++grep >/dev/null "tester_nolongdesc:long_description" $DOC_MODULE-undocumented.txt
++if test $? = 1 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++
++# check missing section short description
++grep >/dev/null "tester_noshortdesc:short_description" $DOC_MODULE-undocumented.txt
++if test $? = 1 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++
++# check enums
++grep >/dev/null "EnumNoItemDocs (<items>)" $DOC_MODULE-undocumented.txt
++if test $? = 1 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++
++# summary
++successes=`expr $tested - $failed`
++rate=`expr 100 \* $successes / $tested`;
++echo "$rate %: Checks $tested, Failures: $failed"
++
++test $failed = 0
++exit $?
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++SUBDIRS = . src docs
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++check-local: clean
++
++endif
++
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++# We require automake 1.6 at least.
++AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = 1.6
++
++# The name of the module, e.g. 'glib'.
++DOC_MODULE=tester
++
++# The top-level SGML file. You can change this if you want to.
++DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MODULE)-docs.xml
++
++# The directory containing the source code. Relative to $(srcdir).
++# gtk-doc will search all .c & .h files beneath here for inline comments
++# documenting the functions and macros.
++DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/tests/fail/src
++
++# Extra options to pass to gtkdoc-scangobj. Not normally needed.
++SCANGOBJ_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-scan.
++SCAN_OPTIONS=--deprecated-guards="GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED" \
++ --ignore-decorators="GLIB_VAR"
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkdb.
++MKDB_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkhtml
++MKHTML_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-fixref. Not normally needed.
++# --html-dir=$(HTML_DIR)
++FIXXREF_OPTIONS=--extra-dir=$(glib_prefix)/share/gtk-doc/html
++
++# Used for dependencies. The docs will be rebuilt if any of these change.
++HFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/fail/src/*.h
++CFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/fail/src/*.c
++
++# Header files to ignore when scanning.
++IGNORE_HFILES=config.h
++
++# Images to copy into HTML directory.
++HTML_IMAGES =
++
++# Extra SGML files that are included by $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE).
++# e.g. content_files=running.sgml building.sgml changes-2.0.sgml
++content_files =
++
++# SGML files where gtk-doc abbreviations (#GtkWidget) are expanded
++# These files must be listed here *and* in content_files
++# e.g. expand_content_files=running.sgml
++expand_content_files=
++
++# CFLAGS and LDFLAGS for compiling gtkdoc-scangobj with your library.
++# Only needed if you are using gtkdoc-scangobj to dynamically query widget
++# signals and properties.
++GTKDOC_CFLAGS = -I$(top_srcdir)/tests/fail/src $(TEST_DEPS_CFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_LIBS = $(TEST_DEPS_LIBS) $(top_builddir)/tests/fail/src/libtester.la
++
++# include generic part
++include $(top_srcdir)/tests/gtk-doc.make
++
++# Other files to distribute
++# e.g. EXTRA_DIST += version.xml.in
++EXTRA_DIST +=
++
++CLEANFILES += \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \
++ DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(srcdir):$(PATH)
++endif
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++fail_test_source_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'fail',
++ 'src'
++)
++
++fail_test_docs_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'fail',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++fail_test_output_dir = join_paths(
++ builddir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'fail',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++fail_test_html_data = []
++
++test(
++ 'test-fail-scan',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: fail_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_scan_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(fail_test_output_dir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(fail_test_source_dir),
++ '--ignore-headers=config.h',
++ '--deprecated-guards=GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED',
++ '--ignore-decorators=GLIB_VAR',
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-fail-mkdb',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: fail_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkdb_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(fail_test_source_dir),
++ '--main-sgml-file=@0@'.format('tester-docs.xml'),
++ '--output-format=xml',
++ '--xml-mode',
++ ],
++)
++
++foreach style_data: gtkdoc_style_data
++ fail_test_html_data += join_paths(srcdir, 'style', style_data)
++endforeach
++
++test(
++ 'test-fail-mkhtml',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: fail_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkhtml_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(join_paths(fail_test_output_dir, 'html')),
++ '--html-assets=@0@'.format('@@'.join(fail_test_html_data)),
++ '@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '@0@'.format(join_paths('..', 'tester-docs.xml')),
++ '--uninstalled',
++ '--path=@0@'.format(':'.join([
++ fail_test_docs_dir,
++ srcdir])
++ ),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-fail-fixxref',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: fail_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_fixxref_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--module-dir=@0@'.format('html'),
++ '--extra-dir=@0@'.format(glib_docpath),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-fail-check',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: fail_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ should_fail: true,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_check_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--input-dir=@0@'.format(fail_test_docs_dir),
++ '--output-dir=@0@'.format(fail_test_output_dir),
++ ],
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<?xml version="1.0"?>
++<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
++ "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd"
++[
++ <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib "xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'">
++ <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM "xml/gtkdocentities.ent">
++ %gtkdocentities;
++]>
++<book id="index" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude">
++ <bookinfo>
++ <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>
++ <releaseinfo>
++ for &package_string;.
++ </releaseinfo>
++ </bookinfo>
++
++ <chapter>
++ <title>Tests</title>
++ <!--
++ <xi:include href="xml/tester_nodocs.xml"/>
++ <xi:include href="xml/tester_nolongdesc.xml"/>
++ <xi:include href="xml/tester_noshortdesc.xml"/>
++ -->
++ <xi:include href="xml/tester_brokendocs.xml"/>
++ </chapter>
++
++ <index id="api-index">
++ <title>API Index</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-full.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++ <index id="deprecated-api-index" role="deprecated">
++ <title>Index of deprecated API</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-deprecated.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++
++</book>
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>tester_nodocs</FILE>
++</SECTION>
++
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>tester_nolongdesc</FILE>
++</SECTION>
++
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>tester_noshortdesc</FILE>
++</SECTION>
++
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>tester_brokendocs</FILE>
++MACRO_NO_ITEM_DOCS
++MACRO_INCOMPLETE_DOCS
++MACRO_UNUSED_DOCS
++EnumNoItemDocs
++EnumIncompleteDocs
++EnumUnusedDocs
++StructNoItemDocs
++StructIncompleteDocs
++StructUnusedDocs
++func_no_docs
++func_no_item_docs
++func_incomplete_docs
++func_unused_docs
++</SECTION>
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++subdir('docs')
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++noinst_LTLIBRARIES = libtester.la
++
++libtester_la_SOURCES = tester.c tester.h
++#libtester_la_LIBADD = $(TEST_DEPS_LIBS)
++
++AM_CPPFLAGS = $(TEST_DEPS_CFLAGS)
++
++endif
++
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++/*
++ * SECTION:tester_nodocs
++ * @short_description: module for gtk-doc unit test
++ * @title: GtkdocTesterNoDocs
++ *
++ * This file contains non-sense code for the sole purpose of testing the docs.
++ */
++/**
++ * SECTION:tester_nolongdesc
++ * @short_description: module for gtk-doc unit test
++ * @title: GtkdocTesterNoLongDesc
++ */
++/**
++ * SECTION:tester_noshortdesc
++ * @title: GtkdocTesterNoShortDesc
++ *
++ * This file contains non-sense code for the sole purpose of testing the docs.
++ */
++/**
++ * SECTION:tester_brokendocs
++ * @short_description: module for gtk-doc unit test
++ * @title: GtkdocTesterBrokenDocs
++ *
++ * This file contains non-sense code for the sole purpose of testing the docs.
++ */
++
++#include "tester.h"
++
++/**
++ * func_no_docs:
++ */
++void
++func_no_docs(void)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * func_no_item_docs:
++ *
++ * Here we document the function but not the parameters.
++ */
++void
++func_no_item_docs(int a, char b)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * func_incomplete_docs:
++ * @a: a value
++ *
++ * Here we document the function but not all the parameters.
++ */
++void
++func_incomplete_docs(int a, char b)
++{
++}
++
++/**
++ * func_unused_docs:
++ * @a: a value
++ * @b: a value
++ * @c: an unexisting value
++ *
++ * Here we document the function and more than the actual parameters.
++ */
++void
++func_unused_docs(int a, char b)
++{
++}
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#ifndef GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++#define GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++
++#include <glib.h>
++
++/**
++ * MACRO_NO_ITEM_DOCS:
++ *
++ * Here we document the macro but not the parameters.
++ */
++#define MACRO_NO_ITEM_DOCS(a,b) (a+b)
++
++/**
++ * MACRO_INCOMPLETE_DOCS:
++ * @a: a value
++ *
++ * Here we document the macro but not all the parameters.
++ */
++#define MACRO_INCOMPLETE_DOCS(a,b) (a+b)
++
++/**
++ * MACRO_UNUSED_DOCS:
++ * @a: a value
++ * @b: a value
++ * @c: an unexisting value
++ *
++ * Here we document the macro and more than the actual parameters.
++ */
++#define MACRO_UNUSED_DOCS(a,b) (a+b)
++
++
++/**
++ * EnumNoItemDocs:
++ *
++ * Here we document the enum but not the values.
++ * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=568711
++ */
++typedef enum {
++ ENUM_NO_ITEM_DOCS_1,
++ ENUM_NO_ITEM_DOCS_2
++} EnumNoItemDocs;
++
++/**
++ * EnumIncompleteDocs:
++ * @ENUM_INCOMPLETE_DOCS_1: a value
++ *
++ * Here we document the enum but not all the values.
++ */
++typedef enum {
++ ENUM_INCOMPLETE_DOCS_1,
++ ENUM_INCOMPLETE_DOCS_2
++} EnumIncompleteDocs;
++
++/**
++ * EnumUnusedDocs:
++ * @ENUM_UNUSED_DOCS_1: a value
++ * @ENUM_UNUSED_DOCS_2: a value
++ * @ENUM_UNUSED_DOCS_3: an unexisting value
++ *
++ * Here we document the enum and more than the actual values.
++ */
++typedef enum {
++ ENUM_UNUSED_DOCS_1,
++ ENUM_UNUSED_DOCS_2
++} EnumUnusedDocs;
++
++
++/**
++ * StructNoItemDocs:
++ *
++ * Here we document the struct but not the values.
++ */
++typedef struct {
++ int a;
++ char b;
++} StructNoItemDocs;
++
++/**
++ * StructIncompleteDocs:
++ * @a: a value
++ *
++ * Here we document the struct but not all the values.
++ */
++typedef struct {
++ int a;
++ char b;
++} StructIncompleteDocs;
++
++/**
++ * StructUnusedDocs:
++ * @a: a value
++ * @b: a value
++ * @c: an unexisting value
++ *
++ * Here we document the struct and more than the actual values.
++ */
++typedef struct {
++ int a;
++ char b;
++} StructUnusedDocs;
++
++
++void func_no_docs(void);
++void func_no_item_docs(int a, char b);
++void func_incomplete_docs(int a, char b);
++void func_unused_docs(int a, char b);
++
++#endif // GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/bin/sh
++
++set -e
++
++gtkdoctest.sh gobject
++sanity.sh gobject
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++SUBDIRS = . src docs
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++check-local: clean
++
++endif
++
++EXTRA_DIST = examples/gobject.c
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++# We require automake 1.6 at least.
++AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = 1.6
++
++# The name of the module, e.g. 'glib'.
++DOC_MODULE=tester
++
++# The top-level SGML file. You can change this if you want to.
++DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MODULE)-docs.xml
++
++# The directory containing the source code. Relative to $(srcdir).
++# gtk-doc will search all .c & .h files beneath here for inline comments
++# documenting the functions and macros.
++DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/tests/gobject/src
++
++# Extra options to pass to gtkdoc-scangobj. Not normally needed.
++SCANGOBJ_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-scan.
++SCAN_OPTIONS=--deprecated-guards="GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED" \
++ --rebuild-types
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkdb.
++MKDB_OPTIONS=--xml-mode
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkhtml
++MKHTML_OPTIONS=--path=$(abs_top_srcdir)/tests/gobject/examples
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkpdf
++MKPDF_OPTIONS=--path=$(abs_top_srcdir)/tests/gobject/examples
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-fixref. Not normally needed.
++# --html-dir=$(HTML_DIR)
++FIXXREF_OPTIONS=--extra-dir=$(glib_prefix)/share/gtk-doc/html
++
++# Used for dependencies. The docs will be rebuilt if any of these change.
++HFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/gobject/src/*.h
++CFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/gobject/src/*.c
++
++# Header files to ignore when scanning.
++IGNORE_HFILES=config.h
++
++# Images to copy into HTML directory.
++HTML_IMAGES = \
++ $(srcdir)/images/object.png
++
++# Extra SGML files that are included by $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE).
++# e.g. content_files=running.sgml building.sgml changes-2.0.sgml
++content_files =
++
++# SGML files where gtk-doc abbreviations (#GtkWidget) are expanded
++# These files must be listed here *and* in content_files
++# e.g. expand_content_files=running.sgml
++expand_content_files=
++
++# CFLAGS and LDFLAGS for compiling gtkdoc-scangobj with your library.
++# Only needed if you are using gtkdoc-scangobj to dynamically query widget
++# signals and properties.
++GTKDOC_CFLAGS = -I$(top_srcdir)/tests/gobject/src $(TEST_DEPS_CFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_LIBS = $(TEST_DEPS_LIBS) $(top_builddir)/tests/gobject/src/libtester.la
++
++# include generic part
++include $(top_srcdir)/tests/gtk-doc.make
++
++# Other files to distribute
++# e.g. EXTRA_DIST += version.xml.in
++EXTRA_DIST += tester.types
++
++CLEANFILES += \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).types
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \
++ DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(srcdir):$(PATH)
++endif
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++gobject_test_html_data += [
++ join_paths(srcdir, 'tests', 'gobject', 'docs', 'images', 'object.png')
++]
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++gobject_test_source_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'gobject',
++ 'src'
++)
++
++gobject_test_docs_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'gobject',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++gobject_test_output_dir = join_paths(
++ builddir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'gobject',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++gobject_test_html_data = []
++
++test(
++ 'test-gobject-scan',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: gobject_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_scan_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(gobject_test_output_dir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(gobject_test_source_dir),
++ '--ignore-headers=config.h',
++ '--deprecated-guards=GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED',
++ '--rebuild-types',
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-gobject-scangobj',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: gobject_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_scangobj_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--pkg-config=@0@'.format(pkgconfig_prg_path),
++ '--extra-pkg=@0@'.format('glib-2.0'),
++ '--extra-pkg=@0@'.format('gobject-2.0'),
++ '--extra-lib=@0@'.format(gobject_test_lib.full_path()),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-gobject-mkdb',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: gobject_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkdb_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(gobject_test_source_dir),
++ '--main-sgml-file=@0@'.format('tester-docs.xml'),
++ '--output-format=xml',
++ '--xml-mode',
++ ],
++)
++
++foreach style_data: gtkdoc_style_data
++ gobject_test_html_data += join_paths(srcdir, 'style', style_data)
++endforeach
++
++subdir('images') # Appends to gobject_test_html_data
++
++test(
++ 'test-gobject-mkhtml',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: gobject_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkhtml_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(join_paths(gobject_test_output_dir, 'html')),
++ '--html-assets=@0@'.format('@@'.join(gobject_test_html_data)),
++ '@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '@0@'.format(join_paths('..', 'tester-docs.xml')),
++ '--uninstalled',
++ '--path=@0@'.format(':'.join([
++ gobject_test_docs_dir,
++ srcdir,
++ ])
++ ),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-gobject-fixxref',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: gobject_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_fixxref_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--module-dir=@0@'.format('html'),
++ '--extra-dir=@0@'.format(glib_docpath),
++ '--extra-dir=@0@'.format(gobject_docpath),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-gobject-check',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: gobject_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_check_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--input-dir=@0@'.format(gobject_test_docs_dir),
++ '--output-dir=@0@'.format(gobject_test_output_dir),
++ ],
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<?xml version="1.0"?>
++<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
++ "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd"
++[
++ <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib "xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'">
++ <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM "xml/gtkdocentities.ent">
++ %gtkdocentities;
++]>
++<book id="index" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude">
++ <bookinfo>
++ <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>
++ <corpauthor>
++ The <ulink url="http://www.gtk.org/gtk-doc">gtk-doc team</ulink>.
++ </corpauthor>
++ <releaseinfo>
++ for &package_string;.
++ The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at
++ <ulink role="online-location" url="http://[SERVER]/tester/index.html">http://[SERVER]/tester/</ulink>.
++ </releaseinfo>
++ <legalnotice id="legal">
++ <para>
++ This manual is published as public domain.
++ </para>
++ </legalnotice>
++ </bookinfo>
++
++ <preface id="intro">
++ <title>Introduction</title>
++ <para>
++ This document is for testing purpose only.
++ It is generated from Docbook-<acronym>XML</acronym>.
++ <footnote id="intro.footnote-1">
++ <para>
++ Most of the actual text is quite non-sense. Don't pay attention.
++ </para>
++ </footnote>
++ </para>
++ </preface>
++
++ <part label="1" id="part.i">
++ <title>Overview</title>
++ <chapter id="Overview-building">
++ <title>How to build the library</title>
++ <para></para>
++ </chapter>
++ </part>
++
++ <reference label="2" id="part.ii">
++ <title>API Reference</title>
++ <chapter id="main-api">
++ <title>Tests</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/object.xml"/>
++ <xi:include href="xml/object2.xml"/>
++ <xi:include href="xml/object3.xml"/>
++ <xi:include href="xml/iface.xml"/>
++ <xi:include href="xml/iface2.xml"/>
++ <xi:include href="xml/types.xml"/>
++ </chapter>
++ </reference>
++
++ <part label="3" id="part.iii">
++ <title>Appendix</title>
++
++ <chapter id="object-tree">
++ <title>Object Hierarchy</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/tree_index.sgml"/>
++ </chapter>
++
++ <chapter id="object-index">
++ <title>Object Index</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/object_index.sgml"/>
++ </chapter>
++
++ <index id="api-index-full">
++ <title>API Index</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-full.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++ <index id="api-index-deprecated" role="deprecated">
++ <title>Index of deprecated API</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-deprecated.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++ <index id="api-index-0-1" role="0.1">
++ <title>Index of new API in 0.1</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-0.1.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++ <index id="api-index-0-5" role="0.5">
++ <title>Index of new API in 0.5</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-0.5.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++
++ <glossary id="glossary">
++ <title>Glossary</title>
++ <glossdiv><title>A</title>
++ <glossentry>
++ <glossterm><anchor id="glossterm-API"/>API</glossterm>
++ <glossdef>
++ <para>Application Programming Interface</para>
++ </glossdef>
++ </glossentry>
++ </glossdiv>
++ <glossdiv><title>X</title>
++ <glossentry>
++ <glossterm><anchor id="glossterm-XML"/>XML</glossterm>
++ <glossdef>
++ <para>Extensible Markup Language</para>
++ </glossdef>
++ </glossentry>
++ <glossentry>
++ <glossterm><anchor id="glossterm-XSL"/>XSL</glossterm>
++ <glossdef>
++ <para>XML Stylesheet Language</para>
++ </glossdef>
++ </glossentry>
++ </glossdiv>
++ </glossary>
++
++ <xi:include href="xml/annotation-glossary.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </part>
++</book>
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>object</FILE>
++GtkdocObject
++GtkdocObjectClass
++gtkdoc_object_new
++gtkdoc_object_set_otest
++gtkdoc_object_frobnicate
++gtkdoc_object_fooify
++gtkdoc_object_do_not_use
++GTKDOC_OBJECT_MACRO_DUMMY
++GTKDOC_OBJECT_MACRO_SUM
++<SUBSECTION Standard>
++GTKDOC_OBJECT
++GTKDOC_IS_OBJECT
++GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT
++gtkdoc_object_get_type
++GTKDOC_OBJECT_CLASS
++GTKDOC_IS_OBJECT_CLASS
++GTKDOC_OBJECT_GET_CLASS
++</SECTION>
++
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>object2</FILE>
++GtkdocObject2
++GtkdocObject2Class
++<SUBSECTION Standard>
++GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT2
++gtkdoc_object2_get_type
++</SECTION>
++
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>object3</FILE>
++<SUBSECTION Standard>
++GtkdocObject3
++GtkdocObject3Class
++GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT3
++gtkdoc_object3_get_type
++</SECTION>
++
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>iface</FILE>
++GtkdocIface
++GtkdocIfaceInterface
++gtkdoc_iface_configure
++GTKDOC_IFACE_MACRO_DUMMY
++GTKDOC_IFACE_MACRO_SUM
++<SUBSECTION Standard>
++GTKDOC_IFACE
++GTKDOC_IS_IFACE
++GTKDOC_TYPE_IFACE
++gtkdoc_iface_get_type
++GTKDOC_IFACE_GET_INTERFACE
++</SECTION>
++
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>iface2</FILE>
++GtkdocIface2
++<SUBSECTION Standard>
++GTKDOC_TYPE_IFACE2
++gtkdoc_iface2_get_type
++</SECTION>
++
++<SECTION>
++<FILE>types</FILE>
++GtkdocEnum
++GtkdocEnum2
++GtkdocPlainOldData
++GtkdocBoxedPlainOldData
++GtkdocHelperEnum
++GtkdocHelperStruct
++<SUBSECTION Standard>
++GTKDOC_TYPE_ENUM
++GTKDOC_TYPE_ENUM2
++GTKDOC_TYPE_BOXED
++gtkdoc_enum_get_type
++gtkdoc_enum2_get_type
++gtkdoc_boxed_get_type
++GTKDOC_TYPE_BOXED_PLAIN_OLD_DATA
++gtkdoc_boxed_plain_old_data_get_type
++</SECTION>
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++/* example for gobject usage
++ * checkout the article at http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GObject
++ *
++ * This example is part of the release, that can be downloaded
++ * from ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gtk-doc/ or any mirror.
++ */
++
++#include <glib.h>
++#include <glib-object.h>
++
++gint
++main(gint argc, gchar **argv)
++{
++ GObject *myobj;
++
++ myobj = gtkdoc_object_new();
++ g_object_set (myobj, "parameter", 5, NULL);
++ g_object_unref (myobj);
++
++ return 0;
++}
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++subdir('src')
++subdir('docs')
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++noinst_LTLIBRARIES = libtester.la
++
++libtester_la_SOURCES = \
++ gobject.c gobject.h \
++ giface.c giface.h \
++ gtypes.c gtypes.h
++#libtester_la_LIBADD = $(TEST_DEPS_LIBS)
++
++AM_CPPFLAGS = $(TEST_DEPS_CFLAGS)
++
++endif
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++/**
++ * SECTION:iface
++ * @title: GtkdocIface
++ * @short_description: interface for gtk-doc unit test
++ * @see_also: #GtkdocObject
++ *
++ * This file contains non-sense code for the sole purpose of testing the docs.
++ * We can link to the #GtkdocIface:itest property and the #GtkdocIface::itest
++ * signal.
++ * An instance can be configured using the gtkdoc_iface_configure() function.
++ *
++ * I can haz pictures too!
++ * <mediaobject>
++ * <imageobject><imagedata fileref="home.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
++ * <caption><para>Home sweet home.</para></caption>
++ * </mediaobject>
++ *
++ * Just in case you wonder, special characters can be escaped with a \ like
++ * in \% or \# or even \@.
++ *
++ * We also support verbatim spans - lets test escaping of a `<tag>` block.
++ */
++/**
++ * SECTION:iface2
++ * @title: GtkdocIface2
++ * @short_description: interface with a prerequisite for gtk-doc unit test
++ * @see_also: #GtkdocObject, #GtkdocIface
++ *
++ * This file contains non-sense code for the sole purpose of testing the docs.
++ */
++
++#include "giface.h"
++
++/* constructor methods */
++
++/* methods */
++
++/**
++ * gtkdoc_iface_configure:
++ * @config: settings
++ *
++ * Configure a new instance
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success or %FALSE in case of an error
++ *
++ * Since: 0.1
++ */
++gboolean gtkdoc_iface_configure (gchar *config) {
++ return(TRUE);
++}
++
++/* class internals */
++
++static void gtkdoc_iface_base_init (gpointer g_class) {
++ static gboolean initialized = FALSE;
++
++ if (!initialized) {
++ /**
++ * GtkdocIface::itest:
++ * @self: myself
++ *
++ * The event has been triggered.
++ */
++ g_signal_new ("itest", G_TYPE_FROM_CLASS (g_class),
++ G_SIGNAL_RUN_LAST | G_SIGNAL_NO_RECURSE | G_SIGNAL_NO_HOOKS,
++ G_STRUCT_OFFSET (GtkdocIfaceInterface,test),
++ NULL, // accumulator
++ NULL, // acc data
++ g_cclosure_marshal_VOID__OBJECT,
++ G_TYPE_NONE, // return type
++ 0); // n_params
++
++ g_object_interface_install_property (g_class ,
++ g_param_spec_string ("itest",
++ "itest prop",
++ "dummy property for iface",
++ "dummy", /* default value */
++ G_PARAM_READWRITE));
++ initialized = TRUE;
++ }
++}
++
++GType gtkdoc_iface_get_type (void) {
++ static GType type = 0;
++ if (type == 0) {
++ static const GTypeInfo info = {
++ (guint16)sizeof(GtkdocIfaceInterface),
++ gtkdoc_iface_base_init, // base_init
++ NULL, // base_finalize
++ NULL, // class_init
++ NULL, // class_finalize
++ NULL, // class_data
++ 0,
++ 0, // n_preallocs
++ NULL, // instance_init
++ NULL // value_table
++ };
++ type = g_type_register_static(G_TYPE_INTERFACE,"GtkdocIface",&info,0);
++ }
++ return type;
++}
++
++GType gtkdoc_iface2_get_type (void) {
++ static GType type = 0;
++ if (type == 0) {
++ static const GTypeInfo info = {
++ (guint16)sizeof(GtkdocIfaceInterface),
++ NULL, // base_init
++ NULL, // base_finalize
++ NULL, // class_init
++ NULL, // class_finalize
++ NULL, // class_data
++ 0,
++ 0, // n_preallocs
++ NULL, // instance_init
++ NULL // value_table
++ };
++ type = g_type_register_static(G_TYPE_INTERFACE,"GtkdocIface2",&info,0);
++ g_type_interface_add_prerequisite(type, GTKDOC_TYPE_IFACE);
++ }
++ return type;
++}
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#ifndef GTKDOC_IFACE_H
++#define GTKDOC_IFACE_H
++
++#include <glib.h>
++#include <glib-object.h>
++
++/* type macros */
++
++#define GTKDOC_TYPE_IFACE (gtkdoc_iface_get_type ())
++#define GTKDOC_IFACE(obj) (G_TYPE_CHECK_INSTANCE_CAST ((obj), GTKDOC_TYPE_IFACE, GtkdocIface))
++#define GTKDOC_IS_IFACE(obj) (G_TYPE_CHECK_INSTANCE_TYPE ((obj), GTKDOC_TYPE_IFACE))
++#define GTKDOC_IFACE_GET_INTERFACE(obj) (G_TYPE_INSTANCE_GET_CLASS ((obj), GTKDOC_TYPE_IFACE, GtkdocIfaceInterface))
++
++#define GTKDOC_TYPE_IFACE2 (gtkdoc_iface2_get_type ())
++
++/* type structs */
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocIface:
++ *
++ * opaque instance of gtk-doc unit test interface
++ */
++typedef struct _GtkdocIface GtkdocIface;
++typedef struct _GtkdocIfaceInterface GtkdocIfaceInterface;
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocIface2:
++ *
++ * opaque instance of gtk-doc unit test interface
++ */
++typedef struct _GtkdocIface2 GtkdocIface2;
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocIfaceInterface:
++ * @parent: this is a bug :/
++ * @test: overideable method
++ *
++ * class data of gtk-doc unit test interface
++ */
++struct _GtkdocIfaceInterface {
++ GTypeInterface parent;
++
++ /* class methods */
++ void (*test)(const GtkdocIface * const self, gconstpointer const user_data);
++};
++
++GType gtkdoc_iface_get_type(void) G_GNUC_CONST;
++GType gtkdoc_iface2_get_type(void) G_GNUC_CONST;
++
++gboolean gtkdoc_iface_configure (gchar *config);
++
++/**
++ * GTKDOC_IFACE_MACRO_DUMMY:
++ * @parameter_1: first arg
++ * @parameter_2: second arg
++ *
++ * This macro does nothing.
++ */
++#define GTKDOC_IFACE_MACRO_DUMMY(parameter_1,parameter_2) /* do nothing */
++
++/**
++ * GTKDOC_IFACE_MACRO_SUM:
++ * @parameter_1: first arg
++ * @parameter_2: second arg
++ *
++ * This macro adds its args.
++ *
++ * Returns: the sum of @parameter_1 and @parameter_2
++ */
++#define GTKDOC_IFACE_MACRO_SUM(parameter_1,parameter_2) \
++ ((parameter_1) + (parameter_2))
++
++#define _GTKDOC_IFACE_INTERNAL_MACRO /* do nothing */
++
++#endif // GTKDOC_IFACE_H
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++/**
++ * SECTION:object
++ * @title: GtkdocObject
++ * @short_description: class for gtk-doc unit test
++ * @see_also: #GtkdocIface
++ * @Image: object.png
++ *
++ * > Two line
++ * > quote
++ *
++ * Offsets are time values to be added to local
++ * time to get Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) and should be
++ * <literal>"[±]hh[[:]mm[:ss]]"</literal>. Dates are either
++ * <literal>"Jn"</literal> (Julian day with n between 1 and 365, leap
++ * years not counted), <literal>"n"</literal> (zero-based Julian day
++ * with n between 0 and 365) or <literal>"Mm.w.d"</literal> (day d
++ * (0 <= d <= 6) of week w (1 <= w <= 5) of month m (1 <= m <= 12), day
++ * 0 is a Sunday). Times are in local wall clock time, the default is
++ * 02:00:00.
++ *
++ * <literal>lang_COUNTRY@MODIFIER</literal>
++ * <literal>lang_COUNTRY\@MODIFIER</literal>
++ *
++ * This file contains non-sense code for the sole purpose of testing the docs.
++ * We can link to the #GtkdocObject:otest property and the #GtkdocObject::otest
++ * signal.
++ *
++ * When subclassing it is useful to override the #GtkdocObjectClass.test()
++ * method. The #GtkdocObjectClass.foo_bar() vmethod lets you refine your
++ * frobnicator.
++ *
++ * A new instance can be created using the gtkdoc_object_new() function. The
++ * whole lifecycle usually looks like shown in this example:
++ * |[<!-- language="C" -->
++ * #include <glib.h>
++ * #include <glib-object.h>
++ *
++ * GObject *myobj;
++ *
++ * myobj = gtkdoc_object_new();
++ * // do something
++ * g_object_unref (myobj);
++ * ]|
++ *
++ * # Examples # {#examples}
++ *
++ * Here are a few examples.
++ *
++ * ## Example 1 ##
++ *
++ * You can also change parameters:
++ * <informalexample>
++ * <programlisting role="example" language="c"><xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude" parse="text" href="../../examples/gobject.c" /></programlisting>
++ * </informalexample>
++ *
++ * This example serves two main purposes:
++ *
++ * - `test`ing conversion (`long description
++ * follows here`)
++ *
++ * - catching bugs
++ *
++ * [GTK](http://www.gtk.org) 
++ *
++ * - having an example
++ *
++ * # Discussion
++ *
++ * This is a section with a heading without a trailing hash mark.
++ *
++ * > This is a bloclquote with a link to <link linkend="GtkdocObject2">
++ * > GtkdocObject2</link>.
++ *
++ * > Single line quote
++ *
++ * <orderedlist>
++ * <listitem><para>
++ * This list is here to ensure the parsing of the above list
++ * </para></listitem>
++ * <listitem><para>
++ * Doesn't change it.
++ * </para></listitem>
++ * </orderedlist>
++ *
++ * This example serves two main purposes:
++ *
++ * * testing alternate list syntax
++ *
++ * Don't match this as a link [ style | binding ][ : <replaceable>priority</replaceable> ]
++ *
++ * * not sure if we want this one
++ *
++ * A link <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/MOS_Technology_SID#Technical_details>
++ *
++ * <refsect3><title>An embedded docbook section</title>
++ * <para>Some stuff</para>
++ *
++ * - A list
++ *
++ * - that is not recognised as markdown
++ *
++ * </refsect3>
++ *
++ * # Coda # {#this-is-an-id-tag}
++ *
++ * - One
++ * - Two
++ * - Three
++ *
++ * 1. This is a ordered list
++ *
++ * 1. This is a code block in a list:
++ * |[<!-- language="C" -->
++ * GObject *myobj;
++ *
++ * myobj = gtkdoc_object_new();
++ * // do something
++ * g_object_unref (myobj);
++ * ]|
++ * And another:
++ * |[<!-- language="C" -->
++ * GObject *myobj;
++ *
++ * myobj = gtkdoc_object_new();
++ * /* do something */
++ * g_object_unref (myobj);
++ * ]|
++ *
++ * 1. Really
++ *
++ * Has a paragraph with a [link to the examples][examples].
++ *
++ * 1. Is
++ *
++ * Nothing more to say. Except one more link:
++ *
++ * <http://www.gnome.org/>
++ *
++ * |[<!-- language="plain" -->
++ * switch
++ * │
++ * ╰── slider
++ * ]|
++ */
++
++/**
++ * SECTION:object2
++ * @title: GtkdocObject2
++ * @short_description: class with interface for gtk-doc unit test
++ * @see_also: #GtkdocIface
++ *
++ * This file contains non-sense code for the sole purpose of testing the docs.
++ *
++ * Internals
++ * =========
++ *
++ * All the internal details go here or not:
++ *
++ * - single item list
++ */
++
++/**
++ * SECTION:object3
++ * @title: GtkdocObject3
++ * @short_description: class that is mostly undocumented
++ *
++ * This file contains non-sense code for the sole purpose of testing the docs.
++ */
++
++#include "gobject.h"
++#include "giface.h"
++
++/* property ids */
++
++enum {
++ GTKDOC_OBJECT_TEST=1,
++ GTKDOC_OBJECT_DEP_TEST
++};
++
++enum {
++ GTKDOC_OBJECT2_ITEST=1
++};
++
++/* constructor methods */
++
++/**
++ * gtkdoc_object_new:
++ *
++ * Create a new instance
++ * <note><para>
++ * This will only work if you have called g_type_init() before.
++ * </para></note>
++ *
++ * Returns: the instance or %NULL in case of an error
++ * Since: 0.1
++ */
++GtkdocObject *gtkdoc_object_new (void) {
++ return(NULL);
++}
++
++/* methods */
++
++/**
++ * gtkdoc_object_set_otest:
++ * @self: the object
++ * @value: the new otest value, whose description extends further than one
++ * line will allow
++ *
++ * Set the #GtkdocObject:otest property. This is a long paragraph.
++ *
++ * Oh, btw. setting the property directly saves us one method.
++ *
++ * Deprecated: Use g_object_set(obj,"otest",value,NULL); instead.
++ * Since: 0.5
++ */
++void gtkdoc_object_set_otest (GObject *self, const gchar *value) {
++
++}
++
++/**
++ * gtkdoc_object_frobnicate:
++ * @self: the object
++ * @n: number of iterations
++ *
++ * Frobnicate the content of @self @n times. This implements a
++ * complex algorithm (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Algorithm).
++ * <footnote>
++ * <para>
++ * Negative frobnication can lead to unexpected behaviour.
++ * </para>
++ * </footnote>
++ *
++ * Since: 0.5
++ */
++void gtkdoc_object_frobnicate (GObject *self, gint n) {
++
++}
++
++/**
++ * gtkdoc_object_fooify:
++ * @self: the object
++ * @...: a NULL terminated list of arguments
++ *
++ * Fooify the content of @self.
++ *
++ * Returns: %TRUE for success
++ */
++gboolean gtkdoc_object_fooify (GObject *self, ...) {
++ return TRUE;
++}
++
++/**
++ * gtkdoc_object_do_not_use:
++ * @self: the object
++ *
++ * Test a deprecation without additional message.
++ *
++ * Deprecated: 3.10
++ */
++void gtkdoc_object_do_not_use (GObject *self) {
++
++}
++
++/* class internals */
++
++static void gtkdoc_object_get_property (GObject *object, guint property_id,
++ GValue *value, GParamSpec *pspec)
++{
++
++}
++
++static void gtkdoc_object_set_property (GObject *object, guint property_id,
++ const GValue *value, GParamSpec *pspec)
++{
++
++}
++
++static void gtkdoc_object_class_init (GtkdocObjectClass *klass) {
++ GObjectClass *gobject_class = G_OBJECT_CLASS (klass);
++
++ gobject_class->set_property = gtkdoc_object_set_property;
++ gobject_class->get_property = gtkdoc_object_get_property;
++
++ /**
++ * GtkdocObject::otest:
++ * @self: myself
++ *
++ * The event has been triggered.
++ */
++ g_signal_new ("otest", G_TYPE_FROM_CLASS (klass),
++ G_SIGNAL_RUN_LAST | G_SIGNAL_NO_RECURSE | G_SIGNAL_NO_HOOKS,
++ G_STRUCT_OFFSET (GtkdocObjectClass,test),
++ NULL, // accumulator
++ NULL, // acc data
++ g_cclosure_marshal_VOID__OBJECT,
++ G_TYPE_NONE, // return type
++ 0); // n_params
++
++ /**
++ * GtkdocObject::dep-otest:
++ * @self: myself
++ *
++ * Here's an example signal handler.
++ * |[
++ * static gchar*
++ * otest_callback (GObject *o,
++ * gpointer user_data)
++ * {
++ * gdouble value;
++ *
++ * value = abs (o->value);
++ *
++ * return value;
++ * }
++ * ]|
++ *
++ * Deprecated: Use the #GtkdocObject::otest signal instead.
++ */
++ g_signal_new ("dep-otest", G_TYPE_FROM_CLASS (klass),
++ G_SIGNAL_RUN_LAST | G_SIGNAL_NO_RECURSE | G_SIGNAL_NO_HOOKS,
++ G_STRUCT_OFFSET (GtkdocObjectClass,test),
++ NULL, // accumulator
++ NULL, // acc data
++ g_cclosure_marshal_VOID__OBJECT,
++ G_TYPE_NONE, // return type
++ 0); // n_params
++
++ /**
++ * GtkdocObject::strings-changed:
++ *
++ * Something has happened.
++ */
++ g_signal_new ("strings-changed", G_TYPE_FROM_CLASS (klass),
++ G_SIGNAL_RUN_LAST | G_SIGNAL_NO_RECURSE | G_SIGNAL_NO_HOOKS,
++ 0,
++ NULL, // accumulator
++ NULL, // acc data
++ g_cclosure_marshal_VOID__BOXED,
++ G_TYPE_NONE, // return type
++ 1, G_TYPE_STRV); // n_params
++
++#if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION (2, 25, 9)
++ /**
++ * GtkdocObject::variant-changed:
++ *
++ * Something has happened.
++ */
++ g_signal_new ("variant-changed", G_TYPE_FROM_CLASS (klass),
++ G_SIGNAL_RUN_LAST | G_SIGNAL_NO_RECURSE | G_SIGNAL_NO_HOOKS,
++ 0,
++ NULL, // accumulator
++ NULL, // acc data
++ g_cclosure_marshal_VOID__VARIANT,
++ G_TYPE_NONE, // return type
++ 1, G_TYPE_VARIANT); // n_params
++#endif
++
++ /**
++ * GtkdocObject:otest: (type GList(GtkdocObject2))
++ *
++ * Since: 0.1
++ */
++ g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,GTKDOC_OBJECT_TEST,
++ g_param_spec_pointer ("otest",
++ "otest prop",
++ "dummy property for object",
++ G_PARAM_READWRITE));
++
++ /**
++ * GtkdocObject:dep-otest:
++ *
++ * Deprecated: use #GtkdocObject:otest property
++ */
++ g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,GTKDOC_OBJECT_DEP_TEST,
++ g_param_spec_string ("dep-otest",
++ "dep-otest prop",
++ "dummy deprecated property for object",
++ "dummy", /* default value */
++ G_PARAM_READWRITE));
++}
++
++GType gtkdoc_object_get_type (void) {
++ static GType type = 0;
++ if (type == 0) {
++ static const GTypeInfo info = {
++ (guint16)sizeof(GtkdocObjectClass),
++ NULL, // base_init
++ NULL, // base_finalize
++ (GClassInitFunc)gtkdoc_object_class_init, // class_init
++ NULL, // class_finalize
++ NULL, // class_data
++ (guint16)sizeof(GtkdocObject),
++ 0, // n_preallocs
++ NULL, // instance_init
++ NULL // value_table
++ };
++ type = g_type_register_static(G_TYPE_OBJECT,"GtkdocObject",&info,0);
++ }
++ return type;
++}
++
++
++static void gtkdoc_object2_class_init (GtkdocObjectClass *klass) {
++ GObjectClass *gobject_class = G_OBJECT_CLASS (klass);
++
++ gobject_class->set_property = gtkdoc_object_set_property;
++ gobject_class->get_property = gtkdoc_object_get_property;
++
++ g_object_class_override_property (gobject_class, GTKDOC_OBJECT2_ITEST, "itest");
++}
++
++GType gtkdoc_object2_get_type (void) {
++ static GType type = 0;
++ if (type == 0) {
++ static const GTypeInfo info = {
++ (guint16)sizeof(GtkdocObject2Class),
++ NULL, // base_init
++ NULL, // base_finalize
++ (GClassInitFunc)gtkdoc_object2_class_init, // class_init
++ NULL, // class_finalize
++ NULL, // class_data
++ (guint16)sizeof(GtkdocObject2),
++ 0, // n_preallocs
++ NULL, // instance_init
++ NULL // value_table
++ };
++ static const GInterfaceInfo interface_info = {
++ NULL, // interface_init
++ NULL, // interface_finalize
++ NULL // interface_data
++ };
++ type = g_type_register_static(G_TYPE_OBJECT,"GtkdocObject2",&info,0);
++ g_type_add_interface_static(type, GTKDOC_TYPE_IFACE, &interface_info);
++ }
++ return type;
++}
++
++GType gtkdoc_object3_get_type (void) {
++ static GType type = 0;
++ if (type == 0) {
++ static const GTypeInfo info = {
++ (guint16)sizeof(GtkdocObject3Class),
++ NULL, // base_init
++ NULL, // base_finalize
++ NULL, // class_init
++ NULL, // class_finalize
++ NULL, // class_data
++ (guint16)sizeof(GtkdocObject3),
++ 0, // n_preallocs
++ NULL, // instance_init
++ NULL // value_table
++ };
++ type = g_type_register_static(G_TYPE_OBJECT,"GtkdocObject3",&info,0);
++ }
++ return type;
++}
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#ifndef GTKDOC_OBJECT_H
++#define GTKDOC_OBJECT_H
++
++#include <glib.h>
++#include <glib-object.h>
++
++/* type macros */
++
++#define GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT (gtkdoc_object_get_type ())
++#define GTKDOC_OBJECT(obj) (G_TYPE_CHECK_INSTANCE_CAST ((obj), GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT, GtkdocObject))
++#define GTKDOC_OBJECT_CLASS(klass) (G_TYPE_CHECK_CLASS_CAST ((klass), GTKDOCTYPE_OBJECT, GtkdocObjectClass))
++#define GTKDOC_IS_OBJECT(obj) (G_TYPE_CHECK_INSTANCE_TYPE ((obj), GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT))
++#define GTKDOC_IS_OBJECT_CLASS(klass) (G_TYPE_CHECK_CLASS_TYPE ((klass), GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT))
++#define GTKDOC_OBJECT_GET_CLASS(obj) (G_TYPE_INSTANCE_GET_CLASS ((obj), GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT, GtkdocObjectClass))
++
++#define GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT2 (gtkdoc_object2_get_type ())
++
++#define GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT3 (gtkdoc_object3_get_type ())
++
++/* type structs */
++
++typedef struct _GtkdocObject GtkdocObject;
++typedef struct _GtkdocObjectClass GtkdocObjectClass;
++
++typedef struct _GtkdocObject2 GtkdocObject2;
++typedef struct _GtkdocObject2Class GtkdocObject2Class;
++
++typedef struct _GtkdocObject3 GtkdocObject3;
++typedef struct _GtkdocObject3Class GtkdocObject3Class;
++
++/* in gtkdoc-scan::ScanHeader() we currently skip the enums, but output a decl
++* to -decl.txt and -decl-list.txt for the struct
++* If the symbol has no docs, we get a warning in -unused.txt for the struct, but
++* not the enum
++*
++typedef struct GtkdocHelperStruct GtkdocHelperStruct;
++typedef enum GtkdocHelperEnum GtkdocHelperEnum;
++*/
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocObject:
++ *
++ * instance data of gtk-doc unit test class
++ */
++struct _GtkdocObject {
++ GObject parent;
++
++ /*< private >*/
++ gchar *test_string;
++};
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocObjectClass:
++ * @parent: this is a bug :/
++ * @test: overideable method
++ * @ping: can be used before calling the @test() function
++ * @foo_bar: lets you refine your frobnicator
++ *
++ * class data of gtk-doc unit test class
++ */
++struct _GtkdocObjectClass {
++ GObjectClass parent;
++
++ /* class methods */
++ void (*test)(const GtkdocObject * const self, gconstpointer const user_data);
++ gboolean (*ping)(const GtkdocObject * const self);
++ gboolean (*foo_bar)(const GtkdocObject * const self);
++};
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocObject2:
++ *
++ * instance data of gtk-doc unit test class
++ */
++struct _GtkdocObject2 {
++ GObject parent;
++};
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocObject2Class:
++ * @parent: this is a bug :/
++ *
++ * class data of gtk-doc unit test class
++ */
++struct _GtkdocObject2Class {
++ GObjectClass parent;
++};
++
++struct _GtkdocObject3 {
++ GObject parent;
++};
++
++struct _GtkdocObject3Class {
++ GObjectClass parent;
++};
++
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocHelperStruct:
++ * @a: field
++ *
++ * GtkdocHelperStruct
++ */
++struct GtkdocHelperStruct {
++ int a;
++};
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocHelperEnum:
++ * @GTKDOC_HELPER_ENUM_A: enum a
++ * @GTKDOC_HELPER_ENUM_B: enum b
++ *
++ * GtkdocHelperEnum
++ */
++enum GtkdocHelperEnum {
++ GTKDOC_HELPER_ENUM_A,
++ GTKDOC_HELPER_ENUM_B
++};
++
++GType gtkdoc_object_get_type(void) G_GNUC_CONST;
++GType gtkdoc_object2_get_type(void) G_GNUC_CONST;
++GType gtkdoc_object3_get_type(void) G_GNUC_CONST;
++
++GtkdocObject *gtkdoc_object_new(void);
++#ifndef GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
++void gtkdoc_object_set_otest (GObject *self, const gchar *value);
++void gtkdoc_object_do_not_use (GObject *self);
++#endif
++void gtkdoc_object_frobnicate (GObject *self, gint n);
++gboolean gtkdoc_object_fooify (GObject *self, ...);
++
++/**
++ * GTKDOC_OBJECT_MACRO_DUMMY:
++ * @parameter_1: first arg
++ * @parameter_2: second arg
++ *
++ * This macro does nothing.
++ *
++ * Since: 0.1
++ */
++#define GTKDOC_OBJECT_MACRO_DUMMY(parameter_1,parameter_2) /* do nothing */
++
++/**
++ * GTKDOC_OBJECT_MACRO_SUM:
++ * @parameter_1: first arg
++ * @parameter_2: second arg
++ *
++ * This macro adds its args.
++ *
++ * Returns: the sum of @parameter_1 and @parameter_2
++ */
++#define GTKDOC_OBJECT_MACRO_SUM(parameter_1,parameter_2) \
++ ((parameter_1) + (parameter_2))
++
++#define _GTKDOC_OBJECT_INTERNAL_MACRO /* do nothing */
++
++#endif // GTKDOC_OBJECT_H
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++/**
++ * SECTION:types
++ * @title: GtkdocTypes
++ * @short_description: other gobject types for gtk-doc unit test
++ * @see_also: #GtkdocObject, #GtkdocIface
++ *
++ * This file contains non-sense code for the sole purpose of testing the docs.
++ */
++
++#include "gtypes.h"
++
++/* enum: class internals */
++
++GType gtkdoc_enum_get_type (void) {
++ static GType type = 0;
++ if(type==0) {
++ static const GEnumValue values[] = {
++ { GTKDOC_ENUM_V1, "GTKDOC_ENUM_V1", "first" },
++ { GTKDOC_ENUM_V2, "GTKDOC_ENUM_V2", "second" },
++ { GTKDOC_ENUM_V3, "GTKDOC_ENUM_V3", "third" },
++ { 0, NULL, NULL},
++ };
++ type = g_enum_register_static ("GtkdocEnum", values);
++ }
++ return type;
++}
++
++GType gtkdoc_enum2_get_type (void) {
++ static GType type = 0;
++ if(type==0) {
++ static const GEnumValue values[] = {
++ { GTKDOC_ENUM2_V1, "GTKDOC_ENUM2_V1", "first" },
++ { GTKDOC_ENUM2_V2, "GTKDOC_ENUM2_V2", "second" },
++ { 0, NULL, NULL},
++ };
++ type = g_enum_register_static ("GtkdocEnum2", values);
++ }
++ return type;
++}
++
++/* boxed: class internals */
++
++static gpointer gtkdoc_boxed_copy (gpointer boxed) {
++ return boxed;
++}
++
++static void gtkdoc_boxed_free (gpointer boxed) {
++}
++
++GType gtkdoc_boxed_get_type (void) {
++ static GType type = 0;
++ if (type == 0) {
++ type = g_boxed_type_register_static("GtkdocBoxed",
++ (GBoxedCopyFunc) gtkdoc_boxed_copy, (GBoxedFreeFunc) gtkdoc_boxed_free);
++ }
++ return type;
++}
++
++/* boxed plain old data: class internals */
++
++static gpointer gtkdoc_boxed_plain_old_data_copy (gpointer boxed) {
++ return g_memdup(boxed, sizeof(GtkdocBoxedPlainOldData));
++}
++
++static void gtkdoc_boxed_plain_old_data_free (gpointer boxed) {
++ g_free(boxed);
++}
++
++GType gtkdoc_boxed_plain_old_data_get_type (void) {
++ static GType type = 0;
++ if (type == 0) {
++ type = g_boxed_type_register_static("GtkdocBoxedPlainOldData",
++ (GBoxedCopyFunc) gtkdoc_boxed_plain_old_data_copy,
++ (GBoxedFreeFunc) gtkdoc_boxed_plain_old_data_free);
++ }
++ return type;
++}
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#ifndef GTKDOC_TYPES_H
++#define GTKDOC_TYPES_H
++
++#include <glib.h>
++#include <glib-object.h>
++
++/* type macros */
++
++#define GTKDOC_TYPE_ENUM (gtkdoc_enum_get_type ())
++#define GTKDOC_TYPE_ENUM2 (gtkdoc_enum2_get_type ())
++#define GTKDOC_TYPE_BOXED (gtkdoc_boxed_get_type ())
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocEnum:
++ * @GTKDOC_ENUM_V1: first
++ * @GTKDOC_ENUM_V2: second
++ * Since: 0.5
++ *
++ * Enum values for the #GtkdocEnum type.
++ */
++typedef enum {
++ GTKDOC_ENUM_V1=0,
++ GTKDOC_ENUM_V2,
++ /*< private >*/
++ GTKDOC_ENUM_V3
++} GtkdocEnum;
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocEnum2:
++ * @GTKDOC_ENUM2_V1: first
++ * @GTKDOC_ENUM2_V2: second
++ *
++ * Enum values for the #GtkdocEnum2 type.
++ */
++typedef enum {
++ GTKDOC_ENUM2_V1=0,
++ GTKDOC_ENUM2_V2,
++} GtkdocEnum2;
++
++GType gtkdoc_enum_get_type(void) G_GNUC_CONST;
++GType gtkdoc_enum2_get_type(void) G_GNUC_CONST;
++GType gtkdoc_boxed_get_type(void) G_GNUC_CONST;
++
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocPlainOldData:
++ * @n: Some integer member.
++ * @x: Some floating point member.
++ *
++ * Unboxed plain old data that should default to public members.
++ **/
++typedef struct {
++ guint n;
++ gdouble x;
++ /*<private>*/
++ gpointer priv;
++} GtkdocPlainOldData;
++
++#define GTKDOC_TYPE_BOXED_PLAIN_OLD_DATA (gtkdoc_boxed_plain_old_data_get_type ())
++
++/**
++ * GtkdocBoxedPlainOldData:
++ * @n: Some integer member.
++ * @x: Some floating point member.
++ *
++ * Boxed plain old data that should default to public members.
++ **/
++typedef struct {
++ guint n;
++ gdouble x;
++ /*<private>*/
++ gpointer priv;
++} GtkdocBoxedPlainOldData;
++
++GType gtkdoc_boxed_plain_old_data_get_type(void) G_GNUC_CONST;
++
++#endif // GTKDOC_TYPES_H
++
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++gobject_test_public_h = [
++ 'giface.h',
++ 'gobject.h',
++ 'gtypes.h',
++]
++
++gobject_test_c = [
++ 'giface.c',
++ 'gobject.c',
++ 'gtypes.c',
++]
++
++gobject_test_deps = [
++ glib_dep,
++ gobject_dep,
++]
++
++gobject_test_lib = shared_library(
++ 'gobjecttester',
++ sources: gobject_test_c,
++ dependencies: gobject_test_deps,
++ install: false,
++)
++
++gobject_test_dep = declare_dependency(
++ link_with: gobject_test_lib,
++ include_directories: include_directories('.'),
++ dependencies: gobject_test_deps,
++ sources: gobject_test_public_h,
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- mode: makefile -*-
++
++####################################
++# Everything below here is generic #
++####################################
++
++if GTK_DOC_USE_LIBTOOL
++GTKDOC_CC = $(LIBTOOL) --tag=CC --mode=compile $(CC) $(INCLUDES) $(GTKDOC_DEPS_CFLAGS) $(AM_CPPFLAGS) $(CPPFLAGS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_LD = $(LIBTOOL) --tag=CC --mode=link $(CC) $(GTKDOC_DEPS_LIBS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(AM_LDFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_RUN = $(LIBTOOL) --mode=execute
++else
++GTKDOC_CC = $(CC) $(INCLUDES) $(GTKDOC_DEPS_CFLAGS) $(AM_CPPFLAGS) $(CPPFLAGS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_LD = $(CC) $(GTKDOC_DEPS_LIBS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(AM_LDFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_RUN =
++endif
++
++# We set GPATH here; this gives us semantics for GNU make
++# which are more like other make's VPATH, when it comes to
++# whether a source that is a target of one rule is then
++# searched for in VPATH/GPATH.
++#
++GPATH = $(srcdir)
++
++# we don't install anything in tests
++#TARGET_DIR=$(HTML_DIR)/$(DOC_MODULE)
++
++SETUP_FILES = \
++ $(content_files) \
++ $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt
++
++EXTRA_DIST = \
++ $(HTML_IMAGES) \
++ $(SETUP_FILES)
++
++DOC_STAMPS=setup-build.stamp scan-build.stamp sgml-build.stamp \
++ html-build.stamp pdf-build.stamp \
++ sgml.stamp html.stamp pdf.stamp
++
++SCANOBJ_FILES = \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).args \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).hierarchy \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).interfaces \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).prerequisites \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).signals
++
++REPORT_FILES = \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-undocumented.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-undeclared.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-unused.txt
++
++CLEANFILES = $(SCANOBJ_FILES) $(REPORT_FILES) $(DOC_STAMPS) \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).pdf \
++ ts \
++ gtkdoc-scan.log \
++ gtkdoc-scangobj.log \
++ gtkdoc-mkdb.log \
++ gtkdoc-mkhtml.log \
++ gtkdoc-mkpdf.log \
++ gtkdoc-fixxref.log
++
++GITIGNOREFILES = \
++ html.ref xml.ref
++
++check-local: html-build.stamp pdf-build.stamp
++ @ts=`cat ts`;tsd=`date -d "now - $$ts seconds" $(TS_FMT)`; \
++ echo " DOC `$(DATE_FMT_CMD)$$tsd`: All done"
++
++docs: html-build.stamp pdf-build.stamp
++ @ts=`cat ts`;tsd=`date -d "now - $$ts seconds" $(TS_FMT)`; \
++ echo " DOC `$(DATE_FMT_CMD)$$tsd`: All done"
++
++$(REPORT_FILES): sgml-build.stamp
++
++ts:
++ @echo >ts `date $(TS_FMT)`;
++
++#### setup ####
++
++setup-build.stamp: ts
++ -@if test "$(abs_srcdir)" != "$(abs_builddir)" ; then \
++ echo ' DOC Preparing build'; \
++ files=`echo $(SETUP_FILES) $(expand_content_files) $(DOC_MODULE).types`; \
++ if test "x$$files" != "x" ; then \
++ for file in $$files ; do \
++ destdir=`dirname $(abs_builddir)/$$file`; \
++ test -d "$$destdir" || mkdir -p "$$destdir"; \
++ test -f $(abs_srcdir)/$$file && \
++ cp -pf $(abs_srcdir)/$$file $(abs_builddir)/$$file || true; \
++ done; \
++ fi; \
++ fi
++ @touch setup-build.stamp
++
++#### scan ####
++
++scan-build.stamp: ts setup-build.stamp $(HFILE_GLOB) $(CFILE_GLOB)
++ @ts=`cat ts`;tsd=`date -d "now - $$ts seconds" $(TS_FMT)`; \
++ echo " DOC `$(DATE_FMT_CMD)$$tsd`: Scanning header files"
++ @_source_dir='' ; \
++ for i in $(DOC_SOURCE_DIR) ; do \
++ _source_dir="$${_source_dir} --source-dir=$$i" ; \
++ done ; \
++ echo "gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --ignore-headers="$(IGNORE_HFILES)" $${_source_dir} $(SCAN_OPTIONS) $(EXTRA_HFILES)" >gtkdoc-scan.log; \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(PATH) PYTHONPATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(abs_top_srcdir):$(PYTHONPATH) \
++ gtkdoc-scan --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --ignore-headers="$(IGNORE_HFILES)" $${_source_dir} $(SCAN_OPTIONS) $(EXTRA_HFILES) 2>&1 | tee -a gtkdoc-scan.log
++ @if grep -l '^..*$$' $(DOC_MODULE).types > /dev/null 2>&1 ; then \
++ ts=`cat ts`;tsd=`date -d "now - $$ts seconds" $(TS_FMT)`; \
++ echo " DOC `$(DATE_FMT_CMD)$$tsd`: Introspecting gobjects"; \
++ scanobj_options=""; \
++ if test "x$(V)" = "x1"; then \
++ scanobj_options="--verbose"; \
++ fi; \
++ echo "gtkdoc-scangobj $(SCANGOBJ_OPTIONS) --module=$(DOC_MODULE) $$scanobj_options" >gtkdoc-scangobj.log; \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(PATH) PYTHONPATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(abs_top_srcdir):$(PYTHONPATH) \
++ CC="$(GTKDOC_CC)" LD="$(GTKDOC_LD)" RUN="$(GTKDOC_RUN)" CFLAGS="$(GTKDOC_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS)" LDFLAGS="$(GTKDOC_LIBS) $(LDFLAGS)" \
++ gtkdoc-scangobj $(SCANGOBJ_OPTIONS) --module=$(DOC_MODULE) $$scanobj_options 2>&1 | tee -a gtkdoc-scangobj.log; \
++ else \
++ for i in $(SCANOBJ_FILES) ; do \
++ test -f $$i || touch $$i ; \
++ done \
++ fi
++ @touch scan-build.stamp
++
++$(DOC_MODULE)-decl.txt $(SCANOBJ_FILES) $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt: scan-build.stamp
++ @true
++
++#### xml ####
++
++sgml-build.stamp: setup-build.stamp $(DOC_MODULE)-decl.txt $(SCANOBJ_FILES) $(HFILE_GLOB) $(CFILE_GLOB) $(DOC_MODULE)-sections.txt $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt $(expand_content_files) xml/gtkdocentities.ent
++ @ts=`cat ts`;tsd=`date -d "now - $$ts seconds" $(TS_FMT)`; \
++ echo " DOC `$(DATE_FMT_CMD)$$tsd`: Building XML"
++ @_source_dir='' ; \
++ for i in $(DOC_SOURCE_DIR) ; do \
++ _source_dir="$${_source_dir} --source-dir=$$i" ; \
++ done ; \
++ echo "gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --expand-content-files="$(expand_content_files)" --main-sgml-file=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $${_source_dir} $(MKDB_OPTIONS)" >gtkdoc-mkdb.log; \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(PATH) PYTHONPATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(abs_top_srcdir):$(PYTHONPATH) \
++ gtkdoc-mkdb --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --output-format=xml --expand-content-files="$(expand_content_files)" --main-sgml-file=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $${_source_dir} $(MKDB_OPTIONS) 2>&1 | tee -a gtkdoc-mkdb.log
++ @touch sgml-build.stamp
++
++sgml.stamp: sgml-build.stamp
++ @true
++
++$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE): sgml-build.stamp
++ @true
++
++xml/gtkdocentities.ent: Makefile
++ @$(MKDIR_P) $(@D) && ( \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package \"$(PACKAGE)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_bugreport \"$(PACKAGE_BUGREPORT)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_name \"$(PACKAGE_NAME)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_string \"$(PACKAGE_STRING)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_tarname \"$(PACKAGE_TARNAME)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_url \"$(PACKAGE_URL)\">"; \
++ echo "<!ENTITY package_version \"$(PACKAGE_VERSION)\">"; \
++ ) > $@
++
++#### html ####
++
++html-build.stamp: sgml.stamp $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $(content_files)
++ @ts=`cat ts`;tsd=`date -d "now - $$ts seconds" $(TS_FMT)`; \
++ echo " DOC `$(DATE_FMT_CMD)$$tsd`: Building HTML"
++ @rm -rf html
++ @mkdir html
++ @mkhtml_options=""; \
++ if test "x$(V)" = "x1"; then \
++ mkhtml_options="$$mkhtml_options --verbose"; \
++ fi; \
++ echo "gtkdoc-mkhtml --uninstalled --path="$(abs_srcdir)" $$mkhtml_options $(MKHTML_OPTIONS) $(DOC_MODULE) ../$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE)" >gtkdoc-mkhtml.log; \
++ cd html && PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(PATH) PYTHONPATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(abs_top_srcdir):$(PYTHONPATH) ABS_TOP_SRCDIR=$(abs_top_srcdir) \
++ gtkdoc-mkhtml --uninstalled --path="$(abs_srcdir)" $$mkhtml_options $(MKHTML_OPTIONS) $(DOC_MODULE) ../$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) 2>&1 | tee -a ../gtkdoc-mkhtml.log
++ -@test "x$(HTML_IMAGES)" = "x" || \
++ for file in $(HTML_IMAGES) ; do \
++ test -f $(abs_srcdir)/$$file && cp $(abs_srcdir)/$$file $(abs_builddir)/html; \
++ test -f $(abs_builddir)/$$file && cp $(abs_builddir)/$$file $(abs_builddir)/html; \
++ done;
++ @ts=`cat ts`;tsd=`date -d "now - $$ts seconds" $(TS_FMT)`; \
++ echo " DOC `$(DATE_FMT_CMD)$$tsd`: Fixing cross-references"
++ @echo "gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html --html-dir=$(HTML_DIR) $(FIXXREF_OPTIONS)" >gtkdoc-fixxref.log; \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(PATH) PYTHONPATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(abs_top_srcdir):$(PYTHONPATH) \
++ gtkdoc-fixxref --module=$(DOC_MODULE) --module-dir=html --html-dir=$(HTML_DIR) $(FIXXREF_OPTIONS) 2>&1 | tee -a gtkdoc-fixxref.log
++ @touch html-build.stamp
++
++#### pdf ####
++
++pdf-build.stamp: sgml.stamp $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $(content_files)
++ @ts=`cat ts`;tsd=`date -d "now - $$ts seconds" $(TS_FMT)`; \
++ echo " DOC `$(DATE_FMT_CMD)$$tsd`: Building PDF"
++ @rm -f $(DOC_MODULE).pdf
++ @mkpdf_options=""; \
++ if test "x$(V)" = "x1"; then \
++ mkpdf_options="$$mkpdf_options --verbose"; \
++ fi; \
++ if test "x$(HTML_IMAGES)" != "x"; then \
++ for img in $(HTML_IMAGES); do \
++ part=`dirname $$img`; \
++ echo $$mkpdf_options | grep >/dev/null "\-\-imgdir=$$part "; \
++ if test $$? != 0; then \
++ mkpdf_options="$$mkpdf_options --imgdir=$$part"; \
++ fi; \
++ done; \
++ fi; \
++ echo "gtkdoc-mkpdf --uninstalled --path="$(abs_srcdir)" $$mkpdf_options $(DOC_MODULE) $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $(MKPDF_OPTIONS)" >gtkdoc-mkpdf.log; \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(PATH) PYTHONPATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(abs_top_srcdir):$(PYTHONPATH) ABS_TOP_SRCDIR=$(abs_top_srcdir) \
++ gtkdoc-mkpdf --uninstalled --path="$(abs_srcdir)" $$mkpdf_options $(DOC_MODULE) $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) $(MKPDF_OPTIONS) 2>&1 | tee -a gtkdoc-mkpdf.log
++ @touch pdf-build.stamp
++
++##############
++
++# we need to enforce a rebuild for the tests
++clean-local:
++ @rm -f *~ *.bak ts gtkdoc-*.log
++ @rm -rf .libs
++ @if echo $(SCAN_OPTIONS) | grep -q "\-\-rebuild-types" ; then \
++ rm -f $(DOC_MODULE).types; \
++ fi
++ $(MAKE) distclean-local
++
++distclean-local:
++ @rm -rf xml html $(REPORT_FILES) $(DOC_MODULE).pdf \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-decl-list.txt $(DOC_MODULE)-decl.txt
++ @if test "$(abs_srcdir)" != "$(abs_builddir)" ; then \
++ rm -f $(SETUP_FILES) $(expand_content_files) $(DOC_MODULE).types; \
++ fi
++
++maintainer-clean-local:
++ @rm -rf xml html
++
++.PHONY : dist-hook-local docs
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/bin/sh
++
++suite=$1
++dir=`dirname $0`
++
++cd $dir/$suite/docs && \
++env BUILDDIR=$BUILDDIR/$suite/docs SRCDIR=$SRCDIR/$suite/docs gtkdoc-check
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++
++from __future__ import print_function
++
++import argparse
++import os
++import sys
++
++from subprocess import call
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(description='gtkdoc-check runner.')
++
++ parser.add_argument("--binary-dir", type=str, required=True,
++ help='Path to be used as a working directory')
++ parser.add_argument("--input-dir", type=str, required=True,
++ help='Path to be used as a working directory')
++ parser.add_argument("--output-dir", type=str, required=True,
++ help='Path to be used as a working directory')
++
++ options, arguments = parser.parse_known_args()
++
++ arguments.insert(0, os.path.join(options.binary_dir, 'gtkdoc-check'))
++
++ environ = os.environ.copy()
++
++ environ['SRCDIR'] = options.input_dir
++ environ['BUILDDIR'] = options.output_dir
++
++ sys.exit(call(arguments, env=environ))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++
++from __future__ import print_function
++
++import argparse
++import os
++import sys
++
++from subprocess import call
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(description='gtkdoc-fixxref runner.')
++
++ parser.add_argument("--binary-dir", type=str, required=True,
++ help='Path to be used as a working directory')
++ parser.add_argument("--change-dir", type=str, default=None,
++ help='Path to be used as a working directory')
++
++ options, arguments = parser.parse_known_args()
++
++ arguments.insert(0, os.path.join(options.binary_dir, 'gtkdoc-fixxref'))
++
++ if options.change_dir is not None:
++ if not os.path.exists(options.change_dir):
++ os.makedirs(options.change_dir)
++
++ sys.exit(call(arguments, cwd=options.change_dir))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++
++from __future__ import print_function
++
++import argparse
++import os
++import sys
++
++from subprocess import call
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(description='gtkdoc-mkdb runner.')
++
++ parser.add_argument("--binary-dir", type=str, required=True,
++ help='Path to be used as a working directory')
++ parser.add_argument("--change-dir", type=str, default=None,
++ help='Path to be used as a working directory')
++
++ options, arguments = parser.parse_known_args()
++
++ arguments.insert(0, os.path.join(options.binary_dir, 'gtkdoc-mkdb'))
++
++ if options.change_dir is not None:
++ if not os.path.exists(options.change_dir):
++ os.makedirs(options.change_dir)
++
++ sys.exit(call(arguments, cwd=options.change_dir))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++
++from __future__ import print_function
++
++import argparse
++import os
++import shutil
++import sys
++
++from subprocess import call
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(description='gtkdoc-mkhtml runner.')
++
++ parser.add_argument("--binary-dir", type=str, required=True,
++ help='Path to be used as a working directory')
++ parser.add_argument("--change-dir", type=str, default=None,
++ help='Path to be used as a working directory')
++ parser.add_argument("--html-assets", type=str, default=None,
++ help='List of HTML assets, seprated by "@@"')
++
++ options, arguments = parser.parse_known_args()
++
++ arguments.insert(0, os.path.join(options.binary_dir, 'gtkdoc-mkhtml'))
++
++ if options.change_dir is not None:
++ if not os.path.exists(options.change_dir):
++ os.makedirs(options.change_dir)
++
++ if not options.html_assets is None:
++ for html_asset in options.html_assets.split('@@'):
++ if options.change_dir is not None:
++ html_target = os.path.join(options.change_dir, os.path.basename(html_asset))
++ else:
++ html_target = os.path.join(os.getcwd(), os.path.basename(html_asset))
++ shutil.copyfile(html_asset, html_target)
++
++ sys.exit(call(arguments, cwd=options.change_dir))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++
++from __future__ import print_function
++
++import argparse
++import os
++import sys
++
++from subprocess import call
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(description='gtkdoc-scan runner.')
++
++ parser.add_argument("--binary-dir", type=str, required=True,
++ help='Path to be used as a working directory')
++ parser.add_argument("--change-dir", type=str, default=None,
++ help='Path to be used as a working directory')
++
++ options, arguments = parser.parse_known_args()
++
++ arguments.insert(0, os.path.join(options.binary_dir, 'gtkdoc-scan'))
++
++ if options.change_dir is not None:
++ if not os.path.exists(options.change_dir):
++ os.makedirs(options.change_dir)
++
++ sys.exit(call(arguments, cwd=options.change_dir))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++
++from __future__ import print_function
++
++import argparse
++import os
++import sys
++
++from subprocess import call, PIPE, Popen
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(description='gtkdoc-scangobj runner.')
++
++ parser.add_argument("--binary-dir", type=str, required=True,
++ help='Path to be used as a working directory')
++ parser.add_argument("--pkg-config", type=str, required=True,
++ help='Path to the pkg-config executable to be used')
++ parser.add_argument("--extra-pkg", type=str, default=[], action='append',
++ help='Extra package to be use while scanning')
++ parser.add_argument("--extra-cflags", type=str, default=[], action='append',
++ help='Extra Cflags to be use while scanning')
++ parser.add_argument("--extra-lib", type=str, default=[], action='append',
++ help='Extra library to be use while scanning')
++
++ options, arguments = parser.parse_known_args()
++
++ arguments.insert(0, os.path.join(options.binary_dir, 'gtkdoc-scangobj'))
++
++ process = Popen([options.pkg_config,
++ '--cflags'] + options.extra_pkg,
++ stdout=PIPE, stderr=PIPE)
++
++ output, error = process.communicate()
++ if process.returncode == 0:
++ cflags = output.rstrip().decode('utf-8')
++ arguments.append('--cflags={0}'.format(cflags))
++
++ for flag in options.extra_cflags:
++ arguments.append('--cflags={0}'.format(flag))
++
++ process = Popen([options.pkg_config,
++ '--libs'] + options.extra_pkg,
++ stdout=PIPE, stderr=PIPE)
++
++ output, error = process.communicate()
++ if process.returncode == 0:
++ arguments.append('--ldflags={0}'.format(output.rstrip().decode('utf-8')))
++
++ for lib in options.extra_lib:
++ arguments.append('--ldflags=-l{0}'.format(os.path.basename(lib).split('.')[0].lstrip('lib')))
++ arguments.append('--ldflags=-L{0}'.format(os.path.dirname(lib)))
++ arguments.append('--ldflags=-Wl,-rpath,{0}'.format(os.path.dirname(lib)))
++
++ sys.exit(call(arguments))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++gtkdoc_scan_runner_script = files('gtkdoc_scan_runner.py')
++gtkdoc_scangobj_runner_script = files('gtkdoc_scangobj_runner.py')
++gtkdoc_mkdb_runner_script = files('gtkdoc_mkdb_runner.py')
++gtkdoc_mkhtml_runner_script = files('gtkdoc_mkhtml_runner.py')
++gtkdoc_fixxref_runner_script = files('gtkdoc_fixxref_runner.py')
++gtkdoc_check_runner_script = files('gtkdoc_check_runner.py')
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2018 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import unittest
++
++from gtkdoc import highlight
++
++
++class HighlightTestCase(unittest.TestCase):
++
++ def test_AlwaysKnowsCLang(self):
++ code = highlight.highlight_code('void main(int argc, char **argv')
++ self.assertIsNotNone(code)
++
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ unittest.main()
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++gtkdoc_unit_tests = [
++ 'check',
++ 'common',
++ 'highlight',
++ 'mkdb',
++ 'mk-to-db',
++ 'mkhtml2',
++ 'scan',
++]
++
++test_env = environment()
++test_env.append('PYTHONPATH', srcdir, builddir)
++
++foreach test_name: gtkdoc_unit_tests
++ test(
++ 'test-unit-@0@'.format(test_name),
++ python_prg,
++ env: test_env,
++ args: [
++ join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ '@0@.py'.format(test_name.underscorify()),
++ )
++ ],
++ )
++endforeach
++
++subdir('helpers')
++
++glib_dep = dependency('glib-2.0', version: glib_req)
++gobject_dep = dependency('gobject-2.0', version: glib_req)
++
++glib_prefix = glib_dep.get_pkgconfig_variable('prefix')
++glib_docpath = join_paths(glib_prefix, 'share', 'gtk-doc', 'html')
++
++gobject_prefix = gobject_dep.get_pkgconfig_variable('prefix')
++gobject_docpath = join_paths(gobject_prefix, 'share', 'gtk-doc', 'html')
++
++subdir('annotations')
++subdir('bugs')
++subdir('empty')
++subdir('fail')
++subdir('gobject')
++subdir('program')
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2015 Christoph Reiter
++# 2017 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import unittest
++
++from gtkdoc import md_to_db
++
++
++class TestConverter(unittest.TestCase):
++
++ def setUp(self):
++ md_to_db.Init()
++
++ def test_main(self):
++ input_ = """\
++SUPPORTED MARKDOWN
++==================
++
++Atx-style Headers
++-----------------
++
++# Header 1
++
++## Header 2 ##
++
++Setext-style Headers
++--------------------
++
++Header 1
++========
++
++Header 2
++--------
++
++Ordered (unnested) Lists
++------------------------
++
++1. item 1
++
++1. item 2 with loooong *foo*
++ description
++
++3. item 3
++
++Note: we require a blank line above the list items
++"""
++
++ expexted = """\
++<para>SUPPORTED MARKDOWN</para>
++<para>Atx-style Headers</para>
++<refsect2><title>Header 1</title><refsect3><title>Header 2</title></refsect3>
++<refsect3><title>Setext-style Headers</title></refsect3>
++</refsect2>
++<refsect2><title>Header 1</title><para>Header 2</para>
++<para>Ordered (unnested) Lists</para>
++<orderedlist>
++<listitem>
++<para>item 1</para>
++</listitem>
++<listitem>
++<para>item 2 with loooong *foo*
++description</para>
++</listitem>
++<listitem>
++<para>item 3</para>
++</listitem>
++</orderedlist>
++<para>Note: we require a blank line above the list items</para>
++</refsect2>
++"""
++
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expexted, output)
++
++ def test_docbook(self):
++ input_ = """\
++<itemizedlist>
++ <listitem><para>foo</para></listitem>
++</itemizedlist>
++"""
++
++ # docbook should stay the same
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(input_, output)
++
++ def test_header(self):
++ input_ = """
++widget lifecycle, states and style.
++
++# Height-for-width Geometry Management # {#geometry-management}
++
++GTK+ uses a height-for-width (and wid
++"""
++
++ expected = """\
++<para>widget lifecycle, states and style.</para>
++<refsect2 id="geometry-management"><title>Height-for-width Geometry Management</title><para>GTK+ uses a height-for-width (and wid</para>
++</refsect2>
++"""
++
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expected, output)
++
++ def test_lists(self):
++ input_ = """\
++bla bla
++bla:
++
++- The channel was just created, and has not been written to or read from yet.
++ bla
++
++- The channel is write-only.
++
++foo
++"""
++ expected = """\
++<para>bla bla
++bla:</para>
++<itemizedlist>
++<listitem>
++<para>The channel was just created, and has not been written to or read from yet.
++bla</para>
++</listitem>
++<listitem>
++<para>The channel is write-only.</para>
++</listitem>
++</itemizedlist>
++<para>foo</para>
++"""
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expected, output)
++
++ # like previous, but no newlines beweteen items
++ def test_lists_in_paragraphs(self):
++ input_ = """\
++before:
++- item 1
++- item 2
++
++after
++"""
++ # TODO(ensonic): figure out why we insert '\n' for 2nd listitem
++ expected = """\
++<para>before:</para>
++<itemizedlist>
++<listitem><para>item 1</para></listitem>
++<listitem>
++<para>item 2</para>
++</listitem>
++</itemizedlist>
++<para>after</para>
++"""
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expected, output)
++
++ def test_paragraphs(self):
++ input_ = """\
++foo,
++bar.
++
++foo,
++bar.
++
++foo,
++bar.
++"""
++ expected = """\
++<para>foo,
++bar.</para>
++<para>foo,
++bar.</para>
++<para>foo,
++bar.</para>
++"""
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expected, output)
++
++ def test_reference(self):
++ input_ = """\
++The #GData struct is an opaque data structure to represent a
++[Keyed Data List][glib-Keyed-Data-Lists]. It should only be
++accessed via the following functions."""
++
++ expected = """\
++<para>The <link linkend="GData"><type>GData</type></link> struct is an opaque data structure to represent a
++<link linkend="glib-Keyed-Data-Lists">Keyed Data List</link>. It should only be
++accessed via the following functions.</para>
++"""
++
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expected, output)
++
++ def test_reference2(self):
++ input_ = "a [foo][bar] b [quux][baz]"
++ expected = '<para>a <link linkend="bar">foo</link> b <link linkend="baz">quux</link></para>\n'
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expected, output)
++
++ def test_reference_empty(self):
++ input_ = "[][]"
++ # expected = '<para><ulink url=""></ulink></para>\n'
++ expected = '<para><link linkend=""></link></para>\n'
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expected, output)
++
++ def test_inline_code(self):
++ input_ = "a `abc`"
++ expected = '<para>a <literal>abc</literal></para>\n'
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expected, output)
++
++ def test_inline_code2(self):
++ input_ = "a `[][]`"
++ expected = '<para>a <literal>[][]</literal></para>\n'
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expected, output)
++
++ def test_verbatim(self):
++ input_ = "a `<child>` element"
++ expected = '<para>a <literal><child></literal> element</para>\n'
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expected, output)
++
++ def test_code(self):
++ input_ = """\
++|[<!-- language="C" -->
++ GdkEvent *event;
++ GdkEventType type;
++
++ type = event->type;
++]|
++"""
++
++ expected = '''\
++<informalexample><programlisting role="example" language="C"><![CDATA[
++ GdkEvent *event;
++ GdkEventType type;
++
++ type = event->type;
++]]></programlisting></informalexample>
++<para></para>
++'''
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expected, output)
++
++ def test_plain(self):
++ input_ = u"""\
++|[<!-- language="plain" -->
++frame
++├── border
++├── <label widget>
++╰── <child>
++]|
++"""
++
++ expected = u"""\
++<informalexample><screen><![CDATA[
++frame
++├── border
++├── <label widget>
++╰── <child>
++]]></screen></informalexample>
++<para></para>
++"""
++
++ output = md_to_db.MarkDownParse(input_, "")
++ self.assertEqual(expected, output)
++
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ unittest.main()
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2018 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import textwrap
++import unittest
++
++from gtkdoc import mkdb
++
++
++class ScanSourceContentTestCase(unittest.TestCase):
++ """Baseclass for the source scanner tests."""
++
++ def setUp(self):
++ mkdb.MODULE = 'test'
++ mkdb.SymbolDocs = {}
++
++
++class ScanSourceContent(ScanSourceContentTestCase):
++
++ def test_EmptyInput(self):
++ blocks = mkdb.ScanSourceContent([])
++ self.assertEqual(0, len(blocks))
++
++ def test_SkipsSingleLineComment(self):
++ blocks = mkdb.ScanSourceContent("/** foo */")
++ self.assertEqual(0, len(blocks))
++
++ def test_FindsSingleDocComment(self):
++ blocks = mkdb.ScanSourceContent("""\
++ /**
++ * symbol:
++ *
++ * Description.
++ */""".splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertEqual(1, len(blocks))
++
++
++class ParseCommentBlock(ScanSourceContentTestCase):
++
++ def test_EmptyInput(self):
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock([])
++ self.assertEqual({}, mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++
++ def test_FindsDocComment(self):
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ symbol:
++
++ Description.
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertEqual({'symbol': 'Description.\n'}, mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++
++ def test_FindsDocCommentForSignal(self):
++ mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs = {}
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ Class::signal-with-dashes:
++
++ Description.
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertEqual({'Class::signal-with-dashes': 'Description.\n'}, mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++
++ def test_FindsDocCommentForProperty(self):
++ mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs = {}
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ Class:property-with-dashes:
++
++ Description.
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertEqual({'Class:property-with-dashes': 'Description.\n'}, mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++
++ def test_FindsDocCommentForActions(self):
++ mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs = {}
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ Class|action.with.dots-and-dashes:
++
++ Description.
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertEqual({'Class|action.with.dots-and-dashes': 'Description.\n'}, mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++
++ def test_FindsDocCommentWithParam(self):
++ mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs = {}
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ symbol:
++ @par: value
++
++ Description.
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertEqual({'symbol': 'Description.\n'}, mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++ self.assertIn('symbol', mkdb.SourceSymbolParams)
++ self.assertEqual({'par': 'value\n'}, mkdb.SourceSymbolParams['symbol'])
++
++ def test_FindsDocCommentWithMultilineParam(self):
++ mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs = {}
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ symbol:
++ @par: value docs with
++ two lines
++
++ Description.
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertEqual({'symbol': 'Description.\n'}, mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++ self.assertIn('symbol', mkdb.SourceSymbolParams)
++ self.assertEqual({'par': 'value docs with\ntwo lines\n'}, mkdb.SourceSymbolParams['symbol'])
++
++ def test_FindsDocCommentWithReturns(self):
++ mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs = {}
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ symbol:
++
++ Description.
++
++ Returns: result
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ # TODO: trim multiple newlines in code
++ self.assertEqual({'symbol': 'Description.\n\n'}, mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++ self.assertIn('symbol', mkdb.SourceSymbolParams)
++ # TODO: trim whitespace in code
++ self.assertEqual({'Returns': ' result\n'}, mkdb.SourceSymbolParams['symbol'])
++
++ def test_FindsDocCommentWithSince(self):
++ mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs = {}
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ symbol:
++
++ Since: 0.1
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertIn('symbol', mkdb.Since)
++ self.assertEqual('0.1', mkdb.Since['symbol'])
++
++ def test_FindsDocCommentWithDeprecated(self):
++ mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs = {}
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ symbol:
++
++ Deprecated: use function() instead
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertIn('symbol', mkdb.Deprecated)
++ # TODO: trim whitespace in code
++ self.assertEqual(' use function() instead\n', mkdb.Deprecated['symbol'])
++
++ def test_FindsDocCommentWithStability(self):
++ mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs = {}
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ symbol:
++
++ Stability: stable
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertIn('symbol', mkdb.StabilityLevel)
++ self.assertEqual('Stable', mkdb.StabilityLevel['symbol'])
++
++ def test_HandlesHTMLEntities(self):
++ mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs = {}
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ symbol:
++
++ < & >.
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertEqual({'symbol': '< & >.\n'}, mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++
++
++class ParseSectionCommentBlock(ScanSourceContentTestCase):
++
++ def test_FindsSectionBlock(self):
++ # TODO: maybe override common.LogWarning() instead and capture the messages
++ # Suppress: 'Section symbol is not defined in the test-sections.txt file'
++ mkdb.KnownSymbols['symbol:long_description'] = 1
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ SECTION:symbol
++ @short_description: short module description
++
++ Module description.
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertIn('symbol:short_description', mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++ self.assertEqual('short module description\n', mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs['symbol:short_description'])
++ self.assertIn('symbol:long_description', mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++ self.assertEqual('Module description.\n', mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs['symbol:long_description'])
++
++ # TODO(ensonic): we need to refactor the code first (see comment there)
++ # def test_FindsProgramBlock(self):
++ # mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ # PROGRAM:symbol
++ # @short_description: short program description
++ # @synopsis: test-program [*OPTIONS*...] --arg1 *arg* *FILE*
++ # @see_also: test(1)
++ # @--arg1 *arg*: set arg1 to *arg*
++ # @-v, --version: Print the version number
++ # @-h, --help: Print the help message
++ #
++ # Program description.
++ # """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ # self.assertIn('symbol:short_description', mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++ # self.assertEqual('short program description\n', mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs['symbol:short_description'])
++ # self.assertIn('symbol:long_description', mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs)
++ # self.assertEqual('Program description.\n', mkdb.SourceSymbolDocs['symbol:long_description'])
++
++
++class ScanSourceContentAnnotations(ScanSourceContentTestCase):
++
++ def test_ParamAnnotation(self):
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ symbol:
++ @par: (allow-none): value
++
++ description.
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ # TODO: we only extract those when outputting docbook, thats silly
++ # self.assertEqual({'par': 'value\n'}, mkdb.SourceSymbolParams['symbol'])
++ self.assertEqual({}, mkdb.SymbolAnnotations)
++
++ def test_RetunsAnnotation(self):
++ mkdb.ParseCommentBlock(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ symbol:
++
++ description.
++
++ Returns: (transfer full) result.
++ """).splitlines(keepends=True))
++ # TODO: we only extract those when outputting docbook, thats silly
++ self.assertEqual({}, mkdb.SymbolAnnotations)
++
++ # multiple annotations, multiline annotations, symbol-level ...
++
++
++class OutputStruct(unittest.TestCase):
++
++ def test_SimpleStructGetNormalized(self):
++ res = mkdb.extract_struct_body('data', textwrap.dedent("""\
++ struct data
++ {
++ int i;
++ char *c;
++ };
++ """), False, True)
++ self.assertEqual(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ struct data {
++ int i;
++ char *c;
++ };
++ """), res)
++
++ def test_SimpleTypedefStructGetNormalized(self):
++ res = mkdb.extract_struct_body('data', textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef struct _data
++ {
++ int i;
++ char *c;
++ } data;
++ """), True, True)
++ self.assertEqual(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef struct {
++ int i;
++ char *c;
++ } data;
++ """), res)
++
++ def test_InternalStructNameIsNormalized(self):
++ res = mkdb.extract_struct_body('data', textwrap.dedent("""\
++ struct _data {
++ int i;
++ char *c;
++ };
++ """), False, True)
++ self.assertEqual(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ struct data {
++ int i;
++ char *c;
++ };
++ """), res)
++
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ unittest.main()
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2018 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import logging
++import textwrap
++import unittest
++
++from anytree import PreOrderIter
++from lxml import etree
++from parameterized import parameterized
++
++from gtkdoc import mkhtml2
++
++
++class TestChunking(unittest.TestCase):
++
++ # def setUp(self):
++ # logging.basicConfig(
++ # level=logging.INFO,
++ # format='%(asctime)s:%(filename)s:%(funcName)s:%(lineno)d:%(levelname)s:%(message)s')
++
++ def test_chunk_only_root_gives_single_chunk(self):
++ root = etree.XML('<book />')
++ files = mkhtml2.chunk(root, 'test')
++ self.assertEqual('book', files.name)
++ self.assertEqual(0, len(files.descendants))
++
++ def test_chunk_single_chapter_gives_two_chunks(self):
++ root = etree.XML('<book><chapter /></book>')
++ files = mkhtml2.chunk(root, 'test')
++ descendants = [f for f in files.descendants if f.anchor is None]
++ logging.info('descendants : %s', str(descendants))
++ self.assertEqual(1, len(descendants))
++
++ def test_chunk_first_sect1_is_inlined(self):
++ root = etree.XML('<book><chapter><sect1 /></chapter></book>')
++ files = mkhtml2.chunk(root, 'test')
++ descendants = [f for f in files.descendants if f.anchor is None]
++ logging.info('descendants : %s', str(descendants))
++ self.assertEqual(1, len(descendants))
++
++ def test_chunk_second_sect1_is_not_inlined(self):
++ root = etree.XML('<book><chapter><sect1 /><sect1 /></chapter></book>')
++ files = mkhtml2.chunk(root, 'test')
++ descendants = [f for f in files.descendants if f.anchor is None]
++ logging.info('descendants : %s', str(descendants))
++ self.assertEqual(2, len(descendants))
++
++
++class TestDataExtraction(unittest.TestCase):
++
++ # def setUp(self):
++ # logging.basicConfig(
++ # level=logging.INFO,
++ # format='%(asctime)s:%(filename)s:%(funcName)s:%(lineno)d:%(levelname)s:%(message)s')
++
++ def chunk_db(self, xml):
++ root = etree.XML(xml)
++ files = mkhtml2.chunk(root, 'test')
++ return [f for f in PreOrderIter(files) if f.anchor is None]
++
++ def test_extract_ids(self):
++ files = self.chunk_db('<book><chapter id="chap1"></chapter></book>')
++ links = {}
++ mkhtml2.add_id_links_and_titles(files, links)
++ self.assertIn('chap1', links)
++
++ def test_extract_titles(self):
++ files = self.chunk_db('<book><chapter id="chap1"><title>Intro</title></chapter></book>')
++ links = {}
++ mkhtml2.add_id_links_and_titles(files, links)
++ self.assertIn('chap1', mkhtml2.titles)
++ self.assertEqual('Intro', mkhtml2.titles['chap1']['title'])
++ self.assertEqual('chapter', mkhtml2.titles['chap1']['tag'])
++
++ def test_extract_glossaries(self):
++ files = self.chunk_db(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <book>
++ <glossary id="glossary">
++ <glossentry>
++ <glossterm><anchor id="glossterm-API"/>API</glossterm>
++ <glossdef>
++ <para>Application Programming Interface</para>
++ </glossdef>
++ </glossentry>
++ </glossary>
++ </book>"""))
++ mkhtml2.build_glossary(files)
++ self.assertIn('API', mkhtml2.glossary)
++ self.assertEqual('Application Programming Interface', mkhtml2.glossary['API'])
++
++
++class TestDevhelp(unittest.TestCase):
++
++ xml_minimal = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <book>
++ <chapter id="chap1"><title>Intro</title></chapter>
++ </book>""")
++
++ xml_basic = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <book>
++ <bookinfo>
++ <title>test Reference Manual</title>
++ <releaseinfo>
++ The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at
++ <ulink role="online-location" url="http://www.example.com/tester/index.html">online-site</ulink>.
++ </releaseinfo>
++ </bookinfo>
++ <chapter id="chap1"><title>Intro</title></chapter>
++ </book>""")
++
++ # TODO: need one with multiple conditions
++ xml_full = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <book>
++ <bookinfo>
++ <title>test Reference Manual</title>
++ </bookinfo>
++ <chapter id="chap1">
++ <title>Reference</title>
++ <refentry id="GtkdocObject">
++ <refmeta>
++ <refentrytitle role="top_of_page" id="GtkdocObject.top_of_page">GtkdocObject</refentrytitle>
++ <refmiscinfo>TESTER Library</refmiscinfo>
++ </refmeta>
++ <refnamediv>
++ <refname>GtkdocObject</refname>
++ <refpurpose>class for gtk-doc unit test</refpurpose>
++ </refnamediv>
++ <refsect1 id="GtkdocObject.functions" role="functions_proto">
++ <title role="functions_proto.title">Functions</title>
++ </refsect1>
++ <refsect1 id="GtkdocObject.functions_details" role="details">
++ <title role="details.title">Functions</title>
++ <refsect2 id="gtkdoc-object-new" role="function" condition="since:0.1">
++ <title>gtkdoc_object_new ()</title>
++ <refsect3 id="GtkdocObjectClass.members" role="struct_members">
++ <title>Members</title>
++ <informaltable role="struct_members_table" pgwide="1" frame="none">
++ <tgroup cols="3">
++ <colspec colname="struct_members_name" colwidth="300px"/>
++ <colspec colname="struct_members_description"/>
++ <colspec colname="struct_members_annotations" colwidth="200px"/>
++ <tbody>
++ <row role="member">
++ <entry role="struct_member_name">
++ <para>
++ GtkdocObjectClass
++ <structfield id="GtkdocObjectClass.parent">parent</structfield>;
++ </para>
++ </entry>
++ <entry role="struct_member_description">
++ <para>parent/</para>
++ </entry>
++ <entry role="struct_member_annotations"></entry>
++ </row>
++ </tbody>
++ </tgroup>
++ </informaltable>
++ </refsect3>
++ </refsect2>
++ </refsect1>
++ <refsect1 id="tester-GtkdocTypes.other_details" role="details">
++ <title role="details.title">Types and Values</title>
++ <refsect2 id="GtkdocEnum" role="enum">
++ <title>enum GtkdocEnum</title>
++ <indexterm zone="GtkdocEnum">
++ <primary>GtkdocEnum</primary>
++ </indexterm>
++ <para>Enum values for the <link linkend="GtkdocEnum"><type>GtkdocEnum</type>
++ </link> type.</para>
++ <refsect3 id="GtkdocEnum.members" role="enum_members">
++ <title>Members</title>
++ <informaltable role="enum_members_table" pgwide="1" frame="none">
++ <tgroup cols="3">
++ <colspec colname="enum_members_name" colwidth="300px"/>
++ <colspec colname="enum_members_description"/>
++ <colspec colname="enum_members_annotations" colwidth="200px"/>
++ <tbody>
++ <row role="constant">
++ <entry role="enum_member_name">
++ <para id="GTKDOC-ENUM-V1:CAPS">GTKDOC_ENUM_V1</para>
++ </entry>
++ <entry role="enum_member_description">
++ <para>first</para>
++ </entry>
++ <entry role="enum_member_annotations"></entry>
++ </row>
++ <row role="constant">
++ <entry role="enum_member_name">
++ <para id="GTKDOC-ENUM-V2:CAPS">GTKDOC_ENUM_V2</para>
++ </entry>
++ <entry role="enum_member_description">
++ <para>second Since: 0.5</para>
++ </entry>
++ <entry role="enum_member_annotations"></entry>
++ </row>
++ </tbody>
++ </tgroup>
++ </informaltable>
++ </refsect3>
++ </refsect2>
++ </refsect1>
++ </refentry>
++ </chapter>
++ </book>""")
++
++ # def setUp(self):
++ # logging.basicConfig(
++ # level=logging.INFO,
++ # format='%(asctime)s:%(filename)s:%(funcName)s:%(lineno)d:%(levelname)s:%(message)s')
++
++ def convert(self, xml):
++ root = etree.XML(xml)
++ files = mkhtml2.chunk(root, 'test')
++ files = [f for f in PreOrderIter(files) if f.anchor is None]
++ mkhtml2.add_id_links_and_titles(files, {})
++ return '\n'.join(mkhtml2.create_devhelp2_content('test', root, files))
++
++ def test_create_devhelp_has_minimal_structure(self):
++ devhelp = self.convert(self.xml_minimal)
++ self.assertIn('<book xmlns', devhelp)
++ self.assertIn('<chapters', devhelp)
++ self.assertIn('<functions', devhelp)
++
++ def test_create_devhelp_without_bookinfo(self):
++ devhelp = self.convert(self.xml_minimal)
++ self.assertNotIn('online', devhelp)
++
++ def test_create_devhelp_with_bookinfo(self):
++ devhelp = self.convert(self.xml_basic)
++ self.assertIn('online="http://www.example.com/tester/index.html"', devhelp)
++ self.assertIn('title="test Reference Manual"', devhelp)
++
++ def test_create_devhelp_with_refentry_has_chapters(self):
++ devhelp = self.convert(self.xml_full)
++ self.assertIn('<sub name="Reference" link="chap1.html">', devhelp)
++ self.assertIn('<sub name="GtkdocObject" link="GtkdocObject.html"/>', devhelp)
++
++ def test_create_devhelp_with_refentry_has_keywords(self):
++ devhelp = self.convert(self.xml_full)
++ self.assertIn(
++ '<keyword type="function" name="gtkdoc_object_new ()" '
++ 'link="GtkdocObject.html#gtkdoc-object-new" since="0.1"/>',
++ devhelp)
++
++ def test_create_devhelp_with_refesect3_has_member_keywords(self):
++ devhelp = self.convert(self.xml_full)
++ self.assertIn(
++ '<keyword type="member" name="GtkdocObjectClass.parent" '
++ 'link="GtkdocObject.html#GtkdocObjectClass.parent"/>',
++ devhelp)
++
++ def test_create_devhelp_with_refesect3_has_constant_keywords(self):
++ devhelp = self.convert(self.xml_full)
++ self.assertIn(
++ '<keyword type="constant" name="GTKDOC_ENUM_V1" '
++ 'link="GtkdocObject.html#GTKDOC-ENUM-V1:CAPS"/>',
++ devhelp)
++
++
++class TestNavNodes(unittest.TestCase):
++
++ # def setUp(self):
++ # logging.basicConfig(
++ # level=logging.INFO,
++ # format='%(asctime)s:%(filename)s:%(funcName)s:%(lineno)d:%(levelname)s:%(message)s')
++
++ def chunk_db(self, xml):
++ root = etree.XML(xml)
++ files = mkhtml2.chunk(root, 'test')
++ return [f for f in PreOrderIter(files) if f.anchor is None]
++
++ def test_nav_nodes_contains_home(self):
++ files = self.chunk_db(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <book>
++ </book>"""))
++ nav = mkhtml2.generate_nav_nodes(files, files[0])
++ self.assertEqual(1, len(nav))
++ self.assertIn('nav_home', nav)
++
++ def test_nav_nodes_contains_up_and_prev(self):
++ files = self.chunk_db(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <book>
++ <chapter id="chap1"><title>Intro</title></chapter>
++ </book>"""))
++ nav = mkhtml2.generate_nav_nodes(files, files[1])
++ self.assertEqual(3, len(nav))
++ self.assertIn('nav_up', nav)
++ self.assertIn('nav_prev', nav)
++ self.assertNotIn('nav_next', nav)
++
++ def test_nav_nodes_contains_next(self):
++ files = self.chunk_db(textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <book>
++ <chapter id="chap1"><title>Intro</title></chapter>
++ <chapter id="chap2"><title>Content</title></chapter>
++ </book>"""))
++ nav = mkhtml2.generate_nav_nodes(files, files[1])
++ self.assertEqual(4, len(nav))
++ self.assertIn('nav_next', nav)
++
++
++class TestConverter(unittest.TestCase):
++
++ xml_book_beg = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <book>
++ <bookinfo>
++ <title>test Reference Manual</title>
++ </bookinfo>""")
++ xml_book_end = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ </book>""")
++ xml_book = '\n'.join([xml_book_beg, xml_book_end])
++
++ xml_book_preface = '\n'.join([
++ xml_book_beg,
++ ' <preface id="intro"><title>Intro</title></preface>',
++ xml_book_end])
++
++ xml_book_chapter = '\n'.join([
++ xml_book_beg,
++ ' <chapter id="chap1"><title>Intro</title></chapter>',
++ xml_book_end])
++
++ xml_book_reference = '\n'.join([
++ xml_book_beg,
++ ' <reference id="part.i"><title>Reference</title></reference>',
++ xml_book_end])
++
++ xml_book_part_chapter = '\n'.join([
++ xml_book_beg,
++ textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <part label="1" id="part.i">
++ <title>Overview</title>
++ <chapter id="chap1"><title>Intro</title></chapter>
++ </part>"""),
++ xml_book_end])
++
++ # 2 sections since the first one is not chunked
++ xml_book_chapter_secton = '\n'.join([
++ xml_book_beg,
++ textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <chapter id="chap1">
++ <title>Overview</title>
++ <section id="s1"><title>Intro</title></section>
++ <section id="s2"><title>getting started</title></section>
++ </chapter>"""),
++ xml_book_end])
++ xml_book_chapter_sect1 = xml_book_chapter_secton.replace('section', 'sect1')
++
++ xml_book_chapter_refentry_beg = '\n'.join([
++ xml_book_beg,
++ textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <chapter id="chap1">
++ <title>Reference</title>
++ <refentry id="GtkdocObject">
++ <refmeta>
++ <refentrytitle role="top_of_page" id="GtkdocObject.top_of_page">GtkdocObject</refentrytitle>
++ </refmeta>""")])
++
++ xml_book_chapter_refentry_end = '\n'.join([
++ textwrap.dedent("""\
++ </refentry>
++ </chapter>"""),
++ xml_book_end])
++ xml_book_chapter_refentry = '\n'.join([xml_book_chapter_refentry_beg, xml_book_chapter_refentry_end])
++
++ xml_book_index_empty = '\n'.join([
++ xml_book_beg,
++ ' <index id="api-index-full"><title>API Index</title></index>',
++ xml_book_end])
++
++ xml_book_index = '\n'.join([
++ xml_book_beg,
++ textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <index id="api-index-full">
++ <title>API Index</title>
++ <indexdiv id="api-index-full">
++ <indexdiv><title>O</title>
++ <!-- we get a link warning, since we we don't include the 'refentry' -->
++ <!--indexentry>
++ <primaryie linkends="gtkdoc-object-new">
++ <link linkend="gtkdoc-object-new">gtkdoc_object_new</link>,
++ function in <link linkend="GtkdocObject">GtkdocObject</link>
++ </primaryie>
++ </indexentry-->
++ </indexdiv>
++ </indexdiv>
++ </index>"""),
++ xml_book_end])
++
++ xml_book_glossary_empty = '\n'.join([
++ xml_book_beg,
++ ' <glossary id="glossary"><title>Glossary</title></glossary>',
++ xml_book_end])
++
++ xml_book_glossary = '\n'.join([
++ xml_book_beg,
++ textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <glossary id="glossary">
++ <title>Glossary</title>
++ <glossdiv><title>A</title>
++ <glossentry>
++ <glossterm><anchor id="glossterm-API"/>API</glossterm>
++ <glossdef>
++ <para>Application Programming Interface</para>
++ </glossdef>
++ </glossentry>
++ </glossdiv>
++ </glossary>"""),
++ xml_book_end])
++
++ # def setUp(self):
++ # logging.basicConfig(
++ # level=logging.INFO,
++ # format='%(asctime)s:%(filename)s:%(funcName)s:%(lineno)d:%(levelname)s:%(message)s')
++
++ def convert(self, xml, ix):
++ root = etree.XML(xml)
++ files = mkhtml2.chunk(root, 'test')
++ nodes = [f for f in PreOrderIter(files) if f.anchor is None]
++ return '\n'.join(mkhtml2.convert_content('test', nodes, nodes[ix], 'c'))
++
++ @parameterized.expand([
++ ('book', (xml_book, 0)),
++ ('preface', (xml_book_preface, 1)),
++ ('reference', (xml_book_reference, 1)),
++ ('chapter', (xml_book_chapter, 1)),
++ ('part', (xml_book_part_chapter, 1)),
++ ('section', (xml_book_chapter_secton, 2)),
++ ('sect1', (xml_book_chapter_sect1, 2)),
++ ('refentry', (xml_book_chapter_refentry, 2)),
++ ('index', (xml_book_index, 1)),
++ ('index_empty', (xml_book_index_empty, 1)),
++ ('glossary', (xml_book_glossary, 1)),
++ ('glossary_empty', (xml_book_glossary_empty, 1)),
++ ])
++ def test_convert_produces_html(self, _, params):
++ html = self.convert(params[0], params[1])
++ self.assertIn('<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">', html)
++ self.assertIn('<html>', html)
++ self.assertIn('</html>', html)
++
++ def test_convert_book_has_title(self):
++ html = self.convert(self.xml_book, 0)
++ self.assertIn('<title>test Reference Manual</title>', html)
++
++ def test_refnav_includes_normal_refsect1(self):
++ xml = '\n'.join([
++ self.xml_book_chapter_refentry_beg,
++ textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <refsect1 id="GtkdocObject.description" role="desc">
++ <title role="desc.title">Description</title>
++ </refsect1>
++ """),
++ self.xml_book_chapter_refentry_end])
++ html = self.convert(xml, 2)
++ self.assertIn('class="shortcut">Description</a>', html)
++
++ def test_refnav_skips_protos_refsect1(self):
++ xml = '\n'.join([
++ self.xml_book_chapter_refentry_beg,
++ textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <refsect1 id="GtkdocObject.functions" role="functions_proto">
++ <title role="functions_proto.title">Functions</title>
++ </refsect1>
++ """),
++ self.xml_book_chapter_refentry_end])
++ html = self.convert(xml, 2)
++ self.assertNotIn('class="shortcut">Functions</a>', html)
++
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ unittest.main()
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/bin/sh
++
++set -e
++
++gtkdoctest.sh program
++sanity.sh program
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++SUBDIRS = . src docs
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++check-local: clean
++
++endif
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++# We require automake 1.6 at least.
++AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = 1.6
++
++# The name of the module, e.g. 'glib'.
++DOC_MODULE=tester
++
++# The top-level SGML file. You can change this if you want to.
++DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MODULE)-docs.xml
++
++# The directory containing the source code. Relative to $(srcdir).
++# gtk-doc will search all .c & .h files beneath here for inline comments
++# documenting the functions and macros.
++DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/tests/program/src
++
++# Extra options to pass to gtkdoc-scangobj. Not normally needed.
++SCANGOBJ_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-scan.
++SCAN_OPTIONS=--deprecated-guards="GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED" \
++ --rebuild-types
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkdb.
++MKDB_OPTIONS=--xml-mode
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkhtml
++MKHTML_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-fixref. Not normally needed.
++# --html-dir=$(HTML_DIR)
++FIXXREF_OPTIONS=--extra-dir=$(glib_prefix)/share/gtk-doc/html
++
++# Used for dependencies. The docs will be rebuilt if any of these change.
++HFILE_GLOB=
++CFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/program/src/*.c
++
++# Header files to ignore when scanning.
++IGNORE_HFILES=config.h
++
++# Images to copy into HTML directory.
++HTML_IMAGES =
++
++# Extra SGML files that are included by $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE).
++# e.g. content_files=running.sgml building.sgml changes-2.0.sgml
++content_files =
++
++# SGML files where gtk-doc abbreviations (#GtkWidget) are expanded
++# These files must be listed here *and* in content_files
++# e.g. expand_content_files=running.sgml
++expand_content_files=
++
++# CFLAGS and LDFLAGS for compiling gtkdoc-scangobj with your library.
++# Only needed if you are using gtkdoc-scangobj to dynamically query widget
++# signals and properties.
++GTKDOC_CFLAGS =
++GTKDOC_LIBS =
++
++# include generic part
++include $(top_srcdir)/tests/gtk-doc.make
++
++# Other files to distribute
++# e.g. EXTRA_DIST += version.xml.in
++EXTRA_DIST +=
++
++CLEANFILES += \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).types
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \
++ DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(srcdir):$(PATH)
++endif
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++program_test_source_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'program',
++ 'src'
++)
++
++program_test_docs_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'program',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++program_test_output_dir = join_paths(
++ builddir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'program',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++program_test_html_data = []
++
++test(
++ 'test-program-scan',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: program_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_scan_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(program_test_output_dir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(program_test_source_dir),
++ '--ignore-headers=config.h',
++ '--deprecated-guards=GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED',
++ '--rebuild-types',
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-program-mkdb',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: program_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkdb_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(program_test_source_dir),
++ '--main-sgml-file=@0@'.format('tester-docs.xml'),
++ '--output-format=xml',
++ '--xml-mode',
++ ],
++)
++
++foreach style_data: gtkdoc_style_data
++ program_test_html_data += join_paths(srcdir, 'style', style_data)
++endforeach
++
++test(
++ 'test-program-mkhtml',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: program_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkhtml_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(join_paths(program_test_output_dir, 'html')),
++ '--html-assets=@0@'.format('@@'.join(program_test_html_data)),
++ '@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '@0@'.format(join_paths('..', 'tester-docs.xml')),
++ '--uninstalled',
++ '--path=@0@'.format(':'.join([
++ program_test_docs_dir,
++ srcdir])
++ ),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-program-fixxref',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: program_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_fixxref_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--module-dir=@0@'.format('html'),
++ '--extra-dir=@0@'.format(glib_docpath),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-program-check',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: program_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_check_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--input-dir=@0@'.format(program_test_docs_dir),
++ '--output-dir=@0@'.format(program_test_output_dir),
++ ],
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<?xml version="1.0"?>
++<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
++ "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd"
++[
++ <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib "xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'">
++ <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM "xml/gtkdocentities.ent">
++ %gtkdocentities;
++]>
++<book id="index" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude">
++ <bookinfo>
++ <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>
++ <releaseinfo>
++ for &package_string;.
++ The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at
++ <ulink role="online-location" url="http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.
++ </releaseinfo>
++ </bookinfo>
++
++ <chapter>
++ <title>Programs</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/test-program.xml"/>
++ </chapter>
++
++ <index id="api-index">
++ <title>API Index</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-full.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++ <index id="deprecated-api-index" role="deprecated">
++ <title>Index of deprecated API</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-deprecated.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++</book>
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++subdir('docs')
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++noinst_PROGRAMS = test-program
++
++endif
++
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++
++/**
++ * PROGRAM:test-program
++ * @short_description: A test program
++ * @synopsis: test-program [*OPTIONS*...] --arg1 *arg* *FILE*
++ * @see_also: test(1)
++ * @--arg1 *arg*: set arg1 to *arg*
++ * @-v, --version: Print the version number
++ * @-h, --help: Print the help message
++ *
++ * Long description of program.
++ *
++ * Returns: Zero on success, non-zero on failure
++ */
++
++int main(int argc, char **argv)
++{
++ return 0;
++}
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++SUBDIRS = . src docs
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++check-local: clean
++
++endif
++
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++# We require automake 1.6 at least.
++AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = 1.6
++
++# The name of the module, e.g. 'glib'.
++DOC_MODULE=tester
++
++# The top-level SGML file. You can change this if you want to.
++DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MODULE)-docs.xml
++
++# The directory containing the source code. Relative to $(srcdir).
++# gtk-doc will search all .c & .h files beneath here for inline comments
++# documenting the functions and macros.
++DOC_SOURCE_DIR=$(top_srcdir)/tests/repro/src
++
++# Extra options to pass to gtkdoc-scangobj. Not normally needed.
++SCANGOBJ_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-scan.
++SCAN_OPTIONS=--rebuild-sections --rebuild-types
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkdb.
++MKDB_OPTIONS=--xml-mode
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-mkhtml
++MKHTML_OPTIONS=
++
++# Extra options to supply to gtkdoc-fixref. Not normally needed.
++# --html-dir=$(HTML_DIR)
++FIXXREF_OPTIONS=--extra-dir=$(glib_prefix)/share/gtk-doc/html
++
++# Used for dependencies. The docs will be rebuilt if any of these change.
++HFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/repro/src/*.h
++CFILE_GLOB=$(top_srcdir)/tests/repro/src/*.c
++
++# Header files to ignore when scanning.
++IGNORE_HFILES=config.h
++
++# Images to copy into HTML directory.
++HTML_IMAGES =
++
++# Extra SGML files that are included by $(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE).
++# e.g. content_files=running.sgml building.sgml changes-2.0.sgml
++content_files =
++
++# SGML files where gtk-doc abbreviations (#GtkWidget) are expanded
++# These files must be listed here *and* in content_files
++# e.g. expand_content_files=running.sgml
++expand_content_files=
++
++# CFLAGS and LDFLAGS for compiling gtkdoc-scangobj with your library.
++# Only needed if you are using gtkdoc-scangobj to dynamically query widget
++# signals and properties.
++GTKDOC_CFLAGS = -I$(top_srcdir)/tests/repro/src $(TEST_DEPS_CFLAGS)
++GTKDOC_LIBS = $(TEST_DEPS_LIBS) $(top_builddir)/tests/repro/src/libtester.la
++
++# include generic part
++include $(top_srcdir)/tests/gtk-doc.make
++
++# Other files to distribute
++# e.g. EXTRA_DIST += version.xml.in
++EXTRA_DIST +=
++
++CLEANFILES += \
++ $(DOC_MODULE)-overrides.txt \
++ $(DOC_MODULE).types
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++TESTS_ENVIRONMENT = \
++ DOC_MODULE=$(DOC_MODULE) DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE=$(DOC_MAIN_SGML_FILE) \
++ PATH=$(abs_top_builddir):$(srcdir):$(PATH)
++endif
++
++CLEANFILES += \
++ tester-sections.txt
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++repro_test_source_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'repro',
++ 'src'
++)
++
++repro_test_docs_dir = join_paths(
++ srcdir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'repro',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++repro_test_output_dir = join_paths(
++ builddir,
++ 'tests',
++ 'repro',
++ 'docs'
++)
++
++repro_test_html_data = []
++
++test(
++ 'test-repro-scan',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: repro_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_scan_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(repro_test_output_dir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(repro_test_source_dir),
++ '--ignore-headers=config.h',
++ '--rebuild-sections',
++ '--rebuild-types',
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-repro-mkdb',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: repro_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkdb_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--source-dir=@0@'.format(repro_test_source_dir),
++ '--main-sgml-file=@0@'.format('tester-docs.xml'),
++ '--output-format=xml',
++ '--xml-mode',
++ ],
++)
++
++foreach style_data: gtkdoc_style_data
++ repro_test_html_data += join_paths(srcdir, 'style', style_data)
++endforeach
++
++test(
++ 'test-repro-mkhtml',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: repro_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_mkhtml_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--change-dir=@0@'.format(join_paths(repro_test_output_dir, 'html')),
++ '--html-assets=@0@'.format('@@'.join(repro_test_html_data)),
++ '@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '@0@'.format(join_paths('..', 'tester-docs.xml')),
++ '--uninstalled',
++ '--path=@0@'.format(':'.join([
++ repro_test_docs_dir,
++ srcdir])
++ ),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-repro-fixxref',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: repro_test_output_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_fixxref_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--module=@0@'.format('tester'),
++ '--module-dir=@0@'.format('html'),
++ '--extra-dir=@0@'.format(glib_docpath),
++ ],
++)
++
++test(
++ 'test-repro-check',
++ python_prg,
++ workdir: repro_test_docs_dir,
++ is_parallel: false,
++ args: [
++ gtkdoc_check_runner_script,
++ '--binary-dir=@0@'.format(builddir),
++ '--input-dir=@0@'.format(repro_test_docs_dir),
++ '--output-dir=@0@'.format(repro_test_output_dir),
++ ],
++)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<?xml version="1.0"?>
++<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.3//EN"
++ "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.3/docbookx.dtd"
++[
++ <!ENTITY % local.common.attrib "xmlns:xi CDATA #FIXED 'http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude'">
++ <!ENTITY % gtkdocentities SYSTEM "xml/gtkdocentities.ent">
++ %gtkdocentities;
++]>
++<book id="index" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2003/XInclude">
++ <bookinfo>
++ <title>&package_name; Reference Manual</title>
++ <releaseinfo>
++ for &package_string;.
++ The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at
++ <ulink role="online-location" url="http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/index.html">http://[SERVER]/&package_name;/</ulink>.
++ </releaseinfo>
++ </bookinfo>
++
++ <chapter>
++ <title>Tests</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/tester.xml"/>
++ </chapter>
++
++ <index id="api-index">
++ <title>API Index</title>
++ <xi:include href="xml/api-index-full.xml"><xi:fallback /></xi:include>
++ </index>
++</book>
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++subdir('docs')
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
++
++if BUILD_TESTS
++
++noinst_LTLIBRARIES = libtester.la
++
++libtester_la_SOURCES = tester.c tester.h
++#libtester_la_LIBADD = $(TEST_DEPS_LIBS)
++
++AM_CPPFLAGS = $(TEST_DEPS_CFLAGS)
++
++endif
++
++
++-include $(top_srcdir)/git.mk
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++/**
++ * SECTION:tester
++ * @short_description: module for gtk-doc unit test
++ *
++ * This is a minimal doc module to serve easy to debug repro cases.
++ */
++
++#include "tester.h"
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#ifndef GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++#define GTKDOC_TESTER_H
++
++#include <glib.h>
++
++// FIXME: this should not be needed, if we have a title + long-desc
++/**
++ * FOO:
++ *
++ * Placeholder to have non empty docs.
++ */
++#define FOO 1
++
++#endif // GTKDOC_TESTER_H
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/bin/sh
++
++suite=$1
++dir=$BUILDDIR
++
++failed=0
++tested=0
++
++echo "Running suite(s): gtk-doc-sanity $suite";
++
++# check the presence and non-emptyness of certain files
++nok=0
++for path in $dir/$suite/docs/html; do
++ if test ! -s $path/index.html ; then
++ echo 1>&2 "no or empty $path/index.html"
++ nok=`expr $nok + 1`; break;
++ fi
++ if test ! -s $path/home.png ; then
++ echo 1>&2 "no or empty $path/home.png"
++ nok=`expr $nok + 1`; break;
++ fi
++ file=`echo $path/*.devhelp2`
++ if test ! -s $file ; then
++ echo 1>&2 "no or empty $file"
++ nok=`expr $nok + 1`; break;
++ fi
++done
++if test $nok -gt 0 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++
++# TODO: if we have pdf support check for ./tests/$suite/docs/tester.pdf
++nok=0
++for path in $dir/$suite/docs; do
++ if test ! -s $path/tester.pdf ; then
++ if test -s $path/gtkdoc-mkpdf.log; then
++ if ! grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "must be installed to use gtkdoc-mkpdf" $path/gtkdoc-mkpdf.log; then
++ echo 1>&2 "no or empty $path/tester.pdf"
++ nok=`expr $nok + 1`; break;
++ fi
++ fi
++ fi
++done
++if test $nok -gt 0 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++
++# check validity of generated xml files
++nok=0
++for file in $dir/$suite/docs/xml/*.xml; do
++ xmllint --noout --noent $file
++ if test $? != 0 ; then
++ echo 1>&2 "xml validity check failed for $file"
++ nok=`expr $nok + 1`;
++ fi
++done
++if test $nok -gt 0 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++
++
++# check validity of generated sgml files (if any)
++if ls $dir/$suite/docs/xml/*.sgml 1> /dev/null 2>&1; then
++ nok=0
++ for file in $dir/$suite/docs/xml/*.sgml; do
++ xmllint --noout --noent $file
++ if test $? != 0 ; then
++ echo 1>&2 "sgml validity check failed for $file"
++ nok=`expr $nok + 1`;
++ fi
++ done
++ if test $nok -gt 0 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++ tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++fi
++
++# check validity of devhelp2 files
++nok=0
++for file in $dir/$suite/docs/html/*.devhelp2; do
++ xmllint --noout --nonet --schema $ABS_TOP_SRCDIR/devhelp2.xsd $file
++ if test $? != 0 ; then
++ echo 1>&2 "devhelp2 xml validity check failed for $file"
++ nok=`expr $nok + 1`;
++ fi
++done
++if test $nok -gt 0 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++
++nok=0
++# check that log files have only one line (the command)
++# - discard references to launchapd bugs
++# - discard errors for missing optional tools.
++DISCARD_PATTERN1='Please fix https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+source/gtk-doc/+bug/[0-9]* . For now run:
++gunzip .*.gz
++
++'
++DISCARD_PATTERN2='dblatex or fop must be installed.'
++for file in $dir/$suite/docs/gtkdoc-*.log; do
++ # skip this in verbose mode as we'll have more text
++ if test "x${V}" = "x1"; then
++ continue
++ fi
++
++ expected_lines="1"
++ # adjust for known files
++ if test $file = "$dir/bugs/docs/gtkdoc-mkdb.log"; then
++ expected_lines="2"
++ fi
++ if test $file = "$dir/gobject/docs/gtkdoc-fixxref.log"; then
++ expected_lines="2"
++ fi
++ case $file in
++ *gtkdoc-fixxref.log)
++ # if there is no /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/gobject we should skip fixxref logs
++ if test ! -d "$GLIB_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/gobject"; then
++ continue
++ fi
++ ;;
++ esac
++
++ # count expected lines
++ lines=`grep -v -x -G -e "$DISCARD_PATTERN1" $file | grep -v -x -G -e "$DISCARD_PATTERN2" | wc -l | cut -d' ' -f1`
++ if test $lines -gt $expected_lines; then
++ echo 1>&2 "expected no more than $expected_lines log line in $file, but got $lines"
++ nok=`expr $nok + 1`;
++ fi
++done
++if test $nok -gt 0 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++
++# check stability of generated xml/html
++nok=0
++for path in $dir/$suite/docs*; do
++ if test -d $path/xml.ref; then
++ diff -u $path/xml.ref $path/xml
++ if test $? = 1 ; then
++ echo 1>&2 "difference in generated xml for $path"
++ nok=`expr $nok + 1`;
++ fi
++ fi
++ if test -d $path/html.ref; then
++ diff -u $path/html.ref $path/html
++ if test $? = 1 ; then
++ echo 1>&2 "difference in generated html for $path"
++ nok=`expr $nok + 1`;
++ fi
++ fi
++done
++if test $nok -gt 0 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++
++
++# summary
++successes=`expr $tested - $failed`
++rate=`expr 100 \* $successes / $tested`;
++echo "$rate %: Checks $tested, Failures: $failed"
++
++test $failed = 0
++exit $?
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++# -*- python -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2018 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++import argparse
++import textwrap
++import unittest
++
++from parameterized import parameterized
++
++from gtkdoc import scan
++
++
++BASIC_TYPES = [
++ "char",
++ "signed char",
++ "unsigned char",
++ "short",
++ "signed short",
++ "unsigned short",
++ "long",
++ "signed long",
++ "unsigned long",
++ "int",
++ "signed int",
++ "unsigned int",
++ "short int",
++ "signed short int",
++ "unsigned short int",
++ "long int",
++ "signed long int",
++ "unsigned long int",
++ "signed",
++ "unsigned",
++ "float",
++ "double",
++ "long double",
++ "enum e",
++ "struct s",
++ "union u",
++]
++
++BASIC_TYPES_WITH_VOID = ['void'] + BASIC_TYPES
++
++INLINE_MODIFIERS = [('g_inline', 'G_INLINE_FUNC'), ('static_inline', 'static inline')]
++
++
++class ScanHeaderContentTestCase(unittest.TestCase):
++ """Baseclass for the header scanner tests."""
++
++ def setUp(self):
++ self.decls = []
++ self.types = []
++ self.options = argparse.Namespace(
++ deprecated_guards='GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED',
++ ignore_decorators='',
++ rebuild_types=False)
++ scan.InitScanner(self.options)
++
++ def scanHeaderContent(self, content):
++ return scan.ScanHeaderContent(content, self.decls, self.types,
++ self.options)
++
++ def assertNoDeclFound(self, slist):
++ self.assertEqual([], slist)
++ self.assertEqual([], self.decls)
++ self.assertEqual([], self.types)
++
++ def assertNothingFound(self, slist, doc_comments):
++ self.assertEqual({}, doc_comments)
++ self.assertNoDeclFound(slist)
++
++
++class ScanHeaderContent(ScanHeaderContentTestCase):
++ """Test generic scanner behaviour."""
++
++ def test_EmptyInput(self):
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([])
++ self.assertNothingFound(slist, doc_comments)
++
++ def test_IgnoresOneLineComments(self):
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(['/* test */'])
++ self.assertNothingFound(slist, doc_comments)
++
++ def test_IgnoresOneLineCommentsDoubleStar(self):
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(['/** test */'])
++ self.assertNothingFound(slist, doc_comments)
++
++ def test_FindsDocComment(self):
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent("""\
++ /**
++ * Symbol:
++ */""".splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertEqual(1, len(doc_comments))
++ self.assertIn('symbol', doc_comments)
++
++ def test_DocDoesNotChangeSlistDeclAndTypes(self):
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent("""\
++ /**
++ * Symbol:
++ */""".splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertNoDeclFound(slist)
++
++ def test_SkipInternalHeaders(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ /* < private_header > */
++ /**
++ * symbol:
++ */
++ void symbols(void);""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertNothingFound(slist, doc_comments)
++
++ def test_SkipSymbolWithPreprocessor(self):
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent("""\
++ #ifndef __GTK_DOC_IGNORE__
++ extern int bug_512565(void);
++ #endif""".splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertNoDeclFound(slist)
++
++ def test_AddDeprecatedFlagForSymbolsWithinDeprecationGuards(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ #ifndef GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
++ /**
++ * SYMBOL:
++ *
++ * Deprecated: 1.1. Use NEW_SYMBOL instead.
++ */
++ #define SYMBOL "value"
++ #endif /* GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED */""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertEqual(1, len(self.decls))
++ self.assertIn('<DEPRECATED/>', self.decls[0])
++
++ def test_NoDeprecatedFlagForSymbolsOutsideDeprecationGuards(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ #ifndef GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
++ /**
++ * SYMBOL1:
++ *
++ * Deprecated: 1.1. Use NEW_SYMBOL1 instead.
++ */
++ #define SYMBOL1 "value"
++ #endif /* GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED */
++ /**
++ * SYMBOL2:
++ */
++ #define SYMBOL2 "value"
++ """)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertEqual(2, len(self.decls))
++ self.assertNotIn('<DEPRECATED/>', self.decls[1])
++
++
++class ScanHeaderContentEnum(ScanHeaderContentTestCase):
++ """Test parsing of enum declarations."""
++
++ def assertDecl(self, name, decl, slist):
++ self.assertEqual([name], slist)
++ d = '<ENUM>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s</ENUM>\n' % (name, decl)
++ self.assertEqual([d], self.decls)
++ self.assertEqual([], self.types)
++
++ def test_FindsEnum(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ enum data {
++ TEST,
++ };""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('data', header, slist)
++
++ def test_FindsTypedefEnum(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef enum {
++ ENUM
++ } Data;""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('Data', header, slist)
++
++ def test_HandleEnumWithDeprecatedMember(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ enum data {
++ TEST_A,
++ #ifndef GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
++ TEST_B,
++ #endif
++ TEST_C
++ };""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('data', header, slist)
++
++ def test_HandleDeprecatedInMemberName(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef enum {
++ VAL_DEFAULT,
++ VAL_DEPRECATED,
++ } Data;""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('Data', header, slist)
++
++ def test_HandleDeprecatedMemberDecorator(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef enum {
++ VAL_DEFAULT,
++ OTHER_VAL MY_DEPRECATED_FOR(VAL_DEFAULT),
++ } Data;""")
++ expected = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef enum {
++ VAL_DEFAULT,
++ OTHER_VAL,
++ } Data;""")
++ self.options.ignore_decorators = 'MY_DEPRECATED_FOR()'
++ scan.InitScanner(self.options)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('Data', expected, slist)
++
++ def test_HandleDeprecatedDecorator(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef enum {
++ VAL_DEFAULT,
++ OTHER_VAL,
++ } Data MY_DEPRECATED_FOR(OtherEnum);""")
++ expected = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <DEPRECATED/>
++ typedef enum {
++ VAL_DEFAULT,
++ OTHER_VAL,
++ } Data;""")
++ self.options.ignore_decorators = 'MY_DEPRECATED_FOR()'
++ scan.InitScanner(self.options)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('Data', expected, slist)
++
++
++class ScanHeaderContentFunctions(ScanHeaderContentTestCase):
++ """Test parsing of function declarations."""
++
++ def assertDecl(self, name, ret, params, slist):
++ self.assertEqual([name], slist)
++ d = '<FUNCTION>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n<RETURNS>%s</RETURNS>\n%s\n</FUNCTION>\n' % (name, ret, params)
++ self.assertEqual([d], self.decls)
++ self.assertEqual([], self.types)
++
++ def test_FindsFunctionVoid(self):
++ header = 'void func();'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'void', '', slist)
++
++ def test_IgnoresInternalFunction(self):
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([
++ 'void _internal(void);'
++ ])
++ self.assertNoDeclFound(slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand(INLINE_MODIFIERS)
++ def test_IgnoresInternalInlineVoidFunction(self, _, modifier):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ %s void _internal(void) {
++ }""" % modifier)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertNoDeclFound(slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand(INLINE_MODIFIERS)
++ def test_IgnoresInternalInlineFunction(self, _, modifier):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ %s int _internal(int a) {
++ return a + a; }""" % modifier)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertNoDeclFound(slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand([(t.replace(' ', '_'), t) for t in BASIC_TYPES_WITH_VOID])
++ def test_HandlesReturnValue(self, _, ret_type):
++ header = '%s func(void);' % ret_type
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', ret_type, 'void', slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand([(t.replace(' ', '_'), t) for t in BASIC_TYPES_WITH_VOID])
++ def test_HandlesReturnValuePtr(self, _, ret_type):
++ header = '%s* func(void);' % ret_type
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', ret_type + ' *', 'void', slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand([(t.replace(' ', '_'), t) for t in BASIC_TYPES_WITH_VOID])
++ def test_HandlesReturnValueConstPtr(self, _, ret_type):
++ header = 'const %s* func(void);' % ret_type
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'const ' + ret_type + ' *', 'void', slist)
++
++ # TODO: also do parametrized?
++ def test_FindsFunctionConstCharPtConstPtr_Void(self):
++ header = 'const char* const * func(void);'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'const char * const *', 'void', slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand([(t.replace(' ', '_'), t) for t in BASIC_TYPES])
++ def test_HandlesParameter(self, _, param_type):
++ header = 'void func(%s);' % param_type
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'void', param_type, slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand([(t.replace(' ', '_'), t) for t in BASIC_TYPES])
++ def test_HandlesNamedParameter(self, _, param_type):
++ header = 'void func(%s a);' % param_type
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'void', param_type + ' a', slist)
++
++ def test_HandlesMultipleParameterd(self):
++ header = 'int func(char c, long l);'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'int', 'char c, long l', slist)
++
++ def test_FindsFunctionStruct_Void_WithLinebreakAfterRetType(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ struct ret *
++ func (void);""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'struct ret *', 'void', slist)
++
++ def test_FindsFunctionStruct_Void_WithLinebreakAfterFuncName(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ struct ret * func
++ (void);""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'struct ret *', 'void', slist)
++
++ def test_FindsFunctionVoid_Int_WithLinebreakAfterParamType(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ void func (int
++ a);""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'void', 'int a', slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand(INLINE_MODIFIERS)
++ def test_FindsInlineFunction(self, _, modifier):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ %s void func (void)
++ {
++ }
++ """ % modifier)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'void', 'void', slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand(INLINE_MODIFIERS)
++ def test_FindsInlineFunctionWithNewlineAfterType(self, _, modifier):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ %s void
++ func (void)
++ {
++ }
++ """ % modifier)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'void', 'void', slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand(INLINE_MODIFIERS)
++ def test_FindsInlineFunctionWithConditionalBody(self, _, modifier):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ %s int
++ func (int a)
++ {
++ #if defined(__GNUC__) && (__GNUC__ >= 4) && defined(__OPTIMIZE__)
++ return a;
++ #else
++ return 0;
++ #endif
++ }
++ """ % modifier)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'int', 'int a', slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand(INLINE_MODIFIERS)
++ def test_FindsInlineFunctionWithParenthesisName(self, _, modifier):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ %s void
++ (func) (void)
++ {
++ }
++ """ % modifier)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'void', 'void', slist)
++
++
++class ScanHeaderContentMacros(ScanHeaderContentTestCase):
++ """Test parsing of macro declarations."""
++
++ def assertDecl(self, name, decl, slist):
++ self.assertEqual([name], slist)
++ d = '<MACRO>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s</MACRO>\n' % (name, decl)
++ self.assertEqual([d], self.decls)
++ self.assertEqual([], self.types)
++
++ def test_FindsMacroNumber(self):
++ header = '#define FOO 1'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('FOO', header, slist)
++
++ def test_FindsMacroExpression(self):
++ header = '#define FOO (1 << 1)'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('FOO', header, slist)
++
++ def test_FindsMacroFunction(self):
++ header = '#define FOO(x) (x << 1)'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('FOO', header, slist)
++
++ def test_IgnoresInternalMacro(self):
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([
++ '#define _INTERNAL (a) (a)'
++ ])
++ self.assertNoDeclFound(slist)
++
++ def test_FindsDocCommentForDeprecationGuard(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ /**
++ * GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED:
++ *
++ * Documentation for a deprecation guard.
++ */
++ #define GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED 1""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertEqual(1, len(doc_comments))
++ self.assertIn('gtkdoc_tester_disable_deprecated', doc_comments)
++ self.assertDecl('GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED',
++ '#define GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED 1', slist)
++
++
++class ScanHeaderContentStructs(ScanHeaderContentTestCase):
++ """Test parsing of struct declarations."""
++
++ def assertDecl(self, name, decl, slist):
++ self.assertEqual([name], slist)
++ d = '<STRUCT>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s</STRUCT>\n' % (name, decl)
++ self.assertEqual([d], self.decls)
++ self.assertEqual([], self.types)
++
++ def test_FindsStruct(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ struct data {
++ int test;
++ };""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('data', header, slist)
++
++ def test_FindsTypedefStruct(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef struct {
++ int test;
++ } Data;""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('Data', header, slist)
++
++ def test_HandleStructWithDeprecatedMember(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ struct data {
++ int test_a;
++ #ifndef GTKDOC_TESTER_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
++ int deprecated;
++ #endif
++ int test_b;
++ };""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('data', header, slist)
++
++ def test_IgnoresInternalStruct(self):
++ header = 'struct _internal *x;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertNoDeclFound(slist)
++
++ def test_IgnoresPrivateStruct(self):
++ header = 'struct _x;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertNoDeclFound(slist)
++
++ def test_OpaqueStructTypedefGeneratesEmptyDecl(self):
++ header = 'typedef struct _data data;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('data', '', slist)
++
++ def test_OpaqueStructGeneratesEmptyDecl(self):
++ header = 'struct data;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('data', header, slist)
++
++ def test_GetTitleFromGObjectClassStruct(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ struct _GtkdocObjectClass {
++ GObjectClass parent;
++ };""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertIn('<TITLE>GtkdocObject</TITLE>', slist)
++
++ def test_DeprecatedDecorator(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef struct {
++ int x;
++ } Data MY_DEPRECATED_FOR(OtherStruct);""")
++ expected = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ <DEPRECATED/>
++ typedef struct {
++ int x;
++ } Data;""")
++ self.options.ignore_decorators = 'MY_DEPRECATED_FOR()'
++ scan.InitScanner(self.options)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('Data', expected, slist)
++
++ def test_DeprecatedOpaqueStructTypedef(self):
++ header = 'typedef struct _data data MY_DEPRECATED_FOR(OtherData);'
++ expected = '<DEPRECATED/>\n'
++ self.options.ignore_decorators = 'MY_DEPRECATED_FOR()'
++ scan.InitScanner(self.options)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('data', expected, slist)
++
++ def test_HandleDeprecatedMemberDecorator(self):
++ """Struct with deprecated members."""
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ struct data {
++ int x1 G_GNUC_DEPRECATED;
++ int x2 G_GNUC_DEPRECATED_FOR(replacement);
++ };""")
++ expected = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ struct data {
++ int x1;
++ int x2;
++ };""")
++ scan.InitScanner(self.options)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('data', expected, slist)
++
++
++class ScanHeaderContentUnions(ScanHeaderContentTestCase):
++ """Test parsing of union declarations."""
++
++ def assertDecl(self, name, decl, slist):
++ self.assertEqual([name], slist)
++ d = '<UNION>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s</UNION>\n' % (name, decl)
++ self.assertEqual([d], self.decls)
++ self.assertEqual([], self.types)
++
++ def test_FindsUnion(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ union data {
++ int i;
++ float f;
++ };""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('data', header, slist)
++
++ def test_FindsTypedefUnion(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef union {
++ int i;
++ float f;
++ } Data;""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('Data', header, slist)
++
++ def test_IgnoresInternalUnion(self):
++ header = 'union _internal *x;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertNoDeclFound(slist)
++
++ def test_IgnoresPrivateUnion(self):
++ header = 'union _x;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertNoDeclFound(slist)
++
++ def test_OpaqueUnionTypedefGeneratesEmptyDecl(self):
++ header = 'typedef union _data data;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('data', '', slist)
++
++ def test_OpaqueUnionGeneratesEmptyDecl(self):
++ header = 'union data;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('data', header, slist)
++
++
++class ScanHeaderContentUserFunction(ScanHeaderContentTestCase):
++ """Test parsing of function pointer declarations."""
++
++ def assertDecl(self, name, ret, params, slist):
++ self.assertEqual([name], slist)
++ d = '<USER_FUNCTION>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n<RETURNS>%s</RETURNS>\n%s</USER_FUNCTION>\n' % (name, ret, params)
++ self.assertEqual([d], self.decls)
++ self.assertEqual([], self.types)
++
++ def test_FindsFunctionVoid(self):
++ header = 'typedef void (*func)();'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'void', '', slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand([(t.replace(' ', '_'), t) for t in BASIC_TYPES_WITH_VOID])
++ def test_HandlesReturnValue(self, _, ret_type):
++ header = 'typedef %s (*func)(void);' % ret_type
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', ret_type, 'void', slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand([(t.replace(' ', '_'), t) for t in BASIC_TYPES_WITH_VOID])
++ def test_HandlesReturnValuePtr(self, _, ret_type):
++ header = 'typedef %s* (*func)(void);' % ret_type
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', ret_type + ' *', 'void', slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand([(t.replace(' ', '_'), t) for t in BASIC_TYPES_WITH_VOID])
++ def test_HandlesReturnValueConstPtr(self, _, ret_type):
++ header = 'typedef const %s* (*func)(void);' % ret_type
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'const ' + ret_type + ' *', 'void', slist)
++
++ def test_FindsFunctionVoid_Int_WithLinebreakAfterTypedef(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef
++ void (*func) (int a);""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'void', 'int a', slist)
++
++ def test_FindsFunctionStruct_Void_WithLinebreakAfterRetType(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef struct ret *
++ (*func) (void);""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'struct ret *', 'void', slist)
++
++ # TODO: not found
++ # def test_FindsFunctionStruct_Void_WithLinebreakAfterFuncName(self):
++ # header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ # typedef struct ret * (*func)
++ # (void);""")
++ # slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ # header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ # self.assertDecl('func', 'struct ret *', 'void', slist)
++
++ def test_FindsFunctionVoid_Int_WithLinebreakAfterParamType(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ typedef void (*func) (int
++ a);""")
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('func', 'void', 'int a', slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand([('void', 'void'), ('const_int', 'const int')])
++ def test_FindsFunctionPointerVar(self, _, ret_type):
++ header = '%s (*func)();' % ret_type
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('func', ret_type, '', slist)
++
++
++class ScanHeaderContentVariabless(ScanHeaderContentTestCase):
++ """Test parsing of variable declarations."""
++
++ def assertDecl(self, name, decl, slist):
++ self.assertEqual([name], slist)
++ d = '<VARIABLE>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s</VARIABLE>\n' % (name, decl)
++ self.assertEqual([d], self.decls)
++ self.assertEqual([], self.types)
++
++ @parameterized.expand([(t.replace(' ', '_'), t) for t in BASIC_TYPES])
++ def test_FindsExternVar(self, _, var_type):
++ header = 'extern %s var;' % var_type
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('var', header, slist)
++
++ @parameterized.expand([(t.replace(' ', '_'), t) for t in BASIC_TYPES])
++ def test_FindsExternPtrVar(self, _, var_type):
++ header = 'extern %s* var;' % var_type
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('var', header, slist)
++
++ def test_FindsConstInt(self):
++ header = 'const int var = 42;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('var', header, slist)
++
++ def test_FindConstCharPtr(self):
++ header = 'const char* var = "foo";'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ self.assertDecl('var', header, slist)
++
++
++class ScanHeaderContentTypedefs(ScanHeaderContentTestCase):
++ """Test parsing of typedef declarations."""
++
++ def assertDecl(self, name, decl, slist):
++ self.assertEqual([name], slist)
++ d = '<TYPEDEF>\n<NAME>%s</NAME>\n%s</TYPEDEF>\n' % (name, decl)
++ self.assertEqual([d], self.decls)
++ self.assertEqual([], self.types)
++
++ def test_FindsTypedefStructPointer(self):
++ header = 'typedef struct data *dataptr;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('dataptr', header, slist)
++
++ def test_FindsTypedefUnionPointer(self):
++ header = 'typedef union data *dataptr;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('dataptr', header, slist)
++
++ def test_FindsTypedef(self):
++ header = 'typedef unsigned int uint;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertDecl('uint', header, slist)
++
++ def test_SkipsEnumTypedefUnderscoreName(self):
++ header = 'typedef enum _data data;'
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent([header])
++ self.assertNoDeclFound(slist)
++
++
++class SeparateSubSections(ScanHeaderContentTestCase):
++
++ def test_NoSymbolsGiveEmptyResult(self):
++ liststr = scan.SeparateSubSections([], {})
++ self.assertEqual('\n', liststr)
++
++ def test_CreatesStandardSectionFromIsObjectMacro(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ #define GTKDOC_IS_OBJECT(obj) (G_TYPE_CHECK_INSTANCE_TYPE ((obj), GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT))
++ void gtkdoc_object_function(void);
++ """)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ liststr = scan.SeparateSubSections(slist, doc_comments)
++ self.assertEqual(
++ ['gtkdoc_object_function', '<SUBSECTION Standard>', 'GTKDOC_IS_OBJECT'],
++ liststr.splitlines())
++
++ def test_CreatesStandardSectionFromIsObjectClassMacro(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ #define GTKDOC_IS_OBJECT_CLASS(klass) (G_TYPE_CHECK_CLASS_TYPE ((klass), GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT))
++ void gtkdoc_object_function(void);
++ """)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ liststr = scan.SeparateSubSections(slist, doc_comments)
++ self.assertEqual(
++ ['gtkdoc_object_function', '<SUBSECTION Standard>', 'GTKDOC_IS_OBJECT_CLASS'],
++ liststr.splitlines())
++
++ def test_CreatesStandardSectionFromGetTypeFunction(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ GType gtkdoc_object_get_type(void) G_GNUC_CONST;
++ void gtkdoc_object_function(void);
++ """)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ liststr = scan.SeparateSubSections(slist, doc_comments)
++ self.assertEqual(
++ ['gtkdoc_object_function', '<SUBSECTION Standard>', 'gtkdoc_object_get_type'],
++ liststr.splitlines())
++
++ def test_CreatesStandardSectionAllMacros(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ #define GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT (gtkdoc_object_get_type())
++ #define GTKDOC_OBJECT(obj) (G_TYPE_CHECK_INSTANCE_CAST((obj), GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT, GtkdocObject))
++ #define GTKDOC_OBJECT_CLASS(klass) (G_TYPE_CHECK_CLASS_CAST((klass), GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT, GtkdocObjectClass))
++ #define GTKDOC_IS_OBJECT(obj) (G_TYPE_CHECK_INSTANCE_TYPE((obj), GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT))
++ #define GTKDOC_IS_OBJECT_CLASS(klass) (G_TYPE_CHECK_CLASS_TYPE((klass), GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT))
++ #define GTKDOC_OBJECT_GET_CLASS(obj) (G_TYPE_INSTANCE_GET_CLASS((obj), GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT, GtkdocObjectClass))
++ """)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ liststr = scan.SeparateSubSections(slist, doc_comments)
++ self.assertEqual(
++ ['<SUBSECTION Standard>', 'GTKDOC_IS_OBJECT', 'GTKDOC_IS_OBJECT_CLASS',
++ 'GTKDOC_OBJECT', 'GTKDOC_OBJECT_CLASS', 'GTKDOC_OBJECT_GET_CLASS',
++ 'GTKDOC_TYPE_OBJECT'],
++ liststr.splitlines())
++
++ def test_MovesSymbolIfUndocumented(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ struct _GtkdocObject {
++ GObject parent;
++ };
++ GType gtkdoc_object_get_type(void) G_GNUC_CONST;
++ void gtkdoc_object_function(void);
++ """)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ liststr = scan.SeparateSubSections(slist, doc_comments)
++ self.assertEqual(
++ ['gtkdoc_object_function', '<SUBSECTION Standard>', 'GtkdocObject', 'gtkdoc_object_get_type'],
++ liststr.splitlines())
++
++ def test_DoesNotMoveSymbolIfDocumented(self):
++ header = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ /**
++ * GtkdocObject:
++ *
++ * instance data of gtk-doc unit test class
++ */
++ struct _GtkdocObject {
++ GObject parent;
++ };
++ GType gtkdoc_object_get_type(void) G_GNUC_CONST;
++ void gtkdoc_object_function(void);
++ """)
++ slist, doc_comments = self.scanHeaderContent(
++ header.splitlines(keepends=True))
++ liststr = scan.SeparateSubSections(slist, doc_comments)
++ self.assertEqual(
++ ['GtkdocObject', 'gtkdoc_object_function', '<SUBSECTION Standard>', 'gtkdoc_object_get_type'],
++ liststr.splitlines())
++
++
++class RemoveBracedContent(ScanHeaderContentTestCase):
++
++ def test_OneLineFunctionBodyIsRemoved(self):
++ decl = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ static inline int function(int a) { return a + a; }""")
++ (skip, decl) = scan.remove_braced_content(decl)
++ self.assertEqual("static inline int function(int a);", decl)
++ self.assertEqual(skip, False)
++
++ def test_SimpleFunctionBodyIsRemoved(self):
++ decl = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ static inline int function(int a) {
++ return a + a;
++ }""")
++ (skip, decl) = scan.remove_braced_content(decl)
++ self.assertEqual("static inline int function(int a);", decl)
++ self.assertEqual(skip, False)
++
++ def test_SimpleFunctionWithNewlineBodyIsRemoved(self):
++ decl = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ static inline int function(int a)
++ {
++ return a + a;
++ }""")
++ (skip, decl) = scan.remove_braced_content(decl)
++ self.assertEqual("static inline int function(int a);", decl)
++ self.assertEqual(skip, False)
++
++ def test_NestedFunctionBodyIsRemoved(self):
++ decl = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ static inline int function(int a) {
++ if (a > 0) {
++ return a + a;
++ } else {
++ return a - a;
++ }
++ }""")
++ (skip, decl) = scan.remove_braced_content(decl)
++ self.assertEqual("static inline int function(int a);", decl)
++ self.assertEqual(skip, False)
++
++ def test_NestedFunctionWithNewlinesBodyIsRemoved(self):
++ decl = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ static inline int function(int a)
++ {
++ if (a > 0)
++ {
++ return a + a;
++ }
++ else
++ {
++ return a - a;
++ }
++ }""")
++ (skip, decl) = scan.remove_braced_content(decl)
++ self.assertEqual("static inline int function(int a);", decl)
++ self.assertEqual(skip, False)
++
++ def test_SimpleFunctionWithParenthesisBodyIsRemoved(self):
++ decl = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ static inline int
++ (function) (int a)
++ {
++ return a + a;
++ }""")
++ (skip, decl) = scan.remove_braced_content(decl)
++ self.assertEqual("static inline int\n(function) (int a);", decl)
++ self.assertEqual(skip, False)
++
++ def test_FunctionWithMultilineParamsBodyIsRemoved(self):
++ decl = textwrap.dedent("""\
++ static inline int
++ function (int a,
++ int b)
++ {
++ return a + b;
++ }""")
++ (skip, decl) = scan.remove_braced_content(decl)
++ self.assertEqual(
++ "static inline int\nfunction (int a,\n int b);", decl)
++ self.assertEqual(skip, False)
++
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ from gtkdoc import common
++ common.setup_logging()
++
++ unittest.main()
++
++ # t = RemoveBracedContent()
++ # t.setUp()
++ # t.test_NestedFunctionBodyIsRemoved()
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/bin/sh
++
++suite="tools"
++
++failed=0
++tested=0
++
++echo "Running suite(s): gtk-doc-$suite";
++
++# we use 'which' here as we override the path in TEST_ENVIRONMENT
++
++
++# test shell scripts
++for file in gtkdocize; do
++ sh -n `which $file`
++ if test $? != 0 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++ tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++done
++
++
++# test xsl files
++for file in $ABS_TOP_SRCDIR/*.xsl; do
++ xmllint --noout --noent $file
++ if test $? != 0 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++ tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++done
++
++
++# test python scripts
++# TODO: also test the module files
++for file in gtkdoc-check gtkdoc-depscan gtkdoc-fixxref gtkdoc-mkdb gtkdoc-mkhtml gtkdoc-mkhtml2 gtkdoc-mkman gtkdoc-mkpdf gtkdoc-rebase gtkdoc-scangobj; do
++ fullfile=`which $file`
++ @PYTHON@ -m py_compile $fullfile
++ if test $? != 0 ; then failed=`expr $failed + 1`; fi
++ tested=`expr $tested + 1`
++done
++
++
++# summary
++successes=`expr $tested - $failed`
++
++rate=`expr 100 \* $successes / $tested`;
++echo "$rate %: Checks $tested, Failures: $failed"
++
++test $failed = 0
++exit $?
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/usr/bin/python3
++# canonicalize html dirs to ease comaring them
++#
++# run as:
++# ./tools/c10e-html html
++
++import argparse
++import glob
++import re
++import os
++import sys
++
++from bs4 import BeautifulSoup
++
++
++def prettify(filename, parser='lxml', fixup=False):
++ with open(filename, 'r') as doc:
++ soup = BeautifulSoup(doc.read(), parser)
++ with open(filename, 'w') as doc:
++ html = soup.prettify()
++ if fixup:
++ # strip things that mkhtml2 is not producing to reduce the diff
++ html = html.replace('a class="link" href', 'a href')
++ html = html.replace(' target="_top"', '')
++ html = html.replace('summary="Navigation header" ', '')
++ html = html.replace(""" <a name="idx">
++ </a>
++""", '')
++ html = re.sub(""" <div class="footer">
++ <hr/>
++ Generated by GTK-Doc V[.0-9]*
++ </div>
++""", '', html)
++ html = re.sub(r'\s*<p>\s*</p>', '', html)
++ html = re.sub(r'\s*<a name="id-[.0-9]+">\s*</a>', '', html)
++ html = re.sub(r'\s*<div class="titlepage">\s*</div>', '', html)
++ html = re.sub(r'\s*<meta content="DocBook[^>]*>', '', html)
++ html = re.sub(r'\s*<meta content="GTK-Doc[^>]*>', '', html)
++ doc.write(html)
++
++
++def main(htmldir):
++ for filename in glob.glob(os.path.join(htmldir, '*.devhelp2')):
++ prettify(filename, parser='lxml-xml')
++ for filename in glob.glob(os.path.join(htmldir, '*.html')):
++ prettify(filename, fixup=True)
++
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(
++ description='c10e-html - canonicalize html files for diffing')
++ parser.add_argument('args', nargs='*', help='HTML_DIR')
++
++ options = parser.parse_args()
++ if len(options.args) < 1:
++ sys.exit('Too few arguments')
++
++ main(options.args[0])
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/usr/bin/env python3
++# -*- python; coding: utf-8 -*-
++#
++# gtk-doc - GTK DocBook documentation generator.
++# Copyright (C) 2017 Stefan Sauer
++#
++# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
++# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
++# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
++# (at your option) any later version.
++#
++# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
++# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
++# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
++# GNU General Public License for more details.
++#
++# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
++# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
++# Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
++#
++
++"""Migrate from inline docbook markup to markdown.
++
++The tool converts markup in comments for the given source file(s). If --dry-run
++is given it would only report that docbook tags were found with exit code 1.
++To convert interatively one would make a copy of the docs/xml dir, run the
++migration tool for some sources, rebuild the docs and compare the new xml.
++If it looks the same (or similar enough), submit the changes and repeat for more
++files.
++
++Examples:
++python3 tools/db2md.py --dry-run tests/*/src/*.{c,h} | sed -e 's/^ *//' | sort | uniq -c | sort -g
++"""
++
++import argparse
++import logging
++import os
++import re
++import sys
++import xml.etree.ElementTree as ET
++
++
++def print_xml(node, depth=0):
++ # if node.text:
++ # print(' ' * depth, node.text)
++ for child in node:
++ print(' ' * depth, '<%s %s>' % (child.tag, child.attrib))
++ print_xml(child, depth + 1)
++ # if node.tail:
++ # print(' ' * depth, node.tail)
++
++
++def convert_block(dry_run, filename, lines, beg, end):
++ logging.debug("%s: scan block %d..%d", filename, beg, end)
++
++ # get indentation
++ line = lines[beg]
++ indent = line.find('* ')
++ if indent == -1:
++ logging.warning("%s:%d: missing '*' in comment?", filename, beg)
++ return 0
++
++ indent += 2
++
++ found_docbook = 0
++ end_skip = None
++ content = ''
++ for ix in range(beg, end):
++ # scan for docbook tags
++ line = lines[ix]
++ content += line[indent:]
++
++ if not re.search(r'^\s*\*', line):
++ logging.warning("%s:%d: missing '*' in comment?", filename, ix)
++ continue
++
++ line = line[indent:]
++
++ # skip |[ ... ]| and <![CDATA[ ... ]]> blocks
++ if end_skip:
++ if re.search(end_skip, line):
++ logging.debug("%s:%d: skip code block end", filename, ix)
++ end_skip = None
++ continue
++ else:
++ if re.search(r'\|\[', line):
++ logging.debug("%s:%d: skip code block start", filename, ix)
++ end_skip = r'\]\|'
++ continue
++ # if re.search(r'<!\[CDATA\[', line):
++ # logging.debug("%s:%d: skip code block start", filename, ix)
++ # end_skip = r'\]\]>'
++ # continue
++
++ # TODO: skip `...` blocks
++ # check for historic non markdown compatible chars
++ if re.search(r'\s\*\w+[\s.]', line):
++ logging.warning("%s:%d: leading '*' needs escaping: '%s'", filename, ix, line)
++ # if re.search(r'\s\w+\*[\s.]', line):
++ # logging.warning("%s:%d: trailing '*' needs escaping: '%s'", filename, ix, line)
++ if re.search(r'\s_\w+[\s.]', line):
++ logging.warning("%s:%d: leading '_' needs escaping: '%s'", filename, ix, line)
++ # if re.search(r'\s\w+_[\s.]', line):
++ # logging.warning("%s:%d: trailing '_' needs escaping: '%s'", filename, ix, line)
++
++ # look for docbook
++ for m in re.finditer(r'<([^>]*)>', line):
++ tag = m.group(1)
++ tag_name = tag.split(' ')[0]
++ # check if it is a valid xml element name
++ if not re.search(r'^/?[a-z_:][a-z0-9_:.-]*/?$', tag_name, re.I):
++ continue
++
++ found_docbook = 1
++ break
++ # if dry_run:
++ # # python3 tools/db2md.py --dry-run tests/*/src/*.{c,h} | \
++ # # cut -d':' -f3- | sort | uniq -c | sort -g
++ # print('%s:%d:<%s>' % (filename, ix, tag_name.replace('/', '')))
++
++ if found_docbook:
++ # add a fake root
++ content = '<gtkdoc>' + content + '</gtkdoc>'
++ # TODO: protect |[ ... ]| sections, use CDATA?s
++ try:
++ root = ET.fromstring(content)
++ except ET.ParseError:
++ return 0
++
++ if not root:
++ return 0
++
++ if dry_run:
++ print('%s:%d:' % (filename, ix))
++ print_xml(root)
++ else:
++ # TODO: convert_tags()
++ pass
++
++ return found_docbook
++
++
++def convert_file(dry_run, filename):
++ """Scan scan a single file.
++
++ Returns: 0 if no doocbook was found
++ """
++
++ found_docbook = 0
++ lines = None
++ with open(filename, 'r', encoding='utf-8') as f:
++ lines = f.read().split('\n')
++
++ logging.debug("%s: read file with %d lines", filename, len(lines))
++
++ beg = end = -1
++ for ix in range(len(lines)):
++ line = lines[ix]
++ # logging.debug("%s:%d: %d,%d: %s", filename, ix, beg, end, line)
++ if beg == -1 and end == -1:
++ if re.search(r'^\s*/\*.*\*/', line):
++ pass
++ elif re.search(r'^\s*/\*\*(\s|$)', line):
++ logging.debug("%s:%d: comment start", filename, ix)
++ beg = ix
++ elif beg > -1 and end == -1:
++ if re.search(r'^\s*\*+/', line):
++ logging.debug("%s:%d: comment end", filename, ix)
++ end = ix
++
++ if beg > -1 and end > -1:
++ beg += 1
++ end -= 1
++ if beg < end:
++ found_docbook = found_docbook | convert_block(dry_run, filename, lines, beg, end)
++ beg = end = -1
++
++ return found_docbook
++
++
++def main(dry_run, files):
++ """Scan for docbook tags in comments. If not in dry_run mode rewrite them as
++ markdown. Report the files that contain(ed) docbook tags.
++
++ Returns: 0 if no doocbook was found
++ """
++
++ found_docbook = 0
++ for f in files:
++ found_docbook = found_docbook | convert_file(dry_run, f)
++ return found_docbook
++
++
++if __name__ == '__main__':
++ parser = argparse.ArgumentParser(
++ description='db2md - convert docbook in comment to markdown')
++ parser.add_argument('--dry-run', default=False, action='store_true',
++ help='Only print files with docbook comments.')
++ parser.add_argument('sources', nargs='*')
++ options = parser.parse_args()
++ if len(options.sources) == 0:
++ sys.exit('Too few arguments')
++
++ log_level = os.environ.get('GTKDOC_TRACE')
++ if log_level == '':
++ log_level = 'INFO'
++ if log_level:
++ logging.basicConfig(stream=sys.stdout,
++ level=logging.getLevelName(log_level.upper()),
++ format='%(asctime)s:%(filename)s:%(funcName)s:%(lineno)d:%(levelname)s:%(message)s')
++
++ sys.exit(main(options.dry_run, options.sources))
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/usr/bin/perl -w
++
++#############################################################################
++# Function : CreateValidSGMLID
++# Description : Creates a valid SGML 'id' from the given string.
++# NOTE: SGML ids are case-insensitive, so we have a few special
++# cases to avoid clashes of ids.
++# Arguments : $id - the string to be converted into a valid SGML id.
++#############################################################################
++
++sub CreateValidSGMLID {
++ my ($id) = $_[0];
++
++ # Append -CAPS to all all-caps identifiers
++
++ # Special case, '_' would end up as '' so we use 'gettext-macro' instead.
++ if ($id eq "_") { return "gettext-macro"; }
++
++ if ($id !~ /[a-z]/) { $id .= "-CAPS" };
++
++ $id =~ s/[_ ]/-/g;
++ $id =~ s/[,\.]//g;
++ $id =~ s/^-*//;
++ $id =~ s/::/-/g;
++
++ return $id;
++}
++
++$BASEDIR=shift @ARGV;
++
++print <<EOT;
++<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
++ <tr><th align="left">Module</th><th style="padding-left: 0.5em; padding-right: 0.5em" colspan="4">Documented</th></tr>
++EOT
++
++my $row = 0;
++while (@ARGV) {
++ my $percentage;
++ my $documented;
++ my $undocumented;
++ my @undocumented_symbols;
++
++ my $module_name = shift @ARGV;
++ my $file = shift @ARGV;
++ my $indexfile = shift @ARGV;
++
++ open DOCUMENTED, "<$file" or die "Cannot open $file: $!\n";
++
++ while (<DOCUMENTED>) {
++ if (/(\d+)% (function|symbol) docs coverage/) {
++ $percentage = $1;
++ } elsif (/(\d+) (function|symbol)s documented/) {
++ $documented = $1;
++ } elsif (/(\d+) not documented/) {
++ $undocumented = $1;
++ } elsif (/^\s*(\w+)\s*$/) {
++ push @undocumented_symbols, $1;
++ }
++ }
++
++ close DOCUMENTED;
++
++ my $complete = defined $percentage && defined $documented && defined $undocumented;
++ if (!$complete) {
++ die "Cannot parse documentation status file $file\n";
++ }
++
++ my $total = $documented + $undocumented;
++
++ my $directory;
++ ($directory = $indexfile) =~ s@/[^/]*$@@;
++
++ $bgcolor = ($row % 2 == 0) ? "#f7ebd3" : "#fffcf4";
++
++ print <<EOT;
++ <tr bgcolor="$bgcolor">
++ <td><a href="$indexfile">$module_name</a></td>
++ <td align="right" style="padding-left: 0.5em">$documented</td>
++ <td>/</td><td>$total</td>
++ <td style="padding-right: 0.5em">($percentage%)</td>
++EOT
++ if ($undocumented != 0) {
++ print <<EOT;
++ <td><a href="$directory/undocumented.html"><small>[missing]<small></a></td>
++EOT
++ }
++ print <<EOT;
++ </tr>
++EOT
++
++ #
++ # Print an index of undocumented symbols for this module
++ #
++
++ @undocumented_symbols = sort { uc($a) cmp uc($b) } @undocumented_symbols;
++
++ my $base = "$BASEDIR/$directory";
++
++ open INDEX_SGML, "<$base/index.sgml" or die "Cannot open $base/index.sgml: $!\n";
++
++ my %index_symbols;
++
++ while (<INDEX_SGML>) {
++ if (/<ANCHOR\s+id="([^"]+)"\s+href="([^"]+)">/) {
++ $index_symbols{$1} = $2;
++ }
++ }
++
++ close INDEX_SGML;
++
++ open UNDOC_OUT, ">$base/undocumented.html" or die "Cannot open $base/undocumented.html: $!\n";
++ print UNDOC_OUT <<EOT;
++<html>
++<head>
++<title>Undocumented functions in $module_name</title>
++</head>
++<body bgcolor="#ffffff">
++<table>
++ <tr>
++EOT
++ my $i = 0;
++ for $symbol (@undocumented_symbols) {
++ my $id = CreateValidSGMLID($symbol);
++
++ my $output;
++ if (exists $index_symbols{$id}) {
++ my $href;
++
++ ($href = $index_symbols{$id}) =~ s@.*/(.*)$@$1@;
++
++ $output = qq(<a href="$href">$symbol</a>);
++ } else {
++ $output = qq($symbol);
++ }
++ print UNDOC_OUT " <td>$output</td>\n";
++ if ($i % 3 == 2) {
++ print UNDOC_OUT " </tr><tr>\n";
++ }
++
++ $i++;
++ }
++
++ print UNDOC_OUT <<EOT;
++ </tr>
++</table>
++</body>
++</html>
++EOT
++ close UNDOC_OUT;
++ $row++;
++}
++
++print <<EOT;
++</table>
++EOT
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++#!/bin/sh
++# git hook to ensure code style
++# cp tools/git-pre-commit .git/hooks/pre-commit
++#
++# TODO:
++# pylint -r n -f parseable $files
++
++which >/dev/null pep8 || (echo "please install pep8"; exit )
++which >/dev/null autopep8 || (echo "please install autopep8"; exit )
++which >/dev/null pyflakes || (echo "please install pyflakes"; exit )
++
++files=$(git diff --name-only --staged --diff-filter=ACMRTUXB | egrep "*.py$")
++
++if test -n "$files"; then
++ pep8 --max-line-length=120 $files
++ res=$?
++ if [ $res -ne 0 ]; then
++ echo
++ autopep8 --max-line-length=120 --diff $files
++ echo
++ echo "To fix run: autopep8 --max-line-length=120 -i $files"
++ else
++ pyflakes $files
++ res=$?
++ fi
++ exit $res
++fi
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++
++;; Copyright (C) 1998 Michael Zucchi
++
++;; This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
++;; modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
++;; published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
++;; the License, or (at your option) any later version.
++
++;; This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
++;; useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
++;; warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
++;; PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
++
++;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
++;; License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
++;; Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston,
++;; MA 0211
++;;
++
++;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
++
++;; This file auto-generates a C function document header from the
++;; current function.
++
++;; Load into emacs (e.g. add (load "~/gtk-doc.el") to your .emacs file)
++;; and use C-x4h, or M-x gtk-doc-insert to insert a new header for
++;; the current function. You have to be somewhere in the body of the
++;; function you wish to document.
++
++;; You can also now use C-x4s to insert a blank section header.
++
++;; The default header format is setup to do 'gnome' style headers.
++;; These headers are used in the Gnome project to automatically
++;; produce SGML API documentation directly from the source code.
++
++;; These headers look something like this (the cursor is left at
++;; the '_'):
++
++;; /**
++;; * function_name:
++;; * @param1:
++;; * @param2:
++;; *
++;; * _
++;; *
++;; * Returns:
++;; **/
++;; int function_name(char *param1, int param2)
++;; {
++;; ...
++
++;; It should be able to transform this into quite a few different
++;; header formats by customising the options.
++
++;; For example, for a more gnu-ish header style, the following
++;; settings could be used:
++
++;; (setq-default gnome-doc-header "/* %s\n")
++;; or for no function name in the header:
++;; (setq-default gnome-doc-header "/* \n")
++
++;; (setq-default gnome-doc-blank " \n")
++;; or for more compact version:
++;; (setq-default gnome-doc-blank "")
++
++;; (setq-default gnome-doc-parameter " %s: \n")
++;; or to exclude parameters:
++;; (setq-default gnome-doc-parameter "")
++
++;; (setq-default gnome-doc-trailer " */\n")
++;; (setq-default gnome-doc-section " %s: \n")
++;; (setq-default gnome-doc-match-block "^ ")
++;; (setq-default gnome-doc-match-header "^/\\*")
++
++;; The important thing is to ensure all lines match
++;; the gnome-doc-match-block regular expression.
++
++;; This will produce something like this:
++
++;; /* function_name
++;; param1:
++;; param2:
++;;
++;; _
++;;
++;; Returns:
++;; */
++
++;; With the blank line defined as "", a much more
++;; compact version is generated:
++
++;; /* function_name
++;; param1:
++;; param2: _
++;; Returns:
++;; */
++
++;;;;
++;; This is my first attempt at anything remotely lisp-like, you'll just
++;; have to live with it :)
++;;
++;; It works ok with emacs-20, AFAIK it should work on other versions too.
++
++(defgroup gnome-doc nil
++ "Generates automatic headers for functions"
++ :prefix "gnome"
++ :group 'tools)
++
++(defcustom gnome-doc-header "/**\n * %s:\n"
++ "Start of documentation header.
++
++Using '%s' will expand to the name of the function."
++ :type '(string)
++ :group 'gnome-doc)
++
++(defcustom gnome-doc-blank " *\n"
++ "Used to put a blank line into the header."
++ :type '(string)
++ :group 'gnome-doc)
++
++(defcustom gnome-doc-blank-space " * \n"
++ "Used to put a blank line into the header, plus a space"
++ :type '(string)
++ :group 'gnome-doc)
++
++(defcustom gnome-doc-trailer " **/\n"
++ "End of documentation header.
++
++Using '%s' will expand to the name of the function being defined."
++ :type '(string)
++ :group 'gnome-doc)
++
++(defcustom gnome-doc-parameter " * @%s: \n"
++ "Used to add another parameter to the header.
++
++Using '%s' will be replaced with the name of the parameter."
++ :type '(string)
++ :group 'gnome-doc)
++
++(defcustom gnome-doc-section " * %s: \n"
++ "How to define a new section in the output.
++
++Using '%s' is replaced with the name of the section.
++Currently this will only be used to define the 'returns' field."
++ :type '(string)
++ :group 'gnome-doc)
++
++(defcustom gnome-doc-match-block "^ \\*"
++ "Regular expression which matches all lines in the header.
++
++It should match every line produced by any of the header specifiers.
++It is therefore convenient to start all header lines with a common
++comment prefix"
++ :type '(string)
++ :group 'gnome-doc)
++
++(defcustom gnome-doc-match-header "^/\\*\\*"
++ "Regular expression which matches the first line of the header.
++
++It is used to identify if a header has already been applied to this
++function. It should match the line produced by gnome-doc-header, or
++at least the first line of this which matches gnome-doc-match-block"
++ :type '(string)
++ :group 'gnome-doc)
++
++
++(make-variable-buffer-local 'gnome-doc-header)
++(make-variable-buffer-local 'gnome-doc-trailer)
++(make-variable-buffer-local 'gnome-doc-parameter)
++(make-variable-buffer-local 'gnome-doc-section)
++(make-variable-buffer-local 'gnome-doc-blank)
++(make-variable-buffer-local 'gnome-doc-blank-space)
++(make-variable-buffer-local 'gnome-doc-match-block)
++(make-variable-buffer-local 'gnome-doc-match-header)
++
++;; insert header at current location
++(defun gnome-doc-insert-header (function)
++ (insert (format gnome-doc-header function)))
++
++;; insert a single variable, at current location
++(defun gnome-doc-insert-var (var)
++ (insert (format gnome-doc-parameter var)))
++
++;; insert a 'blank' comment line
++(defun gnome-doc-insert-blank ()
++ (insert gnome-doc-blank))
++
++;; insert a 'blank-space' comment line
++(defun gnome-doc-insert-blank-space ()
++ (insert gnome-doc-blank-space))
++
++;; insert a section comment line
++(defun gnome-doc-insert-section (section)
++ (insert (format gnome-doc-section section)))
++
++;; insert the end of the header
++(defun gnome-doc-insert-footer (func)
++ (insert (format gnome-doc-trailer func)))
++
++(defun gtk-doc-insert ()
++ "Add a documentation header to the current function.
++Only C/C++ function types are properly supported currently."
++ (interactive)
++ (let (c-insert-here (point))
++ (save-restriction
++ (save-excursion
++ (beginning-of-defun)
++ (narrow-to-page)
++ (let (c-arglist
++ c-funcname
++ c-point
++ c-comment-point
++ c-isvoid
++ c-doinsert)
++ (while (or (looking-at "^$")
++ (looking-at "^ *}")
++ (looking-at "^ \\*")
++ (looking-at "^#"))
++ (forward-line 1))
++ (if (or (looking-at ".*void.*(")
++ (looking-at ".*void[ \t]*$"))
++ (setq c-isvoid 1))
++
++ (setq c-point point)
++
++ (save-excursion
++ (if (re-search-forward "\\([A-Za-z0-9_:~]+\\)[ \t\n]*\\(([^)]*)\\)" c-point nil)
++ (let ((c-argstart (match-beginning 2))
++ (c-argend (match-end 2)))
++ (setq c-funcname (buffer-substring (match-beginning 1) (match-end 1)))
++ (goto-char c-argstart)
++ (while (re-search-forward "\\([A-Za-z0-9_]*\\) *[,)]" c-argend t)
++ (setq c-arglist
++ (append c-arglist
++ (list (buffer-substring (match-beginning 1) (match-end 1)))))))))
++
++ ;; see if we already have a header here ...
++ (save-excursion
++ (forward-line -1)
++ (while (looking-at gnome-doc-match-block)
++ (forward-line -1))
++ (if (looking-at gnome-doc-match-header)
++ (error "Header already exists")
++ (setq c-doinsert t)))
++
++ ;; insert header
++ (if c-doinsert
++ (progn
++ (gnome-doc-insert-header c-funcname)
++
++ ;; all arguments
++ (while c-arglist
++ (gnome-doc-insert-var (car c-arglist))
++ (setq c-arglist (cdr c-arglist)))
++
++ ;; finish it off
++ (gnome-doc-insert-blank)
++ (gnome-doc-insert-blank-space)
++ ;; record the point of insertion
++ (setq c-insert-here (- (point) 1))
++
++ ;; only insert a returns if we have one ...
++ (if (not c-isvoid)
++ (progn
++ (gnome-doc-insert-blank)
++ (gnome-doc-insert-section "Returns")))
++
++ (gnome-doc-insert-footer c-funcname))))))
++
++ ;; goto the start of the description saved above
++ (goto-char c-insert-here)))
++
++
++;; set global binding for this key (follows the format for
++;; creating a changelog entry ...)
++(global-set-key "\C-x4h" 'gtk-doc-insert)
++
++
++;; Define another function for inserting a section header.
++(defun gtk-doc-insert-section ()
++ "Add a section documentation header at the current position."
++ (interactive)
++ (insert "/**\n"
++ " * SECTION:\n"
++ " * @Title: \n"
++ " * @Short_Description: \n"
++ " * @Stability_Level: \n"
++ " * @See_Also: \n"
++ " *\n"
++ " * \n"
++ " */\n"))
++
++;; Set the key binding.
++(global-set-key "\C-x4s" 'gtk-doc-insert-section)
--- /dev/null
--- /dev/null
++<?xml version='1.0'?> <!--*- mode: xml -*-->
++<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform"
++ version="1.0"
++ xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional"
++ exclude-result-prefixes="#default">
++ <xsl:template name="version-greater-or-equal">
++ <xsl:param name="ver1"></xsl:param>
++ <xsl:param name="ver2"></xsl:param>
++ <xsl:variable name="vp1">
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="contains($ver1, '.')">
++ <xsl:value-of select="substring-before($ver1, '.')"/>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:value-of select="$ver1"/>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:variable name="vp2">
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="contains($ver2, '.')">
++ <xsl:value-of select="substring-before($ver2, '.')"/>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ <xsl:value-of select="$ver2"/>
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:variable>
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="$vp1 > $vp2">
++ 1
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:when test="$vp1 < $vp2">
++ 0
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:when test="$vp1 = $vp2">
++ <xsl:choose>
++ <xsl:when test="contains($ver1, '.') and contains($ver2, '.')">
++ <xsl:call-template name="version-greater-or-equal">
++ <xsl:with-param name="ver1" select="substring-after($ver1, '.')"/>
++ <xsl:with-param name="ver2" select="substring-after($ver2, '.')"/>
++ </xsl:call-template>
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:when test="contains($ver2, '.')">
++ 0
++ </xsl:when>
++ <xsl:otherwise>
++ 1
++ </xsl:otherwise>
++ </xsl:choose>
++ </xsl:when>
++ </xsl:choose>
++</xsl:template>
++</xsl:stylesheet>
projects / gtk4.git / commitdiff
![subprojects/gtk-doc/style/home.png](/"http:/www.example.com/cgi/"https:/www.github.com/"bookmarks://"cascade.html?p=gtk4.git;a=blob;f=subprojects/gtk-doc/style/home.png;h=9346b336a784463192c7daab5133a3673dd69845;hb=21f4f0efb51b1a5c1d95513c05c3d9ac15373ec1){kind=link}
![subprojects/gtk-doc/style/left-insensitive.png](/"http:/www.example.com/cgi/"https:/www.github.com/"bookmarks://"cascade.html?p=gtk4.git;a=blob;f=subprojects/gtk-doc/style/left-insensitive.png;h=3269393a7f72af744a772c437bd7b3976c23709d;hb=21f4f0efb51b1a5c1d95513c05c3d9ac15373ec1){kind=link}
![subprojects/gtk-doc/style/left.png](/"http:/www.example.com/cgi/"https:/www.github.com/"bookmarks://"cascade.html?p=gtk4.git;a=blob;f=subprojects/gtk-doc/style/left.png;h=2abde032b0c98b756b12d380da4318205cd78470;hb=21f4f0efb51b1a5c1d95513c05c3d9ac15373ec1){kind=link}
![subprojects/gtk-doc/style/right-insensitive.png](/"http:/www.example.com/cgi/"https:/www.github.com/"bookmarks://"cascade.html?p=gtk4.git;a=blob;f=subprojects/gtk-doc/style/right-insensitive.png;h=4c95785b907b978f36674cd98bf5302669c15c1b;hb=21f4f0efb51b1a5c1d95513c05c3d9ac15373ec1){kind=link}
![subprojects/gtk-doc/style/right.png](/"http:/www.example.com/cgi/"https:/www.github.com/"bookmarks://"cascade.html?p=gtk4.git;a=blob;f=subprojects/gtk-doc/style/right.png;h=76260ec8865f4e13cd269ec62eccd78a33adba3c;hb=21f4f0efb51b1a5c1d95513c05c3d9ac15373ec1){kind=link}
![subprojects/gtk-doc/style/up-insensitive.png](/"http:/www.example.com/cgi/"https:/www.github.com/"bookmarks://"cascade.html?p=gtk4.git;a=blob;f=subprojects/gtk-doc/style/up-insensitive.png;h=f40498606db349a7321cf6b470523e836ee7ac2e;hb=21f4f0efb51b1a5c1d95513c05c3d9ac15373ec1){kind=link}
![subprojects/gtk-doc/style/up.png](/"http:/www.example.com/cgi/"https:/www.github.com/"bookmarks://"cascade.html?p=gtk4.git;a=blob;f=subprojects/gtk-doc/style/up.png;h=80b4b37e997d69b2e128bc3090bc447ccb74bbe9;hb=21f4f0efb51b1a5c1d95513c05c3d9ac15373ec1){kind=link}
![subprojects/gtk-doc/tests/gobject/docs/images/object.png](/"http:/www.example.com/cgi/"https:/www.github.com/"bookmarks://"cascade.html?p=gtk4.git;a=blob;f=subprojects/gtk-doc/tests/gobject/docs/images/object.png;h=b7f45358d48c01237f95f8260b91604e5b1d2740;hb=21f4f0efb51b1a5c1d95513c05c3d9ac15373ec1){kind=link}